Manuels et documentation pour votre système PowerEdge 2950 - Manuels - DELL
DELL sur FNAC.COM
- Revenir à l'accueil
PowerEdge 2950
Manuels
- Ce document est disponible en anglais uniquement
- Ce document est disponible en anglais uniquement
- Ce document est disponible en anglais uniquement
Livres blancs
- Ce document est disponible en anglais uniquement
Voir également :
![[TXT]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/__ovh_icons/text.gif)
DELLmanuelsutilisate..> 13-Jun-2014 20:35 12M
Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 13-Jun-2014 20:35 4.4M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 13-Jun-2014 20:33 4.1M
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 13-Jun-2014 20:32 4.1M
Dell-Laser-Printer-3..> 13-Jun-2014 20:31 3.8M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 13-Jun-2014 20:30 3.9M
Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 13-Jun-2014 20:30 3.5M
Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 13-Jun-2014 20:29 3.7M
Dell-Liste-des-manue..> 13-Jun-2014 20:28 3.5M
Dell-Vostro-V131-Man..> 13-Jun-2014 20:28 3.4M
DellDimension1100Ser..> 13-Jun-2014 20:27 3.4M
Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 13-Jun-2014 20:27 3.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Jun-2014 20:26 3.4M
Imprimante-personnel..> 13-Jun-2014 20:25 3.4M
Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 13-Jun-2014 20:25 3.3M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 13-Jun-2014 20:24 3.3M
Dell-PowerVault-NX40..> 13-Jun-2014 20:24 3.2M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 13-Jun-2014 20:23 3.2M
Dell-Dimension-9200-..> 13-Jun-2014 20:23 3.2M
Dell-Divers-Manuels.htm 13-Jun-2014 20:22 3.2M
AlienwareAurora-R3.htm 13-Jun-2014 20:22 3.2M
Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 13-Jun-2014 20:21 3.2M
Imprimante-laser-de-..> 13-Jun-2014 20:20 3.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Jun-2014 20:20 3.2M
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 13-Jun-2014 20:19 3.2M
AlienwareAuroraAuror..> 13-Jun-2014 20:19 3.1M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 13-Jun-2014 20:18 3.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 13-Jun-2014 20:18 3.0M
Dell-Dimension-E520-..> 13-Jun-2014 20:17 3.0M
Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel..> 13-Jun-2014 20:17 3.0M
Chassis-RAID-Dell-Po..> 13-Jun-2014 20:16 3.0M
AlienwareAurora-R4.htm 13-Jun-2014 20:16 2.9M
Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 13-Jun-2014 20:15 2.9M
Dell-Inspiron-700m-M..> 13-Jun-2014 20:15 2.9M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 13-Jun-2014 20:14 2.9M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 13-Jun-2014 20:14 2.9M
Dell-Logiciel-de-ges..> 13-Jun-2014 20:13 2.9M
Dell-Photo-Printer-7..> 13-Jun-2014 20:13 2.8M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 13-Jun-2014 20:12 2.8M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 13-Jun-2014 20:12 2.8M
Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 13-Jun-2014 20:11 2.8M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 13-Jun-2014 20:11 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Jun-2014 20:10 2.8M
Dell-moniteur-D1920-..> 13-Jun-2014 20:10 2.7M
AlienwareArea-51Area..> 13-Jun-2014 20:10 2.7M
Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ma..> 13-Jun-2014 20:09 2.7M
Dell-Baie-de-stockag..> 13-Jun-2014 20:09 2.7M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 13-Jun-2014 20:08 2.7M
Dell-Streak-Manuel-d..> 13-Jun-2014 20:08 2.7M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 13-Jun-2014 20:07 2.6M
Imprimante-Dell-Phot..> 13-Jun-2014 20:07 2.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Jun-2014 20:06 2.6M
Dell-Clavier-Axim-Ma..> 13-Jun-2014 20:06 2.6M
Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 13-Jun-2014 20:06 2.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Jun-2014 20:05 2.5M
alienwareX51.htm 13-Jun-2014 20:05 2.5M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 13-Jun-2014 20:04 2.5M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 13-Jun-2014 20:04 2.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Jun-2014 20:03 2.5M
Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 13-Jun-2014 20:03 2.3M
Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 13-Jun-2014 20:02 2.3M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 13-Jun-2014 20:02 2.2M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 13-Jun-2014 20:02 2.2M
Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel..> 13-Jun-2014 20:01 2.2M
Dell-Inspiron-1100-M..> 13-Jun-2014 20:01 2.2M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 13-Jun-2014 20:01 2.1M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 13-Jun-2014 20:00 2.1M
Dell-Inspiron-9400-E..> 13-Jun-2014 20:00 2.0M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 13-Jun-2014 20:00 1.9M
Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 13-Jun-2014 19:59 1.6M
Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell..> 13-Jun-2014 19:59 1.2M
Dell-Inspiron-1525-1..> 13-Jun-2014 19:59 1.5M
Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 1.0M
listedesproduitsDELL..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 871K
Dell-Dimension-3100-..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 906K
Liste des produits D..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 871K
![[ ]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/__ovh_icons/unknown.gif)
sitemapDELL.xml 13-Jun-2014 19:58 418K
Lien-Manuels-Utilisa..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 90K
rechercheDELL.htm 13-Jun-2014 19:58 7.7K
2715LinksysWireless-..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 5.0K
970SacocheMeridianII..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 5.0K
2714LinksysWireless-..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.9K
957Sacochedetranspor..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.9K
3288D-LinkXtremeNGig..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.8K
1873LinksysWireless-..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.8K
3107Sacochemessagerp..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.8K
1249iDRAC6Enterprise..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.8K
1250iDRAC6Express-Ki..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.8K
1248iDRAC6Express-Ki..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.8K
1288LogitechWireless..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.7K
clicDELL.htm 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.7K
1244Cartedegestionde..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.7K
1214DellNotebookEsse..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.7K
2888TargusUSB2.0Dock..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.6K
DellEView-Standpouro..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.6K
1278LogitechWireless..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.5K
3020MicrosoftArcKeyb..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.5K
1631Adaptateurpourim..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.4K
1622KensingtonSD400D..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.4K
1170Carteadaptateurc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
1171Carteadaptateurc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
317Dell-19-en-1-Lect..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
327Lecteurdecarte19-..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
326Lecteurdecarte19-..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
1164Adaptateuradapta..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
322Dell-19-en-1-Lect..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
321Dell-19-en-1-Lect..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
320Dell-19-en-1-Lect..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
1251iDRAC6Express-Ki..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
1701Ampoulederechang..> 13-Jun-2014 19:58 4.3K
1703Ampoulederechang..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.3K
316Dell-19-en-1-Lect..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.2K
660CartoucheHDamovib..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.2K
1077AdaptateurDispla..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
982Sacochedetranspor..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
762Onduleurfaiblepro..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
984Sacochedetranspor..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
1900AMERICANPOWERCON..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
1302Dell-A940A960-Co..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
3213NETGEARProSafeJG..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
1240DELLCartedegesti..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
609Cartouchedenettoy..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
950Stationd''accueil..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
352Dell-500Go-7200tp..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.1K
1332Dell-964-Couleur..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
761Onduleurde2700Wfo..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
983Sacochedetranspor..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
760Onduleurde1920Wfo..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
759Onduleurde1000Wfo..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1151Graphics6GBNVIDI..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
325LecteurdecarteLec..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1467Dell17201720dnca..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1388Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1439Dell17101710ncar..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1418Dell17001700ncar..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1509Dell2330ddn&2350..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
3736IomegaStorCenter..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
3735IomegaStorCenter..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1580Dell5230dn5350dn..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1387Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1386Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1385Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1394Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1150Graphics1GBNVIDI..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
3651IomegaStorCenter..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1466Dell17201720dnca..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
3434StarTech.com4Por..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1384Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1538Dell3330dncartou..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1586Dell3335dncartou..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1383Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1532Dell2230dcartouc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1414DellS2500cartouc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1406Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1400Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1393Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1392Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1382Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1410DellP1500cartouc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1582Dell5230dncartou..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1391Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1587Dell3335dncartou..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1536Dell3330dncartou..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
557Dell16xLecteurdeD..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1415DellS2500cartouc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1411DellP1500cartouc..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1405Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1404Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1399Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1398Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1390Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1381Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1380Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
772Onduleurde1000Wfo..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
770Onduleurde1920Wfo..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1403Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1397Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1389Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
1379Cartouchedencred..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
771Onduleurde500Wfor..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 4.0K
613DellCartouchedene..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1329Dell-964-Couleur..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1227Sansfilmini-cart..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1396Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1378Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
345Disquedur500GoSAT..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1401Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1395Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1377Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1224Sansfilmini-cart..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
232PET100doubleCoreX..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1615DellUltraSharpU2..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
231PET100doubleCoreX..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
376Disquedur160GoSAT..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1402Cartouchedencren..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
254DoubleCoreXeonE31..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
209DoubleCoreXeonE31..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
735Dell-Blocd''alime..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
492250GoSATA72k6cm25..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
260DoubleCoreXeonX52..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
253DoubleCoreXeonX52..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
246DoubleCoreXeonX52..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1152Graphics1GBNVIDI..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
229PET100doubleCoreC..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
198DoubleCoreXeonE52..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
195DoubleCoreXeonX52..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
354Dell-250Go-7200tr..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
422500GoSATA72k9cm35..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
3341IomegaScreenPlay..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
1511Dell2330ddn&2350..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
188DoubleCoreXeonE31..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
255ProcesseurCore2Du..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
204DoubleCoreXeonL52..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
228PET100SimpleCoreC..> 13-Jun-2014 19:57 3.9K
telecharger.php 12-Oct-2012 11:44 960
![[DIR]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/__ovh_icons/folder.gif)
rechercheDELL_files/ 12-May-2012 14:26 -
test.htm 13-Dec-2011 18:39 745
4220AlienwareM14X.ht..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 2.9K
4221AlienwareM18x.ht..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.3K
4222AlienwareM11.htm..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.2K
4223AlienwareM11xR3...> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 2.9K
4224Alienware17x.htm..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.4K
4225AlienwareM17x.ht..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4226XPS15-Essentiel...> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4227XPS15.htm.htm 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4228XPS15Performance..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4229XPS15Premium.htm..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4230XPS15-Multimédia..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4231XPS15-Premium.ht..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4232XPS17-Essentiel...> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4233XPS17-Efficacité..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4234XPS17Multimédia...> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4235XPS17Premium.htm..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4236XPS17-3D.htm.htm 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4237XPS17-Multimédia..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4238XPS17-Premium.ht..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.1K
4239Imprimantephotoà..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4240DellProjecteuràc..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4241DellProjecteurS5..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4242Imprimantephotoà..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4243Imprimantephotoà..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4245Imprimantephotoà..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
4244Imprimantephotoà..> 28-Oct-2011 11:53 3.0K
3637NETGEARN300Wirel..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52 3.1K
3638NETGEARWN2000RPT..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52 3.2K
3639NETGEARProSafeGS..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52 3.3K
3640NETGEARProSafeXS..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52 3.1K
3641NETGEARProSafeGS..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52 3.2K
3643NETGEARProSafeGS..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52 3.2K
3642NETGEARWirelessR..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52 3.2K
3644TrustWirelessSli..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52 3.2K
3645TrustWirelessDes..> 28-Oct-2011 11:52 3.1K
Page 1 of 2
Statement of Volatility –
Dell Latitude E5430/E5530
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid
the problem.
The Dell Latitude E5430/E5530 contains both volatile and non-volatile (NV) components. Volatile
components lose their data immediately after power is removed from the component. Non-volatile (NV)
components continue to retain their data even after power is removed from the component. The following
NV components are present on the Dell Latitude E5430/E5530 system board.
Table 1. List of Non-Volatile Components on System Board
Description Reference
Designator Volatility Description
User
Accessible
for
external
data
Remedial Action (Action
necessary to prevent loss of
data)
Embedded
Flash in
embedded
controller
MEC5035
U3 192 KB of embedded Flash
memory for keyboard
controller BIOS code, asset
tag, and BIOS passwords.
No N/A
Panel EEDID
EEPROM
Part of panel
assembly
Non-volatile memory,
512 bytes.
No Part of panel assembly
System BIOS U18 Non-volatile memory,
32 Mbit (4 MB), System BIOS
and Video BIOS for basic
boot operation, PSA (on
board diags), PXE diags.
No N/A
Video BIOS On GFx
cards
(G92 or G94)
Non-volatile memory,
512 kbit (64 KB), Graphics
system BIOS.
No N/A
System
Memory –
DDR3
memory
Four
SODIMM
connectors:
JDIM1,2,3,4
Volatile memory in OFF state
Two to four modules must
be populated. System
memory size will depend on
SODIMM modules and must
be between 2 GB and 16 GB.
Yes Power off system
System
memory
SPD
EEPROM
On System
memory
SODIMM(s)
2-4 present
Non-volatile memory
512 Bytes.
Stores memory,
manufacturer data, and
timing information for
correct operation of system
memory.
No N/A
Description Reference
Designator Volatility Description
User
Accessible
for
external
data
Remedial Action (Action
necessary to prevent loss of
data)
RTC CMOS
– BBRAM
(battery
backed up)
U3 Non-volatile memory,
64 Bytes.
Stores CMOS information.
No N/A
Video
memory –
frame buffer
On GFx
cards (G92
or G94):
U2A, U2B,
U3A, U3B,
U4A, U4B,
U5A, U5B,
U6A, U6B,
U7A, U7B,
U8A, U8B,
U9A, U9B
Volatile memory in off state.
1 GB GDDR3 for G92 discrete
graphics systems.
256 MB GDDR3 for
G94 discrete graphics
systems.
No N/A
LOM Serial
Flash
Memory
U18 Non-volatile memory, 8 Mbit
(2 MB) MAC address, LED
mode, WOL settings, PXE
settings.
No N/A
Hard drive(s) User
replaceable
- one or
two.
Non-volatile magnetic
media, various sizes in GB.
May also be SSD (solid state
flash drive).
Yes Low-level format
CDROM/RW/
DVD/
DVD+RW/
Diskette
Drives
User
replaceable
Non-volatile optical media. Yes Low-level format/erase
CAUTION: All other components on the system board lose data if power is removed from the system. Primary
power loss (unplugging the power cord and removing the battery) destroys all user data on the memory
(DDR3, 1067 MHz). Secondary power loss (removing the on-board coin-cell battery) destroys system data on
the system configuration and time-of-day information.
______________
© 2012 Dell Inc.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, Dell Precision™, OptiPlex™, Latitude™, PowerEdge™, PowerVault™,
PowerConnect™, OpenManage™, EqualLogic™, KACE™, FlexAddress™ and Vostro™ are trademarks of Dell Inc. Intel®, Pentium®,
Xeon®, Core™ and Celeron® are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. AMD® is a registered
trademark and AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™, and AMD Sempron™ are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft®,
Windows®, Windows Server®, MS-DOS® and Windows Vista® are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and/or other countries. Red Hat Enterprise Linux® and Enterprise Linux® are registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc.
in the United States and/or other countries. Novell® is a registered trademark and SUSE ™ is a trademark of Novell Inc. in the
United States and other countries. Oracle® is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Citrix®, Xen®,
XenServer® and XenMotion® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. in the United States and/or other
countries. VMware®, Virtual SMP®, vMotion®, vCenter®, and vSphere® are registered trademarks or trademarks of VMWare, Inc. in the
United States or other countries.
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
Dell
Business Client
Re-Image “How-To” Guide
Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family &
Mobile Precision Notebook
Revision 7.0
A07
December 15th, 2012
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
Contents
1 Overview........................................................................................................................................................................................................4
2 “How-To”.......................................................................................................................................................................................................5
2.1 Supported Operating Systems ....................................................................................................................................................5
2.2 Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision New Features & Image Impact .....................................................................6
2.3 Latest Drivers / Applications and Utilities...............................................................................................................................8
2.4 Installation Sequence......................................................................................................................................................................9
2.5 BIOS...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
2.6 Recommended Drivers / Applications Installation Order............................................................................................ 14
Appendix A - .NET Requirements ............................................................................................................................................................. 33
Appendix B - 512e / 4KBe HDD Re-image Guidelines ..................................................................................................................... 34
Appendix C - FAQs........................................................................................................................................................................................... 39
Appendix D - Tables........................................................................................................................................................................................ 41
- Control Point System Manager Features - Table B1................................................................................................................ 41
- Control Point Security Manager Features – Table B2.............................................................................................................42
- Dell Data Protection | Access, DDPA – Table B3.......................................................................................................................42
- Control Point Connection Manager Features – Table B4..................................................................................................... 43
Appendix E - E-Docks.....................................................................................................................................................................................44
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
1 Overview
The purpose of this document is to detail the required steps for reimaging Dell Latitude Ultrabook, EFamily
& Mobile Precision notebooks.
Dell Latitude Ultrabook , E-Family & Mobile Precision notebooks systems ship with Microsoft operating
systems (see Chapter 2.1 for detail). These images include the Dell recommended software stack and
settings, drivers, and applications which are tested and validated with the system.
Drivers and applications must be installed on Dell Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision systems in a
prescribed order to ensure optimal performance. Failure to install drivers and applications as detailed in
this document may result in undesirable performance.
Dell provides drivers and applications that are not included in Microsoft Operating Systems. These drivers
are required to enable the new technologies and features of Dell Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision
products, including the 512e Advanced Format HDD (See appendix –B). Reinstalled images should be
built from a clean hand installed OS load and following the steps in this guide. Dell does not recommend
starting from an image built on previous generations of products or other computer systems.
Dell recommends ensuring BIOS settings (including SATA configurations modes) are correctly set and
using the latest device drivers and applications when imaging their systems.
This “How-To” guide applies to the following Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision systems:
Product 1st Generation 2nd Generation 3rd Generation 4th Generation/Ultrabook Latitude E-Family
E4200 - E6220 E6230
E4300 E4310 E6320 E6330
E5400 E5410 E5420/E5420m E5430
E5500 E5510 E5520/E5520m E5530
E6400 E6410 E6420 E6430/E6430s/6430u*
E6400 ATG E6410 ATG E6420 ATG E6430 ATG
E6500 E6510 E6520 E6530
Precision
Mobile
WorkStations
M2400 - -
M4400 M4500 M4600 M4700
M6400 M6500 M6600 M6700
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
2 “How-To”
2.1 Supported Operating Systems
The following Microsoft operating systems have been validated for use on Dell Latitude E-Family &
Mobile Precision notebook computers:
Note: Not all generation notebook computers can ship with below Microsoft operating
systems. XP only available via CFI service on 3
rd
and 4
th Generation systems
Microsoft Windows XP 32 Bit: Validated on 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th Generation systems.
Vista 32 & 64-Bit: Validated on 1st, 2nd, and 3rd Generation systems.
Windows 7 32 & 64-Bit: Validated on 2
nd
, 3
rd and 4th Generation systems.
Windows 8 32 & 64-Bit: Validated on 3
rd and 4th Generation systems
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
2.2 Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision New Features & Image Impact
Dell Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision systems feature new hardware technologies which
require a new software stack, drivers, and / or applications. These products are not compatible with
previous images built or installed on none Latitude E-Family, Mobile Precision or previous Dell
products. Images between 1
st
, 2
nd
, 3
rd & 4
th generations Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision are
also not compatible
Among these new hardware and technologies are:
2.2.1 New Features Offered on Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision systems, All
Generations:
Note: Not all features are available on all systems
o New BIOS architecture – Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision
o Chipset
1. Intel Core i3, i5 & i7 Dual Core CPUs that include updated integrated graphics
2. 1
st ~3rd Generation Intel Core i3, i5, i7 CPUs that include updated integrated graphics
o eSATA/SATA3
o Intel Turbo Boost
o 512e / 4KBe Sector HDDs
o Intel AMT (Intel Active Management Technology) & vPRO
o Intel RAID Functionality – only for Mobile Precision
o Graphics controller (Intel, nVidia and AMD)
o HDMI Audio
o Network LoM (Intel and Broadcom)
o Wireless LAN
o Wireless WAN
o WiMAX
o Bluetooth
o UWB - Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision 1
st & 2
nd
generation
o Dell Control Vault
o Contactless smartcard / RFID
o Webcam
o USB 3.0
o Free Fall Sensor on the mother board
o Multi-touch Touchpad
o Dell Control Point, 1
st
and 2
nd
generation Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision
o Dell Feature Enhancement Package(DFEP) - Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision 3
rd & 4
th
generation
o Dell Data Protection | Access(DDPA) - Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision 3
rd & 4
th
generation
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
o Dell Data Protection | Encryption(DDPE) - Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision 3
rd & 4
th
generation
o Privacy Panel
o Touch Screen Digitizer- Four Fingers touch with Stylus support on Latitude E-Family &
Mobile Precision 3
rd
generation. Ten fingers touch support on Mobile Precision 4
th
generation.
o Latitude On / Precision On - Reader, Flash, and ARM - Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision 1
st
&2
nd
generation
o WiDi display - Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision 4
th
generation
o Intel® Responsiveness Technologies – Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision 4
th
generation
o Dell Battery Management – Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision 4
th
generation
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
2.3 Latest Drivers / Applications and Utilities
Dell recommends always obtaining the latest and most updated BIOS, drivers, firmware, and
applications. Dell validated and tested drivers and applications are located on Dell’s support web
site http://support.dell.com/
o Enter the Service Tag or select the product model and the model number
o Select Operating System (32-Bit or 64-Bit version must be selected)
o Choose drivers and downloads
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
2.4 Installation Sequence
The list below is a general overview of drivers and applications that must be installed on Dell
Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision systems in a prescribed order to ensure optimal performance.
Actual system configurations may vary.
Note: Dell Alienware, Inspiron, Studio, XPS and Vostro Laptops may have different installation
sequence. Please refer to Dell Support Website for these Laptops.
2.4.1 Installation Sequence Overview
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
2.4.2 Installation Sequence & Features at a Glance:
2.4.2.1 BIOS, Drivers and Firmware:
o BIOS
o Intel Chipset - Helps Windows control system board components and controllers.
o Dell Desktop System Software - A compilation of critical Microsoft QFEs updates
o Media Memory Card / SmartCard controller - Enables and enhances the Media Memory /
SmartCard controller
o Intel Storage:
1. Intel Matrix Storage Manager – Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision 1
st generation
2. Intel Rapid Storage Technology – Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision 2
nd
, 3
rd & 4
th
generations
o Audio - Enables and enhances the audio controller
o Graphics:
1. Enhances and optimizes video performance
2. Enables & provides additional functionality that are not included in MS native VGA
driver
User customizable Power Management features
Portability & behavioral profiles
Multiple monitor support
o Intel Turbo Boost (only for E-Family 2
nd generation systems. 3
rd/4th generation systems
do not need this driver)
1. A driver-based power management mechanism for Intel i3, i5 and i7 processors
2. Intelligent power sharing across cores
3. Budgets power limits available to Processor or graphics turbo Processor
o Integrated Wired Network Controller & Intel PROSet Utility / Application - Enables and
enhances the network controller
o Control Point Security Driver pack- only for E-Family 1
st generation systems
1. Installs and enables the security devices & controllers
2. Even if you do not install the Control Point managers you should install the Control
Point security driver as it contains needed drivers
o Networking & Communication
1. Wireless Local Area Network Adapters (WLAN) - Enables and enhances the Wireless
LAN network adapter
2. Wireless Personal Area Network Adapter (UWB / WPAN) - Enables and enhances the
UWB or Bluetooth Adapter
3. Mobile Broadband Wireless Wide Area Network Adapter (WWAN) - Enables and
enhances the Broadband wireless Adapter
o Touch Pad / Track Stick / Pointer - Enhances the pointing device features
o Free Fall Sensor
o Modem - Enables and enhances the modem
o Intel vPro or AMT – Enhances System Manageability
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
HW based solution using out-of-band communication for management
access to client systems (independent of the system state)
o USB 3.0
o Touch Screen Digitizer
o Control Vault Driver Update (FingerPrint Reader, Contactless Smart Card reader tied in
DDPA package on E-Family 3
rd & 4
th generation systems)
2.4.2.2 Applications:
o Dell Control Point (DCP)- 1
st & 2nd generations Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision
1. Control Point System Manager
DCP Extended Battery Life – EBL
Requires Dell DCP System Manager (for all System Manager release)
Requires Security driver (for System Manager version 1.0 & 1.1 only)
DCP – Ambient Light Sensor
Requires Dell DCP-SM or ALS utility in case DCP-SM is not desired and under
Microsoft Windows Vista only
2. Control Point Connection Manager
3. Control Point Security Manager (Requires Dell Control Point security driver pack)
o Dell Feature Enhance Package (DFEP) - 2
nd
, 3
rd & 4th generations Latitude E-Family &
Mobile Precision
o Dell Data Protection | Access - 3
rd & 4th generations Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision
o Dell Data Protection | Encryption - 3
rd & 4th generations Latitude E-Family & Mobile
Precision
o Latitude On / Precision On – Reader, Flash, and ARM – 1
st & 2
nd generations Latitude EFamily
& Mobile Precision
1. Communication solution that is designed to provide quick access to business critical
data
o Intel Responsiveness Technology, 4
th
generation Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision
1. Intel® Smart Response Technology
2. Intel® Rapid Start Technology
3. Intel® Smart Connect Technology
o Dell Premier Color application, 3
rd & 4
th
generation Latitude Mobile Precision
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
2.5 BIOS
Dell recommends flashing the latest BIOS available to the system. This is posted on Dell’s driver &
downloads support web site (support.dell.com) under the “BIOS” section.
Some of the BIOS settings are critical to Operating System performance and installation. These are
as follows:
Settings System Configuration SATA Operation
Disabled: SATA Controllers are hidden
ATA, Basic Disk Operation mode, does not require additional storage driver.
Note: eSATA is not functional in this mode
AHCI, SATA bus is configured for AHCI mode (Advanced Disk Operation
mode) which offers faster performance, eSATA support, and increased battery
life. This mode requires an additional storage driver provided by Dell
IRRT / RAID On, SATA bus is configured to support IRRT (Intel’s Rapid
Recovery Technology). This mode supports AHCI mode features as well as
disk mirroring (RAID-1). IRRT allows data backup and restoration. This mode
requires an additional storage driver provided by Dell
RAID, SATA bus is configured to support RAID. This mode supports AHCI
mode features as well as disk mirroring (RAID-1). RAID allows data backup
and restoration. This mode requires an additional storage driver provided by
Dell.
Note:
o RAID support requires second hard disk drive.
o If AHCI, IRRT, RAID On, or RAID modes are selected, Intel’s Matrix Storage Manager / Intel
Rapid Storage Technology driver must be installed in conjunction with the installation of
the Operating System. See section “2.6.4 Intel Storage” of this document
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
TPM Security:
Note:
This setting is not available for Non-TPM configuration of 4
th
generations
Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision.
These options enable and configure the Trusted Platform Module (TPM). If TPM is to be
deployed, TPM must be enabled in the BIOS Setup program
2. Security TPM Security
TPM Security:
Disabled (Default): The BIOS will not turn on the TPM during POST.
The TPM will be non-functional and invisible to the Operating System
Enabled: The BIOS will turn the TPM during POST so that it can be used
by the Operating System
Deactivate (Default) = The TPM will be deactivated
Activate = The TPM will be enabled and activated
Clear = The BIOS clears the information stored in the TPM
Intel Responsiveness Technology:
Please refer to Intel Responsiveness Technologies Guide for detail settings of these
features.
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
2.6 Recommended Drivers / Applications Installation Order
For best results, Dell recommends installing drivers / applications in the following order:
2.6.1 Intel Mobile Chipset Software Installation Utility
o Microsoft Operating Systems might not include the updated Intel Chipset Mobile driver for
Dell Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision notebooks, , Ultrabook . The Intel Mobile Chipset
driver is available on Dell’s driver & downloads support web site (support.dell.com) under
the “Chipset” section
2.6.2 Dell System Software for critical Microsoft QFEs
o Dell recommends installing all of the latest available fixes specific to the systems
o For 1
st
, 2
nd
, &3
rd
generation Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision, these are available through
the Dell System Software utility posted on Dell’s driver & downloads support web site
(support.dell.com) under the “System Utilities” section
o For 4
th
generation Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision, please enable the Windows Update
and connect to Internet once install the driver of Integrated Wired Network Controller. (see
more detail in chapter 2.6.22)
2.6.3 Media Memory Card Controller
o Microsoft Operating Systems do not include the Memory Card controller driver. Install the
following driver provided by Dell:
R5C8xx Ricoh driver is available on Dell’s driver & downloads support web site
(support.dell.com) found under the “Chipset” section
PCI8412 TI driver (Applies only for M6500) is available on Dell’s driver & downloads
support web site (support.dell.com) found under the “Chipset” section
O2 Micro driver (Applies for 3
rd & 4th generation Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision)
is available on Dell’s driver & downloads support web site (support.dell.com) found
under the “Chipset” section
2.6.4 Intel Storage - Intel Matrix Storage Manager / Intel Rapid Storage Technology
o The Intel Matrix Storage Manager (IMSM) driver on Dell 1
st generation Latitude E-Family &
Mobile Precision or Intel Rapid Storage Technology (IRST) driver on 2
nd & 3rd generations
Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision is required to be installed on Operating Systems in
AHCI, IRRT, RAID On, and RAID SATA modes
o The Intel IMSM or IRST application must also be installed
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
o The SATA operation modes are configured in the BIOS. Refer to the BIOS section 2.5
o If the SATA mode is configured in AHCI, IRRT, RAID On, or RAID mode, the IMSM / IRST
driver must be installed during the initial Operating System installation stages. The IMSM /
IRST driver is only available from Dell
- If SATA configuration mode in the BIOS is set to either AHCI, IRRT, RAID On, or RAID, install
the Dell IMSM / IRST driver and application available on Dell’s driver & downloads support
web site (support.dell.com) under the “Serial ATA” section
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
- Follow these steps to install the IMSM / IRST driver:
1. For Microsoft XP 32 & 64-Bit Operating Systems:
Installing the Intel IMSM driver using the Floppy Drive
Boot to the Dell Recovery DVD (RDVD) and select the Create RAID
driver from the list of items. You will need Floppy Disk Drive and a
diskette for this selection. The IMSM / IRST driver must be on the root
of the A:\
Note: the latest IMSM / IRST driver can also be obtained from
support.dell.com under the “SATA Drivers” section
Once the driver is extracted and stored on the target diskette, boot to
the operating system CD and start the installation
In the initial stage of Windows Setup, press to install the thirdparty
IMSM SCSI or RAID drivers
When prompted, insert the floppy disk containing the IMSM driver and
follow the instructions provided by Windows Setup
After reading the floppy disk, either choose "Intel(R) ICH9M-E/M SATA
AHCI Controller" if in AHCI mode or "Intel(R) ICH8M-E/ICH9M-eSATA
RAID Controller" if in IRRT mode – select the appropriate driver to
install
2. For Microsoft Vista / Windows 7 (32 & 64-Bit) Operating Systems:
Installing the Intel IMSM / IRST driver after the installation of the
Operating System
Boot to the Operating System DVD or Boot from PXE , then start the OS
installation
After completing the OS installation, insert the Dell RDVD
Select the IMSM / IRST driver and follow the installation procedure
Note: the latest IMSM / IRST driver can also be obtained from
support.dell.com under the “SATA Drivers” section
o If Intel Rapid Recovery or RAID Technologies is to be used, ensure the following:
1. SATA operation mode in the BIOS is set to the appropriate IRRT, RAID On, or RAID
mode
2. Microsoft Operating System was installed under IRRT, RAID On, or RAID mode and
the latest Intel Storage IMSM / IRST driver is installed
3. Install the following Intel IMSM application provided by Dell:
Intel Matrix Storage Manager Application, or
Intel Rapid Storage Technology Application
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
2.6.5 Graphics:
o Microsoft Operating Systems include the VGA graphics drivers only. Therefore for optimum
graphics performance, Dell recommends installing the Dell graphics driver applicable to
their system available on Dell’s driver & downloads support web site (support.dell.com)
under the “Video” section
Note:
For the nVidia Discrete Graphics solution on Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision 3
rd & 4
th
Generation platforms (refer to the below table), the following should be followed:
1. First, install the Intel Media adapter Graphics driver that applies to the system
2. Second, install the nVidia Discrete Graphics driver that applies to the system
Note:
Both 2
nd & 3
rd Generation Intel® Core™ CPUs are available on 4
th
generation Latitude EFamily
& Mobile Precision. Please re-install the Graphics driver when exchange CPU from
2
nd Generation CPU to 3
rd Generation CPU and vice versa.
o Under XP 32-Bit with service packs earlier than Service pack-3 and for Latitude E-Family &
Mobile Precision 1st generation only, the Audio driver must be installed prior to installing the
graphics driver. This applies to Intel graphics solution only. Please refer to the section 2.6.6
Audio in this document.
o The following table lists the various graphics solutions’ offerings on Dell Latitude E-Family &
Mobile Precision products:
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
2.6.6 Audio:
o Microsoft Operating Systems do not include the Audio driver recommended by Dell. The
IDT 92HDxxx HD Audio driver is available on Dell’s driver & downloads support web site
(support.dell.com) under the “Audio” section
Note: Under XP 32-Bit only with service packs earlier than Service pack-3 and for Latitude
E-Family & mobile Precision 1st generation only, the Audio driver must be installed prior to
installing the graphics driver. This applies to Intel graphics solution only
2.6.7 Intel Turbo Boost Driver – (applies for 2
nd
generation Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision
only)
o Intel Turbo Boost driver is required to be installed on platforms meeting both of following
criteria:
1. nVidia or ATI discrete graphics cards
2. Core i7 and i5 Dual Core CPUs
o Microsoft Operating Systems do not include the Intel Dual-Core Turbo Boost driver. Install
the following driver provided by Dell:
Dual-Core Turbo Boost driver is available on Dell’s driver & downloads support web
site (support.dell.com) found under the “CPU” section
2.6.8 Integrated Wired Network Controller (Ethernet)
- Microsoft Operating Systems XP 32 & 64-Bit, Vista 32 & 64-Bit, and Win7/8 32 & 64-Bit either
do not provide native support or do not include the driver recommended by Dell. Install the
following Dell driver for network connectivity
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
- Network Controller drivers are available on Dell’s driver & downloads support web site
(support.dell.com) under the “Network” section
Note: To ensure full functionality of the Intel Gigabit Network adapter, Dell recommends
that you install the Intel PROSet available on Dell’s driver & downloads support web site
(support.dell.com) under the “Network” section
2.6.9 Dell Control Point – DCP, (applies to 1
st & 2
nd
generations Latitude E-Family &
Mobile Precision only)
2.6.9.1 Control Point Security Device Driver
Note: for 2
nd generation Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision, the Control Point
Security Device driver needs to be applied only if the Control Point Security Manager
is used, it is not required for the Dell Data Protection | Access suite.
o Microsoft Operating System does not have the desired drivers and applications
necessary for the security functions offered on Latitude E-Family & Mobile
Precision
o The driver will install the device driver for the security devices installed in the Dell
E-Family notebook computer. In addition, it will install Microsoft Net framework
2.0 SP1 and any relevant Microsoft QFEs required allowing these security devices
to operate correctly
o The driver supports the following Security devices:
1. Broadcom Trusted Platform Module
2. Atmel Trusted Platform Module
3. STMicroelectronics Trusted Platform Module
4. Winbond Trusted Platform Module
5. O2Micro Smart Card Reader
6. Dell Smart Card Keyboard
7. UPEK TouchChip Fingerprint Reader
8. Authentec Fingerprint Reader
9. Broadcom Unified Security Hub
10. Vista Storage driver Update (for ATAPI.SYS)
o The Control Point Security Device Driver is available on Dell’s driver & downloads
support web site (support.dell.com) under the “Control Point” section
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
2.6.9.2 Control Point System Manager
o Dell Control Point System Manager module is a Dell developed modular
application providing a complete set of power management configuring and
alerting capabilities:
o Battery Status
o Power Scheme and Sleep Mode
o Display and Devices
o Keyboard Backlighting and Hotkeys Customization
o Extended Battery Life / All Day Battery Life
o The Control Point System Manager Application is available on Dell’s driver &
downloads support web site (support.dell.com) under “Control Point” section
- Refer to Table B1 under Appendix-B for DCP System Manager features
- For Extended Battery Life feature (EBL), install the Dell Control Point components
offered by Dell in addition to the System Manager Module( version 1.2 & 1.3)
o Control Point System Security Manager driver (applies to Control Point System
Manager 1.0 and 1.1)
o Control Point System Manager XML file (applies to Control Point System
Manager 1.0, 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3. Not required for 1.4 and beyond)
o For Ambient Light Sensor (ALS), install the Dell Ambient Light Sensor Utility
component of Control Point in addition to the System Manager Module. This
component is applicable to Vista 32 & 64-Bit only, and is not required for XP 32 &
64-Bit and Win7/8 32 & 64-Bit
Note: Customers can obtain ALS feature by installing ALS utility in case Control
Point System Manager is not desired and under Microsoft Windows Vista only
2.6.9.3 Control Point Security Manager
- Dell Control Point Security Manager module is a Dell developed modular
application providing provides access to authentication, encryption, fingerprint
readers, and smartcard technologies:
1. Obtain Security Status
2. Manage Logins and Passwords
3. Manage Data Protection
o Security Software Stack:
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
1. For these security devices to function and interface on E-Family notebooks,
install the appropriate Software stack (Applications and Utilities)
2. The security software stack can be obtained through one of the two options:
3. Control Point Security Manager Application which is offered to E-Family
Customers through Dell’s support website
4. Third party security software specific to the customer’s environment. Dell does
not provide 3rd party security software
o The Control Point Security Manager Application is available on Dell’s driver &
downloads support web site (support.dell.com) under the “Control Point” section
o Refer to Table B2 under Appendix-B for DCP Security Manager features
2.6.9.4 Control Point Connection Manager, (applies to 1
st
generation Latitude EFamily
& Mobile Precision only)
o Dell Control Point Connections Manager module is a Dell developed modular
application providing a complete communications management environment:
o Allows the user to create multiple mobile profile settings
o Ability to create, export, and import user defined usage profiles
o System custom configuration
o Execute comprehensive diagnostics and troubleshooting
o Provides the capability to enable or disable any of the radios on the notebook
such as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth GPS, UWB, and mobile broadband
- The Control Point Connection Manager Application is available on Dell’s driver &
downloads support web site (support.dell.com) under the “Control Point” section
- Refer to Table B3 under Appendix-B for DCP Security Manager features
2.6.10 Dell Feature Enhancement Pack – DFEP, (applies to Latitude Precision 3
rd & 4
th
generation E-Family & Mobile)
o Dell Feature Enhancement Pack – DFEP is a Dell developed application providing a
complete set of power management configuring and alerting capabilities
Support for hot keys and system events
Dell customized power plans and extensions
Battery Health Information
Touch Panel
Keyboard hotkey information, including backlighting
Smart Settings
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
o The DFEP Application is available on Dell’s driver & downloads support web site
(support.dell.com) under “System Utilities” section
Note: Supported for Windows7 only
Note: Dell Feature Enhancement Pack will uninstall Dell System Manager if present on the
systems
2.6.11 Dell Data Protection | Access – DDPA, (applies to Latitude Precision 3
rd, & 4
th
generations E-Family & Mobile only)
- Dell Data Protection Access Application is a Dell developed application providing provides
access to authentication, encryption, fingerprint readers, and smartcard technologies:
Obtain Security Status
Manage Logins and Passwords
Manage Data Protection
- The Dell Date Protection | Access Application components are available on Dell’s driver &
downloads support web site (support.dell.com) under the “Dell Data Protection” section
- The following components should be installed in order:
Prerequisites Installer
- This installer contains Windows Installer 4.5 and Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1
- Both of these are required in order for Dell Data Protection | Access to work on
Windows XP and Vista
Drivers Installer
Note: The Dell Data Protection | Access application installer will not install if the
DDPA Drivers installer is not on the platform FIRST
Note: Application Installer for 4
th generations Latitude E-Family & Precision Mobile
INCLUDED driver and middleware Installer already. Please ignore Drivers and
Middleware Installer on 4th generations Latitude E-Family & Precision Mobile.
Middleware Installer
- This installer contains certain relevant Microsoft QFEs
- It also contains the NTRU Trusted Software Stack (TSS) that provides TPM access
Application Installer
- This is the main application Dell Data Protection | Access
Note: It will only install if the Drivers Installer has already been installed on the system,
so the installation order is important
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
o Refer to Table B3 under Appendix-B for DDPA – Data Protection Access
2.6.12 Wireless Local Network Adapters (WLAN)
o Microsoft XP 32 & 64-Bit, Vista 32 & 64-Bit and Win7/8 32 & 64-Bit Operating Systems do not
provide native device driver support for WLAN controllers featured in Dell Latitude E-Family
& Mobile Precision systems. To obtain wireless network functionality, install the Wireless
LAN device driver applicable to the WLAN devices installed in the notebook computer
found under the “Network” section posted on Dell’s driver & downloads support web site
(support.dell.com). The installer also provides WLAN application support which provides
additional features including enterprise authentication enhancements
Note: With Intel Wireless Display (WiDi) you can quickly connect your laptop to your TV
and projector using the Intel® Centrino® wireless solution that’s already built into your
laptop. Because it’s based on Wi-Fi*, there are no cables between the laptop and
TV/Projector. To obtain Wireless Display(ONLY applied to Intel WLAN) functionality,
install the Wireless Display Application found under the “Network” section posted on
Dell’s driver & downloads support web site (support.dell.com).
o Microsoft Windows XP 32 & 64-Bit, Windows Vista 32 & 64-Bit, and Windows 7/8 32 & 64-Bit
Operating Systems do not provide native device driver support for WiMAX controllers
featured in Dell E-Family systems. To obtain WiMAX functionality, install the WiMAX
software applicable to the WiMAX device installed in the notebook computer. This is
available on Dell’s driver & downloads support web site (support.dell.com) under the
“Network” section
o Customers choosing to utilize the Dell Wireless (DW) WLAN Card Utility or Intel PROSet /
Wireless should not install Control Point Connection Manager. If Control Point Connection
Manager is installed, uninstall the existing Intel PROSet / Wireless or Dell Wireless WLAN
entries in Add / Remove Programs (or Programs and Features) before installing this software.
Customers may also choose to uninstall Dell Control Point Connection manager or
uncheck the Wi-Fi control within Dell Control Point Connection Manager
2.6.13 Wireless Personal Area Network Adapter (UWB / WPAN)
o Microsoft XP 32 & 64-Bit, Vista 32 & 64-Bit, and Win7/8 32 & 64-Bit Operating Systems do
not support the Bluetooth controllers featured on Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision
systems. To obtain Bluetooth or UWB functionality, install the associated Bluetooth or UWB
device drivers available on Dell’s driver & downloads support web site (support.dell.com)
under the “Network” section
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
2.6.14 Mobile Broadband Wireless Wide Area Network Adapter (WWAN)
o Microsoft XP 32 & 64-Bit, Vista 32 & 64-Bit, and Win7/8 32 & 64-Bit Operating Systems do
not provide native support for the broadband Wireless WAN controllers featured in Dell
Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision systems. To obtain broadband functionality, install the
Broadband device driver applicable to the wireless WAN devices installed in the system, and
to the service carrier you have a contract with available on Dell’s driver & downloads
support web site (support.dell.com) under the “Communication” section
o The Wireless 5600 EVDO-HSPA module(applies to 1
st
generation Latitude E-Family & Mobile
Precision only) requires the installation of Dell Control Point Connection Manager. Install
the driver and FW before installing the Dell Control Point Connection Manager. The latest
versions of Dell Control Point Connection Manager (v1.3 and later) provide the WWAN
drivers and FW in the Dell Control Point Connection Manager Driver Pack. Earlier versions
provide the drivers and FW in one single Dell Control Point Connection Manager installer.
The Dell Control Point Connection Manger application and Driver Packs can be found under
the “Control Point” section posted on Dell’s driver & downloads support web site
(support.dell.com). Individual driver and FW releases for the 5600 EVDO-HPSA module can
be found under the “Communication” section posted on Dell’s driver & downloads support
web site (support.dell.com). It is highly recommended to use the Driver Packs to ensure
version compatibility
2.6.15 Touchpad
o Microsoft XP 32 & 64-Bit, Vista 32 & 64-Bit, and Win7/8 32 & 64-Bit Operating Systems do
not include the Dell Touchpad drivers
o The Microsoft native OS mouse driver only provides basic point and click functionality. No
advanced features are available with the native driver and this may provide a less than
optimal user experience
o Dell recommends installing the appropriate Dell Touchpad driver for the following user
experience benefits:
1. The driver is tuned to the system characteristics to offer enhanced cursor
acceleration and precision
2. The driver provides the core palm rejection features
3. Access to additional features and control setting (varies with system) including:
Enhanced scrolling and tapping
Touch sensitivity control
Multi-Touch Gestures (2nd Generation)
Jog Shuttle control (M6400 & M6500)
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
Differences between Dell Touchpad devices and drivers:
o Dell Touchpad drivers are different between the 1st and 2nd generation of systems. Drivers
from the 1
st generation (Dell Touchpad / Pointing Stick) and 2nd generation (Dell MultiTouch
Touchpad) are NOT compatible. Dell strongly recommends only installing the
appropriate driver for the system. 3rd generation Latitude Touchpad driver is backword
compatible on 2nd generation Latitude systems
o Dell Touchpad drivers are found under the “Input Device Drivers” section posted on Dell’s
driver & downloads support web site (support.dell.com)
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
2.6.16 Free Fall Sensor
o Microsoft XP 32 & 64-Bit, Vista 32 & 64-Bit, and Win7/8 32 & 64-Bit Operating Systems do
not include the Free Fall Sensor driver. Install the following driver provided by Dell:
1. Free Fall Sensor driver found under the “Applications” section posted on Dell’s driver
& downloads support web site (support.dell.com)
2.6.17 Modem (Only applies to some systems)
o Microsoft XP 32 & 64-Bit, Vista 32 & 64-Bit, and Win7/8 32 & 64-Bit Operating Systems do
not include the Conexant modem driver. Install the following driver provided by Dell:
1. Conexant D330,HDA,MDC,v.92,modem available on Dell’s driver & downloads
support web site (support.dell.com) under the “Communication” section
o If Dell Control Point Connection Manager module is installed, the Conexant modem driver
does not need to be installed
2.6.18 Intel vPro or AMT (Applicable ONLY to vPro Configurations)
o Intel Active Management Technology (Intel AMT) allows users to easily manage networked
computers to:
1. Discover computing assets on a network
2. Remotely repair systems even after operating system failures
3. Protect networks from incoming threats while easily keeping software up to date
o Ensure that the following drivers provided by Dell are being installed prior to installing the
AMT drivers:
1. Intel Mobile Chipset driver
2. Intel 825xx Gigabit Platform LAN Network Device
3. Intel Wireless WLAN driver for WLAN AMT manageability via Intel WLAN adapter
o Microsoft XP 32 & 64-Bit, Vista 32 & 64-Bit, and Win7/8 32 & 64-Bit Operating Systems do
not include the AMT drivers. The AMT drivers are available on Dell’s driver & downloads
support web site (support.dell.com) under the “Chipset” section
1. For E-Family 1
st generation systems
Intel AMT HECI
Intel AMT SOL/ LMS
2. For E-Family 2
nd generation systems
Intel AMT HECI (Unified AMT6 Driver)
3. For E-Family 3
rd generation systems,
Intel Unified AMT 7 Management Interface Driver
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
Intel Identity Protection Technology (IPT) feature requires IPT Middleware to be
installed after the AMT Unified driver
4. For E-Family 4
th generation systems,
Intel Unified AMT 8 Management Interface Driver
Intel Identity Protection Technology (IPT) feature was included in Intel Unified
AMT8 Management Interface Driver already.
2.6.19 USB 3.0
o Microsoft XP 32 & 64-Bit, Vista 32 & 64-Bit, and Win7/8 32 & 64-Bit Operating Systems do
not include the USB 3.0 driver. Install the USB 3.0 driver available on Dell’s driver &
downloads support web site (support.dell.com) under the “Chipset” section
2.6.20Touch Screen Digitizer
o Microsoft XP 32 & 64-Bit, Vista 32 & 64-Bit, and Win7 32 & 64-Bit Operating Systems do not
include the digitizer driver and application. Install the appropriate Touchscreen driver and
application available on Dell’s driver & downloads support web site (support.dell.com) under
the “Input Device Drivers” section
2.6.21 Webcam -applies to 1
st
generation Latitude E-Family & Mobile Precision only)
o The Dell E-Family Webcam driver enables the built-in system digital camera. Install the
following driver provided by Dell for Microsoft Windows XP 32 & 64 Bit only:
1. Creative Labs Integrated Webcam driver available on Dell’s driver & downloads
support web site (support.dell.com) under the “Input Device Drivers” section
2. For video capturing / streaming features, install webcam software available from a
variety of third party providers and as freeware E6400 ATG E6410 ATG M6500 E6420 E6420 ATG E6520 M4600 M6600 E6430 ATG M4700 M6700
Digitech Touch Screen X X
eGalax EMPIA X X X X
n-Trig Multi Touch X X X X
Solution
1
s t Generation 2
nd Generation 3
rd Generation 4th Generation
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
2.6.22Windows Update
o Dell recommends performing Microsoft Windows updates to ensure the latest security,
reliability, and compatibility updates are installed. These updates can be downloaded from
Windowsupdate.Microsoft.com
2.6.23 Latitude ON / Precision ON - applies to 1
st
generation Latitude E-Family & Mobile
Precision only)
o Microsoft XP 32 & 64-Bit, Vista 32 & 64-Bit, and Win7 32 & 64-Bit Operating Systems do not
include the Latitude ON / Precision ON driver and application
o The following table lists which products supports the Latitude ON / Precision ON feature
o In order to enable the Latitude ON / Precision ON button to hibernate Windows when
switching to Latitude ON / Precision ON modes, Dell recommends installing the appropriate
software. In order to determine the appropriate software to install, boot to the system BIOS
and check the following:
1. Under BIOS settings -> system configuration
Latitude ON – ARM module is installed:
Install the "Control Point Button Service" in Windows available on Dell’s
driver & downloads support web site (support.dell.com) under the
“Control Point” section
NOTE: If you installed the Dell Control Point Connection Manager, the
“Control Point Button Service” is already installed
Latitude ON Flash / Precision ON Flash – Flash module is installed
Install the "Latitude ON Flash” in Windows available on Dell’s driver &
downloads support web site (support.dell.com) under the “Applications”
section E4200 E4300 E5400 E5500 E6400 E6400 ATG E6500 M2400 M4400 M6400 E6410 E6410 ATG E6510 M4500 E4310 E5410 E5510 M6500
Latitude ON Reader X X X X X X
Latitude ON Flas h X X X X X X
Latitude ON X X X
Precis ion ON Reader X X
Precis ion ON Flas h X X
1
s t Generation 2
nd Generation
Latitude
ON
Precis ion
ON
Solution
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
Latitude ON Reader / Precision ON Reader
Install the "Reader 2.0" in Windows available on Dell’s driver &
downloads support web site (support.dell.com) under the “Applications”
section
2.6.24 Intel® Responsiveness Technologies
o Intel® Responsiveness Technology include below three components
o Intel® Smart Response Technology
1. Smart response is a driver-based feature that emulates a hybrid drive using a
traditional hard disk drive (HDD) and a small solid state drive (SSD). It stores
frequently used files, data, and applications to a special partition on a small SSD
device. It provides SSD-like read/write performance for the files used most
frequently, while providing lower overall storage cost when used with the largersized
traditional HDD.
2. Install the Dell IMSM / IRST driver and application available on Dell’s driver &
downloads support web site (support.dell.com) under the “SATA Drivers” section
o Intel® Rapid Start Technology
1. Rapid Start is a BIOS-based feature that replaces Windows® hibernate with a new
low-power state; it can improve resume time vs. hibernate by ~2x.
2. Install the "Rapid Start technology manager" in Windows available on Dell’s driver &
downloads support web site (support.dell.com) under the “Applications” section.
o Intel® Smart Connect Technology
1 Smart Connect is a BIOS- and driver-based technology that periodically wakes the
system from the Windows® sleep state to refresh email or social networking
applications. When the system is equipped with specific wireless devices, it can
detect the presence of known networks while asleep, waking only when
connectivity is available. When properly equipped with specific wireless devices,
Smart Connect can also provide quick internet connection readiness, by keeping
wireless devices active in a low-power mode during sleep.
2 Install the " Intel® Smart Connect Configuration Application and Driver package " in
Windows available on Dell’s driver & downloads support web site (support.dell.com)
under the “Applications” section.
Table of Storage configurations supported:
Boot Disk (below)/
Technology (right)
Smart Connect Rapid Start Smart Response
HDD only Not supported Not supported Not supported
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
HDD + SSD Not supported Supported Supported
HDD + mSATA Not supported Supported Supported
SSD only Supported Supported Not supported (Note: SSD
performance achieved without Smart
Response)
mSATA only Supported Supported Not supported (Note: SSD
performance achieved without Smart
Response)
Hybrid Drive Not supported Not supported Not supported (Note: Hybrid Drive is
similar in performance to Smart
Response)
Note: Supported for Windows7/8 only
Note: Please refer to Intel Responsiveness Technologies Guide for detail settings of these
features.
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
Appendix
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
Appendix A
.NET Framework Requirements
What is .NET Framework?
The .NET Framework is a software framework from Microsoft, which is bundled with Windows
operating systems. The .NET Framework is intended to be used by most applications created for the
Microsoft Windows platform.
.NET Framework Requirements?
Windows 7 Windows Vis ta Windows XP
.NET 3.5 .NET 3.0 .NET 1.1
Intel GMA 4500MHD Graphics
Intel GMA HD Graphics
Intel Media Adapter HD/HD 2000/HD 3000
N/A .NET 3.5x N/A
.NET 3.0 .NET 3.0 .NET 3.0
.NET 3.0
Intel MSM / RST Storage
AMD Catalys t Control Center - Control Panel
.NET 3.0 .NET 3.0
Driver / S W S tack
Intel
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
Appendix B
512e / 4KBe HDD Re-image Guidelines
1 What is Advanced Format HDD?
HDD industry is moving towards supporting higher drives capacity, to address the current limitations
with the 512-byte sector HDDs, the industry is moving towards the Advanced Format with 4KB sector
HDDs.
The transition to 4KB sector HDDs will allow storage devices to more easily adopt larger capacities in
both the notebook and desktop space.
While hard drives will transition to 4KB sectors and to maintain backwards compatibility, current
Advanced Format 4KB HDDs, also known as 512e HDDs, will emulate 512-byte SATA
communications to hosts and will operate at 4KB.
2 How does an Advanced Format HDD impact OS Images?
Even though a 512e drive is designed to be backward compatible, most of current Operating Systems
are not aware of the Advanced Format technology. Depending on the Operating System and its
service pack, some extra steps may be required to optimize the performance of the Advanced Format
(512e) HDDs and to maintain full Operating System and Application functionality.
These extra steps could require using alignment tools to fix any sector misalignment as a result of
deploying a non-Advanced Format aware image on an Advanced Format HDD which may otherwise
cause performance issues.
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
3 Re-imaging Requirements when using Advanced Format HDDs
The following are the re-imaging guidelines needed to support Advanced Format HDDs. These
requirements are dependent on which Operating System will be installed and which method of
deployment will be used.
3.1 Microsoft Operating Systems Advanced Format Aware Readiness
An Operating System is Advanced Format Aware if it meets the following criteria:
o It understands the concept of physical sector vs. logical sector
o It maximizes writes using multiples of 4k bytes
o Disk partition starts at the boundary of 4k sector
Not all current Microsoft Operating Systems are Advanced Format Aware (refer to the Table below). A
system configured with an Advanced Format drive and an operating system that is not Advanced
Format aware can experience sector misalignment, resulting in performance or compatibility issues.
- Some extra steps may be required for re-imaging even with Advanced Format Aware Microsoft
Operating Systems, Install/upgrade to the latest Intel Storage driver
- Apply the applicable Microsoft KB article
- Partition alignment
such as (Please refer to section 3.2 for detailed instructions):
Operating System Advanced Format
Aware
Microsoft Windows 7 SP1 Yes
Microsoft Windows 7 Yes
Microsoft Vista SP1 Yes
Microsoft Vista No
Microsoft XP (all versions) No
Microsoft Windows PE 3.0 or Later Yes
Microsoft Windows PE older versions No
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
3.2 Image Installation Guidelines
3.2.1Clean Image Installation on an Advanced Format HDD
Microsoft® OS Installation
Method Windows 7 SP1 Windows 7 Windows Vista SP1 Windows Vista Windows XP
Using Dell Operating
System Media
1. Install/Upgrade
Intel RST
Storage driver to
9.6 or later(1)
1. Apply Microsoft KB
article 982018
2. Install/Upgrade Intel
RST Storage driver
to 9.6 or later(1)
1. Apply Microsoft KB
article 2470478
2. Install/Upgrade
Intel RST Storage
driver to 9.6 or
later(1)
1. Use Alignment Tool (2)
to ensure
Advanced Format drive partitions
are properly aligned
2. Install/Upgrade Intel RST Storage
driver to 9.6 or higher(1)
Using non-Dell off the shelf
Operating System Media
1. Install/Upgrade
Intel RST
Storage driver to
9.6 or later(1)
1. Apply Microsoft KB
article 982018
2. Install/Upgrade Intel
RST Storage driver
to 9.6 or later(1)
1. Apply Microsoft KB
article 2470478
2. Install/Upgrade
Intel RST Storage
driver to 9.6 or
later(1)
1. Use Alignment Tool (2)
to ensure
Advanced Format drive partitions
are properly aligned
2. Install/Upgrade Intel RST Storage
driver to 9.6 or higher(1)
Using Windows PE 3.0 or
prior
Note: If using a Win PE
version earlier than 3.0,
apply Windows Automated
KIT
1. Install/Upgrade
Intel RST
Storage driver to
9.6 or later(1)
1. Apply Microsoft KB
article 982018
2. Install/Upgrade Intel
RST Storage driver
to 9.6 or later(1)
1. Apply Microsoft KB
article 2470478
2. Install/Upgrade
Intel RST Storage
driver to 9.6 or
later(1)
1. Install/Upgrade Intel RST Storage
driver to 9.6 or higher(1)
Using Windows PE 3.1 1. Install/Upgrade Intel RST Storage driver to 9.6 or later(1)
- (1) The Intel RST Driver 9.6 or higher can be found on the Dell Support website in Dell Drivers and Downloads for your system
under the SATA drivers section
- (2)
Please refer to the Partition Alignment Tools - Section 3.4
3.2.2Deploying 512B pre-installed image to an Advanced Format drive
Microsoft® OS Installation
Method Windows 7 SP1 Windows 7 Windows Vista SP1 Windows Vista Windows XP
Using Dell Factory Installed
Image No actions required. Dell Factory Images include required components. Not Available Not Available
Using Sector-Based Utilities
(Norton Ghost, Altiris, etc.)
1. Use Alignment
Tool(2)
to
ensure
Advanced
Format drive
partitions are
properly aligned
before reimaging
2. Install/Upgrade
Intel RST Storage
driver to 9.6 or
later(1)
1. Use Alignment
Tool(2)
to ensure
Advanced Format
drive partitions are
properly aligned
before re-imaging
2. Apply Microsoft KB
article 982018
3. Install/Upgrade Intel
RST Storage driver
to 9.6 or later(1)
1. Use Alignment
Tool(2)
to ensure
Advanced Format
drive partitions are
properly aligned
before re-imaging
2. Apply Microsoft KB
article 2470478
3. Install/Upgrade Intel
RST Storage driver
to 9.6 or later(1)
1. Use Alignment Tool(2)
to ensure
Advanced Format drive partitions
are properly aligned before reimaging
2. Install/Upgrade Intel RST Storage
driver to 9.6 or later(1)
- (1) The Intel RST Driver 9.6 or higher can be found on the Dell Support website in Dell Drivers and Downloads for your system
under the SATA drivers section
- (2)
Please refer to the Partition Alignment Tools - Section 3.4
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
3.3 Other Partition Alignment Requirements
Environment Action
IRRT / RAID 0,1 & 5 Configuration Use Alignment Tools(1) to ensure Advanced Format drive
partitions are properly aligned
Data Protection / Encryption Use Alignment Tools(1) to ensure Advanced Format drive
partitions are properly aligned before encrypting the drive.
Note: Misaligned encrypted Advanced Format drives need
to be decrypted, then aligned and re-encrypted
(1)
Please refer to the Partition Alignment Tools - Section 3.4
3.4 Partition Alignment Options
Partition alignment is required for older operating systems and is recommended for new operating
systems in order to insure proper hard drive performance and imaging between drives of differing
sector sizes. An aligned partition is when the starting offset of the partition is divisible by 4096 Bytes
or by 8 for logical block addressing (LBA) numbers.
3.4.1Pre-Installation of Operating System
This section lists a few options for partition alignment pre-installation of OS:
- Using Ghost:
Ghost 11.5 will maintain the alignment state of the Gold/Master image. If the disk image is
built and aligned on a 512e/Advanced Format drive, the clones of that image will remain
aligned. If the image is built on a 512B, Ghost command line switch {-align=1MB} can be
used to ensure alignment when deployed to any drive.
- Using DISKPART:
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
DISKPART may be used to enable storage configuration or create a partition at an explicit
disk offset from a script, a remote session, or another command prompt.
Dell recommends using WinPE's (3.0 or greater) Diskpart.exe from Windows Vista or
Windows 7 to create the partitions for Windows XP installation. This will create a partition
that is Advanced Format aligned. Without PE, starting with Windows Vista or Windows 7 DVD
to create the partition for the Windows XP will create correct partitioning. On how to use
DISKPART utility and how to divide the offset value of the selected partition, refer to
Microsoft KB Article 300415
3.4.2 Post-Installation of Operating System
The Paragon Alignment Tool (PAT) is a hardware agnostic tool available for download from the
Dell Support website in Dell Drivers and Downloads for your system under the SATA Drives
section. This tool can be used after an Operating System is installed to align the partitions of
an Advanced Format drive.
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
Appendix C
General Re-Imaging FAQs
1. How do I resolve a PCI Yellow Bang?
a. After installing the drivers and you have this PCI yellow bang in device manager, you need to
install the following drivers found in the Chipset folder:
b. For E-Family 1
st generation you need to install two drivers - AMT SOL / LMS and AMT HECI
c. For E-Family 2
nd generation you need to install one driver - AMT HECI
2. How do I resolve a Broadcom USH Yellow Bang?
a. After installing the drivers and you have this USH yellow bang in device manager, you need
to install the Control Point Security Device Driver Pack
3. How do I resolve this Unknown Device yellow bang on E-Family 2
nd generation?
a. After installing the drivers and you have an unknown device yellow bang in device manager,
you need to install the ST Micro Freefall Sensor driver found under Chipset
4. What drivers are in the Control Point Security Device Driver pack?
a. The driver pack has the drivers for all security related hardware, including:
1. Broadcom Trusted Platform Module
2. Atmel Trusted Platform Module
3. STMicroelectronics Trusted Platform Module
4. Winbond Trusted Platform Module
5. O2Micro Smart Card Reader
6. Dell Smart Card Keyboard
7. UPEK TouchChip Fingerprint Reader
8. Authentec Fingerprint Reader
9. Broadcom Unified Security Hub
10. Vista Storage Driver Update (for ATAPI.SYS)
5. Can I use WiMax and WiFi at the same time?
a. No, the wireless adapter only supports one of them being active at one time
6. What is the Dell System Software utility and why do I need it?
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
a. The Dell System Software utility provides critical updates and patches for your operating
system necessary for the correct operation of your system. It is important to install this utility
first after re-imaging your system. It is found under the System Utilities folder on the Dell
Drivers and Download page
7. What is the Client System Update application?
a. Located under System Management > Client System Update, this is primarily targeted at
Customers who want to manage systems on their own. The tool is designed to allow users
to specify their update preferences and apply updates based on the criticality. Alternatively,
end users can use the scheduling option to keep their system up-to-date with the systems
software released by Dell
8. What is eSATA?
One of the connectors on the system is a dual eSATA / USB combo port. It can interface with
either an eSATA device or a USB device. eSATA is an industry standard interface. A few of the
key benefits of eSATA technology are:
o Data speeds up to six times faster than USB 2.0 and IEEE 1394
o Robust and user friendly external connection
o High performance, cost effective expansion storage
o Up to 2 meter shielded cables and connectors
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
Appendix D
Tables
- Control Point System Manager Features - Table B1
Category Feature
DCP SM
Release
Version
Availablity of Feature
when DCP Installed?
Availablity of Feature
when Dell provides
drivers/middleware, but No DCP
App?
Availabilty of Feature
when only Windows OS installed?
user profiles v1.0 Yes N/A Only power schemes are available in
the OS.
View battery manufacturer info. v1.0 Yes N/A Yes, through BIOS
View battery health info. v1.0 Yes N/A Yes, through BIOS
battery charge enable/disable status v1.0 Yes N/A Yes
Network card power management v1.0 Yes Yes (Intel LOM) No (some Broadcom LOMs)
Extended Battery Life/ All Day Battery Life.
(ADBL) v1.0 Yes N/A N o
Dell Enhanced Performance Plans (User
Selectable Thermal Tables for Performance,
temperature and sound levels)
v1.4 Yes N/A N o
Digidesign Audio/Video mode v1.3 Yes N/A Yes, thru individual settings in BIOS/OS
Display settings Inactivate display and system timeouts when
activating an external display using FnF8. v1.0 Yes N/A N o
Fn+F2 to enable Battery Charge disable v1.0 Yes N/A Yes, but with No screen pop-up display
Fn+F3 launch DCP w/ Battery Status v1.0 Yes N/A N o
Fn+F7 to enable/disable DCP v1.0 Yes N/A N o
Fn+F8 to switch between display settings v1.0 Yes N/A Yes, but with No screen pop-up display
Hot Key customizaton
User hot key customization ability (also Fn+D
functionality which is set to toggle display by
default).
v1.0 Yes N/A N o
Keyboard backlighting
Keyboard backlighting options (to be able to
set the intensity, inactivity timeout values
and input triggers.)
v1.0 Yes N/A Yes, but with No screen pop-up display
Ability to Adjust Brightness Level v1.0 Yes N/A Yes, but with No screen pop-up display
feedback through on screen display v1.0 Yes N/A N o
Ability to enale/disable ALS v1.0 Yes N/A Yes
ALS Feedback through on screen display v1.0 Yes N/A N o
Reporting of Ambient Temp log information
at OS presence (PWS only) v1.2 Yes N/A Through BIOS
Reporting of CPU Temp log information at OS
presence (PWS only) v1.2 Yes N/A Through BIOS
Reporting of SMART Alerts log information at
OS presence (PWS only) v1.2 Yes N/A Through BIOS
Reporting of ECC Alerts log information at OS
presence (PWS only) v1.2 Yes N/A Through BIOS
Privacy Screen - Discreet Graphics Fn+E to enable/disable Privacy screen v1.0 Yes N/A N o
Privacy Screen - UMA Graphics Fn+E to enable/disable Privacy screen v1.2.01 Yes N/A N o
"Color Space" Panel Settings for
RGB LED Displays (17" only)
Provides system level controls for NTSC,
sRGB, Pro Photo RGB/Kodak or Adobe color
settings (certain panels only)
v1.3 Yes N/A N o
Brightness
Function Keys
Hardware Monitoring for Desktops
Power Manager
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
- Control Point Security Manager Features – Table B2
- Dell Data Protection | Access, DDPA – Table B3
Category Feature Release
Version
Availablity of Feature
when DCP Installed?
Availablity of Feature
when Dell provides
drivers/middleware, but No DCP
App?
Availabilty of Feature
when only Windows OS
installed?
Secure processing and storage of user security
information v1.0 Yes - USH platforms only N o N o
Ability to locally backup and restore
credentials in CV v1.4 Yes - USH platforms only N o N o
TPM TPM enablement and management v1.0 Yes
Yes - with third party software,
including Windows Vista Bitlocker
No for XP
Yes, with Windows Vista (driver
included) or third party software,
including Windows Vista Bitlocker
Pre-Boot Authentication (PBA) Password and SSO v1.0 Yes Password only, no SSO Password only, no SSO
Embedded Finger Print Reader Full configuration and management for PBA
and Windows Logon v1.0 Yes
Yes - with 3rd party software,
does not include PBA N o
Full configuration and management for
Windows Logon v1.0 yes ( No PBA SUPPORT) Yes - with 3rd party software,
does not include PBA N o
Full configuration and management for PBA v1.4
yes (E2 with CV only, no M'09,
Foose, Reebok, or Fonseca
support)
N o N o
Contact Smart Card Reader
Full configuration and management for
Windows Logon v1.0 Yes
Yes - with 3rd party software,
does not include PBA N o
Full configuration and management for PBA v1.0 Yes N o N o
Contacless Smart Card Reader Full configuration and management for
Windows Logon v1.0 Yes
Yes - with 3rd party software,
does not include PBA N o
Contacless Smart Card Reader Full configuration and management for PBA v1.2 Yes N o N o
Support for 5400 and 7200 FDE's v1.0 Yes Yes - with 3rd party software Yes - with 3rd party software
Support for SSD FDE's v1.2.01 Yes Yes - with 3rd party software Yes - with 3rd party software
Support for dual FDE's (non-RAID) v1.3 Yes Yes - with 3rd party software Yes - with 3rd party software
RSA SecurID RSA SecurID storage in ControlVault v1.1 Yes - USH platforms only Yes - USH platforms only N o
Bitlocker (Vista Only) DCP does not interact with Bitlocker v1.0 Yes N/A Yes
ControlVault
External Dell Branded Finger Print Reader
Full Disked Encrypted Drives (FDE)
Category Feature Release
Version
Availablity of Feature
when DDPA Installed?
Availablity of Feature
when Dell provides
drivers/middleware, but No
DDPA App?
Availabilty of Feature
when only Windows OS
installed?
Secure processing and storage of user security
information v2.0 Yes - USH platforms only N o N o
Ability to locally backup and restore
credentials in CV v2.0 Yes - USH platforms only N o N o
TPM TPM enablement and management v2.0 Yes
Yes - with third party software,
including Windows Vista Bitlocker
No for XP
Yes, with Windows Vista (driver
included) or third party software,
including Windows Vista Bitlocker
Pre-Boot Authentication (PBA) Password and SSO v2.0 Yes Password only, no SSO Password only, no SSO
Embedded Finger Print Reader Full configuration and management for PBA
and Windows Logon v2.0 Yes
Yes - with 3rd party software,
does not include PBA N o
Full configuration and management for
Windows Logon v2.0 yes ( No PBA SUPPORT) Yes - with 3rd party software,
does not include PBA N o
Full configuration and management for PBA v2.0
yes (E2 with CV only, no M'09,
Foose, Reebok, or Fonseca
support)
N o N o
Contact Smart Card Reader
Full configuration and management for
Windows Logon v2.0 Yes
Yes - with 3rd party software,
does not include PBA N o
Full configuration and management for PBA v2.0 Yes N o N o
Contacless Smart Card Reader Full configuration and management for
Windows Logon v2.0 Yes
Yes - with 3rd party software,
does not include PBA N o
Contacless Smart Card Reader Full configuration and management for PBA v2.0 Yes N o N o
Support for 5400 and 7200 FDE's v2.0 Yes Yes - with 3rd party software Yes - with 3rd party software
Support for SSD FDE's v2.0 Yes Yes - with 3rd party software Yes - with 3rd party software
Support for dual FDE's (non-RAID) v2.0 Yes Yes - with 3rd party software Yes - with 3rd party software
RSA SecurID RSA SecurID storage in ControlVault v2.0 Yes - USH platforms only Yes - USH platforms only N o
Bitlocker (Vista Only) DCP does not interact with Bitlocker v2.0 Yes N/A Yes
Full Disked Encrypted Drives (FDE)
ControlVault
External Dell Branded Finger Print Reader
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
- Control Point Connection Manager Features – Table B4
Category Feature Release
Version
Availablity of Feature
when DCP Installed?
Availablity of Feature
when Dell provides
drivers/middleware, but No DCP
App?
Availabilty of Feature
when only Windows OS installed?
Dell Wireless LAN 1397, 1510
(Broadcom) v1.1 Yes
Yes, WITH Dell Wireless Client Utility
(DCU)
No for XP
Yes for Vista & Win 7, with WLAN
AutoConfig, but in box driver has not
been Dell validated
Dell Wireless LAN 1520
(Broadcom TGV - no enterprise extension) v1.3.01 Yes
Yes, with Dell Wireless Client Utility
(DCU)
No for XP
Yes - for Vista & Win 7 ( with in box
drivers) and WLAN AutoConfig
Intel Wireless LAN 5100, 5300 v1.2 Yes Yes, with Intel Proset
No for XP
Yes for Vista & Win 7, with WLAN
AutoConfig, but in box driver has not
been Dell validated
• Intel® Centrino® Ultimate-N 6300 WiFi
card
• Intel® Centrino® Advanced-N 6200 WiFi
card
v1.4 Yes Yes, with Intel Proset
No for XP
Yes for Vista & Win 7, with WLAN
AutoConfig, but in box driver has not
been Dell validated
Disconnect on Ethernet WLAN v1.2 Yes
Yes, with Intel Proset or Dell Wireless
Clinet Utility (DCU) N o
View availabe networks & Site Monitors v1.0 Yes
Yes, with Intel Proset or Dell Wireless
Clinet Utility (DCU)
WZC/WLAN AutoConfig for available
networks
WiFi - Catcher v1.0 Yes Basic Mode Only Basic Mode Only
Hardware Radio Switch v1.0 Yes Yes, in BIOS Yes, in BIOS
Enterprise Extension for WLAN - 802.1x,
WPA-Enterprise/WPA2-Enterprise, CCKM
(CCX5, TTLS not available for Win 7)
v1.2 Yes
Yes, wth Intel PROSet or Dell Wireless
Client Utility (DCU) Yes, except CCX and TTLS
Dell Wireless Mobile Broadband 5720
Minicard v1.0 Yes
Yes, with Dell Mobile Broadband Client
Utility (DMBCU) for 5720 EVDO (novatel) N o
Dell Wireless 5600 EV/HSPA (GOBI) v1.2 Yes N o N o
Dell Wireless 5530 HSPA Minicard
(Helmsley) v1.0 Yes N o N o
Dell Wirless 5620 EV/HSPA (GOBI2) v1.4 Yes
Yes, planned alternative connection
manager
N o
Dell Wireless 5540 HSPA Minicard (H2) v1.4 Yes
Yes, planned alternative connection
manager
N o
GPS Novatel/Ericcson v1.0 Yes
Yes, with Dell Mobile Broadband Client
Utility (DMBCU) for 5720 EVDO (novatel)
No, for 5530 HSPA (Ericson)
N o
Disconnect on Ethernet WWAN v1.0 Yes N o N o
SMS Text Messaging v1.0 Yes
Yes, with Dell Mobile Broadband Client
Utility (DMBCU) for 5720 EVDO (novatel)
No, for 5530 HSPA (Ericson)
N o
Broadcom Gigabit LAN v1.0 Yes Yes Yes
Intel 825X Gigabit v1.0 Yes Yes Yes
Conexant HAD D330 MDC V.92 modem v1.0 Yes Yes Yes
Location Profiles v1.0 Yes N/A Yes, limited attributes through Vista and
Windows 7 (Network and Sharing Center)
Import/Export Profiles v1.0 Yes
Yes, with Intel Proset or Dell Wireless
Clinet Utility (DCU) Yes, limited to WiFi profiles (netsh)
Profile Management Wizard v1.0 Yes
Yes, with Intel Proset or Dell Wireless
Clinet Utility (DCU) N o
Radio Management Airplane Mode v1.0 Yes N o N o
Connection Logs v1.0 Yes
Yes, with Intel Proset or Dell Wireless
Clinet Utility (DCU) N o
Connection Status v1.0 Yes
Yes, with Intel Proset or Dell Wireless
Clinet Utility (DCU) Yes
Device Status v1.0 Yes
Yes, with Intel Proset or Dell Wireless
Clinet Utility (DCU) Yes
Network Status Details v1.0 Yes
Yes, with Intel Proset or Dell Wireless
Clinet Utility (DCU) Yes
Status Logs v1.0 Yes Yes, with Intel Proset or Dell Wireless
Clinet Utility (DCU)
N o
Diagnostics Connection base/ Hardware
based v1.0 Yes
Yes, with Intel Proset or Dell Wireless
Clinet Utility (DCU) Yes
Troubleshooting FAQ's/Web links v1.0 Yes
Yes, with Intel Proset or Dell Wireless
Clinet Utility (DCU) Yes
SSO Pre-logon (Windows XP only) v1.0 Yes
Yes, with Intel Proset or Dell Wireless
Clinet Utility (DCU) Yes, through GPO (Server 2008)
VPN Enforcement v1.0 Yes
Yes, with Dell Mobile Broadband Client
Utility 9DMBCU) for 5720 EVDO (novatel)
No, for 5530 HSPA (Ericson)
N o
WLAN
WWAN
LAN/ Modem/other connections
Location Profiles
connection/device/status
Information
Log-on Features
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
Appendix E
E-Docks
- Dell E-Docks (E-Family Docking Stations)
o Dell E-Family docking stations are architected differently than previous generations of Dell
docking stations.
o To enhance Plug And Play performance E-Family products no longer require a docking profile
Note: USB devices might be malfunction after docking/undocking. It’s a known issue on
Windows XP. Please refer to http://support.microsoft.com/kb/871233 to get workaround.
o The following are the list of features and expected behavior differences between D-Docks and
E-Docks:
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
Dell Latitude Ultrabook, E-Family & Mobile Precision Reimage “How-To” Guide
Dell Latitude E5530
Manuel du propriétaire
Modèle réglementaire: P28G
Type réglementaire: P28G001
Remarques, précautions et
avertissements
REMARQUE : Une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux
utiliser l'ordinateur.
PRÉCAUTION : Une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de
données et vous indique comment éviter le problème.
AVERTISSEMENT : Un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de
blessure corporelle ou de mort.
© 2013 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés.
Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo Dell, Dell Boomi™, Dell Precision™ , OptiPlex™, Latitude™,
PowerEdge™, PowerVault™, PowerConnect™, OpenManage™, EqualLogic™, Compellent™, KACE™, FlexAddress™,
Force10™ Venue™ et Vostro™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. Intel®, Pentium®, Xeon®, Core® et Celeron® sont des
marques déposées d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. AMD® est une marque déposée et
AMD Opteron™, AMD Phenom™ et AMD Sempron™ sont des marques d'Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Microsoft®,
Windows®, Windows Server®, Internet Explorer®, MS-DOS®, Windows Vista® et Active Directory® sont des marques ou
des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Red Hat® et Red Hat®
Enterprise Linux® sont des marques déposées de Red Hat, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Novell® et
SUSE® sont des marques déposées de Novell Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Oracle® est une marque
déposée d'Oracle Corporation et/ou de ses filiales. Citrix,® Xen®, XenServer® et XenMotion® sont des marques ou des
marques déposées de Citrix Systems, Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. VMware®, vMotion®, vCenterv®,
vSphere SRM™ et vSphere® sont des marques ou des marques déposées de VMware, Inc. aux États-Unis ou dans
d'autres pays. IBM® est une marque déposée d'International Business Machines Corporation.
2013 – 12
Rev. A01
Table des matières
1 Intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.................................................... 7
Avant d’intervenir dans l’ordinateur...................................................................................................... 7
Mise hors tension de l’ordinateur......................................................................................................... 9
Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.............................................................................9
2 Retrait et installation des composants.............................................................. 11
Outils recommandés........................................................................................................................... 11
Retrait de la carte SD........................................................................................................................... 11
Installation de la carte SD.................................................................................................................... 11
Retrait de la batterie............................................................................................................................ 12
Installation de la batterie..................................................................................................................... 12
Retrait de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module).......................................................................... 13
Installation de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module)...................................................................13
Retrait du cadre de l'écran.................................................................................................................. 13
Installation du cadre de l'écran...........................................................................................................14
Retrait de la caméra.............................................................................................................................14
Installation de la caméra..................................................................................................................... 15
Retrait de l'écran..................................................................................................................................15
Installation de l'écran...........................................................................................................................17
Retrait de l'habillage du clavier............................................................................................................17
Installation de l’habillage du clavier....................................................................................................19
Retrait du clavier................................................................................................................................. 20
Installation du clavier.......................................................................................................................... 22
Retrait du panneau d'accès.................................................................................................................23
Installation du panneau d'accès......................................................................................................... 24
Retrait du lecteur optique...................................................................................................................24
Installation du lecteur optique............................................................................................................26
Retrait du disque dur...........................................................................................................................26
Installation du disque dur................................................................................................................... 28
Retrait de la carte WLAN.....................................................................................................................28
Installation de la carte de réseau sans fil WLAN................................................................................ 29
Retrait du module de mémoire.......................................................................................................... 29
Installation du module de mémoire...................................................................................................29
Retrait du panneau droit de la base................................................................................................... 29
Installation du panneau droit de la base............................................................................................ 30
Retrait du module thermique............................................................................................................. 30
Installation du module thermique.......................................................................................................31
Retrait du processeur..........................................................................................................................32
Installation du processeur...................................................................................................................32
Retrait du repose-mains..................................................................................................................... 32
Installation du repose-mains..............................................................................................................34
Retrait du bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard................................................................................ 35
Installation du bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard......................................................................... 35
Retrait du module Bluetooth..............................................................................................................36
Installation du module Bluetooth.......................................................................................................36
Retrait de la carte son......................................................................................................................... 37
Installation de la carte son.................................................................................................................. 37
Retrait de l'assemblage écran.............................................................................................................38
Installation de l'assemblage écran..................................................................................................... 40
Retrait du support droit.......................................................................................................................41
Installation du support droit................................................................................................................41
Retrait de la carte modem..................................................................................................................42
Installation de la carte modem...........................................................................................................42
Retrait du support gauche..................................................................................................................43
Installation du support gauche...........................................................................................................43
Retrait de la carte système................................................................................................................. 44
Installation de la carte système.......................................................................................................... 47
Retrait de la pile bouton..................................................................................................................... 48
Installation de la pile bouton..............................................................................................................48
Retrait de la carte d'entrées/sorties (E/S)...........................................................................................49
Installation de la carte d'entrées/sorties (E/S)....................................................................................50
Retrait du connecteur d'alimentation.................................................................................................51
Installation du connecteur d'alimentation......................................................................................... 52
Retrait du ventilateur système............................................................................................................ 53
Installation du ventilateur système.....................................................................................................54
Retrait du connecteur réseau............................................................................................................. 55
Installation de la prise du connecteur réseau.................................................................................... 55
Retrait des haut-parleurs.................................................................................................................... 56
Pose des haut-parleurs....................................................................................................................... 57
3 Caractéristiques......................................................................................................59
Spécifications...................................................................................................................................... 59
4 Informations sur le port d'accueil......................................................................65
5 Informations complémentaires.......................................................................... 67
6 Configuration du système....................................................................................69
Présentation générale ........................................................................................................................69
Accès au programme de configuration du système......................................................................... 69
Options du programme de configuration du système......................................................................69
7 Diagnostics............................................................................................................... 79
Diagnostics.......................................................................................................................................... 79
8 Contacter Dell......................................................................................................... 81
6
1
Intervention à l'intérieur de votre
ordinateur
Avant d’intervenir dans l’ordinateur
Suivez les recommandations de sécurité ci-dessous pour protéger votre ordinateur et vos données
personnelles de toute détérioration. Sauf indication contraire, chaque procédure mentionnée dans ce
document suppose que les conditions suivantes sont réunies :
• Vous avez pris connaissance des consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur.
• Un composant peut être remplacé ou, si acheté séparément, installé en exécutant la procédure de
retrait dans l’ordre inverse.
AVERTISSEMENT : Avant d’intervenir dans l’ordinateur, lisez les informations de sécurité fournies
avec l’ordinateur. D’autres informations sur les meilleures pratiques de sécurité sont disponibles
sur la page d’accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité réglementaire) accessible à l’adresse
www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance
PRÉCAUTION : La plupart des réparations ne peuvent être effectuées que par un technicien de
maintenance agréé. N'effectuez que les opérations de dépannage et les petites réparations
autorisées par la documentation de votre produit et suivez les instructions fournies en ligne ou
par téléphone par l'équipe de maintenance et d'assistance technique. Tout dommage causé par
une réparation non autorisée par Dell est exclu de votre garantie. Consultez et respectez les
consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre produit.
PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter une décharge électrostatique, raccordez-vous à la terre à l’aide d’un
bracelet antistatique ou en touchant une surface métallique non peinte, par exemple un
connecteur sur le panneau arrière de l’ordinateur.
PRÉCAUTION : Manipulez avec précaution les composants et les cartes. Ne touchez pas les
composants ni les contacts des cartes. Saisissez les cartes par les bords ou par le support de
montage métallique. Saisissez les composants, processeur par exemple, par les bords et non par
les broches.
PRÉCAUTION : Lorsque vous déconnectez un câble, tirez sur le connecteur ou sa languette, mais
pas sur le câble lui-même. Certains câbles sont dotés de connecteurs avec dispositif de
verrouillage. Si vous déconnectez un câble de ce type, appuyez d’abord sur le verrou. Lorsque
vous démontez les connecteurs, maintenez-les alignés uniformément pour éviter de tordre les
broches. Enfin, avant de connecter un câble, vérifiez que les deux connecteurs sont correctement
orientés et alignés.
REMARQUE : La couleur de votre ordinateur et de certains composants peut différer de celle de
l’ordinateur et des composants illustrés dans ce document.
7
Pour ne pas endommager l’ordinateur, procédez comme suit avant d’intervenir dans l’ordinateur.
1. Assurez-vous que la surface de travail est plane et propre afin d’éviter de rayer le capot de
l’ordinateur.
2. Mettez l'ordinateur hors tension (voir la section Mise hors tension de l'ordinateur).
3. Si l'ordinateur est connecté à une station d'accueil, telle qu'un périphérique d'accueil ou une
extension de batterie en option, déconnectez-le.
PRÉCAUTION : Pour déconnectez un câble réseau, débranchez-le d’abord de l’ordinateur,
puis du périphérique réseau.
4. Déconnectez tous les câbles externes du système.
5. Débranchez du secteur l’ordinateur et tous les périphériques qui y sont connectés.
6. Fermez l'écran et retournez l'ordinateur sur une surface plane.
REMARQUE : Pour éviter d’endommager la carte système, vous devez retirer la batterie
principale avant de dépanner l’ordinateur.
7. Retirez la batterie principale.
8. Remettez l’ordinateur à l’endroit.
9. Ouvrez l'écran.
10. Appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation pour raccorder la carte système à la terre.
PRÉCAUTION : Pour prévenir tout risque de choc électrique, débranchez toujours
l’ordinateur de la prise électrique avant d’ouvrir l’écran.
PRÉCAUTION : Avant de toucher un élément dans l’ordinateur, raccordez-vous à la terre en
touchant une surface métallique non peinte, telle que le métal à l’arrière de l’ordinateur.
Pendant l’intervention, touchez régulièrement une surface métallique non peinte pour
éliminer l’électricité statique qui pourrait endommager les composants.
11. Retirez de leurs logements les éventuelles ExpressCards ou cartes à puce installées.
8
Mise hors tension de l’ordinateur
PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter de perdre de données, enregistrez et refermez tous les fichiers
ouverts, puis quittez tous les programmes ouverts avant de mettre hors tension l’ordinateur.
1. Arrêtez le système d’exploitation :
– Dans Windows 8 :
* À l’aide d’un périphérique tactile :
a. Balayez à partir du bord droit de l’écran pour ouvrir le menu Charms et sélectionnez
Paramètres.
b. Sélectionnez puis sélectionnez Éteindre
* À l’aide d’une souris :
a. Pointez sur l’angle supérieur droit de l’écran et cliquez sur Paramètres.
b. Cliquez sur et sélectionnez Éteindre.
– Dans Windows 7:
1. Cliquez sur Démarrer .
2. Cliquez sur Arrêter.
ou
1. Cliquez sur Démarrer .
2. Cliquez sur sur la flèche dans l'angle inférieur droit du menu Démarrer (voir ci-dessous), puis
cliquez sur Arrêter.
2. Vérifiez que l’ordinateur et tous les périphériques connectés sont hors tension. Si l’ordinateur et les
périphériques connectés n’ont pas été mis hors tension automatiquement lorsque vous avez arrêté le
système d’exploitation, appuyez sur le bouton Marche/Arrêt et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant quatre
secondes environ pour les mettre hors tension.
Après intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur
Une fois les procédures de réinstallation terminées, n'oubliez pas de brancher les périphériques externes,
cartes, câbles, etc. avant de mettre l'ordinateur sous tension.
PRÉCAUTION : Pour éviter d'endommager l'ordinateur, utilisez uniquement la batterie conçue
pour cet ordinateur Dell spécifique. N'employez pas de batteries conçues pour d'autres
ordinateurs Dell.
1. Branchez les périphériques externes, par exemple réplicateur de port, extension de batterie ou
périphérique d'accueil, et remettez en place les cartes comme l'ExpressCard, le cas échéant.
2. Branchez les câbles téléphoniques ou de réseau sur l'ordinateur.
PRÉCAUTION : Pour connecter un câble réseau, branchez-le d'abord le périphérique du
réseau et sur l'ordinateur.
9
3. Réinstallez la batterie.
4. Branchez l'ordinateur et tous ses périphériques sur leur prise secteur.
5. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension.
10
2
Retrait et installation des composants
Cette section fournit des informations détaillées sur le retrait ou l'installation des composants de
l'ordinateur.
Outils recommandés
Les procédures dans ce document peuvent nécessiter les outils suivants :
• petit tournevis à tête plate
• un tournevis cruciforme n°0
• un tournevis cruciforme n°1
• petite pointe en plastique
Retrait de la carte SD
1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur.
2. Appuyez sur la carte SD pour l'extraire de l'ordinateur.
3. Faites glisser la carte SD hors de l’ordinateur.
Installation de la carte SD
1. Enfoncez la carte SD dans son logement jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic.
2. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur.
11
Retrait de la batterie
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Faites glisser les loquets de dégagement de la batterie pour les mettre en position de déverrouillage.
3. Retirez la batterie de l'ordinateur.
Installation de la batterie
1. Faites glisser la batterie dans son logement jusqu’à ce que vous l'entendiez s'enclencher.
2. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
12
Retrait de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module)
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez la batterie.
3. Appuyez sur la carte SIM située sur la paroi de la batterie pour la libérer.
4. Faites glisser la carte SIM hors de l'ordinateur.
Installation de la carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module)
1. Insérez la carte SIM dans son logement.
2. Installez la batterie.
3. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait du cadre de l'écran
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez la batterie.
3. Ecartez doucement le bord inférieur du cadre d'écran.
13
4. Poursuivez en écartant les côtés et le bord supérieur du cadre de l'écran.
5. Retirez le cadre de l'écran de l'ordinateur.
Installation du cadre de l'écran
1. Placez le cadre d'écran sur l'assemblage écran.
2. En partant de l'angle supérieur, appuyez sur tout le pourtour du cadre d'écran jusqu’à ce qu'il
s'enclenche dans l'assemblage écran.
3. Installez la batterie.
4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait de la caméra
1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur.
2. Retirez :
a) la batterie
b) le cadre d’écran
3. Effectuez les opérations suivantes :
a) Retirez la vis qui maintient le module de la caméra et du microphone.
b) Déconnectez le câble de la caméra.
c) Soulevez le module et retirez-le.
14
Installation de la caméra
1. Mettez en place le module de caméra et microphone.
2. Connectez le câble de la caméra.
3. Serrez la vis de fixation du module de caméra et microphone.
4. Installez :
a) le cadre d’écran
b) la batterie
5. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur.
Retrait de l'écran
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la batterie
b) le cadre de l'écran
3. Retirez les vis de fixation de l'écran.
15
4. Retournez l'écran.
5. Soulevez le ruban en mylar et déconnectez le câble LVDS (low-voltage differential signaling) situé à
l'arrière de l'écran.
16
6. Retirez l'écran de l'assemblage écran.
Installation de l'écran
1. Posez les vis qui fixent les supports d'écran à l'écran.
2. Connectez l'écran à l'assemblage écran.
3. Alignez l'écran dans sa position d'origine dans l'ordinateur.
4. Connectez le câble LVSD (low-voltage differential signaling) à l'écran et fixez la bande.
5. Retournez l'écran et posez les vis qui le maintiennent.
6. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) le cadre de l'écran
b) la batterie
7. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait de l'habillage du clavier
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez la batterie.
17
3. Retirez les vis à l'arrière de l'ordinateur.
4. Retirez l'habillage du clavier en commençant par le bord inférieur.
5. Poursuivez en retirant les côtés et le bord supérieur de l'habillage du clavier.
18
6. Soulevez l'habillage du clavier pour le retirer de l'ordinateur.
Installation de l’habillage du clavier
1. Positionnez le cadre du clavier.
2. Appuyez sur les côtés de l’habillage du clavier jusqu’à ce qu’il s’enclenche.
3. Installez la batterie.
4. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur.
19
Retrait du clavier
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la batterie
b) l'habillage du clavier
3. Retirez la vis à l'arrière de l'ordinateur.
4. Soulevez le clip pour libérer l'habillage du clavier de l'ordinateur.
20
5. Retirez l'habillage du clavier de l'ordinateur.
6. Retirez les vis qui maintiennent le clavier en place.
21
7. Retournez le clavier.
8. Retirez la bande adhésive de fixation du câble flexible plat du clavier à l'arrière du clavier.
9. Déconnectez le câble flexible plat du bouton du clavier.
10. Retirez le câble flexible plat du clavier puis extrayez-le de l'ordinateur.
Installation du clavier
1. Connectez le câble flexible plat au clavier.
2. Apposez l'adhésif permettant de fixer le câble flexible plat au clavier.
3. Faites glisser le clavier dans son compartiment jusqu'à ce que toutes les languettes métalliques soient
en place.
4. Fixez le clip du câble du clavier.
5. Appuyez sur le clavier sur les côtés gauche et droit pour que toutes les fixations soient engagées.
6. Placez les vis qui fixent le clavier au repose-mains.
22
7. Installez la vis à l'arrière de l'ordinateur.
8. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) l'habillage du clavier
b) la batterie
9. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait du panneau d'accès
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez la batterie.
3. Retirez les vis de fixation du panneau d'accès.
4. Faites glisser le panneau d'accès vers l'avant puis soulevez-le pour le retirer de l'ordinateur.
23
Installation du panneau d'accès
1. Faites glisser le panneau d'accès dans son logement jusqu'à ce que vous entendiez un clic.
2. Installez les vis de fixation du panneau d'accès sur l'ordinateur.
3. Installez la batterie.
4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait du lecteur optique
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la batterie
b) le panneau d'accès
3. Retirez la vis qui fixe le lecteur optique.
24
4. Retirez la languette de fixation de l'ordinateur pour dégager le lecteur optique de la baie.
5. Retirez le lecteur optique de l'ordinateur.
6. Retirez les vis de fixation du support du lecteur optique.
7. Retirez le support du lecteur optique.
8. Désengagez les pattes de fixation du cadre du lecteur optique afin de séparer le lecteur optique du
cadre.
9. Retirez le cadre du lecteur optique.
25
Installation du lecteur optique
1. Engagez les pattes de fixation du cadre du lecteur optique afin de le fixer au lecteur optique.
2. Installez le support du lecteur optique.
3. Installez les vis de fixation du support du lecteur optique.
4. Insérez le lecteur optique dans l'ordinateur.
5. Posez la vis qui maintient le lecteur optique en place.
6. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) le panneau d'accès
b) la batterie
7. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait du disque dur
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la batterie
b) le panneau d'accès
3. Retirez les vis de fixation du support du disque dur.
26
4. A l'aide de la languette, tirez le support du disque dur afin de dégager le disque dur de son
connecteur.
5. Retirez le disque dur de l'ordinateur.
27
6. Retirez les vis de fixation du support du disque dur.
7. Retirez le support du disque dur de ce dernier.
Installation du disque dur
1. Installez le support du disque dur dans ce dernier.
2. Posez les vis qui fixent le support du disque dur.
3. Installez le disque dur dans l'ordinateur.
4. Posez la vis qui maintient le support du disque dur en place.
5. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) le panneau de la base
b) la batterie
6. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait de la carte WLAN
1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur.
2. Retirez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de fond de l’ordinateur
3. Effectuez les opérations suivantes :
a) Débranchez les câbles d'antenne de la carte WLAN.
b) Retirez la vis fixant la carte WLAN à l’ordinateur.
c) Retirez la carte WLAN de son emplacement sur la carte système.
28
Installation de la carte de réseau sans fil WLAN
1. Insérez la carte WLAN dans son connecteur sur la carte système.
2. Connectez les câbles d’antenne sur leurs connecteurs respectifs marqués sur la carte WLAN.
3. Serrez la vis qui fixe la carte WLAN à l’ordinateur.
4. Installez :
a) le cache de fond de l’ordinateur
b) la batterie
5. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur.
Retrait du module de mémoire
1. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Avant d’intervenir sur l’ordinateur.
2. Retirez :
a) la batterie
b) le cache de fond de l’ordinateur
3. Écartez les clips de retenue du module de mémoire jusqu'à ce que ce dernier s'éjecte.
4. Soulevez le module de mémoire pour le retirer de l'ordinateur.
Installation du module de mémoire
1. Insérez la mémoire dans le logement de la mémoire.
2. Appuyez sur les clips pour fixer le module de mémoire à la carte système.
3. Installez :
a) le cache de fond de l’ordinateur
b) la batterie
4. Appliquez les procédures décrites dans Après une intervention à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur.
Retrait du panneau droit de la base
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la batterie
b) le panneau d'accès
29
3. Retirez les vis de fixation du panneau droit de la base.
4. Retirez le panneau droit de la base de l'ordinateur.
Installation du panneau droit de la base
1. Placez le panneau droit de la base à son emplacement sur la partie inférieure de l'ordinateur.
2. Posez les vis qui fixent le panneau droit de la base à l'ordinateur.
3. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) le panneau d'accès
b) la batterie
4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait du module thermique
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte mémoire SD
b) la batterie
c) le panneau d'accès
d) le panneau droit de la base
30
3. Retirez les vis qui maintiennent le module thermique en place.
4. Soulevez le module thermique pour le retirer de l'ordinateur.
Installation du module thermique
1. Placez le module thermique dans son compartiment.
2. Installez les vis de fixation du module thermique à l'ordinateur.
3. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) le panneau droit de la base
b) le panneau d'accès
c) la batterie
d) la carte mémoire SD
4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
31
Retrait du processeur
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte mémoire SD
b) la batterie
c) le panneau d'accès
d) le panneau droit de la base
e) le module thermique
3. Tournez le verrou à came du processeur dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d'une montre jusqu'à la
position de déverrouillage.Soulevez le processeur et retirez-le de l'ordinateur.
Installation du processeur
1. Placez le processeur dans son logement dans l'ordinateur.
2. Tournez le verrou à came du processeur dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour le maintenir
bien en place.
3. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) le module thermique
b) le panneau d'accès
c) le panneau droit de la base
d) la batterie
e) la carte mémoire SD
4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait du repose-mains
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte mémoire SD
b) la batterie
c) le panneau d'accès
d) l'habillage du clavier
e) le clavier
f) le lecteur optique
g) le panneau droit de la base
h) le disque dur
32
3. Retirez les vis qui fixent la base de l'ordinateur.
4. Déconnectez les éléments suivants :
a) le câble flexible plat de la carte LED
b) le câble flexible plat de la touche média
c) le câble flexible plat de la tablette tactile
d) e câble flexible plat du scanner d'empreintes
e) le câble flexible plat du bouton de mise en marche
33
5. Retirez les vis qui fixent le repose-mains à l'ordinateur.
6. Soulevez le côté droit de l'assemblage du repose-mains.
7. Dégagez les languettes situées sur le bord gauche de l'assemblage du repose-mains et retirez le
repose-mains de l'ordinateur.
Installation du repose-mains
1. Alignez l'assemblage du repose-mains dans sa position d'origine dans l'ordinateur et installez-le.
2. Connectez les câbles suivants à la carte système :
a) le câble flexible plat du bouton de mise en marche
b) e câble flexible plat du scanner d'empreintes
c) le câble flexible plat de la tablette tactile
d) le câble flexible plat de la touche média
e) le câble flexible plat de la carte LED
3. Posez les vis de fixation sur le repose-mains.
34
4. Installez les vis sur le fond de l'ordinateur.
5. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) le panneau droit de la base
b) le lecteur optique
c) le clavier
d) l'habillage du clavier
e) le panneau d'accès
f) la batterie
g) la carte mémoire SD
6. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait du bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte mémoire SD
b) la batterie
c) le panneau d'accès
d) l'habillage du clavier
e) le clavier
f) le lecteur optique
g) le panneau droit de la base
h) le repose-mains
3. Retirez les vis de fixation du bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard.
4. Retirez le bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard de l'ordinateur.
Installation du bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard
1. Alignez le bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard dans sa position d'origine dans l'ordinateur et mettezle
en place.
2. Retirez les vis de fixation du bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard.
3. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) le repose-mains
b) le panneau droit de la base
c) le lecteur optique
d) le clavier
e) l'habillage du clavier
f) le panneau d'accès
g) la batterie
h) la carte mémoire SD
35
4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait du module Bluetooth
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte mémoire SD
b) la batterie
c) le panneau d'accès
d) l'habillage du clavier
e) le clavier
f) le lecteur optique
g) le panneau droit de la base
h) le repose-mains
3. Déconnectez le câble Bluetooth de la carte système et retirez la vis qui maintient le module
Bluetooth en place.
4. Retirez le module Bluetooth de l'ordinateur.
5. Déconnectez le câble Bluetooth du module Bluetooth.
Installation du module Bluetooth
1. Connectez le câble Bluetooth au module Bluetooth.
2. Placez le module Bluetooth dans son emplacement sur l'ordinateur.
3. Installez la vis de fixation du module Bluetooth.
4. Connectez le câble Bluetooth à la carte système.
5. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) le repose-mains
b) le panneau droit de la base
c) le lecteur optique
d) le clavier
e) l'habillage du clavier
f) le panneau d'accès
g) la batterie
h) la carte mémoire SD
6. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
36
Retrait de la carte son
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte mémoire SD
b) la batterie
c) le panneau d'accès
d) l'habillage du clavier
e) le clavier
f) le lecteur optique
g) le panneau droit de la base
h) le repose-mains
i) le module Bluetooth
3. Déconnectez le câble flexible plat de la carte son de la carte système et retirez la vis qui maintient la
carte son en place.
4. Retirez la carte son de l'ordinateur.
Installation de la carte son
1. Placez la carte son dans l'ordinateur.
2. Serrez la vis de fixation de la carte son à l'ordinateur.
3. Branchez le câble de la carte son à la carte système.
4. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) le module Bluetooth
b) le repose-mains
c) le panneau droit de la base
d) le lecteur optique
e) le clavier
f) l'habillage du clavier
g) le panneau d'accès
h) la batterie
i) la carte mémoire SD
5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
37
Retrait de l'assemblage écran
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte mémoire SD
b) la batterie
c) le panneau d'accès
d) l'habillage du clavier
e) le clavier
f) le lecteur optique
g) le disque dur
h) le panneau droit de la base
i) le repose-mains
3. Débranchez et retirez toutes les antennes des canaux d'acheminement.
38
4. Débranchez le câble LVDS.
5. Faites passer les antennes par l'ouverture dans la partie supérieure de l'ordinateur.
6. Soulevez le connecteur indiqué sur la carte système.
39
7. Retirez les vis de fixation de l'assemblage écran.
8. Retirer l'assemblage écran de l'ordinateur.
Installation de l'assemblage écran
1. Posez les vis de fixation de l'assemblage écran.
2. Insérez le câble LVDS (low-voltage differential signaling) et les câbles d'antenne sans fil dans les
orifices situés sur le châssis.
3. Passez le câble LVDS le long de son compartiment et connectez le connecteur à la carte système.
4. Branchez les câbles d'antenne sur leurs connecteurs respectifs.
5. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) le repose-mains
b) le panneau d'accès droit
c) le lecteur optique
d) le clavier
e) l'habillage du clavier
f) le panneau d'accès
g) la batterie
h) la carte mémoire SD
6. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
40
Retrait du support droit
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte mémoire SD
b) la batterie
c) le panneau d'accès
d) l'habillage du clavier
e) le lecteur optique
f) le disque dur
g) le panneau droit de la base
h) le repose-mains
i) l'assemblage écran
3. Retirez les vis qui maintiennent le support droit à l'ordinateur.
4. Soulevez le support droit et dégagez-le de l'ordinateur.
Installation du support droit
1. Installez le support droit sur l'ordinateur.
2. Serrez les vis qui le maintiennent à l'ordinateur.
3. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) l'assemblage écran
b) le repose-mains
c) le panneau droit de la base
d) le disque dur
e) le lecteur optique
f) le clavier
g) l'habillage du clavier
h) le panneau d'accès
i) la batterie
j) la carte mémoire SD
4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
41
Retrait de la carte modem
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte mémoire SD
b) la batterie
c) le panneau d'accès
d) l'habillage du clavier
e) le clavier
f) le lecteur optique
g) le disque dur
h) le panneau droit de la base
i) le repose-mains
j) l'assemblage écran
k) le support droit
3. Retirer la vis de fixation de la carte modem à l'ordinateur.
4. Soulevez la carte modem pour la libérer du connecteur situé au dos de la carte.
5. Débranchez le câble de connexion du modem de la carte modem.
6. Soulevez la carte modem pour la retirer de l'ordinateur.
Installation de la carte modem
1. Mettez en place la carte modem sur la carte d'E/S située dans l'ordinateur.
2. Branchez le câble de connexion du modem à la carte modem.
3. Engagez la carte modem dans le connecteur situé au dos de l'ordinateur.
4. Serrez la vis de fixation de la carte WLAN à l'ordinateur.
5. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) le support droit
b) l'assemblage écran
c) le repose-mains
d) le panneau droit de la base
e) le disque dur
f) le lecteur optique
g) le clavier
h) l'habillage du clavier
i) le panneau d'accès
j) la batterie
k) la carte mémoire SD
42
6. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait du support gauche
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte mémoire SD
b) la batterie
c) le panneau d'accès
d) l'habillage du clavier
e) le clavier
f) le lecteur optique
g) le disque dur
h) le panneau droit de la base
i) le repose-mains
j) l'assemblage écran
3. Retirez les vis qui maintiennent le support gauche à l'ordinateur.
4. Soulevez le support gauche et dégagez-le de l'ordinateur.
Installation du support gauche
1. Installez le support gauche sur l'ordinateur.
2. Serrez les vis qui le maintiennent à l'ordinateur.
43
3. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) l'assemblage écran
b) le repose-mains
c) le panneau droit de la base
d) le disque dur
e) le lecteur optique
f) le clavier
g) l'habillage du clavier
h) le panneau d'accès
i) la batterie
j) la carte mémoire SD
4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait de la carte système
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte mémoire SD
b) la batterie
c) le panneau d'accès
d) l'habillage du clavier
e) le clavier
f) le lecteur optique
g) le disque dur
h) la carte WLAN
i) le panneau droit de la base
j) le module thermique
k) le repose-mains
l) le bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard
m) l'assemblage écran
n) le support gauche
o) le câble du ventilateur
44
3. Déconnectez les éléments suivants :
a) le câble du ventilateur
b) le câble d'alimentation en CC
c) le câble Bluetooth
4. Débranchez le câble du haut-parleur et le câble flexible plat de la carte son de la carte système.
45
5. Retirez les vis de fixation de la carte système
6. Soulevez le bord droit de l'assemblage de la carte système de 45 degrés.
46
7. Libérez la carte système des connecteurs de port situés à gauche et retirez la carte système.
Installation de la carte système
1. Alignez la carte système dans sa position d'origine sur l'ordinateur.
2. Replacez et serrez les vis de fixation de la carte système à l'ordinateur.
3. Acheminez les câbles suivants et connectez-les à la carte système :
a) le câble flexible plat de la carte son
b) le câble Bluetooth
c) le câble des haut-parleurs
d) le câble d'alimentation en CC
e) le câble du ventilateur
4. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) le support gauche
b) l'assemblage écran
c) le bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard
d) le repose-mains
e) le module thermique
f) le panneau droit de la base
g) le disque dur
h) le lecteur optique
i) le clavier
j) l'habillage du clavier
k) le panneau d'accès
l) la batterie
m) la carte mémoire SD
5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
47
Retrait de la pile bouton
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte mémoire SD
b) la carte ExpressCard
c) la batterie
d) le panneau d'accès
e) l'habillage du clavier
f) le lecteur optique
g) le disque dur
h) la carte WLAN
i) le panneau droit de la base
j) le module thermique
k) le repose-mains
l) le bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard
m) l'assemblage écran
n) le support gauche
o) la carte système
3. Déconnectez la pile bouton de la carte système.
4. Dégagez la pile bouton de l'adhésif et retirez-la.
Installation de la pile bouton
1. Placez la pile bouton sur la carte système, la partie adhésive tournée vers le bas.
2. Connectez le câble de la pile bouton à la carte système.
48
3. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte système
b) le support gauche
c) l'assemblage écran
d) le bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard
e) le repose-mains
f) le module thermique
g) le panneau droit de la base
h) la carte WLAN
i) le disque dur
j) le lecteur optique
k) le clavier
l) l'habillage du clavier
m) le panneau d'accès
n) la batterie
o) la carte ExpressCard
p) la carte mémoire SD
4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait de la carte d'entrées/sorties (E/S)
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte mémoire SD
b) la batterie
c) le panneau d'accès
d) l'habillage du clavier
e) le clavier
f) le lecteur optique
g) le disque dur
h) la carte WLAN
i) le panneau droit de la base
j) le module thermique
k) le repose-mains
l) le bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard
m) l'assemblage écran
n) le support droit
o) le support gauche
p) la carte système
3. Retirez les vis qui fixent la carte d'E/S à l'ordinateur.
49
4. Soulevez la carte d'E/S hors de l'ordinateur.
Installation de la carte d'entrées/sorties (E/S)
1. Mettez en place la carte d'E/S dans l'ordinateur.
2. Serrez la vis qui fixe la carte d'E/S à l'ordinateur.
3. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte système
b) le support gauche
c) le support droit
d) l'assemblage écran
e) le bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard
f) le repose-mains
g) le module thermique
h) le panneau droit de la base
i) la carte WLAN
j) le disque dur
k) le lecteur optique
l) le clavier
m) l'habillage du clavier
n) le panneau d'accès
o) la batterie
p) la carte mémoire SD
4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
50
Retrait du connecteur d'alimentation
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte mémoire SD
b) la batterie
c) le panneau d'accès
d) l'habillage du clavier
e) le clavier
f) le lecteur optique
g) le disque dur
h) la carte WLAN
i) le panneau droit de la base
j) le module thermique
k) le repose-mains
l) le bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard
m) l'assemblage écran
n) le support gauche
o) la carte système
3. Retirez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation du canal d'acheminement.
51
4. Retirez le connecteur d'alimentation.
Installation du connecteur d'alimentation
1. Installez le connecteur d'alimentation dans l'ordinateur.
2. Insérez le câble du connecteur d'alimentation dans le canal d'acheminement.
3. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte système
b) le support gauche
c) l'assemblage écran
d) le bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard
e) le repose-mains
f) le module thermique
g) le panneau droit de la base
h) la carte WLAN
i) le disque dur
j) le lecteur optique
k) le clavier
l) l'habillage du clavier
m) le panneau d'accès
n) la batterie
o) la carte mémoire SD
4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
52
Retrait du ventilateur système
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte mémoire SD
b) la batterie
c) le panneau d'accès
d) l'habillage du clavier
e) le clavier
f) le lecteur optique
g) le disque dur
h) la carte WLAN
i) le panneau droit de la base
j) le module thermique
k) le repose-mains
l) le bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard
m) l'assemblage écran
n) le support droit
o) le support gauche
p) la carte modem
q) le connecteur réseau
r) la carte système
s) le connecteur d'alimentation
3. Retirez le câble du ventilateur du canal d'acheminement.
53
4. Retirez la vis qui fixe le ventilateur système et soulevez-le afin de l'extraire de l'ordinateur.
Installation du ventilateur système
1. Placez le ventilateur système dans l'ordinateur.
2. Serrez les vis qui fixent le ventilateur à l'ordinateur.
3. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) le connecteur d'alimentation
b) la carte système
c) le connecteur réseau
d) la carte modem
e) le support gauche
f) le support droit
g) l'assemblage écran
h) le bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard
i) le repose-mains
j) le module thermique
k) le panneau droit de la base
l) la carte WLAN
m) le disque dur
n) le lecteur optique
o) le clavier
p) l'habillage du clavier
q) le panneau d'accès
r) la batterie
s) la carte mémoire SD
4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
54
Retrait du connecteur réseau
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte mémoire SD
b) la batterie
c) le panneau d'accès
d) l'habillage du clavier
e) le clavier
f) le lecteur optique
g) le disque dur
h) le panneau droit de la base
i) le repose-mains
j) l'assemblage écran
k) le support droit
l) le support gauche
m) la carte modem
3. Retirez les câbles du connecteur réseau des canaux d'acheminement.
4. Retirez la prise du connecteur réseau.
Installation de la prise du connecteur réseau
1. Installez la prise du connecteur réseau dans l'ordinateur.
2. Insérez le câble du connecteur réseau dans le canal d'acheminement.
55
3. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte modem
b) le support gauche
c) le support droit
d) l'assemblage écran
e) le repose-mains
f) le panneau droit de la base
g) le disque dur
h) le lecteur optique
i) le clavier
j) l'habillage du clavier
k) le panneau d'accès
l) la batterie
m) la carte mémoire SD
4. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
Retrait des haut-parleurs
1. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Avant d'intervenir à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur.
2. Retirez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte mémoire SD
b) la batterie
c) le panneau d'accès
d) l'habillage du clavier
e) le clavier
f) le lecteur optique
g) le disque dur
h) la carte WLAN
i) le panneau droit de la base
j) le module thermique
k) le repose-mains
l) le bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard
m) le module Bluetooth
n) la carte son
o) l'assemblage écran
p) le support gauche
q) la carte système
56
3. Retirez les vis de fixation des haut-parleurs.
4. Retirez les câbles du haut-parleur de leurs canaux d'acheminement.
5. Soulevez le haut-parleur pour le retirer de l'ordinateur.
Pose des haut-parleurs
1. Placez les haut-parleurs dans l'ordinateur.
2. Serrez les vis qui fixent les haut-parleurs à l'ordinateur.
3. Connectez les câbles des haut-parleurs et mettez-les bien en place dans leurs canaux
d'acheminement.
57
4. Installez les éléments suivants :
a) la carte système
b) le support gauche
c) l'assemblage écran
d) la carte son
e) le module Bluetooth
f) le bâti du lecteur de carte ExpressCard
g) le repose-mains
h) le module thermique
i) le panneau droit de la base
j) la carte WLAN
k) le disque dur
l) le lecteur optique
m) le clavier
n) l'habillage du clavier
o) le panneau d'accès
p) la batterie
q) la carte mémoire SD
5. Suivez les procédures décrites dans la section Après une intervention dans l'ordinateur.
58
3
Caractéristiques
Spécifications
REMARQUE : Les offres peuvent varier en fonction de la région. Pour plus d'informations sur la
configuration de l'ordinateur, cliquez sur Démarrer. (Icône Démarrer) → Aide et support, puis
sélectionnez l'option pour afficher les informations sur l'ordinateur.
Tableau 1. Informations sur le système
Elément Spécification
Jeu de puces Jeu de puces Intel HM77/QM77 Express
Largeur de bus DRAM 64 bits
Flash EPROM SPI 32 Mbits
Bus PCIe Gen1 100 MHz
Fréquence du bus externe DMI (5GT/s)
Tableau 2. Processeur
Elément Spécification
Types
• Intel Celeron
• Intel Core i3 series
• Intel Core i5 series
• Intel Core i7 series
Mémoire cache L3 jusqu'à 8 Mo
Tableau 3. Mémoire
Elément Spécification
Connecteur mémoire deux emplacements SODIMM
Capacité de la mémoire 2 Go, 4 Go ou 8 Go
Type de mémoire DDR3 SDRAM 1600
Mémoire minimale 2 Go
Mémoire maximale 8 Go
59
Tableau 4. Audio
Elément Spécification
Type Audio haute définition à quatre canaux
Contrôleur IDT92HD93
Conversion stéréo 24 bits (analogique-numérique et numérique-analogique)
Interface :
Interne audio haute définition
Externe entrée microphone/casque stéréo/connecteur hautparleurs
externes
Haut-parleurs deux
Amplificateur de haut-parleur interne 1W (RMS) par canal
Réglages du volume touches de fonction du clavier et menus de programmes
Tableau 5. Vidéo
Elément Spécification
Type Intégrée sur la carte système
Contrôleur Intel HD Graphics
Tableau 6. Communications
Elément Spécification
Carte réseau Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbit/s (RJ-45)
Sans fil réseau local sans fil interne (WLAN) et réseau étendu sans
fil (WWAN)
Tableau 7. Ports et connecteurs
Elément Spécification
Audio (facultatif) un connecteur de microphone/casque stéréo/hautparleurs
Vidéo
• un connecteur VGA à 15 broches
• connecteur HDMI à 19 broches
Carte réseau un connecteur RJ-45
USB 2.0
• deux connecteurs à 4 broches conformes à la norme
USB 2.0
USB 3.0
• un connecteur conforme à la norme USB 3.0
• un connecteur conforme à la norme eSATA/USB 3.0
Lecteur de cartes mémoire un lecteur de carte mémoire 8-en-1
60
Elément Spécification
Port d'accueil un
Port SIM (Subscriber Identity Module,
module d'identité d'abonné)
un
Tableau 8. Écran
Elément Spécification
Type
Latitude E5430
• HD(1366x768), WLED
• HD+(1600 x 900)
Latitude E5530
• HD(1366x768), WLED
• FHD (1920 x 1080)
Taille
Latitude E5430 14,0 pouces
Latitude E5530 15,6 pouces
Dimensions :
Latitude E5430 :
Hauteur 192,50 mm (7,57 pouces)
Largeur 324,00 mm (12,75 pouces)
Diagonale 355,60 mm (14, 00 pouces)
Zones actives (X/Y) 309,40 mm x 173,95 mm
Résolution maximale
• 1366 x 768 pixels
• 1600 x 900 pixels
Luminosité maximale 200 nits
Latitude E5530 :
Hauteur 210,00 mm (8,26 pouces)
Largeur 360 mm (14,17 pouces)
Diagonale 394,24 mm (15,60 pouces)
Zone active (X/Y) 344,23 mm x 193,54 mm
Résolution maximale
• 1366 x 768 pixels
• 1920 x 1080 pixels
Luminosité maximale 220 nits pour la HD, 300 nits pour la FHD
Angle de fonctionnement de 0° (fermé) à 135°
Fréquence d'affichage 60 Hz
61
Elément Spécification
Angles minimaux de visualisation :
Horizontal
• +/- 40° pour la HD
• +/- 60° pour la FHD
Vertical
• +10°/-30° pour la HD
• +/- 50° pour la FHD
Taille de pixel :
Latitude E5430 0,2265 mm x 0,2265 mm
Latitude E5530
• 0,2520 mm x 0,2520 mm pour la HD
• 0,1790 x 0,1790 pour la FHD
Tableau 9. Clavier
Elément Spécifications
Nombre de touches États-Unis : 86 touches ; Royaume-Uni : 87 touches ;
Brésil : 87 touches ; Japon : 90 touches
Configuration QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji
Tableau 10. Pavé tactile
Elément Spécification
Zone active :
axe des X 80,00 mm
axe des Y 45,00 mm
Tableau 11. Batterie
Elément Spécification
Type « Smart » au lithium ion, 4, 6 ou 9 éléments
Dimensions :
Hauteur
4, 6 ou 9 éléments 20 mm (0,79 pouce)
Largeur
4 et 6 éléments 208 mm (8,18 pouces)
9 éléments 214 mm (8,43 pouces)
Profondeur
4 et 6 éléments 48,08 mm (1,89 pouces)
9 éléments 71,79 mm (2,83 pouces)
62
Elément Spécification
Poids
4 éléments 240 g (0,53 lb)
6 éléments 344,73 g (0,76 lb)
9 éléments 508,02 g (1,12 lb)
Tension
4 éléments 14,8 VCC
6 et 9 éléments 11,1 VCC
Plage de températures :
En fonctionnement de 0° C à 50° C (de 32° F à 122° F)
À l'arrêt de –40° C à 85° C (de –40° F à 185° F)
REMARQUE : Le bloc batterie est capable de
résister aux températures de stockage cidessus
lorsqu'elle est chargée à 100%.
REMARQUE : Le bloc batterie est également
capable de résister à des températures
s'étendant de–20 °C à +60 °C tout en
conservant ses performances.
Pile bouton Pile bouton 3 V CR2032 au lithium
Tableau 12. Adaptateur CA
Elément Latitude E5430 Latitude E5530
Type 65 W Adaptateur de 90 W
Tension d'entrée De 100 VCA à 240 VCA De 100 VCA à 240 VCA
Courant d'entrée
(maximum)
1,7 A 1,5 A
Fréquence d'entrée De 50 Hz à 60 Hz De 50 Hz à 60 Hz
Puissance de sortie 65 W 90 W
Courant de sortie 3,34 A (continu) 4,62 A (en continu)
Tension de sortie nominale 19,5 +/– 1,0 VCC 19,5 +/– 1,0 VCC
Plage de températures :
En fonctionnement De 0 °C à 40 °C (32 °F à 104 °F) De 0 °C à 40 °C (32 °F à 104 °F)
À l'arrêt De –40 °C à 70 °C (–40 °F à 158 °F) De –40 °C à 70 °C (–40 °F à 158 °F)
63
Tableau 13. Caractéristiques physiques
Caractéristiques
physiques
Latitude E5430 Latitude E5530
Hauteur de 29,9 mm à 32,5 mm (de 1,17 po à
1,27 po)
de 30,2 mm à 33,2 mm (de 1,18 po à
1,3 po)
Largeur 350 mm (13,7 po) 388 mm (15,27 po)
Profondeur 240 mm (9,44 po) 251 mm (9,88 po)
Poids 2,04 kg (4,5 lb) 2.38 kg (5,25 lb)
Tableau 14. Conditions environnementales
Elément Spécification
Température :
En fonctionnement De 0 °C à 35 °C (de 32 °F à 95 °F)
Stockage –40 °C à 65 °C (–40 °F à 149 °F)
Humidité relative (maximum) :
En fonctionnement De 10 % à 90 % (sans condensation)
Stockage De 5 % à 95 % (sans condensation)
Altitude (maximale) :
En fonctionnement De –15,24 à 3048 m (–50 pieds à 10 000 pieds)
À l'arrêt De –15,24 à 10 668 m (–50 pieds à 35 000 pieds)
Niveau de particules polluantes en
suspension
G1 tel que défini par la norme ISA-71.04–1985
64
4
Informations sur le port d'accueil
Le port d'accueil sert à la connexion d'un ordinateur portable à une station d'accueil (facultatif).
1. Logement pour carte SIM
2. Port d'accueil
65
66
5
Informations complémentaires
Cette section fournit des informations sur les fonctions supplémentaires de l'ordinateur.
67
68
6
Configuration du système
Présentation générale
La configuration du système vous permet de :
• modifier les informations de configuration du système après l’ajout, la modification ou le retrait d’un
composant matériel
• modifier ou ajouter une option sélectionnable par l’utilisateur, son mot de passe, par exemple
• connaître la capacité de mémoire du système ou définir le type de disque dur installé
PRÉCAUTION : Sauf si vous êtes un utilisateur expert, ne modifiez pas les réglages de ce
programme. Certaines modifications peuvent occasionner un dysfonctionnement de votre
ordinateur.
Accès au programme de configuration du système
1. Allumez (ou redémarrez) votre ordinateur.
2. Lorsque le logo DELL bleu apparaît à l’écran, attendez que l’invite F2 s’affiche.
3. Dès qu’elle apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur .
REMARQUE : L’invite F2 indique que le clavier s’est initialisé. Cette invite peut apparaître très
rapidement, et vous devez donc surveiller son affichage, puis appuyer sur . Cela ne sert à
rien d’appuyer sur avant l’invite.
4. Si vous attendez trop longtemps et si le logo du système d’exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu’à ce
que le bureau de Microsoft Windows s’affiche. Arrêtez alors votre ordinateur et faites une nouvelle
tentative.
Options du programme de configuration du système
REMARQUE : Selon votre ordinateur et les périphériques installés, les éléments répertoriés dans la
présente section n’apparaîtront pas forcément tels quels dans votre configuration.
Tableau 15. Généralités
Option Description
System Information Cette section liste les fonctions matérielles principales de votre
ordinateur.
• System Information (Informations système) : affiche la version du
BIOS, le numéro de service, le numéro d'inventaire, l'étiquette de
propriété , la date d'achat, la date de fabrication et le code de service
express.
• Memory Information (Informations mémoire) : affiche la mémoire
installée, la mémoire disponible, la vitesse de la mémoire, le mode
69
Option Description
des canaux mémoire, la technologie de mémoire, la capacité DIMM A
et la capacité DIMM B.
• Processor Information (informations processeur) : affiche le type de
processeur, le nombre de cœurs, l'ID processeur, la vitesse de
l'horloge en cours, la vitesse de l'horloge minimale, la vitesse de
l'horloge maximale, la mémoire cache L2 du processeur, la mémoire
cache L3 du processeur, la capacité HT et la technologie 64 bits.
• Device Information (Informations sur les périphériques) : affiche les
informations relatives au disque dur principal, au périphérique de baie
fixe, au périphérique eSATA du système, au périphérique eSATA
d'accueil, à l'adresse MAC LOM, au contrôleur vidéo, à la version
BIOS vidéo, à la mémoire vidéo, au type d'écran, à la résolution
native, au contrôleur audio, au contrôleur de modem, au
périphérique Wi-Fi, au périphérique cellulaire et au périphérique
Bluetooth.
Battery Information Affiche l’état de la batterie et le type d’adaptateur secteur raccordé à
l’ordinateur
Boot Sequence Permet de modifier l’ordre dans lequel l’ordinateur essaie de trouver un
système d’exploitation.
• Diskette Drive
• Internal HDD (Disque dur interne)
• USB Storage Device (Périphérique de stockage USB)
• CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive (Lecteur de CD/DVD/CD-RW)
• Onboard NIC (Carte réseau intégrée)
Boot List Option Permet de modifier l’ordre d’amorçage.
• Legacy (Hérité)
• UEFI
Date/Time Permet de modifier la date et l’heure.
Tableau 16. Configuration du système
Option Description
Integrated NIC Permet de configurer le contrôleur réseau intégré. Options possibles :
• Désactivée
• Activée
• Enabled w/PXE (w/PXE activé) : cette option est activée par défaut.
System Management Vous permet de contrôler le mécanisme de gestion du système. Les
options sont :
• Disabled (Désactivé) : cette option est activée par défaut.
• ASF 2.0
• Alert Only (Alerte uniquement)
70
Option Description
REMARQUE : Cet élément est pour les systèmes non-Vpro
uniquement.
Parallel Port Permet de configurer le port parallèle sur la station d’accueil. Options
possibles :
• Désactivée
• AT : cette option est activée par défaut.
• PS2
• ECP
Serial Port Permet de configurer le port série intégré. Options possibles :
• Désactivée
• COM1 : cette option est activée par défaut.
• COM2
• COM3
• COM4
SATA Operation Permet de configurer le contrôleur SATA interne. Options possibles :
• Désactivée
• ATA
• AHCI
• RAID On (Raid activé) : cette option est activée par défaut.
Drives Vous permet de configurer les lecteurs SATA intégrés. Tous les lecteurs
sont intégrés par défaut. Les options sont :
• SATA-0
• SATA-1
• SATA-4
• SATA-5
SMART Reporting Ce champ indique si les erreurs de disque dur des lecteurs intégrés sont
signalées lors du démarrage du système. Cette technologie fait partie de
la spécification SMART (Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting
Technology). Cette option est désactivée par défaut.
• Enable SMART Reporting (Activer les rapports SMART)
USB Controller Ce champ configure le contrôleur USB intégré. Si Boot Support
(Activation support d'amorçage) est activé, le système peut démarrer
depuis n'importe quels périphériques de stockage de masse USB (HDD,
clé de mémoire, disquette).
Si le port USB est activé, le périphérique qui y est connecté est activé et
disponible pour le SE.
S'il ne l'est pas, le SE ne peut pas détecter le périphérique connecté au
port.
• Enable Boot Support (Activer le support d'amorçage)
71
Option Description
• Enable External USB Port (Activer le port USB externe)
REMARQUE : Le clavier et la souris USB fonctionnent dans la
configuration BIOS indépendamment de ces paramètres.
Keyboard Illumination Ce champ vous permet de choisir le mode de fonctionnement de la
fonction d’éclairage du clavier.
Le niveau de luminosité du clavier s'étend de 25% à 100%
• Disabled (Désactivé) : cette option est activée par défaut.
• Level is 25% (Niveau à 25 %)
• Level is 50% (Niveau à 50 %)
• Level is 75% (Niveau à 75 %)
• Level is 100% (Niveau à 100 %)
Miscellaneous Devices Permet d’activer ou de désactiver les périphériques suivants :
• Enable Internal Modem (Activer le modem interne)
• Enable Microphone (Activer le microphone)
• Enable eSATA Ports (Activer les ports eSATA)
• Enable Hard Drive Free Fall Protection (Activer la protection contre la
chute libre du disque dur)
• Enable Fixed Bay (Activer la baie fixe)
• Enable Express card (Activer la carte Express)
• Enable Camera (Activer la caméra)
REMARQUE : Tous les périphériques sont activés par défaut.
Vous pouvez également activer ou désactiver la carte Média.
Tableau 17. Vidéo
Option Description
LCD Brightness Permet de configurer la luminosité de l’écran selon la source
d’alimentation (sur batterie et sur courant).
REMARQUE : Les paramètres vidéo sont visibles uniquement lorsqu’une carte vidéo est installée
dans le système.
Tableau 18. Sécurité
Option Description
Admin Password Vous permet de définir, modifier, ou supprimer le mot de passe de
l’administrateur (admin).
REMARQUE : Vous devez définir le mot de passe admin avant de
configurer le mot de passe système ou de disque dur. La
suppression du mot de passe admin supprime automatiquement le
mot de passe système et le mot de passe du disque dur.
72
Option Description
REMARQUE : Les changements de mot de passe prennent effet
immédiatement.
Paramètre par défaut : Not set (Non configuré)
System Password Vous permet de définir, modifier ou supprimer le mot de passe du
système.
REMARQUE : Les changements de mot de passe prennent effet
immédiatement.
Paramètre par défaut : Not set (Non configuré)
Internal HDD-0 Password Permet de définir ou de modifier le mot de passe du disque dur interne
du système.
REMARQUE : Les changements de mot de passe prennent effet
immédiatement.
Paramètre par défaut : Not set (Non configuré)
Strong Password Permet d’appliquer l’option de toujours définir des mots de passe
renforcés.
Paramètre par défaut : Enable Strong Password (Activer les mots de
passe sécurisés) n'est pas sélectionné.
REMARQUE : Si l'option Strong Password est activée, les mots de
passe admin et système doivent contenir au moins 8 caractères
dont un caractère en majuscule et un caractère en minuscule.
Password Configuration Permet de déterminer la longueur minimale et maximale des mots de
passe de l’administrateur et du système.
Password Bypass Vous permet d’activer ou de désactiver l’autorisation d’ignorer le mot de
passe du système et du disque dur interne quand ceux-ci sont
configurés. Les options sont :
• Désactivée
• Reboot bypass (Ignorer au redémarrage)
Réglage par défaut : Disabled (Désactivé)
Password Change Permet d’activer ou de désactiver la permission des mots de passe du
système et du disque dur interne quand le mot de passe de
l’administrateur est configuré.
Paramètre par défaut : Allow Non-Admin Password Changes (Autoriser
les modifications de mot de passe non-admin) est sélectionné
Non-Admin Setup Changes Permet de déterminer si des modifications des options de configuration
sont autorisées lorsqu’un mot de passe de l’administrateur est défini. En
cas de désactivation, les options de configuration sont verrouillées par le
mot de passe de l’administrateur.
TPM Security Permet d’activer ou de désactiver le contrôleur TPM intégré pendant le
POST.
Réglage par défaut : l’option est désactivée
73
Option Description
Computrace Vous permet d’activer ou de désactiver le logiciel optionnel Computrace.
Les options sont :
• Désactiver
• Désactiver
• Activate (Activer)
REMARQUE : Les options Activate et Disable respectivement
activent ou désactivent la fonctionnalité de manière permanente et
aucune autre modification n’est autorisée.
Réglage par défaut : Deactivate (Désactiver définitivement)
CPU XD Support Permet d’activer le mode Exécution Désactivation du processeur.
Réglage par défaut : Enable CPU XD Support (Activer la prise en charge
de CPU XD)
OROM Keyboard Access Permet de définir la possibilité d’entrer dans les écrans de configuration
de l’option ROM en utilisant des touches de raccourci pendant le
démarrage. Options possibles :
• Activer
• One Time Enable (Activer une seule fois)
• Désactiver
Réglage par défaut : Enable (Activer)
Admin Setup Lockout Vous permet d’empêcher les utilisateurs d’entrer dans le programme de
configuration lorsqu’un mot de passe de l’administrateur est configuré.
Réglage par défaut : Enable Admin Setup Lockout (Activer le verrouillage
de la configuration admin) n’est pas sélectionné
Tableau 19. Performances
Option Description
Multi Core Support Ce champ indique si le processus a un ou plusieurs cœurs activés. Les
performances de certaines applications s’améliorent avec des cœurs
supplémentaires. Cette option est activée par défaut. Elle permet
d’activer ou de désactiver le support multicœur pour le processeur.
Options possibles :
• Tous
• 1
• 2
Réglage par défaut : All (Tous)
Intel® SpeedStep™ Permet d’activer ou de désactiver la fonctionnalité Intel SpeedStep.
Réglage par défaut : Enable Intel SpeedStep (Activer le contrôleur
SpeedStep)
C States Control Permet d’activer ou de désactiver les états de veille supplémentaires du
processeur.
Paramètre par défaut : l'option C state est activée.
74
Option Description
Intel® TurboBoost™ Permet d’activer ou de désactiver le mode Intel TurboBoost du
processeur.
Réglage par défaut : Enable Intel TurboBoost (Activer Intel TurboBoost)
Hyper-Thread Control Permet d’activer ou de désactiver le mode HyperThreading du
processeur.
Réglage par défaut : Enabled (Activé)
Tableau 20. Power Management (Gestion de l’alimentation)
Option Description
AC Behavior Permet d’activer ou de désactiver l’option de mise sous tension
automatique de l’ordinateur lorsque celui-ci est connecté à un
adaptateur secteur.
Réglage par défaut : Wake on AC (Réveil sur CA) n’est pas sélectionné.
Auto On Time Permet de configurer l’heure à laquelle l’ordinateur doit s’allumer
automatiquement. Options possibles :
• Désactivée
• Every Day (Chaque jour)
• Weekdays (Jours de semaine)
• Select Days (Sélectionner des jours)
Réglage par défaut : Disabled (Désactivé)
USB Wake Support Permet d’autoriser les périphériques USB à sortir le système de l’état de
veille.
REMARQUE : Ce champ n’est fonctionnel que lorsque l’adaptateur
secteur est raccordé. Si cet adaptateur est retiré pendant la veille, la
configuration du système supprime le courant à tous les ports USB
afin de préserver l’alimentation de la batterie.
• Enable USB Wake Support (Activer la prise en charge de l’éveil USB)
• Paramètre par défaut : Enable USB Wake Support (Activer la prise en
charge du réveil USB) n'est pas sélectionné.
Wireless Radio Control Permet d’activer ou de désactiver la fonction qui commute
automatiquement entre les réseaux filaires et sans fil sans dépendre de la
connexion physique.
• Control WLAN Radio (Contrôle Radio WLAN)
• Control WWAN Radio (Contrôle Radio WWAN)
• Paramètre par défaut : Control WLAN radio ou Control WWAN radio
n'est pas sélectionné
Wake on LAN/WLAN Permet d’activer ou de désactiver la fonction qui rallume l’ordinateur
quand cette fonction est déclenchée par un signal LAN.
• Disabled (Désactivé) : cette option est activée par défaut.
• LAN Only (LAN uniquement)
• WLAN Only (WLAN uniquement)
75
Option Description
• LAN or WLAN (LAN ou WLAN)
Block Sleep Cette option pemet de bloquer la mise en veille (état S3) de
l'environnement du système d'exploitation.
Block Sleep (S3 state) (Bloquer mise en veille (état S3) : cette option est
désactivée par défaut. POST
Primary Battery
Configuration
Vous permet de sélectionner le mode de charge de la batterie. Les
options sont :
• Standard Charge (Charge standard)
• Express Charge (Charge rapide)
• Predominately AC use (Utilisation secteur prédominante)
• Auto Charge (Charge auto) : cette option est activée par défaut.
• Custom Charge (Charge personnalisée)
Si l'option Custom Charge est sélectionnée, il vous est possible de
configurer le début et la fin de la charge.
REMARQUE : Les modes de charge ne sont pas tous disponibles
pour tous les types de batteries.
Battery Slice Configuration Vous permet de sélectionner le type de charge de la batterie. Les options
sont :
• Standard Charge (Charge standard)
• Express Charge (Charge express) : cette option est activée par défaut.
REMARQUE : Le mode de charge express peut ne pas être
disponible pour toutes les batteries.
Tableau 21. POST Behavior
Option Description
Adapter Warnings Permet d’autoriser ou d’empêcher les messages d’avertissement de
configuration du système (BIOS) lorsqu’on utilise certains adaptateurs
d’alimentation.
Réglage par défaut : Enable Adapter Warnings (Activer avertissements
adaptateur)
Keypad Vous permet de choisir une ou deux méthodes pour activer le pavé
numérique intégré dans le clavier interne.
• Fn Key Only (Touche Fn uniquement) : cette option est activée par
défaut.
• By Numlock (Verr num.)
Mouse/Touchpad Permet de définir la façon dont le système traite les données envoyées
par la souris et la tablette tactile. Options possibles :
• Serial Mouse (Souris série)
• PS2 Mouse (Souris PS2)
76
Option Description
• Toushpad/PS-2 Mouse (Pavé tactile/Souris PS-2) : cette option est
activée par défaut.
Numlock Enable Permet d’activer le verrouillage numérique au démarrage de l’ordinateur.
Réglage par défaut : Enable Network (Activer réseau)
Fn Key Emulation Permet de configurer l’option dans laquelle la touche
est utilisée pour simuler le fonctionnement de la touche .
Réglage par défaut : Enable Fn Key Emulation (Activer l’émulation de la
touche Fn)
POST HotKeys Permet d’autoriser l’affichage, lors des ouvertures de session, de
messages indiquant la séquence de touches permettant d’accéder au
menu des options de configuration du système.
Réglage par défaut : Enable F12 Boot Option Menu (Activer le menu
d’options de démarrage par F12)
Tableau 22. Virtualization Support (Prise en charge de la virtualisation)
Option Description
Virtualization Permet d’activer ou de désactiver la technologie Intel Virtualization.
Réglage par défaut : Enable Intel Virtualization Technology (Activer la
technologie Intel Virtualization)
VT for Direct I/O Autorise ou empêche le VMM (Virtual Machine Monitor (VMM) d'utiliser
les fonctions matérielles supplémentaires fournies par la technologie
Intel® Virtualization pour les E/S directes.
Enable VT for Direct I/O (Activer la VT pour les E/S directes) : cette
option est activée par défaut.
Trusted Execution Cette option indique si un MVMM (Measured Virtual Machine Monitor)
peut utiliser les fonctions matérielles supplémentaires fournies par la
technologie Intel Trusted Execution. La technologie de virtualisation
TPM et la technologie de virtualisation pour les E/S directes doivent être
activées pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction.
Trusted Execution (Exécution de confiance) : désactivée par défaut.
Tableau 23. Sans fil
Option Description
Wireless Switch Permet de configurer les périphériques sans fil pouvant être contrôlés
par le commutateur sans fil. Options possibles :
• WWAN
• WLAN
• Bluetooth
Toutes les options sont activées par défaut.
Wireless Device Enable Permet d'activer ou de désactiver les périphériques internes sans fils.
• WWAN
• WLAN
77
Option Description
• Bluetooth
Toutes les options sont activées par défaut.
Tableau 24. Maintenance (Maintenance)
Option Description
Service Tag Affiche le numéro de service de l’ordinateur.
Asset Tag Permet de créer un numéro d’inventaire système si aucun numéro
d’inventaire n’a été défini. Cette option n’est pas définie par défaut.
Tableau 25. Journaux système
Option Description
BIOS Events Permet de voir et d’effacer les événements POST de configuration du
système (BIOS).
78
7
Diagnostics
En cas de problème avec l'ordinateur, exécutez les diagnostics ePSA avant de contacter l'assistance
technique de Dell. Les diagnostics visent à tester le matériel de l'ordinateur sans équipement
supplémentaire ou risque de perte de données. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre le problème vousmême,
le personnel de maintenance et d'assistance peut utiliser les résultats des diagnostics pour vous
aider à le résoudre.
Diagnostics
Tableau 26. Voyants d'état de l'appareil
S'allume lorsque vous allumez l'ordinateur et
clignote lorsque l'ordinateur est en mode
d'économie d'énergie.
S'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des
données.
S'allume ou clignote pour indiquer l'état de charge
de la batterie.
S'allume lorsque le réseau sans fil est activé.
Si l'ordinateur est branché à une prise secteur, le voyant d'état de la batterie fonctionne de la manière
suivante :
Tableau 27. Voyants d'état de la batterie
Un voyant orange et un voyant bleu clignotent
alternativement
Un adaptateur secteur non pris en charge par Dell
ou non authentifié est connecté à votre portable.
Alternativement un voyant orange clignotant et un
voyant bleu fixe
Défaillance de batterie temporaire avec adaptateur
secteur présent.
Voyant orange clignotant constamment Défaillance de batterie fatale avec adaptateur
secteur présent.
Voyant éteint Batterie en mode de chargement complet avec
adaptateur secteur présent.
Voyant blanc fixe allumé Batterie en mode de chargement avec adaptateur
secteur présent.
Indications données par les voyants situés au-dessus du clavier :
79
Tableau 28. Voyants d'état du clavier
S'allume lorsque le pavé numérique est activé.
S'allume lorsque la fonction Verr Maj est activée.
S'allume lorsque la fonction Arrêt défil est activée.
80
8
Contacter Dell
REMARQUE : Si vous ne disposez pas d'une connexion Internet, les informations de contact figurent
sur la facture d'achat, le borderau de colisage, la facture le catalogue des produits Dell.
Dell propose diverses options d'assistance et de maintenance en ligne et téléphonique. Ces options
varient en fonction du pays et du produit et certains services peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans votre
région Pour contacter le service commercial, technique ou client de Dell :
1. Consultez le site dell.com/support.
2. Sélectionnez la catégorie d'assistance.
3. Vérifiez votre pays ou région dans le menu déroulant Pays/Région situé en haut de la page.
4. Sélectionnez le lien de service ou d'assistance approprié.
81
Connect the display
Sluit het beeldscherm aan
Connectez l’écran
Conecte la pantalla
2
Connect the power cable and
press the power button
Sluit de stroomkabel aan en druk op de aan-uitknop
Connectez le câble d’alimentation et appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation
Conecte el cable de alimentación y presione el botón de encendido
Connect the Xbox receiver 4
Sluit de Xbox-ontvanger aan
Connectez le récepteur Xbox
Conecte el receptor Xbox
1
Connect the network cable — optional
Sluit de netwerkkabel aan (optioneel)
Connectez le câble réseau (facultatif)
Conecte el cable de red (opcional)
3 Insert batteries in the Xbox controller
Plaats de batterijen in de Xbox-controller
Insérez les batteries dans la manette Xbox
Introduzca las pilas en el controlador Xbox
5
NOTE: For more information, see the documentation that shipped with
the controller.
N.B.: Raadpleeg voor meer informatie de documentatie van de controller.
REMARQUE : pour plus d’informations, consultez la documentation fournie avec
la manette.
NOTA: Para obtener más información, consulte la documentación entregada con
el controlador.
2014-08
© 2014 Dell Inc.
© 2014 Microsoft Corporation
Printed in China.
Turn on the Xbox controller
Zet de controller van de Xbox aan
Allumez la manette Xbox
Encienda el controlador Xbox
6
NOTE: The drivers for the controller are already installed on your computer.
N.B.: De drivers voor de controller zijn al op uw computer geïnstalleerd.
REMARQUE : les pilotes de la manette sont déjà installés sur l’ordinateur.
NOTA: Los controladores para el controlador ya están instalados en el equipo.
Quick Start Guide
Snelstartgids Guide d’information rapide Guía de inicio rápido
Alienware Alpha
| |
Features
Kenmerken | Caractéristiques | Funciones
2 1
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Product support and manuals
Productondersteuning en handleidingen
Support produits et manuels
Soporte técnico de productos y manuales
alienware.com
dell.com/support/manuals
Contact Dell
Neem contact op met Dell | Contacter Dell
Póngase en contacto con Dell
dell.com/contactdell
Regulatory and safety
Regelgeving en veiligheid | Réglementations et sécurité
Normativa y seguridad
dell.com/regulatory_compliance
Regulatory model
Wettelijk model | Modèle réglementaire
Modelo normativo
D07U
Regulatory type
Wettelijk type | Type réglementaire
Tipo normativo
D07U001
Computer model
Computermodel | Modèle de l’ordinateur
Modelo de equipo
Alienware Alpha
Información para NOM, o Norma Oficial Mexicana
La información que se proporciona a continuación se mostrará en los dispositivos que se describen
en este documento, en conformidad con los requisitos de la Norma Oficial Mexicana (NOM):
Importador:
Dell Mexico S.A. de C.V.
AV PASEO DE LA REFORMA NO 2620 PISO 11
COL. LOMAS ALTAS
MEXICO DF CP 11950
Modelo D07U
Voltaje de alimentación 19,5 V CC
Consumo de corriente de entrada 6,70 A
País de origen Hecho en China y India
10
1. Power button
2. USB 2.0 ports (2)
3. Power-adapter port
4. HDMI-in port
5. HDMI-out port
6. S/PDIF port
7. Network port
8. USB 3.0 ports (2)
9. Hard-drive activity light
10. Service Tag and regulatory labels
1. Aan-uitknop
2. USB 2.0-poorten (2)
3. Poort voor netadapter
4. HDMI-in-poort
5. HDMI-uit-poort
6. S/PDIF-poort
7. Netwerkpoort
8. USB 3.0-poorten (2)
9. Activiteitenlampje harde schijf
10. Servicetag en labels met
voorschriften
1. Bouton d’alimentation
2. Ports USB 2.0 (2)
3. Port de l’adaptateur d’alimentation
4. Port d’entrée HDMI
5. Port de sortie HDMI
6. Port S/PDIF
7. Port réseau
8. Ports USB 3.0 (2)
9. Voyant d’activité du disque dur
10. Numéro de série et étiquettes de
conformité aux normes
1. Botón de encendido
2. Puertos USB 2.0 (2)
3. Puerto de adaptador de alimentación
4. Puerto HDMI de entrada
5. Puerto HDMI de salida
6. Puerto S/PDIF
7. Puerto de red
8. Puertos USB 3.0 (2)
9. Indicador luminoso de la actividad
de la unidad de disco duro
10. Etiqueta de servicio y etiquetas
normativas
Pair the Xbox controller and receiver
Koppel de controller van de Xbox en de ontvanger
Associez la manette Xbox au récepteur
Empareje el controlador Xbox y el receptor
Press the button on the receiver till the light starts blinking and then press the
pairing button on the controller.
Druk op de ontvanger op de knop totdat het lampje begint te knipperen en druk
vervolgens op de controller op de knop voor het koppelen.
Appuyez sur le bouton du récepteur jusqu’à ce que le voyant clignote, puis appuyez
sur le bouton d’association sur la manette.
Pulse el botón del receptor hasta que la luz empiece a parpadear y, a continuación,
pulse el botón de emparejar del controlador.
7 Finish Alienware Alpha setup
Voltooi de installatie van Alienware Alpha
Terminez l’installation d’Alienware Alpha
Termine la instalación de Alienware Alpha
8
Select Console Mode and follow the instructions on the screen to set up
the controller
Selecteer Console-modus en volg de scherminstructies om de controller in
te stellen
Sélectionnez le mode Console et suivez les instructions à l’écran pour configurer
la manette
Seleccione el modo de consola y siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para
configurar el controlador
NOTE: For more information, see dell.com/support/manuals
N.B.: Ga voor meer informatie naar dell.com/support/manuals
REMARQUE : pour plus d’informations, rendez-vous sur dell.com/support/manuals
NOTA: Para obtener más información, consulte dell.com/support/manuals
Create your Alienware Alpha account
Maak uw account aan voor Alienware Alpha
Créez votre compte Alienware Alpha
Cree su cuenta de Alienware Alpha
Connect to your wireless network
Maak verbinding met uw draadloze netwerk
Connectez-vous à votre réseau
Conéctese a su red inalámbrica
NOTE: If you are connecting to a secured wireless network, enter the
password for the wireless network access when prompted.
N.B.: Als u verbinding maakt met een beveiligd draadloos netwerk, vul dan het
wachtwoord voor het netwerk in wanneer daar om gevraagd wordt.
REMARQUE : si vous vous connectez à partir d’un réseau sans fil sécurisé,
saisissez le mot de passe d’accès au réseau sans fil lorsque vous y êtes invité.
NOTA: Si está conectado a una red inalámbrica con seguridad, escriba la
contraseña de acceso de la red inalámbrica cuando se le indique.
Download latest updates for Alienware Alpha
Download de nieuwste updates voor Alienware Alpha
Téléchargez les dernières mises à jour pour Alienware Alpha
Descargue las últimas actualizaciones de Alienware Alpha
Vues
Spécifications
Copyright © 2014 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. Le présent produit est protégé par les législations américaine et
internationale sur le droit d’auteur et la propriété intellectuelle. Dell et le logo Dell sont des marques commerciales
de Dell Inc. aux États-Unis et/ou dans d’autres pays. Toutes les marques et les noms mentionnés dans le présent
document peuvent être des marques commerciales de leur propriétaire respectif.
2014 ‑ 09 Rév. A00
Modèle réglementaire : D07U | Type : D07U001
Modèle de l’ordinateur : Alienware Alpha
REMARQUE : les images de ce document peuvent différer de votre
ordinateur, selon la configuration que vous avez commandée.
Alienware Alpha
1 Port USB 2.0 (sous le couvercle du port USB)
Permet de connecter un récepteur Bluetooth/sans fil pour
un clavier ou une souris sans fil, etc.
2 Port USB 2.0 (2)
Permet de connecter des périphériques (périphériques
de stockage, imprimantes, etc.). Assure des débits de
transfert de données pouvant aller jusqu’à 480 Mbits/s.
3 Bouton d’alimentation
Appuyez pour mettre l’ordinateur sous tension s’il
est éteint ou en état de veille.
Appuyez pour arrêter l’ordinateur s’il est allumé.
Appuyez pendant 4 secondes pour forcer l’ordinateur
à s’éteindre.
REMARQUE : il est possible de personnaliser la
fonction du bouton d’alimentation depuis les Options
d’alimentation. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous
à la section Mon Dell et moi sur dell.com/support.
Avant
1 2 3
Spécifications Vues
Avant
Arrière
1 Port de l’adaptateur d’alimentation
Permet de connecter un adaptateur d’alimentation pour
alimenter votre ordinateur.
2 Port d’entrée HDMI
Permet de connecter des consoles de jeux, des lecteurs Bluray
ou tout autre périphérique de sortie HDMI compatible.
3 Port de sortie HDMI
Permet de connecter un écran, un téléviseur ou tout
autre périphérique d’entrée HDMI compatible. Fournit
des sorties vidéo et audio.
4 Connecteur S/PDIF optique
Permet de relier un amplificateur, des hauts-parleurs ou
un téléviseur pour une sortie audio numérique à travers
des câbles optiques.
5 Port réseau
Permet de connecter un câble Ethernet (RJ45) depuis un
routeur ou un modem haut débit permettant d’accéder au
réseau ou à Internet.
Les deux témoins près du port signalent l’état de la
connectivité et l’activité réseau.
6 Port USB 3.0 (2)
Permet de connecter des périphériques (périphériques
de stockage, imprimantes, etc.). Assure des débits de
transfert de données pouvant aller jusqu’à 5 Gbits/s.
7 Voyant d’activité du disque dur
S’allume lorsque l’ordinateur lit ou écrit des données sur
le disque dur.
Arrière
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Spécifications Vues
Avant
Arrière
Vues Spécifications
Informations
système Mémoire Ports et
connecteurs
Dimensions
et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage
Adaptateur
d’alimentation
Environnement
de l’ordinateur
Dimensions et poids
Hauteur 55 mm (2,17 pouces)
Largeur 200 mm (7,87 pouces)
Profondeur 200 mm (7,87 pouces)
Poids (maximal) 1,81 kg (4 pouces)
REMARQUE : le poids de votre ordinateur varie en fonction de la configuration
commandée et de divers facteurs liés à la fabrication.
Vues Spécifications
Informations
système Mémoire Ports et
connecteurs
Dimensions
et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage
Adaptateur
d’alimentation
Environnement
de l’ordinateur
Informations système
Modèle de l’ordinateur Alienware Alpha
Processeur • 4ème génération Intel Dual Core i3
• 4ème génération Intel Quad Core i5
• 4ème génération Intel Quad Core i7
Chipset Intel H81
Vitesse DMI 5,0 GT/s
Largeur des données du processeur 64 bits
Vues Spécifications
Informations
système Mémoire Ports et
connecteurs
Dimensions
et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage
Adaptateur
d’alimentation
Environnement
de l’ordinateur
Mémoire
Connecteur Deux logements SO-DIMM
Type DDR3L
Vitesse 1600 MHz
Configurations prises en charge 2 Go, 4 Go, 8 Go et 16 Go
Vues Spécifications
Informations
système Mémoire Ports et
connecteurs
Dimensions
et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage
Adaptateur
d’alimentation
Environnement
de l’ordinateur
Ports et connecteurs
Externes :
Réseau Un port RJ45
USB • Trois ports USB 2.0
• Deux ports USB 3.0
Vidéo/audio • Un port S/PDIF optique
• Un port d’entrée HDMI
• Un port de sortie HDMI
Internes :
M.2 Un logement de carte M.2 pour WLAN et Bluetooth
Vues Spécifications
Informations
système Mémoire Ports et
connecteurs
Dimensions
et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage
Adaptateur
d’alimentation
Environnement
de l’ordinateur
Communications
Ethernet Contrôleur Ethernet Realtek RTL8151 10/100/1000 Mbits/s intégré sur la carte système
Sans fil • Wi-Fi 802.11 a/g/n
• Wi-Fi 802.11 a/g/n/ac
• Bluetooth 4.0
Vues Spécifications
Informations
système Mémoire Ports et
connecteurs
Dimensions
et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage
Adaptateur
d’alimentation
Environnement
de l’ordinateur
Vidéo
Contrôleur GPU NVIDIA GeForce
Mémoire GDDR5 2 Go
Vues Spécifications
Informations
système Mémoire Ports et
connecteurs
Dimensions
et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage
Adaptateur
d’alimentation
Environnement
de l’ordinateur
Audio
Contrôleur • Intel HD Audio
• Realtek ALC3220 pour sortie S/PDIF optique
Vues Spécifications
Informations
système Mémoire Ports et
connecteurs
Dimensions
et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage
Adaptateur
d’alimentation
Environnement
de l’ordinateur
Stockage
Interface SATA 6 Gbits/s
Disque dur Un lecteur de 2,5 pouces
Vues Spécifications
Informations
système Mémoire Ports et
connecteurs
Dimensions
et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage
Adaptateur
d’alimentation
Environnement
de l’ordinateur
Adaptateur d’alimentation
Type 130 W
Tension d’entrée 100 VCA–240 VCA
Fréquence d’entrée 50 Hz–60 Hz
Courant de sortie 6,70 A
Tension de sortie nominale 19,50 VCC
Plage de températures :
En fonctionnement 0 °C à 40 °C (32 °F à 104 °F)
En entreposage –40 °C à 70 °C (–40 °F à 158 °F)
Vues Spécifications
Informations
système Mémoire Ports et
connecteurs
Dimensions
et poids Communications Vidéo Audio Stockage
Adaptateur
d’alimentation
Environnement
de l’ordinateur
Environnement de l’ordinateur
Niveau de contaminants atmosphériques G2 ou inférieur selon la norme ISA-S71.04-1985
En fonctionnement En entreposage
Plage de températures 5 °C à 35 °C (41 °F à 95 °F) –40 °C à 65 °C (–40 °F à 149 °F)
Humidité relative (maximale) 10 % à 90 % (sans condensation) 0 % à 95 % (sans condensation)
Vibration (maximale)* 0,26 Grms 1,37 Grms
Choc (maximale) 40 G pour 2 ms avec un changement de
vélocité de 51 cm/s (20 pouce/s)†
105 G pour 2 ms avec un changement de
vélocité de 133 cm/s (52,5 pouce/s)
Altitude (maximale) –15,24 m à 3048 m
(–50 pieds à 10 000 pieds)
–15,24 m à 10 668 m
(–50 pieds à 35 000 pieds)
* Mesurée à l’aide d’un spectre de vibration aléatoire simulant l’environnement utilisateur.
† Mesuré avec disque dur en fonctionnement avec impulsion demi-sinusoïdale de 2 ms.
Alienware Alpha
Service Manual
Computer Model: Alienware Alpha
Regulatory Model: D07U
Regulatory Type: D07U001
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use
of your computer.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to
hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage,
personal injury, or death.
Copyright © 2014 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. This product is protected by U.S. and
international copyright and intellectual property laws. Dell™ and the Dell logo are trademarks of
Dell Inc. in the United States and/or other jurisdictions. All other marks and names mentioned
herein may be trademarks of their respective companies.
2014 - 10
Rev. A00
Contents
Before Working Inside Your Computer........................8
Before You Begin ................................................................................................8
Safety Instructions..............................................................................................8
Recommended Tools.........................................................................................10
After Working Inside Your Computer...........................11
Technical Overview..............................................................12
Inside View Of Your Computer...........................................................................12
System-Board Components..............................................................................13
Removing the Base Cover.................................................14
Procedure...........................................................................................................14
Replacing the Base Cover................................................. 16
Procedure...........................................................................................................16
Removing the Top Cover................................................... 17
Prerequisites......................................................................................................17
Procedure...........................................................................................................17
Replacing the Top Cover................................................... 19
Procedure...........................................................................................................19
Post-requisites.................................................................................................. 19
Removing the Hard Drive.................................................20
Prerequisites.....................................................................................................20
Procedure..........................................................................................................20
Replacing the Hard Drive................................................. 23
Procedure..........................................................................................................23
Post-requisites..................................................................................................23
Removing the Bottom USB Port...................................24
Prerequisites.....................................................................................................24
Procedure..........................................................................................................24
Replacing the Bottom USB Port....................................28
Procedure..........................................................................................................28
Post-requisites..................................................................................................28
Removing the Power-Button Board............................29
Prerequisites.....................................................................................................29
Procedure..........................................................................................................29
Replacing the Power-Button Board............................ 33
Procedure..........................................................................................................33
Post-requisites..................................................................................................33
Removing the Processor Fan.........................................34
Prerequisites.....................................................................................................34
Procedure..........................................................................................................34
Replacing the Processor Fan......................................... 36
Procedure..........................................................................................................36
Post-requisites..................................................................................................36
Removing the Processor Heat-Sink............................37
Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 37
Procedure.......................................................................................................... 37
Replacing the Processor Heat-Sink............................39
Procedure..........................................................................................................39
Post-requisites..................................................................................................39
Removing the Video-Card Fan.......................................40
Prerequisites.....................................................................................................40
Procedure..........................................................................................................40
Replacing the Video-Card Fan........................................42
Procedure..........................................................................................................42
Post-requisites..................................................................................................42
Removing the Video-Card Heat Sink..........................43
Prerequisites.....................................................................................................43
Procedure..........................................................................................................44
Replacing the Video-Card Heat Sink...........................45
Procedure..........................................................................................................45
Post-requisites..................................................................................................45
Removing the Memory Module(s)............................... 46
Prerequisites.....................................................................................................46
Procedure..........................................................................................................46
Replacing the Memory Module(s)................................48
Procedure..........................................................................................................48
Post-requisites..................................................................................................49
Removing the Processor..................................................50
Prerequisites.....................................................................................................50
Procedure..........................................................................................................50
Replacing the Processor.................................................. 52
Procedure..........................................................................................................52
Post-requisites..................................................................................................53
Removing the Front-Panel Light Board....................54
Prerequisites.....................................................................................................54
Procedure..........................................................................................................54
Replacing the Front-Panel Light Board.....................57
Procedure.......................................................................................................... 57
Post-requisites..................................................................................................57
Removing the Wireless Card.......................................... 58
Prerequisites.....................................................................................................58
Procedure..........................................................................................................58
Replacing the Wireless Card...........................................60
Procedure..........................................................................................................60
Post-requisites................................................................................................. 60
Removing the Antenna Modules.................................. 61
Prerequisites......................................................................................................61
Procedure..........................................................................................................62
Replacing the Antenna Modules..................................64
Procedure..........................................................................................................64
Post-requisites..................................................................................................64
Removing the System Board......................................... 65
Prerequisites.....................................................................................................65
Procedure..........................................................................................................66
Replacing the System Board..........................................69
Procedure..........................................................................................................69
Post-requisites..................................................................................................69
Removing the Coin-Cell Battery.....................................71
Prerequisites...................................................................................................... 71
Procedure........................................................................................................... 71
Replacing the Coin-Cell Battery.................................... 73
Procedure.......................................................................................................... 73
Post-requisites.................................................................................................. 73
System Setup.........................................................................74
Overview ........................................................................................................... 74
Entering System Setup .................................................................................... 74
System Setup Options...................................................................................... 74
Boot Sequence..................................................................................................80
Changing Boot Sequence for the Current Boot..........................................80
Changing Boot Sequence for Future Boots.................................................81
Clearing Forgotten Passwords.......................................................................... 81
Prerequisites...............................................................................................82
Procedure....................................................................................................82
Post-requisites............................................................................................84
Clearing CMOS Settings....................................................................................84
Prerequisites...............................................................................................84
Procedure....................................................................................................84
Post-requisites............................................................................................86
Flashing the BIOS................................................................. 87
Before Working Inside Your
Computer
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the components and cards,
handle them by their edges and avoid touching pins and
contacts.
NOTE: The images in this document may differ from your computer
depending on the configuration you ordered.
Before You Begin
1 Save and close all open files and exit all open applications.
2 Shut down your computer.
– Windows 8.1: On the Start screen, click or tap the power icon →
Shut down.
– Console Mode: On the Home screen, click Power → SHUT DOWN.
NOTE: If you are using a different operating system, see the
documentation of your operating system for shut-down instructions.
3 Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical
outlets.
4 Disconnect all cables such as telephone cables, network cables and so on,
from your computer.
5 Disconnect all attached devices and peripherals, such as keyboard, mouse,
monitor, and so on, from your computer.
6 Remove any media card and optical disc from your computer, if applicable.
7 After the computer is unplugged, press and hold the power button for 5
seconds to ground the system board.
Safety Instructions
Use the following safety guidelines to protect your computer from potential
damage and ensure your personal safety.
8
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer. For
more safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance
home page at dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
WARNING: Disconnect all power sources before opening the
computer cover or panels. After you finish working inside
the computer, replace all covers, panels, and screws before
connecting to the power source.
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the computer, make sure that
the work surface is flat and clean.
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the components and cards,
handle them by their edges and avoid touching pins and
contacts.
CAUTION: You should only perform troubleshooting and
repairs as authorized or directed by the Dell technical
assistance team. Damage due to servicing that is not
authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. See the
safety instructions that shipped with the product or at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Before touching anything inside your computer,
ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface,
such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you
work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to
dissipate static electricity, which could harm internal
components.
CAUTION: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector
or on its pull-tab, not on the cable itself. Some cables have
connectors with locking tabs or thumb-screws that you
must disengage before disconnecting the cable. When
disconnecting cables, keep them evenly aligned to avoid
bending any connector pins. When connecting cables, make
sure that the ports and connectors are correctly oriented
and aligned.
CAUTION: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the
cable from your computer and then unplug the cable from
the network device.
9
CAUTION: Press and eject any installed card from the mediacard
reader.
Recommended Tools
The procedures in this document may require the following tools:
• Philips screwdriver
• Flat-head screwdriver
• Plastic scribe
10
After Working Inside Your
Computer
CAUTION: Leaving stray or loose screws inside your
computer may severely damage your computer.
1 Replace all screws and make sure that no stray screws remain inside your
computer.
2 Connect any external devices, peripherals, and cables you removed before
working on your computer.
3 Replace any media cards, discs, and any other part(s) that you removed
before working on your computer.
4 Connect your computer and all attached devices to their electrical outlets.
5 Turn on your computer.
11
Technical Overview
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Inside View Of Your Computer
1 video-card fan 2 back panel
3 processor fan 4 power-button module
5 front-panel light module
12
System-Board Components
1 processor socket 2 processor-fan cable connector
(CPU_FAN)
3 clear password jumper
(CLEAR_PASSWORD)
4 power-button connector
(ALIEN_HEAD)
5 memory-module slot (DIMM2) 6 memory-module slot (DIMM1)
7 video-card fan cable connector
(GPU_FAN)
8 front-panel light board cable
connector (LOGO)
9 USB-port cable connector
(INT_USB2)
10 wireless-card slot
11 clear CMOS jumper (RTCRST) 12 video card
13
Removing the Base Cover
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Procedure
1 Turn the computer over.
2 Remove the screws that secure the base cover to the top cover.
1 screws (4) 2 base cover
14
3 Using a plastic scribe, pry the base cover off the top cover.
1 plastic scribe 2 base cover
15
Replacing the Base Cover
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Procedure
1 Align the screw holes on the base cover with the screw holes on the top
cover and snap the base cover over the top cover.
2 Replace the screws that secure the base cover to the top cover.
16
Removing the Top Cover
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Prerequisites
Remove the base cover.
Procedure
1 Hold the chassis along with the top cover and then turn the computer
over.
17
2 Lift the top cover off the chassis.
1 top cover
18
Replacing the Top Cover
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Procedure
1 Align the slots on the top cover with the ports on the chassis and place the
top cover on the chassis.
2 Hold the chassis along with the top cover and then turn the computer
over.
Post-requisites
Replace the base cover.
19
Removing the Hard Drive
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Hard drives are fragile. Exercise care when
handling the hard drive.
CAUTION: To avoid data loss, do not remove the hard drive
while the computer is in sleep or on state.
Prerequisites
Remove the base cover.
Procedure
1 Remove the screw that secures the hard-drive assembly to the chassis.
2 Slide the hard-drive assembly towards the back of the computer to
disconnect the hard drive from the system board.
20
3 Lift the hard-drive assembly off the chassis.
1 screw 2 hard-drive assembly
4 Remove the screws that secure the hard-drive bracket to the hard drive.
21
5 Lift the hard drive off the hard-drive bracket.
1 hard-drive bracket 2 hard drive
3 screws (4)
22
Replacing the Hard Drive
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Hard drives are fragile. Exercise care when
handling the hard drive.
Procedure
1 Align the screw holes on the hard drive with the screw holes on the harddrive
bracket.
2 Replace the screws that secure the hard-drive bracket to the hard drive.
3 Align the slots on the hard-drive assembly with the tabs on the chassis.
4 Slide the hard-drive assembly towards the front of the computer to
connect the hard drive to the system board.
5 Replace the screw that secures the hard-drive assembly to the chassis.
Post-requisites
1 Replace the top cover.
2 Replace the base cover.
23
Removing the Bottom USB
Port
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Prerequisites
1 Remove the base cover.
2 Remove the top cover.
Procedure
1 Disconnect the USB-port cable from the system board.
24
2 Push down the USB-port cable through the cable-routing hole on the
chassis.
1 USB-port cable 2 routing hole
3 Turn the computer over.
4 Remove the USB-port cable from the routing guides on the chassis.
5 Remove the screw that secures the USB-port bracket to the chassis.
6 Lift the USB-port bracket at an angle to release the tabs on the USB-port
bracket from the slots on the chassis.
25
7 Lift the USB-port bracket off the chassis.
1 screw 2 USB-port bracket
3 chassis 4 USB-port cable
5 routing guides
8 Remove the screw that secures the USB port to the chassis.
26
9 Slide and remove the USB port, along with the cable, from under the tab on
the chassis.
1 screw 2 tab
3 USB port 4 chassis
5 USB-port cable
27
Replacing the Bottom USB
Port
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Procedure
1 Slide the USB port under the tab on the chassis.
2 Replace the screw that secures the USB port to the chassis.
3 Align and slide the tabs on USB-port bracket in the slots on the chassis.
4 Replace the screw that secures the USB-port bracket to the chassis
5 Route the USB-port cable through the routing guides on the chassis and
slide the cable through the cable-routing hole on the chassis.
6 Turn the computer over.
7 Connect the USB-port cable to the system board.
Post-requisites
1 Replace the top cover.
2 Replace the base cover.
28
Removing the Power-Button
Board
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Prerequisites
1 Remove the base cover.
2 Remove the top cover.
Procedure
1 Disconnect the power-button board cable from the system board.
2 Turn the chassis over and remove the antenna cable from the routing
guides on the power-button module.
3 Press the tabs on the power-button module to release the module from
the front panel.
4 Release the tabs at the bottom of the power-button module from the slots
on the chassis.
29
5 Remove the power-button module along with its cable through the slot on
the front panel.
1 tabs (2) 2 routing guides
3 tabs (2) 4 power-button module
5 power-button board cable
30
6 Push the tab that secures the power-button board to the power-button
board bracket.
1 tab 2 power-button board cable
3 power-button board 4 bracket
7 Lift and slide the power-button board to release it from the power-button
board bracket.
31
8 Remove the power-button board along with its cable off the power-button
board bracket.
1 power-button board cable 2 power-button board
3 bracket
32
Replacing the Power-Button
Board
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Procedure
1 Use the alignment posts on power-button board bracket to align the
power-button board into the slot on the power-button board bracket.
2 Snap the power-button board in place on the power-button board bracket.
3 Route the power-button board cable through the cable-routing hole on the
chassis.
4 Align and snap the power-button module into the slot on the front panel.
5 Connect the power-button board cable to the system board.
6 Turn over the chassis and route the antenna cable through the routing
guides on the power-button board module.
Post-requisites
1 Replace the top cover.
2 Replace the base cover.
33
Removing the Processor Fan
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Prerequisites
1 Remove the base cover.
2 Remove the top cover.
Procedure
1 Press the tabs and lift the processor fan off the system board.
1 processor fan 2 tabs (2)
34
2 Disconnect the processor-fan cable from the system board.
1 processor fan 2 processor-fan cable
35
Replacing the Processor Fan
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Procedure
1 Connect the processor-fan cable to the system board.
2 Align and snap the processor fan over the processor heat sink.
Post-requisites
1 Replace the top cover.
2 Replace the base cover.
36
Removing the Processor
Heat-Sink
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: For maximum cooling of the processor, do not
touch the heat transfer areas on the heat sink. The oils in
your skin can reduce the heat transfer capability of the
thermal grease.
Prerequisites
1 Remove the base cover.
2 Remove the top cover.
3 Remove the processor fan.
Procedure
NOTE: The original thermal grease can be reused if the original processor
and heat sink are reinstalled together. If either the processor or the heat
sink is replaced, use the thermal grease provided in the kit to make sure
that thermal conductivity is achieved.
1 Loosen the captive screws that secure the processor heat sink to the
system board.
37
2 Lift the processor heat sink off system board.
1 processor heat sink 2 captive screws (4)
38
Replacing the Processor
Heat-Sink
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: For maximum cooling of the processor, do not
touch the heat transfer areas on the heat sink. The oils in
your skin can reduce the heat transfer capability of the
thermal grease.
Procedure
CAUTION: Incorrect alignment of the heat sink may damage
the system board and processor.
NOTE: The original thermal grease can be reused if the original processor
and heat sink are reinstalled together. If either the processor or the heat
sink is replaced, use the thermal grease provided in the kit to make sure
that thermal conductivity is achieved.
1 Place the processor heat sink over the processor.
2 Align the captive screws on the processor heat sink with the screw holes
on the system board.
3 Tighten the captive screws that secure the processor heat sink to the
system board.
Post-requisites
1 Replace the processor fan.
2 Replace the top cover.
3 Replace the base cover.
39
Removing the Video-Card
Fan
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Prerequisites
1 Remove the base cover.
2 Remove the top cover.
Procedure
1 Disconnect the video-card fan cable from the system board.
40
2 Press the tabs and lift the video-card fan off the system board.
1 video-card fan 2 tabs (2)
3 video-card fan cable
41
Replacing the Video-Card
Fan
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Procedure
1 Align and snap the video-card fan over the video-card heat sink.
2 Connect the video-card fan cable to the system board.
Post-requisites
1 Replace the top cover.
2 Replace the base cover.
42
Removing the Video-Card
Heat Sink
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: For maximum cooling of the processor, do not
touch the heat transfer areas on the heat sink. The oils in
your skin can reduce the heat transfer capability of the
thermal grease.
Prerequisites
1 Remove the base cover.
2 Remove the top cover.
3 Remove the video-card fan.
43
Procedure
NOTE: The original thermal grease can be reused if the original video card
and heat sink are reinstalled together. If either the video card or the heat
sink is replaced, use the thermal grease provided in the kit to make sure
that thermal conductivity is achieved.
1 In sequential order (indicated on the heat sink), loosen the captive screws
that secure the video-card heat sink to the system board.
1 video-card heat sink 2 captive screws (4)
2 Lift the video-card heat sink off the video-card heat sink.
44
Replacing the Video-Card
Heat Sink
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: For maximum cooling of the processor, do not
touch the heat transfer areas on the heat sink. The oils in
your skin can reduce the heat transfer capability of the
thermal grease.
Procedure
CAUTION: Incorrect alignment of the heat sink may damage
the system board and video card.
NOTE: The original thermal grease can be reused if the original video card
and heat sink are reinstalled together. If either the video card or the heat
sink is replaced, use the thermal grease provided in the kit to make sure
that thermal conductivity is achieved.
1 Place the heat sink over the video card.
2 Align the captive screws on the video-card heat sink with the screw holes
on the system board.
3 In sequential order (indicated on the heat sink), tighten the captive screws
that secure the video-card heat sink to the system board.
Post-requisites
1 Replace the video-card fan.
2 Replace the top cover.
3 Replace the base cover.
45
Removing the Memory
Module(s)
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Prerequisites
1 Remove the base cover.
2 Remove the top cover.
3 Remove the processor fan.
Procedure
1 Using your fingertips, pry apart the securing clips on each end of the
memory-module slot until the memory module pops up.
46
2 Slide and remove the memory module from the memory-module slot.
1 memory-module slot 2 memory module
3 securing clips (2)
47
Replacing the Memory
Module(s)
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Procedure
1 Align the notch on the memory module with the tab on the memorymodule
slot.
48
2 Slide the memory module into the memory-module slot and press the
memory module down until it clicks into place.
NOTE: If you do not hear the click, remove the memory module and
reinstall it.
1 memory module 2 notch
3 tab 4 memory-module slot
Post-requisites
1 Replace the processor fan.
2 Replace the top cover.
3 Replace the base cover.
49
Removing the Processor
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Prerequisites
1 Remove the base cover.
2 Remove the top cover.
3 Remove the processor fan.
4 Remove the processor heat sink.
Procedure
1 Press the release lever down and then push it away from the processor to
release it from the tab.
2 Extend the release lever completely and open the processor cover.
50
3 Lift the processor off the processor socket.
1 release lever 2 tab
3 processor cover 4 processor socket
5 processor
51
Replacing the Processor
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: If either the processor or the heat sink is replaced,
use the thermal grease provided in the kit to make sure that
thermal conductivity is achieved.
Procedure
1 Make sure that the release lever on the processor socket is fully extended
and the processor cover is fully open.
CAUTION: Position the processor correctly in the
processor socket to avoid permanent damage to the
processor.
2 Align the notches on the processor with the tabs on the processor socket.
3 Align the pin-1 corner on the processor with the pin-1 corner on the
processor socket, and then place the processor in the processor socket.
CAUTION: Make sure that the processor-cover notch is
positioned underneath the alignment post.
4 When the processor is fully seated in the socket, close the processor cover.
52
5 Pivot the release lever down and place it under the tab on the processor
cover.
1 processor socket 2 processor
3 tab 4 processor cover
5 release lever
Post-requisites
1 Replace the processor heat sink.
2 Replace the processor fan.
3 Replace the top cover.
4 Replace the base cover.
53
Removing the Front-Panel
Light Board
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Prerequisites
1 Remove the base cover.
2 Remove the top cover.
3 Remove the video-card fan.
Procedure
1 Disconnect the front-panel light board cable from the system board.
54
2 Slide the front-panel light board cable through the routing-hole on the
chassis.
1 front-panel light board cable 2 routing hole
55
3 Press the front-panel light module tabs to release the module from the
front panel.
1 front-panel light module 2 tabs
3 front panel
4 Lift the front-panel light module, along with its cable, off the front panel.
56
Replacing the Front-Panel
Light Board
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Procedure
1 Align the tabs on the front-panel light module with the slots on the front
panel, and snap the front-panel light module onto the front panel.
2 Route the front-panel light board cable through the cable-routing hole on
the chassis.
3 Connect the front-panel light board cable to the system board.
Post-requisites
1 Replace the video-card fan.
2 Replace the top cover.
3 Replace the base cover.
57
Removing the Wireless Card
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Prerequisites
1 Remove the base cover.
2 Remove the top cover.
3 Remove the video-card fan.
Procedure
1 Remove the screw that secures the wireless card to the system board.
2 Lift the protective cover off the wireless card.
3 Disconnect the antenna cables from the wireless card.
58
4 Slide and remove the wireless card out of the wireless-card slot.
1 protective cover 2 screw
3 antenna cables (2) 4 wireless card
59
Replacing the Wireless Card
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Procedure
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the wireless card, do not place
any cables under it.
1 Align the notch on the wireless card with the tab on the wireless-card slot.
2 Connect the antenna cables to the wireless card.
A label at the tip of the antenna cables indicates color scheme for the
wireless card supported by your computer.
Connectors on the wireless card Antenna-cable sticker
color
Auxiliary (1) White
Main (2) Black
3 Slide the wireless card at an angle into the wireless-card slot.
4 Press the other end of the wireless card down and replace the protective
cover on the wireless card.
5 Replace the screw that secures the wireless card to the system board.
Post-requisites
1 Replace the video-card fan.
2 Replace the top cover.
3 Replace the base cover.
60
Removing the Antenna
Modules
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Prerequisites
1 Remove the base cover.
2 Remove the top cover.
3 Remove the video-card fan.
4 Remove the wireless card.
61
Procedure
1 Slide the antenna cables through the cable-routing hole on the chassis.
1 antenna cables (2) 2 routing hole
2 Turn the computer over.
3 Remove the antenna cable from the routing guides on the power-button
module and chassis.
4 Remove the screws that secure the antenna modules to the chassis.
62
5 Using a plastic scribe, pry and slide the antenna modules, and release the
tabs on the antenna modules from the slots on the chassis.
1 routing guides 2 screws (2)
3 antenna modules (2) 4 antenna cable
6 Lift the antenna modules, along with the cable, off the chassis.
63
Replacing the Antenna
Modules
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Procedure
1 Align and slide the tabs on the antenna modules in the slots on the
chassis.
2 Align the screw holes on the antenna modules with the screws hole on the
chassis.
3 Replace the screws that secure the antenna modules to the chassis.
4 Route the antenna cable through the routing guides on the chassis and
power-button module.
5 Route the antenna cable through the cable-routing hole on the chassis.
Post-requisites
1 Replace the wireless card.
2 Replace the video-card fan.
3 Replace the top cover.
4 Replace the base cover.
64
Removing the System Board
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
NOTE: Your computer’s Service Tag is stored in the system board. You
must enter the Service Tag in the BIOS setup program after you replace
the system board.
NOTE: Replacing the system board removes any changes you have made
to the BIOS using the BIOS setup program. You must make the desired
changes again after you replace the system board.
NOTE: Before disconnecting the cables from the system board, note the
location of the connectors so that you can reconnect them correctly after
you replace the system board.
Prerequisites
1 Remove the base cover.
2 Remove the top cover.
3 Remove the hard drive.
4 Remove the processor fan.
5 Remove the processor heat sink.
6 Remove the processor.
7 Remove the video-card fan.
8 Remove the video-card heat sink.
9 Remove the memory modules.
10 Remove the wireless card.
65
Procedure
1 Disconnect the USB-port cable, front-panel light board cable, and powerbutton
board cable from the system board.
For information on the location of connectors, see “System- Board
Components”.
1 power-button board cable 2 front-panel light board
cable
3 USB-port cable
2 Remove the screws that secure the back panel to the chassis.
66
3 Push the tab at the bottom of the back panel and remove the back panel
from the chassis.
1 screws (2) 2 back panel
3 tab
4 Remove the screws that secure the system board to the chassis.
67
5 Lift the system board at an angle and remove it from the chassis.
1 system board 2 screws (4)
68
Replacing the System Board
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
NOTE: Your computer’s Service Tag is stored in the system board. You
must enter the Service Tag in the BIOS setup program after you replace
the system board.
NOTE: Replacing the system board removes any changes you have made
to the BIOS using the BIOS setup program. You must make the desired
changes again after you replace the system board.
Procedure
NOTE: Make sure that no cables are under the system board.
1 Slide the system board into the slot on the chassis and align the screw
holes on the system board with the screw holes on the chassis.
2 Replace the screws that secure the system board to the chassis.
3 Align and snap the back panel onto the chassis.
4 Align the screw holes on the back panel with the screw holes on the
chassis and replace the screws that secure the back panel to the chassis.
5 Connect the USB-port cable, front-panel light board cable, and powerbutton
board cable to the system board.
For more information on the location of connectors, see “System-Board
Components”.
Post-requisites
1 Replace the wireless card.
2 Replace the memory modules.
3 Replace the video-card heat sink.
4 Replace the video-card fan.
69
5 Replace the processor.
6 Replace the processor heat sink.
7 Replace the processor fan.
8 Replace the hard drive.
9 Replace the top cover.
10 Replace the base cover.
70
Removing the Coin-Cell
Battery
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Removing the coin-cell battery resets the BIOS
settings to default. It is recommended that you note the
BIOS settings before removing the coin-cell battery.
Prerequisites
1 Remove the base cover.
2 Remove the top cover.
3 Remove the hard drive.
4 Remove the processor fan.
5 Remove the processor heat sink.
6 Remove the processor.
7 Remove the video-card fan.
8 Remove the video-card heat sink.
9 Remove the memory modules.
10 Remove the wireless card.
11 Remove the system board.
Procedure
1 Turn the system board over.
2 Disconnect the coin-cell battery cable from the system board.
71
3 Peel off the coin-cell battery from the system board.
1 coin-cell battery 2 coin-cell battery cable
3 system board
72
Replacing the Coin-Cell
Battery
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Procedure
1 Adhere the coin-cell battery to the system board.
2 Connect the coin-cell battery cable to the system board.
Post-requisites
1 Replace the system board.
2 Replace the wireless card.
3 Replace the memory modules.
4 Replace the video-card heat sink.
5 Replace the video-card fan.
6 Replace the processor.
7 Replace the processor heat sink.
8 Replace the processor fan.
9 Replace the hard drive.
10 Replace the top cover.
11 Replace the base cover.
73
System Setup
Overview
CAUTION: Unless you are an expert computer user, do not
change the settings in the system setup program. Certain
changes can make your computer work incorrectly.
NOTE: Before you change system setup, it is recommended that you write
down the system setup screen information for future reference.
Use system setup to:
• Get information about the hardware installed in your computer, such as the
amount of RAM, the size of the hard drive, and so on.
• Change the system configuration information.
• Set or change a user-selectable option, such as the user password, type of
hard drive installed, enabling or disabling base devices, and so on.
Entering System Setup
NOTE: You must connect a keyboard and mouse to access and configure
system setup.
1 Turn on (or restart) your computer.
2 During POST, when the Dell logo is displayed, watch for the F2 prompt to
appear and then press F2 immediately.
NOTE: The F2 prompt indicates that the keyboard has initialized. This
prompt can appear very quickly, so you must watch for it, and then
press F2. If you press F2 before the F2 prompt, this keystroke is lost. If
you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to
wait until you see the operating system’s desktop. Then, turn off your
computer and try again.
System Setup Options
NOTE: Depending on your computer and its installed devices, the items
listed in this section may or may not appear.
74
Main
BIOS Revision Displays the BIOS version number.
BIOS Build Date Displays the BIOS release date.
System Name Displays the system name.
System Time Displays the current time in
hh:mm:ss format.
System Date Displays the current date in
mm/dd/yyy format.
Service Tag Displays the service tag of your
computer.
Service Tag Input Allows you to enter the service tag of
your computer.
Asset Tag Displays the asset tag of your
computer.
Processor Information
Processor Type Displays the processor type.
Processor ID Displays the processor identification
code.
Processor Core Count Displays the number of cores in the
processor.
Processor L1 Cache Displays the processor L1 cache size.
Processor L2 Cache Displays the processor L2 cache size.
Processor L3 Cache Displays the processor L3 cache size.
Memory Information
Memory Installed Displays the total computer
memory.
Memory Available Displays the amount of memory
available on the computer.
Memory Running Speed Displays the memory speed.
Memory Technology Displays the type of memory
technology used.
SATA Information
75
Main
SATA 1 Displays the device connected to
SATA Port1.
Device Type Displays the type of the connected
device.
Device ID Displays the identification code of
the device.
Device Size Displays the size of the device.
Advanced
Processor Configuration
Intel Hyper-Threading
Technology
Allows you to enable or disable the
HyperThreading in the processor.
Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology Allows you to enable or disable Intel
(R) SpeedStep Technology.
NOTE: If enabled, the processor
clock speed and core voltage are
adjusted dynamically based on
the processor load.
Intel(R) Virtualization
Technology
Allows you to enable or disable Intel
Virtualization Technology feature for
the processor.
CPU XD Support Allows you to enable the Execute
Disable mode of the processor.
Limit CPUID Value Allows you to limit the maximum
value the processor standard CPUID
function supports.
Multi Core Support Allows you to enable or disable
multi-core processor.
Intel(R) Turbo Boost Technology Allows you to enable or disable Intel
Turbo Boost Technology mode for
the processor.
USB Configuration
Front USB Ports Allows you to enable or disable the
front USB ports.
76
Advanced
Rear USB Ports Allows you to enable or disable the
rear USB ports.
Onboard Device Configuration
Onboard Audio Controller Allows you to enable or disable the
onboard audio controller.
SATA Mode Displays the SATA mode on your
computer.
Onboard LAN Controller Allows you to enable or disable the
onboard LAN controller.
Onboard LAN Boot ROM Allows you to boot your computer
from a network.
Boot
Numlock Key Allows you to set the status of the
Num Lock key during boot to On or
Off.
Secure Boot Allows you to enable or disable the
secure boot control.
Load Legacy OPROM Allows you to enable or disable the
Legacy Option ROM.
Keyboard Errors Allows you to enable or disable the
display of keyboard-related errors
during boot.
USB Boot Support Allows you to enable or disable
booting from USB mass storage
devices such as external hard drive,
optical drive, USB drive, and so on.
Boot Mode
Boot Option #1 Displays the first boot device.
Default: UEFI: Windows Boot
Manager.
Boot Option #2 Displays the second boot device.
Default: USB Storage Device.
Boot Option #3 Displays the third boot device.
Default: Internal ODD Devices.
77
Boot
Boot Option #4 Displays the fourth boot device.
Default: USB Floppy Device.
Boot Option #5 Displays the fifth boot device.
Default: Onboard NIC Device.
Hard Disk Drivers Displays the boot sequence of the
hard drive.
Power
Wake Up by Integrated LAN Allow the computer to be powered
on by special LAN signals.
Deep Sleep Control Allows you to define the controls
when Deep Sleep is enabled.
AC Recovery Sets what action the computer
takes when power is restored.
Auto Power On Allows you to enable or disable the
computer from turning on
automatically.
Auto Power On Mode Allows you to set the computer to
turn on automatically every day or
on a preselected date. This option
can be configured only if the Auto
Power On mode is set to Enabled
Everyday or Selected Day .
Auto Power On Date Allows you to set the date on which
the computer must turn on
automatically. This option can be
configured only if the Auto Power On
mode is set to Enabled 1 to 31.
Auto Power On Time Allows you to set the time at which
the computer must turn on
automatically. This option can be
configured only if the Auto Power On
mode is set to Enabled hh:mm:ss.
78
Security
Supervisor Password Displays whether the supervisor
password is set.
User Password Displays whether the user password
is set.
Set Supervisor Password Allows you to set, change, or delete
the supervisor password. The
supervisor password controls access
to the system setup utility.
NOTE: Deleting the supervisor
password deletes the user
password. Set the supervisor
password before setting the
user password.
User Access Level Allows you to restrict or provide
access to the system setup utility.
• No Access: Restricts users from
editing system setup options
• View Only: Allows users to only
view system setup options
• Limited: Allows users to edit
limited system setup options
• Full Access: Allows users to edit
all system setup options except
the supervisor password
Set User Password Allows you to set, change, or delete
the user password.
Password Check Allows you to enable password
verification either when you
attempt to enter system setup or
each time the computer boots.
NOTE: Password Check option
is visible only when the user
password is set.
79
Exit
Save Changes and Reset Allows you to exit system setup and
save your changes.
Discard Changes and Reset Allows you to exit system setup and
load previous values for all system
setup options.
Load Defaults Allows you to load default values for
all system setup options.
Boot Sequence
This feature allows you to change the sequence of devices that your computer
attempts to boot from. If the computer cannot boot from the device you select,
it attempts to boot from the next bootable device. You can use this feature to
change the:
• Current Boot Sequence — change the boot sequence for the current boot,
for example, to boot from the optical drive to run Dell Diagnostics from the
Drivers and Utilities disc or to reinstall your operating system using an
external media. The previous boot sequence is restored at the next boot.
• Future Boot Sequence — change the boot sequence for all future boots, for
example, to boot from the primary hard drive.
Changing Boot Sequence for the Current Boot
1 If you are booting from a USB device, connect the USB device to a USB port.
2 Turn on (or restart) your computer.
3 When F2 Setup, F12 Boot Options appear in the lower-right corner of
the screen, press F12.
NOTE: If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears,
continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop. Then,
shut down your computer and try again.
The Boot Options appears, listing all available boot devices.
4 On the Boot Options, select the device you want to boot from and press
Enter.
For example, if you are booting to a USB hard drive, highlight USB Hard
Disk and press Enter.
Boot Options
Following are the devices that your computer can boot from:
80
Floppy — The computer attempts to boot from the floppy disk drive. If no
operating system is on the drive, the computer generates an error message.
Hard Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the primary hard drive. If
no operating system is on the drive, the computer generates an error message.
CD/DVD/CD-RW Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the optical
drive. If no disc is in the drive, or if the disc is not bootable, the computer
generates an error message.
USB Storage Device — Insert the memory device into a USB connector and
restart the computer. When F12 Boot Options appear in the lower-right
corner of the screen, press F12. The BIOS detects the device and adds the USB
flash option to the boot menu.
NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To ensure
that your device is bootable, check the device documentation.
Network — The computer attempts to boot from the network. If no operating
system is found on the network, the computer generates an error message.
Changing Boot Sequence for Future Boots
1 Enter system setup.
See "Entering System Setup".
2 Use the arrow keys to highlight the Boot menu option and press Enter to
access the menu.
NOTE: Note your current boot sequence in case you want to restore
it.
3 Navigate to Set Boot Priority to configure the boot priority.
4 Use the arrow keys to highlight the boot priority and press Enter to display
the different devices.
5 Select the device and press Enter to set the boot priority.
Clearing Forgotten Passwords
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
81
Prerequisites
1 Remove the base cover.
2 Remove the top cover.
3 Remove the processor fan.
Procedure
1 Locate the password jumper (CLEAR_PASSWORD) on the system board.
For information on the location of the CMOS jumper, see “System- Board
Components”.
82
2 Remove the jumper plug.
1 jumper plug 2 password jumper
(CLEAR_PASSWORD)
3 Replace the processor fan.
4 Replace the top cover.
5 Replace the base cover.
6 Turn on your computer and wait till the operating system is completely
loaded.
7 Shut down your computer.
8 Remove the base cover.
9 Remove the top cover.
10 Remove the processor fan.
83
11 Replace the jumper plug on the password jumper.
1 jumper plug 2 password jumper
(CLEAR_PASSWORD)
Post-requisites
1 Replace the processor fan.
2 Replace the top cover.
3 Replace the base cover.
Clearing CMOS Settings
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the
safety information that shipped with your computer and
follow the steps in Before Working Inside Your Computer.
After working inside your computer, follow the instructions
in After Working Inside Your Computer. For more safety best
practices, see the Regulatory Compliance home page at
dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
Prerequisites
1 Remove the base cover.
2 Remove the top cover.
3 Remove the processor fan.
4 Remove the video-card fan.
Procedure
1 Locate the CMOS jumper (RTCRST) on the system board.
For information on the location of the CMOS jumper, see “System- Board
Components”.
84
2 Remove the jumper plug from the password jumper (CLEAR_PASSWORD)
and place it on the CMOS jumper (RTCRST).
1 jumper plug 2 CMOS jumper (RTCRST)
3 password jumper
(CLEAR_PASSWORD)
3 Replace the video-card fan.
4 Replace the processor fan.
5 Replace the top cover.
6 Replace the base cover.
85
7 Turn on your computer.
A message is displayed to confirm that the CMOS settings are reset and
default BIOS setup has been loaded.
8 Press F1 to continue and wait till the operating system is completely
loaded.
9 Shut down your computer.
10 Remove the base cover.
11 Remove the top cover.
12 Remove the processor fan.
13 Remove the video-card fan.
14 Remove the jumper plug from the CMOS jumper and replace it on the
password jumper.
Post-requisites
1 Replace the video-card fan.
2 Replace the processor fan.
3 Replace the top cover.
4 Replace the base cover.
86
Flashing the BIOS
NOTE: It is recommended that you connect a keyboard and mouse to
flash the BIOS.
You may need to flash (update) the BIOS when an update is available or when
you replace the system board. To flash the BIOS:
1 Turn on the computer.
2 Go to dell.com/support.
3 If you have your computer's Service Tag, type your computer's Service Tag
and click Submit.
If you do not have your computer's Service Tag, click Detect My
Product to allow automatic detection of the Service Tag.
NOTE: If the Service Tag cannot be detected automatically, select
your product under the product categories.
4 Click Get Drivers and Downloads.
5 Click View All Drivers.
6 In the Operating System drop-down, select the operating system
installed on your computer.
7 Click BIOS.
8 Click Download File to download the latest version of the BIOS for your
computer.
9 On the next page, select Single-file download and click Continue.
10 Save the file and once the download is complete, navigate to the folder
where you saved the BIOS update file.
11 Double-click the BIOS update file icon and follow the instructions on the
screen.
87
Technical Guide 1-socket 1U rack server providing the features you need without a lot of the unnecessary extras. Dell PowerEdge R210 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 2 This document is for informational purposes only. Dell reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein. The content provided is as is and without express or implied warranties of any kind. Dell, PowerEdge, PowerVault, OpenManage, and ReadyRails are trademarks of Dell, Inc. Citrix® and XenServer™ are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. and/or one or more of its subsidiaries, and may be registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Intel, Xeon, and Pentium are registered trademarks and Core is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. HP and COMPAQ are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. Broadcom is a registered trademark and NetXtreme is a trademark of Broadcom Corporation and/or its affiliates in the United States, certain other countries and/or the EU. CommVault Galaxy® or Simpana® are registered trademarks of CommVault Systems, Inc. InfiniBand is a registered trademark and service mark of the InfiniBand Trade Association. Matrox is a registered trademark of Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd. Microsoft and SQL Server are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Mellanox is a registered trademark of Mellanox Technologies, Inc. and ConnectX, InfiniBlast, InfiniBridge, InfiniHost, InfiniRISC, InfiniScale, and InfiniPCI are trademarks of Mellanox Technologies, Inc. Red Hat is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Symantec and Backup Exec are trademarks owned by Symantec Corporation or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. Novell, SUSE, PlateSpin, and PowerConvert are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. QLogic and PathScale are registered trademarks of Qlogic Corporation. VMware is a registered trademark and vSphere is a trademark of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other jurisdictions. Vizioncore, vRanger, vConverter, and vFoglight are trademarks of Vizioncore Inc. in the United States of America and other countries. Winbond is a registered trademark of Winbond Electronics Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell disclaims proprietary interest in the marks and names of others. ©Copyright 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction or translation of any part of this work beyond that permitted by U.S. copyright laws without the written permission of Dell Inc. is unlawful and strictly forbidden. Initial Release April 2010 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 3 Table of Contents 1 Product Comparison........................................................................... 7 2 New Technologies ........................................................................... 11 2.1 Overview................................................................................ 11 2.2 Detailed Information.................................................................. 11 2.2.1 System Management ............................................................ 11 2.2.2 Software RAID.................................................................... 11 2.2.3 eSATA.............................................................................. 13 3 System Overview ............................................................................ 14 4 Mechanical.................................................................................... 16 4.1 Chassis Description.................................................................... 16 4.2 Dimensions and Weight............................................................... 16 4.3 Front Panel View and Features...................................................... 17 4.4 Back Panel View and Features ...................................................... 18 4.5 Power Supply Indicators .............................................................. 18 4.5.1 Power Button LED ............................................................... 18 4.5.2 System Status/ID LED ........................................................... 18 4.6 NIC Indicators .......................................................................... 18 4.7 Side View ............................................................................... 19 4.8 Internal Chassis View ................................................................. 20 4.9 Rails ..................................................................................... 21 4.10 Fans...................................................................................... 22 4.11 Control Panel LED ..................................................................... 22 4.12 Security ................................................................................. 22 4.12.1 Top Cover Lock Mechanism .................................................... 22 4.12.2 Bezel............................................................................... 22 4.12.3 Trusted Platform Module (TPM)............................................... 22 4.12.4 Power Switch Security .......................................................... 23 4.12.5 Intrusion Alert.................................................................... 23 4.12.6 Secure Mode...................................................................... 24 4.13 USB Ports ............................................................................... 24 4.14 Battery .................................................................................. 24 4.15 Field Replaceable Units (FRU)....................................................... 25 4.16 User Accessible Jumpers, Sockets, and Connectors ............................. 25 5 Power, Thermal, Acoustic ................................................................. 26 5.1 Power Supplies......................................................................... 26 5.2 Power Supply Connectors on the Planar........................................... 26 5.3 Environmental Specifications........................................................ 27 5.3.1 Temperature ..................................................................... 27 5.3.2 Relative Humidity ............................................................... 27 5.3.3 Maximum Vibration.............................................................. 27 5.3.4 Maximum Shock.................................................................. 27 5.3.5 Altitude ........................................................................... 27 5.3.6 Airborne Contaminant Level................................................... 27 5.4 Power Supply Unit (PSU) Specifications............................................ 28 5.5 ENERGY STAR® Compliance .......................................................... 28 5.6 Thermal ................................................................................. 28 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 4 5.7 Acoustics ................................................................................ 29 6 Processors .................................................................................... 31 6.1 Overview................................................................................ 31 6.2 Supported Processors ................................................................. 31 6.3 Processor Configurations ............................................................. 31 7 Memory........................................................................................ 32 7.1 Overview................................................................................ 32 7.2 DIMMs Supported ...................................................................... 32 7.3 Slots/Risers ............................................................................. 33 7.4 Speed.................................................................................... 33 7.5 Sparing .................................................................................. 33 7.6 Mirroring ................................................................................ 33 7.7 RAID...................................................................................... 33 8 Chipset ........................................................................................ 34 8.1 Overview................................................................................ 34 8.2 Direct Media Interface................................................................ 34 8.3 PCI Express Interface ................................................................. 34 8.4 SATA Interface ......................................................................... 34 8.5 AHCI ..................................................................................... 34 8.6 PCI Interface ........................................................................... 34 8.7 Low Pin Count (LPC) Interface ...................................................... 35 8.8 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) .................................................... 35 8.9 Compatibility Module ................................................................. 35 8.10 Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC) ........................... 35 8.11 USB Interface........................................................................... 35 8.12 Real-Time Clock (RTC)................................................................ 36 8.13 GPIO ..................................................................................... 36 8.14 Enhanced Power Management....................................................... 36 8.15 System Management Features ....................................................... 36 8.15.1 TCO Timer ........................................................................ 36 8.15.2 Processor Present Indicator.................................................... 36 8.15.3 Error Code Correction (ECC) Reporting ...................................... 36 8.15.4 Function Disable ................................................................. 37 8.16 System Management Bus (SMBus 2.0) .............................................. 37 8.17 Intel Anti-Theft Technology ......................................................... 37 8.18 Intel Virtualization Technology for Directed I/O................................. 37 8.19 JTAG Boundary-Scan .................................................................. 38 9 BIOS............................................................................................ 39 9.1 Overview................................................................................ 39 9.2 ACPI...................................................................................... 40 9.3 Power Management Modes ........................................................... 40 9.3.1 Dell Active Power Controller .................................................. 40 9.3.2 Power Saving BIOS Setting (OS Control) ..................................... 41 9.3.3 Maximum Performance ......................................................... 41 10 I/O Slots....................................................................................... 43 10.1 Overview................................................................................ 43 10.2 PCI Devices ............................................................................. 44 10.3 Boot Order.............................................................................. 47 10.4 NICs ...................................................................................... 47 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 5 11 Storage ........................................................................................ 48 11.1 Overview................................................................................ 48 11.2 Drives.................................................................................... 48 11.3 RAID Configurations ................................................................... 49 11.4 Optical Disk Drive (ODD) ............................................................. 49 11.5 Tape Drives ............................................................................. 50 12 Video and Audio ............................................................................. 51 12.1 Video .................................................................................... 51 12.2 Audio .................................................................................... 51 13 Rack Information ............................................................................ 52 13.1 Overview................................................................................ 52 13.2 Rails ..................................................................................... 52 13.3 Cable Management Arm (CMA) ...................................................... 52 14 Operating Systems .......................................................................... 53 15 Virtualization................................................................................. 55 16 Systems Management ....................................................................... 56 16.1 Overview................................................................................ 56 16.2 Server Management ................................................................... 56 16.3 Embedded Server Management ..................................................... 57 16.4 Lifecycle Controller and Unified Server Configurator ........................... 57 16.5 iDRAC6 Express ........................................................................ 58 16.6 iDRAC6 Enterprise ..................................................................... 58 17 Peripherals ................................................................................... 61 17.1 USB....................................................................................... 61 17.2 USB Device.............................................................................. 61 17.3 External Storage ....................................................................... 62 18 Packaging Options ........................................................................... 62 Tables Table 1. Comparison of PowerEdge Server Features ......................................8 Table 2. Comparison Overview PERC S100 and S300..................................... 12 Table 3. eSATA Modes ........................................................................ 13 Table 4. Product Feature Summary ........................................................ 14 Table 5. Overall Dimensions and Weight .................................................. 16 Table 6. Specific Measurements ............................................................ 16 Table 7. TPM Pin Signals ..................................................................... 23 Table 8. Power Supply 24 Pins and Signals ................................................ 26 Table 9. Power Supply 4 Pins and Signals ................................................. 26 Table 10. PSU Specifications.................................................................. 28 Table 11. Acoustical Specifications .......................................................... 29 Table 12. Processor Information ............................................................. 31 Table 13. Supported Processor Configurations............................................. 32 Table 14. Wake Up Events and States ....................................................... 40 Table 15. Summary of R210 Power Management Features ............................... 41 Table 16. Power Profiles that R210 BIOS will Expose in BIOS Setup .................... 42 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 6 Table 17. I/O Slot Information ............................................................... 45 Table 18. PCI Card Dimensions ............................................................... 46 Table 19. Bandwidth, Quantities, and Priorities........................................... 46 Table 20. Available Drives..................................................................... 48 Table 21. RAID Configurations ................................................................ 49 Table 22. Supported Tape Drives............................................................. 50 Table 23. PowerEdge R210 Rail Information ............................................... 52 Table 24. Supported Microsoft Operating Systems ........................................ 53 Table 25. Supported Linux Operating Systems ............................................. 54 Table 26. Supported Virtualization OS ...................................................... 55 Table 27. Unified Server Configurator Features and Description ....................... 58 Table 28. Features List for BMC, iDRAC6, and vFlash..................................... 59 Table 29. USB Controller Priorities .......................................................... 61 Table 30. External Storage .................................................................... 62 Table 31. AMF Single Pack Dimensions and Weights ...................................... 63 Table 32. EMF Single Pack Dimensions and Weights ...................................... 63 Table 33. PowerEdge R210 Volatility ........................................................ 66 Table 34. Volatility: Data Writing and Purpose ............................................ 68 Table 35. Methodology for Data Input to Memory ......................................... 69 Table 36. Methodology for Memory Protection and Clearing ............................ 71 Figures Figure 1. Server Dimensions .................................................................. 17 Figure 2. Front Panel View ................................................................... 17 Figure 3. Back Panel View .................................................................... 18 Figure 4. Power Button LED .................................................................. 18 Figure 5. Side View ............................................................................ 19 Figure 6. Internal Chassis View .............................................................. 20 Figure 7. R210 Static Rails .................................................................... 21 Figure 8. R210 Mounted In Four-Post Square-Hole Rack ................................. 21 Figure 9. System Fans ......................................................................... 22 Figure 10. Intrusion Switch.................................................................. 23 Figure 11. Internal USB Ports ............................................................... 24 Figure 12. Battery on Motherboard ........................................................ 25 Figure 13. PCIe x16 Riser Card ............................................................. 43 Figure 14. SAS 6/iR Adapter Card Installed............................................... 44 Figure 15. Rack Adjustability Range....................................................... 52 Figure 16. Packaging ......................................................................... 64 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 7 1 Product Comparison Dell aims to add value to your business by including the features you need without a lot of the unnecessary extras. Our goal is to deliver value through tailored solutions based on industry standards, as well as purposeful, innovative design of our servers. The Dell™ PowerEdge™ R210 was developed with a purposeful design, energy-optimized technology, simplified systems management, and the flexibility that make it a great first rack server for the small business or as a specialized application server or edge server for larger corporations. Dell’s entry 1-socket 1U rack server, the PowerEdge R210, offers value, the performance of Intel® Xeon® 3400 series processors, DDR3 memory, eSATA external storage expandability, and enterprise-class manageability in an ultra-compact chassis. Purposeful Design: The PowerEdge R210 follows the 11th generation PowerEdge portfolio specifications and features the same system design commonality and reliability true to the entire portfolio. All 11th generation PowerEdge servers are built to make the user experience easier. We put all external ports, power supplies, and LED lights in the same location for familiar experience as well as easy installation and deployment. Robust, metal hard drive carriers and organized cabling are designed to help improve component access and airflow across the server. The PowerEdge R210’s design also provides a LED display positioned on the front of the server for ease of monitoring and troubleshooting condition of the server. It was designed to meet the needs of many IT environments with a short 15.5 inch chassis to allow for flexible deployment almost anywhere, including spaceconstrained environments. Energy Efficiency: The PowerEdge R210 incorporates Energy Smart design using a low 250 watt power supply, low-flow fans and logical component layout of the internal components which aids with airflow direction, helping to keep the server cool and reduce noise as much as possible. The result is a server with the smallest power footprint within the 11th generation PowerEdge server portfolio. Simplified System Management: With the optional advanced embedded systems management capabilities of Lifecycle Controller, Dell brings comprehensive enterprise class manageability into the 1-socket space. Lifecycle Controller is delivered as part of the optional iDRAC Express or iDRAC Enterprise in the PowerEdge R210. The Lifecycle Controller helps to simplify administrator tasks by performing a comprehensive set of provisioning functions such as system deployment, system updates, hardware configuration and diagnostics from a single intuitive interface called Unified Server Configurator (USC) in a pre-OS environment. This helps eliminate the need to use and maintain multiple pieces of disparate CD/DVD media. Also part of the Dell OpenManage™ portfolio is the Dell Management Console which is included with every Dell server and provides IT administrators with a consolidated console view of their IT infrastructure. Built with cost-effective RAID options to further protect your valuable data, new eSATA external storage connectivity options, and the latest Intel® Xeon® processor technology, the PowerEdge R210 is an ideal entry 1 socket 1U rack for small businesses and larger offices needing flexibility and manageability in a very small chassis. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 8 Table 1. Comparison of PowerEdge Server Features Feature R210 R200 (Predecessors) R310 (Next level up) Processor Quad-core Intel® Xeon® processor 3400 series Dual-core Intel® Celeron® G1101 Dual-core Intel® Pentium® G6950 Dual-core Intel® Core i3 530 Dual-core Intel® Core i3 540 processors Single Quad-Core Intel® Xeon® 3300 series Single Dual-Core Intel® Xeon® E3100 series Single Quad-Core Intel® Xeon® 3200 series Single Dual-Core Intel® Xeon® 3000 series Single Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo® E4000 series Single Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo® E7000 series Single Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E2000 series Single Intel® Celeron® E1000 and 400 series Quad-core Intel® Xeon® processor 3400 series Dual-core Intel® Celeron® G1101 Dual-core Intel® Pentium® G6950 Dual-core Intel® Core i3 530 Dual-core Intel® Core i3 540 processors Front Side Bus DMI 1333MHz DMI @2.5 Gb/s # Processors 1 1 1 # Cores Dual or Quad Dual or Quad Dual or Quad L2/L3 Cache 4MB or 8MB 512K~6M Intel® Xeon®: 8M DT proc: 4, 3 or 2M Chipset Intel® 3420 chipset Intel® 3210 chipset+ICH9R Intel® 3420 chipset DIMMs 4 DDR3 Unbuffered w/ECC 1333/1066 MHz 4 DDR2 Unbuffered w/ECC 800/ 667MHz 6 DDR3 Unbuffered w/ECC or Registered w/ECC 1333/1066MHz Min/Max RAM 1GB/16GB 512MB/8GB 1GB/32GB HD Bays 2 x 3.5” or 2 x 2.5” 2 x 3.5” 4 x 3.5” Optional Hot-Swap Support 2.5" HDDs via Hot-Swap tray HD Types Default SATA. Optional SAS and SSD via add-in controller Default SATA. Optional SAS via addin controller Default SATA. Optional SAS and SSD via add-in controller Ext Drive Bay(s) 1 for slim ODD 1 for slim ODD 1 for slim ODD Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 9 Feature R210 R200 (Predecessors) R310 (Next level up) Embedded HD Controller Chipset based SATA Chipset based SATA Chipset based SATA Optional Storage Controller NON-RAID: SAS 5/E LSI 2032 (For TBU only) RAID: SAS 6/iR Adapter PERC S100 PERC S300 PERC H200 PERC 6/E PERC H800 NON-RAID: SAS 5/E LSI 2032 (For TBU only) RAID: SAS 6/iR Adapter PERC 6/E NON-RAID: SAS HBA LSI 2032 (For TBU only), PERC H800 RAID: SAS 6/iR Modular PERC H200 (6Gb/s) PERC H700 (6Gb/s) with 512MB PERC H700 (6Gb/s) NV DRAM with 512MB or 1G PERC S100 (software based) PERC S300 Modular (software based) Availability ECC Memory, ADD-in RAID, TPM/CTPM ECC memory, Add-in RAID, toolless chassis Hot-swap HDD; Redundant PSU; Quad-pack LED diagnostic/LCD with Hot-swap HDD chassis ;ECC Memory Server Mgt. BMC, IPMI 2.0 compliant; Full Dell™ OpenManage™ suite Optional; iDRAC6 Express, iDRAC6 Enterprise, vFlash DRAC4 Full Dell™ OpenManage™ suite BMC, IPMI 2.0 compliant; Full Dell™ OpenManage™ suite Optional; iDRAC6 Express, iDRAC6 Enterprise, vFlash I/O Slots 1 x PCIe x16 (True x16, Gen2); full height, half length Support x16 bandwidth card under 25W Riser 1: One PCIex 8, one PCIe x4 (w/ x8 connector) Riser 2: One PCI-X 64/133 and one PCIe x8 Riser 1: PCIe x16 (x8 routing), Full Height/ Half Length, Gen 2 Riser 2: PCIe x8 (x8 routing), Full Height / Half Length, Gen 2 2 PCIe G2 slots: Slot 1: PCIe x16 (x8 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 10 Feature R210 R200 (Predecessors) R310 (Next level up) RAID See Optional Storage Controller row above See Optional Storage Controller row above See Optional Storage Controller row above NIC/LOM 2x GbE LOM w/o TOE Optional: various NIC available 2x GbE LOM Optional: various NIC available 2x GbE LOM Optional: various NIC available USB 2 front/2 rear/2 internal 2 front/2 rear 2 front/2 rear/2 internal Power Supplies Non-redundant, 250W (80+ Bronze) Auto Ranging (100V~240V) Non-redundant, 345W Non-redundant, 350W (80+ Bronze) Optional redundant, 400W (80+ Silver) Auto Ranging (100V~240V) Fans Non-redundant, nonhot swappable Non-redundant, nonhot swappable Non-redundant, nonhot swappable Form Factor 1U rack 1U rack 1U rack Dimensions (HxWxD) 42.6 x 431 x 393.7 (mm) (w/o ear and bezel) 1.67” x 17.1” x 15.5” 42.67 x 447.0 x 546.1 (mm) (w/o ear and bezel) 1.68” x 17.6” x 21.5” 42.4 x 434.0 x 610 (mm) ( w/o bezel) 1.67” x 17.10” x 24.00” Weight Max. 17.76 lbs (8.058 Kg) Max. 28.7 lbs (13.01 Kg) Max. 33.02 lbs (15 Kg) Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 11 2 New Technologies 2.1 Overview A number of new technologies are used in the PowerEdge R210, including: • iDRAC6 (new Dell server remote management controller) • Software RAID PERC S100 and PERC S300 • E-SATA connector 2.2 Detailed Information 2.2.1 System Management The PowerEdge R210 supports iDRAC6 Express and Enterprise for advanced manageability. For more information on iDRAC 6 options, please see Section 16, Systems Management. 2.2.2 Software RAID Dell PowerEdge RAID controller portfolio now offers Enterprise Software RAID in the PERC S100 and PERC S300 options. PERC S100 and S300 are supported in PowerEdge 11th generation value-based servers. Software RAID code uses the CPU of the computer system to execute the RAID tasks including leveraging the CPUs (calculating power as well as sharing memory), internal bus resources, operating system, and all associated applications. Software-based RAID uses drives which are attached to the computer system via a built-in I/O interface or a processor-less host bus adapter (HBA). The RAID function becomes active as soon as the operating system has loaded the RAID driver software. Previous generations of PERC controllers have been based on Hardware RAID technology, the PERC S100 and PERC S300 are based on Software RAID technology. The software based RAID options provide a cost effective entry-level RAID. Both the PERCS100 and S300 versions offer similar RAID level support, including RAID 0, 1, 5, 10. In the case of the PERC S100, it offers a minimal RAID option where the I/O Controller Hub (ICH) chipset of the motherboard enables a SATA RAID option. There is no new hardware involved. The PERC S100 controller solution supports up to 4 cabled SATA Hard Disk Drives (HDD) or Solid State Disk (SSD) drives and is ideal for SMB usage scenarios. For the PERC S300, the hardware component of the controller is based on the Dell SAS HBA (leveraging SAS 6/iR) and allows for both SAS and SATA connectivity. PERC S300 controller solution supports up to 8 cabled or hot plug SAS/SATA Hard Disk Drives (HDDs). Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 12 Table 2. Comparison Overview PERC S100 and S300 Feature/Spec S100 S300 Interface 3Gb SATA (SATA II) 3Gb SAS/SATA (SAS 1.1) I/O Controller Intel® ICH10R Dell 3Gb/s SAS Adapter (2 internal connectors with x4 SAS ports) System Communication Integrated PCIe Lanes Cache Memory N/A N/A Battery-backed cache No No Max Number of Physical Drives 4 8 HDD Support SATA (Cabled) SAS & SATA (Cabled or hot plug) SSD Support SATA (Cabled) Not Supported SED Support Not Supported Not Supported RAID Levels 0, 1, 5, 10 0, 1, 5, 10 Non-RAID Volumes Yes Yes Max Number of Virtual Disks per Controller 8 8 Global Hotspare Support Yes Yes Operating System Support (Windows Server Only) Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 SP2, 32/64-bit, Standard & Enterprise Editions* Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 SP2 32-bit Web Edition Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 SP2, 32/64-bit, Standard & Enterprise Editions Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2, 64-bit, Web, Standard, and Enterprise Editions Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 SP2, 32/64-bit, Standard & Enterprise Editions* Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 SP2 32-bit Web Edition Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 SP2, 32/64-bit, Standard & Enterprise Editions Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2, 64-bit, Web, Standard, and Enterprise Editions Virtualization Support Not Supported Not Supported Storage Management OpenManage™ 6.2 or later OpenManage 6.2™ or later Note: Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 is supported with Service Pack 2. For the most Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 13 up-to-date information, see the Operating System Support Matrix for Dell PowerEdge Systems on Dell.com. 2.2.3 eSATA External Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (eSATA) serves as an external interface for SATA technologies. For customers who want fast (up to 1.5Gbit/s), easyto-use external storage that has advanced features such as S.M.A.R.T. (SelfMonitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology) protection, eSATA may be a good choice. eSATA devices are not bootable when BIOS is set to RAID mode and are not supported as a part of Virtual Disks when in RAID mode for S100. To operate eSATA devices in the Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 4.8 environment, the BIOS mode must be manually switched from default (AHCI mode) to ATA mode. Table 3. eSATA Modes Mode Bootable Hot-Pluggable Restrictions ATA mode Yes No AHCI mode Yes Yes RHEL 4.8 is not supported. RAID mode (S100 enabled) No No Linux and Virtualization OS are not supported Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 14 3 System Overview Table 4. Product Feature Summary Feature Product Description Form Factor Rack Processors Quad-core Intel® Xeon® 3400 series processors Dual-core Intel® Celeron® G1101 Dual-core Intel® Pentium® G6950 Dual-core Intel® Core™ i3 530 Dual-core Intel® Core™ i3 540 processors Processor Sockets 1 Front Side Bus or HyperTransport DMI (Direct Media Interface) Cache 8MB Chipset Intel® 3420 chipset Memory Up to 16GB (4 U-DIMMs): 1GB/2GB/4GB DDR3 1066MHz or 1333MHz I/O Slots 1 PCIe x16 G2 slot RAID Controllers Internal Controllers: SAS 6/iR PERC S100 (software-based) PERC S300 (software-based) PERC H200 External Controllers: PERC 6/E with 256MB or 512MB of battery-backed cache SAS 5/E PERC H800 LSI2032 PCIe SCSI HBA Drive Bays Cabled options available: Up to two 2.5”/ 3.5” SAS, SATA or SSD drives Maximum Internal Storage 4TB Hard Drives 3.5 inch SATA (7.2K rpm): 160GB, 250GB, 500GB, 1TB, 2TB 3.5 inch Near-line SAS (7.2 rpm): 1TB, 2TB 3.5 inch SAS (10K rpm): 600GB 3.5 inch SAS (15K rpm): 146GB, 300GB, 450GB, 600GB 2.5 inch SAS (10K rpm): 146GB, 300GB Network Interface Cards 1 Broadcom® NetXtreme™ 5709 with Dual Port Gigabit Ethernet NIC, Copper, w/TOE PCIe x4 Broadcom® NetXtreme™ 5709 Dual Port Gigabit Ethernet NIC, Copper, TOE/ISCI PCIe x4 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 15 Feature Product Description Intel® PRO/ 1000PT Single Port Adapter, Gigabit Ethernet NIC, PCIe x1 Intel® Gigabit ET Dual Port Adapter, Gigabit Ethernet NIC, PCIe x4 Intel® Gigabit ET Quad Port Adapter, Gigabit Ethernet NIC, PCIe x4 Power Supply Single-cabled power supply (250W) Availability Quad-pack LED diagnostics, ECC Memory, add-in RAID, TPM/CTPM Video Matrox® G200eW w/ 8MB memory Remote Management iDRAC6 optional Systems Management BMC, IPMI 2.0 compliant Dell™ OpenManage™ featuring Dell Management Console Unified Server Configurator Lifecycle Controller enabled via optional: iDRAC6 Express, iDRAC6 Enterprise and vFlash Rack Support Support for Static ReadyRails™ 4-post and 2-post racks Operating Systems Microsoft® Factory Installed OS Options: Microsoft® Windows® Small Business Server 2008, 64-bit Standard and Premium Edition Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 with SP2 32-bit Standard and Enterprise Edition Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 with SP2 64-bit, Standard and Enterprise Editions Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 32-bit, Web, Standard and Enterprise Edition Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 64-bit, Web, Standard and Enterprise Editions Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 SP2 32-bit, Web, Standard and Enterprise Edition Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 SP2 64-bit, Web, Standard and Enterprise Edition Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 64-bit Web, Standard and Enterprise Edition Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Foundation Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Foundation R2 Microsoft® Non- Factory Installed OS Option: Microsoft® Windows® Essential Business Server 2008 64-bit Standard and Premium Edition Factory Installed Linux OS Options: Novell® SUSE® Linux® Enterprise Server 11 Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 5.3 Virtualization OS Option: Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008, with Hyper-V™ Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 16 4 Mechanical 4.1 Chassis Description The PowerEdge R210 is a 1-socket 1U server. The configuration details are as follows: • HDD Type : 2x 3.5” Cabled HDD or 2 x 2.5” cabled HDD • PSU Type: Single Non-Redundant PSU • Diagnostic: LED 4.2 Dimensions and Weight Table 5. Overall Dimensions and Weight Dimensions (HxWxD) (w/o ear and bezel) 1.68” x 17” x 15.5” (42.6 x 431 x 393.7 mm) Max Weight 17.76 lbs (8.058kg) Measurements in Table 6 correspond to the diagram shown in Figure 1 below. Table 6. Specific Measurements Xa Xb Ya Yb Yc Za with bezel Za without bezel Zb* Zc L6 Sys Wgt (Kg) 434.0 482.58 42.4 N/A N/A 31.35 NA 393.7 397.49 5.95 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 17 Figure 1. Server Dimensions * Zb goes to the nominal rear wall external surface where the motherboard I/O connectors reside. 4.3 Front Panel View and Features Figure 2. Front Panel View Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 18 4.4 Back Panel View and Features Figure 3. Back Panel View 4.5 Power Supply Indicators 4.5.1 Power Button LED The Power button controls the system's power, turning the unit on and off. All PowerEdge servers have the Power LED light-pipe integrated in the Power button. The color of the power LED is green. The lighting pattern must be in the form of a standard Power icon. Figure 4. Power Button LED 4.5.2 System Status/ID LED The System Status/ID LED, present on non-modular rack-dense and rackable tower PowerEdge servers, has the following states: • No light—System is in the off state (S5, or mechanical (no AC power) • Blinking Amber—System fault/error condition. • Steady Blue—Normal operating state (S0) • Blinking Blue—System ID engaged This LED remains powered during non-operational (standby, shutdown) modes to enable system identification. 4.6 NIC Indicators See the Hardware Owner’s Manual for information. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 19 4.7 Side View Figure 5. Side View Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 20 4.8 Internal Chassis View Figure 6. Internal Chassis View Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 21 4.9 Rails ReadyRails™ static rails for tool-less mounting in 4-post racks with square or unthreaded round holes or tooled mounting in 4-post threaded and 2-post racks The R210 rails must first be attached to the sides of the system and then inserted into the cabinet members installed in the rack. For additional information regarding rail options for the R210, see Section 13. Figure 7. R210 Static Rails Figure 8. R210 Mounted In Four-Post Square-Hole Rack Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 22 4.10 Fans There are three system fans located in the middle of the system. Figure 9. System Fans 4.11 Control Panel LED See the Hardware Owner’s Manual for information. 4.12 Security 4.12.1 Top Cover Lock Mechanism The PowerEdge R210 uses a coin lock on the top cover. This lock must be unlocked and the cover removed to access the internal components. 4.12.2 Bezel The bezel lock is located on the front of the bezel and provides security for the system by preventing access to optical disk drives and the Power button. 4.12.3 Trusted Platform Module (TPM) The PowerEdge R210 uses a TPM 1.2 compliant encryption chip solution on the system board with BIOS support worldwide, except for China where Trusted Computing Module (TCM) is the standard. TPM is disabled by default. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 23 Table 7. TPM Pin Signals Pin SIGNAL Pin SIGNAL 1 TPM_PRES_N 20 I2C_TPM_SCL 2 LPC_LAD0 19 P3V3 3 GND 18 I2C_TPM_SDA 4 LPC_LAD1 17 LPC_LAD3 5 SEEPROM I2C Address E0 16 GND 6 P3V3_AUX 15 SERIRQ 7 RST_TPM_R_N 14 P3V3 8 LPC_LFRAME_N 13 LPC_LAD2 9 GND 12 GND 10 TPM 33MHz Clock 11 TPM 14MHz Clock 4.12.4 Power Switch Security The LED control panel is designed so the power switch cannot be accidentally turned on or off. In addition, in BIOS there is an optional setting in the CMOS setup to disable the power switch. 4.12.5 Intrusion Alert The intrusion switch snaps into the chassis located under the side cover. The intrusion switch detects and alerts the user that the side cover is open. Figure 10. Intrusion Switch Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 24 4.12.6 Secure Mode BIOS has the ability to enter a secure boot mode via setup. This mode includes the option to lock out the power and NMI switches on the control panel or set up a system password. See the BIOS specification in the Hardware Owner’s Manual for information. 4.13 USB Ports The PowerEdge R210 has two internal USB ports. Figure 11. Internal USB Ports 4.14 Battery A replaceable lithium battery (CR2032) is mounted on the motherboard to provide backup power for the real-time clock and CMOS RAM in the Platform Controller Hub (PCH). Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 25 Figure 12. Battery on Motherboard 4.15 Field Replaceable Units (FRU) The planar contains a 16K x 8 serial EEPROM to store FRU information including Dell part number, part revision level, and serial number. This information is used by the SEL (system event log) and the BMC (baseboard management controller). Parts available for field replacement include: • CMOS battery • Expansion card • Front bezel • HDD • I/O panel • Memory • ODD • Power supply • Processor • Processor shroud • System board • System fan 4.16 User Accessible Jumpers, Sockets, and Connectors See the Hardware Owner’s Manual. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 26 5 Power, Thermal, Acoustic 5.1 Power Supplies The base system includes a single 250W power supply. This unit provides power to the planar and the two internal hard drive bays. Power will be “soft-switched” allowing power cycling using a switch on the front of the system enclosure or through software control (server management functions). The power system is compatible with industry standards, such as ACPI and Server 2000. Standard VRD (Voltage Regulator Down) modules that conform to VRD11.1 specification are used. This reduces the board layout complexity while offering design modularity. As processor speeds increase, a newer VRD can be used to accommodate the power increase with no need to re-spin the board. The VRD is integrated onto the planar and is not field upgradeable. 5.2 Power Supply Connectors on the Planar There are 2 separate power supply connectors on the planar. One connector is an ATX connector (2x12) and the other one is a 2x2 connector to provide an additional two pins for +12V. The connector Pin definition (2 x 12 power connector) is not ATX standard. The 2x12 connector provides 3.3V, 5V, 12V, and 12V standby to the system. (3.3V standby to system is generated from 12V standby). Table 8. Power Supply 24 Pins and Signals Pin SIGNAL Pin SIGNAL 1 P3V3 13 P3V3 2 P3V3 14 P12V1 3 GND 15 GND 4 P5V 16 PS_ON_N 5 GND 17 GND 6 P5V 18 GND 7 GND 19 GND 8 PS_PWROK 20 P12V1 9 P12V_STBY 21 P5V 10 P12V1 22 P5V 11 P12V1 23 P5V 12 P3V3 24 GND Table 9. Power Supply 4 Pins and Signals Pin SIGNAL Pin SIGNAL 1 GND 3 P12V2 2 GND 4 P12V2 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 27 5.3 Environmental Specifications 5.3.1 Temperature Operating: 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F) with a maximum temperature gradation of 10°C per hour (NOTE: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum operating temperature is de-rated 1ºF/550 ft.) Storage: –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F) with a maximum temperature gradation of 20°C per hour 5.3.2 Relative Humidity Operating: 20% to 80% (non-condensing) with a maximum humidity gradation of 10% per hour Storage: 5% to 95% (non-condensing) 5.3.3 Maximum Vibration Operating : 0.26 Grms at 5–350 Hz for 15 min Storage: 1.54 Grms at 10–250 Hz for 15 min 5.3.4 Maximum Shock Operating: One shock pulse in the positive z axis (one pulse on each side of the system) of 31 G for 2.6 ms in the operational orientation Storage: Six consecutively executed shock pulses in the positive and negative x, y, and z axes (one pulse on each side of the system) of 71 G for up to 2 ms Six consecutively executed shock pulses in the positive and negative x, y, and z axes (one pulse on each side of the system) of 32 G faired square wave pulse with velocity change at 270 inches/second (686 centimeters/second) 5.3.5 Altitude Operating: 16 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) (Note: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum operating temperature is de-rated 1ºF/550 ft.) Storage: 16 to 10,600 m (–50 to 35,000 ft) 5.3.6 Airborne Contaminant Level Class: G2 or lower as defined by ISA-S71.04-1985 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 28 5.4 Power Supply Unit (PSU) Specifications Table 10. PSU Specifications Feature Non Redundant PSU Dimensions L-2101 mm x W-106 mm x H-40.0 mm Status Indicators 1 x bi-color Light Emitting Diode Integrated Fans None AC Cord Rating 15 Amps @ 120 VAC, 10 Amps @ 240 VAC Input Voltage 90 – 264 VAC Auto-ranging Yes Line Frequency 47–63 Hertz Maximum Inrush Current Under typical line conditions and over the entire system ambient operating range, the inrush current may reach 25 Amps for 10 ms or less. Hot-Swap Capability No Output Power 250W Maximum Heat Dissipation 1039 BTU per hour maximum Efficiency 20% to 100% Load 82–85% @115 VAC 82–85% @ 230 VAC 1 Does not include the power supply handle or ejection tab 5.5 ENERGY STAR® Compliance See the ENERGY STAR Compliance results on Dell.com. 5.6 Thermal The thermal design of the PowerEdge R210 reflects the following: • Closed loop thermal control algorithm. Closed loop thermal control method uses feedback temperatures to dynamically determine proper fan speeds. • Comprehensive thermal management. The PowerEdge R210 controls system cooling fan speed based on several different responses from critical components’ sensors, such as CPU temperature, DIMM temperature, inlet ambient temperature, and system configurations. The thermal management adjusts proper cooling ability for the system according to what the system really needs. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 29 • Optimized Ventilation. R210 chassis has a custom ventilation design for optimized air flow path. Each component and peripheral is ensured sufficient air to cool. • Power-to-Cool. Dell continues to improve the design and cooling efficiency for server products. The power-to-cool ratio of the PowerEdge R210 is improved over that of its predecessor, PowerEdge R200. 5.7 Acoustics The acoustical design of the PowerEdge R210 reflects the following: • Adherence to Dell’s high sound quality standards. Sound quality is different from sound power level and sound pressure level in that it describes how humans respond to annoyances in sound, like whistles, hums, etc. One of the sound quality metrics in the Dell specification is prominence ratio of a tone, as listed in the table below. • Noise ramp and descent at bootup. Fan speeds, hence noise levels, ramp during the boot process in order to add a layer of protection for component cooling in case the system were not to boot properly. • Noise levels vs. configurations. The noise level of PowerEdge R210 is not dependent upon the hardware configuration of the system. The table below shows the noise levels of the PowerEdge R210 with maximum configuration. Table 11. Acoustical Specifications Configurations @ 23 ± 2 °C Operating Mode LWA-UL (Bels) LpA (dBA) PROMINENT CPU DIMM ODD HDD TONES Intel® Xeon® X3450 2.66 GHz 4 x 4GB 1 X DVD+/- RW 4 x 3.5” SAS (450 GB/ 15000 RPM) Standby 2.8 16 None Idle 6.5 49 None Stressed Processor 6.5 49 None Definitions Standby: AC Power is connected to Power Supply Units but system is not turned on. Idle: Reference ISO7779 (1999) definition 3.1.7; system is running in its OS but no other specific activity. Stressed Processor: An operating mode per ISO7779 (1999) definition 3.1.6. The software MemBW4 is activated to stress the processors. LwA–UL: The upper limit sound power level (LwA) calculated per section 4.4.2 of ISO 9296 (1988) and measured in accordance to ISO 7779 (1999). LpA: A-Weighted sound pressure level. The system is placed in a rack with its bottom at 75 cm from the floor. The acoustic transducer is at front bystander position, ref ISO7779 (1999) Section 8.6.2. Prominent tone: Criteria of D.5 and D.8 of ECMA-74 9th ed. (2005) are followed to determine if discrete tones are prominent. The system is placed in a rack with its Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 30 bottom at 75 cm from the floor. The acoustic transducer is at front bystander position, ref ISO7779 (1999) Section 8.6.2. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 31 6 Processors 6.1 Overview The PowerEdge R210 is a 1S, entry-level server based on the Intel FCLGA1156 to support Intel Xeon 3400 series and Core i3 processors. 6.2 Supported Processors Table 12. Processor Information Model Speed Power Cache Cores Max. Memory Intel® Xeon® X3430 2.4GHz 95W 8M 4C 1333MHz Intel® Xeon® X3440 2.53GHz 95W 8M 4C 1333MHz Intel® Xeon® X3450 2.67GHz 95W 8M 4C 1333MHz Intel® Xeon® X3460 2.8GHz 95W 8M 4C 1333MHz Intel® Xeon® X3470 2.93GHz 95W 8M 4C 1333MHz Intel® Xeon® L3426 1.86GHz 45W 8M 4C 1333MHz Intel® Core™ i3 540 3.06GHz 73W 4M 2C 1333MHz Intel® Core™ i3 530 2.93GHz 73W 4M 2C 1333MHz Intel® Pentium® G6950 2.8GHz 73W 3M 2C 1066MHz Intel® Celeron® G1101 2.26GHz 73W 2M 2C 1066MHz Intel® Xeon® L3406 2.26GHz 30W 4M 2C 1066MHz 6.3 Processor Configurations The PowerEdge R210 is a single socket 1U rack server that operates in single processor mode only. The memory controller is embedded in the processor. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 32 7 Memory 7.1 Overview Features of the PowerEdge R210 memory include: • 2 channels per processor • Support for Unbuffered ECC DDDR3 DIMMs. • Support for DDR3 speeds of 1066/1333 • 4 DIMM sockets (16GB Maximum capacity) • Support for Single Rank and Dual Rank DIMMs 7.2 DIMMs Supported The following DIMMs are supported by the PowerEdge R210: • 1GB, DDR3 UDIMM, 1066 w/ECC • 1GB, DDR3 UDIMM, 1333 w/ECC • 2GB, DDR3 UDIMM, 1066 w/ECC • 2GB, DDR3 UDIMM, 1333 w/ECC • 4GB, DDR3 UDIMM, 1066 w/ECC • 4GB, DDR3 UDIMM, 1333 w/ECC Table 13. Supported Processor Configurations System Capacity System Memory Speed DIMM Speed DIMM_T ECH DIMM Capacity NUM_DI MM Slot NUM_ Rank Data Width 1GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 1 1 1 1 X8 1GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 1 1 1 1 X8 2GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 1 2 1,2 1 X8 2GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 1 2 1,2 1 X8 4GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 1 4 1,2,3,4 1 X8 4GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 2 2 1,2 2 X8 4GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 1 4 1,2,3,4 1 X8 4GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 2 2 1,2 2 X8 8GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 2 4 1,2,3,4 2 X8 8GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 4 2 1,2 2 X8 8GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 2 4 1,2,3,4 2 X8 8GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 4 2 1,2 2 X8 16GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 4 4 1,2,3,4 2 X8 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 33 System Capacity System Memory Speed DIMM Speed DIMM_T ECH DIMM Capacity NUM_DI MM Slot NUM_ Rank Data Width 16GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 4 4 1,2,3,4 2 X8 2GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 2 1 1 2 X8 2GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 2 1 1 2 X8 4GB 1066 1066 UDIMM 4 1 1 2 X8 4GB 1333 1333 UDIMM 4 1 1 2 X8 7.3 Slots/Risers The PowerEdge R210 planar provides four 72-bit (240-pin) sockets for DIMM memory modules. These modules are DDR3-800/1066/1333 Unbuffered DDR SDRAM DIMMs. The modules are configured as 72 bits wide to provide for ECC. The memory controller in the CPU performs the ECC. The system supports a minimum of 1GB upgradeable to 16 of RAM, using the following DIMM sizes: • 1GB, DIMM Module • 2GB, DIMM Module • 4GB, DIMM Module 7.4 Speed The PowerEdge R210 supports 1066/1333MHz DDR3 memory. 7.5 Sparing Not supported. 7.6 Mirroring Not supported. 7.7 RAID Memory RAID is not supported. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 34 8 Chipset 8.1 Overview The PowerEdge R210 planar incorporates the Intel Ibex Peak as PCH chipset. The Ibex Peak is a highly integrated I/O controller. The high-level features supported by the chipset and implemented on the PowerEdge R210 are detailed in the sections that follow. 8.2 Direct Media Interface Direct Media Interface (DMI) is the chip-to-chip connection between the processor and Ibex Peak chipset. This high-speed interface integrates advanced priority-based servicing allowing for concurrent traffic and true isochronous transfer capabilities. Base functionality is completely software-transparent, permitting current and legacy software to operate normally. 8.3 PCI Express Interface The Ibex Peak provides up to 8 PCI Express Root Ports, supporting the PCI Express Base Specification, Revision 2.0. Each Root Port supports 2.5 GB/s bandwidth in each direction (5 GB/s concurrent). PCI Express Root Ports 1-4 can be statically configured as four x1 Ports or ganged together to form one x 4 ports. Ports 5 and 6 can only be used as two x 1 port. 8.4 SATA Interface The Ibex Peak has two integrated SATA host controllers that support independent DMA operation on up to six ports and supports data transfer rates of up to 3.0 GB/s (300MB/s). The SATA controller contains two modes of operation – a legacy mode using I/O space, and an AHCI mode using memory space. Software that uses legacy mode will not have AHCI capabilities. The Ibex Peak supports the Serial ATA Specification, Revision 1.0a. The Ibex Peak also supports several optional sections of the Serial ATA II: Extensions to Serial ATA 1.0 Specification, Revision 1.0 (AHCI support is required for some elements). 8.5 AHCI The Ibex Peak provides hardware support for Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI), a new programming interface for SATA host controllers. Platforms supporting AHCI may take advantage of performance features such as no master/slave designation for SATA devices—each device is treated as a master—and hardware-assisted native command queuing. AHCI also provides usability enhancements such as Hot-Plug. AHCI requires appropriate software support (e.g., an AHCI driver) and for some features, hardware support in the SATA device or additional platform hardware. 8.6 PCI Interface The Ibex Peak PCI interface provides a 33 MHz, Revision 2.3 implementation. The Ibex Peak integrates a PCI arbiter that supports up to four external PCI bus masters in addition to the internal Ibex Peak requests. This allows for combinations of up to four PCI down devices and PCI slots. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 35 8.7 Low Pin Count (LPC) Interface The Ibex Peak implements an LPC Interface as described in the LPC 1.1 Specification. The Low Pin Count (LPC) bridge function of the Ibex Peak resides in PCI Device 31:Function 0. In addition to the LPC bridge interface function, D31:F0 contains other functional units including DMA, interrupt controllers, timers, power management, system management, GPIO, and RTC. 8.8 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) The Ibex Peak implements an SPI Interface as an alternative interface for the BIOS flash device. An SPI flash device can be used as a replacement for the FWH, and is required to support Gigabit Ethernet, Intel® Active Management Technology and integrated Intel Quiet System Technology. The Ibex Peak supports up to two SPI flash devices with speed up to 20 MHz, 33 MHz utilizing two chip select pins. 8.9 Compatibility Module The DMA controller incorporates the logic of two 82C37 DMA controllers, with seven independently programmable channels. Channels 0–3 are hardwired to 8-bit, count-by-byte transfers, and channels 5–7 are hardwired to 16-bit, count-by-word transfers. Any two of the seven DMA channels can be programmed to support fast Type-F transfers. Channel 4 is reserved as a generic bus master request. The Ibex Peak supports LPC DMA, which is similar to ISA DMA, through the Ibex Peak’s DMA controller. LPC DMA is handled through the use of the LDRQ# lines from peripherals and special encoding on LAD[3:0] from the host. Single, Demand, Verify, and Increment modes are supported on the LPC interface. The timer/counter block contains three counters that are equivalent in function to those found in one 82C54 programmable interval timer. These three counters are combined to provide the system timer function, and speaker tone. The 14.31818 MHz oscillator input provides the clock source for these three counters. The Ibex Peak provides an ISA-Compatible Programmable Interrupt Controller (PIC) that incorporates the functionality of two, 82C59 interrupt controllers. The two interrupt controllers are cascaded so that 14 external and two internal interrupts are possible. In addition, the Ibex Peak supports a serial interrupt scheme. All of the registers in these modules can be read and restored. This is required to save and restore system state after power has been removed and restored to the platform. 8.10 Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC) In addition to the standard ISA compatible Programmable Interrupt controller (PIC) described in the previous section, the Ibex Peak incorporates the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC). 8.11 USB Interface The Ibex Peak contains up to two Enhanced Host Controller Interface (EHCI) host controllers that support USB high-speed signaling. High-speed USB 2.0 allows data transfers up to 480 Mb/s which is 40 times faster than full-speed USB. The Ibex Peak also contains up to seven Universal Host Controller Interface (UHCI) controllers that support USB full-speed and low-speed signaling. The Ibex Peak supports up to fourteen USB 2.0 ports. All fourteen ports are high-speed, fullspeed, and low-speed capable. Ibex Peak’s port-routing logic determines whether a USB port is controlled by one of the UHCI or EHCI controllers. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 36 8.12 Real-Time Clock (RTC) The Ibex Peak contains a real-time clock with 256 bytes of battery-backed RAM. The real-time clock performs two key functions: keeping track of the time of day and storing system data, even when the system is powered down. The RTC operates on a 32.768 KHz crystal and a 3 V battery. The RTC also supports two lockable memory ranges. By setting bits in the configuration space, two 8-byte ranges can be locked to read and write accesses. This prevents unauthorized reading of passwords or other system security information. The RTC also supports a date alarm that allows for scheduling a wake up event up to 30 days in advance, rather than just 24 hours in advance. 8.13 GPIO Various general purpose inputs and outputs are provided for custom system design. The number of inputs and outputs varies depending on Ibex Peak configuration. 8.14 Enhanced Power Management The Ibex Peak’s power management functions include enhanced clock control and various lowpower (suspend) states (e.g., Suspend-to-RAM and Suspend-to-Disk). A hardware-based thermal management circuit permits software-independent entrance to low-power states. The Ibex Peak contains full support for the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) Specification, Revision 3.0a. 8.15 System Management Features In addition to Intel AMT, the Ibex Peak integrates several functions designed to manage the system and lower the total cost of ownership (TCO) of the system. These system management functions are designed to report errors, diagnose the system, and recover from system lockups without the aid of an external microcontroller. 8.15.1 TCO Timer The Ibex Peak’s integrated programmable TCO (Total Cost of Ownership) timer is used to detect system locks. The first expiration of the timer generates an SMI# that the system can use to recover from a software lock. The second expiration of the timer causes a system reset to recover from a hardware lock. 8.15.2 Processor Present Indicator The Ibex Peak looks for the processor to fetch the first instruction after reset. If the processor does not fetch the first instruction, the Ibex Peak will reboot the system. 8.15.3 Error Code Correction (ECC) Reporting When detecting an ECC error, the host controller has the ability to send one of several messages to the Ibex Peak. The host controller can instruct the Ibex Peak to generate an SMI#, NMI, SERR#, or TCO interrupt. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 37 8.15.4 Function Disable The Ibex Peak provides the ability to disable the following integrated functions: LAN, USB, LPC, Intel HD Audio, SATA, PCI Express or SMBus. Once disabled, these functions no longer decode I/O, memory, or PCI configuration space. Also, no interrupts or power management events are generated from the disabled functions. Intruder Detect. The Ibex Peak provides an input signal (INTRUDER#) that can be attached to a switch that is activated by the system case being opened. The Ibex Peak can be programmed to generate an SMI# or TCO interrupt due to an active INTRUDER# signal. 8.16 System Management Bus (SMBus 2.0) The Ibex Peak contains an SMBus Host interface that allows the processor to communicate with SMBus slaves. This interface is compatible with most I2C devices. Special I2C commands are implemented. The Ibex Peak’s SMBus host controller provides a mechanism for the processor to initiate communications with SMBus peripherals (slaves). Also, the Ibex Peak supports slave functionality, including the Host Notify protocol. Hence, the host controller supports eight command protocols of the SMBus interface (see System Management Bus (SMBus) Specification, Version 2.0): Quick Command, Send Byte, Receive Byte, Write Byte/Word, Read Byte/Word, Process Call, Block Read/Write, and Host Notify. Ibex Peak’s SMBus also implements hardware-based Packet Error Checking for data robustness and the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to dynamically provide address to all SMBus devices. 8.17 Intel Anti-Theft Technology The Ibex Peak introduces a new hardware-based security technology which encrypts data stored on any SATA compliant HDD in AHCI Mode. This feature gives the end-user the ability to restrict access to HDD data by unknown parties. Intel Anti-Theft Technology can be used alone or can be combined with software encryption applications to add protection against data theft. Intel Anti-Theft Technology functionality requires a correctly configured system, including an appropriate processor, Intel Management Engine firmware, and system BIOS support. 8.18 Intel Virtualization Technology for Directed I/O The Ibex Peak provides hardware support for implementation of Intel Virtualization Technology with Directed I/O (Intel VT-d). Intel VT-d Technology consists of technology components that support the virtualization of platforms based on Intel Architecture Processors. Intel VT-d Technology enables multiple operating systems and applications to run in independent partitions. A partition behaves like a virtual machine (VM) and provides isolation and protection across partitions. Each partition is allocated its own subset of host physical memory. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 38 8.19 JTAG Boundary-Scan Ibex Peak adds the industry standard JTAG interface and enables Boundary-Scan in place of the XOR chains used in previous generations of the Ibex Peak. Boundary-Scan can be used to ensure device connectivity during the board manufacturing process. The JTAG interface allows system manufacturers to improve efficiency by using industry available tools to test the Ibex Peak on an assembled board. Since JTAG is a serial interface, it eliminates the need to create probe points for every pin in an XOR chain. This eases pin breakout and trace routing and simplifies the interface between the system and a bed-of-nails tester. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 39 9 BIOS 9.1 Overview The following features are supported by BIOS: • System BIOS • System Setup • Onboard PCI video BIOS support • SATA enabled for CDROM and HDD • PCI FW3.0 compliant • PCI-to-PCI bridge 1.0 compliant • Plug and Play BIOS 1.0a compliant • MP 1.4 • SMBIOS 2.5 • USB 1.1 with legacy USB support • USB 2.0 support in BIOS during pre-boot • Dell Server Assistant 7.0 support • System Service support • iDRAC supported • Error logging via ESM • ACPI 2.0 support (S0, OS-S4, S5 states) • I2O v1.5 ready • Selectable Boot support based on BIOS Boot Specification v1.01 • CD-ROM Boot 1.0 • Remote BIOS Update support • Remote Configuration Interface (RCI) support • Console redirection via COM1 • PXE support based on Preboot Execution Environment Specification v2.1 • 2-byte ID support • ePPID support in flash • Memory remapping support • DDR3 UDIMM memory support • UEFI shell Support • IDRAC6/IDRAC6 Lite support • VT-d • IOAT Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 40 • AC recovery staggering Power-Up • DIMM mismatch checking • Support for multiple power profiles: • Static Maximum Performance Mode • OS Control (DBS) • Active Power Controller • Custom 9.2 ACPI ACPI compliance: S0, S4, S5 supported NO S1, S2, S3 (STR) support. S4 will be supported by OS support only. Table 14. Wake Up Events and States Wake Up Events States Can Wake From RTC S5, OS-S4 Power Button S5, OS-S4 RI# Not supported PME# S5, OS-S4 KB Not supported MOUSE Not supported USB Not supported WOL S5, OS-S4 9.3 Power Management Modes 9.3.1 Dell Active Power Controller The Dell Active Power Controller (DAPC) is a Dell proprietary implementation that provides improved performance/watt over the OS implementation of Intel’s DBS. DAPC is implemented in system BIOS and uses hardware level counters, etc. to determine hardware utilization. The BIOS uses this information to determine when to change the processor’s operating frequency. The DAPC is OS independent and means that the OS no longer has control. This provides a consistent power management solution regardless of the installed OS. Some OS(s), particularly hypervisors, do not support power management, thus DAPC provides a solution when there otherwise would not be one. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 41 9.3.2 Power Saving BIOS Setting (OS Control) Intel processors support Demand Based Switching (DBS) which enables the processor to dynamically change its operating frequency in response to workload changes. The industry standard implementation of this power management feature is in the Operating System (OS). The OS monitors process/thread level utilization of the processor and uses processor controls to change the processor’s operating frequency. For heavy workloads, the OS will run the processor at higher frequencies for additional performance. Lighter workloads do not need high performance, thus the OS will run the processor at lower frequencies. 9.3.3 Maximum Performance The Maximum Performance Mode disables power management. In this mode, the processor frequency is statically set to the highest supported frequency. The power management features are implemented via two categories: fixed or generic. Fixed features use bits defined in the ACPI specification for specific capabilities. The fixed feature bits give the OS complete control over the power management of a device since the location of the bits is given to the OS in the FACP table. Thus, a driver can directly access bits to control a device’s power management. Generic features have defined enable and status bits, but the functionality is not fully visible to the OS. Dell provides ASL code to handle the details of generic features, allowing the OS to intelligently communicate with system-specific hardware. Table 15. Summary of R210 Power Management Features Feature Type Enable/Status /Ctrl bit location Description ACPI mode switch Fixed PCH The OS uses the SCI_EN bit to switch from legacy mode to ACPI mode. Sleep states Fixed PCH Supported states: S0(Working), S4-OS (‘Hibernation’ in W2K), and S5 (Soft-off). S1 (also called ‘standby’ or ‘suspend’) and S3 are not supported. Power Button Fixed PCH In ACPI mode, OS has control of the power button. In non-ACPI mode, SMI handler owns power button events. Real-Time Clock Fixed PCH The OS is able to configure the system to wake on the RTC alarm. Power Mgmt. Timer Fixed PCH 24-bit power management timer is used. Power Mgmt. Event (PME) Generic PCH Each host bus’s PME# signal is routed to a separate general-purpose event pin in the chipset. When a device signals PME#, the system wakes (if necessary), the OS detects the event, and a Dell defined ASL routine handles the event. Wake-on-LAN is one example of a PME. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 42 USB wake Generic N/A This feature is not supported on this system since the S1 state is not supported. DBS N/A Processor MSRs This feature does P state transition under Windows C State Support N/A Processor and PCH registers This feature allows multiple C state supports for Processor. This feature will work under Windows and ACPI OS that understand C states. Power Profile support N/A Processor/IMC and PCH chipset registers. 11G Servers will be the most energy smart servers that Dell will ship. In addition to P,C and T states, BIOS will expose the Power Profiles to the OS. Each Power profile will have a specific settings and it will fine tune processor, MCH, IOH and South Bridge. For detailed explanation on how this feature works, please look at BIOS Power Management specification located in Design Docs under R310 engineering. Table 16. Power Profiles that R210 BIOS will Expose in BIOS Setup Maximum Performance DBPM Disabled ( BIOS will set P-State to MAX) Memory frequency = Maximum Performance Fan algorithm = Maximum Performance OS Control Enable OS DBPM Control (BIOS will expose all possible P states to OS) Memory frequency = Maximum Performance Fan algorithm = Minimum Power Active Power Controller Enable DellSystem DBPM (BIOS will not make all P states available to OS) Memory frequency = Maximum Performance Fan algorithm = Minimum Power Custom CPU Power and Performance Management: Maximum Performance | Minimum Power | OS DBPM | System DBPM Memory Power and Performance Management: Maximum Performance |1333Mhz |1067Mhz |800Mhz| Minimum Power Fan Algorithm Maximum Performance | Minimum Power Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 43 10 I/O Slots 10.1 Overview The PowerEdge R210 system provides: • Riser support x16 PCIe card (Gen2 link x16) • Support x16 bandwidth card under 25W Figure 13. PCIe x16 Riser Card Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 44 Figure 14. SAS 6/iR Adapter Card Installed 10.2 PCI Devices Xeon 3400 Series CPU PCI devices include: • Intel QuickPath Architecture Generic Non-core Registers • Intel QuickPath Architecture System Address Decoder • Intel QuickPath Interconnect Link 0 • Intel QuickPath Interconnect Physical 0 • Integrated Memory Controller General Registers • Integrated Memory Controller Target Address Decoder • Integrated Memory Controller Test Registers • Integrated Memory Controller Channel 0 Control • Integrated Memory Controller Channel 0 Address • Integrated Memory Controller Channel 0 Rank • Integrated Memory Controller Channel 0 Thermal Control • Integrated Memory Controller Channel 1 Control • Integrated Memory Controller Channel 1 Address • Integrated Memory Controller Channel 1 Rank • Integrated Memory Controller Channel 1 Thermal Control • DMI Root Port • PCI Express Root Port 1 • PCI Express Root Port 3 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 45 • Core Addressing Mapping, Intel VT-d, System Management • Core Semaphore and Scratchpad Registers • Core System Control/Status Registers • Core Miscellaneous Control/Status Registers • Intel QuickPath Interconnect Link • Intel QuickPath Interconnect Routing and Protocol Core i3/Pentium/Celeron CPU PCI devices include: • Host Bridge/DRAM Controller • Host-to-PCI Express Bridge • Internal Graphics Device • Secondary Host–to-PCI Express Bridge PCH and Slots devices include: • Virtualization Engine Controller Interface (VECI) • USB HS EHCI Controller #2 • PCI Express Port 1 • PCI Express Port 2 • PCI Express Port 3 • PCI Express Port 4 • PCI Express Port 5 • PCI Express Port 6 • PCI Express Port 7 • PCI Express Port 8 • USB HS EHCI Controller #1 • DMI-to-PCI Bridge • LPC Controller1 • SATA Controller #1 o Non-AHCI and Non-RAID Mode (Ports 0,1, 2 and 3) o Desktop Non-AHCI and Non-RAID Mode (Ports 0 and 1) o AHCI Mode (Ports 0-5) o AHCI Mode (Ports 0,1,4 and5) o RAID 0/1/5/10 mode • SMBus Controller • SATA Controller #2 o Non-AHCI and Non-RAID Mode (Ports 4 and 5) • Thermal Subsystem • Slot 1 PCI-E x16 [IIO] • BCM5716 (1) • BCM5716 (2) • Matrox® G200eW w/ 8MB memory The onboard devices are SATA, USB (x4), SMBus, IOxAPIC, and the LOM. Table 17. I/O Slot Information PCI Slot # Mechanical Electrical Height Length 1 PCIe x 16 PCIe x 16 Gen 2 Full Half Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 46 Table 18. PCI Card Dimensions Link Width Height Length x1 Standard height, half length card 111.15 mm (4.376 inches) max 167.65 mm (6.600 inches max X1, x4, x8, x16 Standard height, full length cards 111.15 mm (4.376 inches) max 312.00 mm (12.283 inches) max Low profile cards 68.90 mm (2.731 inches) max 167.65 mm (6.600 inches) max Table 19. Bandwidth, Quantities, and Priorities Category Description Bandwidth Max Qty. Slot Priority Internal Storage Controllers Dell™ SAS 6iR Adapter (SASRAID) PCIe x8 1 1 Dell™ PERC S300 (SW RAID) PCIe x8 1 1 Dell™ PERC H200 (HW RAID) PCIe x8 1 1 External Storage Controllers Dell™ SAS 5E Adapter PCIe x8 1 1 Dell™ PERC 6E Adapter 256MB PCIe x8 1 1 Dell™ PERC 6E Adapter 512MB PCIe x8 1 1 6Gbps SAS HBA PCIe x8 1 1 Dell™ PERC H800 PCIe x8 1 1 Optional NICs Dell™ LSI2032 PCIe HBA SCSI Adapter PCIe x4 1 1 Intel® Gigabit ET Dual Port Server Adapter PCIe x4 1 1 Broadcom® NetXtreme™ II 5709 Dual Port Ethernet PCIe Card with TOE PCIe x4 1 1 Broadcom® NetXtreme™ II 5709 Dual Port Ethernet PCIe Card with TOE and iSCSI Offload PCIe x4 1 1 Intel® PRO/1000 PT Server Adapter PCIe x1 1 1 Intel® Gigabit ET Quad-Port Server Adapter PCIe x4 1 1 Broadcom® NetXtreme™ II BCM5709 Quad Port Ethernet PCIe™ Card with TOE and iSCSI Offload PCIe x4 1 1 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 47 10.3 Boot Order The PowerEdge R210 supports only 1 PCIe x8 slot. 10.4 NICs There is Broadcom 5716 chip on the PowerEdge R210 motherboard. The chip is connected to the PCH via a PCI Express x4 gen2 link. Broadcom 5716 does not support TOE (TCP Offload Engine). The chip provides two Gigabit Ethernet ports. There are two RJ-45 connectors with integrated magnetic and LED on the rear of the system. The firmware for the LOM chip resides in a flash part. The PowerEdge R210 supports Wake on LAN (WOL) from either port. For listing of NICs supported on the R210, please see Section 10.1 Table 24 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 48 11 Storage 11.1 Overview The PowerEdge R210 supports up to 2 HDDS: • 2 x 2.5”/ 3.5” cabled SATA or SSD from motherboard SATA connector • 2 x 2.5”/ 3.5” cabled SAS, SSD, or SATA via add-on storage controller Customer must be selected at point of purchase. This is not an upgrade option for APOS. 11.2 Drives Table 20. Available Drives Drive Specifications HDD Bays 2 x 3.5" or 2 x 2.5” Cabled only HDD/SATA 3.5"/7.2K: 160, 250, or 1000GB, 2000GB HDD/Near Line SAS 3.5"/7.2K: 1000GB, 2000GB HDD/SAS 3.5”/15K: 146, 300, or 450GB, 600GB 3.5”/10K: 600GB 2.5”/10K: 146 or 300GB HDD/SSD 2.5”: or 50GB, 100GB Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 49 11.3 RAID Configurations Table 21. RAID Configurations Non-Mixed Drives, all SATA, all SSD, or ALL SAS Config Type Configs # Name Description Min HDD Max HDD No HDD 0 NCZCBL No controller/No hard drive 0 0 SATA – No Raid 1 MSTCBL On-board SATA Controller (Ibex Peak) 1 2 SATA Raid 2 MSTR0CBL Embedded SATA SW RAID – RAID0 2 2 3 MSTR1CBL Embedded SATA SW RAID – RAID1 2 2 SAS/SATA RAID 4 ASSCBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, No RAID (S300) 1 1 5 ASSCBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, No RAID (S300) with 2 HDDs 2 2 6 ASSR0CBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, RAID 0 (S300) 2 2 7 ASSR1CBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, RAID 1 (S300) 2 2 8 ASSCBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, No RAID (SAS 6/iR /H200 ) 1 2 9 ASSR0CBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, RAID 0 (SAS 6/iR /H200) 2 2 10 ASSR1CBL Add-in SAS/SATA RAID card, RAID 1 (SAS 6/iR/H200 ) 2 2 11.4 Optical Disk Drive (ODD) The PowerEdge R210 will support up to 1 slim type internal optical drive and optional external USB DVD-ROM. The PowerEdge R210 can boot from either the internal optical drive or the optional external drive and supports the following: • Configurations with no ODD • Optional internal DVD-ROM (SATA) • Optional internal DVD+RW (SATA) Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 50 11.5 Tape Drives Table 22. Supported Tape Drives PV DAS PowerVault™ MD1000 PowerVault™ MD3000 PowerVault™ MD1120 External TBU PowerVault™ RD1000 PowerVault™ 114X PowerVault™ DAT 72 PowerVault™ LTO-3-060 PowerVault™ 110T LTO-3 PowerVault™ LTO4-120 External TBU/Automation PowerVault™ ML6000 PowerVault™ 124T PowerVault™ TL2000/TL4000 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 51 12 Video and Audio 12.1 Video Matrox® G200eW w/ 8MB memory integrated in Winbond® WPCM450 (BMC controller): • 640x480 (60/72/75/85 Hz; 8/16/32-bit color) • 800x600 (60/72/75/85 Hz; 8/16/32-bit color) • 1024x768 (60/70/75/85 Hz; 8/16/32-bit color) • 1280x1024 (60/75/85 Hz; 8/16-bit color) • 1280x1024 (60 Hz, 32-bit color) 12.2 Audio The PowerEdge R210 does not support audio (sound card or speakers). Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 52 13 Rack Information 13.1 Overview The ReadyRails™ static rail system for the R210 provides tool-free support for racks with square or unthreaded round mounting holes (including Dell’s 42xx and 24xx series racks) with an adjustment range of 60–87 cm. The rails also offer tooled mounting support for 4-post threaded and 2-post (Telco) racks for added versatility. 13.2 Rails The static rails for the R210 support tool-less mounting in 19”-wide, EIA-310-E compliant square hole and unthreaded round hole racks via Dell’s ReadyRails™ mounting interface. The rails also support a “generic” mounting interface for tooled mounting in threaded hole and 2-post (Telco) racks. Screws are not included in the kit since threaded racks are offered with a variety of thread designations. Users must provide their own screws when mounting the rails in threaded or 2-post racks. Table 23. PowerEdge R210 Rail Information Rail Identifier Mounting Interface Rail Type Rack Types Supported 4-Post 2-Post Square Round Thread Flush Center A4 ReadyRails™/Generic Static Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes The adjustment range of the rails is a function of the type of rack in which they are being mounted. The min-max values listed below represent the allowable distance between the front and rear mounting flanges in the rack. Figure 15. Rack Adjustability Range Rail Identifier Mounting Interface Rail Type Rack Adjustability Range (mm) Rail Depth (mm) Square Round Threaded Without CMA With CMA Min Max Min Max Min Max A4 ReadyRails™/Generic Static 608 879 594 872 604 890 622 — 13.3 Cable Management Arm (CMA) The static rails for the R210 support a wide variety of racks and mounting configurations but do not support the ability to extend the system out of the rack for service. Thus, they do not provide support for a cable management arm (CMA). Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 53 14 Operating Systems For the most up-to-date information, see the Operating System Support Matrix for Dell PowerEdge Systems on Dell.com. Table 24. Supported Microsoft Operating Systems Operating Systems x86 or x64 Installation Factory Install Logo/ Certification Windows® Essential Business Server X64 Standard DIB N/A Premium Microsoft® Hyper-V™ Server 2008 X64 Standard Download N/A Windows® Small Business Server 2008 X64 Standard FI N/A Premium Windows Server® 2008 x32-bit x86 Web Standard Test Only WHQL Enterprise x64 (Hyper-V™ role enabled except for foundation) Web Test Only WHQL Standard Foundation Enterprise Windows Server® 2003 R2 32-bit x86 Standard Test Only WHQL Enterprise x64 Standard Test Only WHQL Enterprise Windows Server® 2008 SP2 X86 Web FI WHQL (WLK1.4) Standard Enterprise X64 (Hyper-V™ role enable) Web Standard Enterprise Windows Server® 2008 R2 (Windows 7 includes SP2 bits) X64 (only) (Hyper-V™ role enabled except for foundation) Web FI WHQL (WLK1.4) Standard Foundation Enterprise Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 54 Table 25. Supported Linux Operating Systems Operating Systems x86 or x64 Installation Factory Install Logo/ Certification Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 4.8 x86-64 ES DIB, NFI Yes x86 ES DIB, NFI Yes Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 5.3 x86-64 Enterprise FI Yes x86 Enterprise DIB, NFI Yes Novell® SUSE® Linux® Enterprise S10 SP3 x86-64 ES DIB, NFI Yes Novell® SUSE® Linux® Enterprise S11 X86-64 ES FI Yes Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 55 15 Virtualization Table 26. Supported Virtualization OS Virtualization OS Install Method VMware® ESX 4 update 1 DIB Embedded VMware ESXi 4 update 1 Download version VMWare ESX 3.5.1 Supported; not offered through Dell (No FI nor DIB) VMWare ESXi 3.5.1 Supported; not offered through Dell (No FI or DIB) PlateSpin® PowerConvert® Website download fulfillment; instructions are DIB Vizioncore™ suite: vRanger™ Pro vConverter™ vReplicator vFoglight™ Website download fulfillment; instructions are DIB Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 56 16 Systems Management 16.1 Overview Dell delivers open, flexible, and integrated solutions that help you reduce the complexity of managing disparate IT assets by building comprehensive IT management solutions. Combining Dell PowerEdge Servers with a wide selection of Dell-developed management solutions gives you choice and flexibility, so you can simplify and save in environments of any size. To help you meet your server performance demands, Dell offers Dell OpenManage systems management solutions for: • Deployment of one or many servers from a single management console • Monitoring of server and storage health and maintenance • System update, configuration change, and maintenance Dell offers IT management solutions for organizations of all sizes—priced, sized, and supported right. 16.2 Server Management A Dell Systems Management and Documentation DVD and a Dell Management Console DVD are included with the product. Content includes: • Dell Systems Build and Update Utility: Dell Systems Build and Update Utility assists in OS install and pre-OS hardware configuration and updates. • OpenManage Server Administrator: The OpenManage Server Administrator (OMSA) tool provides a comprehensive, one-to-one systems management solution, designed for system administrators to manage systems locally and remotely on a network. OMSA allows system administrators to focus on managing their entire network by providing comprehensive one-to-one systems management. • Management Console: Our legacy IT Assistant console is also included, as well as tools to allow access to our remote management products. These tools are Remote Access Service for iDRAC and the BMC Management Utility. • Active Directory Snap-in Utility: The Active Directory Snap-in Utility provides an extension snap-in to the Microsoft Active Directory. This allows you to manage Dell specific Active Directory objects. The Dell-specific schema class definitions and their installation are also included on the DVD. • Dell Systems Service Diagnostics Tools: Dell Systems Service and Diagnostics tools deliver the latest Dell optimized drivers, utilities, and operating system-based diagnostics that you can use to update your system. • eDocs: The section includes PDF files for PowerEdge systems, storage peripheral, and OpenManage software. • Dell Management Console DVD: The Dell Management Console is a Webbased systems management software that enables you to discover and inventory devices on your network. It also provides advanced functions, such as health and performance monitoring of networked devices and patch management capabilities for Dell systems. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 57 • Server Update Utility: In addition to the Systems Management Tools and Documentation and Dell Management Console DVDs, customers have the option to obtain Server Update Utility DVD. This DVD has an inventory tool for managing updates to firmware, BIOS, and drivers for either Linux or Windows operating systems. 16.3 Embedded Server Management The PowerEdge R210 implements circuitry for the next generation of embedded server management. It is Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) v2.0 compliant. The optional iDRAC (Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller) is responsible for acting as an interface between the host system and its management software and the periphery devices. These periphery devices consist of the PSUs, the storage backplane, integrated SAS HBA or PERC 6/I, and control panel with display. The optional upgrade to iDRAC6 provides features for managing the server remotely or in data center lights-out environments. Advanced iDRAC features require the installation of the optional iDRAC6 Enterprise card. 16.4 Lifecycle Controller and Unified Server Configurator Embedded management is comprised of four key components: • Dell Lifecycle Controller • Dell Unified Server Configurator • iDRAC6 (Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller) • vFlash (virtual flash media) Lifecycle Controller powers the embedded management features. It is integrated and tamperproof storage for system-management tools and enablement utilities (firmware, drivers, etc.). Dell Unified Server Configurator (USC) is a local 1:1 graphical user interface embedded on Lifecycle Controller that aids in local server provisioning in a pre-OS environment. For servers with iDRAC Express, the Lifecycle Controller offers OS install, platform updates, platform configuration, and diagnostics capabilities. For servers without iDRAC6 Express, this utility has limited functionality and offers OS install and diagnostics capabilities only. To access the Unified Server Configurator, press the key within 10 seconds of the Dell logo’s appearance during the system boot process. Current functionality enabled by the Unified Server Configurator is detailed in the following table. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 58 Table 27. Unified Server Configurator Features and Description Feature Description Faster O/S Installation Drivers and the installation utility are embedded on system Faster System Updates Integration with Dell support automatically directed to latest versions of the Unified Server Configurator, iDRAC, RAID, BIOS, NIC, and Power Supply Update Rollback Ability to recover to previous known good state for all updatable components More Comprehensive Diagnostics Diagnostic utilities are embedded on system Simplified Hardware Configuration Detects RAID controller and allows user to configure virtual disk and choose virtual disk as boot device, eliminating the need to launch a separate utility. Also provides configuration for iDRAC, BIOS, and NIC/LOM. 16.5 iDRAC6 Express The optional iDRAC6 Express is the first tier of iDRAC6 upgrades. In addition to upgrading the system with a Lifecycle Controller, the iDRAC6 Express offers the following key features: • Graphical web interface • Standard-based interfaces • Server Sensor monitoring and fault alerting • Secure operation of remote access functions including authentication, authorization, and encryption • Power control and management with the ability to limit server power consumption and remotely control server power states • Advanced troubleshooting capabilities For more information on iDRAC6 Express features see table below. 16.6 iDRAC6 Enterprise The optional iDRAC6 Enterprise card provides access to advanced iDRAC6 features. The iDRAC6 Enterprise connects directly to the R210 planar and is mounted parallel to the planar with stand-offs. Key features for the iDRAC6 Enterprise include: • Scripting capability with Dell’s Racadm command-line • Remote video, keyboard, and mouse control with Virtual Console • Remote media access with Virtual Media • Dedicated network interface Additionally, the iDRAC6 Enterprise can be upgraded by adding the vFlash Media card. This is a 1 GB Dell branded SD card that enables a persistent 256 or 512 MB virtual Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 59 flash partition. A more detailed feature list for iDRAC6 Enterprise and vFlash is included in the following table. Table 28. Features List for BMC, iDRAC6, and vFlash Feature BMC iDRAC6 Express iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Media Interface and Standards Support IPMI 2.0 Web-based GUI SNMP WSMAN SMASH-CLP Racadm commandline Conductivity Shared/Failover Network Modes IPv4 VLAN Tagging IPv6 Dynamic DNS Dedicated NIC Security and Authentication Role-based Authority Local Users Active Directory SSL Encryption Remote Management and Remediation Remote Firmware Update Server power control Serial-over-LAN (with proxy) Serial-over-LAN (no proxy) Power capping Last crash screen Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 60 Feature BMC iDRAC6 Express iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Media capture Boot capture Serial-over-LAN Virtual media Virtual console Virtual console sharing Virtual flash Monitoring Sensor Monitoring and Alerting Real-time Power Monitoring* Real-time Power Graphing* Historical Power Counters* Logging Features System Event Log RAC Log Trace Log * BMC availability through OpenManage Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 61 17 Peripherals 17.1 USB All PowerEdge systems have a minimum of 2 front-accessible USB 2.0 compliant ports with enough spacing around to accommodate full usage of both connectors simultaneously along with any/all other front panel features (Video connector, buttons, LED’s, etc.) without mechanical interference. These ports are connected to the same controller and not shared with internal or back USB ports For security reasons, all external USB ports must have an enable/disable function. Disabling USB controllers must observe the hierarchy in Table 29 (listed from lowest to highest priority in a 4 controller design). Internal USB ports connected to internal persistent storage devices have an enable/disable function independent of the other ports present in the system. Table 29. USB Controller Priorities USB Controller Function If Disabled 4 (Lowest) Internal USB peripherals No other Controller is disabled 3 Front USB Controller 4 is disabled as well 2 Back USB Controllers 3 & 4 are disabled as well 1 (Highest) Remote Access (RAC) Controllers 2,3, & 4 are disabled as well The above hierarchy dictates that connections that are lower in the hierarchy must be disabled anytime a higher level connection is disabled (e.g., when Back USB is disabled the Front USB ports are also disabled). 17.2 USB Device Optional external USB DVD-ROM. Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 62 17.3 External Storage Table 30. External Storage External Optical Drive (Optional) USB DVD-ROM PowerVault™ DAS MD1000 JBOD MD3000 RBOD MD1120 – 2.5 SAS/SATA JBOD External TBU RD1000 USB PV114T (2U) DAT 72 SCSI LTO3-060 SCSI LTO3FH SCSI LTO4-120 HH and FH SAS External TBU/Automation ML6000 PV124T TL2000 TL4000 Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 63 18 Packaging Options Options for single pack and multipack are available. Multipack will support 4 units in one pack. Table 31. AMF Single Pack Dimensions and Weights INSIDE DIMENSIONS OUTSIDE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT Length: 81.3 cm (32”) Width: 59.4 cm (23.38”) Depth: 23.5 cm (9.25”) Length: 82.9 cm (32.63”) Width: 61 cm (24”) Depth: 26.7 cm (10.5”) System packed out weight: PowerEdge R210: 9.71 kg (21.42 lbs) Cushion: 0.42 kg (.93 lbs) Corrugated Box: 2.75 kg (6.05 lbs) Total Weight: 12.88 kg (28.4 lbs) Table 32. EMF Single Pack Dimensions and Weights INSIDE DIMENSIONS OUTSIDE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT Length: 61.9 cm (24.38”) Width: 59.4 cm (23.38”) Depth: 24.1 cm (9.50”) Length: 63.5 cm (25.00”) Width: 61 cm (24”) Depth: 27.3 cm (10.75”) System packed out weight: PowerEdge R210: 8.56 kg (18.87 lbs) Cushion: 0.36 kg (.80 lbs) Corrugated Box: 2.06 kg (4.55 lbs) Total Weight: 10.98 kg (24.2 lbs) Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 64 Figure 16. Packaging Dell PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide 65 Appendix A. Regulatory Certifications • FCC (U.S. only) Class A • ICES (Canada) Class A • CE Mark (EN 55022 Class A, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3) • VCCI (Japan) Class A • BSMI (Taiwan) Class A • C-Tick (Australia/New Zealand) Class A • NRCS/SABS (South Africa) Class A • CCC (China) Class A • KCC (Korea) Class A • UL 60950-1 • CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1 • EN 60950-1 • IEC 60950-1 • IRAM (Argentina) • NOM (Mexico) • Bellis (Belarus) • Koncar (Croatia) • TUV GS (Germany) • SII (Israel) • CKT (Kazakhstan) • KEBS (Kenya) • INSM (Moldova) • Soncap (Nigeria) • Nemko (Norway) • GOST (Russia) • KVALITET (Serbia, Bosnia, Herzegovina, Montenegro) • UKRTEST (Ukraine) • UZBEKISTAN GOST (Uzbekistan) • KUCAS (Kuwait) • KSA-ICCP (Saudi Arabia) • MPT (Vietnam) Dell 66 PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide Appendix B. R210 Volatility Tables Table 33. PowerEdge R210 Volatility NonVolatile Volatile RAM Reference Design -ator Q t y Size Type Planar System BIOS SPI Flash Y SYS_S PI 1 4MB Flash EEPROM (SPI interface) LOM Configuration Data Y U7 1 512KB FLASH (NOR) iDRAC6 Controller ROM Y U_IBM C1 1 4KB ROM iDRAC6 Controller RAM Y U_IBM C1 1 8KB RAM System CPLD Y U_CPL D1 1 1200 Macro cells Internal Flash EEPROM System CPLD Y U_CPL D1 1 1KB RAM iDRAC6 Express Internal Flash Y U_EM MC 1 1GB NAND FLASH System RAM Y DIMM_ A1, DIMM_ A2, DIMM_ B1, DIMM_ B2 4 up to 4 DIMMs 16GB RAM TPM ID EEPROM (Plug in module only) Y U_SEE PROM 1 256B EEPROM TPM Binding EEPROM (on China planar only) Y U21 1 256B EEPROM Dell 67 PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide NonVolatile Volatile RAM Reference Design -ator Q t y Size Type iDRAC6 SDRAM Y U_IBM C_MEM 1 128MB DDR2 RAM iDRAC6 FRU Y U_IBM C_FRU 1 4KB EEPROM iDRAC6 Boot Block Flash Y IBMC_ SPI 1 16MB FLASH (NOR) Trusted Platform Module Y N U_TPM 1 1 128 bytes EEPROM Chipset CMOS Y U_PCH 1 1 256B Battery-backed RAM Control Panel Internal USB Y USB3 USB4 2 User selectable License key hard set ROM or user choice iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Y J_SD (conne ctor) 1 1GB Secure Digital NAND Flash Dell 68 PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide Table 34. Volatility: Data Writing and Purpose Can user programs or operating system write data to it during normal operation? Purpose? Planar System BIOS SPI Flash No Not used LOM Configuration Data NO iDRAC Internal RAM iDRAC6 Controller ROM No System-Specific Hardware Logic iDRAC6 controller RAM No Not used System CPLD (non-volatile) No for iDRAC Operating System; Yes for Managed System Services Repository iDRAC Operating System plus Managed System Services Repository (i.e., Unified Server Configurator, OS drivers, diagnostics, rollback versions of various programmables) System CPLD (volatile) Yes System OS RAM iDRAC6 Express Internal Flash No Not used System RAM NO iDRAC internal RAM TPM ID EEPROM (Plug in module only) No BIOS binding of plug in module to a particular planar. TPM Binding EEPROM (China only) No BMC OS + VGA frame buffer iDRAC6 SDRAM No motherboard electronic product identifier iDRAC6 FRU No iDRAC boot loader and configuration (i.e. MAC address), Lifecycle log. nd system event log. iDRAC6 Boot Block Flash yes Storage of encryption keys Trusted Platform Module No BIOS binding of plug-in module to a particular planar Dell 69 PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide Can user programs or operating system write data to it during normal operation? Purpose? Chipset CMOS No BIOS settings Control Panel Internal USB Yes as allowed by OS Normal usage is read only software license key, but not limited iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Yes when enabled, installed, and the media does not have the write protect switch applied Storage of logs, user images such as files, drivers, and Operating Systems Table 35. Methodology for Data Input to Memory How is data input to this memory? Planar System BIOS SPI Flash Loading flash memory requires a vendor-provided firmware file and loader program which is executed by booting the system from a floppy or OS-based executable containing the firmware file and the loader. System loaded with arbitrary data in firmware memory will not operate LOM Configuration Data Loading flash memory requires a vendor-provided firmware file and loader program which is executed by booting up the system from a floppy or OS based executable containing the firmware file and the loader. LOMs loaded with arbitrary data in firmware memory will not operate. iDRAC6 Controller RAM iDRAC embedded system System CPLD Loading flash memory requires a vendor-provided firmware file and loader program which is executed by booting up the system from a floppy or OS-based executable (currently only DRMK utility support) containing the firmware file and the loader. System loaded with arbitrary data in CPLD memory will not operate. iDRAC6 Express Internal Flash Not used System RAM iDRAC OS: Loading flash memory requires a vendor-provided firmware file and loader program which is executed by booting the system from a floppy or OS-based executable containing the firmware file and the loader. System loaded without a good iDRAC firmware image yields a non-functional iDRAC. Dell 70 PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide How is data input to this memory? Managed Services Repository: Various partitions are loaded using vendor-provided firmware file and loader program just like iDRAC OS. TPM ID EEPROM (Plugin module only) Factory loaded only TPM Binding EEPROM (on China planar only) BIOS only iDRAC6 SDRAM Embedded iDRAC OS for 108MB and 8MB for VGA frame buffer iDRAC6 FRU Factory and iDRAC embedded OS iDRAC6 Boot Block Flash Loading flash memory requires a vendor-provided firmware file and loader program which is executed by booting up the system from a floppy or OS-based executable or out of band firmware updates across the management network. Bad contents yield the iDRAC inoperable and unrecoverable in the customer environment. The lifecycle log is automatically updated by the iDRAC as various system component firmware, hardware, and software versions change. Trusted Platform Module Using TPM-enabled operating systems; except in China where TCM is used. Chipset CMOS BIOS control only via input such as BIOS F2 menu user configuration settings (such as boot order) Control Panel Internal USB Either read only license key or OS control copies iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Preloaded media before installation, or remote out-of-band upload of user data (i.e., ISO images, files) or local server read/write capability to use like a hard disk. Dell 71 PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide Table 36. Methodology for Memory Protection and Clearing How is this memory write protected? How is the memory cleared? Planar System BIOS SPI Flash Software write protected Not possible with any utilities or applications and system is not functional if corrupted/removed. LOM Configuration Data No explicitly protected but special applications are needed to communicate through the LOMs to reprogram this ROM Not user clearable iDRAC6 Controller ROM protected permanently by hardware Not clearable iDRAC6 controller RAM n/a iDRAC reset System CPLD (non-volatile) Requires special system specific utility Not possible with any utilities or applications and system is not functional if corrupted/removed. System CPLD (volatile) Not accessible Not clearable iDRAC6 Express Internal Flash Writes are proxied through a temporary iDRAC scratchpad RAM and not directly made from an OS or OS application Not user clearable System RAM OS control Reboot or power down system TPM ID EEPROM (Plug in module only) HW read only Not clearable, read only Dell 72 PowerEdge R210 Technical Guide TPM Binding EEPROM (on China planar only) Locked by BIOS from physical access by anyone after boot Not applicable, BIOS control only iDRAC6 SDRAM n/a AC cycle for BMC OS and reset/power off server for VGA frame buffer iDRAC6 FRU writes controlled by iDRAC embedded OS EPPID is not clearable iDRAC6 Boot Block Flash iDRAC embedded OS control of the write protection Not possible with any utilities or applications and iDRAC does not function as expected if corrupted/removed. Lifecycle log is clearable only in a factory environment; System Event Log is user clearable Trusted Platform Module SW write protected F2 Setup option Chipset CMOS N/A, BIOS only control Planar NVRAM_CLR jumper or by removal of AC cord, cover, and coin cell battery, then waiting 30 seconds prior to replacement of battery, cover and AC cord.; F2 system setup option is used to restore defaults Control Panel Internal USB OS control OS control format iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Media write protection switch or OS control iDRAC-based format, local OS format, deleted, or card removed and formatted on a client Dell™ POWEREDGE™ M610 technical guidebook Inside the poweredge M610 Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 1. System overview 5 A. Overview / Description 5 Section 2. Mechanical 6 A. Dimensions and Weight (blade only) 6 B. Front Panel View and Features 6 C. Side Views and Features 8 D. Security 8 E. USB Key 9 F. Battery 9 G. Field Replaceable Units (FRU) 9 Section 3. Power, Thermal, Acoustic 9 A. Environmental Specifications 9 B. Acoustics 10 Section 4. block diagram 10 Section 5. PROCESSORS 11 A. Overview / Description 11 B. Features 12 C. Supported Processors 12 D. Processor Configurations 12 Section 6. Memory 14 A. Overview / Description 14 B. DIMMs Supported 15 C. Speed 16 Section 7. CHIPSET 18 A. Overview / Description 18 Section 8. bios 19 A. Overview / Description 19 B. I C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) 20 Section 9. Embedded NICs / LOMs 20 A. Overview / Description 20 Section 10. MEZZANINE CARD SLOTS 20 A. Overview / Description 20 2 Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook Section 11. STORAGE 21 A. Overview / Description 21 B. Storage Controllers 21 Section 12. video 22 A. Overview / Description 22 Section 13. OPERATING SYSTEMS 23 A. Overview / Description 23 Section 14. Virtualization 25 Section 15. SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT 25 A. Overview / Description 25 B. Server Management 25 C. Embedded Server Management 26 I. Unmanaged Persistent Storage 26 II. Lifecycle Controller / Unified Server Configurator 27 III. iDRAC6 Express / Enterprise 27 Section 16. Peripherals 29 A. USB peripherals 29 Section 17. DOCUMENTATION 29 A. Overview, Description, and List 29 Section 18. Packaging Options 30 Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 4 The Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 The Dell PowerEdge M-Series blade servers help cut operating expenses through energy efficiency, product flexibility, and efficient use of data center space. When combined with Dell’s world-class storage, management, and support offerings, the result is a total enterprise solution that can help you simplify and save on IT expenses. Strong IT Foundation To build the most efficient data center solutions, Dell sought input from IT professionals. You asked for reliability, scalability, energy efficiency, and a lower total cost of ownership. Our next-generation M610 blade servers deliver, becoming the cornerstone of a high-performance data center capable of keeping pace with your changing business demands. Purposeful Design Designed with your needs in mind, these M-Series blades use the Intel® Xeon® 5500 Series Processor. This processor series adapts to your software in real time, processing more tasks simultaneously. Using Intel Turbo Boost Technology, the M-Series blades can increase performance during peak usage periods. When demand decreases, Intel Intelligent Power Technology helps reduce operating costs and energy usage by proactively putting your server into lower power states. To enhance virtualization and database performance, the M610 is designed with 50% more memory capacity than its predecessor. This increased memory capacity saves money by enabling you to use smaller, less-expensive DIMMs to meet your computing needs. Scalability for Growth As your application needs increase, M-Series blades allow you to scale up to 128 cores and 1536GB of memory per 10U chassis, with opportunities for even greater capacities in the future. To keep pace with changing requirements, you can effectively scale I/O application bandwidth with end-to-end 10Gbe or FC8 solutions. Virtualize I/O within your M-Series chassis using Cisco’s Virtual Blade Switch technology, and manage up to nine Cisco Ethernet switches as a single switch. Additionally, use NPIV and Port Aggregator modes on a variety of switches to virtualize Ethernet or Fibre Channel ports for integration into heterogeneous fabrics. By harnessing Dell’s FlexIO modular switches, you can scale your I/O needs cost effectively, adding ports and functionality through switch modules, including 10Gb uplinks and stacking ports instead of needing to buy complete new switches. Simplified Systems Management Gain more control with the next-generation Dell OpenManage™ suite of management tools. These tools provide enhanced operations and standards-based commands designed to integrate with existing systems for effective control. Dell Management Console (DMC) helps simplify operations and creates stability by shrinking infrastructure management to a single console. This delivers a single view and a common data source for your entire infrastructure management. Built on Symantec® Management Platform, it has an easily extensible, modular foundation that can provide basic hardware management all the way up to more advanced functions, such as asset and security management. Dell Management Console reduces or eliminates manual processes, enabling you to save time and money for more strategic technology usage. The Dell Management Console integrates with the Chassis Management Controller allowing a single view of the chassis. The DMC allows the customer to manage the chassis as one entity, further simplifying management. Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 5 Section 1. System Overview A. Overview / Description The PowerEdge M610 is the next generation of Intel single-slot blade with enhanced processors, RAM, and management while still taking advantage of the M1000e chassis architecture. Along with the M1000e, it leads the industry in high speed, redundant IO throughput and power consumption. Feature Details Processor Nehalem EP - 2-Socket Intel® Xeon® 5500 Series Front Side Bus Intel Quickpath Interconnect (QPI) @ maximum of 6 GT/s # Procs 2S # Cores 4 L2/L3 Cache 4MB and 8MB Chipset Intel Tylersberg DIMMs 12 DDR3 – RDIMM or UDIMM Min/Max RAM 1GB - 96GB HD Bays 2 (2.5” only) HD Types SAS/SATA/SSD Int. HD Controller SATA Opt. HD Controller CERC. PERC available end of June 2009 Video Matrox G200 (8MB memory) Server Management OpenManage Dell Management Console CMC on chassis iDRAC Express iDRAC Enterprise, CMC (on M1000e) Mezz Slots 2 x8 (PCI 2.0) RAID 0, 1 NIC/LOM 2 Broadcom 5709 1Gb USB 2 external 1 internal Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 6 Section 2. Mechanical A. Dimensions and Weight (blade only) Height: 38.5cm (15.2in) Width: 5cm (2in) Depth: 48.6cm (19.2in) Weight: 11.1kg (24.5lbs.) - Maximum configuration B. Front Panel View and Features Figure: Front Panel Features PowerEdge M610 1. Blade Handle Release Button 2. Blade Power Indicator 3. Blade Power Button 4. USB Connectors (2) 5. Blade Status / Indentification Indicator 6. Hard Drives (2) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 7 FEATURE icon description Blade Power Indicator Off – Power is not available to the blade, the blade is in standby mode, the blade is not turned on, or the blade is installed incorrectly. For detailed information on installing a blade, see "Installing a Blade." Green increasing from low brightness to full brightness – Blade power on request is pending. Green on – The blade is turned on. Blade Status/ Identification Indicator Off – The blade power is off. Blue – Normal operating state. Blue Blinking – The blade is being remotely identified via the CMC. Amber Blinking – Blade has either detected an internal error, or the installed mezzanine card(s) does not match the I/O modules installed in the M1000e enclosure. Check the CMC for an I/O configuration error message and correct the error. Blade Power Button N/A Turns blade power off and on. • If you turn off the blade using the power button and the blade is running an ACPI-compliant operating system, the blade can perform an orderly shutdown before the power is turned off. • If the blade is not running an ACPI-compliant operating system, power is turned off immediately after the power button is pressed. • Press and hold the button to turn off the blade immediately. The blade power button is enabled by default by the System Setup program. (If the power button option is disabled, you can only use the power button to turn on the blade. The blade can then only be shut down using system management software.) USB Connector Connects external USB 2.0 devices to the blade. Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 8 C. Side Views and Features D. Security Trusted Platform Module (TPM) The TPM is used to generate/store keys, protect/authenticate passwords, and create/store digital certificates. TPM can also be used to enable the BitLocker™ hard drive encryption feature in Windows Server® 2008. TPM is enabled through a BIOS option and uses HMAC-SHA1-160 for binding. There will be different part numbers to accommodate different TPM solutions around the world. Power Off Security Through the CMC the front USB’s and power button can be disabled so as to not allow any control of the system from the front of the blade. Intrusion Alert A switch mounted on the left riser board is used to detect chassis intrusion. When the cover is opened, the switch circuit closes to indicate intrusion to ESM. When enabled, the software can provide notification to the customer that the cover has been opened. Secure Mode BIOS has the ability to enter a secure boot mode via Setup. This mode includes the option to lock out the power and NMI switches on the Control Panel or set up a system password. Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 9 E. USB Key The PowerEdge M610 supports the following USB devices: • DVD (bootable; requires two USB ports) • USB Key (bootable) • Keyboard (only one USB keyboard is supported) • Mouse (only one USB mouse is supported) F. Battery A replaceable coin cell CR2032 3V battery is mounted on the planar to provide backup power for the Real-Time Clock and CMOS RAM on the ICH9 chip. G. Field Replaceable Units (FRU) The planar contains a serial EEPROM to contain FRU information including Dell part number, part revision level, and serial number. The Advanced Management Enablement Adapter (AMEA) also contains a FRU EEPROM. The backplane’s SEP and the power supplies’ microcontroller are also used to store FRU data. Section 3. Environmental Specifications and Acoustics A. Environmental Specifications Environmental Temperature Operating 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F) NOTE: Decrease the maximum temperature by 1°C (18°F) per 300m (985 ft.) above 900m (2955 ft.) Storage -40° to 65°C (-40° to 149°F) Relative Humidity Operating 8% to 85% (noncondensing) with a maximum humidity gradation of 10% per hour Storage 5% to 95% (noncondensing) Maximum Vibration Operating 0.26 Grms at 10-350Hz for 15 mins Storage 1.54 Grms at 10-250Hz for 15 mins Maximum Shock Operating One shock pulse in the positive z axis (one pulse on each side of the system) of 41 G for up to 2 ms Storage Six consecutively executed shock pulses in the positive and negative x, y, and z axes (one pulse on each side of the system) of 71 G for up to 2 ms Altitude Operating -16 to 3048 m (-50 to 10,000 ft.) Storage -16 to 10,600 m (-50 to 35,000 ft.) Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 10 B. Acoustics The acoustical design of the PowerEdge M610 reflects the following: • Adherence to Dell’s high sound quality standards. Sound quality is different from sound power level and sound pressure level in that it describes how humans respond to annoyances in sound, like whistles, hums, etc. One of the sound quality metrics in the Dell specification is prominence ratio of a tone, and this is listed in the table below. • Hardware configurations and types of applications affect system noise levels. Dell’s advanced thermal control provides for optimized cooling with varying hardware configurations and component utilizations. Most typical configurations will perform as listed in the table below. However, some less typical configurations and components can result in higher noise levels. Higher application loads, e.g., CPU utilization, can also result in higher noise levels. Definitions Idle: Reference ISO7779 (1999) definition 3.1.7; system is running in its OS but no other specific activity. LwA-UL: The upper limit sound power level (LwA) calculated per section 4.4.2 of ISO 9296 (1988) and measured in accordance with ISO7779 (1999). Tones: Criteria of D.5 and D.8 of ECMA-74 9th ed. (2005) are followed to determine if discrete tones are prominent. The system is placed in a rack with its bottom at 75 cm from the floor. The acoustic transducer is at front bystander position, ref ISO7779 (1999), Section 8.6.2. PowerEdge M610 typically configured blade in an m1000e chassis Condition in 23±2° C ambient LwA-UL, bels Tones Idle 7.4 No prominent tones Section 4. Block Diagram Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 11 Section 5. Processors A. Overview / Description The Intel® 5500 series 2S processor (Nehalem - Efficient Processor (EP)), is the microprocessor designed specifically for servers and workstation applications. The processor features quad-core processing to maximize performance and performance/watt for data center infrastructures and highly dense deployments. The Nehalem-EP 2S processor also features Intel’s Core™ micro-architecture and Intel 64 architecture for flexibility in 64-bit and 32-bit applications and operating systems. The 5500 series 2S processor (Nehalem EP) utilizes a 1366-contact Flip-Chip Land Grid Array (FC-LGA) package that plugs into a surface mount socket. PowerEdge M610 provides support for up to two 5500 series 2S processors (Nehalem EP). Nehalem-EP 2S Processor Features Cache Size 32KB instruction, 32KB data, 4 or 8MB (shared) Multi-processor Support 1-2 CPUs Package LGA1366 Table: Nehalem-EP Features Figure: PowerEdge M610 Main Components 1. 2 2.5” Hard Drives Hard drive controller underneath 2. Internal USB 3. Chipset 4. 2 Processor Sockets 5. 12 DDR3 DIMM Slots 6. High-speed Mezz Card Slots On-board NICs underneath 7. iDRAC6 Enterprise 8. Persistent Storage (underneath iDRAC6) 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 12 B. Features Key features of the 5500 series 2S processor (Nehalem EP) include: • Four or two cores per processor • Two point-to-point QuickPath Interconnect links at up to 6.4 GT/s • 1366-pin FC-LGA package • 45 nm process technology • No termination required for non-populated CPUs (must populate CPU socket 1 first) • Integrated three-channel DDR3 memory controller at up to 1333MHz • Compatible with existing x86 code base • MMX™ support • Execute Disable Bit Intel Wide Dynamic Execution • Executes up to four instructions per clock cycle • Simultaneous Multi-Threading (Hyper-Threading) capability • Support for CPU Turbo Mode (on certain SKUs) • Increases CPU frequency if operating below thermal, power, and current limits • Streaming SIMD (Single Instruction, Multiple Data) Extensions 2, 3, and 4 • Intel 64 Tecnology for Virtualization • Intel VT-x and VT-d Technology for Virtualization • Demand-based switching for active CPU power management as well as support for ACPI P-States, C-States, and T-States model speed power cache cores X5570 2.93GHz 95W 8M 4 X5560 2.80GHz 95W 8M 4 X5550 2.66GHz 95W 8M 4 E5540 2.53GHz 80W 8M 4 E5530 2.40GHz 80W 8M 4 E5520 2.26GHz 80W 8M 4 L5520 2.26GHz 60W 8M 4 E5506 2.13GHz 80W 4M 4 L5506 2.13GHz 60W 4M 4 E5504 2.00GHz 80W 4M 4 E5502 1.86GHz 80W 4M 2 C. Supported Processors D. Processor Configurations Single CPU Configuration The PowerEdge M610 is designed such that a single processor placed in the CPU1 socket will function normally, however PowerEdge M610 systems require a CPU blank in the CPU2 socket for thermal reasons. The system will be held in reset if a single processor is placed in the CPU2 socket. Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 13 Intel® Turbo Boost Technology Improves application responsiveness Delivers higher processor frequency on demand Cores / Threads 2 (2 socket/HT on) Core 0 IDLE IDLE IDLE Core 0 IDLE IDLE IDLE up to 10% for 2 software threads Benefit up to 6%† for 16 concurrent software threads 16 (2 socket/HT on) BASE Freq TURBO Freq 2.93 GHz 3.33 GHz 2.93 GHz 3.20 GHz Core 0 Core 2 Core 1 Core 3 Core 0 Core 2 Core 1 Core 3 OR Performance Enhancements Intel Xeon® 5500 Series Processor (Nehalem-EP) Intel® Turbo Boost Technology Increases performance by increasing processor frequency and enabling faster speeds when conditions allow Higher performance on demand All cores operate at rated frequency Normal Core 1 Core 1 Core 2 Core 3 All cores operate at higher frequency 4C Turbo Core 0 Core 1 Core 2 Core 3 Fewer cores may operate at even higher frequencies <4C Turbo Core 0 Core 1 Frequency Intel® Hyper-Threading Technology Increases performance for threading applications delivering greater throughput and responsiveness Higher performance for threaded workloads Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 14 model speed power cache cores X5570 2.93GHz 95W 8M 4 X5560 2.80GHz 95W 8M 4 X5550 2.66GHz 95W 8M 4 E5540 2.53GHz 80W 8M 4 E5530 2.40GHz 80W 8M 4 E5520 2.26GHz 80W 8M 4 L5520 2.26GHz 60W 8M 4 E5506 2.13GHz 80W 4M 4 L5506 2.13GHz 60W 4M 4 E5504 2.00GHz 80W 4M 4 E5502 1.86GHz 80W 4M 2 CPU Power Voltage Regulation Modules (EVRD 11.1) Voltage regulation to the 5500 series 2S processor (Nehalem EP) is provided by EVRD (Enterprise Voltage Regulator-Down). EVRDs are embedded on the planar. CPU core voltage is not shared between processors. EVRDs support static phase shedding and power management via the PMBus. Section 6. Memory A. Overview / Description The PowerEdge M610 utilizes DDR3 memory providing a high performance, high-speed memory interface capable of low latency response and high throughput. The PE M610 supports registered ECC DDR3 DIMMs (RDIMM) or unbuffered ECC DDR3 DIMMs (UDIMM). Key features of the PowerEdge M610 memory system include: • Registered (RDIMM) and Unbuffered (UDIMM) ECC DDR3 technology • Each channel carries 64 data and eight ECC bits • Support for up to 96GB of RDIMM memory (with twelve 8GB RDIMMs) • Support for up to 24GB of UDIMM memory (with twelve 2GB UDIMMs) • Support for 1066/1333MHz single and dual-rank DIMMs • Support for 1066MHz quad rank DIMMs Single DIMM configuration only with DIMM in socket A1 • Support ODT (On Die Termination) Clock gating (CKE) to conserve power when DIMMs are not accessed • DIMMs enter a low-power self-refresh mode • I 2C access to SPD EEPROM for access to RDIMM thermal sensors • Single Bit Error Correction • SDDC (Single Device Data Correction – x4 or x8 devices) • Support for closed loop • Thermal Management on RDIMMs and UDIMMs Multi Bit Error Detection Support for Memory Optimized Mode • Support for Advanced ECC mode • Support for Memory Mirroring • Support for Memory Sparing Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 15 B. DIMMs Supported The DDR3 memory interface consists of three channels, with up to two RDIMMs or UDIMMs per channel for single-/dual-rank and up to two RDIMMs per channel for quad rank. The interface uses 2GB, 4GB, or 8GB RDIMMs. 1GB, or 2GB UDIMMs are also supported. The memory mode is dependent on how the memory is populated in the system: Three channels per CPU populated identically: • Typically, the system will be set to run in Memory Optimized (Independent Channel) mode in this configuration. This mode offers the most DIMM population flexibility and system memory capacity, but offers the least number of RAS (reliability, availability, service) features. • All three channels must be populated identically. • Users wanting memory sparing must also populate the DIMMs in this method, but one channel is the spare and is not accessible as system memory until it is brought online to replace a failing channel. • The first two channels per CPU populated identically with the third channel unused • Typically, two channels operate in Advanced ECC (Lockstep) mode with each other by having the cache line split across both channels. This mode provides improved RAS features (SDDC support for x8-based memory). • For Memory Mirroring, two channels operate as mirrors of each other — writes go to both channels and reads alternate between the two channels. • One channel per CPU populated • This is a simple memory optimized mode. No mirroring or sparing is supported. The PowerEdge M610 memory interface supports memory demand and patrol scrubbing, single-bit correction and multi-bit error detection. Correction of a x4 or x8 device failure is also possible with SDDC in the Advanced ECC mode. Additionally, correction of a x4 device failure is possible in the Memory Optimized mode. If DIMMs of different speeds are mixed, all channels will operate at the fastest common frequency. RDIMMs and UDIMMs cannot be mixed. • If memory mirroring is enabled, identical DIMMs must be installed in the same slots across both channels. • The third channel of each processor is unavailable for memory mirroring. • The first DIMM slot in each channel is color-coded with white ejection tabs for ease of installation. Figure: Memory Locations for Poweredge M610 B1 B6 A6 A1 Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 16 Note: For QR mixed with a SR/DR DIMM, the QR needs to be in the white DIMM connector. There is no requirement in the order of SR and DR DIMMs. NOTE: For Quad-Rank DIMMs mixed with single- or dual-rank DIMMs, the QR DIMM needs to be in the slot with the white ejection tabs (the first DIMM slot in each channel). There is no requirement for the order of SR and DR DIMMs Supported Not Supported • The DIMM sockets are placed 450 mils (11.43 mm) apart, center-to-center in order to provide enough space for sufficient airflow to cool stacked DIMMs. • The PowerEdge M610 memory system supports up to 12 DIMMs. DIMMs must be installed in each channel starting with the DIMM farthest from the processor. Population order will be identified by the silkscreen designator and the System Information Label (SIL) located on the chassis cover. • Memory Optimized: {1, 2, 3}, {4, 5, 6}, {7, 8, 9} • Advanced ECC or Mirrored: {2, 3}, {5, 6}, {8, 9} • Quad Rank or UDIMM: {1, 2, 3}, {4, 5, 6}, {7, 8, 9} C. Speed Memory Speed Limitations The memory frequency is determined by a variety of inputs: • Speed of the DIMMs • Speed supported by the CPU • Configuration of the DIMMs The table below shows the memory populations and the maximum frequency achievable for that configuration. dimm type DImm 0 dimm 1 dimm 2 number of dimms 800 1066 1333 RDIMM SR DR 2 DR DR 2 QR SR 2 QR DR 2 QR QR 2 SR SR SR 3 SR SR DR 3 SR DR DR 3 DR DR DR 3 dimm type DImm 0 dimm 1 dimm 2 number of dimms 800 1066 1333 UDIMM SR 1 DR 1 SR SR 2 SR DR 2 DR DR 2 RDIMM SR 1 DR 1 QR 1 SR SR 2 Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 17 NHM-EP Platform Memory Overview • Platform capability (18 DIMMs): – Up to 3 channels per CPU – Up to 3 DIMMS per channel • Memory Types Supported: – DDR 1333, 1066, and 800 – Registered (RDIMM) and unbuffered (UDIMM) – Single-rank (SR), dual-rank (DR), quad-rank (QR) • System memory Speed (i.e. the speed at which the memory is actually running) is set by BIOS depending on: – CPU capability – DIMM type(s) used (memory speed, U/RDIMM, SR/DR/QR) – DIMM populated per channel • All channels in a system will run at the fastest common frequency 1 2 3 NHM-EP NHM-EP Up to 3 channels per CPU Up to 3 DIMMs per Channel 1 2 3 Memory Population Scenarios CPUs • Maximum B/W: – DDR3 1333 across 3 channels – 1 DPC (6 DIMMs) – Max capacity: 48 GB+ CPU 10.6 GB/s 10.6 10.6 CPU E5550 and above • Balanced Performance: – DDR3 1066 across 3 channels – Up to 2 DIMMs per Channel (DPC) (12 DIMMs) – Max capacity: 96 GB+ CPU 8.5 GB/s 8.5 8.5 CPU E5520 and above • Maximum capacity: – DDR3 800 across 3 channels – Up to 3 DPC (18 DIMMs total) – Max capacity: 144 GB+ CPU 6.4 GB/s 6.4 6.4 CPU All NHM-EP SKUs • RAS capabilities: CPU Mirroring Channel 0 & 1 mirror each other Channel 2 unused CPU Lockstep Channel 0 & 1 operate in lockstep Channel 2 unused Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 18 Performance that adapts to your software environment Delivering Intelligent Performance Next Generation Intel® Microarchitecture Threaded Applications 45nm Quad-Core Intel® Xeon® processors Intel® Hyper-Threading Technology Controller Performance On Demand Intel® Turbo Boost Technology Intel® Intelligent Power Technology Bandwidth Intensive Intel® QuickPath Technology Integrated Memory Controller Section 7. Chipset A. Overview / Description The PowerEdge M610 planar incorporated the Intel 5520 chipset (code named Tylersburg) for I/O and processor interfacing. Tylersburg is designed to support Intel's 5500 series processors (code named Nehalem-EP), QPI interconnect, DDR3 memory technology, and PCI Express Generation 2. The Tylersburg chipset consists of the Tylersburg-36D IOH and ICH9. The Intel 5520 chipset (code named Tylersburg) I/O Hub (IOH) The planar uses the The Intel® 5520 chipset (code named Tylersburg) I/O Hub (IOH)-36D IOH to provide a link between the 5500 series 2S processor (Nehalem EP) and I/O components. The main components of the IOH consist of two full-width QuickPath Interconnect links (one to each processor), 36 lanes of PCI Express Gen2, a x4 Direct Media Interface (DMI), and an integrated IOxAPIC. IOH QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) The QuickPath Architecture consists of serial point-to-point interconnects for the processors and the IOH. The PowerEdge T610 has a total of three QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) links: one link connecting the processors and links connecting both processors with the IOH. Each link consists of 20 lanes (full-width) in each direction with a link speed of up to 6.4 GT/s. An additional lane is reserved for a forwarded clock. Data is sent over the QPI links as packets. The QuickPath Architecture implemented in the IOH and CPUs features four layers. The Physical layer consists of the actual connection between components. It supports Polarity Inversion and Lane Reversal for optimizing component placement and routing. The Link layer is responsible for flow control and the reliable transmission of data. The Routing layer is responsible for the routing of QPI data packets. Finally, the Protocol layer is responsible for high-level protocol communications, including the implementation of a MESIF (Modify, Exclusive, Shared, Invalid, Forward) cache coherence protocol. Intel Direct Media Interface (DMI) The DMI (previously called the Enterprise Southbridge Interface) connects the Tylersburg IOH with the Intel I/O Controller Hub (ICH). The DMI is equivalent to a x4 PCIe Gen1 link with a transfer rate of 1 Gb/s in each direction. Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 19 PCI Express Generation 2 PCI Express is a serial point-to-point interconnect for I/O devices. PCIe Gen2 doubles the signaling bit rate of each lane from 2.5 Gb/s to 5 Gb/s. Each of the PCIe Gen2 ports are backwards-compatible with Gen1 transfer rates. In the Tylersburg-36D IOH, there are two x2 PCIe Gen2 ports (1Gb/s) and eight x4 PCIe Gen2 ports (2 Gb/s). The x2 ports can be combined as a x4 link; however, this x4 link cannot be combined with any of the other x4 ports. Two neighboring x4 ports can be combined as a x8 link, and both resulting x8 links can combine to form a x16 link. Intel I/O Controller Hub 9 (ICH9) ICH9 is a highly integrated I/O controller, supporting the following functions: • Six x1 PCIe Gen1 ports, with the capability of combining ports 1-4 as a x4 link • These ports are unused on the PowerEdge M610 • PCI Bus 32-bit Interface Rev 2.3 running at 33MHz • Up to six Serial ATA (SATA) ports with transfer rates up to 300 MB/s • The PowerEdge M610 features two SATA port for optional internal optical drive or tape backup • Six UHCI and two EHCI (High-Speed 2.0) USB host controllers, with up to twelve USB ports • The PowerEdge M610 has eight external USB ports and two internal ports dedicated for UIPS. Refer to the Whoville Hardware/BIOS Specification for the USB assignments for each platform • Power management interface (ACPI 3.0b compliant) • Platform Environmental Control Interface (PECI) • Intel Dynamic Power Mode Manager • I/O interrupt controller • SMBus 2.0 controller • Low Pin Count (LPC) interface to Super I/O, Trusted Platform Module (TPM), and SuperVU • Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) support for up to two devices • The PowerEdge M610’s BIOS is connected to the ICH using SPI Section 8. BIOS A. Overview / Description The PowerEdge M610 BIOS is based on the Dell BIOS core, and supports the following features: • Nehalem-EP 2S Support • Simultaneous Multi-Threading (SMT) support • CPU Turbo Mode support • PCI 2.3 compliant • Plug n’ Play 1.0a compliant • MP (Multiprocessor) 1.4 compliant • Boot from hard drive, external optical drive, iSCSI drive, USB key, and SD card • ACPI support • Direct Media Interface (DMI) support • PXE and WOL support for on-board NICs • Memory mirroring and spare bank support • SETUP access through key at end of POST • USB 2.0 (USB boot code is 1.1 compliant) • F1/F2 error logging in CMOS • Virtual KVM, CD, and floppy support • Unified Server Configurator (UEFI 2.1) support • Power management support including DBS, Power Inventory and multiple Power Profiles Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 20 The PowerEdge M610 BIOS does not support the following: • Embedded Diagnostics (embedded in MASER) • BIOS language localization • BIOS recovery after bad flash (but can be recovered from iDRAC6 Express) B. I 2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) What is I2C? A simple bi-directional 2-wire bus for efficient inter-integrated circuit control. All I2C-bus compatible devices incorporate an on-chip interface which allows them to communicate directly with each other via the I2C-bus. This design concept solves the many interfacing problems encountered when designing digital control circuits. These I2C devices perform communication functions between intelligent control devices (e.g., microcontrollers), general-purpose circuits (e.g., LCD drivers, remote I/O ports, memories) and application-oriented circuits. Section 9. Embedded NICs/LOMs A. Overview/Description Embedded Gigabit Ethernet Controllers with TCP Offload Engine (TOE) support One embedded dual-port Broadcom 5709C LAN controller is on the PowerEdge M610 planar as an independent Gigabit Ethernet interface device. The following information details the features of the LAN devices. • x4 PCI Express Gen2 capable interface • The M610 operates this controller at Gen1 speed • Integrated MAC and PHY 3072x18 byte context memory • 64KB receive buffer • TOE (TCP Offload Engine) • iSCSI controller (enabled through an optional hardware key) • RDMA controller (RNIC) (enabled post-RTS through an optional hardware key) • NC-SI (Network Controller-Sideband Interface) connection for manageability • Wake-On-LAN (WOL) • PXE 2.0 remote boot • iSCSI boot • IPv4 and IPv6 support • Bare metal deployment support • ISCSI offload - Used for offloading iSCI traffic as an iSCSI accelerator/HBA SECTION 10. Mezzanine Card Slots A. Overview/Description The PowerEdge M610 contains 2 PCIe x8 Gen 2 mezzanine card slots. Each card is a dual port. Every M610 blade can support up to 4 I/O ports (2 from each of the 2 mezzanine cards) plus the two integrated NIC/LOM ports. PLEASE NOTE: For space, the size of new mezzanine cards has been reduced and in the M610 only ONE of some older size cards can fit. Fabric C can fit any card. Fabric B can NOT fit: FC4 HBAs, Infiniband HCAs or Broadcom 5708 1Gb NICs. Mezzanine card options include: • Emulex and QLogic dual-port 8Gb FC HBA • Broadcom 5709 dual-port Gb Ethernet w/ TOE and iSCSI offload • Supports IPv6 offloads, improved virtualization performance, enables M610 to support 2 Ethernet mezzanine cards, and lowers power consumption • Mellanox ConnectX dual-port Double Data Rate (DDR – 20Gbps) Infiniband HCA or Quad Data Rate (QDR – 40Gbps) HCA • Broadcom dual-port 10Gb Ethernet w/ TOE and iSCSI offload Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 21 SECTION 11. Storage A. Hard Drive Overview / Description The PowerEdge M610 supports 2 2.5" hard drives. These drives can be either SATA, SAS or SSD. Both RAID 0 and RAID 1 are supported as long as a RAID card is included. Hard Disk Drive Carriers Hard drives must use the new Dell drive carrier for 2.5" drives. Empty Drive Bays For the slots that are not occupied by drives, a carrier blank is provided to maintain proper cooling, maintain a uniform appearance to the unit, and provide EMI shielding. Diskless Configuration Support The system supports diskless configuration with no storage controller installed in the system. Hard Drive LED Indicators Each disk drive carrier has two LED indicators visible from the front of the system. One is a green LED for disk activity and the other is a bi-color (green/amber) LED for status information. The activity LED is driven by the disk drive during normal operation. The bi-color LED is controlled by the SEP device on the backplane. Both LEDs are used to indicate certain conditions under direction of a storage controller. B. Storage Controllers The PowerEdge M610 will support a variety of RAID cards • A SATA controller comes standard and supports both the SATA drives and some SSD. • CERC6 - The M610 supports this card with 128MB of RAID cache. Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 22 Section 12. Video A. Overview / Description The PowerEdge M610 Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller 6 (iDRAC6) incorporates an integrated video subsystem, connected to the 32-bit PCI interface of the ICH9. This logic is based on the Matrox G200 with 8MB of cache. The device only supports 2D graphics. The video device outputs are multiplexed between the front and rear video ports. If a monitor is connected to the front video connector, it will take precedence over the rear connection, thereby removing the display from the rear connection. The PowerEdge M610 system supports the following 2D graphics video modes: Resolution Refresh Rate (Hz) Color Depth (bit) 640 x 480 60, 72, 75, 85 8, 16, 32 800 x 600 56, 60, 72, 75, 85 8, 16, 32 1024 x 768 60, 72, 75, 85 8, 16, 32 1152 x 864 75 8, 16, 32 1280 x 1024 60, 75, 85 8, 16 1280 x 1024 60 32 Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 23 section 13. Operating Systems A. Overview / Description The PowerEdge M610 supports Windows® , Linux® , and Solaris™ Operating Systems. Windows® Support: x86 or x64 INSTALLATION Factory INSTALLATION logo certification schedule Test/ Validate support Windows® Essential Business Server 2008 x64 Standard/ Premium Yes Windows Hardware Quality Labs - Windows 2008 Shipping Yes Yes Windows Server® 2008 (x64 includes Hyper-V™) x64 Standard Yes Windows Hardware Quality Labs - Windows 2008 Enterprise Shipping Yes Yes Datacenter Windows Server® 2008 x86 Standard Yes Windows Hardware Quality Labs - Windows 2008 Shipping Yes Yes Enterprise Windows® Web Server 2008 x86 and x64 Web Yes Windows Hardware Quality Labs - Windows 2008 Shipping Yes Yes Windows Server® 2008, SP2 (x64 includes Hyper-V™) x64 Standard Yes Windows Hardware Quality Labs - Windows 2008 Available in August - October 2009 Enterprise Yes Yes Datacenter Windows Server® 2008, SP2 x86 Standard Yes Windows Hardware Quality Labs - Windows 2008 Available in August - October 2009 Yes Yes Enterprise Windows® Web Server 2008, SP2 x86 and x64 Web Yes Windows Hardware Quality Labs - Windows 2008 Available in August - October 2009 Yes Yes Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 24 Red Hat® Enterprise Linux 4.7 x86 and x64 ES/AS Available in June 2009 n/A Available in June 2009 Yes Yes Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.2 x86 and x64 Standard/AP Yes n/A Shipping Yes Yes Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.3 x86 and x64 Standard/AP Available in June 2009 n/A Available in June 2009 Yes Yes Novell® SUSE® Linux Enterprise Server 10 SP2 x64 Enterprise Yes n/A Shipping Yes Yes Novell SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 11 x64 Enterprise Available in June 2009 n/A Available in June 2009 Yes Yes Solaris™ 10 05/09 x64 Enterprise Drop in the box n/A Available in June 2009 Yes Yes Linux support: Windows Server® 2008, R2, (x64 includes Hyper-V™) x64 Standard Yes Windows Hardware Quality Labs - Windows 2008 Release 2 Available in November 2009 - January 2010 Enterprise Yes Yes Datacenter x86 or x64 INSTALLATION Factory INSTALLATION logo certification schedule Test/ Validate support Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 25 Section 15. Systems Management A. Overview / Description Dell is focused on delivering open, flexible, and integrated solutions the help our customers reduce the complexity of managing disparate IT assets. We build comprehensive IT management solutions. Combining Dell PowerEdge Servers with a wide selection of Dell-developed management solutions, we provide customers choice and flexibility – so you can simplify and save in environments of any size. To help you meet your server performance demands, Dell offers Dell OpenManage™ systems management solutions for: • Deployment of one or many servers from a single console • Monitoring of server and storage health and maintenance • Update of system, operating system, and application software We offer IT management solutions for organizations of all sizes – priced right, sized right, and supported right. B. Server Management A Dell Systems Management and Documentation DVD and a Dell Management Console DVD are included with the product. ISO images are also available. The following sections briefly describe the content. Dell Systems Build and Update Utility: Dell Systems Build and Update Utility assists in OS install and pre-OS hardware configuration and updates. OpenManage Server Administrator: The OpenManage Server Administrator (OMSA) tool provides a comprehensive, one-to-one systems management solution, designed for system administrators to manage systems locally and remotely on a network. OMSA allows system administrators to focus on managing their entire network by providing comprehensive one-to-one systems management. Management Console: Our legacy IT Assistant console is also included, as well as tools to allow access to our remote management products. These tools include: Remote Access Service, for iDRAC, and the BMC Management Utility. Active Directory Snap-in Utility: The Active Directory Snap-in Utility provides an extension snap-in to the Microsoft Active Directory. This allows you to manage Dell specific Active Directory objects. The Dell-specific schema class definitions and their installation are also included on the DVD. Dell Systems Service Diagnostics Tools: Dell Systems Service and Diagnostics tools deliver the latest Dell optimized drivers, utilities, and operating system-based diagnostics that you can use to update your system. eDocs: The section includes Acrobat files for PowerEdge systems, storage peripheral and OpenManage software. Section 14. virtualization Supported embedded hypervisors: • Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Hyper-V™ • VMware® ESXi Version 4.0 and 3.5 update 4 • Citrix® XenServer™ 5.0 with Hotfix 1 or later Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 26 Dell Management Console DVD: The Dell Management Console is a Web-based systems management software that enables you to discover and inventory devices on your network. It also provides advanced functions, such as health and performance monitoring of networked devices and patch management capabilities for Dell systems. Server Update Utility: In addition to the Systems Management Tools and Documentation and Dell Management Console DVDs, customers have the option to obtain Server Update Utility DVD. This DVD has an inventory tool for managing updates to firmware, BIOS and drivers for either Linux or Windows varieties. C. Embedded Server Management The PowerEdge M610 implements circuitry for the next generation of Embedded Server Management. It is Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) v2.0 compliant. The iDRAC6 (Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller) is responsible for acting as an interface between the host system and its management software and the periphery devices. These periphery devices consist of the PSUs, the storage backplane, integrated SAS HBA or PERC 6/i and control panel with semi-intelligent display. The iDRAC6 provides features for managing the server remotely or in data center lights-out environments. Advanced iDRAC features require the installation of the iDRAC6 Enterprise card. I. Unmanaged Persistent Storage The unmanaged persistent storage consists of two ports: • one located on the control panel board • one located on the Internal SD Module (formerly UIPS). The port on the control panel is for an optional USB key and is located inside the chassis. Some of the possible applications of the USB key are: • User custom boot and pre-boot OS for ease of deployment or diskless environments • USB license keys for software applications like eToken™ or Sentinel Hardware Keys • Storage of custom logs or scratch pad for portable user-defined information (not hot-pluggable) The Internal SD Module is dedicated for an SD Flash Card with embedded Hypervisor for virtualization. The SD Flash Card contains a bootable OS image for virtualized platforms. Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 27 II. Lifecycle Controller / Unified Server Configurator Embedded management is comprised of several pieces which are very interdependent. • Lifecycle Controller • Unified Server Configurator • iDRAC6 • vFLASH Lifecycle controller is the hardware component that powers the embedded management features. It is integrated and tamperproof storage for system-management tools and enablement utilities (firmware, drivers, etc.). It is flash partitioned to support multiple, future use cases Dell Unified Server Configurator is a 1:1 user interface exposing utilities from Lifecycle Controller. Customers will use this interface to configure hardware, update server, run diagnostics, or deploy the operating system. This utility resides on Lifecycle Controller. To access the Unified Server Configurator, press key within 10 seconds of the Dell logo display during the system boot process. Current functionality enabled by the Unified Server Configurator includes: feature description Faster O/S Installation Drivers and the installation utility are embedded on system, so no need to scour DELL.COM Faster System Updates Integration with Dell support automatically directed to latest versions of the Unified Server Configurator More Comprehensive Diagnostics Diagnostic utilities are embedded on system Simplified Hardware Configuration Detects RAID controller and allows user to configure virtual disk and choose virtual disk as boot device, eliminating the need to launch a separate utility III. iDRAC6 Express/Enterprise For the M610, all features of both the iDRAC6 Express and Enterprise are included with each server. The iDRAC6 is a managed persistent storage space for server provisioning data and consists of 1GB flash and VFlash. VFlash offers the hot-plug portability and increased storage capacity benefits of SD while still being managed by the system. iDRAC6 is currently partitioned to support the following applications: • Unified Server Configurator Browser and System Services Module (SSM) (25MB): The Unified Server Configurator browser provides a consistent graphical user interface for bare metal deployment and is ideal for 1-to-1 deployment. The SSM supports automatic 1-to-N deployment • Service Diagnostics (15MB): Formerly on the hard drive as the Utility Partition, this is a bootable FAT16 partition for Service Diagnostics • Deployment OS Embedded Linux (100MB): Storage space to hold embedded Linux • Deployment OS WinPE (200MB): Storage space to hold Windows Preinstallation Environment • Driver Store (150MB): Holds all files required for OS deployment • iDRAC6 firmware (120MB): Holds the two most recent versions of iDRAC6 firmware • Firmware Images (160MB): Holds the two most recent versions of BIOS, RAID, embedded NIC, power supplies, and hard drive firmware. This partition also holds the BIOS and option ROM configuration data • Life Cycle Log (2MB): Stores initial factory configuration as well as all detectable hardware and firmware changes to the server since its deployment. The Life Cycle Log is stored on the BMC SPI flash • RJ-45 Management 10/100Mbps Ethernet port Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 28 • VFlash SD card connector - Launches with limited functionality but designed for future expansion • Other iDRAC6 features: • Remote virtual floppy / CD / disk (with super floppy support) • Graphics console redirection (also called remote virtual KVM-Keyboard / Video / Mouse) (For M Series part of the M1000e) • Virtual flash (requires VFlash card) • Rip and replace • RACADM Command Line Interface Approximately 20% of the Flash space is reserved for wear leveling on the NAND Flash. Wear leveling is a method designed to extend the life of the NAND Flash by balancing the use cycles on the Flash’s blocks. For more information on iDRAC6 Express/Enterprise features see the table below. Feature BMC iDRAC6 Enterprise VFlash Media Interface and Standards Support IPMI 2.0 4 4 4 Web-based GUI 4 4 SNMP 4 4 WSMAN 4 4 SMASH-CLP 4 4 Racadm command-line 4 4 Conductivity Shared/Failover Network Modes 4 4 4 IPv4 4 4 4 VLAN tagging 4 4 4 IPv6 4 4 Dynamic DNS 4 4 Dedicated NIC 4 4 Security & Authentication Role-based Authority 4 4 4 Local Users 4 4 4 Active Directory 4 4 SSL Encryption 4 4 Remote Management & Remediation Remote Firmware Update 4 1 4 4 Server power control 4 1 4 4 Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 29 Feature BMC iDRAC6 Enterprise VFlash Media Virtual console sharing 4 4 Virtual flash 4 Monitoring Sensor Monitoring and Alerting 4 1 4 4 Real-time Power Monitoring 4 4 Real-time Power Graphing 4 4 Historical Power Counters 4 4 Logging Features System Event Log 4 4 4 RAC Log 4 4 Trace Log 4 4 Feature BMC iDRAC6 Enterprise VFlash Media Serial-over-LAN (with proxy) 4 4 4 Serial-over-LAN (no proxy) 4 4 Power capping 4 4 Last crash screen capture 4 4 Boot capture 4 4 Serial-over-LAN 4 4 Virtual media 4 4 Virtual console 4 4 Section 16. Peripherals A. USB peripherals The PowerEdge M610 supports the following USB devices with its 2 externally accessible USB ports: • DVD (bootable; requires two USB ports) • USB Key (bootable) • Keyboard (only one USB keyboard is supported) • Mouse (only one USB mouse is supported Section 17. Documentation A. Overview, Description, and List PowerEdge M610 and other 11G systems use the new Enterprise documentation set. The following is a summary of some of the documents slated for the M610 product. For the complete list of documents, including language requirements and delivery scheduling, refer to the Documentation Matrix and the Documentation Milestones in the InfoDev Functional Publications Plan. Dell™ PowerEdge™ M610 Technical Guidebook 30 • Getting Started Guide: This guide provides initial setup steps, a list of key system features, and technical specifications. This document is required for certain worldwide regulatory submittals. This guide is printed and shipped with the system, and is also available in PDF format on the Dell support site. • Hardware Owner’s Manual: This document provides troubleshooting and remove/replace procedures, as well as information on the System Setup program, system messages, codes, and indicators. This document is provided to customers in HTML and PDF format at the Dell support site. • System Information Label: The system information label documents the system board layout and system jumper settings and is located on the system cover. Text is minimized due to space limitations and translation considerations. The label size is standardized across platforms. • Information Update: This is a PDF document that provides information on late changes and issues having significant customer impact which were discovered after document signoff. • General System Information Placemat: This is a paper document that is provided with every system. The document provides general information about the system, including software license agreement information and the location of the service tag. • Rack Placemat: This is a paper document that is provided with the rack kits. The document provides an overview of procedures for setting up the rack. Section 18. Packaging Options The PowerEdge M610 can ship in three ways: 1. Integrated into the M1000e chassis in one large box 2. In a multi-pack box holding up to eight single-slot blades 3. As a single server in one box DELL™ OPTIPLEX580 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK INSIDE THE OPTIPLEX 580 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 2 OVERVIEW Mini Tower Computer (MT) View 4-5 Desktop Computer (DT) View 6-7 Small Form Factor Computer (SFF) View 8-9 MARKETING SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS Operating System, Chipset 10 Processor 11-12 Advanced System Manageability Modes 12 Memory 13 Drives and Removable Storage 14 System Board Connectors 15 Graphics/Video Controller, External Ports/Connectors 16 Communications—Network Adapter (NIC), Modem 17 Audio and Speakers, Keyboard and Mouse 17 Security, Service and Support, Software 18 DETAILED ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS System Dimensions (Physical) 19 System Board Connector Maximum Allowable Dimensions 19-20 System Level Environmental and Operating Conditions 21 Power 21-22 Audio 22 Communications 23-25 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 3 Graphics/Video Controller 25-30 Hard Drives 30-37 Optical Drive 37-40 BIOS Defaults 40-41 Chassis Enclosure and Ventilation Requirements 42-43 Acoustic Noise Emission Information 44-47 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 4 Mini Tower (MT) Computer View Front and Back View 1 CD/DVD drive 2 CD/DVD drive eject button 3 CD/DVD drive panel 4 USB 2.0 connectors (2) 5 drive activity light 6 power button, power light 7 diagnostic lights (4) 8 headphone connector 9 microphone connector 10 network connectivity light 11 padlock ring 12 cover-release latch, security cable slot 13 voltage selector switch 14 power cable connector 15 back panel connectors 16 expansion card slots (4) 17 power supply diagnostic button 18 power supply diagnostic light OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 5 MT Back Panel Connectors 1 serial connector 2 link integrity light 3 network adapter connector 4 network activity light 5 line-out connector 6 line-in/microphone connector 7 USB 2.0 connectors (6) 8 VGA connector 9 eSata connector 10 DisplayPort connector MT System Board 1 Fan connector (FAN_CPU) 2 Speaker connector (INT_SPKR) 3 N/A 4 Processor connector (CPU) 5 Processor power connector (12VPOWER) 6 Memory module connectors (4) 7 SATA connectors (SATA0, SATA1) 8 Front-panel connector (FRONTPANEL) 9 Power connector (POWER) 10 SATA connectors (SATA2) 11 SATA connectors (SATA3) 12 Intrusion switch connector (INTRUDER) 13 N/A 14 Battery socket (BATTERY) 15 PCI Express x16 connector (SLOT1) 16 PCI Express x4 connector (SLOT2) 17 PCI connector (SLOT3, SLOT4) 18 PS/2 or serial connector (SERIAL2) 19 Floppy drive connector (not offered) OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 6 Desktop (DT) Computer View Front and Back View 1 CD/DVD drive 2 CD/DVD drive eject button 3 USB 2.0 connectors (2) 4 drive activity light 5 diagnostic lights (4) 6 power button, power light 7 network connectivity light 8 microphone connector 9 headphone connector 10 power supply diagnostic button 11 power supply diagnostic light 12 voltage selector switch 13 cover-release latch, security cable slot 14 padlock ring 15 power cable connector 16 back panel connectors 17 expansion card slots (3) OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 7 DT Back Panel Connectors 1 serial connector 2 link integrity light 3 network adapter connector 4 network activity light 5 line-out connector 6 line-in/microphone connector 7 USB 2.0 connectors (6) 8 VGA connector 9 eSata connector 10 DisplayPort connector DT System Board 1 Fan connector (FAN_CPU) 2 Speaker connector (INT_SPKR) 3 Processor connector (CPU) 4 Processor power connector (12VPOWER) 5 Memory module connectors (4) 6 SATA connectors (SATA0, SATA1) 7 Front-panel connector (FRONTPANEL) 8 Power connector (POWER) 9 SATA connectors (SATA2) 10 N/A 11 Intrusion switch connector (INTRUDER) 12 Battery socket (BATTERY) 13 PCI Express x16 connector (SLOT1) 14 PCI Express x4 connector (SLOT2) 15 PCI connector (SLOT3) 16 PS/2 or serial connector (SERIAL2) OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 8 Small Form Factor (SFF) Computer View Front and Back View 1 CD/DVD drive 2 CD/DVD drive eject button 3 USB 2.0 connectors (2) 4 drive activity light 5 diagnostic lights (4) 6 power button, power light 7 network connectivity light 8 microphone connector 9 headphone connector 10 power supply diagnostic button 11 power supply diagnostic light 12 voltage selector switch 13 cover-release latch, security cable slot 14 padlock ring 15 power cable connector 16 back panel connectors 17 expansion card slots (3) OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 9 SFF Back Panel Connectors 1 serial connector 2 link integrity light 3 network adapter connector 4 network activity light 5 line-out connector 6 line-in/microphone connector 7 USB 2.0 connectors (6) 8 VGA connector 9 eSata connector 10 DisplayPort connector SFF System Board 1 Fan connector (FAN_CPU) 2 Processor connector (CPU) 3 Processor power connector (12VPOWER) 4 Memory module connectors (4) 5 SATA drive connectors (SATA0, SATA1) 6 Front-panel connector (FRONTPANEL) 7 Power connector (POWER) 8 SATA connectors (SATA2) 9 Fan connector (FAN_HDD) 10 Intrusion switch connector (INTRUDER) 11 N/A 12 Battery socket (BATTERY) 13 PCI Express x16 connector (SLOT1) 14 PCI Express x4 connector (SLOT2) 15 PS/2 or serial connector (SERIAL2) 16 N/A 17 Speaker connector (INT_SPKR) OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 10 Marketing System Configurations NOTE: Offerings may vary by region. For more information regarding the configuration of your computer, click Start Help and Support and select the option to view information about your computer. Operating System NOTE: One of the following Operating Systems will be preinstalled. MT DT SFF Windows 7® operating system Windows 7® Home Basic (32 bit), Windows 7® Home Premium (32 bit), Windows 7® Professional (32 and 64 bit), Windows 7® Ultimate (32 bit) Windows Vista® operating system Windows Vista® SP2 Home Basic (32 bit) Windows Vista® SP2 Business (32 and 64 bit), Windows Vista® SP2 Ultimate (32 bit), Windows Vista® SP2 Business downgrade via Windows 7® Professional Windows Vista® SP2 Ultimate downgrade via Windows 7® Ultimate Windows XP® operating system Windows XP® Professional SP3 (32 bit) downgrade via Windows 7® Professional or Ultimate Windows XP® Professional SP3 (32 bit) downgrade via Windows Vista® Business or Ultimate Other Ubuntu® Linux® (select countries) FreeDOS for (n-series), OS Media Support X X X Chipset MT DT SFF Chipset AMD 785G Non-volatile memory on chipset BIOS Configuration SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) 8Mbit (1MB) located at SPI_1 on chipset TPM 1.2 Security Device (Trusted Platform Module)1 16KB located at TPM on chipset Non-TPM Available in select countries NIC EEPROM LOM configuration contained within SPI_1 1 TPM not available in some regions OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 11 Processor NOTE: Global Standard Products (GSP) are a subset of Dell's relationship products that are managed for availability and synchronized transitions on a worldwide basis. They ensure the same platform is available for purchase globally. This allows customers to reduce the number of configurations managed on a worldwide basis, thereby reducing their costs. They also enable companies to implement global IT standards by locking in specific product configurations worldwide. The following GSP processors identified below will be made available to Dell customers. NOTE: Processor numbers are not a measure of performance. Processor availability subject to change and may vary by region/country MT DT SFF AMD Phenom II Quad Core AMD Phenom II Quad Core B95/ 3.0GHz, 8M X X X AMD Phenom II Quad Core B93/ 2.8GHz, 8M X X X AMD Phenom II Triple Core AMD Phenom II Triple Core B75/ 3.0GHz, 7.5M X X X AMD Phenom II Triple Core B73/ 2.8GHz, 7.5M X X X AMD Phenom II Dual Core AMD Phenom II Dual Core B55/ 3.0GHz, 7M X X X AMD Phenom II Dual Core B53/ 2.8GHz, 7M X X X AMD Athlon Quad Core AMD Athlon II Quad Core 630/ 2.8GHz, 2M X X X AMD Athlon II Quad Core 620/ 2.6GHz, 2M X X X AMD Athlon Triple Core AMD Athlon II Triple Core 435/ 2.9GHz, 1.5M X X X AMD Athlon II Triple Core 425/ 2.7GHz, 1.5M X X X AMD Athlon Dual Core AMD Athlon II Dual Core B24/ 3.0GHz, 2M X X X OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 12 MT DT SFF AMD Athlon II Dual Core B22/ 2.8GHz, 2M X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP AMD Athlon II Dual Core 250/ 3.0GHz, 2M X X X AMD Athlon II Dual Core 245/ 2.9GHz, 2M X X X AMD Athlon II Dual Core 240/ 2.8GHz, 2M X X X AMD Sempron Single Core AMD Sempron Single Core 140/ 2.7GHz, 1M X X X Advanced System Manageability Mode NOTE: Hardware management mode options allow you to select the right systems management feature support for your enterprise. Dell’s innovative approach to scalable remote client management offers you a choice of built-in hardware management capabilities across platform offerings. The latest generation of Broadcom TruManage technology provides the capability to manage your install base of systems regardless of the power state or hardware functionality of the system. This functionality allows IT to address issues remotely rather than having to physically visit systems. The OptiPlex™ 580 supports Broadcom® TruManage™ technology which supports the following features: BIOS Management, asset reporting, remote troubleshooting and repair , power on f o r remote patching/updating. *The functionality described above requires an appropriate software management console MT DT SFF Broadcom TruManage Systems Management Ready X X X OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 13 Memory Your computer supports a maximum of 16 GB of memory when you use four 4-GB DIMMs; however, 32-bit operating systems, such as the 32-bit version of Microsoft® Windows® XP, can only use a maximum of 4 GB of address space. Moreover, certain components within the computer require address space in the 4GB range. Any address space reserved for these components cannot be used by computer memory; therefore, the amount of memory available to the operating system is less than 4GB. NOTE: The entire 16-GB memory range is available to 64-bit operating systems. Memory modules should be installed in pairs of matched memory size, speed, and technology. If the memory modules are not installed in matched pairs, the computer will continue to operate, but with a slight reduction in performance. MT DT SFF Type: DDR3 Synch DRAM Non-ECC Memory DIMM Slots 4 4 4 DIMM Capacities Up to 16GB Up to 16GB Up to 16GB Minimum Memory 1GB 1GB 1GB Maximum Memory with 1066MHz speed memory 16GB1 16GB1 16GB1 Configurations: 1066MHz Memory configurations 16GB1 DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (4 DIMM) X X X 8GB1 DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (4 DIMM) X X X 8GB1 DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X 4GB1 DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (4 DIMM) X X X 4GB1 DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X 4GB1 DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (1 DIMM) X X X 3GB DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (3 DIMM) X X X 2GB DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X 2GB DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (1 DIMM) X X X 1GB DDR3 Non-ECC SDRAM, 1066MHz, (1 DIMM) X X X 1 The total amount of available memory will be less than 4GB. The amount less depends on the actual system configuration. To fully utilize 4GB or more of memory requires a 64-bit enabled processor and 64-bit operating system. OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 14 Drives and Removable Storage MT DT SFF Bays: 3.5-inch bay (External) 1 1 1 (slimline) 5.25-inch bay (External) 2 1 1 (slimline) Hard Drives Supported (Internal and External) 2 x 3.5” Or 2 x 2.5” 1 x 3.5” Or 2 x 2.5” 1 x 3.5” Or 2 x 2.5” Optical Drives Supported (External) 2 1 1 (slimline) Interface: SATA 4 3 3 3.5” Hard Drives: 160GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD X X X 500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 2.5” Hard Drives 128GB1 SATA Solid State HDD X X X 64GB1 SATA Solid State HDD X X X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 3.5” RAID 1 Data Protection: (includes two matching capacity/speed hard drives) 160GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD X 500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X 250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X 160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X 2.5” RAID 1 Data Protection: (includes two matching capacity/speed hard drives) 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 15 MT DT SFF 160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 3.5” RAID 0 Performance: (includes two matching capacity/speed hard drives) 320GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD X 1TB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X 500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X 2.5” RAID 0 Performance: (includes two matching capacity/speed hard drives) 500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X Optical Drive: (SFF requires a slimline optical drive) DVD+/-RW2 SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s DVD-ROM3 SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s DVD+/-RW2 with Blu-Ray-ROM SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. 2 Discs burned with this drive may not be compatible with some existing drives and players; using DVD+R media provides maximum compatibility. 3 DVD-ROM drives may have write-capable hardware that has been disabled via firmware modifications. System Board Connectors NOTE: See Detailed Engineering Specifications for maximum card dimensions support. MT DT SFF PCI Slot(s): number of 2 1 0 PCIe x16 Slot: number of 1 1 1 PCIe x16 (wired as x4) Slot: number of 1 1 1 Flexbay 1 1 1 Serial ATA (SATA) 4 3 3 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 16 Graphics/Video Controller NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. MT DT SFF Integrated ATI Radeon HD 4200 Graphics1 Integrated on system board with specific processors Enhanced Graphic/Video Options 256MB AMD RADEON HD 3450 Graphics, dual DVI or VGA and TV Out Optional full height or low profile card 256MB NVIDIA 9300GE Graphics, dual DVI or VGA and TV Out Optional full height or low profile card 256MB AMD RADEON HD 3470 Graphics, dual DP Optional full height or low profile card 512MB AMD RADEON HD4550 Graphics, dual DP Optional full height or low profile card 512MB NVIDIA NVS420 Graphics, quad DP or DVI NA NA Low Profile 1 Up to 1.7 GB of system memory may be allocated to support integrated graphics, depending on operating system, system memory size and other factors. External Ports/Connectors NOTE: MT supports full height cards, DT supports low profile cards or full height cards with optional riser. SFF supports low profile cards. See chassis diagrams section for port/connector locations MT DT SFF USB 2.0 (includes two internal on MT, DT and SFF) 8 8 8 Serial One rear PS/2 NA eSATA One rear Parallel NA Network Connector (RJ-45) One rear Video: (enabled with specific processors) VGA One rear Display Port One rear Audio: Microphone-in One minijack front Headphone One minijack front Stereo line-in/micropone One minijack rear Speakers line out One minijack rear OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 17 Communications - Network Adapter (NIC) – NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. MT DT SFF Integrated Broadcom 5761 Ethernet LAN 10/100/1000 (Remote Wake Up, PXE support) Integrated on system board Broadcom NetXtreme 10/100/1000 PCIe Gigabit Networking Card (5722) Supports full height Low-profile or full height card with optional riser Supports low profile card 1 This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network infrastructure is required. Communications – Wireless MT DT SFF Broadcom® 1505 PCIe WLAN card -802.11 draft-N WiFi (with Remote Wake Up support) Optional full height or low profile card Audio and Speakers MT DT SFF RealTek ALC269 High Definition Audio Integrated on system board Dell AX210 USB Stereo Speakers Optional Dell AX510/AX510PA Dell Flat Panel Display Soundbar Optional Dell AY410 Sting 2.1 Muitimedia Speaker System Optional Keyboard and Mouse MT DT SFF Dell USB Keyboard Optional Dell USB QuietKey Keyboard Optional Dell USB Multimedia Pro Keyboard Optional Dell USB Entry Mouse Optional Dell Laser Mouse Optional OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 18 Security MT DT SFF Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 1.21 Integrated on system board Chassis Intrusion Switch Standard Chassis lock slot Standard 1 TPM not available in some regions Service and Support NOTE: For more details on Dell Service Plans please to go to www.dell.com/service/service_plans/ MT DT SFF 3 Year Limited Warranty1 (3-3-0) Standard 3 Year Next Business Day On-site2 Service (3-3-3) Optional Dell ProSupport Optional 1 For a copy of our guarantees or limited warranties, please write Dell USA L.P., Attn: Warranties, One Dell Way, Round Rock, TX 78682. For more information, visit www.dell.com/warranty. 2 Service may be provided by third-party. Technician will be dispatched if necessary following phone-based troubleshooting. Subject to parts availability, geographical restrictions and terms of service contract. Service timing dependent upon time of day call placed to Dell. U.S. only. Software MT DT SFF Dell Client Manager Available via Dell.com Dell Control Point Standard Dell Backup & Recovery Manager Optional Norton Internet Security 2010 90 Day Trial or Optional Subscription McAfee 10 Security Center 90 Day Trial or Optional Subscription OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 19 Detailed Engineering Specifications System Dimensions (Physical) NOTE: System Weight* and Shipping Weight* is based on a typical configuration and may vary based on PC configuration. A typical configuration includes: integrated graphics, one hard drive, one optical drive, and one diskette drive. MT DT SFF Chassis Volume liters 32.62 15.08 8.00 Chassis Weight*1 pounds/kilograms 25.3 / 11.6 16.5 / 7.26 13 / 5.90 Chassis Dimensions: (HxWxD) Height inches/centimeters 15.8 / 40.8 4.4 / 11.4 3.5 / 9.26 Width inches/centimeters 7.4 / 18.7 15.4 / 39.9 11.8 / 31.4 Depth inches/centimeters 17.2 / 43.3 13.7 / 35.3 12.9 / 34 Shipping Weight*1 pounds/kilograms includes packaging materials 43.5 / 19.73 28.0 / 12.7 11.25/ 28.6 Packaging Parameters (HxWxD)2 Height inches/centimeters 22.06/ 56.0 20.35/ 51.7 20.75/ 52.7 Width inches/centimeters 20.94/ 53.2 20.04/ 50.9 16.38/ 41.6 Depth inches/centimeters 14.56/ 37.0 11.96/ 30.4 11.25/ 28.6 1 Weights are approximates and may change based on system configuration and included accessories. 2 Dimensions are DAO specific. Each region has unique packing. System Board Connector Maximum Allowable Dimensions MT DT SFF PCI Slot(s) Dimensions: (HxL) 2 1 0 Height inches/centimeters 4.376/11.115 2.731/6.89 Length inches/centimeters 6.6/16.765* 6.6/16.765 PCIe x16 Slot Dimensions: (HxL) 1 1 1 Height inches/centimeters 4.376/11.115 2.731/6.89 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 20 Length inches/centimeters 6.6/16.765* 6.6/16.765 PCIe x16 (wired as x4)Slot Dimensions: (HxL) 1 1 1 Height inches/centimeters 4.376/11.115 2.731/6.89 Length inches/centimeters 6.6/16.765* 6.6/16.765 * Card length can be longer than standard Half-Length Card but cannot be a Full-Length Card. ** 6.9/17.53 in/cm is longer than the standard Half-Length Card System Level Environmental and Operating Conditions MT DT SFF Temperature Operating 10° to 35° C (50° to 95° F) Non-Operating (Storage) -40° to 65° C (-40° to -149° F) Relative Humidity 20% to 80% (non-condensing) Maximum vibration Operating 5 to 350 Hz at 0.0002 G2/Hz Non-Operating 5 to 500 Hz at 0.001 to 0.01 G2/Hz Maximum Shock Operating 40 G +/- 5% with pulse duration of 2 msec +/- 10% (equivalent to 20 in/sec [51 cm/sec]) Non-Operating 105 G +/- 5% with pulse duration of 2 msec +/- 10% (equivalent to 50 in/sec [127 cm/sec]) Maximum Altitude Operating –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) Non-Operating –15.2 to 10,668 m (–50 to 35,000 ft) OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 21 Power MT APFC EPA DT APFC EPA SFF APFC EPA Power Supply Wattage 305W 255W 255W 255W 235W 235W AC input Voltage Range 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac AC input current (low ac range/high AC range) 5.6/2.8 Arms 3.6/1.8 Arms 5.0/2.5 Arms 4.0/2.0 Arms 4.5/2.25 Arms 3.5/1.75 Arms AC input Frequency 47 – 63 Hz 47 – 63 Hz 47 – 63 Hz 47 – 63 Hz 47 – 63 Hz 47 – 63 Hz AC holdup time (80% load) 16 ms 16 ms 16 ms 16 ms 16 ms 16 ms Average Efficiency ( Energy Star Compliant) 85 – 88 – 85% @ 20 – 50 – 100% load 85 – 88 – 85% @ 20 – 50 – 100% load 85 – 88 – 85% @ 20 – 50 – 100% load Minimum Efficiency (Active PFC) 65% 65% 65% DC parameters +3.3v output 8.0 A 8.0 A 5.0 A 5.0 A 5.0 A 5.0 A +5.0v output 16.0 A 15.0 A 15.0 A 15.0 A 16.0 A 16.0 A +12.0v output 15.0 A & 10.0 A 13.0 A & 7.0 A 18.0 A 18.0 A 17.0 A 17.0 A +5.0v auxiliary output 4.0 A 4.0 A 4.0 A 4.0 A 4.0 A 4.0 A -12.0v output 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A Max total power 305 W 255 W 255 W 255 W 235 W 235 W Max combined +3.3v / +5.0v power 80 W 80 W 91.5 W 91.5 W 88 W 88 W Max combined 12.0v power (note: only if more than one 12v rail) 240W 220W N/A N/A N/A N/A BTUs/h (based on PSU max wattage) 1603 BTU 1000 BTU 1341 BTU 1000 BTU 1235 BTU 921 BTU Power Supply Fan 80 x 25mm 80 x 25mm 92 x 25mm 92 x 25mm 80 x 15mm or 80 x 20mm 80 x 15mm or 80 x 20mm Compliance: OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 22 Energy Star Compliant No Yes No Yes No Yes Blue Angel Compliant Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Climate Savers / 80Plus Compliant No Yes No Yes No Yes FEMP Standby Power Compliant Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes TCO Compliant Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 3.3v CMOS battery (type and estimated battery life) 3-V CR2032 lithium coin cell. Est. 5 year life Audio Integrated RealTek ALC269 High Definition Audio MT DT SFF High Definition Stereo support X X X Number of channels 2 Number of Bits / Audio resolution 16, 20, and 24-bit resolution Sampling rate (recording/playback) Variable Any multiple or sub-multiple of 48kHz or 44.1kHz Signal to Noise Ratio 98dB audio outputs, -98dB audio inputs Analog Audio X X X Dolby Digital THX Digital out (S/PDIF) Audio Jack Impedance Microphone 150 kΩ Line-In 150 kΩ Line-Out 190 Ω Headphone .5 Ω Internal Speaker Power Rating 2W OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 23 Communications - Integrated LAN NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. Integrated Broadcom 5761 Ethernet LAN 10/100/1000 MT DT SFF External Connector Type RJ45 Data Rates supported 10/100/1000 Mbps Controller Details Controller bus architecture (example PCIe 1.0a x1) Intel Gigabit LAN Connect Interface (GLCI) and LAN Connect Interface (LCI) Integrated memory N/A Data transfer mode (example Bus-Master DMA) N/A Power consumption (full operation per data rate connection speed) 781mW (Max.) Power consumption (standby operation) with WOL enabled 200mW (Max, 100Mb) 66mW (Max, 10Mb) Power consumption (standby operation) with WOL disabled in BIOS 0mW (Max) Power consumption (standby operation) with WOL disabled with driver 47mW (Max) IEEE standards compliance (example 802.1P) 802.3 Hardware Certifications (example FCC, B, GS mark…) N/A Boot ROM Support EEPROM (located in SPI) Network Transfer Mode (example Full Duplex, Half Duplex) Network Transfer Rate (example 10BASE-T (half-duplex) 10 Mbps 10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps 100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps 100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 Mbps 1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps 10 Mb (full/half-duplex) 100 Mb (full/half-duplex) 1000 Mb (full-duplex) Environmental Operating temperature 0° C to 85° C (32° F to 185° F) Operating humidity 20% to 80% (non-condensing) Operating System Driver Support Windows XP 32-Bit, Windows Vista 32-bit, Windows Vista 64-bit, Win7 32-bit, Win7 64Bit. Manageability (examples WOL, PXE..) WOL, PXE 2.1 Management Capabilities Alerting (examples ASF 2.0 AMT…) DASH 1.1/ ASF 2.0 1 This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network infrastructure is required. OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 24 Communications – Networking Card NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. Broadcom 5722 NetXtreme 10/100/1000 PCIe Gigabit1 Networking Card MT DT SFF Connector Type RJ45 Data Rates supported 10/100/1000 Mbps Half/Full duplex Controller Details Controller bus architecture (example PCIe 1.0a x1) PCIe 1.0a x1 Integrated memory 40KB Data transfer mode (example Bus-Master DMA) Bus-Master DMA Power consumption (full operation per data rate connection speed) 1.41W (427mA @ +3.3V) Power consumption (standby operation) Less than 300mW IEEE standards compliance (example 802.1P) 802.3z, 802.3x, Dynamic 802.3ad, 802.3 p, 802.1Q Hardware Certifications (example FCC, B, GS mark…) FCC B, VCCI B, CE Boot ROM Support No Network Transfer Mode (example Full Duplex, Half Duplex) Full Duplex/Half Duplex Network Transfer Rate (example 10BASE-T (half-duplex) 10 Mbps 10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps 100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps 100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 Mbps 1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps 10BASE-T (full-duplex - 20Mbps, half-duplex – 10Mbps)* 100BASE-T (full-duplex – 200Mbps, half-duplex - 100Mbps)* 1000BASE-T (full-duplex - 2000Mbps, half-duplex – 1000Mbps)* * Depends on the system environment. Environmental Operating temperature 0° C to 55° C (32° F to 131° F) Operating humidity 5% ~ 85% (non-condensing) Operating System Driver Support Windows XP 32-bit, Windows Vista 32-bit, Windows Vista 64-bit, Win7 32-bit, Win7 64Bit. Manageability (examples WOL, PXE..) WOL, PXE2.1, ACPI, CIM, SNMP Management Capabilities Alerting (examples ASF 2.0 AMT…) None 1 This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network infrastructure is required. OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 25 Communications – Wireless NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. Broadcom® 1505 PCIe WLAN card (802.11 N) MT DT SFF External Connector Type ? Controller Details Controller bus architecture PCIe 1.1 x1 WLAN standards supported 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n 802.11b Data Rates supported 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps 802.11a Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 802.11g Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 802.11n Data Rates supported 300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps Security 802.1x, WEP, WPA/WPA2, TKIP, CCX v1, CCX v2, CCX v3, CCX v4, and CCX v5 128-bit OCB mode AES, 802.11i Operating temperature 0 - 70°C Operating humidity 85% maximum non-condensing Operating System Driver Support Windows XP 32-bit, Windows Vista 32-bit, Windows Vista 64-bit, Win7 32-bit, Win7 64Bit. Graphics/Video Controller NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. Integrated ATI Radeon HD 4200 Graphics MT DT SFF Bus Type Integrated GPU core clock 350 MHz Integrated 24 bit RAMDAC Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed XP: Up to 1GB shared system memory with 2GB system memory Vista and Win7: Up to 1.4GB shared system memory with 4GB or more system memory Overlay Planes Yes OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 26 Maximum Color Depth 32 bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85 Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support OpenGL 2.0/DirectX 10.1 Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Up to 2560x11600 @ 60Hz (DP) Up to 1920x1200 @ 60Hz (DVI & VGA) Up to 1600x1200 @ 85Hz (VGA only) External connectors VGA, DisplayPort Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 0° C to 70° C (32° F to 158° F) Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% (non-condensing) Display Port Bus Type AUX 1, 2, 4 lanes Maximum supported resolution Up to 2560x1600 @ 60Hz Maximum power consumption N/A External connectors Display Port Dongle Supported Display Port to DVI Display Port to VGA 1 Up to 1.7 GB of system memory may be allocated to support integrated graphics, depending on operating system, system memory size and other factors. 2 The Display Port controller does not support multi-monitor display in DOS, but it does in the OS after the driver is loaded. 256MB AMD Radeon™ HD 3450 Graphics dual DVI or VGA and TV Out MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 600Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz Maximum power consumption 22W Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 27 256MB AMD Radeon™ HD 3450 Graphics dual DVI or VGA and TV Out MT DT SFF Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz External connectors DMS-591 and S-video Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 120mm 167.64mm x 120mm Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 85mm Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. 1 DMS-59 to VGA or DMS-59 to DVI adaptors required. 256MB nVidia 9300GE Graphics, dual DVI or VGA and TV Out MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 540Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz Maximum power consumption 25W Overlay Planes No Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 120Hz for 1024x768 and lower Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support DirectX 10.0 and OpenGL 3.1 Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Analog 1920x1200x32bpp @ 60Hz Digital - 1600x1200@60Hz w/o reduced blanking, or 1920x1200@60Hz w/reduced blanking External connectors DMS-591 and S-video Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 120mm 167.64mm x 120mm Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 85mm Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 28 256MB nVidia 9300GE Graphics, dual DVI or VGA and TV Out MT DT SFF Operating Temperature Range -10°-55° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. 1 DMS-59 to VGA or DMS-59 to DVI adaptors required. 256MB AMD Radeon™ HD 3470 Graphics, dual DP MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 750Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz Maximum power consumption 18W Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz External connectors 2 Display Port Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 120mm 167.64mm x 120mm Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 85mm Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. 512MB AMD Radeon™ HD 4550 Graphics, dual DP MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 750Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 800Mhz Maximum power consumption 25W OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 29 512MB AMD Radeon™ HD 4550 Graphics, dual DP MT DT SFF Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz External connectors 2 Display Port(1) Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 120mm 167.64mm x 120mm Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 85mm Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. (1) Dongles Supported: DP-VGA (RN699), DP-DVI (23NVR), DP-DL DVI (XT625), DP-HDMI(TK041) 512MB nVidia NVS 420 Graphics, quad DP or DVI SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 540Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 700Mhz Maximum power consumption 40W Overlay Planes No Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 240Hz for 1024x768 and below Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support DirectX 10.0 and OpenGL 3.0 Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) DP - 2560x1600@60Hz DVI - 1600x1200@60Hz w/o reduced blanking, or 1920x1200@60Hz w/reduced blanking External connectors VHDCI (1) Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 120mm 167.64mm x 120mm OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 30 512MB nVidia NVS 420 Graphics, quad DP or DVI SFF Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 167.64mm x 85mm Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range -10°-55° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. (1) Dongles supported: VHDCI-DP (J772M), VHDCI-DVI-D (F908M), DP-VGA (RN699) Hard Drives1 3.5” 160GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 160,041,885,696 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 8 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 312,581,808 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 50 C to 600 C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400 C to 650 C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 31 3.5” 250GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 250,059,350,016 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 8 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 488,397,168 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 50 C to 600 C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400 C to 650 C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 3.5” 320GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 320,072,933,376 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 625,142,448 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 32 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 50 C to 600 C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400 C to 650 C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 3.5” 500GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 500,107,862,016 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 976,773,168 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 50 C to 600 C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 33 Temperature Range -400 C to 650 C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 3.5” 160GB SATA 10000 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 160,041,885,696 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.787 x 4 x 1 (includes sled) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 4.2 ms (average read) Rotational Speed 10000 rpm Logical Blocks 312,581,808 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.275A) and 12V (.585A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 50 C to 600 C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290 C Altitude Range -1000 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400 C to 700 C Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380 C Altitude Range -1000 ft to 40000 ft 2.5” 160GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 160,144,285,696 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) Approximately (3.93 x 2.75 x 0.374 inches) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 34 Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 12 ms (Read) Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 312,581,808 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W DC Current 5V (.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 50 C to 600 C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400 C to 650 C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 2.5” 250GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 250,059,350,016 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) Approximately (3.93 x 2.75 x 0.374 inches) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 12 ms (Read) Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 488,397,168 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W DC Current 5V (.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 50 C to 600 C OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 35 Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400 C to 650 C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 2.5” 320GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 320,072,933,376 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) Approximately (3.93 x 2.75 x 0.374 inches) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 12 ms (Read) Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 625,142,448 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W DC Current 5V (.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 50 C to 600 C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400 C to 650 C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380 C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 36 2.5” 64GB SATA Solid State HDD Capacity (bytes) 64,023,257,088 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 2.106 x 3.059 x 0.134 Interface type and Maximum speed SATA 3.0 Gbps Internal buffer size 128 MB Average Seek Time NA Rotational Speed NA Logical Blocks 125,045,424 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 0.125W, Active 0.135W *Based on MobileMark 2007 scenario DC Current 5.0V (0.35A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 0 to 70 C Relative Humidity Range 10 to 90 % Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29 C Altitude Range -200 to 5000 m Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -55 to 95 C Relative Humidity Range 5 to 95 % Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38 C Altitude Range -200 to 10,600 m 2.5” 128GB Solid State SATA HDD Capacity (bytes) 128,035,676,160 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 2.106 x 3.059 x 0.134 Interface type and Maximum speed SATA 3.0 Gbps Internal buffer size 128 MB Average Seek Time N/A Rotational Speed N/A Logical Blocks 250,069,680 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 37 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 0.112W, Active 0.125W * Based on MobileMark 2007 scenario DC Current 3.3V (0.6A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 0 to 70 C Relative Humidity Range 10 to 90 % Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29 C Altitude Range -200 to 5000 m Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -55 to 95 C Relative Humidity Range 0 C to 55 C / 90~98% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38 C Altitude Range -200 to 10,600 m 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes and TB equals 1 trillion bytes; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. Optical Drives DVD +/- RW1 MT DT SFF External Dimensions inches/centimeters (With Bezel – W x H x D) 149mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 149mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) Weight (max) pounds/kilograms 730g 730g 170g Interface type and speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard Internal buffer size 2MB 2MB 1MB Access Times (typical) (1/3 stroke) 130ms (1/3 stroke) 130ms (1/3 stroke) 150ms Maximum Data Transfer Rates Writes 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD Reads 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD Power Source DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 1000mA OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 38 DVD +/- RW1 MT DT SFF Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29C 29C 29C Altitude Range -200 to 3048 -200 to 3048 -200 to 3048 Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38C 38C 38C Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m 1 Discs burned with this drive may not be compatible with some existing drives and players; using DVD+R media provides maximum compatibility. DVD-ROM MT DT SFF External Dimensions inches/centimeters (With Bezel – W x H x D) 149mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 149mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) Weight (max) pounds/kilograms 730g 730g 165g Interface type and speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard Internal buffer size 2MB 2MB 1MB Access Times (typical) (1/3 stroke) 130ms (1/3 stroke) 130ms (1/3 stroke) 150ms Maximum Data Transfer Rates Writes N/A N/A N/A Reads 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD Power Source DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 800mA Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29C 29C 29C OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 39 DVD-ROM MT DT SFF Altitude Range -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38C 38C 38C Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m 1 DVD-ROM drives may have write-capable hardware that has been disabled via firmware modifications. DVD+/-RW with Blu-Ray-ROM MT DT SFF External Dimensions inches/centimeters (With Bezel – W x H x D) 149mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 149mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) Weight (max) pounds/kilograms 830g 7830g 190g Interface type and speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard Internal buffer size 4MB 4MB 2MB Access Times (typical) (1/3 stroke) 160ms (1/3 stroke) 160ms (1/3 stroke) 180ms Maximum Data Transfer Rates Writes 16x DVD/ 40x CD 16x DVD/ 40x CD 8x DVD / 24x CD Reads 6x BD/16x DVD/40x CD 6x BD/16x DVD/40x CD 4x BD/8x DVD/ 24x CD Power Source DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 900mA Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29C 29C 29C Altitude Range -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 40 DVD+/-RW with Blu-Ray-ROM MT DT SFF Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38C 38C 38C Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m More details for optical drives can be found at: http://support.dell.com/support/systemsinfo/documentation.aspx?c=us&l=en&s=gen&~cat=7 BIOS Defaults Boot Fast Boot On Numlock Key On Wait For 'F1' If Error Enabled POST Hotkeys Setup & Boot Menu Keyboard Error Report Enabled 1st Boot Device Diskette Drive 2nd Boot Device Hard Drive 3rd Boot Device Optical Drive 4th Boot Device Integrated NIC Power AC Recovery Off Auto Power On Off Remote Wake Up On Low Power Mode On Suspend Mode S3 (STR) Security Password Lock Lock Chassis Intrusion On No Execute On TPM Security Off CPU Information C1E Function Enable Cool & Quiet Enabled Virtualization Enabled OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 41 Onboard Devices GFX/Display Port X16 Integrated NIC On Integrated Audio On Video Memory Size Auto Serial Port #1 3F8/IRQ4 LPT Port Mode PS/2 LPT Port Address 378h USB Controller On Front Dual USB On Rear Dual USB On Rear Quad USB On SATA Configuration SATA Operation AHCI HDD Acoustic Mode Bypass SATA-0 Not Detected SATA-1 Not Detected SATA-2 Not Detected SATA-3 Not Detected External SATA Not Detected System Management DASH/ASF Configuration Disabled Text Console Redirection Disabled Computrace Configuration Computrace Operation Deactivate Chassis Enclosure & Ventilation Requirements Enclosure Ventilation If your enclosure has doors, they need to be of a type that allows at least 30% airflow through the enclosure (front and back). Enclosure Minimum Clearance Leave a 10.2 cm (4 in.) minimum clearance on all vented sides of the computer to permit the airflow required for proper ventilation. OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 42 Recommended Enclosure Do not install your computer in an enclosure that does not allow airflow. This restricts the airflow and impacts your computer’s performance, possibly causing it to overheat. Open Desk Minimum Clearance If your computer is installed in a corner, on a desk, or under a desk, leave at least 5.1 cm (2 in.) clearance from the back of the computer to the wall to permit the airflow required for proper ventilation. OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 43 Regulatory Compliance and Environmental Product related conformity assessment and regulatory authorizations including Product Safety, Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Ergonomics, Communication Devices relevant to this product, along with additional product related conformity assessment, and information encompassing Environmental, Energy Consumption, Noise Emissions, Product Materials Information, Packaging, Batteries, and Recycling relevant to this product may be viewed in the Regulatory and Environmental Datasheet for this product is located at: http://www.dell.com/content/topics/global.aspx/about_dell/values/regulatory_compliance/dec_conform?c=us&l=en&s=corp&~c k=anavml Details of Dell's environmental stewardship program to conserve product energy consumption, reduce or eliminate materials for disposal, prolong product life span and provide effective and convenient equipment recovery solutions may be viewed at www.dell.com/earth by clicking the Design for Environment link on the webpage. OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 44 Acoustic Noise Emission Information Optiplex 580 MT Component Typical Configuration CPU Phenom II X2 B24 65W Memory 1 GB DDRIII 1333 MHz HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA RMSD DVD ROM Graphics Adapter AMD Radeon HD3470 256MB The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell Optiplex 580 MT is as follows1 : (all values LWAd expressed in bels2 ; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts; all values LpA expressed in decibels3 , re 2x10-5 Pa) Sound Power Sound Pressure at Operator Position 1 All tests are conducted according to ISO 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was stressed at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured using the same microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes. 2 Declared Sound Power rounded to the nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2 3 Declared Sound Pressure rounded to the nearest whole decibel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.4 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) Idle 3.6 HDD Operating 3.6 ODD Operating 5.1 90% CPU 3.6 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Sound Pressure at Operator Position (LpA) Desktop Desk side Idle 27.0 21.0 HDD Operating 27.1 21.2 ODD Operating 42.4 36.8 90% CPU 26.7 21.2 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 45 Sound Pressure at Bystander Position Optiplex 580 DT Component Typical Configuration CPU Athlon II X2 B22 65W Memory 1 GB DDRIII 1333 MHz HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA RMSD DVD ROM Graphics Adapter AMD Radeon HD3470 256MB The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell Optiplex 580 DT is as follows3 : (all values LWAd expressed in bels4 ; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts; all values LpA expressed in decibels3 , re 2x10-5 Pa) Sound Power 3 All tests are conducted according to IS 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was stressed at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured using the same microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes. 4 Declared Sound Power rounded to the nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2 3 Declared Sound Pressure rounded to the nearest whole decibel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.4 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Sound Pressure at Bystander Position (LpA) Desktop Desk side Idle 22.0 19.7 HDD Operating 22.0 20.0 ODD Operating 37.4 35.8 90% CPU 21.7 19.7 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) Idle 3.8 HDD Operating 3.8 ODD Operating 5.2 90% CPU 3.8 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 46 Sound Pressure at Operator Position Sound Pressure at Bystander Position Optiplex 580 SFF Component Typical Configuration CPU Athlon II X2 B22 65W Memory 1 GB DDRIII 1333 MHz HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA RMSD Slim DVD +/-RW Graphics Adapter AMD Radeon HD3470 256MB The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell Optiplex 580 SSF is as follows5 : (all values LWAd expressed in bels6 ; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts; all values LpA expressed in decibels3 , re 2x10-5 Pa) 5 All tests are conducted according to ISO 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was stressed at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured using the same microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes. 6 Declared Sound Power rounded to the nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2 3 Declared Sound Pressure rounded to the nearest whole decibel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.4 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Sound Pressure at Operator Position (LpA) Desktop Desk side Idle 27.9 22.4 HDD Operating 28.3 21.6 ODD Operating 42.0 37.0 90% CPU 28.5 21.8 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Sound Pressure at Bystander Position (LpA) Desktop Desk side Idle 23.8 21.7 HDD Operating 24.0 20.7 ODD Operating 36.7 34.0 90% CPU 23.9 20.7 OptiPlex 580 Technical Guidebook Page 47 Sound Power Sound Pressure at Operator Position Sound Pressure at Bystander Position Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) Idle 3.8 HDD Operating 3.7 ODD Operating 4.9 90% CPU 4.0 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Sound Pressure at Operator Position (LpA) Idle 28.0 HDD Operating 28.1 ODD Operating 39.4 90% CPU 28.6 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Sound Pressure at Bystander Position (LpA) Idle 23.7 HDD Operating 24.0 ODD Operating 33.8 90% CPU 24.1 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook Dell DELLTM POWEREDGETM T710 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK INSIDE THE POWEREDGE T710 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook Dell Table of Contents 1 Product Comparison .........................................................................................................................1 1.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................1 2 New Technologies.............................................................................................................................2 2.1 Overview/Description ................................................................................................................2 2.2 Detailed Information ..................................................................................................................2 2.2.1 Intel Xeon 5500 Series Processors ...................................................................................2 2.2.2 Intel 5520 Chipset .............................................................................................................3 2.2.3 PCIe Generation 2.............................................................................................................3 2.2.4 DDR3 Memory Technology ...............................................................................................3 2.2.5 16-Drive Active Backplane ................................................................................................3 2.2.6 Next Generation Broadcom 5709C LOMs.........................................................................4 2.2.7 Next generation Dell Embedded Server Management......................................................4 3 System Overview ..............................................................................................................................4 3.1 Overview/Description ................................................................................................................4 3.2 T710 Product Features Summary .............................................................................................5 4 Mechanical........................................................................................................................................6 4.1 Chassis Description ..................................................................................................................6 4.2 Dimensions and Weight ............................................................................................................6 4.3 Front Panel View and Features.................................................................................................7 4.4 Back Panel View and Features .................................................................................................7 4.5 Power Supply Indicators ...........................................................................................................8 4.6 Side Views and Features ..........................................................................................................8 4.7 Internal Chassis Views..............................................................................................................9 4.8 Rails and Cable Management...................................................................................................9 4.9 Rack View ...............................................................................................................................10 4.10 Fans ........................................................................................................................................10 4.11 Control Panel/LCD ..................................................................................................................11 4.11.1 Cover Latch.....................................................................................................................12 4.11.2 Bezel ...............................................................................................................................12 4.11.3 Hard Drive .......................................................................................................................13 4.11.4 Trusted Platform Management (TPM).............................................................................13 4.11.5 Power-Off Security ..........................................................................................................13 4.11.6 Intrusion Alert ..................................................................................................................13 4.11.7 Secure Mode...................................................................................................................13 4.12 Persistent Storage...................................................................................................................14 4.12.1 Managed Persistent Storage...........................................................................................14 4.12.2 SD Module (Unmanaged Internal Persistent Storage)....................................................15 4.13 USB Key (Unmanaged Internal Persistent Storage)...............................................................16 4.14 Battery.....................................................................................................................................16 4.15 Field Replaceable Units (FRU) ...............................................................................................16 5 Electrical..........................................................................................................................................16 5.1 Clock Circuitry .........................................................................................................................16 5.2 Volatility...................................................................................................................................16 6 Power, Thermal, and Acoustic ........................................................................................................16 6.1 Power Supplies .......................................................................................................................16 6.2 Power Supply Specifications...................................................................................................17 6.3 Power Efficiency......................................................................................................................18 6.4 Environmental Specifications ..................................................................................................19 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook Dell 6.6 Maximum Input Amps .............................................................................................................20 6.7 EnergySmart Enablement .......................................................................................................20 6.8 Energy Star Compliance .........................................................................................................20 6.9 Acoustics.................................................................................................................................20 7 Block Diagram.................................................................................................................................22 8 Processors ......................................................................................................................................22 8.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................22 8.2 Features ..................................................................................................................................23 8.3 Supported Processors.............................................................................................................23 8.4 Processor Configurations........................................................................................................24 8.5 Additional Processor Information ............................................................................................24 9 Memory ...........................................................................................................................................24 9.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................24 9.2 DIMMs Supported ...................................................................................................................24 9.3 Memory Population Scenarios ................................................................................................24 9.4 Slots/Risers .............................................................................................................................25 9.5 Speed/Memory Features.........................................................................................................25 9.6 Memory Population .................................................................................................................26 9.7 Memory Speed Limitations......................................................................................................26 9.8 Mirroring ..................................................................................................................................27 10 Chipset............................................................................................................................................27 10.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................27 10.2 Intel 5500 Chipset Dual I/O Hub (IOH)....................................................................................27 10.3 Intel Quickpath Architecture ....................................................................................................28 10.4 PCI Express Generation 2 ......................................................................................................28 10.5 Intel Direct Media Interface (DMI) ...........................................................................................28 10.6 Super I/O Controller ................................................................................................................29 11 BIOS................................................................................................................................................29 11.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................29 11.2 Supported ACPI States ...........................................................................................................29 12 Embedded NICs/LAN on Motherboard (LOM) ................................................................................29 12.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................29 13 I/O Slots ..........................................................................................................................................30 13.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................30 13.2 X16 Express Card Specifications............................................................................................30 13.3 Available PCIe Cards ..............................................................................................................31 13.4 Boot Order...............................................................................................................................32 14 Storage............................................................................................................................................32 14.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................32 14.2 3.5” X8 HDD Backplane ..........................................................................................................33 14.3 2.5” X16 HDD Backplane ........................................................................................................33 14.4 Storage Card Support Matrix ..................................................................................................33 14.5 Available Drives ......................................................................................................................34 14.6 RAID Configurations ...............................................................................................................35 14.7 Internal Storage Controllers ....................................................................................................42 14.8 LED Indicators.........................................................................................................................42 14.9 Optical Drives..........................................................................................................................42 14.10 Tape Drives.............................................................................................................................42 15 Video...............................................................................................................................................42 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook Dell 15.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................42 16 Audio...............................................................................................................................................43 17 Rack Information.............................................................................................................................43 17.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................43 17.2 Cable Management Arm (CMA)..............................................................................................43 17.3 Rack Configuration..................................................................................................................43 17.4 Rails ........................................................................................................................................44 18 Operating Systems..........................................................................................................................45 18.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................45 18.2 Operating Systems Supported ................................................................................................45 19 Virtualization....................................................................................................................................46 19.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................46 19.2 Virtualization Options Supported.............................................................................................46 20 Systems Management ....................................................................................................................47 20.1 Overview/Description ..............................................................................................................47 20.2 Server Management................................................................................................................47 20.3 Embedded Server Management .............................................................................................48 20.4 Lifecycle Controller and Unified Server Configurator..............................................................48 20.5 Optional iDRAC Express.........................................................................................................49 20.6 iDRAC6 Enterprise..................................................................................................................49 21 Peripherals......................................................................................................................................51 21.1 USB peripherals ......................................................................................................................51 21.2 External Storage .....................................................................................................................51 22 Packaging Options..........................................................................................................................51 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 1 DELL 1 Product Comparison 1.1 Overview The PowerEdge T710 is the flagship of the Dell tower servers positioned above the PowerEdge T610 and replacing the PowerEdge 2900III. Table 1 shows a comparison between these versions. Table 1. Comparison of T710 to PE2900-III and T610 Feature/Spec PE2900-III (predecessor) T710 T610 Processor Quad-Core Intel® Xeon® Processor 5400 Series, Intel Xeon 5200 Series Intel Xeon 5500 Series Intel Xeon 5500 Series Front Side Bus 1066/1333 MHz QPI 4.8 – 6.4 GT/s QPI 4.8 – 6.4 GT/s # Processors 1 or 2 1 or 2 1 or 2 # Cores 2 or 4 per proc 2 or 4 per proc 2 or 4 per proc L2/L3 Cache 2 X 3MB or 2 X 6MB shared L2 256K L2 per core/4MB or 8MB shared L3 256K L2 per core/4MB or 8MB shared L3 Chipset Intel 5000X chipset Intel 5520 chipset Intel 5520 chipset DIMMs 12 18 12 Min/Max RAM 1GB/48GB 1GB/144GB 1GB/96GB HD Bays 8 or 10 X 3.5” 8 X 3.5” or 16 X 2.5” 8 X 3.5” or 2.5” HD Types SAS, SATA SSD, SAS, SATA SSD, SAS, SATA Ext Drive Bay(s) 2 X HH Perhiperal Bays 2 X HH Perhiperal Bays 2 X HH Perhiperal Bays Int. HD Controller None None None Opt. HD Controller Perc 5/i, Perc 6/i, SAS 6/iR, SAS 5/i Perc 6/i, SAS 6/iR Perc 6/i, SAS 6/iR Availability Hot Swap HDD, Hot Swap Redundant Fans, Hot Swap Redundant PS Hot Swap HDD, Hot Swap Redundant Fans, Hot Swap Redundant PS Hot Swap HDD, Optional Hot Swap Redundant Fans, Hot Swap Redundant PS Server Mgt. BMC, Optional DRAC5 iDRAC6 Express, Optional iDRAC6 Enterprise, Optional VFlash iDRAC6 Express, Optional iDRAC6 Enterprise, Optional VFlash I/O Slots 6 + Storage Controller Slot 6 + Storage Controller Slot 5 + Storage Controller Slot RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10 See RAID Configurations 0, 1, 5, 6, 10 NIC/LOM 2 X TOE/iSCSI 4 X TOE/iSCSI 2 X TOE/iSCSI USB 2 Front, 4 Rear, 1 Internal 2 Front, 6 Rear, 1 Internal 2 Front, 6 Rear, 1 Internal Power Supplies 930 W Redundant 1100 W Redundant 598 W Redundant Fans Hot plug Redundant Hot plug Redundant Cabled, Optional Hot plug Redundant Chassis 5U Rackable Tower 5U Rackable Tower 5U Rackable Tower PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 2 DELL Feature/Spec PE2900-III (predecessor) T710 T610 Unmanaged Internal Storage Internal USB key SD card for virtualization solutions SD card for virtualization solutions 2 New Technologies 2.1 Overview/Description The T710 utilizes the following new technologies common to other Dell 11G servers: • Intel Xeon 5520 Series processors o New architecture with memory controller within each processor o Dual and quad core o Intel turbo mode allows increased processor speed o Hyperthreading technology o Quick Path Interconnect • Intel 5520 chipset o Dual IOH for maximum I/O capability • PCIe Generation 2 • DDR3 memory technology • 16-drive active backplane with expander • Next generation Broadcom 5709C LOMs • Next generation Dell embedded server management o iDRAC express with Lifecycle Controller and Unified Server Configurator o Optional iDRAC enterprise o Optional v-flash 2.2 Detailed Information 2.2.1 Intel Xeon 5500 Series Processors Intel Xeon 5500 series processors are the latest generation Intel processors for two-socket servers. They are based on a new 45nm die technology and utilize integrated memory controllers on the processor itself rather than a separate memory controller. QuickPath interconnect technology, the speed of which varies with the processor model, replaces the familiar front-side-bus. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 3 DELL Figure 1. Intel Xeon 5500 Series Processors • Intel Hyper-Threading Technology: enables more software threads to be running simultaneously • Intel Intelligent Power Technologies: scales server power consumption to performance needs • Intel Turbo Boost Technology: boosts frequency for active cores by up to 400 MHz for during peak demand periods See Section 8 “Processors” for more detail. 2.2.2 Intel 5520 Chipset The Intel 5520 chipset is the companion to the new Intel Xeon 5500 series processor. It supports the QuickPath interconnect technology and provides PCI Express Gen 2 capability for I/O. The T710 system is designed around dual Intel 5520 chipset I/O HUBs 36-D (IOH). See Section 27 “Chipset”. 2.2.3 PCIe Generation 2 PCIe Gen 2 provides the next generation of I/O bandwidth to the system. PCIe Gen2 doubles the signaling bit rate of each lane from 2.5 Gb/s to 5 Gb/s. 2.2.4 DDR3 Memory Technology Intel Xeon 5500 series processors support new DDR3 memory technology that replaces fully-buffered DIMMs in the new Intel architecture. Native DDR3 memory capability improves memory access speed, lowers latency, and allows more memory capacity (up to 18 DIMMs per two-socket platform). See Section 9 “Memory”. 2.2.5 16-Drive Active Backplane T710 includes an optional 16-drive active backplane that allows one controller to address all 16 drives. See Section 14.3 “2.5” X16 HDD BACKPLANE”. PCI Express Gen 2 Intel Xeon 5500 Intel Xeon 5500 QPI QPI up to 25.6 GB/sec bandwidth per link DDR3 Memory Up to 18 slots PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 4 DELL 2.2.6 Next Generation Broadcom 5709C LOMs The Broadcom 5709C LOMs are the latest 1GBe offering. Two dual-port devices provide a total of four LOM ports for the T710. They are TOE enabled, with iSCSI offload available as an option. See Section 12 “Embedded NICs/LAN on Motherboard (LOM)”. 2.2.7 Next generation Dell Embedded Server Management The chart below shows the components of the new embedded server management capability. As a 700-series enterprise product, T710 comes standard with BMC and iDRAC Express. The iDRAC Express hosts the Lifecycle Controller and Unified Server Configurator. Optional iDRAC Enterprise provides out-of-band management capabilities and enables the optional V-Flash. See Section 20.2 “Embedded Server Management”. Figure 2. Embedded Server Management Capability 3 System Overview 3.1 Overview/Description • Customer driven product priorities o Best performance and availability in a two-socket tower o Large Storage footprint, best I/O capability • Product Positioning o Industry leading performance and availability in a two-socket tower o In direct competition with the HP ML370, IBM x3500 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 5 DELL • Target Market o Corporate workgroups in remote sites running critical apps requiring 24 x 7 uptime o Supports applications across Data Access and Data Processing o Virtualization o Retail space, Digital signage, TV walls • Key Features o Dual IOH, up to 16 drives in one volume, 18 DIMMS, 4x LOMs, all HA in base, 4 x 25 W PCI 3.2 T710 Product Features Summary Table 2. PowerEdge T710 Features and Descriptions Feature Details Processor Intel Xeon 5500 Series,1,86GHz – 2.93GHz, 60W, 80W, 95W, See Section 8.3 “Supported Processors”. Front Side Bus Intel Quick Path Interconnect (QPI) 4.8 – 6.4 GT/s # Processors 1 or 2 # Cores 2 or 4 L2/L3 Cache 256 K per core L2, 4MB – 8MB shared L3 Chipset Intel 5520 chipset DIMMs/Speed 1, 2, 4, 8 GB UDIMM and RDIMM @ 1066 and 1333 MHz Certain memory configurations clock down to 800 MHz Min/Max RAM 1GB/144 GB HD Bays 8 X 3.5” or 16 X 2.5”, 3Gb SAS HD Types SSD, SAS, SATA are supported Ext Drive Bay(s) Two full height peripheral bays Int. HD Controller None Opt. HD Controller Perc 6/i or SAS 6/iR in dedicated storage slot BIOS Dell BIOS core 11G implementation. See Section 11 “BIOS”. Video Integrated Matrox G200 with iDRAC6 Availability Hot swap HDD, hot swap redundant power supplies, hot swap redundant fans Server Mgt. iDRAC6 Express, Optional iDRAC6 Enterprise, Optional VFlash I/O Slots 6 PCIe Gen 2 expansion slots + 1 dedicated controller slot RAID 0, 1, 5, 10, 50, 60. See Section 14.6 “RAID Configurations”. NIC/LOM 2 X Broadcom 5709 1GBe LOMs (4 ports total). TOE enabled, Optional iSCSI offload USB Two front, six rear, one internal Power Supplies Optional redundant 1100 W. Climate Saver Gold Front Panel Active LCD, rotates 90 degrees for rack mounting System ID System ID for PR T710:: 0x029B PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 6 DELL Feature Details Fans 4 X hot swap redundant Chassis 5U rackable tower 4 Mechanical 4.1 Chassis Description The T710 system uses a tower or rack mount 5U chassis. It is classified by Dell as a rackable tower, meaning it is optimized for tower operation 4.2 Dimensions and Weight Figure 3. T710 Dimensions Table 3. Detailed Dimensions Xa Xb Ya Yb Yc Za with bezel Za without bezel Zb Zc 217.9 mm 304.4 mm 431.3 mm 466.3 mm 471.3 mm 37 mm 35 mm 659.6 mm 694.8 mm 8.6 in 12.0 in 17.0 in 18.4 in 18.6 in 1.5 in 1.4 in 26.0 in 27.4 in Weight (maximum configuration) 35.3 kg (78 lb) PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 7 DELL 4.3 Front Panel View and Features Figure 4. Front Panel View and Features 4.4 Back Panel View and Features Figure 5. Back Panel View and Features PCIe Slots iDRAC Enterprise USB LOMs Control Panel and LCD Front USB (2) Peripheral Bays, 2HH PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 8 DELL 4.5 Power Supply Indicators T710 power supplies have embedded cooling fans and one bi-colored status LED. Status States: • Off – LED is dark • AC source applied – solid green LED • Fault of any kind – solid amber LED • DC enable applied – solid green LED (no change from AC applied) 4.6 Side Views and Features Figure 6. Side Views and Features Figure 7. Fold-out Feet Add Additional Stability PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 9 DELL 4.7 Internal Chassis Views Figure 8. Internal Chassis Overview Figure 9. Internal Chassis Detailed View 4.8 Rails and Cable Management The T710 Rack Kit has rack installation components, such as rails. The rack installation components consist of sliding rack mount rails with the latest generation Cable Management Arm (CMA). T710 features slam latches to offer easier removal from the rack. Processors Backplane Backplane Cables DIMM Slots Controller Slot PCIe Slots PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 10 DELL Figure 10. New Cable Management Arm • All steel construction – eliminates creep/sag • More open area for air flow When the system is installed in a rack, please observe the following guidelines: • Nothing should be located within 12” of the front of the unit that could restrict the air flow into the system. • Nothing should be mounted or placed behind the chassis that would restrict airflow from exiting the system. Only Dell approved CMAs can be placed behind the chassis. All other objects should be located at least 24” away from the rear of the chassis. • When two systems are placed back-to-back, the separation between the units should be at least 24” if the exit airflow is equivalent for the two chassis. This allows exit air to escape without creating an extreme back pressure at the rear of one of the chassis. 4.9 Rack View Figure 11. T710 Rack View For more rack, rail, and CMA information see Section 17 “Rack Information”. 4.10 Fans Four 92mm single-rotor hot-pluggable fans are mounted in the rear of the cooling shroud. Each fan has a single-wire harness that plugs into the planar fan connectors (FAN1 through FAN4). PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 11 DELL Figure 12. Fans The Embedded Server Management logic in the system controls and monitors the speed of the fans. A fan speed fault or over-temperature condition results in a notification by ESM. T710 Power Supply Units have integrated fans. The system requires a blank module in place of the empty power supply slot. System fan speed is pulse-width modulated. Optional redundant cooling is supported with only one rotor failing at a time (system may throttle when a rotor fails). Note Do not place any physical obstructions in the front (at least 12”) or rear (at least 24”) of the T710 chassis. This may cause a decrease in airflow, resulting in an over-temperature condition. Placement of non-redundant fans must be at the rearmost section of the shroud. Do not operate the system without the cooling shroud installed. 4.11 Control Panel/LCD The system control panel is located on the front of the system chassis to provide user access to buttons, display, and I/O interfaces. Figure 13. Control Panel/LCD View PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 12 DELL Features of the system control panel include: • 128x20 pixel LCD panel with controls o Two navigation buttons o One select button o One system ID button • ACPI-compliant power button with an integrated green power LED • Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI) button (recessed) • Ambient temperature sensor • LCD panel can rotate 90 degrees for optional rack mounting of the server • Two external USB 2.0 connectors The LCD panel is a graphics display controlled by the iDRAC, unlike the 9G panel that had its own CPLD. Error codes can be sent to the display by either ESM or BIOS. BIOS has the ability to enter a “Secure Mode” through setup, which locks the power and NMI buttons. When in this mode, pressing either button has no effect and does not mask other sources of NMI and power control. 4.11.1 Cover Latch A tool-less latch is integrated in the side cover to secure it to the tower chassis. It is lockable. Figure 14. Cover Latch 4.11.2 Bezel A metal bezel is mounted to the chassis front to provide the Dell ID. A lock on the bezel prevents unauthorized access to system HDD(s). System status (via the LCD) is viewable when the bezel is installed. The bezel is standard for the T710 system. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 13 DELL Figure 15. T710 Bezel 4.11.3 Hard Drive The front bezel of the system contains a lock. A locked bezel secures the system hard drives. 4.11.4 Trusted Platform Management (TPM) The TPM generates/stores keys, protects/authenticates passwords, and creates/stores digital certificates. TPM can also enable the BitLocker™ hard drive encryption feature in Windows Server 2008. TPM is enabled through a BIOS option and uses HMAC-SHA1-160 for binding. There are different planar PWA part numbers to accommodate the different TPM solutions. The Rest of World (ROW) version has the TPM soldered onto the planar. The other version of the planar has a connector for a plug-in module (Factory Install Only). China TPM (TCM) is a post-RTS feature. Until China TCM is available, T710 units shipped to customers in China contain a no TPM motherboard. 4.11.5 Power-Off Security BIOS has the ability to disable the power button function. 4.11.6 Intrusion Alert A switch mounted on the cooling shroud detects chassis intrusion. When the cover is opened, the switch circuit closes to indicate intrusion to ESM. When enabled, the software provides notification that the cover has been opened. 4.11.7 Secure Mode BIOS has the ability to enter a secure boot mode via Setup. This mode includes the option to lock out the power and NMI switches on the control panel or set up a system password. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 14 DELL 4.12 Persistent Storage T710 offers two types of persistent storage: managed (iDRAC6 Express/iDRAC6 Enterprise) and unmanaged internal persistent storage. One of the unmanaged ports is for an optional SD card and the other is for a USB key. Figure 16. Persistent Storage Block Diagram 4.12.1 Managed Persistent Storage iDRAC6 Express is a managed persistent storage space for server provisioning data. The base iDRAC6 express consists of 1 GB flash, and the optional Vflash is an external SD card on the optional iDRAC6 Enterprise. The optional vflash offers the hot-plug portability and increased storage capacity benefits of SD while managed by the system. iDRAC6 is currently configured to support the following applications: • Unified Server Configurator Browser and System Services Module (SSM) (25 MB): the UEFI browser provides a consistent graphical user interface for bare metal deployment and is ideal for one-to-one deployment. The SSM supports automatic one-to-N deployment. • Service Diagnostics (15 MB): formerly on the hard drive as the Utility Partition, this is a bootable FAT16 partition for Service Diagnostics • Deployment OS Embedded Linux (100 MB): storage space to hold Embedded Linux • Online Diagnostics (35 MB): non-bootable FAT32 partition for Online Diagnostics. • Deployment OS WinPE (200 MB): storage space to hold Windows Pre-installation Environment • Driver Store (150 MB): holds all files required for OS deployment. • iDRAC firmware (120 MB): holds the two most recent versions of iDRAC firmware PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 15 DELL • Firmware Images (160 MB): holds the two most recent versions of BIOS, RAID, LOM, power supplies and hard drive firmware. This partition also holds the BIOS and option ROM configuration data. • Life Cycle Log (2 MB): stores initial factory configuration as well as all detectable hardware and firmware changes to the server since its deployment. The Life Cycle Log is stored on the BMC SPI flash. Approximately 20 percent of the flash space is reserved for wear leveling on the NAND flash. Wear leveling extends the life of the NAND flash by balancing the use cycles on the flash’s blocks. 4.12.2 SD Module (Unmanaged Internal Persistent Storage) The optional Internal SD module is a dedicated port for an SD flash card for embedded Hypervisor for virtualization. The SD flash card contains a bootable OS image for virtualized platforms. Figure 17. T710 SD Module Figure 18. SD Diagram PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 16 DELL 4.13 USB Key (Unmanaged Internal Persistent Storage) T710 has one internal USB port on the motherboard for any USB key based security or license application. Some possible applications of the USB key: • User custom boot and pre-boot OS for ease of deployment or diskless environments • USB license keys for software applications like eToken™ or Sentinel Hardware Keys • Storage of custom logs or scratch pad for portable user defined information (not hot-pluggable) 4.14 Battery A replaceable coin cell CR2032 3V battery mounted on the planar provides backup power for the RealTime Clock and CMOS RAM on the ICH. The battery is located under the fan assembly at the rear of the motherboard, near the rear USB ports. 4.15 Field Replaceable Units (FRU) Hot swap HDD and SSD, fans, and power supplies are the primary field replaceable units on T710. The planar contains a serial EEPROM to store FRU information including Dell part number, part revision level, and serial number. The Advanced Management Enablement Adapter (AMEA) contains a FRU EEPROM. The backplane SEP and the power supply microcontroller are also used to store FRU data. 5 Electrical 5.1 Clock Circuitry System clock circuitry is based on Intel CK410B+ synthesizer and DB1200/DB900 driver specification. A clock synthesizer device is a single chip solution. The CK410B+ synthesizes and distributes a multitude of clock outputs at various frequencies, timings and drive levels using a single 14.318 MHz crystal. • PCI Express Gen2 support • Host clock support (133 MHz) • Spread spectrum support • 33 MHz, 48 MHz, 100 MHz clock support • 14.318 MHz clock support 5.2 Volatility See your Dell Representative for the current T710 Statement of Volatility. 6 Power, Thermal, and Acoustic 6.1 Power Supplies The power supply subsystem consists of one or two AC-DC power supplies (1+1 redundant configuration) connected to the planar through the PDB. The power supply only provides +12V and +12Vaux. There are several voltage regulators in the system to supply different voltage levels needed by different logic devices. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 17 DELL 6.2 Power Supply Specifications The T710 power supply is rated at 1100 W. It operates on input voltages ranging from 90 – 264 V, autoswitching to the sensed line level. • EMC classification is Light Industry • FCC classification is Class A Table 4. Power Supply Specifications Minimum Typical Maximum Vin (Voltage first range) 90 V 115/230 264 V Vin (frequency) 47 Hz 50/60 Hz 63 Hz Iin (90 VAC) – – 13.5 A Iin(100 VAC) – – 12.0 A Iin (180 VAC) – – 7.0 A Initial In-rush Current – – 55 A Secondary In-rush Current – – 35 A The base redundant system consists of two hot-plug 1100 W power supplies in a 1+1 configuration. The power supplies connect indirectly to the planar via the Power Distribution Board (PDB). Two power cables connect between the PDB and the backplane. Another multi-drop cable also connects the PDB to the optical and/or tape drives. The PS bay sheet metal prevents unsupported power supplies from being installed in a T710 system. T710 power supplies have embedded cooling fans and one bi-colored status LED. Status States: • Off – No LED • AC source applied – Solid Green LED • Fault of any kind – Solid Amber LED • DC enable applied – Solid Green LED (no change from AC applied) Starting with 11G, the power supplies no longer have a FRU EEPROM; FRU data is now stored in the memory of the PSU Microcontroller. Additionally, the PSU Firmware can now be updated by iDRAC over the PMBus. Power is soft-switched, allowing power cycling via a switch on the front of the system enclosure or via software control (through server management functions). The power system is compatible with industry standards, such as ACPI and the Microsoft Windows Server H/W Design Guide. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 18 DELL Figure 19. T710 Power Supply If using only one power supply, the single PSU should be installed in the PS1 bay and a PSU Close Out (metal cover) is installed in the PS2 bay. The use of the PS1 bay for the single PSU configuration is done for consistency only. Nothing prevents the use of the PS2 bay in a single PSU configuration. 6.3 Power Efficiency Table 5. T710 Power Supply Efficiency Efficiency at 115 V Input Voltage 20% Loading 87% 50% Loading 90% 100% Loading 87% Efficiency at 230 V Input Voltage 10% Loading 80% 20% Loading 88% 50% Loading 92% 100% Loading 88% One of the main features of the latest family of Dell servers is enhanced power efficiency. T710 achieves higher power efficiency by implementing the following features: • User-selectable power cap (subsystems will throttle to maintain the specified power cap) • Improved power budgeting • Larger heat sinks for processors and IOH • Accurate inlet temperature • PSU/VR efficiency improvements • Switching regulators instead of linear regulators • Closed loop thermal throttling • Increased rear venting/3D venting • PWM fans with an increased number of fan zones and configuration-dependent fan speeds • Use of DDR3 memory (lower voltage, UDIMM support) • CPU VR dynamic phase shedding • Memory VR static phase shedding PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 19 DELL • Random time interval for system start • Allows an entire rack to power on without exceeding the available power • BIOS Power/Performance options page • BIOS-based CPU P-state manager (power management in a virtualized environment) • Ability to slow down or power down memory • Ability to disable a CPU core • Ability to turn off items not being used (i.e. USB ports, LOMs, PCIe slots, etc.) • Option to run PCIe at Gen1 speeds instead of Gen2 (BIOS setup option) 6.4 Environmental Specifications Table 6. Environmental Specifications Temperature Operating 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F) with a maximum temperature gradation of 10°C per hour Note: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum operating temperature is de-rated 1°F/550 ft. Storage -40° to 65°C (-40° to 149°F) with a maximum temperature gradation of 20°C per hour Relative Humidity Operating 20% to 80% (non-condensing) with a maximum humidity gradation of 10% per hour Storage 5% to 95% (non-condensing) with a maximum humidity gradation of 10% per hour Maximum Vibration Operating 0.26 Grms at 5 – 350 Hz in operational orientations Storage 1.54 Grms at 10 – 250 Hz in all orientations Maximum Shock Operating Half-sine shock in all operational orientations of 31 G ± 5% with a pulse duration of 2.6 ms ± 10% Storage Half-sine shock on all six sides of 71 G ± 5% with a pulse duration of 2 ms ± 10% Square wave shock on all six sides of 27 G with velocity change @ 235 in/sec or greater Altitude Operating -16 to 3048 m (-50 to 10,000 ft) Note: For altitudes above 2950 feet, the maximum operating temperature is de-rated 1°F/550 ft. Storage -16 to 10,600 m (-50 to 35,000 ft) PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 20 DELL 6.6 Maximum Input Amps The T710 system exhibits the following maximum current draw at the stated voltages: • 13.7A maximum at 90 VAC • 12.0A maximum at 100 VAC • 10.4A maximum at 115 VAC • 5.75A maximum at 208 VAC • 5.45A maximum at 220 VAC • 5.2A maximum at 230 VAC 6.7 EnergySmart Enablement T710 does not support a separate EnergySmart configuration as was offered with certain 10 G servers. A 750 W EnergySmart power supply option is under investigation, but will not be available at RTS. Certain other EnergySmart options may be made available in the future. 6.8 Energy Star Compliance The final Energy Star specification for servers was issued in mid-May, 2009. Work is underway to determine which configurations of T710 will be Energy Star compliant. This section will be updated accordingly. 6.9 Acoustics The acoustical design of the PowerEdge T710 reflects: • Adherence to Dell’s high sound quality standards. Sound quality is different from sound power level and sound pressure level in that it describes how humans respond to annoyances in sound, like whistles, hums, etc. One of the sound quality metrics in the Dell specification is prominence ratio of a tone, and this is listed in the table below. • Office environment acoustics. Compare the values for LpA in Table 7 to see that they are lower than ambient noise levels of typical office environments. • Hardware configurations affect system noise levels. Dell’s advanced thermal control provides for optimized cooling with varying hardware configurations. Some of the perhaps less intuitive but potentially important decision-making configuration examples are listed below. o Most typical configurations perform as listed in Table 7. o However, some less typical configurations and components can result in higher noise levels. Examples of acoustical performance for non-typical hardware configurations are shown in Table 7. o The dBA values are not additive, e.g., incorporating a change for 2 dBA reduction and another change for 3 dBA does not generally produce a 5 dBA reduction. • Noise ramp and descent at Boot-up. Fan speed noise levels ramp during the boot process to add a layer of protection for component cooling if the system does not boot properly. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 21 DELL Table 7. T710’s Prominence Ratio to Tone Operating Mode LwA-UL, bels LpA, dBA Tones PowerEdge T710 3.5” HDD System Typical: 4x Y847J fans, 2x 80 W M399F CPUs, 5x GX198 146 GB 15 KRPM HDDs, 6x 2-GB D841D DIMMs, 2x 1100-W Y613G Power Supplies, PERC6/i YK838 card, 2x X3959 NIC PCI cards, 1x DVD Drive at 23° C Standby 2.7 13 No prominent tones Idle 5.9 40 No prominent tones Active Hard Disk Drives 6.0 42 No prominent tones Stressed Processor, SPECPower at 50% loading 5.9 40 No prominent tones Non-Typical Hardware Configurations; Same as Above Except with Following PCI cards 10 Gb NIC, Idle 6.0 42 No prominent tones PERC6/E, Idle 6.0 42 No prominent tones 4+ PCI cards installed 6.2 44 No prominent tones PowerEdge T710 2.5” HDD System Typical: 4x Y847J fans, 2x 80 W M399F CPUs, 5x 2.5” 73 GB 15 KRPM SAS HDDs, 6x 2-GB D841D DIMMs, 2x 1100-W Y613G Power Supplies, PERC6/i YK838 card, 2x X3959 NIC PCI cards, 1xDVD Drive at 23° C Standby 2.7 13 No prominent tones Idle 5.7 38 No prominent tones Active Hard Disk Drives 5.7 39 No prominent tones Stressed Processor, SPECPower at 50% loading 5.7 38 No prominent tones PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 22 DELL 7 Block Diagram Figure 20. T710 Block Diagram 8 Processors 8.1 Overview The Intel 5500 two-socket processor is the IA-32 microprocessor designed specifically for servers and workstation applications. The processor is based on new Core micro-architecture; however, it is 100 percent compatible with existing IA-32 software. Selective Intel Xeon 5500 series two-socket SKUs also support Turbo Mode. Turbo Mode is an OS-controlled operation that automatically allows the processor to run faster than the marked frequency if the CPU is operating below power, temperature, and current limits. The Intel Xeon 5500 series two-socket processor utilizes a 1366-contact Flip-Chip Land Grid Array (FCLGA) package that plugs into a surface mount socket. Table 8. Intel Xeon 5500 Series Features Intel Xeon 5500 series Two-Socket Processor Features Cache size 32 KB instruction 32 KB data 4 or 8 MB (shared) Multi-processor support 1-2 CPUs Package LGA1366 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 23 DELL 8.2 Features The Intel 5500 two-socket processor supports all Streaming SIMD Extensions (including SSE2, SSE3, and SSE4) and Intel 64 instructions. Key features: • Four or two cores per processor • Two point-to-point QPI links at 6.4 GT/s • 1366-land FC-LGA package • No termination required for non-populated CPUs (must populate CPU socket 1 first) • Integrated QuickPath DDR3 memory controller • 64-byte cache line size • RISC/CISC hybrid architecture • Compatible with existing x86 code base • Optimized for 32-bit code • MMX support • Execute Disable Bit • Intel Wide Dynamic Execution o Executes up to four instructions per clock cycle • Simultaneous Multi-Threading (SMT) capability • Support for CPU Turbo Mode (on certain SKUs) o Increases CPU frequency if operating below thermal, power, and current limits • Streaming SIMD (Single Instruction, Multiple Data) Extension 4 • Intel 64 Technology • Intel VT-x and VT-d Technology for virtualization support • Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology • Demand-based switching for active CPU power management as well as support for ACPI PStates, C-States, and T-States 8.3 Supported Processors All processors are branded as Intel Xeon and a 256K L2 cache per core. Please go to Dell.com or contact your Dell representative for the most up-to-date offering. Table 9. Supported Processors and Descriptions Model Speed Power QPI L3 Cache Features Cores X5570 2.93 GHz 95 W 6.4 GT/s 8 M Turbo +3, HT 4 X5560 2.80 GHz 95 W 6.4 GT/s 8 M Turbo +3, HT 4 X5550 2.66 GHz 95 W 6.4 GT/s 8 M Turbo +3, HT 4 E5540 2.53 GHz 80 W 5.86 GT/s 8 M Turbo +2, HT 4 E5530 2.40 GHz 80 W 5.86 GT/s 8 M Turbo +2, HT 4 E5520 2.26 GHz 80 W 5.86 GT/s 8 M Turbo +2, HT 4 L5520 2.26 GHz 60 W 5.86 GT/s 8 M Turbo +2, HT 4 E5506 2.13 GHz 80 W 4.8 GT/s 4 M – 4 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 24 DELL Model Speed Power QPI L3 Cache Features Cores E5504 2.00 GHz 80 W 4.8 GT/s 4 M – 4 E5502 1.86 GHz 80 W 4.8 GT/s 4 M – 2 8.4 Processor Configurations T710 provides support for up to two Intel 5500 two-socket processors. A single processor placed in the CPU1 socket functions normally; however, T710 systems require a CPU blank in the CPU2 socket for thermal reasons. The system is held in reset if a single processor is placed in the CPU2 socket. 8.5 Additional Processor Information Voltage regulation to the Intel 5500 two-socket processor is provided by EVRD (Enterprise Voltage Regulator-Down). EVRDs are embedded on the planar. CPU core voltage is not shared between processors. EVRDs support static phase shedding and power management via the PMBus. 9 Memory 9.1 Overview T710 utilizes DDR3 memory providing a high performance, high-speed memory interface capable of low-latency response and high throughput. T710 supports Registered ECC DDR3 DIMMs (RDIMM) or Unbuffered ECC DDR3 DIMMs (UDIMM). The DDR3 memory interface consists of three channels. The maximum number of supported DIMMs is dependent on the type of DIMM used Table 10. DIMM Configurations DIMM Type Maximum Configuration Single or dual rank RDIMM 3 per channel per processor (18 total) Quad rank RDIMM 2 per channel per processor (12 total) Single or dual rank UDIMM 2 per channel per processor (12 total) 9.2 DIMMs Supported T710’s DDR3 interface supports 2, 4, 8, or 16 GB RDIMMs and 1 GB or 2 GB UDIMMs. 9.3 Memory Population Scenarios The memory mode is dependent on how the memory is populated in the system. • Three channels populated per CPU o Typically, the system runs in Independent Channel mode in this configuration. This mode offers the most DIMM population flexibility and system memory capacity, but offers the least number of RAS (reliability, availability, service) features. o All three channels must be populated identically. o Maximum memory bus speed is 800 MHz • Two channels (CH 2 and CH 1) are populated identically per CPU; third channel is unused. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 25 DELL o When mirroring is enabled, the memory image in Channel 2 is maintained the same as Channel 1. o Typically, two channels operate in Advanced ECC (Lockstep) mode with each other by having the cache line split across both channels. This mode provides improved RAS features (SDDC support for x8-based memory). o For memory mirroring, the two channels operate as mirrors of each other – writes go to both channels and reads alternate between the two channels. The channels are no longer in lockstep mode. • One channel is populated per CPU o This is a simple Memory Optimized (Independent) mode. Mirroring is not supported. The T710 memory interface supports memory demand and patrol scrubbing, single-bit correction, and multi-bit error detection. Correction of a x4 or x8 device failure is also possible through the lockstep channel mode and the SDDC code. Additionally, correction of a x4 device failure is possible through the independent channel mode. 9.4 Slots/Risers The T710 has 18 DIMM slots on the motherboard. No memory risers are utilized. Nine DIMM slots are associated with each processor. Both processors must be populated to utilize all 18 DIMM slots. Figure 21. T710 Motherboard 9.5 Speed/Memory Features Key features of the T710 memory system include: • Registered (RDIMM) and Unbuffered (UDIMM) ECC DDR3 technology • Each channel carries 64 data and eight ECC bits • Support for up to 144 GB of RDIMM memory (with 18 x 8 GB RDIMMs) • Support for up to 24 GB of UDIMM memory (with 12 x 2 GB UDIMMs) • Support for 1066/1333 MHz single and dual rank DIMMs • Support for 1066 MHz quad rank DIMMs • 800 MHz DIMMs are only used in testing • Single DIMM configuration only with 1 GB DIMM at socket DIMM A1 • Support ODT (On Die Termination) • Clock gating (CKE) to conserve power when DIMMs are not accessed • DIMMs enter a low power self-refresh mode PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 26 DELL • I2C access to SPD EEPROM for access to RDIMM thermal sensors • Single Bit Error Correction • SDDC (Single Device Data Correction – x4 or x8 devices) • Support for Closed Loop Thermal Management • Multi Bit Error Detection • Support for Memory Optimized Mode • Support for Memory Mirroring • Support for Independent channel mode 9.6 Memory Population Across CPU sockets, DIMM populations can be different as long as the population rules for each socket are followed. Additionally, both CPU sockets operate in the same RAS mode and are set up with the same memory timing parameters. • If DIMMs of different speeds are mixed, all channels operate at the fastest common frequency. • RDIMMs and UDIMMs cannot be mixed. • The first DIMM slot in each channel is color-coded with white ejection tabs for ease of identification. • The first DIMM slot in each channel is color-coded with white ejection tabs for ease of installation. • The DIMM sockets are placed 450 mils (11.43 mm) apart, center-to-center in order to provide enough space for sufficient airflow to cool stacked DIMMs. • The T710 memory subsystem supports up to 18 DIMMs. DIMMs must be installed in each channel starting with the DIMM farthest from the processor. Population order will be identified by the silkscreen designator and the System Information Label (SIL) located on the chassis cover. See the figure below for DIMM naming and numbering. o Memory Optimized (Independent): {1, 2, 3}, {4, 5, 6}, {7, 8, 9} o Advanced ECC (Lockstep) or Mirrored: {2,3}, {5, 6}, {8, 9} o Quad Rank or UDIMM: {1, 2, 3}, {4, 5, 6} 9.7 Memory Speed Limitations The memory frequency is determined by a variety of inputs: • Speed of the DIMMs • Speed supported by the CPU • Configuration of the DIMMs Table 10 shows the memory populations and the maximum frequency achievable for that configuration. Note For Quad Rank DIMMs mixed with Single or Dual Rank DIMMs, the QR DIMM needs to be in the slot with the white ejection tabs (the first DIMM slot in each channel). There is no requirement for the order of SR and DR DIMMs. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 27 DELL Table 11. DIMM Population and Maximum Achievable Frequency DIMM Type DIMM 0 DIMM 1 DIMM 2 # of DIMMs 800 1066 1333 UDIMM SR – – 1 DR – – 1 SR SR – 2 SR DR – 2 DR DR – 2 RDIMM SR – – 1 DR – – 1 QR – – 1 SR SR – 2 SR DR – 2 DR DR – 2 QR SR – 2 QR DR – 2 QR QR – 2 SR SR SR 3 SR SR DR 3 SR DR DR 3 DR DR DR 3 9.8 Mirroring Memory mirroring is supported on memory configurations 29 (64GB) and 35 (32GB). 10 Chipset 10.1 Overview The T710 motherboard incorporates the Intel 5500-EP chipset for I/O and processor interfacing. The Intel 5500 chipset supports Intel’s 5500 two-socket processor family, QPI interconnect, DDR3 memory technology, and PCI Express Generation 2. The Intel 5500 chipset consists of the Intel-5500 36D Dual IOH and ICH9. 10.2 Intel 5500 Chipset Dual I/O Hub (IOH) The T710 motherboard incorporates the Intel 5500 chipset 36D Dual IOH to provide a link between the Intel 5500 two-socket processors and I/O components. The main components of the IOH consist of two full-width QPI links (one to each processor), 72 lanes of PCIe Gen2, and a x4 ESI link to connect directly to the South Bridge. The IOH supports a special mode to work with DP processors that allow two IOHs to appear as a single IOH to the processors in the system. This mode results in special behavior in the link and protocol PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 28 DELL layers. Each IOH has a unique NodeID for communication between each other, but only the legacy IOH’s NodeID are exposed to the CPU. 10.3 Intel Quickpath Architecture The QuickPath Architecture consists of serial point-to-point interconnects for the processors and the IOH. T710 has a total of four QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) links including one link connecting the processors and links connecting both processors with the IOH and links connecting both IOHs. Each link consists of 20 lanes (full-width) in each direction with a link speed of 6.4 GT/s. An additional lane is reserved for a forwarded clock. Data is sent over the QPI links as packets. The QuickPath Architecture implemented in the Intel 5500 chipset features four layers. The Physical layer consists of the actual connection between components. It supports Polarity Inversion and Lane Reversal for optimizing component placement and routing. The Link layer is responsible for flow control and the reliable transmission of data. The Routing layer is responsible for the routing of QPI data packets. Finally, the Protocol layer is responsible for high-level protocol communications, including the implementation of a MESIF (Modify, Exclusive, Shared, Invalid, Forward) cache coherence protocol. 10.4 PCI Express Generation 2 PCI Express is a serial point-to-point interconnects for I/O devices. PCIe Gen2 doubles the signaling bit rate of each lane from 2.5 Gb/s to 5 Gb/s. Each of the PCIe Gen2 ports are backwards-compatible with Gen1 transfer rates. 10.5 Intel Direct Media Interface (DMI) The DMI (previously called the Enterprise Southbridge Interface) connects the Intel 5500 chipset IOH with the Intel I/O Controller Hub (ICH). The DMI is equivalent to a x4 PCIe Gen1 link with a transfer rate of 1 GB/s in each direction. Intel controller Hub 9/10 is a highly integrated I/O controller, supporting the following functions: • Six x1 PCIe Gen1 ports, with the capability of combining ports 1-4 as a x4 link o These ports are unused on T710 • PCI Bus 32-bit Interface Rev 2.3 running at 33 MHz • Up to six Serial ATA (SATA) ports with transfer rates up to 300 MB/s o T710 features two SATA ports for optional internal optical drive or tape backup • Six UHCI and two EHCI (High-Speed 2.0) USB host controllers, with up to twelve USB ports o T710 has eight external USB ports and two internal ports dedicated for UIPS and embedded storage • Power management interface (ACPI 3.0b compliant) • Platform Environmental Control Interface (PECI) • Intel Dynamic Power Mode Manager • I/O interrupt controller • SMBus 2.0 controller • Low-Pin Count (LPC) interface to Super I/O, Trusted Platform Module (TPM), and SuperVU • Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) support for up to two devices o T710 BIOS is connected to the ICH using SPI PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 29 DELL 10.6 Super I/O Controller The T710 system planar incorporates a SMSC LPC47M534 Super I/O controller to provide support for the serial port and the keyboard controller. The LPC47M534 is a plug and play compatible device that interfaces directly to the ICH through an embedded LPC bus. 11 BIOS 11.1 Overview The T710 BIOS is based on the Dell BIOS core and supports: • IA-32 Intel 5500 Two-Socket Support • Simultaneous Multi-Threading (SMT) support • CPU Turbo Mode support • PCI 2.3 compliant • Plug n’ Play 1.0a compliant • MP (Multiprocessor) 1.4 compliant • Boot from hard drive, optical drive, iSCSI drive, USB key, and SD card • ACPI support • Direct Media Interface (DMI) support • PXE and WOL support for on-board NICs • Memory mirroring • SETUP access through key at end of POST • USB 2.0 (USB boot code is 1.1 compliant) • F1/F2 error logging in CMOS • Virtual KVM, CD, and floppy support • UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) 2.1 support The T710 BIOS does not support: • Embedded diagnostics • BIOS language localization • BIOS recovery after bad flash (but can be recovered via iDRAC Express) 11.2 Supported ACPI States PE T710 conforms to Advance Configuration and Power Interface Specification, v2.0c. and provides support for ACPI P-States, C-States, and T-States. 12 Embedded NICs/LAN on Motherboard (LOM) 12.1 Overview Two dual-port LAN controllers with support circuitry are embedded on the T710 system board as independent Ethernet interface device. This provides four LOM ports at the rear of the server. Both controllers are TOE enabled, with optional iSCSI offload engine. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 30 DELL The device is Broadcom 5709C Gigabit Ethernet controller. The following information details the features of the LAN device: • x4 PCI Express Gen2 capable interface o T710 operates dual-port controllers at Gen1 speed • MAC and PHY integrated • 3072x18 Byte context memory • 64 KB receive buffer • TOE (TCP Offload Engine) • iSCSI controller (enabled through an optional hardware key) • RDMA controller (RNIC) (enabled through an optional hardware key) • NC-SI (Network Controller-Sideband Interface) connection • Wake-On-LAN (WOL) • PXE 2.0 remote boot • iSCSI boot • IPv4 and IPv6 support • Bare metal deployment support 13 I/O Slots 13.1 Overview The T710 comes standard with six PCIe (gen 2) expansion slots on the motherboard. A separate dedicated slot is provided on the motherboard for the HDD controller. All PCIe slots are x8 connectors, except the x16 slot. Slot specifications are shown below. See the motherboard diagram for slot locations. • Slot 1 = half length, full height PCIe x4 link • Slot 2 = Full length, full height PCIe x16 link • Slot 3 = Full length, full height PCIe x8 link • Slot 4 = Half length, full height PCIe x8 link • Slot 5 = Half length, full height PCIe x8 link • Slot 6 = Half length, full height PCIe x8 link • Storage slot = PCIe x8 link 13.2 X16 Express Card Specifications T710 supports x16 cards that meet the following requirements: • Standard height (4.376”) • Full length (12.283”) • Support for full bandwidth of x16 Gen2 link • No support for hot-plug or hot-removal • Maximum power of 25W • T710 provides +12V, +3.3V, and +3.3Vaux in accordance with Power Supply Rail Requirements • x16 slot is not compliant with the PCI Express x16 Graphics 150W-ATX Specification • x16 cards must be compliant with the PCI Express Card Electromechanical Specification Rev 2.0 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 31 DELL • x16 cards must only occupy the space of one slot. Cards that occupy the space of two slots are not supported • x16 card is limited to 25 W initial start-up power until it is configured as a high-power device. If no value is set for the Slot Power Limit, the card is limited to 25 W. The card must then scale down to 25 W or disable operation per PCI Express Base Spec Rev 2.0 • x16 card must be able to support a maximum operating temperature of 55°C as defined in the Dell PCI Environmental Spec and the PCI Express Card Electromechanical Spec. T710 provides a minimum transverse air velocity of x LFM (linear feet per minute) to the x16 card. 13.3 Available PCIe Cards T710 supports the following cards. Maximum supported and slot priorities shown. Table 12. T710 Supported PCIe Cards and Descriptions1 Category Card Priority Description Width Slot Priority2 Maximum Cards Internal Storage (Integrated Slot) 100 Dell PERC 6/i Integrated (No Sled) x8 Gen1 Integrated 1 200 Dell SAS 6/iR Integrated (No Sled) x8 Gen1 Integrated 1 External Controllers 300 Dell SAS 5/E x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 2#3 400 Dell PERC 6/E 512 x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 2#3 500 Dell PERC 6/E 256 x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 2#3 10 GB NICs 600 Intel 10G Base-DA SFP+ Dual Port Adapter x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 4 700 Intel 10G Base-T Single Port NIC x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 43 800 Broadcom® NetXtreme II® 57710 Single Port 10G Base-T Ethernet PCIExpress Network Interface Card with TOE and iSCSI Offload x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 43 900 Intel 10G Base-SR Optical Single Port NIC x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 4 Internal Storage 1000 Dell SAS 5/iR x8 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 2#3 FC8 HBA Single Port 1100 Qlogic QLE2562 8Gbps FC HBA, Dual Port x8 Gen1/x4 Gen2 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 1200 Emulex LPe12002 8Gbps FC HBA, Dual Port x8 Gen1/x4 Gen2 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 1300 Qlogic QLE2560 8Gbps FC HBA, Single Port x8 Gen1/x4 Gen2 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 32 DELL Category Card Priority Description Width Slot Priority2 Maximum Cards 1400 Emulex LPe12000 8Gbps FC HBA, Single Port x8 Gen1/x4 Gen2 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 FC4 HBA 1500 Qlogic QLE2462 FC4 HBA, Dual Port x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 1600 Qlogic QLE2460 FC4 HBA, Single Port x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 1700 Qlogic QLE220 FC4 HBA, Single Port x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 1800 Emulex LPe11002 FC4 HBA, Dual Port x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 1900 Emulex LPe1150 FC4 HBA, Single Port x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 SCSI HBA 2000 LSI2032 PCIe SCSI HBA x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 2 1 GB NICs 2100 Intel PRO/1000VT 1G Cu Quad Port NIC x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3 5 2200 Intel PRO/1000PT 1G Cu Dual Port NIC x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3,1 6 2300 Broadcom 5709 IPV6 1G CU Dual Port NIC TOE/iSOE x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3,1 6 2400 Broadcom 5709 IPv6 1G Cu Dual Port NIC TOE x4 Gen1 Slot 6,4,2,5,3,1 6 1. For optimal performance, it is best to alternate slot population as Slot 6, 4, and 2, before starting Slot 5,3, and1. 2. Slot 1 should be used for 1G NIC's only preferably. 3. T710 supports up to four 25 W maximum power each (excluding internal storage slot) and up to two 15 W for the remainder PCI-e cards regardless of which slots are populated. This restriction applies to any PCIe cards with a maximum power over 15 W. 13.4 Boot Order System boot order is settable in the BIOS 14 Storage 14.1 Overview T710 supports a 16-drive backplane for 2.5” drives and an eight-drive backplane for 3.5” drives. There are sixteen 2.5” or eight 3.5” hot-plug capable Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or Serial ATA (SATA) slots with two LED indicators per slot, two Mini-SAS cable connectors for connecting the backplane to the integrated SAS 6/iR or PERC 6/i, a 10-pin planar signal connector, and an 8-pin PDB power connector. SAS 6/iR is only supported on the 3.5” HDD backplane. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 33 DELL 14.2 3.5” X8 HDD Backplane The 3.5” HDD backplane has: • 3.5” HDD are supported in this configuration • 2.5” SSD in 3.5” carrier. Also max of 2x 2.5” SAS HDD in 3.5” carrier for entry SAS HDD price point • Two Mini-SAS cables are used to connect both channels of the integrated SAS 6/iR or PERC 6/i card to the eight-drive backplane. • For SATA/SAS mixing, two SAS drives are supported. In this configuration, one pair of drives will be SAS and the remaining six drives will be SATA. 14.3 2.5” X16 HDD Backplane The 2.5” HDD backplane has: • Only 2.5” HDD are supported in this configuration • One Mini-SAS cable is used to connect one channel of the integrated PERC 6/I (only) card to the sixteen-drive backplane. • A SAS expander is used to map 16 HDD to the PERC (x4) controller • For SATA/SAS mixing, two SAS drives are supported. In this configuration, one pair of drives will be SAS and the remaining fourteen drives will be SATA. 14.4 Storage Card Support Matrix Table 13. Storage Card Support Matrix SKU Product Usage T710 Support Slot PCIe Con PCI Bracket I/O Con RAID BBU PERC SAS/SATA PERC 6/i Integrated Internal Backplane Storage (HDD, SSD) Yes – Max 1 Storage slot x8 No x4 int 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, 60 BBU PERC 6/E Adapter External SAS/SATA Storage Yes – Max 2 (MD1000 Pompano and MD1020 Ridgeback) PCIe slot x8 Yes x4 ext x4 ext 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, 60 TBBU PERC 5/E Adapter External Legacy Storage Yes – Max 2 (MD1000 Pompano only) PCIe slot x8 Yes x4 ext x4 ext 0, 1, 5, 10, 50 TBBU SAS HBA SAS/SATA SAS 6/iR Integrated Internal Backplane Storage (No tape or SSD support) Yes – Max 1 Storage slot x8 No x4 int x4 int 0, 1 No SAS 5/iR Adapter Internal SAS Tape Yes – Max 1 PCIe slot x8 Yes x4 int N/A No PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 34 DELL SKU Product Usage T710 Support Slot PCIe Con PCI Bracket I/O Con RAID BBU SAS 5/E Adapter External SAS (DAS, Tape) Yes – Max 2 PCIe slot x8 Yes x4 ext x4 ext None No ICH SATA On Planar via chipset Internal SATA Optical and/or Tape (No HDD) Yes - 2 ports for Optical and/or Tape N/A N/A N/A x1 int N/A N/A LSI 2032 SCSI LSI 2032 Adapter Internal/Extern al SCSI Tape or External legacy SCSI storage Yes - Max 2 PCIe slot x4 Yes SCSI(i nt) SCSI (ext) N/A N/A 14.5 Available Drives Table 14. T710 Available Drives and Descriptions Form Factor Capacity Speed Type 2.5” 25 GB N/A SATA SSD 2.5” 50 GB N/A SATA SSD 2.5” 100 GB N/A SATA SSD 2.5” 73 GB 15 k SAS HDD 2.5” 146 GB 15 k SAS HDD 2.5” 146 GB 10 k SAS HDD 2.5” 300 GB 10 k SAS HDD 2.5” 160 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD 2.5” 250 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD 2.5” 500 GB 7.2 k NL SAS HDD 3.5” 146 GB 15 k SAS HDD 3.5” 300 GB 15 k SAS HDD 3.5” 450 GB 15 k SAS HDD 3.5” 600 GB 10 k SAS HDD 3.5” 160 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD 3.5” 250 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD 3.5” 500 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD 3.5” 750 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD 3.5” 1000 GB 7.2 k SATA HDD 3.5” 500 GB 7.2 k NL SAS HDD 3.5” 750 GB 7.2 k NL SAS HDD 3.5” 1000 GB 7.2 k NL SAS HDD PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 35 DELL 14.6 RAID Configurations T710 offers a wide array or RAID configurations from the factory to support the large drive capacity and the mixing of SSD, SAS, and SATA drives. All configurations use the back plane connection type. Table 15. T710 RAID Configurations Configuration Type Configurations Description Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS, or all SSD Mixed SAS/ SATA Non-RAID mix of SSD with SAS/SATA not supported Min 2xSAS+1xSATA 2.5” (2.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA 2.5” (3.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA 3.5”: Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/3.5” chassis Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/ 3.5” chassis SAS/SATA – No RAID 0 MSS Integrated SAS/SATA No RAID (SAS 6/iR) 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 1 2.5” SSD = not valid 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 8 2.5” SSD = not valid 2.5” = not valid 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 3 3.5” = 8 2.5” SSD = not valid 2.5” SSD = not valid PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 36 DELL Configuration Type Configurations Description Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS, or all SSD Mixed SAS/ SATA Non-RAID mix of SSD with SAS/SATA not supported Min 2xSAS+1xSATA 2.5” (2.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA 2.5” (3.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA 3.5”: Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/3.5” chassis Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/ 3.5” chassis SAS/SATA - RAID 1 MSSR0 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 0 (SAS 6/iR) Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 0 (PERC6iI) 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 2 2.5” = 2 3.5” = 2 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 8 2.5” = 16/8 3.5” = 8 N/A SAS/SATA - RAID 2 MSSR1 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 1 (SAS 6/iR) Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 1 (PERC6/i) 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 2 2.5” = 2 3.5” = 2 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 2 2.5” = 2 3.5” = 2 N/A SAS/SATA - RAID 3 MSSR5 Integrated SSD/ SAS/SATA RAID 5 (PERC 6/i ) 2.5” = 3 3.5” = 3 2.5” = 16/8 3.5” = 8 N/A SAS/SATA - RAID 4 MSSR6 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 6 (PERC 6/i) 2.5” = 4 3.5” = 4 2.5” = 16/8 3.5” = 8 N/A SAS/SATA - RAID 5 MSSR10 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 10 (PERC 6/i ) 2.5” = 4 3.5” = 4 2.5” = 16/8 3.5” = 8 N/A PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 37 DELL Configuration Type Configurations Description Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS, or all SSD Mixed SAS/ SATA Non-RAID mix of SSD with SAS/SATA not supported Min 2xSAS+1xSATA 2.5” (2.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA 2.5” (3.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA 3.5”: Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/3.5” chassis Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/ 3.5” chassis SAS/SATA - RAID 6 MSSR50 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 50 (PERC 6/i ) 2.5” = 6 3.5” = 6 2.5” = 16/8 3.5” = 8 N/A SAS/SATA - RAID 7 MSSR60 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 60 (PERC 6/i ) 2.5” = 8 3.5” = 8 2.5” = 16/8 3.5” = 8 N/A SAS/SATA - RAID 8 MSSR1R1 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 1/RAID 1 (SAS 6/iR, PERC 6/i) 2.5” = 2+2 3.5” = 2+2 2.5” = 2+2 3.5” = 2+2 N/A SAS/SATA - RAID 9 MSSR1R5 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 1/RAID 5 (PERC 6/i) 2.5” = 2 + 3 3.5” = 2 + 3 2.5” = 2+14/6 3.5” = 2+ 6 N/A SAS/SATA - RAID 13 MSSR1R6 Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 1/RAID 6 (PERC 6/i) 2.5” = 2 + 3 3.5” = 2 + 3 2.5” = 2+14/6 3.5” = 2+ 6 N/A SAS/SATA – No RAID 10 MSS-X Integrated SAS/SATA No RAID (SAS 6/iR) – – 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 3 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 2+2 2.5”= not valid 3.5”=6 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 38 DELL Configuration Type Configurations Description Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS, or all SSD Mixed SAS/ SATA Non-RAID mix of SSD with SAS/SATA not supported Min 2xSAS+1xSATA 2.5” (2.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA 2.5” (3.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA 3.5”: Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/3.5” chassis Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/ 3.5” chassis SAS/SATA - RAID 11 MSSR1R1-X Integrated SAS/SATA RAID 1/RAID 1 (SAS 6/iR) Integrated SAS/SATA RAID 1/RAID 1 (PERC 6/i) – – – 2.5” = not valid 3.5” = 2+2 2.5” = 2+2 3.5” = 2+2 SAS/SATA - RAID 12 MSSR1R5-X Integrated SAS/SATA RAID 1/RAID 5 (PERC 6/i) – – – 2.5” = 2 + 14/6 3.5” = 2 + 6 SSD/SAS - RAID 14 MSSR0R1-X Integrated SSD/SAS RAID 0/RAID 1 (PERC 6/i) RAID 0 set is SSD, RAID 1 set is SAS – – 2.5” = 1 + 2 2.5” = 14 + 2 3.5” = 1 + 2 3.5” = 6 + 2 SSD/SAS - RAID 15 MSSR1R1-X Integrated SSD/SAS RAID 1/RAID 1 (PERC 6/i) RAID 1 set is SSD, second RAID 1 set is SAS – – 2.5” = 2 + 2 2.5” = 2 + 2 3.5” = 2 + 2 3.5” = 2 + 2 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 39 DELL Configuration Type Configurations Description Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS, or all SSD Mixed SAS/ SATA Non-RAID mix of SSD with SAS/SATA not supported Min 2xSAS+1xSATA 2.5” (2.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA 2.5” (3.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA 3.5”: Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/3.5” chassis Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/ 3.5” chassis SSD/SAS - RAID 16 MSSR1R5-X Integrated SSD/SAS RAID 1/RAID 5 (PERC 6/i) RAID 1 set is SSD, RAID 5 set is SAS – – 2.5” = 2 + 3 2.5” = 2 + 14 3.5” = 2 + 3 3.5” = 2 + 6 SSD/SAS - RAID 17 MSSR1R10-X Integrated SSD/SAS RAID 1/RAID 10 (PERC 6/i) RAID 1 set is SSD, RAID 10 set is SAS – – 2.5” = 2 + 4 2.5” = 2 + 14 3.5” = 2 + 4 3.5” = 2 + 4 SSD/SAS - RAID 18 MSSR1R50-X Integrated SSD/SAS RAID 1/RAID 50 (PERC 6/i) RAID 1 set is SSD, RAID 50 set is SAS – – 2.5” = 2 + 6 2.5” = 2 + 14 3.5” = 2 + 6 3.5” = 2 + 6 SSD/SAS - RAID 19 MSSR10R50-X Integrated SSD/SAS RAID 10/RAID 50 (PERC 6/i) RAID 10 set is SSD, RAID 50 set is SAS – – 2.5” = 4 + 6 2.5” = 8 + 8 3.5” = not valid 3.5” = not valid PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 40 DELL Configuration Type Configurations Description Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS, or all SSD Mixed SAS/ SATA Non-RAID mix of SSD with SAS/SATA not supported Min 2xSAS+1xSATA 2.5” (2.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA 2.5” (3.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA 3.5”: Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/3.5” chassis Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/ 3.5” chassis SSD/SAS/ SATA RAID 20 MSSR0R1R5-X Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 0/RAID 1/RAID 5 (PERC 6/i) RAID 0 set is SSD, RAID 1 set is SAS, RAID 5 set is SATA – – 2.5” = 1 + 2 + 3 2.5” = 4 + 2 + 10 3.5” = 1 + 2 + 3 3.5” = 2 + 2 + 4 SSD/SAS/ SATA RAID 21 MSSR1R1R5-X Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 1/RAID 1/RAID 5 (PERC 6/i) RAID 1 set is SSD, second RAID 1 set is SAS, RAID 5 set is SATA – – 2.5” = 2 + 2 + 3 2.5” = 2 + 2 + 12 3.5” = 2 + 2 + 3 3.5” = 2 + 2 + 4 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 41 DELL Configuration Type Configurations Description Non-Mixed drives, all SATA, or all SAS, or all SSD Mixed SAS/ SATA Non-RAID mix of SSD with SAS/SATA not supported Min 2xSAS+1xSATA 2.5” (2.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 14xSATA 2.5” (3.5” chassis): Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA 3.5”: Max 2xSAS + 6xSATA Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/3.5” chassis Min HDD Max HDD 2.5” chassis/ 3.5” chassis SSD/SAS/ SATA RAID 22 MSSR10R1R5- X Integrated SSD/SAS/SATA RAID 10/RAID 1/RAID 5 (PERC 6/i) RAID 10 set is SSD, RAID 1 set is SAS, RAID 5 set is SATA – – 2.5” = 4 +2 + 3 2.5” = 8 + 2 + 6 or 2.5” = 4 + 2 + 10 3.5” = not valid 3.5” = not valid PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 42 DELL 14.7 Internal Storage Controllers T710 supports a choice of two internal 3GB SAS HDD controllers. The internal controller is placed in the dedicated storage slot on the motherboard. 14.8 LED Indicators Each disk drive carrier has two LED indicators visible from the front of the system. One is a green LED for disk activity and the other is a bicolor (Green/Amber) LED for status information. The activity LED is driven by the disk drive during normal operation. The bicolor LED is controlled by the SEP device on the backplane. Both LEDs indicate certain conditions under direction of a storage controller. 14.9 Optical Drives SATA optical drives are optional and connect to the planar via a SATA interface. IDE optical drives are no longer supported. The following optical drives are available on T710: DVD-ROM and DVD+RW. If the optical drive is not ordered with the system, a blank is installed in its place. In the absence of tape drive, an optional second SATA optical drive is installed in the bay adjacent to the first optical drive. 14.10 Tape Drives Tape drives are optional and connect to the planar via SATA/SCSI controller card/SAS controller card. IDE tape drive is no longer supported. The following tape drives are available for usage on T710: internal SATA, SCSI, and SAS drives; external SCSI and SAS drives. If the tape drive is not ordered with the system, a blank is installed in its place. T710 supports a number of internal tape backup options, plus the RD1000 disk backup unit. Only halfheight backup options are supported. 15 Video 15.1 Overview The T710 system Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller (iDRAC6) incorporates an integrated video subsystem, connected to the 32-bit PCI interface of the ICH. This logic is based on the Matrox G200. The device only supports 2D graphics. The integrated video core shares its video memory with the iDRAC’s 128 MB DDR2 application space memory. This memory is also used for the KVM buffer. The T710 system supports the following 2D graphics video modes: Table 16. Video Descriptions Resolution Refresh Rate (Hz) Color Depth (bit) 640 x 480 60, 72, 75, 85 8, 16, 32 800 x 600 56, 60, 72, 75, 85 8, 16, 32 1024 x 768 60, 72, 75, 85 8, 16, 32 1152 x 864 75 8, 16, 32 1280 x 1024 60, 75, 85 8, 16 1280 x 1024 60 32 PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 43 DELL 16 Audio T710 does not support audio (sound card or speakers) as a system feature. 17 Rack Information 17.1 Overview T710 shares the same rail kit and CMA as T610. The rails and CMA are 3U tall, but accommodate systems that are 3U or greater in height such as T710 and T610 (both 5U). The rack kit includes ears that bolt on the chassis and engage the rail latches. 17.2 Cable Management Arm (CMA) The 3U CMA for T710 contains the following cables. Table 17. Cable Types and Amount Containable Cable Type # of Cables Power 2 SAS 10 CAT6 2 Status LED 1 KVM dongle 1 Total 16 See Section 4.8 “Rails and Cable Management” for a picture of the new CMA. 17.3 Rack Configuration In the rack configuration, the top painted panel is removed and two ears are bolted to the chassis. The ears contain the slam latches that engage the rail latches. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 44 DELL Figure 22. T710 Rack Ears 17.4 Rails Sliding ReadyRails™ for 4-post Racks: Figure 23. T710 Sliding ReadyRails • Support for tool-less installation in 19” CEA-310-E compliant square hole 4-post racks including: • Support for Dell Clydesdale Racks (4220, 2420) • Support for Dell R2K Racks (4210, 2410) • Support for Dell Marconi Racks (4200, 2400) • Support for HP/Compaq 9xxx and 10xxx series racks • Support for HP/Compaq 7xxx series racks without the CMA • Support for tool-less installation in 19” CEA-310-E compliant round hole 4-post racks Ears bolt to chassis for rack configuration Ears Include slam latches to secure server in rack PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 45 DELL • Support for full extension of the system out of the rack to allow serviceability of key internal components • Support for optional cable management arm (CMA) • Rail depth without the CMA: 760 mm • Rail depth with the CMA: 840 mm • Square-hole rack adjustment range: 692-756 mm • Round-hole rack adjustment range: 678-749 mm 18 Operating Systems 18.1 Overview T710 supports all major enterprise server operating systems consistent with the Dell 11G server portfolio. 18.2 Operating Systems Supported Table 18. Microsoft Operating System Operating Systems Installation Factory Install Logo/Certification Schedule Small Business Server 2008 X64 Standard Premium FI FI WHQL RTS Small Business Server 2003 R2 32-bit x86 Standard Premium FI WHQL RTS Windows Server® 2008 and Windows Server 2008 SP2 32-bit x86 Standard FI WHQL RTS Enterprise FI RTS x64 Standard FI WHQL RTS Enterprise Datacenter FI FI RTS RTS Windows Server 2003 32-bit x86 Standard No WHQL RTS Enterprise No RTS x64 Standard No WHQL RTS Enterprise No RTS Windows Server 2003 R2 32-bit x86 Standard FI WHQL RTS Enterprise FI RTS x64 Standard FI WHQL RTS Enterprise FI RTS Datacenter DIB RTS PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 46 DELL Table 19. Linux Operating System Operating Systems Installation Factory Install Logo/Certification Schedule Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 4.7 ES/AS x86-64 DIB, NFI Yes RTS RTS ES/AS x86 DIB, NFI Yes RTS RTS Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.3 x86-64 FI Yes RTS RTS x86 DIB, NFI Yes RTS RTS SUSETM Linux Enterprise Server 10 x86-64 SP2 X86-64 FI (may change) Yes RTS SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 11 x86-64 FI Yes RTS Table 20. Solaris Operating System Operating Systems Installation Factory Install Logo/Certification Schedule Solaris 10 (latest update) – DIB, NFI Yes Post RTS 19 Virtualization 19.1 Overview T710 has a primary mission as a virtualization platform for remote locations. Accordingly, the T710 supports all major virtualization options available from Dell, including VMware, Citrix XenServer and Microsoft Hyper-V Server. Embedded options are available for VMware and Citrix XenServer. Embedded options require the optional SD card module to be installed. 19.2 Virtualization Options Supported Table 21. Virtualization Options Supported Operating Systems Factory Install Logo/ Certification Schedule Support for VMware ESX TM 3.5 update 4 and ESX 4.0 FI Yes RTS Support for Microsoft Hyper-V (Viridian) TM FI Yes RTS Support for VMware ESXi TM 3.5 update 4 and ESXi 4.0 (embedded) FI Yes RTS Support for Citrix XenServer Enterprise® 5.x (embedded) FI Yes RTS Support for Microsoft Hyper-V server (VSKU) (standalone) FI Yes RTS PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 47 DELL 20 Systems Management 20.1 Overview/Description Dell aims on delivering open, flexible, and integrated solutions that help you reduce the complexity of managing disparate IT assets by building comprehensive IT management solutions. Combining Dell PowerEdge Servers with a wide selection of Dell-developed management solutions gives you choice and flexibility, so you can simplify and save in environments of any size. To help you meet your server performance demands, Dell offers Dell OpenManage™ systems management solutions for: • Deployment of one or many servers from a single console • Monitoring of server and storage health and maintenance • Update of system, operating system, and application software Dell offers IT management solutions for organizations of all sizes – priced, sized, and supported right. 20.2 Server Management A Dell Systems Management and Documentation DVD and a Dell Management Console DVD are included with the product. ISO images are also available. A brief description of available content: • Dell Systems Build and Update Utility: Dell Systems Build and Update Utility assists in OS install and pre-OS hardware configuration and updates. • OpenManage Server Administrator: The OpenManage Server Administrator (OMSA) tool provides a comprehensive, one-to-one systems management solution, designed for system administrators to manage systems locally and remotely on a network. OMSA allows system administrators to focus on managing their entire network by providing comprehensive one-toone systems management. • Management Console: Our legacy IT Assistant console is also included, as well as tools to allow access to our remote management products. These tools are Remote Access Service, for iDRAC, and the BMC Management Utility. • Active Directory Snap-in Utility: The Active Directory Snap-in Utility provides an extension snapin to the Microsoft Active Directory. This allows you to manage Dell specific Active Directory objects. The Dell-specific schema class definitions and their installation are also included on the DVD. • Dell Systems Service Diagnostics Tools: Dell Systems Service and Diagnostics tools deliver the latest Dell optimized drivers, utilities, and operating system-based diagnostics that you can use to update your system. • eDocs: The section includes Acrobat files for PowerEdge systems, storage peripheral, and OpenManage software. • Dell Management Console DVD: The Dell Management Console is a Web-based systems management software that enables you to discover and inventory devices on your network. It also provides advanced functions, such as health and performance monitoring of networked devices and patch management capabilities for Dell systems. • Server Update Utility: In addition to the Systems Management Tools and Documentation and Dell Management Console DVDs, customers have the option to obtain Server Update Utility DVD. This DVD has an inventory tool for managing updates to firmware, BIOS and drivers for either Linux or Windows varieties. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 48 DELL 20.3 Embedded Server Management The PowerEdge T710 implements circuitry for the next generation of Embedded Server Management. It is Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) v2.0 compliant. The optional iDRAC (Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller) is responsible for acting as an interface between the host system and its management software and the periphery devices. These periphery devices consist of the PSUs, the storage backplane, integrated SAS HBA or PERC 6/I, and control panel with display. The optional upgrade to iDRAC6 provides features for managing the server remotely or in data center lights-out environments. Advanced iDRAC features require the installation of the optional iDRAC6 Enterprise card. 20.4 Lifecycle Controller and Unified Server Configurator Embedded management is comprised of several interdependent pieces: • Lifecycle Controller • Unified Server Configurator • iDRAC6 • vFlash Lifecycle controller powers the embedded management features. It is integrated and tamperproof storage for system-management tools and enablement utilities (firmware, drivers, etc.). It is flash partitioned to support multiple, future-use cases. Dell Unified Server Configurator (USC) is a local 1:1 graphical user interface embedded on Lifecycle Controller that aids in local server provisioning in a pre-OS environment. For servers with iDRAC Express, the Lifecycle Controller offers OS install, platform updates, platform configuration, and diagnostics capabilities. For servers without iDRAC Express, this utility has limited functionality and offers OS install and diagnostics capabilities only. To access the Unified Server Configurator, press the key within 10 seconds of the Dell logo’s appearance during the system boot process. Current functionality enabled by the Unified Server Configurator includes: Table 22. Unified Server Configurator Features and Description Feature Description Faster O/S Installation Drivers and the installation utility are embedded on system, so no need to scour DELL.COM Faster System Updates Integration with Dell support automatically directed to latest versions of the Unified Server Configurator, iDRAC, RAID, BIOS, NIC, and Power Supply Update Rollback Ability to recover to previous “known good state” for all updatable components More Comprehensive Diagnostics Diagnostic utilities are embedded on system Simplified Hardware Configuration Detects RAID controller and allows user to configure virtual disk and choose virtual disk as boot device, eliminating the need to launch a separate utility. Also provides configuration for iDRAC, BIOS, and NIC/LOM. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 49 DELL 20.5 Optional iDRAC Express The optional iDRAC Express is the first tier of iDRAC6 upgrades. In addition to upgrading the system with a Lifecycle Controller, the iDRAC6 Express offers the following key features: • Graphical web interface • Standard-based interfaces • Server Sensor monitoring and fault alerting • Secure operation of remote access functions including authentication, authorization, and encryption • Power control and management with the ability to limit server power consumption and remotely control server power states • Advanced troubleshooting capabilities For more information on iDRAC6 Express features see table below. 20.6 iDRAC6 Enterprise The optional iDRAC6 Enterprise card provides access to advanced iDRAC6 features. The iDRAC6 Enterprise connects directly to the T710 planar and is mounted parallel to the planar with stand-offs. Key features for the iDRAC6 Enterprise include: • Scripting capability with Dell’s Racadm command-line • Remote video, keyboard, and mouse control with Virtual Console • Remote media access with Virtual Media • Dedicated network interface Additionally, the iDRAC6 Enterprise can be upgraded by adding the vFlash Media card. This is a 1 GB Dell branded SD card that enables a persistent 256 MB virtual flash partition. In the future, vFlash will be expanded to include additional features. A more detailed feature list for iDRAC6 Enterprise and vFlash is included in the table below. Table 23. Features List for BMC, iDrac, and vFlash Feature BMC iDRAC 6 Express iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Media Interface and Standards Support IPMI 2.0 Web-based GUI SNMP WSMAN SMASH-CLP Racadm commandline Conductivity Shared/Failover Network Modes IPv4 VLAN Tagging PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 50 DELL Feature BMC iDRAC 6 Express iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Media IPv6 Dynamic DNS Dedicated NIC Security and Authentication Role-based Authority Local Users Active Directory SSL Encryption Remote Management and Remediation Remote Firmware Update Server power control Serial-over-LAN (with proxy) Serial-over-LAN (no proxy) Power capping Last crash screen capture Boot capture Serial-over-LAN Virtual media Virtual console Virtual console sharing Virtual flash Monitoring Sensor Monitoring and Alerting Real-time Power Monitoring Real-time Power Graphing Historical Power Counters Logging Features System Event Log PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 51 DELL Feature BMC iDRAC 6 Express iDRAC6 Enterprise vFlash Media RAC Log Trace Log 21 Peripherals 21.1 USB peripherals The T710 system supports the following USB devices: • DVD-ROM (bootable; requires two USB ports) • USB Key (bootable) • Keyboard (only one USB keyboard is supported) • Mouse (only one USB mouse is supported) 21.2 External Storage 22 Packaging Options The T710 is only available in a single system package. Multipack options are not available. PowerEdge T710 Technical Guidebook 52 DELL Appendix A. T710 Volatility Table Table 24. T710 Volatility Table NonVolatile RAM Volatile RAM Reference Designator Qty Planar, PE T710 System BIOS SPI Flash Y U55 1 Ethernet Controller Config Data Y TBD 2 ESM Firmware Y U18 1 System CPLD Y U53 1 MASER Daughtercard Internal Flash Y U_EMMC 1 MASER Daughtercard FRU Y U_FRU 1 TPM ID EEPROM (on TPM board) Y U_SEEPROM 1 TPM Binding EEPROM (on planar) Y U116 1 ESM SDRAM Y U13 1 ESM SEL/FRU Y U5 1 ESM Boot Flash Y U9 1 System RAM Y J40-48; J55-63 18 Control Panel System Identification EEPROM Y U_SYS_ID 1 Backplane 2.5”/3.5” PSOC Embedded Flash Y U_SEP 2/1 Power Supply PSU Microcontroller Y TBD 1 PERC 6/i Integrated ROMB NVSRAM Config Data Y U23 1 ROMB Firmware Y U24 1 ROMB Cache RAM Y U58-61 4 FRU Y U40 1 CPLD Y U_CPLD 1 SAS 6/iR Integrated SCSI Controller Configuration Data Y U3 1 FRU Y U4 1 Integrated Mirroring NVSRAM Y U1 1 AMEA SD Card Y J_SD 1 FRU Y U_FRU 1 PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide The M1000e chassis provides flexibility, power and thermal efficiency with scalability for future needs. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 1 This document is for informational purposes only. Dell reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein. The content provided is as is and without express or implied warranties of any kind. Dell, PowerEdge, PowerConnect, RapidRails, VersaRails, FlexAddress, and OpenManage are trademarks of Dell, Inc. Avocent is a registered trademark of Avocent Corporation or its subsidiaries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Brocade is a registered trademark of Brocade Communications Systems, Inc., in the United States and/or in other countries. Cisco and Catalyst are registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and certain other countries. Citrix® and XenServer™ are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. and/or one or more of its subsidiaries, and may be registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. Egenera registered trademarks of Egenera, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. InfiniBand is a registered trademark and service mark of the InfiniBand Trade Association. Intel and Xeon are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Mellanox is a registered trademark of Mellanox Technologies, Inc. Microsoft, Windows Server, Active Directory, and Hyper-V are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Platespin and PowerConvert are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc., in the United States and other countries. Velcro is a registered trademark of Velcro Industries B.V. VMware is a registered trademark and vCenter is a trademark of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other jurisdictions. Dell disclaims proprietary interest in the marks and names of others. ©Copyright 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction or translation of any part of this work beyond that permitted by U.S. copyright laws without the written permission of Dell Inc. is unlawful and strictly forbidden. Initial Release June 2010 Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 2 Table of Contents 1 Product Comparison ...........................................................................................5 2 New Technologies..............................................................................................7 2.1 Overview ..................................................................................................7 2.2 Detailed Information ....................................................................................7 3 System Information ............................................................................................9 3.1 Overview ..................................................................................................9 3.2 Product Features Summary .............................................................................9 4 Mechanical.................................................................................................... 10 4.1 Chassis Description..................................................................................... 10 4.2 Dimensions and Weight................................................................................ 10 4.3 Front Panel View and Features ...................................................................... 10 4.4 Back Panel Features ................................................................................... 12 4.5 Power Supply Indicators............................................................................... 12 4.6 Rails and Cable Management......................................................................... 13 4.7 Rack Support............................................................................................ 16 4.8 Rack View ............................................................................................... 16 4.9 Fans ...................................................................................................... 17 4.10 Cabling................................................................................................... 21 4.11 Control Panel/LCD ..................................................................................... 22 4.12 Security.................................................................................................. 24 5 Power, Thermal, Acoustic .................................................................................. 26 5.1 Power Supplies ......................................................................................... 26 5.1.1 Supported Voltages .............................................................................. 27 5.1.2 Redundancy ....................................................................................... 27 5.1.3 Power Management .............................................................................. 29 5.2 Power Supply Specifications.......................................................................... 30 5.3 Heat Dissipation ........................................................................................ 30 5.4 Environmental Specifications......................................................................... 33 5.5 Power Consumption.................................................................................... 33 5.6 Maximum Input Amps .................................................................................. 33 5.7 Power-Up Sequence ................................................................................... 33 5.8 Acoustics ................................................................................................ 33 6 Processors and Memory ..................................................................................... 35 7 Midplane....................................................................................................... 36 8 Embedded NICs/LAN on Motherboard (LOM)............................................................. 39 9 I/O ............................................................................................................. 40 9.1 Overview ................................................................................................ 40 9.2 Quantities and Priorities .............................................................................. 41 9.3 Supported Mezzanine Cards and Switches .......................................................... 44 9.4 I/O Module Installation................................................................................ 45 9.5 FlexAddress ............................................................................................. 45 10 Storage ........................................................................................................ 51 11 Video........................................................................................................... 52 12 Rack Information............................................................................................. 53 Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 3 12.1 Overview ................................................................................................ 53 12.2 Rails ...................................................................................................... 53 12.3 Cable Management Arm (CMA)....................................................................... 54 12.4 Rack View ............................................................................................... 55 13 Virtualization ................................................................................................. 57 14 Systems Management........................................................................................ 59 14.1 Overview ................................................................................................ 59 14.2 Server Management.................................................................................... 60 14.3 Enclosure Management................................................................................ 61 14.4 Integrated Keyboard and Mouse Controller (iKVM)................................................ 65 15 Peripherals .................................................................................................... 68 16 Packaging Options ........................................................................................... 69 Tables Table 1. Comparison of PowerEdge 1855/1955 Chassis and M1000e Chassis ............................5 Table 2. Rack vs. Blade Server Rack-Level Specification Comparison ...................................6 Table 3. Feature Summary .....................................................................................9 Table 4. Dimensions ........................................................................................... 10 Table 5. Typical Modular Server System Rack Height and Cable Reduction........................... 13 Table 6. Fabric Specifications................................................................................ 43 Table 7. FlexAddress Features and Benefits ............................................................... 47 Figures Figure 1. Server Density Comparison ..........................................................................5 Figure 2. M1000e Front View.................................................................................. 10 Figure 3. Possible Server Module Sizes, Front Panel View ................................................ 11 Figure 4. Example Server Module Configurations .......................................................... 11 Figure 5. Power Supply Indicators............................................................................ 12 Figure 6. Rack Cabling ......................................................................................... 14 Figure 7. RapidRails Rack Kit Contents ...................................................................... 15 Figure 8. VersaRails Rack Kit Contents ...................................................................... 15 Figure 9. M1000e in a Rack.................................................................................... 16 Figure 10. Rear View Showing Fans......................................................................... 17 Figure 11. Blades, Blanks, and 1 Open Slot Needing to be Filled ...................................... 18 Figure 12. Power Supply, Power Supply Blanks, and Open Slot Needing to be Filled ............... 18 Figure 13. I/O Module and Open Slot Needing to be Filled ............................................. 19 Figure 14. Installed CMC, I/O Module, and Power Supply Blanks ...................................... 20 Figure 15. Installed iKVM Blank ............................................................................. 20 Figure 16. Power Supply, CMC, and I/O Module Blanks.................................................. 21 Figure 17. Simplified Cabling................................................................................ 22 Figure 18. M1000e LCD Panel Recessed Position ......................................................... 23 Figure 19. M1000e LCD Panel During Usage ............................................................... 23 Figure 20. LCD Panel Capabilities........................................................................... 24 Figure 21. Power Supplies in M1000e....................................................................... 26 Figure 22. M1000e Power Supply Rear View............................................................... 27 Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 4 Figure 23. Power Architecture .............................................................................. 28 Figure 24. PMBus Communication Channels ............................................................... 30 Figure 25. Server Cooling Air Profile ....................................................................... 31 Figure 26. I/O Module Inlet and IOM Locations ........................................................... 31 Figure 27. I/O Cooling Air Profile........................................................................... 32 Figure 28. Power Supply Inlet and Cooling Air Profile ................................................... 32 Figure 29. Midplane........................................................................................... 36 Figure 30. M1000e Midplane Front View ................................................................... 37 Figure 31. M1000e Midplane Rear View .................................................................... 38 Figure 32. M1000e I/O Modules ............................................................................. 40 Figure 33. High Speed I/O Architecture ................................................................... 42 Figure 34. Ethernet Growth Path ........................................................................... 43 Figure 35. Difference Between Passthroughs and Switch Modules ..................................... 44 Figure 36. FlexAddress Addresses........................................................................... 46 Figure 37. FlexAddress Screen in the CMC................................................................. 47 Figure 38. FlexAddress SD Card ............................................................................. 48 Figure 39. SD Slot on bottom of CMC....................................................................... 48 Figure 40. CMC FlexAddress Summary Screen............................................................. 49 Figure 41. CMC FlexAddress Server Detail Screen ........................................................ 50 Figure 42. Examples of Major Storage Platforms Supported ............................................ 51 Figure 43. M1000e RapidRails Static Rails ................................................................. 53 Figure 44. M1000e VersaRails Static Rails ................................................................. 54 Figure 45. M1000e Strain Relief Bar and Cable Enumerator Clip (12 Per Kit) ........................ 55 Figure 46. M1000e Mounted in the Rack ................................................................... 55 Figure 47. M1000e Strain Relief Bar and Cable Enumerator Clips...................................... 56 Figure 48. Examples of Major Virtualization Platforms Supported..................................... 57 Figure 49. Examples of I/O modules Recommended for Use in Virtualized Environments ......... 58 Figure 50. System Management Architecture Simplified Block Diagram .............................. 60 Figure 51. Chassis Management Controller................................................................ 63 Figure 52. CMC Module Features ............................................................................ 64 Figure 53. M1000e iKVM ...................................................................................... 65 Figure 54. Rear iKVM interface Panel ...................................................................... 66 Figure 55. Front Keyboard/Video Ports .................................................................... 66 Figure 56. Enclosure After Unpacking...................................................................... 69 Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 5 1 Product Comparison The Dell™ PowerEdge™ M1000e offers significant enhancements over its predecessor, the 1955, as can be seen in the following table: Table 1. Comparison of PowerEdge 1855/1955 Chassis and M1000e Chassis Feature 1855/1955 Chassis M1000e Chassis Blade Compatibility PowerEdge 1855/1955 PowerEdge M600/M605 11G and beyond Form Factor 7U 10U No. of Blades 10 16 I/O Module Bay 4 6 Fabric Types Supported 1 x Dual GbE 1 x Dual Xaui 1 Lane – GbE, FC2 4 Lane – 4 x IB 2 x 2 Lane to support: GbE2 x 4 2 X 4 Lane to support: 1 Lane – GbE, 10GbE serial/KR, FC8/4/2/1 4 Lane – IB, 10GbE (Xaui. KR), 40GbE Power Supplies 2 x (non-redundant) or 4 x 2100W PSUs 3 x non-redundant) or 6 x 2360W PSUs Management Modules 1 (std) 2nd(optional) 1 (std) 2nd(optional) KVM options 1 x Avocent® Analog or Digital KVM 1 x Avocent® Analog KVM (optional) Putting 16 half-height blades in the PowerEdge M1000e is 60% more dense than using 1U servers. Figure 1. Server Density Comparison Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 6 Greater density means: • Smaller Footprint • More Processing Performance • More RAM capacity • Lower Power Consumption per unit • Easier Manageability Dell’s blade server platform offers superior feature density over comparable rack servers, as can be seen from 0. (Darker blue shading indicates increased memory density.) Table 2. Rack vs. Blade Server Rack-Level Specification Comparison1 R410 R510 R610 R710 R810 R815 R905 R910 M605 M610 M710 M805 M905 M910 Form Factor Rack2 Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack 1/2 Blade 1/2 Blade Full Blade Full Blade Full Blade Full Blade Processors Manufacturer Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel AMD AMD Intel AMD Intel Intel AMD AMD Intel Sockets 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 4 4 Max Cores per 42U Rack 504 252 504 252 672 1,008 240 320 768 768 384 384 768 1,024 Memory Max RAM per rack, in TB 5 3 8 4 11 5 3 10 4 12 6 4 6 16 I/O Max 1GB Ethernet Ports per 42U Rack 252 378 504 420 588 588 320 440 512 640 576 512 512 640 Max 10GbE, DDR IB, or FC network ports per rack 84 168 168 84 252 252 140 220 256 256 256 256 256 256 Internal Storage3 Drives per 42U rack 168 252 252 168 126 126 50 160 128 128 128 64 64 64 Max 7.2k or 10k rpm internal storage per rack 336 504 151 252 76 76 50 96 77 77 77 38 38 38 Max 15k rpm internal storage per 42U rack 101 151 37 76 18 18 15 23 19 19 19 9 9 9 Max SSD internal storage per 42U rack 17 25 25 17 13 13 0 16 13 13 13 6 6 6 1 This rack-level physical capacity specification summary does not factor in power and cooling. 2 42U is the most common rack size. 3 Storage measurements provided in Terabytes. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 7 2 New Technologies 2.1 Overview The PowerEdge M1000e is designed to help customers be more efficient with time, power and cooling, investment, and system performance. It is a breakthrough Dell engineered and patentpending design that maximizes flexibility, power and thermal efficiency, system-wide availability, performance, and manageability. The chassis integrates the latest in management, I/O, power and cooling technologies in a modular, easy-to-use package. Designed from the ground up to support current and future generations of server, storage, networking, and management technologies, the PowerEdge M1000e includes the headroom necessary to scale for the future. Dell optimized the PowerEdge M1000e Modular Server Enclosure and Server Modules to: • Maximize flexibility—modular I/O, power, cooling, and management architecture. • Maximize longevity—optimized power and cooling design supports current and future generations of server modules and I/O. I/O bandwidth to support not only today’s generation of 10Gb Ethernet, 20Gbps InfiniBand and 4Gbps Fibre Channel, but up to 40Gbps QDR InfiniBand, 10Gbps Serial Ethernet, and 8Gbps Fibre Channel. • Lower total cost of ownership (TCO)—lower cost than rack-mount servers with equivalent features. Best in class power and cooling efficiency. The PowerEdge M1000e Modular Server Enclosure solution supports server modules, network, storage, and cluster interconnect modules (switches and passthrough modules), a high-performance and highly available passive midplane that connects server modules to the infrastructure components, power supplies, fans, integrated KVM and Chassis Management Controllers (CMC). The PowerEdge M1000e uses redundant and hot‐pluggable components throughout to provide maximum uptime. The M1000e provides identical and symmetric fabric options B and C for each modular server. Ethernet I/O switches support I/O sub-modules that provide external I/O flexibility of stacking ports, 10GE copper ports, or 10GE optical ports. True modularity at the system and subsystem level provides simplicity of extension and enhancement, now and in the future. The main benefits to customers of these features include improved: • Data center density • Power & cooling efficiency • Flexibility • Scalability • Virtualization capability • Ease of deployment • Manageability Together, these factors enable customers to do more with their server investment. 2.2 Detailed Information Virtually unlimited in scalability, the PowerEdge M1000e chassis provides ultimate flexibility in server processor and chipset architectures. Both Intel and AMD server architectures can be supported simultaneously by the M1000e infrastructure, while cutting-edge mechanical, electrical, and software interface definitions enable multi‐generational server support and expansion. The chassis features: Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 8 • A high-speed passive midplane that connects the server modules in the front and power, I/O, and management infrastructure in the rear of the enclosure. • Comprehensive I/O options to support dual links of 40 Gigabits per second today (with 4x QDR InfiniBand®) with future support of even higher bandwidth I/O devices when those technologies become available. This provides high‐speed server module connectivity to the network and storage now and well into the future. • Thorough power-management capabilities including delivering shared power to ensure full capacity of the power supplies available to all server modules. • Broad management ability including private Ethernet, serial, USB, and low-level management connectivity between the Chassis Management Controller (CMC), Keyboard/Video/Mouse (KVM) switch, and server modules. • Up to two Chassis Management Controllers (CMC‐1 is standard, CMC-2 provides optional redundancy) and 1 optional integrated Keyboard/Video/Mouse (iKVM) switch. • Up to 6 hot-pluggable, redundant Power Supplies and 9 hot-pluggable, N+1 redundant fan modules. • System Front Control panel w/ LCD panel and two USB Keyboard/Mouse and one Video ―crash cart‖ connections. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 9 3 System Information 3.1 Overview The Dell PowerEdge M1000e Modular Server Enclosure is a breakthrough in enterprise server architecture. The enclosure and its components spring from a revolutionary, ground-up design incorporating the latest advances in power, cooling, I/O, and management technologies. These technologies are packed into a highly available rack dense package that integrates into standard Dell and third-party 2000mm depth racks. 3.2 Product Features Summary Table 3. Feature Summary Feature Parameter Chassis Size 10U high rack mount Blades per Chassis 16 Half Height, 8 Full Height Total Blades in a 42U Rack 64 Half Height, 32 Full Height Total I/O Module Bays 6 (3 redundant or dual fabrics) Total Power Supplies 6 (3+3 redundant) Total Fan Modules 9 (8+1 redundant) Management Modules and Interfaces 2 CMCs (1+1 redundant), 1 iKVM, Front Control Panel, Graphical LCD Control Panel AC Redundancy 3+3 2+2 1+1 Each requires power supplies in slots 1, 2, and 3 to be connected to a different grid as compared to those in slots 4, 5, and 6. DC Redundancy 1+1 2+1 3+1 4+1 5+1 Each with one extra power supply that comes online if one of the existing power supplies fails. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 10 4 Mechanical 4.1 Chassis Description The Dell M1000e supports up to sixteen half-height or 8 full-height server modules. The chassis guide and retention features are designed such that alternative module form factors are possible. The chassis architecture is flexible enough that server, storage, or other types of front-loading modules are possible. 4.2 Dimensions and Weight Table 4. Dimensions Dimension Measurement Width, not including rack ears 447.5 mm Height 440.5 mm Depth, Rear of EIA Flange to Rear of Chassis 753.6 mm Total System Depth (Front Bezel to PS Latch) 835.99 mm 4.3 Front Panel View and Features Figure 2. M1000e Front View The M1000e enclosure supports up to 16 half‐height or 8 full-height server modules, each occupying a slot accessible in the front of the enclosure. The enclosure has also been designed to accommodate other form factors, including dual-width modules. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 11 Figure 3. Possible Server Module Sizes, Front Panel View Server Modules can be freely located within each 2 x 2 half-height quadrant. The mechanical design of the M1000e has support structures for half-height server modules above or below double-width server modules, and for half-height server modules side-by-side with full-height server modules. Figure 4. Example Server Module Configurations Server modules are accessible from the front of the M1000e enclosure. At the bottom of the enclosure is a flip-out multiple angle LCD screen for local systems management configuration, system information, and status. The front of the enclosure also contains two USB connections for USB keyboard and mouse, a video connection and the system power button. The front control panel’s USB and video ports work only when the iKVM module is installed, as the iKVM provides the capability to switch the KVM between the blades. For more information, see System Control Panel Features in the Hardware Owner’s Manual. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 12 Fresh air plenums are at both top and bottom of the chassis. The bottom fresh air plenum provides non‐preheated air to the M1000e power supplies. The top fresh air plenum provides non‐preheated air to the CMC, iKVM and I/O modules. 4.4 Back Panel Features The rear of the M1000e Enclosure contains system management, cooling, power and I/O components. At the top of the enclosure are slots for two Chassis Management Cards and one integrated KVM switch. The enclosure ships by default with a single CMC, with the option of adding a second CMC to provide a fully redundant, active‐standby fault-tolerant solution for management access and control. Interleaved in the center of the chassis are fans and I/O modules. This arrangement optimizes the balance of airflow through the system, allowing lower pressure build-up in the system and resulting in lower airflow requirements for the fans. For more information, see Back-Panel Features in the Hardware Owner’s Manual. 4.5 Power Supply Indicators Figure 5 shows the power supply indicators. For more information, see Back-Panel Features in the Hardware Owner’s Manual. Figure 5. Power Supply Indicators Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 13 4.6 Rails and Cable Management RapidRailsTM Static Rails for Square Hole Racks: Supports toolless installation in 19‖ EIA-310-E compliant square hole 4-post racks including all generations of Dell racks except for the 4200 & 2400 series Has a minimum rail depth of 703 mm Provides a square-hole rack adjustment range of 712-755 mm Includes strain relief bar and cable enumerators for managing and securing cables VersaRailsTM Static Rails for Square or Round Hole Racks: Supports tooled installation in 19‖ EIA-310-E compliant square or unthreaded round hole 4- post racks Has a minimum rail depth of 703 mm Provides a square-hole rack adjustment range of 706-755 mm Provides a round-hole rack adjustment range of 706-755 mm Includes strain relief bar and cable enumerators for managing and securing cables One of the advantages of a modular server system is the reduction in cable management needs within a rack system. The inclusion of fabric switches, integrated KVM and system management aggregation at the CMCs provides six‐fold or better cable reduction. The following table shows a comparison of a typical reduction available when using the M1000e Modular system with integrated switches, compared to traditional ―rack and stack‖ components. The configuration in the table assumes a server with four Ethernet ports and two Fibre Channel ports. In support of the M1000e, Dell offers a modular system cable management system to ease system installation in Dell or other industry-standard racks. Table 5. Typical Modular Server System Rack Height and Cable Reduction Component Rack Height AC power cables Ethernet Cables FC Cables KVM Cables 2 socket server 1Ux16 2x16 4x16 2x16 USBx16 + VGAx16 KVM 1U 1 ‐ ‐ USBx1 + VGAx1 Ethernet Switches 1Ux4 1x4 4x4 ‐ ‐ FC Switches 1Ux2 1x2 ‐ 2x2 ‐ Total Rack 23U height 39 AC cables 72 Ethernet Cables 36 FC Cables USBx17 + VGAx17 M1000e Equivalent 10U height 6 AC cables 16 Ethernet Cables 4 FC Cables USBx1 + VGAx1 Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 14 Figure 6. Rack Cabling RapidRailsTM Static Rails for Square Hole Racks supports toolless installation in 19‖ EIA-310-E compliant square hole 4-post racks including all generations of Dell racks except for the 4200 & 2400 series. Minimum rail depth is 703 mm. Square-hole rack adjustment range is 712–755 mm. The rail system includes a strain relief bar and cable enumerators for managing and securing cables. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 15 Figure 7. RapidRails Rack Kit Contents Figure 8. VersaRails Rack Kit Contents See Section 12 for more details. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 16 4.7 Rack Support The M1000e chassis offers the following options for rack support: • RapidRails™ static rails for toolless mounting in 4-post racks with square holes • VersaRails™ static rails for tooled mounting in 4-post racks with square or unthreaded round holes See Section 12 for more details. 4.8 Rack View Figure 9. M1000e in a Rack Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 17 4.9 Fans ` Figure 10. Rear View Showing Fans The PowerEdge M1000e chassis comes standard with 9 hot-swappable, redundant fan modules that are distributed evenly across the enclosure. The speed of each fan is individually managed by the CMC. Together, these design innovations can provide: • Significant power savings as compared to older servers • Less airflow required as compared to the same number of similarly configured 1U servers • A similar acoustic profile as compared to previous servers Fans are N+1 redundant, meaning that any single fan can fail without impacting system uptime or reliability. In the event of a fan failure, system behavior is dependent on the resultant temperatures of the system, as monitored by the Server Module iDRAC and I/O Modules. The CMC continues to interpret the airflow needs of each server and I/O module to control the fan speeds appropriately. The system will not ramp the fans to full speed in the event of a fan failure unless deemed necessary by on‐board monitoring. Failure of more than one fan will not automatically result in shutting down of blade servers. This is because the blade servers have their own self-protection mechanisms to prevent them from running too hot. The result of a failure of multiple fans would depend on the configuration, ambient temperature, and workload being run. For example, the processors within a blade are automatically throttled back by that server if they reach a thermal threshold and then shut down if a critical over-temperature threshold is met. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 18 Note: The blank blade, hard drive, and server I/O fillers for every blank slot are required for cooling/airflow reasons. Figure 11. Blades, Blanks, and 1 Open Slot Needing to be Filled Figure 12. Power Supply, Power Supply Blanks, and Open Slot Needing to be Filled Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 19 Figure 13. I/O Module and Open Slot Needing to be Filled Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 20 Figure 14. Installed CMC, I/O Module, and Power Supply Blanks Figure 15. Installed iKVM Blank Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 21 Figure 16. Power Supply, CMC, and I/O Module Blanks 4.10 Cabling There are two types of external cabling simplification features offered: • Stacked Ethernet Switching o Internal switches have optional 10GbE uplinks and/or stacking connectors o Manage/configure multiple switches as one with stacking o Consolidate uplinks from multiple chassis into 2-4 x 10GbE ports • Stacked CMCs o CMC has a 2nd Ethernet port for connection to other CMCs in the rack o CMC connects to the management network to manage all blade servers o Saves port consumption on external switches Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 22 Figure 17. Simplified Cabling 4.11 Control Panel/LCD The control panel contains the local user interface. Functions include chassis level diagnostic LEDs, LCD panel, and power button. This device is hot-pluggable and is always powered, even in chassis standby mode. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 23 Figure 18. M1000e LCD Panel Recessed Position Figure 19. M1000e LCD Panel During Usage The M1000e chassis LCD shows extensive information about the status of each hardware module, network information for the CMC and each iDRAC, and status messages with detailed explanations in plain language. Users may access a wide variety of information about modules via the panel, including their type, user-defined name, configurations, service tag numbers, and IP address Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 24 information. The LCD panel can be retracted into the chassis body, or extended and angled once deployed for full visibility no matter where the M1000e is mounted in the rack. The LCD panel can be used as a diagnostic source and as a place to configure parameters of certain chassis components as well as the server’s iDRAC network configuration. Figure 20 shows some of the capabilities of the LCD control panel. Figure 20. LCD Panel Capabilities The primary function of the LCD panel is to provide real-time information on the health and status of the modules in the enclosure. LCD panel features include: • A deployment setup wizard that allows you to configure the CMC module’s network settings during initial system set up • Menus to configure the iDRAC in each blade • Status information screens for each blade • Status information screens for the modules installed in the back of the enclosure, including the IO modules, fans, CMC, iKVM, and power supplies • A network summary screen listing the IP addresses of all components in the system • Real time power consumption statistics, including high and low values and average power consumption • Ambient temperature values • AC power information • Critical failure alerts and warnings See the M1000e Configuration Guide and the CMC Administrator Reference Guide for more details on the capabilities of the LCD panel. 4.12 Security The M1000e offers many security features, including the ability to: • Assign one admin per blade or one admin per multiple blades • Grant permissions to some blades but not to others • Customize administrative access for CMC, iDRAC, and I/O Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 25 Most of the security capabilities are driven by the CMC, which provides a mechanism for centralized configuration of the M1000e enclosure’s security settings and user access. It is secured by a usermodifiable password. The CMC’s security features include: • User authentication through optional Active Directory and LDAP services or hardware-stored user IDs and passwords • Role-based authority, which enables an administrator to configure specific privileges for each user • User ID and password configuration through the Web interface • Web interface supports 128-bit SSL 3.0 encryption and 40-bit SSL 3.0 encryption (for countries where 128-bit is not acceptable) • Configurable IP ports (where applicable) • Login failure limits per IP address, with login blocking from the IP address when the limit is exceeded • Configurable session auto time out and number of simultaneous sessions • Limited IP address range for clients connecting to the CMC • Secure Shell (SSH), which uses an encrypted layer for higher security • Single Sign-on, Two-Factor Authentication, and Public Key Authentication • Disabling front panel access Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 26 5 Power, Thermal, Acoustic Built on Dell Energy Smart technology, the M1000e is one of the most power-efficient blade solutions on the market. The M1000e enclosure takes advantage of Energy Smart thermal design efficiencies, such as ultra-efficient power supplies and dynamic power-efficient fans with optimized airflow design to efficiently cool the chassis and enable better performance in a lower power envelope. A modular system has many advantages over standard rack mount servers in terms of power optimization, and this aspect was a focal point throughout the M1000e’s conceptualization and development. The key areas of interest are power delivery and power management. The M1000e provides industry-leading power efficiency and density, accomplished through highly efficient components, improved design techniques, and a fresh air plenum that reduces the air temperature to the power supply components. Lower operating temperature equates to higher power density for the power supply (exceeding 21 Watts per cubic inch) and higher power efficiency (better than 87% at 20% load and higher at heavier loads, approaching 91% efficiency under normal operating conditions). Power efficiency in the M1000e does not stop with the power supply. Every aspect of efficiency has been tweaked and improved from previous designs—adding more copper to PC board power planes to reduce I2R losses, improving inductors and other components, increasing efficiencies of DC‐DC converters, and replacing some linear voltage regulators with more-efficient switching regulators. See Section 15 for more information on external power connection accessories. 5.1 Power Supplies The power distribution inside the M1000e Modular Server System consists of a power supply system located in the rear bottom of the chassis. Figure 21. Power Supplies in M1000e Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 27 Figure 22. M1000e Power Supply Rear View The Dell power supplies utilize output Oring FETs to isolate the power supply from the 12V system bus. If a single power supply fails its output Oring FET for that power supply will turn off removing itself from the bus. Think of it as an electrical switch that turns off when the power supply fails. 5.1.1 Supported Voltages Dell currently offers a power supply rated at 2360W 230V. With current sharing between power supplies, total system redundant power is approximately 7080W in a 3+3 power supply configuration. 5.1.2 Redundancy Power redundancy in the M1000e supports any necessary usage model, though the M1000e requires three power supplies to power a fully populated system or six power supplies in a fully redundant system. AC redundancy is supported in the following configurations, each of which requires the power supplies in slots 1, 2, and 3 to be connected to a different grid as compared to those in slots 4, 5, and 6. • 3+3 • 2+2 • 1+1 DC redundancy is supported in the following configurations, each with one extra power supply that comes online if one of the existing power supplies fails: Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 28 • 1+1 • 2+1 • 3+1 • 4+1 • 5+1 When Dynamic Power Supply Engagement (DPSE) is enabled, the PSU units move between On and Off states depending upon actual power draw conditions to achieve high power efficiency by driving fewer supplies to maximum versus all with partial and less-efficient loading. In the N+N power supply configuration, the system will provide protection against AC grid loss or power supply failures. If one power grid fails, three power supplies lose their AC source, and the three power supplies on the other grid remain powered, providing sufficient power for the system to continue running. In the N+1 configuration only power supply failures are protected, not grid failures. The likelihood of multiple power supplies failing at the same time is remote. In the N+0 configuration there is no power protection and any protection must be provided at the node or chassis level. Typically this case is an HPCC or other clustered environment where redundant power is not a concern, since the parallelism of the processing nodes across multiple system chassis provides all the redundancy that is necessary. The midplane carries all 12 Volt DC power for the system, both main power and standby power. The CMCs, LCD and Control Panel are powered solely by 12 Volt Standby power, insuring that chassis level management is operational in the chassis standby state, whenever AC power is present. The server modules, I/O Modules, Fans, and iKVM are powered solely by 12 Volt Main power. Figure 23. Power Architecture Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 29 5.1.3 Power Management Power is no longer just about power delivery, it is also about power management. The M1000e System offers many advanced power management features. Most of these features operate transparently to the user, while others require only a one time selection of desired operating modes. Shared power takes advantage of the large number of resources in the modular server, distributing power across the system without the excess margin required in dedicated rack mount servers and switches. The M1000e has an advanced power budgeting feature, controlled by the CMC and negotiated in conjunction with the iDRAC on every server module. Prior to any server module powering up, through any of its power up mechanisms such as AC recovery, WOL or a simple power button press, the server module iDRAC performs a sophisticated power budget inventory for the server module, based upon its configuration of CPUs, memory, I/O and local storage. Once this number is generated, the iDRAC communicates the power budget inventory to the CMC, which confirms the availability of power from the system level, based upon a total chassis power inventory, including power supplies, iKVM, I/O Modules, fans and server modules. Since the CMC controls when every modular system element powers on, it can set power policies on a system level. In coordination with the CMC, iDRAC hardware constantly monitors actual power consumption at each server module. This power measurement is used locally by the server module to insure that its instantaneous power consumption never exceeds the budgeted amount. While the system administrator may never notice these features in action, what they enable is a more aggressive utilization of the shared system power resources. Thus the system is never ―flying blind‖ in regards to power consumption, and there is no danger of exceeding power capacity availability, which could result in a spontaneous activation of power supply over current protection without these features. The system administrator can also set priorities for each server module. The priority works in conjunction with the CMC power budgeting and iDRAC power monitoring to insure that the lowest priority blades are the first to enter any power optimization mode, should conditions warrant the activation of this feature. Power capping is set at the chassis level for our blade servers and not at the blade server level, so components like processer, memory can throttle down when necessary on lower priority blade servers. An allocation is taken out for the infrastructure (fans, IO modules) and then the remainder is applied to the blades, and then throttling is applied if required to get under the cap. If all the blades are setup with the same priority, then it will start throttling down processor, memory, and so on. A variety of BIOS settings will throttle the processor or not depending on load: If power consumption demands exceed available power, the enclosure ―throttles‖ back the power supplied to blades as prioritized in the CMC. The blades will not shut down; rather they will slow down if necessary; Dell designed the system this way on purpose, in response to customer feedback that they did not want the blades to shut themselves down under any condition. I/O modules, on the other hand, will shut down prior to permanent damage, as they are less tolerant to power variation than the blade server hardware. The M1000e is compliant with the PMBus Specification 1.1, using this power management standard for status, measurement and control. The M1000e power supplies continuously monitor AC input current, voltage and power, enabling exposure of data to Dell™ OpenManage™ IT Assistant or to other enterprise-level management tools. Real time power consumption is viewable per system. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 30 Figure 24. PMBus Communication Channels All VMware® products include consuming the "current power consumption" and "current power cap/limit" retrieval via Dell specific IPMI commands using iDRAC. They are using this to report the total power consumed by the server and also using this as part of their calculations to determine/approximate the VM-level power. The Power Management chapter in the Dell Chassis Management Controller (CMC) User Guide provides extensive information on power management. 5.2 Power Supply Specifications Each power supply offers: • 91%+ AC/DC Conversion Efficiency • Dynamic Power Supply Engagement which automatically engages the minimum number of supplies required to power a given configuration, maximizing power supply efficiency The following are the PowerEdge M-1000e chassis power supply capabilities: • 2360 watts maximum for each PSU • 220 VAC (Volts Alternate Current) input (a single PSU runs between 180V and 260V AC) • 50Hz or 60Hz input • 14A maximum input • 192A (Amps) @ + 12 Volts DC ( Direct Current) output Operational • 4.5A @ +12 Volt output Standby • 3 or 6 PSU configurations available • PSUs are hot-swappable 5.3 Heat Dissipation The cooling strategy for the M1000e supports a low‐impedance, high‐efficiency design philosophy. Driving lower airflow impedance allows the M1000e to draw air through the system at a lower operating pressure and reduces the system fan power consumed to meet the airflow requirements of the system. The low impedance design is coupled with a high‐efficiency air-moving device designed explicitly for the PowerEdge M1000e chassis. The efficiency of an air-moving device is defined as the work output Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 31 of the fan as compared to the electrical power required to run the fan. The M1000e fan operates at extreme efficiencies which correlates directly into savings in the customer’s required power‐to‐cool. The high‐efficiency design philosophy also extends into the layout of the subsystems within the M1000e. The Server Modules, I/O Modules, and Power Supplies are incorporated into the system with independent airflow paths. This isolates these components from pre‐heated air, reducing the required airflow consumptions of each module. Figure 25. Server Cooling Air Profile The Server Modules are cooled with traditional front‐to‐back cooling. As shown in the figure, the front of the system is dominated by inlet area for the individual server modules. The air passes through the server modules, through venting holes in the midplane, and is then drawn into the fans which exhaust the air from the chassis. There are plenums both upstream of the midplane, between the midplane and the blades, and downstream of the midplane, between the midplane and the fans, to more evenly distribute the cooling potential from the three columns of fans across the server modules. Figure 26. I/O Module Inlet and IOM Locations Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 32 Figure 27. I/O Cooling Air Profile The I/O Modules use a bypass duct to draw ambient air from the front of the system to the I/O Module inlet, as seen in the figure. This duct is located above the server modules. This cool air is then drawn down through the I/O Modules in a top to bottom flow path and into the plenum between the midplane and fans, from where it is exhausted from the system. Figure 28. Power Supply Inlet and Cooling Air Profile The Power Supplies, located in the rear of the system, use basic front‐to‐back cooling, but draw their inlet air from a duct located beneath the server modules, as seen in the figure above. This insures that the power supplies receive ambient temperature air. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 33 This hardware design is coupled with a thermal cooling algorithm that incorporates the following: • Server module level thermal monitoring by the iDRAC • I/O module thermal health monitors • Fan control and monitoring by the CMC The iDRAC on each server module calculates the amount of airflow required on an individual server module level and sends a request to the CMC. This request is based on temperature conditions on the server module, as well as passive requirements due to hardware configuration. Concurrently, each IOM can send a request to the CMC to increase or decrease cooling to the I/O subsystem. The CMC interprets these requests, and can control the fans as required to maintain Server and I/O Module airflow at optimal levels. 5.4 Environmental Specifications See the Getting Started Guide on support.dell.com. 5.5 Power Consumption Use the Dell Energy Smart Solution Advisor (ESSA) to see requirements for a specific chassis configuration. 5.6 Maximum Input Amps See Power Distribution Systems for the Dell M1000e Modular Server Enclosure – Selection and Installation. 5.7 Power-Up Sequence The following steps detail how and in what order the M1000e components are powered up: 1. The first power supply provides a small amount of electricity which starts up the first CMC. 2. CMC begins to boot and power up the power supply units. 3. Active and Standby CMC boot up Linux® operating system. 4. Active CMC powers up all remaining PSUs. 5. All six PSUs are powered up. 6. Server iDRAC are powered up. (In slot priority order from 1–9; i.e., highest priority 1 slots first, then priority 2, etc. If all same priority, goes in slot order 1–16. Each one is spaced apart by 500ms.) 7. iKVM is powered up. 8. IOM modules are powered up. 9. Depending upon Blade BIOS power setting (last power state, always on or always off), blade iDRAC requests power up from CMC first come/first served in order from #6. 10. CMC powers up blades. For full configuration, booting the enclosure takes between 2–4 minutes, followed by 1–4 minutes for each blade. 5.8 Acoustics The M1000e is engineered for sound quality in accordance with the Dell Enterprise acoustical specification. Compared to previous generations of products, the fans have more levels of control and finer tuning of the fan behavior. Firmware is optimized to choose the lowest fan speeds and Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 34 therefore the lowest acoustical output for any configuration (components installed), operating condition (applications being run), and ambient temperature. Because acoustical output is dependent and indeed minimized for each combination of these variables, no single acoustical level (sound pressure level or sound power level) represents the M1000e, and instead boundaries on sound power level are provided below: • Lowest Fan Speed: Upper Limit A-weighted Sound Power Level, LwA-UL, is 7.5 bels • Full Fan Speed: Upper Limit A-weighted Sound Power Level, LwA-UL, is 9.7 bels • LwA-UL is the upper limit sound power level (LwA) calculated per section 4.4.2 of ISO 9296 (1988) and measured in accordance to ISO 7779 (1999) • Acoustical models have been provided to predict performance between these bounds in the ESSA tool: http://solutions.dell.com/DellStarOnline/Launch.aspx/ESSA A few things to be aware of: • Fans are loud when running at full speed. It is rare that fans need to run at full speed. Please ensure that components are operating properly if fans remain at full speed. • The CMC will automatically raise and lower the fan speed to a setting that is appropriate to keep all modules cool. • If a single fan is removed, all fans will be set to 50% speed if the enclosure is in Standby mode; if the enclosure is powered on, removal of a single fan is treated like a failure (nothing happens). • Re-installation of a fan will cause the rest of the fans to settle back to a quieter state. • Whenever communication to the CMC or iDRAC is lost such as during firmware update, the fan speed will increase and create more noise. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 35 6 Processors and Memory With the addition of the PowerEdge M910 server to the PowerEdge portfolio, the M1000e is now scalable to 256 cores & 4TB of RAM: 4 sockets x 8 cores x 8 blades = 256 Cores; 32 DIMM sockets x 16GB DIMMs x 8 Blades = 4096GB or 4TB RAM. See the Technical Guide for each of the compatible blade servers offered for more details on processors and memory offered. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 36 7 Midplane Though hidden from view in an actively running system, the midplane is the focal point for all connectivity within the M1000e Modular System. The midplane is a large printed circuit board providing power distribution, fabric connectivity, and system management infrastructure. Additionally it allows airflow paths for the front-to-back cooling system through ventilation holes. Figure 29. Midplane As is requisite for fault-tolerant systems, the M1000e midplane is completely passive, with no hidden stacking midplanes or interposers with active components. I/O fabrics and system management are fully redundant from each hot pluggable item. The system management Ethernet fabric is fully redundant when two CMCs are installed, with two point-to-point connections from each server module. The midplane serves as transport for a patent-pending, time-division–multiplexed serial bus for general purpose I/O reduction. This serial bus contributes greatly to the midplane’s I/O lane count reduction, which is typically burdened with a significant I/O pin and routing channel count of largely static or low-speed functions. For instance, all Fibre Channel I/O Passthrough module LED and SFP status information is carried over this bus, which alone eliminates over one hundred point-to-point connections that would otherwise be required. The time division multiplexed serial bus is fully redundant, with health monitoring, separate links per CMC and error checking across all data. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 37 Figure 30. M1000e Midplane Front View The system is designed for receptacles on all midplane connectors and pins on all pluggable components, so any potential for bent pins is limited to the pluggable field replaceable unit, not to the system. This contributes to the high reliability and uptime of the M1000e modular system. The midplane is physically attached to the enclosure front structural element. It is aligned by guide‐pins and edges in all 3 axes. This provides close tolerance alignment between the server modules and their midplane connections. The midplane has been carefully designed to minimize the impact to the overall system airflow. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 38 Figure 31. M1000e Midplane Rear View All M1000e midplane routing is fully isolated, supporting all chassis power, fabric, system management, and fault-tolerance requirements. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 39 8 Embedded NICs/LAN on Motherboard (LOM) See the Technical Guide for each of the compatible blade servers. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 40 9 I/O 9.1 Overview Dell M-series provides complete, snap-in FlexI/O scalability down to the switch interconnects. Flex I/O technology is the foundation of the M1000e I/O subsystem. Customers may mix and match I/O modules, including Cisco®, Dell™ PowerConnect™, Fibre Channel, and InfiniBand options. The I/O modules may be installed singly or in redundant pairs. See I/O Connectivity in the Hardware Owner’s Manual for detailed information. Figure 32. M1000e I/O Modules These I/O modules are connected to the blades through three redundant I/O fabrics. The enclosure was designed for 5+ years of I/O bandwidth and technology. The I/O system offers customers a wide variety of options to meet nearly any network need: • Complete, on-demand switch design • Easily scale to provide additional uplink and stacking functionality • No need to waste your current investment with a ―rip and replace‖ upgrade • Flexibility to scale Ethernet stacking and throughput • Partnered Solutions with Cisco, Emulex and Brocade • Quad Data Rate InfiniBand Switch options available for HPCC • Up to 8 high-speed ports Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 41 • Cisco® Virtual Blade Switch capability • Ethernet Port Aggregator • Virtualization of Ethernet ports for integration into any Ethernet fabric • Fibre Channel products from Brocade and Emulex offering powerful connectivity to Dell/EMC SAN fabrics • High-availability clustering inside a single enclosure or between two enclosures Each server module connects to traditional network topologies while providing sufficient bandwidth for multi‐generational product lifecycle upgrades. I/O fabric integration encompasses networking, storage, and interprocessor communications (IPC). 9.2 Quantities and Priorities There are three supported high-speed fabrics per M1000e half‐height server module, with two flexible fabrics using optional plug-in mezzanine cards on the server, and one connected to the LOMs on the server. The ports on the server module connect via the midplane to the associated I/O Modules (IOM) in the rear of the enclosure, which then connect to the customer’s LAN/SAN/IPC networks. The optional mezzanine cards are designed to connect via 8-lane PCIe to the server module’s chipset in most cases. Mezzanine cards may have either one dual port ASIC with 4- or 8-lane PCIe interfaces or dual ASICs, each with 4-lane PCIe interfaces. External fabrics are routed through high-speed, 10- Gigabit-per-second–capable air dielectric connector pins through the planar and midplane. For best signal integrity, the signals isolate transmit and receive signals for minimum crosstalk. Differential pairs are isolated with ground pins and signal connector columns are staggered to minimize signal coupling. The M1000e system management hardware and software includes Fabric Consistency Checking, preventing the accidental activation of any misconfigured fabric device on a server module. The system will automatically detect this misconfiguration and alert the user of the error. No damage occurs to the system, and the user will have the ability to reconfigure the faulted module. M1000e I/O is fully scalable to current and future generations of server modules and I/O Modules. There are three redundant multi‐lane fabrics in the system, as illustrated in Figure 33. In its original configuration, the M1000e midplane is enabled to support up to four Gigabit Ethernet links per server module on Fabric A. Thus, potential data bandwidth for Fabric A is 4 Gbps per halfheight server module. A future midplane upgrade may enable higher bandwidth on Fabric A. The M1000e provides full 10/100/1000M Ethernet support when using Ethernet passthrough modules enabling you to connect to any legacy infrastructure whether using Ethernet passthrough or switch technology. This technical advance uses in-band signaling on 1000BASE‐KX transport and requires no user interaction for enablement. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 42 Figure 33. High Speed I/O Architecture Fabric B and C are identical, fully customizable fabrics, routed as two sets of four lanes from mezzanine cards on the server modules to the I/O Modules in the rear of the chassis. Supported bandwidth ranges from 1 to 10 Gbps per lane depending on the fabric type used. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 43 Table 6. Fabric Specifications Fabric Encoding Symbol Rate Per Lane (Gbps) Data Rate Per Lane (Gbps) Data Rate Per Link (Gbps) Lanes Per Link Per Industry Specification PCIe Gen1 8B/10B 2.5 2 8 (4 lane) 1,2,4,8,12,16,32 PCIe Gen2 8B/10B 5 4 16 (4 lane) 1,2,4,8,12,16,32 SATA 3Gbps 8B/10B 3 2.4 2.4 1 SATA 6Gbps 8B/10B 6 4.8 4.8 1 SAS 3Gbps 8B/10B 3 2.4 2.4 1-Any SAS 6Gbps 8B/10B 6 4.8 4.8 1-Any FC 4Gbps 8B/10B 4.25 3.4 3.4 1 FC 8bps 8B/10B 8.5 6.8 6.8 1 IB SDR 8B/10B 2.5 2 8 (4 lane) 4,12 IB DDR 8B/10B 5 4 16 (4 lane) 4,12 IB QDR 8B/10B 10 8 32 (4 lane) 4,12 GbE: 1000BASEKX 8B/10B 1.25 1 1 1 10GbE: 10GBASE-KX4 8B/10B 3.125 2.5 10 (4 lane) 4 10GbE: 10GBASE-KR 64B/66B 10.3125 10 10 1 Figure 34. Ethernet Growth Path The M1000e is designed for full support of all near-, medium- and long-term I/O infrastructure needs. While the M1000e system’s bandwidth capabilities lead the industry, the M1000e is also intelligently designed for maximum cost, flexibility and performance benefit. While Fabric A is dedicated to the server module LOMs, requiring Ethernet switch or passthrough modules for I/O slots A1 and A2, Fabrics B and C can be populated with Ethernet, Fibre Channel, or InfiniBand solutions. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 44 I/O Modules are used as pairs, with two modules servicing each server module fabric providing a fully redundant solution. I/O Modules may be passthroughs or switches. Passthrough modules provide direct 1:1 connectivity from each LOM/mezzanine card port on each server module to the external network. Switches provide an efficient way to consolidate links from the LOM or Mezzanine cards on the server modules to uplinks into the customer’s network. Figure 35. Difference Between Passthroughs and Switch Modules For more information on the I/O module options, see the PowerEdge M-Series Blades I/O Guide. 9.3 Supported Mezzanine Cards and Switches Dell supports one mezzanine design standard and one I/O Module design standard for true modular computing. The currently supported I/O modules include: • PowerConnect M6220 Switch; GbE + 10GbE uplinks & stacking • PowerConnect M6348 Switch; 48 1GbE ports + 10GbE uplinks • PowerConnect M8024 10Gb Ethernet Switch (SFP+, CX4, & 10Gbase-T uplink module options) • Cisco® Catalyst® 3032 switch; All 1GbE • Cisco Catalyst 3130g Switch; All 1GbE + stacking • Cisco Catalyst 3130x Switch; 1GbE+ 10GbE uplinks & stacking • Cisco 3130g & 3130x switches can be combined in a stack • 1Gb Ethernet Pass-Through Module • 10Gb Ethernet Pass-Through Module (SFP+) • Brocade® 8Gb Fibre Channel Switch Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 45 • 4Gb Fibre Channel Pass-Through • Mellanox® DDR (20Gb) InfiniBand Switch • Mellanox QDR (40Gb) InfiniBand Switch See the Ethernet I/O Cards page on Dell.com for supported I/O hardware. 9.4 I/O Module Installation For detailed information on installing the I/O modules in your system, see the I/O Modules section in the Hardware Owner’s Manual for your specific PowerEdge server. 9.5 FlexAddress FlexAddress™ delivers persistent storage and network identities, equipping a data center to handle predictable or even unplanned changes—increase, upgrade, or replace servers without affecting the network or storage and minimizing downtime. Dell’s patent-pending FlexAddress technology allows any M-Series blade enclosure to lock the World Wide Name (WWN) of the Fibre Channel controller and Media Access Control (MAC) of the Ethernet and iSCSI controller into a blade slot, instead of to the blade’s hardware as was done in the past. By removing the network and storage identity from the server hardware, customers are now able to upgrade and replace components or the entire server without changing the identity on the network. This technology works with any vendor’s installed I/O module as well as with Dell PowerConnect™ products. FlexAddress delivers the ability to: • Service a blade or IO Mezzanine card, upgrade the IO mezzanine cards to newer technology, or upgrade the entire server with new technology while maintaining the mapping to Ethernet and storage fabrics. This capability allows quick, painless connection and reduces downtime. This capability is especially powerful when operating in a boot from SAN environment. • Quickly obtain a list of all MAC/WWNs in the chassis by slot and be assured these will never change • Efficiently integrate into existing management and network infrastructure Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 46 Figure 36. FlexAddress Addresses FlexAddress replaces the factory-assigned World Wide Name/Media Access Control (WWN/MAC) IDs on a blade with WWN/MAC IDs from the FlexAddress SD card associated with that slot. This userconfigurable feature enables a choice of iSCSI MAC, Ethernet MAC, and/or WWN persistence, and thus allows blades to be swapped without affecting SAN Zoning, iSCSI zoning, or any MAC-dependent functions. The write-protected FlexAddress SD card comes provisioned with unique pool of 208 MACs and 64 WWNs. Other types of SD cards inserted into the CMC’s SD card slot are ignored. FlexAddress can be ordered with a new enclosure or implemented on one already owned by a customer through the purchase of a customer kit. If FlexAddress is purchased with the chassis, it will be installed and active when the system is powered up. In the case of an existing enclosure, FlexAddress requires the addition of one FlexAddress SD card to a CMC and an upgrade to the iDRAC firmware, Ethernet and Fibre Channel controllers’ firmware, server BIOS, and CMC firmware. All blades and CMC MUST have the correct versions of firmware to properly support this feature. When redundant CMCs are installed, it is not necessary to put such an SD card in both CMCs, since the WWN/MAC addresses are pushed to the chassis Control Panel upon enablement for redundancy; if one CMC becomes inoperable, the other CMC still has access to the WWN/MAC addresses in the Control Panel. Blades that are up and running are not affected as they already have their WWN/MACs programmed into their controllers. If a replacement of the control panel is required, the SD card will push the WWN/MACs back to it. It is important to note that the chassis Control Panel also stores CMC configuration information, so it is advisable that customers keep a backup of the CMC configuration file. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 47 The CMC manages the following functions specific to FlexAddress: • Provides user interface for enabling or disabling the FlexAddress feature—on a per-blade-slot basis, a per-fabric basis, or both • Identifies and reports device information for each of the supported fabric types—LOMs, Ethernet, and Fibre Channel mezzanine cards • Validates all the components of the FlexAddress feature—SD card validation, System BIOS, IO controller firmware, CMC firmware, and, iDRAC firmware versions • Reports FlexAddress feature status for each of the blade slots • Provides information for both server-assigned (factory-programmed) and chassis-assigned (FlexAddress) addresses on each supported device • Logs any system-level errors that may prevent the FlexAddress feature from being used on the chassis or on a given device. Figure 37. FlexAddress Screen in the CMC Table 7. FlexAddress Features and Benefits Features Benefits Lock the World Wide Name (WWN) of the Fibre Channel controller and Media Access Control (MAC) of the Ethernet and iSCSI controller into a blade slot, instead of to the blade’s hardware Easily replace blades without network management effort Service or replace a blade or I/O mezzanine card and maintain all address mapping to Ethernet and storage fabrics Ease of management Easy and highly reliable booting from Ethernet or Fibre Channel based Storage Area Networks (SANs) An almost no-touch blade replacement All MAC/WWN/iSCSIs in the chassis will never change Fewer future address name headaches Fast & Efficient integration into existing network infrastructure No need to learn a new management tool Low cost vs switch-based solution FlexAddress is simple and easy to implement Simple and quick to deploy FlexAddress SD card comes with a unique pool of MAC/WWNs and is able to be enabled on a single enclosure at a given time, until disabled No need for the user to configure No risk of duplicates on your network or SAN Works with all I/O modules including Cisco, Brocade, and Dell PowerConnect switches as well as pass-thru modules Choice is independent of switch or pass-through module Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 48 Wake on LAN (WOL) is enabled after a power down and power up of the enclosure. FlexAddress on Ethernet devices is programmed by the module server BIOS. In order for the blade BIOS to program the address, it needs to be operational which requires the blade to be powered up. Once the powerdown and power-up sequence completes, the FlexAddress feature is available for Wake-On-LAN (WOL) function. Following are the four steps required in order to implement FlexAddress on an M1000e: A Chassis Management Controller (CMC) receives a FlexAddress feature card provisioned with a unique pool of: 208 MACs and 64 WWNs. Figure 38. FlexAddress SD Card The FlexAddress card is inserted at factory or to an already installed chassis in an customer location (note: to Enable FlexAddress on an existing chassis, blade BIOS, iDRAC firmware, HBA and Ethernet controller firmware, and CMC firmware must be updated to the latest versions) Figure 39. SD Slot on bottom of CMC Select the slots and fabrics you want FlexAddress enabled on (see figure below). note blades must be powered off and have the latest firmware in order for FlexAddress MAC/WWNs to be deployed to them. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 49 Figure 40. CMC FlexAddress Summary Screen FlexAddress MAC/WWNs are now deployed. CMC GUI shows users a summary of Server Assigned (hardware based) and chassis assigned (FlexAddress) MAC/WWNs for the entire chassis or per slot (see Figure Figure 41 below). Green Checkmarks denote which identifier is currently being used. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 50 Figure 41. CMC FlexAddress Server Detail Screen For more information, review the FlexAddress chapter of the CMC User’s Guide. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 51 10 Storage The M1000e was designed primarily to support external storage over the network, which is the primary requirement for customers seeking maximum density. Figure 42. Examples of Major Storage Platforms Supported The blade servers also support at least two internal hard drives which can be put into RAID if so desired. For details, see the Technical Guide for each of the compatible blade servers offered. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 52 11 Video The iKVM supports a video display resolution range from 640x480 at 60Hz up to 1280 x 1024 x 65,000 colors (noninterlaced) at 75Hz. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 53 12 Rack Information 12.1 Overview The RapidRails™ static rail system for the M1000e provides tool-less support for racks with square mounting holes including all generations of Dell racks except for the 4200 & 2400 series. Also available are the VersaRails™ static rails, which offer tooled mounting support for racks with square or unthreaded round mounting holes. Both versions include a strain relief bar and cable enumerator clips to help manage and secure the cables exiting the back of the system. 12.2 Rails The RapidRails and VersaRails static rail kits for the M1000e are identical except for their mounting bracket designs. The mounting brackets on the RapidRails static rails have hooks and a lock button for supporting tool-less installation in 4-post racks with square mounting holes. Figure 43. M1000e RapidRails Static Rails The mounting brackets on the VersaRails static rails have threaded clinch nuts rather than hooks and a lock button in order to support tooled installation in 4-post racks with unthreaded round mounting holes. The VersaRails static rails can also be mounted in square hole racks if desired. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 54 Figure 44. M1000e VersaRails Static Rails The VersaRails static rails are not intended to be mounted in threaded hole racks since the rails cannot be fully tightened and secured against the rack mounting flange. Neither the VersaRails nor the RapidRails kits support mounting in 2-post racks. Mounting Interface Rail Type Rack Types Supported Rail Adjustability Range (mm) 4-Post 2-Post Square Round Threaded Square Round Thread Flush Center Min Max Min Max Min Max RapidRails Static √ X X X X 712 755 — — — — VersaRails Static √ √ X X X 706 755 706 755 — — The min-max values listed in the table above represent the allowable distance between the front and rear mounting flanges in the rack. 12.3 Cable Management Arm (CMA) Since the M1000e does not need to be extended out of the rack for service, neither the RapidRails nor the VersaRails static rail systems support a cable management arm. Included instead are a strain relief bar and cable enumerator clips to help manage and secure the potentially large number of cables exiting the back of the system. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 55 Figure 45. M1000e Strain Relief Bar and Cable Enumerator Clip (12 Per Kit) 12.4 Rack View The M1000e is installed on the rails by simply resting the back of the system on the rail ledges, pushing the system forward until it fully seats, and tightening the thumbscrews on the chassis front panel. Figure 46. M1000e Mounted in the Rack The strain relief bar and cable enumerator clips can be used to help manage and secure the power cords and I/O cables exiting the back of the system as indicated below. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 56 Figure 47. M1000e Strain Relief Bar and Cable Enumerator Clips More information can be found in the Rack Installation Guide. Strain Relief Bar Cable Enumerator Clips Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 57 13 Virtualization The M1000e and the blade servers which fit in it have been designed for optimal use with all major virtualization software platforms. Figure 48. Examples of Major Virtualization Platforms Supported The M1000e platform offers many benefits for virtualization: • Data center Consolidation o High Density Form Factor o I/O Bandwidth & Switch Port Savings o Large Memory Capacity • Ease Of Mgmt/Deployment o Management Options o I/O Virtualization o Chassis LCD Display o Embedded Hypervisor • Reduce Downtime o Persistent Addresses o Fully Redundant Power & Cooling o Fully Redundant I/O o Hot-Swappable Drives • Power & Cooling Efficiency o Super Efficient Power Supplies o Optimized Airflow o Best-in-class Fan Technology Many of the I/O modules offered provide significant benefits for use in virtualized environments, such as: Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 58 Figure 49. Examples of I/O modules Recommended for Use in Virtualized Environments Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 59 14 Systems Management 14.1 Overview The M1000e server solution offers a holistic management solution designed to fit into any customer data center. It features: • Dual Redundant Chassis Management Controllers (CMC) o Powerful management for the entire enclosure o Includes: real-time power management and monitoring; flexible security; status/ inventory/ alerting for blades, I/O and chassis • iDRAC o One per blade with full DRAC functionality like other Dell servers including vMedia/KVM o Integrates into CMC or can be used separately • iKVM o Embedded in the chassis for easy KVM infrastructure incorporation allowing one admin per blade o Control Panel on front of M1000e for ―crash cart‖ access • Front LCD o Designed for deployment and local status reporting Onboard graphics and keyboard/mouse USB connect to an optional system level Integrated KVM (iKVM) module for local KVM access. Full USB access is available through the server module front panel. In Figure 50 below, OSCAR (On Screen Configuration and Activity Reporting) is the graphic user interface for the 4161DS or 2161DS-2 console switch used to share a single keyboard/mouse/LCD in a rack with all the servers in the rack Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 60 Figure 50. System Management Architecture Diagram Management connections transfer health and control traffic throughout the chassis. The system management fabric is architected for 100BaseT Ethernet over differential pairs routed to each module. There are two 100BaseT interfaces between CMCs, one switched and one unswitched. All system management Ethernet is routed for 100 Mbps signaling. Every module has a management network link to each CMC, with redundancy provided at the module level. Failure of any individual link will cause failover to the redundant CMC. 14.2 Server Management The server module base management solution includes additional features for efficient deployment and management of servers in a modular server form factor. The base circuit, which integrates the baseboard management controller (BMC) function with hardware support for Virtual KVM (vKVM) and Virtual Media (vMedia), is the integrated Dell Remote Access Controller (iDRAC). iDRAC has two Ethernet connections, one for each CMC, providing system management interface redundancy. Highlights of the iDRAC solution include the following: • Dedicated management interface for high‐performance management functions • vMedia • vKVM • IPMI 2.0 Out-of-Band management • Serial-over-LAN redirection • Systems Management Architecture for Server Hardware (SMASH) Command Line Protocol (CLP) • Blade status and inventory • Active power management Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 61 • Integration with Microsoft® Active Directory® • Security, Local and Active Directory Traditional IPMI-based BMC features like hardware monitoring and power control are supported. The LifeCycle controller on 11th generation servers offers additional features including: • Unified Server Configurator (USC): Consolidated interface for OS install, hardware configuration, updates, and diagnostics o Reduces task time and speed of deployment o Eliminates media for OS drivers during OS install and update o Eliminates multiple control ROM options for hardware configuration o Eases firmware updates with roll-back capability • Embedded Diagnostics • Parts Replacement: Automatically updates RAID/NIC firmware to previous levels after parts replacement. • Persistent Life Cycle Log • Out-of-Band Configuration/Update: With the introduction of Lifecycle Controller (LCC) 1.3, customers and console vendors can initiate and schedule an upgrade to device firmware and pre-OS software out-of-band. This is useful during ―bare metal‖ deployment scenarios or change management in operating systems where firmware updates were not possible in the past (i.e., virtualization). o Updates are staged on the Lifecycle Controller and applied immediately or during a scheduled maintenance window. o Lifecycle controller 1.3 supports updates with BIOS, diagnostics, driver pack, USC, RAID controller firmware, iDRAC6 firmware, and NIC firmware. More information on the iDRAC and Lifecycle Controller can be found on support.dell.com. 14.3 Enclosure Management The CMC provides secure remote management access to the chassis and installed modules. The M1000e must have at least one CMC and supports an optional redundant module, each occupying a slot accessible through the rear of the chassis. Redundancy is provided in an Active—Standby pairing of the modules and failover occurs when the active module has failed or degraded. The CMC interfaces through dual stacking 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports and one serial port. The CMC serial port interface provides common management of up to six I/O modules through a single connection. The CMC provides many features, including: Deployment o LCD based deployment ―wizard‖ o Single secure interface for inventory, configuration, monitoring, and alerting for server modules, chassis infrastructure and I/O Modules o Centralized configuration for iDRAC, I/O Modules and CMC o 1:Many iDRAC configuration o 1:Many Blade Boot Device Selection o 1:Many vMedia File share o Customized Slot Naming o IO Module Configuration and Launch o WWN/MAC Display & Persistence w/ FlexAddress; Manages FlexAddress Ports o Support for Network Time Protocol (NTP) Monitoring and Troubleshooting o User interface entry point (web, telnet, SSH, serial) Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 62 o Monitoring and alerting for chassis environmental conditions or component health thresholds. This includes but is not limited to the following: Real time power consumption Power supplies Fans Power allocation Temperature CMC redundancy o I/O fabric consistency o Consolidated Status Reporting & Event Logs Email & SNMP alerting Support for Remote Syslog Blade Events displayed in CMC o Consolidated Chassis/Blade/IO Inventory o ―Virtual Server Reseat‖ simulates blade removal/insertion o Remotely blink LEDs to Identify Components Updating o Reporting of Firmware versions o 1:Many iDRAC Firmware update o Consolidated CMC and iKVM F/W update o 1:Many update of drivers & Firmware via Remote File Share (w/ Repository Manager) o 2 x 10/100/1000Mb Ethernet ports + 1 serial port Real Time Power/Thermal Monitoring and Management o Consolidated Chassis/Blade Power Reporting o Power budget management and allocation o Real Time System AC Power Consumption with reset-able peak and minimum values o System level power limiting and slot based power prioritization o Manages Dynamic Power Engagement functionality o Manages fan speed control o Power sequencing of modules in conjunction with the defined chassis power states Separate management network o Configuration of the embedded management switch, which facilitates external access to manageable modules o Provides connection from management network to iDRAC on each of the blades and the management interfaces on the integrated I/O Modules o 2nd Ethernet port supports daisy chaining of CMCs for improved cable management Security o Local Authentication &/or AD Integration OpenLDAP coming in CMC 3.0 o Supports multiple levels of user roles and permissions for control of chassis, IO, &/or server blades, including Microsoft Active Directory o IPv6 Support o VLAN tagging for iDRAC, CMC, and IOMs o Two Factor Authentication w/ SmartCard o Single Sign On using OS credentials (with AD) o Private Key Authentication (PK Auth) o Secure Web (SSL) and CLI (Telnet/SSH) interfaces Support for Industry-Standard Interfaces o SMASH CLP o WSMAN o CIM XML Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 63 o SNMP The Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller (iDRAC) on each server module is connected to the CMC via dedicated, fully redundant 100 Mbps Ethernet connections wired through the midplane to a dedicated 24‐port Ethernet switch on the CMC, and exposed to the outside world through the CMC’s external Management Ethernet interface (10/100/1000M). This connection is distinct from the three redundant data Fabrics A, B and C. Unlike previous generations of Dell server modules, the iDRAC’s connectivity is independent of, and in addition to, the onboard GbE LOMs on the server module. Each server module’s iDRAC has its own IP address and can be accessed, if security settings allow, directly through a supported browser, telnet, SSH, or IPMI client on the management station. Figure 51. Chassis Management Controller Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 64 Figure 52. CMC Module Features Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 65 14.4 Integrated Keyboard and Mouse Controller (iKVM) Figure 53. M1000e iKVM The modular enclosure supports one optional Integrated KVM (iKVM) module. This module occupies a single slot accessible through the rear of the chassis. The iKVM redirects local server module video, keyboard, and mouse electrical interfaces to either the iKVM local ports or the M1000e front panel ports. The iKVM allows connection to a VGA monitor, USB keyboard, and USB mouse without use of a dongle. The iKVM also has an Analog Console Interface (ACI) compatible RJ45 port that allows the iKVM to tie the interface to a KVM appliance upstream of the iKVM via CAT5 cabling. Designed with Avocent technology, the ACI port reduces cost and complexity by giving access for sixteen servers using only one port on an external KVM Switch. The iKVM contains a ―seventeenth blade‖ feature, connecting the CMC Command Line Interface via the KVM switch and allowing text-based deployment wizards on VGA monitors. iKVM firmware is updated through the CMC. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 66 Figure 54. Rear iKVM interface Panel The front of the enclosure includes two USB connections for a keyboard and mouse, along with a video connection port, both of which require the Avocent iKVM switch to be activated for them to be enabled. These ports are designed for connecting a local front ―crash cart‖ console to be connected to access the blade servers while standing in front of the enclosure. Figure 55. Front Keyboard/Video Ports Dell modular servers also include vKVM as a standard feature, routing the operator’s keyboard output, mouse output and video between the target server module and a console located on the system management IP network. With up to two simultaneous vKVM sessions per blade, remote management now satisfies virtually any usage model. vMedia is also now standard, providing Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 67 emulation of USB DVD‐R/W, USB CD‐R/W, USB Flash Drive, USB ISO image and USB Floppy over an IP interface. Connection to vKVM and vMedia is through the CMC, with encryption available on a per stream basis. It is possible to connect the following Dell\Avocent KVMIP switches to the iKVM card in the M1000e blade enclosure using a CAT5 cable. • Dell: o 2161DS-2 o 4161DS o 2321DS o 180AS o 2160AS • Avocent: o All DSR xx20, xx30, xx35 models o All Mergepoint Unity models For other Avocent branded models, customers need to connect to the card using the USB adapter. More information on the iKVM can be found in the iKVM training material on us.training.dell.com, in the iKVM Module section of the Dell PowerEdge Modular Systems Hardware Owner’s Manual, in the CMC User Guide, and at dell.avocent.com. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 68 15 Peripherals Common peripherals for the M1000e include: • An external USB DVD-ROM Drive is often used for local installation of OS or other software. • A Dell 1U rack console which enables customers to mount a system administrator’s control station directly into a Dell rack without sacrificing rack space needed for servers and other peripherals. It features: o 17" LCD flat-panel monitor with height adjustment o Specially designed keyboard and trackball combination o Twin PS/2 connectors o SVGA video output o 1U rack-mounting kit o Simple installation • Uninterruptible power supplies for racks, which provides a temporary power source to bridge the critical moments after a power failure, allowing: o Time to save and back up the data being processed o Safely power down your servers o Support for up to 5000 VA (3750 watts) • Power distribution units (PDUs): use the Dell Energy Smart Solution Advisor (ESSA) to see what a given chassis configuration will require. o Single phase needs one PDU per chassis Use 30A for a medium to lightly loaded chassis Use 60A for a heavily loaded o For 3 phase: 30A 3 phase for a heavily loaded single chassis 50 or 60A 3 phase for multiple chassis. o Generally customers run 2 x 3 phase circuits to the rack via a PDU, then the PDU breaks out single phases to each PSU. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 69 16 Packaging Options Figure 56. Enclosure After Unpacking The M1000e comes from the factory on a pallet with components installed. The components must be taken out before it is installed in a rack. There are cardboard slings under the chassis to enable two people to lift it. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 70 Appendix A. Regulatory Certifications Please see the external Product Safety, EMC, and Environmental Datasheets on dell.com at: http://www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance_datasheets. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 71 Appendix B. Status Messages C.1 LCD Status Messages See the M1000e Configuration Guide and CMC Administrator Reference Guide for details. C.2 System Status Messages See the CMC Administrator Reference Guide for details. Dell PowerEdge M1000e Technical Guide 72 Appendix C. Additional Information Videos highlighting the major M1000e features are available on http://www.dell.com/html/us/products/pedge/poweredge_mseries_blade_videos/poweredge.html The PowerEdge M1000e Configuration Guide, Hardware Owner’s Manual and CMC Administrator Reference Guide each contain a wealth of additional information about the PowerEdge M1000e’s capabilities. The blade training material on dtt.us.dell.comdtt.us.dell.com is also a useful reference. TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK INSIDE THE OPTIPLEX 780 TM TM DELL OPTIPLEX 780 OVERVIEW Mini Tower Computer (MT) View 3 Desktop Computer (DT) View 4 Small Form Factor Computer (SFF) View 5 Ultra Small Form Factor Computer (USFF) View 6 MARKETING SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS Operating System, Chipset 7 Processor 8 Advanced System Manageability Modes, Memory 9 Drives and Removable Storage, System Board Connectors 10-11 Graphics/Video Controller 12 External Ports/Connectors 12 Communications—Network Adapter (NIC), Modem 13 Audio and Speakers, Keyboard and Mouse 13 Security, Service and Support, Software 14 DETAILED ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS System Dimensions (Physical) 15 System Board Connector Maximum Allowable Dimensions 15 System Level Environmental and Operating Conditions 16 Power 17 Audio 18 Communications 18-22 Graphics/Video Controller 23-26 Hard Drives 27-39 Optical Drive 40-42 BIOS Defaults 43-44 Chassis Enclosure and Ventilation Requirements 45 Acoustic Noise Emission Information 46-49 TABLE OF CONTENTS DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 3 FRONT VIEW 1 Optical Drive (optional) 7 Power Button, Power Light 2 Optical Drive Eject Button 8 Diagnostic Lights (4) 3 Optical Drive Bay 9 Headphone Connector 4 Media Card Reader (optional) 10 Microphone Connector 5 USB 2.0 Connectors (2) 11 Network Connectivity Light 6 Hard Drive Activity Light BACK VIEW 1 Power Connector 4 Power-Supply Vent 2 Back-Panel Connectors 5 Chassis Lock Loop 3 Expansion Card Slots (4) 6 Cover Release Latch BACK PANEL CONNECTORS 1 Parallel Connector 7 Line-in Connector 2 Serial Connector 8 USB 2.0 Connectors (6) 3 Link Integrity Light 9 VGA Video Connector 4 Network Connector 10 eSATA Connector 5 Network Activity Light 11 DisplayPort Connector 6 Line-out Connector MINI TOWER COMPUTER (MT) VIEW DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 4 FRONT VIEW 1 Optical Drive (optional) 7 Network Connectivity Light 2 Optical Drive Eject Button 8 Microphone Connector 3 USB 2.0 Connectors (2) 9 Headphone Connector 4 Hard Drive Activity Light 10 Media Card Reader (optional) 5 Power Button, Power Light 6 Diagnostic Lights (4) BACK VIEW 1 Expansion Card Slots (3) 4 Chassis Lock Loop 2 Air Vent 5 Power Connector 3 Cover Release Latch 6 Back-Panel Connectors BACK PANEL CONNECTORS 1 Parallel Connector 7 Line-in Connector 2 Serial Connector 8 USB 2.0 Connectors (6) 3 Link Integrity Light 9 VGA Video Connector 4 Network Connector 10 eSATA Connector 5 Network Activity Light 11 DisplayPort Connector 6 Line-out Connector DESKTOP COMPUTER (DT) VIEW DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 5 FRONT VIEW 1 Optical Drive (optional) 7 Power Button, Power Light 2 Optical Drive Eject Button 8 Microphone Connector 3 USB 2.0 Connectors (2) 9 Headphone Connector 4 Network Connectivity Light 10 Media Card Reader (optional) 5 Diagnostic Lights (4) 6 Hard Drive Activity Light BACK VIEW 1 Chassis Lock Loop 4 Back-Panel Connectors 2 Cover Release Latch 5 Expansion Card Slots (2) 3 Power Connector BACK PANEL CONNECTORS 1 Parallel Connector 7 Line-in Connector 2 Serial Connector 8 USB 2.0 Connectors (6) 3 Link Integrity Light 9 VGA Video Connector 4 Network Connector 10 eSATA Connector 5 Network Activity Light 11 DisplayPort Connector 6 Line-out Connector SMALL FORM FACTOR COMPUTER (SFF) VIEW DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 6 BACK VIEW 1 Network Activity Light 9 Display Port Connector 2 Captive Thumbscrew 10 VGA Video Connector 3 Padlock Ring 11 Serial Connector 4 Security Cable Slot 12 USB Connector 2.0 (5) 5 Power Connector 13 Network Connector 6 Line-Out Connector 14 Link Integrity Light 7 Line-in/ Microphone Connector 15 WiFi Antenna (optional) 8 eSATA Connector FRONT VIEW 1 Optical Drive 7 Headphone Connector 2 Power Button, Power Light 8 Microphone Connector 3 Drive Activity Light 9 USB Connector 2.0 (2) 4 Diagnostic Lights (4) 5 Network Connectivity Light 6 WiFi Activity Light (optional) ULTRA SMALL FORM FACTOR COMPUTER (USFF) VIEW DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 7 MARKETING SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS NOTE: Offerings may vary by region. For more information regarding the configuration of your computer, click Start>Help and Support and select the option to view information about your computer. OPERATING SYSTEM NOTE: One of the follow ing Operating Systems will be preinstalled. MT DT SFF USFF Windows 7® operating system Microsoft® Windows 7® Basic; Microsoft® Windows 7® Home Premium; Microsoft® Windows 7® Professional (32 and 64 bit); Microsoft® Windows 7® Ultimate (32 and 64 bit) Windows Vista® operating system Windows Vista® Business SP2 (32 and 64 bit), Windows Vista® Home Basic SP2 (32 bit), Windows Vista® Business SP2 (32 bit) via Windows 7 Professional Downgrade Rights, Windows Vista® Ultimate SP2 (32 bit) via Windows 7 Ultimate Downgrade Rights, Windows XP® operating system Windows® XP Professional SP3 via Windows Vista® Business or Ultimate Downgrade Rights (32 bit), Windows® XP Professional SP3 via Microsoft® Windows 7® Professional or Microsoft® Windows 7® Ultimate Downgrade Rights (32 bit) Other FreeDOS for (N-series), Ubuntu® Linux (China only) OS Media Support X X X X CHIPSET MT DT SFF USFF Chipset Intel Q45 Express Chipset w/ICH10DO Non-volatile memory on chipset BIOS Configuration SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) 64Mbit (8MB) located at SPI_FLASH on chipset TPM 1.2 Security Device (Trusted Platform Module)1 16KB located at TPM1.2 on chipset TCM (Trusted Computing Module) Available in China only Non-TPM Available in select countries NIC EEPROM LOM configuration contained within SPI_FLASH – no dedicated LOM EEPROM DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 8 PROCESSOR NOTE: Global Standard Products (GSP) are a subset of Dell’s relationship products that are managed for availability and synchronized transitions on a worldwide basis. They ensure the same platform is available for purchase globally. This allows customers to reduce the number of configurations managed on a worldwide basis, thereby reducing their costs. They also enable companies to implement global IT standards by locking in specific product configurations worldwide. The following GSP processors identified below will be made available to Dell customers. NOTE: Processor numbers are not a measure of performance. Processor availability subject to change and may vary by region/ country. MT DT SFF USFF Intel® Core™ 2 Quad Processors Intel® Core™ 2 Quad Q9650/3.00GHz, 12M, 1333FSB X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP Intel® Core™ 2 Quad Q9550/2.83GHz, 12M, 1333FSB X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP Intel® Core™ 2 Quad Q9400/2.66GHz, 6M, 1333FSB X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP Intel® Core™ 2 Quad Q8400/2.66GHz, 4M, 1333FSB X X X Intel® Core™ 2 Quad Q8300/2.50GHz, 4M, 1333FSB X X X Intel® Core™ 2 Duo and Pentium® Dual Core Processors Intel® Core™ 2 Duo E8600/3.33GHz, 6M, 1333FSB X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP Intel® Core™ 2 Duo E8500/3.16GHz, 6M, 1333FSB X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP Intel® Core™ 2 Duo E8400/3.0GHz, 6M, 1333FSB X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP X-GSP Intel® Core™ 2 Duo E7600/3.06GHz, 3M, 1066FSB X X X X Intel® Core™ 2 Duo E7500/2.93GHz, 3M, 1066FSB X X X X Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E6700/3.2GHz, 2M, 1066FSB X X X X Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E6500/2.93GHz, 2M, 1066FSB X X X X Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E6300/2.8GHz, 2M, 1066FSB X X X X Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E5500/2.8GHz, 2M, 800FSB X X X X Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E5400/2.7GHz, 2M, 800FSB X X X X Intel® Pentium® Dual-Core E5300/2.60GHz, 2M, 800FSB X X X X Intel® Celeron® Processors Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core 3300/2.50GHz, 1M, 800FSB X X X X Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core 3200/2.40GHz, 1M, 800FSB X X X X Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core 1600/2.40GHz, 512K, 800FSB X X X X Intel® Celeron® Dual-Core 1500/2.20GHz, 512K, 800FSB X X X X Intel® Celeron® 450/2.20GHz, 512K, 800FSB X X X X DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 9 MEMORY Memory modules should be installed in pairs of matched memory size, speed, and technology. If the memory modules are not installed in matched pairs, a slight reduction in performance may occur. NOTE: This system supports both 1066MHz and 1333MHz DDR3 memory, how ever the memory w ill operate at 1066MHz speed due to chipset specifications . ADVANCED SYSTEM MANAGEABILITY MODES NOTE: Hardware management mode options allow you to select the right systems management feature support for your enterprise. Dell’s innovati ve approach to scalable remote client management offers you a choice of built-in hardware management capabilities across platform offerings. The OptiPlex 780 supports Intel ® vPro™ technology and Intel ® Standard Manageability w hich supports the follow ing features: Asset reporting and inventor y capabilities, Remote troubleshooting and repair, Client System Isolation, Remote patching/ updating Intel® vPro™ technology adds these additional features: Client initialed “Fast Call for Help”/ beyond firew all systems management capability, Microsoft N AP support, Hardened security monitoring, Support for the latest generation of Intel® Core™ 2 Processors MT DT SFF USFF Intel® vPro Technology Enabled* (iAMT 5.x) X X X X Intel® vPro Technology DIsabled * (iAMT 5.x) X X X X Intel® Standard Manageability * X X X X No Out-of-Band Systems Management X X X X MT DT SFF USFF Type: DDR3 Synch DRAM Non-ECC Memory 1066MHz and 1333MHz DIMM Slots 4 4 4 2 DIMM Capacities Up to 4GB Up to 4GB Up to 4GB Up to 4GB Minimum Memory 1GB 1GB 1GB 1GB Maximum System Memory 16GB1 16GB1 16GB1 8GB Memory configurations 16GB1 DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (4 DIMM) X X X 8GB1 DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X X 8GB1 DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (4 DIMM) X X X 4GB1 DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (4 DIMM) X X X 4GB1 DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X X 4GB1 DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (1 DIMM) X X X X 3GB DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (3 DIMM) X X X 3GB DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X X 2GB DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (2 DIMM) X X X X 2GB DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (1 DIMM) X X X X 1GB DDR3, 1066MHz/1333MHz, (1 DIMM) X X X X 1 The total amount of available memory will be less than 4GB. The amount less depends on the actual system configuration. To fully utilize 4GB or more of memory requires a 64-bit enabled processor and 64-bit operating system. *The functionality described above requires an appropriate software management console -I nt el vPr o Tec h n ol o g y E n a b l ed : T hi s op ti o n en a bl es f ul l vPr o o u t of b a n d f u nc ti o na l i t y. R e q ui r es a vPr o pr o ce s s or . -I nt el vPr o Tec h n ol o g y D i s ab l ed : T hi s op ti o n di sa bl es vP r o t ec h n ol o gy b u t al l ow s fo r t he l at er ena b l em e nt o f vP r o a s de - s i r e d. R e q ui r es a vPr o pr o ce s s or -I nt el S ta n d ar d M an a ge a bi l i t y: T h i s o p ti on de l i ver s a po r ti on o f b asi c ou t o f ba n d c a p ab i l i ti es ( se e a b o ve) - N o O ut o f Ban d S ys t e m s M a n a ge me n t : Th i s op ti o n d oe s n o t s u p p or t ou t of b a n d m a na g em e nt. C a n n o t be e nab l ed a ft er p o i nt o f sal e. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 10 DRIVES AND REMOVABLE STORAGE MT DT SFF USFF Bays: 3.5-inch bay (External 19-1 Media Card Reader) 1 1 1 (slim-line) 5.25-inch bay (External Optical) 2 1 1 (slim-line) Hard Drives Supported (Internal and External) 2 2 2 1 Optical Drives Supported 2 1 1 1 Interface: SATA 4 3 3 2 3.5” Hard Drives: 160GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD X X X 80GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD X X X 1TB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X 2.5” Hard Drives: 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X X 250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X X 160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD X X X X 250GB1 SATA Full Disk Encryption HDD X X X X 160GB1 SATA Full Disk Encryption HDD X X X X 128GB1 SATA Solid State Drive X X X X 64GB1 SATA Solid State Drive X X X X RAID 1 Data Protection: (includes two matching capacity/speed hard drives) 160GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD (3.5”) X 80GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD (3.5”) X 1TB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (2.5”) X X X 250GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (2.5”) X X X 160GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (2.5”) X X X DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 11 DRIVES AND REMOVABLE STORAGE MT DT SFF USFF RAID 0 Performance: (includes two matching capacity/speed hard drives) 320GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD (3.5”) X 160GB1 SATA 10K RPM HDD (3.5”) X 2TB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 1TB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 640GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (3.5”) X 640GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (2.5”) X X X 500GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (2.5”) X X X 320GB1 SATA 7200 RPM HDD (2.5”) X X X Optical Drive: (SFF/USFF require slim-line optical drive) Blu-ray Writer (available in 2H 2010) SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s DVD+/-RW2 SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s DVD-ROM3 SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s Media Card Reader: Dell 19 in 1 Media Card Reader 480Mb/s 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. 2 Discs burned with this drive may not be compatible with some existing drives and players; using DVD+R media provides maximum compatibility. 3 DVD-ROM drives may have write-capable hardware that has been disabled via firmware modifications. SYSTEM BOARD CONNECTORS NOTE: See Detailed Engineering Specifications for maximum card dimensions. MT DT SFF USFF PCI Slot(s): number of 2 2 1 PCIe x16 Slot: number of 1 1 1 PCIe x1 Slot: number of 1 0 0 Flexbay 1 1 1 Serial ATA (SATA) 4 3 3 2 DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 12 MT DT SFF USFF Integrated Intel GMA 4500 Integrated on system board Enhanced Graphic/Video Options DVI (Digital) Adapter Card Optional card 1GB NVIDIA GeForce GT330 with DVI or VGA and S-Video Out (adapters convert to dual DVI or dual VGA) Optional card 512MB ATI RADEON HD 4550 Graphics with dual DVI or VGA and S-Video Out (adapters convert to dual DVI or dual VGA) Optional card 256MB ATI RADEON HD 3450 Graphics with dual DVI or VGA and S-Video Out (adapters convert to dual DVI or dual VGA) Optional card 256MB ATI RADEON HD 3470 Graphics with Dual DP (adapters convert to dual DVI or dual VGA) Optional card 256MB NVIDIA GeForce 9300 GE with dual DVI or VGA and SVideo Out (adapters convert to dual DVI or dual VGA) Optional card NVIDIA Quadro NVS 420 (adapters covert to quad DVI or DP) Optional card GRAPHICS/VIDEO CONTROLLER NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. See chassis diagrams section for port/connector locations MT DT SFF USFF USB 2.0 2 Front, 6 Rear, 1 Internal 2 Front, 5 Rear Serial 1 rear, second port optional via card 1 Rear eSATA 1 Rear 1 Rear Parallel 1 Rear Network Connector (RJ-45) 1 Rear PS/2 Optional via add-in card 1394 Controller Optional via add-in card Video: VGA 1 Rear DVI-I Optional via add-in card DisplayPort 1 Rear Audio: Line in for microphone 1 Front Line in for microphone or stereo 1 Rear Line out for headphones or speakers 1 Front, 1 Rear Risers: (replaces 1 PCI slot and 1 PCIe slot on DT system board) Combo full height riser with 1 PCI and 1 PCIe connector X Dual full height riser with 2 PCI connectors X EXTERNAL PORTS/CONNECTORS NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 13 COMMUNICATIONS – MODEM NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. MT DT SFF USFF Intel® 82567LM Gigabit1 Ethernet LAN 10/100/1000 (Remote Wake Up, PXE support and Intel Active Management Technology support) Integrated on system board Broadcom NetXtreme 10/100/1000 PCIe Gigabit Networking Card Optional via add-in card 1 This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network infrastructure is required. MT DT SFF USFF V.92 Data/Fax Controllerless Modem Optional via add-in card MT DT SFF USFF Dell Wireless 1505 PCIe WLAN card (802.11n) Optional via add-in card Dell Wireless 1510 miniPCIe WLAN card (802.11n) Optional Dell Wireless 1520 miniPCIe WLAN card (802.11n) Optional via add-in card COMMUNICATIONS – WIRELESS MT DT SFF USFF ADI 1984A High Definition Audio Codec Integrated on system board Internal Dell Business Audio Speaker Optional Dell AX210 2.0 Desktop Speakers Optional Dell AX510/AX510PA Flat Panel Soundbar Speakers Optional Dell AY410 30W 2.1 Stereo Speakers with Subwoofer Optional AUDIO AND SPEAKERS MT DT SFF USFF Dell USB Entry Keyboard with optional palmrest Standard Dell QuietKey Keyboard with optional palmrest Optional Dell Multimedia Pro Keyboard Optional Dell Smartcard Keyboard Optional Dell USB Optical Mouse Optional Dell Laser Mouse Optional Dell Logo Mouse Pad Optional KEYBOARD AND MOUSE COMMUNICATIONS - NETWORK ADAPTER (NIC) NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 14 SECURITY SERVICE AND SUPPORT NOTE: For more details on Dell Service Plans please to go to: www.dell.com/service/service_plans SOFTWARE MT DT SFF USFF Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 1.21 Integrated on system board Trusted Computing Module (TCM) Integrated on system board (China only) Chassis Intrusion Switch Optional Dell Smartcard Keyboard Optional Chassis lock slot and loop support Standard 1 TPM is not available in all countries. Depending on your country regulations, TCM or No-TPM system boards will be made available. MT DT SFF USFF 3 Year Warranty1 Next Business Day On-site2 (3-3-3) Standard ProSupport Optional 1 For a copy of our guarantees or limited warranties, please write Dell USA L.P., Attn: Warranties, One Dell Way, Round Rock, TX 78682. For more information, visit www.dell.com/warranty. 2 Service may be provided by third-party. Technician will be dispatched if necessary following phone-based troubleshooting. Subject to parts availability, geographical restrictions and terms of service contract. Service timing dependent upon time of day call placed to Dell. U.S. only. MT DT SFF USFF Dell Client Manager Available via Dell.com Dell ControlPoint Standard Norton 2009 Internet Security 30 Day Trial or Optional Subscription McAfee 10 SecurityCenter 30 Day Trial or Optional Subscription DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 15 DETAILED ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS SYSTEM DIMENSIONS (PHYSICAL) NOTE: System Weight and Shipping Weight is based on a typical configuration and may var y based on PC configuration. A typical configuration includes: integrated graphics, one hard drive, one optical drive, and one diskette drive. SYSTEM BOARD CONNECTOR MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE DIMENSIONS MT DT SFF USFF Chassis Volume (liters) 33.0 16.0 10.7 3.7 Chassis Weight (pounds/kilograms) 25.8 / 11.7 18.2 / 8.26 15 / 6.80 7.0/ 3.2 Chassis Dimensions: (HxWxD) Height (inches/centimeters) 16.1 / 40.8 4.5 / 11.4 3.65 / 9.26 9.40/ 23.9 Width (inches/centimeters) 7.4 / 18.7 15.7 / 39.9 12.4 / 31.4 2.60/ 6.50 Depth (inches/centimeters) 17.0 / 43.3 13.9 / 35.3 13.4 / 34 9.30/ 23.6 Shipping Weight (pounds/kilograms - includes packaging materials) 43.5 / 19.73 28 / 12.7 21.3 / 9.66 13.5/ 6.12 Packaging Parameters (HxWxD) Height (inches/centimeters) 22.38/56.85 20.63 / 52.4 20.88/50.04 18.69/47.5 Width (inches/centimeters) 22.25/56.52 20.31/51.59 19.38/49.23 15.75/40.0 Depth (inches/centimeters) 14.25 / 36.2 11.75/29.85 10.63 / 27 7.75/19.7 MT DT SFF USFF PCI Slots 2 2 1 Height (inches/centimeters) 4.376 / 11.115 2.731 / 6.89 Length (inches/centimeters) 7.4 / 18.796* 6.6 / 16.764 PCIe x16 Slots 1 1 1 Height (inches/centimeters) 4.376 / 11.115 2.731 / 6.89 Length (inches/centimeters) 7.4 / 18.796* 6.6 / 16.764 PCIe x1 Slots 1 Height (inches/centimeters) 4.376 / 11.115 Length (inches/centimeters) 7.4 / 18.796* Risers: (replaces 1 PCI slot and 1 PCIe slot on DT system board) Combo Full Height Riser with 1 PCI and 1 PCIe connector (HxL) 1 Height (inches/centimeters) 4.376 / 11.115 Length (inches/centimeters)*, ** 6.6 / 16.764 Dual Full Height Riser with 2 PCI connectors (HxL) 1 Height (inches/centimeters) 4.376 / 11.115 Length (inches/centimeters)*, ** 6.6 / 16.764 * Card length can be longer than standard Half-Length Card but cannot be a Full-Length Card. ** 6.9/17.53 in/cm is longer than the standard Half-Length Card DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 16 SYSTEM LEVEL ENVIRONMENTAL AND OPERATING CONDITIONS MT DT SFF USFF Temperature Operating 10° to 35° C (50° to 95° F) Non-Operating (Storage) -40° to 65° C (-40° to -149° F) Relative Humidity 20% to 80% (non-condensing) Maximum vibration Operating 0.25 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 0.5 octave/min Non-Operating 0.5 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 1 octave/min Maximum Shock Operating Bottom half-sine pulse with a change in velocity of 50.8 cm/sec (20 inches/sec) Non-Operating 27-G faired square wave with a velocity change of 508 cm/sec (200 inches/sec) Maximum Altitude Operating –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) Non-Operating –15.2 to 10,668 m (–50 to 35,000 ft) DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 17 POWER NOTE: These form factors utilize a more efficient Active Power Factor Correction (APFC) pow er supply. Dell recommends only Uni versal Pow er Supplies (UPS) based on Sine Wave output for APFC PSUs, not an approximation of a Sine Wave, Square Wave, or quasi -Square Wave. If you have questions, please contact the manufacture to confirm the output type. MT APFC EPA DT APFC EPA SFF APFC EPA USFF EPA Power Supply Wattage 305W 255W High Efficiency 255W 255 W High Efficiency 235W 235W High Efficiency 180W High Efficiency AC input Voltage Range 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac 90 – 264Vac AC input current (low ac range/high AC range) 5.6A / 2.8A 3.6A / 1.8A 5.0A / 2.5A 4.0A / 2.0A 4.5A / 2.25A 3.5A / 1.75A 2.6A / 1.3A AC input Frequency 47HZ / 63HZ 47HZ / 63HZ 47HZ / 63HZ 47HZ / 63HZ 47HZ / 63HZ 47HZ / 63HZ 47 – 63 Hz AC holdup time (80% load) 16MSEC 16MSEC 16MSEC 16MSEC 16MSEC 16MSEC 16 ms Average Efficiency (Energy Star 5.0 Compliant) 87 – 90 – 87% @ 20 – 50 – 100% load 87 – 90 – 87% @ 20 – 50 – 100% load 87 – 90 – 87% @ 20 – 50 – 100% load 87 – 90 – 87% @ 20 – 50 – 100% load Typical Efficiency (Active PFC) 65% 65% 65% N/A DC parameters +3.3v output 8.0A 8.0A 7.0 A 7.0 A 5A 5A N/A +5.0v output 16A 16A 15A 15A 16A 16A N/A +12.0v output 12vA/15A; 12VB/10A 12VA/13A; 12VB/7A 18A 18A 17A 17A +12VA - 9.0 A & +12VB - 7.0 A Note: +12VB Rated at 0.4A when in Standby Mode. +5.0v auxiliary output 4.0A 4.0A 4.0 4.0 4.0A 4.0A N/A -12.0v output 0.5A 0.5A 0.5A 0.5A 0.5A 0.5A 0.1 A Max total power 305W 255W 255W 255W 235W 235W 180W Max combined +3.3v / +5.0v power 80W 80W 91.5W 91.5W 88W 88W N/A Max combined 12.0v power (note: only if more than one 12v rail) 240W 240W N/A N/A N/A N/A 180W BTUs/h (based on PSU max wattage) 1603 BTU 1000 BTU 1341 BTU 1000 BTU 1235 BTU 921 BTU 723 BTU 3.3v CMOS battery (type and estimated battery life) Power Supply Fan 80*25mm 80*25mm 92*25mm 92*25mm 80*15mm 80*15mm N/A Compliance: 1watt requirement Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Blue Angel Compliant Select Select Select Select Select Select Select Climate Savers / 80Plus Compliant No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes FEMP (CECP) Standby Power Compliant No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 18 AUDIO COMMUNICATIONS - NETWORK ADAPTER (NIC) NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. INTEGRATED ADI 1984A HIGH DEFINITION AUDIO MT DT SFF USFF High Definition Stereo support X X X X Number of channels 2 Number of Bits / Audio resolution 16, 20, and 24-bit resolution Sampling rate (recording/playback) Independent 8, 11.025, 16, 22.05, 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, 96, 176.4, and 192 kHz sample rates Signal to Noise Ratio 96+ dB audio outputs, 90+ dB audio inputs Analog Audio X X X X Dolby Digital THX Digital out (S/PDIF) Audio Jack Impedance Microphone 150 kΩ Line-In 150 kΩ Line-Out 190 Ω Headphone .5 Ω Internal Speaker Power Rating 2W INTEGRATED INTEL® 82567 GIGABIT1 ETHERNET LAN 10/100/1000 MT DT SFF USFF External Connector Type RJ45 Data Rates supported 10/100/1000 Mbps Controller Details Controller bus architecture (example PCIe 1.0a x1) Intel Gigabit LAN Connect Interface (GLCI) and LAN Connect Interface (LCI) Integrated memory N/A Data transfer mode (example Bus-Master DMA) N/A Power consumption (full operation per data rate connection speed) 680mW (Max.) Power consumption (standby operation) 141mW (Max.) IEEE standards compliance (example 802.1P) 802.3 Hardware Certifications (example FCC, B, GS mark…) N/A Boot ROM Support EEPROM (located in SPI) Network Transfer Mode (example Full Duplex, Half Duplex) Network Transfer Rate (example 10BASE-T (half-duplex) 10 Mbps 10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps 100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps 100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 Mbps 1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps 10 Mb (full/half-duplex) 100 Mb (full/half-duplex) 1000 Mb (full-duplex) DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 19 COMMUNICATIONS - NETWORK ADAPTER (NIC) (CONT.) COMMUNICATIONS – INTEGRATED LAN NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. INTEGRATED INTEL® 82567 GIGABIT1 ETHERNET LAN 10/100/1000 (CONT.) MT DT SFF USFF Environmental Operating temperature 0° C to 70° C (32° F to 158° F) Operating humidity 20% to 80% (non-condensing) Operating System Driver Support Windows® XP, Windows Vista® Ultimate, Windows Vista® Business 32 bit/64 bit, Windows Vista Home Basic Manageability (examples WOL, PXE) WOL, PXE 2.1 Management Capabilities Alerting Intel® Standard Manageability, Intel Core 2 Duo/ Quad Processor with vPro Technology 1 This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network infrastructure is required. Broadcom NetXtreme 10/100/1000 PCIe Gigabit1 Networking Card MT DT SFF USFF Connector Type RJ45 Data Rates supported 10/100/1000 Mbps Half/Full duplex Controller Details Controller bus architecture (example PCIe 1.0a x1) PCIe c1.0a x1 Integrated memory 64KBytes RX, 8KBytes TX Data transfer mode (example Bus-Master DMA) Bus-Master DMA Power consumption (full operation per data rate connection speed) 2.84W (860mA @ +3.3V) Power consumption (standby operation) Less than 300mW IEEE standards compliance (example 802.1P) 802.3, 802.2, 802.3x, 802.1p Hardware Certifications (example FCC, B, GS mark…) FCC B, VCCI B, CE Boot ROM Support No Network Transfer Mode (example Full Duplex, Half Duplex) Full Duplex/Half Duplex Network Transfer Rate (example 10BASE-T (half-duplex) 10 Mbps 10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps 100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps 100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 Mbps 1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps 10BASE-T (full-duplex) 20 Mbps Max* 100BASE-TX (half-duplex) 100 Mbps Max* 100BASE-TX (full-duplex) 200 MbpsMax* 1000BASE-T (full-duplex) 2000 Mbps Max* * Depends on the system environment. 1 This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network infrastructure is required. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 20 COMMUNICATIONS – INTEGRATED LAN (CONT.) BROADCOM NETXTREME 10/100/1000 PCIE GIGABIT1 NETWORKING CARD (CONT.) MT DT SFF USFF Environmental Operating temperature 0° C to 55° C (32° F - 131° F) Operating humidity 5% ~ 85% (non-condensing) Operating System Driver Support Windows® 7, Windows® XP, Windows Vista® Ultimate, Windows Vista® Business 32 bit/64 bit, Windows Vista Home Basic, Linux Manageability (examples WOL, PXE) WOL, PXE2.1, ACPI Management Capabilities Alerting (example ASF 2.0) None 1 This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 Gb/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network infrastructure is required. COMMUNICATIONS – MODEM V.92 DATA/FAX CONTROLLERLESS MODEM MT DT SFF USFF Bus PCI External Connector RJ-11 Data Transmission PCM - Pulse Coded Modulation (V.92/V.90) TCM - Trellis Coded Modulation (V.90/V.34/V.32 bis/V.32) Data Speeds 56kbps receive, 48kbps transmit Data Standards ITU V.92/V.90, V.34/V.32 bis/V.32 Fax Speeds 14.4kbps Fax Mode Capabilities 2-wire, half-duplex, synchronous Error Correction and Data Compression V.44, V.42, V.42bis, MNP 2-4, MNP 5 Power Management WOR (wake on ring) capable Upgradeability Driver upgradeable Video V.80 Synchronous Access Mode (SAM) can be supported by software applications (not driver) Operating Temperature 0~50 degree C Operating Humidity 45 degree C 90% max Operating System Support Windows 7,Vista 32/64, Windows XP 32/64 Operating System Driver Support Windows 7,Vista 32/64, Windows XP 32/64 Power Requirements +3.0V~+3.6V, 116.6mW max Chipset Conexant SmartHSFs/LF (CX11256 & CX20493) Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L X H) L: 5.25/13.325 H: 4.73/12.002 Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L X H) L: 5.26/13.366 H: 3.12/7.923 DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 21 COMMUNICATIONS – WIRELESS NOTE: Native DisplayPort on system is not supported w ith optional w ireless card on the DT and SFF chassis. DELL WIRELESS 1505 PCIE WLAN CARD (802.11N WITH REMOTE WAKE UP SUPPORT) MT DT SFF External Connector Type Custom WLAN Antenna Connector Controller Details Controller bus architecture Electrically compatible with the PCI Express Base Specification v1.1 (x1 lane) and PCIe v1.0a. WLAN standards supported 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n 802.11b Data Rates supported 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps 802.11a Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 802.11g Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 802.11n Data Rates supported 300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps Encryption WEP 64-bit and 128-bit, TKIP, AES-CCMP 128-bit Operating temperature 0 to +70 °C Operating humidity Max Operating Humidity 85 % Operating System Driver Support Windows 7, Windows XP 32/64, Vista 32/64 DELL WIRELESS 1510 PCIE MINI PCIE WLAN CARD (802.11N) USFF External Connector Type Custom WLAN Antenna Connector Controller Details Controller bus architecture Electrically compatible with the PCI Express Base Specification v1.1 (x1 lane) and PCIe v1.0a. WLAN standards supported 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n 802.11b Data Rates supported 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps 802.11a Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 802.11g Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 802.11n Data Rates supported 300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps Encryption WEP 64-bit and 128-bit, TKIP, AES-CCMP 128-bit Operating temperature 0 to +70 °C Operating humidity Max Operating Humidity 85 % Operating System Driver Support Windows 7, Windows XP 32/64, Vista 32/64 DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 22 COMMUNICATIONS – WIRELESS NOTE: Native DisplayPort on system is not supported w ith optional w ireless card on the DT and SFF chassis. DELL WIRELESS 1520 PCIE MINI PCIE WLAN CARD (802.11N) MT DT SFF USFF External Connector Type Custom WLAN Antenna Connector Controller Details Controller bus architecture Electrically compatible with the PCI Express Base Specification v1.1 (x1 lane) and PCIe v1.0a. WLAN standards supported 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n 802.11b Data Rates supported 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps 802.11a Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 802.11g Data Rates supported 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 802.11n Data Rates supported 300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps Encryption WEP 64-bit and 128-bit, TKIP, AES-CCMP 128-bit Operating temperature 0 to +70 °C Operating humidity Max Operating Humidity 85 % Operating System Driver Support Windows 7, Windows XP 32/64, Vista 32/64 DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 23 GRAPHICS/VIDEO CONTROLLER NOTE: MT supports full height card, DT supports low profile card or full height card with optional riser. SFF supports low profile card. INTEGRATED INTEL GMA 4500 MT DT SFF USFF Bus Type Integrated GPU core clock Gen5 core @ 667 350 MHz Integrated and with 350MHz 24 bit RAMDAC Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed XP: Up to 1GB shared system memory with 2GB system memory Vista: Up to 2GB shared system memory with 4GB system memory Maximum power consumption 4 W Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32 bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85 Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support OpenGL 2.0/DirectX 10.0 Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/ or digital) Up to 2560x1600 @ 60Hz (DP) Up to 1920x1200 @ 60Hz (DVI & VGA) Up to 1600x1200 @ 85Hz (VGA only) External Connectors VGA, DisplayPort Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 0° to 106° C (32° to 223° F) Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% (non-condensing) Altitude Range –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) DisplayPort Bus Type AUX 1, 2, 4 lanes Maximum supported resolution Up to 2560x1600 @ 60Hz Maximum power consumption N/A External connectors DisplayPort DVI (Digital) Adder Card (MT,DT and SFF Only) Bus Type sDVO Maximum supported resolution Up to 1920x1566 @ 60 Hz Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 5.75 x 2.75 / 14.61 x 6.99 Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 5.75 x 2.75 / 14.61 x 6.99 Maximum power consumption N/A External connectors DVI 1 Up to 1.7 GB of system memory may be allocated to support integrated graphics, depending on operating system, system memory size and other factors. 2 DVI and VGA can be used concurrently for multi-monitor display in DOS. The DisplayPort controller does not support multi-monitor display in DOS 3 Populating a discrete graphics card in the x16 slot disables onboard video. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 24 GRAPHICS/VIDEO CONTROLLER (CONT.) 1GB NVIDIA GEFORCE GT330 MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 600Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz Maximum power consumption 22W Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz External connectors 1 DVI and 1 DisplayPort Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 4.7 / 16.764 x 12.0 Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 3.35 / 16.764 x 8.5 Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. 512MB AMD RADEON™ HD 4550 GRAPHICS DUAL DVI OR VGA AND TV OUT MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 540Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz Maximum power consumption 25W Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz External connectors 1 DVI and 1 DisplayPort Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 4.7 / 16.764 x 12.0 Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 3.35 / 16.764 x 8.5 Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 25 GRAPHICS/VIDEO CONTROLLER (CONT.) 1DMS-59 to VGA or DMS-59 to DVI adaptors required. 256MB AMD RADEON™ HD 3450 GRAPHICS DUAL DVI OR VGA AND TV OUT MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 600Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz Maximum power consumption 22W Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz External connectors DMS-591 and S-video Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 4.7 / 16.764 x 12.0 Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 3.35 / 16.764 x 8.5 Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. 256MB NVIDIA GEFORCE 9300 GE MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 540Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz Maximum power consumption 25W Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz External connectors DMS-591 and S-video Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 4.7 / 16.764 x 12.0 Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 3.35 / 16.764 x 8.5 Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. 1DMS-59 to VGA or DMS-59 to DVI adaptors required. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 26 GRAPHICS/VIDEO CONTROLLER (CONT.) 256MB AMD RADEON™ HD 3470 GRAPHICS W/ DUAL DP MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 750Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 500Mhz Maximum power consumption 18W Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 85Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support D3D and OpenGL Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 1920x1440/32bpp @ 75Hz Min : 640x480/8bpp @ 60Hz External connectors 2 Display Port Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 4.7 / 16.764 x 12.0 Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 4.7 / 16.764 x 12.0 Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. 512MB NVIDIA QUADRO NVS 420 MT DT SFF Bus Type (example integrated or PCIe x16) PCIEx16 GPU core clock 550Mhz Frame Buffer Memory (onboard and shared) Size and Speed 512MB, 700Mhz Maximum power consumption 40W Overlay Planes Yes Maximum Color Depth 32-bit Maximum Vertical Refresh Rate 75Hz Multiple Display Support Yes Operating Systems Graphics/ Video API Support Supported Resolutions and Max Refresh Rates (Hz) (Note: Analog and/or digital) Max : 2560x1600 @ 60Hz (Digital) Max : 1920x1200 @ 60Hz (Analog) External connectors VHDCI to Quad DisplayPort VHDCI to Quad single-link DVI-D Dimensions of full height card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 2.731 / 16.764 x 6.936 Dimensions of low profile card inches/centimeters (L x H) 6.6 x 2.731 / 16.764 x 6.936 Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 10°-50° C Relative Humidity Range 5-90% RH Altitude Range 0-20,000 ft. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 27 HARD DRIVES1 3.5” 160GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 160,041,885,696 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 8 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 312,581,808 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 3.5” 250GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 250,059,350,016 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 8 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 488,397,168 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 28 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 3.5” 250GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD (CONT.) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 3.5” 320GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 320,072,933,376 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 625,142,448 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 29 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 3.5” 500GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 500,107,862,016 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 976,773,168 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 30 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 3.5” 1TB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 1,000,204,886,016 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 32 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 1,953,525,168 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7.0W, Active 10.0W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 31 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 3.5” 80GB SATA 10000 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 80,026,361,856 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 (includes sled) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 4.6 ms (average read) Rotational Speed 10,000 rpm Logical Blocks 156,301,488 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7W, Active 10W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 32 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 3.5” 160GB SATA 10000 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 160,041,885,696 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 (includes sled) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 4.6 ms (average read) Rotational Speed 10,000 rpm Logical Blocks 312,581,808 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 7W, Active 10W DC Current 5V (.8A) and 12V (1.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 33 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 2.5” 160GB FULL DISK ENCRYPTION SATA HDD Capacity (bytes) 160,041,885,696 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 (includes sled) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 8 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 312,581,808 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W DC Current 5V (.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 34 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 2.5” 250GB FIPS FULL DISK ENCRYPTION SATA HDD Capacity (bytes) 250,059,350,016 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 5.87 x 4 x 1 (includes sled) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 8.5 ms Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 488,397,168 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W DC Current 5V (.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 35 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 0°C to 70°C Relative Humidity Range 10 to 90% Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29°C Altitude Range -200 to 5,000 m Op Shock (@0.5ms) 1,500G Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -55°C to 95°C Relative Humidity Range 5 to 95% Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38°C Altitude Range -200 to 10,600 m 2.5” 64GB1 SATA SOLID STATE DRIVE Capacity (bytes) 64,023,257,088 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 3.94 x 2.75 x 0.374 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s MTBF 1M hours Average Seek Time n/a Performance: Sequential Read/ Write 220/200 (MB/s) Performance: SYSmark ‘07 Overall Score 156 Logical Blocks 125,045,424 Power Source DC Power Consumption (Max) Idle 0.7W, Active 1.25W DC Current 5V (0.8A) DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 36 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 0°C to 70°C Relative Humidity Range 10 to 90% Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29°C Altitude Range -200 to 5,000 m Op Shock (@0.5ms) 1,500G Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -55°C to 95°C Relative Humidity Range 5 to 95% Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38°C Altitude Range -200 to 10,600 m 2.5” 128GB1 SATA SOLID STATE DRIVE Capacity (bytes) 128,035,676,160 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) 3.94 x 2.75 x 0.374 Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s MTBF 1M hours Average Seek Time n/a Performance: Sequential Read/ Write 220/200 (MB/s) Performance: SYSmark ‘07 Overall Score 156 Logical Blocks 250,069,680 Power Source DC Power Consumption (Max) Idle 0.205W, Active 0.435W DC Current 5V (0.8A) DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 37 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. 2.5” 160GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 160,144,285,696 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) Approximately (3.93 x 2.75 x 0.374 inches) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 12 ms (Read) Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 312,581,808 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W DC Current 5V (.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 38 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. 2.5” 250GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 250,059,350,016 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) Approximately (3.93 x 2.75 x 0.374 inches) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 12 ms (Read) Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 488,397,168 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W DC Current 5V (.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 39 HARD DRIVES (CONT.) 1 For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes ; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating environment and will be less. 2.5” 320GB SATA 7200 RPM HDD Capacity (bytes) 320,072,933,376 Dimensions inches (W x D x H) Approximately (3.93 x 2.75 x 0.374 inches) Interface type and Maximum speed Up to 3Gb/s Internal buffer size 16 MB Average Seek Time 12 ms (Read) Rotational Speed 7200 rpm Logical Blocks 625,142,448 Power Source DC Power (Max) Idle 1.0W, Active 3.25W DC Current 5V (.8A) Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range 5 0C to 600C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 290C Altitude Range -50 ft to 10000 ft Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Temperature Range -400C to 650C Relative Humidity Range 10% to 90% non-condensing Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 380C Altitude Range -50 ft to 35000 ft DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 40 OPTICAL DRIVES DVD +/- RW1 MT DT SFF USFF External Dimensions inches/centimeters (Without Bezel – W x H x D) 148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) 128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) Weight (max) pounds/ kilograms 800g 800g 170g 170g Interface type and speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard Standard Internal buffer size supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent Access Times (typical) supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent Maximum Data Transfer Rates Writes 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD 8x DVD / 24x CD Reads 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD Power Source DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V 5V DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 1000mA 1000mA Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29C 29C 29C 29C Altitude Range -200 to 3048 -200 to 3048 -200 to 3048 -200 to 3048 Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38C 38C 38C 38C Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m 1 Discs burned with this drive may not be compatible with some existing drives and players; using DVD+R media provides maximum compatibility. DVD-ROM MT DT SFF USFF External Dimensions inches/centimeters (Without Bezel – W x H x D) 148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) 128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) Weight (max) pounds/ kilograms 750g 750g 165g 165g Interface type and speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard Standard Internal buffer size supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent Access Times (typical) supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent Maximum Data Transfer Rates Writes N/A N/A N/A N/A Reads 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 41 OPTICAL DRIVES (CONT.) DVD-ROM (CONT.) MT DT SFF USFF Power Source DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V 5V DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 800mA 800mA Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29C 29C 29C 29C Altitude Range -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38C 38C 38C 38C Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m COMBO DVD/ CDRW MT DT SFF USFF External Dimensions inches/centimeters (Without Bezel – W x H x D) 148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) 128.0 mm (5.04)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) Weight (max) pounds/ kilograms 750g 750g 165g 165g Interface type and speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard Standard Internal buffer size supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent Access Times (typical) supplier dependent supplier dependent c supplier dependent Maximum Data Transfer Rates Writes 48x CD 48x CD 24x CD 24x CD Reads 16x DVD/48x CD 16x DVD/48x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD 8x DVD/ 24x CD Power Source DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V 5V DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 900mA 900mA Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29C 29C 29C 29C Altitude Range -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38C 38C 38C 38C Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 42 OPTICAL DRIVES (CONT.) BLU-RAY WRITER MT DT SFF USFF External Dimensions inches/centimeters (Without Bezel – W x H x D) 148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 148.2mm(6in)/42mm (2in)/ 190.5 (max) 128.0 mm (5.04in)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) 128.0 mm (5.04in)/ 12.7mm (0.5 in)/ 126.1mm (4.97in) Weight (max) pounds/ kilograms 750g 750g 165g 165g Interface type and speed SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s SATA 1.5Gbit/s Disc Capacity Standard Standard Standard Standard Internal buffer size supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent supplier dependent Access Times (typical) supplier dependent supplier dependent c supplier dependent Maximum Data Transfer Rates Writes 6X BD/16x DVD/40x CD 6x BD/16x DVD/40x CD 6X BD/8x DVD/24x CD 6X BD/8x DVD/24x CD Reads 8X BD/16x DVD/40x CD 8x BD/16x DVD/40x CD 6X BD/8x DVD/ 24x CD 6X BD/8x DVD/ 24x CD Power Source DC Power Requirements 12V, 5V 12V, 5V 5V 5V DC Current 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 1200mA (12V)/ 900mA (5V) 900mA 900mA Environmental Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C 5C to 50C Relative Humidity Range 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH 20% to 80% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29C 29C 29C 29C Altitude Range -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m -200 to 3048m Environmental Non-Operating Conditions (Non-Condensing): Operating Temperature Range -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C -40C to 65C Relative Humidity Range 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH 5% to 95% RH Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 38C 38C 38C 38C Altitude Range -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m -200 to 10600m DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 43 BIOS DEFAULTS Drives Diskette drive: USB SATA Operation; RAID On SMART Reporting: Disable SATA-0: Enable SATA-1: Enable External SATA: Enable System Configuration Integrated NIC: Enable USB Controller: Enable Parallel Port: PS/2 Parallel Port Address: 378h Serial Port #1: Auto Serial Port #2: Auto Front USB: Enable Rear Quad USB: Enable Rear Dual USB: Enable PCI Slots: Enable Audio: Enable Video Primary Video: Auto Performance Multiple CPU Core: Enable Intel® SpeedStep™: Disable, unless the customer purchased a SpeedStep™ capable processor. C States Control: Disable Limit CPUID Value: Disable HDD Acoustic Mode: Bypass Virtualization Support Virtualization: Disable VT for Direct I/O: Disable Security Administrator Password: Not set System Password: Not set Password Changes: Enable TPM Security: Disable CPU XD Support: Enable Computrace®: Deactivate SATA-0 Password: Not set DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 44 BIOS DEFAULTS (CONT.) Power Management AC Recovery: Power Off Auto On Time: Disable Low Power Mode: Disable Remote Wake Up: Disable Suspend Mode: S3 Fan Control Override: Disable Maintenance Service Tag: Set by the factory Asset Tag: Optional User Entry SERR Message: Enable Post Behavior Fast Boot: Enable Numlock LED: Enable POST HotKeys: Enable Keyboard Errors: Enable MEBx HotKey Enable DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 45 CHASSIS ENCLOSURE & VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS ENCLOSURE VENTILATION If your enclosure has doors, they need to be of a type that allows at least 30% airflow through the enclosure (front and back). ENCLOSURE MINIMUM CLEARANCE Leave a 10.2 cm (4 in.) minimum clearance on all vented sides of the computer to permit the airflow required for proper ventilation. RECOMMENDED ENCLOSURE Do not install your computer in an enclosure that does not allow airflow. This restricts the airflow and impacts your computer’s performance, possibly causing it to overheat. OPEN DESK MINIMUM CLEARANCE If your computer is installed in a corner, on a desk, or under a desk, leave at least 5.1 cm (2 in.) clearance from the back of the computer to the wall to permit the airflow required for proper ventilation. REGULATORY COMPLIANCE AND ENVIRONMENTAL Product related conformity assessment and regulatory authorizations including Product Safety, Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Ergonomics, and Communication Devices relevant to this product may be viewed at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. The Regulatory Datasheet for this product is located at http://www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Details of Dell's environmental stewardship program to conserve product energy consumption, reduce or eliminate materials for disposal, prolong product life span and provide effective and convenient equipment recovery solutions may be viewed at www.dell.com/environment. Product related conformity assessment, regulatory authorizations, and information encompassing Environmental, Energy Consumption, Noise Emissions, Product Materials Information, Packaging, Batteries, and Recycling relevant to this product may be viewed by clicking the Design for Environment link on the webpage. DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 46 ACOUSTIC NOISE EMISSION INFORMATION Component Typical Configuration High-end Configuration CPU E8500 Q9550 Memory 1GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x1) 2GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x2) HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 250 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 (x2) RMSD DVDRW/DVD dual config DVDRW/DVD dual config Graphics Adapter GeForce 9300 GE Radeon HD 3470 OPTIPLEX 780 MT The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell OptiPlex 780 MT is as follows: (all values LWAd expressed in bels; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts) Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) High-end Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) Idle 3.8 N/A HDD Operating 3.8 N/A 90% CPU 3.9 N/A ODD Operating 5.1 N/A The Declared A-weighted Sound Pressure Level in decibels (re 2x10-5 Pa), at Operator, Bystander, and Desk Side Positions are measured in accordance with ISO 7779 7.6.1, 7.6.2, and C.15.2 and declared in accordance with ISO 9296 for this product is as follows1 : Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Pressure (LpA) High-end Configuration Declared Sound Pressure (LpA) Table-Top Floor-Standing Table-Top Floor- Standing Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Idle 28.2 23.2 22.1 20.6 28.0 23.2 21.4 20.5 HDD Operating 28.1 23.1 22.5 20.9 28.0 23.0 21.4 20.4 90% CPU 30.8 26.1 23.6 22.0 32.2 26.8 27.6 26.3 ODD Operating 33.6 42.1 35.6 34.3 33.3 1 All tests are conducted according to ISO 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was stressed at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured using the same microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes. 2 Declared Sound Power rounded to nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2 DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 47 ACOUSTIC NOISE EMISSION INFORMATION OPTIPLEX 780 DT The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell OptiPlex 780 DT is as follows: (all values LWAd expressed in bels; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts) The Declared A-weighted Sound Pressure Level in decibels (re 2x10-5 Pa), at Operator, Bystander, and Desk Side Positions are measured in accordance with ISO 7779 7.6.1, 7.6.2, and C.15.2 and declared in accordance with ISO 9296 for this product is as follows1 : 1 All tests are conducted according to ISO 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was stressed at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured using the same microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes. 2 Declared Sound Power rounded to nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) High-end Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) Idle 3.7 N/A HDD Operating 3.7 N/A 90% CPU 4.1 N/A ODD Operating 5.1 N/A Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Pressure (LpA) High-end Configuration Declared Sound Pressure (LpA) Table-Top Floor-Standing Table-Top Floor- Standing Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Idle 26.1 22.1 20.7 20.1 26.1 22.0 20.0 19.0 HDD Operating 25.9 22.0 20.8 19.9 26.0 21.9 20.2 19.1 90% CPU 32.4 26.4 24.3 23.4 35.0 29.0 26.5 25.0 ODD Operating 34.3 42.6 37.2 35.5 33.8 Component Typical Configuration High-end Configuration CPU E8500 Q9550 Memory 1GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x1) 2GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x2) HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 250 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 (x2) RMSD DVDRW/DVD dual config DVDRW/DVD dual config Graphics Adapter GeForce 9300 GE Radeon HD 3470 DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 48 ACOUSTIC NOISE EMISSION INFORMATION OPTIPLEX 780 SFF The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell OptiPlex 780 SFF is as follows: (all values LWAd expressed in bels; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts) The Declared A-weighted Sound Pressure Level in decibels (re 2x10-5 Pa), at Operator, Bystander, and Desk Side Positions are measured in accordance with ISO 7779 7.6.1, 7.6.2, and C.15.2 and declared in accordance with ISO 9296 for this product is as follows1 : 1 All tests are conducted according to ISO 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was stressed at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured using the same microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes. 2 Declared Sound Power rounded to nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) High-end Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) Idle 3.8 N/A HDD Operating 3.7 N/A 90% CPU 4.1 N/A ODD Operating 4.8 N/A Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Pressure (LpA) High-end Configuration Declared Sound Pressure (LpA) Table-Top Floor-Standing Table-Top Floor- Standing Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Operator Position (LpA) Bystander Position (LpA) Idle 28.0 24.1 20.8 20.2 31.0 26.5 23.0 22.2 HDD Operating 28.2 24.1 20.6 20.2 30.7 25.9 23.0 22.2 90% CPU 33.0 28.2 24.1 23.6 42.1 35.0 31.3 29.4 ODD Operating Component Typical Configuration High-end Configuration CPU E8500 Q9550 Memory 1GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x1) 2GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x2) HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 250 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 (x2) RMSD DVDRW/DVD dual config DVDRW/DVD dual config Graphics Adapter GeForce 9300 GE Radeon HD 3470 DELL™ OPTIPLEX™ 780 TECHNICAL GUIDEBOOK V2.0 49 ACOUSTIC NOISE EMISSION INFORMATION OPTIPLEX 780 USFF The Declared Noise Emission in accordance with ISO 9296 for the Dell Optiplex 780 USFF is as follows: (all values LWAd expressed in bels; 1 bel=10 decibels, re 10-12 Watts) The Declared A-weighted Sound Pressure Level in decibels (re 2x10-5 Pa), at Operator, Bystander, and Desk Side Positions are measured in accordance with ISO 7779 7.6.1, 7.6.2, and C.15.2 and declared in accordance with ISO 9296 for this product is as follows1 : 1 All tests are conducted according to ISO 7779 and declared according to ISO 9296 except 90% CPU. For this mode, the system CPU was stressed at 90% utilization with no other peripheral device actively seeking. This test mode is not specified in ISO 7779, but was measured using the same microphone distances and measurement techniques defined for the other reported operating modes. 2 Declared Sound Power rounded to nearest tenth of a bel per ISO 9296 section 4.4.2 Operating Mode Typical Configuration Declared Sound Power (LWAd) Idle 3.9 HDD Operating 3.9 90% CPU 4.4 ODD Operating 4.8 Component Typical Configuration CPU E8500 Memory 2GB DDR3 1066 MHz (x1) HDD (#, capacity) 160 GB 7200 RPM SATA2 RMSD DVDRW Graphics Adapter Integrated USER MANUAL ENG This user manual includes detailed usage instructions for your camera. Please read this manual thoroughly. 1 Copyright information Camera specifications or contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of camera functions. You are not allowed to reuse or distribute any part of this manual without prior permission. We recommend using your camera within the country where you purchase it. Use this camera responsibly and adhere to all laws and regulations concerning its use. PlanetFirst represents Samsung Electronics' commitment to sustainable development and social responsibility through eco-driven business and management activities. Microsoft Windows and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. Mac and Apple App Store are registered trademarks of the Apple Corporation. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google, Inc. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Photoshop, and Lightroom are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. microSD™, microSDHC™, and microSDXC™ are registered trademarks of the SD Association. HDMI, the HDMI logo, and the term "High Definition Multimedia Interface" are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Trademarks and trade names used in this manual are the property of their respective owners. 2 Health and safety information Prevent damage to subjects’ eyesight. Do not use the flash in close proximity (closer than 1 m/3 ft) to people or animals. If you use the flash too close to your subject’s eyes, this can cause temporary or permanent eyesight damage. Keep your camera away from small children and pets. Keep your camera and all accessories out of the reach of small children and animals. Small parts may cause choking or serious injury if swallowed. Moving parts and accessories may present physical dangers as well. Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight or high temperatures for an extended period of time. Prolonged exposure to sunlight or extreme temperatures can cause permanent damage to your camera’s internal components. Avoid covering the camera or charger with blankets or clothes. The camera may overheat, which may distort the camera or cause a fire. Do not handle the power supply cord or the charger during a thunderstorm. This may result in an electric shock. Always comply with the following precautions and usage tips to avoid dangerous situations and ensure peak performance of your camera. Warning—situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Do not disassemble or attempt to repair your camera. You can damage the camera and expose yourself to the risk of an electric shock. Do not use your camera near flammable or explosive gases and liquids. This may cause a fire or explosion. Do not insert flammable materials into the camera or store these materials near the camera. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not handle your camera with wet hands. This may result in an electric shock. 3 Health and safety information If liquid or foreign objects enter your camera, immediately disconnect all power sources, such as the battery or charger, and then contact a Samsung service center. Comply with any regulations that restrict the use of a camera in a certain area. Avoid interference with other electronic devices. Turn off the camera when in an aircraft. Your camera can cause interference with aircraft equipment. Follow all airline regulations and turn off your camera when directed by airline personnel. Turn off the camera near medical equipment. Your camera can interfere with medical equipment in hospitals or health care facilities. Follow all regulations, posted warnings, and directions from medical personnel. Avoid interference with pacemakers. Maintain a safe distance between this camera and all pacemakers to avoid potential interference, as recommended by the manufacturer and research groups. If you have any reason to suspect that your camera is interfering with a pacemaker or other medical device, turn off the camera immediately and contact the manufacturer of the pacemaker or medical device for guidance. Caution—situations that could cause damage to your camera or other equipment Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended period of time. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious damage to your camera. Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement batteries. Do not damage or heat the battery. Inauthentic, damaged, or heated batteries may cause a fire or personal injury. Use only Samsung-approved batteries, chargers, cables, and accessories. Using unauthorized batteries, chargers, cables, or accessories can cause batteries to explode, damage your camera, or cause injury. Samsung is not responsible for damage or injuries caused by unapproved batteries, chargers, cables, or accessories. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Misusing the battery may cause a fire or electric shock. 4 Health and safety information Do not touch the flash while it fires. The flash is very hot when fired and may burn your skin. When you use the AC charger, turn off the camera before you disconnect the power to the AC charger. Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock. Disconnect the charger from the wall socket when not in use. Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock. Do not use a damaged power supply cord, plug, or loose outlet when you charge batteries. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not allow the AC charger to come in contact with the +/- terminals on the battery. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not drop or subject the camera to strong impacts. Doing so may damage the screen or external or internal components. Exercise caution when you connect cables and install batteries and memory cards. If you force the connectors, improperly connect cables, or improperly install batteries and memory cards, you can damage ports, connectors, and accessories. Keep cards with magnetic strips away from the camera case. Information stored on the card may be damaged or erased. Never use a damaged battery or memory card. This may result in electric shock or camera malfunction or cause a fire. Do not place the camera in or near magnetic fields. Doing so may cause the camera to malfunction. Do not use the camera if the screen is damaged. If the glass or acrylic parts are broken, visit a Samsung service center to have the camera repaired. 5 Health and safety information Check that the camera is operating properly before use. The manufacturer takes no responsibility for any loss of files or damage that may result from camera malfunction or improper use. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight. This may discolor the image sensor or cause it to malfunction. If the camera overheats, remove the battery and allow it to cool down. Prolonged usage of the camera may overheat the battery and raise the internal temperature of the camera. If the camera stops operating, remove the battery and allow it to cool down. High internal temperatures may result in noise in your photos. This is normal and does not affect your camera’s overall performance. Avoid interference with other electronic devices. Your camera emits radio frequency (RF) signals that may interfere with unshielded or improperly shielded electronic equipment, such as pacemakers, hearing aids, medical devices, and other electronic devices in homes or vehicles. Consult the manufacturers of your electronic devices to solve any interference problems you experience. To prevent unwanted interference, use only Samsung-approved devices or accessories. Use your camera in the normal position. Avoid contact with your camera’s internal antenna. Data transference and your responsibilities Data transferred via WLAN could be leaked, so avoid transferring sensitive data in public areas or on open networks. The camera manufacturer is not liable for any data transfers that infringe on copyrights, trademarks, intellectual property laws, or public decency ordinances. 6 Icons used in this manual Icon Function Additional information Safety warnings and precautions [ ] Camera buttons. For example, [Shutter] represents the shutter button. ( ) Page number of related information ĺ The order of options or menus you must select to perform a step; for example: Select b ĺ Quality (represents select b, and then Quality). * Annotation This manual is explained based on NX-M lenses. When you attach NX lenses using the mount adapter, some shooting options or functions may not be supported. 7 Contents Chapter 1 My Camera Getting started ............................................................................................ 27 Unpacking.................................................................................................................... 27 Camera layout .............................................................................................. 28 Using the DIRECT LINK button ............................................................................. 30 Setting the DIRECT LINK button ............................................................................. 30 Using the display ....................................................................................................... 31 Using the Self shot mode.......................................................................................... 31 Inserting the battery and memory card ................................................. 32 Removing the battery and memory card ......................................................... 34 Using the memory card adapter .......................................................................... 34 Charging the battery and turning on your camera .............................. 35 Charging the battery................................................................................................ 35 Turning on your camera ......................................................................................... 35 Performing the initial setup ...................................................................... 36 Selecting functions (options) ................................................................... 38 Selecting with buttons ............................................................................................ 38 Selecting by touch .................................................................................................... 38 Using m ................................................................................................................. 39 E.g. Selecting the photo size in P mode .............................................................. 39 Using the Smart panel ............................................................................................. 40 E.g. Adjust the exposure value in P mode .......................................................... 40 Selecting a mode ......................................................................................... 41 Accessing a Mode screen ....................................................................................... 41 Mode description ...................................................................................................... 41 Tips Concepts in Photography Shooting postures....................................................................................... 13 Holding the camera ..................................................................................................... 13 Standing photography ............................................................................................... 14 Crouching photography ............................................................................................ 14 Aperture ........................................................................................................ 15 Aperture value and the depth of field .................................................................. 16 Shutter speed ............................................................................................... 17 ISO sensitivity .............................................................................................. 18 How the aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity control exposure ......................................................................................... 19 Correlation between focal length, angle, and perspective ................ 20 Depth of field ............................................................................................... 20 What controls out-of-focus effects? ....................................................................... 21 DOF preview ................................................................................................................... 22 Composition ................................................................................................. 23 Rule of Thirds .................................................................................................................. 23 Photos with two subjects .......................................................................................... 24 Flash ............................................................................................................... 25 Flash guide number ..................................................................................................... 25 8 Contents Display icons ................................................................................................ 43 In Shooting mode ..................................................................................................... 43 Capturing photos ........................................................................................................ 43 Recording videos ......................................................................................................... 44 About the level gauge ............................................................................................... 44 In Playback mode ...................................................................................................... 45 Viewing photos ............................................................................................................ 45 Playing videos ............................................................................................................... 45 Changing the information displayed ................................................................. 46 Lenses ............................................................................................................ 47 Lens layout ................................................................................................................... 47 Locking or unlocking the lens ................................................................................. 48 Lens markings ............................................................................................................ 49 Accessories ................................................................................................... 50 External flash layout ................................................................................................. 50 Connecting the external flash ................................................................................. 51 Mount adapter layout .............................................................................................. 52 Attaching the mount adapter ................................................................................. 52 Removing the mount adapter ................................................................................ 53 Shooting modes .......................................................................................... 54 Auto mode ................................................................................................................... 54 Smart mode................................................................................................................. 56 Using the Beauty Face mode ................................................................................... 56 Using the Best Face mode ........................................................................................ 57 Capturing panoramic photos .................................................................................. 58 Program mode ........................................................................................................... 59 Program Shift ................................................................................................................ 60 Minimum shutter speed ............................................................................................ 60 Aperture Priority mode ........................................................................................... 61 Shutter Priority mode .............................................................................................. 62 Manual mode.............................................................................................................. 63 Using Framing Mode .................................................................................................. 63 Using the Bulb function ............................................................................................ 64 Recording a video ..................................................................................................... 65 Available functions by shooting mode ............................................................. 66 Chapter 2 Shooting Functions Size and Resolution .................................................................................... 69 Photo size ..................................................................................................................... 69 Quality ........................................................................................................................... 70 ISO sensitivity .............................................................................................. 71 White Balance .............................................................................................. 72 Customizing preset White Balance options ....................................................... 73 Picture Wizard (photo styles) .................................................................... 74 9 Contents AF mode ........................................................................................................ 75 Single AF ....................................................................................................................... 75 Continuous AF ............................................................................................................ 76 Manual focus ............................................................................................................... 76 AF area ........................................................................................................... 77 Selection AF ................................................................................................................ 77 Multi AF ......................................................................................................................... 78 Face Detection ............................................................................................. 79 Normal........................................................................................................................... 79 Smile Shot .................................................................................................................... 80 Wink Shot ..................................................................................................................... 80 Touch AF ........................................................................................................ 81 Touch AF ....................................................................................................................... 81 AF Point ......................................................................................................................... 81 Tracking AF .................................................................................................................. 81 One touch shot .......................................................................................................... 82 MF Assist ....................................................................................................... 83 Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) ............................................................. 84 Drive (shooting method) ........................................................................... 85 Single ............................................................................................................................. 85 Continuous Normal .................................................................................................. 86 Burst ............................................................................................................................... 86 Timer .............................................................................................................................. 87 Auto Exposure Bracketing (AE Bracket) ............................................................. 87 White Balance Bracketing (WB Bracket) ............................................................ 88 Picture Wizard Bracketing (P Wiz Bracket) ........................................................ 88 Depth Bracketing ..................................................................................................... 89 Flash ............................................................................................................... 90 Reducing the red-eye effect .................................................................................. 91 Adjusting the flash intensity ................................................................................. 91 Metering ........................................................................................................ 92 Multi ............................................................................................................................... 92 Center-weighted ....................................................................................................... 93 Spot ................................................................................................................................ 93 Measuring the exposure value of the focus area ........................................... 94 Dynamic Range ........................................................................................... 95 Smart Filter ................................................................................................... 96 Exposure compensation ............................................................................ 97 Exposure lock ............................................................................................... 98 Video functions ........................................................................................... 99 Movie size..................................................................................................................... 99 When Video Out is set to NTSC ............................................................................... 99 When Video Out is set to PAL .................................................................................. 99 Movie quality ........................................................................................................... 100 Multi Motion ............................................................................................................ 100 Fader ........................................................................................................................... 101 Voice ............................................................................................................................ 101 10 Contents Chapter 3 Playback/Editing Searching and managing files ................................................................ 103 Viewing photos ....................................................................................................... 103 Viewing image thumbnails ................................................................................. 103 Viewing files by category .................................................................................... 104 Viewing files as a folder ........................................................................................ 104 Protecting files ........................................................................................................ 105 Deleting files ............................................................................................................ 106 Deleting a single file ................................................................................................. 106 Deleting multiple files .............................................................................................. 106 Deleting all files .......................................................................................................... 106 Viewing photos .......................................................................................... 107 Enlarging a photo .................................................................................................. 107 Viewing a slide show ............................................................................................. 107 Auto rotating ........................................................................................................... 108 Playing videos ............................................................................................ 109 Scanning backward or forward ......................................................................... 109 Adjusting the brightness of a video ................................................................ 110 Adjusting the volume of a video ...................................................................... 110 Trimming a video during playback .................................................................. 111 Capturing an image during playback ............................................................. 111 Editing photos ........................................................................................... 112 Cropping a photo ................................................................................................... 112 Rotating a photo .................................................................................................... 113 Resizing photos....................................................................................................... 113 Adjusting your photos .......................................................................................... 114 Retouching faces .................................................................................................... 115 Applying Smart Filter effects .............................................................................. 116 Chapter 4 Wireless network Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings ............... 118 Connecting to a WLAN ......................................................................................... 118 Setting network options ......................................................................................... 119 Manually setting the IP address ........................................................................... 119 Using the login browser....................................................................................... 120 Network connection tips ..................................................................................... 121 Entering text ............................................................................................................ 122 Using the NFC Feature (Tag & Go) ......................................................... 123 Using NFC features in Shooting mode ........................................................... 123 Using NFC features in Playback mode (Photo Beam)................................ 123 Using NFC features in Wi-Fi mode .................................................................... 123 Saving files to a smart phone automatically ....................................... 124 Sending photos or videos to a smart phone ....................................... 126 11 Contents Chapter 5 Camera settings menu User settings ............................................................................................... 146 ISO Customizing ..................................................................................................... 146 ISO Expansion ............................................................................................................. 146 ISO Step ......................................................................................................................... 146 Auto ISO Range .......................................................................................................... 146 Noise Reduction ..................................................................................................... 147 Bracket Settings ...................................................................................................... 147 Color Space ............................................................................................................... 148 Distortion Correct .................................................................................................. 149 Touch Operation ..................................................................................................... 149 iFn Customizing ...................................................................................................... 149 User Display .............................................................................................................. 150 Key Mapping ............................................................................................................ 151 Live view NFC........................................................................................................... 151 MobileLink/NFC Image Size .............................................................................. 151 Grid Line .................................................................................................................... 151 AF Lamp ..................................................................................................................... 152 Auto Self-Shot ......................................................................................................... 152 Lens Button Speed Settings ............................................................................... 152 Setting ......................................................................................................... 153 Sending photos or videos to multiple smart phones ........................ 128 Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release .............................. 130 Using the Baby Monitor ........................................................................... 132 Adjusting the noise level for alarm activation ............................................. 133 Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos ..................................... 134 Installing the program for Auto Backup on your PC.................................. 134 Sending photos or videos to a PC .................................................................... 134 Sending photos or videos via email ...................................................... 136 Changing email settings ...................................................................................... 136 Storing your information ........................................................................................ 136 Setting an email password ..................................................................................... 137 Changing the email password .............................................................................. 138 Sending photos or videos via email ................................................................ 138 Using photo or video sharing services ................................................. 140 Accessing a sharing service ................................................................................ 140 Uploading photos or videos............................................................................... 141 Using Samsung Link to send files .......................................................... 142 Uploading photos to an online storage ......................................................... 142 Viewing photos or videos on devices that support Samsung Link ...... 143 12 Contents Using or storing the camera ............................................................................... 167 Inappropriate places to use or store the camera ........................................... 167 Using on beaches or shores ................................................................................... 167 Storing for extended period of time ................................................................... 167 Using the camera with caution in humid environments ............................ 168 Other cautions ............................................................................................................ 168 About memory card .............................................................................................. 169 Supported memory card ........................................................................................ 169 Memory card capacity ............................................................................................. 170 Cautions when using memory cards .................................................................. 171 About the battery .................................................................................................. 172 Battery specifications ............................................................................................... 172 Battery life .................................................................................................................... 174 Low battery message ............................................................................................... 174 Notes about using the battery .............................................................................. 174 Cautions about using the battery ........................................................................ 175 Notes about charging the battery ....................................................................... 175 Notes about charging with a computer connected...................................... 176 Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care ............................ 176 Updating the firmware ............................................................................. 177 Before contacting a service center ........................................................ 178 Camera specifications .............................................................................. 181 Glossary ....................................................................................................... 186 Optional accessories ................................................................................. 192 Index ............................................................................................................ 193 FCC notice ................................................................................................... 196 Chapter 6 Connecting to external devices Viewing files on an HDTV ........................................................................ 157 Transferring files to your computer ....................................................... 158 Transferring files to your Windows OS computer ....................................... 158 Connecting the camera as a removable disk ................................................... 158 Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP) .................................................. 159 Transferring files to your Mac OS ...................................................................... 159 Using programs on a PC........................................................................... 161 Installing programs from the provided CD ................................................... 161 Available programs when using i-Launcher .................................................... 161 Using i-Launcher .................................................................................................... 162 Requirements for Windows OS ............................................................................. 162 Requirements for Mac OS ....................................................................................... 162 Opening i-Launcher .................................................................................................. 162 Downloading the firmware .................................................................................... 163 Downloading the PC Auto Backup program ................................................... 163 Installing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ........................................................ 163 Using Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ............................................................... 163 Chapter 7 Appendix Error messages .......................................................................................... 165 Maintaining the camera........................................................................... 166 Cleaning the camera ............................................................................................. 166 Camera lens and display ......................................................................................... 166 Image sensor ............................................................................................................... 166 Camera body ............................................................................................................... 166 13 Concepts in Photography Holding the camera Hold the camera and place your index finger on the shutter button. For larger lenses, place your left hand under the lens for support. Shooting postures A correct posture for stabilizing the camera is necessary for taking a good photo. Even if you hold a camera correctly, the wrong posture can cause the camera to shake. Stand up straight and remain still to maintain a steady base for your camera. When shooting with a slow shutter speed, hold your breath to minimize body movement. 14 Concepts in Photography Standing photography Compose your shot, stand up straight with your feet shoulder-length apart, and keep your elbows pointed down. Crouching photography Compose your shot, crouch with one knee touching the ground, and keep a straight posture. 15 Concepts in Photography Aperture The aperture is one of the three factors that determine the exposure. The aperture housing contains thin, metal plates that open and close to let light through the aperture and into the camera. The size of the aperture is related to the amount of light: a larger aperture allows more light and a smaller aperture allows less light. Aperture sizes Minimum aperture Medium aperture Maximum aperture Aperture opened slightly Aperture opened wide The size of the aperture is represented by a value known as an "F-number." The f-number represents the focal length divided by the diameter of the lens. For example, if a lens with a 50 mm focal length has an f-number of F2, the diameter of the aperture is 25 mm. (50 mm/25 mm = F2) The smaller the f-number, the greater the size of the aperture. The opening in the aperture is described as the Exposure Value (EV). Increasing the Exposure Value (+1 EV) means the amount of light doubles. Decreasing the Exposure Value (-1 EV) means the amount of light halves. You can also use the exposure compensation feature to fine-tune the amount of light by subdividing exposure values into 1/2, 1/3 EV, and so on. +1 EV F1.4 F2 F2.8 F4 F5.6 F8 -1 EV Exposure Value Steps 16 Concepts in Photography Aperture value and the depth of field You can blur or sharpen the background of a photo by controlling the aperture. It is closely related to the depth of field (DOF), which can be expressed as small or large. A photo with a large DOF A photo with a small DOF The aperture housing contains several blades. These blades move together and control the amount of light passing through the center of the aperture. The number of blades also affects the shape of light when shooting night scenes. If an aperture has an even number of blades, light divides into an equal number of sections. If the number of blades is odd, the number of sections is double the number of blades. For example, an aperture with 8 blades divides light into 8 sections and an aperture with 7 blades into 14 sections. 7 blades 8 blades 17 Concepts in Photography Shutter speed Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the shutter. It controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture before it reaches the image sensor. Usually, the shutter speed is manually adjustable. The measurement of the shutter speed is known as the "Exposure Value" (EV), which is marked in intervals of 1 s, 1/2 s, 1/4 s, 1/8 s, 1/15 s, 1/1,000 s, 1/2,000 s, and so on. Exposure +1 EV -1 EV 1 s 1/2 s 1/4 s 1/8 s 1/15 s 1/30 s Shutter speed Therefore, the faster the shutter speed, the less light will be let in. Likewise, the slower the shutter speed, the more light will be let in. The photos below illustrate that a slow shutter speed allows more time for light to enter the camera. This adds a motion blurring effect to moving objects. On the other hand, a fast shutter speed allows less time to let light in and the photo more easily freezes subjects in motion. 0.8 s 0.004 s 18 Concepts in Photography ISO sensitivity The exposure of an image is determined by the sensitivity of the camera. This sensitivity is based on international film standards, known as ISO standards. On digital cameras, this sensitivity rating is used to represent the sensitivity of the digital mechanism that captures the image. ISO sensitivity doubles as the number doubles. For example, an ISO 200 setting is capable of capturing images at twice the speed of an ISO 100 setting. However, higher ISO settings can result in "noise"—small specks, spots, and other phenomena in a photo that give the shot a noisy or dirty appearance. As a general rule, it is best to use a low ISO setting to prevent noise in your photos, unless you are shooting in darkened environments or at night. Changes in the quality and brightness according to ISO sensitivity Because a low ISO sensitivity means the camera will be less sensitive to light, you need more light to have an optimal exposure. When using a low ISO sensitivity, open the aperture more or reduce the shutter speed to allow more light to enter the camera. For example, on a sunny day when light is abundant, a low ISO sensitivity does not require a slow shutter speed. However, in a dark place or at night, a low ISO sensitivity will result in a blurry photo. Therefore, it is recommended to increase the ISO sensitivity by a moderate amount. A photo captured with a tripod and high ISO sensitivity A blurred photo with a low ISO sensitivity 19 Concepts in Photography How the aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity control exposure The aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity are closely interconnected in photography. The aperture setting controls the opening that regulates the light that enters the camera, while the shutter speed determines the length of time that light is allowed to enter. ISO sensitivity determines the speed at which the film reacts to light. Together, these three aspects are described as the triangle of exposure. A change in shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO sensitivity can be offset by adjustments to the others to maintain the amount of light. The results, however, change according to the settings. For example, shutter speed is useful in expressing movement, aperture can control the depth of field, and ISO sensitivity can control the graininess of a photo. Settings Results Aperture value Wide aperture = more light Narrow aperture = less light Wide = small depth of field Narrow = large depth of field Settings Results Shutter speed Fast speed = less light Slow speed = more light Fast = still Slow = blurry ISO sensitivity High sensitivity = more sensitive to light Low sensitivity = less sensitive to light High = more grainy Low = less grainy 20 Concepts in Photography Correlation between focal length, angle, and perspective Focal length, which is measured in millimeters, is the distance between the middle of the lens to its focal point. It affects the angle and perspective of captured images. A short focal length translates into a wide angle, which allows you to capture a wide shot. A long focal length translates into a narrow angle, which allows you to capture telephoto shots. 9 mm angle 27 mm angle Depth of field Portraits or still-life photos mostly acclaimed by people are the ones on which the background is out of focus so the subject looks pronounced. Depending on the focused areas, a photo can be blurred or sharpened. This is called 'a low DOF' or 'a high DOF'. The depth of field is the focused area around the subject. Therefore, a small DOF signifies that the focused area is narrow and a large DOF means the focused area is wide. A photo with a small DOF, which stresses the subject and makes the rest of it blurred, can be obtained by capturing a photo close to the subject or selecting a low aperture value. Conversely, a photo with a large DOF which shows all the elements on the photo sharply focused can be achieved by capturing a photo far from the subject or selecting a high aperture value. Small Depth of Field Large Depth of Field 21 Concepts in Photography What controls out-of-focus effects? DOF depends on aperture value The wider the aperture is (namely the lower the aperture value), the lower the DOF becomes. Under the condition where the focal length is equal, a low aperture value leads to a photo with a low DOF. 27 mm F3.5 27 mm F11 DOF depends on focal length The longer the focal length is, the lower the DOF gets. 9 mm angle 27 mm angle 22 Concepts in Photography DOF depends on the distance between the subject and the camera The shorter the distance between the subject and the camera is, the lower the DOF gets. Therefore, taking a photo close to a subject can result in a photo of low DOF. A photo captured far from the subject A photo captured close to the subject DOF preview You can press the Custom button to get an idea of what your shot will look like before shooting. The camera adjusts the aperture to the predefined settings and shows the results on the screen. Set the function of the Custom button to Optical Preview. (p. 151) 23 Concepts in Photography Composition It is fun to capture a photo of the beauty of world with a camera. No matter how the world is beautiful, however, a poor composition cannot capture the beauty of it. When it comes to composition, it is very important to prioritize subjects. Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually, abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition. Rule of Thirds To use the rule of thirds, divide the image into a 3x3 pattern of equal rectangles. To compose photos that best emphasize the subject, make sure the subject is located at one of the corners of the center rectangle. Using the rule of thirds will create photos with stable and compelling compositions. Below are a few examples. 24 Concepts in Photography Photos with two subjects If your subject is in one corner of the photo, it creates an unbalanced composition. You can stabilize the photo by capturing a second subject in the opposite corner to balance the weight of the photo. Subject 1 Subject 2 Subject 1 Subject 2 Unstable Stable When taking landscape photos, centering the horizon will create an unbalanced effect. Give more weight to the photo by moving the horizon up or down. Subject 1 Subject 2 Subject 1 Subject 2 Unstable Stable 25 Concepts in Photography Flash Light is one of the most important components in photography. It is not easy, however, to have an enough amount of light anytime and anywhere. Making use of a flash allows you to optimize light settings and create a variety of effects. Flash, also known as strobe or speed light, helps to create adequate exposure in low-light conditions. It is also useful in light-abundant situations. For example, flash can be used in compensating the exposure of a subject’s shadow or capturing clearly both the subject and the background in backlit conditions. Before correction After correction Flash guide number The model number of a flash refers to the flash’s power, and the maximum amount of light created is represented by a value known as a "guide number". The bigger the guide number, the more light is emitted from the flash. The guide number is achieved by multiplying the distance from the flash to the subject and the aperture value when the ISO sensitivity is set to 100. Guide number = Flash to Subject Distance X Aperture value Aperture value = Guide number/Flash to Subject Distance Flash to Subject Distance = Guide number/Aperture value Therefore, if you know the guide number of a flash, you can estimate an optimum flash to subject distance when setting the flash manually. For example, if a flash has a guide number of GN 20 and is 4 meters away from the subject, the optimal aperture value is F5.0. Chapter 1 My Camera Learn about your camera’s layout, display icons, lens, optional accessories, and basic functions. My Camera 27 Getting started Unpacking Check your product box for the following items. Camera AC adapter/USB cable Rechargeable battery Strap Software CD-ROM (User manual included) Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM Quick Start Guide Quick Reference Guide The illustrations may differ from your actual items. The items may differ depending on your region. You can purchase optional accessories at a retailer or a Samsung service center. Samsung is not responsible for any problems caused by using unauthorized accessories. For information about accessories, refer to page 192. My Camera 28 Camera layout No. Name 1 Shutter button 2 Power button 3 DIRECT LINK button Start a preset Wi-Fi function. (p. 30) 4 External flash port cover 5 Microphone 6 Lens mount index 7 Internal antenna * Avoid contact with the internal antenna while using a wireless network. 8 Lens release button 9 Image sensor * Do not touch the image sensor. 10 Lens mount 11 NFC tag 12 AF-assist light/Timer lamp 13 Built-in flash 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 11 10 8 7 13 12 My Camera > Camera layout 29 No. Name 1 Speaker 2 Eyelet for camera strap 3 Video recording button Start recording a video. 4 Status lamp Indicate the status of the camera. Blinking: When saving a photo, shooting a video, sending data to a computer, connecting to WLAN, or sending a photo. Steady: When there is no data transfer or charging the battery. 5 f button Select a shooting mode. 6 D button In Shooting mode: Change the information on the display. In other situations: Move up. 7 F button In Shooting mode: Select an AF mode. In other situations: Move right. 8 o button In the Menu screen: Save the selected options. In Shooting mode: Allow you to select a focus area manually in some shooting modes. No. Name 9 Delete/Custom button In Shooting mode: Perform the assigned function. (p. 151) In Playback mode: Delete files. 10 I button In Shooting mode: Adjust the shutter speed, aperture value, exposure compensation, or ISO sensitivity. In Playback mode: View thumbnails. In other situations: Move down. 11 Playback button Enter Playback mode to view pictures or videos. 12 C button In Shooting mode: Select a shooting method or set the timer. In other situations: Move left. 13 m button Access options or menus. 14 Display (touch screen) To take a self-portrait while looking at yourself on the screen, flip the screen up. (p. 31) Touch the screen to select a menu or an option. (p. 38) 3 2 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 14 12 11 13 My Camera > Camera layout 30 No. Name 1 Tripod mount 2 Battery lock 3 Memory card slot 4 USB and shutter release port Connect the camera to a computer or shutter release. Use a shutter release cable with a tripod to minimize camera movement. 5 HDMI port 6 Battery slot 7 Battery cover Using the DIRECT LINK button You can turn on the Wi-Fi feature conveniently by pressing [DIRECT LINK]. Press [DIRECT LINK] again to return to the previous mode. Setting the DIRECT LINK button You can select a Wi-Fi function to launch when you press [DIRECT LINK]. (p. 151) To set a DIRECT LINK option, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Key Mapping ĺDIRECT LINKĺ an option. 1 5 6 7 4 3 2 My Camera > Camera layout 31 Using the display You can take a self-portrait while looking at yourself on the display by flipping the display up. Using the Self shot mode When the camera is off and you enabled the Self shot option (p. 152), flipping the display upward turns the camera on and enters Self shot mode. In Self shot mode, the timer (3 seconds), one-touch shot, face detection, and beauty face functions are automatically activated. 1 Flip the display upward. 180˚ 2 Touch . 3 Drag the sliders or touch the +/- icons to adjust the softness and brightness of the skin tone. 4 Press [o] or touch Set. 5 Touch the frame area on the display, or press [Shutter]. After 3 seconds, the camera automatically releases the shutter. When the camera is off, flipping the display upward automatically turns the camera on. Keep the display closed when the camera is not in use. Flip the display only within the angle allowed. Failing to do so may damage your camera. When the camera is not held and the display is flipped upward, use a tripod. Otherwise, it may cause damage to your camera. Do not flip the display up when an external flash is mounted on the camera. Otherwise, it may cause damage to your camera. My Camera 32 Inserting the battery and memory card Learn how to insert or remove the battery and an optional memory card into the camera. 1 Insert your finger into the groove and open the battery cover. Be careful not to damage your fingernails when you open the battery cover. 2 Insert a memory card into the slot with the gold-colored contacts facing up. Insert the memory card fully until it locks into space. 3 Slide the battery lock to the left. 4 Insert the battery with the gold-colored contacts facing right. Hold the battery cover open with your finger. My Camera > Inserting the battery and memory card 33 5 Close the battery lock and slide it to the right. 6 Close the battery cover. 7 Press the battery cover firmly to ensure that it closes tightly. My Camera > Inserting the battery and memory card 34 Removing the battery and memory card Rechargeable battery Battery lock Slide the battery lock to the left to release the battery. Memory card Push the card gently until it disengages from the camera, and then pull it out of the slot. Using the memory card adapter To read data with a PC or memory card reader, insert the memory card into a memory card adapter. Do not bend or pull the battery lock. Doing so may damage the lock. While the status lamp of the camera is blinking, do not remove the memory card or battery. Doing so may damage the data stored on the memory card or your camera. My Camera 35 Charging the battery and turning on your camera Charging the battery Before you use the camera for the first time, you must charge the battery. Plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera, and then plug the other end of the USB cable into the AC adapter. Status lamp Red light on: Charging Green light on: Fully charged Red light blinking: Charging Error Use only the AC adapter and USB cable supplied with your camera. If you use another AC adapter, the camera battery may not charge or work properly. Turning on your camera To turn on or off the camera, press [ ]. The initial setup screen appears when you turn on the camera for the first time. (p. 36) For some lenses, when you turn on the camera, the lens moves automatically. Do not press or force the lens, as it may damage the lens. My Camera 36 Performing the initial setup When you turn on your camera for the first time, the initial setup screen appears. The language is preset for the country or region where the camera is sold. You can change the language as desired. You can also select an item by touching it on the screen. 1 Press [I] to select Time Zone, and then press [o]. 2 Press [D/I] to select a time zone, and then press [o]. Back Set Time Zone [GMT +00:00] London [GMT -01:00] Cape Verde [GMT -02:00] Mid-Atlantic [GMT -03:00] Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo [GMT -03:30] Newfoundland 3 Press [I] to select Date/Time Set, and then press [o]. 4 Press [C/F] to select an item (Year/Month/Day/Hour/ Minute/Summer time). 5 Press [D/I] to set the option, and then press [o]. Back Set Year Month Day Hour Min DST Date/Time Set The screen may differ depending on the language you selected. 6 Press [I] to select Date Type, and then press [o]. 7 Press [D/I] to select a date type, and then press [o]. Back Set Date Type YYYY/MM/DD MM/DD/YYYY DD/MM/YYYY My Camera > Performing the initial setup 37 8 Press [I] to select Time Type, and then press [o]. 9 Press [D/I] to select a time type, and then press [o]. Back Set Time Type 12 Hr 24 Hr 10 Press [m] to finish the initial setup. My Camera 38 Selecting functions (options) Selecting with buttons Press [D/I/C/F] to move, and then press [o] to select an option. Selecting by touch Do not use sharp objects, such as pens or pencils, to touch the screen. You can damage the screen. Dragging: Touch and hold an area on the screen, and then drag your finger. Touching: Touch an icon to select a menu or an option. Flicking: Gently flick your finger across the screen. My Camera > Selecting functions (options) 39 When you touch or drag the screen, discolorations may occur. This is not a malfunction, but a characteristic of the touch screen. Touch or drag lightly to minimize the discolorations. The touch screen may not work properly if you use the camera in extremely humid environments. The touch screen may not work properly if you apply screen protection film or other accessories to the screen. Depending on the viewing angle, the screen may appear dim. Adjust the brightness or viewing angle to improve the resolution. Using m Press [m] or touch on the screen, and then change shooting options or settings. E.g. Selecting the photo size in P mode 1 On the Mode screen, select Program. 2 Press [m] or touch . 3 Press [D/I] to move to b, and then press [o]. You can also touch b on the screen. 4 Press [D/I] to move to Photo Size, and then press [o]. You can also drag the option list, and then touch an option. AutoShare Photo Size Quality ISO Minimum Shutter Speed Back Select My Camera > Selecting functions (options) 40 5 Press [D/I] to move to an option, and then press [o]. You can also drag the option list, and then touch an option. Press [m] or touch Back to go back to the previous menu. (3:2) (5472x3648) (3:2) (3888x2592) (3:2) (2976x1984) (3:2) (1728x1152) (16:9) (5472x3080) Photo Size Back Set 6 Press [m] or touch Back to switch to Shooting mode. Using the Smart panel Touch on the screen to access some functions such as Exposure, ISO, and White Balance. E.g. Adjust the exposure value in P mode 1 On the Mode screen, select Program. 2 Touch . 3 Press [D/I/C/F] to move to EV, and then press [o]. You can also select an option by touching it. 4 Press [D/I/C/F] to adjust the exposure value, and then press [o]. You can also drag the dial on the screen to adjust the option. EV : 0 Back Adjust You can adjust some options by dragging them. My Camera 41 Selecting a mode Select various modes and functions on the Mode screen. Accessing a Mode screen In Shooting or Playback mode, press [f]. Press [f] again to return to the previous mode. Auto Smart Shutter Manual Priority Back Set Program Aperture Priority Wi-Fi Touch an icon to select a mode or function. You can also press [D/I/C/F] to move a mode or function, and then press [o] to select it. Mode description Mode Description Auto Capture a photo with a scene mode selected automatically by the camera. (p. 54) Smart Capture a photo with options that are preset for a specific scene. (p. 56) Program Capture a photo with settings you have adjusted manually except the shutter speed and aperture value. (p. 59) Aperture Priority Set the aperture value manually while the camera automatically selects an appropriate shutter speed. (p. 61) Shutter Priority Set the shutter speed manually while the camera automatically selects an appropriate aperture value. (p. 62) Manual Adjust both the aperture value and the shutter speed manually. (p. 63) My Camera > Selecting a mode 42 Mode Description Wi-Fi MobileLink: Send photos or videos to a smart phone. (p. 126) Remote Viewfinder: Use a smart phone as a remote shutter release and see a preview on your smart phone of an image from your camera. (p. 130) Group Share: Send photos or videos to multiple smart phones. (p. 128) Baby Monitor: Connect the camera to a smart phone and monitor a location. (p. 132) Auto Backup: Send photos or videos that you captured with the camera to a PC wirelessly. (p. 134) Email: Send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. (p. 136) SNS & Cloud: Upload photos or videos to file sharing websites. (p. 140) Samsung Link: Upload photos to Samsung Link online storage or view files on other Samsung Link supported devices. (p. 142) My Camera 43 Display icons Capturing photos 1 2 3 1. Shooting information Icon Description Shooting mode Current date Current time Auto exposure lock (p. 98) Available number of photos Memory card inserted Memory card not inserted* : Fully charged : Partially charged (Red): Empty (recharge the battery) : Charging Icon Description Auto focus frame Spot metering area Camera shake Level gauge (p. 44) Histogram (p. 150) Focus Shutter speed Aperture value Exposure adjustment value ISO sensitivity (p. 71) * Photos that were captured without inserting a memory card cannot be transferred to a memory card or a computer. 2. Shooting options Icon Description Photo size Drive mode Flash (p. 90) Flash intensity adjustment Metering (p. 92) AF mode (p. 75) Focus area Icon Description Face detection White Balance (p. 72) White Balance micro adjustment Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) (p. 84) RAW file Dynamic Range (p. 95) 3. Shooting options (Touch) Icon Description Change Smart mode** Mobile Connection*** Touch AF options Shooting options Smart panel ** This icon appears only when you select Smart mode. *** You can directly select a Wi-Fi function that connects to a smart phone. The icons displayed will change according to the mode you select or the options you set. In Shooting mode My Camera > Display icons 44 2. Shooting options Icon Description Video size AF mode (p. 75) Metering (p. 92) White Balance (p. 72) White Balance micro adjustment Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) (p. 84) Fader (p. 101) Voice recording off (p. 101) The icons displayed will change according to the mode you select or the options you set. About the level gauge The level gauge helps you align the camera with the horizontal and vertical lines on the display. If the level gauge is not level, calibrate the level gauge using the Horizontal Calibration function. (p. 153) Vertical Horizontal Ÿ Level Ÿ Unlevel You cannot use the level gauge when you shoot in portrait orientation. Recording videos 1 2 1. Shooting information Icon Description Shooting mode Cancel Touch AF. (Touch) Current recording time/ Available recording time Memory card inserted : Fully charged : Partially charged (Red): Empty (recharge the battery) : Charging Exposure value ISO sensitivity (p. 71) My Camera > Display icons 45 In Playback mode Viewing photos Information Mode F No Shutter ISO Metering Flash Focal Length White Balance EV Photo Size Date Icon Description Current file/The total number of files Folder number-File number RAW file Protected file Continuously captured photos (they will appear as a folder) (p. 104) Playback/Editing/Setting menu (Touch) Share a file. (Touch) View image thumbnails. (Touch) 1 2 3 No. Description 1 Captured photo 2 RGB histogram (p. 150) 3 Shooting mode, Metering, Flash, White Balance, Aperture value, Shutter speed, ISO, Focal length, Exposure value, Photo size, Date Playing videos Stop Icon Description Current file/The total number of files Playback speed Folder number-File number Multi Motion Current playback time Video length View previous file/Scan backward. (Each time you touch the scan backward icon, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) Pause or resume playback. View next file/Scan forward. (Each time you touch the scan forward icon, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) Adjust the volume or mute the sound. My Camera > Display icons 46 Changing the information displayed Press [D] repeatedly to change the display type. Mode Display type Shooting Basic shooting information (Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture value, Exposure value, ISO sensitivity, etc.) Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons (MENU, Fn, Mobile Connection, Touch AF) + Level gauge Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons + Current shooting options information (Photo size, Drive mode, Flash, Metering, AF mode, etc.) Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons + Current shooting options information + Histogram + Date and time Playback Basic information Display all information about the current file. Display all information about the current file including RGB histogram. No information (when connected to an HDTV or an HDMIenabled monitor) My Camera 47 Lenses You can purchase optional NX-M lenses. Learn about the functions of each lens and select one that suits your needs and preferences. Lens layout SAMSUNG NX-M 9 mm F3.5 ED lens (example) 3 1 2 No. Description 1 Lens 2 Lens mount index 3 Lens contacts My Camera > Lenses 48 SAMSUNG NX-M 9-27 mm F3.5-5.6 ED OIS lens (example) 5 3 1 2 4 No. Description 1 Zoom lock index 2 Lens 3 Zoom ring 4 Lens mount index 5 Lens contacts Locking or unlocking the lens To lock the lens, rotate and pull the zoom ring gently away from the camera body. Align the zoom lock indexes as shown in the illustration. To unlock the lens, rotate the zoom ring as shown in the illustration. You cannot capture a photo when the lens is locked. My Camera > Lenses 49 Lens markings Find out what the numbers on the lens signify. SAMSUNG NX-M 9-27 mm F3.5-5.6 ED OIS lens (example) 3 4 5 1 2 2 No. Description 1 Aperture value A range of supported aperture values. For example, 1:3.5–5.6 means the maximum aperture value range from 3.5 to 5.6. 2 Focal length The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point (in millimeters). This figure is expressed in a range: minimum focal length to maximum focal length of the lens. Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject is magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view. 3 ED ED stands for Extra-low Dispersion. Extra-low dispersion glass is effective in minimizing chromatic aberration (a distortion that occurs when a lens fails to focus all colors to the same convergence point). 4 OIS (p. 84) Optical Image Stabilization. Lenses with this feature can detect camera shake and effectively cancel out the movement inside the camera. 5 Ø The lens diameter. When you attach a filter to the lens, make sure that the diameters of the lens and the filter are the same. My Camera 50 Accessories Use accessories such as external flash that can supply a constant amount of light. You can also use the mount adapter to attach NX lenses. For more information about optional accessories, refer to the manual for each accessory. The illustrations may differ from the actual items. You can purchase Samsung-approved accessories at a retailer or a Samsung service center. Samsung is not responsible for damage caused by using another manufacturer's accessories. External flash layout SEF7A (example) (optional) 1 4 3 2 No. Description 1 Flash fastening dial 2 Lamp 3 Flash connection 4 Flash port My Camera > Accessories 51 Connecting the external flash 1 Open the external flash port cover. 2 Mount the flash by inserting it firmly into the external flash port. Hold the external flash port cover open with your finger. 3 Lock the flash into place by turning the flash fastening dial as shown in the illustration. The available options may differ depending on the shooting mode. There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the flash fires a second time. Do not remove the flash forcefully. Doing so may damage the flash and camera. Use only Samsung-approved flashes. Using incompatible flashes may damage your camera. My Camera > Accessories 52 Attaching the mount adapter 1 Remove the mount adapter caps and body cap. 2 Align the indexes (white) on the camera and the mount adapter. Then, rotate the mount adapter as shown in the illustration until you hear a click. Mount adapter layout Samsung NX mount adapter (example) (optional) 1 2 4 3 No. Description 1 Lens release button 2 NX-M lens mount index 3 NX lens mount index 4 Tripod mount My Camera > Accessories 53 2 Press and hold the lens release button on the camera. Then, rotate the lens as shown in the illustration. Flash is not available when using the mount adapter. The Continuous option in Drive is not available when using the mount adapter. Horizontal lines may appear on the photo when you use the mount adapter and the subject is exposed to a fluorescent or mercury-vapor light source. To resolve this, select b ĺ Banding Reduction ĺ On. This function may cause the edges of the frame to appear dark. 3 Align the indexes (red) on the NX lens and the mount adapter. Then, rotate the lens as shown in the illustration until you hear a click. Removing the mount adapter 1 Press and hold the lens release button on the mount adapter. Then rotate the lens as shown in the illustration. My Camera 54 Shooting modes Two simple shooting modes—Auto and Smart mode—help you capture photos with numerous automatic settings. Additional modes allow for greater customization of settings. Auto mode In Auto mode, the camera recognizes surrounding conditions and automatically adjusts factors that contribute to exposure, including shutter speed, aperture value, metering, White Balance, and exposure compensation. As the camera controls most of the functions, some shooting functions are limited. This mode is useful for capturing quick snapshots with the least amount of adjustment. 1 On the Mode screen, select Auto. 2 Align your subject in the frame. 3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus. The camera selects a scene. An appropriate scene icon appears at the screen. A My Camera > Shooting modes 55 Recognizable scenes Icon Description Landscapes Scenes with bright white backgrounds Landscapes at night Portraits at night Landscapes with backlighting Portraits with backlighting Portraits Close-up photos of objects Close-up photos of text Sunsets Indoors, dark Partially lit Close-up with spot lighting Portraits with spot lighting Icon Description Blue skies Forested areas typically consist of green-colored subjects Close-up photos of colorful subjects Camera is stabilized on a tripod and the subject is not moving for a certain period of time. (when shooting in the dark) Actively moving subjects Fireworks (when using a tripod) 4 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo. The camera may detect different scenes, even the same subjects, depending on external factors such as camera shake, lighting, or distance to the subject. If the camera does not recognize an appropriate scene mode, it uses the default settings for the Auto mode. Even if it detects a face, the camera may not select a portrait mode depending on the subject's position or lighting. Even if you use a tripod, the camera may not detect the tripod mode ( ) if the subject is moving. The camera consumes more battery power, because it changes settings often to select appropriate scenes. My Camera > Shooting modes 56 Smart mode In Smart mode, you can capture photos with options that are preset for a specific scene. 1 On the Mode screen, select Smart. 2 Select a scene. Option Description Beauty Face Capture a portrait using options to make the skin tone softer and brighter. Best Face Capture multiple photos and replace faces to create the best possible image. Continuous Shot Capture a series of photos of moving subjects. Kids Shot Capture a photo with a funny sound to get a kid's attention. Landscape Capture still-life scenes and landscapes. Macro Capture small or close-up subjects. Food Capture a photo of food in more colorful tones. Parties and Indoors Capture a crisp indoor photos. Action Freeze Capture subjects moving at high speed. Rich Tones Capture a photo with vibrant colors. Panorama Capture a wide panoramic scene in a single photo. Waterfall Capture scenes with waterfalls. Option Description Silhouette Capture subjects as dark shapes against a light background. Sunset Capture scenes at sunset, with natural-looking reds and yellows. Night Capture a photo with less blurring and image noise in low light conditions. Fireworks Capture scenes with fireworks. Light Trace Capture scenes with the light trailing in low-light conditions. 3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture. Using the Beauty Face mode In Beauty Face mode, you can use options to make the skin tone softer and brighter before capturing a portrait. 1 On the Mode screen, select Smart ĺ Beauty Face. 2 Press [m] ĺb ĺ Face Retouch. 3 Press [D/I] to select an option. 4 Press [C/F] to adjust the option. You can also drag the sliders or touch +/- to adjust the options. My Camera > Shooting modes 57 5 Press [o]. 6 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. 7 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo. Using the Best Face mode In Best Face mode, you can capture multiple photos and replace faces to create the best possible image. Use this mode to select the best image for each individual when capturing group photos. 1 On the Mode screen, select Smart ĺ Best Face. 2 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. 3 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo. The camera captures 5 photos consecutively. The first photo is set as the background image. The camera automatically detects faces after shooting. 4 Touch a face to replace. Back Save 5 Touch the best image from the 5 faces that were captured. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to replace the rest of the faces in the photo. The icon will appear on the image that the camera recommends. 6 Press [o] to save the photo. Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. The resolution is set to 5.9M or less. My Camera > Shooting modes 58 Capturing panoramic photos In Panorama mode, you can capture a wide panoramic scene in a single photo. Panorama mode captures and combines a series of photos to create a panoramic image. 1 On the Mode screen, select Smart ĺ Panorama. 2 Press and hold [Shutter], and then slowly move the camera in the direction you selected. An arrow toward the direction of motion is displayed, and the entire shooting image is displayed in the preview box. When the scenes are aligned, the camera captures the next photo automatically. 3 When you are finished, release [Shutter]. The camera will automatically save the shots into one photo. If you release [Shutter] while shooting, the panoramic shooting stops and photos that have been captured are saved. The resolution varies depending on the panoramic photo you captured. In Panorama mode, some shooting options are not available. The camera may stop shooting due to the shooting composition or the subject's movement. In Panorama mode, your camera may not capture the entire last scene if you stop moving the camera to improve the photo quality. To capture the entire scene, move your camera slightly beyond the point where you want the scene to end. For best results when capturing panoramic photos, avoid the following: - moving the camera too quickly or too slowly - moving the camera too little to capture the next image - moving the camera at irregular speeds - shaking the camera - shooting in dark places - capturing moving subjects nearby - shooting conditions where the brightness or color of light is changing Photos taken are automatically saved, and shooting is stopped under the following conditions: - if you change the shooting direction while shooting - if you move the camera too rapidly - if you do not move the camera My Camera > Shooting modes 59 Program mode The camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture value so that an optimal exposure value can be achieved. This mode is useful when you want to capture shots of constant exposure while being able to adjust other settings. 1 On the Mode screen, select Program. 2 Set the desired options. 3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. My Camera > Shooting modes 60 Program Shift Program Shift function lets you adjust the shutter speed and aperture value while the camera maintains the same exposure. Press [I] to select the shutter speed and aperture value and press [C/F] to adjust the aperture value. The shutter speed will change according to the aperture value. Minimum shutter speed Set the shutter speed not to be slower than the selected speed. However, if an optimal exposure value cannot be achieved because the ISO sensitivity reached the maximum ISO value that is set by Auto ISO Range, shutter speed may be slower than the selected minimum shutter speed. To set the minimum shutter speed, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Minimum Shutter Speed ĺ an option. This feature is available only when the ISO sensitivity is set to Auto. This feature is available only in Program or Aperture Priority mode. My Camera > Shooting modes 61 Aperture Priority mode In Aperture Priority mode, the camera automatically calculates shutter speed according to the aperture value you choose. You can adjust the depth of field (DOF) by changing the aperture value. This mode is useful for taking portraits, flowers, or landscape shots. Large Depth of Field Small Depth of Field 1 On the Mode screen, select Aperture Priority. 2 Press [I] to select the aperture value. 3 Press [C/F] to adjust the aperture value. 4 Set the desired options. 5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. In low-light settings, you may need to increase the ISO sensitivity to prevent blurred photos. To set the minimum shutter speed, in Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Minimum Shutter Speed ĺ an option. You can also touch the aperture value on the screen to adjust it. My Camera > Shooting modes 62 Shutter Priority mode In Shutter Priority mode, the camera automatically adjusts the aperture value according to the shutter speed you choose. This mode is useful for capturing photos of fast-moving subjects or for creating tracer effects in a photo. For example, set the shutter speed to over 1/500 s to freeze the subject. To make the subject appear blurred set the shutter speed to below 1/30 s. Slow shutter speed Fast shutter speed 1 On the Mode screen, select Shutter Priority. 2 Press [I] to select the shutter speed. 3 Press [C/F] to adjust the shutter speed. 4 Set the desired options. 5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. In order to compensate for the reduced amount of light allowed by fast shutter speeds, open the aperture and let in more light. If your photos are still too dark, increase the ISO value. You can also touch the shutter speed on the screen to adjust it. My Camera > Shooting modes 63 Manual mode Manual mode lets you adjust the shutter speed and aperture value manually. In this mode, you can fully control the exposure of your photos. This mode is useful in controlled shooting environments, such as a studio, or when it is necessary to fine-tune camera settings. The Manual mode is also recommended for shooting night scenes or fireworks. 1 On the Mode screen, select Manual. 2 Press [I] to select the aperture value or shutter speed. 3 Press [C/F] to adjust the aperture value or shutter speed. 4 Set the desired options. 5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. You can also touch the aperture value or shutter speed on the screen to adjust it. Using Framing Mode When you adjust the aperture value or shutter speed, the exposure changes according to the settings, so the display may darken. With this function on, the brightness of the display is constant regardless of the settings, so you can better frame your shot. To use Framing Mode, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Framing Mode ĺ an option. My Camera > Shooting modes 64 Using the Bulb function Use the Bulb function to shoot night scenes or the night sky. While you are pressing [Shutter], the shutter is left open so you can create moving light effects. To use a bulb, In Shooting mode, press [I] to select the shutter speed ĺ Press [C] repeatedly to set the shutter speed to Bulb ĺ Press and hold [Shutter] for the desired time. If you set a high ISO value or open the shutter for a long time, image noise may increase. Drive options, flash, and One touch shot cannot be used with the Bulb function. The Bulb function is available only in Manual mode. Use a tripod and shutter release to prevent your camera from shaking. The longer you open the shutter, the longer it takes to save a photo. Do not turn the camera off while the camera saves a photo. If you use this function for a long time, use a fully charged battery. My Camera > Shooting modes 65 H.264 (MPEG-4 part10/AVC) is the latest video coding format established in 2003 collaboratively by ISO-IEC and ITU-T. Since this format uses a high compression rate, more data can be saved in less memory space. If you have the image stabilizer option on when shooting a movie, the camera may record the image stabilizer sound. If you remove the camera lens while recording a movie, the recording will be interrupted. Do not change the lens while recording. If you change the shooting angle of the camera suddenly while shooting a movie, the camera may not be able to record images accurately. Use a tripod to minimize camera shake. The camera supports only the Multi AF function when recording a video. You cannot use any other focus area setting functions. When the size of a movie file exceeds 4 GB, the camera automatically stops recording even if the maximum recording time (29 minutes and 59 seconds) has not been reached. If you use a slow writing memory card, the recording of your movie can be interrupted because the card cannot process data at the rate the video is being shot. If this occurs, replace the card with a faster memory card or reduce the video size (for example, from 1280X720 to 640X480). When formatting a memory card, always format using the camera. If you format on another camera or a PC, you can lose files on the card or cause a change in the capacity of the card. While recording a video in the same ISO sensitivity, the screen may be darker than taking a photo. Adjust the ISO sensitivity. When you record a video in Program, Aperture Priority, or Shutter Priority mode, ISO is automatically set to Auto. Recording a video In Shooting mode, you can record Full HD videos (1920X1080) by pressing (Video recording). The camera lets you record a video up to 29 minutes and 59 seconds in length at 30 fps, and saves the files in MP4 (H.264) format. The sound is recorded via the camera's microphone. Select Fader to fade in or out a scene. You can also select Voice or other options to set recording options. (p. 101) 1 On the Mode screen, select a shooting mode. This feature may not work in some modes. 2 Set the desired options. 3 Press (Video recording) to start recording. The camera will retain the shutter speed and aperture value that you have set before starting shooting. 4 Press (Video recording) again to stop. You can also press [Shutter] to stop recording. My Camera > Shooting modes 66 Available functions by shooting mode For details about shooting functions, see Chapter 2. Function Auto Smart Program Aperture Priority Shutter Priority Manual Face Retouch (p. 56) - O ---- Photo Size (p. 69) OOOOOO Quality (p. 70) - OOOOO ISO (p. 71) - - OOOO White Balance (p. 72) - - OOOO Picture Wizard (p. 74) - - OOOO Smart Filter (p. 96) - - OOOO AF Mode (p. 75) - OOOOO AF Area (p. 77) - OOOOO Face Detection (p. 79) - - OOOO Touch AF (p. 81) OOOOOO MF Assist (p. 83) OOOOOO Link AE to AF Point (p. 94) - - OOOO Framing Mode (p. 63) - - OOOO O: You can select options for the function. (Available options vary by shooting mode.) -: The function is set to a certain option by default or the function is not available. My Camera > Shooting modes 67 Function Auto Smart Program Aperture Priority Shutter Priority Manual OIS (Anti-Shake) (p. 84) OOOOOO Drive (Continuous/Burst/Timer/Bracket) (p. 85) OOOOOO Metering (p. 92) - - OOOO Dynamic Range (p. 95) - - OOOO Flash (p. 90) OOOOOO Exposure compensation (p. 97) - - OOO - Exposure lock (p. 98) - - OOO - O: You can select options for the function. (Available options vary by shooting mode.) -: The function is set to a certain option by default or the function is not available. Chapter 2 Shooting Functions Learn about the functions you can set in Shooting mode. You can enjoy more customized photos and videos by using the shooting functions. 69 Shooting Functions > Size and Resolution ize and Resolution Shooting Functions Photo size As you increase the resolution, your photo or video will include more pixels, so it can be printed on larger paper or displayed on a larger screen. When you use a high resolution, the file size will also increase. Select a low resolution for photos that will be displayed in a digital picture frame or uploaded to the web. To set the size, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Photo Size ĺ an option. * Default Icon Size Recommended for (3:2) 5472x3648* Printing on A1 paper. (3:2) 3888x2592 Printing on A2 paper. (3:2) 2976x1984 Printing on A3 paper. (3:2) 1728x1152 Printing on A5 paper. (16:9) 5472x3080 Printing on A1 paper or viewing on an HDTV. (16:9) 3712x2088 Printing on A3 paper or viewing on an HDTV. (16:9) 2944x1656 Printing on A4 paper or viewing on an HDTV. (16:9) 1920x1080 Printing on A5 paper or viewing on an HDTV. (1:1) 3648x3648 Printing a square photo on A1 paper. (1:1) 2640x2640 Printing a square photo on A3 paper. (1:1) 2000x2000 Printing a square photo on A4 paper. (1:1) 1024x1024 Attaching to an email. Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Size and Resolution 70 Shooting Functions > Size and Resolution Quality The camera saves photos in either the JPEG or RAW format. Photos captured by a camera are often transformed to the JPEG format and stored in the memory according to the settings of the camera at the time of shooting. RAW files are not transformed to the JPEG format and are stored in the memory without any changes. RAW files have the file extension "SRW". To adjust and calibrate exposures, White Balances, tones, contrasts, and colors of the RAW files, or to convert them into JPEG or TIFF format, use the Adobe Photoshop Lightroom program found on the supplied DVD-ROM. Ensure you have enough space on the memory card to save photos in the RAW format. To set the quality, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Quality ĺ an option. * Default Icon Format Description JPEG Super Fine*: Compressed for the best quality. Recommended for printing in large size. JPEG Fine: Compressed for better quality. Recommended for printing in normal size. * Default Icon Format Description JPEG Normal: Compressed for normal quality. Recommended for printing in small size or uploading to the web. RAW RAW: Save a photo without data loss. Recommended for editing after shooting. RAW+JPEG RAW + S.Fine: Save a photo in both the JPEG (S.Fine quality) and RAW format. RAW+JPEG RAW + Fine: Save a photo in both the JPEG (Fine quality) and RAW format. RAW+JPEG RAW + Normal: Save a photo in both the JPEG (Normal quality) and RAW format. Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. 71 Shooting Functions > ISO sensitivity SO sensitivity Shooting Functions The ISO sensitivity value represents the sensitivity of camera to light. The larger the ISO value, the more sensitive the camera is to light. Consequently, by selecting a higher ISO sensitivity value, you can capture photos in dim or dark places at faster shutter speeds. However, this may increase electronic noise and result in a grainy photo. To set ISO sensitivity, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ ISO ĺ an option. Examples ISO 160 ISO 400 ISO 800 ISO 3200 Increase the ISO value in places where flash use is prohibited. You can capture a clear photo by setting a high ISO value without having to secure more light. Use the Noise Reduction function in order to reduce the visual noise that can appear on photos of a high ISO value. (p. 147) Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions. You can also touch the ISO value on the screen to adjust it. ISO sensitivity 72 Shooting Functions > White Balance ite Balance Shooting Functions White Balance represents the light source that influences on the color of a photo. The color of a photo depends on the type and quality of the light source. If you want the color of your photo to be realistic, select an appropriate lighting condition to calibrate the White Balance, such as Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, Tungsten, or adjust color temperature manually. You can also adjust color for the preset light sources so that the colors of the photo match the actual scene under mixed lighting conditions. To set the White Balance, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ White Balance ĺ an option. * Default Icon Description Auto WB*: Use automatic settings depending on the lighting conditions. Daylight: Select when taking outdoor photos on a sunny day. This option results in photos closest to the natural colors of the scene. Cloudy: Select when taking outdoor photos on a cloudy day or in shadows. Photos captured on cloudy days tend to be more bluish than on sunny days. This option offsets that effect. Fluorescent White: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent lamp, especially for white fluorescent light. * Default Icon Description N Fluorescent NW: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent lamp, especially for white fluorescent light of very white hues. D Fluorescent Daylight: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent lamp, especially for white fluorescent light of slightly bluish hue. Tungsten: Select when taking indoor photos under incandescent bulbs or halogen lamps. Incandescent tungsten bulbs tend to have a reddish hue. This option offsets that effect. Flash WB: Select when using a flash. Custom Set: Use your pre-defined settings. You can manually set the White Balance by pressing [D], and then shooting a white sheet of paper. Fill the spot metering circle with the paper and set the White Balance. Color Temperature: Manually adjust the color temperature of the light source. Color temperature is a measurement in degrees Kelvin that indicates the specific type of light source. You can get a warmer photo with a higher value, and a cooler photo with a lower value. Press [D], and then adjust the color temperature. Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. White Balance 73 Shooting Functions > White Balance Customizing preset White Balance options You can also customize preset White Balance options. To customize preset options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ White Balance ĺ an option ĺ [D] ĺ press [D/I/C/F]. White Balance : Daylight Back Set Reset You can also touch an area on the screen. Examples Auto WB Daylight Fluorescent Daylight Tungsten 74 Shooting Functions > Picture Wizard (photo styles) icture Wizard (photo styles) Shooting Functions Picture Wizard lets you apply different photo styles to your photo to create various looks and emotional moods. You can also create and save your own photo styles by adjusting color, saturation, sharpness, and contrast for each style. There is no rule for which style is suitable in which conditions. Experiment with different styles and find your own settings. To set a photo style, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Picture Wizard ĺ an option. Examples Standard Vivid Portrait Landscape Forest Retro Cool Calm Classic You can also adjust the value of the preset style settings. Select a Picture Wizard option, press [D], and then adjust color, saturation, sharpness, or contrast. To customize your own picture wizard, select , , or , and then adjust the color, saturation, sharpness, and contrast. Picture Wizard options cannot be set with Smart Filter options at the same time. Picture Wizard (photo styles) 75 Shooting Functions > AF mode Shooting Functions AF mode Learn how to adjust the camera’s focus according to the subjects. You can select a focusing mode appropriate to the subject among Single Auto Focus, Continuous Auto Focus, and Manual Focus. The AF function is activated when you press [Shutter] halfway. In the MF mode, you have to press [C/F] to focus manually. In most cases, you can have a focus by selecting Single AF. Fast moving subjects or subjects with small shading differences to the background are difficult to focus. Select an appropriate focusing mode for such instances. To set the auto focus mode, In Shooting mode, press [F] ĺ an option. You can also set the option by pressing [m] ĺb ĺ AF Mode ĺ an option in Shooting mode. The available options may differ depending on the lens in use. Single AF Single AF is appropriate for shooting a still subject. When you press [Shutter] halfway, the focus fixes in the focus area. The area turns green when the focus is achieved. 76 Shooting Functions > AF mode Continuous AF While you are pressing [Shutter] halfway, the camera continues to automatic focusing. Once the focus area is fixed on the subject, the subject is always in focus even when moving. This mode is recommended for shooting a person on a bicycle, a running dog, or a car racing scene. Manual focus You can manually focus on a subject by pressing [C/F] on the camera. The MF Assist function lets you easily achieve a focus. While you are adjusting the focus, the focus area is magnified. This mode is recommended for shooting an object similar in color to the background, a night scene, or fireworks. After capturing a photo with manual focus, press [o] ĺ [C/F] to manually adjust the focus again. If you use this function, you cannot set Touch AF, Face Detection, AF Area, and Link AE to AF Point options. While you are adjusting the focus, the manual focus scale ( ) appears. 77 Shooting Functions > AF area Shooting Functions The AF area function changes the positions of the focus area. Generally, cameras focus on the nearest subject. When there are a lot of subjects, however, unwanted subjects can be in focus. In order to prevent unwanted subjects from being in focus, change the focus area so that a desired subject is in focus. You can get a clearer and sharper photo by selecting an appropriate focus area. To set the auto focus area, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ AF Area ĺ an option. Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Selection AF You can set the focus on an area you want. Apply an out-of-focus effect to make the subject more distinguishable. The focus on the photo below was repositioned and resized so that it fits the subject’s face. To resize or move the focus area, in Shooting mode, press [o]. Touch an area to focus on it or press [D/I/C/F] to move the focus area, and pinch your fingers together or spread them apart to resize the focus area. AF area 78 Shooting Functions > AF area Multi AF The camera displays a green rectangle in places where focus is set correctly. The photo is divided into two or more areas, and the camera obtains focus points of each area. It is recommended for scenery photos. When you press [Shutter] halfway, the camera displays the focus areas as shown in the photo below. 79 Shooting Functions > Face Detection ce Detection Shooting Functions Face Detection Use Face Detection options to capture a self portrait or a smiling face. To use the face detection function, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Face Detection ĺ an option. When your camera detects a face, it tracks the detected face automatically. When you use the Face Detection AF option, the camera focuses on the area with the white frame automatically. Depending on the Picture Wizard options, Face Detection may not be effective. When you set manual focus, Face Detection may not be available. Face Detection may not be effective when: - the subject is far from the camera - it is too bright or too dark - the subject is not facing the camera - the subject is wearing sunglasses or a mask - the subject’s facial expression changes drastically - the subject is backlit or the lighting conditions are unstable When you set Face Detection options, the AF area is automatically set to Multi AF. Depending on the Face Detection options you selected, some shooting options may not be available. Normal The camera focuses on human faces preferentially. Faces of up to 10 people can be detected. This setting is recommended for shooting a group of people. When you press [Shutter] halfway, the camera focuses on faces as shown in the photo below. In cases of shooting a group of people, the camera displays the focus on the nearest person’s face in white and the rest of the people’s faces in gray. 80 Shooting Functions > Face Detection Wink Shot The camera automatically releases the shutter 2 seconds after it detects a winking face. Wink for more than 1 second for better detection. Wink detection may fail when: - the camera is below eye level - the subject appears dark due to backlighting - the subject is wearing glasses - the subject is far from the camera Smile Shot The camera automatically releases the shutter when it detects a smiling face. When your subject smiles broadly, your camera can detect the smile more easily. 81 Shooting Functions > Touch AF Shooting Functions Tracking AF Tracking AF allows you to track and automatically focus on your subject, even when the subject is moving or when you change the shooting composition. White frame: Your camera is tracking the subject. Green frame: Your subject is in focus when you half-press [Shutter]. Red frame: Your camera failed to focus. Select or focus on an area that you touch on the screen. Additionally, focus on the subject and capture a photo by touching on the screen. To set Touch AF, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺTouch AF ĺ an option. Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions. You can also touch on the screen and select an option in Shooting mode. Touch AF Touch AF allows you to select and focus on the focus area that you touch on the screen. AF Point The focus area will correspond to the area you touch on the screen and the focus will not be achieved. Touch AF 82 Shooting Functions > Touch AF One touch shot You can capture a photo with the touch of your finger. As you touch a subject, the camera focuses on the subject automatically and captures a photo. If you do not select a focus area, the Auto Focus function does not work. Tracking a subject may fail when: - the subject is too small - the subject moves irregularly - the subject is backlit or you are shooting in a dark place - colors or patterns on the subject and the background are the same - the subject includes horizontal patterns, such as blinds - the camera shakes excessively - you capture photos continuously When tracking fails, the feature will be reset. If the camera fails to track the subject, the focus area will be reset. If the camera fails to focus, the focus frame will change to red and the focus will be reset. 83 Shooting Functions > Shooting Functions > MF Assist F Assist Shooting Functions In the manual focus mode, you have to press [C/F] to focus. When you use the MF Assist function, you can achieve a clearer focus because the focus area is magnified. This function is only available on a lens that supports manual focus. To set the manual focus assist, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ MF Assist ĺ an option. * Default Option Description Off Do not use the MF Assist function. Enlarge x5* The focus area is magnified by 5 times when you adjust the focus. Enlarge x8 The focus area is magnified by 8 times when you adjust the focus. MF Assist 84 Shooting Functions > Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) ptical Image Stabilization (OIS) Shooting Functions Use the Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) function to minimize camera shake. OIS may not be available with some lenses. Camera shake tends to occur in dark places or when shooting indoors. In such cases, the camera uses slower shutter speeds in order to increase the amount of light taken in, which can result in a blurry photo. You can prevent this situation by using the OIS function. To set OIS options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ OIS (Anti-Shake) ĺ an option. * Default Icon Description Mode 1*: The OIS function is applied only when you press [Shutter] in full or half. Mode 2: The OIS function is on. Off: The OIS function is off. Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) Without OIS correction With OIS correction OIS may not function properly when: - you move your camera to follow a moving subject - there is too much camera shake - the shutter speed is slow (for example, when you select Night in Smart mode) - the battery is low - you capture a close-up shot If you use the OIS function with a tripod, your images may be blurred by the vibration of the OIS sensor. Deactivate the OIS function when you use a tripod. If the camera is hit or dropped, the display will be blurry. If this occurs, turn off the camera, and then turn it on again. Use the OIS function only when needed because the function consumes more battery power. This option may not be available with some lenses. 85 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) rive (shooting method) Shooting Functions You can set the shooting method, such as Continuous, Burst, Timer or Bracketing. Select Single to capture one photo at a time. Select Continuous Normal or Burst to shoot fast moving subjects. Select AE Bracket, WB Bracket, P Wiz Bracket, or Depth Bracket to adjust exposure, White Balance, apply picture Wizard effects, or capture photos with different depths of field. You can also select Timer to capture a photo automatically after a specified time. To change the shooting method, In Shooting mode, press [C] ĺ an option. You can also set the option by pressing [m] ĺb ĺ Drive ĺ a shooting method in Shooting mode. Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Single Capture one photo whenever you press [Shutter]. Recommended for general conditions. Drive (shooting method) 86 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) Continuous Normal Continuously capture photos while you are pressing [Shutter]. You can capture up to 6 photos per second. Maximum shooting speed is 6 frames per second. It will slow down after approx. JPEG 11 shots, RAW 4 shots. (May vary depending on the spec of memory card.) Burst Consecutively capture up to 10 shots per second (3 seconds), 15 shots per second (2 seconds), or 30 shots per second (1 second) when you press [Shutter] once. It is recommended for shooting the rapid motion of fast moving subjects such as racing cars. • To set the number of shots, in Shooting mode, press [C] ĺ Burst, and then press [D]. • The photo size is set to 5M. • It may take longer to save a photo. • You cannot use the flash with this option. • Shutter speed must be faster than 1/30 second. • Photos captured with this option may be slightly enlarged when saving. • You cannot set an ISO option higher than ISO 3200. • This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when the photo quality is set to RAW. 87 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) Timer Capture a photo after a specified time. You can set the Timer for 2 to 30 seconds. Press [Shutter] to stop capturing. To set the timer details, in Shooting mode, press [C] ĺTimer, and then press [D]. Auto Exposure Bracketing (AE Bracket) When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos: the original, one a step darker, and one a step lighter. Use a tripod to prevent blurry photos as the camera captures three photos continuously. You can adjust the settings in Bracket Settings menu. Exposure -2 Original Exposure +2 To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ an option. 88 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) White Balance Bracketing (WB Bracket) When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos: the original and two more with different White Balance settings. The original photo is captured when you press [Shutter]. The other two are automatically adjusted according to the White Balance you have set. You can adjust the settings in Bracket Settings menu. WB-2 Original WB+2 To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ an option. This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when the photo quality is set to RAW. Picture Wizard Bracketing (P Wiz Bracket) When you press [Shutter], the camera captures three consecutive photos, each with a different Picture Wizard setting. The camera captures a photo and applies the three Picture Wizard options you have set to the image captured. You can select three different settings in Bracket Settings menu. Vivid Standard Retro To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ an option. This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when the photo quality is set to RAW. 89 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) Depth Bracketing When you press [Shutter], the camera captures three consecutive photos, each with a different depth of field by adjusting the aperture value. Use a tripod to prevent blurry photos as the camera captures three photos continuously. You can adjust the settings in Bracket Settings menu. To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ an option. This feature is available only in Program or Aperture Priority mode. If the aperture value is set to its maximum or minimum, two photos will be captured with the maximum or minimum aperture value. 90 Shooting Functions > Flash Shooting Functions In order to capture a realistic photo of a subject, the amount of light should be constant. When the light source varies, you can use a flash and supply a constant amount of light. Select appropriate settings according to a light source and a subject. To set flash options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Flash ĺ an option. Icon Description Off: Do not use the flash. A Smart Flash: The camera automatically adjusts the brightness of the flash according to the amount of light in the surrounding environment. A Auto: The flash automatically fires in dark places. Auto Red-eye: The flash automatically fires and reduces red-eyes. Fill in: The flash fires whenever you capture a photo. (Brightness is automatically adjusted.) Fill-in Red: The flash fires whenever you capture a photo and reduces red-eyes. 1st Curtain: The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens. The camera captures a photo of a subject earlier in an action sequence clearly. Ball moving direction Icon Description 2nd Curtain: The flash fires just before the shutter closes. The camera captures a photo of a subject later in an action sequence clearly. Ball moving direction The available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the flash fires a second time. If you select Off, the flash does not fire even when an external flash is attached. For some lenses, the lens may block the light from the internal flash. If this occurs, use an optional external flash. If you attach a lens other than the one provided, using a lens mount adapter, no flashes will fire. Use only Samsung-approved flashes. Using incompatible external flashes may damage your camera. Flash 91 Shooting Functions > Flash Reducing the red-eye effect If the flash fires when you capture a photo of a person in the dark, a red glow may appear in the eyes. To reduce the red-eye effect, select Auto Red-eye or Fill-in Red. Without red-eye reduction With red-eye reduction If the subject is too far from the camera or moves when the first flash fires, redeyes may not be reduced. Adjusting the flash intensity When the flash is on, adjust the flash intensity ±2 levels. To set the flash intensity, In Shooting mode, touch ĺ Flash ĺ move to a desired option ĺ press [D] ĺ [C/F]. Back Set Flash : Fill in You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the intensity. Adjusting the flash intensity may not be effective when: - the subject is too close to the camera - you set a high ISO sensitivity - the exposure value is too big or too small In some shooting modes, you cannot use this function. If the subject is too close when you use the flash, some light may be blocked, resulting in a dark photo. Ensure that the subject is within the recommended range, which varies by lens. 92 Shooting Functions > Metering etering Shooting Functions The metering mode refers to the way in which a camera measures the quantity of light. The camera measures the amount of light in a scene, and in many of its modes, uses the measurement to adjust various settings. For example, if a subject looks darker than its actual color, the camera captures an overexposed photo of it. If a subject looks lighter than its actual color, the camera captures an underexposed photo of it. The brightness and overall mood of the photo can also be affected by how the camera measures the amount of light. Select an appropriate setting for a shooting condition. To set a metering option, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Metering ĺ an option. Multi The Multi mode calculates the amount of light in multiple areas. When light is sufficient or insufficient, the camera adjusts the exposure by averaging the overall brightness of the scene. This mode is suitable for general photos. Metering 93 Shooting Functions > Metering Center-weighted The Center-weighted mode calculates a broader area than the Spot mode does. It sums up the amount of light in the center portion of the shot (60–80%) and that of the rest of the shot (20–40%). It is recommended for situations where there is a slight difference in brightness between a subject and a background or an area of the subject is large compared to the overall composition of the photo. Spot The Spot mode calculates the amount of light in the center. When you capture a photo in conditions where there is a strong backlight behind a subject, the camera adjusts the exposure so as to shoot a subject correctly. For example, when you select the Multi mode in a strong backlight condition, the camera calculates that the overall amount of light is abundant, which results in a darker photo. The Spot mode can prevent this situation as it calculates the amount of light in a designated area. The subject is in bright color while the background is dark. The Spot mode is recommended for a situation like this where a huge difference in the exposure exists between a subject and a background. 94 Shooting Functions > Metering Measuring the exposure value of the focus area When this function is turned on, the camera automatically sets an optimal exposure by calculating the brightness of the focus area. This function is only available when you select Spot metering or Multi metering, and Selection AF. To set this function, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Link AE to AF Point ĺ an option. 95 Shooting Functions > Dynamic Range namic Range Shooting Functions This function automatically corrects the loss of bright detail that can occur due to shading differences in the photo. To set Dynamic Range options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Dynamic Range ĺ an option. Without Dynamic Range effect With Dynamic Range effect * Default Icon Description Off*: Do not use Dynamic Range. Smart Range+: Correct the loss of bright detail. HDR: Capture 3 photos with different exposures, and then combine them to create a single image automatically. You cannot set an ISO option higher than ISO 3200. Dynamic Range options cannot be set with drive options other than Single or Timer. Dynamic Range options cannot be set with Smart Filter or Picture Wizard options at the same time. Dynamic Range options cannot be set with the Bulb function. Dynamic Range 96 Shooting Functions > Smart Filter mart Filter Shooting Functions Smart Filter lets you apply special effects to your photos or videos. You can select various filter options to create special effects that are difficult to be achieved with normal lenses. To set Smart Filter options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Smart Filter ĺ an option. * Default Option Description Off* No effect Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong vignette effect of Lomo cameras. Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in miniature. Sketch Apply a pen sketch effect. Fish Eye Distort close objects to imitate the visual effect of a fisheye lens. Smart Filter options cannot be set with Picture Wizard options at the same time. Smart Filter 97 Shooting Functions > Exposure compensation xposure compensation Shooting Functions The camera automatically sets the exposure by measuring the levels of light from the photo’s composition and the position of a subject. If the exposure set by the camera is higher or lower than you expected, you can adjust the exposure value manually. The exposure value is adjustable in ±3 increments. The camera displays the exposure warning in red for each step beyond ±3 range. To adjust the exposure value, touch the exposure level indicator on the screen or touch ĺ EV and adjust the exposure value. You can also press [I] to select the exposure value and press [C/F] to adjust it. You can check the exposure value by the position of the exposure level indicator. Exposure level indicator Increased exposure (brighter) Decreased exposure (darker) Exposure warning Standard exposure index -2 Original +2 Exposure compensation 98 Shooting Functions > Exposure lock xposure lock Shooting Functions When you cannot achieve an appropriate exposure because of a strong brightness contrast, lock the exposure and then capture a photo. To lock the exposure, adjust the photo’s composition on which you want to calculate the exposure, and then press the Custom button. (when the function of the Custom button is set to AEL) (p. 151) After locking the exposure, aim the lens where you desire, and then press [Shutter]. Exposure lock 99 Shooting Functions > Video functions ideo functions Shooting Functions The functions available for video are explained below. Movie size Set the movie size. To set movie size options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Movie Size ĺ an option. When Video Out is set to NTSC * Default Icon Size Recommended for * 1920X1080 (30 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV. 1280X720 (30 fps) (16:9) View on an HDTV. 640X480 (30 fps) (4:3) View on a TV. 320X240 (30 fps) (4:3) Post on a website using the wireless network (30 seconds maximum). When Video Out is set to PAL * Default Icon Size Recommended for * 1920X1080 (25 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV. 1280X720 (25 fps) (16:9) View on an HDTV. 640X480 (25 fps) (4:3) View on a TV. 320X240 (25 fps) (4:3) Post on a website using the wireless network (30 seconds maximum). Video functions 100 Shooting Functions > Video functions Movie quality Set the Movie quality. To set movie quality options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Movie Quality ĺ an option. * Default Icon Extension Description MP4 (H.264) Normal: Record videos in normal quality. MP4 (H.264) HQ*: Record videos in high quality. Multi Motion Set the playing speed of a video. To set playing speed options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺMulti Motion ĺ an option. * Default Icon Description x0.25: Record a video to view it at 1/4 normal speed during playback. (Available only with 640x480 or 320x240) x1*: Record a video to view it at normal speed during playback. x5: Record a video to view it at 5X normal speed during playback. x10: Record a video to view it at 10X normal speed during playback. x20: Record a video to view it at 20X normal speed during playback. If you select an option other than x1, the sound recording function and the Distortion Correct function will not be supported. The available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. 101 Shooting Functions > Video functions Voice Sometimes, a muted video is more appealing than the one with sound. Turn the voice off to record a muted video. To set voice options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Voice ĺ an option. Fader You can fade in or fade out a scene using the fader function on the camera without having to do it on a PC. Set the fade in option to gradually fade in at the start of the scene. Set the fade out option to gradually fade out the scene. Use the function appropriately and add dramatic effects on your videos. To set fader options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺFader ĺ an option. * Default Icon Description Off*: Fader function not used. In: Scene gradually fades in. Out: Scene gradually fades out. In-Out: The fader function is applied at the start and end of the scene. When you use the fader function, it may take longer to save a file. Chapter 3 Playback/Editing Learn about how to play back and edit photos and videos. Refer to chapter 6 for editing files on a PC. 103 Playback/Editing Learn how to view photo and video thumbnails and how to protect or delete files. If you perform no operations for a while, information and icons on the screen disappear. When you operate the camera again, they will reappear. Viewing photos 1 Press [y]. The most recent file you captured will be displayed. 2 Press [C/F] to scroll through files. You can also drag the image left or right to move to another file. You may not be able to edit or play back files that were captured with other cameras, due to unsupported sizes or codecs. Use a computer or another device to edit or play back these files. Viewing image thumbnails In order to search for photos and videos you want, convert to the thumbnail view by pressing [I] or touching in Playback mode. The thumbnail view displays multiple images at a time so that you can easily look through items you wish to find. You can also classify and display files by category, such as date or file type. In thumbnail view, press [m] ĺz ĺ View ĺ an item to select the thumbnail view mode. Searching and managing files 104 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Viewing files by category 1 In the thumbnail view, press [m] ĺz ĺ Filter ĺ a category. * Default Option Description All* View files normally. Date View files by the date they were saved. File Type View files by the file type. 2 Select a list to open it. 3 Select a file to view it. Viewing files as a folder Continuous and burst shots appear as a folder. Selecting a folder will play back all photos automatically. Deleting a folder will delete all photos in the folder. 1 In Playback mode, press [C/F] to move to a desired folder. You can also drag the image left or right to move to a desired folder. The camera will automatically play back photos in the folder. 2 Press [o] to open the folder. You can also touch the folder on the screen to open the folder. 105 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files 3 Press [C/F] to move to another file. You can also drag the image left or right to move to another file. 4 Press [o] to return to Playback mode. You can also touch to return to Playback mode. Protecting files Protect your files from accidental deletion. 1 In Playback mode, scroll to a file. 2 Press [m] ĺz ĺ Protect ĺ On. You cannot delete or rotate a protected file. 106 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Deleting files Delete files in Playback mode and secure more space on your memory card. Protected files are not deleted. Deleting a single file You can select a single file and delete it. 1 In Playback mode, select a file, and then press [n]. 2 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. Deleting multiple files You can select multiple files and delete them. 1 In Playback mode, press [m] ĺz ĺ Delete ĺ Multiple Delete. Alternatively, in thumbnails view, press [n], and then select files to delete. 2 Select files you want to delete by pressing [C/F], and then press [o]. Press [o] again to cancel your selection. 3 Press [n]. 4 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. Deleting all files You can delete all files on the memory card at once. 1 In Playback mode, press [m]. 2 Select z ĺ Delete ĺ Delete All. 3 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. 107 Playback/Editing Enlarging a photo You can enlarge photos when viewing them in Playback mode. Pinch your fingers together or spread them apart on the screen to reduce or enlarge a photo. Drag the photo to move the magnified area. You can also use the Trim function to extract the portion of the image displayed on the screen and save it as a new file. Magnified area Magnification (The maximum magnification may differ by resolution.) Back Crop To Do this Move magnified area Press [D/I/C/F]. Crop the enlarged image Press [o]. (saved as a new file) Return to the original image Press [m]. Double-tap an area to enlarge it quickly. Viewing a slide show You can view photos in a slide show and apply various effects to the slide show. 1 In Playback mode, press [m]. 2 Select z ĺ Slide Show Options. 3 Select a slide show effect option. Skip to step 4 to start a slide show with no effects. * Default Option Description Play Mode Set whether or not to repeat the slide show. (One Play*, Repeat) Interval Set the interval between photos. (1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, 10 sec) Intervals can only be set when the scene change effect is Off. Effect Set a scene change effect between photos. Select Off to cancel effects. Viewing photos 108 Playback/Editing > Viewing photos 4 Press [m]. 5 Select Start Slide Show. 6 View the slide show. Press [o] to pause. Press [o] again to resume. Press [m] to stop the slide show and return to Playback mode. Auto rotating With Auto Rotate on, the camera automatically rotates photos you have captured vertically so they fit the screen horizontally. To set auto rotate options, In Playback mode, press [m] ĺz ĺ Auto Rotate ĺ an option. 109 Playback/Editing In Playback mode, you can play a video, capture an image from a video, or crop a video to save as another file. Stop Icon Description View previous file/Scan backward. (Each time you touch the icon while playing the video, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) Pause or resume playback. View next file/Scan forward. (Each time you touch the icon while playing the video, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) Adjust the volume or mute the sound. Scanning backward or forward To scan backwards or forwards through a video file while it is playing, use one of the following methods. Touch . Each time you touch the icon, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X. Press [C/F]. Each time you press the button, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X. Drag the handles that appear on the progress bar to the left or right. You can change the playback position in the video. Drag an area on the screen to the left or right. You can change the playback position in the video. Playing videos 110 Playback/Editing > Playing videos Adjusting the brightness of a video Adjust the brightness of a video while playing it. To adjust the brightness of a video, Touch the left half of the display ĺ drag upward or downward. Stop Adjusting the volume of a video Adjust the volume of a video while playing it. To adjust the volume of a video, Touch the right half of the display ĺ drag upward or downward. Stop You can also press [D/I] to adjust the volume of a video. 111 Playback/Editing > Playing videos 9 Touch Trim to trim a video. You can adjust the scene to be cropped by dragging the handles that appear on the progress bar. 10 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. The original video should be at least 10 seconds long. The camera will save the edited video as a new file and leave the original video intact. The point where you want the trimming to begin can be selected 2 seconds after playback starts. Capturing an image during playback 1 While viewing a video, press [o] or touch at the point where you want to capture an image. 2 Touch Capture. The resolution of the captured image will be the same as the original video. The captured image is saved as a new file. Trimming a video during playback 1 In Playback mode, scroll to a video, and then press [m]. 2 Select Trim Movie. 3 Press [o] or touch to start playing the video. 4 Press [o] or touch at the point where you want the trimming to begin. 5 Touch Start Point. 6 Press [o] or touch to resume playing the video. 7 Press [o] or touch at the point where you want the trimming to end. 8 Touch End Point. 112 Playback/Editing Edited photos are saved as new files under different file names. Photos captured in some modes cannot be edited with the Image Edit function. To edit images, In Playback mode, scroll to a photo, and then press [m] ĺ z ĺ Edit Image ĺan option. Some images may not be edited with the Image Edit function. In this case, use the supplied image editing software. RAW files cannot be edited with the Image Edit function. In this case, use the supplied image editing software. The camera will save edited photos as new files. When you edit photos, the camera will automatically convert them to a lower resolution. Photos that you rotate or resize manually are not automatically converted to a lower resolution. You cannot edit photos while viewing files as a folder. Open the folder and select a photo to edit each photo. Cropping a photo 1 Touch ĺ . 2 Drag the corner of the box to adjust the size of the area. 3 Drag the box to move the location of the area. 4 Press [o] or touch to save. Editing photos 113 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Rotating a photo 1 Touch ĺ . 2 Touch an option. Rotate : Right 90˚ 3 Press [o] or touch to save. You can also rotate a photo in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting z ĺ Rotate ĺ a desired option. The camera will overwrite the original file. Resizing photos Change the size of a photo and save it as a new file. 1 Touch ĺ . 2 Touch an option. Resize : 3888 x 2592 3 Press [o] or touch to save. Available resize options differ depending on the original size of the photo. 114 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Adjusting your photos You can correct captured photos by adjusting the brightness, contrast, or color. 1 Touch . 2 Touch an adjusting option. • If you selected (Auto adjustment), skip to step 6. Icon Description Original (Reset to the original image) Auto adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation RGB adjustment Color Temperature Exposure 3 Press [C/F] to adjust the option. • You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the option. 4 Press [o] or touch . 5 Touch . 6 Press [o] or touch to save. 115 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Retouching faces 1 Touch ĺ . 2 Press [C/F] to adjust the option. You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the option. As the number increases, the skin tone becomes brighter and smoother. 3 Press [o] or touch to save. 116 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Applying Smart Filter effects Apply special effects to your photos. 1 Touch , and then touch an option. Smart Filter : Vignetting Option Description Off No effect Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong vignette effect of Lomo cameras. Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in miniature. Soft Focus Hide facial imperfections or apply dreamy effects. Sketch Apply a pen sketch effect. Option Description Fish-eye Distort close objects to imitate the visual effect of a fisheye lens. Classic Apply a black and white effect. Retro Apply a sepia tone effect. Oil Painting Apply an oil painting effect. Cartoon Apply a cartoon effect. Ink Painting Apply ink sketching effect. Cross Filter Add lines that radiate outward from bright objects to imitate the visual effect of a cross filter. Zooming Shot Blur the edges of a photo to emphasize the subjects in the center. 2 Press [o] or touch . 3 Touch to save. Chapter 4 Wireless network Learn how to connect to wireless local area networks (WLANs) and use functions. 118 Wireless network Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Learn to connect via an access point (AP) when you are in a range of a WLAN. You can also configure network settings. Connecting to a WLAN 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 Select , , , , or . 3 Follow the on-screen instructions until the Wi-Fi Setting screen appears. In some modes, press [m], and then select Wi-Fi Setting. The camera automatically searches for available AP devices. 4 Select an AP. Samsung1 Samsung2 Samsung3 Wi-Fi Setting Refresh Back Select Refresh to refresh the list of connectable APs. Select Add wireless network to add an AP manually. The AP name must be in English to add the AP manually. Icon Description Ad hoc AP Secured AP WPS AP Signal strength Press [F] or touch to open network setting options. When you select a secured AP, a pop-up window appears. Enter the required passwords to connect to the WLAN. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 122) When a login page appears, refer to "Using the login browser". (p. 120) When you select an unsecured AP, the camera will connect to the WLAN. If you select a WPS profile supported AP, select ĺ WPS PIN connection, and then enter a PIN on the AP device. You can also connect to a WPS profile supported AP by selecting ĺ WPS button connection on the camera, and then pushing the WPS button on the AP device. If a pop-up message about data collection regulations appears, read and agree to it. 119 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Setting network options 1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press [F] or touch . 2 Select each option, and then enter the required information. Option Description Network Password Enter the network password. IP Setting Set the IP address automatically or manually. Manually setting the IP address 1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press [F] or touch . 2 Select IP Setting ĺ Manual. 3 Select each option, and then enter the required information. Option Description IP Enter the static IP address. Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask. Gateway Enter the gateway. DNS Server Enter the DNS address. 120 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Using the login browser You can enter your login information via the login browser when connecting to some APs, sharing services, or cloud servers. Icon Description Close the login browser. Move to the previous page. Move to the next page. Stop loading the page. Reload the page. You may not be able to select some items depending on the page you connected to. This does not indicate a malfunction. The login browser may not close automatically after you log into some pages. If this occurs, close the login browser by touching , and then proceed with the desired operation. It may take longer to load the login page due to the page size or network speed. If this occurs, wait until the login information input window appears. 121 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Network connection tips Some Wi-Fi features are not available if you do not insert a memory card. The quality of the network connection will be determined by the AP. The further the distance between your camera and the AP, the longer it will take to connect to the network. If a nearby device is using the same radio frequency signal as your camera, it may interrupt your connection. If your AP name is not in English, the camera may not be able to locate the device or the name may appear incorrectly. For network settings or a password, contact your network administrator or network service provider. If a WLAN requires authentication from the service provider, you may not be able to connect to it. To connect to the WLAN, contact your network service provider. Depending on the encryption type, the number of digits in the password may differ. A WLAN connection may not be possible in all surroundings. The camera may display a WLAN enabled printer on the AP List. You cannot connect to a network via a printer. You cannot connect your camera to a network and a TV simultaneously. Connecting to a network may incur additional charges. Costs will vary based on the conditions of your contract. If you cannot connect to a WLAN, try another AP from the available AP list. A login page may appear when you select free WLANs provided by some network service providers. Enter your ID and password to connect to the WLAN. For information about registering or the service, contact the network service providers. Be cautious when you enter personal information for an AP connection. Do not enter any payment or credit card information on your camera. The manufacturer is not liable for any problem caused by entering such information. Available network connections may differ by country. The WLAN feature of your camera must comply with radio transmission laws in your region. To ensure compliance, use the WLAN feature only in the country where you purchased the camera. The process for adjusting network settings may differ, depending on network conditions. Do not access a network that you are not authorized to use. Before you connect to a network, ensure your battery is fully charged. You cannot upload or send files captured in some modes. Files that you transfer to another device may not be supported by the device. In this case, use a computer to play back the files. 122 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Entering text Learn how to enter text. The icons in the table let you move the cursor, change the case, etc. Press [D/I/C/F] to scroll to a key and press [o] to enter it. Or, touch a key to enter it. X Cancel Done Icon Description Move the cursor. In ABC mode, change the case. X Delete the last letter. Cancel Stop entering text and return to the previous page. Switch between Symbol mode and ABC mode. Enter a space. Done Save the displayed text. You can use only the English alphabets in some modes, regardless of the display language. Press [y] to move to Done directly. The number of characters you can enter varies depending on the situation. The screen may differ depending on the input mode. 123 Wireless network Using the NFC Feature (Tag & Go) Using NFC features in Playback mode (Photo Beam) In Playback mode, the camera transfers the current file to the smart phone automatically when you read a tag from an NFC-enabled device. To transfer multiple files, select files from the thumbnail view, and then read a tag from an NFC-enabled device. Using NFC features in Wi-Fi mode Select MobileLink or Remote Viewfinder from the pop-up window that appears by reading a tag from an NFC-enabled device. (p. 126, 130) Place a smart phone's NFC antenna near the camera’s NFC tag to launch the feature for saving photos to a smart phone automatically or the feature for using a smart phone as a remote shutter. You can also transfer files to an NFC-enabled device in Playback mode. This feature is supported by NFC-enabled smart phones running Android OS. It is recommended that you use the latest version. This feature is not available for iOS devices. You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps or the Google Play Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART CAMERA App from www.samsung.com. To read an NFC tag, place the NFC-enabled device near the camera’s NFC tag for more than 2 seconds. You can set the size for transferred photos by pressing [m], and then selecting d ĺ MobileLink/NFC Image Size ĺ an option. Do not modify the NFC tag in any way. Using NFC features in Shooting mode Launch AutoShare or Remote Viewfinder by reading a tag from an NFCenabled device. (p. 124, 130) Preset to launch the Wi-Fi function by reading a tag on an NFC-enabled device. (p. 151) 124 Wireless network Saving files to a smart phone automatically The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the AutoShare feature via a WLAN. When you capture a photo with your camera, the photo is saved to a smart phone automatically. The AutoShare feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.) Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly. You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART CAMERA App from www.samsung.com. If you set this function, the setting is maintained even when you change the Shooting mode. This feature may not be supported in some modes or may not be available with some shooting options. 1 In Shooting mode, touch ĺAutoShare. You can also press [m] ĺb ĺ AutoShare ĺ On. If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the camera, select Security Settings. (p. 155) 2 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 28) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 5. 3 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the camera to the smart phone. 125 Wireless network > Saving files to a smart phone automatically 4 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. An icon that shows the connection status ( ) will appear on the camera’s screen. 5 Capture a photo. The captured photo is saved to the camera, and then transferred to the smart phone. If a memory card is not inserted or the memory is full, the captured photo is transferred to the smart phone without being saved to the camera. If you recorded a video, it is saved only to the camera. The image file captured while recording a video is not saved on the smart phone. If the GPS feature is activated on the smart phone, the GPS information will be saved with the captured photo. 126 Wireless network The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the MobileLink feature via a WLAN. You can easily send photos or videos to your smart phone. The MobileLink feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.) Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly. You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART CAMERA App from www.samsung.com. When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. You can view up to 1,000 recent files and send up to 1,000 files at a time. When you send Full HD videos using MobileLink feature, you may not be able to play back files on some devices. When using this feature on an iOS device, the device may lose its Wi-Fi connection. You cannot send RAW files. You can set the size for transferred photos by pressing [m], and then selecting d ĺ MobileLink/NFC Image Size ĺ an option. You can also touch ĺ MobileLink on the screen in Shooting mode. You can also send files in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ MobileLink or by selecting ĺ MobileLink. The screen turns off if you perform no operations on the camera for 30 seconds. 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 On the camera, select . If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the camera, select Security Settings. (p. 155) 3 On the camera, select a sending option. If you select Select Files from Smartphone, you can use your smart phone to view and share files stored on the camera. The screen turns off if you perform no operations on the smart phone for 30 seconds. If you select Select Files from Camera, you can select files to send from the camera. 4 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 28) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 7. Sending photos or videos to a smart phone 127 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos to a smart phone 5 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the camera to the smart phone. 6 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. 7 On the smart phone or camera, select files to transfer from the camera. 8 On the smart phone, touch the copy button or on the camera, select Send. The camera will send the files to the smart phone. 128 Wireless network Sending photos or videos to multiple smart phones The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the Group Share feature via a WLAN. You can easily send photos or videos to multiple smart phones. The Group Share feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.) Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly. You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART CAMERA App from www.samsung.com. When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. Transferring files to multiple smart phones may take longer than transferring files to one device. When you send Full HD videos using Group Share feature, you may not be able to play back files on some devices. When using this feature on an iOS device, the device may lose its Wi-Fi connection. You cannot send RAW files. You can set the size for transferred photos by pressing [m], and then selecting d ĺ MobileLink/NFC Image Size ĺ an option. You can also send files in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ Group Share or by selecting ĺ Group Share. 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 On the camera, select . If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the camera, select Security Settings. (p. 155) 3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 28) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 6. 129 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos to multiple smart phones 4 Touch Connect next to the desired smart phone listed on the camera. If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. You can connect to up to 4 smart phones. If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the camera to the smart phone. 5 Select Next. 6 On camera, select files to transfer from the camera. 7 On the camera, select Send. The camera will send the files to the smart phone. When you connect to multiple smart phones, the camera will send the files to all devices at the same time. 130 Wireless network The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the Remote Viewfinder feature via a WLAN. Use the smart phone as a remote shutter release with the Remote Viewfinder feature. The captured photo will display on the smart phone. The Remote Viewfinder feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.) Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly. You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART CAMERA App from www.samsung.com. You can also touch ĺ Remote Viewfinder on the screen in Shooting mode. Continuously captured photos or videos will not display on the smart phone. 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 On the camera, select . If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the camera, select Security Settings. (p. 155) 3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 28) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 6. 4 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the camera to the smart phone. Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release 131 Wireless network > Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release 5 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. 6 On the smart phone, select q to open the smart panel. 7 On the smart phone, set the shooting options. While using this feature, some buttons are not available on your camera. With the smart phone, you can operate the camera only by touching the screen. Some shooting options are not supported. Shooting options that you have set will remain on the camera after the connection with the smart phone has ended. 8 Touch to return to the shooting screen. 9 On the smart phone, touch and hold to focus, and then release it to capture the photo. Touch to record a video and touch to stop a video. If the GPS feature is activated on the smart phone, the GPS information will be saved with the captured photo. When you use this feature, the ideal distance between the camera and the smart phone may vary, depending on your surroundings. The smart phone must be within 7 m of the camera to use this feature. It will take some time to capture the photo after you release on the smart phone. If the file save option is set to Smartphone + Camera, only photos will be transferred to the smart phone. (Videos and RAW files will not be transferred.) If you capture photos continuously when the file save option is set to Smartphone + Camera, photos will not be transferred to the smart phone. The smart phone's screen will not mirror the camera's display when recording a video. The Remote Viewfinder function will deactivate when: - there is an incoming call on the smart phone - either the camera or the smart phone turns off - device loses its connection to the WLAN - the Wi-Fi connection is poor or unstable - you perform no operations for approximately 3 minutes while connected - folder and file number are max values The screen turns off if you perform no operations on the camera for 30 seconds. 132 Wireless network Using the Baby Monitor 3 On the camera, select an AP from the list, and then position the camera. Place the camera in a safe location where children or pets cannot reach it. Point the camera lens at the subject. We recommend you connect the camera to a power outlet with the AC adapter. 4 On the smart phone, select the AP that the camera is connected to. For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. 5 On the smart phone, turn on the Samsung Home Monitor application. Use the Baby Monitor feature to connect the camera to a smart phone on which the Samsung Home Monitor is installed, and monitor a location. The Baby Monitor feature is supported by smart phones that support WVGA (800X480) or higher resolution and run the Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.) Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly. You should install the Samsung Home Monitor application on your smart phone before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Use this feature indoors only. 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 On the camera, select . If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. 133 Wireless network > Using the Baby Monitor 6 Start live video or sound monitoring. Watch live video from the camera on your smart phone. During video monitoring, touch the Sound Monitoring Mode button on the smart phone to stop the video stream. If the camera detects noise, an alarm will notify you on the smart phone. During live video monitoring via the smart phone, video is not saved on the camera. If the monitored location is dark, touch to turn on the AF-assist light. During sound monitoring, alarms will sound on the smart phone if the camera detects noise for a short period at a volume that is higher than the designated level. During live video monitoring, alarms will not sound on the smart phone even if the camera detects noise. 7 Touch to exit the Samsung Home Monitor application. Adjusting the noise level for alarm activation You can set the level of noise that will activate an alarm while using sound monitoring. Press [D/I] to adjust the noise level. Noise level for alarm activation: When the camera detects noise that exceeds the designated level for a short period, an alarm will sound. Back Wi-Fi Setting Sensor sensitivity Do not use this feature for illegal purposes. 134 Wireless network Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos You can send photos or videos that you captured with the camera to a PC wirelessly. Installing the program for Auto Backup on your PC 1 Install i-Launcher on the PC. (p. 161) 2 Connect the camera to the PC with the USB cable. 3 When the Auto Backup program icon appears, click it. The Auto Backup program is installed on the PC. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation. 4 Remove the USB cable. Before installing the program, ensure that the PC is connected to a network. Sending photos or videos to a PC 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 Select . If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 118) 3 Select a backup PC. 135 Wireless network > Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos 4 Select OK. To cancel sending, select Cancel. You cannot select individual files to backup. This function backs up only new files on the camera. The backup's progress will be shown on the PC monitor. When the transfer is completed, the camera will turn off automatically in approximately 30 seconds. Select Cancel to return to the previous screen and prevent the camera from turning off automatically. To turn off your PC automatically after the transfer is complete, select Shut down PC after backup. To change the backup PC, select Change PC. When you connect the camera to the WLAN, select the AP that is connected to the PC. The camera will search for available access points even if you are connecting to the same access point again. If you turn off the camera or remove the battery while sending files, the file transfer will be interrupted. While you are using this feature, the shutter control is disabled on your camera. You can connect only one camera to the PC at a time for sending files. The backup may be canceled due to network conditions. When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. You must turn off Windows Firewall and any other firewalls before using this feature. You can send up to 1,000 recent files. On the PC software, the server name must be entered in the Latin alphabet and can contain no more than 48 characters. 136 Wireless network 5 Select the Name box, enter your name, and then touch Done. Sender Setting Name Save Email Reset 6 Select the Email box, enter your email address, and then touch Done. 7 Select Save to save your changes. To delete your information, select Reset. You can change settings in the email menu and send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. Changing email settings In the email menu, you can change settings for storing your information. You can also set or change the email password. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 122) Storing your information 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 Select . The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 118) 3 Press [m]. 4 Select Sender Setting. Sending photos or videos via email 137 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email Setting an email password 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 Select . The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 118) 3 Press [m]. 4 Select Setting Password ĺ On. To deactivate the password, select Off. 5 When the pop-up appears, select OK. 6 Enter a 4-digit password. 7 Enter the password again. 8 When the pop-up appears, select OK. If you lost your password, you can reset it by selecting Reset on the password setting screen. When you reset the information, the previously saved user’s setting information and email address will be deleted. 138 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email Changing the email password 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 Select . The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 118) 3 Press [m]. 4 Select Change Password. 5 Enter your current 4-digit password. 6 Enter a new 4-digit password. 7 Enter the new password again. 8 When the pop-up appears, select OK. Sending photos or videos via email You can send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 122) 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 Select . 3 Connect to a WLAN. (p. 118) 4 Select the Sender box, enter your email address, and then touch Done. If you have previously saved your information, it will be inserted automatically. (p. 136) To use an address from the list of previous senders, select ĺ an address. 139 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email 5 Select the Receiver box, enter an email address, and then touch Done. To use an address from the list of previous recipients, select ĺ an address. Select to add additional recipients. You can input up to 30 recipients. Select to delete an address from the list. 6 Select Next. 7 Select files to send. You can select up to 20 files. The total size must be 7 MB or less. 8 Select Next. 9 Select the comment box, enter your comments, and then touch Done. 10 Select Send. The camera will send the email. If an email fails to send, a message prompting you to send it again appears. Even if a photo appears to have transferred successfully, errors with the recipient’s email account may cause the photo to be rejected or recognized as spam. You may not be able to send an email if no network connection is available or if your email account settings are incorrect. You cannot send an email if the combined file sizes exceed the 7 MB. The maximum resolution of photos you can send is 2M. The maximum resolution of videos you can send is . If the selected photo has a resolution higher than 2M, it will be automatically resized to a lower resolution. If you cannot send an email because of firewall or user authentication settings, contact your network administrator or network service provider. When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. You can also send an email in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ Email or by selecting ĺ Email. 140 Wireless network Upload your photos or videos to file sharing services. Available sharing services will be displayed on your camera. To upload files to some sharing services, you must visit the website and register before connecting your camera. Accessing a sharing service 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 Select . 3 Connect to a WLAN. (p. 118) 4 Select a sharing service. If the pop-up message that prompts you to create an account appears, select OK. 5 Enter your ID and password to log in. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 122) If you connected to some sharing services, refer to "Using the login browser". (p. 120) To select an ID from the list, select ĺ an ID. If you have previously logged in to the sharing service, you may be logged in automatically. You must have an existing account on the file sharing service to use this feature. Using photo or video sharing services 141 Wireless network > Using photo or video sharing services Uploading photos or videos 1 Access the sharing service with your camera. 2 Select files to upload. You can select up to 20 files. The total size must be 10 MB or less. (On some sharing services, the total size or number of files may vary.) 3 Select Upload. The camera will upload photos or videos. When an upload fails, a message prompting you to upload it again appears. On some sharing services, you can enter your comments by selecting the comment box. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 122) You can set an upload folder for Facebook by pressing [m], and then selecting Upload Folder (Facebook) on the sharing service's list screen. You cannot upload files if the file size exceeds the limit. The maximum resolution of photos you can upload is 2M. The maximum resolution of videos you can upload is . If the selected photo has a resolution higher than 2M, it will be automatically resized to a lower resolution. (On some sharing services, the maximum photo resolution may vary.) The method of uploading photos or videos may differ depending on the selected sharing service. If you cannot access a sharing service because of firewall or user authentication settings, contact your network administrator or network service provider. Uploaded photos or videos may be automatically titled with the date they were captured. The speed of your internet connection may affect how quickly photos upload or web pages open. When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. You can also upload photos or videos to file sharing services in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ a sharing service or by selecting ĺ a sharing service. You cannot upload videos to some sharing services. When you upload photos to a file sharing service, the photo may be resized to 2M or 1M depending on their policy. 142 Wireless network Using Samsung Link to send files You can upload files from your camera to the Samsung Link online storage or view files on a Samsung Link device connected to the same AP. Uploading photos to an online storage 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 Select ĺWeb storage. If the guide message appears, select OK. The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 118) To change the size for uploaded photos, press [m], and then select Upload Image Size. 3 Enter your ID and password, and then select Login ĺ OK. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 122) To select an ID from the list, select ĺ an ID. If you have previously logged in to the website, you may be logged in automatically. To use this feature, you must create a Samsung Link account and an account with an affiliated online storage service using your PC. After you have finished creating the accounts, add your online storage account to Samsung Link. 4 Select an online storage service. Before you use this feature, you must visit the Samsung Link website with your PC and register an online storage. 5 Select files to upload, and then select Upload. You cannot upload video files to Samsung Link online storage. When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. You can upload up to 20 files. You can also upload photos in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ Samsung Link or by selecting ĺ Samsung Link. 143 Wireless network > Using Samsung Link to send files Viewing photos or videos on devices that support Samsung Link 1 On the Mode screen, select Wi-Fi. 2 Select ĺNearby devices. The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 118) You can set to allow only selected devices or all devices to connect by pressing [m], and then selecting DLNA Access Control on the screen. A sharing file list is created. Wait until other devices can find your camera. 3 Connect the Samsung Link device to a network, and then turn on the Samsung Link feature. Refer to your device's user manual for more information. 4 On the camera, allow the Samsung Link device to connect to your camera. 5 On the Samsung Link device, select a camera to connect to. 6 On the Samsung Link device, browse the shared photos or videos. For information about searching for the camera and browsing the photos or videos on the Samsung Link device, refer to the device's user manual. Videos may not play smoothly depending on the type of Samsung Link device or the network condition. AP ▲ The camera is connected to a TV that supports Samsung Link via WLAN. 144 Wireless network > Using Samsung Link to send files You can share up to 1,000 recent files. On a Samsung Link device, you can view only photos or videos captured with your camera. The range of the wireless connection between your camera and a Samsung Link device may vary depending on the specifications of the AP. If the camera is connected to 2 Samsung Link devices, playback may be slower. Photos or videos will be shared in their original sizes. You can use this feature only with devices that support Samsung Link. Shared photos or videos will not be stored on the Samsung Link device, but they can be stored in the camera to meet the device's specifications. Transferring photos or videos to the Samsung Link device may take some time depending on the network connection, the number of files to be shared, or the sizes of the files. If you power off the camera abnormally while viewing photos or videos on a Samsung Link device (for example, by removing the battery), the device considers the camera to still be connected. The order of photos or videos on the camera may be different than on the Samsung Link device. Depending on the number of photos or videos you want to share, it may take some time to load your photos or videos and complete the initial set-up process. While viewing photos or videos on the Samsung Link device, continuously using the device's remote or performing additional operations on the device may prevent this feature from working properly. If you reorder or sort files on the camera while viewing them on a Samsung Link device, you must repeat the initial set-up process to update the list of files on the device. When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. We recommend you use a network cable to connect your Samsung Link device to your AP. This will minimize any video ‘Stuttering’ you may experience when streaming content. To view files on a Samsung Link device using the Nearby devices feature, enable multicast mode on your AP. Chapter 5 Camera settings menu Learn about the user settings and general settings menu. You can adjust the settings to better suit your needs and preferences. 146 Camera settings menu You can set the user environment with these settings. To set user options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺ d ĺ an option. Available items and the order of them may differ depending on shooting conditions. ISO Customizing ISO Expansion You can select ISO 100 and 25600. ISO Step You can set the size for the ISO sensitivity by either 1/3 or 1 step. Auto ISO Range You can set the maximum ISO value under which each EV step is chosen when you set the ISO to Auto. User settings 147 Camera settings menu > User settings Noise Reduction Use the Noise Reduction to reduce the visual noise in photos. * Default Option Description High ISO NR This function reduces noise that may occur when you set a high ISO sensitivity. (Off, High, Normal*, Low) Long Term NR This function reduces noise when you set the camera for a long exposure. (Off, On*) Bracket Settings You can set up the options for each bracketing. * Default Option Description AE Bracket Settings Set the exposure interval. (-/+0.3 EV*, -/+0.7 EV, -/+1.0 EV, -/+1.3 EV, -/+1.7 EV, -/+2.0 EV, -/+2.3 EV, -/+2.7 EV, -/+3.0 EV) WB Bracket Settings Adjust the White Balance interval range of the 3 bracketed photos. (AB-/+3*, AB-/+2, AB-/+1, MG-/+3, MG-/+2, MG-/+1) For example, AB-/+3 adjusts the Amber value plus or minus three steps. MG-/+3 adjusts the Magenta value the same amount. P Wiz Bracket Settings Select 3 Picture Wizard settings the camera uses to capture the 3 bracketed photos. Depth Bracket Settings Set the depth interval. (-/+0.3, -/+0.7, -/+1.0*, -/+1.3, -/+1.7, -/+2.0, -/+2.3, -/+2.7, -/+3.0) 148 Camera settings menu > User settings Color Space The color space option allows you to select methods for representing colors. Digital imaging devices such as digital cameras, monitors, and printers have their own methods for representing colors, which are called color spaces. * Default Option Description sRGB* sRGB (Standard RGB) is an international specification to define the color space created by IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). It is widely used for creating colors on PC monitors and is also the standard color space for Exif. sRGB is recommended for regular images and images you intend to publish on the Internet. Adobe RGB Adobe RGB is used for commercial printing and has a larger color range than sRGB. Its wider range of colors helps you to easily edit photos on a computer. Note that individual programs are generally compatible with a limited number of color spaces. Adobe RGB sRGB When the color space is set to Adobe RGB, photos will be saved as "_SAMXXXX.JPG". 149 Camera settings menu > User settings Distortion Correct You can correct lens distortion that might occur from lenses. This feature is available with lenses that support it. Touch Operation Set to enable touch operation in Shooting mode. * Default Option Description Off Do not use touch operations in Shooting mode. (You can use touch operations in other situations.) On* Use touch operations in Shooting mode. iFn Customizing You can select options that can be adjusted when you press [i-Function] on an i-Function lens. Option Description Aperture Set to adjust the aperture value. Shutter Speed Set to adjust the shutter speed. EV Set to adjust the exposure value. ISO Set to adjust ISO sensitivity. White Balance Set to adjust the White Balance. 150 Camera settings menu > User settings User Display You can add or remove shooting information from the display. 1 2 3 No. Description 1 Icons Set to display icons on the right in Shooting mode. 2 Date & Time Set to display the date and time. 3 Histogram Set the histogram on the display on or off. About histogram A histogram is a graph that shows the brightness distribution of a photo. A histogram inclined to the left indicates a dark photo. A histogram inclined to the right indicates a bright photo. The height of the graph is related to color information. The graph gets higher if a specific color is more common. Insufficient exposure Balanced exposure Excessive exposure 151 Camera settings menu > User settings Key Mapping You can change the function assigned to the Custom button or the DIRECT LINK button. * Default Button Function Custom Set the Custom button's function. Optical Preview*: Execute the Depth of Field Preview function for the current aperture value. (p. 22) One Touch WB (White Balance): Execute the Custom White Balance function. One Touch RAW +: Save a file in the RAW+JPEG format. To save a file in JPEG format, press the button again. Reset: Reset some settings. AEL: Execute the auto exposure lock function. (Halfpressing [Shutter] executes the auto focus lock function.) AEL Hold: Keep executing the auto exposure lock function after shooting. (The exposure remains locked even after you capture a photo.) DIRECT LINK Set the DIRECT LINK button's function. (AutoShare, MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Group Share, Baby Monitor, Auto Backup, Email, SNS & Cloud, Samsung Link) Live view NFC In Shooting mode, turn on the NFC feature on an NFC-enabled smart phone and place the smart phone's NFC antenna near the camera’s NFC tag to launch AutoShare or Remote Viewfinder. This feature is supported by NFC-enabled smart phones running Android OS. It is recommended that you use the latest version. This feature is not available for iOS devices. MobileLink/NFC Image Size Set the size of photos to transfer to a smartphone using the MobileLink or NFC functions. * Default Option Description Resize to 2M or lower If a photo's size is larger than 3M, it will be transferred after resizing it to 2M or lower. Original* The photo will be transferred in its original size. Grid Line Select a guide to help you compose a scene. (Off*, 4 X 4, 3 X 3, Cross, Diagonal) 152 Camera settings menu > User settings Lens Button Speed Settings Set the zoom speed for the Power Zoom lens' buttons at either fast, medium, or slow speed. At fast speed, zoom noise increases and can be recorded in videos. This function is available only when you attach the Power Zoom lens using the mount adapter. AF Lamp When shooting in dark places, turn the AF lamp on in order to have a better auto focus. The Auto Focus functions more accurately in dark places when the AF lamp is on. Auto Self-Shot Set to turn on the camera and enter Self shot mode automatically when you flip the display upward. In Self shot mode, the timer (3 seconds), one-touch shot, face detection, and beauty face options are automatically activated. 153 Camera settings menu Learn to configure your camera's settings. To set Setting options, In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] ĺ q ĺ an option. * Default Item Description Sound System Volume: Set the sound volume or turn all sound off entirely. (Off, Low, Medium*, High) Even if the system volume is turned off, the camera emits the sound while playing a video or a slide show. AF Sound: Set the sound the camera emits when you half-press the shutter button on or off. (Off, On*) Button Sound: Set the sound the camera emits when you press the buttons or touch the screen on or off. (Off, On*) Quick View Set the Quick View time length–the amount of time the camera displays a photo immediately after you capture it. (Off, 1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, Hold) * Default Item Description Display Adjust Adjust the display brightness, auto brightness setting, display color, or level gauge. Display Brightness: You can adjust the display brightness manually. Auto Brightness: Turn auto brightness on or off. (Off, On*) Display Color: You can adjust the display color manually. Horizontal Calibration: Calibrate the level gauge. If the level gauge is not level, position the camera on the level surface, and then follow the on-screen instructions. You cannot access the Horizontal Calibration option in Playback mode. You cannot calibrate the level gauge in portrait orientation. Auto Display Off Set the display off time. The display turns off if you do not use the camera for the time you set. (Off, 30 sec*, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min) Auto Power Off Set power shut off time. The camera shuts off if you do not use it for the time you set. (Off, 1 min*, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min) The camera retains the power-off time setting even if you replace the battery. Auto Power Off may not work if the camera is connected to a computer or a TV or playing a slide show or a movie. Setting 154 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description Help Guide Display Set to display help text about menus and functions. (Off, On*) Press [n] to hide the help text. Language Set a language the camera shows on the display. Date & Time Set date, time, date format, time zone and whether to imprint the date on photos. (Time Zone, Date/Time Set, Date Type, Time Type, Imprint) The date appears on the lower right side of the photo. When you print a photo, some printers may not print the date appropriately. Video Out Set the video signal output appropriate for your country when connecting the camera to an external video device such as a monitor or HDTV. NTSC: USA, Canada, Japan, Korea, Taiwan, Mexico, etc. PAL (Supports only PAL B, D, G, H, or I): Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, England, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Singapore, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, Norway, etc. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) When you connect the camera to an HDTV that supports Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), you can control the play function of the camera with the TV remote control. Off: You cannot control the play function of camera with the TV remote control. On*: You can control the play function of camera with the TV remote control. * Default Item Description HDMI Output When you connect the camera to an HDTV with an HDMI cable, you can change the resolution of the image. NTSC: Auto*, 1080i, 720p, 480p, 576p (activates only when PAL is selected) If the connected HDTV does not support the resolution you select, the camera sets the resolution one level lower. File Number Set the method of numbering files and folders. Reset: After using the reset function, the next file name is started at 0001. Series*: New file numbers continue the existing number sequence, even if you have installed a new memory card, formatted the card, or deleted all photos. The first folder name is 100PHOTO, if you have selected the sRGB color space and Standard file naming, the first file name is SAM_0001. File name numbers are increased by 1 from SAM_0001 to SAM_9999. Folder numbers are increased by 1 from 100PHOTO to 999PHOTO. The maximum number of files that can be saved in one folder is 9,999. File numbers are assigned according to DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) specifications. If you change a file name (for example, on a computer), the camera will not be able to play the file. 155 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description Format Format the memory card. Formatting deletes all existing files including protected files. (No*, Yes) Errors can occur if you use a memory card formatted by another brand of camera, a memory card reader, or a computer. Please format memory cards in the camera before using them to capture photos. Device Information View the firmware version of the body and the lens, Mac address, and network certification number, or update the firmware. Firmware Update: Update the firmware of the camera body or lens. (Body Firmware, Lens Firmware) You can update the firmware by connecting the camera to the computer and starting i-Launcher. For more details, refer to page 177. You cannot run a firmware upgrade without a fully charged battery. Recharge the battery fully before running a firmware upgrade. If you update the firmware, user settings and values will be reset. (Date, time, language, and video out will not change.) Do not turn the camera off while the update is in progress. * Default Item Description Wi-Fi Privacy lock Set to require a PIN when connecting the camera and a smart phone. PIN: Enter a PIN before connecting. None*: Allow a connection without requiring a PIN. Connections will automatically be made without requiring a PIN when using the NFC function. PINs are automatically generated and renewed only when you reset the camera settings or update the firmware. If you have previously connected your camera to a smart phone via a PIN, they will connect automatically. Reset Reset the setup menu and shooting options to the factory defaults. (Date, time, language, and video output settings do not change.) (No*, Yes) Open Source License View open source licenses. Chapter 6 Connecting to external devices Make full use of the camera by connecting it to external devices such as a computer or HDTV. 157 Connecting to external devices Play back photos or videos by connecting your camera to an HDTV using an optional HDMI cable. 1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] ĺ q ĺ HDMI Output ĺ an option. (p. 154) 2 Turn off your camera and HDTV. 3 Connect your camera to your HDTV with the optional HDMI cable. 4 Turn on your HDTV, and then select the HDMI video source. 5 Turn on the camera. The camera automatically enters into Playback mode when you connect it to an HDTV. 6 View photos or play videos using the camera buttons. When using the HDMI cable, you can connect the camera to an HDTV using the Anynet+(CEC) method. The Anynet+(CEC) functions allow you to control connected devices using the TV remote control. If the HDTV supports Anynet+(CEC), the TV turns on automatically when used in conjunction with the camera. This feature may not be available on some HDTVs. When connected to an HDTV by an HDMI cable, the camera cannot capture a photo or video. When connected to an HDTV, some of the camera’s playback functions may not be available. The length of time after which the camera and an HDTV are connected may vary depending on the memory card that you are using. As the main feature of a memory card is to increase the transfer speed, it is not necessarily true to say that a memory card with a faster transfer speed is also fast in using the HDMI function. Viewing files on an HDTV 158 Connecting to external devices Transfer files on a memory card to your computer by connecting the camera to the PC. Transferring files to your Windows OS computer Connecting the camera as a removable disk You can connect the camera to your computer as a removable disk. Open the removable disk and transfer files to your computer. 1 Turn off the camera. 2 Connect the camera to your computer with the USB cable. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not work properly. 3 Turn on the camera. The computer recognizes the camera automatically. 4 On your computer, select My Computer ĺ Removable Disk ĺ DCIM ĺ 100PHOTO. 5 Select the files you want, and then drag or save them to your computer. Transferring files to your computer 159 Connecting to external devices > Transferring files to your computer Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP) With Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows 8, the methods for disconnecting the camera are similar. 1 Ensure that no data is being transferred between the camera and the computer. If the status lamp on your camera is blinking, it means the data transfer is in progress. Please wait until the status lamp stops blinking. 2 Click on the tool bar at the bottom right of your computer screen. 3 Click the pop-up message. 4 Click the message box indicating safely removed. 5 Remove the USB cable. Transferring files to your Mac OS Mac OS 10.5 or later is supported. 1 Turn off the camera. 2 Connect your camera to a Macintosh computer with the USB cable. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not work properly. 160 Connecting to external devices > Transferring files to your computer 3 Turn on the camera. The computer recognizes the camera automatically and displays a removable disk icon. 4 On your computer, open the removable disk. 5 Transfer photos or videos to the Mac OS computer. 161 Connecting to external devices You can view and edit files using the provided programs. You can also send the files to a PC wirelessly. Installing programs from the provided CD 1 Insert the installation CD into your PC. 2 Select a language. 3 Select a program to install. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions. 5 Click Exit to complete the installation. Available programs when using i-Launcher Item Description Firmware Upgrade You can download the firmware of your camera. PC Auto Backup i-Launcher provides a link for downloading the PC Auto Backup program when you connect the camera to a computer. You can send photos or videos that you captured with the camera to a PC wirelessly. Using programs on a PC 162 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC Using i-Launcher i-Launcher allows you update the firmware of the camera or the lens or provides a link to download the PC Auto Backup program. Requirements for Windows OS Item Requirements CPU Intel® Core™ 2 Duo 1.66 GHz or higher/ AMD Athlon X2 Dual-Core 2.2 GHz or higher RAM Minimum 512 MB RAM (1 GB or more recommended) OS* Windows 7, Windows 8 Hard disk capacity 250 MB or more (1 GB and above recommended) Others • CD-ROM drive • 1024X768 pixels, 16-bit color display compatible monitor (1280X1024 pixels, 32-bit color display recommended) • USB 2.0 port • nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT or higher/ ATI X1600 series or higher • Microsoft DirectX 9.0c or later * A 32-bit version of i-Launcher will be installed—even on 64-bit editions of Windows 7 and Windows 8. • The requirements on the following page are recommendations only. i-Launcher may not work properly even when the computer meets the requirements, depending on the condition of your computer. • If your computer does not meet the requirements, videos may not play correctly. The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage that results from using unqualified computers such as a computer you assembled yourself. Requirements for Mac OS Item Requirements OS Mac OS 10.5 or higher (except PowerPC) RAM Minimum 256 MB RAM (512 MB or more recommended) Hard disk capacity Minimum 110 MB Others USB 2.0 port, CD-ROM drive Opening i-Launcher On your computer, select Start ĺ All Programs ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher ĺ Samsung i-Launcher. Or, click Applications ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher on your Mac OS computer. 163 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC Downloading the firmware From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click Firmware Upgrade. For information about updating the firmware, refer to page 177. Downloading the PC Auto Backup program From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click PC Auto Backup. For information about installing the PC Auto Backup program, refer to page 134. Installing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 1 Insert Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM into your PC. 2 Select a language. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions. Using Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Photos captured by a camera are often transformed to JPEG formats and stored in the memory according to the settings of the camera at the time of shooting. RAW files are not transformed to JPEG formats and are stored in the memory without any changes. With Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, you can calibrate exposures, White Balances, tones, contrasts, and colors of photos. You can also edit JPEG or TIFF files as well as RAW files. For more information, refer to the program guide. Depending on your version of Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, you may not be able to open RAW files. In this case, update the program from the Adobe website. In Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, an image’s brightness, color and other effects may be displayed differently. This occurs because the original camera settings and options applied during image capture are removed, ready for it to be processed in Adobe Photoshop Lightroom. Chapter 7 Appendix Get information about error messages, camera maintenance, trouble shooting tips, specifications, and optional accessories. 165 Appendix When the following error messages appear, try these remedies. Error messages Suggested remedies Lens is locked The lens is locked. Rotate the lens counterclockwise. (p. 48) Card Error Turn off the camera, and then turn it on again. Remove the memory card and insert it again. Format the memory card. Low Battery Insert a charged battery or recharge the battery. No Image File Capture photos or insert a memory card that contains photos. Device disconnected. Network connection disconnected while photos are being transferred to supported devices. Re-select a supported device. File Error Delete the damaged file or contact a service center. Error messages Suggested remedies Memory Full Delete unnecessary files or insert a new memory card. Transfer failed. The camera has failed to send e-mails or files to other devices. Try sending again. Check the network connection and try again. Unable to capture a photo because folder and file number on the memory card reached the maximum values. Reset the folder number? File names do not match the DCF standard. Follow the on-screen instructions to reset the folder number. Error 00 Turn off your camera and remount the lens. If the message still appears, contact a service center. Error messages 166 Appendix Cleaning the camera Camera lens and display Use a brush to remove dust and wipe the lens gently with a soft cloth. If any dust remains, apply lens cleaning liquid to a piece of cleaning paper and wipe gently. Image sensor Depending on different shooting conditions, dust may appear in photos because the image sensor is exposed to the external environment. This problem is normal, and the exposure to dust occurs in everyday use of the camera. Avoid contact with the image sensor while using the blower. Camera body Wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. Never use benzene, thinners, or alcohol to clean the device. These solutions can damage the camera or cause it to malfunction. Maintaining the camera 167 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Using on beaches or shores Protect your camera from sand and dirt when you use it on beaches or in other similar areas. Your camera is not waterproof. Do not handle the battery, adapter, or memory card with wet hands. Operating the camera with wet hands may cause damage to your camera. Storing for extended period of time When you store the camera for an extended period, place it in a sealed container with an absorbent material, such as silica gel. Over time, unused batteries will discharge and must be recharged before use. The present date and time can be initialized when the camera is turned on after the camera and battery have been separated for a prolonged period. Using or storing the camera Inappropriate places to use or store the camera Avoid exposing the camera to very cold or very hot temperatures. Avoid using your camera in areas with extremely high humidity, or where the humidity changes drastically. Avoid exposing the camera to direct sunlight and storing it in hot, poorly ventilated areas, such as in a car during summer time. Protect your camera and the display from impact, rough handling, and excessive vibration to avoid serious damage. Avoid using or storing your camera in dusty, dirty, humid, or poorly ventilated areas to prevent damage to moving parts and internal components. Do not use your camera near fuels, combustibles, or flammable chemicals. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the camera or its accessories. Do not store the camera where there are mothballs. 168 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Using the camera with caution in humid environments When you transfer the camera from a cold environment to a warm one, condensation can form on the lens or internal components of the camera. In this situation, turn off the camera and wait for at least 1 hour. If condensation forms on the memory card, remove the memory card from the camera and wait until all moisture has evaporated before reinserting it. Other cautions Do not swing your camera by the strap. This may cause injury to yourself or others or damage to your camera. Do not paint your camera, as paint can clog moving parts and prevent proper operation. Turn off the camera when not using it. Your camera consists of delicate parts. Avoid impacts to the camera. Protect the display from external force by keeping it in the case when not in use. Protect the camera from scratches by keeping it away from sand, sharp implements, or loose change. Do not use the camera if the screen is cracked or broken. Broken glass or acrylic could cause injury to your hands and face. Take the camera to a Samsung service center to have it repaired. Never place cameras, batteries, chargers, or accessories near, on, or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Heat can deform or overheat these devices, which can cause a fire or explosion. Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight, as this may discolor the image sensor or cause it to malfunction. Protect your lens from fingerprints and scratches. Clean your lens with a soft, clean, debris-free lens cloth. The camera may turn off if impacted from the outside. This is to protect the memory card. Turn on the camera to use it again. While you use the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your camera’s lifespan or performance. When you use the camera in low temperatures, it may take some time to turn on, the color of the display may be changed temporarily, or afterimages may appear. These conditions are not malfunctions and they will correct themselves when the camera is returned to milder temperatures. Paint or metal on the outside of the camera may cause allergies, itchy skin, eczema, or swelling for people with sensitive skin. If you experience any of these symptoms, stop using the camera immediately and consult a doctor. Do not insert foreign objects into any of your camera’s compartments, slots, or access points. Damage due to improper use may not be covered by your warranty. Do not allow unqualified personnel to service the camera or attempt to service the camera yourself. Any damage that results from unqualified service is not covered by your warranty. 169 Appendix > Maintaining the camera About memory card Supported memory card This product supports microSD, microSDHC, or microSDXC memory cards. Memory card adapter Memory card To read data with a PC or memory card reader, insert the memory card into a memory card adapter. 170 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Memory card capacity The memory capacity may differ depending on shooting scenes or shooting conditions. These capacities are based on a 2 GB SD card. Size Quality Super Fine Fine Normal RAW RAW + S.Fine RAW + Fine RAW + Normal Photo 20.0M (5472X3648) 160 290 398 55 35 44 48 10.1M (3888X2592) 288 486 630 - 44 51 53 5.9M (2976X1984) 435 679 835 - 49 54 56 2.0M (1728X1152) 831 1,081 1,201 - 56 58 57 Burst 489 743 899 - - - - 16.9M (5472X3080) 186 332 450 - 37 46 50 7.8M (3712X2088) 355 577 730 - 48 52 55 4.9M (2944X1656) 497 752 908 - 51 55 56 2.1M (1920X1080) 1,546 2,804 3,847 - 60 62 63 13.3M (3648X3648) 228 398 529 - 40 48 52 7.0M (2640X2640) 385 616 771 - 48 53 55 4.0M (2000X2000) 566 829 981 - 52 56 57 1.1M (1024X1024) 2,779 4,690 6,085 - 62 63 64 171 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Cautions when using memory cards • Avoid memory cards to very cold or very hot temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can cause memory cards to malfunction. • Insert a memory card in the correct direction. Inserting a memory card in the wrong direction may damage your camera and memory card. • Do not use memory cards that have been formatted by other cameras or by a computer. Reformat the memory card with your camera. • Turn off the camera when you insert or remove the memory card. • Do not remove the memory card or turn off your camera while the lamp is blinking, as this may damage your data. • When the lifespan of a memory card has expired, you cannot store any more photos on the card. Use a new memory card. • Do not bend, drop, or subject memory cards to heavy impact or pressure. • Avoid using or storing memory cards near strong magnetic fields. • Avoid using or keeping memory cards in areas with high temperature, high humidity, or corrosive substances. Size Quality HQ Normal Video 1920X1080 (30 fps) Approx. 17' Approx. 19' 51" 1280X720 (30 fps) Approx. 23' 46" Approx. 29' 38" 640X480 (30 fps) Approx. 52' 57" Approx. 69' 43" For Sharing (30 fps) - Approx. 235' 48" • The figures above are measured without using the zoom function. • Available recording time may vary if you use the zoom. • Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time. • The maximum recording time is 29 minutes and 59 seconds per file. • The maximum playback time of For Sharing videos is 30 seconds per file. 172 Appendix > Maintaining the camera About the battery Use only Samsung-approved batteries. Battery specifications Item Description Model* B740AE/B740AC/B740AU/B740AK Type Lithium-ion battery Cell capacity 2,330 mAh Voltage 3.8 V Charging time** (When the battery is completely discharged) Approx. 270 min * The battery specifications or model may differ depending on your region. ** The figures above are based on when you use the provided USB cable and AC adapter. Charging the battery by connecting it to a computer may take longer. Prevent memory cards from making contact with liquids, dirt, or foreign substances. If dirty, wipe the memory card clean with a soft cloth before you insert the memory card in your camera. Do not allow liquids, dirt, or foreign substances to come in contact with memory cards or the memory card slot. Doing so may cause memory cards or the camera to malfunction. When you carry a memory card, use a case to protect the card from electrostatic discharges. Transfer important data to other media, such as a hard disk, CD, or DVD. When you use the camera for an extended period, the memory card may become warm. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. Use a memory card that meets the standard requirements. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. 173 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Personal injury or death can occur if the battery is handled carelessly or improperly. For your safety, follow these instructions for proper battery handling: The battery can ignite or explode if not handled properly. If you notice any deformities, cracks, or other abnormalities in the battery, immediately discontinue use of the battery and contact your manufacturer. Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommend battery chargers and charge the battery only by the method described in this user manual. Do not place the battery near heating devices or expose to excessively warm environments, such as the inside of an enclosed car in the summertime. Do not place the battery in a microwave oven. Avoid storing or using the battery in hot, humid places, such as spas or shower enclosures. Do not rest the device on flammable surfaces, such as bedding, carpets, or electric blankets for a prolonged period. When the device is switched on, do not leave it in any confined space for a prolonged period. Do not allow battery terminals to come in contact with metallic objects, such as necklaces, coins, keys, or watches. Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement batteries. Do not disassemble the battery or puncture it with any sharp object. Avoid exposing the battery to high pressure or crushing forces. Avoid exposing the battery to major impacts, such as dropping it from high places. Do not expose the battery to temperatures of 60 °C (140 °F) or above. Do not allow the battery to come in contact with moisture or liquids. Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, or the like. Disposal guidelines Dispose of the battery with care. Do not dispose of the battery in a fire. Disposal regulations may differ by country or region. Dispose of the battery in accordance with all local and federal regulations. Guidelines for charging the battery Charge the battery only by the method described in this user manual. The battery can ignite or explode if not charged properly. 174 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Battery life Shooting mode Average time / Number of photos Photos Approx. 325 min/Approx. 650 photos (When you attach a 9 mm lens and use the internal flash) Approx. 265 min/Approx. 530 photos (When you attach a 9-27 mm lens and use the external flash) Videos Approx. 190 min (Record videos at 1920X1080 resolution and 30 fps.) The figures above are based on the CIPA test standards. Your results may differ depending on your actual usage. Available shooting time differs depending on background, shooting interval, and use conditions. Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time. Low battery message When the battery has fully discharged, the battery icon will turn red and the "Low Battery" message will appear. Notes about using the battery Avoid exposing batteries to very cold or very hot temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can reduce the charging capacity of your batteries. When you use the camera for an extended period, the area around the battery chamber may become warm. This does not affect the normal use of the camera. Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock. In temperatures below 0 °C/32 °F, battery capacity and battery life may decrease. Battery capacity may decrease in low temperatures, but will return to normal in milder temperatures. Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended period. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious damage to your camera. Storing the camera for extended periods with the battery installed causes the battery to discharge. You may not be able to recharge a fully discharged battery. When you do not use the camera for an extended period (3 months or more), check the battery and recharge it regularly. If you let the battery discharge continually, its capacity and life may decrease, which can lead to a malfunction, fire, or explosion. 175 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Cautions about using the battery Protect batteries, chargers, and memory cards from damage. Prevent batteries from making contact with metal objects, as this can create a connection between the + and – terminals of your battery and lead to temporary or permanent battery damage and may cause a fire or electric shock. Notes about charging the battery If the status lamp is off, ensure that the battery is inserted correctly. If the camera is on while charging, the battery may not fully charge. Turn off the camera before charging the battery. Do not use your camera when you are charging the battery. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock. Let the battery charge for at least 10 minutes before turning on the camera. If you connect the camera to an external power source when the battery is depleted, using high energy-consuming functions will cause the camera to turn off. To use the camera normally, recharge the battery. If you reconnect the power cable when the battery is fully charged, the status lamp turns on for approximately 30 minutes. Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Charge the battery until the red status lamp turns off. If the status lamp blinks in red, reconnect the cable, or remove the battery and insert it again. If you charge the battery when the cable is overheated or the temperature is too high, the status lamp may blink in red. Charging will start when the battery cools down. Overcharging batteries may shorten battery life. After charging is finished, disconnect the cable from your camera. Do not bend or place heavy objects on the AC cable. Doing so may damage the cable. 176 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Notes about charging with a computer connected Use only the provided USB cable. The battery may not charge when: - you use a USB hub - other USB devices are connected to your computer - you connect the cable to the port on the front side of your computer - the USB port of your computer does not support the power output standard (5 V, 500 mA) Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care Never dispose of batteries in a fire. Follow all local regulations when you dispose of used batteries. Never place batteries or cameras on or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Batteries may explode when they are overheated. 177 Appendix Updating the firmware Connect the camera to the computer and update the firmware of the camera of the lens. You cannot run a firmware upgrade without a fully charged battery. Recharge the battery fully before running a firmware upgrade. If you update the firmware, user settings and values will be reset. (Date, time, language, and video out will not change.) Do not turn the camera off while the update is in progress. 1 Turn off the camera. 2 Connect your camera to the computer with the USB cable. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not work properly. 3 Turn on the camera. 4 On the computer, select i-Launcher ĺ Firmware Upgrade. 5 Follow the on-screen instructions to download the firmware to the camera. You can download the firmware of the camera or the lens. 6 Turn off the camera when the download completes. 7 Remove the USB cable. 8 Turn on the camera. 9 Press [m] ĺ q ĺ Device Information ĺ Software Update ĺ Body Firmware or Lens Firmware. 10 Select Yes from a pop-up window on the camera to update the firmware. 178 Appendix Before contacting a service center If you are having trouble with your device, try these troubleshooting solutions before contacting a service professional. When you leave your camera at a service center, be sure to also leave the other components that may have contributed to the malfunction, such as the memory card and battery. Situation Suggested remedies Cannot turn on the camera Ensure that the battery is inserted. Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly. Charge the battery. The power turns off suddenly Charge the battery. Your camera may be in Auto power off mode or the display turns off automatically. (p. 153) The camera may be turned off automatically to prevent the memory card from being damaged due to excessive heat. Turn on your camera again. The camera is losing battery power quickly The battery may lose power more quickly in low temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F). Keep the battery warm by putting it into your pocket. Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Recharge if needed. Batteries are consumable parts that must be replaced over time. Get a new battery if the battery life is diminishing quickly. Situation Suggested remedies Cannot capture photos There is no space on the memory card. Delete unnecessary files or insert a new card. Format the memory card. The memory card is defective. Get a new memory card. Ensure that the camera is switched on. Charge the battery. Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly. The camera freezes Remove the battery and insert it again. The camera heats up While using the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your camera’s lifespan or performance. The flash fires unexpectedly The flash may fire due to static electricity. The camera is not malfunctioning. The flash does not work The flash option may be set to Off. (p. 90) You cannot use the flash in some modes. The date and time are incorrect Set the date and time under the q menu. (p. 154) The display or buttons do not work Remove the battery and insert it again. 179 Appendix > Before contacting a service center Situation Suggested remedies The memory card has an error Turn off the camera, and then turn it on again. Remove the memory card, and then insert it again. Format the memory card. See "Cautions when using memory cards" for more details. (p. 171) Your TV or computer cannot display photos and videos that are stored on a microSDXC memory card microSDXC memory cards use the exFAT file system. Ensure that the external device is compatible with the exFAT file system before connecting the camera to the device. Your computer does not recognize a microSDXC memory card microSDXC memory cards use the exFAT file system. To use microSDXC memory cards on a Windows XP computer, download and update the exFAT file system driver from the Microsoft website. Cannot display files If you change the name of a file, your camera may not play the file (the name of the file should meet the DCF standard). If you encounter this situation, display files on your computer. Situation Suggested remedies The photo is blurry Ensure that the focus option you set is suitable for the kind of shot you are capturing. Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. Ensure that the lens is clean. If not, clean the lens. (p. 166) The colors in the photo do not match the actual scene An incorrect White Balance can create unrealistic color. Select the proper White Balance option to suit the light source. (p. 72) The photo is too bright or too dark Your photo is overexposed or underexposed. Adjust the aperture value or the shutter speed. Adjust the ISO sensitivity. (p. 71) Turn the flash off or on. (p. 90) Adjust the exposure value. (p. 97) Photos are distorted This camera can have minute distortion when using a wide-angle lens that enables shooting with a wide angle of view. This is normal, and does not cause malfunction. Horizontal lines appear on the photo This may occur when the subject is exposed to a fluorescent or mercury-vapor light source. Select a slow shutter speed or set the shooting mode to Auto. 180 Appendix > Before contacting a service center Situation Suggested remedies Playback screen does not appear on the connected external device Ensure that HDMI cable is properly connected to the external monitor. Ensure that the memory card is properly recorded. Your computer does not recognize your camera Ensure that the USB cable is connected correctly. Ensure that the camera is switched on. Ensure that you are using a supported operating system. Your computer disconnects the camera while transferring files The file transfer may be interrupted by static electricity. Disconnect the USB cable and connect it again. i-Launcher is not functioning properly End i-Launcher and restart the program. Depending on your computer's specifications and environment, the program may not launch automatically. In this case, click Start ĺ All Programs ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher ĺ Samsung i-Launcher on your Windows computer. (For Windows 8, open Start screen, and then select All apps ĺ Samsung i-Launcher.) Or, click Applications ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher on your Mac OS computer. Situation Suggested remedies Auto Focus does not work Subject is not in focus. When the subject is outside the AF area, shoot by moving the subject inside the AF area and half-pressing [Shutter]. Subject is too close. Step back from the subject and shoot. Lens does not work Ensure that the lens is properly mounted. Remove the lens from the camera and remount it. External flash does not work Ensure that the external flash is properly mounted on the external flash port. The date & time settings screen appears when you power on the camera Set the date and time again. This screen appears when the camera’s internal power source is completely discharged. Insert a fully charged battery and wait at least 72 hours in power off status for the internal power source to be recharged. 181 Appendix Camera specifications Image Sensor Type BSI CMOS Sensor size 13.2 X 8.8 mm Effective pixels Approx. 20.5 mega-pixels Total pixels Approx. 20.9 mega-pixels Color filter RGB primary color filter Lens Mount Type Samsung NX-M Mount Available lens Samsung NX-M Lenses Image Stabilization Type Lens shift (depends on lens) Mode Off/Mode 1/Mode 2 Distortion Correct Off/On (depends on lens) i-Function Supported (depends on lens) Display Type TFT LCD with Touch Panel (C-type Touch Control Enabled) Size 3.0" (Approx. 75.2 mm) Resolution HVGA (320X480) 460.8 k dots Field of view Approx. 100 % Angle Flip up: 180° User display Grid Line, Icons, Histogram, Level gauge Focusing Type Contrast AF Focusing point Selection: 1 point (Free selection) Multi: Normal 21 points, Close up 35 points Face detection: Max. 10 faces Object tracking AF Mode Single AF, Continuous AF, Manual Focus, Touch AF & Shutter AF Assist Lamp Green LED 182 Appendix > Camera specifications Shutter Type Electronic shutter Speed • Auto: 1/16,000–1/4 sec. • Manual: 1/16,000–30 sec. (1/3 EV Step) • Bulb (time limit: 4 min.) Exposure Metering system TTL 221 (17X13) Block segment Metering: Multi, Center-weighted, Spot Metering range: EV 0–18 (ISO160 · 9 mm, F3.5) Compensation ±3 EV (1/3 EV Step) AE lock Custom button ISO equivalent Auto, 160, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400, 12800 (1 or 1/3 EV Step) * Auto ISO settings are selectable up to ISO 3200. You can select ISO 100 and 25600. Drive Mode Mode Single, Continuous, Burst (5M only), Timer, Bracket (Auto Exposure, White Balance, Picture Wizard, Depth) Continuous shooting 6 fps * Maximum shooting speed is 6 frames per second. It will slow down after approx. JPEG 11 shots, RAW 4 shots. (May vary depending on the spec of memory card.) Bracket shooting Auto exposure bracketing (±3 EV), White Balance bracketing, Picture Wizard bracketing, Depth bracketing Self-timer 2–30 sec. (1 second interval) Shutter release via Micro USB port (optional) Flash Type Built-in flash Mode Smart Flash, Auto, Auto Red-eye, Fill in, Fill-in Red, 1st Curtain, 2nd Curtain, Off Guide number 4.9 (based on ISO 160, 24 mm), 4 (based on ISO 100, 24 mm) Angle of view 24 mm (35 mm film equivalent) Sync speed Less than 1/200 sec. Flash EV -2–+2 EV (1/2 EV Step) External flash Samsung NX mini external flash available (SEF7A) (optional) Guide number: 8 (Based on ISO 160, 24 mm), 7 (Based on ISO 100, 24 mm) Sync terminal External flash port 183 Appendix > Camera specifications White Balance Mode Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent White, Fluorescent NW, Fluorescent Daylight, Tungsten, Flash WB, Custom Set, Color Temperature (Manual) Micro adjustment Amber/Blue/Green/Magenta 7 steps respectively Dynamic Range Off/Smart Range+/HDR Picture Wizard Mode Standard, Vivid, Portrait, Landscape, Forest, Retro, Cool, Calm, Classic, Custom1, Custom2, Custom3 Parameter Color, Saturation, Sharpness, Contrast Shooting Mode Auto, Smart, Program, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, Manual Smart mode Beauty Face, Best Face, Continuous Shot, Kids Shot, Landscape, Macro, Food, Parties and Indoors, Action Freeze, Rich Tones, Panorama, Waterfall, Silhouette, Sunset, Night, Fireworks, Light Trace Smart filter Vignetting, Miniature, Sketch, Fish Eye Size JPEG (3:2): 20.0M (5472X3648), 10.1M (3888X2592), 5.9M (2976X1984), 5.0M (2736X1824) (Burst mode only), 2.0M (1728X1152) JPEG (16:9): 16.9M (5472X3080), 7.8M (3712X2088), 4.9M (2944X1656), 2.1M (1920X1080) JPEG (1:1): 13.3M (3648X3648), 7.0M (2640X2640), 4.0M (2000X2000), 1.1M (1024X1024) RAW: 20.0M (5472X3648) Quality Super Fine, Fine, Normal, RAW, RAW + S.Fine, RAW + Fine, RAW + Normal RAW standard SRW (ver.3.0.0) Color space sRGB, Adobe RGB Video Type MP4 (H.264) Format Movie: H.264, Sound: AAC Movie AE mode Program, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, Manual Movie clip Audio on/off (Shooting time: Max. 29' 59'') Smart filter Vignetting, Miniature, Sketch, Fish Eye 184 Appendix > Camera specifications Size 1920X1080, 1280X720, 640X480, 320X240 (For Sharing) Frame rate 30 fps Multi Motion x0.25 (640X480, 320X240 only), x1, x5, x10, x20 Quality HQ, Normal Sound Mono Edit Still image capture, Time trimming Playback Type Single image, Thumbnails (15/28), Slide show, Movie Edit Smart Filter, Crop, Resize, Rotate, Face Retouch, Brightness, Contrast, Auto adjustment, Saturation, RGB adjustment, Color Temperature, Exposure Smart filter Vignetting, Miniature, Soft Focus, Sketch, Fish Eye, Classic, Retro, Oil Painting, Cartoon, Ink Painting, Cross Filter, Zooming Shot Storage Media External memory (optional)*: microSD card (2 GB guaranteed), microSDHC card (up to 32 GB guaranteed), microSDXC card (up to 64 GB guaranteed) * Class 6 and above recommended File format RAW (SRW (ver.3.0.0)), JPEG (EXIF 2.3), MP4 (Movie), DCF Wireless network Type IEEE 802.11b/g/n Function AutoShare, Remote Viewfinder, MobileLink, Photo Beam, Auto Backup, Samsung Link, SNS & Cloud, Email, Baby Monitor, Group Share NFC Yes Interface Digital output USB 2.0 (micro USB jack) Video output NTSC, PAL (selectable) HDMI External release Yes DC power input DC 5.0 V, 0.55 A via micro USB 185 Appendix > Camera specifications Power Source Type Rechargeable battery: B740AE/B740AC/B740AU/ B740AK (2,330 mAh, 3.8 V) * The battery specifications or model may differ depending on your region. Dimensions (W X H X D) 110.4 X 61.9 X 22.5 mm Weight 158 g (without battery and memory card) Operating Temperature 0–40 °C Operating Humidity 5–85 % Software i-Launcher, Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 5 * Specifications may change without notice to improve performance. * Other brands and products names are trademarks of respective owners. 186 Appendix Glossary AP (Access Point) An access point is a device that allows wireless devices to connect to a wired network. Ad-Hoc network An ad-hoc network is a temporary connection for sharing files or an internet connection and between computers and devices. AdobeRGB Adobe RGB is used for commercial printing and has a larger color range than sRGB. Its wider range of colors helps you to easily edit photos on a computer. AEB (Auto Exposure Bracket) This feature automatically captures several images at different exposures to help you capture a properly-exposed image. AEL (Auto Exposure Lock) These features help you lock the exposure on which you want to calculate the exposure. AF (Auto Focus) A system that automatically focuses the camera lens on the subject. Your camera uses the contrast to focus automatically. AMOLED (Active-matrix organic light-emitting diode)/ LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) AMOLED is a visual display that is very thin and light, as it does not need backlighting. LCD is a visual display commonly used in consumer electronics. This display needs a separate backlight, such as CCFL or LED, to reproduce colors. Aperture The aperture controls the amount of light that reaches the camera’s sensor. 187 Appendix > Glossary Composition Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually, abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition. DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) A specification to define a file format and file system for digital cameras created by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA). Depth of field The distance between the nearest and farthest points that can be acceptably focused in a photograph. Depth of field varies with lens aperture, focal length, and distance from the camera to the subject. Selecting a smaller aperture, for example, will increase the depth of field and blur the background of a composition. Camera shake (Blur) If the camera is moved while the shutter is open, the entire image may appear blurred. This occurs more often when the shutter speed is slow. Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, or using a faster shutter speed. Alternatively, use a tripod or the OIS function to stabilize the camera. Cloud Computing Cloud computing is a technology that allows you to store data on remote servers and to use them from a device with internet access. Color space The range of colors that the camera can see. Color temperature Color Temperature is a measurement in degrees Kelvin (K) that indicates the hue of a specific type of light source. As the color temperature increases, the color of the light source has a more bluish quality. As the color temperature decreases, the color of the light source has a more reddish quality. At 5,500 degrees Kelvin, the color of the light source is similar to the sun at midday. 188 Appendix > Glossary Flash A speed light that helps to create adequate exposure in low-light conditions. Focal length The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point (in millimeters). Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject is magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view. Histogram A graphical representation of the brightness of an image. The horizontal axis represents the brightness and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels. High points at the left (too dark) and right (too bright) on the histogram indicate a photo that is improperly exposed. H.264/MPEG-4 A high-compression video format established by international standard organizations ISO-IEC and ITU-T. This codec is capable of providing good video quality at low bit rates developed by the Joint Video Team (JVT). EV (Exposure Value) All the combinations of the camera’s shutter speed and lens aperture that result in the same exposure. EV Compensation This feature allows you to quickly adjust the exposure value measured by the camera, in limited increments, to improve the exposure of your photos. Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format) A specification to define an image file format for digital cameras created by the Japan Electronic Industries Development Association (JEIDA). Exposure The amount of light allowed to reach the camera’s sensor. Exposure is controlled by a combination of the shutter speed, the aperture value, and ISO sensitivity. 189 Appendix > Glossary Metering The metering refers to the way in which the camera measures the quantity of light to set the exposure. MF (Manual Focus) A system that manually focuses the camera lens on the subject. You can use the focus ring to focus on a subject. MJPEG (Motion JPEG) A video format which is compressed as a JPEG image. Image sensor The physical part of a digital camera that contains a photosite for each pixel in the image. Each photosite records the brightness of the light that strikes it during an exposure. Common sensor types are CCD (Chargecoupled Device) and CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor). IP (Internet protocol) address An IP address is a unique number that is assigned to every device that is connected to the internet. ISO sensitivity The sensitivity of the camera to light, based on the equivalent film speed used in a film camera. At higher ISO sensitivity settings, the camera uses a higher shutter speed, which can reduce blur caused by camera shake and low light. However, images with high sensitivity are more susceptible to noise. JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) A lossy method of compression for digital images. JPEG images are compressed to reduce their overall file size with minimal deterioration of the image resolution. 190 Appendix > Glossary PAL (Phase Alternate Line) A video color encoding standard used in numerous countries throughout Africa, Asia, Europe, and the Middle East. Quality An expression of the rate of compression used in a digital image. Higher quality images have a lower rate of compression, which usually results in a larger file size. RAW (CCD raw data) The original, unprocessed data, collected directly from the camera’s image sensor. White Balance, contrast, saturation, sharpness, and other data can be manipulated with editing software before the image is compressed into a standard file format. Resolution The number of pixels present in a digital image. High resolution images contain more pixels and typically show more detail than low resolution images. Noise Misinterpreted pixels in a digital image that may appear as misplaced or random, bright pixels. Noise usually occurs when photos are shot with a high sensitivity or when a sensitivity is automatically set in a dark place. NFC (Near Field Communication) NFC is a set of standards for radio communication at very close proximity. You can use NFC-enabled devices to activate features or exchange data with other devices. NTSC (National Television System Committee) A video color encoding standard used most commonly in Japan, North America, the Philippines, South America, South Korea, and Taiwan. Optical zoom This is a general zoom which can enlarge images with a lens and does not deteriorate quality of images. 191 Appendix > Glossary Shutter speed Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the shutter, and it is an important factor in the brightness of a photo, as it controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture before it reaches the image sensor. A fast shutter speed allows less time to let light in and the photo becomes darker and more easily freezes subjects in motion. sRGB (Standard RGB) International standard of color space established by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). This is defined from color space for PC monitors and is also used as the standard color space for Exif. Vignetting A reduction of an image’s brightness or saturation at the periphery (outer edges) compared to the center of the image. Vignetting can draw interest to subjects positioned in the center of an image. White Balance (Color balance) An adjustment of the intensities of colors (typically the primary colors red, green, and blue), in an image. The goal of adjusting the White Balance, or color balance, is to correctly render the colors in an image. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi is a technology that allows electronic devices to exchange data wirelessly over a network. WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) WPS is a technology that secures wireless home networks. 192 Appendix Optional accessories You can purchase the following optional items: Lens, External flash, Shutter release (micro USB type), Rechargeable battery, Battery charger, Camera bag, Camera case, Memory card, Filter, USB cable, HDMI cable, Strap To locate the type, image and availability of accessories, visit the Samsung website. Before purchasing accessories, make sure they are compatible with your camera. GPS10 and EM10 are not compatible with this camera. Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Samsung is not responsible for damage caused by using another manufacturer’s accessories. The accessories supplied with each product may be different in type and quantity. 193 Appendix A Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 163 Aperture 15, 19 Auto Backup 134 Auto focus 75 B Baby Monitor 132 Battery Caution 172 Charging 35 Insert 32 Best Face mode 57 Bracketing 87 C Camera Connecting as removable disk 158 Connecting to PC 158 Disconnecting (Windows) 159 Layout 28 Camera specifications 181 Charging 35 Color space 148 D Date & Time 154 Depth of Field (DOF) 16, 20 DIRECT LINK 30 Display brightness 153 Display type 46 Drive 85 E Enlarging 107 Exposure Value (EV) 15, 97 F Fader 101 Files Deleting 106 Photo type 70 Protecting 105 Video type 100 Flash Flash options 90 Guide number 25 Intensity 91 F-number 15 Focal length 20 I Icons Playback mode 45 Shooting mode 43 i-Launcher 162 Image adjustment Adjusting photos 114 Retouching faces 115 ISO sensitivity 71 L Lenses Layout 47 Locking 48 Markings 49 Unlocking 48 M Maintenance 166 Memory card Caution 169 Insert 32 Metering 92 MobileLink 126 Index 194 Appendix > Index N NFC (Tag & Go) 123 O One touch shot 82 Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) 84 Optional accessories Attach the mount adapter 52 Connect the flash 51 Flash layout 50 Mount adapter layout 52 P Panorama mode 58 Photos Editing 112 Enlarging 107 Shooting options 69 Viewing on camera 103 Picture Wizard 74 Posture 13 Power save mode 153 R Red-eye effect 91 Remote Viewfinder 130 Resolution Playback mode 113 Shooting mode (Movie) 99 Shooting mode (Photo) 69 Retouching faces 115 Rotating 113 Rule of thirds 23 S Samsung Link 142 Service center 178 Settings 153 Shooting modes Aperture Priority 61 Auto 54 Manual 63 Program 59 Recording 65 Shutter Priority 62 Smart 56 Shutter speed 17, 19 Slide show 107 Smart filter Playback mode 116 Shooting mode 96 Smart panel 40 T Thumbnails 103 Timer 87 Touch AF 81 Touch screen 38 Tracking AF 81 Transferring files Mac 159 Windows 158 TV 157 U Unpacking 27 V Video Out 154 Videos Capturing 111 Options 99 Recording 65 Viewing 109 W White balance 72 Wireless network 118 195 Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories, or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product or their local government office for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. This product is RoHS compliant. Correct disposal of batteries in this product (Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the battery, manual, or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd, or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium, or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system. CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website: www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or call, (877) 278 - 0799 Appendix 196 Appendix FCC notice Caution: Any changes or modifications in construction of this device which are not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: - Reorientate, or relocate, the receiving antenna. - Increase the distance between the equipment and receiver. - Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. - Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device and its antenna must not be colocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Caution: Any changes or modifications to the equipment not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void user’s authority to operate the equipment. IC: 649E-EVNXF1 FCC ID: A3L-EVNXF1 197 33258/SDPPI/2014 1258 TRC/SS/2014/39 TA-2013/2281 APPROVED No.: ESD-1408453C Model : EV-NXF1 Year of Manufacture : 2014 CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. This equipment may be operated in all EU countries. In France, this equipment may only be used indoors. Declaration of Conformity Trade Name : Samsung Electronics America, Inc. Model No. : Samsung EV-NXF1 Responsible Party: Samsung Electronics America, Inc. Address : 85 Challenger Road, Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660 Telephone No.: 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) This device complies with Industry Canada License-Exempt RSS standard (S) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Complies with IDA Standards DA100790 Please refer to the warranty that came with your product or visit our website www.samsung.com for after-sales service or inquiries. Mode d’emploi FRE Ce mode d’emploi propose des instructions détaillées pour l’utilisation de l’appareil photo. Veuille le lire attentivement. 1 Informations sur les droits d’auteur • Les caractéristiques de l’appareil photo ou le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis, suite à l’évolution des fonctions de l’appareil photo. • La distribution ou la réutilisation du contenu de ce mode d’emploi, même partielle, sans autorisation préalable, est interdite. • Nous vous recommandons d’utiliser votre appareil photo dans le pays où vous l’avez acheté. • Utilisez l’appareil photo de manière responsable et veillez à respecter toutes les législations et règlementations en vigueur. PlanetFirst représente l’engagement de Samsung Electronics à l’égard du développement durable et de la responsabilité sociale, qui se traduit par des décisions et des activités commerciales sous une optique écologique. • Microsoft Windows et le logo Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation. • Mac et Apple App Store sont des marques déposées d’Apple Corporation. • Google Play Store est une marque déposée de Google, Inc. • Adobe, le logo Adobe, Photoshop et Lightroom sont des marques déposées ou des marques d’Adobe Systems Incorporated aux Etats-Unis et / ou dans d’autres pays. • microSD™, microSDHC™ et microSDXC™ sont des marques déposées de la SD Association. • HDMI, le logo HDMI et l’expression « High Definition Multimedia Interface » sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées de HDMI Licensing LLC. • Wi-Fi®, le logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. • Les marques commerciales mentionnées dans ce mode d’emploi appartiennent à leurs propriétaires respectifs. 2 Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité Tachez de ne pas éblouir les sujets photographiés. N’utilisez pas le flash à proximité (à moins d’1 mètre) de personnes ou d’animaux. L’utilisation du flash trop près des yeux du sujet peut provoquer des lésions temporaires ou permanentes. Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo à la portée d’enfants en bas âge ou d’animaux domestiques. Tenez l’appareil photo, ses pièces et ses accessoires, hors de portée des enfants en bas âge et des animaux. L’ingestion de petites pièces peut provoquer l’étouffement ou des blessures graves. Les parties détachables et les accessoires représentent également un danger. Evitez toute exposition prolongée de l’appareil photo à la lumière directe du soleil ou à des températures élevées. Une exposition prolongée à la lumière directe du soleil ou à des températures très élevées peut endommager de manière permanente les composants internes de l’appareil photo. Evitez de couvrir l’appareil photo ou le chargeur avec des couvertures ou des vêtements. L’appareil photo risque de surchauffer, de se déformer ou de prendre feu. Ne manipulez pas le cordon d’alimentation ou le chargeur lors d’un orage. Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique. Respectez toujours les consignes et conseils d’utilisation suivants afin de prévenir toute situation dangereuse et de garantir un fonctionnement optimal de l’appareil photo. Attention—situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser d’autres personnes Ne démontez pas ou n’essayez pas de réparer vous-même l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez endommager l’appareil photo et vous exposer à un risque de choc électrique. N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de gaz ou de liquides inflammables ou explosifs. Un départ d’incendie ou une explosion risque de se produire. N’introduisez pas de matériaux inflammables dans l’appareil photo ou ne stockez pas de tels matériaux à proximité de l’appareil photo. Vous risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo avec les mains mouillées. Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique. 3 Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité Si du liquide ou des corps étrangers pénètrent dans l’appareil photo, déconnectez toutes les sources d’alimentation comme la batterie ou le chargeur, puis contactez le centre de service après-vente de Samsung. Respectez toutes les réglementations limitant l’utilisation des appareils photo dans certaines zones. • Evitez toute interférence avec d’autres appareils électroniques. • Eteignez l’appareil photo lorsque vous voyagez en avion. Cet appareil photo peut provoquer des interférences avec les équipements de navigation aérienne. Respectez l’ensemble des réglementations aériennes et éteignez l’appareil photo lorsque vous y êtes invité par le personnel navigant. • Eteignez l’appareil photo à proximité de tout équipement médical. Cet appareil photo peut créer des interférences avec les équipements médicaux des hôpitaux ou des établissements de santé. Respectez l’ensemble des réglementations, avertissements affichés et recommandations du personnel médical. Evitez toute interférence avec les stimulateurs cardiaques. Maintenez l’appareil photo à bonne distance des stimulateurs cardiaques pour éviter toute interférence, comme recommandé par le fabricant et les groupes de recherche. Si vous avez une quelconque raison de suspecter que l’appareil photo provoque des interférences avec un stimulateur cardiaque ou tout autre appareil médical, éteignez-le immédiatement et contactez le fabricant du stimulateur cardiaque ou de l’appareil médical pour en savoir plus. Attention—situations susceptibles d’endommager l’appareil photo ou d’autres équipements Si vous rangez l’appareil photo sans l’utiliser pour une période de temps prolongée, retirez d’abord la batterie. Les batteries peuvent fuir ou se détériorer avec le temps, risquant d’endommager gravement l’appareil photo. Utilisez uniquement des batteries de remplacement lithiumion originales recommandées par le fabricant. N’endommagez pas ou ne chauffez pas la batterie. Les batteries non homologuées, endommagées ou ayant été exposées à la chaleur sont à même de produire une flamme ou une blessure. Utilisez uniquement des batteries, des chargeurs et des accessoires homologués par Samsung. • L’utilisation de batteries, de chargeurs, de câbles ou d’accessoires non homologués peut endommager l’appareil photo, provoquer leur éclatement ou causer des blessures. • Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommage ou blessure résultant d’une utilisation inappropriée de batteries, chargeurs, câbles ou accessoires. Utilisez la batterie prévue uniquement pour l’appareil photo. Une mauvaise utilisation de celle-ci risque de produire une flamme ou une décharge électrique. 4 Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité Ne touchez pas le flash en cours de déclenchement. Le flash est très chaud lorsqu’il se déclenche et peut provoquer des brûlures. Lorsque vous utilisez le chargeur secteur, éteignez l’appareil photo avant de couper l’alimentation du chargeur secteur. Ne pas suivre ces instructions peut produire des flammes ou une électrocution. Débranchez le chargeur de la prise murale lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Ne pas suivre ces instructions peut produire des flammes ou une électrocution. N’utilisez jamais de fiches et de cordons d’alimentation endommagés ou de prises électriques mal fixées lorsque vous rechargez la batterie. Vous risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. Le chargeur secteur ne doit jamais entrer en contact avec les bornes +/- de la batterie. Vous risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo tomber ou subir des chocs. Cela peut endommager l’écran ou des composants, tant externes qu’internes. Effectuez les branchements des cordons, des adaptateurs et l’insertion des batteries et des cartes mémoire avec précaution. Enfoncer les cordons en forçant ou sans précaution et brancher les câbles ou insérer les batteries et les cartes mémoire de manière incorrecte peut endommager les ports, les prises et les accessoires. Evitez tout contact des cartes mémoire avec l’étui de l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager ou d’effacer les données stockées sur la carte. N’utilisez jamais de batterie ou de carte mémoire endommagée. Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique, d’endommager l’appareil photo ou de provoquer une flamme. Ne soumettez ou n’approchez pas l’appareil photo de champs magnétiques. Cela risque d’entraîner un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil photo. N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo si l’écran est endommagé. Si les parties en verre ou en acrylique sont brisées, apportez l’appareil photo dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung afin de la faire réparer. 5 Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité Vérifiez que l’appareil photo fonctionne correctement avant de l’utiliser. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de fichiers ou de dégâts résultant d’un fonctionnement incorrect ou d’une mauvaise utilisation de l’appareil photo. Vous devez brancher la fiche micro-USB du câble USB sur l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. Ne jamais exposer l’objectif aux rayons directs du soleil. Vous risquez de décolorer le capteur d’images ou d’entraîner des dysfonctionnements. Si l’appareil photo surchauffe, retirez la batterie jusqu’à ce qu’elle refroidisse. • Lors d’un usage prolongé, la batterie peut chauffer et augmenter la température interne de l’appareil photo. Si l’appareil photo ne fonctionne plus, retirez la batterie et laissez-lui le temps de refroidir. • Des températures internes élevées peuvent entraîner l’apparition de parasites sur vos photos. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas les performances globales de l’appareil photo. Evitez toute interférence avec d’autres appareils électroniques. Votre appareil photo émet des signaux de radiofréquences (RF) qui risquent d’interférer avec les équipements électroniques non blindés ou blindés de façon incorrecte, comme les stimulateurs cardiaques, les prothèses auditives et tout autre appareil électronique, que ce soit dans les bâtiments ou les véhicules. Consultez les fabricants de vos appareils électroniques pour résoudre tout problème d’interférence. Pour éviter toute interférence indésirable, utilisez uniquement des appareils ou accessoires approuvés par Samsung. Utilisez l’appareil photo en position normale. Evitez tout contact avec l’antenne interne de l’appareil photo. Transfert des données et responsabilités • Les données transférées via un réseau local sans fil pourraient être divulguées. Evitez donc de transférer des données sensibles dans des endroits publics ou via des réseaux ouverts. • Le fabricant de l’appareil photo ne peut être tenu responsable des transferts de données enfreignant les droits d’auteur, les législations sur les marques commerciales et la propriété intellectuelle ou les règlements concernant les outrages aux bonnes mœurs. 6 Icônes utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi Icône Fonction Informations complémentaires Mises en garde et précautions [ ] Touches de l’appareil photo. Par exemple, [Déclencheur] désigne la touche du déclencheur/obturateur. ( ) Numéro de page où se trouve l’information correspondante ĺ Séquence d’options ou de menus à sélectionner pour accomplir une procédure ; par exemple : sélectionnez b ĺ Qualité (signifie que vous devez sélectionner b, puis Qualité). * Annotation Ce mode d’emploi est basé sur les objectifs NX-M. Lorsque vous fixez des objectifs NX à l’aide de l’adaptateur de montage, il est possible que certaines options ou fonctions de prises de vue ne soient pas prises en charge. 7 Table des matières Chapitre 1 Mon appareil photo Mise en route ............................................................................................... 27 Contenu du coffret ................................................................................................... 27 Présentation de l’appareil photo ............................................................. 28 Utilisation de la touche DIRECT LINK ................................................................. 30 Configuration de la touche DIRECT LINK ............................................................ 30 Utilisation de l’écran ................................................................................................. 31 Utilisation du mode Autoportrait .......................................................................... 31 Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire .................................... 32 Retrait de la batterie et de la carte mémoire................................................... 34 Utilisation de l’adaptateur de carte mémoire ................................................. 34 Mise en charge de la batterie et mise sous tension de l’appareil photo ........................................................................................... 35 Chargement de la batterie ..................................................................................... 35 Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo ............................................................... 35 Configuration initiale ................................................................................. 36 Sélection de fonctions (options) .............................................................. 38 Sélection à l’aide des touches............................................................................... 38 Sélection à l’aide de l’écran tactile ...................................................................... 38 Utilisation de l’option m .................................................................................. 39 Ex. : définir le format photo en mode P .............................................................. 39 Utilisation du panneau intelligent ...................................................................... 40 Ex. : régler la valeur d’exposition en mode P ..................................................... 40 Sélection d’un mode .................................................................................. 41 Accès à l’écran Mode ................................................................................................ 41 Description des modes ........................................................................................... 41 Conseils Concepts de photographie Postures pour les prises de vue ................................................................ 13 Prise en main de l’appareil photo ........................................................................... 13 Photographie en position debout .......................................................................... 14 Photographie en position accroupie ..................................................................... 14 Ouverture ..................................................................................................... 15 Valeur d’ouverture et profondeur de champ ...................................................... 16 Vitesse d’obturation.................................................................................... 17 Sensibilité ISO .............................................................................................. 18 Contrôle de l’exposition par le réglage de l’ouverture, de la vitesse d’obturation et de la sensibilité ISO ................................. 19 Corrélation entre la longueur de focale, l’angle et la perspective .... 20 Profondeur de champ ................................................................................ 20 Quels sont les éléments qui contrôlent les effets hors-mise au point ? .... 21 Aperçu de la profondeur de champ ....................................................................... 22 Composition ................................................................................................. 23 Règle des tiers ................................................................................................................ 23 Photos avec deux sujets ............................................................................................. 24 Flash ............................................................................................................... 25 Nombre guide du flash ............................................................................................... 25 8 Table des matières Icônes affichées à l’écran ........................................................................... 43 En mode Prise de vue .............................................................................................. 43 Prise de photos ............................................................................................................. 43 Enregistrement de vidéos ......................................................................................... 44 A propos de l’indicateur de niveau ....................................................................... 44 En mode Lecture ....................................................................................................... 45 Affichage de photos ................................................................................................... 45 Lecture de vidéos ........................................................................................................ 45 Modification des informations affichées .......................................................... 46 Objectifs ........................................................................................................ 47 Présentation de l’objectif ........................................................................................ 47 Verrouillage et déverrouillage de l’objectif ........................................................ 48 Marquages de l’objectif ........................................................................................... 49 Accessoires ................................................................................................... 50 Présentation du flash externe ............................................................................... 50 Fixation du flash externe ........................................................................................... 51 Disposition de la bague d’adaptation ............................................................... 52 Montage de la bague d’adaptation ...................................................................... 52 Retrait de la bague d’adaptation ........................................................................... 53 Modes de prise de vue ............................................................................... 54 Mode Automatique .................................................................................................. 54 Mode intelligent ........................................................................................................ 56 Utilisation du mode Beauté ..................................................................................... 56 Utilisation du mode Meilleure photo ................................................................... 57 Prise de photos panoramiques ............................................................................... 58 Mode Programme ..................................................................................................... 59 Changement de programme .................................................................................. 60 Vitesse obturation minimum ................................................................................... 60 Mode Priorité ouverture ......................................................................................... 61 Mode Priorité Vitesse ............................................................................................... 62 Mode Manuel .............................................................................................................. 63 Utilisation du mode d’exposition ........................................................................... 63 Utilisation de la fonction Bulb ................................................................................. 64 Enregistrement d’une vidéo .................................................................................. 65 Fonctions disponibles en mode Prise de vue ................................................. 66 Chapitre 2 Fonctions de prise de vue Format et résolution ................................................................................... 69 Format photo .............................................................................................................. 69 Qualité ........................................................................................................................... 70 Sensibilité ISO .............................................................................................. 71 Balance des blancs ...................................................................................... 72 Personnalisation des options de préréglage de la balance des blancs .... 73 Assistant photo (styles de photo) ............................................................ 74 9 Table des matières Mode AF ........................................................................................................ 75 AF unique ..................................................................................................................... 75 AF continu .................................................................................................................... 76 Mise au point manuelle .......................................................................................... 76 Zone AF ......................................................................................................... 77 Mise au point sélection ........................................................................................... 77 Mise au point multiple ............................................................................................ 78 Détection des visages ................................................................................ 79 Normale ........................................................................................................................ 79 Sourire ........................................................................................................................... 80 Clin d’œil ....................................................................................................................... 80 Mise au point tactile ................................................................................... 81 Mise au point tactile ................................................................................................. 81 Point AF ......................................................................................................................... 81 Mise au point avec suivi .......................................................................................... 81 Déclenchement par sélection .............................................................................. 82 Aide mise au point manuelle .................................................................... 83 Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) .................................................... 84 Prise de vue (type) ...................................................................................... 85 Unique ........................................................................................................................... 85 Normal continu .......................................................................................................... 86 Mode Rafale ................................................................................................................ 86 Retardateur .................................................................................................................. 87 Bracketing Exposition automatique (BKT AE) ................................................. 87 Bracketing Balance des blancs (BKT NB) ........................................................... 88 Bracketing Assistant photo (A. photo Bracketing) ........................................ 88 Bracketing de profondeur de champ ................................................................ 89 Flash ............................................................................................................... 90 Réduction de l’effet yeux rouges ......................................................................... 91 Réglage de l’intensité du flash.............................................................................. 91 Mesure de l’exposition ............................................................................... 92 Multiple ......................................................................................................................... 92 Centrée .......................................................................................................................... 93 Sélective ....................................................................................................................... 93 Mesure de la valeur d’exposition de la zone de mise au point ................. 94 Plage dynamique ........................................................................................ 95 Filtre intelligent ........................................................................................... 96 Compensation de l’exposition .................................................................. 97 Verrouillage de l’exposition ...................................................................... 98 Fonctions vidéo ........................................................................................... 99 Format vidéo ............................................................................................................... 99 Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur NTSC ........................................................................ 99 Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur PAL ........................................................................... 99 Qualité vidéo ............................................................................................................ 100 Multi-mouvements ................................................................................................ 100 Fondu.......................................................................................................................... 101 Voix .............................................................................................................................. 101 10 Table des matières Chapitre 3 Lecture / Retouche Recherche et gestion de fichiers ............................................................ 103 Affichage de photos .............................................................................................. 103 Affichage des images sous forme de miniatures ........................................ 103 Affichage de fichiers par catégorie .................................................................. 104 Visionnage de fichiers sous forme de dossiers ............................................ 104 Protection de fichiers ............................................................................................ 105 Suppression de fichiers ........................................................................................ 106 Suppression d’un seul fichier ................................................................................ 106 Suppression de plusieurs fichiers ........................................................................ 106 Suppression de tous les fichiers ........................................................................... 106 Affichage de photos ................................................................................. 107 Agrandissement d’une photo ............................................................................ 107 Visionnage d’un diaporama ............................................................................... 107 Rotation automatique .......................................................................................... 108 Lecture de vidéos ...................................................................................... 109 Avance ou retour rapide de la lecture ............................................................ 109 Réglage de la luminosité d’une vidéo ............................................................ 110 Réglage du volume d’une vidéo ....................................................................... 110 Recadrage d’une vidéo au cours de la lecture ............................................. 111 Extraction d’une image pendant la lecture .................................................. 111 Retouche de photos ................................................................................. 112 Rognage d’une photo .......................................................................................... 112 Rotation d’une photo ........................................................................................... 113 Redimensionnement de photos ....................................................................... 113 Réglage des photos ............................................................................................... 114 Retouche de visages ............................................................................................. 115 Effets de filtre intelligent ..................................................................................... 116 Chapitre 4 Réseau sans fil Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau ............................................................................. 118 Connexion à un réseau local sans fil................................................................ 118 Configuration des options de réseau ................................................................. 119 Configuration manuelle de l’adresse IP ............................................................. 119 Utilisation du navigateur de connexion ........................................................ 120 Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau ........................................................... 121 Saisie de texte .......................................................................................................... 122 Utilisation de la fonction NFC (Partage par contact) ......................... 123 Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Prise de vue ................................ 123 Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Lecture (Partage instantané) .............................................................................................. 123 Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Wi-Fi ............................................... 123 Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone ......... 124 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone ................................ 126 11 Table des matières Chapitre 5 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo Paramètres utilisateur .............................................................................. 146 Personnalisation ISO ............................................................................................. 146 Extension ISO .............................................................................................................. 146 Palier ISO ....................................................................................................................... 146 Plage ISO auto ............................................................................................................. 146 Réducteur de bruit ................................................................................................. 147 Réglage Bracketing ................................................................................................ 147 Espace colorimétrique .......................................................................................... 148 Corriger distort. ....................................................................................................... 149 Fonctionnement tactile ....................................................................................... 149 Personnalisation iFn .............................................................................................. 149 Affichage utilisateur .............................................................................................. 150 Attribution touches ............................................................................................... 151 Vue Live NFC ............................................................................................................ 151 Taille de l’image MobileLink/NFC ..................................................................... 151 Grille ............................................................................................................................ 151 Voyant de mise au point ...................................................................................... 152 Autoportrait automatique .................................................................................. 152 Réglagle de la touche Vitesse sur l’objectif ................................................... 152 Paramètres .................................................................................................. 153 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à plusieurs smartphones .................. 128 Utilisation d’un smartphone pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur à distance ........................................................................ 130 Utilisation de la fonction Baby Monitor ............................................... 132 Réglage du niveau de bruit pour l’activation de l’alarme ....................... 133 Utilisation de Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des photos ou des vidéos ........................................................................ 134 Installation du programme Sauvegarde automatique sur votre ordinateur ...................................................................................................... 134 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un ordinateur ........................................... 134 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel .......................................... 136 Modification des paramètres de courriel ...................................................... 136 Enregistrement de vos informations .................................................................. 136 Création d’un mot de passe de courriel ............................................................ 137 Changement du mot de passe de courriel ....................................................... 138 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel ................................................... 138 Utilisation des services de partage de photos ou de vidéos ............ 140 Accès à un service de partage ........................................................................... 140 Téléchargement de photos ou de vidéos ...................................................... 141 Utilisation de Samsung Link pour l’envoi de fichiers ......................... 142 Téléchargement de photos sur un système de stockage en ligne ....... 142 Visionnage de photos ou de vidéos sur des dispositifs compatibles Samsung Link .......................................................................................................... 143 12 Table des matières Usage et rangement de l’appareil photo....................................................... 168 Usage ou rangement inapproprié de l’appareil photo ................................ 168 Utilisation sur la plage ou en bord de mer ....................................................... 168 Rangement pour une durée prolongée ............................................................ 168 Usage avec précaution de l’appareil photo dans les environnements humides .........................................................................................................................169 Autres avertissements .............................................................................................. 169 A propos des cartes mémoire ............................................................................ 170 Cartes mémoires prises en charge ...................................................................... 170 Capacité de la carte mémoire ............................................................................... 171 Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire ................................................. 172 A propos de la batterie ......................................................................................... 173 Caractéristiques de la batterie .............................................................................. 173 Autonomie de la batterie ........................................................................................ 175 Message de batterie faible ..................................................................................... 175 Remarques à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie ........................................ 175 Avertissements à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie ................................ 176 Remarques concernant la recharge de la batterie......................................... 176 Remarques à propos de la recharge avec raccordement à un ordinateur ............................................................................................................177 Utilisation et recyclage consciencieux des batteries et des chargeurs .......................................................................................................................177 Mise à jour du micrologiciel .................................................................... 178 Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente ....................... 179 Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo ..................................................... 182 Glossaire ...................................................................................................... 187 Accessoires en option............................................................................... 193 Index ............................................................................................................ 194 Chapitre 6 Connexion à des appareils externes Affichage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD ........................................... 158 Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur ..................................................... 159 Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Windows ........................................ 159 Connexion de l’appareil photo en tant que disque amovible................... 159 Déconnexion de l’appareil photo (Windows XP) ........................................... 160 Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Mac .................................................. 160 Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur .................................... 162 Installation des programmes depuis le CD fourni ...................................... 162 Programmes disponibles lors de l’utilisation d’i-Launcher ........................ 162 Utilisation d’i-Launcher ........................................................................................ 163 Configuration requise pour Windows ................................................................ 163 Configuration requise pour Mac .......................................................................... 163 Ouverture d’i-Launcher ........................................................................................... 163 Téléchargement du firmware ................................................................................ 164 Téléchargement du programme PC Auto Backup ......................................... 164 Installation d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ................................................. 164 Utilisation d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ................................................... 164 Chapitre 7 Annexe Messages d’erreur ..................................................................................... 166 Entretien de l’appareil photo .................................................................. 167 Nettoyage de l’appareil photo .......................................................................... 167 Objectif et écran de l’appareil photo .................................................................. 167 Capteur d’images ....................................................................................................... 167 Boîtier de l’appareil photo ...................................................................................... 167 13 Concepts de photographie Prise en main de l’appareil photo Tenez l’appareil photo et placez l’index sur la touche du déclencheur. Pour des objectifs plus grands, soutenez l’appareil en plaçant la main gauche sous l’objectif. Postures pour les prises de vue Pour stabiliser l’appareil photo et prendre une bonne photo, une posture correcte est nécessaire. Même si vous tenez l’appareil photo correctement, une mauvaise posture peut le faire bouger. Tenez-vous debout, bien droit et restez immobile afin de stabiliser l’appareil photo. Afin de réduire les mouvements du corps, retenez votre souffle lorsque vous effectuez une prise de vue avec une vitesse d’obturation lente. 14 Concepts de photographie Photographie en position debout Composez votre prise de vue, tenez-vous debout, bien droit, les pieds dans le prolongement de vos épaules, les coudes pointés vers le bas. Photographie en position accroupie Composez votre prise de vue, accroupissez-vous en plaçant un genou au sol tout en vous tenant droit. 15 Concepts de photographie Ouverture L’ouverture fait partie des trois facteurs qui déterminent l’exposition. L’intérieur de l’ouverture contient de fines lamelles de métal qui s’ouvrent et se referment afin de laisser la lumière passer à travers l’ouverture et pénétrer dans l’appareil photo. La taille de l’ouverture est liée à la quantité de lumière : une ouverture plus grande laisse passer plus de lumière, tandis qu’une ouverture plus petite laisse pénétrer moins de lumière. Tailles d’ouverture Ouverture minimum Ouverture moyenne Ouverture maximum Ouverture réduite Ouverture large La taille de l’ouverture est représentée par une valeur désignée par le terme « nombre f ». Le nombre f se détermine par la longueur de focale divisée par le diamètre de l’objectif. Par exemple, si un objectif avec une longueur de focale de 50 mm a pour nombre f F2, le diamètre de l’ouverture est de 25 mm. (50 mm/25 mm = F2) Plus le nombre f est faible, plus la taille de l’ouverture est importante. La taille de l’ouverture se définit par la valeur d’exposition (EV). Augmenter la valeur d’exposition (+1 EV) signifie que la quantité de lumière double. Baisser la valeur d’exposition (-1 EV) signifie que la quantité de lumière est réduite de moitié. Vous pouvez également utiliser la fonction de compensation de l’exposition afin d’effectuer un réglage de quantité de lumière fin, en subdivisant les valeurs d’exposition par 1/2, 1/3 EV, et ainsi de suite. +1 EV F1.4 F2 F2.8 F4 F5.6 F8 -1 EV Niveaux de la valeur d’exposition 16 Concepts de photographie Valeur d’ouverture et profondeur de champ En contrôlant l’ouverture, vous pouvez rendre l’arrière plan d’une photo plus flou ou plus net. Ceci est étroitement lié à la profondeur de champ (DOF) qui peut être définie comme faible ou élevée. Photo avec une profondeur de champ élevée Photo avec une profondeur de champ faible L’intérieur de l’ouverture contient plusieurs lamelles. Ces lamelles se déplacent simultanément et contrôlent la quantité de lumière qui passe à travers le centre de l’ouverture. Lors de prises de vues réalisées de nuit, le nombre de lamelles joue sur l’aspect de la lumière. Pour un nombre donné de lamelles dans l’ouverture, la lumière est divisée par le nombre de sections correspondant. Si le nombre de lamelles est impair, le nombre de sections est double. Par exemple, une ouverture disposant de 8 lamelles divise la lumière en 8 sections alors qu’une ouverture disposant de 7 lamelles la divise en 14 sections. 7 lamelles 8 lamelles 17 Concepts de photographie Vitesse d’obturation La vitesse d’obturation désigne l’intervalle de temps entre l’ouverture et la fermeture de l’obturateur. Elle contrôle la quantité de lumière qui passe à travers l’ouverture avant d’atteindre le capteur d’images. Généralement, la vitesse d’obturation est réglable manuellement. La mesure de la vitesse d’obturation est connue sous le nom de « Valeur d’exposition » (EV), qui se caractérise par des intervalles de 1 s, 1/2 s, 1/4 s, 1/8 s, 1/15 s, 1/1 000 s, 1/2 000 s, et ainsi de suite. Exposition +1 EV -1 EV 1 s 1/2 s 1/4 s 1/8 s 1/15 s 1/30 s Vitesse d’obturation Par conséquent, plus la vitesse d’obturation est élevée, moins la lumière pénètre. De même, plus la vitesse d’obturation est faible, plus la lumière pénètre. Les photos représentées ci-dessous illustrent une vitesse d’obturation lente laissant plus de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer dans l’objectif de l’appareil photo. Cela engendre un effet de flou lié au mouvement des objets. Par ailleurs, une vitesse d’obturation rapide accorde moins de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer, ce qui tend à immobiliser un sujet en mouvement sur la photo. 0,8 s 0,004 s 18 Concepts de photographie Sensibilité ISO L’exposition d’une image est déterminée par la sensibilité de l’appareil photo. Cette sensibilité est basée sur des standards photographiques internationaux, connus sous le nom de standards ISO. Sur les appareils numériques, cette échelle de sensibilité est utilisée pour représenter la sensibilité du mécanisme numérique qui capture l’image. Lorsque le nombre double, la sensibilité ISO double également. Par exemple, une sensibilité définie sur ISO 200 peut capturer des images deux fois plus vite qu’une sensibilité définie sur ISO 100. Néanmoins, des paramètres ISO élevés peuvent causer du « bruit », à savoir des petites tâches, des points et autres phénomènes qui donnent à la photo une apparence sale ou avec des parasites. En règle générale, il vaut mieux utiliser une faible sensibilité ISO afin d’éviter la présence de bruit sur les photos, sauf si vous effectuez une prise de vue dans un environnement sombre ou de nuit. Changements de la qualité et de la luminosité en fonction de la sensibilité ISO Une faible sensibilité ISO signifie que l’appareil photo est moins sensible à la lumière et que vous avez besoin de plus de lumière pour une exposition optimale. Lorsque vous utilisez une faible sensibilité ISO, choisissez une ouverture plus importante ou réduisez la vitesse d’obturation afin de laisser plus de lumière pénétrer dans l’appareil photo. Par exemple, une faible sensibilité ISO au cours d’une journée ensoleillée où la lumière est abondante ne nécessite pas de vitesse d’obturation lente. Néanmoins, dans un endroit sombre ou de nuit, une faible sensibilité ISO rendent les photos floues. Il est donc recommandé d’augmenter la sensibilité ISO de manière modérée. Photo prise avec un trépied et une sensibilité ISO élevée Photo floue avec une faible sensibilité ISO 19 Concepts de photographie Contrôle de l’exposition par le réglage de l’ouverture, de la vitesse d’obturation et de la sensibilité ISO En photographie, les paramètres d’ouverture, de vitesse d’obturation et de sensibilité ISO sont étroitement liés. Les paramètres d’ouverture contrôlent et régulent la quantité de lumière qui pénètre dans l’appareil photo, alors que la vitesse d’obturation détermine la durée au cours de laquelle la lumière peut pénétrer. La sensibilité ISO correspond à la vitesse à laquelle un appareil photo réagit à la lumière. Ces trois aspects sont désignés globalement par le triangle d’exposition. Un changement de la vitesse d’obturation, de la valeur d’ouverture ou de la sensibilité ISO peut être compensé par un réglage des autres valeurs pour maintenir la quantité de lumière. Néanmoins, les résultats varient en fonction des paramètres utilisés. Par exemple, la vitesse d’obturation est utile pour capturer des mouvements, l’ouverture permet de contrôler la profondeur de champ et la sensibilité ISO le grain d’une photo. Paramètres Résultats Valeur d’ouverture Large ouverture = plus de lumière Ouverture étroite = moins de lumière Large = petite profondeur de champ Etroit = grande profondeur de champ Paramètres Résultats Vitesse d’obturation Vitesse rapide = moins de lumière Vitesse lente = plus de lumière Rapide = image nette Lente = image floue Sensibilité ISO Haute sensibilité = plus de sensibilité à la lumière Basse sensibilité = moins de sensibilité à la lumière Haute = plus de grain Basse = moins de grain 20 Concepts de photographie Corrélation entre la longueur de focale, l’angle et la perspective La longueur de focale, ou distance focale, exprimée en millimètres, correspond à la distance séparant le milieu de l’objectif du foyer de mise au point. Elle influe sur l’angle et la perspective des images prises. Une longueur de focale courte génère un angle de vue étendu, ce qui permet de photographier un plan large. Une longueur de focale longue génère un angle de vue étroit, ce qui permet de photographier au téléobjectif. Angle 9 mm Angle 27 mm Profondeur de champ Les plus belles photos de nature morte ou de portraits sont celles dont l’arrière plan est flou et sur lesquelles le sujet ressort. En fonction des zones mises au point, une photo peut être floue ou nette. Ceci est désigné par « une profondeur de champ faible » ou « une profondeur de champ élevée ». La profondeur de champ est la zone mise au point autour du sujet. C’est pourquoi, une faible profondeur de champ signifie que la zone mise au point est étroite, tandis qu’une profondeur de champ élevée élargit la zone mise au point. Une photo avec une faible profondeur de champ, qui met le sujet en évidence et dont le reste est flou, peut être obtenue en prenant une photo à proximité du sujet ou en sélectionnant une faible valeur d’ouverture. A l’opposé, une photo avec une profondeur de champ élevée et dont chaque élément est nettement mis au point peut être obtenue en prenant une photo en étant éloigné du sujet ou en sélectionnant une valeur d’ouverture élevée. Profondeur de champ réduite Profondeur de champ élevée 21 Concepts de photographie Quels sont les éléments qui contrôlent les effets hors-mise au point ? La profondeur de champ dépend de la valeur d’ouverture Plus l’ouverture est large (par définition, plus la valeur d’ouverture est basse), plus la profondeur de champ est faible. Dans une situation où la longueur de focale est égale, une faible valeur d’ouverture résulte en une faible profondeur de champ sur une photo. 27 mm F3.5 27 mm F11 Profondeur de champ liée à la longueur de focale Plus la longueur de focale est importante, plus la profondeur de champ est faible. Angle 9 mm Angle 27 mm 22 Concepts de photographie Profondeur de champ liée à la distance entre le sujet et l’appareil photo Plus la distance entre le sujet et l’appareil photo est courte, plus la profondeur de champ est faible. C’est pourquoi, prendre une photo rapprochée d’un sujet a pour conséquence une faible profondeur de champ. Photo prise en étant éloigné du sujet Photo prise à proximité du sujet Aperçu de la profondeur de champ Afin d’obtenir un aperçu de l’aspect final de votre photo avant d’effectuer la prise de vue, vous pouvez appuyer sur la touche de personnalisation. L’appareil photo règle l’ouverture sur les paramètres prédéfinis et affiche le résultat sur l’écran. Affectez la fonction Aperçu optique à la touche de personnalisation (p. 151). 23 Concepts de photographie Composition La photographie est un art qui a pour raison d’être de capturer l’essence même des merveilles du monde à l’aide d’un appareil photo. Néanmoins, quand bien même le sujet présage d’une photo réussie, une mauvaise composition ne peut en reproduire fidèlement l’aspect. En matière de composition, il est très important de hiérarchiser les sujets. En photographie, la composition signifie la disposition des éléments d’une scène. En règle générale, une bonne composition doit obéir à la règle des tiers. Règle des tiers La règle des tiers consiste à diviser l’image en un quadrillage de 3x3, formé de rectangles de taille égale. Pour composer des photos qui mettent le mieux en valeur le sujet, veillez à ce que le sujet soit placé dans l’un des quatre coins du rectangle central. L’utilisation de la règle des tiers permet de créer des photos avec une composition équilibrée et saisissante. En voici quelques exemples. 24 Concepts de photographie Photos avec deux sujets Si votre sujet se trouve à l’un des coins de la photo, la composition semble alors déséquilibrée. Vous pouvez équilibrer la photo en prenant un second sujet placé à l’extrémité opposée. Sujet 1 Sujet 2 Sujet 1 Sujet 2 Instable Stable Le fait de centrer l’horizon sur une photo de paysage crée une impression de déséquilibre. Equilibrez la photo en déplaçant l’horizon vers le haut ou vers le bas. Sujet 1 Sujet 2 Sujet 1 Sujet 2 Instable Stable 25 Concepts de photographie Flash La lumière est l’un des éléments les plus importants en photographie. Il n’est, cependant, pas simple d’avoir la quantité de lumière suffisante quel que soit le moment ou l’endroit. L’utilisation d’un flash vous permet d’optimiser les paramètres de lumière et de créer différents effets. Le flash, également appelé éclairage stroboscopique ou laser, permet de créer un niveau d’exposition satisfaisant dans des conditions de faible éclairage. Il est également utile dans des conditions de forte luminosité. Par exemple, le flash peut être utilisé pour compenser l’exposition de l’ombre d’un sujet ou pour saisir à la fois le sujet et l’arrière-plan en contre jour. Avant correction Après correction Nombre guide du flash Le numéro de modèle d’un flash indique la puissance du flash ; ainsi, la quantité de lumière maximale créée est représentée par une valeur appelée « nombre guide ». Plus le nombre est élevé, plus le flash est puissant. Le nombre guide s’obtient en multipliant la distance entre le flash et le sujet par la valeur d’ouverture, lorsque la sensibilité ISO est définie sur 100. Nombre guide = Distance flash-sujet X Valeur d’ouverture Valeur d’ouverture = Nombre guide / Distance flash-sujet Distance flash-sujet = Nombre guide / Valeur d’ouverture Par conséquent, si vous connaissez le nombre guide d’un flash, vous pouvez estimer la distance flash-sujet lorsque vous réglez le flash manuellement. Par exemple, si un flash possède le nombre guide NG 20 et est à 4 mètres de distance du sujet, la valeur d’ouverture optimale est de F5.0. Chapitre 1 Mon appareil photo Découvrez les différents composants de l’appareil photo, les icônes affichées à l’écran, les différents objectifs disponibles, les accessoires en option et les fonctions de base. Mon appareil photo 27 Mise en route Contenu du coffret Sortez le téléphone de son coffret et vérifiez que tous les éléments suivants sont présents : Appareil photo Adaptateur secteur / Câble USB Batterie rechargeable Dragonne CD-ROM (Mode d’emploi inclus) DVD-ROM Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Guide de demarrage rapide Guide de référence rapide • Les illustrations peuvent différer par rapport au produit fourni. • Les éléments peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique. • Vous pouvez acheter des accessoires en option auprès d’un revendeur ou d’un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de problème consécutif à l’utilisation d’accessoires non autorisés. Pour en savoir plus sur les accessoires, reportez-vous à la page 193. Mon appareil photo 28 Présentation de l’appareil photo N° Nom 1 Déclencheur 2 Touche Marche / Arrêt 3 Touche DIRECT LINK Démarrez une fonction Wi-Fi prédéfinie (p. 30). 4 Cache du port du flash externe 5 Microphone 6 Repère d'installation de l'objectif 7 Antenne interne * Eviter tout contact avec l’antenne interne lors de l’utilisation du réseau sans fil. 8 Touche de déverrouillage de l’objectif 9 Capteur d'images * Ne touchez pas le capteur d’images. 10 Monture de l'objectif 11 Balise NFC 12 Voyant AF / Voyant du retardateur 13 Flash intégré 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 11 10 8 7 13 12 Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo 29 N° Nom 1 Haut-parleur 2 Anneau d'attache de la dragonne 3 Touche d’enregistrement vidéo Démarrer un enregistrement vidéo. 4 Voyant d'état Indiquer l’état de l’appareil photo. • Clignotement : lors de l’enregistrement d’une photo ou d’une vidéo, de l’envoi de données vers un ordinateur, de la connexion à un réseau local sans fil ou l’envoi d’une photo. • Fixe : en l’absence de transfert de données ou lorsque la batterie est en charge. 5 Touche f Sélectionner un mode de Prise de vue. 6 Touche D • En mode Prise de vue : modifier les informations à l’écran. • Dans d’autres cas : monter. 7 Touche F • En mode Prise de vue : sélectionner un mode AF. • Dans d’autres cas : se déplacer vers la droite. 8 Touche o • Sur l’écran d’accueil : enregistrer les options sélectionnées. • En mode Prise de vue : sélectionner manuellement une zone de mise au point dans certains modes de prise de vue. N° Nom 9 Touche Supprimer / Personnaliser • En mode Prise de vue : exécuter la fonction assignée (p. 151). • En mode Lecture : supprimer des fichiers. 10 Touche I • En mode Prise de vue : régler la vitesse d’obturation, la valeur d’ouverture, la compensation d’exposition ou la sensibilité ISO. • En mode Lecture : afficher les miniatures. • Dans d’autres cas : descendre. 11 Touche Lecture Activer le mode Lecture pour visualiser les photos ou visionner des vidéos. 12 Touche C • En mode Prise de vue : sélectionner la méthode de prise de vue ou régler le retardateur. • Dans d’autres cas : se déplacer vers la gauche. 13 Touche Accéder aux options ou aux menus. m 14 Affichage (tactile) • Pour prendre un autoportrait en se regardant dans l’écran, faire pivoter l’écran vers le haut (p. 31). • Appuyer sur l’écran pour sélectionner un menu ou une option (p. 38). 3 2 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 14 12 11 13 Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo 30 N° Nom 1 Douille pour trépied 2 Loquet de la batterie 3 Fente de carte mémoire 4 USB et port de déverrouillage du déclencheur Brancher l’appareil photo sur un ordinateur, un téléviseur ou le port de déclenchement de l’obturateur. Utiliser un câble de déclenchement de l’obturateur avec un trépied pour réduire le bougé de l’appareil photo. 5 Port HDMI 6 Emplacement batterie 7 Cache batterie Utilisation de la touche DIRECT LINK La touche [DIRECT LINK] vous permet d’activer facilement la fonction Wi-Fi. Appuyez sur [DIRECT LINK] pour revenir au mode précédent. Configuration de la touche DIRECT LINK Vous pouvez sélectionner une fonction Wi-Fi à exécuter au moment où vous appuyez sur la touche [DIRECT LINK] (p. 151). Pour définir une option DIRECT LINK En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ Attribution touches ĺDIRECT LINK ĺ une option. 1 5 6 7 4 3 2 Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo 31 Utilisation de l’écran Vous pouvez prendre un autoportrait en vous regardant dans l’écran en le faisant pivoter vers le haut. Utilisation du mode Autoportrait Lorsque l’appareil photo est éteint et que vous avez activé l’option Autoportrait (p. 152), basculer l’écran vers le haut allume l’appareil photo qui passe en mode Autoportrait. En mode Autoportrait, les fonctions de retardateur (3 secondes), OneTouch Shot, détection des visages et beauté sont automatiquement activées. 1 Faites pivoter l’écran vers le haut. 180˚ 2 Appuyez sur . 3 Faites glisser le curseur ou appuyez sur les icônes +/- pour régler la douceur et l’éclat du grain de peau. 4 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur Définir. 5 Appuyez sur le cadre de l’écran ou sur [Déclencheur]. • Après 3 secondes, l’appareil photo déverrouille automatiquement le déclencheur. • Lorsque l’appareil est éteint, la basculement de l’écran vers le haut allume automatiquement l’appareil photo. • Laissez l’écran fermé lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil photo. • Faites pivoter l’écran en respectant scrupuleusement les angles autorisés. Le non-respect de cette recommandation risque d’endommager l’appareil photo. • Utilisez un trépied lorsque l’écran est incliné vers le haut et que vous ne le tenez pas à la main. Si vous passez outre ces précautions, vous risquez d’endommager votre appareil photo. • Ne faites pas pivoter l’écran vers le haut lorsqu’un flash externe est monté sur l’appareil photo. Si vous passez outre ces précautions, vous risquez d’endommager votre appareil photo. Mon appareil photo 32 Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire Voici comment installer ou retirer la batterie et une carte mémoire en option dans l’appareil photo. 1 Insérez le doigt dans la rainure et ouvrez le cache de la batterie. Faites attention à ne pas vous abîmer les ongles lorsque vous ouvrez le cache de la batterie. 2 Insérez une carte mémoire dans la fente en orientant la puce vers le haut. • Insérez à fond la carte mémoire jusqu’à ce qu’elle se verrouille en position. 3 Faites glisser le loquet de la batterie vers la gauche. 4 Insérez la batterie en orientant la puce vers la droite. • Maintenez le cache de la batterie ouvert avec le doigt. Mon appareil photo > Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire 33 5 Fermez le loquet de la batterie et faites-le glisser vers la droite. 6 Fermez le cache batterie. 7 Appuyez fermement sur le cache de la batterie afin de vous assurer qu’il est bien fermé. Mon appareil photo > Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire 34 Retrait de la batterie et de la carte mémoire Batterie rechargeable Loquet de la batterie Faites glisser le loquet de la batterie vers la gauche pour libérer la batterie. Carte mémoire Appuyez doucement sur la carte pour la faire sortir de l’appareil photo, puis retirez-la entièrement de son emplacement. Utilisation de l’adaptateur de carte mémoire Pour pouvoir lire des données sur un ordinateur ou par le biais d’un lecteur de cartes, insérez la carte dans l’adaptateur approprié. • Ne pliez pas ou ne tirez pas sur le loquet de la batterie. Vous risquez d’endommager le loquet. • Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire ou la batterie lorsque le voyant d’état de l’appareil photo clignote. Vous risquez d’endommager les données stockées sur la carte mémoire ou dans l’appareil photo. Mon appareil photo 35 Mise en charge de la batterie et mise sous tension de l’appareil photo Chargement de la batterie Vous devez charger complètement la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil photo pour la première fois. Branchez l’extrémité la plus fine du câble USB sur l’appareil photo, puis l’autre extrémité du câble USB sur un adaptateur secteur. Voyant d'état • Voyant rouge allumé : en charge • Voyant vert allumé : charge complète • Voyant rouge clignotant : erreur de recharge Utilisez uniquement l’adaptateur secteur et le câble USB fournis avec l’appareil photo. Si vous utilisez un autre adaptateur secteur, la batterie de l’appareil photo risque de ne pas se recharger ou de fonctionner correctement. Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo Pour allumer ou éteindre l’appareil photo, appuyez sur [ ]. • L’écran de configuration initiale apparaît lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo pour la première fois (p. 36). Pour certains objectifs, lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo, l’objectif se déplace automatiquement. N’appuyez pas ou ne forcez pas sur l’objectif, vous risqueriez de l’abîmer. Mon appareil photo 36 Configuration initiale Lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo pour la première fois, l’écran de configuration initiale s’affiche. La langue est réglée selon le pays ou la région où l’appareil photo est vendu. Vous pouvez la changer pour celle de votre choix. Vous pouvez également sélectionner un élément en appuyant dessus à l’écran. 1 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Fuseau horaire, puis appuyez sur [o]. 2 Appuyez sur [D / I] pour sélectionner un fuseau horaire, puis appuyez sur [o]. Retour Définir Fuseau horaire [GMT +00:00] Londres [GMT -01:00] Cap Vert [GMT -02:00] Açores [GMT -03:00] Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo [GMT -03:30] Terre-Neuve 3 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Configuration date/ heure, puis appuyez sur [o]. 4 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour sélectionner un élément (Année/ Mois/Jour/Heure/Minute/Heure d’été). 5 Appuyez sur [D / I] pour définir une option, puis appuyez sur [o]. Retour Définir Année Mois Jour Heure Min Heure d'été Configuration date/heure • L’affichage peut différer en fonction de la langue sélectionnée. 6 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Type date, puis appuyez sur [o]. 7 Appuyez sur [D / I] pour sélectionner un format de date, puis appuyez sur [o]. Retour Définir Type date AAAA/MM/JJ MM/JJ/AAAA JJ/MM/AAAA Mon appareil photo > Configuration initiale 37 8 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Type d'heure, puis appuyez sur [o]. 9 Appuyez sur [D / I] pour sélectionner un format d’heure, puis appuyez sur [o]. Retour Définir Type d'heure 12 h 24 h 10 Appuyez sur [m] pour terminer la configuration. Mon appareil photo 38 Sélection de fonctions (options) Sélection à l’aide des touches Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour vous déplacer, puis appuyez sur [o] pour sélectionner une option. Sélection à l’aide de l’écran tactile N’utilisez pas d’objets pointus, comme des crayons ou des stylos, pour appuyer sur l’écran. Vous risquez de l’endommager. Faire glisser : maintenez une zone à l’écran appuyée, puis faites glisser le doigt pour la déplacer. Appuyer : appuyez sur une icône pour sélectionner un menu ou une option. Effleurer : faites glisser brièvement le doigt sur l’écran. Mon appareil photo > Sélection de fonctions (options) 39 • Lorsque vous appuyez sur un élément à l’écran ou que vous le faites glisser, cela peut entraîner des décolorations. Il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement, mais d’une caractéristique de l’écran tactile. N’appuyez pas trop fort sur l’écran pour minimiser cet effet de décoloration. • L’écran tactile peut ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous utilisez l’appareil photo dans un environnement extrêmement humide. • L’écran tactile peut ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous installez un film protecteur ou tout autre accessoire sur l’écran. • Selon l’angle de vue, la luminosité de l’écran peut parfois sembler insuffisante. Réglez la luminosité ou l’angle de vue afin d’améliorer la luminosité. Utilisation de l’option m Appuyez sur [m] ou sur à l’écran, puis modifiez les options ou les paramètres de prise de vue. Ex. : définir le format photo en mode P 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Programme. 2 Appuyez sur [m] ou sur . 3 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour accéder à b, puis appuyez sur [o]. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur b à l’écran. 4 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour accéder à Format photo, puis appuyez sur [o]. • Vous pouvez également faire défiler la liste et appuyer sur une option. AutoShare Format photo Qualité ISO Vitesse obturation minimum Retour Sélectionner Mon appareil photo > Sélection de fonctions (options) 40 5 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour sélectionner une option, puis appuyez sur [o]. • Vous pouvez également faire défiler la liste et appuyer sur une option. • Appuyez sur [m] ou Retour pour revenir au menu précédent. (3:2) (5472x3648) (3:2) (3888x2592) (3:2) (2976x1984) (3:2) (1728x1152) (16:9) (5472x3080) Format photo Retour Définir 6 Appuyez sur [m] ou Retour pour revenir au mode Prise de vue. Utilisation du panneau intelligent Appuyez sur à l’écran pour accéder à certaines fonctions telles que Exposition, ISO et Balance des blancs. Ex. : régler la valeur d’exposition en mode P 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Programme. 2 Appuyez sur . 3 Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour accéder à l’option EV, puis appuyez sur [o]. • Vous pouvez également sélectionner une option en appuyant dessus. 4 Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour régler la valeur de l’exposition, puis appuyez sur [o]. • Vous pouvez également faire glisser la molette sur l’écran pour régler l’option. EV : 0 Retour Régler Vous pouvez également régler certaines options en les faisant glisser. Mon appareil photo 41 Sélection d’un mode Sélectionnez une variété de modes et de fonctions sur l’écran Mode. Accès à l’écran Mode En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [f]. Appuyez à nouveau sur [f] pour revenir au mode précédent. Automatique Intelligent Priorité vitesse Manuel Retour Définir Programme Priorité ouverture Wi-Fi Appuyez sur une icône pour sélectionner un mode ou une fonction. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [D/I/C/F] pour accéder à un mode ou une fonction, puis appuyer sur [o] pour le/la sélectionner. Description des modes Mode Description Automatique Prendre une photo à l’aide d’un mode Scène sélectionné automatiquement par l’appareil photo (p. 54). Intelligent Prendre une photo avec des options prédéfinies pour une scène spécifique (p. 56). Programme Prenez une photo avec des paramètres réglés manuellement, à l’exception de la vitesse d’obturation et de la valeur d’ouverture (p. 59). Priorité ouverture Définir la valeur d’ouverture manuellement tandis que l’appareil photo sélectionne automatiquement une vitesse d’obturation appropriée (p. 61). Priorité vitesse Définir la vitesse d’obturation manuellement tandis que l’appareil photo sélectionne automatiquement une valeur d’ouverture appropriée (p. 62). Manuel Régler manuellement la valeur d’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation (p. 63). Mon appareil photo > Sélection d’un mode 42 Mode Description Wi-Fi • MobileLink : envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à un smartphone (p. 126). • Remote Viewfinder : utiliser un smartphone comme déclencheur distant de l’obturateur et afficher un aperçu d’une image de votre appareil photo sur le smartphone (p. 130). • Group Share : envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à plusieurs smartphones (p. 128). • Baby Monitor : connecter l’appareil photo à un smartphone pour surveiller un endroit (p. 132). • Sauvegarde automatique : envoyer sur un ordinateur, à l’aide de la fonction sans fil, les photos ou vidéos prises avec l’appareil photo (p. 134). • Courriel : envoyer par courriel des photos ou des vidéos stockées sur l’appareil photo (p. 136). • Réseaux sociaux et Cloud : publier vos photos ou vos vidéos sur des sites Web de partage de fichiers (p. 140). • Samsung Link : télécharger des photos vers le stockage en ligne Samsung Link ou visionner des fichiers sur d’autres appareils compatibles Samsung Link (p. 142). Mon appareil photo 43 Icônes affichées à l’écran Prise de photos 1 2 3 1. Informations de prise de vue Icône Description Mode de prise de vue Date du jour Heure du moment Verrouillage automatique de l’exposition (p. 98) Nombre de photos disponibles Carte mémoire insérée Carte mémoire non insérée* • : recharge complète • : recharge partielle • (Rouge) : vide (recharger la batterie) • : recharge en cours Icône Description Cadre de mise au point automatique Zone de mesure de l’exposition sélective Bougé de l’appareil photo Indicateur de niveau (p. 44) Histogramme (p. 150) Mise au point Vitesse d’obturation Valeur d’ouverture Valeur de réglage de l’exposition Sensibilité ISO (p. 71) * Les photos prises sans insérer de carte mémoire ne peuvent pas être imprimées ou transférées sur une carte mémoire ou sur un ordinateur. 2. Options de prise de vue Icône Description Format photo Mode de sélection Flash (p. 90) Réglage de l’intensité du flash Mesure de l’exposition (p. 92) Mode AF (p. 75) Zone de mise au point Icône Description Détection des visages Balance des blancs (p. 72) Réglage fin de la balance des blancs Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) (p. 84) Fichier RAW Plage dynamique (p. 95) 3. Options de prise de vue (tactile) Icône Description Modifier le mode Intelligent** Connexion mobile*** Options de mise au point tactile Options de prise de vue Panneau intelligent ** Cette icône s’affiche lorsque vous sélectionnez le mode Intelligent. *** Vous pouvez sélectionner directement une fonction Wi-Fi qui se connecte à un smartphone. Les icônes varient en fonction du mode sélectionné ou des options choisies. En mode Prise de vue Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran 44 2. Options de prise de vue Icône Description Taille de la vidéo Mode AF (p. 75) Mesure de l’exposition (p. 92) Balance des blancs (p. 72) Réglage fin de la balance des blancs Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) (p. 84) Fondu (p. 101) Enregistrement vocal désactivé (p. 101) Les icônes varient en fonction du mode sélectionné ou des options choisies. A propos de l’indicateur de niveau L’indicateur de niveau vous permet d’aligner l’appareil photo par rapport aux lignes horizontale et verticale à l’écran. Si l’indicateur de niveau n’est pas droit, réglez-le à l’aide de la fonction Calibrage horizontal (p. 153). Vertical Horizontal Ÿ Aligné sur l’horizon Ÿ Non aligné sur l’horizon Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser l’indicateur de niveau lors d’une prise de vue en orientation portrait. Enregistrement de vidéos 1 2 1. Informations de prise de vue Icône Description Mode de prise de vue Annuler la mise au point tactile. (tactile) Durée d’enregistrement actuelle / Durée d’enregistrement disponible Carte mémoire insérée • : recharge complète • : recharge partielle • (Rouge) : vide (recharger la batterie) • : recharge en cours Valeur d’exposition Sensibilité ISO (p. 71) Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran 45 En mode Lecture Affichage de photos Informations Mode F No Déclencheur ISO Mesure de l'exposition Flash Distance focale Balance des blancs EV Format photo Date Icône Description Fichier en cours / Nombre total de fichiers Numéro de dossier-Numéro de fichier Fichier RAW Fichier protégé Photos prises en continu (elles apparaissent sous forme de dossier) (p. 104) Menu Lecture / Edition / Paramétrage (tactile) Partager un fichier. (tactile) Afficher les images sous forme de miniatures. (tactile) 1 2 3 N° Description 1 Photo prise 2 Histogramme RGB (p. 150) 3 Mode Prise de vue, Mesure de l’exposition, Flash, Balance des blancs, Valeur d’ouverture, Vitesse d’obturation, ISO, Distance focale, Valeur d’exposition, Format photo, Date Lecture de vidéos Arrêter Icône Description Fichier en cours / Nombre total de fichiers Vitesse de lecture Numéro de dossier-Numéro de fichier Multi-mouvements Temps de lecture en cours Durée de la vidéo Afficher le fichier précédent / Retour rapide. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur l’icône de retour rapide, la vitesse de retour change selon l’ordre suivant : 2X, 4X, 8X.) Mettre une pause ou reprendre la lecture. Afficher le fichier suivant / Avance rapide. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur l’icône d’avance rapide, la vitesse d’avance change selon l’ordre suivant : 2X, 4X, 8X.) Régler le volume ou couper le son. Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran 46 Modification des informations affichées Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur [ D] pour changer de type d’affichage. Mode Type d’affichage Prise de vue • Informations de base sur la prise de vue (Mode Prise de vue, Vitesse d’obturation, Valeur d’ouverture, Valeur d’exposition, Sensibilité ISO, etc.) • Informations de base sur la prise de vue + Touches d’options de prise de vue (MENU, Fn, Connexion mobile, Mise au point tactile) + Indicateur de niveau • Informations de base sur la prise de vue + Touches d’options de prise de vue + Informations sur les options de la prise de vue en cours (Format photo, Mode de sélection, Flash, Mesure de l’exposition, Mode AF, etc.) • Informations de base sur la prise de vue + Touches d’options de prise de vue + Informations sur les options de la prise de vue en cours + Histogramme + Date et heure Lecture • Informations de base • Afficher toutes les informations sur le fichier en cours. • Afficher toutes les informations sur la prise de vue, y compris l’histogramme RGB. • Aucune information (lorsque vous êtes connecté à un HDTV ou un moniteur compatible HDMI) Mon appareil photo 47 Objectifs Vous pouvez acheter des objectifs NX-M en option. Découvrez les fonctions de chaque objectif et choisissez-en un selon vos besoins et vos préférences. Présentation de l’objectif Objectif SAMSUNG NX-M 9 mm F3.5 ED (exemple) 3 1 2 N° Description 1 Objectif 2 Repère d'installation de l'objectif 3 Contacts de l’objectif Mon appareil photo > Objectifs 48 Objectif SAMSUNG NX-M 9-27 mm F3.5-5.6 ED OIS (exemple) 5 3 1 2 4 N° Description 1 Index de verrouillage du zoom 2 Objectif 3 Bague de zoom 4 Repère d'installation de l'objectif 5 Contacts de l’objectif Verrouillage et déverrouillage de l’objectif Pour verrouiller l’objectif, faites pivoter la bague de zoom et tirez doucement dessus pour l’écarter l’appareil photo. Alignez les repères de verrouillage du zoom sur LOCK, comme indiqué dans l’illustration. Pour déverrouiller l’objectif, tournez la bague de zoom comme indiqué dans l’illustration. Il est impossible de prendre une photo si l’objectif est verrouillé. Mon appareil photo > Objectifs 49 Marquages de l’objectif Découvrez ce que les numéros inscrits sur l’objectif signifient. Objectif SAMSUNG NX-M 9-27 mm F3.5-5.6 ED OIS (exemple) 3 4 5 1 2 2 N° Description 1 Valeur d’ouverture Gamme de valeurs d’ouverture prises en charge. Par exemple, 1:3.5 – 5.6 correspond à une gamme de valeurs maximales d’ouverture allant de 3,5 à 5,6. 2 Longueur de focale Distance entre le centre de l’objectif et son point focal (en millimètres). Cette valeur est exprimée sous forme de plage (longueur minimum à maximum). Des longueurs de focale plus importantes réduisent les angles de vue et agrandissent le sujet. Des longueurs de focale moins élevées agrandissent les angles de vue. 3 ED ED signifie dispersion extra faible (Extra-low Dispersion). Un verre à très faible dispersion assure une excellente correction de l’aberration chromatique (déformation qui se produit lorsqu’un objectif ne parvient pas à mettre au point toutes les couleurs vers le même point de convergence). 4 OIS (p. 84) Stabilisation optique de l’image. Les objectifs bénéficiant de cette fonction détectent les mouvements internes de l’appareil photo et les compensent efficacement. 5 Ø Diamètre de l’objectif. Assurez-vous que le diamètre des filtres que vous fixez sur l’objectif est égal au diamètre de ce dernier. Mon appareil photo 50 Accessoires Utilisez des accessoires comme un flash externe qui peut vous fournir une quantité de lumière constante. Vous pouvez également utiliser la bague d’adaptation pour fixer les objectifs NX. Pour obtenir davantage d’informations sur les accessoires en option, consultez le mode d’emploi de ceux-ci. • Les illustrations peuvent différer par rapport au produit fourni. • Vous pouvez acheter des accessoires agréés Samsung auprès d’un revendeur ou d’un centre de service après-ventes Samsung. Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages causés par l’utilisation d’accessoires fournis par d’autres fabricants. Présentation du flash externe SEF7A (exemple) (en option) 1 4 3 2 N° Description 1 Cadran de fixation du flash 2 Lampe 3 Connexion flash 4 Port du flash Mon appareil photo > Accessoires 51 Fixation du flash externe 1 Ouvrez le cache du port du flash externe. 2 Montez le flash en l’insérant fermement dans le port du flash externe. • Maintenez le cache du port du flash externe ouvert avec le doigt. 3 Sécurisez le flash en tournant le cadran de fixation du flash dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction du mode de prise de vue sélectionné. • Un court laps de temps se déroule entre les deux déclenchements du flash. Ne bougez pas tant que le flash ne s’est pas déclenché une seconde fois. • Ne forcez pas sur le flash pour le retirer. Vous risquez d’endommager le flash et l’appareil photo. • Utilisez uniquement des flashs homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de flashs incompatibles peut endommager l’appareil photo. Mon appareil photo > Accessoires 52 Montage de la bague d’adaptation 1 Retirez les caches de la bague d’adaptation et le cache du boîtier. 2 Alignez les repères (blancs) sur l’appareil photo et la bague d’adaptation. Tournez ensuite la bague d’adaptation comme indiqué dans l’illustration jusqu’au déclic. Disposition de la bague d’adaptation Bague d’adaptation Samsung NX (exemple) (en option) 1 2 4 3 N° Description 1 Touche de déverrouillage de l’objectif 2 Repère de la monture d’objectif NX-M 3 Repère de la monture d’objectif NX 4 Douille pour trépied Mon appareil photo > Accessoires 53 2 Maintenez enfoncée la touche de déverrouillage de l’objectif sur l’appareil photo. Faites ensuite tourner l’objectif comme indiqué dans l’illustration. • Le flash n’est pas disponible lors de l’utilisation de la bague d’adaptation. • L’option Continue dans le mode Prise de vue n’est pas disponible lors de l’utilisation de la bague d’adaptation. • Des lignes horizontales peuvent apparaître sur la photo lorsque vous utilisez la bague d’adaptation et que le sujet est exposé à une source lumineuse fluorescente ou une lampe au mercure. Pour résoudre ce problème, sélectionnez b ĺ Réduction de l'effet de bandes ĺ Activé. Cette fonction peut assombrir les bords du cadre. 3 Alignez les repères (rouges) sur l’objectif NX et la bague d’adaptation. Tournez ensuite l’objectif comme indiqué dans l’illustration jusqu’au déclic. Retrait de la bague d’adaptation 1 Maintenez enfoncée la touche de déverrouillage de l’objectif sur la bague d’adaptation. Faites ensuite tourner l’objectif comme indiqué dans l’illustration. Mon appareil photo 54 Modes de prise de vue Deux modes de prise de vue simples, Automatique et Intelligent, vous permettent de réaliser des prises de vue à l’aide de nombreux paramètres automatiques. Des modes supplémentaires vous offrent de plus grandes possibilités de personnalisation des paramètres. Mode Automatique En mode Automatique, l’appareil photo reconnaît l’environnement dans lequel les prises de vue sont effectuées et règle automatiquement les facteurs liés à l’exposition, comme par exemple la vitesse d’obturation, la valeur d’ouverture, la mesure de l’exposition, la balance des blancs et la compensation de l’exposition. L’appareil photo contrôlant la plupart de ces fonctions, certaines fonctions de prise de vue sont limitées. Ce mode est utile pour prendre rapidement des photos en effectuant le moins de réglages possible. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Automatique. 2 Cadrez le sujet. 3 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course. • L’appareil photo sélectionne une scène. L’icône correspondante apparaît à l’écran. A Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 55 Scènes reconnaissables Icône Description Paysages Scènes sur fonds blancs éclatants Paysages de nuit Portraits de nuit Paysages à contre-jour Portraits à contre-jour Portraits Plans rapprochés d’objets Plans rapprochés de texte Couchers de soleil Intérieurs, endroits obscurs Eclairage partiel Plans rapprochés avec éclairage au spot Portraits avec éclairage au spot Icône Description Ciel bleu Zones boisées (couleur dominante verte) Plans rapprochés de sujets colorés Appareil photo stabilisé sur un trépied et sujet relativement immobile pendant une durée donnée. (en cas de prise de vue dans un endroit sombre) Sujets en mouvement Feux d’artifice (lors de l’utilisation d’un trépied) 4 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. • Il est possible que l’appareil photo détecte des scènes différentes ou des sujets identiques, en fonction des conditions de prise de vue, telles que le bougé de l’appareil photo, l’éclairage et la distance à laquelle se trouve le sujet. • Si l’appareil photo ne reconnaît pas de mode scénique, il utilise les paramètres par défaut du mode Automatique. • Même lorsqu’un visage est détecté, il est possible que l’appareil photo ne sélectionne pas un mode Portrait, selon la position du sujet ou de l’éclairage. • Même si vous utilisez un trépied, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne détecte pas le mode Trépied ( ) si le sujet est en mouvement. • La batterie de l’appareil photo se décharge plus rapidement, car l’appareil change souvent les paramètres afin de capturer les scènes adéquates. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 56 Mode intelligent En mode Intelligent, vous pouvez prendre une photo avec des options prédéfinies pour une scène donnée. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Intelligent. 2 Sélectionnez une scène. Option Description Beauté Réaliser un portrait à l’aide de diverses options qui permettent d’adoucir et d’éclairer le grain de peau. Meilleure photo Prendre plusieurs clichés et remplacer les visages pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible. Mode Continu Prendre une série de photos de sujets qui se déplacent. Prise Enfants Prendre une photo avec un son amusant pour attirer l’attention des enfants. Paysage Réaliser des clichés de nature morte ou de paysage. Macro Prendre en photo des petits sujets ou réaliser des gros plans. Nature morte Prendre en photo des aliments dans des tons plus colorés. Fêtes et intérieurs Prendre des photos d’intérieur nettes. Action Prendre en photo des sujets se déplaçant à grande vitesse. Ton riche Prendre une photo avec des couleurs dynamiques. Panorama Prendre en photo une scène panoramique en un seul cliché. Cascade Prendre en photo des scènes avec des cascades. Option Description Silhouette Prendre en photo des sujets sous forme d’ombres foncées se détachant sur un fond clair. Coucher de soleil Prendre des photos de couchers du soleil avec des tons rouges et jaunes naturels. Nuit Prendre une photo d’une plus grande netteté et avec un bruit réduit, dans des conditions d’éclairage faible. Feux d'artifice Prendre en photo des scènes avec des feux d’artifice. Lumière Prendre en photo des scènes avec des traînées lumineuses dans des conditions de faible luminosité. 3 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour effectuer la prise de vue. Utilisation du mode Beauté En mode Beauté, diverses options vous permettent d’adoucir et d’éclairer le grain de peau avant de réaliser un portrait. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Intelligent ĺ Beauté. 2 Appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Retouche des visages. 3 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour sélectionner une option. 4 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler l’option. • Vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur +/- pour régler les options. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 57 5 Appuyez sur [o]. 6 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point. 7 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. Utilisation du mode Meilleure photo En mode Meilleure photo, vous pouvez prendre plusieurs clichés et remplacer les visages pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible. Vous avez alors la possibilité de choisir, pour chacun des individus d’une photo de groupe, le meilleur cliché. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Intelligent ĺ Meilleure photo. 2 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point. 3 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. • L’appareil photo prend 5 photos consécutives. • La première est définie comme arrière-plan. • Les visages sont automatiquement détectés après la mise au point par l’appareil photo. 4 Appuyez sur un visage pour le remplacer. Retour Enregistrer 5 Sélectionnez la meilleure pose pour les 5 visages photographiés. • Répétez les étapes 4 et 5 pour remplacer le reste des visages de la photo. • L’icône apparaît sur l’image recommandée par l’appareil photo. 6 Appuyez sur [o] pour enregistrer la photo. • Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil photo. • La résolution photo est définie sur 5.9M ou à une valeur inférieure. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 58 Prise de photos panoramiques En mode Panorama, vous pouvez prendre une large scène panoramique sur une seule photo. Le mode Panorama permet de prendre une série de photos puis de les combiner pour créer une image panoramique. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Intelligent ĺ Panorama. 2 Maintenez le [Déclencheur] enfoncé, puis déplacez lentement l’appareil photo dans la direction souhaitée. • Une flèche indiquant la direction du mouvement apparaît et l’intégralité de l’image prise est affichée dans le champ d’aperçu. • Une fois les scènes alignées, l’appareil photo prend alors le cliché suivant automatiquement. 3 Une fois terminé, relâchez le [Déclencheur]. • L’appareil photo enregistre automatiquement les photos en une seule. • Si vous relâchez le [Déclencheur] au cours de la prise de vue, la vue panoramique s’interrompt et les photos prises sont enregistrées. • La résolution varie en fonction de la photo panoramique que vous avez prise. • En mode Panorama, certaines options de prise de vue ne sont pas disponibles. • L’appareil photo peut cesser de photographier du fait de la composition de la prise de vue ou du déplacement du sujet. • En mode Panorama, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne prenne pas l’intégralité de la dernière scène si vous arrêtez le déplacement de l’objectif pour améliorer la qualité de la photo. Pour prendre une scène entière, déplacez l’appareil photo légèrement au-delà du point final. • Pour optimiser les résultats lors de la prise de photos panoramiques, évitez : - de déplacer l’appareil photo trop rapidement ou trop lentement ; - d’interrompre le déplacement de l’appareil photo avant le cliché suivant ; - de déplacer l’appareil photo à une vitesse irrégulière ; - de secouer l’appareil photo ; - d’effectuer la prise de vue dans un endroit sombre ; - de prendre en photo des sujets en mouvement placés trop près de l’objectif ; - les conditions de prise de vue, où la luminosité et la couleur de la lumière, ne cessent de changer. • Les photos réalisées sont automatiquement sauvegardées et la prise de vue est interrompue dans les circonstances suivantes : - si vous changez de direction en pleine prise de vue ; - si vous bougez l’appareil photo trop rapidement ; - si vous ne bougez pas l’appareil photo. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 59 Mode Programme L’appareil photo règle automatiquement la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture afin d’atteindre une valeur d’exposition optimale. Ce mode est pratique lorsque vous souhaitez réaliser des prises de vue avec une exposition constante tout en ayant la possibilité de régler d’autres paramètres. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Programme. 2 Définissez les options de votre choix. 3 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 60 Changement de programme La fonction Changement de programme vous permet de régler la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture tout en conservant la même valeur d’exposition sur l’appareil photo. Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture, puis appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler la valeur d’ouverture. La vitesse d’obturation change en fonction de la valeur d’ouverture. Vitesse obturation minimum Réglez la vitesse d’obturation afin qu’elle ne soit pas plus lente que la vitesse sélectionnée. Toutefois, si la valeur d’exposition optimale ne peut être atteinte, car la sensibilité ISO est égale à la valeur ISO maximale définie par l’option Plage ISO auto, la vitesse d’obturation doit être plus lente que la vitesse d’obturation minimum sélectionnée. Pour définir une vitesse d’obturation minimum En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Vitesse obturation minimum ĺ une option. • Cette fonction est disponible uniquement si la sensibilité ISO est réglée sur Automatique. • Cette fonction est disponible uniquement en mode Programme ou Priorité ouverture. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 61 Mode Priorité ouverture En mode Priorité ouverture, l’appareil photo calcule automatiquement la vitesse d’obturation en fonction de la valeur d’ouverture choisie. Vous pouvez ajuster la profondeur de champ (DOF) en modifiant la valeur d’ouverture. Ce mode est utile pour prendre des portraits ou des photos de fleurs ou de paysages. Profondeur de champ élevée Profondeur de champ réduite 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Priorité ouverture. 2 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la valeur d’ouverture. 3 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler la valeur d’ouverture. 4 Définissez les options de votre choix. 5 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. • En cas de faible luminosité, il peut s’avérer nécessaire d’augmenter la sensibilité ISO afin d’éviter de prendre des photos floues. • Pour régler la vitesse d’obturation minimum, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Vitesse obturation minimum ĺ une option. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur la valeur d’ouverture à l’écran pour la régler. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 62 Mode Priorité Vitesse En mode Priorité Vitesse, l’appareil photo règle automatiquement la valeur d’ouverture en fonction de la vitesse d’obturation choisie. Ce mode est utile pour prendre des photos de sujets en mouvement ou pour créer des effets de vitesse sur une photo. Par exemple, définissez la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur supérieure à 1/500 s afin d’immobiliser le sujet sur l’image. Pour rendre le sujet flou, réglez la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur inférieure à 1/30 s. Vitesse d’obturation lente Vitesse d’obturation rapide 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Priorité vitesse. 2 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la priorité vitesse. 3 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour sélectionner la priorité vitesse. 4 Définissez les options de votre choix. 5 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. • Afin de compenser le manque de lumière causé par des vitesses d’obturation rapides, augmentez l’ouverture pour permettre à plus de lumière d’entrer. Si vos photos sont toujours trop sombres, augmentez la valeur ISO. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur la vitesse d’obturation à l’écran pour la régler. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 63 Mode Manuel Le mode Manuel vous permet d’ajuster la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture manuellement. Dans ce mode, vous pouvez entièrement contrôler l’exposition de vos photos. Ce mode est utile dans des environnements de prise de vue professionnels, tel qu’un studio, ou lorsqu’il est nécessaire d’affiner les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Le mode Manuel est également recommandé pour les prises de vue de nuit ou les feux d’artifice. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Manuel. 2 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la valeur d’ouverture ou la priorité vitesse. 3 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler la valeur d’ouverture ou la priorité vitesse. 4 Définissez les options de votre choix. 5 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur la valeur d’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation à l’écran pour la régler. Utilisation du mode d’exposition Lorsque vous réglez la valeur d’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation, l’exposition change en fonction des paramètres et l’affichage peut s’assombrir. Lorsque cette fonction est activée, la luminosité de l’écran est constante quels que soient les paramètres choisis, pour vous permettre de mieux cadrer la prise de vue. Pour utiliser le mode d’exposition En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Mode d'exposition ĺ une option. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 64 Utilisation de la fonction Bulb Utilisez la fonction Bulb pour réaliser des prises de vue nocturnes ou pour photographier des ciels étoilés. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’obturateur reste ouvert de façon à vous permettre de créer des effets de lumière animée. Pour utiliser un flash de type bulb En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la priorité vitesse ĺ Appuyez sur [C] de façon continue pour régler la priorité vitesse sur Bulb ĺMaintenez le [Déclencheur] enfoncé pendant la durée souhaitée. • Si vous réglez une valeur ISO élevée ou si vous laissez l’obturateur ouvert pendant longtemps, du bruit plus important risque d’apparaître sur l’image. • Les options de prise de vue, le flash et la fonction Déclenchement par sélection ne peuvent pas être utilisés avec la fonction Bulb. • La fonction Bulb est disponible uniquement en mode Manuel. • Utilisez un trépied et le déclenchement de l’obturateur pour stabiliser l’appareil photo. • Plus l’obturateur reste ouvert, plus l’enregistrement d’une photo est long. N’éteignez pas l’appareil photo lorsque l’enregistrement d’une photo est en cours. • Si vous utilisez cette fonction pendant une durée prolongée, veillez à ce que la batterie soit complètement rechargée. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 65 • Le format H.264 (MPEG-4 part10 / AVC) est l’un des derniers formats vidéo mis au point par les organismes internationaux de normalisation ISO-IEC et ITU-T et disponible depuis 2003. Sachant que ce format utilise un taux de compression élevé, davantage de données peuvent être enregistrées dans un espace mémoire plus restreint. • Il est possible que l’appareil photo enregistre le son du stabilisateur d’image si vous avez activé cette option ou bien lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo. • Si vous retirez l’objectif de l’appareil photo lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo, l’enregistrement est alors interrompu. Ne changez pas d’objectif lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo. • Si vous modifiez brusquement l’angle de prise de vue lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo, il est possible que l’appareil photo ne puisse pas enregistrer les images de façon précise. Utilisez un trépied pour réduire les mouvements de l’appareil photo. • L’appareil photo prend uniquement en charge la fonction Mise au point multiple lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser d’autres fonctions de réglage de la zone de mise au point. • Lorsque la taille du fichier vidéo est supérieure à 4 Go, l’appareil photo interrompt automatiquement l’enregistrement même si la durée maximale d’enregistrement (29 minutes et 59 secondes) n’est pas atteinte. • Si vous utilisez une carte mémoire à vitesse d’écriture lente, il est possible que l’enregistrement de la vidéo en cours s’interrompe, car la carte ne parvient pas à traiter un débit de données trop élevé. Si cela se produit, remplacez la carte utilisée par une autre carte à vitesse d’écriture plus rapide, ou bien réduisez la résolution de l’image (par exemple, de 1280X720 à 640X480). • Utilisez toujours l’appareil photo pour formater une carte mémoire. Si vous formatez les fichiers sur un autre appareil photo ou sur un ordinateur, cela peut affecter la capacité d’enregistrement de la carte ou bien causer la perte de fichiers. • Lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo avec la même sensibilité ISO, l’écran peut être plus sombre que lors de la prise d’une photo. Réglez la sensibilité ISO. • Lorsque vous enregistrez une vidéo en mode Programme, Priorité ouverture, ou Priorité vitesse, le paramètre ISO est automatiquement défini sur Automatique. Enregistrement d’une vidéo En mode Prise de vue, vous pouvez enregistrer des vidéos Full HD (1920X1080) en appuyant sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo). L’appareil photo vous permet de réaliser des vidéos d’une durée de 29 minutes et 59 secondes maximum, à 30 ips, et enregistre les fichiers au format MP4 (H.264). Le son est enregistré via le microphone de l’appareil photo. Sélectionnez Fondu pour appliquer un fondu entrant ou sortant à la scène. Vous pouvez également sélectionner l’option Voix ou toute autre option permettant de paramétrer l’enregistrement (p. 101). 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez un mode Prise de vue. • Il est possible que cette fonction soit inopérante dans certains modes. 2 Définissez les options de votre choix. 3 Appuyez sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo) pour lancer l’enregistrement. • L’appareil photo maintient la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture définies avant la prise de vue. 4 Appuyez à nouveau sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo) pour l’arrêter. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur le [Déclencheur] pour arrêter l’enregistrement. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 66 Fonctions disponibles en mode Prise de vue Pour obtenir plus d’informations à propos des fonctions de prise de vue, reportez-vous à la section 2. Fonction Automatique Intelligent Programme Priorité ouverture Priorité vitesse Manuel Retouche des visages (p. 56) -O- - - - Format photo (p. 69) OOOOOO Qualité (p. 70) - OOOOO ISO (p. 71) - - OOOO Balance des blancs (p. 72) - - OOOO Assistant photo (p. 74) - - OOOO Filtre intelligent (p. 96) - - OOOO Mode AF (p. 75) - OOOOO Zone AF (p. 77) - OOOOO Détection des visages (p. 79) - - OOOO Mise au point tactile (p. 81) OOOOOO Aide mise au point manuelle (p. 83) OOOOOO Lien AE à AF (p. 94) - - OOOO Mode d'exposition (p. 63) - - OOOO O : vous pouvez sélectionner les options de la fonction. (Les options disponibles varient selon le mode Prise de vue.) - : la fonction est réglée sur une certaine option par défaut ou la fonction n’est pas disponible. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 67 Fonction Automatique Intelligent Programme Priorité ouverture Priorité vitesse Manuel OIS (anti flou de bougé) (p. 84) OOOOOO Prise de vue (Continue/Mode Rafale/ Retardateur/Bracketing) (p. 85) OOOOOO Mesure de l'exposition (p. 92) - - OOOO Plage dynamique (p. 95) - - OOOO Flash (p. 90) OOOOOO Compensation de l'exposition (p. 97) - - OOO - Verrouillage de l’exposition (p. 98) - - OOO - O : vous pouvez sélectionner les options de la fonction. (Les options disponibles varient selon le mode Prise de vue.) - : la fonction est réglée sur une certaine option par défaut ou la fonction n’est pas disponible. Chapitre 2 Fonctions de prise de vue Découvrez les fonctions que vous pouvez définir en mode Prise de vue. En utilisant les fonctions de prise de vue, vous pouvez personnaliser encore plus vos photos et vos vidéos. Fonctions de prise de vue 69 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Format photo Sélectionner une résolution plus élevée permet d’augmenter le nombre de pixels des photos ou des vidéos afin de pouvoir les imprimer sur du papier grand format ou de les visionner sur un grand écran. Si vous utilisez une résolution élevée, la taille du fichier augmente également. Pour afficher des photos dans un cadre numérique ou en télécharger vers le web, sélectionnez une basse résolution. Pour régler la taille En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Format photo ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Taille Recommandé pour (3:2) 5472x3648* Impression sur papier A1. (3:2) 3888x2592 Impression sur papier A2. (3:2) 2976x1984 Impression sur papier A3. (3:2) 1728x1152 Impression sur papier A5. (16:9) 5472x3080 Impression sur papier A1 ou affichage sur un téléviseur HD. (16:9) 3712x2088 Impression sur papier A3 ou affichage sur un téléviseur HD. (16:9) 2944x1656 Impression sur papier A4 ou affichage sur un téléviseur HD. (16:9) 1920x1080 Impression sur papier A5 ou affichage sur un téléviseur HD. (1:1) 3648x3648 Impression d’une photo carrée sur du papier au format A1. (1:1) 2640x2640 Impression d’une photo carrée sur du papier au format A3. (1:1) 2000x2000 Impression d’une photo carrée sur du papier au format A4. (1:1) 1024x1024 Pièce jointe à un courriel. Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Format et résolution 70 Fonctions de prise de vue > Format et résolution Qualité L’appareil photo enregistre les photos au format JPEG ou RAW. Les photos prises par un appareil numérique sont souvent converties en format JPEG et stockées en mémoire selon les paramètres de l’appareil photo au moment de la prise de vue. Les fichiers RAW ne sont pas convertis au format JPEG et sont stockés en mémoire sans aucune modification. Les fichiers RAW ont pour extension « SRW ». Pour régler et étalonner l’exposition, la balance des blancs, les tonalités, le contraste et les couleurs des fichiers RAW, ou pour les convertir au format JPEG ou TIFF, utilisez le programme Adobe Photoshop Lightroom fourni sur le DVD-ROM. Pour enregistrer des photos en format RAW, assurez-vous que la carte mémoire dispose d’un espace suffisant. Pour définir la qualité En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Qualité ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Format Description JPEG Maximale* : • Compressée afin d’obtenir la meilleure qualité possible. • Recommandé pour imprimer en grand format. JPEG Elevée : • Compressé pour obtenir une meilleure qualité. • Recommandé pour imprimer en format normal. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Format Description JPEG Normale : • Compressé pour obtenir une qualité normale. • Recommandé pour imprimer en petit format ou pour envoyer sur le web. RAW RAW : • Enregistrer une photo sans perte de données. • Recommandé pour effectuer des modifications après la prise de vue. RAW+JPEG RAW + Très élevée : enregistrer une photo au format JPEG (qualité maximale) et RAW. RAW+JPEG RAW + Elevée : enregistrer une photo au format JPEG (qualité Elevée) et RAW. RAW+JPEG RAW + Normale : enregistrer une photo au format JPEG (qualité normale) et RAW. Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Fonctions de prise de vue 71 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue La sensibilité ISO désigne la sensibilité de l’appareil photo à la lumière. Plus la valeur de la sensibilité ISO est importante, plus l’appareil photo est sensible à la lumière. Par conséquent, en sélectionnant une valeur de sensibilité ISO plus élevée, vous pouvez réaliser des prises de vue dans des endroits sombres, en utilisant une vitesse d’obturation supérieure. Néanmoins, il est possible que cela augmente les effets de bruit électronique et donne un aspect granuleux à la photo. Pour définir la sensibilité ISO En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ ISO ĺ une option. Exemples ISO 160 ISO 400 ISO 800 ISO 3200 • Augmentez la valeur ISO dans les endroits où l’utilisation du flash est interdite. En définissant une valeur ISO élevée, vous pouvez obtenir des photos d’une plus grande clarté sans avoir besoin de davantage de lumière. • Afin de réduire le bruit visuel (parasites) qui peut apparaître sur des photos prises avec une valeur ISO élevée, utilisez la fonction Réducteur de bruit (p. 147). • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur la valeur ISO à l’écran pour la régler. Sensibilité ISO Fonctions de prise de vue 72 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue En photographie, la balance des blancs permet de corriger la dominante de couleur en fonction de l’éclairage ambiant. La couleur des photos dépend du type et de la qualité de la source d’éclairage. Pour que les couleurs de vos photos soient le reflet de la réalité, choisissez des conditions d’éclairage appropriées pour calibrer la balance des blancs, par exemple Balance des blancs automatique, Lumière du jour, Nuageux, Tungstène, ou bien réglez la température des couleurs manuellement. Vous pouvez également ajuster la couleur des sources de lumière prédéfinies de façon à ce que les couleurs de la photo correspondent aux couleurs véritables de la scène sous différentes conditions d’éclairage. Pour définir une balance des blancs En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Balance des blancs ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description Balance des blancs automatique* : automatiser les paramètres en fonction des conditions d’éclairage. Lumière du jour : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en extérieur par beau temps. Cette option permet d’obtenir des photos reproduisant au mieux les couleurs naturelles d’une scène. Nuageux : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en extérieur par temps nuageux ou dans un endroit ombragé. Les photos prises par temps nuageux ont tendance à présenter une teinte plus bleutée que celles prises par beau temps. Cette option permet de compenser cet effet. Blanc fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue sous un éclairage de type lumière naturelle fluorescente, en particulier celle de couleur blanche. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description N Blanc/Noir fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue sous un éclairage de type lumière naturelle fluorescente, en particulier celle aux tonalités de blanc très prononcé. D Lumière du jour fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue sous un éclairage de type lumière naturelle fluorescente, en particulier celle de couleur blanche avec une teinte légèrement bleue. Tungstène : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en intérieur avec des ampoules à incandescence ou des lampes halogène. Les ampoules tungstène incandescentes ont tendance à ajouter une tonalité rougeâtre. Cette option permet de compenser cet effet. Balance des blancs flash : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue à l’aide d’un flash. Réglage personnalisé : utiliser vos paramètres prédéfinis. Vous pouvez définir manuellement la balance des blancs en appuyant sur [D], et en prenant une feuille de papier blanc en photo. Remplir le cercle de mesure de l’exposition sélective avec la feuille de papier et définir la balance des blancs. Température couleur : régler manuellement la température des couleurs de la source lumineuse. La température des couleurs est une mesure exprimée en degrés kelvins et qui indique spécifiquement le type de source lumineuse. Il est possible d’obtenir une photo plus chaleureuse à l’aide d’une valeur élevée, et une photo moins chaleureuse à l’aide d’une valeur plus basse. Appuyez sur [D], puis réglez la température de couleur. Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Balance des blancs 73 Fonctions de prise de vue > Balance des blancs Personnalisation des options de préréglage de la balance des blancs Vous pouvez également personnaliser les options prédéfinies de balance des blancs. Pour personnaliser les options prédéfinies En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Balance des blancs ĺ une option ĺ [D] ĺ appuyez sur [D/I/C/F]. Balance des blancs : Lumière du jour Retour Définir Réinitialiser Vous pouvez également appuyer sur une zone à l’écran. Exemples Balance des blancs automatique Lumière du jour Lumière du jour fluorescent Tungstène Fonctions de prise de vue 74 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue L’assistant photo vous permet d’appliquer des styles à vos photos afin de leur faire adopter différents aspects et créer des impressions particulières. Vous pouvez également créer et enregistrer vos propres styles de photos en réglant la couleur, la saturation, la netteté et le contraste pour chacun de ces styles. L’application de différents styles ne suit aucune règle particulière, quelles que soient les conditions. Essayez plusieurs styles différents et trouvez les paramètres qui vous conviennent. Pour définir un style de photo En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Assistant photo ĺ une option. Exemples Standard Accentué Portrait Paysage Naturel Rétro Cool Calme Classique • Vous pouvez également régler les valeurs des paramètres de styles prédéfinis. Sélectionnez une option de l’Assistant photo, appuyez sur [D], puis réglez la couleur, la saturation, la netteté ou le contraste. • Pour personnaliser l’Assistant photo, sélectionnez , ou , puis réglez la couleur, la saturation, la netteté et le contraste. • Il est impossible de régler en même temps les options de l’Assistant photo et les options de Filtre intelligent. Assistant photo (styles de photo) Fonctions de prise de vue 75 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Mode AF Voici comment régler la mise au point de l’appareil photo en fonction des sujets. Vous pouvez sélectionner un mode de mise au point adapté au sujet, parmi les modes de Mise au point automatique unique, Mise au point automatique continue et Mise au point manuelle. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, la fonction de mise au point automatique s’active. En mode MF, vous devez appuyer sur [C/F] pour effectuer manuellement la mise au point. Dans la plupart des cas, vous pouvez effectuer une mise au point en sélectionnant AF unique. Il est difficile d’effectuer une mise au point sur des sujets se déplaçant rapidement ou ayant des effets d’ombre subtils différents de ceux de l’arrière-plan. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez un mode de mise au point approprié. Pour définir le mode de mise au point automatique En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [F] ĺ une option. • Vous pouvez également effectuer ce réglage en appuyant sur [m] ĺb ĺ Mode AF ĺ option choisie en mode Prise de vue. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction l’objectif utilisé. AF unique La fonction AF unique est appropriée pour les photos de sujets immobiles. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, la mise au point s’établit dans la zone correspondante. Une fois la mise au point effectuée, la zone devient verte. 76 Fonctions de prise de vue > Mode AF AF continu Tant que vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo continue d’effectuer la mise au point automatique. Une fois la zone de mise au point établie, cette dernière reste active sur le sujet même lorsque ce dernier est en mouvement. Ce mode est recommandé pour photographier une personne sur une bicyclette, un chien qui court ou une course automobile. Mise au point manuelle Vous pouvez effectuer la mise au point manuellement sur un sujet en appuyant sur [C/F] sur l’appareil photo. La fonction Aide mise au point manuelle vous permet d’effectuer facilement la mise au point. Lorsque vous réglez la mise au point, la zone de mise au point est agrandie. Ce mode est recommandé pour photographier un objet dont la couleur est similaire à celle de l’arrière-plan, une scène de nuit ou un feu d’artifice. • Après avoir pris une photo avec la mise au point manuelle, appuyez sur [o] ĺ [C/F] pour régler de nouveau manuellement la mise au point. • Si vous utilisez cette fonction, vous ne pouvez pas régler les options Mise au point tactile, Détection des visages, Zone AF, et Lien AE à AF. • Tandis que vous réglez la mise au point, l’échelle de la mise au point manuelle ( ) apparaît. Fonctions de prise de vue 77 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue La fonction Zone AF permet de modifier l’emplacement de la zone de mise au point. D’une manière générale, les appareils photo effectuent une mise au point sur le sujet le plus proche. En présence de plusieurs sujets, il arrive que certains sujets soient involontairement mis au point. Vous pouvez modifier l’emplacement de la zone de mise au point afin d’éviter qu’une mise au point porte sur des sujets non choisis. En sélectionnant une zone de mise au point appropriée, vous pouvez obtenir une photo plus claire et plus nette. Pour définir la zone de mise au point automatique En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Zone AF ĺ une option. Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Mise au point sélection Vous pouvez définir la mise au point sur une zone en particulier. Appliquez un effet hors-mise au point afin de faire ressortir le sujet. La zone de mise au point de la photo ci-dessous a été repositionnée et sa taille a été modifiée afin de l’adapter au visage du sujet. En mode Prise de vue, afin de redimensionner ou de déplacer la zone de mise au point, appuyez sur [o]. Appuyez sur une zone pour y effectuer la mise au point ou appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour déplacer la zone de mise au point, puis effectuez un mouvement de pincement avec deux doigts ou le mouvement inverse pour redimensionner la zone de mise au point. Zone AF 78 Fonctions de prise de vue > Zone AF Mise au point multiple L’appareil photo affiche un rectangle vert sur les zones de la photo où la mise au point est correctement effectuée. La photo est divisée en au moins deux zones et l’appareil photo effectue une mise au point sur chaque zone. Ceci est recommandé pour les photos de paysages. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo affiche les zones de mise au point, comme illustré sur la photo ci-dessous. Fonctions de prise de vue 79 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Détection des visages Utilisez les options de Détection des visages pour faire un autoportrait ou un visage souriant. Pour utiliser la fonction de détection des visages En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Détection des visages ĺ une option. • Lorsque l’appareil photo détecte un visage, il suit automatiquement le visage détecté. • Avec l’option AF Détection Visage, l’appareil photo effectue automatiquement la mise au point sur le cadre blanc. • Selon les options sélectionnées dans l’Assistant photo, la détection des visages peut ne pas être efficace. • Lors d’une mise au point manuelle, la détection des visages peut ne pas être possible. • La détection des visages risque de ne pas fonctionner lorsque : - le sujet est éloigné de l’appareil photo ; - la luminosité est trop forte ou trop faible ; - le sujet n’est pas face à l’appareil photo ; - le sujet porte des lunettes de soleil ou un masque ; - les expressions faciales du sujet changent radicalement ; - le sujet est à contre-jour ou les conditions d’éclairage sont instables. • Lorsque vous définissez les options Détection des visages, la zone AF est automatiquement réglée sur Mise au point multiple. • Selon les options de Détection des visages que vous avez sélectionnées, il est possible que certaines options de prise de vue ne soient pas disponibles. Normale L’appareil photo effectue une mise au point en priorité sur les visages. Il peut détecter jusqu’à 10 visages. Ce paramètre est recommandé pour les photos de groupe. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo effectue une mise au point sur les visages, comme cela est présenté sur la photo ci-dessous. Lors d’une prise de vue d’un groupe de personnes, la mise au point effectuée avec l’appareil photo sur le visage de la personne la plus proche s’affiche en blanc tandis que celle effectuée sur les autres personnes s’affiche en gris. 80 Fonctions de prise de vue > Détection des visages Clin d’œil L’appareil photo déverrouille automatiquement le déclencheur 2 secondes après avoir détecté un clin d’œil. • Clignez des yeux pendant plus de 1 seconde pour une meilleure détection. • La détection des clignements des yeux peut échouer si : - l’appareil photo n’est pas aligné par rapport au niveau des yeux ; - le sujet est dans l’ombre ; - le sujet porte des lunettes ; - le sujet est éloigné de l’appareil photo. Sourire L’appareil photo déverrouille automatiquement le déclencheur lorsqu’il détecte un visage souriant. Lorsque votre sujet a un grand sourire, il est plus facile pour l’appareil photo de le détecter. Fonctions de prise de vue 81 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Mise au point avec suivi La mise au point avec suivi permet de suivre un sujet et d’effectuer automatiquement la mise au point, même si le sujet se déplace ou en cas de changement de cadrage de la prise de vue. Cadre blanc : l’appareil photo effectue un suivi. Cadre vert : la mise au point est effectuée lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course. Cadre rouge : l’appareil photo ne parvient pas à effectuer la mise au point. Sélectionnez ou effectuez la mise au point sur une zone en appuyant sur l’écran. Effectuez ensuite la mise au point sur le sujet et prenez une photo en appuyant sur l’écran. Pour régler la mise au point tactile En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺMise au point tactile ĺ une option. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur sur l’écran et sélectionner une option en mode Prise de vue. Mise au point tactile La mise au point tactile vous permet de sélectionner une zone focale et d’effectuer une mise au point en appuyant sur l’écran. Point AF La zone de mise au point correspond à celle sur laquelle vous appuyez à l’écran tant que la mise au point n’est pas effectuée. Mise au point tactile 82 Fonctions de prise de vue > Mise au point tactile Déclenchement par sélection Une simple pression du doigt suffit pour prendre une photo. Lorsque vous appuyez sur un sujet, l’appareil photo effectue automatiquement la mise au point sur lui et prend une photo. • Si vous ne sélectionnez aucune zone de mise au point, la mise au point automatique est inopérante. • Le suivi peut s’avérer impossible si : - le sujet est trop petit ; - le sujet bouge de manière irrégulière ; - le sujet est à contre-jour ou si la luminosité est insuffisante ; - les couleurs ou les motifs sur le sujet et l’arrière-plan sont identiques ; - des motifs horizontaux, tels que des stores, sont présents ; - l’appareil photo n’est pas stable ; - vous prenez des photos en continu. • Lorsque le suivi ne parvient pas à s’effectuer, la fonctionnalité est réinitialisée. • Si l’appareil photo ne parvient pas à suivre le sujet, la zone de mise au point est réinitialisée. • Si l’appareil photo ne réussit pas à effectuer la mise au point, le cadre de mise au point devient rouge et la fonctionnalité est réinitialisée. Fonctions de prise de vue 83 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue En mode mise au point manuelle, vous devez appuyer sur [C/F] pour effectuer la mise au point. Lorsque vous utilisez la fonction Aide mise au point manuelle, vous pouvez obtenir une meilleure mise au point car la zone de mise au point est agrandie. Cette fonction est disponible uniquement sur les objectifs avec lesquels la mise au point manuelle est possible. Pour définir l’aide à la mise au point manuelle En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Aide mise au point manuelle ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Désactivé Ne pas utiliser la fonction Aide mise au point manuelle. Agrandir x5* Lorsque vous effectuez la mise au point, la zone de mise au point est grossie jusqu’à 5 fois. Agrandir x8 Lorsque vous effectuez la mise au point, la zone de mise au point est grossie jusqu’à 8 fois. Aide mise au point manuelle Fonctions de prise de vue 84 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Utilisez la fonction OIS (stabilisation optique de l’image) pour réduire le bougé de l’appareil photo. La fonction OIS peut ne pas être disponible avec certains objectifs. Le bougé de l’appareil photo tend à se produire dans les endroits sombres ou lors de la prise de vue en intérieur. Dans ces cas-là, l’appareil photo utilise une vitesse d’obturation plus lente afin d’augmenter la quantité de lumière qui pénètre dans l’objectif, ce qui peut donner des photos floues. Vous pouvez éviter ce type de situations en utilisant la fonction OIS. Pour définir les options OIS En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ OIS (anti flou de bougé) ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description Mode 1* : la fonction OIS s’applique uniquement lorsque vous enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à fond ou à mi-course. Mode 2 : la fonction OIS est activée. Désactivé : la fonction OIS est désactivée. Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) Sans correction OIS Avec correction OIS • L’option OIS risque de ne pas fonctionner si : - vous bougez l’appareil photo pour suivre un sujet en mouvement ; - l’appareil photo est instable ; - la vitesse d’obturation est lente (par exemple, si vous sélectionnez Nuit dans le mode Intelligent) ; - le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible ; - vous prenez une photo en gros plan. • Si la fonction OIS est utilisée avec un trépied, les photos peuvent être floues en raison des vibrations du capteur OIS. Désactivez la fonction OIS lorsque vous utilisez un trépied. • Si l’appareil photo est soumis à un choc, l’affichage devient flou. Si cela se produit, éteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le. • Utilisez la fonction OIS uniquement si cela est nécessaire, car la batterie se décharge plus rapidement. • Cette option peut ne pas être disponible avec certains objectifs. Fonctions de prise de vue 85 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Il vous est possible de définir le type de prise de vue, par exemple Continue, Mode Rafale, Retardateur ou Bracketing. Sélectionnez Unique pour prendre une photo à la fois. Sélectionnez Normal continu ou Mode Rafale pour prendre des photos de sujets se déplaçant rapidement. Sélectionnez BKT AE, BKT NB, A. photo Bracketing ou Bracketing de profondeur de champ pour régler l’exposition, la balance des blancs, appliquer des effets de l’assistant photo ou prendre des photos avec différentes profondeurs de champ. Vous pouvez également sélectionner Retardateur pour prendre automatiquement une photo à l’issue d’une durée particulière. Pour modifier la méthode de prise de vue En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C] ĺ une option. • Vous pouvez également effectuer ce réglage en appuyant sur [m] ĺb ĺ Prise de vue ĺ une option en mode Prise de vue. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Unique Prenez une photo à chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. Recommandé pour des conditions de prise de vue courantes. Prise de vue (type) 86 Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type) Normal continu Prenez des photos en continu en appuyant sur le [Déclencheur]. Vous pouvez prendre jusqu’à 6 photos par seconde. La vitesse maximale de prise de vue est de 6 images par seconde. Elle ralentira au bout environ de 11 clichés au format JPEG et de 4 clichés au format RAW. (Cela peut varier en fonction des caractéristiques techniques de la carte mémoire.) Mode Rafale Prenez successivement 10 photos par seconde (3 secondes), 15 photos par seconde (2 secondes) ou 30 photos par seconde (1 seconde) lorsque vous appuyez une fois sur le [Déclencheur]. Cette fonctionnalité est recommandée pour prendre des photos de mouvements rapides ou de sujets se déplaçant rapidement, par exemple lors de courses automobiles. • Pour définir le nombre de clichés, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C] → Mode Rafale, puis appuyez sur [D]. • Le format photo est réglé sur 5M. • L’enregistrement d’une photo peut prendre plus de temps. • Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le flash avec cette option. • La vitesse d’obturation doit être supérieure à 1/30 seconde. • Les photos capturées avec cette option peuvent être légèrement agrandies lors de l’enregistrement. • Vous ne pouvez pas régler l’option ISO à une valeur supérieure à ISO 3200. • Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW. 87 Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type) Retardateur Prenez une photo à l’issue d’une durée particulière. Vous pouvez régler le retardateur sur un délai compris entre 2 et 30 secondes. • Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour interrompre la prise de vue. • Pour définir les détails du retardateur, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C] ĺ Retardateur, puis appuyez sur [D]. Bracketing Exposition automatique (BKT AE) Après avoir appuyé sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo prend 3 photos consécutives : l’originale, une un peu plus sombre et une autre un peu plus claire. Utilisez un trépied afin d’éviter d’obtenir un résultat flou lors de la prise continue des trois clichés par l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez régler les paramètres dans le menu Réglage Bracketing. Exposition -2 Original Exposition +2 Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option. 88 Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type) Bracketing Balance des blancs (BKT NB) Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo prend 3 photos consécutives : l’originale et deux autres avec des paramètres de balance des blancs différents. La photo originale est réalisée lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. Les deux autres sont réglées automatiquement en fonction de la balance des blancs que vous avez définie. Vous pouvez régler les paramètres dans le menu Réglage Bracketing. WB-2 Original WB+2 • Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option. • Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW. Bracketing Assistant photo (A. photo Bracketing) Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo réalise trois clichés consécutifs, chacun avec différents paramètres de l’assistant photo. L’appareil photo effectue une prise de vue et applique les trois options de l’assistant photo que vous avez définies pour la photo prise. Vous pouvez sélectionner trois paramètres différents dans le menu Réglage Bracketing. Accentué Standard Rétro • Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option. • Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW. 89 Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type) Bracketing de profondeur de champ Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo réalise trois clichés consécutifs, chacun avec une profondeur différente en ajustant la valeur d’ouverture. Utilisez un trépied afin d’éviter d’obtenir un résultat flou lors de la prise continue des trois clichés par l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez régler les paramètres dans le menu Réglage Bracketing. • Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option. • Cette fonction est disponible uniquement en mode Programme ou Priorité ouverture. • Si la valeur d’ouverture est réglée au maximum ou au minimum, deux photos seront prises avec la valeur d’ouverture maximum ou minimum. Fonctions de prise de vue 90 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Pour obtenir une photo réaliste du sujet, la quantité de lumière doit être constante. Lorsque la source de luminosité varie, vous pouvez utiliser un flash pour obtenir une quantité de lumière stable. Sélectionnez des paramètres appropriés en fonction d’une source de lumière et d’un sujet. Pour définir les options du flash En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Flash ĺune option. Icône Description Désactivé : ne pas utiliser le flash. A Flash intelligent : l’appareil photo règle automatiquement l’intensité du flash en fonction de la quantité de lumière ambiante. A Automatique : le flash se déclenche automatiquement dans les endroits sombres. Yeux rouges auto : le flash se déclenche automatiquement et réduit l’effet yeux rouges. Contre jour : le flash se déclenche chaque fois que vous prenez une photo. (La luminosité est automatiquement ajustée.) Ctre jour + Yeux rouges : le flash se déclenche et réduit l’effet yeux rouges chaque fois que vous prenez une photo. 1er Rideau : le flash se déclenche immédiatement après l’ouverture de l’obturateur. L’appareil photo capture plus rapidement et plus nettement la photo d’un sujet au cours d’un mouvement. Direction du déplacement de la boule Icône Description 2e Rideau : le flash se déclenche juste avant que l’obturateur ne se referme. L’appareil photo prend plus lentement et plus clairement la photo d’un sujet au cours d’un mouvement. Direction du déplacement de la boule • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. • Un court laps de temps se déroule entre les deux déclenchements du flash. Ne bougez pas tant que le flash ne s’est pas déclenché une seconde fois. • Si vous sélectionnez Désactivé, le flash ne se déclenche pas même si un flash externe est installé. • Pour certains objectifs, l’objectif peut bloquer la lumière provenant du flash interne. Si cela se produit, utilisez un flash externe en option. • Si vous fixez un autre objectif que celui fourni à l’aide d’une bague d’adaptation, le flash ne se déclenche pas. Utilisez uniquement des flashs homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de flashs externes incompatibles peut endommager l’appareil photo. Flash 91 Fonctions de prise de vue > Flash Réduction de l’effet yeux rouges Si le flash se déclenche lorsque vous photographiez une personne dans un endroit sombre, il est possible qu’une lueur rouge apparaisse dans ses yeux. Pour réduire l’effet yeux rouges, sélectionnez Yeux rouges auto ou Ctre jour + Yeux rouges. Sans réduction des yeux rouges Avec réduction des yeux rouges Si le sujet est trop éloigné de l’appareil photo ou se déplace lorsque le flash se déclenche, il se peut que l’effet yeux rouges ne soit pas corrigé. Réglage de l’intensité du flash Lorsque le flash est activé, réglez son intensité de ±2 niveaux. Pour définir l’intensité du flash En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur ĺ Flash ĺ sélectionnez l’option de votre choix ĺ appuyez sur [D] ĺ [C/F]. Retour Définir Flash : Contre jour • Vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur +/- pour régler l’intensité. • Le réglage de l’intensité du flash risque d’être sans effet si : - le sujet est trop près de l’appareil photo ; - vous avez sélectionné une sensibilité ISO élevée ; - la valeur d’exposition est trop élevée ou trop faible. • Dans certains modes de prise de vue, cette fonction n’est pas accessible. • Si le sujet est trop rapproché lorsque vous utilisez le flash, cela peut refléter la lumière et assombrir la photo. Vérifiez que le sujet est situé à la distance recommandée, qui peut varier selon l’objectif utilisé. Fonctions de prise de vue 92 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Le mode de mesure de l’exposition correspond à la manière dont l’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière. L’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière, puis utilise cette mesure dans de nombreux modes afin de régler divers paramètres. Par exemple, si un sujet semble plus foncé qu’il ne l’est en réalité, l’appareil photo effectue une prise de vue surexposée de ce sujet. Si un sujet semble plus clair qu’il ne l’est en réalité, l’appareil photo effectue une prise de vue sous-exposée de ce sujet. La luminosité et l’ambiance générale de la photo peuvent également être affectées par la façon dont l’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière. Sélectionnez des paramètres appropriés pour chaque type de conditions de prise de vue. Pour définir une option de mesure de l’exposition En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Mesure de l'exposition ĺ une option. Multiple Le mode Multiple calcule la quantité de lumière dans différentes zones. Lorsque la lumière est suffisante, ou lorsqu’elle ne l’est pas, l’appareil photo règle l’exposition en équilibrant la luminosité générale de la scène. Ce mode est adapté aux photos courantes. Mesure de l’exposition 93 Fonctions de prise de vue > Mesure de l’exposition Centrée Le mode Centrée effectue des calculs sur une zone plus large qu’en mode Sélective. Il détermine la quantité de lumière dans la partie centrale de la photo (60 – 80%) ainsi que sur le reste de la photo (20 – 40%). Ce mode est recommandé dans les cas où la différence de luminosité entre un sujet et un arrière-plan est faible, ou qu’une partie du sujet est grande au regard de la composition générale de la photo. Sélective La mesure Sélective calcule la quantité de lumière au centre. Lorsque vous réalisez une prise de vue dans des conditions de fort contre-jour derrière un sujet, l’appareil photo règle l’exposition afin de capturer correctement ce dernier. Par exemple, lorsque vous sélectionnez le mode Multiple dans des conditions de fort contre-jour, l’appareil photo considère que la quantité globale de lumière est élevée, ce qui assombrit la photo. Le mode Sélective permet d’éviter cette situation, car la quantité de lumière est calculée dans une zone définie. Le sujet est clair alors que l’arrière plan est sombre. Le mode Sélective est recommandé dans un cas comme celui-ci, qui présente une différence d’exposition importante entre un sujet et un arrière-plan. 94 Fonctions de prise de vue > Mesure de l’exposition Mesure de la valeur d’exposition de la zone de mise au point Lorsque cette fonction est activée, l’appareil photo applique automatiquement une exposition optimale en calculant la luminosité de la zone de mise au point. Cette option est disponible uniquement si vous sélectionnez la mesure de l’exposition Sélective ou Multiple, et l’option Mise au point sélection. Pour appliquer cette fonction En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Lien AE à AF ĺ une option. Fonctions de prise de vue 95 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Cette fonction corrige automatiquement la perte de luminosité due à des différences de niveaux d’exposition sur la photo. Pour définir les options de Plage dynamique En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Plage dynamique ĺ une option. Sans effet de plage dynamique Avec effet de plage dynamique * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description Désactivé* : ne pas utiliser la Plage dynamique. Plage intelligente+ : corriger la perte de luminosité. HDR : prendre 3 photos avec différentes expositions, puis les associer afin de créer automatiquement une image unique. • Vous ne pouvez pas régler l’option ISO à une valeur supérieure à ISO 3200. • Les options Plage dynamique ne peuvent pas être définies avec des options de prise de vue autres que Unique ou Retardateur. • Il est impossible de régler en même temps les options de Plage dynamique avec les options Filtre intelligent ou Assistant photo. • Les options Plage dynamique ne peuvent pas être réglées avec la fonction Bulb. Plage dynamique Fonctions de prise de vue 96 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Le filtre intelligent vous permet d’appliquer des effets spéciaux à vos photos ou vidéos. Vous pouvez sélectionner diverses options de filtre pour créer des effets spéciaux difficiles à obtenir avec des objectifs normaux. Pour appliquer les options de filtre intelligent En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Filtre intelligent ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Désactivé* Aucun effet Vignettage Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un fort contraste et un effet de dégradé intense, caractéristiques des appareils Lomo. Miniature Appliquer un effet de plongée pour que le sujet apparaisse plus petit. Esquisse Appliquer un effet d’esquisse au crayon. Œil de poisson Déformer les objets en gros plan pour imiter l’effet visuel d’un objectif ultra grand angle. Il est impossible de régler en même temps les options du Filtre intelligent et les options de l’Assistant photo. Filtre intelligent Fonctions de prise de vue 97 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue L’appareil photo définit automatiquement l’exposition en mesurant les niveaux de lumière à partir de la composition d’une photo et de la position d’un sujet. Si la valeur d’exposition définie par l’appareil photo est plus élevée ou plus basse que celle que vous attendiez, vous pouvez alors la régler manuellement. La valeur d’exposition peut être réglée en faisant varier les valeurs de ±3. L’appareil photo affiche un message d’avertissement en rouge pour chaque niveau d’exposition au-delà d’une plage de ±3. Pour régler la valeur d’exposition, appuyez sur le voyant de niveau d’exposition à l’écran ou sur ĺ EV et réglez la valeur d’exposition. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [I] pour sélectionner la valeur d’exposition et appuyer sur [C/F] pour la régler. Vous pouvez vérifier la valeur d’exposition par rapport à l’indicateur de niveau d’exposition. Indicateur de niveau d’exposition Exposition augmentée (plus clair) Exposition réduite (plus sombre) Mise en garde à propos de l’exposition Indice d’exposition standard -2 Original +2 Compensation de l’exposition Fonctions de prise de vue 98 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Si vous ne parvenez pas à obtenir une exposition adéquate à cause d’un fort contraste de luminosité, verrouillez l’exposition, puis prenez la photo. Pour verrouiller l’exposition, définissez les éléments de la photo sur lesquels vous souhaitez calculer le niveau d’exposition et appuyez sur la touche de personnalisation. (lorsque la fonction de la touche de personnalisation est réglée sur AEL) (p. 151) Une fois l’exposition verrouillée, pointez l’objectif sur le sujet et appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. Verrouillage de l’exposition Fonctions de prise de vue 99 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Les fonctions vidéo disponibles sont présentées ci-dessous. Format vidéo Définissez le format vidéo. Pour définir les options du format vidéo En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ Format vidéo ĺ une option. Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur NTSC * Paramètre par défaut Icône Taille Recommandé pour * 1920X1080 (30 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur Full HD. 1280X720 (30 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD. 640X480 (30 ips) (4:3) Visionner sur un téléviseur. 320X240 (30 ips) (4:3) Publier sur un site Web via un réseau sans fil (30 secondes maximum). Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur PAL * Paramètre par défaut Icône Taille Recommandé pour * 1920X1080 (25 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur Full HD. 1280X720 (25 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD. 640X480 (25 ips) (4:3) Visionner sur un téléviseur. 320X240 (25 ips) (4:3) Publier sur un site Web via un réseau sans fil (30 secondes maximum). Fonctions vidéo 100 Fonctions de prise de vue > Fonctions vidéo Qualité vidéo Définissez la qualité vidéo à utiliser. Pour définir les options de la qualité vidéo En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ Qualité vidéo ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Extension Description MP4 (H.264) Normale : enregistrer des vidéos en qualité normale. MP4 (H.264) HQ* : enregistrer des vidéos en haute qualité. Multi-mouvements Régler la vitesse de lecture d’une vidéo. Pour définir les options de vitesse de lecture En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺMultimouvements ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description x0.25 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner au 1/4 de la vitesse normale. (Disponible uniquement à la résolution 640x480 ou 320x240) x1* : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale. x5 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale X 5. x10 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale X 10. x20 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale X 20. • Si vous sélectionnez une option différente de x1, les fonctions d’enregistrement sonore et de correction des distorsions ne seront pas prises en charge. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. 101 Fonctions de prise de vue > Fonctions vidéo Voix Il arrive parfois que certaines vidéos muettes soient plus attractives que celles filmées avec le son. Désactivez l’enregistrement vocal afin de réaliser une vidéo muette. Pour définir les options de voix En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ Voix ĺ une option. Fondu Vous pouvez appliquer un fondu au début ou à la fin d’une scène en utilisant la fonction de fondu sur l’appareil photo, sans avoir recours à un ordinateur. Appliquez l’effet de fondu entrant pour qu’une scène commence progressivement par cet effet. Appliquez l’effet de fondu sortant pour qu’une scène se termine progressivement par cet effet. Utilisez cette fonction de manière appropriée pour vous permettre d’ajouter des effets spectaculaires à vos vidéos. Pour définir les options de fondu En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺFondu ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description Désactivé* : fonction de fondu non utilisée. Entrant : la scène est fondue progressivement en début de séquence. Sortant : la scène est fondue progressivement en fin de séquence. Entrant-Sortant : le fondu est appliqué au début et à la fin de la scène. Lorsque la fonction de fondu est utilisée, l’enregistrement d’un fichier peut prendre plus de temps. Chapitre 3 Lecture / Retouche Voici comment lire et retoucher des photos et des vidéos. Pour retoucher des fichiers sur un ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section 6. 103 Lecture / Retouche Voici comment afficher les miniatures de vos photos et vidéos, et comment protéger ou supprimer des fichiers. Si vous n’effectuez aucune opération pendant un certain temps, les informations et icônes à l’écran disparaissent. Ces éléments réapparaissent lorsque vous réutilisez l’appareil photo. Affichage de photos 1 Appuyez sur [y]. • Le fichier capturé le plus récent s’affiche. 2 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour faire défiler les fichiers. • Vous pouvez également faire glisser l’image vers la gauche ou la droite pour passer à un autre fichier. Il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas modifier ou reproduire des fichiers capturés avec d’autres appareils photo en raison de tailles ou de codecs non pris en charge. Utilisez un ordinateur ou un autre dispositif pour modifier ou reproduire ces fichiers. Affichage des images sous forme de miniatures Pour rechercher des photos et des vidéos de votre choix, convertissezles en vues Miniatures en appuyant sur [I] ou sur en mode Lecture. L’affichage sous forme de miniatures permet de visionner plusieurs images à la fois afin de parcourir et de trouver facilement les éléments que vous recherchez. Vous pouvez également classer et afficher les fichiers par catégorie, telles que la date ou le type de fichier. En vue Miniatures, appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Afficher ĺ un élément pour sélectionner le mode vue Miniatures. Recherche et gestion de fichiers 104 Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers Affichage de fichiers par catégorie 1 En vue Miniatures, appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Filtrer ĺune catégorie. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Tout* Afficher les fichiers normalement. Date Afficher les fichiers en fonction de leur date d’enregistrement. Type de fichier Afficher les fichiers par type. 2 Sélectionnez une liste afin de l’ouvrir. 3 Sélectionnez un fichier afin de l’afficher. Visionnage de fichiers sous forme de dossiers Les prises de vues en continue et en rafale apparaissent sous forme de dossiers. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un dossier, toutes les photos sont automatiquement lues. La suppression d’un dossier entraîne celle de toutes les photos qu’il contient. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [C/F] pour accéder au dossier voulu. • Vous pouvez également faire glisser l’image vers la gauche ou la droite pour accéder au dossier voulu. • L’appareil photo lit automatiquement les photos contenues dans le dossier. 2 Appuyez sur [o] pour ouvrir le dossier. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur le dossier à l’écran pour ouvrir le dossier. 105 Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers 3 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour accéder à un autre fichier. • Vous pouvez également faire glisser l’image vers la gauche ou la droite pour passer à un autre fichier. 4 Appuyez sur [o] pour revenir au mode Lecture. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur pour revenir au mode Lecture. Protection de fichiers Protégez vos fichiers contre toute suppression accidentelle. 1 En mode Lecture, faites défiler l’affichage pour atteindre un fichier. 2 Appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Protéger ĺ Activé. Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer ou faire pivoter un fichier protégé. 106 Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers Suppression de fichiers En mode Lecture, supprimez des fichiers pour gagner de l’espace sur la carte mémoire. Les fichiers protégés ne sont pas supprimés. Suppression d’un seul fichier Vous pouvez sélectionner un seul fichier et le supprimer. 1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez un fichier et appuyez sur [n]. 2 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui. Suppression de plusieurs fichiers Vous pouvez effectuer une sélection multiple de fichiers pour les supprimer. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Supprimer ĺ Suppression multiple. • Vous pouvez également, en mode Miniatures, appuyer sur [n], puis sélectionner les fichiers à supprimer. 2 Sélectionnez les fichiers à supprimer, puis appuyez sur [C/F], puis sur [o]. • Appuyez sur [o] à nouveau pour annuler votre sélection. 3 Appuyez sur [n]. 4 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui. Suppression de tous les fichiers Vous pouvez supprimer tous les fichiers de la carte mémoire en même temps. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m]. 2 Sélectionnez z ĺ Supprimer ĺ Supprimer tout. 3 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui. 107 Lecture / Retouche Agrandissement d’une photo En mode Lecture, vous pouvez agrandir les photos lorsque vous les visualisez. Effectuez un mouvement de pincement avec deux doigts sur l’écran pour réduire une photo ou le mouvement inverse pour l’agrandir. Faites glisser la photo pour déplacer la zone agrandie. Vous pouvez également utiliser la fonction Recadrer afin d’extraire une partie de l’image affichée sur l’écran et d’enregistrer la photo découpée en tant que nouveau fichier. Zone agrandie Agrandissement (L’agrandissement maximum possible peut varier en fonction de la résolution.) Retour Rogner Pour Procédez comme suit Déplacer la zone agrandie Appuyer sur [D/I/C/F]. Rogner la photo agrandie Appuyez sur [o]. (enregistrée en tant que nouveau fichier) Revenir à l’image originale Appuyez sur [m]. Appuyez deux fois sur une zone pour l’agrandir rapidement. Visionnage d’un diaporama Vous pouvez visionner les photos sous forme de diaporama et ajouter des effets de transition entre chaque photo. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m]. 2 Sélectionnez z ĺ Options diaporama. 3 Choisissez une option d’effet de diaporama. • Passez à l’étape 4 pour démarrer le diaporama sans aucun effet. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Mode de lecture Activer une option de répétition du diaporama. (Une lecture*, Répétition) Intervalle • Définir l’intervalle entre l’affichage des photos. (1 s*, 3 s, 5 s, 10 s) • Les intervalles peuvent uniquement être définis si l’effet de changement de scène est réglé sur Désactivé. Effet • Définir un changement de scène entre les photos. • Sélectionnez Désactivé pour annuler les effets. Affichage de photos 108 Lecture / Retouche > Affichage de photos 4 Appuyez sur [m]. 5 Sélectionnez Démarrer diaporama. 6 Visionnez le diaporama. • Appuyez sur [o] pour mettre en pause. • Appuyez à nouveau sur [o] pour reprendre la lecture. • Appuyez sur [m] pour interrompre le diaporama et revenir au mode Lecture. Rotation automatique En activant la fonction Rotation auto, l’appareil photo fait pivoter automatiquement les photos prises verticalement afin qu’elles s’affichent horizontalement à l’écran. Pour définir les options de rotation automatique En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Rotation auto ĺ une option. 109 Lecture / Retouche En mode Lecture, vous pouvez lire une vidéo, en extraire une image ou encore la rogner et l’enregistrer en tant que nouveau fichier. Arrêter Icône Description Afficher le fichier précédent / Retour rapide. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur l’icône lors de la lecture d’une vidéo, la vitesse de lecture change selon la séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.) Mettre une pause ou reprendre la lecture. Afficher le fichier suivant / Avance rapide. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur l’icône lors de la lecture d’une vidéo, la vitesse de lecture change selon la séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.) Régler le volume ou couper le son. Avance ou retour rapide de la lecture Pour avancer ou rembobiner un fichier vidéo lors de sa lecture, utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes. • Appuyez sur . Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur l’icône, la vitesse de lecture change selon l’ordre suivant : 2X, 4X, 8X. • Appuyez sur [C/F]. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur la touche, la vitesse de lecture change selon l’ordre suivant : 2X, 4X, 8X. • Faites glisser les poignées qui apparaissent sur la barre de progression à gauche ou à droite. Vous pouvez modifier la position de lecture dans la vidéo. • Faites glisser une zone de l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite. Vous pouvez modifier la position de lecture dans la vidéo. Lecture de vidéos 110 Lecture / Retouche > Lecture de vidéos Réglage de la luminosité d’une vidéo Réglez la luminosité d’une vidéo au cours de sa lecture. Pour régler la luminosité d’une vidéo Appuyez sur le côté gauche de l’écran ĺ faites glisser l’affichage vers le haut ou le bas. Arrêter Réglage du volume d’une vidéo Réglez le volume d’une vidéo au cours de sa lecture. Pour régler le volume d’une vidéo Touchez la moitié droite de l’afficheur ĺ faites-la glisser vers le haut ou le bas. Arrêter Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [D/I] pour régler le volume d’une vidéo. 111 Lecture / Retouche > Lecture de vidéos 9 Appuyez sur Recadrer pour raccourcir une vidéo. • Vous pouvez définir la scène à rogner en faisant glisser les poignées qui apparaissent sur la barre de progression. 10 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui. • La durée de la vidéo d’origine doit être d’au moins 10 secondes. • L’appareil photo enregistre la vidéo modifiée en tant que nouveau fichier et conserve la vidéo d’origine intacte. • L’endroit où vous souhaitez que le recadrage commence peut être sélectionné 2 secondes après le début de la lecture. Extraction d’une image pendant la lecture 1 Lors du visionnage d’une vidéo, appuyez sur [o] ou à l’endroit où vous souhaitez extraire une image. 2 Appuyez sur Enregistrer. • La résolution de l’image extraite est la même que celle de la vidéo d’origine. • L’image extraite est enregistrée en tant que nouveau fichier. Recadrage d’une vidéo au cours de la lecture 1 En mode Lecture, faites défiler l’affichage pour atteindre une vidéo, puis appuyez sur [m]. 2 Sélectionnez Recadrer la vidéo. 3 Appuyez sur [o] ou pour démarrer la lecture de la vidéo. 4 Appuyez sur [o] ou à l’endroit où le recadrage doit débuter. 5 Appuyez sur Point de départ. 6 Appuyez sur [o] ou pour reprendre la lecture de la vidéo. 7 Appuyez sur [o] ou à l’endroit où le recadrage doit se terminer. 8 Appuyez sur Point final. 112 Lecture / Retouche Les photos retouchées sont enregistrées en tant que nouveaux fichiers, sous des noms de fichiers différents. Il est impossible de retoucher les photos prises dans certains modes par le biais de la fonction Édition photo. Pour retoucher des images En mode Lecture, faites défiler l’affichage pour atteindre une photo, puis appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Retoucher l'image ĺune option. • Il est possible que certaines images ne puissent pas être retouchées à l’aide de la fonction Édition photo. Dans ce cas, utilisez le logiciel de retouche fourni. • Les fichiers RAW ne peuvent pas être retouchés à l’aide la fonction Retoucher l’image. Dans ce cas, utilisez le logiciel de retouche fourni. • L’appareil photo enregistre les photos retouchées en tant que nouveau fichier. • Lorsque vous retouchez des photos, l’appareil photo les enregistre automatiquement à une résolution inférieure. Les photos pivotées ou redimensionnées manuellement ne sont pas automatiquement converties à une résolution inférieure. • Les photos visionnées en tant que dossier ne peuvent pas être retouchées. Ouvrez le dossier et sélectionnez une photo pour retoucher chacune des photos. Rognage d’une photo 1 Appuyez sur ĺ . 2 Faites glisser le coin du cadre pour redimensionner la zone. 3 Faites glisser le cadre pour déplacer la zone. 4 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur pour enregistrer. Retouche de photos 113 Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos Rotation d’une photo 1 Appuyez sur ĺ . 2 Appuyez sur une option. Rotation : Droite (90°) 3 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur pour enregistrer. • Vous pouvez également faire pivoter une photo en mode Lecture en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant z ĺ Rotation ĺ une option voulue. • L’appareil photo écrase le fichier d’origine. Redimensionnement de photos Modifiez la taille d’une photo pour l’enregistrer sous forme de nouveau fichier. 1 Appuyez sur ĺ . 2 Appuyez sur une option. Redimensionner : 3888 x 2592 3 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur pour enregistrer. Les options de redimensionnement disponibles dépendent de la taille d’origine de la photo. 114 Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos Réglage des photos Vous pouvez modifier les photos prises en réglant la luminosité, le contraste ou la couleur. 1 Appuyez sur . 2 Appuyez sur une option de réglage. • Si vous avez sélectionné (Réglage automatique), passez à l’étape 6. Icône Description Original (revenir à l’image originale) Réglage automatique Luminosité Contraste Saturation Réglage RVB Température couleur Exposition 3 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler l’option. • Vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur +/- pour régler l’option. 4 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur . 5 Appuyez sur . 6 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur pour enregistrer. 115 Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos Retouche de visages 1 Appuyez sur ĺ . 2 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler l’option. • Vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur +/- pour régler l’option. • Au fur et à mesure que la valeur augmente, la couleur de la peau devient plus lumineuse et plus douce. 3 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur pour enregistrer. 116 Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos Effets de filtre intelligent Appliquez des effets spéciaux à vos photos. 1 Appuyez sur , puis sur une option. Filtre intelligent : Vignettage Option Description Désactivé Aucun effet Vignettage Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un fort contraste et un effet de dégradé intense, caractéristiques des appareils Lomo. Miniature Appliquer un effet de plongée pour que le sujet apparaisse plus petit. Onirique Masquer les imperfections du visage ou appliquer des effets doux. Esquisse Appliquer un effet d’esquisse au crayon. Option Description Effet ultra grand angle Déformer les objets en gros plan pour imiter l’effet visuel d’un objectif ultra grand angle. Classique Appliquer un effet noir et blanc. Rétro Appliquer un effet sépia. Peinture à l'huile Appliquer un effet de peinture à l’huile. Dessin Appliquer un effet de bande dessinée. Peinture à l'encre Appliquer un effet d’esquisse à l’encre. Filtre croisé Ajouter des lignes qui irradient vers l’extérieur depuis les objets brillants pour imiter l’effet visuel d’un filtre croisé. Prise de vue zoom Brouiller les bords d’une photo pour souligner les sujets placés au milieu. 2 Appuyez sur [o] ou sur . 3 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer. Chapitre 4 Réseau sans fil Voici comment vous connecter à des réseaux locaux sans fil et à utiliser des fonctions de connectivité. 118 Réseau sans fil Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Cette section décrit comment se connecter via un point d’accès lorsqu’un réseau local sans fil se trouve dans le champ de détection. Vous pouvez également configurer les paramètres réseau. Connexion à un réseau local sans fil 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sélectionnez , , , , ou . 3 Suivre les instructions qui s’affichent jusqu’à l’apparition de l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi. • Dans certains modes, appuyez sur [m], puis sélectionnez Paramètres Wi-Fi. • L’appareil photo recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles. 4 Sélectionnez un point d’accès. Samsung1 Samsung2 Samsung3 Paramètres Wi-Fi Actualiser Retour • Sélectionnez Actualiser pour actualiser la liste des points d’accès disponibles. • Sélectionnez Ajouter mode sans fil pour ajouter un point d’accès manuellement. Le nom du point d’accès doit être en anglais pour ajouter le point d’accès manuellement. Icône Description Point d’accès Ad hoc Point d’accès sécurisé Point d’accès WPS Force du signal Appuyez sur [F] ou appuyez sur pour définir les options de paramètres réseau. • Lorsque vous choisissez un point d’accès sécurisé, une fenêtre contextuelle apparaît. Saisissez le mot de passe requis pour vous connecter au réseau local sans fil. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte » (p. 122). • Lorsqu’une page de connexion apparaît, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation du navigateur de connexion » pour en savoir plus (p. 120). • Si vous choisissez un point d’accès non sécurisé, l’appareil photo se connecte au réseau local sans fil. • Si vous choisissez un point d’accès pris en charge par un profil WPS, sélectionnez ĺ Connexion PIN WPS, puis saisissez le code PIN sur le périphérique du point d’accès. Vous avez également la possibilité de vous connecter à un point d’accès pris en charge par un profil WPS en sélectionnant ĺ Connexion via la touche WPS sur l’appareil photo et en appuyant sur la touche WPS sur le périphérique du point d’accès. • Si un message vous informe de la réglementation en vigueur sur la collecte de données, lisez son contenu et acceptez ses conditions. 119 Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Configuration des options de réseau 1 Dans l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi, accédez à un point d’accès, puis appuyez sur [F] ou . 2 Pour chaque option, précisez les informations requises. Option Description Mot de passe réseau Saisir le mot de passe réseau. Configuration IP Définir l’adresse IP automatiquement ou manuellement. Configuration manuelle de l’adresse IP 1 Dans l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi, accédez à un point d’accès, puis appuyez sur [F] ou . 2 Sélectionnez Configuration IP ĺ Manuel. 3 Pour chaque option, précisez les informations requises. Option Description IP Saisir l’adresse IP statique. Masque sousréseau Indiquer le masque sous-réseau. Passerelle Indiquer la passerelle. Serveur DNS Saisir l’adresse DNS. 120 Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Utilisation du navigateur de connexion Vous pouvez saisir vos informations de session via le navigateur lors de la connexion à certains points d’accès, services de partage ou serveurs Cloud. Icône Description Fermer le navigateur de connexion. Accéder à la page précédente. Accéder à la page suivante. Arrêter le chargement de la page. Recharger la page. • Il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas sélectionner certaines options selon la page à laquelle vous êtes connecté. Il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement. • Le navigateur de connexion peut ne pas se fermer automatiquement après la connexion à certaines pages. Si cela se produit, fermez le navigateur en appuyant sur , puis poursuivez vos manipulations. • La page de connexion peut s’avérer plus longue à charger en fonction de sa taille ou du débit du réseau. Si cela se produit, patientez jusqu’à ce que la fenêtre de connexion s’affiche. 121 Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau • Certaines fonctions Wi-Fi ne sont pas disponibles si vous n’insérez pas de carte mémoire. • La qualité de la connexion réseau est déterminée par les points d’accès. • Plus la distance entre l’appareil photo et le point d’accès est grande, plus ce premier met du temps à se connecter au réseau. • Si un périphérique à proximité utilise une fréquence radio identique à celle de l’appareil photo, il se peut que votre connexion s’interrompe. • Si le nom de votre point d’accès n’est pas en anglais, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne puisse pas localiser le périphérique ou que son nom apparaisse de façon incorrecte. • Pour connaître les paramètres réseau et le mot de passe requis, contactez votre administrateur réseau ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau. • Si un réseau local sans fil requiert l’authentification du fournisseur d’accès, il se peut que vous ne soyez pas en mesure de vous connecter audit réseau. Pour vous connecter au réseau local sans fil, contactez votre fournisseur de service réseau. • En fonction du type de chiffrement, la longueur du mot de passe peut varier. • En fonction des conditions environnantes, il peut s’avérer impossible d’établir une connexion à un réseau local sans fil. • Il est possible que l’appareil photo affiche une imprimante compatible avec les réseaux locaux sans fil figurant dans la liste des points d’accès. Vous ne pouvez cependant pas vous connecter au réseau par le biais d’une imprimante. • Il est impossible de connecter l’appareil photo simultanément à un réseau et à un téléviseur. • La connexion à un réseau peut entraîner des frais supplémentaires. Ces coûts varient en fonction des conditions de votre forfait. • Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à un réseau local sans fil, essayez un autre point d’accès dans la liste des points d'accès disponibles. • Il se peut qu’une page de connexion apparaisse lorsque vous sélectionnez des réseaux locaux sans fil gratuits mis à disposition par certains fournisseurs d’accès réseau. Saisissez votre ID et votre mot de passe pour vous connecter au réseau local sans fil. Pour en savoir plus sur l’inscription à ces services ou à un service particulier, contactez les fournisseurs d’accès réseau en question. • Soyez prudent lors de la saisie d’informations personnelles pour vous connecter à un point d’accès. Ne saisissez aucune information de paiement sur l’appareil photo. Le fabricant ne peut être tenu responsable de tout problème survenant suite à la saisie de telles informations. • Les connexions réseau disponibles peuvent varier selon le pays. • La fonction de réseau local sans fil de l’appareil photo doit être conforme à la législation en matière de transmission par radiofréquences dans votre pays ou région. Pour assurer une compatibilité totale, n’utilisez la fonction de réseau local sans fil que dans le pays dans lequel vous avez acheté l’appareil photo. • Les opérations à suivre pour régler les paramètres réseau peuvent différer en fonction des conditions du réseau. • Ne tentez pas d’accéder à un réseau dont l’accès ne vous est pas autorisé. • Avant de vous connecter à des réseaux, assurez-vous que la batterie est entièrement rechargée. • Vous ne pouvez pas télécharger ou envoyer des fichiers capturés dans certains modes. • Les fichiers transférés vers un autre appareil peuvent ne pas être pris en charge par cet appareil. Dans ce cas, utilisez un ordinateur pour lire les fichiers. 122 Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Saisie de texte Cette section décrit comment saisir du texte. Les icônes dans le tableau vous permettent de déplacer le curseur, de modifier la casse, etc. Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour faire défiler jusqu’à la touche souhaitée, puis appuyez sur [o] pour la saisir. Ou appuyez sur une touche pour la saisir. X Annuler Effectué Icône Description Déplacer le curseur. En mode ABC, changer la casse. X Supprimer la dernière lettre. Annuler Arrêter la saisie de texte et revenir à la page précédente. Passer du mode Symbole au mode ABC. Ajouter un espace. Effectué Enregistrer le texte à l’écran. • Dans certains modes, vous pouvez saisir uniquement du texte exclusivement à l’aide des caractères anglais, quelle que soit la langue d’affichage choisie. • Appuyez sur [y] pour aller jusqu’à Effectué directement. • Le nombre de caractères à saisir varie en fonction de la situation. • L’affichage peut différer en fonction du mode de saisie. 123 Réseau sans fil Utilisation de la fonction NFC (Partage par contact) Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Lecture (Partage instantané) En mode Lecture, l’appareil photo transfère automatiquement le fichier actif sur le smartphone lorsque vous procédez à la lecture d’une balise depuis un dispositif compatible NFC. • Pour transférer plusieurs fichiers, sélectionnez des fichiers depuis l’écran Miniatures, puis procédez à la lecture d’une balise depuis un dispositif compatible NFC. Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Wi-Fi Sélectionnez MobileLink ou Remote Viewfinder depuis la fenêtre qui s’affiche en procédant à la lecture d’une balise depuis un dispositif compatible NFC (p. 126, 130). Placez l’antenne NFC du smartphone à proximité du symbole NFC de l’appareil photo pour lancer la fonctionnalité d’enregistrement automatique des photos sur le smartphone ou pour utiliser le smartphone comme déclencheur à distance. Vous pouvez également transférer des fichiers vers un dispositif compatible NFC en mode Lecture. • Cette fonctionnalité est prise en charge par les smartphones compatibles NFC fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android. Il est recommandé d’utiliser la dernière version. Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible pour les appareils iOS. • Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps ou Google Play Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement. • Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca. • Pour se connecter à une balise NFC, placez le dispositif compatible NFC à proximité de la balise NFC de l’appareil photo pendant plus de 2 secondes. • Vous pouvez définir la taille des photos transférées en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant d ĺ MobileLink / Taille de l'image NFC ĺ une option. • Il ne faut en aucun cas modifier l’étiquette NFC. Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Prise de vue Lancez AutoShare ou Remote Viewfinder en procédant à la lecture d’une balise depuis un dispositif compatible NFC (p. 124, 130). Configurez la fonction Wi-Fi pour qu’elle se lance à la lecture d’une balise sur un dispositif compatible NFC (p. 151) 124 Réseau sans fil Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction AutoShare via un réseau local sans fil. Lorsque vous prenez une photo à l’aide de l’appareil photo, la photo s’enregistre automatiquement sur le smartphone. • La fonctionnalité AutoShare est prise en charge par les smartphones ou les tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement. • Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement. • Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca. • Si vous activez cette fonction, les paramètres sont conservés même si vous changez de mode Prise de vue. • Il est possible que certains modes ne prennent pas en charge cette fonction ou que cette dernière ne soit pas disponible avec certaines options de prise de vue. 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur ĺAutoShare. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [m] ĺb ĺ AutoShare ĺ Activé. • Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. • Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Paramètres sécurité. (p. 156) 2 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer l’application. • Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de la balise NFC (p. 28) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le smartphone est connecté à l’appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 5. 3 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et établissez la connexion entre le smartphone et l’appareil photo. • Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à la fois. • Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone. 125 Réseau sans fil > Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone 4 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez la connexion du smartphone. • Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la connexion est automatique. • Une icône indiquant l’état de la connexion ( ) apparaît sur l’écran de l’appareil photo. 5 Prenez une photo. • La photo est enregistrée sur l’appareil photo, puis transférée au smartphone. Si aucune carte mémoire n’est insérée ou si la mémoire est insuffisante, la photo prise est alors transférée sur le smartphone sans qu’elle soit enregistrée sur l’appareil photo. • Tout enregistrement vidéo n’est conservé que sur l’appareil photo. • Le fichier image généré au cours de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo n’est pas sauvegardé sur le smartphone. • Si la fonction GPS est activée sur le smartphone, les informations GPS sont alors enregistrées avec la photo prise. 126 Réseau sans fil L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction MobileLink via un réseau local sans fil. Vous pouvez facilement envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à votre smartphone. • La fonctionnalité MobileLink est prise en charge par les smartphones ou les tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement. • Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement. • Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Vous pouvez visualiser jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents et envoyer jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers à la fois. • Lorsque vous envoyez des vidéos Full HD à l’aide de la fonction MobileLink, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas lire ces fichiers sur certains appareils. • Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction sur un appareil iOS, la connexion Wi-Fi risque d’être désactivée. • Il est impossible d’envoyer des fichiers RAW. • Vous pouvez définir la taille des photos transférées en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant dĺMobileLink / Taille de l'image NFCĺ une option. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur ĺMobileLink sur l’écran en mode Prise de vue. • Vous pouvez également envoyer des fichiers en mode Lecture en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi)ĺMobileLink ou en sélectionnant ĺMobileLink. • L’écran s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur l’appareil photo dans les 30 secondes. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez . • Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. • Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Paramètres sécurité. (p. 156) 3 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez une option d’envoi. • Si l’option Sélectionner des fichiers du smartphone est activée, vous pouvez utiliser votre smartphone pour afficher et partager les fichiers stockés sur l’appareil photo. L’écran s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur le smartphone dans les 30 secondes. • Si l’option Sélectionner des fichiers de l’appareil photo est activée, vous pouvez sélectionner les fichiers à envoyer depuis l’appareil photo. 4 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer l’application. • Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de la balise NFC (p. 28) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le smartphone est connecté à l’appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 7. Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone 127 Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone 5 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et établissez la connexion entre le smartphone et l’appareil photo. • Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à la fois. • Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone. 6 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez la connexion du smartphone. • Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la connexion est automatique. 7 Sur le smartphone ou l’appareil photo, sélectionnez les fichiers à transférer depuis l’appareil photo. 8 Sur le smartphone, appuyez sur la touche de copie ou, sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Envoyer. • L’appareil photo envoie les fichiers au smartphone. 128 Réseau sans fil Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à plusieurs smartphones L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction Group Share via un réseau local sans fil. Vous pouvez facilement envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à plusieurs smartphones. • La fonctionnalité Group Share est prise en charge par les smartphones ou les tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement. • Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement. • Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Le transfert de fichiers vers plusieurs smartphones peut prendre plus de temps que le transfert vers un seul appareil. • Lorsque vous envoyez des vidéos Full HD à l’aide de la fonction Group Share, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas lire ces fichiers sur certains appareils. • Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction sur un appareil iOS, la connexion Wi-Fi risque d’être désactivée. • Il est impossible d’envoyer des fichiers RAW. • Vous pouvez définir la taille des photos transférées en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant d ĺ MobileLink / Taille de l'image NFC ĺ une option. • Vous pouvez également envoyer des fichiers en mode Lecture en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ Group Share ou en sélectionnant ĺ Group Share. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez . • Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. • Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Paramètres sécurité. (p. 156) 3 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer l’application. • Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de la balise NFC (p. 28) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le smartphone est connecté à l’appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 6. 129 Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à plusieurs smartphones 4 Appuyez sur Connexion en regard du smartphone de votre choix figurant dans la liste sur l’appareil photo. • Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la connexion est automatique. • Vous pouvez connecter jusqu’à 4 smartphones. • Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone. 5 Sélectionnez Suivant. 6 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez les fichiers à transférer depuis l’appareil photo. 7 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Envoyer. • L’appareil photo envoie les fichiers au smartphone. • Lorsque vous établissez la connexion avec plusieurs smartphones, l’appareil photo envoie les fichiers à tous les dispositifs en même temps. 130 Réseau sans fil L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction Remote Viewfinder via un réseau local sans fil. Utilisez le smartphone pour déclencher à distance l’obturateur à l’aide de la fonction Remote Viewfinder. La photo ainsi prise s’affiche directement sur le smartphone. • La fonctionnalité Remote Viewfinder est prise en charge par les smartphones ou les tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement. • Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement. • Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur ĺ Remote Viewfinder sur l’écran en mode Prise de vue. • Les photos ou les vidéos prises en continu ne s’affichent pas sur le smartphone. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez . • Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. • Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Paramètres sécurité. (p. 156) 3 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer l’application. • Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de la balise NFC (p. 28) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le smartphone est connecté à l’appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 6. 4 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et établissez la connexion entre le smartphone et l’appareil photo. • Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à la fois. • Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone. Utilisation d’un smartphone pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur à distance 131 Réseau sans fil > Utilisation d’un smartphone pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur à distance 5 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez la connexion du smartphone. • Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la connexion est automatique. 6 Sur le smartphone, sélectionnez q pour ouvrir le panneau intelligent. 7 Sur le smartphone, définissez les options de prise de vue. • Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction, certaines touches ne sont plus disponibles sur l’appareil photo. • Avec le smartphone, vous pouvez faire fonctionner l’appareil photo uniquement en appuyant sur l’écran. • Certaines options de prise de vue ne sont pas prises en charge. • Les options de prise de vue réglées sont conservées sur l’appareil photo même après la déconnexion avec le smartphone. 8 Appuyez sur pour revenir à l’écran de prise de vue. 9 Sur le smartphone, maintenez enfoncé pour effectuer la mise au point, puis relâchez pour prendre la photo. • Appuyer sur pour enregistrer une vidéo et sur pour arrêter une vidéo. • Si la fonction GPS est activée sur le smartphone, les informations GPS sont alors enregistrées avec la photo prise. • Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonctionnalité, la distance idéale entre l’appareil photo et le smartphone peut varier, selon les conditions environnantes. • Pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction, le smartphone doit se trouver dans un périmètre de 7 m par rapport à l’appareil photo. • Une fois relâché sur le smartphone, le déclenchement de la prise de vue peut ne pas se faire immédiatement. • Si l’option d’enregistrement du fichier est définie sur Smartphone + Appareil photo, seules les photos seront transférées vers le Smartphone. (Les vidéos et les fichiers RAW ne seront pas transférés.) • Si vous prenez des photos en continu lorsque l’option d’enregistrement du fichier est définie sur Smartphone + Appareil photo, les photos ne seront pas transférées vers le Smartphone. • Lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo, l’écran du smartphone ne reflète pas l’écran de l’appareil photo. • La fonction Remote Viewfinder se désactive si : - le smartphone reçoit un appel ; - l’appareil photo ou le smartphone est éteint ; - l’appareil perd sa connexion au réseau local sans fil ; - le signal de la connexion Wi-Fi est mauvais ou instable ; - vous ne réalisez aucune opération dans les 3 minutes une fois la connexion établie ; - le nombre de dossiers et de fichiers a atteint le maximum. • L’écran s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur l’appareil photo dans les 30 secondes. 132 Réseau sans fil Utilisation de la fonction Baby Monitor 3 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez un point d’accès dans la liste, puis positionnez l’appareil photo. • Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo à la portée d’enfants en bas âge ou d’animaux domestiques. • Pointez l’objectif de l’appareil photo sur le sujet. • Il est recommandé de brancher l’appareil photo sur une prise de courant par le biais d’un adaptateur secteur. 4 Sur le smartphone, sélectionnez le point d’accès auquel l’appareil photo est connecté. • Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer l’application. 5 Sur le smartphone, démarrez l’application Samsung Home Monitor. Utilisez la fonction Baby Monitor pour établir la connexion entre l’appareil photo et un smartphone où Samsung Home Monitor est installé pour surveiller un lieu. • La fonction Baby Monitor est prise en charge par les smartphones compatibles avec les résolutions WVGA (800X480) ou supérieures et fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement. • Vous devez installer l’application Samsung Home Monitor sur votre smartphone avant d’utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. • N’utilisez cette fonction qu’en intérieur. 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez . • Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. 133 Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de la fonction Baby Monitor 6 Démarrez la vidéo surveillance ou l’audio surveillance. • Visionnez la vidéo live de l’appareil photo sur votre smartphone. Au cours de la vidéo surveillance, appuyez sur Mode de surveillance sonore sur le smartphone pour interrompre le flux vidéo. Si l’appareil photo détecte du bruit, une alarme vous en informe sur le smartphone. • Au cours de la vidéo surveillance par le biais du smartphone, la vidéo n’est pas enregistrée sur l’appareil photo. • Si le lieu surveillé est sombre, appuyez sur pour activer le voyant AF. • Au cours de la surveillance, une alarme retentit sur le smartphone si l’appareil photo détecte du bruit sur une courte période à un volume supérieur à un niveau indiqué. • Au cours de la vidéo surveillance live, aucune alarme sonore ne retentit sur le smartphone même si l’appareil photo détecte du bruit. 7 Appuyez sur pour fermer l’application Samsung Home Monitor. Réglage du niveau de bruit pour l’activation de l’alarme Vous pouvez définir le niveau du bruit entraînant l’activation d’une alarme en cas d’audio surveillance. Appuyez sur [D/I] pour définir le niveau de bruit. Niveau de bruit pour l’activation de l’alarme : quand l’appareil photo détecte du bruit sur une courte période à un volume supérieur au niveau indiqué, une alarme retentit. Retour Paramètres Wi-Fi Sensibilité du capteur N’utilisez pas cette fonction à des fins illégales. 134 Réseau sans fil Utilisation de Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des photos ou des vidéos A l’aide de la fonction sans fil, vous pouvez envoyer sur un ordinateur les photos ou vidéos enregistrées avec l’appareil photo. Installation du programme Sauvegarde automatique sur votre ordinateur 1 Installez i-Launcher sur l’ordinateur (p. 162). 2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 3 Lorsque l’icône du programme Sauvegarde automatique apparaît, cliquez dessus. • Le programme Sauvegarde automatique est alors installé sur l’ordinateur. Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour terminer l’installation. 4 Débranchez le câble USB. Avant d’installer le programme, assurez-vous que l’ordinateur est connecté à un réseau. Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un ordinateur 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sélectionnez . • Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles (p. 118). 3 Sélectionnez un ordinateur de sauvegarde. 135 Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des photos ou des vidéos 4 Sélectionnez OK. • Pour annuler l’envoi, sélectionnez Annuler. • Il est impossible de sélectionner des fichiers précis à sauvegarder. Cette fonction ne sauvegarde que les nouveaux fichiers de l’appareil photo. • La progression de la sauvegarde s’affiche sur l’écran de l’ordinateur. • Lorsque le transfert est terminé, l’appareil photo s’éteint automatiquement au bout d’environ 30 secondes. Sélectionnez Annuler pour revenir à l’écran précédent et empêcher l’appareil photo de s’éteindre automatiquement. • Pour éteindre automatiquement votre ordinateur une fois le transfert terminé, sélectionnez Eteindre PC après sauvegarde. • Pour changer d’ordinateur de sauvegarde, sélectionnez Changer de PC. • Si vous connectez l’appareil photo au réseau local sans fil, sélectionnez le point d’accès connecté à l’ordinateur. • L’appareil photo recherche les points d’accès disponibles même si vous vous reconnectez au même point d’accès. • Si vous éteignez l’appareil photo ou retirez sa batterie lors de l’envoi de fichiers, le transfert de fichiers est alors interrompu. • Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction, la commande de l’obturateur se désactive sur l’appareil photo. • Vous ne pouvez connecter qu’un seul appareil photo à l’ordinateur à la fois pour envoyer des fichiers. • La sauvegarde peut être annulée en raison de l’état du réseau. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Avant d’utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez désactiver le pare-feu Windows ou tout autre pare-feu. • Vous pouvez envoyer jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents. • Sur le logiciel PC, le nom du serveur doit être saisi en alphabet latin et ne peut pas comporter plus de 48 caractères. 136 Réseau sans fil 5 Sélectionnez le champ Nom, indiquez votre nom, puis appuyez sur Effectué. Paramètres expéditeur Nom Enregistrer Courriel Réinitialiser 6 Sélectionnez le champ Courriel, indiquez votre adresse électronique, puis appuyez sur Effectué. 7 Sélectionnez Enregistrer pour enregistrer les modifications. • Pour supprimer vos coordonnées, sélectionnez Réinitialiser. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres du menu Courriel et envoyer par courriel des photos ou des vidéos stockées sur l’appareil photo. Modification des paramètres de courriel Depuis le menu Courriel, il vous est possible de modifier les paramètres pour le stockage de vos informations. Vous avez également la possibilité de définir ou de changer le mot de passe de courriel. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte » (p. 122). Enregistrement de vos informations 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sélectionnez . • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles (p. 118). 3 Appuyez sur [m]. 4 Sélectionnez Paramètres expéditeur. Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel 137 Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel Création d’un mot de passe de courriel 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sélectionnez . • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles (p. 118). 3 Appuyez sur [m]. 4 Sélectionnez Configurer mot de passe ĺ Activé. • Pour désactiver le mot de passe, sélectionnez Désactivé. 5 Lorsque la fenêtre apparaît, sélectionnez OK. 6 Saisissez un mot de passe de 4 chiffres. 7 Confirmez-le en saisissant le mot de passe à nouveau. 8 Lorsque la fenêtre apparaît, sélectionnez OK. Si vous avez perdu votre mot de passe, vous pouvez le réinitialiser en sélectionnant Reset sur l’écran du paramètre du mot de passe. Lors de la réinitialisation, vos paramètres personnels et votre adresse courriel sont alors effacés. 138 Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel Changement du mot de passe de courriel 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sélectionnez . • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles (p. 118). 3 Appuyez sur [m]. 4 Sélectionnez Changer mot de passe. 5 Saisissez le mot de passe de 4 chiffres. 6 Saisissez un nouveau mot de passe de 4 chiffres. 7 Confirmez-le en saisissant le nouveau mot de passe. 8 Lorsque la fenêtre apparaît, sélectionnez OK. Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel Vous pouvez envoyer par courriel des photos ou des vidéos stockées sur l’appareil photo. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte » (p. 122). 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Connectez-vous à un réseau local sans fil (p. 118). 4 Sélectionnez le champ Expéditeur, indiquez votre adresse électronique, puis appuyez sur Effectué. • Si vous avez préalablement enregistré vos informations, celles-ci sont insérées automatiquement (p. 136). • Pour utiliser une adresse figurant dans la liste des précédents expéditeurs, sélectionnez ĺ une adresse. 139 Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel 5 Sélectionnez le champ Destinataire, indiquez une adresse électronique, puis appuyez sur Effectué. • Pour utiliser une adresse figurant dans la liste des précédents destinataires, sélectionnez ĺ une adresse. • Sélectionnez pour ajouter des destinataires. Vous pouvez entrer jusqu’à 30 destinataires. • Sélectionnez pour supprimer une adresse de la liste. 6 Sélectionnez Suivant. 7 Sélectionnez les fichiers à envoyer. • Vous pouvez sélectionner jusqu’à 20 fichiers. La taille totale ne doit pas dépasser 7 Mo. 8 Sélectionnez Suivant. 9 Sélectionnez le champ Commentaire, saisissez vos commentaires, puis appuyez sur Effectué. 10 Sélectionnez Envoyer. • L’appareil photo transmet alors le courriel. • Si un courriel n’est pas envoyé, un message vous demande alors de le renvoyer. • Même si le transfert de la photo semble s’être déroulé correctement, celle-ci peut être rejetée ou identifiée comme courrier indésirable en cas d’erreur sur le compte de courriel du destinataire. • Il se peut que vous ne soyez pas en mesure d’envoyer de courriel si aucune connexion réseau n’est disponible ou si les paramètres de votre compte de courriel sont incorrects. • Vous ne pouvez pas envoyer de courriel si la taille combinée des fichiers est supérieure à 7 Mo. La résolution maximale des photos que vous pouvez envoyer est de 2M. La résolution maximale des vidéos que vous pouvez envoyer est de . Si la résolution photo sélectionnée est supérieure à 2M, la photo est alors automatiquement redimensionnée à une résolution inférieure. • Si vous ne pouvez pas envoyer de courriel en raison d’un pare-feu ou de paramètres d’authentification utilisateur, contactez votre administrateur réseau ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Vous pouvez également envoyer un courriel en mode Lecture en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ Courriel ou en sélectionnant ĺ Courriel. 140 Réseau sans fil Envoyez vos photos ou vos vidéos sur des services de partage de fichiers. Les services de partage disponibles s’affichent sur l’appareil photo. Pour envoyer des fichiers à certains services de partage, vous devez vous inscrire sur le site Web avant de connecter l’appareil photo. Accès à un service de partage 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Connectez-vous à un réseau local sans fil (p. 118). 4 Sélectionnez un service de partage. • Si une fenêtre vous invite à créer un compte, sélectionnez OK. 5 Saisissez votre ID et votre mot de passe pour vous connecter. • Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte » (p. 122). • Si vous êtes connectés à des services de partage, veuillez-vous reporter à « Utilisation du navigateur de connexion » (p. 120). • Pour sélectionner un ID dans la liste, appuyez sur ĺ un ID. • Si vous avez déjà ouvert une session sur le service de partage, il se peut que la connexion s’établisse automatiquement. Vous devez disposer d’un compte sur le service de partage de fichiers pour utiliser cette fonction. Utilisation des services de partage de photos ou de vidéos 141 Réseau sans fil > Utilisation des services de partage de photos ou de vidéos Téléchargement de photos ou de vidéos 1 Accédez au service de partage à travers l’appareil photo. 2 Sélectionnez les fichiers à envoyer. • Vous pouvez sélectionner jusqu’à 20 fichiers. La taille totale ne doit pas dépasser 10 Mo. (Sur certains services de partage, la limite en termes de taille totale ou de nombre de fichiers peut varier.) 3 Sélectionnez Envoyer. • L’appareil photo envoie les photos ou les vidéos. • Si un envoi ne se fait pas correctement, un message vous demande de renvoyer les fichiers. • Sur certains services de partage, vous pouvez saisir des remarques en sélectionnant le champ de commentaire. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte » (p. 122). • Vous pouvez définir un dossier d’envoi pour Facebook en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Charger dossier (Facebook) dans l’écran du service de partage. • Vous ne pouvez pas envoyer de fichier si sa taille est supérieure à la limite définie. La résolution maximale des photos que vous pouvez télécharger est de 2M. La résolution maximale des vidéos que vous pouvez télécharger est de . Si la résolution de la photo sélectionnée est supérieure à 2M, la photo est alors automatiquement redimensionnée à une résolution inférieure. (Sur certains services de partage, la résolution maximale d’une photo peut être différente.) • Le mode d’envoi des photos ou des vidéos peut varier en fonction du service de partage sélectionné. • Si vous ne parvenez pas à accéder à un service de partage en raison d’un pare-feu ou de paramètres d’authentification utilisateur, contactez votre administrateur réseau ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau. • Il se peut que la date de prise de vue apparaisse dans le titre des photos ou des vidéos envoyées. • Le débit de votre connexion Internet peut avoir une incidence sur le temps d’envoi des photos ou d’ouverture des pages Web. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Vous pouvez également envoyer en mode Lecture des photos ou des vidéos sur des services de partage de fichiers, en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ le service de partage de votre choix, ou en sélectionnant ĺ le service de partage de votre choix. • Sur certains services de partage, l’envoi de vidéos est impossible. • En envoyant des photos à un service de partage de fichiers, il se peut qu’elles soient redimensionnées au format 2M ou 1M en fonction de la politique du service. 142 Réseau sans fil Utilisation de Samsung Link pour l’envoi de fichiers Vous pouvez envoyer des fichiers de votre appareil photo vers le stockage en ligne Samsung Link ou visionner des fichiers sur d’autres appareils compatibles Samsung Link connectés au même point d’accès. Téléchargement de photos sur un système de stockage en ligne 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sélectionnez ĺStockage Web. • Si le message guide apparaît, sélectionnez OK. • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles (p. 118). • Pour modifier la taille des photos envoyées, appuyez sur [m], puis sélectionnez Taille de l'image téléchargée. 3 Saisissez votre ID et votre mot de passe, puis sélectionnez Connexion ĺ OK. • Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte » (p. 122). • Pour sélectionner un ID dans la liste, appuyez sur ĺ un ID. • Si vous avez déjà ouvert une session sur le site Web, il se peut que la connexion s’établisse automatiquement. Pour utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez créer à l’aide de votre ordinateur un compte Samsung Link ainsi qu’un compte disposant d’un service de stockage en ligne affilié. Une fois les comptes créés, ajoutez à Samsung Link votre compte du système de stockage en ligne. 4 Sélectionnez un service de stockage en ligne. • Avant d’utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez accéder au site Web de Samsung Link avec votre ordinateur et vous inscrire à un stockage en ligne. 5 Sélectionnez les fichiers à envoyer, puis appuyez sur Envoyer. • L’envoi de fichiers vidéo au stockage en ligne Samsung Link est impossible. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Vous pouvez envoyer jusqu’à 20 fichiers. • Vous pouvez également envoyer des photos en mode Lecture en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ Samsung Link ou en sélectionnant ĺ Samsung Link. 143 Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de Samsung Link pour l’envoi de fichiers Visionnage de photos ou de vidéos sur des dispositifs compatibles Samsung Link 1 Sur l’écran Mode, sélectionnez Wi-Fi. 2 Sélectionnez ĺAppareils à proximité. • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles (p. 118). • Vous pouvez autoriser à se connecter uniquement les dispositifs sélectionnés ou tous les dispositifs en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Contrôle d'accès DLNA à l’écran. • Une liste de partage de fichiers est alors créée. Attendez que les autres dispositifs aient détecté l’appareil photo. 3 Connectez le dispositif Samsung Link à un réseau, puis activez la fonction Samsung Link. • Reportez-vous au mode d’emploi de votre dispositif pour davantage d’informations. 4 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez le dispositif Samsung Link à se connecter à l’appareil photo. 5 Sur le dispositif Samsung Link, sélectionnez l’appareil photo auquel se connecter. 6 Sur le dispositif Samsung Link, parcourez la liste des photos ou vidéos partagées. • Pour en savoir plus sur la manière de rechercher l’appareil photo et de parcourir les photos ou les vidéos sur le dispositif Samsung Link, consultez le mode d’emploi de l’appareil. • Selon le type de dispositif Samsung Link ou l’état du réseau, il est possible que les vidéos ne soient pas lues correctement. Point d’accès ▲ L’appareil photo est raccordé à un téléviseur compatible Samsung Link via un réseau local sans fil. 144 Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de Samsung Link pour l’envoi de fichiers • Vous pouvez partager jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents. • Vous ne pouvez afficher sur un dispositif Samsung Link que des photos ou des vidéos prises avec l’appareil photo. • La portée de la connexion sans fil entre l’appareil photo et un dispositif Samsung Link peut varier en fonction des spécifications du point d’accès. • Si l’appareil photo est connecté à 2 dispositifs Samsung Link, la lecture risque d’être ralentie. • Les photos ou les vidéos sont partagées dans leurs dimensions d’origine. • Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonctionnalité avec des dispositifs prenant en charge Samsung Link. • Les photos ou vidéos partagées ne sont pas enregistrées sur le dispositif Samsung Link, mais peuvent être stockées dans l’appareil photo afin de respecter les caractéristiques de l’appareil photo. • Le transfert de photos ou de vidéos sur le dispositif Samsung Link peut prendre un certain temps selon la connexion réseau, le nombre de fichiers à partager ou la taille des fichiers. • Si vous éteignez l’appareil photo de façon inhabituelle pendant le visionnage de photos ou de vidéos sur un dispositif Samsung Link (par exemple, en retirant la batterie), le dispositif considère que l’appareil photo est toujours connecté. • Il se peut que l’ordre des photos ou des vidéos sur l’appareil photo diffère de celui du dispositif Samsung Link. • En fonction du nombre de photos ou de vidéos à partager, le chargement de celles-ci et l’exécution du processus de configuration initial peuvent prendre un certain temps. • Lorsque vous visionnez des photos ou des vidéos sur le dispositif Samsung Link, l’utilisation continue de la télécommande ou l’exécution d’opérations supplémentaires sur le dispositif peut empêcher le bon fonctionnement de cette fonction. • Si vous réorganisez ou triez des fichiers sur l’appareil photo tout en les visionnant sur un dispositif Samsung Link, vous devez procéder à nouveau au processus initial de configuration pour actualiser la liste des fichiers sur le dispositif. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Il est recommandé d’utiliser un câble réseau pour raccorder le dispositif Samsung Link au point d’accès. Cela permet de réduire les interruptions du son et de l’image lors de la diffusion de vidéo. • Pour visionner des fichiers sur un appareil Samsung Link à l’aide de la fonction Appareils à proximité, vous devez activer le mode Multidiffusion sur votre point d’accès. Chapitre 5 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo Cette section présente les paramètres utilisateur et le menu général des réglages de l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez régler les paramètres en fonction de vos besoins et de vos préférences. 146 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo Vous pouvez définir la manière d’utiliser l’appareil grâce à ces paramètres. Afin de paramétrer les options utilisateur En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ une option. Les options disponibles et leur ordre d’affichage peuvent différer selon les conditions de prise de vue. Personnalisation ISO Extension ISO Vous pouvez sélectionner ISO 100 et 25600. Palier ISO Vous pouvez régler la sensibilité ISO par paliers de 1/3 ou 1. Plage ISO auto Si vous réglez la plage ISO sur Automatique, vous pouvez définir la valeur ISO maximale pour chaque palier EV sélectionné. Paramètres utilisateur 147 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur Réducteur de bruit Afin de réduire les parasites sur les photos, utilisez l’option Réducteur de bruit. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Réduct. bruit ISO élevé Cette fonction réduit les parasites qui peuvent apparaître lorsque vous utilisez une sensibilité ISO élevée. (Désactivé, Elevé, Normale*, Bas) Réduction bruit long terme Cette fonction réduit le bruit lorsque vous réglez l’appareil photo sur une exposition prolongée. (Désactivé, Activé*) Réglage Bracketing Vous pouvez configurer les options de chaque bracketing. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Réglage AE Bracketing Régler l’intervalle d’exposition. (-/+0.3 EV*, -/+0.7 EV, -/+1.0 EV, -/+1.3 EV, -/+1.7 EV, -/+2.0 EV, -/+2.3 EV, -/+2.7 EV, -/+3.0 EV) Régler balance des blancs Brack Régler la gamme de balance des blancs des 3 photos bracketing. (AB-/+3*, AB-/+2, AB-/+1, MG-/+3, MG-/+2, MG-/+1) Par exemple, AB-/+3 règle la valeur Orange sur plus ou moins trois paliers. MG-/+3 règle la valeur Magenta aux mêmes niveaux. Réglage balance des blancs mode Braketing Sélectionner 3 paramètres de l’assistant photo que l’appareil photo utilise pour prendre 3 photos bracketing. Réglage de la profondeur de champ mode Bracketing Régler l’intervalle de profondeur. (-/+0.3, -/+0.7, -/+1.0*, -/+1.3, -/+1.7, -/+2.0, -/+2.3, -/+2.7, -/+3.0) 148 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur Espace colorimétrique L’espace colorimétrique vous permet de sélectionner les méthodes de représentation des couleurs. Les appareils numériques d’imagerie, comme les appareils photos numériques, les moniteurs et les imprimantes disposent de leurs propres spécificités techniques pour représenter les couleurs, que l’on nomme espaces colorimétriques. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description sRGB* La norme sRGB (standard RGB) est une norme internationale qui permet de définir l’espace colorimétrique créé par l’IEC (commission électrotechnique internationale). Cette norme est couramment utilisée afin de recréer les couleurs sur des moniteurs d’ordinateurs et constitue également l’espace colorimétrique standard pour les données Exif. sRGB est recommandé pour les images habituelles et celles que vous souhaitez publier sur Internet. Adobe RGB Adobe RGB est utilisé pour des impressions professionnelles et dispose d’une gamme de couleurs plus importante que la norme sRGB. Il vous permet ainsi de retoucher facilement des photos sur un ordinateur. Notez que les divers programmes disponibles sur le marché ne sont généralement compatibles qu’avec un nombre limité d’espaces colorimétriques. Adobe RGB sRGB Lorsque l’espace colorimétrique est réglé sur Adobe RGB, les photos sont enregistrées sous le nom « _SAMXXXX.JPG ». 149 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur Corriger distort. Vous pouvez corriger la déformation qui peut se produire avec les objectifs. Cette fonction est disponible avec les objectifs qui la prennent en charge. Fonctionnement tactile Réglez cette option pour utiliser le fonctionnement tactile en mode Prise de vue. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Désactivé Ne pas utiliser le fonctionnement tactile en mode Prise de vue. (Vous pouvez utiliser le fonctionnement tactile dans d’autres cas.) Activé* Utiliser le fonctionnement tactile en mode Prise de vue. Personnalisation iFn Vous pouvez sélectionner les options réglables prévues lorsque vous appuyez sur [i-Function] sur un objectif compatible i-Function. Option Description Ouverture Permet de régler la valeur d’ouverture. Vitesse d'obturation Permet de régler la vitesse d’obturation. EV Permet d’ajuster la valeur d’exposition. ISO Définissez la sensibilité ISO. Balance des blancs Régler la balance des blancs. 150 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur Affichage utilisateur Vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des informations de prise de vue sur l’écran. 1 2 3 N° Description 1 Icônes Activer l’affichage des icônes sur la partie de droite en mode Prise de vue. 2 Date et heure Activer l’affichage de la date et l’heure. 3 Histogramme Activer ou désactiver l’histogramme sur l’écran. Description des histogrammes Un histogramme est la représentation graphique de la répartition de la luminosité sur une photo. Un histogramme incliné vers la gauche signifie que la photo est sombre. Un histogramme incliné vers la droite signifie que la photo est claire. La hauteur des crêtes est liée aux informations colorimétriques. Les crêtes du graphique sont plus élevées si une couleur spécifique est prédominante. Exposition insuffisante Exposition équilibrée Exposition excessive 151 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur Attribution touches Vous pouvez modifier la fonction associée à la touche Personnalisé ou à la touche DIRECT LINK. * Paramètre par défaut Bouton Fonction Personnalisé Définir la fonction de la touche Personnalisé. • Aperçu optique* : exécuter la fonction de prévisualisation de la profondeur de champ pour la valeur d’ouverture (p. 22). • Balance des blancs 1 touche (Balance des blancs) : exécuter la fonction de balance des blancs personnalisée. • 1 touche RAW + : enregistrer un fichier au format RAW+JPEG. Pour enregistrer un fichier au format JPEG, appuyer à nouveau sur cette touche. • Réinitialiser : réinitialiser certains paramètres. • AEL : exécuter la fonction de verrouillage automatique de l’exposition. (Appuyer sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course exécute la fonction de verrouillage automatique de la mise au point.) • Maintien AEL : continuer d’exécuter la fonction de verrouillage automatique de l’exposition. (L’exposition reste verrouillée même après la prise de vue.) DIRECT LINK Définir la fonction de la touche DIRECT LINK. (AutoShare, MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Group Share, Baby Monitor, Sauvegarde automatique, Courriel, Réseaux sociaux et Cloud, Samsung Link) Vue Live NFC En mode Prise de vue, activez la fonction NFC sur un smartphone compatible, puis placez l’antenne NFC de ce dernier près de la balise NFC de l’appareil photo pour lancer la fonction AutoShare ou Remote Viewfinder. Cette fonctionnalité est prise en charge par les smartphones compatibles NFC fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android. Il est recommandé d’utiliser la dernière version. Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible pour les appareils iOS. Taille de l’image MobileLink/NFC Définir la taille des photos à transférer à un smartphone à l’aide des fonctions MobileLink ou NFC. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Redimensionnez à 2M ou moins. Si la taille de la photo est supérieure à 3M, elle sera transférée après avoir été redimensionnée à une taille inférieure ou égale à 2M. Original* La photo sera transférée dans sa taille originale. Grille Sélectionnez un guide pour vous aider à composer une scène. (Désactivé*, 4 X 4, 3 X 3, Croix, Diagonale) 152 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur Réglagle de la touche Vitesse sur l’objectif Réglez la vitesse du zoom des touches de l’objectif Power Zoom sur la valeur rapide, moyenne ou lente. A vitesse rapide, le son du zoom augmente et risque d’être capturé dans les enregistrements vidéo. Cette fonction n’est disponible que lorsque l’objectif Power Zoom est fixé à l’aide de la bague d’adaptation. Voyant de mise au point Afin d’optimiser la mise au point automatique dans les endroits sombres, activez le voyant de mise au point. Cette fonction donne de meilleurs résultats lorsque le voyant de mise au point est activé pour la prise de photo dans les endroits sombres. Autoportrait automatique Réglez l’appareil pour qu’il s’allume et passe automatiquement en mode Autoportrait lorsque vous inclinez l’écran vers le haut. En mode Autoportrait, les options de retardateur (3 secondes), One-Touch Shot, détection des visages et beauté sont automatiquement activées. 153 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo Voici comment configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Pour définir les paramètres En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺ q ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Son • Volume système : définir le volume sonore ou désactiver complètement le son. (Désactivé, Bas, Moyen*, Elevé) Même si le volume système est désactivé, l’appareil photo émet un son lors de la lecture vidéo ou d’un diaporama. • Son de la mise au point : définir le son que l’appareil photo émet en enfonçant le déclencheur à mi-course. (Désactivé, Activé*) • Son des touches : définir le son que l’appareil photo émet en appuyant sur des touches ou sur l’écran pour l’allumer ou l’éteindre. (Désactivé, Activé*) Vue rapide Définir la durée de la vue rapide – délai au cours duquel l’appareil photo affiche la photo immédiatement après la prise de vue. (Désactivé, 1 s*, 3 s, 5 s, Maintenir) * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Réglage affichage Régler la luminosité de l’écran, la luminosité automatique, la couleur ou l’indicateur de niveau. • Luminosité écran : régler la luminosité de l’écran manuellement. • Luminosité auto : activer ou désactiver la luminosité automatique. (Désactivé, Activé*) • Colorimétrie écran : régler manuellement la colorimétrie de l’écran. • Calibrage horizontal : étalonner l’indicateur de niveau. Si l’indicateur de niveau n’est pas droit, positionnez l’appareil photo sur une surface plane, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran. • Il est impossible d’accéder à l’option Calibrage horizontal en mode Lecture. • Il est impossible d’utiliser l’indicateur de niveau lors d’une prise de vue en orientation portrait. Désactivation écran auto Définir le délai de désactivation de l’écran. Après une durée prédéfinie sans utiliser l’appareil photo, l’écran s’éteint. (Désactivé, 30 s*, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min) Paramètres 154 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Mise hors tension auto Définir le délai de mise hors tension. L’appareil photo s’éteint lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas pendant une période prédéfinie. (Désactivé, 1 min*, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min) • L’appareil photo mémorise le délai d’extinction même si vous remplacez la batterie. • Si l’appareil photo est connecté à un ordinateur ou à un téléviseur et qu’une vidéo ou un diaporama est en cours de lecture, il est possible que la fonction Mise hors tension auto ne fonctionne pas. Affichage de l'aide Activer l’affichage de texte d’aide sur les menus et les fonctions. (Désactivé, Activé*) Appuyez sur [n] pour masquer le texte d’aide. Language Sélectionnez une langue d’affichage sur l’écran de l’appareil photo. Date et heure Définir la date, l’heure, le format de date, le fuseau horaire et indiquer si la date doit être mentionnée sur les photos. (Fuseau horaire, Configuration date/heure, Type date, Type d'heure, Impression) • La date apparaît en bas à droite de la photo. • Lorsque vous imprimez une photo, il est possible que certaines imprimantes n’impriment pas la date correctement. * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Vidéo Sélectionner la sortie des signaux vidéo appropriée à votre pays lorsque l’appareil photo est raccordé à un appareil vidéo externe, comme un moniteur ou un téléviseur HD. • NTSC : États-Unis, Canada, Japon, Corée, Taïwan, Mexique, etc. • PAL (compatible uniquement avec PAL B, D, G, H ou I) : Allemagne, Australie, Autriche, Belgique, Chine, Danemark, Espagne, Finlande, France, Italie, Koweït, Malaisie, Norvège, Nouvelle-Zélande, Royaume-Uni, Singapour, Suède, Suisse, Thaïlande, etc. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un téléviseur HD compatible avec la fonction Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), vous pouvez contrôler la fonction de lecture de l’appareil photo à l’aide d’une télécommande. • Désactivé : il est impossible de contrôler la fonction de lecture de l’appareil photo à l’aide de la télécommande du téléviseur. • Activé* : il est possible de contrôler la fonction de lecture de l’appareil photo à l’aide de la télécommande du téléviseur. Sortie HDMI Lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un téléviseur HD par le biais d’un câble HDMI, vous pouvez changer la résolution de l’image. • NTSC : Automatique*, 1080i, 720p, 480p, 576p (actif uniquement lorsque le réglage PAL est sélectionné) Si le téléviseur HD n’est pas compatible avec la résolution sélectionnée, l’appareil photo définit la résolution au niveau inférieur. 155 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Numéro fichier Définissez la méthode de création des noms de fichier et de dossier. • Réinitialiser : après utilisation de la fonction de réinitialisation, la dénomination des nouveaux fichiers débute à 0001. • Série* : les nouveaux numéros de fichiers s’ajoutent à la suite de ceux déjà existants, même si vous avez inséré ou formaté une nouvelle carte mémoire ou que vous avez supprimé toutes les photos existantes. • Le nom du premier dossier est 100PHOTO. Si vous avez sélectionné l’espace colorimétrique sRGB et la dénomination standard des fichiers, le nom du premier fichier correspond à SAM_0001. • Les noms des fichiers vont progressivement de SAM_0001 à SAM_9999 d’un incrément de 1. • Les noms des dossiers vont progressivement de 100PHOTO à 999PHOTO d’un incrément de 1. • Un même dossier peut contenir 9 999 fichiers maximum. • Les numéros de fichiers sont attribués conformément aux caractéristiques DCF (Design rule for Camera File system). • Si vous modifiez le nom d’un fichier (par exemple sur un ordinateur), l’appareil photo n’est alors pas en mesure de le lire. Formater Formater la carte mémoire. Le formatage supprime l’ensemble des fichiers, y compris les fichiers protégés. (Non*, Oui) Il est possible que des erreurs se produisent si vous utilisez une carte mémoire formatée à l’aide d’un appareil photo d’une autre marque, d’un lecteur de cartes mémoire ou d’un ordinateur. Veuillez formater la carte mémoire avec l’appareil photo avant de l’utiliser pour la prise de photos. * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Informations périphérique Afficher la version du micrologiciel du boîtier et de l’objectif, l’adresse Mac et le numéro de certification réseau, ou mettre à jour le micrologiciel. • Mise à jour firmware : mettre à jour le firmware du boîtier de l’appareil photo ou de l’objectif. (Micrologiciel boîtier, Micrologiciel objectif) • Vous pouvez effectuer la mise à jour du firmware en connectant l’appareil photo à l’ordinateur et en démarrant le i-Launcher. Pour plus de détails, reportezvous à la page 178. • Vous ne pouvez pas lancer la mise à niveau du firmware sans avoir complètement rechargé la batterie au préalable. Rechargez entièrement la batterie avant d’effectuer la mise à niveau du firmware. • Si vous mettez le firmware à jour, les paramètres utilisateur et les valeurs sont réinitialisés. (La date, l’heure, la langue et la sortie vidéo ne sont pas modifiées.) • N’éteignez pas l’appareil photo lorsque la mise à jour est en cours. 156 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Verrouillage Wi-Fi Demander la saisie d’un code PIN lors de la connexion de l’appareil photo à un smartphone. • PIN: saisir un code PIN avant la connexion. • Aucun*: autoriser la connexion sans saisie d’un code PIN. • La connexion est automatique et aucun code PIN n’est demandé lors de l’utilisation de la fonction NFC. • Dès que vous réinitialisez les paramètres de l’appareil photo ou mettez à jour le micrologiciel, les codes PIN sont automatiquement générés et renouvelés. • Si vous avez déjà connecté votre appareil photo à un smartphone à l’aide d’un code PIN, la connexion est automatiquement établie. Réinitialiser Réinitialiser le menu de configuration et les options de prises de vue aux paramètres par défaut. (Les paramètres de la date, de l’heure, de la langue et de la sortie vidéo ne sont pas modifiés.) (Non*, Oui) Licence Open Source Afficher les licences open source. Chapitre 6 Connexion à des appareils externes Tirez pleinement partie des fonctionnalités de l’appareil photo en le connectant à des appareils externes, par exemple un ordinateur ou un téléviseur HD. 158 Connexion à des appareils externes Visionnez des photos ou vidéos en raccordant l’appareil photo à un téléviseur HD à l’aide d’un câble HDMI vendu en option. 1 En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺ q ĺ Sortie HDMI ĺ une option (p. 154). 2 Eteignez l’appareil photo et le téléviseur. 3 Branchez l’appareil photo sur le téléviseur HD à l’aide du câble HDMI proposé en option. 4 Allumez le téléviseur HD et sélectionnez la source vidéo HDMI. 5 Allumez l’appareil photo. • L’appareil photo passe automatiquement en mode Lecture lorsque vous le raccordez à un téléviseur HD. 6 Utilisez les touches de l’appareil photo pour visualiser des photos ou lire des vidéos. • Grâce au câble HDMI, vous pouvez brancher l’appareil photo sur le téléviseur HD en utilisant la méthode Anynet+(CEC). • Les fonctions Anynet+(CEC) vous permettent de contrôler les appareils connectés en utilisant la télécommande du téléviseur. • Si le téléviseur HD est compatible Anynet+(CEC), il s’allume automatiquement lorsqu’il est connecté à l’appareil photo. Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible sur certains téléviseurs HD. • Vous ne pouvez pas prendre de photos ou de vidéos lorsque l’appareil photo est branché sur le téléviseur HD à l’aide d’un câble HDMI. • Il est possible que certaines fonctions de lecture de l’appareil photo ne soient pas disponibles lorsque celui-ci est branché sur un téléviseur HD. • Le délai de connexion de l’appareil photo à un téléviseur HD peut varier en fonction de la carte mémoire utilisée. La fonction principale d’une carte mémoire étant d’augmenter la vitesse de transfert, celle-ci n’est pas nécessairement plus rapide lors de l’utilisation de fonctions HDMI, même si elle dispose d’un taux de transfert plus élevé. Affichage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD 159 Connexion à des appareils externes Transférez les fichiers d’une carte mémoire sur votre ordinateur en connectant l’appareil photo à ce dernier. Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Windows Connexion de l’appareil photo en tant que disque amovible Vous pouvez connecter l’appareil photo à votre ordinateur en tant que disque amovible. Ouvrez le disque amovible qui apparaît et transférez des fichiers sur l’ordinateur. 1 Eteignez l’appareil photo. 2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. • Vous devez brancher la fiche micro-USB (extrémité la plus petite) du câble USB sur l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. • Si vous tentez de brancher le câble USB sur le port HDMI, l’appareil photo risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 3 Allumez l’appareil photo. • L’ordinateur détecte automatiquement l’appareil photo. 4 Sur l’ordinateur, sélectionnez Poste de travail ĺ Disque amovible ĺ DCIM ĺ 100PHOTO. 5 Sélectionnez les fichiers de votre choix, puis faites-les glisser ou enregistrez-les sur l’ordinateur. Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur 160 Connexion à des appareils externes > Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur Déconnexion de l’appareil photo (Windows XP) La méthode pour déconnecter l’appareil photo est identique pour Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows 8. 1 Assurez-vous qu’aucune donnée n’est en cours de transfert entre l’appareil photo et l’ordinateur. • Si le voyant d’état de l’appareil photo clignote, cela signifie que des données sont en cours de transfert. Attendez que le voyant d’état cesse de clignoter. 2 Cliquez sur dans la barre d’outils en bas à droite de l’écran de l’ordinateur. 3 Cliquez sur le message qui apparaît. 4 Cliquez sur la zone du message indiquant que l’appareil photo a été retiré en toute sécurité. 5 Débranchez le câble USB. Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Mac Mac OS 10.5 ou version ultérieure est pris en charge. 1 Eteignez l’appareil photo. 2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur Macintosh à l’aide du câble USB. • Vous devez brancher la fiche micro-USB (extrémité la plus petite) du câble USB sur l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. • Si vous tentez de brancher le câble USB sur le port HDMI, l’appareil photo risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 161 Connexion à des appareils externes > Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur 3 Allumez l’appareil photo. • L’ordinateur détecte automatiquement l’appareil photo et affiche une icône de disque amovible. 4 Ouvrez le disque amovible. 5 Transférez vos photos ou vidéos sur l’ordinateur Mac. 162 Connexion à des appareils externes Vous pouvez afficher et modifier les fichiers à l’aide des programmes fournis. Vous pouvez envoyer des fichiers à l’ordinateur via le réseau sans fil. Installation des programmes depuis le CD fourni 1 Insérez le CD d’installation dans le lecteur de votre ordinateur. 2 Sélectionnez la langue. 3 Sélectionnez le programme à installer. 4 Suivez les instructions à l’écran. 5 Cliquez sur Exit pour terminer l’installation. Programmes disponibles lors de l’utilisation d’i-Launcher Elément Description Firmware Upgrade Vous pouvez télécharger le firmware de l’appareil photo. PC Auto Backup i-Launcher propose un lien pour télécharger le programme PC Auto Backup lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un ordinateur. A l’aide de la fonction sans fil, vous pouvez envoyer sur un ordinateur les photos ou vidéos enregistrées avec l’appareil photo. Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur 163 Connexion à des appareils externes > Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur Utilisation d’i-Launcher i-Launcher vous permet de mettre à jour le micrologiciel de l’appareil photo ou de l’objectif ou vous fournit un lien pour télécharger le programme PC Auto Backup. Configuration requise pour Windows Elément Configuration requise Processeur Intel® Core™ 2 Duo cadencé à 1,66 GHz ou plus puissant / AMD Athlon X2 Dual-Core cadencé à 2,2 GHz ou plus puissant Mémoire vive Minimum 512 Mo de RAM (1 Go ou plus recommandé) Système d’exploitation* Windows 7, Windows 8 Capacité du disque dur 250 Mo minimum (1 Go et plus recommandé) Divers • Lecteur de CD-ROM • Pour une résolution de 1024X768 pixels, un moniteur couleur 16 bits compatible est recommandé (pour une résolution de 1280X1024 pixels, un écran couleur 32 bits est recommandé) • Port USB 2.0 • Carte vidéo nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT ou plus puissante / ATI X1600 ou plus puissante • Microsoft DirectX 9.0c ou version ultérieure * Une version 32 bits de i-Launcher sera installée même sur les éditions 64 bits de Windows 7 et Windows 8. • Les exigences de la page suivante sont uniquement des recommandations. i-Launcher peut ne pas fonctionner correctement sur certains ordinateurs, même si ceux-ci satisfont à la configuration requise. • Si l’ordinateur ne répond pas à la configuration requise, un problème de lecture vidéo risque de se produire. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages résultant de l’utilisation d’ordinateurs non conformes, notamment les ordinateurs assemblés. Configuration requise pour Mac Elément Configuration requise Système d’exploitation Mac OS 10.5 ou ultérieur (sauf PowerPC) Mémoire vive Minimum 256 Mo de RAM (512 Mo ou plus recommandé) Capacité du disque dur 110 Mo minimum Divers Port USB 2.0, lecteur de CD-ROM Ouverture d’i-Launcher Sur l’ordinateur, sélectionnez Démarrer Démarrer → Tous les programmes → Samsung → i-Launcher → Samsung i-Launcher. Sinon, cliquez sur Applications → Samsung → i-Launcher sur l'ordinateur Mac OS. 164 Connexion à des appareils externes > Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur Téléchargement du firmware Depuis l’écran Samsung i-Launcher, cliquez sur Firmware Upgrade. Pour plus de détails sur la mise à jour du micrologiciel, veuillez-vous reporter à la page 178. Téléchargement du programme PC Auto Backup Depuis l’écran Samsung i-Launcher, cliquez sur PC Auto Backup. Pour en savoir plus sur l’installation du programme PC Auto Backup, reportez-vous à la page 134. Installation d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 1 Insérez le DVD-ROM Adobe Photoshop Lightroom dans l’ordinateur. 2 Sélectionnez la langue. 3 Suivez les instructions à l’écran. Utilisation d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Les photos prises par un appareil numérique sont souvent converties aux formats JPEG et stockées en mémoire selon les réglages de l’appareil photo au moment de la prise de vue. Les fichiers RAW ne sont pas convertis au format JPEG et sont stockés dans la mémoire sans qu’aucune modification ne soit effectuée. Adobe Photoshop Lightroom vous permet d’étalonner le niveau d’exposition, la balance des blancs, les tonalités des couleurs, les contrastes et les couleurs des photos. Vous pouvez également retoucher les fichiers JPEG ou TIFF ainsi que les fichiers RAW. Pour davantage d’informations, consultez le guide du programme en question. • En fonction de votre version d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas ouvrir les fichiers RAW. Dans ce cas, mettez le programme à jour depuis le site Web d’Adobe. • Il se peut qu’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom affiche différemment les effets de luminosité, de couleurs et autres d’une image. Cela est dû à la suppression des paramètres et des options d’origine de l’appareil photo, appliqués au moment de l’enregistrement de l’image, en vue du traitement dans Adobe Photoshop Lightroom. Chapitre 7 Annexe Obtenez des informations concernant les messages d’erreur, l’entretien de l’appareil photo, des conseils de dépannage, les caractéristiques et les accessoires en option. 166 Annexe Lorsque l’un des messages d’erreur suivants apparaît, reportez-vous aux solutions proposées pour tenter de résoudre le problème. Messages d'erreur Solutions possibles Objectif verrouillé L’objectif est verrouillé. Faire pivoter l’objectif dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d’une montre (p. 48). Erreur de carte • Eteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le. • Retirez la carte mémoire, puis insérez-la de nouveau. • Formatez la carte mémoire. Batterie faible Insérez une batterie chargée ou rechargez celle qui est déjà en place. Aucun fichier image Prenez des photos ou insérez une carte mémoire qui en contient. Périphérique déconnecté. La connexion réseau s’est interrompue pendant le transfert de photos vers des appareils pris en charge. Sélectionnez de nouveau un appareil pris en charge. Erreur de fichier Supprimez le fichier endommagé ou contactez le centre de service après-vente. Messages d'erreur Solutions possibles Mémoire pleine Supprimez les fichiers inutiles ou insérez une nouvelle carte mémoire. Échec transfert. • L’appareil photo n’a pas pu envoyer d’e-mails ou de fichiers à d’autres appareils. Ré-essayez de l’envoyer. • Vérifiez la connexion réseau et ré-essayez. Impossible de prendre une photo car le numéro de dossier/fichier sur la carte mémoire a atteint les valeurs maximales. Réinitialiser le numéro de dossier ? Les noms de fichier ne correspondent pas à la norme DCF. Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour réinitialiser le nombre de dossiers. Error 00 Eteignez l’appareil photo avant de retirer l’objectif. Si le message s’affiche toujours, contactez le centre de service après-vente. Messages d’erreur 167 Annexe Nettoyage de l’appareil photo Objectif et écran de l’appareil photo Utilisez un pinceau pour éliminer la poussière et essuyez délicatement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux. S’il reste de la poussière, humidifiez une lingette avec du nettoyant liquide pour objectif et essuyez délicatement. Capteur d’images En fonction des conditions de prise de vue, de la poussière peut apparaître sur les photos suite à l’exposition du capteur d’images à l’environnement extérieur. Ce phénomène est normal et l’exposition à la poussière fait partie de l’utilisation quotidienne de l’appareil photo. Évitez tout contact avec le capteur d’images lors de l’utilisation de la soufflette. Boîtier de l’appareil photo Essuyez-le délicatement avec un chiffon doux et sec. N’utilisez jamais de benzène, de diluants ou d’alcool pour nettoyer l’appareil. Ces produits peuvent l’endommager ou entraîner un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil photo. Entretien de l’appareil photo 168 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo Utilisation sur la plage ou en bord de mer • Protégez l’appareil photo du sable et de la poussière lorsque vous l’utilisez à la plage ou dans d’autres endroits similaires. • L’appareil photo n’est pas étanche. Ne manipulez pas la batterie, l’adaptateur ou la carte mémoire avec les mains humides. Cela peut entraîner la détérioration de l’appareil photo. Rangement pour une durée prolongée • Lorsque vous rangez l’appareil photo pour une durée prolongée, placezle dans un contenant clos avec un matériau absorbant comme du gel de silice. • Lorsqu’elle n’est pas utilisée pendant une période prolongée, une batterie pleine se décharge progressivement et doit alors être rechargée avant l’utilisation suivante. • Il est possible de régler la date et l’heure lorsque l’appareil photo est éteint et que la batterie ne se trouve pas dans l’appareil photo pendant une durée prolongée. Usage et rangement de l’appareil photo Usage ou rangement inapproprié de l’appareil photo • Evitez d’exposer l’appareil photo à des températures extrêmes. • Evitez d’utiliser l’appareil photo dans des endroits très humides ou dans lesquels le taux d’humidité varie beaucoup. • Evitez d’exposer l’appareil photo à la lumière directe du soleil et de le ranger dans des endroits chauds, mal ventilés, comme à l’intérieur d’une voiture en été. • Protégez l’appareil photo et son écran contre les chocs et les vibrations excessives susceptibles de les endommager. • Evitez d’utiliser et de ranger l’appareil photo dans un endroit poussiéreux, mal entretenu, humide ou mal ventilé, afin de ne pas endommager ses composants internes. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de combustibles ou de produits chimiques inflammables. Ne transportez et ne stockez jamais de liquides inflammables, de gaz ou de matériaux explosifs dans le même compartiment que l’appareil photo ou ses accessoires. • Ne rangez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de boules de naphtaline. 169 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo Usage avec précaution de l’appareil photo dans les environnements humides Lorsque vous transférez l’appareil photo d’un environnement froid à un environnement chaud, de la condensation peut se former sur l’objectif et les composants internes de l’appareil photo. Si tel est le cas, éteignez l’appareil photo et attendez au moins 1 heure. Si de la condensation s’est formée sur la carte mémoire, retirez-la de l’appareil photo et attendez que l’humidité se soit évaporée avant de la réinsérer. Autres avertissements • Ne faites pas tournoyer l’appareil photo par la dragonne. Vous risquez de vous blesser, de blesser d’autres personnes ou d’endommager l’appareil photo. • Ne peignez pas l’appareil photo, la peinture risquant de bloquer ses pièces mobiles et de perturber son fonctionnement. • Eteignez l’appareil photo si vous ne l’utilisez pas. • L’appareil photo contient des pièces fragiles. Evitez de faire subir des chocs à l’appareil photo. • Protégez l’écran de toute pression extérieure en le conservant dans l’étui lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Protégez l’appareil photo des rayures en le tenant à l’écart du sable, des objets pointus ou des pièces de monnaie. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo si l’écran est fissuré ou endommagé. Des morceaux de plastique ou d’acrylique risquent de vous blesser les mains ou le visage. Apportez l’appareil photo dans un centre de service aprèsvente Samsung afin de la faire réparer. • Ne posez jamais l’appareil photo, sa batterie, son chargeur ou ses accessoires à proximité, à l’intérieur ou au-dessus d’un dispositif chauffant, tel qu’un four à micro-ondes, une cuisinière ou un radiateur. La chaleur peut déformer ou faire surchauffer ces appareils et provoquer une incendie ou une explosion. • Evitez toute exposition de l’objectif à la lumière directe du soleil — ceci risque d’entraîner une décoloration ou un mauvais fonctionnement du capteur d’images. • Protégez l’objectif des traces de doigt et des éraflures. Nettoyez l’objectif à l’aide d’un chiffon doux et propre, exempt de poussière. • L’appareil photo peut s’éteindre en cas de pression extérieure. Cela a pour but de protéger la carte mémoire. Allumez l’appareil photo pour l’utiliser à nouveau. • Il est possible que l’appareil photo chauffe en cours d’utilisation. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ou les performances de l’appareil photo. • Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo à des températures faibles, il peut mettre du temps à s’allumer, une décoloration peut se produire temporairement ou des images persistantes peuvent apparaître. Il ne s’agit en aucun cas d’un dysfonctionnement, et ces perturbations momentanées se corrigent d’elles-mêmes une fois que l’appareil photo retrouve à nouveau une température plus modérée. • La peinture ou le métal sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut provoquer des allergies, des démangeaisons, de l’eczéma ou des boursouflures pour les personnes à peau sensible. Si vous présentez de tels symptômes, arrêtez immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil photo et consultez un médecin. • N’introduisez pas de corps étrangers dans les compartiments, les logements ou les ouvertures de l’appareil photo. Il est possible que votre garantie ne couvre pas les dommages provoqués par une mauvaise utilisation. • Ne confiez pas la réparation de l’appareil photo à un technicien non agréé et ne tentez pas de le réparer vous-même. Votre garantie ne couvre pas les dégâts résultant d’une réparation par un technicien non agréé. 170 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo A propos des cartes mémoire Cartes mémoires prises en charge Ce produit prend en charge les cartes mémoire microSD, microSDHC ou microSDXC. Adaptateur de carte mémoire Carte mémoire Pour pouvoir lire des données sur un ordinateur ou par le biais d’un lecteur de cartes, insérez la carte dans l’adaptateur approprié. 171 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo Capacité de la carte mémoire La capacité de la mémoire peut varier en fonction de la scène ou des conditions de prise de vue. Ces capacités sont données pour une carte SD de 2 Go. Taille Qualité Maximale Elevée Normale RAW RAW + Très élevée RAW + Elevée RAW + Normale Photo 20.0M (5472X3648) 160 290 398 55 35 44 48 10.1M (3888X2592) 288 486 630 - 44 51 53 5.9M (2976X1984) 435 679 835 - 49 54 56 2.0M (1728X1152) 831 1 081 1 201 - 56 58 57 Mode Rafale 489 743 899 - - - - 16.9M (5472X3080) 186 332 450 - 37 46 50 7.8M (3712X2088) 355 577 730 - 48 52 55 4.9M (2944X1656) 497 752 908 - 51 55 56 2.1M (1920X1080) 1 546 2 804 3 847 - 60 62 63 13.3M (3648X3648) 228 398 529 - 40 48 52 7.0M (2640X2640) 385 616 771 - 48 53 55 4.0M (2000X2000) 566 829 981 - 52 56 57 1.1M (1024X1024) 2 779 4 690 6 085 - 62 63 64 172 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire • Evitez d’exposer la carte mémoire à des températures extrêmes (inférieures à 0 °C ou supérieures à 40 °C). Cela risque de provoquer des dysfonctionnements de la carte mémoire. • Introduisez la carte mémoire dans le bon sens. Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil photo ainsi que la carte mémoire. • N’utilisez pas de carte mémoire formatée avec un autre appareil photo ou avec un ordinateur. Reformatez la carte mémoire sur l’appareil photo. • Eteignez l’appareil photo avant d’introduire ou de retirer la carte mémoire. • Vous ne devez pas retirer la carte mémoire ou éteindre l’appareil photo lorsque le voyant clignote. Vous risquez d’endommager vos données. • Au terme de la durée de vie de la carte mémoire, vous ne pouvez plus stocker de photos sur la carte. Utilisez une autre carte mémoire. • Evitez de plier la carte mémoire, de la laisser tomber ou de la soumettre à des chocs ou des pressions importantes. • Evitez d’utiliser ou de ranger toute carte mémoire à proximité de champs magnétiques. • Evitez d’utiliser ou de ranger toute carte mémoire dans des environnements chauds, très humides ou en contact avec des substances corrosives. Taille Qualité HQ Normale Vidéo 1920X1080 (30 ips) Environ 17' Environ 19' 51" 1280X720 (30 ips) Environ 23' 46" Environ 29' 38" 640X480 (30 ips) Environ 52' 57" Environ 69' 43" Pour partager (30 ips) - Environ 235' 48" • Les valeurs précédentes sont mesurées sans utiliser la fonction de zoom. • Le temps d’enregistrement disponible peut varier si le zoom est utilisé. • Plusieurs vidéos ont été enregistrées successivement afin de déterminer la durée totale d’enregistrement. • La durée maximale d’enregistrement est de 29 minutes et 59 secondes par fichier. • La durée maximale de lecture de vidéos Pour partager est de 30 secondes par fichier. 173 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo A propos de la batterie Utilisez uniquement des batteries homologuées par Samsung. Caractéristiques de la batterie Elément Description Modèle* B740AE/B740AC/B740AU/B740AK Type Batterie au lithium-ion Capacité des cellules 2 330 mAh Tension 3,8 V Temps de charge** (Lorsque la batterie est complètement déchargée) Environ 270 min * Les caractéristiques de la batterie ou du modèle peuvent différer selon votre région. ** Les valeurs indiquées ci-dessus sont basées sur l’utilisation du câble de connexion USB et de l’adaptateur secteur fournis. La recharge de la batterie en la raccordant à un ordinateur peut s’avérer plus lente. • Evitez tout contact de la carte mémoire avec des liquides, de la poussière ou des corps étrangers. Si la carte mémoire est sale, nettoyez-la avec un chiffon doux avant de l’introduire dans l’appareil photo. • Evitez que la carte mémoire ou l’emplacement pour carte mémoire n’entre en contact avec des liquides, de la poussière ou tout corps étranger. Cela risque d’endommager l’appareil photo ou la carte mémoire. • Lorsque vous transportez une carte mémoire, rangez-la dans un étui afin de la protéger de l’électricité statique. • Transférez vos données importantes sur d’autres supports, tel qu’un disque dur ou un CD ou DVD. • Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo de manière prolongée, la carte mémoire peut chauffer. Ceci est normal et n’entraîne aucun dysfonctionnement. • Utilisez une carte mémoire conforme aux normes en vigueur. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. 174 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo Des blessures pouvant s’avérer mortelles peuvent résulter d’une utilisation imprudente ou inappropriée de la batterie. Pour votre sécurité, veuillez suivre ces instructions destinées à utiliser la batterie correctement : • La batterie peut s’enflammer ou bien éclater si celle-ci n’est pas manipulée correctement. Si vous remarquez un quelconque défaut de fabrication, une fêlure ou d’autres anomalies sur la batterie, cessez de l’utiliser immédiatement et contactez votre fabricant. • Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs de batterie originaux recommandés par le fabricant, et rechargez la batterie en respectant scrupuleusement les consignes décrites dans ce mode d’emploi. • Ne placez pas la batterie à proximité d’appareils chauffants ou dans un environnement soumis à des températures élevées, par exemple à l’intérieur d’une voiture en été. • Ne placez jamais la batterie dans un four à micro-ondes. • Evitez de stocker ou d’utiliser la batterie dans des endroits chauds et humides comme des spas ou des cabines de douche. • Ne posez pas l’appareil sur des surfaces inflammables comme de la literie, des couvertures, des tapis ou des couvertures électriques pendant des périodes prolongées. • Lorsque l’appareil est allumé, ne le laissez pas dans un espace confiné pendant une période prolongée. • Ne laissez pas les bornes de la batterie entrer en contact avec des objets métalliques comme des colliers, des pièces de monnaie, des clés ou des montres. • Utilisez uniquement des batteries de remplacement lithium-ion originales recommandées par le fabricant. • Ne démontez ou ne perforez pas la batterie avec un objet tranchant. • Evitez de soumettre la batterie à une pression élevée ou à des éléments susceptibles de l’écraser. • Evitez de soumettre la batterie à des chocs importants, par exemple la laisser tomber de très haut. • N’exposez pas la batterie à des températures d’au moins 60 °C. • Evitez de mettre la batterie en contact avec des liquides ou de l’humidité. • Evitez tout contact de la batterie avec des flammes et de l’exposer à une chaleur intense ou au soleil de façon prolongée. Informations sur le traitement des batteries usagées • Portez une attention particulière à la façon dont vous jetez les batteries usagées. • Ne jetez pas la batterie au feu. • Les consignes de traitement des batteries usagées peuvent varier d’un pays à l’autre. Procédez à la mise au rebut de la batterie usagée en accord avec toutes les réglementations locales et fédérales en vigueur. Consignes relatives à la recharge de la batterie Respectez les consignes de recharge indiquées dans ce mode d’emploi pour recharger la batterie. La batterie peut s’enflammer ou éclater si celle-ci n’est pas rechargée correctement. 175 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo Autonomie de la batterie Mode Prise de vue Durée moyenne / Nombre de photos Photos • Environ 325 min /Environ 650 photos (Si vous fixez un objectif 9 mm et utilisez le flash interne) • Environ 265 min /Environ 530 photos (Si vous fixez un objectif entre 9 et 27 mm et utilisez le flash externe) Vidéo Environ 190 min (Enregistrement de vidéos à une résolution de 1920X1080 et à une fréquence de 30 ips.) • Ces chiffres proviennent des normes de test CIPA. Ils peuvent varier en fonction de votre utilisation réelle. • Les temps de prise de vue disponibles varient en fonction de l’arrièreplan, de l’intervalle de prise de vue et des conditions d’utilisation. • Plusieurs vidéos ont été enregistrées successivement afin de déterminer la durée totale d’enregistrement. Message de batterie faible Lorsque la batterie est complètement déchargée, l’icône de batterie devient rouge et le message « Batterie faible » apparaît. Remarques à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie • Evitez d’exposer les cartes mémoire à des températures extrêmes (inférieures à 0 °C ou supérieures à 40 °C). Les températures extrêmes peuvent avoir pour effet de réduire la capacité de recharge des batteries. • Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo de manière prolongée, la zone située autour de la trappe batterie peut chauffer. Ceci n’affecte pas l’utilisation normale de l’appareil photo. • Ne tirez pas sur le cordon d’alimentation pour le débrancher de la prise secteur, car vous risquez de provoquer des flammes ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. • A des températures inférieures à 0 °C, la capacité et la durée de vie de la batterie peuvent diminuer. • La capacité de la batterie peut diminuer à de faibles températures, mais redevient normale à des températures plus modérées. • Si vous rangez l’appareil photo sans l’utiliser pour une période de temps prolongée, retirez d’abord la batterie. Les batteries peuvent fuir ou se détériorer avec le temps, risquant d’endommager gravement l’appareil photo. Si vous rangez l’appareil photo pendant une durée prolongée, sans avoir retiré la batterie, celle-ci risque de se décharger. Lorsque la batterie est complètement déchargée, il peut s’avérer impossible de la recharger. • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil photo pendant une durée prolongée (3 mois ou plus), vérifiez la batterie et rechargez-la régulièrement. Si vous laissez continuellement la batterie se décharger, sa capacité et sa durée de vie peuvent diminuer, ce qui peut entraîner son dysfonctionnement, des flammes ou son éclatement. 176 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo Avertissements à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie Protégez la batterie, le chargeur et la carte mémoire de toute détérioration. Evitez tout contact de la batterie avec des objets métalliques, car cela risque de provoquer un court-circuit entre les bornes + et - de la batterie, de l’endommager de manière temporaire ou permanente, ou de provoquer des flammes ou une électrocution . Remarques concernant la recharge de la batterie • Si le voyant d’état est éteint, assurez-vous que la batterie est correctement mise en place. • Si lors de la recharge l’appareil photo est allumé, la batterie peut ne pas se recharger complètement. Eteignez l’appareil photo avant de recharger la batterie. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo lors de la recharge de la batterie. Vous risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. • Ne tirez pas sur le cordon d’alimentation pour le débrancher de la prise secteur, car vous risquez de provoquer des flammes ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. • Laissez la batterie se recharger pendant au moins 10 minutes avant d’allumer l’appareil photo. • Si vous raccordez l’appareil photo à une source d’alimentation externe alors que la batterie est déchargée, l’utilisation de fonctions à forte consommation énergétique provoque l’extinction de l’appareil photo. Rechargez la batterie pour pouvoir utiliser l’appareil photo normalement. • Si vous rebranchez le cordon d’alimentation alors que la batterie est complètement rechargée, le voyant d’état s’allume pendant environ 30 minutes. • L’utilisation du flash et l’enregistrement de vidéos déchargent rapidement la batterie. Rechargez la batterie jusqu’à ce que le voyant d’état rouge s’éteigne. • Si le voyant d’état rouge clignote, rebranchez le cordon ou retirez la batterie et réintroduisez-la. • Si vous rechargez la batterie lorsque le cordon surchauffe ou lorsque la température est trop élevée, le voyant d’état rouge peut clignoter. La recharge démarre lorsque la batterie a refroidi. • La recharge excessive des batteries peut raccourcir leur durée de vie. A la fin de chaque recharge, débranchez le cordon de l’appareil photo. • Ne tordez pas le cordon d’alimentation et ne placez pas d’objets lourds dessus. Vous risquez d’endommager le cordon. 177 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo Remarques à propos de la recharge avec raccordement à un ordinateur • Utilisez uniquement le câble USB fourni. • La recharge de la batterie peut s’avérer impossible quand : - vous utilisez un concentrateur USB ; - d’autres appareils USB sont raccordés à votre ordinateur ; - vous connectez le câble sur le port situé sur la face avant de votre ordinateur ; - le port USB de votre ordinateur ne prend pas en charge un niveau standard de puissance en sortie (5 V, 500 mA). Utilisation et recyclage consciencieux des batteries et des chargeurs • Ne jetez jamais la batterie au feu. Respectez la réglementation en vigueur concernant l’élimination des batteries usagées. • Ne posez jamais les batteries ou l’appareil photo à l’intérieur ou audessus d’un dispositif chauffant, tel qu’un four à micro-ondes, une cuisinière ou un radiateur. En cas de surchauffe, les batteries risquent d’éclater. 178 Annexe Mise à jour du micrologiciel Connectez l’appareil photo à l’ordinateur et procédez à la mise à jour du micrologiciel de l’appareil photo ou de l’objectif. • Vous ne pouvez pas lancer la mise à niveau du firmware sans avoir complètement rechargé la batterie au préalable. Rechargez entièrement la batterie avant d’effectuer la mise à niveau du firmware. • Si vous mettez le firmware à jour, les paramètres utilisateur et les valeurs sont réinitialisés. (La date, l’heure, la langue et la sortie vidéo ne sont pas modifiées.) • N’éteignez pas l’appareil photo lorsque la mise à jour est en cours. 1 Eteignez l’appareil photo. 2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. • Vous devez brancher l'extrémité la plus petite du câble USB sur l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. • Si vous tentez de brancher le câble USB sur le port HDMI, l’appareil photo risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 3 Allumez l’appareil photo. 4 Sur l’ordinateur, sélectionnez i-Launcher ĺ Firmware Upgrade. 5 Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour télécharger le micrologiciel dans l’appareil photo. • Vous pouvez télécharger le micrologiciel de l’appareil photo ou de l’objectif. 6 Éteignez l’appareil photo une fois le téléchargement terminé. 7 Débranchez le câble USB. 8 Allumez l’appareil photo. 9 Appuyez sur [m] ĺ q ĺ Informations périphérique ĺ Mise à jour du logiciel ĺ Micrologiciel boîtier ou Micrologiciel objectif. 10 Cliquez sur Oui sur une fenêtre contextuelle de l’appareil photo pour la mise à jour du micrologiciel. 179 Annexe Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente Si l’appareil photo ne fonctionne pas correctement, vérifiez les éléments suivants avant de contacter un représentant. Lorsque vous apportez l’appareil photo dans un centre de service après-vente, veillez à également fournir les autres composants qui ont pu contribuer au dysfonctionnement, notamment la carte mémoire et la batterie. Problème Solutions possibles Impossible d’allumer l’appareil photo • Assurez-vous que la batterie est installée. • Assurez-vous que la batterie est correctement installée. • Rechargez la batterie. L’appareil photo s’éteint de façon inattendue • Rechargez la batterie. • L’appareil photo peut être réglé en mode extinction automatique ou configuré afin que l’écran s’éteigne automatiquement (p. 154). • Il est possible que l’appareil photo s’éteigne afin d’éviter que la carte mémoire ne soit endommagée en raison d’une chaleur excessive. Rallumez l’appareil photo. La batterie de l’appareil photo se décharge rapidement • La batterie peut se décharger plus rapidement dans un environnement où les températures sont basses (en dessous de 0 °C). Gardez la batterie au chaud en la plaçant dans votre poche. • L’utilisation du flash et l’enregistrement de vidéos déchargent rapidement la batterie. Rechargez-la si nécessaire. • La batterie est un consommable qui a une durée de vie limitée et doit périodiquement être remplacé. Remplacez-la si son autonomie diminue rapidement. Problème Solutions possibles Impossible de prendre des photos • La carte mémoire est pleine. Supprimez les fichiers inutiles ou insérez une nouvelle carte. • Formatez la carte mémoire. • La carte mémoire est défectueuse. Remplacez la carte mémoire. • Assurez-vous que l’appareil photo est allumé. • Rechargez la batterie. • Assurez-vous que la batterie est correctement installée. L’appareil photo ne répond pas Retirez la batterie, puis replacez-la. L’appareil photo chauffe Il est possible que l’appareil photo chauffe en cours d’utilisation. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ou les performances de l’appareil photo. Le flash se déclenche de façon inattendue L’électricité statique peut provoquer le déclenchement du flash. Il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil photo. Le flash ne fonctionne pas • Le flash est peut-être réglé sur Désactivé (p. 90). • Certains modes ne vous permettent pas d’utiliser le flash. La date et l’heure sont incorrectes Réglez la date et l’heure dans le menu q (p. 154). L’écran ou des touches ne fonctionnent pas Retirez la batterie, puis replacez-la. 180 Annexe > Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente Problème Solutions possibles La carte mémoire présente une erreur • Eteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le. • Retirez la carte mémoire, puis insérez-la de nouveau. • Formatez la carte mémoire. Pour davantage d’informations, voir « Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire » (p. 172). Le téléviseur ou l’ordinateur ne peuvent pas afficher les photos et les vidéos stockées sur une carte mémoire microSDXC. Les cartes mémoire microSDXC utilisent le système de fichiers exFAT. Assurez-vous que le dispositif externe est compatible avec le système de fichiers exFAT avant d’y connecter l’appareil photo. Votre ordinateur ne reconnaît pas les cartes mémoires microSDXC. Les cartes mémoire microSDXC utilisent le système de fichiers exFAT. Pour utiliser une carte mémoire microSDXC sur un ordinateur Windows XP, téléchargez et effectuez la mise à jour du pilote du système de fichiers exFAT, à partir du site Web de Microsoft. Impossible d’afficher des fichiers Si vous modifiez le nom d’un fichier, l’appareil photo risque de ne plus pouvoir le lire (le nom de fichier doit être conforme à la norme DCF). Si vous rencontrez ce problème, affichez le fichier sur un ordinateur. Problème Solutions possibles La photo est floue • Assurez-vous d’avoir réglé l’option de mise au point appropriée pour le type de prise de vue. • Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil photo. • Assurez-vous que l’objectif est propre. Dans le cas contraire, nettoyez-le (p. 167). Les couleurs de la photo ne correspondent pas à celles de la scène Un réglage incorrect de la balance des blancs peut provoquer un mauvais rendu des couleurs. Sélectionnez l’option Balance des blancs appropriée à la source de lumière (p. 72). La photo est trop claire ou trop sombre. Votre photo est surexposée ou sous-exposée. • Réglez la valeur d’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation. • Réglez la sensibilité ISO (p. 71). • Activez ou désactivez le flash (p. 90). • Réglez la valeur d’exposition (p. 97). Les photos sont déformées L’objectif grand-angle, qui permet de photographier avec un angle de vue large, peut générer de très légères déformations de la photo prise par l’appareil photo. Ceci est normal et n’engendre pas de dysfonctionnement. Des lignes horizontales apparaissent sur la photo Cela peut se produire lorsque le sujet est exposé à une source lumineuse fluorescente ou une lampe au mercure. Sélectionnez une vitesse d’obturation lente ou réglez le mode de prise de vues sur Automatique. 181 Annexe > Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente Problème Solutions possibles L’écran de lecture ne s’affiche pas sur le périphérique externe connecté • Vérifiez qu’un câble HDMI est correctement branché sur l’écran externe. • Assurez-vous que la carte mémoire est reconnue. L’ordinateur ne reconnaît pas l’appareil photo • Vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement branché. • Assurez-vous que l’appareil photo est allumé. • Assurez-vous d’utiliser un système d’exploitation pris en charge. L’appareil photo se déconnecte de l’ordinateur pendant le transfert des fichiers L’électricité statique peut interrompre la transmission des fichiers. Débranchez le câble USB, puis rebranchez-le. i-Launcher ne s’exécute pas correctement • Quittez i-Launcher et redémarrez l’application. • Selon la configuration et l’environnement de votre ordinateur, il est possible que l’application ne démarre pas automatiquement. Si tel est le cas, cliquez sur Démarrer ĺ Tous les programmes ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher ĺ Samsung i-Launcher sur votre ordinateur Windows. (Dans le cas de Windows 8, ouvrez l’écran d’accueil, puis sélectionnez Toutes les applications ĺ Samsung i-Launcher.) Sinon, cliquez sur Applications ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher sur votre ordinateur Mac OS. Problème Solutions possibles La fonction de mise au point automatique ne fonctionne pas • La mise au point ne s’effectue pas sur le sujet. Lorsque le sujet se trouve en dehors de la zone AF, recadrez-le dans la zone AF, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course. • Le sujet est trop proche. Eloignez-vous du sujet et prenez la photo. L’objectif est inopérant • Vérifiez que l’objectif est correctement installé. • Retirez l’objectif de l’appareil photo et remettez-le en place. Le flash externe ne fonctionne pas Assurez-vous que le flash externe est correctement monté sur le port du flash externe. Lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo, l’écran de réglage de la date et de l’heure s’affiche • Réglez de nouveau la date et l’heure. • Cet écran apparaît lorsque la source d’alimentation interne de l’appareil photo est complètement déchargée. Insérez une batterie pleine puis éteignez l’appareil photo pendant au moins 72 heures afin d’assurer une recharge complète. 182 Annexe Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Capteur d’images Type BSI CMOS Dimensions du capteur 13,2 X 8,8 mm Pixels effectifs Environ 20,5 mégapixels Nombre total de pixels Environ 20,9 mégapixels Filtre couleur Filtre RGB couleurs primaires Monture de l’objectif Type Monture Samsung NX-M Objectif disponible Objectifs Samsung NX-M Stabilisation de l’image Type Décentrement (dépend de l’objectif) Mode Désactivée/Mode 1/Mode 2 Correction des déformations Activé / Désactivé (dépend de l’objectif) i-Function Pris en charge (en fonction de l’objectif) Écran Type TFT LCD avec volet tactile (compatible type C) Taille 3,0" (Environ 75,2 mm) Résolution HVGA (320X480) 460,8 k points Champ de vision Environ 100 % Angle Pivotement vers le haut : 180° Affichage utilisateur Grille, Icônes, Histogramme, Indicateur de niveau Mise au point Type Contraste Mise au point automatique Foyer de mise au point automatique • Sélection : 1 point (sélection libre) • Multiple : Normal 21 points, Macro 35 points • Détection des visages : max. 10 visages • Mise au point avec suivi des objets Mode AF unique, AF continu, Mise au point manuelle, Mise au point tactile et Déclencheur Voyant de mise au point assistée LED verte 183 Annexe > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Obturateur Type Obturateur électronique Vitesse • Automatique : 1/16 000 – 1/4 s • Manuel : 1/16 000 – 30 s (Palier 1/3 EV) • Bulb (limite de temps : 4 min) Exposition Système de mesure de l’exposition TTL 221 (17X13) Segment bloc Mesure de l’exposition : Multiple, Centrée, Sélective Plage de la mesure de l’exposition : EV 0–18 (ISO160 · 9 mm, F3.5) Compensation ±3 EV (Palier 1/3 EV) Verrouillage AE Touche de personnalisation Equivalent ISO Automatique, 160, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400, 12800 (1 ou Palier 1/3 EV) * Vous pouvez sélectionner les paramètres ISO auto jusqu’à ISO 3200. Vous pouvez sélectionner ISO 100 et 25600. Mode de sélection Mode Unique, Continue, Mode Rafale (5M uniquement), Retardateur, Bracketing (Exposition automatique, Balance des blancs, Assistant photo, Profondeur) Prise de vue en continu 6 ips * La vitesse maximale de prise de vue est de 6 images par seconde. Elle ralentira au bout environ de 11 clichés au format JPEG et de 4 clichés au format RAW. (Cela peut varier en fonction des caractéristiques techniques de la carte mémoire.) Prise de vue Bracketing Bracketing Exposition automatique (±3 EV), Bracketing Balance des blancs, Bracketing Assistant photo, Bracketing de profondeur de champ Retardateur à distance 2–30 s (intervalle d’1 seconde) Déclenchement de l’obturateur via le port micro-USB (en, option) Flash Type Flash intégré Mode Flash intelligent, Automatique, Yeux rouges auto, Contre jour, Ctre jour + Yeux rouges, 1er Rideau, 2e Rideau, Désactivée Nombre guide 4,9 (sur base ISO 160, 24 mm), 4 (sur base ISO 100, 24 mm) Angle de vue 24 mm (équivalent film 35 mm) Vitesse de synchronisation Inférieure à 1/200 s Valeur d’exposition Flash -2 – +2 EV (Palier 1/2 EV) Flash externe Flash externe Samsung NX mini disponible (SEF7A) (en, option) Nombre guide : 8 (sur base ISO 160, 24 mm), 7 (sur base ISO 100, 24 mm) Terminal de synchronisation Port du flash externe 184 Annexe > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Balance des blancs Mode Balance des blancs automatique, Lumière du jour, Nuageux, Blanc fluorescent, Blanc/Noir fluorescent, Lumière du jour fluorescent, Tungstène, Balance des blancs flash, Réglage personnalisé, Température couleur (Manuel) Ajustement micro Orange / Bleu / Vert / Magenta 7 paliers respectivement Plage dynamique Désactivée/Plage intelligente+/HDR Assistant photo Mode Standard, Accentué, Portrait, Paysage, Naturel, Rétro, Cool, Calme, Classique, Personnalisé 1, Personnalisé 2, Personnalisé 3 Paramètres Couleur, Saturation, Netteté, Contraste Prise de vue Mode Automatique, Intelligent, Programme, Priorité ouverture, Priorité vitesse, Manuel Mode intelligent Beauté, Meilleure photo, Mode Continu, Prise Enfants, Paysage, Macro, Nature morte, Fêtes et intérieurs, Action, Ton riche, Panorama, Cascade, Silhouette, Coucher de soleil, Nuit, Feux d'artifice, Lumière Filtre intelligent Vignettage, Miniature, Esquisse, Œil de poisson Taille • JPEG (3:2): 20.0M (5472X3648), 10.1M (3888X2592), 5.9M (2976X1984), 5.0M (2736X1824) (mode Rafale uniquement), 2.0M (1728X1152) • JPEG (16:9): 16.9M (5472X3080), 7.8M (3712X2088), 4.9M (2944X1656), 2.1M (1920X1080) • JPEG (1:1): 13.3M (3648X3648), 7.0M (2640X2640), 4.0M (2000X2000), 1.1M (1024X1024) • RAW: 20.0M (5472X3648) Qualité Maximale, Elevée, Normale, RAW, RAW + Très élevée, RAW + Elevée, RAW + Normale Norme RAW SRW (ver.3.0.0) Espace colorimétrique sRGB, Adobe RGB Vidéo Type MP4 (H.264) Format Vidéo : H.264, son : AAC Mode vidéo AE Programme, Priorité ouverture, Priorité vitesse, Manuel Clip vidéo Son activé / désactivé (durée de prise de vue : maxi. 29' 59'') Filtre intelligent Vignettage, Miniature, Esquisse, Œil de poisson 185 Annexe > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Taille 1920X1080, 1280X720, 640X480, 320X240 (Pour partager) Fréquence d’images 30 ips Multi-mouvements x0.25 (640X480, 320X240 uniquement), x1, x5, x10, x20 Qualité HQ, Normale Son Mono Retouche Découpage de la durée, Capture d’images fixes Lecture Type Image unique, Miniatures (15/28), Diaporama, Vidéo Retouche Filtre intelligent, Rogner, Redimensionner, Rotation, Retouche des visages, Luminosité, Contraste, Réglage automatique, Saturation, Réglage RVB, Température couleur, Exposition Filtre intelligent Vignettage, Miniature, Onirique, Esquisse, Œil de poisson, Classique, Rétro, Peinture à l'huile, Dessin, Peinture à l'encre, Filtre croisé, Prise de vue zoom Stockage Support Mémoire externe (en option)* : carte microSD (jusqu’à 2 Go garantis), carte microSDHC (jusqu’à 32 Go garantis), carte microSDXC (jusqu’à 64 Go garantis) * Classe 6 et supérieure recommandée Format de fichier RAW (SRW (ver.3.0.0)), JPEG (EXIF 2.3), MP4 (vidéo), DCF Réseau sans fil Type IEEE 802.11b/g/n Fonction AutoShare, Remote Viewfinder, MobileLink, Partage instantané, Sauvegarde automatique, Samsung Link, Réseaux sociaux et Cloud, Courriel, Baby Monitor, Group Share NFC Oui Interface Sortie numérique USB 2.0 (prise micro-USB) Sortie vidéo • NTSC, PAL (au choix) • HDMI Déclenchement externe Oui Connecteur d’alimentation CC 5,0 V, 0,55 A via micro USB 186 Annexe > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Source d'alimentation Type Batterie rechargeable : B740AE/B740AC/B740AU/ B740AK (2 330 mAh, 3,8 V) * Les caractéristiques de la batterie ou du modèle peuvent différer selon votre région. Dimensions (L x H x P) 110,4 x 61,9 x 22,5 mm Poids 158 g (sans batterie, ni carte mémoire) Température de fonctionnement 0 – 40 °C Humidité ambiante tolérée 5 – 85% Logiciels i-Launcher, Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 5 * Ces caractéristiques peuvent changer sans préavis à des fins d’amélioration du rendement. * Toutes les marques de commerce et noms de produits appartiennent à leurs détenteurs respectifs. 187 Annexe Glossaire AP (Point d’accès) Un point d’accès est un appareil qui permet aux appareils sans fil de se connecter à un réseau câblé. Réseau Ad-Hoc Un réseau ad-hoc est une connexion temporaire permettant de partager des fichiers ou une connexion Internet entre des ordinateurs et des appareils. Adobe RGB Adobe RGB est utilisé pour des impressions professionnelles et dispose d’une gamme de couleurs plus importante que la norme sRGB. Il vous permet ainsi de retoucher facilement des photos sur un ordinateur. AEB (Bracketing d’exposition automatique) Cette fonctionnalité permet de prendre automatiquement plusieurs photos à différentes expositions afin de vous aider à obtenir une exposition correcte. AEL (Verrouillage automatique de l’exposition) Ces fonctions vous permettent de verrouiller l’exposition sur laquelle vous souhaitez calculer celle-ci. AF (Mise au point automatique) Système qui permet à l’objectif de l’appareil photo d’effectuer une mise au point automatique sur le sujet. L’appareil photo se base sur le contraste pour opérer la mise au point automatique. AMOLED (matrice active à diodes organiques électroluminescentes) / LCD (Ecran à cristaux liquides) L’écran AMOLED est très fin et très léger, car il ne nécessite aucun rétro-éclairage. L’écran LCD est couramment utilisé dans le secteur de l’électronique grand public. Ce type d’écran nécessite un rétro-éclairage séparé, de type CCFL ou LED, pour reproduire les couleurs. Ouverture L’ouverture contrôle la quantité de lumière atteignant le capteur de l’appareil photo. 188 Annexe > Glossaire Composition En photographie, la composition signifie la disposition des éléments d’une scène. En règle générale, une bonne composition doit obéir à la règle des tiers. DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) Spécification créée par la Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA) qui définit le format et le système de fichiers pour les appareils photo. Profondeur de champ Zone de netteté acceptable entre le point de mise au point le plus proche et celui le plus éloigné. La profondeur de champ varie selon la focale et l’ouverture utilisées, ainsi que la distance entre l’appareil photo et le sujet. Avec, par exemple, une ouverture inférieure, la profondeur de champ augmente et l’arrière-plan de la composition devient flou. Bougé de l’appareil photo (flou) Si vous bougez l’appareil photo alors que l’obturateur est ouvert, l’image risque d’être floue. Cela est d’autant plus vrai si la vitesse d’obturation est lente. Vous pouvez éviter ce phénomène de bougé de l’appareil photo en augmentant la sensibilité, en utilisant le flash ou en augmentant la vitesse d’obturation. Pour stabiliser l’appareil photo, vous pouvez également utiliser un trépied ou la fonction OIS. Cloud Le Cloud est une technologie permettant de stocker des données sur des serveurs distants et de les utiliser à partir d’un appareil via un accès Internet. Espace colorimétrique Gamme des couleurs « visibles » par l’appareil photo. Température des couleurs La température des couleurs est une mesure exprimée en Kelvin (K) qui indique la tonalité chromatique d’un type spécifique de source de lumière. Lorsque la température de couleur augmente, la couleur de la source lumineuse devient bleutée. Lorsque la température de couleur diminue, la couleur de la source lumineuse devient rougeâtre. A 5 500 degrés Kelvin, la couleur de la source lumineuse est similaire celle de la lumière du soleil à midi. 189 Annexe > Glossaire Flash Lumière brève et intense qui permet de créer une exposition adéquate lorsque la luminosité est faible. Longueur de focale Distance entre le centre de l’objectif et son point focal (en millimètres). Des longueurs de focale plus importantes réduisent les angles de vue et agrandissent le sujet. Des longueurs de focale moins élevées agrandissent les angles de vue. Histogramme Représentation graphique de la luminosité d’une image. L’axe des abscisses représente la luminosité et l’axe des ordonnées le nombre de pixels. Des points à l’extrême gauche (trop sombre) ou à l’extrême droite (trop clair) signifient que la photo n’est pas correctement exposée. H.264 / MPEG-4 Format vidéo à compression élevée mis au point par les organismes internationaux de normalisation ISO-IEC et ITU-T. Ce codec permet d’obtenir une bonne qualité vidéo avec des débits binaires faibles développés par la Joint Video Team (JVT). EV (Valeur d’exposition) Ensemble des combinaisons de vitesses d’obturation et d’ouverture de l’objectif de l’appareil photo pour une même exposition. Compensation EV Cette fonctionnalité permet de régler rapidement la valeur d’exposition mesurée par l’appareil photo, selon des incréments restreints, afin d’améliorer l’exposition des photos. Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format) Spécification créée par la Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA) qui définit le format de fichiers pour les appareils photo. Exposition Quantité de lumière atteignant le capteur de l’appareil photo. L’exposition est contrôlée par la vitesse d’obturation, la valeur d’ouverture et la sensibilité ISO. 190 Annexe > Glossaire Mesure de l’exposition La mesure de l’exposition correspond à la manière dont l’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière nécessaire à la définition de l’exposition. MF (Mise au point manuelle) Système qui permet d’effectuer une mise au point manuelle sur le sujet à travers l’objectif de l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez utiliser la bague de mise au point en vue de la prise de vue d’un sujet. MJPEG (Motion JPEG) Format vidéo avec une compression d’images JPEG. Capteur d’images Partie physique de l’appareil photo qui comporte une cellule photosensible pour chaque pixel de l’image. Chaque cellule photosensible enregistre la valeur de la luminosité d’une exposition. Il existe deux types de capteurs : CCD (Charge-Coupled Device) et CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor). Adresse IP (protocole Internet) Une adresse IP est un nombre unique affecté à chacun des appareils raccordés à Internet. Sensibilité ISO Sensibilité de l’appareil photo à la lumière, mesurée d’après la sensibilité du film utilisé dans un appareil photo à pellicule. A une sensibilité ISO élevée, la vitesse d’obturation de l’appareil photo est plus grande, ce qui réduit le flou causé par le bougé de l’appareil ou par une faible luminosité. Toutefois, avec une sensibilité plus élevée, le risque de parasites est également plus grand. JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) Méthode de compression des images numériques avec pertes. Les images JPEG sont compressées afin de réduire la taille de leur fichier avec une dégradation minimale de la résolution. 191 Annexe > Glossaire PAL (Phase Alternate Line) Norme d’encodage couleur vidéo utilisée dans de nombreux pays d’Afrique, d’Asie, d’Europe et du Moyen-Orient. Qualité Expression du taux de compression d’une image numérique. Lorsque la qualité de l’image est élevée, le taux de compression est bas et la taille du fichier plus importante. RAW (données brutes CCD) Données originales non traitées, capturées directement par le capteur d’images de l’appareil photo. La balance des blancs, le contraste, la saturation, la netteté et d’autres données peuvent être modifiées avec le logiciel de retouche avant que l’image ne soit compressée dans un format de fichier standard. Résolution Nombre de pixels d’une image numérique. Les images à résolution élevée comportent plus de pixels et présentent généralement davantage de détails que les images avec une faible résolution. Parasite (ou bruit) Problème d’affichage des pixels, au niveau de leur emplacement ou de leur clarté, sur une image numérique. Des parasites peuvent apparaître si les photos sont prises avec une sensibilité trop élevée ou avec un réglage de sensibilité automatique dans un environnement sombre. NFC (Near Field Communication) La communication NFC est une technologie de communication sans-fil à courte portée. Vous pouvez utiliser des appareils compatibles NFC pour activer des fonctions ou échanger des données avec d’autres appareils. NTSC (National Television System Committee) Norme d’encodage couleur vidéo habituellement utilisée au Japon, en Amérique du Nord, aux Philippines, en Amérique du Sud, en Corée du Sud et à Taïwan. Zoom optique Zoom qui permet d’agrandir les images à l’aide de l’objectif sans dégrader la qualité des images. 192 Annexe > Glossaire Vitesse d’obturation La vitesse d’obturation est définie par la durée nécessaire à l’ouverture et à la fermeture de l’obturateur. Du point de vue de la luminosité d’une photo, la vitesse d’obturation constitue un facteur important, car elle contrôle la quantité de lumière qui passe à travers l’ouverture avant d’atteindre le capteur d’images. Par ailleurs, une vitesse d’obturation rapide accorde moins de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer. La photo devient plus sombre et immobilise un sujet en mouvement plus facilement. sRGB (RGB standard) Norme internationale de l’espace colorimétrique établie par la CEI (Commission électrotechnique internationale). Elle est définie d’après l’espace colorimétrique des écrans informatiques et est également utilisée comme espace colorimétrique standard pour Exif. Vignettage Réduction de la luminosité ou de la saturation d’une image à sa périphérie (bords externes). Le vignettage permet de mettre en évidence les sujets positionnés au centre de l’image. Balance des blancs (équilibre des couleurs) Réglage de l’intensité des couleurs (généralement les couleurs primaires comme le rouge, le vert et le bleu) d’une image. La balance des blancs a pour but d’obtenir un rendu fidèle des couleurs. Wi-Fi La technologie Wi-Fi permet aux appareils électroniques d’échanger des données sans fil via un réseau. WPS (configuration Wi-Fi protégée) WPS est une technologie permettant de sécuriser les réseaux domestiques sans fil. 193 Annexe Accessoires en option Les articles suivants vous sont proposés en option : Objectif, Flash externe, Déclenchement de l’obturateur (de type microUSB), Batterie rechargeable, Chargeur de batterie, Sac de transport de l’appareil photo, Étui de l’appareil photo, Carte mémoire, Filtre, Câble USB, Câble HDMI, Dragonne • Pour connaître le type et la disponibilité, et obtenir une image, des accessoires, rendez-vous sur le site Web de Samsung. • Avant tout achat d’accessoire, vérifiez qu’il est bien compatible avec l’appareil photo. GPS10 et EM10 sont incompatibles avec l’appareil photo. • Utilisez uniquement des accessoires homologués par Samsung. Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages causés par l’utilisation d’accessoires fournis par d’autres fabricants. • Les accessoires fournis avec chaque produit peuvent différer en type et en quantité. 194 Annexe A Accessoires en option Disposition de la bague d’adaptation 52 Mise en place du flash 51 Monter la bague d’adaptation 52 Présentation du flash 50 Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 164 Agrandissement 107 Appareil photo Connexion à l’ordinateur 159 Connexion en tant que disque amovible 159 Déconnexion (Windows) 160 Disposition 28 Assistant photo 74 B Baby Monitor 132 Balance des blancs 72 Batterie Attention 173 En charge 35 Insérer 32 Bracketing 87 C Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo 182 Carte mémoire Attention 170 Insérer 32 Centre de service après-vente 179 Contenu du coffret 27 D Date et heure 154 Déclenchement par sélection 82 Diaporama 107 DIRECT LINK 30 E Ecran tactile 38 Effet yeux rouges 91 En charge 35 Entretien 167 Espace colorimétrique 148 F Fichiers Protection 105 Suppression 106 Type de photo 70 Type de vidéo 100 Filtre intelligent Mode de prise de vue 96 Mode Lecture 116 Flash Intensité 91 Nombre guide 25 Options du Flash 90 Fondu 101 I Icônes Mode de prise de vue 43 Mode Lecture 45 i-Launcher 163 L Longueur de focale 20 Luminosité écran 153 M Mesure de l’exposition 92 Miniatures 103 Mise au point automatique 75 Mise au point avec suivi 81 Mise au point tactile 81 MobileLink 126 Mode Economie d’énergie 154 Index 195 Annexe > Index Mode Meilleure photo 57 Mode Panorama 58 Modes de prise de vue Automatique 54 Enregistrement 65 Intelligent 56 Manuel 63 Priorité ouverture 61 Priorité vitesse 62 Programme 59 N NFC (Partage par contact) 123 Nombre f 15 O Objectifs Déverrouillage 48 Disposition 47 Marquages 49 Verrouillage 48 Ouverture 15, 19 P Panneau intelligent 40 Paramètres 153 Photos Affichage sur l’appareil photo 103 Agrandissement 107 Options de prise de vue 69 Retouche 112 Posture 13 Prise de vue 85 Profondeur de champ (DOF) 16, 20 R Réglage de l’image Réglage des photos 114 Retouche de visages 115 Règle des tiers 23 Remote Viewfinder 130 Réseau sans fil 118 Résolution Mode Lecture 113 Mode Prise de vue (photo) 69 Mode Prise de vue (vidéo) 99 Retardateur 87 Retouche de visages 115 Rotation 113 S Samsung Link 142 Sauvegarde automatique 134 Sensibilité ISO 71 Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) 84 T Téléviseur 158 Transfert de fichiers Mac 160 Windows 159 Type d’affichage 46 V Valeur d’exposition (EV) 15, 97 Vidéo 154 Enregistrement 65 Options 99 Prise de vue en cours 111 Visionnage 109 Vitesse d’obturation 17, 19 196 Annexe Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit (Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques) (Applicable aux pays disposant de systèmes de collecte séparés) Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque audio, câble USB, etc.) ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée des déchets présentant des risques environnementaux et de santé publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres déchets. Vous favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un développement durable. Les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les procédures et les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage. Les entreprises et particuliers sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets. Elimination des batteries de ce produit (Applicable aux pays disposant de systèmes de collecte séparés) Le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l'emballage indique que les batteries de ce produit ne doivent pas être éliminées en fin de vie avec les autres déchets ménagers. L'indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de mercure, de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive CE 2006/66. Si les batteries ne sont pas correctement éliminées, ces substances peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou à l'environnement. Afin de protéger les ressources naturelles et d'encourager la réutilisation du matériel, veillez à séparer les batteries des autres types de déchets et à les recycler via votre système local de collecte gratuite des batteries. CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) 197 ATTENTION RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACÉE PAR UNE BATTERIE DE TYPE INCORRECT. TRAITEZ LES BATTERIES USAGÉES SUIVANT LES INSTRUCTIONS. Son utilisation est soumise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférence nuisible et (2) Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interférences reçues, y compris celles qui peuvent entraîner un fonctionnement indésirable. Attention: Tout modification de l’équipement non expressément validée par la partie responsable de la conformité pourraient annuler le droit de l’utilisateur à faire fonctionner l’équipement. IC: 649E-EVNXF1 Cet équipement peut fonctionner dans tous les pays de l’Union européenne. En France, toutefois, il ne peut être utilisé qu’à l’intérieur. 198 Pour les utilisateurs résidant en France Service Consommateur Contact téléphonique : Du lundi au samedi de 9 h à 20 h 01 48 63 00 00 Adresse postale : Samsung Service Consommateurs BP 200 93404 SAINT OUEN CEDEX 199 Pour les utilisateurs résidant au Canada SERVICE À LA CLIENTÈLE Téléphone : Du lundi au vendredi de 8 h 30 à 20 h (heure normale de l'Est) 1 800 726-7864 Adresse postale : Samsung Electronics Canada Inc. 55 Standish Court, 10th Floor Mississauga ON L5R 4B2 Pour toute question ou demande de service après-vente, veuillez consulter les conditions de garantie accompagnant votre produit ou rendez-vous sur le www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca. ENG This user manual includes detailed usage instructions for your camera. Please read this manual thoroughly. USER MANUAL 1 Copyright information • Camera specifications or contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of camera functions. • You are not allowed to reuse or distribute any part of this manual without prior permission. • We recommend using your camera within the country where you purchase it. • Use this camera responsibly and adhere to all laws and regulations concerning its use. PlanetFirst represents Samsung Electronics' commitment to sustainable development and social responsibility through eco-driven business and management activities. • Microsoft Windows and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. • Mac and Apple App Store are registered trademarks of the Apple Corporation. • Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google, Inc. • Adobe, the Adobe logo, Photoshop and Lightroom are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. • microSD™, microSDHC™, and microSDXC™ are registered trademarks of the SD Association. • HDMI, the HDMI logo, and the term “High Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. • Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. • Trademarks and trade names used in this manual are the property of their respective owners. 2 Health and safety information Prevent damage to subjects’ eyesight. Do not use the flash in close proximity (closer than 1 m/3 ft) to people or animals. If you use the flash too close to your subject’s eyes, this can cause temporary or permanent eyesight damage. Keep your camera away from small children and pets. Keep your camera and all accessories out of the reach of small children and animals. Small parts may cause choking or serious injury if swallowed. Moving parts and accessories may present physical dangers as well. Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight or high temperatures for an extended period of time. Prolonged exposure to sunlight or extreme temperatures can cause permanent damage to your camera’s internal components. Avoid covering the camera or charger with blankets or clothes. The camera may overheat, which may distort the camera or cause a fire. Do not handle the power supply cord or go near the charger during a thunderstorm. This may result in electric shock. Always comply with the following precautions and usage tips to avoid dangerous situations and ensure peak performance of your camera. Warning—situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Do not disassemble or attempt to repair your camera. This may result in electric shock or damage to the camera. Do not use your camera near flammable or explosive gases and liquids. This may cause a fire or explosion. Do not insert flammable materials into the camera or store these materials near the camera. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not handle your camera with wet hands. This may result in electric shock. 3 Health and safety information If liquid or foreign objects enter your camera, immediately disconnect all power sources, such as the battery or charger, and then contact a Samsung service center. Comply with any regulations that restrict the use of a camera in a certain area. • Avoid interference with other electronic devices. • Turn off the camera when in an aircraft. Your camera can cause interference with aircraft equipment. Follow all airline regulations and turn off your camera when directed by airline personnel. • Turn off the camera near medical equipment. Your camera can interfere with medical equipment in hospitals or health care facilities. Follow all regulations, posted warnings, and directions from medical personnel. Avoid interference with pacemakers. Maintain the distance between this camera and all pacemakers to avoid potential interference, as recommended by the manufacturer and research groups. If you have any reason to suspect that your camera is interfering with a pacemaker or other medical device, turn off the camera immediately and contact the manufacturer of the pacemaker or medical device for guidance. Caution—situations that could cause damage to your camera or other equipment Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended period of time. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious damage to your camera. Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement batteries. Do not damage or heat the battery. Inauthentic, damaged, or heated batteries may cause a fire or personal injury. Use only Samsung-approved batteries, chargers, cables and accessories. • Using unauthorized batteries, chargers, cables or accessories can cause batteries to explode, damage your camera, or cause injury. • Samsung is not responsible for damage or injuries caused by unapproved batteries, chargers, cables or accessories. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Misusing the battery may cause a fire or electric shock. 4 Health and safety information Do not touch the flash while it fires. The flash is very hot when fired and may burn your skin. When you use the AC charger, turn off the camera before you disconnect the power to the AC charger. Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock. Disconnect the charger from the wall socket when not in use. Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock. Do not use a damaged power supply cord, plug, or loose outlet when you charge batteries. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not allow the AC charger to come in contact with the +/- terminals on the battery. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not drop or subject the camera to strong impacts. Doing so may damage the screen or external or internal components. Exercise caution when you connect cables and install batteries and memory cards. If you force the connectors, improperly connect cables, or improperly install batteries and memory cards, you can damage ports, connectors, and accessories. Keep cards with magnetic strips away from the camera case. Information stored on the card may be damaged or erased. Never use a damaged battery, or memory card. This may result in electric shock or camera malfunction or cause a fire. Do not place the camera in or near magnetic fields. Doing so may cause the camera to malfunction. Do not use the camera if the screen is damaged. If the glass or acrylic parts are broken, visit a Samsung service center to have the camera repaired. 5 Health and safety information Check that the camera is operating properly before use. The manufacturer takes no responsibility for any loss of files or damage that may result from camera malfunction or improper use. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight. This may discolor the image sensor or cause it to malfunction. If the camera overheats, remove the battery and allow it to cool down. • Prolonged usage of the camera may overheat the battery and raise the internal temperature of the camera. If the camera stops operating, remove the battery and allow it to cool down. • High internal temperatures may result in noise in your photos. This is normal and does not affect your camera’s overall performance. Avoid interference with other electronic devices. Your camera emits radio frequency (RF) signals that may interfere with unshielded or improperly shielded electronic equipment, such as pacemakers, hearing aids, medical devices, and other electronic devices in homes or vehicles. Consult the manufacturers of your electronic devices to solve any interference problems you experience. To prevent unwanted interference, use only Samsung-approved devices or accessories. Use your camera in the normal position. Avoid contact with your camera’s internal antenna. Data transference and your responsibilities • Data transferred via WLAN could be leaked, so avoid transferring sensitive data in public areas or on open networks. • The camera manufacturer is not liable for any data transfers that infringe on copyrights, trademarks, intellectual property laws, or public decency ordinances. 6 Indications used in this manual Mode indications Mode Indication Smart Auto t Program P Aperture Priority A Shutter Priority S Manual M Lens Priority i Smart s Wi-Fi B Icons used in this manual Icon Function Additional information Safety warnings and precautions [ ] Camera buttons. For example, [Shutter] represents the shutter button. ( ) Page number of related information → The order of options or menus you must select to perform a step; for example: Select 1→ Quality (represents select 1, and then Quality). * Annotation 7 Contents Chapter 1 My Camera Getting started ............................................................................................ 29 Unpacking.................................................................................................................... 29 Camera layout .............................................................................................. 30 Using the DIRECT LINK button ................................................................................ 32 Inserting the battery and memory card ................................................. 33 Removing the battery and memory card ........................................................... 33 Using the memory card adapter ............................................................................. 33 Charging the battery and turning on your camera .............................. 34 Charging the battery................................................................................................ 34 Turning on your camera ......................................................................................... 34 Performing the initial setup ...................................................................... 35 Selecting functions (options) ................................................................... 36 Selecting with buttons ............................................................................................ 36 Selecting by touch .................................................................................................... 36 Using m .............................................................................................................. 37 E.g. Selecting the photo size in P mode ............................................................. 37 Using the Smart panel ............................................................................................. 38 E.g. Adjust the exposure value in P mode ......................................................... 38 Tips Concepts in Photography Shooting postures....................................................................................... 13 Holding the camera ..................................................................................................... 13 Standing photography ............................................................................................... 13 Crouching photography ............................................................................................ 14 Using the display .......................................................................................................... 14 Low-angle shot .............................................................................................................. 15 High-angle shot ............................................................................................................. 15 Aperture ........................................................................................................ 16 Aperture value and the depth of field .................................................................. 17 Shutter speed ............................................................................................... 18 ISO sensitivity .............................................................................................. 19 How the aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity control exposure ......................................................................................... 20 Correlation between focal length, angle, and perspective ................ 21 Depth of field ............................................................................................... 22 What controls out-of-focus effects? ....................................................................... 22 Optical preview ............................................................................................................. 24 Composition ................................................................................................. 24 Rule of Thirds .................................................................................................................. 24 Photos with two subjects .......................................................................................... 25 Flash ............................................................................................................... 26 Flash guide number ..................................................................................................... 26 Bounce Photography .................................................................................................. 27 8 Contents Display icons ................................................................................................ 40 In Shooting mode ..................................................................................................... 40 Capturing photos ........................................................................................................ 40 Recording videos ......................................................................................................... 41 About the level gauge ............................................................................................... 41 In Playback mode ...................................................................................................... 42 Viewing photos ............................................................................................................ 42 Playing videos ............................................................................................................... 42 Changing the information displayed ................................................................. 43 Lenses ............................................................................................................ 44 Lens layout ................................................................................................................... 44 Locking or unlocking the lens ................................................................................. 45 Lens markings ............................................................................................................ 47 Accessories ................................................................................................... 48 External flash layout ................................................................................................. 48 Connecting the external flash ................................................................................. 49 GPS module layout (optional) .............................................................................. 51 Attaching the GPS module .................................................................................... 51 Shooting modes .......................................................................................... 53 t Smart Auto mode ..................................................................................... 53 P Program mode ....................................................................................................... 55 Program Shift ................................................................................................................ 56 Minimum shutter speed ............................................................................................ 56 A Aperture Priority mode ..................................................................................... 57 S Shutter Priority mode.......................................................................................... 58 M Manual mode ....................................................................................................... 59 Framing mode .............................................................................................................. 59 Using the Bulb function ............................................................................................ 60 i Lens Priority mode ............................................................................................. 60 Using E ............................................................................................................. 60 Using i-Function in P/A/S/M modes ................................................................ 61 Using Z .............................................................................................................. 63 s Smart mode ........................................................................................................ 64 Using the Best Face mode ........................................................................................ 65 Capturing panoramic photos .................................................................................. 66 Recording a video ..................................................................................................... 68 3D mode ....................................................................................................................... 69 Available functions by shooting mode ............................................................. 71 9 Contents Chapter 2 Shooting Functions Size and Resolution .................................................................................... 73 Photo size ..................................................................................................................... 73 Quality ........................................................................................................................... 74 ISO sensitivity .............................................................................................. 75 White Balance .............................................................................................. 76 Customizing preset White Balance options ....................................................... 77 Picture Wizard (photo styles) .................................................................... 79 AF mode ........................................................................................................ 80 Single AF ....................................................................................................................... 81 Continuous AF ............................................................................................................ 81 Manual focus ............................................................................................................... 82 AF area ........................................................................................................... 83 Selection AF ................................................................................................................ 83 Multi AF ......................................................................................................................... 84 Face detection AF ...................................................................................................... 84 Self-Portrait AF ........................................................................................................... 85 Touch AF ........................................................................................................ 86 Touch AF ....................................................................................................................... 86 AF Point ......................................................................................................................... 86 Tracking AF .................................................................................................................. 86 One touch shot .......................................................................................................... 87 Focus assist ................................................................................................... 88 MF Assist ....................................................................................................................... 88 Focus Peaking ............................................................................................................. 88 Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) ............................................................. 89 Drive (shooting method) ........................................................................... 90 Single ............................................................................................................................. 90 Continuous .................................................................................................................. 90 Burst ............................................................................................................................... 91 Timer .............................................................................................................................. 91 Auto Exposure Bracketing (AE Bracket) ............................................................. 92 White Balance Bracketing (WB Bracket) ............................................................ 92 Picture Wizard Bracketing (P Wiz Bracket) ........................................................ 93 Bracketing setting ..................................................................................................... 93 Flash ............................................................................................................... 94 Reducing the red-eye effect .................................................................................. 95 Adjusting the flash intensity ................................................................................. 95 Metering ........................................................................................................ 97 Multi ............................................................................................................................... 97 Spot ................................................................................................................................ 98 Center-weighted ....................................................................................................... 98 Measuring the exposure value of the focus area ........................................... 99 Dynamic Range ......................................................................................... 100 Smart Filter ................................................................................................. 101 Exposure compensation .......................................................................... 102 Exposure lock ............................................................................................. 103 Video functions ......................................................................................... 104 Movie size.................................................................................................................. 104 Movie quality ........................................................................................................... 104 Multi Motion ............................................................................................................ 105 Fader ........................................................................................................................... 105 Voice ............................................................................................................................ 106 Wind cut .................................................................................................................... 106 Mic Level .................................................................................................................... 106 10 Contents Chapter 3 Playback/Editing Searching and managing files ................................................................ 108 Viewing photos ....................................................................................................... 108 Viewing image thumbnails ................................................................................. 108 Viewing files by category .................................................................................... 109 Viewing files as a folder ........................................................................................ 109 Protecting files ........................................................................................................ 110 Lock/Unlock all files .................................................................................................. 110 Deleting files ............................................................................................................ 111 Deleting a single file ................................................................................................. 111 Deleting multiple files .............................................................................................. 111 Deleting all files .......................................................................................................... 112 Viewing photos .......................................................................................... 113 Enlarging a photo .................................................................................................. 113 Viewing a slide show ............................................................................................. 113 Auto rotating ........................................................................................................... 114 Creating a print order (DPOF) ............................................................................ 114 Playing videos ............................................................................................ 115 Trimming a video during playback .................................................................. 115 Capturing an image during playback ............................................................. 116 Editing photos ........................................................................................... 117 Cropping a photo ................................................................................................... 117 Rotating a photo .................................................................................................... 118 Resizing photos....................................................................................................... 118 Adjusting your photos .......................................................................................... 119 Retouching faces .................................................................................................... 120 Applying Smart Filter effects .............................................................................. 121 Chapter 4 Wireless network Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings ............... 123 Connecting to a WLAN ......................................................................................... 123 Setting network options ......................................................................................... 124 Manually setting the IP address ........................................................................... 124 Using the login browser....................................................................................... 125 Network connection tips ..................................................................................... 126 Entering text ............................................................................................................ 127 Saving files to a smart phone automatically ....................................... 128 Sending photos or videos to a smart phone ....................................... 129 Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release .............................. 131 Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos ..................................... 133 Installing the program for Auto Backup on your PC.................................. 133 Sending photos or videos to a PC .................................................................... 133 Sending photos or videos via email ...................................................... 135 Changing email settings ...................................................................................... 135 Storing your information ........................................................................................ 135 Setting an email password ..................................................................................... 136 Changing the email password .............................................................................. 137 Sending photos or videos via email ................................................................ 137 Using photo or video sharing websites ................................................ 139 Accessing a website .............................................................................................. 139 Uploading photos or videos............................................................................... 140 Using AllShare Play to send files ............................................................ 141 Uploading photos to online storage ............................................................... 141 Viewing photos or videos on devices that support AllShare Play ........ 142 Sending photos using Wi-Fi Direct ........................................................ 144 11 Contents Chapter 6 Connecting to external devices Viewing files on an HDTV or 3D TV ........................................................ 158 Viewing files on an HDTV .................................................................................... 158 Viewing files on a 3D TV ....................................................................................... 159 Transferring files to your computer ....................................................... 160 Transferring files to your Windows OS computer ....................................... 160 Connecting the camera as a removable disk ................................................... 160 Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP) .................................................. 161 Transferring files to your Mac OS ...................................................................... 161 Using programs on a PC........................................................................... 163 Installing programs from the provided CD ................................................... 163 Available programs when using i-Launcher .................................................... 163 Using i-Launcher .................................................................................................... 163 Requirements for Windows OS ............................................................................. 163 Requirements for Mac OS ....................................................................................... 164 Opening i-Launcher .................................................................................................. 164 Using Multimedia Viewer ........................................................................................ 165 Downloading the firmware .................................................................................... 166 Downloading the PC Auto Backup program ................................................... 166 Installing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ........................................................ 167 Using Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ............................................................... 167 Chapter 5 Camera settings menu User settings ............................................................................................... 146 ISO Customizing ..................................................................................................... 146 ISO Step ......................................................................................................................... 146 Auto ISO Range .......................................................................................................... 146 Noise Reduction ..................................................................................................... 146 Bracket Set ................................................................................................................ 147 DMF (Direct Manual Focus) ................................................................................ 147 Color space ............................................................................................................... 148 Distortion Correct .................................................................................................. 149 Touch Operation ..................................................................................................... 149 iFn Customizing ...................................................................................................... 149 User Display .............................................................................................................. 149 Key Mapping ............................................................................................................ 150 Grid Line .................................................................................................................... 151 AF Lamp ..................................................................................................................... 151 Setting ......................................................................................................... 152 12 Contents Before contacting a service center ........................................................ 181 Camera specifications .............................................................................. 184 Glossary ....................................................................................................... 189 Optional accessories ................................................................................. 195 Index ............................................................................................................ 197 FCC notice ................................................................................................... 200 Chapter 7 Appendix Error messages .......................................................................................... 169 Maintaining the camera........................................................................... 170 Cleaning the camera ............................................................................................. 170 Camera lens and display ......................................................................................... 170 Image sensor ............................................................................................................... 170 Camera body ............................................................................................................... 170 Using or storing the camera ............................................................................... 171 Inappropriate places to use or store the camera ........................................... 171 Using on beaches or shores ................................................................................... 171 Storing for extended period of time ................................................................... 171 Using the camera with caution in humid environments ............................ 172 Other cautions ............................................................................................................ 172 About memory card .............................................................................................. 173 Supported memory card ........................................................................................ 173 Memory card capacity ............................................................................................. 174 Cautions when using memory cards .................................................................. 176 About the battery .................................................................................................. 177 Battery specifications ............................................................................................... 177 Battery life .................................................................................................................... 178 Low battery message ............................................................................................... 178 Notes about using the battery .............................................................................. 178 Cautions about using the battery ........................................................................ 179 Notes about charging the battery ....................................................................... 179 Notes about charging with a computer connected...................................... 180 Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care ............................ 180 13 Concepts in Photography Standing photography Compose your shot; stand up straight with your feet shoulder-length apart, and keep your elbows pointed down. Shooting postures A correct posture for stabilizing the camera is necessary for taking a good photo. Even if you hold a camera correctly, the wrong posture can cause the camera to shake. Stand up straight and remain still to maintain a steady base for your camera. When shooting with a slow shutter speed, hold your breath to minimize body movement. Holding the camera Hold the camera with your right hand and place you right index finger on the shutter button. Place your left hand under the lens for support. 14 Concepts in Photography Crouching photography Compose your shot, crouch with one knee touching the ground, and keep a straight posture. Using the display To take photos at high or low angles, tilt the display up or down. You can tilt the display up to 90° upwards ( ) or 45° downwards ( ). • Keep the display closed ( ) when the camera is not in use. • Tilt the display only within the angle allowed. Failing to do so may damage your camera. 15 Concepts in Photography Low-angle shot A low-angle shot is a shot from a camera positioned below your eyeline, looking up the subject. High-angle shot A high-angle shot is a shot from a camera positioned above your eyeline, looking down on the subject. 16 Concepts in Photography Aperture The aperture, a hole that controls the amount of light that enters the camera, is one of the three factors that determine the exposure. The aperture housing contains thin, metal plates that open and close to let light through the aperture and into the camera. The size of the aperture is closely related to the brightness of a photo: the larger the aperture, the brighter the photo; the smaller the aperture, the darker the photo. Aperture sizes Minimum aperture Medium aperture Maximum aperture Darker photo (aperture opened slightly) Brighter photo (aperture opened wide) The size of the aperture is represented by a value known as an “F-number.” The f-number represents the focal length divided by the diameter of the lens. For example, if a lens with a 50 mm focal length has an f-number of F2, the diameter of the aperture is 25 mm. (50 mm/25 mm=F2) The smaller the f-number, the greater the size of the aperture. The opening in the aperture is described as the Exposure Value (EV). Increasing the Exposure Value (+1 EV) means the amount of light doubles. Decreasing the Exposure Value (-1 EV) means the amount of light halves. You can also use the exposure compensation feature to fine-tune the amount of light by subdividing exposure values into 1/2, 1/3 EV, and so on. +1 EV F1.4 F2 F2.8 F4 F5.6 F8 -1 EV Exposure Value Steps 17 Concepts in Photography Aperture value and the depth of field You can blur or sharpen the background of a photo by controlling the aperture. It is closely related to the depth of field (DOF), which can be expressed as small or large. A photo with a large DOF A photo with a small DOF The aperture housing contains several blades. These blades move together and control the amount of light passing through the center of the aperture. The number of blades also affects the shape of light when shooting night scenes. If an aperture has an even number of blades, light divides into an equal number of sections. If the number of blades is odd, the number of sections is double the number of blades. For example, an aperture with 8 blades divides light into 8 sections and an aperture with 7 blades into 14 sections. 7 blades 8 blades 18 Concepts in Photography Shutter speed Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the shutter, and it is an important factor in the brightness of a photo, as it controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture before it reaches the image sensor. Usually, the shutter speed is manually adjustable. The measurement of the shutter speed is known as the “Exposure Value” (EV), which is marked in intervals of 1 s, 1/2 s, 1/4 s, 1/8 s, 1/15 s, 1/1000 s, 1/2000 s, and so on. Exposure +1 EV -1 EV 1s 1/2 s 1/4 s 1/8 s 1/15 s 1/30 s Shutter Speed Therefore, the faster the shutter speed, the less light will be let in. Likewise, the slower the shutter speed, the more light will be let in. As the photos below illustrate, a slow shutter speed allows more time to let light in, so the photo becomes brighter. On the other hand, a fast shutter speed allows less time to let light in and the photo becomes darker and more easily freezes subjects in motion. 0.8 s 0.004 s 19 Concepts in Photography ISO sensitivity The exposure of an image is determined by the sensitivity of the camera. This sensitivity is based on international film standards, known as ISO standards. On digital cameras, this sensitivity rating is used to represent the sensitivity of the digital mechanism that captures the image. ISO sensitivity doubles as the number doubles. For example, an ISO 200 setting is capable of capturing images at twice the speed of an ISO 100 setting. However, higher ISO settings can result in “noise”—small specks, spots, and other phenomena in a photo that give the shot a noisy or dirty appearance. As a general rule, it is best to use a low ISO setting to prevent noise in your photos, unless you are shooting in darkened environments or at night. Changes in the quality and brightness according to ISO sensitivity Because a low ISO sensitivity means the camera will be less sensitive to light, you need more light to have an optimal exposure. When using a low ISO sensitivity, open the aperture more or reduce the shutter speed to allow more light to enter the camera. For example, on a sunny day when light is abundant, a low ISO sensitivity does not require a slow shutter speed. However, in a dark place or at night, a low ISO sensitivity will result in a blurry photo. Therefore, it is recommended to increase the ISO sensitivity by a moderate amount. A photo captured with a tripod and high ISO sensitivity A blurred photo with a low ISO sensitivity 20 Concepts in Photography How the aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity control exposure The aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity are closely interconnected in photography. The aperture setting controls the opening that regulates the light that enters the camera, while the shutter speed determines the length of time that light is allowed to enter. ISO sensitivity determines the speed at which the film reacts to light. Together, these three aspects are described as the triangle of exposure. A change in shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO sensitivity can be offset by adjustments to the others to maintain the amount of light. The results, however, change according to the settings. For example, shutter speed is useful in expressing movement, aperture can control the depth of field, and ISO sensitivity can control the graininess of a photo. Settings Results Aperture value Wide aperture = more light Narrow aperture = less light Wide = small depth of field Narrow = large depth of field Settings Results Shutter speed Fast speed = less light Slow speed = more light Fast = still Slow = blurry ISO sensitivity High sensitivity = more sensitive to light Low sensitivity = less sensitive to light High = more grainy Low = less grainy 21 Concepts in Photography Correlation between focal length, angle, and perspective Focal length, which is measured in millimeters, is the distance between the middle of the lens to its focal point. It affects the angle and perspective of captured images. A short focal length translates into a wide angle, which allows you to capture a wide shot. A long focal length translates into a narrow angle, which allows you to capture telephoto shots. Short focal length wide shot wide angle wide-angle lens Long focal length telephoto shot narrow angle telephoto lens Look at these photos below and compare the changes. 18 mm angle 55 mm angle 200 mm angle Normally, a lens with a wide angle is suitable for shooting landscapes and a lens with a narrow angle is recommended for shooting sports events or portraits. 22 Concepts in Photography Depth of field Portraits or still-life photos mostly acclaimed by people are the ones on which the background is out of focus so the subject looks pronounced. Depending on the focused areas, a photo can be blurred or sharpened. This is called ‘a low DOF’ or ‘a high DOF’. The depth of field is the focused area around the subject. Therefore, a small DOF signifies that the focused area is narrow and a large DOF means the focused area is wide. A photo with a small DOF, which stresses the subject and makes the rest of it blurred, can be obtained by using a telescope lens or selecting a low aperture value. Conversely, a photo with a large DOF which shows all the elements on the photo sharply focused can be achieved by using a wide angle lens or selecting a high aperture value. Small Depth of Field Large Depth of Field What controls out-of-focus effects? DOF depends on aperture value The wider the aperture is (namely the lower the aperture value), the lower the DOF becomes. Under the condition where the other values including shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are equal, a low aperture value leads to a photo with a low DOF. 55 mm F5.7 55 mm F22 23 Concepts in Photography DOF depends on focal length The longer the focal length is, the lower the DOF gets. A telescope lens with a longer focal length than a wide-angle lens with a short focal length is better to capture a photo of a low DOF. A photo captured with an 18 mm wideangle lens A photo captured with a 100 mm telescope lens DOF depends on the distance between the subject and the camera The shorter the distance between the subject and the camera is, the lower the DOF gets. Therefore, taking a photo close to a subject can result in a photo of low DOF. A photo captured with a 100 mm telescope lens A photo captured close to the subject 24 Concepts in Photography Optical preview You can press the Custom button to view the optical preview before capturing a photo. The camera adjusts the aperture to the predefined settings and shows the results on the screen. Set the Custom button to Optical preview. (p. 150) Composition It is fun to capture a photo of the beauty of world with a camera. No matter how the world is beautiful, however, a poor composition cannot capture the beauty of it. When it comes to composition, it is very important to prioritize subjects. Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually, abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition. Rule of Thirds To use the rule of thirds, divide the image into a 3x3 pattern of equal rectangles. To compose photos that best emphasize the subject, make sure the subject is located at one of the corners of the center rectangle. 25 Concepts in Photography Using the rule of thirds will create photos with stable and compelling compositions. Below are a few examples. Photos with two subjects If your subject is in one corner of the photo, it creates an unbalanced composition. You can stabilize the photo by capturing a second subject in the opposite corner to balance the weight of the photo. Subject 1 Subject 2 Subject 1 Subject 2 Unstable Stable When taking landscape photos, centering the horizon will create an unbalanced effect. Give more weight to the photo by moving the horizon up or down. Subject 1 Subject 2 Subject 1 Subject 2 Unstable Stable 26 Concepts in Photography Flash guide number The model number of a flash refers to the flash’s power, and the maximum amount of light created is represented by a value known as a “guide number.” The bigger the guide number, the more light is emitted from the flash. The guide number is achieved by multiplying the distance from the flash to the subject and the aperture value when the ISO sensitivity is set to 100. Guide number = Flash to Subject Distance X Aperture value Aperture value = Guide number / Flash to Subject Distance Flash to Subject Distance = Guide number / Aperture value Therefore, if you know the guide number of a flash, you can estimate an optimum flash to subject distance when setting the flash manually. For example, if a flash has a guide number of GN 20 and is 4 meters away from the subject, the optimal aperture value is F5.0. Flash Light is one of the most important components in photography. It is not easy, however, to have an enough amount of light anytime and anywhere. Making use of a flash allows you to optimize light settings and create a variety of effects. Flash, also known as strobe or speed light, helps to create adequate exposure in low-light conditions. It is also useful in light-abundant situations. For example, flash can be used in compensating the exposure of a subject’s shadow or capturing clearly both the subject and the background in backlit conditions. Before correction After correction 27 Concepts in Photography Bounce Photography Bounce photography refers to the method of bouncing light off of the ceiling or walls so that the light spreads evenly over the subject. Normally, photos captured with flash may appear unnatural and cast shadows. Subjects in photos captured with bounce photography cast no shadows and look smooth due to evenly spread light. Chapter 1 My Camera Learn about your camera’s layout, display icons, lens, optional accessories, and basic functions. My Camera 29 Getting started Unpacking Check your product box for the following items. Camera (including the body cap and hot-shoe cover) AC adapter/USB cable Rechargeable battery External flash Software CD-ROM (User manual included) Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM Quick Start Guide Strap • The illustrations may differ from your actual items. • You can purchase optional accessories at a retailer or a Samsung service center. Samsung is not responsible for any problems caused by using unauthorized accessories. For information about accessories, refer to page 195. My Camera 30 Camera layout No. Name 1 Mode dial • t: Smart Auto mode (p. 53) • P: Program mode (p. 55) • A: Aperture Priority mode (p. 57) • S: Shutter Priority mode (p. 58) • M: Manual mode (p. 59) • i: Lens Priority mode (p. 60) • s: Smart mode (p. 64) • B: Wi-Fi (p. 122) 2 Jog dial • In the Menu screen: Move to a desired menu item. • In the Smart panel: Adjust a selected option. • In Shooting mode: Adjust shutter speed or aperture value in some shooting modes or change the size of a focus area. • In Playback mode: View thumbnails, enlarge or reduce a photo, or open or close a folder of continuous or burst shots in Playback mode. 3 DIRECT LINK button: Start a preset Wi-Fi function. (p. 32) No. Name 4 Microphone 5 Hot-shoe cover 6 Hot-shoe 7 Eyelet for camera strap 8 Image sensor 9 Internal antenna/NFC tag * Avoid contact with the internal antenna while using the wireless network. 10 Speaker 11 Lens release button 12 Lens mount 13 Lens mount index 14 AF-assist light/Timer lamp 15 Power switch 16 Shutter button 1 2 3 4 5 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 6 4 8 7 16 15 My Camera > Camera layout 31 No. Name 1 Video recording button Start recording a video. 2 EV adjust button (p. 102) Press and hold the button, and then scroll the jog dial to adjust the exposure value. In M mode, the aperture value will be adjusted. 3 Fn button Access the Smart panel and fine-tune some settings. 4 o button • In the Menu screen: Save the selected options. • In Shooting mode: Allow you to select a focus area manually in some shooting modes. 5 Navigation button • In Shooting mode - D: View camera settings and change options. - I: Select an ISO value. - C: Select a drive option. - F: Select an AF mode. • In other situations Move up, down, left, right, respectively. No. Name 6 Delete/Custom button • In Shooting mode: Perform the assigned function. (p. 150) • In Playback mode: Delete files. 7 Playback button Enter Playback mode. 8 Status lamp Indicate the status of the camera. • Blinking: When saving a photo, shooting a video, sending data to a computer, connecting to WLAN, or sending a photo. • Steady: When there is no data transfer, when data transfer to a computer is complete, or charging the battery. 9 MENU button Access options or menus. 5 6 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 My Camera > Camera layout 32 No. Name 1 USB and shutter release port Connect the camera to a computer or shutter release. Use a shutter release cable with a tripod to minimize camera movement. 2 HDMI port 3 Battery chamber/Memory card cover Insert a memory card and battery. 4 Display • To take photos at high or low angles, tilt the display up or down. (p. 14) • Touch the screen to select a menu or an option. (p. 36) 5 Tripod mount Using the DIRECT LINK button You can turn on the Wi-Fi feature conveniently by pressing [DIRECT LINK]. Press [DIRECT LINK] again to return to the previous mode. Setting the DIRECT LINK button You can select a Wi-Fi function to launch when you press [DIRECT LINK]. (p. 150) To set a DIRECT LINK option, In Shooting mode, press [m] → 5 → Key Mapping → DIRECT LINK → an option. 4 5 1 2 3 My Camera 33 Inserting the battery and memory card Learn how to insert the battery and an optional memory card into the camera. Memory card Insert a memory card with the goldcolored contacts facing down. Rechargeable battery Insert the battery with the Samsung logo facing up. Removing the battery and memory card Rechargeable battery Battery lock Slide the lock up to release the battery. Memory card Push the card gently until it disengages from the camera, and then pull it out of the slot. Using the memory card adapter To use micro memory cards with this product, a PC, or a memory card reader, insert the card into an adapter. While the status lamp of the camera is blinking, do not remove the memory card or battery. Doing so may damage the data stored on the memory card or your camera. My Camera 34 Charging the battery and turning on your camera Charging the battery Before you use the camera for the first time, you must charge the battery. Plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera, and then plug the other end of the USB cable into the AC adapter. Status lamp • Red light on: Charging • Red light off: Fully charged • Red light blinking: Error • Use only the AC adapter and USB cable supplied with your camera. If you use another AC adapter, the camera battery may not charge or work properly. • You can charge the battery with the USB cable only when the camera is turned off. Turning on your camera Set the Power switch to ON. • To turn your camera off, set the Power switch to OFF. • The initial setup screen appears when you turn on the camera for the first time. (p. 35) My Camera 35 Performing the initial setup When you turn on your camera for the first time, the initial setup screen appears. The language is preset for the country or region where the camera is sold. You can change the language as desired. You can also select an item by touching it on the screen. 1 Press [I] to select Time Zone, and then press [F] or [o]. 2 Press [D/I] to select a time zone, and then press [o]. Back Set Time Zone [GMT +00:00] London [GMT -01:00] Cape Verde [GMT -02:00] Mid-Atlantic [GMT -03:00] Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo [GMT -03:30] Newfoundland 3 Press [I] to select Date & Time, and then press [F] or [o]. Back Set Date & Time Year Month Day Hr Min DST • The screen may differ depending on the language selected. 4 Press [C/F] to select an item (Year/Month/Day/Hr/Min/ DST). 5 Press [D/I] to set the option, and then press [o]. 6 Press [I] to select Date Type, and then press [F] or [o]. 7 Press [D/I] to select a date type, and then press [o]. 8 Press [I] to select Time Type, and then press [F] or [o]. 9 Press [D/I] to select a time type, and then press [o]. 10 Press [m] to finish the initial setup. My Camera 36 Selecting functions (options) Selecting with buttons Scroll the jog dial or press [D/I/C/F] to move, and then press [o] to select an option. Selecting by touch Do not use sharp objects, such as pens or pencils, to touch the screen. You can damage the screen. Touching: Touch an icon to select a menu or an option. AllShare Play MobileLink Remote Viewfinder Auto Backup Email SNS & Cloud Dragging: Touch and hold an area on the screen, and then drag your finger. AutoShare Photo Size Quality ISO White Balance Back Select My Camera > Selecting functions (options) 37 Flicking: Gently flick your finger across the screen. • The touch screen may not recognize your inputs if you touch multiple items at the same time. • When you touch or drag the screen, discolorations may occur. This is not a malfunction, but a characteristic of the touch screen. Touch or drag lightly to minimize the discolorations. • The touch screen may not work properly if you use the camera in extremely humid environments. • The touch screen may not work properly if you apply screen protection film or other accessories to the screen. • Depending on the viewing angle, the screen may appear dim. Adjust the brightness or viewing angle to improve the resolution. Using Press [m m ] or touch on the screen, and then change shooting options or settings. E.g. Selecting the photo size in P mode 1 Rotate the mode dial to P. 2 Press [m] or touch . 3 Press [C] → [D/I] to move to 1, and then press [o]. • You can also touch 1 on the screen. 4 Scroll the jog dial or press [D/I] to move to Photo Size, and then press [o]. • You can also drag the option list, and then touch an option. Back Select AutoShare Photo Size Quality ISO White Balance My Camera > Selecting functions (options) 38 5 Scroll the jog dial or press [D/I] to move to an option, and then press [o]. • You can also drag the option list, and then touch an option. • Press [m] or touch Back to go back to the previous menu. Back Set AutoShare Photo Size Quality ISO White Balance 5472x3648 (3:2) 3888x2592 (3:2) 2976x1984 (3:2) 1728x1152 (3:2) 5472x3080 (16:9) 6 Press [m] or touch Back to switch to Shooting mode. Using the Smart panel Press [f] or touch on the screen to access some functions such as Exposure, ISO, and White Balance. E.g. Adjust the exposure value in P mode 1 Rotate the mode dial to P. 2 Press [f] or touch . My Camera > Selecting functions (options) 39 3 Press [D/I/C/F] to move to EV, and then press [o]. • You can directly select an option by scrolling the jog dial without having to press [o]. • You can also select an option by touching it. EV : 0.0 Adjust You can adjust some options by dragging them. Back 4 Scroll the jog dial or press [C/F] to adjust the exposure value, and then press [o]. • You can also drag the dial on the screen, and then select Set to adjust the option. EV : 0.0 Back Set My Camera 40 Display icons Capturing photos 1 2 3 London 1. Shooting information Icon Description Shooting mode Current date Current time GPS activated* London Location information* Memory card not inserted** Auto exposure lock (p. 103) Available number of photos • : Fully charged • : Partially charged • (Red): Empty (recharge the battery) Icon Description Auto focus frame Spot metering area Camera shake Manual focus scale Level gauge (p. 41) Histogram (p. 150) Focus Shutter speed Aperture value Exposure adjustment value ISO sensitivity (p. 75) * These icons appear when you attach an optional GPS module. ** Photos that were captured without inserting a memory card cannot be transferred to a memory card or a computer. 2. Shooting options Icon Description Photo size Drive mode Flash (p. 94) Flash intensity adjustment Metering (p. 97) Icon Description AF mode (p. 80) Focus area Face detection White Balance (p. 76) White Balance micro adjustment Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) (p. 89) Z Z on ratio RAW file Dynamic Range (p. 100) 3. Shooting options (Touch) Icon Description Change Smart mode*** AutoShare Touch AF options Shooting options Smart panel *** This icon appears only when you select Smart mode. The icons displayed will change according to the mode you select or the options you set. In Shooting mode My Camera > Display icons 41 2. Shooting options Icon Description Video size AF mode (p. 80) Metering (p. 97) White Balance (p. 76) Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) (p. 89) White Balance micro adjustment Fader (p. 105) Multi Motion (p. 105) Voice recording off (p. 106) The icons displayed will change according to the mode you select or the options you set. About the level gauge The level gauge helps you align the camera with the horizontal and vertical lines on the display. If the level gauge is not level, calibrate the level gauge using the Horizontal Calibration function. (p. 152) Vertical Horizontal ▲ Level ▲ Unlevel You cannot use the level gauge when you shoot in portrait orientation. Recording videos 1 2 1. Shooting information Icon Description Shooting mode Current recording time/Available recording time • : Fully charged • : Partially charged • (Red): Empty (recharge the battery) Shutter speed Aperture value Exposure value ISO sensitivity (p. 75) My Camera > Display icons 42 In Playback mode Viewing photos London Information Mode F No Shutter ISO Metering Flash Focal Length White Balance EV Photo Size Date Icon Description Continuously captured file Current file/The total number of files Folder number - File number File with location information London Location information RAW file Protected file Print information added to file (p. 114) 3D file m Playback/Editing menu (Touch) Editing photos (Touch) Trimming a video (Touch) Viewing image thumbnails (Touch) 1 2 3 London No. Description 1 Captured photo 2 RGB histogram (p. 150) 3 Shooting mode, Metering, Flash, White Balance, Aperture value, Shutter speed, ISO, Focal length, Exposure value, Photo size, Date, Location information Playing videos Stop Capture Icon Description Playback speed Multi Motion Current playback time Video length / View previous file/Scan backward. (Each time you touch the scan backward icon, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) / Pause or resume playback. / View next file/Scan forward. (Each time you touch the scan forward icon, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) Adjust the volume or mute the sound. My Camera > Display icons 43 Changing the information displayed Press [D] repeatedly to change the display type. Mode Display type Shooting • Basic shooting information (Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture value, Exposure value, ISO sensitivity, etc.) • Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons (MENU, Fn, AutoShare, Touch AF) + Level gauge • Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons + Current shooting options information (Photo size, Drive mode, Flash, Metering, AF mode, etc.) • Basic shooting information + Shooting option buttons + Current shooting options information + Histogram + Date and time Playback • Basic information • Display all information about the current file. • Display all information about the current file including RGB histogram. My Camera 44 Lenses You can purchase optional lenses made exclusively for your NX series camera. Learn about the functions of each lens and select one that suits your needs and preferences. Lens layout SAMSUNG 18-55 mm F3.5-5.6 OIS III lens (example) 1 2 3 5 4 6 7 8 No. Description 1 Lens mount index 2 Zoom ring 3 Focus ring (p. 88) 4 Lens hood mount index 5 Lens 6 i-Function button (p. 60) 7 AF/MF switch (p. 80) 8 Lens contacts When not using the lens, attach the lens cap and lens mount cover to protect the lens from dust and scratches. My Camera > Lenses 45 SAMSUNG 20-50 mm F3.5-5.6 ED II lens (example) 7 1 2 3 5 6 4 No. Description 1 Lens mount index 2 Zoom lock switch 3 Lens 4 Focus ring (p. 88) 5 i-Function button (p. 60) 6 Zoom ring 7 Lens contacts Locking or unlocking the lens To lock the lens, pull and hold the zoom lock switch away from the camera body and rotate the zoom ring as shown in the illustration. My Camera > Lenses 46 To unlock the lens, rotate the zoom ring as shown in the illustration until you hear the click. You cannot capture a photo when the lens is locked. SAMSUNG 16 mm F2.4 lens (example) 5 2 1 4 3 No. Description 1 i-Function button (p. 60) 2 Lens mount index 3 Focus ring (p. 88) 4 Lens 5 Lens contacts My Camera > Lenses 47 Lens markings Find out what the numbers on the lens signify. SAMSUNG 18-200 mm F3.5-6.3 ED OIS lens (example) 1 2 345 No. Description 1 Aperture value A range of supported aperture values. For example, 1:3.5–6.3 means the maximum aperture value range from 3.5 to 6.3. 2 Focal length The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point (in millimeters). This figure is expressed in a range: minimum focal length to maximum focal length of the lens. Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject is magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view. 3 ED ED stands for Extra-low Dispersion. Extra-low dispersion glass is effective in minimizing chromatic aberration (a distortion that occurs when a lens fails to focus all colors to the same convergence point). 4 OIS (p. 89) Optical Image Stabilization. Lenses with this feature can detect camera shake and effectively cancel out the movement inside the camera. 5 Ø The lens diameter. When you attach a filter to the lens, make sure that the diameters of the lens and the filter are the same. My Camera 48 Accessories You can use accessories including external flash and GPS module that can help you capture better and more convenient photos. For more information about optional accessories, refer to the manual for each accessory. • The illustrations may differ from the actual items. • You can purchase Samsung-approved accessories at a retailer or a Samsung service center. Samsung is not responsible for damage caused by using another manufacturer's accessories. External flash layout SEF8A (example) 1 2 3 No. Description 1 Bulb 2 Hot-shoe fastening dial 3 Hot-shoe connection My Camera > Accessories 49 Connecting the external flash 1 Remove the hot-shoe cover from the camera. 2 Mount the flash by sliding it into the hot-shoe. 3 Lock the flash into place by turning the hot-shoe fastening dial clockwise. 4 Lift up the flash for use. My Camera > Accessories 50 • You can capture a photo with a flash that is not fully charged, but it is recommended to use a fully charged flash. • Refer to the optional accessories page for available external flashes. (p. 195) • The available options may differ depending on the shooting mode. • There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the flash fires a second time. • SEF8A may not be compatible with other NX series cameras. • For more details about optional flashes, refer to the user manual for the flash. Use only Samsung-approved flashes. Using incompatible flashes may damage your camera. SEF220A (example) (optional) 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 No. Description 1 Display icons 2 READY lamp/Test button 3 MODE button 4 Flash release button 5 POWER button 6 Battery cover 7 Bulb 8 TELE/WIDE mode switch 9 Hot-shoe connection My Camera > Accessories 51 GPS module layout (optional) 1 2 3 4 5 No. Description 1 Status lamp 2 POWER button 3 Hot-shoe fastening dial 4 Hot-shoe connection 5 Battery cover Attaching the GPS module 1 Remove the hot-shoe cover from the camera. 2 Mount the GPS module by sliding it into the hot-shoe. My Camera > Accessories 52 3 Lock the GPS module into place by turning the hot-shoe fastening dial towards LOCK. 4 Press the power button of the GPS module. My Camera 53 Shooting modes Two simple shooting modes—Smart Auto and Smart mode—help you capture photos with numerous automatic settings. Additional modes allow for greater customization of settings. Icon Description t Smart Auto mode (p. 53) P Program mode (p. 55) A Aperture Priority mode (p. 57) S Shutter Priority mode (p. 58) M Manual mode (p. 59) i Lens Priority mode (p. 60) s Smart mode (p. 64) B Wi-Fi features (p. 122) t Smart Auto mode In Smart Auto mode, the camera recognizes surrounding conditions and automatically adjusts factors that contribute to exposure, including shutter speed, aperture value, metering, White Balance, and exposure compensation. As the camera controls most of the functions, some shooting functions are limited. This mode is useful for capturing quick snapshots with the least amount of adjustment. My Camera > Shooting modes 54 1 Rotate the mode dial to t. 2 Align your subject in the frame. 3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus. • The camera selects a scene. An appropriate scene icon appears at the screen. Recognizable scenes Icon Description Landscapes Scenes with bright white backgrounds Landscapes at night Icon Description Portraits at night Landscapes with backlighting Portraits with backlighting Portraits Close-up photos of objects Close-up photos of text Sunsets Indoors, dark Partially lit Close-up with spot lighting Portraits with spot lighting Blue skies Forested areas typically consist of green-colored subjects Close-up photos of colorful subjects Camera is stabilized on a tripod and the subject is not moving for a certain period of time. (when shooting in the dark) Actively moving subjects Fireworks (when using a tripod) 4 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo. My Camera > Shooting modes 55 • The camera may detect different scenes, even the same subjects, depending on external factors such as camera shake, lighting, and distance to the subject. • If the camera does not recognize an appropriate scene mode, it uses the default settings for the Smart Auto mode. • Even if it detects a face, the camera may not select a portrait mode depending on the subject's position or lighting. • Even if you use a tripod, the camera may not detect the tripod mode ( ) if the subject is moving. • The camera consumes more battery power, because it changes settings often to select appropriate scenes. P Program mode The camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture value so that an optimal exposure value can be achieved. This mode is useful when you want to capture shots of constant exposure while being able to adjust other settings. 1 Rotate the mode dial to P. 2 Set the desired options. 3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. My Camera > Shooting modes 56 Program Shift Program Shift function lets you adjust the shutter speed and aperture value while the camera maintains the same exposure. When you scroll the jog dial to the left, the shutter speed decreases and the aperture value increases. When you scroll the jog dial to the right, the shutter speed increases and the aperture value decreases. Minimum shutter speed Set the shutter speed not to be slower than the selected speed. However, if an optimal exposure value cannot be achieved because the ISO sensitivity reached the maximum ISO value that is set by Auto ISO Range, shutter speed may be slower than the selected minimum shutter speed. To set the minimum shutter speed, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Minimum Shutter Speed → an option. • This feature is available only when the ISO sensitivity is set to Auto. • This feature is available only in Program or Aperture priority mode. My Camera > Shooting modes 57 A Aperture Priority mode In Aperture Priority mode, the camera automatically calculates shutter speed according to the aperture value you choose. You can adjust the depth of field (DOF) by changing the aperture value. This mode is useful for taking portraits, flowers, or landscape shots. Large Depth of Field Small Depth of Field 1 Rotate the mode dial to A. 2 Scroll the jog dial to adjust the aperture value. • You can also adjust the aperture value by pressing [f], moving to the aperture value, and then scrolling the jog dial or dragging the screen. 3 Set the desired options. 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. • In low-light settings, you may need to increase the ISO sensitivity to prevent blurred photos. • To set the minimum shutter speed, in Shooting mode, press [m] →1 → Minimum Shutter Speed → an option. My Camera > Shooting modes 58 S Shutter Priority mode In Shutter Priority mode, the camera automatically adjusts the aperture value according to the shutter speed you choose. This mode is useful for capturing photos of fast-moving subjects or for creating tracer effects in a photo. For example, set the shutter speed to over 1/500 s to freeze the subject. To make the subject appear blurred set the shutter speed to below 1/30 s. Slow shutter speed Fast shutter speed 1 Rotate the mode dial to S. 2 Scroll the jog dial to adjust the shutter speed. • You can also adjust the shutter speed by pressing [f], moving to the shutter speed, and then scrolling the jog dial or dragging the screen. 3 Set the desired options. 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. In order to compensate for the reduced amount of light allowed by fast shutter speeds, open the aperture and let in more light. If your photos are still too dark, increase the ISO value. My Camera > Shooting modes 59 M Manual mode Manual mode lets you adjust the shutter speed and aperture value manually. In this mode, you can fully control the exposure of your photos. This mode is useful in controlled shooting environments, such as a studio, or when it is necessary to fine-tune camera settings. The Manual mode is also recommended for shooting night scenes or fireworks. 1 Rotate the mode dial to M. 2 Scroll the jog dial to adjust the shutter speed. 3 Press and hold [W], and then rotate the mode dial to adjust the aperture value. • You can also adjust the shutter speed or the aperture value by pressing [f], moving to the shutter speed or the aperture value, and then scrolling the jog dial or dragging the screen. 4 Set the desired options. 5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. Framing mode When you adjust the aperture value or shutter speed, the exposure changes according to the settings, so the display may darken. With this function on, the brightness of the display is constant regardless of the settings, so you can better frame your shot. To use Framing Mode, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Framing Mode → an option. My Camera > Shooting modes 60 Using the Bulb function Use the Bulb function to shoot night scenes or the night sky. While you are pressing [Shutter], the shutter is left open so you can create moving light effects. To use a bulb, Completely scroll the jog dial to the left to Bulb → Press and hold [Shutter] for the desired time. • If you set a high ISO value or open the shutter for a long time, image noise may increase. • Drive options, flash, and One touch shot cannot be used with the Bulb function. • The Bulb function is available only in Manual mode. • Use a tripod and shutter release to prevent your camera from shaking. • The longer you open the shutter, the longer it takes to save a photo. Do not turn the camera off while the camera saves a photo. • If you use this function for a long time, use a fully charged battery. i Lens Priority mode You can adjust the depth of field to blur or sharpen the background. Using E 1 Rotate the mode dial to i. 2 Press [i-Function] on the lens to select E. • You can also press [i-Function], and then press [C/F] or drag the screen to select E. My Camera > Shooting modes 61 3 Adjust the focus ring to select a value. • You can also scroll the jog dial to adjust the value. • You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the value. Defocus E Sharpen 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. • As you sharpen photos, the aperture value Increases and the shutter speed reduces. In dark places, photos may be blurry. • This function is not available when you set 3D Auto Mode in 3D mode. Using i-Function in P/A/S/M modes When you use the i-Function button on an i-Function lens, you can manually select and adjust shutter speed, aperture value, exposure value, ISO sensitivity, and White Balance on the lens. 1 Rotate the mode dial to P, A, S, or M. 2 Press [i-Function] on the lens to select a setting. • You can also press [i-Function], and then press [C/F] or drag the screen to select a setting. My Camera > Shooting modes 62 3 Adjust the focus ring to select an option. • You can also scroll the jog dial or drag the screen to select an option. 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. Available options Shooting mode PASM 3D Aperture -O-OShutter Speed - - OO - EV OOO - O ISO OOOO - White Balance OOOOO Z OOOO - • To select items to appear when you press [i-Function] on the lens in Shooting mode, press [m] → 5 → iFn Customizing → an item. • This function is not available when you set 3D Auto Mode in 3D mode. My Camera > Shooting modes 63 Using Z The Z allows you to zoom in on a subject with less degradation of photo quality than the Digital zoom. However, the photo resolution may change compared to when you zoom in by rotating the zoom ring. 1 Rotate the mode dial to P, A, S, M, or i. 2 Press [i-Function] on the lens to select Z. • You can also press [i-Function], and then press [C/F] or drag the screen to select Z. 3 Adjust the focus ring to select a zoom ratio. • You can also scroll the jog dial or drag the screen to select an option. • Photo resolution varies according to the zoom ratio if you use the Z. 3:2 16:9 1:1 x1.2 4560X3040 (13.9M) 4560X2568 (11.7M) 3040X3040 (9.2M) x1.4 3888X2592 (10.1M) 3888X2184 (8.5M) 2592X2592 (6.7M) x1.7 3264X2176 (7.1M) 3264X1840 (6.0M) 2176X2176 (4.7M) x2 2736X1824 (5.0M) 2736X1536 (4.2M) 1824X1824 (3.3M) These figures are based on the maximum resolution at each image ratio. 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. • Z is not available when you capture burst shots. • Z is not available when you capture photos in the RAW file format. • Z is deactivated when you record videos by pressing the video recording button. • This function is not available when you set 3D Auto Mode in 3D mode. My Camera > Shooting modes 64 s Smart mode In Smart mode, you can capture photos with options that are preset for a specific scene. 1 Rotate the mode dial to s. 2 Select a scene. • To select a shooting mode when the mode dial is set to s, press [f] or touch , and then select a desired mode. Smart : Beauty Face Set Option Description Beauty Face Capture a portrait with options to hide facial imperfections. Best Face Capture multiple photos and replace faces to create the best possible image. Landscape Capture still-life scenes and landscapes. Option Description Macro Capture small or close-up subjects. Action Freeze Capture subjects moving at high speed. Rich Tones Capture a photo with vibrant colors. Panorama Capture a wide panoramic scene in a single photo. Waterfall Capture scenes with waterfalls. Silhouette Capture subjects as dark shapes against a light background. Sunset Capture scenes at sunset, with natural-looking reds and yellows. Night Capture multiple photos in low light conditions without a flash. The camera combines them to create a single image that is brighter and has less blurring. Fireworks Capture scenes with fireworks. Light Trace Capture scenes with the light trailing in low-light conditions. Creative Shot Capture photos with effects applied automatically. 3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture. My Camera > Shooting modes 65 Using the Best Face mode In Best Face mode, you can capture multiple photos and replace faces to create the best possible image. Use this mode to select the best image for each individual when capturing group photos. 1 Rotate the mode dial to s, and then select Best Face. 2 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. 3 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo. • The camera captures 5 photos consecutively. • The first photo is set as the background image. • The camera automatically detects faces after shooting. 4 Touch a face to replace. 5 Touch the best image from the 5 faces that were captured. • Repeat steps 4 and 5 to replace the rest faces of the photo. • The icon will appear on the image that the camera recommends. 6 Touch to save the photo. • Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. • The resolution is set to 5.9M or smaller. My Camera > Shooting modes 66 Capturing panoramic photos Capture a 2D or 3D panoramic photo. Captured 3D panoramic photos can be viewed only on a 3D TV or 3D monitor. 1 Rotate the mode dial to s, and then select Panorama. 2 Press [m] →1→ Panorama → Live Panorama or 3D. 3 Press [m] to return to Shooting mode. 4 Press and hold [Shutter] to start shooting. 5 With [Shutter] pressed, slowly move the camera in the direction you selected. • In 3D Panorama mode, you can capture a scene only in horizontal directions. • An arrow toward the direction of motion is displayed, and the entire shooting image is displayed in the preview box. • When the scenes are aligned, the camera captures the next photo automatically. 6 When you are finished, release [Shutter]. • The camera will automatically save the shots into one photo. • If you release [Shutter] while shooting, the panoramic shooting stops and photos that have been captured are saved. My Camera > Shooting modes 67 • The resolution varies depending on the panoramic photo you captured. • In Panorama mode, some shooting options are not available. • The camera may stop shooting due to the shooting composition or the subject's movement. • In Panorama mode, your camera may not capture the entire last scene if you stop moving the camera to improve the photo quality. To capture the entire scene, move your camera slightly beyond the point where you want the scene to end. • In 3D Panorama mode, your camera may not capture the very beginning or end of a scene due to the nature of the 3D effect. To capture the entire scene, move slightly beyond the beginning and end points you want to capture. • Photos captured with the 3D function are saved in JPEG (2D) and MPO (3D) formats. On your camera's display, you can view only JPEG files. • To view 3D files, connect your camera to a 3D TV or 3D monitor with an optional HDMI cable. While viewing, wear proper 3D glasses. • Capturing photos in 3D Panorama mode may result in a less pronounced 3D effect than those captured with a 3D lens. To increase the 3D effect, attach the optional 3D lens and use 3D mode. (p. 69) • For best results when capturing panoramic photos, avoid the following: - moving the camera too quickly or too slowly - moving the camera too little to capture the next image - moving the camera at irregular speeds - shaking the camera - shooting in dark places - capturing moving subjects nearby - shooting conditions where the brightness or color of light is changing • Photos taken are automatically saved, and shooting is stopped under the following conditions: - if you change the shooting direction while shooting - if you move the camera too rapidly - if you do not move the camera My Camera > Shooting modes 68 Recording a video In Shooting mode, you can record Full HD videos (1920X1080) by pressing (Video recording). The camera lets you record a video up to 29 minutes and 59 seconds in length at 60, 30, 24, or 15 fps, and saves the files in MP4 (H.264) format. 60 fps is available only with 1920X1080 and 1280X720 and 24 fps is available only with 1920X810. 15 fps is available only with some Smart Filter options. The sound is recorded via the camera's microphone. You can set the exposure by adjusting the aperture value and shutter speed for the mode you selected. When you use a lens that does not have an AF/MF switch while recording a video, press [F] to deactivate or activate the AF function. When you use the lens that has an AF/MF switch, the AF function works according to the switch’s setting. Select Fader to fade in or out a scene. You can also select Voice, Wind Cut, or other options to set recording options. (p. 106) 1 Rotate the mode dial to t, P, A, S, M, i, or s. • This feature may not work in some modes. 2 Set the desired options. 3 Press (Video recording) to start recording. 4 Press (Video recording) again to stop. • H.264 (MPEG-4 part10/AVC) is the latest video coding format established in 2003 collaboratively by ISO-IEC and ITU-T. Since this format uses a high compression rate, more data can be saved in less memory space. • If you have the image stabilizer option on when shooting a movie, the camera may record the image stabilizer sound. • The zoom sound or other lens sounds may be recorded if you adjust the lens while recording a video. • When using an optional video lens, the autofocus noise is not recorded. • If you remove the camera lens while recording a movie, the recording will be interrupted. Do not change the lens while recording. • If you attach an external microphone while recording a movie, sound will not be recorded through the external microphone. (The previous settings are maintained.) If you remove the external microphone while recording a movie, sound will not be recorded. Turn off the camera before attaching or removing the external microphone. My Camera > Shooting modes 69 • If you change the shooting angle of the camera suddenly while shooting a movie, the camera may not be able to record images accurately. Use a tripod to minimize camera shake. • The camera supports only the Multi AF function when recording a video. You cannot use any other focus area setting functions, such as Face Detection AF. • When the size of a movie file exceeds 4 GB, the camera automatically stops recording even if the maximum recording time (29 minutes and 59 seconds) has not been reached. • If you use a slow writing memory card, the recording of your movie can be interrupted because the card cannot process data at the rate the video is being shot. If this occurs, replace the card with a faster memory card or reduce the video size (for example, from 1280X720 to 640X480). • When formatting a memory card, always format using the camera. If you format on another camera or a PC, you can lose files on the card or cause a change in the capacity of the card. • When you press the video recording button, Z turns off. • While recording a video in the same ISO sensitivity, the screen may be darker than taking a photo. Adjust the ISO sensitivity. • When you record a video in P, A, or S mode, ISO is automatically set to Auto. 3D mode You can capture 3D photos or videos with an optional 3D lens. SAMSUNG 45 mm F1.8 [T6] 2D/3D lens (example) Set the 2D/3D switch on the lens to 3D, and then capture a photo or video 1.5-5 m away from the subject. My Camera > Shooting modes 70 • 3D mode is always on, regardless of the mode dial of the camera, except B. • To use auto 3D options that enable the camera to set shooting options automatically depending on shooting conditions in 3D mode, press [m] →1→ 3D Auto Mode → On. • To change the 3D recording option, press [m] →6→ 3D REC Mode → a desired option. * Default Icon Description Side by Side*: Displays two images next to each other. Frame Packing: Displays the images for the left and right eye alternately in frames. • Available shooting options differ compared to other shooting modes. • You can select either 4.1M (2688X1512) or 2.1M (1920X1080) photo size. • The video resolution is set to 1920X1080. • Videos recorded in 3D may be dark or playback may be jittery. • Shooting in low temperatures may result in color distortion in images and may consume more battery power. • You may not be able to shoot properly in conditions below 8.5 LV/900 lux. For best results, capture photos in places with sufficient light. • When you photograph objects that contain polarizing material, such as a display, sunglasses, or a polarizing filter, or use the polarizing material with your lens, the images may appear dark or the 3D effect may not be applied properly. • Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. • If you rotate or tilt the camera vertically while shooting, the 3D effect may not be applied properly. Capture images with the camera in the normal position. • If you shoot in fluorescent lighting or capture images displayed by projectors or TVs, the images may appear black due to the flicker effect. • In 3D mode, the Enlarge x8 option of MF Assist may not be available. • The camera's display shows 3D videos only in 2D. • Photos captured with the 3D function are saved in JPEG (2D) and MPO (3D) formats. On your camera's display, you can view only JPEG files. • To view 3D files, connect your camera to a 3D TV or 3D monitor with an optional HDMI cable. While viewing, wear proper 3D glasses. • You cannot use the flash in 3D mode. My Camera > Shooting modes 71 Available functions by shooting mode For details about shooting functions, see Chapter 2. Press a shortcut for each function. Function Available in Shortcut Photo Size (p. 73) P/A/S/M/i/s*/t/3D* - Quality (p. 74) P/A/S/M/i/s* - ISO (p. 75) P/A/S/M f/I White Balance (p. 76) P/A/S/M f Picture Wizard (p. 79) P/A/S/M f Smart Filter (p. 101) P/A/S/M f AF Mode (p. 80) P/A/S/M/i*/s*/3D* f AF Area (p. 83) P/A/S/M/i*/s* f/F Touch AF (p. 86) P/A/S/M/i/s*/t/3D* - MF Assist (p. 88) P/A/S/M/i/s/t/3D* - Focus Peaking (p. 88) P/A/S/M/i/s/t - Link AE to AF Point (p. 99) P/A/S/M - Function Available in Shortcut Framing Mode (p. 59) P/A/S/M - OIS (Anti-Shake) (p. 89) P/A/S/M/i/s*/t* - Drive (Continuous/ Burst/Timer/ Bracketing) (p. 90) P/A/S/M/i*/s*/t*/3D* f/C Metering (p. 97) P/A/S/M f Dynamic Range (p. 100) P/A/S/M - Flash (p. 94) P*/A*/S*/M*/i*/s*/t* f Exposure compensation (p. 102) P/A/S f/W Exposure lock (p. 103) P/A/S - * Some functions are limited in these modes. Chapter 2 Shooting Functions Learn about the functions you can set in Shooting mode. You can enjoy more customized photos and videos by using the shooting functions. Shooting Functions 73 Shooting Functions Photo size As you increase the resolution, your photo or video will include more pixels, so it can be printed on larger paper or displayed on a larger screen. When you use a high resolution, the file size will also increase. Select a low resolution for photos that will be displayed in a digital picture frame or uploaded to the web. To set the size, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Photo Size → an option. Icon Size Recommended for 5472x3648 (3:2) Printing on A1 paper. 3888x2592 (3:2) Printing on A2 paper. 2976x1984 (3:2) Printing on A3 paper. 1728x1152 (3:2) Printing on A5 paper. 5472x3080 (16:9) Printing on A1 paper or viewing on an HDTV. 3712x2088 (16:9) Printing on A3 paper or viewing on an HDTV. 2944x1656 (16:9) Printing on A4 paper or viewing on an HDTV. 1920x1080 (16:9) Printing on A5 paper or viewing on an HDTV. 3648x3648 (1:1) Printing a square photo on A1 paper. 2640x2640 (1:1) Printing a square photo on A3 paper. 2000x2000 (1:1) Printing a square photo on A4 paper. 1024x1024 (1:1) Printing a square photo on A5 paper. Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Size and Resolution 74 Shooting Functions > Size and Resolution Quality The camera saves photos in either the JPEG or RAW format. Photos captured by a camera are often transformed to the JPEG format and stored in the memory according to the settings of the camera at the time of shooting. RAW files are not transformed to the JPEG format and are stored in the memory without any changes. RAW files have the file extension “SRW”. To adjust and calibrate exposures, White Balances, tones, contrasts, and colors of the RAW files, or to convert them into JPEG or TIFF format, use the Adobe Photoshop Lightroom program found on the supplied DVD-ROM. Ensure you have enough space on the memory card to save photos in the RAW format. To set the quality, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Quality → an option. Icon Format Description JPEG Super Fine: • Compressed for the best quality. • Recommended for printing in large size. JPEG Fine: • Compressed for better quality. • Recommended for printing in normal size. Icon Format Description JPEG Normal: • Compressed for normal quality. • Recommended for printing in small size or uploading to the web. RAW RAW: • Save a photo without data loss. • Recommended for editing after shooting. RAW+JPEG RAW + S.Fine: Save a photo in both the JPEG (S.Fine quality) and RAW format. RAW+JPEG RAW + Fine: Save a photo in both the JPEG (Fine quality) and RAW format. RAW+JPEG RAW + Normal: Save a photo in both the JPEG (Normal quality) and RAW format. Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Shooting Functions 75 Shooting Functions The ISO sensitivity value represents the sensitivity of camera to light. The larger the ISO value, the more sensitive the camera is to light. Consequently, by selecting a higher ISO sensitivity value, you can capture photos in dim or dark places at faster shutter speeds. However, this may increase electronic noise and result in a grainy photo. To set ISO sensitivity, In Shooting mode, press [I] → an option. Examples ISO 100 ISO 400 ISO 800 ISO 3200 • You can also set the option by pressing [m] →1→ ISO → an option in Shooting mode. • Increase the ISO value in places where flash use is prohibited. You can capture a clear photo by setting a high ISO value without having to secure more light. • Use the Noise Reduction function in order to reduce the visual noise that can appear on photos of a high ISO value. (p. 146) • Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions. ISO sensitivity Shooting Functions 76 Shooting Functions White Balance represents the light source that influences on the color of a photo. The color of a photo depends on the type and quality of the light source. If you want the color of your photo to be realistic, select an appropriate lighting condition to calibrate the White Balance, such as Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, Tungsten, or adjust color temperature manually. You can also adjust color for the preset light sources so that the colors of the photo match the actual scene under mixed lighting conditions. To set the White Balance, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ White Balance → an option. Icon Description Auto WB: Use automatic settings depending on the lighting conditions. Daylight: Select when taking outdoor photos on a sunny day. This option results in photos closest to the natural colors of the scene. Cloudy: Select when taking outdoor photos on a cloudy day or in shadows. Photos captured on cloudy days tend to be more bluish than on sunny days. This option offsets that effect. Icon Description Fluorescent White: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent lamp. Especially for white fluorescent light with a color temperature of about 4,200K. Fluorescent NW: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent lamp. Especially for white fluorescent light of very white hues with a temperature of about 5,000K. Fluorescent Daylight: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent lamp. Especially for white fluorescent light of slightly bluish hue with a temperature of about 6,500K. Tungsten: Select when taking indoor photos under incandescent bulbs or halogen lamps. Incandescent tungsten bulbs tend to have a reddish hue. This option offsets that effect. Flash WB: Select when using a flash. Custom Set: Use your pre-defined settings. You can manually set the White Balance by pressing [D], and then shooting a white sheet of paper. Fill the spot metering circle with the paper and set the White Balance. White Balance 77 Shooting Functions > White Balance Icon Description Color Temperature: Manually adjust the color temperature of the light source. Color temperature is a measurement in degrees Kelvin that indicates the specific type of light source. As the color temperature increases, the color distribution becomes cooler. Alternatively, as the color temperature decreases, the color distribution becomes warmer. Press [D], and then adjust the color temperature. Clear sky Fluorescent H Fluorescent L Cloudy Halogen lamp Daylight Tungsten Candle light Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Customizing preset White Balance options You can also customize preset White Balance options. To customize preset options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ White Balance → an option → [D] → scroll the jog dial, or press [D/I/C/F]. White Balance : Daylight Back Set Reset You can also touch an area on the screen. 78 Shooting Functions > White Balance Examples Auto WB Daylight Fluorescent Daylight Tungsten Shooting Functions 79 Shooting Functions Picture Wizard lets you apply different photo styles to your photo to create various looks and emotional moods. You can also create and save your own photo styles by adjusting color, saturation, sharpness, and contrast for each style. There is no rule for which style is suitable in which conditions. Experiment with different styles and find your own settings. To set a photo style, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Picture Wizard → an option. Examples Standard Vivid Portrait Landscape Forest Retro Cool Calm Classic • You can also adjust the value of the preset style settings. Select a Picture Wizard option, press [D], and then adjust color, saturation, sharpness, or contrast. • To customize your own picture wizard, select , , or , and then adjust the color, saturation, sharpness, and contrast. • Picture Wizard options cannot be set with Smart Filter options at the same time. Picture Wizard (photo styles) Shooting Functions 80 Shooting Functions AF mode Learn how to adjust the camera’s focus according to the subjects. You can select a focusing mode appropriate to the subject among Single Auto Focus, Continuous Auto Focus, and Manual Focus. The AF function is activated when you press [Shutter] halfway. In the MF mode, you have to rotate the focus ring on the lens to focus manually. In most cases, you can have a focus by selecting Single AF. Fast moving subjects or subjects of a color similar to the background are difficult to focus. Select an appropriate focusing mode for such instances. If your lens has an AF/MF switch, you must set the switch according to the selected mode. Set the switch to AF when you select Single AF or Continuous AF. Set the switch to MF when you select Manual Focus. When your lens has no AF/MF switch, press [F] to select a desired AF mode. To set the auto focus mode, In Shooting mode, press [F] → an option. • You can also set the option by pressing [m] →1→ AF Mode → an option in Shooting mode. • The available options may differ depending on the lens in use. 81 Shooting Functions > AF mode Single AF Single AF is appropriate for shooting a still subject. When you press [Shutter] halfway, the focus fixes in the focus area. The area turns green when the focus is achieved. Continuous AF While you are pressing [Shutter] halfway, the camera continues to automatic focusing. Once the focus area is fixed on the subject, the subject is always in focus even when moving. This mode is recommended for shooting a person on a bicycle, a running dog, or a car racing scene. 82 Shooting Functions > AF mode Manual focus You can manually focus on a subject by rotating the focus ring on the lens. The MF Assist function lets you easily achieve a focus. While you are rotating the focus ring, the focus area is magnified. When you use the Focus Peaking function, the color you selected appears on the focused subject. This mode is recommended for shooting an object similar in color to the background, a night scene, or fireworks. If you use this function, you cannot set Touch AF, AF Area, and Link AE to AF Point options. Shooting Functions 83 Shooting Functions The AF area function changes the positions of the focus area. Generally, cameras focus on the nearest subject. When there are a lot of subjects, however, unwanted subjects can be in focus. In order to prevent unwanted subjects from being in focus, change the focus area so that a desired subject is in focus. You can get a clearer and sharper photo by selecting an appropriate focus area. To set the auto focus area, In Shooting mode, press [m] → 1→ AF Area → an option. • Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. • When the AF/MF switch is set to MF, you cannot change the AF area from the shooting menu. • When you use the Face Detection AF option, the camera focuses on the area with the white frame automatically. • Depending on the Picture Wizard options, Face Detection may not be effective. • When you set manual focus, Face Detection may not be available. • Face Detection may not be effective when: - the subject is far from the camera - it is too bright or too dark - the subject is not facing the camera - the subject is wearing sunglasses or a mask - the subject’s facial expression changes drastically - the subject is backlit or the lighting conditions are unstable Selection AF You can set the focus on an area you want. Apply an out-of-focus effect to make the subject more distinguishable. The focus on the photo below was repositioned and resized so that it fits the subject’s face. To resize or move the focus area, in Shooting mode, press [o]. Use the navigation button to move the focus area. Scroll the jog dial to resize the focus area. AF area 84 Shooting Functions > AF area Multi AF The camera displays a green rectangle in places where focus is set correctly. The photo is divided into two or more areas, and the camera obtains focus points of each area. It is recommended for scenery photos. When you press [Shutter] halfway, the camera displays the focus areas as shown in the photo below. Face detection AF The camera focuses on human faces preferentially. Faces of up to 10 people can be detected. This setting is recommended for shooting a group of people. When you press [Shutter] halfway, the camera focuses on faces as shown in the photo below. In cases of shooting a group of people, the camera displays the focus on the nearest person’s face in white and the rest of the people’s faces in gray. 85 Shooting Functions > AF area Self-Portrait AF It can be difficult to check whether your face is in focus when you are taking a self-portrait. When this function is on, the beep from the camera gets faster when your face is located at the center of the composition. Shooting Functions 86 Shooting Functions Tracking AF Tracking AF allows you to track and automatically focus on your subject, even when the subject is moving or when you change the shooting composition. White frame: Your camera is tracking the subject. Green frame: Your subject is in focus when you half-press [Shutter]. Red frame: Your camera failed to focus. Select or focus on a focal area that you touch on the screen. Additionally, focus on the subject and capture a photo by touching on the screen. To set Touch AF, In Shooting mode, press [m] → 1→ Touch AF → an option. Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions. Touch AF Touch AF allows you to select and focus on the focus area that you touch on the screen. AF Point The focal area will correspond to the area you touch on the screen and the focus will not be achieved. Touch AF 87 Shooting Functions > Touch AF One touch shot You can capture a photo with the touch of your finger. As you touch on a subject, the camera focuses on the subject automatically and captures a photo. • If you do not select a focus area, the Auto Focus function does not work. • Tracking a subject may fail when: - the subject is too small - the subject moves excessively - the subject is backlit or you are shooting in a dark place - colors or patterns on the subject and the background are the same - the subject includes horizontal patterns, such as blinds - the camera shakes excessively • When tracking fails, the feature will be reset. • If the camera fails to track the subject, the focus area will be reset. • If the camera fails to focus, the focus frame will change to red and the focus will be reset. Shooting Functions 88 Shooting Functions hooting Functions In the manual focus mode, you have to rotate the focus ring on the lens to focus. When you use the MF Assist function or the Focus Peaking function, you can achieve a clearer focus. This function is only available on a lens that supports manual focus. MF Assist In the manual focus mode, you can enlarge the scene and easily adjust the focus while rotating the focus ring. To set the manual focus assist, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺ1ĺ MF Assist ĺ an option. * Default Option Description Off Do not use the MF Assist function. Enlarge x5* The focus area is magnified by 5 times when you rotate the focus ring. * Default Option Description Enlarge x8 The focus area is magnified by 8 times when you rotate the focus ring. Focus Peaking In the manual focus mode, the color you selected appears on the focused subject to help you focus while rotating the focus ring. To set Focus Peaking options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺ1ĺ Focus Peaking ĺ an option. * Default Option Description Level Set a sensitivity for detecting the focused subject. (Off, High, Normal*, Low) Color Set a color to appear on the focused subject. (White*, Red, Green) Focus assist Shooting Functions 89 Shooting Functions Use the Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) function to minimize camera shake. OIS may not be available with some lenses. Camera shake tends to occur in dark places or when shooting indoors. In such cases, the camera uses slower shutter speeds in order to increase the amount of light taken in, which can result in a blurry photo. You can prevent this situation by using the OIS function. If your lens has an OIS switch, you have set the switch to ON to use the OIS function. To set OIS options, In Shooting mode, press [m] → 1→ OIS (Anti-Shake) → an option. * Default Icon Description Off: The OIS function is off. (This option may not be available with some lenses.) Mode 1*: The OIS function is applied only when you press [Shutter] in full or half. Mode 2: The OIS function is on. Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) Without OIS correction With OIS correction • OIS may not function properly when: - you move your camera to follow a moving subject - there is too much camera shake - the shutter speed is slow (for example, when you select Night in s mode) - the battery is low - you capture a close-up shot • If you use the OIS function with a tripod, your images may be blurred by the vibration of the OIS sensor. Deactivate the OIS function when you use a tripod. • If the camera is hit or dropped, the display will be blurry. If this occurs, turn off the camera, and then turn it on again. • Use the OIS function only when needed because the function consumes more battery power. • To set an OIS option on the menu, set the OIS switch on your lens to ON. • This option may not be available with some lenses. • Off may not be available with some lenses. Shooting Functions 90 Shooting Functions You can set the shooting method such as Continuous, Burst, Timer and so on. Select Single to capture one photo at a time. Select Continuous or Burst to shoot fast moving subjects. Select AE Bracket, WB Bracket, or P Wiz Bracket to adjust exposure, White Balance, or apply Picture Wizard effects. You can also select Timer to capture a photo of yourself. To set the shooting method, In Shooting mode, press [C] → an option. • You can also set the option by pressing [m] →1→ Drive → an option in Shooting mode. • Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Single Capture one photo whenever you press [Shutter]. Recommended for general conditions. Continuous Continuously capture photos while you are pressing [Shutter]. You can capture up to 5 photos (Continuous Normal) or 8.6 photos (Continuous High) per second. If you select Continuous High, the noise reduction function is not available. Drive (shooting method) 91 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) Burst Consecutively capture up to 10 shots per second (3 seconds), 15 shots per second (2 seconds), or 30 shots per second (1 second) when you press [Shutter] once. It is recommended for shooting the rapid motion of fast moving subjects such as racing cars. • To set the number of shots, in Shooting mode, press [C] → Burst, and then press [D]. • The photo size is set to 5M. • It may take longer to save a photo. • You cannot use the flash with this option. • Shutter speed must be faster than 1/30 second. • Photos captured with this option may be slightly enlarged when saving. • You cannot set an ISO option higher than ISO 3200. • This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when the photo quality is set to RAW. Timer Capture a photo with a delay of 2 to 30 seconds. The delay is adjustable in increments of 1 second. To set the delay, in Shooting mode, press [C] → Timer, and then press [D]. 92 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) Auto Exposure Bracketing (AE Bracket) When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos: the original, one a step darker, and one a step lighter. Use a tripod to prevent blurry photos as the camera captures three photos continuously. You can adjust the settings in Bracket Set menu. Exposure -2 Original Exposure +2 White Balance Bracketing (WB Bracket) When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos: the original and two more with different White Balance settings. The original photo is captured when you press [Shutter]. The other two are automatically adjusted according to the White Balance you have set. You can adjust the settings in Bracket Set menu. WB-2 Original WB+2 This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when the photo quality is set to RAW. 93 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) Picture Wizard Bracketing (P Wiz Bracket) When you press [Shutter], the camera captures three consecutive photos, each with a different Picture Wizard setting. The camera captures a photo and applies the three Picture Wizard options you have set to the image captured. You can select three different settings in Bracket Set menu. Vivid Standard Retro This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when the photo quality is set to RAW. Bracketing setting You can set up the options for AE Bracket, WB Bracket, and P Wiz Bracket. (p. 147) To set a bracketing option, In Shooting mode, press [m] → 5 → Bracket Set → an option. Shooting Functions 94 Shooting Functions In order to capture a realistic photo of a subject, the amount of light should be constant. When the light source varies, you can use a flash and supply a constant amount of light. Select appropriate settings according to a light source and a subject. To set flash options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Flash → an option. Icon Description Off: Do not use the flash. Smart Flash: The camera automatically adjusts the brightness of the flash according to the amount of light in the surrounding environment. Auto: The flash automatically fires in dark places. Auto Red-eye: The flash automatically fires and reduces red-eyes. Fill in: The flash fires whenever you capture a photo. (Brightness is automatically adjusted.) Fill-in Red: The flash fires whenever you capture a photo and reduces red-eyes. Icon Description 1st Curtain: The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens. The camera captures a photo of a subject earlier in an action sequence clearly. Ball moving direction 2nd Curtain: The flash fires just before the shutter closes. The camera captures a photo of a subject later in an action sequence clearly. Ball moving direction • The available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. • There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the flash fires a second time. • If you select Off, the flash does not fire even when an external flash is attached. Use only Samsung-approved flashes. Using incompatible flashes may damage your camera. Flash 95 Shooting Functions > Flash Reducing the red-eye effect If the flash fires when you capture a photo of a person in the dark, a red glow may appear in the eyes. To reduce the red-eye effect, select Auto Red-eye or Fill-in Red. Without red-eye reduction With red-eye reduction If the subject is too far from the camera or moves when the first flash fires, redeyes may not be reduced. Adjusting the flash intensity When the flash is on, adjust the flash intensity +/-2 levels. To set the flash intensity, In Shooting mode, press [f] ĺ Flash ĺ an option ĺ [D] ĺ scroll the jog dial or press [C/F] to adjust the flash intensity. Back Set Flash : 0.0 96 Shooting Functions > Flash • You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the intensity. • Adjusting the flash intensity may not be effective when: - the subject is too close to the camera - you set a high ISO sensitivity - the exposure value is too big or too small • In some shooting modes, you cannot use this function. • If you attach an intensity-adjustable external flash to the camera, the intensity settings of the flash will be applied. • If the subject is too close when you use the flash, some light may be blocked, resulting in a dark photo. Ensure that the subject is within the recommended range, which varies by lens. • When a lens hood is attached, the light from the flash can be blocked by the hood. Remove the hood to use the flash. Shooting Functions 97 Shooting Functions The metering mode refers to the way in which a camera measures the quantity of light. The camera measures the amount of light in a scene, and in many of its modes, uses the measurement to adjust various settings. For example, if a subject looks darker than its actual color, the camera captures an overexposed photo of it. If a subject looks lighter than its actual color, the camera captures an underexposed photo of it. The brightness and overall mood of the photo can also be affected by how the camera measures the amount of light. Select an appropriate setting for a shooting condition. To set a metering option, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Metering → an option. Multi The Multi mode calculates the amount of light in multiple areas. When light is sufficient or insufficient, the camera adjusts the exposure by averaging the overall brightness of the scene. This mode is suitable for general photos. Metering 98 Shooting Functions > Metering Spot The Spot mode calculates the amount of light in the center. When you capture a photo in conditions where there is a strong backlight behind a subject, the camera adjusts the exposure so as to shoot a subject correctly. For example, when you select the Multi mode in a strong backlight condition, the camera calculates that the overall amount of light is abundant, which results in a darker photo. The Spot mode can prevent this situation as it calculates the amount of light in a designated area. The subject is in bright color while the background is dark. The Spot mode is recommended for a situation like this where a huge difference in the exposure exists between a subject and a background. Center-weighted The Center-weighted mode calculates a broader area than the Spot mode does. It sums up the amount of light in the center portion of the shot (60–80 %) and that of the rest of the shot (20–40 %). It is recommended for situations where there is a slight difference in brightness between a subject and a background or an area of the subject is large compared to the overall composition of the photo. 99 Shooting Functions > Metering Measuring the exposure value of the focus area When this function is turned on, the camera automatically sets an optimal exposure by calculating the brightness of the focus area. This function is only available when you select Spot metering or Multi metering, and Selection AF. To set this function, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Link AE to AF Point → an option. Shooting Functions 100 Shooting Functions This function automatically corrects the loss of bright detail that can occur due to shading differences in the photo. To set Smart Range options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Dynamic Range → an option. Without Dynamic Range effect With Dynamic Range effect Icon Description Off: Do not use Dynamic Range. Smart Range+: Correct the loss of bright detail. You cannot set ISO 100. HDR: Capture 2 photos with different exposures, and then combine them to create a single image automatically. • You cannot set an ISO option higher than ISO 3200. • Dynamic Range options cannot be set at the same time as Picture Wizard options. Dynamic Range Shooting Functions 101 Shooting Functions Smart Filter lets you apply special effects to your photos. You can select various filter options to create special effects that are difficult to be achieved with normal lenses. To set Smart Filter options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →1→ Smart Filter → an option. Option Description Off No effect Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong vignette effect of Lomo cameras. Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in miniature. Colored Pencil Apply a colored pencil painting effect. Watercolor Apply a watercolor painting effect. Wash drawing Apply a washed-out effect. Oil Sketch Apply an oil sketching effect. Ink Sketch Apply an ink sketching effect. Acryl Apply an acryl painting effect. Option Description Negative Apply a negative film effect. Red Desaturate all colors but red. Green Desaturate all colors but green. Blue Desaturate all colors but blue. Yellow Desaturate all colors but yellow. Smart filter options cannot be set with Picture Wizard options at the same time. Smart Filter Shooting Functions 102 Shooting Functions The camera automatically sets the exposure by measuring the levels of light from the photo’s composition and the position of a subject. If the exposure set by the camera is higher or lower than you expected, you can adjust the exposure value manually. The exposure value is adjustable in ±3 increments. The camera displays the exposure warning in red for each step beyond ±3 range. To adjust the exposure value, while holding down [W], scroll the jog dial. You can also adjust the exposure value by pressing [f], and then selecting EV. You can check the exposure value by the position of the exposure level indicator. Exposure level indicator Increased exposure (brighter) Decreased exposure (darker) Exposure warning Standard exposure index -2 Original +2 Exposure compensation Shooting Functions 103 Shooting Functions When you cannot achieve an appropriate exposure because of a strong color contrast, lock the exposure, and then capture a photo. To lock the exposure value, adjust the photo’s exposure, and then press the custom button. After locking the exposure, aim the lens where you desire, and then press [Shutter]. • Set a function of the custom button to AEL to lock the current exposure value. (p. 150) • This feature is not available in Manual mode. Exposure lock Shooting Functions 104 Shooting Functions The functions available for video are explained below. Movie size Set the movie size. To set movie size options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→ Movie Size → an option. Icon Size Recommended for 1920X1080 (60 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV. (Playable only on full HDTVs capable of playback at 60 fps.) 1920X1080 (30 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV. 1920X1080 (15 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV. (Available only with some Smart Filter options.) 1920X810 (24 fps) (Approx. 2.35:1) View on an HDTV. 1280X720 (60 fps) (16:9) View on an HDTV. 1280X720 (30 fps) (16:9) View on an HDTV. 640X480 (30 fps) (4:3) View on a TV. 320X240 (30 fps) (4:3) Post on a website using the wireless network (30 seconds maximum). Movie quality Set the Movie quality. To set movie quality options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→ Movie Quality → an option. Icon Extension Description MP4 (H.264) Normal: Record videos in normal quality. MP4 (H.264) HQ: Record videos in high quality. Video functions 105 Shooting Functions > Video functions Multi Motion Set the playing speed of a video. To set playing speed options, In Shooting mode, press [m] → 6→ Multi Motion → an option. Icon Description x0.25: Record a video and play it at 1/4 normal speed. (Available only with 640x480 or 320x240) x0.5: Record a video and play it at 1/2 normal speed. (Available only with 1280x720 (30 fps), 640x480, or 320x240) x1: Record a video and play it at normal speed. x5: Record a video and play it at 5X normal speed. x10: Record a video and play it at 10X normal speed. x20: Record a video and play it at 20X normal speed. • If you select an option other than x1, sound will not be recorded. • The available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Fader You can fade in or fade out a scene using the fader function on the camera without having to do it on a PC. Set the fade in option to gradually fade in at the start of the scene. Set the fade out option to gradually fade out the scene. Use the function appropriately and add dramatic effects on your videos. To set fader options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→ Fader → an option. Icon Description Off: Fader function not used. In: Scene gradually fades in. Out: Scene gradually fades out. In-out: The fader function is applied at the start and end of the scene. When you use the fader function, it may take longer to save a file. 106 Shooting Functions > Video functions Mic Level Set the mic level for the shooting conditions. To set the mic level, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→ Mic Level → an option. Voice Sometimes, a muted video is more appealing than the one with sound. Turn the voice off to record a muted video. To set voice options, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→ Voice → an option. Wind cut When you record videos in noisy environments, unintended sounds can be recorded in videos. In particular, severe wind noise recorded in videos distracts you from enjoying your videos. Use the Wind Cut function to remove some surrounding noise in addition to wind noise. To reduce wind sound, In Shooting mode, press [m] →6→ Wind Cut → an option. Chapter 3 Playback/Editing Learn about how to play back and edit photos and videos. Refer to chapter 6 for editing files on a PC. 108 Playback/Editing Learn how to view photo and video thumbnails and how to protect or delete files. If you perform no operations for a while, information and icons on the screen disappear. When you operate the camera again, they will reappear. Viewing photos 1 Press [y]. • The most recent file you captured will be displayed. 2 Press [C/F] to scroll through files. • You can also drag the image left or right to move to another file. You may not be able to edit or play back files that were captured with other cameras, due to unsupported sizes or codecs. Use a computer or another device to edit or play back these files. Viewing image thumbnails In order to search for photos and videos you want, convert to the thumbnail view. The thumbnail view displays multiple images at a time so that you can easily look through items you wish to find. You can also classify and display files by category, such as date or file type. Scroll the jog dial to the left to select the thumbnail view mode. (Scroll the jog dial to the right to return to the previous mode.) Searching and managing files 109 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Viewing files by category 1 In the thumbnail view, press [m] →z→ Filter → a category. • You can also touch FILTER to select a category. * Default Option Description All* View files normally. Date View files by the date they were saved. Type View files by the file type. Location View files by the place they were saved. (Only the photos captured with an optional GPS module have the location information.) 2 Select a list to open it. 3 Select a file to view it. 4 Touch to return to the previous view. Viewing files as a folder Continuous and burst shots appear as a folder. Selecting a folder will play back all photos automatically. Deleting a folder will delete all photos in the folder. 1 In Playback mode, press [C/F] or drag the image left or right to move to a desired folder. • The camera will automatically play back photos in the folder. 2 Scroll the jog dial to the right to open the folder. • You can also touch the folder on the screen to open the folder. 3 Press [C/F] or drag the image left or right to move to another file. 4 Scroll the jog dial to the left to return to Playback mode. 110 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Protecting files Protect your files from accidental deletion. 1 In Playback mode, press [m] →z→ Protect → Select. 2 Press [C/F] to select a file, and then press [o]. 3 Press [f]. You cannot delete or rotate a protected file. Lock/Unlock all files Lock or unlock all files. 1 In Playback mode, press [m] →z→ Protect → All. 2 Select an option. Option Description Lock Lock all files. Unlock Unlock all files. Cancel Return to the previous menu. 111 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Deleting files Delete files in Playback mode and secure more space on your memory card. Protected files are not deleted. Deleting a single file You can select a single file and delete it. 1 In Playback mode, select a file, and then press [n]. 2 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. Deleting multiple files You can select multiple files and delete them. 1 In Playback mode, press [m] →z→ Delete → Select. • Alternatively, in thumbnails view, press [n], and then select files to delete. 2 Select files you want to delete by pressing [C/F], and then press [o]. • Press [o] again to cancel your selection. 3 Press [n]. 4 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. 112 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Deleting all files You can delete all files on the memory card at once. 1 In Playback mode, press [m]. 2 Select z→ Delete → All. 3 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. 113 Playback/Editing Enlarging a photo You can enlarge photos when viewing them in Playback mode. You can also use the Trim function to extract the portion of the image displayed on the screen and save it as a new file. Magnified area Magnification (the maximum magnification may differ by resolution) Full Image Crop Scroll the jog dial to the right to enlarge a photo. (Scroll the jog dial to the left to reduce a photo.) To Do this Move magnified area Press [D/I/C/F]. Crop the enlarged image Press [f]. (saved as a new file) Return to the original image Press [o]. You can also pinch your fingers together or spread them apart on the screen to reduce or enlarge a photo. You can also double-tap an area to enlarge it quickly. Viewing a slide show You can view photos in a slide show, apply various effects to the slide show, and play background music. 1 In Playback mode, press [m]. 2 Select z→ Slide Show Options. 3 Select a slide show effect option. • Skip to step 4 to start a slide show with no effects. * Default Option Description Play Mode Set whether or not to repeat the slide show. (One Play*, Repeat) Interval Set the interval between photos. (1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, 10 sec) Music Set background audio. Effect • Set a scene change effect between photos. • Select Off to cancel effects. Viewing photos 114 Playback/Editing > Viewing photos 4 Press [m]. 5 Select Start Slide Show. 6 View the slide show. • Press [o] to pause. • Press [o] again to resume. • Press [m] to stop the slide show and return to Playback mode. • Press [D/I] to adjust the volume level. Auto rotating With Auto Rotate on, the camera automatically rotates photos you have captured vertically so they fit the screen horizontally. To set auto rotate options, In Playback mode, press [m] →z→ Auto Rotate → an option. Creating a print order (DPOF) DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) lets you set the number of copies to be printed. The camera saves the DPOF information in the MISC folder of your memory card. If you have set DPOF information for your images, you can take the memory card to a digital printing shop for printing. You cannot set the print order of RAW format files. Photos with dimensions that are wider than the paper may be cut off on the left and right edges. Ensure that your photo dimensions are compatible with the paper you select. 1 In Playback mode, select a photo, and then press [m]. 2 Select z→ DPOF. 3 Press [D/I] to set the number of copies. • To select another photo, press [C/F]. 4 Press [o] to save. 115 Playback/Editing In Playback mode, you can play a video, capture an image from a video, or crop a video to save as another file. Stop Capture Video viewing controls Icon/Button Description / /[C] View previous file/Scan backward. (Each time you touch the icon or press the button while playing the video, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) / /[o] Pause or resume playback. / /[F] View next file/Scan forward. (Each time you touch the icon or press the button while playing the video, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) /[D/I] Adjust the volume or mute the sound. Trimming a video during playback 1 In Playback mode, scroll to a video, and then touch . 2 Press [o] or touch to start playing the video. 3 Press [o] or touch at the point where you want the trimming to begin. 4 Press [f] or touch Start Point. 5 Press [o] or touch to resume playing the video. 6 Press [o] or touch at the point where you want the trimming to end. Playing videos 116 Playback/Editing > Playing videos 7 Press [f] or touch End Point. 8 Press [f] or touch Trim to trim a video. • You can adjust the scene to be cropped by dragging the handles that appear on the progress bar. 9 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. • You cannot trim a video recorded in 3D mode. • The original video should be at least 10 seconds long. • The camera will save the edited video as a new file and leave the original video intact. Capturing an image during playback 1 While viewing a video, press [o] or touch at the point where you want to capture an image. 2 Press [f] or touch Capture. • You cannot capture an image from a video recorded in 3D mode. • The resolution of the captured image will be the same as the original video. • The captured image is saved as a new file. 117 Playback/Editing Edited photos are saved as new files under different file names. Photos captured in some modes cannot be edited with the Image Edit function. To edit images, In Playback mode, scroll to a photo, and then touch ĺ an option. You can also edit images in Playback mode by selecting a photo, and then pressing [f] or [m] ĺ Edit Image. Some images may not be edited with the Image Edit function. In this case, use a supplied image editing software. The camera will save edited photos as new files. When you edit photos, the camera will automatically convert them to a lower resolution. Photos that you rotate or resize manually are not automatically converted to a lower resolution. You cannot edit photos while viewing files as a folder. Open the folder and select a photo to edit each photo. Cropping a photo 1 Touch ĺ . 2 Drag the corners of the box to adjust the size of the area. 3 Drag the box to move the location of the area. 4 Touch OK. 5 Touch to save. Editing photos 118 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Rotating a photo 1 Touch → . 2 Touch an option. Rotate : Right 90° 3 Touch OK. 4 Touch to save. • You can also rotate a photo in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting z→ Rotate → a desired option. • The camera will overwrite the original file. Resizing photos Change the size of a photo and save it as a new file. 1 Touch → . 2 Touch an option. Resize : 10.1M 3:2 3 Touch OK. 4 Touch to save. Available resize options differ depending on the original size of the photo. 119 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Adjusting your photos You can correct captured photos by adjusting the brightness, contrast, or saturation. 1 Touch . 2 Touch an adjusting option. Icon Description Original (Reset to the original image) Auto adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation RGB adjustment Color Temperature Exposure Hue 3 Press [C/F] to adjust the option. • You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the option. • If you selected , skip to step 4. 4 Touch OK. 5 Touch to save. 120 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Retouching faces 1 Touch ĺ . 2 Press [C/F] to adjust the option. You can also drag the slider or touch +/- to adjust the option. As the number increases, the skin tone becomes brighter and smoother. 3 Touch OK. To cancel correction, touch . 4 Touch to save. 121 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Applying Smart Filter effects Apply special effects to your photos. 1 Touch , and then touch an option. Smart Filter : Vignetting Option Description Original No effect Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong vignette effect of Lomo cameras. Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in miniature. Colored Pencil Apply a colored pencil painting effect. Watercolor Apply a watercolor painting effect. Wash drawing Apply a washed-out effect. Option Description Oil Sketch Apply an oil sketching effect. Ink Sketch Apply an ink sketching effect. Acryl Apply an acryl painting effect. Negative Apply a negative film effect. Red Desaturate all colors but red. Green Desaturate all colors but green. Blue Desaturate all colors but blue. Yellow Desaturate all colors but yellow. 2 Touch OK. 3 Touch to save. Chapter 4 Wireless network Learn how to connect to wireless local area networks (WLANs) and use functions. 123 Wireless network Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Learn to connect via an access point (AP) when you are in a range of a WLAN. You can also configure network settings. Connecting to a WLAN 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select , , , or . 3 Press [m], and then select Wi-Fi Setting. • In some modes, follow the on-screen instructions until the Wi-Fi Setting screen appears. • The camera automatically searches for available AP devices. 4 Select an AP. Back Refresh Samsung1 Samsung2 Samsung3 Samsung4 • Select Refresh to refresh connectable APs. • Select Add wireless network to add an AP manually. Your AP name must be in English to add the AP manually. Icon/Option Description Ad hoc AP Secured AP WPS AP Signal strength Press [F] or touch to open network setting options. • When you select a secured AP, a pop-up window appears. Enter the required passwords to connect to the WLAN. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127) • When a login page appears, refer to "Using the login browser". (p. 125) • When you select an unsecured AP, the camera will connect to the WLAN. • If you select a WPS profile supported AP, select → WPS PIN connection, and then enter a PIN on the AP device. You can also connect to a WPS profile supported AP by selecting → WPS button connection on the camera, and then pushing the WPS button on the AP device. • The same AP may be listed twice, with different frequencies, because your camera supports the dual band function. 124 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Setting network options 1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press [F] or touch . 2 Select each option, and then enter the required information. Option Description Network Password Enter the network password. IP Setting Set the IP address automatically or manually. Manually setting the IP address 1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press [F] or touch . 2 Select IP Setting → Manual. 3 Select each option, and then enter the required information. Option Description IP Enter the static IP address. Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask. Gateway Enter the gateway. DNS Server Enter the DNS address. 125 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Using the login browser You can enter your login information via the login browser when connecting to some APs, sharing sites, or cloud servers. Icon Description Close the login browser. Move to the previous page. Move to the next page. Stop loading the page. Reload the page. • You may not be able to select some items depending on the page you connected to. This does not indicate a malfunction. • The login browser may not close automatically after you log into some pages. If this occurs, close the login browser by touching , and then proceed with the desired operation. • It may take longer to load the login page due to the page size or network speed. If this occurs, wait until the login information input window appears. 126 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Network connection tips • You must insert a memory card to use the Wi-Fi features. • The quality of the network connection will be determined by the AP. • The further the distance between your camera and the AP, the longer it will take to connect to the network. • If a nearby device is using the same radio frequency signal as your camera, it may interrupt your connection. • If your AP name is not in English, the camera may not be able to locate the device or the name may appear incorrectly. • For network settings or a password, contact your network administrator or network service provider. • If a WLAN requires authentication from the service provider, you may not be able to connect to it. To connect the WLAN, contact your network service provider. • Depending on the encryption type, the number of digits in the password may differ. • A WLAN connection may not be possible in all surroundings. • The camera may display a WLAN enabled printer on the AP List. You cannot connect to a network via a printer. • You cannot connect your camera to a network and a TV simultaneously. • Connecting to a network may incur additional charges. Costs will vary based on the conditions of your contract. • If you cannot connect to a WLAN, try another AP from the available AP list. • A login page may appear when you select free WLANs provided by some network service providers. Enter your ID and password to connect to the WLAN. For information about registering or the service, contact the network service providers. • Be cautious when you enter personal information for an AP connection. Do not enter any payment or credit card information on your camera. The manufacturer is not liable for any problem caused by entering such information. • Available network connections may differ by country. • The WLAN feature of your camera must comply with radio transmission laws in your region. To ensure compliance, use the WLAN feature only in the country where you purchased the camera. • The process for adjusting network settings may differ, depending on network conditions. • Do not access a network that you are not authorized to use. • Before you connect to a network, ensure your battery is fully charged. • You cannot upload or send files captured in some modes. • Files that you transfer to another device may not be supported by the device. In this case, use a computer to play back the files. 127 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Entering text Learn how to enter text. The icons in the table let you move the cursor, change the case, etc. Touch a key to enter it. Icon Description Move the cursor. Stop entering text and return to the previous page. Change case. Switch between Symbol/Number mode and the normal mode. Change the input language. Enter a space. Save the displayed text. Delete the last letter. • You can use only the English alphabets in some modes, regardless of the display language. • You can enter up to 64 characters. • The screen may differ depending on the input mode. • Touch and hold a key to enter the character at the upper right corner of the key. 128 Wireless network Saving files to a smart phone automatically The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the AutoShare feature via a WLAN. When you capture a photo with your camera, the photo is saved to the smart phone automatically. • The AutoShare feature is supported by Galaxy series smart phones or Galaxy Tab models with the Android 2.3 OS or higher or iOS devices with the iOS 6.0 or higher. Before using this feature, check the device’s firmware and update it if needed. • You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. • To install and launch Samsung SMART CAMERA App on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the NFC feature and place the smart phone near an NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. This feature is supported by smart phones running Android OS 2.3 or higher. This feature is not available for iOS devices. • You must insert a memory card to use this feature. • If you set this function, the setting is maintained even when you change the Shooting mode. • This feature may not be supported in some modes or may not be available with some shooting options. 1 On the camera, in Shooting mode, press [m]. 2 On the camera, select 1→ AutoShare → On. • If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. 3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. • To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 6. 4 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. • The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. 5 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. • If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. • An icon that shows the connection status ( ) will appear on the camera’s screen. 6 On the camera, capture a photo. • The captured photo is saved to the camera, and then transferred to the smart phone. • If you recorded a video, it is saved only to the camera. 129 Wireless network The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the MobileLink feature via a WLAN. You can easily send photos or videos to your smart phone. • The MobileLink feature is supported by Galaxy series smart phones or Galaxy Tab models with the Android 2.3 OS or higher or iOS devices with the iOS 6.0 or higher. Before using this feature, check the device’s firmware and update it if needed. • You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. • To install and launch Samsung SMART CAMERA App on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the NFC feature and place the smart phone near an NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. This feature is supported by smart phones running Android OS 2.3 or higher. This feature is not available for iOS devices. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • If you select files from the smart phone, you can view up to 1,000 recent files and send up to 150 files at a time. If you select files from the camera, you can view files that were selected from the camera. The maximum number of files that can be sent varies depending on the storage space of the smart phone. • When you send Full HD videos using MobileLink feature, you may not be able to play back files on some devices. • When using this feature on an iOS device, the device may lose its Wi-Fi connection. • You cannot send RAW files. 1 On the camera, rotate the mode dial to B. 2 On the camera, select . • If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. 3 On the camera, select a sending option. • If you select Select Files from Smartphone, you can use your smart phone to view and share files stored on the camera. • If you select Select Files from Camera, you can select files to send from the camera. 4 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. • To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 7. Sending photos or videos to a smart phone 130 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos to a smart phone 5 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. • The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. 6 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. • If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. 7 On the smart phone or camera, select files to transfer from the camera. 8 On the smart phone, touch the copy button or on the camera, select Send. • The camera will send the files. 131 Wireless network The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the Remote Viewfinder feature via a WLAN. Use the smart phone as a remote shutter release with the Remote Viewfinder feature. The captured photo will display on the smart phone. • The Remote Viewfinder feature is supported by Galaxy series smart phones or Galaxy Tab models with the Android 2.3 OS or higher or iOS devices with the iOS 6.0 or higher. Before using this feature, check the device’s firmware and update it if needed. • You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. • To install and launch Samsung SMART CAMERA App on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the NFC feature and place the smart phone near an NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. This feature is supported by smart phones running Android OS 2.3 or higher. This feature is not available for iOS devices. • This function is not available in 3D mode. 1 On the camera, rotate the mode dial to B. 2 On the camera, select . • If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. 3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. • To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 30) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 6. 4 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. • The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release 132 Wireless network > Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release 5 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. • If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. 6 On the smart phone, set the following shooting options. Icon Description Flash option Timer option Photo size Saving location • While using this feature, some buttons are not available on your camera. • The zoom button and the shutter button on your smart phone will not function when using this feature. • Remote Viewfinder mode supports the and photo sizes only. 7 On the smart phone, touch and hold to focus. • The focus is automatically set to Multi AF. 8 Release to capture the photo. • Photos saved to the smart phone will be resized to 1616X1080 when shooting in and to 1920X1080 when shooting in resolution. • When you use this feature, the ideal distance between the camera and the smart phone may vary, depending on your surroundings. • The smart phone must be within 7 m of the camera to use this feature. • It will take some time to capture the photo after you release on the smart phone. • The Remote Viewfinder function will deactivate when: - there is an incoming call on the smart phone - either the camera or the smart phone turns off - the memory is full - device loses its connection to the WLAN - the Wi-Fi connection is poor or unstable - you perform no operations for approximately 5 minutes while connected 133 Wireless network Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos You can send photos or videos that you captured with the camera to a PC wirelessly. Installing the program for Auto Backup on your PC 1 Install i-Launcher on the PC. (p. 163) 2 Connect the camera to the PC with the USB cable. 3 When the Auto Backup program icon appears, click it. The Auto Backup program is installed on the PC and the information about the PC will be stored to the camera. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation. You can also save the information about the PC to the camera by connecting the PC and the camera via Wi-Fi. 4 Remove the USB cable. Before installing the program, ensure that the PC is connected to a network. If no internet connection is available, you must install the program from the provided CD. Sending photos or videos to a PC 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. You must configure the backup PC information to use the Auto Backup feature. For more details, refer to "Installing the program for Auto Backup on your PC". (p. 133) If the Auto Backup program is installed on your PC, save the PC information via USB cable or Wi-Fi connection. The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) 134 Wireless network > Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos 3 Select a backup PC. • If you have performed a backup before, move to step 4. 4 Select OK. • To cancel sending, select Cancel. • You cannot select individual files to backup. This function backs up only new files on the camera. • The backup's progress will be shown on the PC monitor. • When the transfer is completed, the camera will turn off automatically in approximately 30 seconds. Select Cancel to return to the previous screen and prevent the camera from turning off automatically. • To turn off your PC automatically after the transfer is complete, select Shut down PC after backup. • To change the backup PC, select . • When you connect the camera to the WLAN, select the AP that is connected to the PC. • The camera will search for available access points even if you are connecting to the same access point again. • If you turn off the camera or remove the battery while sending files, the file transfer will be interrupted. • While you are using this feature, the shutter control is disabled on your camera. • You can connect only one camera to the PC at a time for sending files. • The backup may be canceled due to network conditions. • Photos or videos can be sent to a PC one time only. Files cannot be sent again even if you reconnect your camera to another PC. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • You must turn off Windows Firewall and any other firewalls before using this feature. • You can send up to 1,000 recent files. • On the PC software, the server name must be entered in the Latin alphabet and can contain no more than 48 characters. • When multiple file types are created at once, only the image files (JPG) will be sent to the PC with this feature. 135 Wireless network 5 Select the Name box, enter your name, and then touch . Sender Setting Name Save Email Reset 6 Select the Email box, enter your email address, and then touch . 7 Select Save to save your changes. • To delete your information, select Reset. You can change settings in the email menu and send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. Changing email settings In the email menu, you can change settings for storing your information. You can also set or change the email password. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127) Storing your information 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) 3 Press [m]. 4 Select Sender Setting. Sending photos or videos via email 136 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email Setting an email password 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) 3 Press [m]. 4 Select Setting Password → On. • To deactivate the password, select Off. 5 When the pop-up appears, select OK. 6 Enter a 4-digit password. 7 Enter the password again. 8 When the pop-up appears, select OK. If you lost your password, you can reset it by selecting RESET on the password setting screen. When you reset the information, the previously saved user’s setting information, email address, and recently sent email list will be deleted. 137 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email Changing the email password 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) 3 Press [m]. 4 Select Change Password. 5 Enter your current 4-digit password. 6 Enter a new 4-digit password. 7 Enter the new password again. 8 When the pop-up appears, select OK. Sending photos or videos via email You can send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127) 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) 3 Select the Sender box, enter your email address, and then touch . • If you have previously saved your information, it will be inserted automatically. (p. 135) • To use an address from the list of previous senders, select → an address. 138 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos via email 4 Select the Receiver box, enter an email address, and then touch . • To use an address from the list of previous recipients, select → an address. • Select to add additional recipients. You can input up to 30 recipients. • Select to delete an address from the list. 5 Select Next. 6 Select files to send. • You can select up to 20 files. The total size must be 7 MB or less. 7 Select Next. 8 Select the comment box, enter your comments, and then touch . 9 Select Send. • The camera will send the email. • Even if a photo appears to have transferred successfully, errors with the recipient’s email account may cause the photo to be rejected or recognized as spam. • You may not be able to send an email if no network connection is available or if your email account settings are incorrect. • You cannot send an email if the file size exceeds the limit. The maximum photo resolution you can send is 2M and the longest video you can upload is a video recorded using . If the selected photo resolution is higher than 2M, it will be automatically resized to a lower resolution. • If you cannot send an email because of firewall or user authentication settings, contact your network administrator or network service provider. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • You can also send an email in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) → Email. 139 Wireless network Upload your photos or videos to file sharing websites. Available websites will be displayed on your camera. To upload files to some websites, you must visit the website and register before connecting your camera. Accessing a website 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . 3 Select a website. • If the pop-up message that prompts you to create an account appears, select OK. • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) 4 Enter your ID and password to log in. • For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127) • If you connected to SkyDrive, refer to "Using the login browser". (p. 125) • To select an ID from the list, select → an ID. • If you have previously logged in to the website, you may be logged in automatically. You must have an existing account on the file sharing website to use this feature. Using photo or video sharing websites 140 Wireless network > Using photo or video sharing websites Uploading photos or videos 1 Access the website with your camera. 2 Select files to upload. • You can select up to 20 files. The total size must be 10 MB or less. (On some websites, the total size or number of files may vary.) 3 Select Upload. • On some websites, you can enter your comments by selecting the comment box. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127) • You can set an upload folder for Facebook by pressing [m], and then selecting Upload Folder (Facebook) on the website's list screen. • You cannot upload files if the file size exceeds the limit. The maximum photo resolution you can upload is 2M, and the longest video you can upload is a video recorded using . If the selected photo resolution is higher than 2M, it will be automatically resized to a lower resolution. (On some websites, the maximum photo resolution may vary.) • The method of uploading photos or videos may differ depending on the selected website. • If you cannot access a website because of firewall or user authentication settings, contact your network administrator or network service provider. • Uploaded photos or videos may be automatically titled with the date they were captured. • The speed of your internet connection may affect how quickly photos upload or web pages open. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • You can also upload photos or videos to file sharing websites in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) → a desired website. • You cannot upload videos to some websites. • When you upload photos to SkyDrive, they will be resized to 2M while maintaining their aspect ratios. 141 Wireless network Using AllShare Play to send files You can upload files from your camera to AllShare Play online storage or view files on an AllShare Play device connected to the same AP. Uploading photos to online storage 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select → Web storage. • If the guide message appears, select OK. • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) • To change the size for uploaded photos, press [m], and then select Upload Image Size. • If you have registered more than one web storage, you can select from the list by pressing [m], and then selecting Change Web storage. 3 Enter your ID and password, and then select Login → OK. • For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 127) • To select an ID from the list, select → an ID. • If you have previously logged in to the website, you may be logged in automatically. To use this feature, you must create an AllShare Play account and an account with an affiliated online storage service using your PC. After finishing creating accounts, add your online storage account to AllShare Play. 4 Select files you want to upload, and then select Upload. • If you have registered more than one web storage, select a web storage first. • You cannot upload video files to AllShare Play online storage. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • You can upload up to 20 files. • You can also upload photos in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) → AllShare Play. 142 Wireless network > Using AllShare Play to send files Viewing photos or videos on devices that support AllShare Play 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select ĺNearby devices. If the guide message appears, select Yes. The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 123) You can set to allow only selected devices or all devices to connect by pressing [m], and then selecting DLNA Access Control on the screen. A sharing file list is created. Wait until other devices can find your camera. 3 Connect the AllShare Play device to a network, and then turn on the AllShare Play feature. Refer to your device's user manual for more information. 4 On the camera, allow the AllShare Play device to connect to your camera. 5 On the AllShare Play device, select a camera to connect. 6 On the AllShare Play device, browse the shared photos or videos. For information about searching for the camera and browsing the photos or videos on the AllShare Play device, refer to the device's user manual. Videos may not play smoothly depending on the type of AllShare Play device or the network condition. For smooth playback, use a 5 GHz dual-band AP device. AP S A camera is connected to a TV that supports AllShare Play via WLAN. 143 Wireless network > Using AllShare Play to send files • You can share up to 1,000 recent files. • On an AllShare Play device, you can view only photos or videos captured with your camera. • The range of the wireless connection between your camera and an AllShare Play device may vary depending on the specifications of the AP. • If the camera is connected to 2 AllShare Play devices, playback may be slower. • Photos or videos will be shared in their original sizes. • You can use this feature only with devices that support AllShare Play. • Shared photos or videos will not be stored on the AllShare Play device, but they can be stored in the camera to meet the device's specifications. • Transferring photos or videos to the AllShare Play device may take some time depending on the network connection, the number of files to be shared, or the sizes of the files. • If you power off the camera abnormally while viewing photos or videos on an AllShare Play device (for example, by removing the battery), the device considers the camera to still be connected. • The order of photos or videos on the camera may be different than on the AllShare Play device. • Depending on the number of photos or videos you want to share, it may take some time to load your photos or videos and complete the initial set-up process. • While viewing photos or videos on the AllShare Play device, continuously using the device's remote or performing additional operations on the device may prevent this feature from working properly. • If you reorder or sort files on the camera while viewing them on an AllShare Play device, you must repeat the initial set-up process to update the list of files on the device. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • We recommend you use a network cable to connect your AllShare Play device to your AP. This will minimize any video ‘Stuttering’ you may experience when streaming content. • To view files on an AllShare Play device using the Nearby devices feature, enable multicast mode on your AP. • 1920X1080 (60 fps) videos can be played only on full HDTVs capable of playback at 60 fps. • You can view 3D files only on 3D-compatible TVs or monitors. 144 Wireless network Sending photos using Wi-Fi Direct When the camera connects via a WLAN to a device that supports the Wi-Fi Direct function, you can send photos to the device. This feature may not be supported on some devices. 1 On the device, turn on the Wi-Fi Direct option. 2 On the camera, in Playback mode, scroll to a photo. 3 Press [m], and then select Share(Wi-Fi) → Wi-Fi Direct. • When in the single image view, you can send only one photo at a time. • When in thumbnails view, you can select multiple photos. Select Upload when you are finished selecting photos. 4 Select the device from the camera’s list of Wi-Fi Direct devices. • Ensure that the device's Wi-Fi Direct option is turned on. • You can also select your camera from the device's list of Wi-Fi Direct devices. 5 On the device, allow the camera to connect to the device. • The photo will be sent to the device. • You can send up to 20 files at a time. • When there are no photos in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • If you cannot connect to a Wi-Fi Direct device, update the device with the latest firmware. This feature may not be supported on some devices. Chapter 5 Camera settings menu Learn about the user settings and general settings menu. You can adjust the settings to better suit your needs and preferences. 146 Camera settings menu You can set the user environment with these settings. To set user options, In Shooting mode, press [m] → 5 → an option. Available items and the order of them may differ depending on shooting conditions. ISO Customizing ISO Step You can set the size for the ISO sensitivity by either 1/3 or 1 step. Auto ISO Range You can set the maximum ISO value under which each EV step is chosen when you set the ISO to Auto. * Default Option Value 1/3 Step ISO 125, ISO 160, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO 500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000, ISO 2500, ISO 3200* 1 Step ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200* Noise Reduction Use the Noise Reduction to reduce the visual noise in photos. * Default Option Description High ISO NR This function reduces noise that may occur when you set a high ISO sensitivity. (Off, High, Normal*, Low) Long Term NR This function reduces noise when you set the camera for a long exposure. (Off, On*) User settings 147 Camera settings menu > User settings Bracket Set You can set up the options for AE Bracket, WB Bracket, and P Wiz Bracket. Option Description AE Bracket Set Set the exposure interval. (-/+0.3 EV*, -/+0.7 EV, -/+1 EV, -/+1.3 EV, -/+1.7 EV, -/+2 EV, -/+2.3 EV, -/+2.7 EV, -/+3 EV) WB Bracket Set Adjust the White Balance interval range of the 3 bracketed photos. (AB-/+3*, AB-/+2, AB-/+1, MG-/+3, MG-/+2, MG-/+1) For example, AB-/+3 adjusts the Amber value plus or minus three steps. MG-/+3 adjusts the Magenta value the same amount. P Wiz Bracket Set Select 3 Picture Wizard settings the camera uses to capture the 3 bracketed photos. DMF (Direct Manual Focus) You can adjust the focus manually by rotating the focus ring after achieving the focus by half-pressing [Shutter]. This feature may not be available with some lenses. 148 Camera settings menu > User settings Color space The color space option allows you to select methods for representing colors. Digital imaging devices such as digital cameras, monitors, and printers have their own methods for representing colors, which are called color spaces. Option Description sRGB sRGB (Standard RGB) is an international specification to define the color space created by IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). It is widely used for creating colors on PC monitors and is also the standard color space for Exif. sRGB is recommended for regular images and images you intend to publish on the Internet. Adobe RGB Adobe RGB is used for commercial printing and has a larger color range than sRGB. Its wider range of colors helps you to easily edit photos on a computer. Note that individual programs are generally compatible with a limited number of color spaces. Adobe RGB sRGB When the color space is set to Adobe RGB, photos will be saved as “_SAMXXXX.JPG”. 149 Camera settings menu > User settings Distortion Correct You can correct lens distortion that might occur from lenses. This feature may not be available with some lenses. Touch Operation Set to enable touch operation in Shooting mode. Option Description On Use touch operations in Shooting mode. Off Do not use touch operations in Shooting mode. (You can use touch operations in other situations.) iFn Customizing You can select options that can be adjusted when you press [i-Function] on an i-Function lens. Option Description Aperture Set to adjust the aperture value. Shutter Speed Set to adjust the shutter speed. EV Set to adjust the exposure value. ISO Set to adjust ISO sensitivity. White Balance Set to adjust the White Balance. Z Set to adjust the zoom ratio. User Display You can add or remove shooting information from the display. 1 2 3 London No. Description 1 Date & Time Set to display the date and time. 2 Icons Set to display icons on the right in Shooting mode. 150 Camera settings menu > User settings No. Description 3 Histogram Set the histogram on the display on or off. About histogram A histogram is a graph that shows the brightness distribution of a photo. A histogram inclined to the left indicates a dark photo. A histogram inclined to the right indicates a bright photo. The height of the graph is related to color information. The graph gets higher if a specific color is more common. Insufficient exposure Balanced exposure Excessive exposure Key Mapping You can change the function assigned to the Custom button or DIRECT LINK button. * Default Button Function Custom Set a function of the Custom button. • Optical Preview*: Execute the Depth of Field Preview function for the current aperture value. (p. 24) • One Touch WB (White Balance): Execute the Custom White Balance function. • One Touch RAW +: Save a file in the RAW+JPEG format. To save a file in JPEG format, press the button again. • Reset: Reset some settings. • AEL: Execute the auto exposure lock function. • AEL Hold: Keep executing the auto exposure lock function after shooting. DIRECT LINK Set a function of the DIRECT LINK button. (AutoShare*, MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Auto Backup, Email, SNS & Cloud, AllShare Play) 151 Camera settings menu > User settings Grid Line Select a guide to help you compose a scene. (Off*, 3 X 3, 2 X 2, Cross, Diagonal) AF Lamp When shooting in dark places, turn the AF lamp on in order to have a better auto focus. The Auto Focus functions more accurately in dark places when the AF lamp is on. 152 Camera settings menu Learn to configure your camera's settings. To set Setting options, In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] →q→ an option. * Default Item Description Sound • System Volume: Set the sound volume or turn all sound off entirely. (Off, Low, Medium*, High) Even if the system volume is turned off, the camera emits the sound while playing a video or a slide show. • AF Sound: Set the sound the camera emits when you half-press the shutter button on or off. (Off, On*) • Button Sound: Set the sound the camera emits when you press the buttons or touch the screen on or off. (Off, On*) Quick View Set the Quick View time length – the amount of time the camera displays a photo immediately after you capture it. (Off, 1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, Hold) * Default Item Description Display Adjust Adjust the display brightness, auto brightness setting, display color, or level gauge. • Display Brightness: You can adjust the display brightness manually. • Auto Brightness: Turn auto brightness on or off. (Off, On*) • Display Color: You can adjust the display color manually. • Horizontal Calibration: Calibrate the level gauge. If the level gauge is not level, position the camera on the level surface, and then follow the on-screen instructions. • You cannot access the Horizontal Calibration option in Playback mode. • You cannot calibrate the level gauge in portrait orientation. Auto Display Off Set the display off time. The display turns off if you do not use the camera for the time you set. (Off, 30 sec*, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min) Setting 153 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description Power Save Set power shut off time. The camera shuts off if you do not use it for the time you set. (30 sec, 1 min*, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min) • The camera retains the power-off time setting even if you replace the battery. • Power Save may not work if the camera is connected to a computer or a TV or playing a slide show or a movie. Help Guide Display • Mode Help Guide: Set to display help text about the selected mode when changing shooting modes. (Off, On*) • Function Help Guide: Set to display help text about menus and functions. (Off, On*) Press [n] to hide the help text. Language Set a language the camera shows on the display. Date & Time Set date, time, date format, time zone and whether to imprint the date on photos. (Time Zone, Date & Time, Date Type, Time Type, Imprint) • The date appears on the lower right side of the photo. • When you print a photo, some printers may not print the date appropriately. * Default Item Description Video Out Set the video signal output appropriate for your country when connecting the camera to an external video device such as a monitor or HDTV. • NTSC: USA, Canada, Japan, Korea, Taiwan, Mexico, etc • PAL (Supports only PAL B, D, G, H, or I): Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, England, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Singapore, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, Norway, etc Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) When you connect the camera to an HDTV that supports Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), you can control the play function of the camera with the TV remote control. • Off: You cannot control the play function of camera with the TV remote control. • On*: You can control the play function of camera with the TV remote control. HDMI Output When you connect the camera to an HDTV with an HDMI cable, you can change the resolution of the image. • NTSC: Auto*, 1080p, 720p, 480p, 576p (activates only when PAL is selected) If the connected HDTV does not support the resolution you select, the camera sets the resolution one level lower. 154 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description 3D HDMI Output Select an option for playing files on a 3D TV. • Side by Side*: Displays two images next to each other. • Frame Packing: Displays the images for the left and right eye alternately in frames. File Name Set the method of creating file names. • Standard*: SAM_XXXX.JPG (sRGB)/ _SAMXXXX.JPG (Adobe RGB) • Date: - sRGB files - MMDDXXXX.JPG. For example, for a photo captured on Jan. 01, the file name would be 0101XXXX.jpg. - Adobe RGB files - _MDDXXXX.JPG for the months Jan through Sept. For the months Oct through Dec, the month number is replaced by the letters A (Oct.), B (Nov.) and C (Dec.). For example, for a photo captured on Feb. 03, the file name would be _203XXXX.jpg. For a photo captured on Oct. 05, the file name would be _A05XXXX.jpg. * Default Item Description File Number Set the method of numbering files and folders. • Reset: After using the reset function, the next file name is started at 0001. • Series*: New file numbers continue the existing number sequence, even if you have installed a new memory card, formatted the card, or deleted all photos. • The first folder name is 100PHOTO, if you have selected the sRGB color space and Standard file naming, the first file name is SAM_0001. • File name numbers are increased by 1 from SAM_0001 to SAM_9999. • Folder numbers are increased by 1 from 100PHOTO to 999PHOTO. • The maximum number of files that can be saved in one folder is 9,999. • File numbers are assigned according to DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) specifications. • If you change a file name (for example, on a computer), the camera will not be able to play the file. Folder Type Set the type of folder. • Standard*: XXXPHOTO • Date: XXX_MMDD 155 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description Format Format the memory card. Formatting deletes all existing files including protected files. (Yes, No) Errors can occur if you use a memory card formatted by another brand of camera, a memory card reader, or a computer. Please format memory cards in the camera before using them to capture photos. Device Information View the firmware version of the body and the lens, Mac address, and network certification number, or update the firmware. • Firmware Update: Update the firmware of the camera body or lens. (Body Firmware, Lens Firmware) • You can download firmware upgrades from www.samsung.com. • You cannot run a firmware upgrade without a fully charged battery. Recharge the battery fully before running a firmware upgrade. • If you update the firmware, user settings and values will be reset. (Date, time, language, and video out will not change.) • Do not turn the camera off while the update is in progress. * Default Item Description Dual-band Mobile AP Set a frequency for using the camera as an AP for the AutoShare, MobileLink, or Remote Viewfinder feature. (5 GHz, 2.4 GHz*) If you use the camera in a country other than the one where it was purchased, the 5 GHz Wi-Fi feature may not function properly, due to differences in radio frequencies. In this case, use the 2.4 GHz Wi-Fi feature instead. GPS • Geotagging: Set to capture photos with location information using the Global Positioning System (GPS). Location information is added to the Exif data associated with the photo. (Off, On*) • GPS Valid Time Settings: Set the time to use the last location information when the camera fails to receive GPS signals. If the camera fails to receive GPS signals after the specified time, the location information will not be recorded onto the photos. (15 sec*, 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 10 min, 30 min) • Location Display: Set to display the location information on the screen in Shooting mode. The location information will appear in Korean only when you are in Korea and the display language is set to Korean. When another language is set, the location information will appear in English. (Off, On*) • GPS Reset: Set to search for GPS satellites closest to your current position. (Yes, No) To use the GPS function, you must purchase an optional GPS device. 156 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description Sensor Cleaning • Sensor Cleaning: Remove dust from the sensor. • Start-Up Action: When on, the camera performs sensor cleaning each time you turn it on. (Off*, On) As this product uses interchangeable lenses, the sensor can get dust on it when you change lenses. This can lead to dust particles appearing in the photos you capture. It is recommended not to change lenses when you are in a particularly dusty area. Also, make sure to attach the lens cap to the lens when not using it. Reset Reset the setup menu and shooting options to the factory defaults. (Date, time, language, and video output settings do not change.) (Yes, No) Open Source Licenses View open source licenses. Chapter 6 Connecting to external devices Make full use of the camera by connecting it to external devices such as a computer, HDTV or 3D TV. 158 Connecting to external devices Play back photos or videos by connecting your camera to an HDTV (3D TV) using an optional HDMI cable. Viewing files on an HDTV 1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] →q→ HDMI Output → an option. (p. 153) 2 Turn off your camera and HDTV. 3 Connect your camera to your HDTV with the optional HDMI cable. 4 Turn on your HDTV, and then select the HDMI video source. 5 Turn on the camera. • The camera automatically enters into Playback mode when you connect it to an HDTV. 6 View photos or play videos using the camera buttons. • When using the HDMI cable, you can connect the camera to an HDTV using the Anynet+(CEC) method. • The Anynet+(CEC) functions allow you to control connected devices using the TV remote control. • If the HDTV supports Anynet+(CEC), the TV turns on automatically when used in conjunction with the camera. This feature may not be available on some HDTVs. • When connected to an HDTV by an HDMI cable, the camera cannot capture a photo or video. • When connected to an HDTV, some of the camera’s playback functions may not be available. • The length of time after which the camera and an HDTV are connected may vary depending on the memory card that you are using. As the main feature of a memory card is to increase the transfer speed, it is not necessarily true to say that a memory card with a faster transfer speed is also fast in using the HDMI function. • 1920X1080 (60 fps) videos can be played only on full HDTVs capable of playback at 60 fps. Viewing files on an HDTV or 3D TV 159 Connecting to external devices > Viewing files on an HDTV or 3D TV Viewing files on a 3D TV You can view photos or videos captured in 3D mode or with the 3D Panorama option in Smart mode on a 3D TV. 1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] →q→ HDMI Output → an option. (p. 153) 2 Select 3D HDMI Output → an option. (p. 154) 3 Turn off your camera and 3D TV. 4 Connect your camera to your 3D TV with the optional HDMI cable. 5 Turn on your 3D TV, and then select the HDMI video source. 6 Turn on your camera. • The camera automatically enters into Playback mode when you connect it to a 3D TV. 7 Move to a 3D file, and then press [I] to switch to 3D mode. • Press [I] again to switch to 2D Mode. 8 Turn on your TV's 3D function. • Refer to your TV's user manual for more details. 9 View 3D photos or play 3D videos using the camera buttons. • You cannot view an MPO file in 3D effect on TVs that do not support the file format. • Use proper 3D glasses when you view an MPO file or a 3D video file on a 3D TV. • Capturing photos in 3D Panorama mode may result in a less pronounced 3D effect than those captured in 3D mode with a 3D lens. Do not view the 3D photos or videos captured by your camera on a 3D TV or 3D monitor for an extended period of time. It may cause unpleasant symptoms, such as eyestrain, fatigue, nausea, and more. 160 Connecting to external devices Transfer files on a memory card to your computer by connecting the camera to the PC. Transferring files to your Windows OS computer Connecting the camera as a removable disk You can connect the camera to your computer as a removable disk. 1 Turn off the camera. 2 Connect the camera to your computer with the USB cable. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not work properly. 3 Turn on the camera. The computer recognizes the camera automatically. 4 On your computer, select My Computer ĺ Removable Disk ĺ DCIM ĺ 100PHOTO or 101_0101. 5 Select the files you want, and then drag or save them to your computer. If the Folder Type is set to Date, the folder name appears as “XXX_MMDD”. For example, if you capture a photo on January 1, the folder name will be "101_0101". Transferring files to your computer 161 Connecting to external devices > Transferring files to your computer Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP) With Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows 8, the methods for disconnecting the camera are similar. 1 Ensure that no data is being transferred between the camera and the computer. If the status lamp on your camera is blinking, it means the data transfer is in progress. Please wait until the status lamp stops blinking. 2 Click on the tool bar at the bottom right of your computer screen. 3 Click the pop-up message. 4 Click the message box indicating safely removed. 5 Remove the USB cable. Transferring files to your Mac OS Mac OS 10.5 or later is supported. 1 Turn off the camera. 2 Connect your camera to a Macintosh computer with the USB cable. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not work properly. 162 Connecting to external devices > Transferring files to your computer 3 Turn on the camera. • The computer recognizes the camera automatically and displays a removable disk icon. 4 Open the removable disk. 5 Transfer photos or videos to the Mac OS computer. 163 Connecting to external devices You can view and edit files using the provided programs. You can also send the files to a PC wirelessly. Installing programs from the provided CD 1 Insert the installation CD into your PC. 2 Select a language. 3 Select a program to install. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions. 5 Click Exit to complete the installation. Available programs when using i-Launcher Item Description Multimedia Viewer You can view files with Multimedia Viewer. Firmware Upgrade You can download the firmware of your camera. PC Auto Backup You can send photos or videos that you captured with the camera to a PC wirelessly. Using i-Launcher i-Launcher allows you to play back files with Multimedia Viewer and provides a link to download the PC Auto Backup program. Requirements for Windows OS Item Requirements CPU Intel® i5 3.3 GHz or higher/ AMD Phenom™ II x4 3.2 GHz or higher RAM Minimum 512 MB RAM (1 GB or more recommended) OS* Windows XP SP2, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8 Hard disk capacity 250 MB or more (1 GB and above recommended) Others • CD-ROM drive • 1024X768 pixels, 16-bit color display compatible monitor (1280X1024 pixels, 32-bit color display recommended) • USB 2.0 port • nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT or higher/ ATI X1600 series or higher • Microsoft DirectX 9.0c or higher * A 32-bit version of i-Launcher will be installed—even on 64-bit editions of Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows 8. Using programs on a PC 164 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC • The requirements are recommendation only. i-Launcher may not work properly even when the computer meets the requirements, depending on the condition of your computer. • If your computer does not meet the requirements, videos may not play correctly. The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage that results from using unqualified computers such as a computer you assembled yourself. Requirements for Mac OS Item Requirements OS Mac OS 10.5 or higher (except PowerPC) RAM Minimum 256 MB RAM (512 MB or more recommended) Hard disk capacity Minimum 110 MB Others USB 2.0 port, CD-ROM drive Opening i-Launcher On your computer, select Start → All Programs → Samsung → i-Launcher → Samsung i-Launcher. Or, click Applications → Samsung → i-Launcher on your Mac OS computer. 165 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC Using Multimedia Viewer Multimedia Viewer allows you to play back files. From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click Multimedia Viewer. • Multimedia Viewer supports the following formats: - Videos: MP4 (Video: H.264, Audio: AAC), WMV (WMV 7/8/9), AVI (MJPEG) - Photos: JPG, GIF, BMP, PNG, TIFF, MPO • Files that have been recorded with other manufacturers’ devices may not play back smoothly. Viewing photos 1 2 3 1011 456789 No. Description 1 File name 2 Enlarged area 3 Histogram 4 Open the selected file. 5 Histogram button 6 Rotate to the left/Rotate to the right. 7 Move to the previous file/Move to the next file. 8 Fit the photo to the screen. 9 View the photo in the original size. 10 Zoom in/Zoom out 11 Switches between 2D and 3D mode. 166 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC Viewing videos 1 2 8 4567 3 No. Description 1 File name 2 Adjust the volume. 3 Open the selected file. 4 Move to the next file. 5 Stop No. Description 6 Pause 7 Move to the previous file. 8 Progress bar Downloading the firmware From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click Firmware Upgrade. Downloading the PC Auto Backup program From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click PC Auto Backup. For information about installing the PC Auto Backup program, refer to page 133. 167 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC Installing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 1 Insert Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM into your PC. 2 Select a language. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions. Using Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Photos captured by a camera are often transformed to JPEG formats and stored in the memory according to the settings of the camera at the time of shooting. RAW files are not transformed to JPEG formats and are stored in the memory without any changes. With Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, you can calibrate exposures, White Balances, tones, contrasts, and colors of photos. You can also edit JPEG or TIFF files as well as RAW files. For more information, refer to the program guide. Chapter 7 Appendix Get information about error messages, camera maintenance, trouble shooting tips, specifications, and optional accessories. 169 Appendix When the following error messages appear, try these remedies. Error messages Suggested remedies Lens is locked The lens is locked. Rotate the lens counter-clockwise until you hear a click. (p. 45) Card Error • Turn off your camera, and then turn it on again. • Remove your memory card and insert it again. • Format your memory card. Low Battery Insert a charged battery or recharge the battery. No Image File Capture photos or insert a memory card that contains photos. File Error Delete the damaged file or contact a service center. Memory Full Delete unnecessary files or insert a new memory card. Card Locked You can lock SD, SDHC, SDXC, or UHS-1 card to prevent files from being deleted. Unlock the card when shooting. (p. 173) Error messages Suggested remedies Folder and file number are max values. Replace the card File names do not match the DCF standard. Transfer the files on the memory card to your computer and format the card. (p. 155) Error 00 Turn off your camera and remount the lens. If the message still appears, contact a service center. Error 01/02 Turn off your camera, remove the battery, and insert again. If the message still appears, contact a service center. Error messages 170 Appendix Cleaning the camera Camera lens and display Use a brush to remove dust and wipe the lens gently with a soft cloth. If any dust remains, apply lens cleaning liquid to a piece of cleaning paper and wipe gently. Image sensor Depending on different shooting conditions, dust may appear in photos because the image sensor is exposed to the external environment. This problem is normal, and the exposure to dust occurs in everyday use of the camera. You can remove dust from the sensor by operating the sensor cleaning function. (p. 156) If dust remains after cleaning the sensor, contact a service center. Do not insert the blower into the mounting opening of the lens. Camera body Wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. Never use benzene, thinners, or alcohol to clean the device. These solutions can damage the camera or cause it to malfunction. Maintaining the camera 171 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Using on beaches or shores • Protect your camera from sand and dirt when you use it on beaches or in other similar areas. • Your camera is not waterproof. Do not handle the battery, adapter, or memory card with wet hands. Operating the camera with wet hands may cause damage to your camera. Storing for extended period of time • When you store the camera for an extended period, place it in a sealed container with an absorbent material, such as silica gel. • Over time, unused batteries will discharge and must be recharged before use. • The present date and time can be initialized when the camera is turned on after the camera and battery have been separated for a prolonged period. Using or storing the camera Inappropriate places to use or store the camera • Avoid exposing the camera to very cold or very hot temperatures. • Avoid using your camera in areas with extremely high humidity, or where the humidity changes drastically. • Avoid exposing the camera to direct sunlight and storing it in hot, poorly ventilated areas, such as in a car during summer time. • Protect your camera and the display from impact, rough handling, and excessive vibration to avoid serious damage. • Avoid using or storing your camera in dusty, dirty, humid, or poorly ventilated areas to prevent damage to moving parts and internal components. • Do not use your camera near fuels, combustibles, or flammable chemicals. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the camera or its accessories. • Do not store the camera where there are mothballs. 172 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Using the camera with caution in humid environments When you transfer the camera from a cold environment to a warm one, condensation can form on the lens or internal components of the camera. In this situation, turn off the camera and wait for at least 1 hour. If condensation forms on the memory card, remove the memory card from the camera and wait until all moisture has evaporated before reinserting it. Other cautions • Do not swing your camera by the strap. This may cause injury to yourself or others or damage to your camera. • Do not paint your camera, as paint can clog moving parts and prevent proper operation. • Turn off the camera when not using it. • Your camera consists of delicate parts. Avoid impacts to the camera. • Protect the display from external force by keeping it in the case when not in use. Protect the camera from scratches by keeping it away from sand, sharp implements, or loose change. • Do not use the camera if the screen is cracked or broken. Broken glass or acrylic could cause injury to your hands and face. Take the camera to a Samsung service center to have it repaired. • Never place cameras, batteries, chargers, or accessories near, on, or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. These devices may be deformed and can overheat and cause a fire or explosion. • Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight, as this may discolor the image sensor or cause it to malfunction. • Protect your lens from fingerprints and scratches. Clean your lens with a soft, clean, debris-free lens cloth. • The camera may turn off if impacted from the outside. This is to protect the memory card. Turn on the camera to use it again. • While you use the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your camera’s lifespan or performance. • When you use the camera in low temperatures, it may take some time to turn on, the color of the display may be changed temporarily, or afterimages may appear. These conditions are not malfunctions and they will correct themselves when the camera is returned to milder temperatures. • Paint or metal on the outside of the camera may cause allergies, itchy skin, eczema, or swelling for people with sensitive skin. If you experience any of these symptoms, stop using the camera immediately and consult a doctor. • Do not insert foreign objects into any of your camera’s compartments, slots, or access points. Damage due to improper use may not be covered by your warranty. • Do not allow unqualified personnel to service the camera or attempt to service the camera yourself. Any damage that results from unqualified service is not covered by your warranty. 173 Appendix > Maintaining the camera About memory card Supported memory card This product supports SD (Secure Digital), SDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity), SDXC (Secure Digital eXtended Capacity), UHS-1 (Ultra High Speed-1), microSD, microSDHC, microSDXC, or microUHS-1 memory cards. Terminal Write-protect switch Label (front) You can prevent files from being deleted by using the write-protect switch on an SD, SDHC, SDXC, or UHS-1 card. Slide the switch down to lock or slide it up to unlock. Unlock the card when capturing photos and videos. Memory card adapter Memory card To use micro memory cards with this product, a PC, or a memory card reader, insert the card into an adapter. 174 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Memory card capacity The memory capacity may differ depending on shooting scenes or shooting conditions. These capacities are based on a 2 GB SD card. Size Quality Super Fine Fine Normal RAW RAW + S.Fine RAW + Fine RAW + Normal Photo 20.0M (5472X3648) 151 179 218 69 47 49 52 10.1M (3888X2592) 276 321 384 - 62 64 66 5.9M (2976X1984) 423 484 565 - 71 72 74 2.0M (1728X1152) 845 923 1,016 - 82 83 84 Burst 479 545 631 - - - - 16.9M (5472X3080) 177 208 252 - 51 53 56 7.8M (3712X2088) 343 396 467 - 66 68 70 4.9M (2944X1656) 487 553 640 - 74 75 76 2.1M (1920X1080) 827 905 999 - 82 83 84 13.3M (3648X3648) 218 255 307 - 56 58 61 7.0M (2640X2640) 373 429 504 - 68 70 72 4.0M (2000X2000) 559 630 721 - 76 77 78 1.1M (1024X1024) 1,111 1,180 1,258 - 86 86 87 175 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Size Quality HQ Normal Video 1920X1080 (60 fps) Approx. 10' 10" Approx. 12' 43" 1920X1080 (30 fps) Approx. 17' 41" Approx. 22' 09" * 1920X1080 (15 fps) Approx. 23' 38" Approx. 29' 24" 1920X810 (24 fps) Approx. 21' 35" Approx. 27' 02" 1280X720 (60 fps) Approx. 16' 51" Approx. 21' 06" 1280X720 (30 fps) Approx. 29' 11" Approx. 36' 35" 640X480 (30 fps) Approx. 120' 47" Approx. 153' 30" For Sharing (30 fps) Approx. 218' 48" Approx. 278' 24" * is available only with some Smart Filter options. • The figures above are measured without using the zoom function. • Available recording time may vary if you use the zoom. • Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time. • The maximum recording time is 29 minutes and 59 seconds per file. • The maximum playback time of For Sharing videos is 30 seconds per file. 176 Appendix > Maintaining the camera • Prevent memory cards from making contact with liquids, dirt, or foreign substances. If dirty, wipe the memory card clean with a soft cloth before you insert the memory card in your camera. • Do not allow liquids, dirt, or foreign substances to come in contact with memory cards or the memory card slot. Doing so may cause memory cards or the camera to malfunction. • When you carry a memory card, use a case to protect the card from electrostatic discharges. • Transfer important data to other media, such as a hard disk, CD, or DVD. • When you use the camera for an extended period, the memory card may become warm. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. • Use a memory card that meets the standard requirements. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. Cautions when using memory cards • Avoid memory cards to very cold or very hot temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can cause memory cards to malfunction. • Insert a memory card in the correct direction. Inserting a memory card in the wrong direction may damage your camera and memory card. • Do not use memory cards that have been formatted by other cameras or by a computer. Reformat the memory card with your camera. • Turn off the camera when you insert or remove the memory card. • Do not remove the memory card or turn off your camera while the lamp is blinking, as this may damage your data. • When the lifespan of a memory card has expired, you cannot store any more photos on the card. Use a new memory card. • Do not bend, drop, or subject memory cards to heavy impact or pressure. • Avoid using or storing memory cards near strong magnetic fields. • Avoid using or keeping memory cards in areas with high temperature, high humidity, or corrosive substances. 177 Appendix > Maintaining the camera • Do not rest the device on flammable surfaces, such as bedding, carpets, or electric blankets for a prolonged period. • When the device is switched on, do not leave it in any confined space for a prolonged period. • Do not allow battery terminals to come in contact with metallic objects, such as necklaces, coins, keys, or watches. • Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement batteries. • Do not disassemble the battery or puncture the battery with any sharp object. • Avoid exposing the battery to high pressure or crushing forces. • Avoid exposing the battery to major impacts, such as dropping it from high places. • Do not expose the battery to temperatures of 60 °C (140 °F) or above. • Do not allow the battery to come in contact with moisture or liquids. • Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. Disposal guidelines • Dispose of the battery with care. • Do not dispose of the battery in a fire. • Disposal regulations may differ by country or region. Dispose of the battery in accordance with all local and federal regulations. Guidelines for charging the battery Charge the battery only by the method described in this user manual. The battery can ignite or explode if not charged properly. About the battery Use only Samsung-approved batteries. Battery specifications Item Description Model BP1130 Type Lithium-ion battery Cell capacity 1,130 mAh Voltage 7.6 V Charging time* (When the battery is completely discharged) Approx. 215 min * Charging the battery by connecting it to a computer may take longer. Personal injury or death can occur if the battery is handled carelessly or improperly. For your safety, follow these instructions for proper battery handling: • The battery can ignite or explode if not handled properly. If you notice any deformities, cracks, or other abnormalities in the battery, immediately discontinue use of the battery and contact your manufacturer. • Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommend battery chargers and charge the battery only by the method described in this user manual. • Do not place the battery near heating devices or expose to excessively warm environments, such as the inside of an enclosed car in the summertime. • Do not place the battery in a microwave oven. • Avoid storing or using the battery in hot, humid places, such as spas or shower enclosures. 178 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Battery life Shooting mode Average time / Number of photos Photos Approx. 165 min/Approx. 330 photos Videos Approx. 110 min (Record videos at 1920X1080 resolution and 60 fps.) • The figures above are based on the CIPA test standards. Your results may differ depending on your actual usage. • Available shooting time differs depending on background, shooting interval, and use conditions. • Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time. Low battery message When the battery has fully discharged, the battery icon will turn red and the "Low Battery" message will appear. Notes about using the battery • Avoid exposing batteries to very cold or very hot temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can reduce the charging capacity of your batteries. • When you use the camera for an extended period, the area around the battery chamber may become warm. This does not affect the normal use of the camera. • Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock. • In temperatures below 0 °C/32 °F, battery capacity and battery life may decrease. • Battery capacity may decrease in low temperatures, but will return to normal in milder temperatures. • Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended period. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious damage to your camera. Storing the camera for extended periods with the battery installed causes the battery to discharge. You may not be able to recharge a fully discharged battery. • When you do not use the camera for an extended period (3 months or more), check the battery and recharge it regularly. If you let the battery discharge continually, its capacity and life may decrease, which can lead to a malfunction, fire, or explosion. 179 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Cautions about using the battery Protect batteries, chargers, and memory cards from damage. Prevent batteries from making contact with metal objects, as this can create a connection between the + and – terminals of your battery and lead to temporary or permanent battery damage and may cause a fire or electric shock. Notes about charging the battery • If the status lamp is off, make sure that the battery is inserted correctly. • If the camera is on while charging, the battery may not fully charge. Turn off the camera before charging the battery. • Do not use your camera when you are charging the battery. This may cause a fire or electric shock. • Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock. • Let the battery charge for at least 10 minutes before turning on the camera. • If you connect the camera to an external power source when the battery is depleted, using high energy-consuming functions will cause the camera to turn off. To use the camera normally, recharge the battery. • If you reconnect the power cable when the battery is fully charged, the status lamp turns on for approximately 30 minutes. • Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Charge the battery until the red status lamp turns off. • If the status lamp blinks in red, reconnect the cable, or remove the battery and insert it again. • If you charge the battery when the cable is overheated or the temperature is too high, the status lamp may blink in red. Charging will start when the battery cools down. • Overcharging batteries may shorten battery life. After charging is finished, disconnect the cable from your camera. • Do not bend or place heavy objects on the AC cable. Doing so may damage the cable. 180 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Notes about charging with a computer connected • Use only the provided USB cable. • The battery may not charge when: - you use a USB hub - other USB devices are connected to your computer - you connect the cable to the port on the front side of your computer - the USB port of your computer does not support the power output standard (5 V, 500 mA) Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care • Never dispose of batteries in a fire. Follow all local regulations when you dispose of used batteries. • Never place batteries or cameras on or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Batteries may explode when they are overheated. 181 Appendix Before contacting a service center If you are having trouble with your device, try these troubleshooting solutions before contacting a service professional. When you leave your camera at a service center, be sure to also leave the other components that may have contributed to the malfunction, such as the memory card and battery. Situation Suggested remedies Cannot turn on the camera • Ensure that the battery is inserted. • Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly. • Charge the battery. The power turns off suddenly • Charge the battery. • Your camera may be in Power save mode or the display turns off automatically. (p. 153) • The camera may be turned off automatically to prevent the memory card from being damaged due to excessive heat. Turn on your camera again. The camera is losing battery power quickly • The battery may lose power more quickly in low temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F). Keep the battery warm by putting it into your pocket. • Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Recharge if needed. • Batteries are consumable parts that must be replaced over time. Get a new battery if the battery life is diminishing quickly. Situation Suggested remedies Cannot capture photos • There is no space on the memory card. Delete unnecessary files or insert a new card. • Format the memory card. • The memory card is defective. Get a new memory card. • The memory card is locked. Unlock the card. (p. 173) • Ensure that the camera is switched on. • Charge the battery. • Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly. The camera freezes Remove the battery and insert it again. The camera heats up While using the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your camera’s lifespan or performance. The flash fires unexpectedly The flash may fire due to static electricity. The camera is not malfunctioning. The flash does not work • The flash option may be set to Off. (p. 94) • You cannot use the flash in some modes. The date and time are incorrect Set the date and time under the q menu. (p. 153) The display or buttons do not work Remove the battery and insert it again. 182 Appendix > Before contacting a service center Situation Suggested remedies The memory card has an error • Turn off your camera, and then turn it on again. • Remove your memory card, and then insert it again. • Format your memory card. See "Cautions when using memory cards" for more details. (p. 176) Your computer does not recognize an SDXC or UHS-1 memory card SDXC memory cards use the exFAT file system. To use SDXC memory cards or UHS-1 memory cards that are formatted with the exFAT file system on a Windows XP computer, download and update the exFAT file system driver from the Microsoft website. Your TV or computer cannot display photos and videos that are stored on an SDXC or UHS-1 memory card SDXC memory cards use the exFAT file system. To use SDXC memory cards or UHS-1 memory cards that are formatted with the exFAT file system, ensure that the external device is compatible with the exFAT file system before connecting the camera to the device. Cannot display files If you change the name of a file, your camera may not play the file (the name of the file should meet the DCF standard). If you encounter this situation, display files on your computer. The photo is blurry • Ensure that the focus option you set is suitable for the kind of shot you are capturing. • Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. • Ensure that the lens is clean. If not, clean the lens. (p. 170) Situation Suggested remedies The colors in the photo do not match the actual scene An incorrect White Balance can create unrealistic color. Select the proper White Balance option to suit the light source. (p. 76) The photo is too bright or too dark. Your photo is overexposed or underexposed. • Adjust the aperture value or the shutter speed. • Adjust the ISO sensitivity. (p. 75) • Turn off or on the flash. (p. 94) • Adjust the exposure value. (p. 102) Photos are distorted This camera can have minute distortion when using a wide-angle lens that enables shooting with a wide angle of view. This is normal, and does not cause malfunction. Playback screen does not appear on the connected external device • Ensure that HDMI cable is properly connected to the external monitor. • Ensure that the memory card is properly recorded. Your computer does not recognize your camera • Ensure that the USB cable is connected correctly. • Ensure that your camera is switched on. • Ensure that you are using a supported operating system. Your computer disconnects the camera while transferring files The file transfer may be interrupted by static electricity. Disconnect the USB cable and connect it again. 183 Appendix > Before contacting a service center Situation Suggested remedies Your computer cannot play videos Videos may not play on some video player programs. To play video files captured with your camera, use the Multimedia Viewer program that you can install with the i-Launcher program on your computer. i-Launcher is not functioning properly • End i-Launcher and restart the program. • Depending on your computer's specifications and environment, the program may not launch automatically. In this case, click Start ĺ All Programs ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher ĺ Samsung i-Launcher on your Windows computer. (For Windows 8, open Start screen, and then select All apps ĺ Samsung i-Launcher.) Or, click Applications ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher on your Mac OS computer. Cannot set the DPOF for RAW files You cannot set the DPOF for RAW files. Auto Focus does not work • Subject is not in focus. When the subject is outside the AF area, shoot by moving the subject inside the AF area and half-pressing [Shutter]. • Subject is too close. Step back from the subject and shoot. • The focus mode is set to MF. Switch the mode to AF. Situation Suggested remedies AEL feature does not work AEL feature does not work in t, M, i, and s modes. Select another mode to use this feature. Lens does not work • Ensure that the lens is properly mounted. • Remove the lens from the camera and remount it. External flash or GPS does not work Ensure that the external device is properly mounted and turned on. The date & time settings screen appears when you power on the camera • Set the date and time again. • This screen appears when the camera’s internal power source is completely discharged. Insert a fully charged battery and wait at least 72 hours in power off status for the internal power source to be recharged. 184 Appendix Camera specifications Image Sensor Type CMOS Sensor size 23.5 X 15.7 mm Effective pixels Approx. 20.3 mega-pixels Total pixels Approx. 21.6 mega-pixels Color filter RGB primary color filter Lens Mount Type Samsung NX Mount Available lens Samsung lenses Image Stabilization Type Lens shift (depends on lens) Mode Off/Mode 1/Mode 2 Distortion Correct Off/On (depends on lens) i-Function E, Z (X1.2, 1.4, 1.7, 2.0) Dust Reduction Type Super sonic drive Display Type AMOLED with Touch Panel (C-type Touch Control Enabled) Size 3.31" (Approx. 84.0 mm) Resolution WVGA (800X480) 768 k dots (PenTile) Field of view Approx. 100 % Angle Tiltable (Up 90°, Down 45°) User display Grid Line, Icons, Histogram, Distance Scale, Level gauge Focusing Type Phase Detection & Contrast AF Focusing point • Total AF point: 105 points (Phase Detection AF), 247 points (Contrast AF) • Selection: 1 point (Free selection) • Multi: Normal 21 (3 X 7) points (Cross point 1), Close up 35 points • Face detection: Max. 10 faces Mode Single AF, Continuous AF, Manual Focus, Touch AF & Shutter AF Assist Lamp Green LED 185 Appendix > Camera specifications Shutter Type Electronically controlled vertical-run focal plane shutter Speed • Auto: 1/6,000–30 sec. • Manual: 1/6,000–30 sec. (1/3 EV Step) • Bulb (time limit: 4 min) Exposure Metering system TTL 221 (17 X 13) Block segment Metering: Multi, Center-weighted, Spot Metering range: EV 0–18 (ISO100 · 30 mm, F2) Compensation ±3 EV (1/3 EV Step) AE lock CUSTOM key ISO equivalent • 1 Step: Auto, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200, ISO 6400, ISO 12800, ISO 25600 • 1/3 Step: Auto, ISO 100, ISO 125, ISO 160, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO 500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000, ISO 2500, ISO 3200, ISO 4000, ISO 5000, ISO 6400, ISO 8000, ISO 10000, ISO 12800, ISO 16000, ISO 20000, ISO 25600 Drive Mode Mode Single, Continuous, Burst (5M only), Timer, Bracket (Auto Exposure, White Balance, Picture Wizard) Continuous shooting • JPEG: High (8.6 fps), Normal (5 fps) • RAW: High (8.6 fps), Normal (5 fps) Burst shooting • 10, 15, or 30 frames per second • Up to 30 shots per shutter-press Bracket shooting Auto exposure bracketing (±3 EV), White Balance bracketing, Picture Wizard bracketing Self-timer 2–30 sec. (1 second interval) Shutter release SR2NX02 (via Micro USB port) (optional) Flash Type External Flash (Bundle with SEF8A) Mode Smart Flash, Auto, Auto Red-eye, Fill in, Fill-in Red, 1st Curtain, 2nd Curtain, Off Guide number 8 (based on ISO 100) (SEF8A) Angle of view 28 mm (35 mm film equivalent) Sync speed Less than 1/180 sec. 186 Appendix > Camera specifications Flash EV -2–+2 EV (0.5 EV Step) External flash Optional Samsung external flashes: SEF42A, SEF220A Sync terminal Hot-shoe White Balance Mode Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent White, Fluorescent NW, Fluorescent Daylight, Tungsten, Flash WB, Custom Set, Color Temperature (Manual) Micro adjustment Amber/Blue/Green/Magenta 7 steps respectively Dynamic Range Off/Smart Range+/HDR Picture Wizard Mode Standard, Vivid, Portrait, Landscape, Forest, Retro, Cool, Calm, Classic, Custom1, Custom2, Custom3 Parameter Color, Saturation, Sharpness, Contrast Shooting Mode Smart Auto, Program, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, Manual, Lens Priority, Smart Smart mode Beauty Face, Best Face, Landscape, Macro, Action Freeze, Rich Tones, Panorama, Waterfall, Silhouette, Sunset, Night, Fireworks, Light Trace, Creative Shot Smart Filter Vignetting, Miniature, Colored Pencil, Watercolor, Wash drawing, Oil Sketch, Ink Sketch, Acryl, Negative, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow Size • JPEG (3:2): 20.0M (5472X3648), 10.1M (3888X2592), 5.9M (2976X1984), 5.0M (2736X1824) (Burst mode only), 2.0M (1728X1152) • JPEG (16:9): 16.9M (5472X3080), 7.8M (3712X2088), 4.9M (2944X1656), 2.1M (1920X1080) • JPEG (1:1): 13.3M (3648X3648), 7.0M (2640X2640), 4.0M (2000X2000), 1.1M (1024X1024) • RAW: 20.0M (5472X3648) * 3D mode with 3D lens is available only with JPEG (16:9) 4.1M (2688X1512) or 2.1M (1920X1080). Quality Super Fine, Fine, Normal RAW standard SRW (ver.2.0.0) Color space sRGB, Adobe RGB 187 Appendix > Camera specifications Video Type MP4 (H.264) Format Movie: H.264, Sound: AAC Movie AE mode Program, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, Manual Movie clip Audio on/off (Shooting time: Max. 29' 59'') Smart Filter Vignetting, Miniature, Colored Pencil, Watercolor, Wash drawing, Oil Sketch, Ink Sketch, Acryl, Negative, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow Size 1920X1080, 1920X810, 1280X720, 640X480, 320X240 (For Sharing) Frame rate 60 fps, 30 fps, 24 fps (available only with 1920X810), 15 fps (available only with some Smart Filter options) Multi Motion x0.25 (640X480, 320X240 only), x0.5 (1280X720 (30 fps), 640X480, 320X240 only), x1, x5, x10, x20 Quality HQ, Normal Sound Stereo Edit Still image capture, Time trimming Playback Type Single image, Thumbnails (15/28), Slide show, Movie Edit Smart Filter, Resize, Rotate, Face Retouch, Brightness, Contrast Smart filter Vignetting, Miniature, Colored Pencil, Watercolor, Wash drawing, Oil Sketch, Ink Sketch, Acryl, Negative, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow Smart filter size JPEG (3:2): 5.9M (2976X1984), 5.0M (2736X1824), 2.0M (1728X1152) JPEG (16:9): 6.2M (3328X1872), 4.9M (2944X1656), 2.1M (1920X1080) JPEG (1:1): 6.0M (2448X2448), 4.0M (2000X2000), 1.1M (1024X1024) Storage Media External memory (optional)*: SD card (2 GB guaranteed), SDHC card (up to 32 GB guaranteed), SDXC card (up to 64 GB guaranteed), UHS-1 card * Class 6 and above recommended File format RAW (SRW (ver.2.0.0)), JPEG (EXIF 2.21), MPO (3D), DCF, DPOF 1.1 GPS Type Geo-tagging with an optional GPS Module (WGS 84) Feature Location name (English and Korean only) 188 Appendix > Camera specifications Wireless network Type IEEE 802.11b/g/n support Dual Band Function MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Auto Backup, Email, SNS & Cloud, AllShare Play, AutoShare, Wi-Fi Direct NFC Yes Interface Digital output USB 2.0 (micro USB jack) Video output • NTSC, PAL (selectable) • HDMI External release Yes (micro USB) External microphone Yes DC power input DC 5.0V, 1A via micro USB Power Source Type Rechargeable battery: BP1130 (1,130 mAh) * The power source may differ depending on your region. Dimensions (W X H X D) 122 X 63.7 X 40.7 mm (without protrusions) Weight 284 g (without battery and memory card) Operating Temperature 0–40 °C Operating Humidity 5–85 % Software i-Launcher, Adobe Photoshop Lightroom * Specifications may change without notice to improve performance. * Other brands and products names are trademarks of respective owners. 189 Appendix Glossary AP (Access Point) An access point is a device that allows wireless devices to connect to a wired network. Ad-Hoc network An ad-hoc network is a temporary connection for sharing files or an internet connection and between computers and devices. AdobeRGB Adobe RGB is used for commercial printing and has a larger color range than sRGB. Its wider range of colors helps you to easily edit photos on a computer. AEB (Auto Exposure Bracket) This feature automatically captures several images at different exposures to help you capture a properly-exposed image. AEL/AFL (Auto Exposure Lock/Auto Focus Lock) These features help you lock the exposure or focus on which you want to focus or calculate the exposure. AF (Auto Focus) A system that automatically focuses the camera lens on the subject. Your camera uses the contrast to focus automatically. AMOLED (Active-matrix organic light-emitting diode) / LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) AMOLED is a visual display that is very thin and light, as it does not need backlighting. LCD is a visual display commonly used in consumer electronics. This display needs a separate backlight, such as CCFL or LED, to reproduce colors. Aperture The aperture controls the amount of light that reaches the camera’s sensor. 190 Appendix > Glossary Composition Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually, abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition. DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) A specification to define a file format and file system for digital cameras created by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA). Depth of field The distance between the nearest and farthest points that can be acceptably focused in a photograph. Depth of field varies with lens aperture, focal length, and distance from the camera to the subject. Selecting a smaller aperture, for example, will increase the depth of field and blur the background of a composition. DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) A format for writing printing information, such as selected images and number of prints, on a memory card. DPOF-compatible printers, sometimes available at photo shops, can read the information from the card for convenient printing. Camera shake (Blur) If the camera is moved while the shutter is open, the entire image may appear blurred. This occurs more often when the shutter speed is slow. Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, or using a faster shutter speed. Alternatively, use a tripod or the OIS function to stabilize the camera. Cloud Computing Cloud computing is a technology that allows you to store data on remote servers and to use them from a device with internet access. Color space The range of colors that the camera can see. Color temperature Color Temperature is a measurement in degrees Kelvin (K) that indicates the hue of a specific type of light source. As the color temperature increases, the color of the light source has a more bluish quality. As the color temperature decreases, the color of the light source has a more reddish quality. At 5,500 degrees Kelvin, the color of the light source is similar to the sun at midday. 191 Appendix > Glossary Flash A speed light that helps to create adequate exposure in low-light conditions. Focal length The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point(in millimeters). Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject is magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view. Histogram A graphical representation of the brightness of an image. The horizontal axis represents the brightness and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels. High points at the left (too dark) and right (too bright) on the histogram indicate a photo that is improperly exposed. H.264/MPEG-4 A high-compression video format established by international standard organizations ISO-IEC and ITU-T. This codec is capable of providing good video quality at low bit rates developed by the Joint Video Team (JVT). EV (Exposure Value) All the combinations of the camera’s shutter speed and lens aperture that result in the same exposure. EV Compensation This feature allows you to quickly adjust the exposure value measured by the camera, in limited increments, to improve the exposure of your photos. Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format) A specification to define an image file format for digital cameras created by the Japan Electronic Industries Development Association (JEIDA). Exposure The amount of light allowed to reach the camera’s sensor. Exposure is controlled by a combination of the shutter speed, the aperture value, and ISO sensitivity. 192 Appendix > Glossary Metering The metering refers to the way in which the camera measures the quantity of light to set the exposure. MF (Manual Focus) A system that manually focuses the camera lens on the subject. You can use the focus ring to focus on a subject. MJPEG (Motion JPEG) A video format which is compressed as a JPEG image. MPO (Multi Picture Object) An image file format that contains multiple images in a file. An MPO file provides a 3D effect on MPO-compatible displays, such as 3D TVs or 3D monitors. Image sensor The physical part of a digital camera that contains a photosite for each pixel in the image. Each photosite records the brightness of the light that strikes it during an exposure. Common sensor types are CCD (Chargecoupled Device) and CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor). IP (Internet protocol) address An IP address is a unique number that is assigned to every device that is connected to the internet. ISO sensitivity The sensitivity of the camera to light, based on the equivalent film speed used in a film camera. At higher ISO sensitivity settings, the camera uses a higher shutter speed, which can reduce blur caused by camera shake and low light. However, images with high sensitivity are more susceptible to noise. JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) A lossy method of compression for digital images. JPEG images are compressed to reduce their overall file size with minimal deterioration of the image resolution. 193 Appendix > Glossary PAL (Phase Alternate Line) A video color encoding standard used in numerous countries throughout Africa, Asia, Europe, and the Middle East. Quality An expression of the rate of compression used in a digital image. Higher quality images have a lower rate of compression, which usually results in a larger file size. RAW (CCD raw data) The original, unprocessed data, collected directly from the camera’s image sensor. White Balance, contrast, saturation, sharpness, and other data can be manipulated with editing software before the image is compressed into a standard file format. Resolution The number of pixels present in a digital image. High resolution images contain more pixels and typically show more detail than low resolution images. Noise Misinterpreted pixels in a digital image that may appear as misplaced or random, bright pixels. Noise usually occurs when photos are shot with a high sensitivity or when a sensitivity is automatically set in a dark place. NFC (Near Field Communication) NFC is a set of standards for radio communication at very close proximity. You can use NFC-enabled devices to activate features or exchange data with other devices. NTSC (National Television System Committee) A video color encoding standard used most commonly in Japan, North America, the Philippines, South America, South Korea, and Taiwan. Optical zoom This is a general zoom which can enlarge images with a lens and does not deteriorate quality of images. 194 Appendix > Glossary Shutter speed Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the shutter, and it is an important factor in the brightness of a photo, as it controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture before it reaches the image sensor. A fast shutter speed allows less time to let light in and the photo becomes darker and more easily freezes subjects in motion. sRGB (Standard RGB) International standard of color space established by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). This is defined from color space for PC monitors and is also used as the standard color space for Exif. Vignetting A reduction of an image’s brightness or saturation at the periphery (outer edges) compared to the center of the image. Vignetting can draw interest to subjects positioned in the center of an image. White Balance (Color balance) An adjustment of the intensities of colors (typically the primary colors red, green, and blue), in an image. The goal of adjusting the White Balance, or color balance, is to correctly render the colors in an image. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi is a technology that allows electronic devices to exchange data wirelessly over a network. WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) WPS is a technology that secures wireless home networks. 195 Appendix Optional accessories Lens SAMSUNG 18-55 mm F3.5-5.6 OIS III SAMSUNG 20-50 mm F3.5-5.6 ED II SAMSUNG 16 mm F2.4 SAMSUNG 20 mm F2.8 SAMSUNG 30 mm F2 SAMSUNG 50-200 mm F4-5.6 ED OIS III SAMSUNG 60 mm F2.8 Macro ED OIS SSA SAMSUNG 18-200 mm F3.5-6.3 ED OIS Lens SAMSUNG 85 mm F1.4 ED SSA SAMSUNG 12-24 mm F4-5.6 ED SAMSUNG 45 mm F1.8 SAMSUNG 45 mm F1.8 [T6] 2D/3D External flash SEF42A SEF220A GPS GPS10 196 Appendix > Optional accessories Shutter release (micro USB type) Microphone SR2NX02 EM10 Rechargeable battery Battery charger BP1130 BC3NX01 Camera bag Camera case Memory card Filter USB cable HDMI cable Strap • These illustrations may differ from your actual items. Refer to the user manuals of these optional accessories for details. • Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Samsung is not responsible for damage caused by using another manufacturer’s accessories. 197 Appendix A Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 167 AllShare Play 141 Aperture 16, 20 Auto Backup 133 Auto focus 80 B Battery Caution 177 Charging 34 Insert 33 Best Face mode 65 Bracketing 92 C Camera Connecting as removable disk 160 Connecting to PC 160 Disconnecting (Windows) 161 Layout 30 Camera specifications 184 Charging 34 Color space 148 D Date & Time 153 Depth of Field (DOF) 17, 22 Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) 114 DIRECT LINK 32 Display brightness 152 Display type 43 Drive 90 E Enlarging 113 Exposure Value (EV) 16, 102 F Fader 105 Files Deleting 111 Photo type 74 Protecting 110 Video type 104 Flash Bounce photography 27 Flash options 94 Guide number 26 Intensity 95 F-number 16 Focal length 21 Focus assist 88 Focus Peaking 88 I Icons Playback mode 42 Shooting mode 40 i-Function 61 i-Launcher 163 Image adjustment Adjusting photos 119 Retouching faces 120 ISO sensitivity 75 i-Zoom 63 L Lenses Layout 44 Locking 45 Markings 47 Unlocking 46 M Maintenance 170 Memory card Caution 173 Insert 33 Metering 97 MobileLink 129 Index 198 Appendix > Index O One touch shot 87 Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) 89 Optional accessories Attach the GPS module 51 Connect the flash 49 Flash layout 48 GPS module layout 51 P Panorama mode 66 Photos Editing 117 Enlarging 113 Shooting options 73 Viewing on 3D TV 159 Viewing on camera 108 Viewing on HDTV 158 Picture Wizard 79 Posture 13 Power save mode 153 R Red-eye effect 95 Remote Viewfinder 131 Resolution Playback mode 118 Shooting mode (Movie) 104 Shooting mode (Photo) 73 Retouching faces 120 Rotating 118 Rule of thirds 24 S Service center 181 Settings 152 Shooting modes Aperture Priority 57 Lens Priority 60 Manual 59 Program 55 Recording 68 Shutter Priority 58 Smart 64 Smart Auto 53 Shutter speed 18, 20 Slide show 113 Smart filter Playback mode 121 Shooting mode 101 Smart panel 38 T Thumbnails 108 Timer 91 Touch AF 86 Touch screen 36 Tracking AF 86 Transferring files Mac 161 Windows 160 TV 158 U Unpacking 29 V Video Out 153 Videos Capturing 116 Options 104 Recording 68 Viewing 115 W White balance 76 Wireless network 123 3 3D mode 69 199 Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. Correct disposal of batteries in this product (Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system. CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website: www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or call, (877) 278 - 0799 Appendix 200 Appendix FCC notice Caution: Any changes or modifications in construction of this device which are not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorientate or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the distance between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Declaration of Conformity Trade Name : Samsung Electronics America, Inc. Model No. : Samsung NX300 Responsible Party : Samsung Electronics America, Inc. Address : 85 Challenger Road, Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660 Telephone No. : 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. RF exposure statements: This device is for handheld operation only. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. FCC ID:A3LNX300 201 TA-2012/1802 APPROVED Model : NX300 Year of Manufacture : 2013 CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution: Any changes or modifications to the equipment not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void user’s authority to operate the equipment. IC: 649E-NX300 This equipment may be operated in all EU countries. In France, this equipment may only be used indoors. Complies with IDA Standards DA100790 No.: ESD-1306913C TRC/SS/2013/17 Please refer to the warranty that came with your product or visit our website www.samsung.com for after-sales service or inquiries. FRE Ce mode d’emploi propose des instructions détaillées pour l’utilisation de l’appareil photo. Veuille le lire attentivement. Mode d’emploi 1 Informations sur les droits d’auteurs • Les caractéristiques de l’appareil ou le contenu de ce manuel d’utilisation peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis, suite à l’évolution des fonctions de l’appareil. • Nous vous recommandons d’utiliser votre appareil photo dans le pays dans lequel vous l’avez acheté. • Utilisez cet appareil photo de manière responsable et veillez à respecter toutes les législations et règlementations en vigueur. • La distribution ou la réutilisation du contenu de ce manuel d’utilisation, même partielle, sans autorisation préalable, est interdite. PlanetFirst représente l’engagement de Samsung Electronics à l’égard du développement durable et de la responsabilité sociale, illustré à travers des activités commerciales écologiques et contrôlées. • Microsoft Windows et le logo Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation. • Mac et Apple App Store sont des marques déposées d’Apple Corporation. • Google Play Store est une marque déposée de Google, Inc. • Adobe, le logo Adobe, Photoshop et Lightroom sont des marques déposées ou des marques de Adobe Systems Incorporated aux Etats-Unis et / ou dans d’autres pays. • microSD™, microSDHC™ et microSDXC™ sont des marques deposees de SD Association. • HDMI, le logo HDMI et l’expression « High-Definition Multimedia Interface » sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées de HDMI Licensing LLC. • Wi-Fi®, le logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. • Les marques commerciales mentionnées dans ce manuel d’utilisation appartiennent à leurs propriétaires respectifs. 2 Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité Evitez d’endommager la vue des sujets photographiés. N’utilisez pas le flash à proximité (à moins d’un mètre) de personnes ou d’animaux. L’utilisation du flash trop près des yeux du sujet peut provoquer des lésions temporaires ou permanentes. Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo à la portée d’enfants en bas âge ou d’animaux domestiques. Tenez l’appareil, ses pièces et ses accessoires, hors de portée des enfants en bas âge et des animaux. L’ingestion de petites pièces peut provoquer un étouffement ou des blessures graves. Les composants et les accessoires peuvent également présenter des risques de blessure. Evitez toute exposition prolongée de l’appareil photo à la lumière directe du soleil ou à des températures élevées. Une exposition prolongée à la lumière directe du soleil ou à des températures très élevées peut endommager de manière permanente les composants internes de l’appareil photo. Evitez de couvrir l’appareil photo ou le chargeur avec des couvertures ou des vêtements. L’appareil photo peut surchauffer, se déformer ou prendre feu. Ne manipulez pas le cordon d’alimentation ou ne vous approchez pas du chargeur lors d’un orage. Vous pourriez recevoir une décharge électrique. Respectez toujours les consignes et conseils d’utilisation suivants afin de prévenir toute situation dangereuse et de garantir un fonctionnement optimal de votre appareil photo. Avertissement—situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser d’autres personnes Ne démontez pas ou n’essayez pas de réparer vous-même votre appareil photo. Vous pouvez recevoir une décharge électrique ou endommager l’appareil photo. N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de gaz ou de liquides inflammables ou explosifs. Vous risquez de provoquer une explosion ou un incendie. Ne laissez pas pénétrer de matériaux inflammables dans l’appareil photo ou ne stockez pas ces matériaux à proximité de l’appareil photo. Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique ou de provoquer un incendie. N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo avec les mains mouillées. Vous pouvez recevoir une décharge électrique. 3 Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité Si du liquide ou des corps étrangers pénètrent dans l’appareil photo, déconnectez toutes les sources d’alimentation comme la batterie ou le chargeur, puis contactez un service aprèsvente de Samsung. Respectez la réglementation interdisant l'utilisation des appareils photo dans certaines zones spécifiques. • Evitez les interférences avec d’autres appareils électroniques. • Eteignez votre appareil photo à bord d’un avion. Il pourrait photo peut provoquer des interférences avec l’équipement de bord. Respectez les consignes de la compagnie aérienne et éteignez votre appareil photo lorsque vous y êtes invité. • Eteignez votre appareil photo à proximité de tout appareil médical. Il pourrait causer des interférences avec le matériel médical utilisé dans les hôpitaux et les centres de soins. Observez la réglementation en vigeur, ainsi que les mises en garde affichées et les consignes du personnel médical. Évitez les interférences avec les stimulateurs cardiaques. Maintenez l’appareil photo à distance des stimulateurs cardiaques pour éviter toute interférence, comme recommandé par le fabricant et les groupes de recherche. Si vous pensez que votre appareil photo interfère avec un stimulateur cardiaque ou un appareil médical, éteignez-le immédiatement et contactez le fabricant du stimulateur cardiaque ou de l’appareil médical pour connaître la marche à suivre. Attention—situations susceptibles d’endommager votre appareil photo ou d’autres appareils Si vous rangez votre appareil photo sans l’utiliser pour une période de temps prolongée, retirez d’abord la batterie. Les batteries peuvent fuir ou se détériorer avec le temps, risquant d’endommager gravement l’appareil photo. Utilisez uniquement des batteries de remplacement lithium-ion authentiques recommandées par le fabricant. N’endommagez pas ou ne chauffez pas la batterie. Cela risque de provoquer un incendie ou des dommages corporels. Utilisez uniquement des batteries, des chargeurs et des accessoires homologués par Samsung. • L’utilisation de batteries, chargeurs, câbles ou accessoires non homologués peut endommager l’appareil photo, provoquer une explosion ou causer des blessures. • Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages ou blessures résultant d’une utilisation inappropriée de batteries, chargeurs, câbles ou accessoires. N’utilisez la batterie que pour l’usage pour lequel elle a été conçue. Un usage non conforme risque de provoquer une décharge électrique ou un incendie. 4 Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité Ne touchez pas le flash en cours de déclenchement. Le flash est très chaud lorsqu’il se déclenche et peut provoquer des brûlures. Lorsque vous utilisez un chargeur, éteignez toujours l’appareil photo avant de débrancher le chargeur de la prise murale. Si vous ne prenez pas cette précaution, vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique ou de provoquer un incendie. Débranchez le chargeur de la prise murale lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Si vous ne prenez pas cette précaution, vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique ou de provoquer un incendie. N’utilisez jamais de fiches et de cordons d’alimentation endommagés ou de prises électriques mal fixées lorsque vous rechargez la batterie. Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique ou de provoquer un incendie. Evitez tout contact du chargeur avec les bornes + et – de la batterie. Vous pouvez recevoir une décharge électrique ou provoquer un incendie. Ne laissez pas tomber l’appareil photo et ne le soumettez pas à des chocs violents. Cela risquerait d’endommager l’écran ou les composants internes ou externes. Effectuez les manipulations de branchement des cordons, du chargeur et d’insertion des batteries et des cartes mémoire avec précaution. Enfoncer les cordons en forçant ou sans précaution et brancher les câbles ou insérer les batteries et les cartes mémoire de manière incorrecte peut endommager les ports, les prises et les accessoires. Evitez tout contact des cartes mémoire avec le boîtier de l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager ou d’effacer les données qui y sont stockées. N’utilisez jamais une batterie, un chargeur ou une carte mémoire endommagé. Vous risqueriez de recevoir une décharge électrique, d’endommager l’appareil photo ou de provoquer un incendie. Ne pas positionner l’appareil photo à l’intérieur ou à proximité d’un champ magnétique. Cela risquerait de l’endommager. N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo si l’écran est endommagé. Si les parties en verre ou en acrylique sont brisées, apportez l’appareil dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung afin de la faire réparer. 5 Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité Vérifiez que l’appareil photo fonctionne correctement avant de l’utiliser. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de fichiers ou de dégâts résultant d’un fonctionnement incorrect ou d’une mauvaise utilisation de l’appareil photo. Vous devez brancher la fiche micro-USB du câble USB sur votre appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous inversez le sens de connexion du câble. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de pertes de données. Ne jamais exposer l’objectif aux rayons directs du soleil. Vous risquez de décolorer le capteur d’images ou d’entraîner des dysfonctionnements. Si l’appareil surchauffe, retirez la batterie jusqu’à ce qu’elle refroidisse. • Lors d’un usage prolongé, la batterie peut chauffer et augmenter la température interne de l’appareil photo. Si l’appareil ne fonctionne plus, retirez la batterie et laissez-lui le temps de refroidir. • Des températures internes élevées peuvent entraîner l’apparition de parasites sur vos photos. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas les performances globales de votre appareil photo. Evitez les interférences avec d’autres appareils électroniques. Les signaux de fréquence radio émis par votre appareil photo peuvent perturber le fonctionnement des systèmes électroniques mal installés ou insuffisamment protégés, notamment les stimulateurs cardiaques, les prothèses auditives, les appareils médicaux et les équipements électroniques domestiques et automobiles. Contactez les fabricants de ces appareils électroniques pour résoudre les problèmes d’interférences éventuels. Pour éviter toute interférence involontaire, utilisez exclusivement des appareils ou des accessoires homologués par Samsung. Utilisez votre appareil photo dans la position normale. Evitez tout contact avec l’antenne interne de votre appareil photo. Transfert de données et responsabilités • Afin d’empêcher tout risque de fuite des données transférées via le réseau Wi-Fi, évitez de transférer des données sensibles dans des zones publiques ou sur des réseaux ouverts. • Le fabricant de l’appareil photo décline toute responsabilité en cas de transferts de données qui porteraient atteinte aux droits d’auteur, marques, lois sur la propriété intellectuelle ou qui seraient contraires aux bonnes moeurs. 6 Indications utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi Indications de mode Mode Indication Scènes Automatique t Programme P Priorité ouverture A Priorité vitesse S Manuel M Priorité de l’objectif i Intelligent s Wi-Fi B Icônes utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi Icône Fonction Informations complémentaires Mises en garde et précautions [ ] Touches de l’appareil photo. Par exemple, [Déclencheur] désigne le déclencheur. ( ) Numéro de page où se trouve l’information correspondante ĺ Séquence d’options ou de menus à sélectionner pour accomplir une procédure. Exemple : sélectionnez 1ĺ Qualité (signifie que vous devez sélectionner 1, puis Qualité). * Annotation 7 Table des matières Section 1 Mon appareil photo Mise en route ............................................................................................... 29 Contenu du coffret ................................................................................................... 29 Présentation de l’appareil photo ............................................................. 30 Utilisation de la touche DIRECT LINK .................................................................... 32 Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire .................................... 33 Retrait de la batterie et de la carte mémoire ..................................................... 33 Utilisation de l’adaptateur pour carte mémoire ................................................ 33 Mise en charge de la batterie et mise sous tension de l’appareil photo ............................................................................................................. 34 Chargement de la batterie ..................................................................................... 34 Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo. .............................................................. 34 Configuration initiale ................................................................................. 35 Sélection de fonctions (options) .............................................................. 36 Sélection avec des touches ................................................................................... 36 Sélection à l’aide de l’écran tactile ...................................................................... 36 Utilisation de l’option m .............................................................................. 37 Ex. : définir la taille de la photo en mode P ....................................................... 37 Utilisation du panneau intelligent ...................................................................... 38 Ex. : régler la valeur d’exposition en mode P .................................................... 38 Conseils Concepts de photographie Postures pour les prises de vue ................................................................ 13 Prise en main de l’appareil photo ........................................................................... 13 Photographie debout ................................................................................................. 13 Photographie accroupi ............................................................................................... 14 Utilisation de l’écran .................................................................................................... 14 Photo en contre-plongée .......................................................................................... 15 Photo en plongée ......................................................................................................... 15 Ouverture ..................................................................................................... 16 Valeur d’ouverture et profondeur de champ ...................................................... 17 Vitesse d’obturation.................................................................................... 18 Sensibilité ISO .............................................................................................. 19 Façon dont le réglage de l’ouverture, de la vitesse d’obturation et de la sensibilité ISO contrôlent l’exposition .......................................... 20 Corrélation entre la longueur de focale, l’angle et la perspective .... 21 Profondeur de champ ................................................................................ 22 Quels sont les éléments qui contrôlent les effets hors-mise au point ? .... 22 Aperçu optique ............................................................................................................. 24 Composition ................................................................................................. 24 Règle des tiers ................................................................................................................ 24 Photos avec deux sujets ............................................................................................. 25 Flash ............................................................................................................... 26 Nombre guide du flash ............................................................................................... 26 Prise de vue avec flash indirect ................................................................................ 27 8 Table des matières Icônes affichées à l’écran ........................................................................... 40 En mode Prise de vue .............................................................................................. 40 Photographier ............................................................................................................... 40 Enregistrement de vidéos ......................................................................................... 41 A propos de l’indicateur de niveau ....................................................................... 41 En mode Lecture ....................................................................................................... 42 Lecture de vidéos ........................................................................................................ 42 Lire des vidéos .............................................................................................................. 42 Modification des informations affichées .......................................................... 43 Objectifs ........................................................................................................ 44 Présentation de l’objectif ........................................................................................ 44 Verrouillage et déverrouillage de l’objectif ........................................................ 45 Marquages de l’objectif ........................................................................................... 47 Accessoires ................................................................................................... 48 Présentation du flash ............................................................................................... 48 Fixation du flash externe ........................................................................................... 49 Description du module GPS (en option) ........................................................... 51 Mise en place du module GPS .............................................................................. 51 Modes de prise de vue ............................................................................... 53 t Mode Scènes automatiques ................................................................. 53 P Mode Programme ................................................................................................ 55 Déplacement de programme .................................................................................. 56 Vitesse obturation minimum .................................................................................. 56 A Mode Priorité ouverture.................................................................................... 57 S Mode Priorité Vitesse ........................................................................................... 58 M Mode Manuel ....................................................................................................... 59 Mode d’exposition ....................................................................................................... 59 Utilisation de la fonction Bulb ................................................................................. 60 i Mode Priorité de l’objectif ............................................................................... 60 Utilisation de l’option E .............................................................................. 60 Usage d’i-Function dans les modes P/A/S/M ................................................ 61 Utilisation de Z ............................................................................................... 63 s Mode Intelligent ................................................................................................ 64 Utilisation du mode Meilleures poses .................................................................. 65 Prise de photos panoramiques ............................................................................... 66 Enregistrement d’une vidéo .................................................................................. 68 Mode 3D ....................................................................................................................... 69 Fonctions disponibles en mode Prise de vue ................................................. 71 9 Table des matières Section 2 Fonctions de prise de vue Format et résolution ................................................................................... 73 Format photo .............................................................................................................. 73 Qualité ........................................................................................................................... 74 Sensibilité ISO .............................................................................................. 75 Balance des blancs ...................................................................................... 76 Personnalisation des options de préréglage de la balance des blancs ... 77 Assistant photo (styles de photo) ............................................................ 79 Mode AF ........................................................................................................ 80 AF unique ..................................................................................................................... 81 Mise au point continue ........................................................................................... 81 Mise au point manuelle .......................................................................................... 82 Zone AF ......................................................................................................... 83 Mise au point ciblée ................................................................................................. 83 Mise au point multiple ............................................................................................ 84 Mise au point avec détection de visage ............................................................ 84 AF autoportrait ........................................................................................................... 85 Mise au point tactile ................................................................................... 86 Mise au point tactile ................................................................................................. 86 Point AF ......................................................................................................................... 86 Mise au point avec suivi .......................................................................................... 86 Déclenchement par sélection .............................................................................. 87 Assistance à la mise au point .................................................................... 88 Aide M. au P. manuelle............................................................................................. 88 Assistance à la mise au point ................................................................................ 88 Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS, Optical Image Stabilization) ... 89 Prise de vue .................................................................................................. 90 Unique ........................................................................................................................... 90 Continue ....................................................................................................................... 90 Mode Rafale ................................................................................................................ 91 Retardateur .................................................................................................................. 91 Bracketing d’exposition automatique (BKT AE) ............................................. 92 Bracketing Balance des blancs (BKT NB) ........................................................... 92 Bracketing Assistant photo (A. photo Bracketing) ........................................ 93 Réglages de la fonction Bracketing .................................................................... 93 Flash ............................................................................................................... 94 Réduction de l’effet yeux rouges ......................................................................... 95 Réglage de l’intensité du flash.............................................................................. 95 Mesure de l’exposition ............................................................................... 97 Multiple ......................................................................................................................... 97 Sélective ....................................................................................................................... 98 Centrée .......................................................................................................................... 98 Mesure de la valeur d’exposition de la zone de mise au point ................... 99 Plage dynamique ...................................................................................... 100 Filtre intelligent ......................................................................................... 101 Compensation de l’exposition ................................................................ 102 Verrouillage de l’exposition .................................................................... 103 Fonctions vidéo ......................................................................................... 104 Format vidéo ............................................................................................................ 104 Qualité vidéo ............................................................................................................ 104 Multi-mouvements ................................................................................................ 105 Fondu.......................................................................................................................... 105 Voix .............................................................................................................................. 106 Réduction vent ........................................................................................................ 106 Niveau Mic ................................................................................................................ 106 10 Table des matières Section 3 Lecture / Retouche Recherche et gestion de fichiers ............................................................ 108 Visionnage de photos ........................................................................................... 108 Affichage des images sous forme de miniatures ........................................ 108 Affichage de fichiers par catégorie .................................................................. 109 Visionnage de fichiers sous forme de dossier .............................................. 109 Protection des fichiers .......................................................................................... 110 Verrouiller / Déverrouiller tous les fichiers ....................................................... 110 Suppression de fichiers ........................................................................................ 111 Suppression d’un seul fichier ................................................................................ 111 Suppression de plusieurs fichiers ........................................................................ 111 Suppression de tous les fichiers ........................................................................... 112 Visionnage de photos .............................................................................. 113 Agrandissement d’une photo ............................................................................ 113 Affichage d’un diaporama .................................................................................. 113 Rotation automatique .......................................................................................... 114 Création d’une commande d’impression (DPOF) ....................................... 114 Lecture de vidéos ...................................................................................... 115 Recadrage d’une vidéo au cours de la lecture ............................................. 115 Extraction d’une image pendant la lecture .................................................. 116 Retouche de photos ................................................................................. 117 Rognage d’une photo .......................................................................................... 117 Pivotement d’une photo ..................................................................................... 118 Redimensionnement de photos ....................................................................... 118 Réglage des photos ............................................................................................... 119 Retouche de visages ............................................................................................. 120 Effets de filtre intelligent ..................................................................................... 121 Section 4 Réseau sans fil Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau .................................................................................... 123 Connexion à un réseau local sans fil................................................................ 123 Configuration des options de réseau ................................................................. 124 Configuration manuelle de l’adresse IP ............................................................. 124 Utilisation du navigateur de connexion ........................................................ 125 Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau ........................................................... 126 Saisie de texte .......................................................................................................... 127 Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone ......... 128 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone ................................ 129 Utilisation d’un smartphone comme télécommande du déclencheur ................................................................................................ 131 Utilisation de la Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des photos ou des vidéos ............................................................................... 133 Installation du programme de Sauvegarde automatique sur votre ordinateur ................................................................................................................. 133 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un ordinateur ........................................... 133 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel .......................................... 135 Modification des paramètres de courriel ...................................................... 135 Enregistrement de vos coordonnées ................................................................. 135 Création d’un mot de passe de courriel ............................................................ 136 Modification du mot de passe de courriel ........................................................ 137 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel ................................................... 137 Utilisation des sites Web de partage de photos ou de vidéos ......... 139 Accès à un site Web ............................................................................................... 139 Téléchargement de photos ou de vidéos ...................................................... 140 11 Table des matières Section 6 Connexion à des appareils externes Visionnage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD ou 3D ............................ 158 Visionnage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD ................................................. 158 Visionnage de fichiers sur un téléviseur 3D .................................................. 159 Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur ..................................................... 160 Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Windows ........................................ 160 Connexion de l’appareil photo en tant que disque amovible................... 160 Déconnexion de l’appareil photo (Windows XP) ........................................... 161 Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur Mac ...................................................... 161 Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur fonctionnant sous Windows...................................................................................................... 163 Installation des programmes depuis le CD-ROM fourni .......................... 163 Programmes disponibles lors de l’utilisation de i-Launcher ...................... 163 Utilisation de i-Launcher ..................................................................................... 163 Configuration requise pour Windows ................................................................ 163 Configuration requise pour Mac .......................................................................... 164 Ouverture de i-Launcher ......................................................................................... 164 Utilisation de la fonction Multimedia Viewer .................................................. 165 Téléchargement du micrologiciel ........................................................................ 166 Téléchargement du programme PC Auto Backup ......................................... 166 Installation de Adobe Photoshop Lightroom .............................................. 167 Utilisation de Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ................................................ 167 Utilisation de AllShare Play pour l’envoi de fichiers ........................... 141 Stockage en ligne de photos ............................................................................. 141 Visionnage de photos ou de vidéos sur des appareils compatibles AllShare Play ............................................................................................................. 142 Envoi de photos à l’aide de la fonction Wi-Fi Direct ........................... 144 Section 5 Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo Paramètres utilisateur .............................................................................. 146 Personnalisation ISO ............................................................................................. 146 Palier ISO ....................................................................................................................... 146 Plage ISO auto ............................................................................................................. 146 Réducteur de bruit ................................................................................................. 146 Réglage du Bracketing ......................................................................................... 147 DMF (Direct Manual Focus) ................................................................................ 147 Espace colorimétrique .......................................................................................... 148 Correction des déformations ............................................................................. 149 Fonctionnement tactile ....................................................................................... 149 Personnalisation iFn .............................................................................................. 149 Affichage utilisateur .............................................................................................. 149 Attribution touches ............................................................................................... 150 Grille ............................................................................................................................ 151 Voyant de mise au point ...................................................................................... 151 Paramètres .................................................................................................. 152 12 Table des matières Avant de contacter un centre de service .............................................. 181 Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo ..................................................... 184 Glossaire ...................................................................................................... 189 Accessoires en option............................................................................... 195 Index ............................................................................................................ 197 Section 7 Annexes Messages d’erreur ..................................................................................... 169 Entretien de l’appareil photo .................................................................. 170 Nettoyage de l’appareil photo .......................................................................... 170 Objectif et écran de l’appareil photo .................................................................. 170 Capteur d’images ....................................................................................................... 170 Boîtier de l’appareil photo ...................................................................................... 170 Utilisation et rangement de l’appareil photo ............................................... 171 Usage ou rangement inapproprié de l’appareil photo ................................ 171 Utilisation sur la plage ou en bord de mer ....................................................... 171 Rangement pour une durée prolongée ............................................................ 171 Usage avec précaution de l’appareil photo dans les environnements humides .........................................................................................................................172 Autres avertissements .............................................................................................. 172 A propos des cartes mémoire ............................................................................ 173 Cartes mémoires compatibles .............................................................................. 173 Capacité de la carte mémoire ............................................................................... 174 Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire ................................................. 176 A propos de la batterie ......................................................................................... 177 Caractéristiques de la batterie .............................................................................. 177 Autonomie de la batterie ........................................................................................ 178 Message de batterie faible ..................................................................................... 178 Remarques à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie ........................................ 178 Avertissements à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie ................................ 179 Remarques concernant le chargement de la batterie .................................. 179 Remarques à propos de la mise en charge avec raccordement à un ordinateur ............................................................................................................180 Utilisez et recyclez les batteries et les chargeurs avec soin ........................ 180 13 Concepts de photographie Photographie debout Composez votre prise de vue. Tenez-vous debout, bien droit, les pieds dans le prolongement de vos épaules et conservez vos coudes pointés vers le bas. Postures pour les prises de vue Pour stabiliser l’appareil et prendre une bonne photo, une posture correcte est nécessaire. Même si vous tenez l’appareil photo correctement, une mauvaise posture peut le faire bouger. Tenez-vous debout, bien droit, et restez immobile afin de maintenir l’appareil et l’empêcher de bouger. Afin de réduire les mouvements du corps, retenez votre souffle lorsque vous effectuez une prise de vue avec une vitesse d’obturation lente. Prise en main de l’appareil photo Tenez l’appareil photo de la main droite et placez l’index droit sur la touche du déclencheur. Soutenez l’appareil en plaçant la main gauche sous l’objectif. 14 Concepts de photographie Photographie accroupi Composez votre prise de vue. Accroupissez-vous en plaçant un genou au sol tout en vous tenant droit. Utilisation de l’écran Pour prendre des photos en plongée ou en contre-plongée, inclinez l’écran vers le haut ou le bas. Vous pouvez incliner l’écran jusqu’à 90° vers le haut ( ) ou 45° vers le bas ( ). • Laissez l’écran fermé ( ) lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil photo. • Inclinez l’écran en respectant scrupuleusement les angles autorisés. Le non-respect de cette recommandation risque d’endommager l’appareil photo. 15 Concepts de photographie Photo en contre-plongée Une photo en contre-plongée est prise par un appareil photo placé audessous de la ligne de vision, en regardant le sujet de dessous. Photo en plongée Une photo en plongée est prise par un appareil photo placé au-dessus de la ligne de vision, en regardant le sujet de dessus. 16 Concepts de photographie Ouverture L’ouverture, que l’on peut désigner par un trou qui contrôle la quantité de lumière qui pénètre dans l’appareil photo, fait partie des trois facteurs qui déterminent l’exposition. L’intérieur de l’ouverture contient de fines lamelles de métal qui s’ouvrent et se referment afin de laisser la lumière passer à travers l’ouverture et entrer dans l’appareil photo. La taille de l’ouverture est étroitement liée à la luminosité d’une photo : plus l’ouverture est importante, plus la photo est claire. Moins elle l’est, plus la photo est foncée. Tailles d’ouverture Ouverture minimale Ouverture moyenne Ouverture maximum Photo plus sombre (ouverture réduite) Photo plus claire (ouverture large) La taille de l’ouverture est représentée par une valeur désignée par « nombre F ». Le nombre f se détermine par la distance focale divisée par le diamètre de l’objectif. Par exemple, si un objectif avec une distance focale de 50 mm a pour nombre f F2, le diamètre de l’ouverture est de 25 mm (50 mm ÷ 25 mm = F2).Plus le nombre f est faible, plus la taille de l’ouverture est importante. La taille de l’ouverture est définie en tant que valeur d’exposition (EV). Augmenter la valeur d’exposition (+1 EV) signifie que la quantité de lumière double. Baisser la valeur d’exposition (-1 EV) signifie que la quantité de lumière est réduite de moitié. Vous pouvez également utiliser la fonction de compensation de l’exposition afin d’effectuer un réglage de quantité de lumière fin, en subdivisant les valeurs d’exposition par 1/2, 1/3 EV, et ainsi de suite. +1 EV F1.4 F2 F2.8 F4 F5.6 F8 -1 EV Niveaux de la valeur d’exposition 17 Concepts de photographie Valeur d’ouverture et profondeur de champ En contrôlant l’ouverture, vous pouvez flouter l’arrière plan d’une photo ou le rendre plus net. Ceci est étroitement lié à la profondeur de champ (DOF) qui peut être définie comme faible ou élevée. Une photo avec une profondeur de champ (DOF) Une photo avec une faible profondeur de champ (DOF) L’intérieur de l’ouverture contient plusieurs lamelles. Ces lamelles se déplacent simultanément et contrôlent la quantité de lumière qui passe à travers le centre de l’ouverture. Lors de prises de vues réalisées de nuit, le nombre de lamelles joue sur l’aspect de la lumière. Pour un nombre donné de lamelles dans l’ouverture, la lumière est divisée par le nombre de sections correspondant. Si le nombre de lamelles est impair, le nombre de sections est double. Par exemple, une ouverture disposant de 8 lamelles divise la lumière en 8 sections alors qu’une ouverture disposant de 7 lamelles la divise en 14 sections. 7 lamelles 8 lamelles 18 Concepts de photographie Vitesse d’obturation La vitesse d’obturation est définie par la durée nécessaire à l’ouverture et à la fermeture de l’obturateur. Dans le cadre de la luminosité d’une photo, la vitesse d’obturation constitue un facteur important car elle contrôle la quantité de lumière qui passe à travers l’ouverture avant d’atteindre le capteur d’images. Généralement, la vitesse d’obturation est réglable manuellement. La mesure de la vitesse d’obturation est connue sous le nom de « Valeur d’exposition » (EV), qui se caractérise par des intervalles de 1 s, 1/2 s, 1/4 s, 1/8 s, 1/15 s, 1/1 000 s, 1/2 000 s, et ainsi de suite. Exposition +1 EV -1 EV 1 s 1/2 s 1/4 s 1/8 s 1/15 s 1/30 s Vitesse d’obturation Par conséquent, plus la vitesse d’obturation est élevée, moins la lumière pénètrera et plus la vitesse d’obturation est faible, plus la lumière pénètrera. Comme présenté sur la photo ci-dessous, une vitesse d’obturation lente laisse plus de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer, la photo devient donc plus claire. Par ailleurs, une vitesse d’obturation rapide accorde moins de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer. La photo devient plus sombre et immobilise un sujet en mouvement plus facilement. 0,8 s 0,004 s 19 Concepts de photographie Sensibilité ISO L’exposition d’une image est déterminée par la sensibilité de l’appareil. Cette sensibilité est basée sur des standards photographiques internationaux, connus sous le nom de standards ISO. Sur les appareils numériques, cette échelle de sensibilité est utilisée pour représenter la sensibilité du mécanisme numérique qui capture l’image. Lorsque le nombre double, la sensibilité ISO double également. Par exemple, une sensibilité définie sur ISO 200 peut capturer des images deux fois plus vite qu’une sensibilité définie sur ISO 100. Néanmoins, des paramètres ISO élevés peuvent causer du « bruit »—petites tâches, points, et autres phénomènes qui donnent à la photo une apparence bruyante ou sale. En règle générale, il vaut mieux utiliser une faible sensibilité ISO afin d’éviter la présence de bruit sur vos photos, sauf si vous effectuez une prise de vue dans un environnement sombre ou de nuit. Changements de la qualité et de la luminosité en fonction de la sensibilité ISO Une faible sensibilité ISO signifie que l’appareil photo est moins sensible à la lumière et que vous avez besoin de plus de lumière pour une exposition optimale. Lorsque vous utilisez une faible sensibilité ISO, choisissez une ouverture plus importante ou réduisez la vitesse d’obturation afin de laisser plus de lumière pénétrer dans l’appareil photo. Par exemple, une faible sensibilité ISO au cours d’une journée ensoleillée où la lumière est abondante ne nécessite pas une vitesse d’obturation lente. Néanmoins, dans un endroit sombre ou de nuit, une faible sensibilité ISO rendent les photos floues. Il est donc recommandé d’augmenter la sensibilité ISO de manière modérée. Photo prise avec un trépied et une sensibilité ISO élevée Une photo floue avec une faible sensibilité ISO 20 Concepts de photographie Façon dont le réglage de l’ouverture, de la vitesse d’obturation et de la sensibilité ISO contrôlent l’exposition En photographie, les paramètres d’ouverture, de vitesse d’obturation et de sensibilité ISO sont étroitement liés. Les paramètres d’ouverture contrôlent et régulent la quantité de lumière qui pénètre dans l’appareil photo, alors que la vitesse d’obturation détermine la durée au cours de laquelle la lumière peut pénétrer. La sensibilité ISO correspond à la vitesse à laquelle un appareil photo réagit à la lumière. Ensemble, ces trois aspects sont désignés en tant que triangle d’exposition. Un changement de la vitesse d’obturation, de la valeur d’ouverture ou de la sensibilité ISO peut être compensé par un réglage des autres valeurs pour maintenir la quantité de lumière. Néanmoins, les résultats varient en fonction des paramètres utilisés. Par exemple, la vitesse d’obturation est utile pour capturer des mouvements, l’ouverture permet de contrôler la profondeur de champ et la sensibilité ISO le grain d’une photo. Paramètres Résultats Valeur d’ouverture Large ouverture = plus de lumière Ouverture étroite = moins de lumière Large = petite profondeur de champ Etroit = grande profondeur de champ Paramètres Résultats Vitesse d’obturation Vitesse rapide = moins de lumière Vitesse lente = plus de lumière Rapide = image nette Lente = image floue Sensibilité ISO Haute sensibilité = plus de sensibilité à la lumière Basse sensibilité = moins de sensibilité à la lumière Haute = plus de grain Basse = moins de grain 21 Concepts de photographie Corrélation entre la longueur de focale, l’angle et la perspective La distance focale, exprimée en millimètres, correspond à la distance séparant le milieu de l’objectif du foyer de mise au point. Elle influe sur l’angle et la perspective des images capturées. Une distance focale courte génère un angle de vision étendu, ce qui permet de photographier un plan large. Une distance focale longue génère un angle de vision étroit, ce qui permet de photographier au téléobjectif. Longueur de focale courte plan large angle large objectif angle large Longueur de focale longue photo au téléobjectif angle étroit téléobjectif Observez les photos ci-dessous et comparez les différences. Angle 18 mm Angle 55 mm Angle 200 mm En temps normal, un objectif grand angle convient pour réaliser des photos de paysages, tandis qu’un objectif à angle étroit est recommandé pour les photos d’évènements sportifs ou les portraits. 22 Concepts de photographie Profondeur de champ Les plus belles photos de nature morte ou de portraits sont celles dont l’arrière plan est hors-mise au point et sur lesquelles le sujet ressort. En fonction des zones mises au point, une photo peut être floue ou nette. Ceci est désigné par « une faible profondeur de champ » ou « une profondeur de champ élevée ». La profondeur de champ est la zone mise au point autour du sujet. C’est pourquoi, une faible profondeur de champ signifie que la zone mise au point est étroite, tandis qu’une profondeur de champ élevée élargit la zone mise au point. Une photo avec une faible profondeur de champ, qui met le sujet en évidence et dont le reste est flou, peut être obtenue en utilisant un téléobjectif ou en sélectionnant une faible valeur d’ouverture. A l’opposé, une photo avec une profondeur de champ élevée et dont chaque élément est nettement mis au point peut être obtenue en utilisant un objectif grand angle ou en sélectionnant une valeur d’ouverture élevée. Profondeur de champ réduite Profondeur de champ élevée Quels sont les éléments qui contrôlent les effets hors-mise au point ? La profondeur de champ dépend de la valeur d’ouverture Plus l’ouverture est large (par définition, plus la valeur d’ouverture est basse), plus la profondeur de champ est faible. Dans une situation où les autres valeurs telles que la vitesse d’obturation et la sensibilité ISO sont égales, une faible valeur d’ouverture résulte en une faible profondeur de champ sur une photo. 55 mm F5.7 55 mm F22 23 Concepts de photographie La profondeur de champ dépend de la longueur de focale Plus la longueur de focale est importante, plus la profondeur de champ est faible. Pour réaliser une prise de vue avec une faible profondeur de champ, un téléobjectif disposant d’une longueur de focale importante est mieux adapté qu’un objectif grand angle à courte profondeur de champ. Photo prise avec un objectif grand angle 18 mm Photo prise avec un objectif télescopique 100 mm La profondeur de champ dépend de la distance entre le sujet et l’appareil photo Plus la distance entre le sujet et l’appareil photo est courte, plus la profondeur de champ est faible. C’est pourquoi, prendre une photo rapprochée d’un sujet a pour conséquence une faible profondeur de champ. Photo prise avec un objectif télescopique 100 mm Photo prise à proximité du sujet 24 Concepts de photographie Aperçu optique Vous pouvez appuyer sur la touche de personnalisation afin d’afficher l’aperçu optique avant de prendre une photo. L’appareil photo règle l’ouverture sur les paramètres prédéfinis et affiche le résultat sur l’écran. Affectez la fonction Aperçu optique à la touche de personnalisation. (p. 150) Composition Il est passionnant de prendre des photos des merveilles du monde à l’aide d’un appareil photo. Néanmoins, et quelle que soit la beauté de ces merveilles, une mauvaise composition ne peut en reproduire fidèlement l’aspect. En matière de composition, il est très important de hiérarchiser les sujets. En photographie, la composition signifie la disposition des éléments d’une scène. En règle générale, une bonne composition doit obéir à la règle des tiers. Règle des tiers La règle des tiers consiste à diviser l’image en un quadrillage 3x3 formé de rectangles de taille égale. Pour composer des photos qui mettent le mieux en valeur le sujet, veillez à ce que le sujet soit placé dans l’un des quatre coins du rectangle central. 25 Concepts de photographie L’utilisation de la règle des tiers permet de créer des photos bénéficiant d’une composition équilibrée et saisissante. Voir quelques exemples ci-dessous. Photos avec deux sujets Si votre sujet se trouve à l’une des extrémités de la photo, la composition semblera déséquilibrée. Vous pouvez équilibrer la photo en capturant un second sujet placé à l’extrémité opposée. Sujet 1 Sujet 2 Sujet 1 Sujet 2 Instable Stable Le fait de centrer l’horizon sur une photo de paysage crée une impression de déséquilibre. Equilibrez la photo en déplaçant l’horizon vers le haut ou vers le bas. Sujet 1 Sujet 2 Sujet 1 Sujet 2 Instable Stable 26 Concepts de photographie Nombre guide du flash Le numéro de modèle d’un flash indique la puissance du flash. Ainsi, la quantité de lumière maximale créée est représentée par une valeur appelée « nombre guide ». Plus le nombre est élevé, plus le flash est puissant. Le nombre guide s’obtient en multipliant la distance entre le flash et le sujet par la valeur d’ouverture, lorsque la sensibilité ISO est définie sur 100. Nombre guide = Distance flash-sujet X Valeur d’ouverture Valeur d’ouverture = Nombre guide / Distance flash-sujet Distance flash-sujet = Nombre guide / Valeur d’ouverture Par conséquent, si vous connaissez le nombre guide d’un flash, vous pouvez estimer la distance flash-sujet lorsque vous réglez le flash manuellement. Par exemple, si un flash possède le nombre guide NG 20 et est à 4 mètres de distance du sujet, la valeur d’ouverture optimale est de F5.0. Flash La lumière est l’un des éléments les plus importants en photographie. Il n’est, cependant, pas simple d’avoir la quantité de lumière suffisante quel que soit le moment ou l’endroit. L’utilisation d’un flash vous permet d’optimiser les réglages de lumière et de créer différents effets. Le flash, également appelé éclairage stroboscopique ou laser, permet de créer un niveau d’exposition satisfaisant dans des conditions de faible éclairage. Il est également utile dans des conditions de fort éclairage. Par exemple, le flash peut être utilisé pour compenser l’exposition de l’ombre d’un sujet ou pour capturer à la fois le sujet et l’arrière-plan dans des situations de contre jour. Avant correction Après correction 27 Concepts de photographie Prise de vue avec flash indirect La prise de vue avec flash indirect se réfère à une méthode qui redirige la lumière du sujet vers le plafond ou les murs de sorte que la lumière se répartisse de manière égale autour du sujet. En règle générale, les prises de vue réalisées avec le flash peuvent manquer de naturel et projettent des ombres. Au contraire, les sujets sur les photos prises avec la prise de vue avec flash indirect ne projettent pas d’ombres et apparaissent plus douces car la lumière est plus diffuse. Section 1 Mon appareil photo Découvrez les différents composants de votre appareil photo, les icônes affichées à l’écran, les différents objectifs disponibles, les accessoires en option et les fonctions de base. Mon appareil photo 29 Mise en route Contenu du coffret Sortez le téléphone de son coffret et vérifiez que tous les éléments suivants sont présents : Appareil photo (y compris le capuchon et le cache de la griffe porte-accessoire) Adaptateur secteur / Câble USB Batterie rechargeable Flash externe CD-ROM (Mode d’emploi inclus) DVD-ROM Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Guide de demarrage rapide Dragonne • Les illustrations peuvent différer par rapport au produit fourni. • Vous pouvez acheter des accessoires en option auprès d’un revendeur ou d’un centre de service Samsung. Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de problème consécutif à l’utilisation d’accessoires non autorisés. Pour en savoir plus sur les accessoires, consultez la page 195. Mon appareil photo 30 Présentation de l’appareil photo N°. Nom 1 Molette de sélection du mode • t : mode Scènes automatiques (p. 53) • P : mode Programme (p. 55) • A : mode Priorité ouverture (p. 57) • S : mode Priorité Vitesse (p. 58) • M : mode Manuel (p. 59) • i : mode Priorité objectif (p. 60) • s : mode Intelligent (p. 64) • B : Wi-Fi (p. 122) 2 Molette de réglage • Sur l’écran d’accueil : accéder à l’élément de menu souhaité. • Dans le panneau Intelligent : régler une option sélectionnée. • En mode Prise de vue : régler la vitesse d’obturation ou la valeur d’ouverture dans certains modes de prise de vue et modifier la taille de la zone de mise au point. • En mode Lecture : afficher des miniatures, agrandir ou réduire une photo, ou ouvrir ou fermer un dossier de clichés pris en mode Continu ou Rafale en mode Lecture. 3 Touche DIRECT LINK : lancer une fonction Wi-Fi prédéfinie. (p. 32) N°. Nom 4 Microphone 5 Cache de la griffe porte-accessoire 6 Griffe porte-accessoire 7 Anneau d'attache de la dragonne 8 Capteur d'images 9 Antenne interne / Étiquette NFC * Eviter tout contact avec l’antenne interne lors de l’utilisation du réseau sans fil. 10 Haut-parleur 11 Touche de déverrouillage de l’objectif 12 Monture de l'objectif 13 Repère d’installation de l’objectif 14 Voyant AF / Voyant du retardateur 15 Interrupteur Marche / Arrêt 16 Déclencheur 1 2 3 4 5 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 6 4 8 7 16 15 Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo 31 N°. Nom 1 Touche d’enregistrement vidéo Démarrez un enregistrement vidéo. 2 Touche de réglage de la valeur d’exposition (p. 102) Maintenir la touche enfoncée, puis tourner la molette de réglage pour régler la valeur d’exposition. En mode M, la valeur d’ouverture est ajustée. 3 Touche Fn Accéder au panneau Intelligent et régler certains paramètres. 4 o touche • Sur l’écran d’accueil : enregistrer les options sélectionnées. • En mode Prise de vue : sélectionnez une zone de mise au point manuellement dans certains modes de prise de vue. 5 Touche de navigation • En mode Prise de vue - D : afficher les paramètres de l’appareil photo et modifier les options. - I : sélectionner une sensibilité ISO. - C : sélectionner une option de prise de vue. - F : sélectionner un mode de mise au point automatique. • Dans d’autres cas Déplacer respectivement le point actif vers le haut, le bas, la gauche, la droite. N°. Nom 6 Touche Supprimer / Personnaliser • En mode Prise de vue : exécuter la fonction définie (p. 150). • En mode Lecture : supprimez des fichiers. 7 Touche Lecture Activez le mode Lecture. 8 Voyant d'état Indique l’état de l’appareil photo. • Clignotement : lors de l’enregistrement d’une photo, de la capture d’une vidéo, de l’envoi de données vers un ordinateur, de la connexion à un réseau local sans fil ou l’envoi d’une photo. • Fixe : en l’absence de transfert de données, lorsque le transfert des données vers un ordinateur est terminé ou lors de la mise en charge de la batterie. 9 Touche MENU Accédez aux options ou aux menus. 5 6 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo 32 N°. Nom 1 USB et port de déverrouillage du déclencheur Brancher l’appareil photo sur un ordinateur, un téléviseur ou au port de déverrouillage de l’obturateur. Utiliser un câble de déverrouillage de l’obturateur avec un trépied pour réduire le bougé de l’appareil photo. 2 Port HDMI 3 Trappe batterie / carte mémoire Insérez une carte mémoire et une batterie. 4 Écran • Pour prendre des photos en plongée ou en contre-plongée, incliner l’écran vers le haut ou le bas. (p. 14) • Appuyez sur l’écran pour sélectionner un menu ou une option. (p. 36) 5 Douille pour trépied Utilisation de la touche DIRECT LINK La touche [DIRECT LINK] vous permet d’activer facilement la fonction Wi-Fi. Appuyez sur [DIRECT LINK] pour revenir au mode précédent. Configuration de la touche DIRECT LINK Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche [DIRECT LINK] vous pouvez sélectionner la fonction Wi-Fi souhaitée. (p. 150) Pour définir une option DIRECT LINK : En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ 5 ĺ Attribution touches ĺ DIRECT LINKĺ une option. 4 5 1 2 3 Mon appareil photo 33 Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire Découvrez comment installer la batterie et une carte mémoire en option dans l’appareil photo. Carte mémoire Insérez une carte mémoire en orientant la puce vers le bas. Batterie rechargeable Insérez la batterie en orientant le logo Samsung vers le haut. Retrait de la batterie et de la carte mémoire Batterie rechargeable Loquet de la batterie Faites glisser le verrou vers le haut pour libérer la batterie. Carte mémoire Appuyez doucement sur la carte pour la faire sortir de l’appareil photo, puis retirezla entièrement de son emplacement. Utilisation de l’adaptateur pour carte mémoire Pour utiliser des cartes de type micro avec ce produit, un ordinateur ou un lecteur de carte mémoire, insérez la carte dans un adaptateur. Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire ou la batterie lorsque le voyant lumineux de l’appareil photo clignote. Vous risquez d’endommager les données stockées sur la carte mémoire ou dans votre l’appareil photo. Mon appareil photo 34 Mise en charge de la batterie et mise sous tension de l’appareil photo Chargement de la batterie Vous devez charger complètement la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil photo pour la première fois. Branchez l’extrémité la plus fine du câble USB sur l’appareil photo, puis l’autre extrémité du câble sur un adaptateur secteur. Voyant d’état • Voyant rouge allumé : en charge • Voyant rouge éteint : chargement éteint • Voyant rouge clignotant : erreur • Utilisez uniquement l’adaptateur secteur et le câble USB fournis avec votre appareil photo. Dans le cas contraire, la batterie de l’appareil photo risque de ne pas se recharger ou de fonctionner correctement. • Vous pouvez recharger la batterie à l’aide du câble USB uniquement lorsque l’appareil photo est allumé. Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo. Positionnez l’interrupteur Marche / Arrêt sur ON. • Pour éteindre l’appareil photo, positionnez l’interrupteur Marche / Arrêt sur OFF. • L’écran de configuration initiale apparaît lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo pour la première fois. (p. 35) Mon appareil photo 35 Configuration initiale Lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo pour la première fois, l’écran de configuration initiale s’affiche. La langue est réglée selon le pays ou la région où l’appareil photo est vendu. Vous pouvez la modifier et sélectionner la langue de votre choix. Vous pouvez également sélectionner un élément en appuyant dessus à l’écran. 1 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Fuseau horaire, puis appuyez sur [F] ou [o]. 2 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour sélectionner un fuseau horaire, puis appuyez sur [o]. Retour Définir Fuseau horaire [GMT +00:00] Londres [GMT -01:00] Cap Vert [GMT -02:00] Açores [GMT -03:00] Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo [GMT -03:30] Terre-Neuve 3 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Date & heure, puis appuyez sur [F] ou [o]. Retour Définir Date & heure Année Mois Jour Heure Min Heure d/'été • L’affichage peut différer en fonction de la langue sélectionnée. 4 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour sélectionner un élément (Année / Mois / Jour / Heure / Min / Heure d/'été). 5 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour définir une option, puis appuyez sur [o]. 6 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Type date, puis appuyez sur [F] ou [o]. 7 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour sélectionner un format de date, puis appuyez sur [o]. 8 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Type d'heure, puis appuyez sur [F] ou [o]. 9 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour sélectionner un format d’heure, puis appuyez sur [o]. 10 Appuyez sur [m] pour terminer la configuration initiale. Mon appareil photo 36 Sélection de fonctions (options) Sélection avec des touches Tournez la molette de réglage ou appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour vous déplacer, puis appuyez sur [o] pour sélectionner une option. Sélection à l’aide de l’écran tactile N’utilisez pas d’objets pointus, comme des crayons ou des stylos, pour appuyer sur l’écran. Vous risqueriez de l’endommager. Appuyer : appuyez sur une icône pour sélectionner un menu ou une option. AllShare Play MobileLink Remote Viewfinder Sauvegarde automatique Courriel Réseaux sociaux et Cloud Faire glisser : maintenez une zone à l’écran appuyée, puis déplacez-la à l’aide du doigt. AutoShare Format photo Qualité ISO Bal. des blancs Retour Sélect. Mon appareil photo > Sélection de fonctions (options) 37 Effleurer : faites glisser le doigt à travers l’écran. • L’écran tactile peut ne pas reconnaître votre requête si vous appuyez sur plusieurs éléments à la fois. • Lorsque vous appuyez sur un élément à l’écran ou que vous le faites glisser, cela peut entraîner des décolorations. Il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement, mais d’une caractéristique de l’écran tactile. N’appuyez pas trop fort sur l’écran pour minimiser cet effet de décoloration. • L’écran tactile peut ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous utilisez l’appareil photo dans un environnement extrêmement humide. • L’écran tactile peut ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous installez un film protecteur ou tout autre accessoire sur l’écran. • Selon l’angle de vue, la luminosité de l’écran peut parfois sembler insuffisante. Réglez la luminosité ou l’angle de vue afin d’améliorer la luminosité. Utilisation de l’option Appuyez sur [m] ou sur à l’écran, puis modifiez les options ou m les paramètres de prise de vue. Ex. : définir la taille de la photo en mode P 1 Passez au mode P à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Appuyez sur [m] ou . 3 Appuyez sur [C] ĺ [D/I] pour accéder à 1, puis appuyez sur [o]. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur 1 à l’écran. 4 Tournez la molette de réglage ou appuyez sur [D/I] pour accéder à l’option Format photo, puis appuyez sur [o]. • Vous pouvez également faire défiler la liste et appuyer sur une option. Retour Sélect. AutoShare Format photo Qualité ISO Bal. des blancs Mon appareil photo > Sélection de fonctions (options) 38 5 Tournez la molette de réglage ou appuyez sur [D/I] pour accéder à une option, puis appuyez sur [o]. • Vous pouvez également faire défiler la liste et appuyer sur une option. • Appuyez sur [m] ou Retour pour revenir au menu précédent. Retour Définir AutoShare Format photo Qualité ISO Bal. des blancs 5472x3648 (3:2) 3888x2592 (3:2) 2976x1984 (3:2) 1728x1152 (3:2) 5472x3080 (16:9) 6 Appuyez sur [m] ou Retour pour revenir au mode Prise de vue. Utilisation du panneau intelligent Appuyez sur [f] ou à l’écran pour accéder à certaines fonctions telles que Exposition, ISO et Balance des blancs. Ex. : régler la valeur d’exposition en mode P 1 Passez au mode P à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Appuyez sur [f] ou . Mon appareil photo > Sélection de fonctions (options) 39 3 Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour accéder à l’option EV, puis appuyez sur [o]. • Vous pouvez sélectionner directement une option en tournant la molette de réglage sans appuyer sur [o]. • Vous pouvez également sélectionner une option en appuyant dessus. EV : 0.0 Régler Vous pouvez également régler certaines options en les faisant glisser. Retour 4 Tournez la molette de réglage ou appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler la valeur d’exposition, puis appuyez sur [o]. • Vous pouvez également faire glisser la molette sur l’écran, puis sélectionner Définir pour régler l’option. EV : 0.0 Retour Définir Mon appareil photo 40 Icônes affichées à l’écran Photographier 1 2 3 London 1. Informations de prise de vue Icône Description Mode Prise de vue Date actuelle Heure actuelle GPS activé* London Informations de localisation* Carte mémoire non insérée** Verrouillage automatique de l’exposition (p. 103) Nombre de photos disponibles • : chargement terminé • : chargement partiel • (rouge) : vide (recharger la batterie) Icône Description Cadre de mise au point automatique Zone de mesure sélective Mouvements de l’appareil photo Echelle de la mise au point manuelle Indicateur de niveau (p. 41) Histogramme (p. 150) Mise au point Vitesse obturateur Valeur d’ouverture Valeur de réglage de l’exposition Sensibilité ISO (p. 75) * Ces icônes apparaissent lorsque vous utilisez un module GPS en option. ** Les photos prises sans insérer de carte mémoire ne peuvent pas être imprimées ou transférées sur une carte mémoire ou sur un ordinateur. 2. Options de prise de vue Icône Description Taille de la photo Mode de sélection Flash (p. 94) Réglage de l’intensité du flash Mesure de l’exposition (p. 97) Icône Description Mode AF (p. 80) Zone de mise au point Détection des visages Balance des blancs (p. 76) Réglage fin de la balance des blancs Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) (p. 89) Z Z activé Rapport de Fichier RAW Plage dynamique (p. 100) 3. Options de prise de vue (tactile) Icône Description Modification du mode Intelligent*** AutoShare Options de mise au point tactile Options de prise de vue Panneau intelligent *** Cette icône apparaît uniquement lorsque le mode Intelligent est sélectionné. Les icônes affichées varient en fonction du mode sélectionné ou des options choisies. En mode Prise de vue Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran 41 2. Options de prise de vue Icône Description Taille de la vidéo Mode AF (p. 80) Mesure de l’exposition (p. 97) Balance des blancs (p. 76) Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) (p. 89) Réglage fin de la balance des blancs Fondu (p. 105) Multi-mouvements (p. 105) Enregistrement vocal désactivé (p. 106) Les icônes affichées varient en fonction du mode sélectionné ou des options choisies. A propos de l’indicateur de niveau L’indicateur de niveau vous permet d’aligner l’appareil photo par rapport aux lignes horizontale et verticale à l’écran. Si l’indicateur de niveau n’est pas droit, réglez-le à l’aide de la fonction Calibrage horizontal. (p. 152) au format vertical au format horizontal ▲ Aligné ▲ Non aligné Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser l’indicateur de niveau lors d’une prise de vue en orientation portrait. Enregistrement de vidéos 1 2 1. Informations de prise de vue Icône Description Mode Prise de vue Durée d’enregistrement actuelle / Durée d’enregistrement disponible • : chargement terminé • : chargement partiel • (rouge) : vide (recharger la batterie) Vitesse obturateur Valeur d’ouverture Valeur d’exposition Sensibilité ISO (p. 75) Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran 42 En mode Lecture Lecture de vidéos London Informations Mode F No Shutter ISO Metering Flash Focal Length White Balance EV Photo Size Date Icône Description Fichier extrait en continue Fichier en Affichage de photos total de fichiers Numéro de dossier - Numéro de fichier Fichier avec informations de localisation London Informations de localisation Fichier RAW Fichier protégé Informations d’impression ajoutées au fichier (p. 114) Fichier 3D m Menu Lecture / Modifier (tactile) Retouche de photos (tactile) Recadrage d’une vidéo (tactile) Affichage des images sous forme de miniatures (tactile) 1 2 3 London N°. Description 1 Photo capturée 2 Histogramme RGB (p. 150) 3 Mode Prise de vue, Mes. Exposition, Flash, Balance des blancs, Valeur d’ouverture, Vitesse obturateur, ISO, Longueur de focale, Valeur d’exposition, Format photo, Date, Position Lire des vidéos Arreter Enregistrer Icône Description Vitesse de lecture Multi-mouvements Temps de lecture en cours Durée de la vidéo / Afficher le fichier précédent / Reculer. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur l’icône Reculer, la vitesse de balayage change selon la séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.) / Pause ou reprise de la lecture. / Afficher le fichier suivant / Avancer. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur l’icône Avancer, la vitesse de balayage change selon la séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.) Régler le volume ou désactiver le son. Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran 43 Modification des informations affichées Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur [ D] pour changer le type d’affichage. Mode Type d’affichage Prise de vue • Informations de prise de vue de base (Mode Prise de vue, Vitesse d’obturation, Valeur d’ouverture, Valeur d’exposition, Sensibilité ISO, etc.) • Informations de prise de vue de base + touches Options de prise de vue (MENU, Fn, AutoShare, Mise au point tactile) + Mesure de niveau • Informations de prise de vue de base + touches Options de prise de vue + Informations sur les options de prise de vue actuelles (Format photo, Mode d’entraînement, Flash, Mesure de l’exposition, Mode de mise au point, etc.) • Informations de prise de vue de base + touches Options de prise de vue + Informations sur les options de prise de vue actuelles + Histogramme + Date et heure Lecture • Informations de base • Afficher toutes les informations sur le fichier en cours. • Afficher toutes les informations sur la prise de vue, y compris l’histogramme RVB. Mon appareil photo 44 Objectifs Vous pouvez acheter en option des objectifs exclusivement fabriqués pour votre appareil photo de la gamme NX. Découvrez les fonctions de chaque objectif et sélectionnez-en un en fonction de vos besoins et de vos préférences. Présentation de l’objectif Objectif SAMSUNG 18-55 mm F3.5-5.6 OIS III (exemple) 1 2 3 5 4 6 7 8 N°. Description 1 Repère d’installation de l’objectif 2 Bague de zoom 3 Bague de mise au point (p. 88) 4 Repère du parasoleil d’objectif 5 Objectif 6 Touche i-Function (p. 60) 7 Touche Mise au point automatique / Mise au point manuelle (p. 80) 8 Contacts de l’objectif Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’objectif, installez le cache de l’objectif ainsi que le cache de la monture afin de protéger l’objectif contre la poussière et les rayures. Mon appareil photo > Objectifs 45 Objectif SAMSUNG 20-50 mm F3.5-5.6 ED II (exemple) 7 1 2 3 5 6 4 N°. Description 1 Repère d’installation de l’objectif 2 Bouton de verrouillage du zoom 3 Objectif 4 Bague de mise au point (p. 88) 5 Touche i-Function (p. 60) 6 Bague de zoom 7 Contacts de l’objectif Verrouillage et déverrouillage de l’objectif Pour verrouiller l’objectif, déplacez le bouton de verrouillage vers l’extérieur du boîtier de l’appareil photo tout en le maintenant enfoncé, puis tournez la bague de zoom comme indiqué dans l’illustration. Mon appareil photo > Objectifs 46 Pour déverrouiller l’objectif, tournez la bague de zoom comme indiqué dans l’illustration jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez le déclic. Il est impossible de prendre une photo si l’objectif est verrouillé. Objectif SAMSUNG 16 mm F2.4 (exemple) 5 2 1 4 3 N°. Description 1 Touche i-Function (p. 60) 2 Repère d’installation de l’objectif 3 Bague de mise au point (p. 88) 4 Objectif 5 Contacts de l’objectif Mon appareil photo > Objectifs 47 Marquages de l’objectif Découvrez ce que les numéros inscrits sur l’objectif signifient. Objectif SAMSUNG 18-200 mm F3.5-6.3 ED OIS (exemple) 1 2 345 N°. Description 1 Valeur d’ouverture Gamme de valeurs d’ouverture acceptées. Par exemple, 1:3.5–6.3 correspond à une gamme de valeurs maximale d’ouverture allant de 3,5 à 6,3. 2 Longueur de focale Distance entre le centre de l’objectif et son point focal (en millimètres). Cette valeur est exprimée sous forme de plage (longueur minimale à maximale). Des longueurs de focales plus importantes réduisent les angles de vue et agrandissent le sujet. Des longueurs de focales moins élevées agrandissent les angles de vue. 3 ED ED signifie Dispersion extra faible. Un verre à très faible dispersion assure une excellente correction de l’aberration chromatique (déformation qui se produit lorsqu’un objectif ne parvient pas à mettre au point toutes les couleurs vers le même point de convergence). 4 OIS (p. 89) Stabilisation optique de l’image Les objectifs bénéficiant de cette fonction détectent les mouvements internes de l’appareil photo et les suppriment efficacement. 5 Ø Diamètre de l’objectif. Assurez-vous que le diamètre des filtres que vous fixez sur l’objectif soit égal au diamètre de ce dernier. Mon appareil photo 48 Accessoires Vous pouvez utiliser des accessoires, parmi lesquels un flash externe et un module GPS, afin de vous aider à prendre de meilleurs clichés, de façon plus pratique. Pour obtenir davantage d’informations sur les accessoires proposés en option, consultez le mode d’emploi de ceux-ci. • Les illustrations peuvent différer par rapport au produit fourni. • Vous pouvez acheter des accessoires agréé Samsung auprès d’un revendeur ou d’un centre de service Samsung. Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages causés par l’utilisation d’accessoires fournis par d’autres fabricants. Présentation du flash SEF8A (exemple) 1 2 3 N°. Description 1 Flash 2 Cadran de fixation de la griffe porte-accessoire 3 Raccordement de la griffe porte-accessoire Mon appareil photo > Accessoires 49 Fixation du flash externe 1 Retirez le cache de la griffe porte-accessoire de l’appareil photo. 2 Fixez le flash en le faisant coulisser dans la griffe porte-accessoire. 3 Sécurisez le flash en tournant le cadran de fixation de la griffe porte-accessoire dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre. 4 Soulevez le flash pour l’utiliser. Mon appareil photo > Accessoires 50 • Vous pouvez prendre une photo avec un flash non entièrement rechargé, mais il est préférable d’utiliser un flash dont la charge est complète. • Reportez-vous à la page concernant les accessoires en option pour connaître les flashs externes disponibles. (p. 195) • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction du mode de prise de vue sélectionné. • Une pause est marquée entre deux déclenchements du flash. Ne bougez pas tant que le flash ne s’est pas déclenché une seconde fois. • Le flash SEF8A peut ne pas être compatible avec les autres appareils photo de la série NX. • Pour en savoir plus sur les flashs proposés en option, consultez le mode d’emploi des dispositifs en question. Utilisez uniquement des flashs homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de flashs incompatibles peut endommager l’appareil photo. SEF220A (exemple) (en option) 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 N°. Description 1 Icônes affichées à l’écran 2 READY / Touche de test 3 Touche MODE 4 Touche de déverrouillage du flash 5 Touche Marche / Arrêt 6 Cache batterie 7 Flash 8 Touche de changement de mode TELE / WIDE 9 Raccordement de la griffe porte-accessoire Mon appareil photo > Accessoires 51 Description du module GPS (en option) 1 2 3 4 5 N°. Description 1 Voyant d'état 2 Touche Marche / Arrêt 3 Cadran de fixation de la griffe porte-accessoire 4 Raccordement de la griffe porte-accessoire 5 Cache batterie Mise en place du module GPS 1 Retirez le cache de la griffe porte-accessoire de l’appareil photo. 2 Installez le module GPS en le faisant glisser dans la griffe porte-accessoire. Mon appareil photo > Accessoires 52 3 Bloquez le module GPS en tournant le cadran de fixation du sabot sur LOCK. 4 Appuyez sur la touche marche / arêt du module GPS. Mon appareil photo 53 Modes de prise de vue Deux modes de prise de vue simples—Scènes Automatique et Intelligent—vous permettent de réaliser des prises de vue à l’aide de nombreux paramètres automatiques. Des modes supplémentaires vous offrent de plus grandes possibilités de personnalisation des paramètres. Icône Description t Mode Scènes automatiques (p. 53) P Mode Programme (p. 55) A Mode Priorité ouverture (p. 57) S Mode Priorité Vitesse (p. 58) M Mode Manuel (p. 59) i Mode Priorité objectif (p. 60) s Mode Intelligent (p. 64) B Fonctions Wi-Fi (p. 122) t Mode Scènes automatiques En mode Scènes automatiques, l’appareil photo reconnaît l’environnement dans lequel les prises de vue sont effectuées et règle automatiquement les facteurs liés à l’exposition, comme par exemple la vitesse d’obturation, la valeur d’ouverture, la mesure de l’exposition et la compensation de l’exposition. L’appareil photo contrôlant la plupart de ces fonctions, certaines fonctions de prise de vue sont limitées. Ce mode est utile pour capturer rapidement des photos en effectuant le moins possible de réglages. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 54 1 Passez au mode t à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Cadrez le sujet. 3 Enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point. • L’appareil photo sélectionne une scène. L’icône correspondante apparaît à l’écran. Scènes reconnaissables Icône Description Paysages Scènes sur fonds blancs et éclatants Paysages de nuit Portraits de nuit Icône Description Paysages à contre-jour Portraits à contre-jour Portrait Plans rapprochés d’objets Plans rapprochés de texte Couchers de soleil Intérieurs, endroits obscurs Eclairage partiel Plans rapprochés avec éclairage aux spots Portraits avec éclairage aux spots Ciels bleus Zones boisées, où la couleur dominante est le vert Plans rapprochés d’objets colorés L’appareil photo est stabilisé sur le trépied et le sujet ne bouge pas pendant une durée déterminée (lors d’une prise de vue dans des conditions de faible luminosité). Sujets en mouvement Feux d’artifice (lors de l’utilisation d’un trépied) 4 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 55 • Il est possible que l’appareil photo détecte des scènes différentes ou des sujets identiques, en fonction des conditions de prise de vue, comme par exemple les mouvements de l’appareil photo, l’éclairage et la distance à laquelle se trouve le sujet. • Si l’appareil photo ne reconnaît pas de mode scénique, il utilise les paramètres par défaut du mode Scènes automatiques. • Même lorsqu’un visage est détecté, il est possible que l’appareil photo ne sélectionne pas un mode Portrait, selon la position du sujet ou l’éclairage. • Même si vous utilisez un trépied, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne détecte pas le mode Trépied ( ) si le sujet est en mouvement. • La batterie de l’appareil photo se décharge plus rapidement, car l’appareil modifie souvent les paramètres afin de capturer les scènes adéquates. P Mode Programme L’appareil photo règle automatiquement la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture afin d’atteindre une valeur d’exposition optimale. Ce mode est pratique lorsque vous souhaitez réaliser des prises de vue avec une exposition constante tout en ayant la possibilité de régler d’autres paramètres. 1 Passez au mode P à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Définissez les options de votre choix. 3 Pour faire la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre une photo. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 56 Déplacement de programme La fonction Dépl. Programme vous permet de régler la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture tout en conservant la même valeur d’exposition. Lorsque vous faites défiler la molette de réglage vers la gauche, la vitesse d’obturation diminue alors que la valeur d’ouverture augmente. Lorsque vous faites défiler la molette de réglage vers la droite, la vitesse d’obturation augmente alors que la valeur d’ouverture diminue. Vitesse obturation minimum Régler la vitesse d’obturation afin qu’elle ne soit pas plus lente que la vitesse sélectionnée. Toutefois, si la valeur d’exposition optimale ne peut être atteinte, car la sensibilité ISO est égale à la valeur ISO maximale définie par l’option Plage ISO auto, la vitesse d’obturation doit être plus lente que la vitesse d’obturation minimum sélectionnée. Pour régler la vitesse d’obturation minimum En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Vitesse obturation minimum ĺ une option. • Cette fonction est disponible uniquement si la Sensibilité ISO est réglée sur Auto. • Cette fonction est disponible uniquement en mode Programme ou Priorité ouverture. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 57 A Mode Priorité ouverture En mode Priorité ouverture, l’appareil photo calcule automatiquement la vitesse d’obturation en fonction de la valeur d’ouverture choisie. Vous pouvez ajuster la profondeur de champ (DOF) en modifiant la valeur d’ouverture. Ce mode est utile pour prendre des portraits ou des photos de fleurs ou de paysages. Profondeur de champ élevée Faible profondeur de champ 1 Passez au mode A à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Faites défiler les options à l’aide de la molette de réglage pour régler la valeur d’ouverture. • Vous pouvez également régler la valeur d’ouverture en appuyant sur [f] pour sélectionner la valeur d’ouverture, puis en faisant défiler la molette de réglage ou en faisant glisser l’écran. 3 Définissez les options de votre choix. 4 Pour faire la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre une photo. • En situation de faible luminosité, il peut être nécessaire d’augmenter la sensibilité ISO afin d’éviter de prendre des photos floues. • Pour régler la vitesse d’obturation minimum, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Vitesse obturation minimum ĺ une option. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 58 S Mode Priorité Vitesse En mode Priorité Vitesse, l’appareil photo règle automatiquement la vitesse d’ouverture en fonction de la vitesse d’obturation choisie. Ce mode est utile pour capturer des photo de sujets en mouvement ou pour créer des effets de vitesse sur une photo. Par exemple, définissez la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur supérieure à 1/500 s. afin d’immobiliser le sujet. Afin de flouter le sujet, réglez la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur inférieure à 1/30 s. Vitesse d’obturation lente Vitesse d’obturation rapide 1 Passez au mode S à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Tournez la molette de réglage pour régler la vitesse d’obturation. • Vous pouvez également régler la vitesse d’obturation en appuyant sur [f] pour sélectionner la vitesse d’obturation, puis en faisant défiler la molette de réglage ou en faisant glisser l’écran. 3 Définissez les options de votre choix. 4 Pour faire la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre une photo. Afin de compenser le manque de lumière causé par des vitesses d’obturation rapides, augmentez l’ouverture pour permettre à plus de lumière d’entrer. Si vos photos sont toujours trop sombres, augmentez la valeur ISO. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 59 M Mode Manuel Le mode Manuel vous permet d’ajuster la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture manuellement. Dans ce mode, vous pouvez entièrement contrôler l’exposition de vos photos. Ce mode est utile dans des environnements de prise de vue professionnels, comme un studio par exemple, ou lorsqu’il est nécessaire d’affiner les réglages de l’appareil photo. Le mode Manuel est également recommandé pour les prises de vue de nuit ou les feux d’artifice. 1 Passez au mode M à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Tournez la molette de réglage pour régler la vitesse d’obturation. 3 Maintenez la touche [W] enfoncée, puis tournez la molette de sélection pour régler la valeur d’ouverture. • Vous pouvez également régler la vitesse d’obturation ou la valeur d’ouverture en appuyant sur [f] pour sélectionner la vitesse d’obturation ou la valeur d’ouverture, puis en faisant défiler la molette de réglage ou en faisant glisser l’écran. 4 Définissez les options de votre choix. 5 Pour faire la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre une photo. Mode d’exposition Lorsque vous réglez la valeur d’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation, l’exposition change en fonction des réglages. L’écran peut donc s’assombrir. Lorsque cette fonction est activée, la luminosité de l’écran est constante quels que soient les réglages effectués, afin de vous permettre de mieux cadrer votre photo. Pour utiliser le Mode expo. En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Mode expo. ĺ une option. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 60 Utilisation de la fonction Bulb Utilisez la fonction Bulb pour réaliser des prises de vue nocturnes ou pour photographier des ciels étoilés. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’obturateur reste ouvert de façon à vous permettre de créer des effets lumineux animés. Pour utiliser la fonction Bulb Faites défiler la molette de réglage jusqu’à l’extrême gauche afin de sélectionner la fonction Bulb ĺ Maintenez le [Déclencheur] enfoncé pendant la durée souhaitée. • Si vous réglez une valeur ISO élevée ou si vous laissez l’obturateur ouvert pendant longtemps, du bruit risque d’apparaître sur l’image de façon accrue. • Les options de prise de vue, le flash et la fonction Déclenchement par sélection ne peuvent pas être utilisés avec la fonction Bulb. • La fonction Bulb est disponible uniquement en mode Manuel. • Utilisez un trépied et le déclenchement de l’obturateur pour stabiliser l’appareil photo. • Plus l’obturateur reste ouvert, plus l’enregistrement d’une photo est long. N’éteignez pas l’appareil photo lorsque l’enregistrement d’une photo est en cours. • Si vous utilisez cette fonction pendant une durée prolongée, veillez à ce que la batterie soit complètement chargée. i Mode Priorité de l’objectif Vous pouvez régler la profondeur de champ afin d’estomper ou Utilisation de l’option E d’accentuer l’arrière-plan. 1 Passez au mode i à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Appuyez sur [ E i-Function] sur l’objectif pour sélectionner . • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [i-Function], puis sur [C/F] ou faire glisser l’écran pour sélectionner E. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 61 3 Réglez la bague de mise au point pour sélectionner une valeur. • Pour définir cette valeur, vous pouvez également faire défiler la molette de réglage. • Pour définir cette valeur, vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur +/-. Défocalisation Accentué E 4 Pour faire la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre une photo. • Plus les photos sont nettes, plus la valeur d’ouverture augmente et la vitesse d’obturation réduit. Dans les endroits sombres, les photos peuvent être floues. • Cette fonction n’est pas disponible lorsque vous réglez l’option Mode Auto 3D en mode 3D. Usage d’i-Function dans les modes P/A/S/M Vous pouvez faire appel à la touche i-Function sur un objectif compatible pour sélectionner et régler manuellement la vitesse d’obturation, la valeur d’ouverture, la valeur d’exposition, la sensibilité ISO ainsi que la balance des blancs sur l’objectif. 1 Passez au mode P, A, S ou M à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Appuyez sur [i-Function] sur l’objectif pour sélectionner un réglage. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [i-Function], puis sur [C/F] ou faire glisser l’écran pour sélectionner un paramètre. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 62 3 Tournez la bague de mise au point pour sélectionner une option. • Vous pouvez également faire défiler la molette de réglage ou faire glisser l’écran pour sélectionner une option. 4 Pour faire la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre une photo. Options disponibles Mode Prise de vue PASM 3D Ouverture -O-OVitesse obturateur - - OO - EV OOO - O ISO OOOO - Bal. des blancs OOOOO Z OOOO - • Pour sélectionner des éléments à afficher en mode Prise de vue lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche [i-Function] située sur l’objectif, appuyez sur [m] ĺ 5 ĺ Personnalisation iFn ĺ un élément. • Cette fonction n’est pas disponible lorsque vous réglez l’option Mode Auto 3D en mode 3D. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 63 Utilisation de Z La fonction Z vous permet de zoomer sur un sujet avec une altération moindre de la qualité de la photo qu’avec le zoom numérique. Cependant, la résolution des photos peut varier lorsque vous zoomez en tournant la bague de zoom. 1 Passez au mode P, A, S, M ou i à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Appuyez sur [i-Function] sur l’objectif pour sélectionner Z. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [i-Function], puis sur [C/F] ou faire glisser l’écran pour sélectionner Z. 3 Réglez la bague de mise au point pour sélectionner un rapport de zoom. • Vous pouvez également faire défiler la molette de réglage ou faire glisser l’écran pour sélectionner une option. • La résolution des photos varie selon le rapport de zoom lorsque vous utilisez le Z. 3:2 16:9 1:1 x1.2 4560X3040 (13.9M) 4560X2568 (11.7M) 3040X3040 (9.2M) x1.4 3888X2592 (10.1M) 3888X2184 (8.5M) 2592X2592 (6.7M) x1.7 3264X2176 (7.1M) 3264X1840 (6.0M) 2176X2176 (4.7M) x2 2736X1824 (5.0M) 2736X1536 (4.2M) 1824X1824 (3.3M) Les présentes données s’appuient sur une résolution maximale pour chaque proportion d’image. 4 Pour faire la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre une photo. • Z n’est pas disponible si vous réalisez des clichés en rafale. • Z n’est pas disponible si vous prenez des photos au format de fichier RAW. • Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos, la fonction Z est désactivé dès que vous appuyez sur la touche d’enregistrement. • Cette fonction n’est pas disponible lorsque vous réglez l’option Mode Auto 3D en mode 3D. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 64 s Mode Intelligent En mode Intelligent, vous pouvez prendre une photo avec des options prédéfinies pour une scène donnée. 1 Passez au mode s à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sélectionnez une scène. • Pour sélectionner un mode de prise de vue lorsque la molette de sélection est réglée sur s, appuyez sur [f] ou , puis sélectionnez le mode souhaité. Intelligent : Beauté Définir Option Description Beauté Faire un portrait avec des options qui gomment les imperfections du visage. Meilleures poses Prendre plusieurs clichés et remplacer les visages pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible. Paysage Réaliser des clichés de nature morte ou de paysage. Option Description Macro Prendre en photo des petits sujets ou les prendre en gros plan. Action Prendre en photo des sujets se déplaçant à grande vitesse. Ton riche Prendre une photo avec des couleurs dynamiques. Panorama Prendre en photo une scène panoramique en un seul cliché. Cascade Prendre en photo des scènes avec des cascades. Silhouette Prendre en photo des sujets sous forme d’ombres foncées se détachant sur un fond clair. Coucher de soleil Prendre des photos de couchers du soleil avec des tons rouges et jaunes naturels. Nuit Prendre plusieurs photos en conditions de faible luminosité sans flash. L’appareil photo les associe pour créer une image unique plus lumineuse et moins floue. Feux d'artifice Prendre en photo des scènes avec des feux d’artifice. Lumière Prendre en photo des scènes avec des traînées lumineuses dans des conditions de faible luminosité. Photo créative Prendre des photos avec des effets appliqués automatiquement. 3 Pour faire la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre une photo. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 65 Utilisation du mode Meilleures poses En mode Meilleures poses, vous pouvez prendre plusieurs clichés et remplacer les visages pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible. Vous avez alors la possibilité de choisir, pour chacun des individus d’une photo de groupe, le meilleur cliché. 1 Passez au mode s à l’aide de la molette de sélection, puis sélectionnez Meilleures poses. 2 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] pour effectuer la mise au point. 3 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. • L’appareil photo prend 5 photos consécutives. • La première est définie comme arrière-plan. • Les visages sont automatiquement détectés après la mise au point. 4 Appuyez sur un visage pour le remplacer. 5 Sélectionnez la meilleure pose pour les 5 visages photographiés. • Répétez les étapes 4 et 5 pour remplacer les autres visages de la photo. • L’icône apparaît sur l’image recommandée par l’appareil photo. 6 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer la photo. • Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil. • La résolution photo est définie à 5.9M ou à une valeur inférieure. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 66 Prise de photos panoramiques Prenez une photo panoramique en 2D ou 3D. Il n’est possible de visionner les photos panoramiques 3D que sur un téléviseur ou moniteur compatible. 1 Passez au mode s à l’aide de la molette de sélection, puis sélectionnez Panorama. 2 Appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Panorama ĺ Panorama Live ou 3D. 3 Appuyez sur [m] pour revenir au mode Prise de vue. 4 Maintenez le [Déclencheur] enfoncé pour commencer la prise de vue. 5 Tout en maintenant le [Déclencheur] enfoncé, déplacez lentement l’appareil photo dans la direction souhaitée. • En mode Panorama 3D, il ne vous est possible de prendre un cliché que dans le sens horizontal. • Une flèche indiquant la direction du mouvement apparaît et l’intégralité de l’image prise est affichée dans le champ d’aperçu. • Une fois les scènes alignées, l’appareil photo prend alors le prochain cliché automatiquement. 6 Une fois terminé, relâchez le [Déclencheur]. • L’appareil photo enregistre automatiquement les deux photos en une seule. • Si vous relâchez le [Déclencheur] au cours de la prise de vue, la vue panoramique s’interrompt et les photos prises sont enregistrées. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 67 • La résolution varie en fonction de la photo panoramique que vous avez prise. • En mode Panorama, certaines options de prise de vue ne sont pas disponibles. • L’appareil photo peut cesser de photographier du fait de la composition de la prise de vue ou du déplacement du sujet. • En mode Panorama, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne prenne pas l’intégralité de la dernière scène si vous arrêtez le déplacement de l’objectif pour améliorer la qualité de la photo. Pour prendre une scène entière, déplacez l’appareil photo légèrement au-delà du point final. • En mode Panorama 3D, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne prenne pas le tout début ou la toute fin d’une scène en raison de la nature de l’effet 3D. Pour prendre l’intégralité d’un plan, déplacez légèrement l’objectif au-delà des points de début et de fin de la prise de vue à réaliser. • Les photos prises avec la fonction 3D sont enregistrées aux formats JPEG (2D) et MPO (3D). L’écran de l’appareil photo vous permet uniquement de visionner les fichiers au format JPEG. • Pour visionner des fichiers 3D, raccordez votre appareil photo à un téléviseur 3D ou à un moniteur 3D à l’aide d’un câble HDMI en option. Lors du visionnage, portez des lunettes 3D adaptées. • Si vous prenez des photos en mode Panorama 3D, l’effet 3D risque d’être moins prononcé que sur les photos prises avec un objectif 3D. Pour accroître l’effet 3D, fixez l’objectif 3D en option et utilisez le mode 3D. (p. 69) • Pour optimiser les résultats lors de la prise de photos panoramiques, évitez : - de déplacer l’appareil photo trop rapidement ou trop lentement ; - d’interrompre le déplacement de l’appareil photo avant le prochain cliché ; - de déplacer l’appareil photo à une vitesse irrégulière ; - de secouer l’appareil photo ; - d’effectuer la prise de vue dans un endroit sombre ; - de prendre en photo des sujets en mouvement placés trop près de l’objectif ; - les conditions de prise de vue, où la luminosité et la couleur de la lumière, ne cessent de changer. • Les photos réalisées sont automatiquement sauvegardées et la prise de vue est interrompue dans les circonstances suivantes : - si vous changez de direction en pleine prise de vue ; - si vous bougez l’appareil photo trop rapidement ; - si vous ne bougez pas l’appareil photo. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 68 Enregistrement d’une vidéo En mode Prise de vue, vous pouvez enregistrer des vidéos Full HD (1920X1080) en appuyant sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo). L’appareil photo vous permet de réaliser des vidéos d’une durée de 29 minutes et 59 secondes maximum à 60, 30, 24 ou 15 ips et enregistre les fichiers au format MP4 (H.264). La fréquence de 60 ips n’est disponible qu’aux résolutions 1920X1080 et 1280X720, et la fréquence de 24 ips n’est disponible qu’en résolution 1920X810. La fréquence de 15 ips n’est disponible qu’avec certaines options de filtre intelligent. Le son est enregistré via le microphone de l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez définir l’exposition en réglant la valeur d’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation pour le mode sélectionné. Si vous utilisez un objectif dépourvu de commutateur AF / MF pendant l’enregistrement d’une vidéo, appuyez sur [F] pour désactiver ou activer la fonction mise au point automatique. Lorsque vous utilisez un objectif équipé d’un commutateur AF / MF, la fonction de mise au point automatique (AF) fonctionne selon le réglage du commutateur. Sélectionnez Fondu pour appliquer un fondu entrant ou sortant à la scène. Vous pouvez également sélectionner l’option Voix, Réduction vent ou toute autre option permettant de paramétrer l’enregistrement. (p. 106) 1 Passez au mode t, P, A, S, M, i ou s à l’aide de la molette de sélection. • Il est possible que cette fonction soit inopérante dans certains modes. 2 Définissez les options de votre choix. 3 Appuyez sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo) pour lancer l’enregistrement. 4 Appuyez à nouveau sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo) pour l’arrêter. • Le format H.264 (MPEG-4 part10/AVC) est l’un des derniers formats vidéo à mis au point par les organismes internationaux de normalisation ISO-IEC et ITU-T. Etant donné que ce format utilise un taux de compression élevé, davantage de données peuvent être enregistrées dans un espace mémoire plus restreint. • Il est possible que l’appareil photo enregistre le son du stabilisateur d’image si vous avez activé cette option ou bien lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo. • Si vous réglez l’objectif alors que l’enregistrement d’une vidéo est en cours, vous risquez d’enregistrer le son émis par le zoom ou l’objectif. • Lorsque vous utilisez un objectif vidéo en option, le son de la mise au point automatique n’est pas enregistré. • Si vous retirez l’objectif de l’appareil photo lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo, l’enregistrement sera interrompu. Ne changez pas d’objectif lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo. • Si vous installez un microphone externe lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo, le son n’est pas enregistré à partir du microphone externe. (les paramètres précédents sont conservés). Si vous retirez le microphone externe lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo, le son n’est pas enregistré. Eteignez l’appareil photo avant d’installer ou de retirer le microphone. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 69 • Si vous modifiez brusquement l’angle de prise de vue lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo, il est possibe que l’appareil photo ne puisse pas enregistrer les images de façon précise. Utilisez un trépied pour réduire les mouvements de l’appareil photo. • L’appareil photo prend uniquement en charge la fonction Mise au point multiple lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser d’autres fonctions de paramétrage des zones de mise au point automatique, comme par exemple la fonction MPA Détection des visages. • Lorsque la taille du fichier vidéo est supérieure à 4 Go, l’appareil photo interrompt automatiquement l’enregistrement même si la durée maximale d’enregistrement (29 minutes et 59 secondes) n’est pas atteinte. • Si vous utilisez une carte mémoire à vitesse d’écriture lente, il est possible que l’enregistrement de votre vidéo en cours soit interrompu, car la carte ne peut traiter un débit de données trop élevé. Si cela se produit, remplacez la carte utilisée par une autre carte à vitesse d’écriture plus rapide, ou bien réduisez la résolution de l’image (par exemple, de 1280X720 à 640X480). • Utilisez toujours l’appareil photo pour formater une carte mémoire. Si vous formatez les fichiers sur un autre appareil photo ou sur un PC, cela peut affecter la capacité d’enregistrement de la carte ou bien causer la perte de fichiers. • Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche d’enregistrement vidéo, le Z est désactivé. • Lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo avec la même sensibilité ISO, l’écran peut être plus sombre que lors de la prise d’une photo. Réglez la sensibilité ISO. • Lorsque vous enregistrez une vidéo en mode P, A ou S, ISO est automatiquement réglé sur Automatique. Mode 3D Vous pouvez prendre des photos ou enregistrer des vidéos 3D avec un objectif 3D en option. Objectif SAMSUNG 45 mm F1.8 [T6] 2D/3D (exemple) Réglez le commutateur 2D/3D de l’objectif en mode 3D, puis prenez une photo ou enregistrez une vidéo à une distance située entre 1,5 et 5 mètres du sujet. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 70 • Le mode 3D est toujours activé, quel que soit le réglage de la molette de sélection du mode de l’appareil photo (sauf pour B). • Pour utiliser des options 3D automatiques qui permettent à l’appareil photo de régler automatiquement les options de prise de vue en fonction des conditions de prise de vue en mode 3D, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Mode Auto 3D ĺ Activé. • Pour modifier l’option d’enregistrement en 3D, appuyez sur [m] ĺ 6ĺ Mode REC 3D ĺ l’option souhaitée. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description Côte à côte* : affiche deux images côte à côte. Compression d'images : affiche alternativement les images de l’œil gauche et de l’œil droit dans des cadres différents. • Les options de prise de vue disponibles diffèrent par rapport aux autres modes de prise de vue. • Vous pouvez sélectionner 4.1M (2688X1512) ou 2.1M (1920X1080) comme format photo. • La résolution vidéo est réglée sur 1920X1080. • Il est possible que les vidéos enregistrées en 3D soient sombres ou la lecture saccadée. • Une prise de vue à des températures très basses peut entraîner une mauvaise restitution des couleurs et une consommation excessive de la batterie. • La prise de vue risque d’être impossible dans des conditions de luminosité inférieures à 8,5 LV/900 lux. Pour de meilleurs résultats, procédez à la prise de vue lorsque la luminosité est suffisante. • Lorsque vous photographiez des objets contenant des matériaux polarisants, tels que certains écrans, filtres ou lunettes, ou appliquez un matériau polarisant sur votre objectif, les images risquent d’être assombries ou l’effet 3D incorrect. • Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil. • Si vous pivotez l’appareil photo ou si vous l’inclinez verticalement lors de la prise de vue, l’effet 3D risque d’être incorrect. Positionnez l’appareil photo normalement. • Si vous prenez en photo des lumières fluorescentes ou des images affichées par des projecteurs ou des téléviseurs, ces images risquent d’apparaître en noir en raison des effets de scintillement. • En mode 3D, l’option Agrandir x8 de la fonction Aide M. au P. manuelle peut ne pas être disponible. • L’appareil photo affiche les vidéos 3D uniquement en 2D. • Les photos prises avec la fonction 3D sont enregistrées aux formats JPEG (2D) et MPO (3D). L’écran de l’appareil photo vous permet uniquement de visionner les fichiers au format JPEG. • Pour visionner des fichiers 3D, raccordez votre appareil photo à un téléviseur 3D ou à un moniteur 3D à l’aide d’un câble HDMI en option. Lors du visionnage, portez des lunettes 3D adaptées. • Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le flash en mode 3D. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 71 Fonctions disponibles en mode Prise de vue Pour obtenir des informations à propos des fonctions de prise de vue, consultez le chapitre 2. Appuyez sur le raccourci correspondant à chacune des fonctions. Fonction Disponible en Raccourci Format photo (p. 73) P/A/S/M/i/s*/t/3D* - Qualité (p. 74) P/A/S/M/i/s* - ISO (p. 75) P/A/S/M f/I Bal. des blancs (p. 76) P/A/S/M f Assistant photo (p. 79) P/A/S/M f Filtre intelligent (p. 101) P/A/S/M f Mode AF (p. 80) P/A/S/M/i*/s*/3D* f Zone AF (p. 83) P/A/S/M/i*/s* f/F Mise au point tactile (p. 86) P/A/S/M/i/s*/t/3D* - Aide M. au P. manuelle (p. 88) P/A/S/M/i/s/t/3D* - Assistance à la mise au point (p. 88) P/A/S/M/i/s/t - Lien AE à AF (p. 99) P/A/S/M - Fonction Disponible en Raccourci Mode expo. (p. 59) P/A/S/M - OIS (anti-bougé) (p. 89) P/A/S/M/i/s*/t* - Prise de vue (Continue / Mode Rafale / Retardateur / Bracketing) (p. 90) P/A/S/M/i*/s*/t*/3D* f/C Mesure de l’exposition (p. 97) P/A/S/M f Plage dynamique (p. 100) P/A/S/M - Flash (p. 94) P*/A*/S*/M*/i*/s*/t* f Compensation de l'exposition (p. 102) P/A/S f/W Verrouillage de l’exposition (p. 103) P/A/S - * Dans ces modes, certaines fonctions sont limitées. Section 2 Fonctions de prise de vue Découvrez les fonctions que vous pouvez définir en mode Prise de vue. En utilisant les fonctions de prise de vue, vous pouvez personnaliser encore plus vos photos et vos vidéos. Fonctions de prise de vue 73 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Format photo Sélectionner une résolution plus élevée permet d’augmenter le nombre de pixels des photos ou des vidéos afin de pouvoir les imprimer sur du papier grand format ou de les visionner sur un grand écran. Si vous utilisez une résolution élevée, la taille du fichier augmente également. Pour afficher des photos dans un cadre numérique ou en télécharger vers le web, sélectionnez une basse résolution. Pour régler la taille En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Format photo ĺ une option. Icône Taille Recommandé pour 5472x3648 (3:2) Imprimez sur papier A1. 3888x2592 (3:2) Imprimez sur papier A2. 2976x1984 (3:2) Imprimez sur papier A3. 1728x1152 (3:2) Imprimez sur papier A5. 5472x3080 (16:9) Imprimez sur papier A1 ou visionnez sur un téléviseur HD. 3712x2088 (16:9) Imprimez sur papier A3 ou visionnez sur un téléviseur HD. 2944x1656 (16:9) Imprimez sur papier A4 ou visionnez sur un téléviseur HD. 1920x1080 (16:9) Imprimez sur papier A5 ou visionnez sur un téléviseur HD. 3648x3648 (1:1) Imprimez d’une photo carrée sur du papier au format A1. 2640x2640 (1:1) Imprimez d’une photo carrée sur du papier au format A3. 2000x2000 (1:1) Imprimez d’une photo carrée sur du papier au format A4. 1024x1024 (1:1) Imprimez d’une photo carrée sur du papier au format A5. Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Format et résolution 74 Fonctions de prise de vue > Format et résolution Qualité L’appareil enregistre les photos au format JPEG ou RAW. Les photos capturées par un appareil numérique sont souvent converties en format JPEG et stockées dans la mémoire selon les réglages de l’appareil photo au moment de la prise de vue. Les fichiers RAW ne sont pas convertis au format JPEG et sont stockés dans la mémoire sans aucune modification. Les fichiers RAW ont pour extension « SRW ». Pour régler et étalonner l’exposition, la balance des blancs, les tonalités, le contraste et les couleurs des fichiers RAW, ou pour les convertir au format JPEG ou TIFF, utilisez le programme Adobe Photoshop Lightroom fourni sur le DVD-ROM. Pour enregistrer des photos en format RAW, assurez-vous que l’appareil photo dispose de suffisamment de mémoire disponible. Pour définir la qualité En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Qualité ĺ une option. Icône Format Description JPEG Maximale : • Compressée afin d’obtenir la meilleure qualité possible. • Recommandé pour une impression en grand format. JPEG Elevée : • Compressé pour obtenir une meilleure qualité. • Recommandé pour une impression en format normal. Icône Format Description JPEG Normale : • Compressé pour obtenir une qualité normale. • Recommandé pour imprimer en petit format ou pour télécharger vers le web. RAW RAW : • Enregistrez une photo sans perdre de données. • Recommandé pour effectuer des modifications après la prise de vue. RAW+JPEG RAW + Très élevé : enregistrez une photo au format JPEG (qualité maximale) et RAW. RAW+JPEG RAW + Elevé : enregistrez une photo au format JPEG (qualité fine) et RAW. RAW+JPEG RAW + Normal : enregistrer une photo au format JPEG (qualité normale) et RAW. Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Fonctions de prise de vue 75 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue La sensibilité ISO désigne la sensibilité de l’appareil photo à la lumière. Plus la valeur de la sensibilité ISO est importante, plus l’appareil photo est sensible à la lumière. Par conséquent, en sélectionnant une valeur de sensibilité ISO plus élevée, vous pouvez réaliser des prises de vue dans des endroits sombres, en utilisant une vitesse d’obturation plus rapide. Néanmoins, il est possible que cela augmente les effets de bruit électronique et donne un aspect granuleux à la photo. Pour définir la sensibilité ISO En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [I] ĺ une option. Exemples ISO 100 ISO 400 ISO 800 ISO 3200 • Vous pouvez également effectuer ce réglage en appuyant sur [m] ĺ 1ĺ ISO ĺ une option en mode Prise de vue. • Augmentez la valeur ISO dans les endroits où l’utilisation du flash est interdite. En définissant une valeur ISO élevée, vous pouvez obtenir des photos d’une plus grande clarté sans avoir besoin de davantage de lumière. • Afin de réduire le bruit visuel qui peut apparaître sur des photos prises avec une valeur ISO élevée, utilisez la fonction de Réduction du bruit. (p. 146) • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Sensibilité ISO Fonctions de prise de vue 76 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue En photographie, la balance des blancs permet de corriger la dominante de couleur en fonction de l’éclairage ambiant. La couleur des photos dépend du type et de la qualité de la source d’éclairage. Pour que les couleurs de vos photos soient le reflet de la réalité, choisissez des conditions d’éclairage appropriées pour calibrer la balance des blancs, par exemple Bal. des blancs auto, Lumière du jour, Nuageux, Tungstène, ou bien réglez la température des couleurs manuellement. Vous pouvez également régler la couleur des sources lumineuses prédéfinies de façon à ce que les couleurs de la photo correspondent aux véritables couleurs de la scène sous différentes conditions d’éclairage. Pour définir une balance des blancs, En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Bal. des blancs ĺ une option. Icône Description Bal. des blancs auto : automatiser les réglages en fonction des conditions d’éclairage. Lumière du jour : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en extérieur par beau temps. Cette option permet d’obtenir des photos reproduisant au mieux les couleurs naturelles d’une scène. Nuageux : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en extérieur par temps nuageux ou dans un endroit ombragé. Les photos prises par temps nuageux ont tendance à présenter un aspect plus bleuté que celles prises par beau temps. Cette option permet de compenser cet effet. Icône Description Blanc fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue sous un éclairage de type lumière du jour fluorescent. Cette option est particulièrement adaptée à un éclairage fluorescent avec une température de couleurs d’environ 4 200 k. Blanc/Noir fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue sous un éclairage de type lumière du jour fluorescent. Cette option est particulièrement adaptée à un éclairage fluorescent très blanc avec une température de couleurs d’environ 5 000 k. Lumière du jour fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue sous un éclairage de type lumière du jour fluorescent. Cette option est particulièrement adaptée à un éclairage fluorescent légèrement bleuté avec une température de couleurs d’environ 6 500 k. Tungstène : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en intérieur avec des ampoules à incandescence ou des lampes halogène. Les ampoules tungstène incandescentes ont tendance à créer un coloris rougeâtre. Cette option permet de compenser cet effet. Bal.Blancs flash : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue à l’aide d’un flash. Réglage personnalisé : utilisez vos paramètres prédéfinis. Vous pouvez définir manuellement la balance des blancs en appuyant sur [D], et en prenant une feuille de papier blanc en photo. Remplir le cercle de mesure sélective avec la feuille de papier et définir la balance des blancs. Balance des blancs 77 Fonctions de prise de vue > Balance des blancs Icône Description Température couleur : régler manuellement la température des couleurs de la source lumineuse. La température des couleurs est une mesure exprimée en degrés kelvins et qui indique spécifiquement le type de source lumineuse. Au fur et à mesure que la température de la couleur augmente, la gamme de répartition des couleurs devient plus froide. Inversement, au fur et à mesure que la température des couleurs diminue, la gamme de répartition des couleurs devient plus chaude. Appuyez sur [D], puis réglez la température de couleur. Ciel clair Fluorescent haut Fluorescent bas Nuageux Lampe halogène Lumière naturelle Tungstène Lumière de bougie Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Personnalisation des options de préréglage de la balance des blancs Vous pouvez également personnaliser les options prédéfinies de balance des blancs. Pour personnaliser les options prédéfinies En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Bal. des blancs ĺ une option ĺ [D] ĺ tournez la molette de réglage ou appuyez sur [D/I/C/F]. Bal. des blancs : Lumière du jour Retour Définir Annuler Vous pouvez également appuyer sur une zone à l’écran. 78 Fonctions de prise de vue > Balance des blancs Exemples Bal. des blancs auto Lumière du jour Lumière du jour fluorescent Tungstène Fonctions de prise de vue 79 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue L'Assistant photo vous permet d’appliquer des styles à vos photos afin de leur faire adopter différents aspects et créer des impressions particulières. Vous pouvez également créer et enregistrer vos propres styles de photos en réglant la couleur, la saturation, la netteté, et le contraste pour chacun de ces styles. L’application de différents styles ne suit aucune règle particulière, quelles que soient les conditions. Essayez plusieurs styles différents et trouvez les paramètres qui vous conviennent. Pour définir un style de photo En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Assistant photo ĺ une option. Exemples Standard Accentué Portrait Paysage Naturel Rétro Cool Calme Classique • Vous pouvez également régler les valeurs des paramètres de styles prédéfinis. Sélectionnez une option Assistant photo, appuyez sur [D], puis réglez la couleur, la saturation, la netteté ou le contraste. • Pour personnaliser votre assistant photo, sélectionnez , ou , puis réglez la couleur, la saturation, la netteté et le contraste. • Il est impossible de régler en même temps les options de l’Assistant photo et les options Filtre intelligent. Assistant photo (styles de photo) Fonctions de prise de vue 80 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Mode AF Découvrez comment régler la mise au point de l’appareil photo en fonction des sujets. Vous pouvez sélectionner un mode de mise au point adapté au sujet, parmi les modes de Mise au point automatique unique, Mise au point automatique continue et Mise au point manuelle. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, la fonction de mise au point automatique s’active. En mode Mise au point manuelle, vous devez faire pivoter la bague de mise au point sur l’objectif afin d’effectuer une mise au point manuelle. Dans la plupart des cas, vous pouvez effectuer une mise au point en sélectionnant AF unique. Il est difficile d’effectuer une mise au point sur des sujet se déplaçant rapidement ou ayant une couleur similaire à celle de l’arrière-plan. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez un mode de mise au point approprié. Si votre objectif est équipé d’un commutateur AF / MF, vous devez le régler en fonction du mode sélectionné. Réglez le commutateur sur AF lorsque vous sélectionnez les options AF unique ou AF continu. Réglez le commutateur sur MF lorsque vous sélectionnez l’option M.P. manuelle. Si votre objectif est dépourvu d’une touche AF / MF, appuyez sur [F] pour sélectionner le mode AF souhaité. Pour définir le mode Mise au point automatique En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [F] ĺ une option. • Vous pouvez également effectuer ce réglage en appuyant sur [m] ĺ 1ĺ Mode AF ĺ une option en mode Prise de vue. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction l’objectif utilisé. 81 Fonctions de prise de vue > Mode AF AF unique La fonction AF unique est appropriée pour les photos de sujets immobiles. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, la mise au point s’établit dans la zone correspondante. Une fois la mise au point effectuée, la zone devient verte. Mise au point continue Tant que vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo continue d’effectuer la mise au point automatique. Une fois la zone de mise au point établie, cette dernière reste active sur le sujet même lorsque ce dernier est en mouvement. Ce mode est recommandé pour photographier une personne sur une bicyclette, un chien qui court ou une scène de course automobile. 82 Fonctions de prise de vue > Mode AF Mise au point manuelle Vous pouvez effectuer manuellement une mise au point sur un sujet en faisant pivoter la bague de mise au point sur l’objectif. La fonction d’aide M. au P. manuelle vous permet d’effectuer facilement la mise au point. Lorsque vous tournez la bague de mise au point, la zone de mise au point est agrandie. Avec la fonction Focus Peaking, la couleur sélectionnée apparaît autour du sujet photographié. Avec la fonction Focus Peaking, la couleur sélectionnée apparaît sur le sujet photographié. Ce mode est recommandé pour photographier un objet dont la couleur est similaire à celle de l’arrière-plan, une scène de nuit ou un feu d’artifice. Si vous utilisez cette fonction, vous ne pouvez pas régler les options Mise au point tactile, Zone AF et Lien AE à AF. Fonctions de prise de vue 83 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue La fonction Zone AF permet de modifier l’emplacement de ladite zone. D’une manière générale, les appareils photo effectuent une mise au point sur le sujet le plus proche. En présence de plusieurs sujets, il arrive que certains sujets soient involontairement mis au point. Vous pouvez modifier l’emplacement de la zone de mise au point afin d’éviter qu’une mise au point soit effectuée sur des sujets non choisis. En sélectionnant une zone de mise au point appropriée, vous pouvez obtenir une photo plus claire et plus nette. Pour définir la zone de mise au point automatique En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Zone AF ĺ une option. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. • Lorsque le commutateur AF / MF est réglé sur MF, vous ne pouvez pas modifier l’option Zone AF à partir du menu Prise de vue. • Avec l’option MPA Détection des visages, l’appareil photo effectue automatiquement la mise au point sur le cadre blanc. • La détection des visages peut ne pas être efficace selon les options Assistant photo sélectionnées. • Lors d’une mise au point manuelle, la détection des visages peut ne pas être possible. • La détection des visages risque de ne pas fonctionner lorsque : - le sujet est éloigné de l’appareil photo ; - la luminosité est trop forte ou trop faible ; - le sujet n’est pas face à l’appareil photo ; - le sujet porte des lunettes de soleil ou un masque ; - les expressions faciales du sujet changent radicalement ; - le sujet est à contre-jour ou si les conditions d’éclairage sont instables. Mise au point ciblée Vous pouvez définir la mise au point sur une zone en particulier. Appliquez un effet hors-mise au point afin de faire ressortir le sujet. La zone de mise au point de la photo ci-dessous a été repositionée et sa taille a été modifiée afin de l’adapter au visage du sujet. En mode Prise de vue, afin de redimensionner ou de déplacer la zone de mise au point, appuyez sur [o]. Utilisez la touche de navigation pour déplacer la zone de mise au point. Tournez la molette de réglage pour redimensionner la zone de mise au point. Zone AF 84 Fonctions de prise de vue > Zone AF Mise au point multiple L’appareil photo affiche un rectange vert sur les zones de la photo où la mise au point est correctement effectuée. La photo est divisée en deux zones ou plus et l’appareil photo effectue une mise au point sur chaque zone. Ceci est recommandé pour les photos de paysages. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo affiche les zones de mise au point, comme illustré sur la photo ci-dessous. Mise au point avec détection de visage L’appareil photo effectue une mise au point sur les visages en priorité. Il est possible de détecter jusqu’à 10 visages. Ce paramètre est recommandé pour les photos de groupe. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo effectue une mise au point sur les visages, comme cela est présenté sur la photo ci-dessous. Lors d’une prise de vue d’un groupe de personnes, la mise au point effectuée sur le visage de la personne la plus proche s’affiche en blanc tandis que celle effectuée sur les autres personnes s’affiche en gris. 85 Fonctions de prise de vue > Zone AF AF autoportrait Lorsque vous réalisez un autoportrait, il peut être difficile de déterminer si votre visage fait l’objet d’une mise au point ou non. Lorsque cette fonction est activée, la fréquence du bip de l’appareil photo s’accélère lorsque vous rapprochez votre visage du centre de la composition. Fonctions de prise de vue 86 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Mise au point avec suivi La mise au point avec suivi permet de suivre un sujet et d’effectuer automatiquement la mise au point, même si le sujet se déplace ou en cas de changement de cadrage de la prise de vue. Cadre blanc : l’appareil photo effectue un suivi. Cadre vert : la mise au point est effectuée lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course. Cadre rouge : la mise au point a échoué. Sélectionnez une zone focale ou effectuez une mise au point en appuyant sur l’écran. Effectuez ensuite la mise au point sur le sujet et prenez une photo en appuyant sur l’écran. Pour régler la mise au point tactile : En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Mise au point tactile ĺ une option. Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Mise au point tactile La mise au point tactile vous permet de sélectionner une zone focale et d’effectuer une mise au point en appuyant sur l’écran. Point AF La zone focale correspond à la zone que vous touchez à l’écran et la mise au point n’est pas effectuée. Mise au point tactile 87 Fonctions de prise de vue > Mise au point tactile Déclenchement par sélection Un doigt suffit pour prendre une photo. Dès que vous appuyez sur un sujet à l’écran, l’appareil photo effectue automatiquement la mise au point et prend la photo. • Si vous ne sélectionnez aucune zone de mise au point, la mise au point automatique est inopérante. • Le suivi peut s’avérer impossible si : - le sujet est trop petit ; - le sujet bouge de manière excessive ; - le sujet est à contre-jour ou si la luminosité est insuffisante ; - les couleurs ou les motifs sur le sujet et l’arrière-plan sont identiques ; - des motifs horizontaux, tels que des stores, sont présents ; - l’appareil photo n’est pas stable. • En cas d’échec du suivi, la fonctionnalité est réinitialisée. • Si l’appareil photo ne parvient pas à suivre le sujet, la zone de mise au point est réinitialisée. • Si l’appareil photo ne réussit pas à effectuer la mise au point, le cadre de mise au point devient rouge et la fonctionnalité est réinitialisée. Fonctions de prise de vue 88 Fonctions de Fonctions de prise de vue prise de vue En mode Mise au point manuelle, vous devez faire pivoter la bague de mise au point sur l’objectif afin d’effectuer la mise au point. Lorsque vous utilisez la fonction Aide M. au P. manuelle ou Focus Peaking, vous pouvez obtenir une mise au point plus claire. Cette fonction est disponible uniquement sur les objectifs avec lesquels la mise au point manuelle est possible. Aide M. au P. manuelle En mode Mise au point manuelle, vous pouvez agrandir la scène et facilement effectuer la mise au point tout en tournant la bague de mise au point. Pour définir l’aide à la mise au point manuelle En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Aide M. au P. manuelle ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Désactivé La fonction Aide M. au P. manuelle n’est pas utilisée. Agrandir x5* Lorsque vous faites pivoter la bague de mise au point, la zone de mise au point est agrandie jusqu’à 5 fois. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Agrandir x8 Lorsque vous faites pivoter la bague de mise au point, la zone de mise au point est agrandie jusqu’à 8 fois. Assistance à la mise au point En mode de mise au point manuelle, la couleur sélectionnée apparaît sur le sujet photographié afin de vous aider à effectuer la mise au point alors que vous tournez la bague de mise au point. Pour définir les options d'assistance à la mise au point En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Assistance à la mise au point ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Niveau Définir une sensibilité pour détecter le sujet mis au point. (Arrêt, Elevé, Normal*, Bas) Couleur Définir une couleur pour qu'elle apparaisse sur le sujet mis au point. (Blanc*, Rouge, Vert) Assistance à la mise au point Fonctions de prise de vue 89 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Utilisez la fonction de stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) afin de réduire les mouvements de l’appareil photo. La fonction de stabilisation optique de l’image n’est pas disponible avec tous les objectifs. Les mouvements de l’appareil photo se produisent souvent dans des endroits sombres ou lors de la prise de vue en intérieur. Dans ces cas-là, l’appareil photo utilise une vitesse d’obturation plus lente afin d’augmenter la quantité de lumière, ce qui peut donner des photos floues. Vous pouvez éviter ce type de situations en utilisant la fonction OIS. Si l’objectif est équipé d’un interrupteur OIS, positionnez l’interrupteur sur ON pour utiliser la fonction OIS. Pour définir les options OIS En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ OIS (anti-bougé) ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description Arrêt : la fonction OIS est désactivée. (Cette option peut ne pas être disponible avec certains objectifs.) Mode 1* : la fonction OIS s’applique uniquement lorsque vous enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à fond ou à mi-course. Mode 2 : la fonction OIS est toujours activée. Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS, Optical Image Stabilization) Sans correction OIS Avec correction OIS • L’option OIS risque de ne pas fonctionner si : - vous bougez l’appareil photo pour suivre un sujet en mouvement ; - l’appareil photo est instable ; - la vitesse d’obturation est lente (par exemple, si vous sélectionnez Nuit en mode s) ; - le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible ; - vous prenez une photo en gros plan. • Si la fonction OIS est utilisée avec un trépied, les photos peuvent être floues en raison des vibrations du capteur OIS. Désactivez la fonction OIS lorsque vous utilisez un trépied. • Si l’appareil photo est soumis à un choc, l’écran sera flou. Si cela se produit, éteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le. • Utilisez la fonction OIS uniquement si cela est nécessaire, car la batterie se décharge plus rapidement. • Pour définir une option OIS dans le menu, réglez l’interrupteur OIS de l’objectif sur ON. • Cette option peut ne pas être disponible avec certains objectifs. • La position Arrêt peut ne pas être disponible avec certains objectifs. Fonctions de prise de vue 90 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Il vous est possible de définir le type de prise de vue, par exemple Continue, Rafale, Retardateur, etc. Sélectionnez Unique pour prendre une photo à la fois. Sélectionnez Continue ou Mode Rafale pour prendre des photos de sujets se déplaçant rapidement. Sélectionnez BKT AE, BKT NB ou A. photo Bracketing pour régler l’exposition, la balance des blancs ou appliquer les effets de l’assistant photo. Vous pouvez également sélectionner Retardateur pour prendre une photo de vous-même. Pour définir la méthode de prise de vue En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C] ĺ une option. • Vous pouvez également effectuer ce réglage en appuyant sur [m] ĺ 1ĺ Prise de vue ĺ une option en mode Prise de vue. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Unique Prenez une photo à chaque fois que vous appuyez sur [Déclencheur]. Recommandé pour des conditions de prise de vue courantes. Continue Prenez des photos en continu en appuyant sur le [Déclencheur]. Il vous est possible de prendre jusqu’à 5 photos (Rafale faible) ou 8,6 photos (Rafale élevée) par seconde. Si vous sélectionnez Rafale élevée, la fonction de réduction du bruit n’est pas disponible. Prise de vue 91 Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue Mode Rafale Prenez successivement 10 photos par seconde (3 secondes), 15 photos par seconde (2 secondes) ou 30 photos par seconde (1 seconde) lorsque vous appuyez une fois sur le [Déclencheur]. Cette fonctionnalité est recommandée pour prendre des photos de mouvements rapides ou de sujets se déplaçant rapidement, comme par exemple lors de courses automobiles. • Pour définir le nombre de clichés, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C] ĺ Mode Rafale, puis sur [D]. • Le format de la photo est réglé sur 5M. • L’enregistrement d’une photo peut prendre plus de temps. • Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le flash avec cette option. • La vitesse d’obturation doit être supérieure à 1/30 seconde. • Les photos capturées avec cette option peuvent être légèrement agrandies lors de l’enregistrement. • Vous ne pouvez pas régler l’option ISO à une valeur supérieure à ISO 3200. • Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW. Retardateur Capturez une photo après un délai de 2 à 30 secondes. Il est possible de régler le délai par incréments d’une seconde. Pour définir le délai avant le déclenchement, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C] ĺ Retardateur, puis sur [D]. 92 Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue Bracketing d’exposition automatique (BKT AE) Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo réalise 3 clichés consécutifs : l’original, un autre légèrement plus foncé, puis un autre légèrement plus clair. Utilisez un trépied afin d’éviter d’obtenir un résultat flou. Vous pouvez régler les paramètres dans le menu Réglage Bracketing. Exposition -2 Original Exposition +2 Bracketing Balance des blancs (BKT NB) Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo réalise 3 clichés consécutifs : l’original, puis deux autres avec différents paramètres de balance des blancs. La photo originale est réalisée lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. Les deux autres sont réglées automatiquement en fonction de la balance des blancs que vous avez définie. Vous pouvez régler les paramètres dans le menu Réglage Bracketing. WB-2 Original WB+2 Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW. 93 Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue Bracketing Assistant photo (A. photo Bracketing) Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo réalise trois clichés consécutifs, chacun avec différents paramètres de l’Assistant photo. L’appareil photo effectue une prise de vue et applique les trois options de l’Assistant photo que vous avez définies pour la photo prise. Vous pouvez sélectionner trois paramètres différents dans le menu Réglage Bracketing. Accentué Standard Rétro Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW. Réglages de la fonction Bracketing Vous pouvez configurer les options BKT AE, BKT NB et A. photo Bracketing. (p. 147) Pour définir une option de bracketing En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ 5 ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option. Fonctions de prise de vue 94 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Pour obtenir une photo réaliste du sujet, le niveau de luminosité doit être constant. Lorsque la source de luminosité varie, vous pouvez utiliser un flash et créer ainsi un niveau de luminosité constant. Sélectionnez des paramètres appropriés en fonction d’une source de luminosité et d’un sujet. Pour définir les options du flash En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Flash ĺune option. Icône Description Arrêt : ne pas utiliser le flash. Flash intelligent : l’appareil photo règle automatiquement l’intensité du flash en fonction du niveau de luminosité ambiant. Automatique : le flash se déclenche automatiquement dans les endroits sombres. Yeux rouges auto : le flash se déclenche automatiquement et réduit l’effet yeux rouges. Contre jour : le flash se déclenche à chaque fois que vous réalisez une prise de vue. (La luminosité est automatiquement ajustée.) Ctre jour + Yeux rouges : le flash se déclenche à chaque fois que vous réalisez une prise de vue et réduit l’effet yeux rouges. Icône Description 1er Rideau : le flash se déclenche immédiatement après ouverture de l’obturateur. L’appareil photo capture plus rapidement et nettement la photo d’un sujet dans une séquence d’actions. Direction du déplacement de la balle 2e Rideau : le flash se déclenche juste avant que l’obturateur ne se referme. L’appareil photo capture plus lentement et clairement la photo d’un sujet dans une séquence d’actions. Direction du déplacement de la balle • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. • Une pause est marquée entre deux déclenchements du flash. Ne bougez pas tant que le flash ne s’est pas déclenché une seconde fois. • Si vous sélectionnez Arrêt, le flash ne se déclenche pas même si un flash externe est installé. Utilisez uniquement des flashs homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de flashs incompatibles peut endommager l’appareil photo. Flash 95 Fonctions de prise de vue > Flash Réduction de l’effet yeux rouges Si le flash se déclenche lorsque vous photographiez une personne dans un endroit sombre, il est possible qu’un halo rouge apparaisse à la place de ses yeux. Pour réduire l’effet yeux rouges, sélectionnez Yeux rouges auto ou Ctre jour + Yeux rouges. Sans réduction des yeux rouges Avec réduction des yeux rouges Si le sujet est trop éloigné de l’appareil photo ou se déplace lorsque le flash se déclenche, il se peut que l’effet yeux rouges ne soit pas corrigé. Réglage de l’intensité du flash Lorsque le flash est activé, réglez son intensité de +/-2 niveaux. Pour définir l’intensité du flash En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [f] ĺ Flash ĺ une option ĺ [D] ĺ tournez la molette de réglage ou appuyez sur [C/F] pour réglet l’intensité du flash. Retour Définir Flash : 0.0 96 Fonctions de prise de vue > Flash • Vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur +/- pour régler l’intensité. • Le réglage de l’intensité du flash risque d’être sans effet si : - le sujet est trop près de l’appareil ; - vous avez sélectionné une sensibilité ISO élevée ; - la valeur d’exposition est trop élevée ou trop faible. • Dans certains modes de prise de vue, cette fonction n’est pas accessible. • Si vous avez installé sur l’appareil photo un flash externe à inténsité variable, les réglages d’intensité du flash s’appliquent. • Si le sujet est trop rapproché lorsque vous utilisez le flash, cela peut refléter la lumière et assombrir la photo. Vérifiez que le sujet est situé à la distance recommandée, qui peut varier selon l’objectif utilisé. • L’utilisation d’un pare-soleil peut arrêter la lumière du flash. Retirez le pare-soleil avant d’utiliser le flash. Fonctions de prise de vue 97 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Le mode de mesure de l’exposition correspond à la manière dont l’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière. L’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière, puis utilise cette mesure dans de nombreux modes afin de régler divers paramètres. Par exemple, si un sujet semble plus foncé qu’il ne l’est en réalité, l’appareil photo effectue une prise de vue surexposée de ce sujet. Si un sujet semble plus clair qu’il ne l’est en réalité, l’appareil photo effectue une prise de vue sous-exposée de ce sujet. La luminosité et l’ambiance générale de la photo peuvent également être affectées par la façon dont l’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière. Sélectionnez des paramètres appropriés pour chaque type de conditions de prise de vue. Pour définir une option de mesure de l’exposition En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Mesure de l’exposition ĺ une option. Multiple La mesure Multiple calcule la quantité de lumière dans plusieurs zones. Lorsque la lumière est suffisante ou insuffisante, l’appareil photo règle l’exposition en équilibrant la luminosité générale de la scène. Ce mode est adapté aux photos courantes. Mesure de l’exposition 98 Fonctions de prise de vue > Mesure de l’exposition Sélective La mesure Sélective calcule la quantité de lumière au centre. Lorsque vous réalisez une prise de vue dans des conditions de fort contre-jour derrière un sujet, l’appareil photo règle l’exposition afin de capturer correctement ce dernier. Par exemple, lorsque vous sélectionnez la mesure Multiple dans des conditions de fort contre-jour, l’appareil photo considère que la quantité globale de lumière est élevée, ce qui rend par conséquent la photo plus sombre. La mesure Sélective permet d’éviter cette situation, car la quantité de lumière est calculée dans une zone définie. Le sujet est clair alors que l’arrière plan est sombre. La mesure Sélective est recommandée dans une situation comme celle-ci, qui présente une différence d’exposition importante entre un sujet et un arrière-plan. Centrée Le mode Centrée effectue des calculs sur une zone plus large qu’en mode Sélective. Il détermine la quantité de lumière dans la partie centrale de la photo (60 à 80 %) ainsi que sur le reste de la photo (20 à 40 %). Ce mode est recommandé dans des situations où la différence de luminosité entre un sujet et un arrière-plan est faible, ou qu’une partie du sujet est grande au regard de la composition générale de la photo. 99 Fonctions de prise de vue > Mesure de l’exposition Mesure de la valeur d’exposition de la zone de mise au point Lorsque cette fonction est activée, l’appareil photo applique automatiquement une exposition optimale en calculant la luminosité de la zone de mise au point. Cette option est disponible uniquement si vous sélectionnez le mesure Sélective ou Multiple, et l’option Mise au point sélection. Pour appliquer cette fonction En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Lien AE à AF ĺ une option. Fonctions de prise de vue 100 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Cette fonction corrige automatiquement la perte de luminosité dûe à des différences de niveaux d’exposition sur la photo. Pour appliquer les options de plage intelligente En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Plage dynamique ĺ une option. Sans effet de plage dynamique Avec effet de plage dynamique Icône Description Arrêt : ne pas utiliser la plage dynamique. Plage intelligente+ : corriger la perte de luminosité. Vous ne pouvez pas appliquer le réglage ISO 100. HDR : prendre deux photos avec différentes expositions, puis les associer afin de créer automatiquement une image unique. • Vous ne pouvez pas régler l’option ISO à une valeur supérieure à ISO 3200. • Les options Plage dynamique ne peuvent pas être définies en même temps que les options Assistant photo. Plage dynamique Fonctions de prise de vue 101 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Le Filtre intelligent vous permet d’appliquer des effets spéciaux à vos photos. Vous pouvez sélectionner diverses options de filtre pour créer des effets spéciaux difficiles à obtenir avec des objectifs normaux. Pour appliquer les options de filtre intelligent En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ1ĺ Filtre intelligent ĺ une option. Option Description Désactivé Aucun effet Vignettage Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un fort contraste et un effet de dégradé intense caractéristiques des appareils Lomo. Miniature Appliquer un effet de contre-plongée pour que le sujet apparaisse plus petit. Crayon de couleur Appliquer un effet de peinture au crayon de couleur. Aquarelle Appliquer un effet de peinture à l’eau. Dessin au lavis Appliquer un effet passé. Esquisse à l'huile Appliquer un effet d'esquisse à l'huile. Esquisse à l'encre Appliquer un effet d'esquisse à l'encre. Acrylique Appliquer un effet de peinture acrylique. Option Description Négatif Appliquer un effet de film négatif. Rouge Désaturer toutes les couleurs sauf le rouge. Vert Désaturer toutes les couleurs sauf le vert. Bleu Désaturer toutes les couleurs sauf le bleu. Jaune Désaturer toutes les couleurs sauf le jaune. Il est impossible de régler en même temps les options de l’Assistant photo et les options Filtre intelligent. Filtre intelligent Fonctions de prise de vue 102 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue L’appareil photo définit automatiquement l’exposition en mesurant les niveaux de lumière à partir de la composition d’une photo et de la position d’un sujet. Si la valeur d’exposition définie par l’appareil photo est plus élevée ou plus basse que celle que vous attendiez, vous pouvez alors la régler manuellement. La valeur d’exposition peut être réglée en utilisant ±3 incréments. L’appareil photo affiche un message d’avertissement en rouge pour chaque niveau au-delà de la plage ±3. Pour régler la valeur d’exposition, tournez la molette de réglage tout en maintenant la touche [W] enfoncée. Vous pouvez également régler la valeur d’exposition en appuyant sur [f], puis en sélectionnant EV. Vous pouvez vérifier la valeur d’exposition par rapport à l’indicateur de niveau d’exposition. Indicateur de niveau d’exposition Exposition augmentée (plus clair) Exposition baissée (plus sombre) Mise en garde à propos de l’exposition Indice d’exposition standard -2 Original +2 Compensation de l’exposition Fonctions de prise de vue 103 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Si vous ne parvenez pas à obtenir une exposition adéquate à cause d’un fort contraste des couleurs, verrouillez l’exposition, puis prenez la photo. Pour verrouiller la valeur d’exposition, réglez l’exposition de la photo, puis appuyez sur la touche de personnalisation. Une fois l’exposition verrouillée, pointez l’objectif sur le sujet et appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. • Réglez une fonction de la touche de personnalisation sur AEL pour verrouiller la valeur d’exposition. (p. 150) • Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible en mode Manuel. Verrouillage de l’exposition Fonctions de prise de vue 104 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Les fonctions vidéo disponibles sont présentées ci-dessous. Format vidéo Définissez le format vidéo. Pour définir les options du format vidéo En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ6ĺ Format vidéo ĺ une option. Icône Taille Recommandé pour 1920X1080 (60 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD grand écran. (Lecture possible uniquement sur des téléviseurs haute définition capables de lire des images à une fréquence de 60 ips.) 1920X1080 (30 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD grand écran. 1920X1080 (15 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD grand écran. (Disponible uniquement avec certaines options Filtre intelligent.) 1920X810 (24 ips) (Environ 2,35:1) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD. 1280X720 (60 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD. 1280X720 (30 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD. 640X480 (30 ips) (4:3) Visionner sur un téléviseur. 320X240 (30 ips) (4:3) Publier sur un site Web à l’aide du réseau sans fil (30 secondes maximum). Qualité vidéo Définir la qualité vidéo. Pour définir les options de la qualité vidéo En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ6ĺ Qualité vidéo ĺ une option. Icône Extension Description MP4 (H.264) Normale : enregistrez des vidéos en qualité normale. MP4 (H.264) Haute qualité : enregistrez des vidéos en qualité élevée. Fonctions vidéo 105 Fonctions de prise de vue > Fonctions vidéo Multi-mouvements Réglez la vitesse de lecture d’une vidéo. Pour définir les options de vitesse de lecture En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ6ĺ Multi-mouvements ĺ une option. Icône Description x0.25 : enregistrer une vidéo et la lire à 1/4 de la vitesse normale. (Disponible uniquement à la résolution 640x480 ou 320x240) x0.5 : enregistrer une vidéo et la lire à 1/2 de la vitesse normale. (Disponible uniquement à la résolution 1280x720 (30 ips), 640x480 ou 320x240) x1 : enregistrer une vidéo et la lire en vitesse normale. x5 : enregistrer une vidéo et la lire à une vitesse 5X supérieure. x10 : enregistrer une vidéo et la lire à une vitesse 10X supérieure. x20 : enregistrer une vidéo et la lire à une vitesse 20X supérieure. • Si vous sélectionnez une option autre que x1, le son n’est alors pas enregistré. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Fondu Vous pouvez appliquer un fondu au début ou à la fin d’une scène en utilisant la fonction de fondu sur l’appareil photo, sans avoir recours à un PC. Appliquez l’effet de fondu entrant pour qu’une scène commence progressivement par cet effet. Appliquez l’effet de fondu sortant pour qu’une scène se termine progressivement par cet effet. Utilisez cette fonction de manière appropriée pour vous permettre d’ajouter des effets spectaculaires à vos vidéos. Pour définir les options de fondu En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ6ĺFondu ĺ une option. Icône Description Désactivé : fonction de fondu non utilisée. Entrant : la scène est fondue progressivement en début de séquence. Sortant : la scène est fondue progressivement en fin de séquence. Entrant-Sortant : la fonction de fondu est appliquée au début et à la fin de la scène. Lorsque la fonction de fondu est utilisée, l’enregistrement d’un fichier peut être plus long. 106 Fonctions de prise de vue > Fonctions vidéo Niveau Mic Régler le niveau du microphone en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Pour régler le niveau du microphone En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ6ĺ Niveau Mic ĺ une option. Voix Il arrive parfois que certaines vidéos muettes soient plus attractives que celles filmées avec le son. Désactivez la voix afin de réaliser une vidéo muette. Pour définir les options de voix En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ6ĺ Voix ĺ une option. Réduction vent Lorsque vous enregistrez des vidéos dans un environnement bruyant, il est possible que des sons indésirables soient enregistrés. En particulier, un bruit de vent intense enregistré dans les vidéos peut vous empêcher d’apprécier pleinement ces dernières. Utilisez la fonction Réduction vent afin de supprimer des bruits ambiants en plus de celui du vent. Pour réduire le son du vent En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ6ĺ Réduction vent ĺ une option. Section 3 Lecture / Retouche Découvrez comment lire et retoucher vos photos et vos vidéos. Pour retoucher des fichiers sur un ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section 6. 108 Lecture / Retouche Découvrez comment afficher les miniatures de vos photos et vidéos, et comment protéger ou supprimer des fichiers. Si, pendant un certain temps, vous n’effectuez aucune opération, les informations et icônes à l’écran disparaissent. Ces éléments réapparaissent lorsque vous réutilisez l’appareil photo. Visionnage de photos 1 Appuyez sur [y]. • Le fichier le plus récent que vous avez capturé s’affiche. 2 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour faire défiler les fichiers. • Vous pouvez également faire glisser l’image vers la gauche ou la droite pour accéder à un autre fichier. Il se peut que vous ne soyez pas en mesure de retoucher ou de visionner des photos ou des vidéos prises par un autre appareil photo, si ceux-ci sont trop volumineux ou s’ils comportent des codecs non pris en charge. Utilisez un ordinateur ou un autre appareil pour les retoucher ou les visionner. Affichage des images sous forme de miniatures Afin de rechercher des photos et des vidéos plus rapidement, définissez l’affichage de ces dernières sous forme de miniatures. L’affichage sous forme de miniatures permet de visionner plusieurs images à la fois afin de parcourir et de trouver facilement les éléments que vous recherchez. Vous pouvez également classer et afficher les fichiers par catégorie, telles que la date ou le type de fichier. Tournez la molette de réglage vers la gauche pour sélectionner le mode Miniatures. (Tournez la molette de réglage vers la droite pour revenir au mode précédent.) Recherche et gestion de fichiers 109 Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers Affichage de fichiers par catégorie 1 En vue Miniatures, appuyez sur [m] ĺzĺ Filtrer ĺ une catégorie. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur FILTER pour sélectionner une catégorie. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Tout* Afficher les fichiers normalement. Date Affichez les fichiers en fonction de leur date d’enregistrement. Type Afficher les fichiers par type. Position Afficher les fichiers en fonction du lieu où ils ont été enregistrés. (Seules les photos prises avec un module GPS en option indiquent les informations de localisation.) 2 Sélectionnez une liste afin de l’ouvrir. 3 Sélectionnez un fichier afin de l’afficher. 4 Appuyez sur pour revenir à la vue précédente. Visionnage de fichiers sous forme de dossier Les prises de vues en continue et en rafale apparaissent sous forme de dossier. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un dossier, toutes les photos sont automatiquement lues. La suppression d’un dossier entraîne celle de toutes les photos qu’il contient. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [C/F] ou faites glisser l’image vers la gauche ou la droite afin d’accéder au dossier souhaité. • L’appareil photo lit automatiquement les photos contenues dans le dossier. 2 Faites défiler les options à l’aide de la molette de réglage en la tournant sur la droite pour ouvrir le dossier. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur le dossier à l’écran pour ouvrir le dossier. 3 Appuyez sur [C/F] ou faites glisser l’image vers la gauche ou la droite pour accéder à un autre fichier. 4 Tournez la molette de réglage vers la gauche pour revenir en mode Lecture. 110 Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers Protection des fichiers Vous pouvez protéger des fichiers pour éviter toute suppression accidentelle. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺzĺ Protéger ĺ Sélect.. 2 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour sélectionner un fichier, puis appuyez sur [o]. 3 Appuyez sur [f]. Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer ou pivoter un fichier protégé. Verrouiller / Déverrouiller tous les fichiers Verrouillez ou déverrouillez tous les fichiers. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺzĺ Protéger ĺ Tout. 2 Sélectionnez une option. Option Description Verrouiller Verrouiller tous les fichiers. Déverrouiller Déverrouiller tous les fichiers. Annuler Revenir au menu précédent. 111 Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers Suppression de fichiers En mode Lecture, supprimez des fichiers et assurez plus d’espace sur votre carte mémoire. Les fichiers protégés ne sont pas supprimés. Suppression d’un seul fichier Vous pouvez sélectionner un seul fichier et le supprimer. 1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez un fichier et appuyez sur [n]. 2 Lorsque la fenêtre en incrustation s’affiche, sélectionnez Oui. Suppression de plusieurs fichiers Vous pouvez effectuer une sélection multiple de fichiers et supprimer ces derniers. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺzĺ Supprimer ĺ Sélect.. • Vous pouvez également, en mode Miniatures, appuyer sur [n], puis sélectionner les fichiers à supprimer. 2 Sélectionnez les fichiers à supprimer, puis appuyez sur [C/F], puis sur [o]. • Appuyez à nouveau sur [o] pour annuler votre sélection. 3 Appuyez sur [n]. 4 Lorsque la fenêtre en incrustation s’affiche, sélectionnez Oui. 112 Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers Suppression de tous les fichiers Vous pouvez supprimer tous les fichiers de la carte mémoire en même temps. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m]. 2 Sélectionnez zĺ Supprimer ĺ Tout. 3 Lorsque la fenêtre en incrustation s’affiche, sélectionnez Oui. 113 Lecture / Retouche Agrandissement d’une photo En mode Lecture, vous pouvez agrandir les photos lorsque vous les visualisez. Vous pouvez également utiliser la fonction de recadrage afin d’extraire une partie de l’image affichée sur l’écran et d’enregistrer la photo découpée en tant que nouveau fichier. Zone agrandie Agrandissement (l’agrandissement maximal possible peut varier en fonction de la résolution). Image pleine Rogner Faites défiler les options à l’aide de la molette de réglage en la tournant sur la droite pour agrandir une photo. (Inversement, tournez la molette de réglage en la tournant sur la gauche pour réduire la photo.) Pour Procédez comme suit Déplacez la zone agrandie Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F]. Recadrer la photo agrandie Appuyez sur [f] (enregistré en tant que nouveau fichier). Revenez à l’image originale Appuyez sur [o]. Vous pouvez également effectuer un mouvement de pincement avec deux de vos doigts sur l’écran pour réduire une photo ou le mouvement inverse pour l’agrandir. Vous pouvez également appuyer deux fois sur une zone pour l’agrandir rapidement. Affichage d’un diaporama Vous pouvez visionner les photo dans un diaporama, en ajoutant des effets de transition entre chaque photo ainsi qu’un fond sonore. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m]. 2 Sélectionnez zĺ Options diaporama. 3 Choisissez une option d’effet de diaporama. • Passez à l’étape 4 pour démarrer le diaporama sans aucun effet. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Mode de lecture Activer une option de répétition du diaporama. (Une lecture*, Répétition) Intervalle Définir l’intervalle entre l’affichage des photos. (1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, 10 sec) Musique Définir une musique d’arrière-plan. Effet • Définir un changement de scène entre les photos. • Sélectionnez Désactivé pour annuler les effets. Visionnage de photos 114 Lecture / Retouche > Visionnage de photos 4 Appuyez sur [m]. 5 Sélectionnez Démarrer diaporama. 6 Affichez le diaporama. • Appuyez sur [o] pour effectuer une pause. • Appuyez à nouveau sur [o] pour reprendre la lecture. • Appuyez sur [m] pour interrompre le diaporama et revenir au mode Lecture. • Appuyez sur [D/I] pour régler le volume. Rotation automatique En activant la fonction Rotation auto, l’appareil photo fait pivoter automatiquement les photos prises verticalement afin qu’elles s’affichent horizontalement à l’écran. Afin de paramétrer les options Rotation auto En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺzĺ Rotation auto ĺ une option. Création d’une commande d’impression (DPOF) Le format de commande d’impression numérique (DPOF) vous permet de définir le nombre d’exemplaires à imprimer. L’appareil photo sauvegarde les informations DPOF dans le dossier MISC de la carte mémoire. Lorsque vous avez défini les informations DPOF de vos images, vous pouvez apporter votre carte mémoire chez votre développeur de photos pour procéder à l’impression. Vous ne pouvez pas définir l’ordre d’impression des fichiers au format RAW. Lorsque les photos sont plus grandes que le papier d’impression, les bords gauche et droit des photos peuvent être rognés. Vérifiez que les dimensions de la photo correspondent à celles du papier sélectionné. 1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez une photo et appuyez sur [m]. 2 Sélectionnez zĺ DPOF. 3 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour définir le nombre de copies. • Pour sélectionner une autre photo, appuyez sur [C/F]. 4 Appuyez sur [o] pour enregistrer. 115 Lecture / Retouche En mode Lecture, vous pouvez lire une vidéo, en extraire une image ou encore la rogner et l’enregistrer en tant que nouveau fichier. Arreter Enregistrer Commandes d’affichage des vidéos Icône / Bouton Description / /[C] Afficher le fichier précédent / Reculer. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur l’icône ou sur la touche lors de la lecture d’une vidéo, la vitesse de balayage change selon la séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.) / /[o] Effectuer une pause ou reprendre la lecture. / /[F] Afficher le fichier suivant / Avancer. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur l’icône ou sur la touche lors de la lecture d’une vidéo, la vitesse de balayage change selon la séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.) /[D/I] Régler le volume ou désactiver le son. Recadrage d’une vidéo au cours de la lecture 1 En mode Lecture, faites défiler une vidéo et appuyez sur . 2 Appuyez sur [o] ou pour démarrer la lecture de la vidéo. 3 Appuyez sur [o] ou à l’endroit où le recadrage doit débuter. 4 Appuyez sur [f] ou sur Point de départ. 5 Appuyez sur [o] ou pour reprendre la lecture de la vidéo. 6 Appuyez sur [o] ou à l’endroit où le recadrage doit se terminer. Lecture de vidéos 116 Lecture / Retouche > Lecture de vidéos 7 Appuyez sur [f] ou sur Point final. 8 Appuyez sur [f] ou sur Recadrer pour effectuer le recadrage d’une vidéo. • Vous pouvez définir la scène à recadrer en faisant glisser les poignées qui apparaissent sur la barre de progression. 9 Lorsque la fenêtre contextuelle s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui. • Vous ne pouvez pas recadrer une vidéo enregistrée en mode 3D. • La durée de la vidéo d’origine doit être d’au moins 10 secondes. • L’appareil photo enregistre la vidéo modifiée en tant que nouveau fichier et conserve la vidéo d’origine intacte. Extraction d’une image pendant la lecture 1 Lors du visionnage d’une vidéo, appuyez sur [o] ou à l’endroit où vous souhaitez extraire une image. 2 Appuyez sur [f] ou sur Enregistrer. • Vous ne pouvez pas extraire d’images d’une vidéo enregistrée en mode 3D. • La résolution de l’image extraite est la même que celle de la vidéo d’origine. • L’image extraite est enregistrée en tant que nouveau fichier. 117 Lecture / Retouche Les photos modifiées sont enregistrées en tant que nouveaux fichiers, sous des noms de fichiers différents. Il est impossible de retoucher les photos capturées dans certains modes par le biais de la fonction Édition photo. Pour retoucher des images En mode Lecture, faites défiler une photo et appuyez sur ĺ une option. • Vous pouvez également retoucher des images en mode Lecture en sélectionnant une photo, puis en appuyant sur [f] ou [m] ĺ Édition photo. • Il est possible que certaines images ne puissent pas être retouchées à l’aide de la fonction Édition photo. Dans ce cas, utilisez le logiciel de retouche fourni. • L’appareil photo enregistre les photos retouchées en tant que nouveau fichier. • Lorsque vous retouchez des photos, l’appareil photo les enregistre automatiquement à une résolution inférieure. Les photos pivotées ou redimensionnées manuellement ne sont pas automatiquement converties à une résolution inférieure. • Les photos visionnées en tant que dossier ne peuvent pas être retouchées. Ouvrez le dossier et sélectionnez une photo pour retoucher chacune des photos. Rognage d’une photo 1 Appuyez sur ĺ . 2 Faites glisser les coins du cadre pour redimensionner la zone. 3 Faites glisser le cadre pour déplacer la zone. 4 Appuyez sur OK. 5 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer. Retouche de photos 118 Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos Pivotement d’une photo 1 Appuyez sur ĺ . 2 Appuyez sur une option. Rotation : Droite (90°) 3 Appuyez sur OK. 4 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer. • Vous pouvez également faire pivoter une photo en mode Lecture en appuyant sur [m], puis sur zĺ Rotation ĺ une option souhaitée. • L’appareil photo écrase le fichier d’origine. Redimensionnement de photos Modifiez la taille d’une photo pour l’enregistrer sous forme de nouveau fichier. 1 Appuyez sur ĺ . 2 Appuyez sur une option. Redimensionner : 10.1M 3:2 3 Appuyez sur OK. 4 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer. Les options de redimensionnement disponibles dépendent de la taille d’origine de la photo. 119 Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos Réglage des photos Vous pouvez modifier les photos capturées en réglant la luminosité, le contraste ou la saturation. 1 Appuyez sur . 2 Appuyez sur une option de réglage. Icône Description Original (revenir à l’image originale) Réglage automatique Luminosité Contraste Saturation Réglage RVB Température couleur Exposition Tonalité 3 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler l’option. • Vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur +/- pour régler l’option. • Si vous avez sélectionné , passez à l’étape 4. 4 Appuyez sur OK. 5 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer. 120 Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos Retouche de visages 1 Appuyez sur ĺ . 2 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler l’option. • Vous pouvez également faire glisser le curseur ou appuyer sur +/- pour régler l’option. • Au fur et à mesure que la valeur augmente, la couleur de la peau devient plus lumineuse et plus douce. 3 Appuyez sur OK. • Pour annuler la correction, appuyez sur . 4 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer. 121 Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos Effets de filtre intelligent Appliquez des effets spéciaux à vos photos. 1 Appuyez sur , puis sur une option. Filtre intelligent : Vignettage Option Description Original Aucun effet Vignettage Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un fort contraste et un effet de dégradé intense caractéristiques des appareils Lomo. Miniature Appliquer un effet de contre-plongée pour faire apparaître le sujet plus petit. Crayon de couleur Appliquer un effet de peinture au crayon de couleur. Aquarelle Appliquer un effet de peinture à l’eau. Dessin au lavis Appliquer un effet passé. Option Description Esquisse à l'huile Appliquer un effet d'esquisse à l'huile. Esquisse à l'encre Appliquer un effet d'esquisse à l'encre. Acrylique Appliquer un effet de peinture acrylique. Négatif Appliquer un effet de film négatif. Rouge Désaturer toutes les couleurs sauf le rouge. Vert Désaturer toutes les couleurs sauf le vert. Bleu Désaturer toutes les couleurs sauf le bleu. Jaune Désaturer toutes les couleurs sauf le jaune. 2 Appuyez sur OK. 3 Appuyez sur pour enregistrer. Section 4 Réseau sans fil Apprenez à vous connecter à des réseaux locaux sans fil et à en utiliser les fonctions. 123 Réseau sans fil Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Cette section décrit comment se connecter via un point d’accès (PA) lorsqu’un réseau local sans fil se trouve dans le champ de détection. Vous pouvez également configurer les paramètres réseau. Connexion à un réseau local sans fil 1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sélectionnez , , ou . 3 Appuyez sur [m], puis sur Paramètres Wi-Fi. • Dans certains modes, suivez les instructions qui s’affichent jusqu’à l’apparition de l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi. • L’appareil photo recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles. 4 Sélectionnez un point d’accès. Retour Actualiser Samsung1 Samsung2 Samsung3 Samsung4 • Sélectionnez Actualiser pour actualiser les points d’accès disponibles. • Sélectionnez Ajouter mode sans fil pour ajouter un point d’accès manuellement. Le nom de votre point d’accès doit être en anglais pour l’ajouter manuellement. Icône / Option Description Point d’accès Ad hoc Point d’accès sécurisé Point d’accès WPS Force du signal Appuyez sur [F] pour définir les options de réglage réseau. • Lorsque vous choisissez un point d’accès sécurisé, une fenêtre contextuelle apparaît. Saisissez les mots de passe requis pour vous connecter au réseau local sans fil. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, consultez « Saisie de texte ». (p. 127) • Lorsqu’une page de connexion apparaît, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation du navigateur de connexion ». (p. 125) • Si vous choisissez un point d’accès non sécurisé, l’appareil photo se connecte au réseau local sans fil. • Si vous choisissez un point d’accès pris en charge par un profil WPS, sélectionnez ĺ Connexion PIN WPS, puis saisissez le code PIN sur le périphérique du point d’accès. Vous avez également la possibilité de vous connecter à un point d’accès pris en charge par un profil WPS en sélectionnant ĺ Connexion via la touche WPS sur l’appareil photo et en appuyant sur la touche WPS sur le périphérique du point d’accès. • Un même point d’accès peut être répertorié deux fois avec différentes fréquences, car votre appareil photo prend en charge les communications bibandes. 124 Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Configuration des options de réseau 1 Dans l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi, accédez à un point d’accès, puis appuyez sur [F] ou . 2 Pour chaque option, précisez les informations requises. Option Description Mot de passe réseau Saisir le mot de passe réseau. Config. IP Définir l’adresse IP automatiquement ou manuellement. Configuration manuelle de l’adresse IP 1 Dans l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi, accédez à un point d’accès, puis appuyez sur [F] ou . 2 Sélectionnez Config. IP ĺ Manuel. 3 Pour chaque option, précisez les informations requises. Option Description IP Saisir l’adresse IP statique. Masque sous-ré. Indiquer le masque de sous-réseau. Passerelle Indiquer la passerelle. Serveur DNS Saisir l’adresse DNS. 125 Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Utilisation du navigateur de connexion Vous pouvez saisir vos informations de session via le navigateur lors de la connexion à certains points d’accès, sites de partage ou serveurs Cloud. Icône Description Fermer le navigateur de connexion. Accéder à la page précédente. Accéder à la page suivante. Arrêter le chargement de la page. Actualiser la page. • Il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas sélectionner certaines options selon la page à laquelle vous êtes connecté. Il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement. • Le navigateur de connexion peut ne pas se fermer automatiquement après la connexion à certaines pages. Si cela se produit, fermez le navigateur en appuyant sur, , puis poursuivez vos manipulations. • La page de connexion peut s’avérer plus longue à charger en fonction de sa taille ou du débit du réseau. Si cela se produit, patientez jusqu’à ce que la fenêtre de connexion s’affiche. 126 Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau • Pour utiliser la fonction Wi-Fi, vous devez insérer une carte mémoire. • La qualité de la connexion réseau est déterminée par les points d’accès. • Plus la distance entre l’appareil photo et le point d’accès est grande, plus ce premier mettra de temps à se connecter au réseau. • Si un périphérique à proximité utilise une fréquence radio identique à celle de votre appareil photo, il se peut que votre connexion s’interrompe. • Si le nom de votre point d’accès n’est pas en anglais, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne puisse pas localiser le périphérique ou que son nom apparaisse de façon incorrecte. • Pour connaître les paramètres réseau et le mot de passe requis, contactez votre administrateur réseau ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau. • Si un réseau local sans fil requiert l’authentification du fournisseur d’accès, il se peut que vous ne soyez pas en mesure de vous connecter audit réseau. Pour vous connecter au réseau local sans fil, contactez votre fournisseur d’accès réseau. • En fonction du type de cryptage, le nombre de chiffres qui composent le mot de passe peut varier. • En fonction des conditions environnantes, il peut s’avérer impossible d’établir une connexion à un réseau local sans fil. • Il est possible que l’appareil photo affiche une imprimante compatible avec les réseaux locaux sans fil figurant dans la liste des points d’accès. Vous ne pouvez cependant pas vous connecter au réseau par le biais d’une imprimante. • Il est impossible de connecter l’appareil photo simultanément à un réseau et à un téléviseur. • La connexion à un réseau peut entraîner des frais supplémentaires. Ces coûts varient en fonction des termes de votre contrat. • Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à un réseau local sans fil, essayez un autre point d’accès parmi la liste de ceux proposés. • Il se peut qu’une page de connexion apparaisse lorsque vous sélectionnez des réseaux locaux sans fil gratuits mis à disposition par certains fournisseurs d’accès réseau. Saisissez votre identifiant et votre mot de passe pour vous connecter au réseau local sans fil. Pour en savoir plus sur l’inscription à ces services ou à un service particulier, contactez les fournisseurs d’accès réseau en question. • Soyez prudent lors de la saisie d’informations personnelles pour vous connecter à un point d’accès. Ne saisissez aucune information de paiement sur l’appareil photo. Le fabricant ne peut être tenu responsable de tout problème survenant suite à la saisie de telles informations. • Les connexions réseau disponibles peuvent varier selon le pays. • La fonction de réseau local sans fil de l’appareil photo doit être conforme à la législation en matière de transmission par radiofréquences dans votre pays ou région. Pour assurer une compatibilité totale, n’utilisez la fonction de réseau local sans fil que dans le pays dans lequel vous avez acheté l’appareil photo. • Les opérations à suivre pour régler les paramètres réseau peuvent différer en fonction des conditions du réseau. • Ne tentez pas d’accéder à un réseau dont l’accès ne vous est pas autorisé. • Avant de vous connecter à des réseaux, assurez-vous que la batterie est entièrement rechargée. • Vous ne pouvez pas télécharger ou envoyer des fichiers capturés dans certains modes. • Les fichiers transférés vers un autre appareil peuvent ne pas être pris en charge par cet appareil. Dans ce cas, utilisez un ordinateur pour lire les fichiers. 127 Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Saisie de texte Cette section décrit comment saisir du texte. Les icônes dans le tableau vous permettent de déplacer le curseur, de modifier la casse, etc. Appuyez sur une touche pour saisir le texte. Icône Description Déplacer le curseur. Arrêter la saisie de texte et revenir à la page précédente. Modifier la casse. Passer du mode Symbole / Nombre au mode normal. Modifier la langue de saisie. Ajouter un espace. Enregistrer le texte à l’écran. Supprimer la dernière lettre. • Dans certains modes, vous pouvez saisir uniquement du texte à l’aide de caractères anglais, quelle que soit la langue d’affichage choisie. • Vous pouvez saisir jusqu’à 64 caractères. • L’affichage peut différer en fonction du mode de saisie. • Maintenez une touche enfoncée pour saisir le caractère situé dans le coin supérieur droit de la touche. 128 Réseau sans fil Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction AutoShare via un réseau local sans fil. Lorsque vous prenez une photo à l’aide de votre appareil photo, la photo est enregistrée automatiquement sur le smartphone. • La fonction AutoShare est prise en charge par les smartphones des séries Galaxy ou les modèles Galaxy Tab dotés de la version Android 2.3 ou ultérieure, ou des autres appareils équipés du système d’exploitation iOS 6.0 ou ultérieur. Avant d’utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vérifiez le micrologiciel de votre appareil et mettez-le à jour, si nécessaire. • Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou appareil avant d’utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement. • Pour installer et démarrer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction NFC et placez le smartphone à proximité de l'étiquette NFC (p. 30) de l’appareil photo. Cette fonctionnalité est prise en charge par les smartphones fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3 ou toute version ultérieure. Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible pour les appareils iOS. • Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez insérer une carte mémoire. • Si vous paramétrez cette fonction, le paramétrage est conservé même si vous changez de mode de prise de vue. • Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas prise en charge dans certains modes ou qu’elle ne soit pas disponible avec certaines options de prise de vue. 1 Sur l’appareil photo et en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m]. 2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez 1ĺ AutoShare ĺ Marche. • Si la fenêtre contextuelle qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. 3 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer l’application. • Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de l’étiquette NFC (p. 30) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le smartphone est connecté à votre appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 6. 4 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo. • Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à la fois. 5 Autorisez la connexion du smartphone sur l’appareil photo. • Si le smartphone a déjà été connecté à l’appareil photo, la connexion est automatique. • Une icône indiquant l’état de la connexion ( ) apparaît sur l’écran de l’appareil photo. 6 Prenez une photo à l’aide de l’appareil photo. • La photo est enregistrée sur l’appareil photo, puis transférée au smartphone. • Les vidéos sont uniquement enregistrées sur l’appareil photo. 129 Réseau sans fil L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction MobileLink via un réseau local sans fil. Vous pouvez facilement envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à votre smartphone. • La fonction MobileLink est prise en charge par les smartphones des séries Galaxy ou les modèles Galaxy Tab dotés de la version Android 2.3 ou ultérieure, ou des autres appareils équipés du système d’exploitation iOS 6.0 ou ultérieur. Avant d’utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vérifiez le micrologiciel de votre appareil et mettez-le à jour, si nécessaire. • Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou appareil avant d’utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement. • Pour installer et démarrer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction NFC et placez le smartphone à proximité de l'étiquette NFC (p. 30) de l’appareil photo. Cette fonctionnalité est prise en charge par les smartphones fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3 ou toute version ultérieure. Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible pour les appareils iOS. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Si vous sélectionnez des fichiers depuis le smartphone, vous pouvez visionner jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents et envoyer jusqu’à 150 fichiers à la fois. Si vous sélectionnez des fichiers depuis l’appareil photo, vous pouvez les visionner sur l’appareil photo. Le nombre maximal de fichiers pouvant être envoyés dépend de l’espace disponible sur le smartphone. • Lorsque vous envoyez des vidéos Full HD à l’aide de la fonction MobileLink, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas lire ces fichiers sur certains appareils. • Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction sur un appareil iOS, la connexion Wi-Fi risque d’être désactivée. • Il est impossible d’envoyer des fichiers RAW. 1 Sur l’appareil photo, passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sur l’appareil photo, appuyez sur . • Si la fenêtre contextuelle qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. 3 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez une option d’envoi. • Si l’option Sélectionner des fichiers du smartphone est activée, vous pouvez utiliser votre smartphone pour afficher et partager les fichiers stockés sur l’appareil photo. • Si l’option Sélectionner des fichiers de l’appareil photo est activée, vous pouvez sélectionner les fichiers à envoyer depuis l’appareil photo. 4 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer l’application. • Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de l’étiquette NFC (p. 30) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le smartphone est connecté à votre appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 7. Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone 130 Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone 5 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo. • Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à la fois. 6 Autorisez la connexion du smartphone sur l’appareil photo. • Si le smartphone a déjà été connecté à l’appareil photo, la connexion est automatique. 7 Sur le smartphone ou l’appareil photo, sélectionnez les fichiers à transférer depuis l’appareil photo. 8 Sur le smartphone, appuyez sur la touche Copier ou, sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Envoyer. • L’appareil photo transmet alors les fichiers. 131 Réseau sans fil L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction Remote Viewfinder via un réseau local sans fil. Utilisez le smartphone pour déclencher à distance l’obturateur à l’aide de la fonction Remote Viewfinder. La photo ainsi prise s’affiche directement sur le smartphone. • La fonction Remote Viewfinder est prise en charge par les smartphones des séries Galaxy ou les modèles Galaxy Tab dotés de la version Android 2.3 ou ultérieure, ou des autres appareils équipés du système d’exploitation iOS 6.0 ou ultérieur. Avant d’utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vérifiez le micrologiciel de votre appareil et mettez-le à jour, si nécessaire. • Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou appareil avant d’utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement. • Pour installer et démarrer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction NFC et placez le smartphone à proximité de l'étiquette NFC (p. 30) de l’appareil photo. Cette fonctionnalité est prise en charge par les smartphones fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3 ou toute version ultérieure. Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible pour les appareils iOS. • Cette fonction n’est pas disponible en mode 3D. 1 Sur l’appareil photo, passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez . • Si la fenêtre contextuelle qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. 3 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer l’application. • Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de l’étiquette NFC (p. 30) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le smartphone est connecté à votre appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 6. 4 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo. • Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à la fois. Utilisation d’un smartphone comme télécommande du déclencheur 132 Réseau sans fil > Utilisation d’un smartphone comme télécommande du déclencheur 5 Autorisez la connexion du smartphone sur l’appareil photo. • Si le smartphone a déjà été connecté à l’appareil photo, la connexion est automatique. 6 Sur le smartphone, définissez les options de prise de vue suivantes. Icône Description Option Flash Retardateur Format photo Enregistrement de la position • Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction, certaines touches ne sont plus disponibles sur l’appareil photo. • La touche Zoom et le déclencheur du smartphone ne s’activent pas lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction. • Le mode Remote Viewfinder n’est compatible qu’avec les formats photo et . 7 Sur le smartphone, maintenez le doigt sur pour effectuer la mise au point. • La mise au point est automatiquement définie sur Mise au point multiple. 8 Relâchez pour prendre la photo. • Les photos enregistrées sur le smartphone seront redimensionnées à 1616X1080 lors d’une prise de vue à une résolution de et à 1920X1080 à une résolution de . • Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonctionnalité, la distance idéale entre l’appareil photo et le smartphone peut varier, selon l’environnement. • Pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction, le smartphone doit se trouver dans un périmètre de 7 m par rapport à l’appareil photo. • Une fois la touche du smartphone relâchée, le déclenchement de la prise de vue peut ne pas se faire immédiatement. • La fonction Remote Viewfinder se désactive si : - le smartphone reçoit un appel ; - l’appareil photo ou le smartphone est éteint ; - la mémoire est saturée ; - l’appareil perd sa connexion au réseau local sans fil ; - le signal de la connexion Wi-Fi est mauvais ou instable ; - aucune opération n’est effectuée pendant environ 5 minutes alors que la connexion est établie. 133 Réseau sans fil Utilisation de la Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des photos ou des vidéos Vous pouvez envoyer sur un ordinateur, à l’aide de la fonction sans fil, les photos ou vidéos prises avec l’appareil photo. Installation du programme de Sauvegarde automatique sur votre ordinateur 1 Installez i-Launcher sur l’ordinateur. (p. 163) 2 Branchez l’appareil sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 3 Lorsque l’icône du programme Sauvegarde automatique apparaît, cliquez dessus. • Le programme Sauvegarde automatique est installé sur l’ordinateur et les informations le concernant sont stockées sur l’appareil photo. Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour terminer l’installation. • Vous pouvez également enregistrer les informations à propos de l’ordinateur sur l’appareil photo en les raccordant via une connexion Wi-Fi. 4 Débranchez le câble USB. Avant d’installer le programme, assurez-vous que l’ordinateur est connecté à un réseau. Si aucune connexion Internet n’est disponible, vous devez installer le programme par le biais du CD fourni. Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un ordinateur 1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sélectionnez . • Si la fenêtre contextuelle qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. • Vous devez configurer les informations de sauvegarde de l’ordinateur afin d’utiliser le programme Sauvegarde automatique. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la section « Installation du programme de Sauvegarde automatique sur votre ordinateur ». (p. 133) Si le programme Sauvegarde automatique est installé sur votre ordinateur, enregistrez les informations concernant l’ordinateur via un câble USB ou une connexion Wi-Fi. • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche alors automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles. (p. 123) 134 Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de la Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des photos ou des vidéos 3 Sélectionnez un ordinateur de sauvegarde. • Si vous avez déjà effectué une sauvegarde, passez à l’étape 4. 4 Sélectionnez OK. • Pour annuler l’envoi, sélectionnez Annuler. • Il est impossible de sélectionner des fichiers précis à sauvegarder. Cette fonction ne sauvegarde que les nouveaux fichiers de l’appareil photo. • La progression de la sauvegarde s’affiche sur l’écran de l’ordinateur. • Lorsque le transfert est terminé, l’appareil photo s’éteint automatiquement au bout d’environ 30 secondes. Sélectionnez Annuler pour revenir à l’écran précédent et empêcher l’appareil photo de s’éteindre automatiquement. • Pour éteindre automatiquement votre ordinateur une fois le transfert terminé, sélectionnez Eteindre PC après sauvegarde. • Pour changer d’ordinateur de sauvegarde, sélectionnez . • Si vous connectez l’appareil photo au réseau local sans fil, sélectionnez le point d’accès connecté à l’ordinateur. • L’appareil photo recherche les points d’accès disponibles même si vous vous reconnectez au même point d’accès. • Si vous éteignez l’appareil photo ou retirez sa batterie lors de l’envoi de fichiers, le transfert de fichiers est alors interrompu. • Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction, le contrôle de l’obturateur est désactivé sur votre appareil photo. • Vous ne pouvez connecter qu’un seul appareil photo à l’ordinateur à la fois pour envoyer des fichiers. • La sauvegarde peut être annulée en raison de l’état du réseau. • Les photos ou les vidéos ne peuvent être envoyées qu’une seule fois vers un ordinateur. Il est impossible de les envoyer à nouveau, même si vous connectez l’appareil photo sur un autre ordinateur. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Avant d’utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez désactiver le pare-feu Windows ou tout autre pare-feu. • Vous pouvez envoyer jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents. • Sur le logiciel PC, le nom du serveur doit être saisi en alphabet latin et ne peut pas comporter plus de 48 caractères. • Lorsque plusieurs types de fichiers sont créés simultanément, seuls les fichiers images (JPG) sont transmis à l’ordinateur à l’aide de cette fonctionnalité. 135 Réseau sans fil 5 Sélectionnez le champ Nom, indiquez votre nom, puis appuyez sur . Paramètres expéditeur Nom Enregistrer Courriel Annuler 6 Sélectionnez le champ Courriel, indiquez votre adresse électronique, puis appuyez sur . 7 Sélectionnez Enregistrer pour enregistrer les modifications. • Pour supprimer vos coordonnées, sélectionner Annuler. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres du menu Courriel et envoyer par courrier électronique des photos ou des vidéos stockées sur l’appareil photo. Modification des paramètres de courriel Depuis le menu Courriel, il vous est possible de modifier les paramètres pour le stockage de vos coordonnées. Vous avez également la possibilité de définir ou de changer le mot de passe de courriel. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte ». (p. 127) Enregistrement de vos coordonnées 1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sélectionnez . • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche alors automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles. (p. 123) 3 Appuyez sur [m]. 4 Sélectionnez Paramètres expéditeur. Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel 136 Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel Création d’un mot de passe de courriel 1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sélectionnez . • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche alors automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles. (p. 123) 3 Appuyez sur [m]. 4 Sélectionnez Config. mot de passe ĺ Marche. • Pour désactiver le mot de passe, sélectionnez Arrêt. 5 Lorsque la fenêtre contextuelle apparaît, sélectionnez OK. 6 Saisissez un mot de passe de 4 chiffres. 7 Confirmez-le en le saisissant à nouveau. 8 Lorsque la fenêtre contextuelle apparaît, sélectionnez OK. Si vous avez perdu votre mot de passe, vous pouvez le réinitialiser en sélectionnant RESET sur l’écran de paramétrage du mot de passe. Lors de la réinitialisation, vos paramètres personnels, votre adresse de messagerie électronique et la liste des courriels récemment envoyés seront effacés. 137 Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel Modification du mot de passe de courriel 1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sélectionnez . • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche alors automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles. (p. 123) 3 Appuyez sur [m]. 4 Sélectionnez Changer mot de passe. 5 Saisissez le mot de passe de 4 chiffres actuel. 6 Saisissez un nouveau mot de passe de 4 chiffres. 7 Confirmez-le en le saisissant à nouveau. 8 Lorsque la fenêtre contextuelle apparaît, sélectionnez OK. Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel Vous pouvez envoyer par courriel des photos ou des vidéos stockées sur l’appareil photo. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte ». (p. 127) 1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sélectionnez . • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche alors automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles. (p. 123) 3 Sélectionnez le champ Expéditeur, indiquez votre adresse électronique, puis appuyez sur . • Si vous avez préalablement enregistré vos coordonnées, celles-ci sont insérées automatiquement. (p. 135) • Pour utiliser une adresse figurant dans la liste des précédents expéditeurs, sélectionnez ĺ une adresse. 138 Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel 4 Sélectionnez le champ Destinataire, indiquez une adresse électronique, puis appuyez sur . • Pour utiliser une adresse figurant dans la liste des précédents destinataires, sélectionnez ĺ une adresse. • Sélectionnez pour ajouter des destinataires. Vous pouvez entrer jusqu’à 30 destinataires. • Sélectionnez pour supprimer une adresse de la liste. 5 Sélectionnez Suivant. 6 Sélectionnez les fichiers à envoyer. • Vous pouvez sélectionner jusqu’à 20 fichiers. La taille totale ne doit pas dépasser 7 Mo. 7 Sélectionnez Suivant. 8 Sélectionnez le champ des commentaires, saisissez vos commentaires, puis appuyez sur . 9 Sélectionnez Envoyer. • L’appareil photo transmet alors le courriel. • Même si le transfert de la photo semble s’être déroulé correctement, celle-ci peut être rejetée ou identifiée comme courrier indésirable en cas d’erreur sur le compte de courriel du destinataire. • Il se peut que vous ne soyez pas en mesure d’envoyer de courriel si aucune connexion réseau n’est disponible ou si les paramètres de votre compte de courriel sont incorrects. • Vous ne pouvez pas envoyer de courriel si la taille du fichier est supérieure à la limite définie. La résolution maximale des photos que vous pouvez envoyer est de 2M, et pour envoyer une vidéo d’une durée maximale, vous devez l’enregistrer à l’aide de l’option . Si la résolution de la photo sélectionnée est supérieure à 2M, elle est alors automatiquement redimensionnée à une résolution inférieure. • Si vous ne pouvez pas envoyer de courriel en raison d’un pare-feu ou de paramètres d’authentification utilisateur, contactez votre administrateur réseau ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Vous pouvez également envoyer un courriel en mode Lecture en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ Courriel. 139 Réseau sans fil Publiez vos photos ou vos vidéos sur des sites Web de partage de fichiers. Les sites Web disponibles s’affichent sur votre appareil photo. Pour envoyer des fichiers à certains site Web, vous devez vous inscrire sur le site Web avant de connecter l’appareil photo. Accès à un site Web 1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Sélectionnez un site Web. • Si la fenêtre contextuelle qui vous invite à créer un compte apparaît, sélectionnez OK. • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche alors automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles. (p. 123) 4 Saisissez votre identifiant et votre mot de passe pour vous connecter. • Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, consultez « Saisie de texte ». (p. 127) • Si vous êtes connecté à SkyDrive, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation du navigateur de connexion ». (p. 125) • Pour sélectionner un identifiant dans la liste, appuyez sur ĺ un identifiant. • Si vous avez déjà visité ce site Web, il se peut que vous vous connectiez automatiquement. Vous devez disposer d’un compte sur le site Web de partage de fichiers pour pouvoir exploiter cette fonction. Utilisation des sites Web de partage de photos ou de vidéos 140 Réseau sans fil > Utilisation des sites Web de partage de photos ou de vidéos Téléchargement de photos ou de vidéos 1 Accédez au site Web avec votre appareil photo. 2 Sélectionnez les fichiers à envoyer. • Vous pouvez sélectionner jusqu’à 20 fichiers. La taille totale ne doit pas dépasser 10 Mo. (Sur certains sites Web, la limite en termes de taille totale ou de nombre de fichiers peut varier.) 3 Sélectionnez Publier. • Sur certains sites Web, vous pouvez saisir des remarques en sélectionnant le champ de commentaires. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte ». (p. 127) • Vous pouvez définir un dossier d’envoi pour Facebook en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Charger dossier (Facebook) dans l’écran du site Web. • Vous ne pouvez pas envoyer de fichier si sa taille est supérieure à la limite définie. La résolution maximale des photos que vous pouvez envoyer est de 2M, et pour envoyer une vidéo d’une durée maximale, vous devez l’enregistrer à l’aide de l’option . Si la résolution de la photo sélectionnée est supérieure à 2M, elle est alors automatiquement redimensionnée à une résolution inférieure. (Sur certains sites Web, la résolution maximale d’une photo peut être différente.) • Le mode de publication des photos ou des vidéos peut varier en fonction du site Web sélectionné. • Si vous ne parvenez pas à accéder à un site Web en raison d’un pare-feu ou de paramètres d’authentification utilisateur, contactez votre administrateur réseau ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau. • Il se peut que la date de prise de vue apparaisse dans le titre des photos ou des vidéos publiées. • Le débit de votre connexion Internet peut avoir une incidence sur le temps de publication des photos ou d’ouverture des pages Web. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Vous pouvez également envoyer des photos ou des vidéos sur des sites Web de partage de fichiers en mode Lecture en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ un site Web de votre choix. • Sur certains sites Web, l’envoi de vidéos est impossible. • Lors de l’envoi de photos sur SkyDrive, elles sont redimensionnées à 2M sans aucune déformation. 141 Réseau sans fil Utilisation de AllShare Play pour l’envoi de fichiers Vous pouvez envoyer des fichiers de votre appareil photo vers le stockage en ligne ou visionner des fichiers sur d’autres appareils compatibles connectés au même point d’accès. Stockage en ligne de photos 1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sélectionnez ĺStockage Web. • Si le message du guide apparaît, sélectionnez OK. • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche alors automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles. (p. 123) • Pour modifier la taille des photos envoyées, appuyez sur [m], puis sélectionnez Charger la résolution d'image. • Si vous disposez de plusieurs espaces de stockage Web, vous pouvez faire votre choix dans la liste en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Changer le stockage Web. 3 Saisissez votre identifiant et votre mot de passe, puis sélectionnez Connexion ĺ OK. • Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte ». (p. 127) • Pour sélectionner un identifiant dans la liste, appuyez sur ĺ un identifiant. • Si vous avez déjà visité ce site Web, il se peut que vous vous connectiez automatiquement. Pour utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez créer à l’aide de votre ordinateur un compte AllShare Play disposant d’un service de stockage en ligne. Une fois la création de comptes terminée, ajoutez-les à AllShare Play. 4 Sélectionnez les fichiers à envoyer, puis appuyez sur Publier. • Si vous disposez de plusieurs espaces de stockage Web, commencez par en choisir un. • L’envoi de fichiers vidéo sur le système de stockage en ligne AllShare Play est impossible. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Vous pouvez envoyer jusqu’à 20 fichiers. • Vous pouvez également envoyer des photos en mode Lecture en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ AllShare Play. 142 Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de AllShare Play pour l’envoi de fichiers Visionnage de photos ou de vidéos sur des appareils compatibles AllShare Play 1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sélectionnez ĺAppareils à proximité. • Si le message du guide apparaît, sélectionnez Oui. • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche alors automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles. (p. 123) • Vous pouvez autoriser à se connecter uniquement les appareils sélectionnés ou tous les appareils en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Contrôle d'accès DLNA à l’écran. • Une liste de partage est alors créée. Attendez que les autres appareils aient détecté votre appareil photo. 3 Connectez l’appareil AllShare Play à un réseau, puis activez la fonction AllShare Play. • Reportez-vous au mode d’emploi de votre appareil pour en savoir plus. 4 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez l’appareil AllShare Play à se connecter à votre appareil photo. 5 Sur l’appareil AllShare Play, sélectionnez l’appareil photo auquel se connecter. 6 Sur l’appareil AllShare Play, parcourez la liste des photos ou vidéos partagées. • Pour en savoir plus sur la manière de rechercher l’appareil photo et de parcourir les photos ou les vidéos sur l’appareil AllShare Play, consultez le mode d’emploi de l’appareil. • Selon le type d’appareil AllShare Play ou l’état du réseau, il est possible que les vidéos ne soient pas lues correctement. Pour une lecture sans heurts, utilisez un appareil à point d'accès bibande de 5 GHz. AP S Appareil photo raccordé à un téléviseur compatible AllShare Play via le réseau local sans fil. 143 Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de AllShare Play pour l’envoi de fichiers • Vous pouvez partager jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents. • Vous ne pouvez afficher sur un appareil AllShare Play que des photos ou des vidéos prises avec l’appareil photo. • La portée de la connexion sans fil entre l’appareil photo et un appareil AllShare Play peut varier en fonction des spécifications du point d’accès. • Si l’appareil photo est connecté à 2 appareils AllShare Play, la lecture risque d’être ralentie. • Les photos ou les vidéos sont partagées dans leurs dimensions d’origine. • Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonctionnalité avec des appareils compatibles AllShare Play. • Les photos ou vidéos partagées ne sont pas enregistrées sur l’appareil AllShare Play, mais peuvent être stockées dans l’appareil photo afin de respecter les caractéristiques de l’appareil. • Le transfert de photos ou de vidéos sur l’appareil AllShare Play peut prendre un certain temps selon la connexion réseau, le nombre de fichiers à partager ou la taille des fichiers. • Si vous éteignez l’appareil photo de façon inhabituelle pendant le visionnage de photos ou de vidéos sur un appareil AllShare Play (par exemple, en retirant la batterie), l’appareil considère que l’appareil photo est toujours connecté. • Il se peut que l’ordre des photos ou des vidéos sur l’appareil photo diffère de celui de l’appareil AllShare Play. • En fonction du nombre de photos ou de vidéos à partager, le chargement de celles-ci et l’exécution du processus de configuration initial peuvent prendre un certain temps. • Lorsque vous visionnez des photos ou des vidéos sur l’appareil AllShare Play, l’utilisation continue de la télécommande ou l’exécution d’opérations supplémentaires sur l’appareil peut empêcher le bon fonctionnement de cette fonction. • Si vous réorganisez ou triez des fichiers sur l’appareil photo tout en les visionnant sur un appareil AllShare Play, vous devez procéder à nouveau au processus initial de configuration pour actualiser la liste des fichiers sur l’appareil. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Nous vous recommandons l’utilisation d’un câble réseau pour raccorder l’appareil AllShare Play au point d’accès. Cela permettra de réduire les interruptions de son et d’image lors de la diffusion des vidéos. • Pour visionner des fichiers sur un appareil AllShare Play à l’aide de la fonction Appareils à proximité, vous devez activer le mode Multidiffusion sur votre point d’accès. • Les vidéos d’une résolution de 1920X1080 (60 ips) peuvent uniquement être lues sur des téléviseurs haute définition capables de lire des images à une fréquence de 60 ips. • Vous pouvez visionner des fichiers 3D uniquement sur des moniteurs ou téléviseurs 3D compatibles. 144 Réseau sans fil Envoi de photos à l’aide de la fonction Wi-Fi Direct Lorsque l’appareil photo se connecte à un réseau local sans fil prenant en charge la fonction Wi-Fi Direct, vous pouvez envoyer des photos à l’autre appareil. Il est possible que certains matériels ne soient pas compatibles avec la fonction. 1 Depuis l’appareil, activez l’option Wi-Fi Direct. 2 Sur l’appareil photo, en mode Lecture, parcourez la liste pour accéder à une photo. 3 Appuyez sur [m], puis sélectionnez Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ Wi-Fi Direct. • Lorsque la vue Image unique est activée, vous ne pouvez envoyer qu’une photo à la fois. • Dans la vue Miniatures, vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs photos. Appuyez sur Publier lorsque vous avez terminé de sélectionner les photos. 4 Sélectionnez l’appareil dans la liste des périphériques Wi-Fi Direct de l’appareil photo. • Vérifiez que l’option Wi-Fi Direct est activée sur l’appareil photo. • Vous pouvez également sélectionner l’appareil photo dans la liste des périphériques Wi-Fi Direct. 5 Sur l’appareil, autorisez l’appareil photo à se connecter. • La photo sera envoyée à l’appareil. • Vous pouvez envoyer jusqu’à 20 fichiers simultanément. • Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonctionnalité lorsque la carte mémoire de l’appareil photo ne comporte aucune photo. • Si vous ne parvenez pas à vous connecter à un périphérique Wi-Fi Direct, mettez-le à jour à l’aide de la dernière version du micrologiciel. Il est possible que certains matériels ne soient pas compatibles avec la fonction. Section 5 Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo Cette section présente les paramètres utilisateur et le menu général des réglages de l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez régler les paramètres en fonction de vos besoins et de vos préférences. 146 Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo Vous pouvez définir la manière d’utiliser l’appareil grâce à ces paramètres. Afin de paramétrer les options utilisateur En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ 5 ĺ une option. Les options disponibles et leur ordre d’affichage peuvent différer selon les conditions de Prise de vue. Personnalisation ISO Palier ISO Vous pouvez régler la sensibilité ISO par palier de 1/3 ou 1. Plage ISO auto Si vous réglez la plage ISO sur Automatique, vous pouvez définir la valeur ISO maximum pour chaque palier EV sélectionné. * Paramètre par défaut Option Value 1/3 palier ISO 125, ISO 160, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO 500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000, ISO 2500, ISO 3200* 1 palier ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200* Réducteur de bruit Afin de réduire les parasites sur les photos, utilisez l’option Réducteur de bruit. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Réduct. bruit ISO élevé Cette fonction réduit les parasites qui peuvent apparaître lorsque vous utilisez une sensibilité ISO élevée. (Désactivé, Elevé, Normal*, Bas) Réduc. bruit lg terme Cette fonction réduit le bruit lorsque vous réglez l’appareil photo sur une exposition prolongée. (Désactivé, Marche*) Paramètres utilisateur 147 Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur Réglage du Bracketing Vous pouvez configurer les options BKT AE, BKT NB et A. photo Bracketing. Option Description Réglage AE Bracketing Régler l’intervalle d’exposition. (-/+0.3 EV*, -/+0.7 EV, -/+1 EV, -/+1.3 EV, -/+1.7 EV, -/+2 EV, -/+2.3 EV, -/+2.7 EV, -/+3 EV) Régler Bal.Blanc Brack Régler la gamme de balance des blancs des 3 photos bracketing. (AB-/+3*, AB-/+2, AB-/+1, MG-/+3, MG-/+2, MG-/+1) Par exemple, AB-/+3 règle la valeur Orange sur plus ou moins trois niveaux. MG-/+3 règle la valeur Magenta aux mêmes niveaux. Réglage BKT A. photo Sélectionner 3 paramètres de l’assistant photo que l’appareil utilise pour prendre 3 photos bracketing. DMF (Direct Manual Focus) Vous pouvez régler la mise au point manuellement en faisant tourner la bague, une fois la mise au point effectuée en enfonçant le [Déclencheur] à mi-course. Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible avec certains objectifs. 148 Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur Espace colorimétrique L’espace colorimétrique vous permet de sélectionner les méthodes de représentation des couleurs. Les appareils numériques d’imagerie, comme les appareils photos numériques, les moniteurs et les imprimantes disposent de leurs propres spécificités techniques pour représenter les couleurs, que l’on nomme espaces colorimétriques. Option Description sRGB sRGB (standard RGB) est une spécification internationale qui permet de définir l’espace colorimétrique créé par la CEI (commission électrotechnique internationale). Cette norme est couramment utilisée afin de recréer les couleurs sur des moniteurs d’ordinateurs et constitue également l’espace colorimétrique standard pour les données Exif. sRGB est recommandé pour les images habituelles et celles que vous souhaitez publier sur Internet. RGB Adobe RGB Adobe est utilisé pour des impressions professionnelles et dispose d’une gamme de couleurs plus importante que la norme sRGB, vous permettant ainsi de modifier facilement des photos sur un ordinateur. Notez que les divers programmes disponibles sur le marché ne sont généralement compatibles qu’avec un nombre limité d’espaces colorimétriques. RGB Adobe sRGB Lorsque l’espace colorimétrique est réglé sur Adobe RGB, les photos sont enregistrées sous le nom « _SAMXXXX.JPG ». 149 Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur Correction des déformations Vous pouvez corriger la déformation qui peut se produire avec les objectifs. Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible avec certains objectifs. Fonctionnement tactile Régler cette option pour utiliser le fonctionnement tactile en mode Prise de vue. Option Description Activé Utilisez le fonctionnement tactile en mode Prise de vue. Désactivé N’utilisez pas le fonctionnement tactile en mode Prise de vue. (Vous pouvez utiliser le fonctionnement tactile dans d’autres situations.) Personnalisation iFn Vous pouvez sélectionner les options réglables prévues lorsque vous appuyez sur [i-Function] sur un objectif compatible i-Function. Option Description Ouverture Permet de régler la valeur d’ouverture. Vitesse obturateur Permet de régler la vitesse d’obturation. EV Permet d’ajuster la valeur d’exposition. ISO Définissez la sensibilité ISO. Bal. des blancs Régler la balance des blancs. Z Permet de régler le rapport de zoom. Affichage utilisateur Vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des informations de prise de vue sur l’écran. 1 2 3 London N°. Description 1 Date & heure Activez l’affichage de la date et l’heure. 2 Icônes Activez l’affichage des icônes sur la partie de droite en mode Prise de vue. 150 Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur N°. Description 3 Histogramme Activez ou désactivez l’histogramme sur l’écran. Description des histogrammes Un histogramme est un graphique qui présente la répartition de la lumière sur une photo. Un histogramme incliné vers la gauche signifie que la photo est sombre. Un histogramme incliné vers la droite signifie que la photo est claire. La hauteur des pointes est liée aux informations sur la couleur. Les pointes du graphique sont plus élevées si une couleur spécifique est prédominante. Exposition insuffisante Exposition équilibrée Exposition excessive Attribution touches Vous pouvez modifier la fonction associée à la touche Personnalisé ou DIRECT LINK. * Paramètre par défaut Bouton Fonction Personnalisé Définir une fonction pour la touche de personnalisation. • Aperçu optique* : exécuter la fonction de prévisualisation de la profondeur de champ pour la valeur d’ouverture. (p. 24) • Bal.Bl 1 touche (Balance des blancs) : exécuter la fonction de balance des blancs personnalisée. • 1 touche RAW+ : enregistrer un fichier au format RAW+JPEG. Pour enregistrer un fichier au format JPEG, appuyez à nouveau sur cette touche. • Réinitialiser : réinitialiser certains paramètres. • AEL : exécuter la fonction de verrouillage automatique de l’exposition. • Maintien AEL : continuer d’exécuter la fonction de verrouillage automatique de l’exposition. DIRECT LINK Définir une fonction pour la touche DIRECT LINK. (AutoShare*, MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Sauvegarde automatique, Courriel, Réseaux sociaux et Cloud, AllShare Play) 151 Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur Grille Sélectionnez un guide qui vous aidera à composer une scène (Désactivé*, 3 X 3, 2 X 2, Croix, Diagonale). Voyant de mise au point Afin d’optimiser la mise au point automatique dans les endroits sombres, activez le Voyant M. au P.. La mise au point automatique donne de meilleurs résultats dans des endroits sombres lorsque le Voyant M. au P. est activé. 152 Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo Découvrez comment configurer les paramètres de votre appareil photo. Pour définir les paramètres : En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺ qĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Son • Volume Son : définissez le volume sonore ou désactivez complètement le son. (Désactivé, Bas, Moyen*, Elevé) Même si le volume système est désactivé, l’appareil émet un son lors de la lecture d’une vidéo ou d’un diaporama. • Son de la mise au point : définir le son émis par l’appareil photo lorsque vous enfoncez le déclencheur à mi-course. (Désactivé, Marche*) • Son des touches : définir le son émis par l’appareil photo lorsque vous appuyez sur des touches ou lorsque vous touchez l’écran. (Désactivé, Activé*) Affichage rapide Définir la durée de l’affichage rapide – délai au cours duquel l’appareil photo affiche la photo immédiatement après la prise de vue. (Désactivé, 1 s*, 3 s, 5 s, Conserver) * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Réglage affichage Réglez la luminosité de l’écran, la luminosité automatique, la couleur ou l’indicateur de niveau. • Luminosité écran : régler la luminosité de l’écran manuellement. • Luminosité auto : activez ou désactivez la luminosité automatique. (Désactivé, Marche*) • Colorimètrie écran : vous pouvez régler la couleur de l’affichage manuellement. • Calibrage horizontal: calibrer l’indicateur de niveau. Si l’indicateur de niveau n’est pas droit, positionnez l’appareil de photo sur une surface plane, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran. • Vous ne pouvez pas accéder à l’option Calibrage horizontal en mode Lecture. • Vous ne pouvez pas définir le niveau de l’orientation portrait. Désactivation écran auto Définissez le délai de désactivation de l’écran. Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil photo après une durée prédéfinie, l’écran s’éteint. (Désactivé, 30 s*, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min) Paramètres 153 Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo > Paramètres * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Economie d'énergie Définir le délai de mise hors tension. L’appareil photo s’éteint lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas pendant une période prédéfinie. (30 s, 1 min*, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min) • L’appareil photo mémorise le délai de mise hors tension même si vous remplacez la batterie. • Si l’appareil photo est connecté à un ordinateur ou à un téléviseur et qu’une vidéo ou un diaporama est en cours de lecture, il est possible que la fonction Economie d'énergie ne fonctionne pas. Affichage guide aide • Aide à la sélection de mode: activer l’affichage de texte d’aide pour le mode sélectionné lors du changement de mode de prise de vue. (Désactivé, Activé*) • Aide à la sélection de fonction: activer l’affichage de texte d’aide sur les menus et les fonctions. (Désactivé, Activé*) Appuyez sur [n] pour masquer le texte d’aide. Language Sélectionnez une langue d’affichage. Date et heure Définissez la date, l’heure, le format de date, le fuseau horaire et indiquez si la date doit être imprimée sur les photos. (Fuseau horaire, Date & heure, Type date, Type d'heure, Impression) • La date apparaît en bas à droite de la photo. • Lorsque vous imprimez une photo, il est possible que certaines imprimantes n’impriment pas la date correctement. * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Vidéo Sélectionner la sortie des signaux vidéo appropriée à votre pays lorsque l’appareil photo est raccordé à un appareil vidéo externe, comme un moniteur ou un téléviseur HD. • NTSC : États-Unis, Canada, Japon, Corée, Taïwan, Mexique, etc. • PAL (prend en charge uniquement PAL B, D, G, H ou I) : Australie, Autriche, Belgique, Chine, Danemark, Finlande, France, Allemagne, Royaume-Uni, Italie, Koweït, Malaisie, Nouvelle-Zélande, Singapour, Espagne, Suède, Suisse, Thaïlande, Norvège, etc. Anynet+ (HDMICEC) Lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un téléviseur HD compatible avec la fonction Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), vous pouvez contrôler la fonction de lecture de l’appareil photo avec une télécommande. • Désactivé : vous ne pouvez contrôler la fonction de lecture de l’appareil photo avec la télécommande du téléviseur. • Marche* : vous pouvez contrôler la fonction de lecture de l’appareil photo avec la télécommande du téléviseur. Sortie HDMI Lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un téléviseur HD avec un câble HDMI, vous pouvez modifier la résolution de l’image. • NTSC : Automatique*, 1080p, 720p, 480p, 576p (actif uniquement lorsque le réglage PAL est sélectionné) Si le téléviseur HD n’est pas compatible avec la résolution que vous avez sélectionné, l’appareil photo définit la résolution au niveau inférieur. 154 Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo > Paramètres * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Sortie HDMI 3D Sélectionner une option pour la lecture de fichiers sur un téléviseur 3D. • Côte à côte* : affiche deux images côte à côte. • Compression d'images : affiche alternativement les images de l’œil gauche et de l’œil droit dans des cadres différents. Nom du fichier Définissez la méthode de création des noms de fichier. • Standard* : SAM_XXXX.JPG (sRGB) / _SAMXXXX.JPG (RGB Adobe) • Date : - fichiers sRGB - MMDDXXXX.JPG. Par exemple, pour une photo prise le 1er janvier, le nom du fichier est 0101XXXX.jpg. - fichiers RGB Adobe - _MDDXXXX.JPG pour les mois de janvier à septembre. pour les mois d’octobre à décembre, le numéro du mois est remplacé par les lettres A (oct.), B (nov.) et C (déc.). Par exemple, pour une photo prise le 3 février, le nom du fichier est _203XXXX.jpg. Pour une photo prise le 5 octobre, le fichier est nommé _A05XXXX.jpg. * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Numéro fichier Définissez la méthode de création des noms de fichier et de dossier. • Réinitialiser : après utilisation de la fonction de réinitialisation, la dénomination des nouveaux fichiers débute à 0001. • Série* : les nouveaux numéros de fichiers s’ajoutent à la suite de ceux déjà existants, même si vous avez inséré ou formaté une nouvelle carte mémoire ou que vous avez supprimé toutes les photos existantes. • Le nom du premier dossier est 100PHOTO.Si vous avez sélectionné la gamme de couleurs sRGB et la dénomination standard des fichiers, le nom du premier fichier correspond à SAM_0001. • Les noms de fichiers augmentent progressivement d’une unité de SAM_0001 à SAM_9999. • Les noms des dossiers augmentent progressivement d’une unité de 100PHOTO à 999PHOTO. • Un même dossier peut contenir 9 999 fichiers maximum. • Les numéros de fichiers sont attribués conformément aux spécifications DCF (Design rule for Camera File system). • Si vous modifiez le nom d’un fichier (par exemple sur un ordinateur), l’appareil photo ne sera pas en mesure de le lire. Type dossier Définissez un type de dossier. • Standard* : XXXPHOTO • Date : XXX_MMDD 155 Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo > Paramètres * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Formater Formater la carte mémoire. Le formatage supprime l’ensemble des fichiers, y compris les fichiers protégés. (Oui, Non) Il est possible que des erreurs se produisent si vous utilisez une carte mémoire qui a été formatée à l’aide d’un appareil photo d’une autre marque, d’un lecteur de cartes mémoire ou d’un ordinateur. Veuillez formater les cartes mémoire dans l’appareil photo avant de les utiliser pour effectuer des prises de vue. Informations périphérique Afficher la version du micrologiciel du boîtier et de l’objectif, l’adresse Mac et le numéro de certification réseau, ou mettre à jour le micrologiciel. • M. à J. firmware: mettre à jour le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil photo ou de l’objectif. (Boîtier, Objectif) • Vous pouvez télécharger les mises à jour du micrologiciel sur www.samsung.fr ou www.samsung.ca. • Vous ne pouvez pas lancer la mise à jour du micrologiciel sans avoir complètement rechargé la batterie au préalable. Rechargez entièrement la batterie avant d’effectuer la mise à niveau du micrologiciel. • Si vous mettez le micrologiciel à jour, les paramètres utilisateur et les valeurs sont réinitialisés. (La date, l’heure, la langue et la sortie vidéo ne sont pas modifiées.) • N’éteignez pas l’appareil photo lorsque la mise à jour est en cours. * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Point d'accès mobile bi-bande Définissez une fréquence pour utiliser l'appareil photo comme point d'accès pour la fonction AutoShare, MobileLink ou Remote Viewfinder. (5 GHz, 2,4 GHz*) Si vous utilisez l’appareil photo dans un pays autre que celui dans lequel il a été acheté, la fonction Wi-Fi 5 GHz risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement, en raison des différences de fréquences radio. Si tel est le cas, utilisez plutôt la fonction Wi-Fi 2,4 GHz. GPS • Géolocalisation : paramétrer l’appareil pour prendre des photos en affichant les informations de localisation à l’aide de la fonction GPS (Global Positioning System). Les informations de localisation sont ajoutées aux données Exif associées à la photo. (Désactivé, Activé*) • Param. tps val. GPS : indiquer la durée d’utilisation des dernières informations de localisation lorsque l’appareil photo ne parvient pas à recevoir les signaux GPS. Si l’appareil photo ne parvient toujours pas à capter les signaux GPS une fois le délai spécifié écoulé, les informations de localisation ne sont alors pas enregistrées sur les photos. (15 s*, 30 s, 1 min, 3 min, 10 min, 30 min) • Affichage lieu : afficher les informations de localisation à l’écran en mode Prise de vue. Les informations de localisation s’affichent en coréen uniquement si vous résidez en Corée et que la langue d’affichage est réglée sur le coréen. Si vous définissez une autre langue, les informations de localisation s’afficheront en anglais. (Désactivé, Activé*) • Réinit. GPS : paramétrer l’appareil photo pour qu’il recherche les satellites GPS autour de votre position actuelle. (Oui, Non) Pour utiliser la fonction GPS, vous devez acheter un appareil GPS en option. 156 Menu des réglages de l’appareil photo > Paramètres * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Nettoyage du capteur • Nettoyage du capteur : enlevez la poussière du capteur. • Action de démarrage : l’appareil photo procède à un nettoyage du capteur à chaque fois que vous le mettez en marche. (Désactivé*, Marche) Ce produit utilisant des objectifs interchangeables, il est possible que de la poussière se dépose sur le capteur lorsque vous changez les objectifs. Cela peut causer l’apparition de particules de poussière sur les photos que vous prenez. Il est recommandé de ne pas changer les objectifs lorsque vous vous trouvez dans des endroits particulièrement poussiéreux. Par ailleurs, assurez-vous que le cache de l’objectif soit en place lorsque vous ne vous en servez pas. Réinitialiser Réinitialisez le menu des paramètres et les options de prises de vue sur les paramètres par défaut. (La date, l’heure, la langue et la sortie vidéo ne sont pas modifiées.) (Oui, Non) Licences open source Afficher les licences open source. Section 6 Connexion à des appareils externes Tirez pleinement partie des fonctionnalités de l’appareil photo en le connectant à des appareils externes comme, par exemple, un ordinateur, un téléviseur HD ou un téléviseur 3D. 158 Connexion à des appareils externes Visionnez les photos ou vidéos en raccordant l’appareil photo à un téléviseur HD (ou téléviseur 3D) à l’aide d’un câble HDMI en option. Visionnage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD 1 En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺ qĺ Sortie HDMI ĺ une option. (p. 153) 2 Eteignez l’appareil photo et le téléviseur HD. 3 Reliez l’appareil photo au téléviseur HD à l’aide d’un câble HDMI proposé en option. 4 Allumez votre téléviseur HD et sélectionnez la source vidéo HDMI. 5 Allumez l’appareil photo. • L’appareil photo passe automatiquement en mode Lecture lorsque vous le raccordez à un téléviseur HD. 6 Utilisez les touches de l’appareil photo pour visualiser des photos ou lire des vidéos. • Grâce au câble HDMI, vous pouvez brancher l’appareil photo sur le téléviseur HD en utilisant la méthode Anynet+(CEC). • Les fonctions Anynet+(CEC) vous permettent de contrôler les appareils connectés en utilisant la télécommande du téléviseur. • Si le téléviseur HD est compatible avec Anynet+(CEC), il s’allume automatiquement lorsqu’il est connecté à l’appareil photo. Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible sur certains téléviseurs HD. • Vous ne pouvez pas prendre de photos ou de vidéos lorsque l’appareil photo est branché sur le téléviseur HD à l’aide d’un câble HDMI. • Il est possible que certaines fonctions de lecture de l’appareil photo ne soient pas disponibles, lorsque celui-ci est branché sur un téléviseur HD. • Le délai de connexion de l’appareil photo à un téléviseur HD peut varier en fonction de la carte mémoire utilisée. La fonction principale d’une carte mémoire étant d’augmenter la vitesse de transfert, celle-ci ne sera pas nécessairement plus rapide lors de l’utilisation de fonctions HDMI, même si elle dispose d’un taux de transfert plus élevé. • Les vidéos d’une résolution de 1920X1080 (60 ips) peuvent uniquement être lues sur des téléviseurs haute définition capables de lire des images à une fréquence de 60 ips. Visionnage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD ou 3D 159 Connexion à des appareils externes > Visionnage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD ou 3D Visionnage de fichiers sur un téléviseur 3D Vous pouvez visionner sur un téléviseur 3D les photos ou vidéos prises en mode 3D ou à l’aide de la fonction Panorama 3D en mode Intelligent. 1 En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺ qĺ Sortie HDMI ĺ une option. (p. 153) 2 Sélectionnez Sortie HDMI 3D ĺ une option. (p. 154) 3 Eteignez l’appareil photo et le téléviseur 3D. 4 Reliez l’appareil photo au téléviseur 3D à l’aide d’un câble HDMI proposé en option. 5 Allumez votre téléviseur 3D et sélectionnez la source vidéo HDMI. 6 Allumez l’appareil photo. • L’appareil photo passe automatiquement en mode Lecture lorsque vous le raccordez à un téléviseur 3D. 7 Accédez à un fichier 3D, puis appuyez sur [I] pour passer en mode 3D. • Appuyez à nouveau sur [I] pour repasser en mode 2D. 8 Activez la fonction 3D du téléviseur. • Reportez-vous au mode d’emploi de votre téléviseur pour en savoir plus. 9 Utilisez les touches de l’appareil photo pour visionner des photos ou des vidéos 3D. • Il est impossible de visionner un fichier MPO en 3D sur des téléviseurs non compatibles avec ce format de fichier. • Utilisez des lunettes 3D adaptées pour visionner un fichier MPO ou une vidéo 3D sur un téléviseur 3D. • Lorsque vous prenez des photos en mode Panorama 3D, l’effet 3D risque d’être moins prononcé par rapport à des photos prises en mode 3D avec un objectif 3D. Ne visualisez pas les photos ou vidéos 3D prises avec l’appareil photo sur un téléviseur ou un moniteur 3D pendant une durée prolongée. Cela risque de provoquer des symptômes indésirables, tels qu’une fatigue oculaire, des nausées ou des effets plus marqués. 160 Connexion à des appareils externes Transférez les fichiers d’une carte mémoire sur votre ordinateur en connectant l’appareil photo à ce dernier. Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Windows Connexion de l’appareil photo en tant que disque amovible Vous pouvez connecter l’appareil photo à votre ordinateur en tant que disque amovible. 1 Éteignez l’appareil photo. 2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. • Vous devez brancher l’extrémité la plus petite du câble USB sur l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. • Si vous tentez de brancher le câble USB sur le port HDMI, l’appareil photo risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 3 Allumez l’appareil photo. • L’ordinateur détecte automatiquement l’appareil photo. 4 Sur l’ordinateur, sélectionnez Poste de travail ĺ Disque amovible ĺ DCIM ĺ 100PHOTO ou 101_0101. 5 Sélectionnez les fichiers de votre choix, puis faites-les glisser ou enregistrez-les sur l’ordinateur. Si Type dossier est réglé sur Date, le nom du dossier apparaît comme suit : « XXX_MMDD ». Par exemple, si vous capturez un fichier le 1er janvier, le nom du fichier sera « 101_0101 ». Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur 161 Connexion à des appareils externes > Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur Déconnexion de l’appareil photo (Windows XP) La méthode pour débrancher l’appareil photo est identique pour Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows 8. 1 Assurez-vous qu’aucune donnée n’est en cours de transfert entre l’appareil photo et l’ordinateur. • Si le témoin lumineux de l’appareil photo clignote, cela signifie que des données sont en cours de transfert. Attendez que le voyant d’état cesse de clignoter. 2 Cliquez sur dans la barre d’outils en bas à droite de l’écran de l’ordinateur. 3 Cliquez sur le message qui apparaît. 4 Cliquez sur la zone du message indiquant que l’appareil photo a été retiré en toute sécurité. 5 Débranchez le câble USB. Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur Mac Mac OS 10.5 ou version ultérieure est pris en charge. 1 Eteignez l’appareil photo. 2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur Macintosh à l’aide du câble USB. • Vous devez brancher l’extrémité la plus fine du câble USB sur l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. • Si vous tentez de brancher le câble USB sur le port HDMI, l’appareil photo risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 162 Connexion à des appareils externes > Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur 3 Allumez l’appareil photo. • L’ordinateur détecte automatiquement l’appareil photo et affiche une icône de disque amovible. 4 Ouvrez le disque amovible. 5 Transférez vos photos ou vos vidéos sur l’ordinateur Mac. 163 Connexion à des appareils externes Vous pouvez afficher et modifier les fichiers à l’aide des programmes fournis. Vous pouvez envoyer des fichiers à l’ordinateur via le réseau sans fil. Installation des programmes depuis le CD-ROM fourni 1 Insérez le CD-ROM d’installation dans le lecteur de votre ordinateur. 2 Sélectionnez une langue. 3 Sélectionnez le programme à installer. 4 Suivez les instructions affichées à l’écran. 5 Cliquez sur Exit (Quitter) pour terminer l’installation. Programmes disponibles lors de l’utilisation de i-Launcher Elément Description Multimedia Viewer Vous pouvez lire des fichiers avec le Multimedia Viewer. Firmware Upgrade Vous pouvez télécharger le micrologiciel de votre appareil photo. PC Auto Backup Vous pouvez envoyer sur un ordinateur, à l’aide de la fonction sans fil, les photos ou vidéos prises avec l’appareil photo. Utilisation de i-Launcher i-Launcher vous permet de lire des fichiers avec Multimedia Viewer et propose un lien pour télécharger le programme PC Auto Backup. Configuration requise pour Windows Elément Configuration requise Processeur Intel® i5 3,3 GHz or higherou plus puissant / AMD Phenom™ II x4 3,2 GHz ou plus puissant Mémoire vive Minimum 512 Mo de RAM (1 Go ou plus recommandé) Système d’exploitation* Windows XP SP2, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8 Capacité du disque dur 250 Mo minimum (1 Go et plus recommandé) Divers • Lecteur de CD-ROM • Pour une résolution de 1024 x 768, un moniteur couleur 16 bits compatible est recommandé (pour une résolution de 1280 x 1024 pixels, un écran couleur 32 bits est recommandé) • Port USB 2.0 • Carte vidéo nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT ou plus récente / ATI X1600 ou plus récente • Microsoft DirectX 9.0c ou une version ultérieure * Une version 32 bits de i-Launcher est installée—y compris sur les éditions 64 bits de Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows 8. Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur fonctionnant sous Windows 164 Connexion à des appareils externes > Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur fonctionnant sous Windows • La configuration indiquée ne constitue qu’une recommandation. i-Launcher peut ne pas fonctionner correctement sur certains ordinateurs, même si ceux-ci répondent aux spécifications. • Si l’ordinateur ne répond pas aux spécifications requises, un problème de lecture vidéo risque de survenir. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages résultant de l’utilisation d’ordinateurs non conformes, notamment les ordinateurs assemblés. Configuration requise pour Mac Elément Configuration requise Système d’exploitation Mac OS 10.5 ou ultérieur (à l’exception du PowerPC) Mémoire vive Minimum 256 Mo de RAM (512 Mo ou plus recommandé) Capacité du disque dur 110 Mo minimum Divers Port USB 2.0, lecteur de CD-ROM Ouverture de i-Launcher Sur l’ordinateur Windows, sélectionnez démarrer ĺ Tous les programmes ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher ĺ Samsung i-Launcher. Ou, cliquez sur Applications ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher sur un ordinateur Mac. 165 Connexion à des appareils externes > Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur fonctionnant sous Windows Utilisation de la fonction Multimedia Viewer La fonction Multimedia Viewer vous permet de lire des fichiers. Depuis l’écran Samsung i-Launcher, cliquez sur Multimedia Viewer. • Elle prend en charge les formats suivants : - Vidéos : MP4 (Vidéo : H.264, Audio : AAC), WMV (WMV 7/8/9), AVI (MJPEG) - Photos : JPG, GIF, BMP, PNG, TIFF, MPO • Les fichiers enregistrés avec les appareils d’autres fabricants risquent de ne pas être lus correctement. Afficher des photos 1 2 3 1011 456789 N°. Description 1 Nom du fichier 2 Zone agrandie 3 HistogrammeHistogram 4 Ouvrir le fichier sélectionné. 5 Touche Histogramme 6 Faire pivoter vers la gauche ou vers la droite. 7 Passer au fichier suivant / revenir au précédent. 8 Dimensionner la photo à la taille de l’écran. 9 Afficher la photo à sa taille d’origine. 10 Zoom avant / arrière 11 Commuter entres les modes 2D et 3D. 166 Connexion à des appareils externes > Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur fonctionnant sous Windows Lecture de vidéos 1 2 8 4567 3 N°. Description 1 Nom du fichier 2 Régler le volume. 3 Ouvrir le fichier sélectionné. 4 Accéder au fichier suivant. 5 Arrêter N°. Description 6 Pause 7 Revenir au fichier précédent. 8 Barre de progression Téléchargement du micrologiciel Depuis l’écran Samsung i-Launcher, cliquez sur Firmware Upgrade. Téléchargement du programme PC Auto Backup Depuis l’écran Samsung i-Launcher, cliquez sur PC Auto Backup. Pour en savoir plus sur l’installation du programme PC Auto Backup, reportez-vous à la page 133. 167 Connexion à des appareils externes > Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur fonctionnant sous Windows Installation de Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 1 Insérez le DVD-ROM Adobe Photoshop Lightroom dans votre ordinateur. 2 Sélectionnez une langue. 3 Suivez les instructions affichées à l’écran. Utilisation de Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Les photos prises par un appareil numérique sont souvent converties en format JPEG et stockées dans la mémoire en fonction des paramètres de l’appareil au moment de la capture. Les fichiers RAW ne sont pas convertis au format JPEG et sont stockés dans la mémoire sans qu’aucune modification ne soit effectuée. Avec Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, vous pouvez régler le niveau d’exposition, la balance des blancs, la tonalité, les contrastes et les couleurs des photos. Vous pouvez également modifier les fichiers JPEG ou TIFF ainsi que les fichiers RAW. Pour plus de détails, consultez le guide des programmes. Section 7 Annexes Obtenez des informations concernant les messages d’erreur, l’entretien de l’appareil photo, des conseils de dépannage, les caractéristiques et les accessoires en option. 169 Annexes Lorsque l’un des messages d’erreur suivants apparaît, reportez-vous aux solutions proposées pour tenter de résoudre le problème. Messages d'erreur Solutions possibles Objectif verrouillé L’objectif est verrouillé. Tourner l’objectif dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d’une montre jusqu’au déclic. (p. 45) Erreur de carte • Eteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le. • Retirez la carte mémoire, puis insérez-la de nouveau. • Formatez la carte mémoire. Batterie faible Insérez une batterie chargée ou rechargez celle qui est déjà en place. Aucun fichier image Prenez des photos ou insérez une carte mémoire qui en contient. Erreur de fichier Supprimez le fichier endommagé ou contactez le centre de Service Après-Vente. Mémoire pleine Supprimez les fichiers inutiles ou insérez une nouvelle carte mémoire. Carte verrouillée Vous pouvez verrouiller la carte SD, SDHC, SDXC ou UHS-1 pour éviter la suppression des fichiers. Déverrouillez la carte pour prendre des photos. (p. 173) Messages d'erreur Solutions possibles Nombre de dossiers et fichiers max. Remplacez la carte. Les noms de fichier ne correspondent pas à la norme DCF. Transférez les fichiers de la carte mémoire vers votre ordinateur et formatez-la. (p. 155) Error 00 Eteignez l’appareil photo avant de retirer l’objectif. Si le message continue de s’afficher, contactez le centre de Service Après-Vente. Error 01/02 Eteignez l’appareil photo, retirez la batterie et insérezla de nouveau. Si le message continue de s’afficher, contactez le centre de service. Messages d’erreur 170 Annexes Nettoyage de l’appareil photo Objectif et écran de l’appareil photo Utilisez un pinceau pour éliminer la poussière et essuyez délicatement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux. S’il reste de la poussière, humidifiez une lingette avec du nettoyant liquide pour objectif et essuyez délicatement. Capteur d’images En fonction des conditions de prise de vue, de la poussière peut apparaître sur les photos suite à l’exposition du capteur d’images à l’environnement extérieur. Ce phénomène est normal et l’exposition à la poussière fait partie de l’utilisation quotidienne de l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez retirer la poussière du capteur d’images en utilisant la fonction de nettoyage du capteur (p. 156). S’il reste de la poussière après le nettoyage du capteur, contactez un centre de service. N’introduisez pas la soufflette dans la monture de l’objectif. Boîtier de l’appareil photo Essuyez-le délicatement avec un chiffon doux et sec. N’utilisez jamais de benzène, de diluants ou d’alcool pour nettoyer l’appareil. Ces produits peuvent l’endommager ou entraîner un dysfonctionnement. Entretien de l’appareil photo 171 Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo Utilisation sur la plage ou en bord de mer • Protégez l’appareil photo du sable et de la terre lorsque vous l’utilisez à la plage ou dans d’autres endroits similaires. • L’appareil photo n’est pas étanche. Ne manipulez pas la batterie, l’adaptateur ou la carte mémoire avec des mains humides. Cela pourrait endommager l’appareil photo. Rangement pour une durée prolongée • Lorsque vous rangez l’appareil photo pour une durée prolongée, placezle dans un récipient clos avec un matériau absorbant comme du gel de silice. • Lorsqu’elle n’est pas utilisée pendant une période prolongée, une batterie pleine se décharge progressivement et doit alors être rechargée avant l’utilisation suivante. • Il est possible d’initialiser la date et l’heure actuelles lorsque l’appareil photo est éteint et que la batterie est restée en dehors de l’appareil photo pendant une durée prolongée. Utilisation et rangement de l’appareil photo Usage ou rangement inapproprié de l’appareil photo • Evitez d’exposer l’appareil à des températures extrêmes. • Evitez d’utiliser l’appareil photo dans des endroits très humides ou dans lesquels le taux d’humidité varie beaucoup. • Evitez d’exposer l’appareil photo à la lumière directe du soleil et de le ranger dans des endroits chauds, mal ventilés, comme à l’intérieur d’une voiture en été. • Protégez l’appareil photo et son écran contre les chocs et les vibrations excessives, qui risquent de les endommager. • Evitez d’utiliser et de ranger l’appareil photo dans un endroit poussiéreux, mal entretenu, humide ou peu ventilé, afin de ne pas endommager ses composants internes. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de combustibles ou de produits chimiques inflammables. Ne transportez et ne stockez jamais de liquides inflammables, de gaz ou de matériaux explosifs dans le même compartiment que l’appareil ou ses accessoires. • Ne rangez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de boules de naphtaline. 172 Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo Usage avec précaution de l’appareil photo dans les environnements humides Lorsque vous faites passer l’appareil photo d’un environnement froid à un environnement chaud, de la condensation peut se former sur l’objectif et les composants internes de l’appareil photo. Si tel est le cas, éteignez l’appareil photo et attendez au moins 1 heure. Si de la condensation s’est formée sur la carte mémoire, retirez-la et attendez que l’humidité se soit évaporée avant de la réinsérer. Autres avertissements • Ne faites pas tournoyer l’appareil photo par la dragonne. Vous risquez de vous blesser ou d’entrainer des blessures à d’autres personnes, ou même d’endommager l’appareil photo. • Evitez de peindre l’appareil photo, la peinture risquant de bloquer ses pièces mobiles et de perturber son fonctionnement. • Eteignez l’appareil photo si vous l’utilisez pas. • L’appareil photo contient des pièces fragiles. Evitez de faire subir des chocs à l’appareil photo. • Protégez l’écran de toute pression extérieure en le conservant dans l’étui lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Protégez l’appareil photo des rayures en le tenant à l’écart du sable, des objets pointus ou des pièces de monnaie. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo si l’écran est fissuré ou brisé. Vous risquez de vous blesser les mains ou le visage avec les morceaux de verre ou de plastique. Rapportez votre appareil photo à un centre de service aprèsvente Samsung pour le faire réparer. • Ne posez jamais l’appareil photo, les batteries, le chargeur ou des accessoires à l’intérieur ou au-dessus d’un dispositif chauffant, tel qu’un four à micro-ondes, une cuisinière ou un radiateur. Cela pourrait entraîner une déformation ou une surchauffe des matériaux, ou même provoquer un incendie ou une explosion. • Evitez toute exposition de l’objectif à la lumière directe du soleil - ceci risque d’entraîner une décoloration ou un mauvais fonctionnement du capteur d’images. • Protégez l’objectif des traces de doigt et des éraflures. Nettoyez l’objectif en utilisant un chiffon doux et propre, exempt de poussière. • L’appareil photo peut s’éteindre en cas de pression extérieure. Cela a pour but de protéger la carte mémoire. Allumez l’appareil photo pour l’utiliser à nouveau. • Il est possible que l’appareil photo chauffe en cours d’utilisation. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ou les performances de l’appareil. • Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo dans des températures faibles, il peut mettre du temps à s’éteindre, une décoloration peut se produire temporairement ou des images persistantes peuvent apparaître. Il ne s’agit en aucun cas de dysfonctionnements. Ces perturbations sont momentanées et se corrigent d’elles-mêmes une fois que l’appareil retrouve à nouveau une température plus modérée. • La peinture ou le métal du boîtier de l’appareil photo peut provoquer des allergies, des démangeaisons, de l’eczéma ou des boursouflures pour les personnes à peau sensible. Si vous présentez de tels symptômes, arrêtez immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil photo et consultez un médecin. • N’introduisez pas de corps étrangers dans les trappes, les logements ou les ouvertures de l’appareil photo. Il est possible que les dommages provoqués par une mauvaise utilisation ne soient pas couverts par votre garantie. • Ne confiez pas la réparation de l’appareil photo à un technicien non agréé et ne tentez pas de le réparer vous-même. Votre garantie ne couvre pas les dégâts résultant d’une réparation par un technicien non agréé. 173 Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo A propos des cartes mémoire Cartes mémoires compatibles Ce produit est compatible avec les cartes mémoire SD (Secure Digital), SDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity), SDXC (Secure Digital eXtended Capacity), UHS-1 (Ultra High Speed-1), microSD, microSDHC, microSDXC ou microUHS-1. Contact Loquet de protection contre l’écriture Étiquette (face avant) Vous pouvez protéger les fichiers contre la suppression en utilisant le loquet de verrouillage empêchant l’écriture sur les cartes SD, SDHC, SDXC ou UHS-1. Faites glisser le loquet vers le bas pour verrouiller la carte ou vers le haut pour la déverrouiller. Déverrouillez la carte lorsque vous prenez des photos ou filmez des vidéos. Adaptateur de carte mémoire Carte mémoire Pour utiliser des cartes de type micro avec ce produit, un ordinateur ou un lecteur de carte mémoire, insérez la carte dans un adaptateur. 174 Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo Capacité de la carte mémoire La capacité de la mémoire peut varier en fonction de la scène ou des conditions de prise de vue. Ces capacités sont données pour une carte SD d’2 Go. Taille Qualité Maximale Elevée Normale RAW RAW + Très élevé RAW + Elevé RAW + Normal Photo 20.0M (5472X3648) 151 179 218 69 47 49 52 10.1M (3888X2592) 276 321 384 - 62 64 66 5.9M (2976X1984) 423 484 565 - 71 72 74 2.0M (1728X1152) 845 923 1 016 - 82 83 84 Mode Rafale 479 545 631 - - - - 16.9M (5472X3080) 177 208 252 - 51 53 56 7.8M (3712X2088) 343 396 467 - 66 68 70 4.9M (2944X1656) 487 553 640 - 74 75 76 2.1M (1920X1080) 827 905 999 - 82 83 84 13.3M (3648X3648) 218 255 307 - 56 58 61 7.0M (2640X2640) 373 429 504 - 68 70 72 4.0M (2000X2000) 559 630 721 - 76 77 78 1.1M (1024X1024) 1 111 1 180 1 258 - 86 86 87 175 Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo Taille Qualité Haute qualité Normale Vidéo 1920X1080 (60 ips) Environ 10' 10" Environ 12' 43" 1920X1080 (30 ips) Environ 17' 41" Environ 22' 09" * 1920X1080 (15 ips) Environ 23' 38" Environ 29' 24" 1920X810 (24 ips) Environ 21' 35" Environ 27' 02" 1280X720 (60 ips) Environ 16' 51" Environ 21' 06" 1280X720 (30 ips) Environ 29' 11" Environ 36' 35" 640X480 (30 ips) Environ 120' 47" Environ 153' 30" Pour partager (30 ips) Environ 218' 48" Environ 278' 24" * est disponible uniquement avec certaines options de filtre intelligent. • Les valeurs précédentes sont mesurées sans utiliser la fonction de zoom. • Le temps d’enregistrement disponible peut varier si le zoom est utilisé. • Plusieurs vidéos ont été enregistrées successivement afin de déterminer la durée totale d’enregistrement. • La durée maximale d’enregistrement est de 29 minutes et 59 secondes par fichier. • La durée maximale de lecture de vidéos Pour partager est de 30 secondes par fichier. 176 Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo • Evitez tout contact des cartes mémoire avec des liquides, de la poussière ou des corps étrangers. Si la carte mémoire est sale, nettoyez-la avec un chiffon doux avant de l’introduire dans l’appareil photo. • Evitez que les cartes mémoire ou l’emplacement pour carte mémoire n’entrent en contact avec des liquides, des poussières ou tout corps étranger. Cela risque d’endommager l’appareil photo ou les cartes mémoire. • Lorsque vous transportez une carte mémoire, rangez-la dans un étui afin de la protéger de l’électricité statique. • Transférez vos données importantes sur d’autres supports, tel qu’un disque dur ou un CD / DVD. • Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo de manière prolongée, la carte mémoire peut chauffer. Ceci est normal et n’engendre pas de dysfonctionnement. • Utilisez une carte mémoire conforme aux normes en vigueur. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire • Evitez d’exposer les cartes mémoire à des températures extrêmes (inférieures à 0 °C ou supérieures à 40 °C). Cela risque de provoquer des dysfonctionnements des cartes mémoire. • Introduisez une carte mémoire dans le bon sens. Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil photo ainsi que la carte mémoire. • N’utilisez pas de carte mémoire qui a été formatée avec un autre appareil photo ou avec un ordinateur. Reformatez la carte mémoire sur l’appareil photo. • Eteignez l’appareil photo avant d’introduire ou de retirer la carte mémoire. • Vous ne devez pas retirer la carte mémoire ou éteindre l’appareil photo lorsque le voyant clignote. Vous risquez d’endommager vos données. • Au terme de la durée de vie de la batterie, vous ne pouvez plus stocker de photos sur la carte. Remplacez-la. • Evitez de plier la carte mémoire, de la laisser tomber ou de la soumettre à des chocs ou des pressions importantes. • Evitez d’utiliser ou de ranger les cartes mémoire à proximité de champs magnétiques. • Evitez d’utiliser ou de ranger des cartes mémoire dans des environnements chauds, très humides ou en contact avec des substances corrosives. 177 Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo • Ne posez pas l’appareil sur des surfaces inflammables comme de la literie, des couvertures, des tapis ou des couvertures électriques pendant des périodes prolongées. • Lorsque l’appareil est allumé, ne le laissez pas dans un espace confiné pendant une période prolongée. • Ne laissez pas les bornes de la batterie entrer en contact avec des objets métalliques comme des colliers, des pièces de monnaie, des clés ou bien des montres. • Utilisez uniquement d’authentiques batteries de remplacement Lithium-ion recommandées par le fabricant. • Ne démontez ou ne perforez pas la batterie avec un objet coupant, tel qu’il soit. • Evitez de soumettre la batterie à une pression élevée ou bien à des éléments susceptible de l’écraser. • Evitez de soumettre la batterie à des chocs importants comme par exemple la laisser tomber de très haut. • N’exposez pas la batterie à des températures supérieures ou égales à 60 °C. • Evitez de mettre la batterie en contact avec des liquides ou de l’humidité. • Evitez de mettre la batterie en contact avec le feu et de l’exposer à une chaleur extrême ou au soleil de façon prolongée. Informations sur le traitement des batteries usagées. • Portez une attention particulière à la façon dont vous traitez les batteries usagées. • Ne jetez pas la batterie au feu. • Les consignes de traitement des batteries usagées peuvent varier d’un pays à l’autre. Procédez au traitement de la batterie usagée en accord avec toutes les réglementations locales et fédérales en vigueur à l’endroit où vous vous trouvez. Consignes relatives au chargement de la batterie Respectez les consignes de chargement indiquées dans ce mode d’emploi pour charger la batterie. La batterie peut s’enflammer ou bien exploser si celle-ci n’est pas chargée correctement. A propos de la batterie Utilisez uniquement des batteries homologuées par Samsung. Caractéristiques de la batterie Elément Description Modèle BP1130 Type Batterie au lithium-ion Capacité des cellules 1 130 mAh Tension 7,6 V Temps de charge* (lorsque la batterie est complètement déchargée) Environ 215 min * Le temps de chargement de la batterie lors de la connexion à un ordinateur peut être plus long. Des blessures pouvant s’avérer mortelles peuvent résulter d’une utilisation imprudente ou inappropriée de la batterie. Pour votre sécurité, veuillez suivre ces instructions destinées à utiliser la batterie correctement : • La batterie peut s’enflammer ou bien exploser si celle-ci n’est pas manipulée correctement. Si vous remarquez un quelconque défaut de fabrication, une fêlure ou d’autres anomalies sur la batterie, cessez de l’utiliser immédiatement et contactez votre fabricant. • Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs de batterie authentiques recommandés par le fabricant, et rechargez la batterie en respectant scrupuleusement les consignes décrites dans ce mode d’emploi. • Ne placez pas la batterie à proximité d’appareils chauffants ou dans un environnement soumis à des températures élevées comme par exemple à l’intérieur d’une voiture en été. • Ne placez jamais la batterie dans un four à micro-ondes. • Evitez de stocker ou d’utiliser la batterie dans des endroits chauds et humides comme des spas ou des cabines de douche. 178 Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo Autonomie de la batterie Mode Prise de vue Durée moyenne / Nombre de photos Photos Environ 165 min/Environ 330 photos Vidéos Environ 110 min (enregistrement de vidéos à une résolution de1920X1080 et 60 ips.) • Ces chiffres proviennent des normes de test CIPA. Ils peuvent varier en fonction de votre utilisation réelle. • Les temps de prise de vue disponibles varient en fonction de l’arrièreplan, de l’intervalle de prise de vue et des conditions d’utilisation. • Plusieurs vidéos ont été enregistrées successivement afin de déterminer la durée totale d’enregistrement. Message de batterie faible Lorsque la batterie est complètement déchargée, l’icône de batterie devient rouge et le message « Batterie faible » apparaît. Remarques à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie • Evitez d’exposer les cartes mémoire à des températures extrêmes (inférieures à 0 °C ou supérieures à 40 °C). Les températures extrêmes peuvent avoir pour effet de réduire la capacité de chargement des batteries. • Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo de manière prolongée, la zone située autour de la trappe batterie peut chauffer. Ceci n’affecte pas l’utilisation normale de l’appareil photo. • Ne tirez pas sur le cordon d’alimentation pour le débrancher de la prise secteur, car vous risquez de provoquer un incendie ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. • A des températures inférieures à 0 °C, la capacité et la durée de vie de la batterie peuvent diminuer. • La capacité de la batterie peut diminuer à de faibles températures, mais redevient normale à des températures plus modérées. • Si vous rangez l’appareil photo sans l’utiliser pour une période de temps prolongée, retirez d’abord la batterie. Les batteries peuvent fuir ou se détériorer avec le temps, risquant d’endommager gravement l’appareil photo. Si vous rangez l’appareil photo pendant une durée prolongée, sans avoir retiré la batterie, celle-ci risque de se décharger. Lorsque la batterie est complètement déchargée, il peut s’avérer impossible de la recharger. • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil photo pendant une durée prolongée (3 mois ou plus), vérifiez la batterie et rechargez-la régulièrement. Si vous laissez continuellement la batterie se décharger, sa capacité et sa durée de vie peuvent diminuer, ce qui peut entraîner un dysfonctionnement, un incendie ou une explosion. 179 Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo Avertissements à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie Protégez les batteries, les chargeurs et les cartes mémoire de tout dommage. Evitez tout contact de la batterie avec des objets métalliques, car cela risque de provoquer un court-circuit entre les bornes + et - de la batterie, de l’endommager de manière temporaire ou permanente, ou de provoquer un incendie ou un choc électrique. Remarques concernant le chargement de la batterie • Si le voyant d’état est éteint, assurez-vous que la batterie est installée correctement. • Si lors de la mise en charge l’appareil photo est allumé, la batterie peut ne pas se recharger complètement. Eteignez l’appareil photo avant de recharger la batterie. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo lors de la mise en charge de la batterie. Vous risquez de provoquer un incendie ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. • Ne tirez pas sur le cordon d’alimentation pour le débrancher de la prise secteur, car vous risquez de provoquer un incendie ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. • Laissez la batterie se recharger pendant au moins 10 minutes avant d’allumer l’appareil photo. • Si vous raccordez l’appareil photo à une source d’alimentation externe alors que la batterie est déchargée, l’utilisation de fonctions à forte consommation énergétique provoquera l’extinction de l’appareil photo. Rechargez la batterie pour pouvoir utiliser l’appareil photo normalement. • Si vous rebranchez le cordon d’alimentation alors que la batterie est complètement rechargée, le voyant d’état s’allume pendant environ 30 minutes. • L’utilisation du flash et l’enregistrement de vidéos déchargent rapidement la batterie. Rechargez la batterie jusqu’à ce que le voyant d’état rouge s’éteigne. • Si le voyant d’état clignote en rouge, rebranchez le cordon ou retirez la batterie et réintroduisez-la. • Si vous chargez la batterie lorsque le cordon surchauffe ou lorsque la température est trop élevée, le voyant d’état peut clignoter en rouge. Le chargement démarre lorsque la batterie a refroidi. • Le chargement excessif des batteries peut raccourcir leur durée de vie. A la fin de chaque chargement, débranchez le cordon de l’appareil photo. • Ne tordez pas le cordon d’alimentation et ne placez pas d’objets lourds dessus. Vous risquez d’endommager le cordon. 180 Annexes > Entretien de l’appareil photo Remarques à propos de la mise en charge avec raccordement à un ordinateur • Utilisez uniquement le câble USB fourni. • La mise en charge de la batterie peut s’avérer impossible quand : - vous utilisez un concentrateur USB ; - d’autres appareils USB sont raccordés à votre ordinateur ; - vous connectez le câble au port situé sur la face avant de votre ordinateur ; - le port USB de votre ordinateur ne prend pas en charge un niveau standard de puissance en sortie (5 V, 500 mA). Utilisez et recyclez les batteries et les chargeurs avec soin • Ne jetez jamais les batteries au feu. Respectez la réglementation en vigueur dans votre pays concernant l’élimination des batteries usagées. • Ne posez jamais les batteries ou l’appareil à l’intérieur ou au-dessus d’un dispositif chauffant, tel qu’un four à micro-ondes, une cuisinière ou un radiateur. En cas de surchauffe, les batteries risquent d’exploser. 181 Annexes Avant de contacter un centre de service Si l’appareil photo ne fonctionne pas correctement, vérifiez les éléments suivants avant de contacter le service après-vente. Lorsque vous apportez l’appareil photo dans un centre de service, veillez également à fournir les autres composants qui ont pu contribuer au dysfonctionnement, notamment la carte mémoire et la batterie. Problème Solutions possibles Impossible d’allumer l’appareil photo • Assurez-vous que la batterie est installée. • Assurez-vous que la batterie est correctement installée. • Mettez la batterie en charge. L’appareil photo s’éteint de façon inattendue. • Mettez la batterie en charge. • Votre appareil peut être réglé en mode Economie d’énergie ou configuré afin que l’écran s’éteigne automatiquement. (p. 153) • Il est possible que l’appareil photo s’éteigne afin d’éviter que la carte mémoire ne soit endommagée en raison d’une chaleur excessive. Rallumez l’appareil photo. La batterie de l’appareil photo se décharge rapidement. • La batterie peut se décharger plus rapidement dans un environnement où les températures sont basses (en dessous de 0 °C). Gardez la batterie au chaud en la plaçant dans votre poche. • L’utilisation du flash et l’enregistrement de vidéos déchargent rapidement la batterie. Rechargez-la si nécessaire. • La batterie est un consommable qui a une durée de vie limitée et qui doit périodiquement être remplacé. Remplacez-la si son autonomie diminue rapidement. Problème Solutions possibles Impossible de prendre des photos • La carte mémoire est pleine. Supprimez les fichiers inutiles ou insérez une nouvelle carte mémoire. • Formatez la carte mémoire. • La carte mémoire est défectueuse. Remplacez-la. • La carte mémoire est verrouillée. Déverrouillez la carte. (p. 173) • Assurez-vous que l’appareil photo est allumé. • Mettez la batterie en charge. • Assurez-vous que la batterie est correctement installée. L’appareil photo ne répond pas. Retirez la batterie, puis replacez-la. L’appareil photo chauffe. Il est possible que l’appareil photo chauffe en cours d’utilisation. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ou les performances de l’appareil. Le flash se déclenche de façon inattendue. L’électricité statique peut provoquer le déclenchement du flash. Il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil photo. Le flash ne fonctionne pas. • Le flash est peut-être réglé sur Arrêt. (p. 94) • Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le flash dans certains modes. La date et l’heure ne sont pas correctes. Régler la date et l’heure dans le menu q. (p. 153) L’écran ou des touches ne fonctionnent pas. Retirez la batterie, puis replacez-la. 182 Annexes > Avant de contacter un centre de service Problème Solutions possibles La carte mémoire présente une erreur. • Eteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le. • Retirez la carte mémoire, puis insérez-la de nouveau. • Formatez la carte mémoire. Voir « Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire » pour en savoir plus. (p. 176) L’ordinateur ne reconnaît pas une carte mémoire SDXC ou UHS-1 Les cartes mémoire SDXC utilisent le système de fichiers exFAT. Pour utiliser des cartes mémoire SDXC ou UHS-1 formatées avec le système de fichiers exFAT sur un ordinateur Windows XP, téléchargez et effectuez la mise à jour du pilote du système de fichiers exFAT à partir du site Web Microsoft. Le téléviseur ou l’ordinateur ne peut pas afficher les photos et les vidéos stockées sur une carte mémoire SDXC ou UHS-1 Les cartes mémoire SDXC utilisent le système de fichiers exFAT. Pour utiliser des cartes mémoire SDXC ou UHS-1 formatées avec le système de fichiers exFAT, assurez-vous que le périphérique externe est compatible avec le système de fichiers exFAT avant de raccorder l’appareil photo au périphérique. Impossible d’afficher des fichiers. Si vous modifiez le nom d’un fichier, l’appareil photo risque de ne plus pouvoir le lire (le nom des fichiers doit être conforme à la norme DCF). Si vous rencontrez ce problème, affichez le fichier sur un ordinateur. La photo est floue. • Assurez-vous d’avoir réglé l’option de mise au point appropriée pour le type de prise de vue. • Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil. • S’assurer que l’objectif est propre. Dans le cas contraire, le nettoyer. (p. 170) Problème Solutions possibles Les couleurs de la photo ne correspondent pas à celles de la scène Un réglage incorrect de la balance des blancs peut provoquer un mauvais rendu des couleurs. Sélectionner l’option Balance des blancs appropriée à la source de lumière. (p. 76) La photo est trop claire ou trop sombre. Votre photo est sur-exposée ou sous-exposée. • Réglez la valeur d’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation. • Régler la sensibilité ISO. (p. 75) • Activez ou désactivez le flash. (p. 94) • Régler la valeur d’exposition. (p. 102) Les photos sont déformées. L’objectif grand-angle, qui permet de photographier avec un angle de vision étendu, peut générer de très légères déformations de la photo. Ceci est normal et n’engendre pas de dysfonctionnement. L’écran de lecture ne s’affiche pas sur le périphérique externe connecté. • Vérifiez qu’un câble HDMI est correctement branché sur l’écran externe. • Assurez-vous que la carte mémoire est reconnue. L’ordinateur ne reconnaît pas l’appareil photo. • Vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement branché. • Assurez-vous que l’appareil photo est allumé. • Assurez-vous d’utiliser un système d’exploitation compatible. L’appareil photo se déconnecte de l’ordinateur pendant le transfert des fichiers. L’électricité statique peut interrompre la transmission des fichiers. Débranchez le câble USB, puis rebranchez-le. 183 Annexes > Avant de contacter un centre de service Problème Solutions possibles L’ordinateur ne parvient pas à lire des vidéos Il est possible que les vidéos ne puissent pas être lues sur certains lecteurs vidéo. Pour lire les fichiers vidéo enregistrés par votre appareil photo, utilisez le programme Multimedia Viewer que vous pouvez installer à l’aide de l’application i-Launcher située sur votre ordinateur. i-Launcher ne s’exécute pas correctement • Quittez i-Launcher et redémarrez l’application. • Selon la configuration et l’environnement de votre ordinateur, il est possible que l’application ne démarre pas automatiquement. Si tel est le cas, cliquez sur démarrer ĺ Tous les programmes ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher ĺ Samsung i-Launcher sur votre ordinateur Windows. (Pour Windows 8, ouvrez l’écran d’accueil, puis sélectionnez All apps (Toutes les applications) ĺ Samsung i-Launcher.) Ou, cliquez sur Applications ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher sur un ordinateur Mac OS. Impossible de configurer la fonction DPOF pour les fichiers RAW. Vous ne pouvez pas régler la fonction DPOF pour les fichiers RAW. La fonction de mise au point automatique ne fonctionne pas. • La mise au point ne s’effectue pas sur le sujet. Lorsque le sujet se trouve en dehors de la zone de mise au point automatique, placez-le à l’intérieur de cette zone, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course. • Le sujet est trop proche. Eloignez-vous-vous du sujet et prenez la photo. • Le mode de mise au point est réglé sur Mise au point manuelle. Passez en mode Mise au point automatique. Problème Solutions possibles La fonction de verrouillage AEL ne fonctionne pas. La fonction AEL ne fonctionne pas avec les modes t, M, i et s. Pour utiliser cette fonction, sélectionner un autre mode. L’objectif est inopérant. • Vérifiez que l’objectif est correctement installé. • Retirer l’objectif de l’appareil photo et le réinstaller. Le flash externe ou le GPS ne fonctionne pas. Vérifiez que le flash externe est correctement installé et allumé. Lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo, l’écran de réglage de la date et de l’heure s’affiche • Réglez de nouveau la date et l’heure. • Cet écran apparaît lorsque la source d’alimentation interne de l’appareil photo est complètement déchargée. Insérez une batterie pleine puis éteignez l’appareil photo pendant 72 heures au moins afin d’assurer un rechargement complet. 184 Annexes Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Capteur d’images Type CMOS Dimensions du capteur 23,5 X 15,7 mm Pixels effectifs Environ 20,3 mégapixels Nombre total de pixels Environ 21,6 mégapixels Filtre couleur Filtre RGB couleurs primaires Monture de l’objectif Type Monture Samsung NX Objectif disponible Objectifs Samsung Stabilisation de l’image Type Décentrement (dépend de l’objectif) Mode Désactivé / Mode 1 / Mode 2 Correction des déformations Activé / Désactivé (dépend de l’objectif) i-Function E, Z (X1.2, 1.4, 1.7, 2.0) Réduction de la poussière Type Commande ultra-rapide Écran Type AMOLED avec le panneau tactile (panneau tactile type C activé) Taille 3,31" (Environ 84,0 mm) Résolution WVGA (800X480) 768 000 pixels (PenTile) Champ de vision Environ 100 % Angle Inclinable (90° vers le haut, 45° vers le bas) Affichage utilisateur Grille, Icônes, Histogramme, Échelle de distance, Indicateur de niveau Mise au point Type Détection de phase et M. au P. contraste Foyer de mise au point automatique • Total points AF : 105 points (mise au point à détection de phase), 247 points (mise au point à mesure du contraste) • Sélection : 1 point (sélection libre) • Multiple : Normale 21 (3 X 7) points (croisée 1), Macro 35 points • Détection des visages : 10 visages max. Mode AF unique, AF continu, Mise au point manuelle, Mise au point tactile et Déclencheur Lampe d’assistance de mise au point automatique LED verte 185 Annexes > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Obturateur Type Obturateur à plan focal vertical à contrôle électronique Vitesse • Automatique : 1/6 000 à 30 s • Manuel : 1/6 000 à 30 s (Palier 1/3 EV) • Bulb (durée limitée : 4 min) Exposition Système de mesure de l’exposition TTL 221 (17 X 13) segment bloc Mesure de l’exposition : Multiple, Centrée, Sélective Plage de mesures : EV 0 à 18 (ISO100 · 30 mm, F2) Compensation ±3 EV (Palier 1/3 EV) Verrouillage AE Touche CUSTOM Équivalent ISO • 1 palier : Automatique, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200, ISO 6400, ISO 12800, ISO 25600 • 1/3 palier : Automatique, ISO 100, ISO 125, ISO 160, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO 500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000, ISO 2500, ISO 3200, ISO 4000, ISO 5000, ISO 6400, ISO 8000, ISO 10000, ISO 12800, ISO 16000, ISO 20000, ISO 25600 Mode de sélection Mode Unique, Continue, Mode Rafale (5M uniquement), Retardateur, Bracketing (Exposition automatique, Bal. des blancs, Assistant photo) Prises de vue en continu • JPEG : Elevé (8,6 ips), Normal (5 ips) • RAW : Elevé (8,6 ips), Normal (5 ips) Rafale • 10, 15 ou 30 images par seconde • Jusqu’à 30 photos par pression sur le déclencheur Prise de vue Bracketing Bracketing Exposition automatique (±3 EV), Bracketing Balance des blancs, Bracketing Assistant photo Retardateur à distance 2 à 30 s (intervalle d’ 1 seconde) Déclenchement de l’obturateur SR2NX02 (via le port micro-USB) (en option) Flash Type Flash externe (livré avec SEF8A) Mode Flash intelligent, Automatique, Yeux rouges auto, Contre jour, Ctre jour + Yeux rouges, 1er Rideau, 2e Rideau, Arrêt Nombre guide 8 (selon ISO 100) (SEF8A) Angle de vue 28 mm (équivalent au format 35 mm) Vitesse de synchronisation Inférieure à 1/180 s. 186 Annexes > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Flash EV -2 à +2 EV (Palier 0,5 EV) Flash externe Flash externes Samsung en option : SEF42A, SEF220A Terminal de synchronisation Griffe porte-accessoire Balance des blancs Mode Bal. des blancs auto, Lumière du jour, Nuageux, Blanc fluorescent, Blanc/Noir fluorescent, Lumière du jour fluorescent, Tungstène, Bal.Blancs flash, Réglage personnalisé, Température couleur (Manuel) Ajustement micro Orange / Bleu / Vert / Magenta 7 paliers respectivement Plage dynamique Arrêt / Plage intelligente+ / HDR Assistant photo Mode Standard, Accentué, Portrait, Paysage, Naturel, Rétro, Cool, Calme, Classique, Personnalisé 1, Personnalisé 2, Personnalisé 3 Paramètres Couleur, Saturation, Netteté, Contraste Prise de vue Mode Scènes Automatique, Programme, Priorité ouverture, Priorité vitesse, Manuel, Priorité de l’objectif, Intelligent Mode Intelligent Beauté, Meilleures poses, Paysage, Macro, Action, Ton riche, Panorama, Cascade, Silhouette, Coucher de soleil, Nuit, Feux d'artifice, Lumière, Photo créative Filtre intelligent Vignettage, Miniature, Crayon de couleur, Aquarelle, Dessin au lavis, Esquisse à l'huile, Esquisse à l'encre, Acrylique, Négatif, Rouge, Vert, Bleu, Jaune Taille • JPEG (3:2) : 20.0M (5472X3648), 10.1M (3888X2592), 5.9M (2976X1984), 5.0M (2736X1824) (mode Rafale uniquement), 2.0M (1728X1152) • JPEG (16:9) : 16.9M (5472X3080), 7.8M (3712X2088), 4.9M (2944X1656), 2.1M (1920X1080) • JPEG (1:1) : 13.3M (3648X3648), 7.0M (2640X2640), 4.0M (2000X2000), 1.1M (1024X1024) • RAW : 20.0M (5472X3648) * Le mode 3D avec l’objectif 3D est uniquement disponible avec JPEG (16:9) 4.1M (2688X1512) ou 2.1M (1920X1080). Qualité Maximale, Elevée, Normale RAW standard SRW (ver.2.0.0) Espace colorimétrique sRGB, RGB Adobe 187 Annexes > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Vidéo Type MP4 (H.264) Format Vidéo : H.264, Audio : AAC Mode Vidéo AE Programme, Priorité ouverture, Priorité vitesse, Manuel Clip vidéo Son activé / désactivé (durée de prise de vue : jusqu’à 29’ 59’’) Filtre intelligent Vignettage, Miniature, Crayon de couleur, Aquarelle, Dessin au lavis, Esquisse à l'huile, Esquisse à l'encre, Acrylique, Négatif, Rouge, Vert, Bleu, Jaune Taille 1920X1080, 1920X810, 1280X720, 640X480, 320X240 (Pour partager) Fréquence d’images 60 ips, 30 ips, 24 ips (disponibles uniquement avec 1920X810), 15 ips (disponible uniquement avec certaines options de filtre intelligent) Multi-mouvements x0.25 (640X480, 320X240 uniquement), x0.5 (1280X720 (30 ips), 640X480, 320X240 uniquement), x1, x5, x10, x20 Qualité Haute qualité, Normale Son Stéréo Retouche Découpage de la durée, Capture d’images fixes Lecture Type Image unique, Miniatures (15/28), Diaporama, Vidéo Retouche Filtre intelligent, Redimensionner, Rotation, Retouche des visages, Luminosité, Contraste Filtre intelligent Vignettage, Miniature, Crayon de couleur, Aquarelle, Dessin au lavis, Esquisse à l'huile, Esquisse à l'encre, Acrylique, Négatif, Rouge, Vert, Bleu, Jaune Dimensions du filtre intelligent • JPEG (3:2) : 5.9M (2976X1984), 5.0M (2736X1824), 2.0M (1728X1152) • JPEG (16:9) : 6.2M (3328X1872), 4.9M (2944X1656), 2.1M (1920X1080) • JPEG (1:1) : 6.0M (2448X2448), 4.0M (2000X2000), 1.1M (1024X1024) Stockage Support Mémoire externe (en option)* : carte SD (2 Go garantis), carte SDHC (jusqu’à 32 Go garantis), carte SDXC (jusqu’à 64 Go garantis), carte UHS-1 * Classe 6 et ultérieure recommandée Format de fichiers RAW (SRW (ver.2.0.0)), JPEG (EXIF 2.21), MPO (3D), DCF, DPOF 1.1 GPS Type Marquage géographique avec module GPS en option (WGS 84) Fonction Nom de l’emplacement (anglais et coréen uniquement) 188 Annexes > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Réseau sans fil Type IEEE 802.11b/g/n prise en charge double bande Fonction MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Sauvegarde automatique, Courriel, Réseaux sociaux et Cloud, AllShare Play, AutoShare, Wi-Fi Direct NFC Oui Interface Sortie numérique USB 2.0 (prise micro-USB) Sortie vidéo • NTSC, PAL (possibilité de sélection) • HDMI 1.4a Déclenchement externe Oui (micro-USB) Microphone externe Oui Connecteur d’alimentation CC CC 5,0 V, 1 A via micro-USB Source d'alimentation’Source d'alimentation Type Batterie rechargeable : BP1130 (1 130 mAh) * La source d’alimentation peut varier en fonction de votre zone géographique. Dimensions (L x H x P) 122 x 63,7 x 40,7 mm (hors parties saillantes) Poids 284 g (sans batterie, ni carte mémoire) Température de fonctionnement 0 à 40 °C Humidité ambiante tolérée 5 à 85 % Logiciels i-Launcher, Adobe Photoshop Lightroom * Afin d’améliorer les performances, les caractéristiques peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. * Toutes les marques de commerce et noms de produits appartiennent à leurs détenteurs respectifs. 189 Annexes Glossaire AP (Point d’accès) Un point d’accès est un appareil qui permet aux appareils sans fil de se connecter à un réseau câblé. Réseau Ad-Hoc Un réseau ad-hoc est une connexion temporaire permettant de partager des fichiers ou une connexion Internet entre des ordinateurs et des appareils. AdobeRGB Adobe RGB est utilisé pour des impressions professionnelles et dispose d’une gamme de couleurs plus importante que sRGB. Sa gamme de couleurs plus importante vous permet de modifier facilement des photos sur un ordinateur. AEB (Prise de vue en fourchette avec réglage automatique) Cette fonctionnalité permet de prendre automatiquement plusieurs photos avec différentes expositions afin de vous aider à obtenir une exposition correcte. AEL / AFL (Verrouillage de l’exposition automatique / Verrouillage de la mise au point automatique) Ces fonctions vous permettent de verrouiller l’exposition ou la mise au point pour les calculer. AF (Mise au point automatique) Système qui permet d’effectuer une mise au point automatique sur le sujet. L’appareil photo se base sur le contraste pour opérer la mise au point automatique. AMOLED (Matrice active à diodes organiques électroluminescentes) / LCD (Ecran à cristaux liquides) L’écran AMOLED est très fin et très léger car il ne nécessite aucun rétroéclaraige. L’écran LCD est couramment utilisé dans le secteur de l’électronique grand public. Ce type d’écran nécessite un rétroéclairage séparé, de type CCFL ou LED, pour reproduire les couleurs. Ouverture L’ouverture contrôle la quantité de lumière atteignant le capteur de l’appareil photo. 190 Annexes > Glossaire Composition En photographie, ce terme signifie la disposition des éléments d’une scène. En règle générale, une bonne composition doit obéir à la règle des tiers. DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) Spécification créée par la Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA) qui définit le format et le système de fichiers pour les appareils photo. Profondeur de champ Zone de netteté acceptable entre le point de mise au point le plus proche et le plus éloigné. Elle est variable selon la focale et l’ouverture utilisées, ainsi que la distance entre l’appareil photo et le sujet. Avec, par exemple, une ouverture inférieure, la profondeur de champ augmente et l’arrièreplan de la composition devient flou. DPOF (Format de commande d’impression numérique) Format de commande d’impression numérique qui permet de sélectionner les images ou le nombre de copies sur une carte mémoire. Les appareils photo compatibles DPOF sont capables de lire les informations stockées sur une carte, ce qui facilite l’impression. Bougé de l’appareil photo (flou) Si vous bougez l’appareil photo alors que l’obturateur est ouvert, l’image risque d’être floue. Cela est plus fréquent si la vitesse de l’obturateur est lente. Vous pouvez éviter cela en augmentant la sensibilité, en utilisant le flash ou en augmentant la vitesse de l’obturateur. Pour stabiliser l’appareil photo, vous pouvez également utiliser un trépied ou la fonction OIS. Informatique dans les nuages L’informatique dans les nuages (ou Cloud Computing) est une technologie permettant de stocker des données sur des serveurs distants et de les utiliser à partir d’un appareil distant via un accès Internet. Espace colorimétrique Gamme de couleurs visibles par l’appareil photo. Température de couleur La température de couleur est une mesure exprimée en kelvins (K) qui indique la tonalité chromatique d’un type spécifique de source lumineuse. Lorsque la température de couleur augmente, la couleur de la source lumineuse devient bleutée. Lorsque la température de couleur diminue, la couleur de la source lumineuse devient rougeâtre. A 5 500 degrés Kelvin, la couleur de la source lumineuse est similaire celle de la lumière du soleil à midi. 191 Annexes > Glossaire Flash Lumière brève et intense qui permet de créer une exposition adéquate lorsque la luminosité est faible. Longueur de focale Distance entre le centre de l’objectif et son point focal (en millimètres). Des longueurs de focales plus importantes réduisent les angles de vue et agrandissent le sujet. Des longueurs de focales moins élevées agrandissent les angles de vue. Histogramme Représentation graphique de la luminosité d’une image. L’axe horizontal représente la luminosité et l’axe vertical le nombre de pixels. Des points à l’extrême gauche (trop sombre) ou à l’extrême droite (trop clair) signifient que la photo n’est pas correctement exposée. H.264/MPEG-4 Format vidéo à compression élevée mis au point par les organismes internationaux de normalisation ISO-IEC et ITU-T. Ce codec permet d’obtenir une bonne qualité vidéo avec des débits binaires faibles développés par la Joint Video Team (JVT). EV (Valeur d’exposition) Ensemble des combinaisons de vitesses de l’obturateur et d’ouverture de l’objectif pour une même exposition. Compensation EV Cette fonctionnalité vous permet de régler rapidement la valeur d’exposition mesurée par l’appareil photo, selon des incréments restreints, afin d’améliorer l’exposition de vos photos. Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format) Spécification créée par la Japan Electronic Industries Development Association (JEIDA) qui définit le format de fichiers pour les appareils photo. Exposition Quantité de lumière atteignant le capteur de l’appareil photo. L’exposition est contrôlée par la vitesse de l’obturateur, la valeur d’ouverture et la sensibilité ISO. 192 Annexes > Glossaire Mesure de l’exposition Correspond à la manière dont l’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière nécessaire à la définition de l’exposition. MF (M.P. manuelle) Système qui permet d’effectuer une mise au point manuellement sur le sujet. Vous pouvez utiliser la bague de mise au point pour effectuer la mise au point sur un sujet. MJPEG (Motion JPEG) Format vidéo avec une compression d’images JPEG. MPO (Multi Picture Object) Format de fichier d’image qui compile plusieurs images au sein d’un même fichier. Un fichier MPO assure un effet 3D sur les écrans compatibles MPO, tels que les téléviseurs et les moniteurs 3D. Capteur d’image Partie physique de l’appareil photo qui comporte une cellule photosensible pour chaque pixel de l’image. Chaque cellule photosensible enregistre la valeur de la luminosité d’une exposition. Il existe deux types de capteurs : CCD (Charge-coupled Device) et CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor). Adresse IP (Protocole Internet) Une adresse IP est un nombre unique affecté à chacun des appareils raccordés à Internet. Sensibilité ISO Sensibilité de l’appareil photo à la lumière basée sur la sensibilité du film utilisé dans l’appareil photo. A une sensibilité ISO élevée, la vitesse de l’obturateur de l’appareil photo est plus grande, ce qui réduit le flou causé par le bougé de l’appareil ou une luminosité insuffisante. Toutefois, avec une sensibilité plus élevée, le risque de parasites est également plus grand. JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) Méthode de compression des images numériques avec pertes. Les images JPEG sont compressées afin de réduire la taille de leur fichier avec une dégradation minimale de la résolution. 193 Annexes > Glossaire PAL (Phase Alternate Line) Norme d’encodage couleur vidéo utilisée dans de nombreux pays d’Afrique, d’Asie, d’Europe et du Moyen-Orient. Qualité Expression du taux de compression d’une image numérique. Lorsque la qualité de l’image est élevée, le taux de compression est bas et la taille du fichier plus importante. RAW (Données raw CCD) Données originales non traitées, capturées directement par le capteur d’images de l’appareil photo. La balance des blancs, le contraste, la saturation, la netteté et d’autres données peuvent être modifiées avec le logiciel de retouche avant que l’image ne soit compressée dans un format de fichier standard. Résolution Nombre de pixels d’une image numérique. Les images à résolution élevée comportent plus de pixels et présentent généralement davantage de détails que les images avec une faible résolution. Parasite Problème d’affichage des pixels sur une image numérique (pixels mal placés, aléatoires ou lumineux). Des parasites peuvent apparaître si les photos sont prises avec une sensibilité trop élevée ou avec un réglage de sensibilité automatique dans un environnement sombre. NFC (Near Field Communication) La communication en champ proche (en anglais Near Field Communication) est une technologie de communication sans-fil à courte portée. Vous pouvez utiliser des appareils compatibles NFC pour activer des fonctions ou échanger des données avec d’autres appareils. NTSC (National Television System Committee) Norme d’encodage couleur vidéo habituellement utilisée au Japon, en Amérique du Nord, aux Philippines, en Amérique du Sud, en Corée du Sud et à Taïwan. Zoom optique Zoom qui permet d’agrandir les images à l’aide de l’objectif sans dégrader la qualité des images. 194 Annexes > Glossaire Vitesse d’obturation La vitesse d’obturation est définie par la durée nécessaire à l’ouverture et à la fermeture de l’obturateur. Dans le cadre de la luminosité d’une photo, la vitesse d’obturation constitue un facteur important car elle contrôle la quantité de lumière qui passe à travers l’ouverture avant d’atteindre le capteur d’images. Par ailleurs, une vitesse d’obturation rapide laisse moins de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer. La photo devient plus sombre et immobilise plus facilement un sujet en mouvement. sRGB (RGB standard) Norme internationale de l’espace colorimétrique établie par la CEI (Commission électrotechnique internationale). Elle est définie d’après l’espace colorimétrique des écrans d’ordinateur et est également utilisée comme espace colorimétrique standard pour Exif. Vignettage Réduction de la luminosité ou de la saturation d’une image à sa périphérie (bords externes). Cela permet de mettre en évidence les sujets positionnés au centre de l’image. Balance des blancs (équilibre des couleurs) Réglage de l’intensité des couleurs (généralement les couleurs primaires comme le rouge, le vert et le bleu) d’une image. L’objectif est un rendu exact des couleurs. Wi-Fi La technologie Wi-Fi permet aux appareils électroniques d’échanger des données sans fil via un réseau. WPS (Configuration Wi-Fi protégée) WPS est une technologie permettant de sécuriser les réseaux domestiques sans fil. 195 Annexes Accessoires en option Objectif SAMSUNG 18-55 mm F3.5-5.6 OIS III SAMSUNG 20-50 mm F3.5-5.6 ED II SAMSUNG 16 mm F2.4 SAMSUNG 20 mm F2.8 SAMSUNG 30 mm F2 SAMSUNG 50-200 mm F4-5.6 ED OIS III SAMSUNG 60 mm F2.8 Macro ED OIS SSA SAMSUNG 18-200 mm F3.5-6.3 ED OIS Objectif SAMSUNG 85 mm F1.4 ED SSA SAMSUNG 12-24 mm F4-5.6 ED SAMSUNG 45 mm F1.8 SAMSUNG 45 mm F1.8 [T6] 2D/3D Flash externe SEF42A SEF220A GPS GPS10 196 Annexes > Accessoires en option Déclenchement de l'obturateur (type micro-USB) Microphone SR2NX02 EM10 Batterie rechargeable Chargeur de batterie BP1130 BC3NX01 Etui Etui de l’appareil photo Carte mémoire Filtre Câble USB Câble HDMI Dragonne • Ces illustrations peuvent différer par rapport au produit fourni. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous aux modes d’emploi de ces accessoires en option. • Utilisez uniquement des accessoires homologués par Samsung. Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages causés par l’utilisation d’accessoires fournis par d’autres fabricants. 197 Annexes A Accessoires en option Description du module GPS 51 Mise en place du flash 49 Mise en place du module GPS 51 Présentation du flash 48 Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 167 Agrandissement 113 AllShare Play 141 Appareil photo Connexion au PC 160 Connexion en tant que disque amovible 160 Déconnexion (Windows) 161 Présentation 30 Assistance à la mise au point 88 Assistant photo 79 B Balance des blancs 76 Batterie Attention 177 En charge 34 Insérer 33 Bracketing 92 C Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo 184 Carte mémoire Attention 173 Insérer 33 Centre de service 181 Contenu du coffret 29 D Date & heure 153 Déclenchement par sélection 87 Diaporama 113 DIRECT LINK 32 DPOF (format de commande d’impression numérique) 114 E Ecran tactile 36 Effet yeux rouges 95 En charge 34 Entretien 170 Espace colorimétrique 148 F Fichiers Protection 110 Suppression 111 Type de photo 74 Type de vidéo 104 Filtre intelligent Mode Lecture 121 Mode Prise de vue 101 Flash Intensité 95 Nombre guide 26 Options du Flash 94 Prise de vue avec flash indirect 27 Focus Peaking 88 Fondu 105 I Icônes Mode Lecture 42 Mode Prise de vue 40 i-Function 61 i-Launcher 163 L Longueur de focale 21 Luminosité 152 M Mesure de l’exposition 97 Miniatures 108 Minuterie 91 Mise au point automatique 80 Mise au point avec suivi 86 Mise au point tactile 86 MobileLink 129 Mode 3D 69 Mode Economie d’énergie 153 Mode Meilleures poses 65 Mode Panorama 66 Index 198 Annexes > Index Modes de prise de vue Enregistrement 68 Intelligent 64 Manuel 59 Priorité déclencheur 58 Priorité de l’objectif 60 Priorité ouverture 57 Programme 55 Scènes automatiques 53 N Nombre-F 16 O Objectifs Déverrouillage 46 Disposition 44 Marquages 47 Verrouillage 45 Ouverture 16, 20 P Panneau intelligent 38 Paramètres 152 Photos Affichage sur l’appareil photo 108 Agrandissement 113 Options de prise de vue 73 Retouche 117 Visionnage sur un téléviseur 3D 159 Visionnage sur un téléviseur HD 158 Pivotement 118 Posture 13 Prise de vue 90 Profondeur de champ (DoF) 17, 22 R Réglage de l’image Réglage des photos 119 Retouche de visages 120 Règle des tiers 24 Remote Viewfinder 131 Réseau sans fil 123 Résolution Mode Lecture 118 Mode Prise de vue (photo) 73 Mode Prise de vue (vidéo) 104 Retouche de visages 120 S Sauvegarde automatique 133 Sensibilité ISO 75 Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS, Optical Image Stabilization) 89 T Téléviseur 158 Transfert de fichiers Mac 161 Windows 160 Type d’affichage 43 V Valeur d’exposition (EV) 16, 102 Vidéo 153 Vidéos Enregistrement 68 Options 104 Prise de vue 116 Visionnage 115 Vitesse d'obturation 18 Vitesse obturateur 20 199 Annexes Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit (Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques) (Applicable aux pays disposant de systèmes de collecte séparés) Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque audio, câble USB, etc.) ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée des déchets présentant des risques environnementaux et de santé publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres déchets. Vous favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un développement durable. Les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les procédures et les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage. Les entreprises et particuliers sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets. Elimination des batteries de ce produit (Applicable aux pays disposant de systèmes de collecte séparés) Le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l'emballage indique que les batteries de ce produit ne doivent pas être éliminées en fin de vie avec les autres déchets ménagers. L'indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de mercure, de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive CE 2006/66. Si les batteries ne sont pas correctement éliminées, ces substances peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou à l'environnement. Afin de protéger les ressources naturelles et d'encourager la réutilisation du matériel, veillez à séparer les batteries des autres types de déchets et à les recycler via votre système local de collecte gratuite des batteries. CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) 200 ATTENTION RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACÉE PAR UNE BATTERIE DE TYPE INCORRECT. TRAITEZ LES BATTERIES USAGÉES SUIVANT LES INSTRUCTIONS. Son utilisation est soumise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférence nuisible et (2) Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interférences reçues, y compris celles qui peuvent entraîner un fonctionnement indésirable. Attention: Tout modification de l’équipement non expressément validée par la partie responsable de la conformité pourraient annuler le droit de l’utilisateur à faire fonctionner l’équipement. IC: 649E-NX300 Cet équipement peut fonctionner dans tous les pays de l’Union européenne. En France, toutefois, il ne peut être utilisé qu’à l’intérieur. 201 Pour les utilisateurs résidant en France Service Consommateur Contact téléphonique : Du lundi au samedi de 9 h à 20 h 01 48 63 00 00 Adresse postale : SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS FRANCE ZI Paris Nord II, BP 50116 95950 Roissy CDG FRANCE 202 Pour les utilisateurs résidant au Canada SERVICE À LA CLIENTÈLE Téléphone : Du lundi au vendredi de 8 h 30 à 20 h (heure normale de l'Est) 1 800 726-7864 Adresse postale : Samsung Electronics Canada Inc. 55 Standish Court, 10th Floor Mississauga ON L5R 4B2 Pour toute question ou demande de service après-vente, veuillez consulter les conditions de garantie accompagnant votre produit ou rendez-vous sur le www.samsung.fr ou www.samsung.ca USER MANUAL ENG This user manual includes detailed usage instructions for your camera. Please read this manual thoroughly. 1 Copyright information • Camera specifications or contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of camera functions. • You are not allowed to reuse or distribute any part of this manual without prior permission. • We recommend using your camera within the country where you purchase it. • Use this camera responsibly and adhere to all laws and regulations concerning its use. PlanetFirst represents Samsung Electronics' commitment to sustainable development and social responsibility through eco-driven business and management activities. • Microsoft Windows and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. • Mac and Apple App Store are registered trademarks of the Apple Corporation. • Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google, Inc. • Adobe, the Adobe logo, Photoshop, and Lightroom are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. • microSD™, microSDHC™, and microSDXC™ are registered trademarks of the SD Association. • HDMI, the HDMI logo, and the term "High Definition Multimedia Interface" are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. • Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. • Trademarks and trade names used in this manual are the property of their respective owners. 2 Health and safety information Prevent damage to subjects’ eyesight. Do not use the flash in close proximity (closer than 1 m/3 ft) to people or animals. If you use the flash too close to your subject’s eyes, this can cause temporary or permanent eyesight damage. Keep your camera away from small children and pets. Keep your camera and all accessories out of the reach of small children and animals. Small parts may cause choking or serious injury if swallowed. Moving parts and accessories may present physical dangers as well. Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight or high temperatures for an extended period of time. Prolonged exposure to sunlight or extreme temperatures can cause permanent damage to your camera’s internal components. Avoid covering the camera or charger with blankets or clothes. The camera may overheat, which may distort the camera or cause a fire. Do not handle the power supply cord or the charger during a thunderstorm. This may result in an electric shock. Always comply with the following precautions and usage tips to avoid dangerous situations and ensure peak performance of your camera. Warning—situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Do not disassemble or attempt to repair your camera. You can damage the camera and expose yourself to the risk of an electric shock. Do not use your camera near flammable or explosive gases and liquids. This may cause a fire or explosion. Do not insert flammable materials into the camera or store these materials near the camera. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not handle your camera with wet hands. This may result in an electric shock. 3 Health and safety information If liquid or foreign objects enter your camera, immediately disconnect all power sources, such as the battery or charger, and then contact a Samsung service center. Comply with any regulations that restrict the use of a camera in a certain area. • Avoid interference with other electronic devices. • Turn off the camera when in an aircraft. Your camera can cause interference with aircraft equipment. Follow all airline regulations and turn off your camera when directed by airline personnel. • Turn off the camera near medical equipment. Your camera can interfere with medical equipment in hospitals or health care facilities. Follow all regulations, posted warnings, and directions from medical personnel. Avoid interference with pacemakers. Maintain a safe distance between this camera and all pacemakers to avoid potential interference, as recommended by the manufacturer and research groups. If you have any reason to suspect that your camera is interfering with a pacemaker or other medical device, turn off the camera immediately and contact the manufacturer of the pacemaker or medical device for guidance. Caution—situations that could cause damage to your camera or other equipment Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended period of time. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious damage to your camera. Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement batteries. Do not damage or heat the battery. Inauthentic, damaged, or heated batteries may cause a fire or personal injury. Use only Samsung-approved batteries, chargers, cables, and accessories. • Using unauthorized batteries, chargers, cables, or accessories can cause batteries to explode, damage your camera, or cause injury. • Samsung is not responsible for damage or injuries caused by unapproved batteries, chargers, cables, or accessories. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Misusing the battery may cause a fire or electric shock. 4 Health and safety information Do not touch the flash while it fires. The flash is very hot when fired and may burn your skin. When you use the AC charger, turn off the camera before you disconnect the power to the AC charger. Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock. Disconnect the charger from the wall socket when not in use. Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock. Do not use a damaged power supply cord, plug, or loose outlet when you charge batteries. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not allow the AC charger to come in contact with the +/- terminals on the battery. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not drop or subject the camera to strong impacts. Doing so may damage the screen or external or internal components. Exercise caution when you connect cables and install batteries and memory cards. If you force the connectors, improperly connect cables, or improperly install batteries and memory cards, you can damage ports, connectors, and accessories. Keep cards with magnetic strips away from the camera case. Information stored on the card may be damaged or erased. Never use a damaged battery or memory card. This may result in electric shock or camera malfunction or cause a fire. Do not place the camera in or near magnetic fields. Doing so may cause the camera to malfunction. Do not use the camera if the screen is damaged. If the glass or acrylic parts are broken, visit a Samsung service center to have the camera repaired. 5 Health and safety information Check that the camera is operating properly before use. The manufacturer takes no responsibility for any loss of files or damage that may result from camera malfunction or improper use. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight. This may discolor the image sensor or cause it to malfunction. If the camera overheats, remove the battery and allow it to cool down. • Prolonged usage of the camera may overheat the battery and raise the internal temperature of the camera. If the camera stops operating, remove the battery and allow it to cool down. • High internal temperatures may result in noise in your photos. This is normal and does not affect your camera’s overall performance. Avoid interference with other electronic devices. Your camera emits radio frequency (RF) signals that may interfere with unshielded or improperly shielded electronic equipment, such as pacemakers, hearing aids, medical devices, and other electronic devices in homes or vehicles. Consult the manufacturers of your electronic devices to solve any interference problems you experience. To prevent unwanted interference, use only Samsung-approved devices or accessories. Use your camera in the normal position. Avoid contact with your camera’s internal antenna. Data transference and your responsibilities • Data transferred via WLAN could be leaked, so avoid transferring sensitive data in public areas or on open networks. • The camera manufacturer is not liable for any data transfers that infringe on copyrights, trademarks, intellectual property laws, or public decency ordinances. 6 Icons used in this manual Mode indications Mode Indication Smart Auto t Program P Aperture Priority A Shutter Priority S Manual M Smart s Panorama R Wireless network B Icons used in this manual Icon Function Additional information Safety warnings and precautions [ ] Camera buttons. For example, [Shutter] represents the shutter button. ( ) Page number of related information ĺ The order of options or menus you must select to perform a step; for example: Select b ĺ Quality (represents select b, and then Quality). * Annotation 7 Contents Chapter 1 My Camera Getting started ............................................................................................ 28 Unpacking.................................................................................................................... 28 Camera layout .............................................................................................. 29 Using the MOBILE button ....................................................................................... 31 Using the display ....................................................................................................... 32 Using the Self shot mode.......................................................................................... 32 Inserting the battery and memory card ................................................. 33 Removing the battery and memory card ......................................................... 33 Using the memory card adapter .......................................................................... 33 Charging the battery and turning on your camera .............................. 34 Charging the battery................................................................................................ 34 Turning on your camera ......................................................................................... 34 Performing the initial setup ...................................................................... 35 Selecting functions (options) ................................................................... 37 Using m ................................................................................................................. 37 E.g. Selecting the photo size in P mode.............................................................. 37 Using the Smart panel ............................................................................................. 38 E.g. Adjust the exposure value in P mode .......................................................... 38 Using iFn ....................................................................................................................... 39 Display icons ................................................................................................ 41 In Shooting mode ..................................................................................................... 41 Capturing photos ........................................................................................................ 41 Recording videos ......................................................................................................... 42 About the level gauge ............................................................................................... 42 Tips Concepts in Photography Shooting postures....................................................................................... 13 Holding the camera ..................................................................................................... 13 Standing photography ............................................................................................... 14 Crouching photography ............................................................................................ 14 Aperture ........................................................................................................ 15 Aperture value and the depth of field .................................................................. 16 Shutter speed ............................................................................................... 17 ISO sensitivity .............................................................................................. 18 How the aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity control exposure ......................................................................................... 19 Correlation between focal length, angle, and perspective ................ 20 Depth of field ............................................................................................... 21 What controls out-of-focus effects? ....................................................................... 21 DOF preview ................................................................................................................... 23 Composition ................................................................................................. 23 Rule of Thirds .................................................................................................................. 23 Photos with two subjects .......................................................................................... 24 Flash ............................................................................................................... 25 Flash guide number ..................................................................................................... 26 Bounce Photography .................................................................................................. 26 8 Contents In Playback mode ...................................................................................................... 43 Viewing photos ............................................................................................................ 43 Playing videos ............................................................................................................... 43 Changing the information displayed ................................................................. 44 Lenses ............................................................................................................ 45 Lens layout ................................................................................................................... 45 Locking or unlocking the lens ................................................................................. 46 Lens markings ............................................................................................................ 48 Accessories ................................................................................................... 49 External flash layout ................................................................................................. 49 Connecting the external flash ................................................................................. 50 Shooting modes .......................................................................................... 51 t Smart Auto mode ......................................................................................... 52 P Program mode ....................................................................................................... 54 Program Shift ................................................................................................................ 55 Minimum shutter speed ............................................................................................ 55 A Aperture Priority mode...................................................................................... 56 S Shutter Priority mode .......................................................................................... 57 M Manual mode........................................................................................................ 58 Using Framing Mode .................................................................................................. 58 Using the Bulb function ............................................................................................ 59 s Smart mode .......................................................................................................... 60 Using the Best Face mode ........................................................................................ 61 R Panorama mode ................................................................................................. 62 Recording a video ..................................................................................................... 63 Available functions by shooting mode ............................................................. 65 Chapter 2 Shooting Functions Size and Resolution .................................................................................... 67 Photo size ..................................................................................................................... 67 Quality ........................................................................................................................... 68 ISO sensitivity .............................................................................................. 69 White Balance .............................................................................................. 70 Customizing preset White Balance options ....................................................... 71 Picture Wizard (photo styles) .................................................................... 72 AF mode ........................................................................................................ 73 Single AF ....................................................................................................................... 74 Continuous AF ............................................................................................................ 74 Manual focus ............................................................................................................... 75 AF area ........................................................................................................... 76 Selection AF ................................................................................................................ 76 Multi AF ......................................................................................................................... 77 Tracking AF .................................................................................................................. 77 Face Detection ............................................................................................. 79 Normal........................................................................................................................... 79 Smile Shot .................................................................................................................... 80 Wink Shot ..................................................................................................................... 80 MF Assist ....................................................................................................... 81 Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) ............................................................. 82 9 Contents Drive (shooting method) ........................................................................... 83 Single ............................................................................................................................. 83 Continuous .................................................................................................................. 84 Burst ............................................................................................................................... 84 Timer .............................................................................................................................. 85 Auto Exposure Bracketing (AE Bracket) ............................................................. 85 White Balance Bracketing (WB Bracket) ............................................................ 86 Picture Wizard Bracketing (P Wiz Bracket) ........................................................ 86 Depth Bracketing ...................................................................................................... 87 Flash ............................................................................................................... 88 Reducing the red-eye effect .................................................................................. 89 Adjusting the flash intensity ................................................................................. 89 Metering ........................................................................................................ 90 Multi ............................................................................................................................... 90 Center-weighted ....................................................................................................... 91 Spot ................................................................................................................................ 91 Measuring the exposure value of the focus area ........................................... 92 Dynamic Range ........................................................................................... 93 Smart Filter ................................................................................................... 94 Exposure compensation ............................................................................ 95 Exposure lock ............................................................................................... 96 Video functions ........................................................................................... 97 Movie size..................................................................................................................... 97 When Video Out is set to NTSC ............................................................................... 97 When Video Out is set to PAL .................................................................................. 97 Movie quality .............................................................................................................. 98 Multi Motion ............................................................................................................... 98 Fader .............................................................................................................................. 99 Voice ............................................................................................................................... 99 Chapter 3 Playback/Editing Searching and managing files ................................................................ 101 Viewing photos ....................................................................................................... 101 Viewing image thumbnails ................................................................................. 101 Viewing files by category .................................................................................... 102 Viewing files as a folder ........................................................................................ 102 Protecting files ........................................................................................................ 103 Deleting files ............................................................................................................ 103 Deleting a single file ................................................................................................. 103 Deleting multiple files .............................................................................................. 104 Deleting all files .......................................................................................................... 104 10 Contents Viewing photos .......................................................................................... 105 Enlarging a photo .................................................................................................. 105 Viewing a slide show ............................................................................................. 105 Auto rotating ........................................................................................................... 106 Playing videos ............................................................................................ 107 Trimming a video during playback .................................................................. 107 Capturing an image during playback ............................................................. 108 Editing photos ........................................................................................... 109 Rotating a photo .................................................................................................... 109 Resizing photos....................................................................................................... 110 Adjusting your photos .......................................................................................... 110 Retouching faces .................................................................................................... 111 Applying Smart Filter effects .............................................................................. 112 Chapter 4 Wireless network Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings ............... 114 Connecting to a WLAN ......................................................................................... 114 Setting network options ......................................................................................... 115 Manually setting the IP address ........................................................................... 115 Network connection tips ..................................................................................... 116 Entering text ............................................................................................................ 117 Using the NFC Feature (Tag & Go) ......................................................... 118 Using NFC features in Shooting mode ........................................................... 118 Using NFC features in Playback mode (Photo Beam)................................ 118 Using NFC features in Wi-Fi mode .................................................................... 118 Saving files to a smart phone automatically ....................................... 119 Sending photos or videos to a smart phone ....................................... 121 Sending photos or videos to multiple smart phones ........................ 123 Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release .............................. 125 Using the Home Monitor+ ...................................................................... 127 Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos ..................................... 129 Installing the program for Auto Backup on your PC.................................. 129 Sending photos or videos to a PC .................................................................... 129 Using Samsung Link to view files .......................................................... 131 11 Contents Chapter 6 Connecting to external devices Viewing files on an HDTV ........................................................................ 146 Transferring files to your computer ....................................................... 147 Transferring files to your Windows OS computer ....................................... 147 Connecting the camera as a removable disk ................................................... 147 Disconnecting the camera (for Windows 7) ..................................................... 148 Transferring files to your Mac OS ...................................................................... 148 Using programs on a PC........................................................................... 150 Installing i-Launcher ............................................................................................. 150 Using Samsung i-Launcher .................................................................................... 151 Using i-Launcher .................................................................................................... 151 Requirements for Windows OS ............................................................................. 151 Requirements for Mac OS ....................................................................................... 152 Opening Samsung i-Launcher .............................................................................. 152 Downloading the firmware .................................................................................... 152 Downloading the PC Auto Backup program ................................................... 152 Installing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ....................................................... 153 Using Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ............................................................... 153 Chapter 5 Camera settings menu User settings ............................................................................................... 134 ISO Customizing ..................................................................................................... 134 ISO Step ......................................................................................................................... 134 Auto ISO Range .......................................................................................................... 134 Noise Reduction ..................................................................................................... 134 Bracket Settings ...................................................................................................... 135 DMF (Direct Manual Focus) ................................................................................ 135 Color Space ............................................................................................................... 136 Distortion Correct .................................................................................................. 137 iFn Customizing ...................................................................................................... 137 User Display .............................................................................................................. 138 Key Mapping ............................................................................................................ 139 Live view NFC........................................................................................................... 139 MobileLink/NFC Image Size .............................................................................. 139 Grid Line .................................................................................................................... 140 AF Lamp ..................................................................................................................... 140 Auto Self-Shot ......................................................................................................... 140 Lens Button Speed Settings ............................................................................... 140 Setting ......................................................................................................... 141 12 Contents About the battery .................................................................................................. 162 Battery specifications ............................................................................................... 162 Battery life .................................................................................................................... 164 Low battery message ............................................................................................... 164 Notes about using the battery .............................................................................. 164 Cautions about using the battery ........................................................................ 165 Notes about charging the battery ....................................................................... 165 Notes about charging with a computer connected...................................... 166 Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care ............................ 166 Updating the firmware ............................................................................. 167 Before contacting a service center ........................................................ 168 Camera specifications .............................................................................. 171 Glossary ....................................................................................................... 176 Optional accessories ................................................................................. 182 Index ............................................................................................................ 183 Chapter 7 Appendix Error messages .......................................................................................... 155 Maintaining the camera........................................................................... 156 Cleaning the camera ............................................................................................. 156 Camera lens and display ......................................................................................... 156 Image sensor ............................................................................................................... 156 Camera body ............................................................................................................... 156 Using or storing the camera ............................................................................... 157 Inappropriate places to use or store the camera ........................................... 157 Using on beaches or shores ................................................................................... 157 Storing for extended period of time ................................................................... 157 Using the camera with caution in humid environments ............................ 158 Other cautions ............................................................................................................ 158 About memory card .............................................................................................. 159 Supported memory card ........................................................................................ 159 Memory card capacity ............................................................................................. 160 Cautions when using memory cards .................................................................. 161 13 Concepts in Photography Holding the camera Hold the camera with your right hand and place your right index finger on the shutter button. Place your left hand under the lens for support. Shooting postures A correct posture for stabilizing the camera is necessary for taking a good photo. Even if you hold a camera correctly, the wrong posture can cause the camera to shake. Stand up straight and remain still to maintain a steady base for your camera. When shooting with a slow shutter speed, hold your breath to minimize body movement. 14 Concepts in Photography Standing photography Compose your shot, stand up straight with your feet shoulder-length apart, and keep your elbows pointed down. Crouching photography Compose your shot, crouch with one knee touching the ground, and keep a straight posture. 15 Concepts in Photography Aperture The aperture is one of the three factors that determine the exposure. The aperture housing contains thin, metal plates that open and close to let light through the aperture and into the camera. The size of the aperture is related to the amount of light: a larger aperture allows more light and a smaller aperture allows less light. Aperture sizes Minimum aperture Medium aperture Maximum aperture Aperture opened slightly Aperture opened wide The size of the aperture is represented by a value known as an "F-number." The f-number represents the focal length divided by the diameter of the lens. For example, if a lens with a 50 mm focal length has an f-number of F2, the diameter of the aperture is 25 mm. (50 mm/25 mm = F2) The smaller the f-number, the greater the size of the aperture. The opening in the aperture is described as the Exposure Value (EV). Increasing the Exposure Value (+1 EV) means the amount of light doubles. Decreasing the Exposure Value (-1 EV) means the amount of light halves. You can also use the exposure compensation feature to fine-tune the amount of light by subdividing exposure values into 1/2, 1/3 EV, and so on. +1 EV F1.4 F2 F2.8 F4 F5.6 F8 -1 EV Exposure Value Steps 16 Concepts in Photography Aperture value and the depth of field You can blur or sharpen the background of a photo by controlling the aperture. It is closely related to the depth of field (DOF), which can be expressed as small or large. A photo with a large DOF A photo with a small DOF The aperture housing contains several blades. These blades move together and control the amount of light passing through the center of the aperture. The number of blades also affects the shape of light when shooting night scenes. If an aperture has an even number of blades, light divides into an equal number of sections. If the number of blades is odd, the number of sections is double the number of blades. For example, an aperture with 8 blades divides light into 8 sections and an aperture with 7 blades into 14 sections. 7 blades 8 blades 17 Concepts in Photography Shutter speed Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the shutter. It controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture before it reaches the image sensor. Usually, the shutter speed is manually adjustable. The measurement of the shutter speed is known as the "Exposure Value" (EV), which is marked in intervals of 1 s, 1/2 s, 1/4 s, 1/8 s, 1/15 s, 1/1,000 s, 1/2,000 s, and so on. Exposure +1 EV -1 EV 1 s 1/2 s 1/4 s 1/8 s 1/15 s 1/30 s Shutter speed Therefore, the faster the shutter speed, the less light will be let in. Likewise, the slower the shutter speed, the more light will be let in. The photos below illustrate that a slow shutter speed allows more time for light to enter the camera. This adds a motion blurring effect to moving objects. On the other hand, a fast shutter speed allows less time to let light in and the photo more easily freezes subjects in motion. 0.8 s 0.004 s 18 Concepts in Photography ISO sensitivity The exposure of an image is determined by the sensitivity of the camera. This sensitivity is based on international film standards, known as ISO standards. On digital cameras, this sensitivity rating is used to represent the sensitivity of the digital mechanism that captures the image. ISO sensitivity doubles as the number doubles. For example, an ISO 200 setting is capable of capturing images at twice the speed of an ISO 100 setting. However, higher ISO settings can result in "noise"—small specks, spots, and other phenomena in a photo that give the shot a noisy or dirty appearance. As a general rule, it is best to use a low ISO setting to prevent noise in your photos, unless you are shooting in darkened environments or at night. Changes in the quality and brightness according to ISO sensitivity Because a low ISO sensitivity means the camera will be less sensitive to light, you need more light to have an optimal exposure. When using a low ISO sensitivity, open the aperture more or reduce the shutter speed to allow more light to enter the camera. For example, on a sunny day when light is abundant, a low ISO sensitivity does not require a slow shutter speed. However, in a dark place or at night, a low ISO sensitivity will result in a blurry photo. Therefore, it is recommended to increase the ISO sensitivity by a moderate amount. A photo captured with a tripod and high ISO sensitivity A blurred photo with a low ISO sensitivity 19 Concepts in Photography How the aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity control exposure The aperture setting, shutter speed, and ISO sensitivity are closely interconnected in photography. The aperture setting controls the opening that regulates the light that enters the camera, while the shutter speed determines the length of time that light is allowed to enter. ISO sensitivity determines the speed at which the film reacts to light. Together, these three aspects are described as the triangle of exposure. A change in shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO sensitivity can be offset by adjustments to the others to maintain the amount of light. The results, however, change according to the settings. For example, shutter speed is useful in expressing movement, aperture can control the depth of field, and ISO sensitivity can control the graininess of a photo. Settings Results Aperture value Wide aperture = more light Narrow aperture = less light Wide = small depth of field Narrow = large depth of field Settings Results Shutter speed Fast speed = less light Slow speed = more light Fast = still Slow = blurry ISO sensitivity High sensitivity = more sensitive to light Low sensitivity = less sensitive to light High = more grainy Low = less grainy 20 Concepts in Photography Correlation between focal length, angle, and perspective Focal length, which is measured in millimeters, is the distance between the middle of the lens to its focal point. It affects the angle and perspective of captured images. A short focal length translates into a wide angle, which allows you to capture a wide shot. A long focal length translates into a narrow angle, which allows you to capture telephoto shots. Short focal length wide shot wide angle wide-angle lens Long focal length telephoto shot narrow angle telephoto lens Look at these photos below and compare the changes. 16 mm angle 50 mm angle 200 mm angle Normally, a lens with a wide angle is suitable for shooting landscapes and a lens with a narrow angle is recommended for shooting sports events or portraits. 21 Concepts in Photography Depth of field Portraits or still-life photos mostly acclaimed by people are the ones on which the background is out of focus so the subject looks pronounced. Depending on the focused areas, a photo can be blurred or sharpened. This is called 'a low DOF' or 'a high DOF'. The depth of field is the focused area around the subject. Therefore, a small DOF signifies that the focused area is narrow and a large DOF means the focused area is wide. A photo with a small DOF, which stresses the subject and makes the rest of it blurred, can be obtained by using a telescope lens or selecting a low aperture value. Conversely, a photo with a large DOF which shows all the elements on the photo sharply focused can be achieved by using a wide angle lens or selecting a high aperture value. Small Depth of Field Large Depth of Field What controls out-of-focus effects? DOF depends on aperture value The wider the aperture is (namely the lower the aperture value), the lower the DOF becomes. Under the condition where the focal length is equal, a low aperture value leads to a photo with a low DOF. 50 mm F5.7 50 mm F22 22 Concepts in Photography DOF depends on focal length The longer the focal length is, the lower the DOF gets. A telescope lens with a longer focal length than a wide-angle lens with a short focal length is better to capture a photo of a low DOF. A photo captured with a 16 mm wide-angle lens A photo captured with a 100 mm telescope lens DOF depends on the distance between the subject and the camera The shorter the distance between the subject and the camera is, the lower the DOF gets. Therefore, taking a photo close to a subject can result in a photo of low DOF. A photo captured with a 100 mm telescope lens A photo captured close to the subject 23 Concepts in Photography DOF preview You can press the Custom button to get an idea of what your shot will look like before shooting. The camera adjusts the aperture to the predefined settings and shows the results on the screen. Set the function of the Custom button to Optical Preview. (p. 139) Composition It is fun to capture a photo of the beauty of world with a camera. No matter how the world is beautiful, however, a poor composition cannot capture the beauty of it. When it comes to composition, it is very important to prioritize subjects. Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually, abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition. Rule of Thirds To use the rule of thirds, divide the image into a 3x3 pattern of equal rectangles. To compose photos that best emphasize the subject, make sure the subject is located at one of the corners of the center rectangle. 24 Concepts in Photography Using the rule of thirds will create photos with stable and compelling compositions. Below are a few examples. Photos with two subjects If your subject is in one corner of the photo, it creates an unbalanced composition. You can stabilize the photo by capturing a second subject in the opposite corner to balance the weight of the photo. Subject 1 Subject 2 Subject 1 Subject 2 Unstable Stable 25 Concepts in Photography When taking landscape photos, centering the horizon will create an unbalanced effect. Give more weight to the photo by moving the horizon up or down. Subject 1 Subject 2 Subject 1 Subject 2 Unstable Stable Flash Light is one of the most important components in photography. It is not easy, however, to have an enough amount of light anytime and anywhere. Making use of a flash allows you to optimize light settings and create a variety of effects. Flash, also known as strobe or speed light, helps to create adequate exposure in low-light conditions. It is also useful in light-abundant situations. For example, flash can be used in compensating the exposure of a subject’s shadow or capturing clearly both the subject and the background in backlit conditions. Before correction After correction 26 Concepts in Photography Flash guide number The model number of a flash refers to the flash’s power, and the maximum amount of light created is represented by a value known as a "guide number". The bigger the guide number, the more light is emitted from the flash. The guide number is achieved by multiplying the distance from the flash to the subject and the aperture value when the ISO sensitivity is set to 100. Guide number = Flash to Subject Distance X Aperture value Aperture value = Guide number/Flash to Subject Distance Flash to Subject Distance = Guide number/Aperture value Therefore, if you know the guide number of a flash, you can estimate an optimum flash to subject distance when setting the flash manually. For example, if a flash has a guide number of GN 20 and is 4 meters away from the subject, the optimal aperture value is F5.0. Bounce Photography Bounce photography refers to the method of bouncing light off of the ceiling or walls so that the light spreads evenly over the subject. Normally, photos captured with flash may appear unnatural and cast shadows. Subjects in photos captured with bounce photography cast no shadows and look smooth due to evenly spread light. Chapter 1 My Camera Learn about your camera’s layout, display icons, lens, optional accessories, and basic functions. My Camera 28 Getting started Unpacking Check your product box for the following items. Camera AC adapter/USB cable Rechargeable battery Strap Quick Start Guide Quick Reference Guide Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM • The illustrations may differ from your actual items. • You can purchase optional accessories at a retailer or a Samsung service center. Samsung is not responsible for any problems caused by using unauthorized accessories. For information about accessories, refer to page 182. My Camera 29 Camera layout No. Name 1 Mode dial • t: Smart Auto mode (p. 52) • P: Program mode (p. 54) • A: Aperture Priority mode (p. 56) • S: Shutter Priority mode (p. 57) • M: Manual mode (p. 58) • s: Smart mode (p. 60) • R: Panorama mode (p. 62) • B: Wireless Network (p. 113) 2 Shutter button 3 Power button 4 MOBILE button Select a Wi-Fi function to connect with your mobile device. (p. 31) 5 Microphone 6 Hot-shoe No. Name 7 Speaker 8 NFC tag 9 Lens release button 10 Image sensor 11 Lens mount 12 Lens mount index 13 AF-assist light/Timer lamp 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 7 9 10 13 12 11 8 My Camera > Camera layout 30 No. Name 1 Video recording button Start recording a video. 2 Eyelet for camera strap 3 Internal antenna * Avoid contact with the internal antenna while using a wireless network. 4 f button Access the Smart panel and fine-tune some settings. 5 o button • In the Menu screen: Save the selected options. • In Shooting mode: Allow you to select a focus area manually in some shooting modes. 6 Delete/Custom button • In Shooting mode: Perform the assigned function. (p. 139) • In Playback mode: Delete files. 7 Playback button Enter Playback mode to view pictures or videos. No. Name 8 Navigation button (Smart dial) • In Shooting mode: - D: Change the information on the display. - I: Select the shutter speed, aperture value, exposure compensation, or ISO sensitivity. - C: Select a shooting method or set the timer. - F: Select an AF mode. • In Playback mode: - I: View thumbnails. • In other situations: Move up, down, left, right, respectively. (You can also rotate the navigation button.) 9 m button Access options or menus. 10 Status lamp Indicate the status of the camera. • Blinking: When saving a photo, shooting a video, sending data to a computer, connecting to WLAN, or sending a photo. • Steady: When there is no data transfer or charging the battery. 11 Display To take a self-portrait while looking at yourself on the screen, flip the screen up. (p. 32) 1 2 4 5 6 8 7 10 9 11 3 My Camera > Camera layout 31 No. Name 1 HDMI port 2 USB port Connect the camera to a computer. 3 Battery chamber/Memory card cover Insert a memory card and battery. 4 Tripod mount Using the MOBILE button Select a Wi-Fi function that connects to a smart phone by pressing [ ]. Press [ ] again to return to the previous mode. 1 2 4 3 My Camera > Camera layout 32 Using the display You can take a self-portrait while looking at yourself on the display by flipping the display up. Using the Self shot mode When the camera is off and you enabled the Self shot option (p. 140), flipping the display upward turns the camera on and enters Self shot mode. In Self shot mode, the timer (3 seconds), face detection, and beauty face functions are automatically activated. Press [o] to change the face detection option. Press [n] to deactivate or activate the beauty face function. 1 Flip the display upward. 180˚ 2 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter]. • After 3 seconds, the camera automatically releases the shutter. • When the camera is off, flipping the display upward automatically turns the camera on. • Keep the display closed when the camera is not in use. • Flip the display only within the angle allowed. Failing to do so may damage your camera. • When the camera is not held and the display is flipped upward, use a tripod. Otherwise, it may cause damage to your camera. • Do not flip the display up when an external flash is mounted on the camera. Otherwise, it may cause damage to your camera. My Camera 33 Inserting the battery and memory card Learn how to insert or remove the battery and an optional memory card into the camera. Memory card Insert a memory card with the gold-colored contacts facing up. Rechargeable battery Insert the battery with the goldcolored contacts facing left. Removing the battery and memory card Rechargeable battery Battery lock Slide the lock up to release the battery. Memory card Push the card gently until it disengages from the camera, and then pull it out of the slot. Using the memory card adapter To read data with a PC or memory card reader, insert the memory card into a memory card adapter. While the status lamp of the camera is blinking, do not remove the memory card or battery. Doing so may damage the data stored on the memory card or your camera. My Camera 34 Charging the battery and turning on your camera Charging the battery Before you use the camera for the first time, you must charge the battery. Plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera, and then plug the other end of the USB cable into the AC adapter. Status lamp • Red light on: Charging • Green light on: Fully charged • Red light blinking: Charging error Use only the AC adapter and USB cable supplied with your camera. If you use another AC adapter, the camera battery may not charge or work properly. Turning on your camera To turn on or off the camera, press [ ]. • The initial setup screen appears when you turn on the camera for the first time. (p. 35) My Camera 35 Performing the initial setup When you turn on your camera for the first time, the initial setup screen appears. The language is preset for the country or region where the camera is sold. You can change the language as desired. 1 Press [I] to select Time Zone, and then press [o]. 2 Press [D/I] to select a time zone, and then press [o]. Back Set Time Zone [GMT +00:00] London [GMT -01:00] Cape Verde [GMT -02:00] Mid-Atlantic [GMT -03:00] Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo [GMT -03:30] Newfoundland 3 Press [I] to select Date/Time Set, and then press [o]. 4 Press [C/F] to select an item (Year/Month/Day/Hour/ Minute/Summer time). 5 Press [D/I] to set the option, and then press [o]. Back Set Year Month Day Hour Min DST Date/Time Set • The screen may differ depending on the language you selected. 6 Press [I] to select Date Type, and then press [o]. 7 Press [D/I] to select a date type, and then press [o]. Back Set Date Type YYYY/MM/DD MM/DD/YYYY DD/MM/YYYY My Camera > Performing the initial setup 36 8 Press [I] to select Time Type, and then press [o]. 9 Press [D/I] to select a time type, and then press [o]. Back Set Time Type 12 Hr 24 Hr 10 Press [m] to finish the initial setup. My Camera 37 Selecting functions (options) Rotate the navigation button or press [D/I/C/F] to move, and then press [o] to select an option. Using m Press [m], and then change shooting options or settings. E.g. Selecting the photo size in P mode 1 Rotate the mode dial to P. 2 Press [m]. 3 Press [C], rotate the navigation button or press [D/I] to move to b, and then press [o]. 4 Rotate the navigation button or press [D/I] to move to Photo Size, and then press [o]. AutoShare Photo Size Quality ISO Minimum Shutter Speed Back Select My Camera > Selecting functions (options) 38 5 Rotate the navigation button or press [D/I] to move to an option, and then press [o]. • Press [m] to go back to the previous menu. (3:2) (5472x3648) (3:2) (3888x2592) (3:2) (2976x1984) (3:2) (1728x1152) (16:9) (5472x3080) Photo Size Back Set 6 Press [m] to switch to Shooting mode. Using the Smart panel Press [f] to access some functions such as Exposure, ISO, and White Balance. E.g. Adjust the exposure value in P mode 1 Rotate the mode dial to P. 2 Press [f]. 3 Press [D/I/C/F] to move to EV, and then press [o]. • You can directly select an option by rotating the navigation button without having to press [o]. EV : 0 Back Adjust 4 Rotate the navigation button or press [C/F] to adjust the exposure value, and then press [o]. My Camera > Selecting functions (options) 39 Using iFn Press [i-Function] on an i-Function lens to manually select and adjust shutter speed, aperture value, exposure value, ISO sensitivity, and White Balance on the lens. 1 Rotate the mode dial to P, A, S, or M. 2 Press [i-Function] on the lens to select a setting. • To select items to appear, select [m] ĺ d ĺ iFn Customizing ĺ an item. • You can also press [i-Function], and then press [D/I] to select a setting. Option Description Aperture Adjust the aperture value. Shutter Speed Adjust the shutter speed. EV Adjust the exposure value. ISO Adjust the ISO sensitivity. White Balance Select a White Balance option. 3 Adjust the focus ring to select an option. • You can also rotate the navigation button. 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. My Camera > Selecting functions (options) 40 Available options Shooting mode PASM Aperture -O-O Shutter Speed - - OO EV OOO - ISO OOOO White Balance OOOO My Camera 41 Display icons Capturing photos 1 2 1. Shooting information Icon Description Shooting mode Current date Current time Focal length* Auto exposure lock (p. 96) Available number of photos Memory card inserted Memory card not inserted** Icon Description • : Fully charged • : Partially charged • (Red): Empty (recharge the battery) • : Charging Auto focus frame Spot metering area Camera shake Manual focus scale Level gauge (p. 42) Histogram (p. 138) Focus Shutter speed Aperture value Exposure adjustment value ISO sensitivity (p. 69) * This icon appears when you attach the Power Zoom lens. ** Photos that were captured without inserting a memory card cannot be transferred to a memory card or a computer. 2. Shooting options Icon Description Photo size Drive mode Flash (p. 88) Flash intensity adjustment Metering (p. 90) AF mode (p. 73) Face detection Beauty face*** Focus area White Balance (p. 70) White Balance micro adjustment Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) (p. 82) RAW file Dynamic Range (p. 93) *** This icon appears when the camera enters Self shot mode by flipping the display upward. The icons displayed will change according to the mode you select or the options you set. In Shooting mode My Camera > Display icons 42 2. Shooting options Icon Description Video size AF mode (p. 73) Metering (p. 90) White Balance (p. 70) White Balance micro adjustment Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) (p. 82) Fader (p. 99) Voice recording off (p. 99) The icons displayed will change according to the mode you select or the options you set. About the level gauge The level gauge helps you align the camera with the horizontal and vertical lines on the display. If the level gauge is not level, calibrate the level gauge using the Horizontal Calibration function. (p. 141) Vertical Horizontal Ÿ Level Ÿ Unlevel You cannot use the level gauge when you shoot in portrait orientation. Recording videos 1 2 1. Shooting information Icon Description Shooting mode Current recording time/ Available recording time Multi Motion (p. 98) Playback time after applying the Multi Motion feature Memory card inserted • : Fully charged • : Partially charged • (Red): Empty (recharge the battery) • : Charging Exposure value ISO sensitivity (p. 69) My Camera > Display icons 43 In Playback mode Viewing photos Information Mode F No Shutter ISO Metering Flash Focal Length White Balance EV Photo Size Date Icon Description Current file/The total number of files Folder number-File number RAW file Protected file Continuously captured photos (they will appear as a folder) (p. 102) 1 2 3 No. Description 1 Captured photo 2 RGB histogram (p. 138) 3 Shooting mode, Metering, Flash, White Balance, Aperture value, Shutter speed, ISO, Focal length, Exposure value, Photo size, Date Playing videos Stop Play Icon Description Current file/The total number of files Playback speed Folder number-File number Multi Motion Current playback time Video length My Camera > Display icons 44 Changing the information displayed Press [D] repeatedly to change the display type. Mode Display type Shooting • Basic shooting information (Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture value, Exposure value, ISO sensitivity, etc.) • Basic shooting information + Level gauge • Basic shooting information + Current shooting options information (Photo size, Drive mode, Flash, Metering, AF mode, etc.) • Basic shooting information + Current shooting options information + Histogram + Date and time Playback • Basic information • Display all information about the current file. • Display all information about the current file including RGB histogram. My Camera 45 Lenses You can purchase optional lenses made exclusively for your NX series camera. Learn about the functions of each lens and select one that suits your needs and preferences. Lens layout SAMSUNG 16-50 mm F3.5-5.6 Power Zoom ED OIS lens (example) 1 6 2 3 4 5 No. Description 1 i-Function button (p. 39) 2 Lens mount index 3 Focus ring 4 Lens 5 Zoom button • Press the zoom button to adjust the zoom ratio. 6 Lens contacts When not using the lens, attach the lens cap and lens mount cover to protect the lens from dust and scratches. My Camera > Lenses 46 SAMSUNG 20-50 mm F3.5-5.6 ED II lens (example) 7 1 2 3 5 6 4 No. Description 1 Lens mount index 2 Zoom lock switch 3 Lens 4 Focus ring (p. 81) 5 i-Function button (p. 39) 6 Zoom ring 7 Lens contacts Locking or unlocking the lens To lock the lens, pull and hold the zoom lock switch away from the camera body and rotate the zoom ring as shown in the illustration. To unlock the lens, rotate the zoom ring as shown in the illustration until you hear the click. You cannot capture a photo when the lens is locked. My Camera > Lenses 47 SAMSUNG 16 mm F2.4 lens (example) 5 2 1 4 3 No. Description 1 i-Function button (p. 39) 2 Lens mount index 3 Focus ring (p. 81) 4 Lens 5 Lens contacts My Camera > Lenses 48 Lens markings Find out what the numbers on the lens signify. SAMSUNG 18-200 mm F3.5-6.3 ED OIS lens (example) 1 2 345 No. Description 1 Aperture value A range of supported aperture values. For example, 1:3.5–6.3 means the maximum aperture value range from 3.5 to 6.3. 2 Focal length The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point (in millimeters). This figure is expressed in a range: minimum focal length to maximum focal length of the lens. Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject is magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view. 3 ED ED stands for Extra-low Dispersion. Extra-low dispersion glass is effective in minimizing chromatic aberration (a distortion that occurs when a lens fails to focus all colors to the same convergence point). 4 OIS (p. 82) Optical Image Stabilization. Lenses with this feature can detect camera shake and effectively cancel out the movement inside the camera. 5 Ø The lens diameter. When you attach a filter to the lens, make sure that the diameters of the lens and the filter are the same. My Camera 49 Accessories You can use accessories such as external flash that can help you capture better and more convenient photos. For more information about optional accessories, refer to the manual for each accessory. • The illustrations may differ from the actual items. • You can purchase Samsung-approved accessories at a retailer or a Samsung service center. Samsung is not responsible for damage caused by using another manufacturer's accessories. External flash layout SEF8A (example) (optional) 1 2 3 No. Description 1 Lamp 2 Hot shoe fastening dial 3 Hot shoe connection My Camera > Accessories 50 Connecting the external flash 1 Mount the flash by sliding it into the hot-shoe. 2 Lock the flash into place by turning the hot-shoe fastening dial clockwise. 3 Lift up the flash for use. • You can capture a photo with a flash that is not fully charged, but it is recommended to use a fully charged flash. • The available options may differ depending on the shooting mode. • There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the flash fires a second time. • SEF8A may not be compatible with other NX series cameras. • For more details about optional flashes, refer to the user manual for the flash. Use only Samsung-approved flashes. Using incompatible flashes may damage your camera. My Camera 51 Shooting modes Two simple shooting modes—Smart Auto and Smart mode—help you capture photos with numerous automatic settings. Additional modes allow for greater customization of settings. Icon Description t Smart Auto mode (p. 52) P Program mode (p. 54) A Aperture Priority mode (p. 56) S Shutter Priority mode (p. 57) M Manual mode (p. 58) s Smart mode (p. 60) R Panorama mode (p. 62) B Wireless Network (p. 113) My Camera > Shooting modes 52 t Smart Auto mode In Smart Auto mode, the camera recognizes surrounding conditions and automatically adjusts factors that contribute to exposure, including shutter speed, aperture value, metering, White Balance, and exposure compensation. As the camera controls most of the functions, some shooting functions are limited. This mode is useful for capturing quick snapshots with the least amount of adjustment. 1 Rotate the mode dial to t. 2 Align your subject in the frame. 3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus. • The camera selects a scene. An appropriate scene icon appears at the screen. My Camera > Shooting modes 53 Recognizable scenes Icon Description Landscapes Scenes with bright white backgrounds Landscapes at night Portraits at night Landscapes with backlighting Portraits with backlighting Portraits Close-up photos of objects Close-up photos of text Sunsets Indoors, dark Partially lit Close-up with spot lighting Portraits with spot lighting Blue skies Icon Description Forested areas typically consist of green-colored subjects Close-up photos of colorful subjects Camera is stabilized on a tripod and the subject is not moving for a certain period of time (when shooting in the dark). Actively moving subjects 4 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo. • The camera may detect different scenes, even the same subjects, depending on external factors such as camera shake, lighting, or distance to the subject. • If the camera does not recognize an appropriate scene mode, it uses the default settings for t mode. • Even if it detects a face, the camera may not select a portrait mode depending on the subject's position or lighting. • Even if you use a tripod, the camera may not detect the tripod mode ( ) if the subject is moving. • The camera consumes more battery power, because it changes settings often to select appropriate scenes. My Camera > Shooting modes 54 P Program mode The camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture value so that an optimal exposure value can be achieved. This mode is useful when you want to capture shots of constant exposure while being able to adjust other settings. 1 Rotate the mode dial to P. 2 Set the desired options. 3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. My Camera > Shooting modes 55 Program Shift Program Shift function lets you adjust the shutter speed and aperture value while the camera maintains the same exposure. Press [I] to select the shutter speed and aperture value and rotate the navigation button to adjust the aperture value. The shutter speed will change according to the aperture value. Minimum shutter speed Set the shutter speed not to be slower than the selected speed. However, if an optimal exposure value cannot be achieved because the ISO sensitivity reached the maximum ISO value that is set by Auto ISO Range, shutter speed may be slower than the selected minimum shutter speed. To set the minimum shutter speed, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Minimum Shutter Speed ĺ an option. • This feature is available only when the ISO sensitivity is set to Auto. • This feature is available only in Program or Aperture Priority mode. My Camera > Shooting modes 56 A Aperture Priority mode In Aperture Priority mode, the camera automatically calculates shutter speed according to the aperture value you choose. You can adjust the depth of field (DOF) by changing the aperture value. This mode is useful for taking portraits, flowers, or landscape shots. Large Depth of Field Small Depth of Field 1 Rotate the mode dial to A. 2 Press [I] to select the aperture value. 3 Rotate the navigation button to adjust the aperture value. 4 Set the desired options. 5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. • In low-light settings, you may need to increase the ISO sensitivity to prevent blurred photos. • To set the minimum shutter speed, in Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Minimum Shutter Speed ĺ an option. My Camera > Shooting modes 57 S Shutter Priority mode In Shutter Priority mode, the camera automatically adjusts the aperture value according to the shutter speed you choose. This mode is useful for capturing photos of fast-moving subjects or for creating tracer effects in a photo. For example, set the shutter speed to over 1/500 s to freeze the subject. To make the subject appear blurred set the shutter speed to below 1/30 s. Slow shutter speed Fast shutter speed 1 Rotate the mode dial to S. 2 Press [I] to select the shutter speed. 3 Rotate the navigation button to adjust the shutter speed. 4 Set the desired options. 5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. In order to compensate for the reduced amount of light allowed by fast shutter speeds, open the aperture and let in more light. If your photos are still too dark, increase the ISO value. My Camera > Shooting modes 58 M Manual mode Manual mode lets you adjust the shutter speed and aperture value manually. In this mode, you can fully control the exposure of your photos. This mode is useful in controlled shooting environments, such as a studio, or when it is necessary to fine-tune camera settings. The Manual mode is also recommended for shooting night scenes or fireworks. 1 Rotate the mode dial to M. 2 Press [I] to select the aperture value or shutter speed. 3 Rotate the navigation button to adjust the aperture value or shutter speed. 4 Set the desired options. 5 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture the photo. Using Framing Mode When you adjust the aperture value or shutter speed, the exposure changes according to the settings, so the display may darken. With this function on, the brightness of the display is constant regardless of the settings, so you can better frame your shot. To use Framing Mode, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Framing Mode ĺ an option. My Camera > Shooting modes 59 Using the Bulb function Use the Bulb function to shoot night scenes or the night sky. During the interval between the first [Shutter] press and the second [Shutter] press, the shutter is left open so you can create moving light effects. To use a bulb, In Shooting mode, press [I] to select the shutter speed ĺ Completely rotate the navigation button counter-clockwise to set the shutter speed to Bulb ĺ Press [Shutter] to start shooting ĺ Press [Shutter] again to stop shooting. • If you set a high ISO value or open the shutter for a long time, image noise may increase. • Drive options and flash options cannot be used with the Bulb function. • The Bulb function is available only in Manual mode. • Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. • The longer you open the shutter, the longer it takes to save a photo. Do not turn the camera off while the camera saves a photo. • If you use this function for a long time, use a fully charged battery. My Camera > Shooting modes 60 s Smart mode In Smart mode, you can capture photos with options that are preset for a specific scene. 1 Rotate the mode dial to s. 2 Select a scene. Option Description Beauty Face Capture a portrait with options to hide facial imperfections. Best Face Capture multiple photos and replace faces to create the best possible image. Continuous Shot Capture a series of photos of moving subjects. Kids Shot Capture a photo with a funny sound to get a kid's attention. Landscape Capture still-life scenes and landscapes. Macro Capture small or close-up subjects. Option Description Food Capture a photo of food in more colorful tones. Parties and Indoors Capture a crisp indoor photos. Action Freeze Capture subjects moving at high speed. Rich Tones Capture a photo with vibrant colors. Waterfall Capture scenes with waterfalls. Silhouette Capture subjects as dark shapes against a light background. Sunset Capture scenes at sunset, with natural-looking reds and yellows. Night Capture a photo with less blurring and image noise in low light conditions. Fireworks Capture scenes with fireworks. Light Trace Capture scenes with the light trailing in low-light conditions. 3 Half-press [Shutter] to focus, and then press [Shutter] to capture. My Camera > Shooting modes 61 Using the Best Face mode In Best Face mode, you can capture multiple photos and replace faces to create the best possible image. Use this mode to select the best image for each individual when capturing group photos. 1 Rotate the mode dial to s, and then select Best Face. 2 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. 3 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo. • The camera captures 5 photos consecutively. • The first photo is set as the background image. • The camera automatically detects faces after shooting. 4 Select a face to replace by using the navigation button. Cancel Save 5 Select the best image from the 5 faces that were captured. • Repeat steps 4 and 5 to replace the rest of the faces in the photo. • The icon will appear on the image that the camera recommends. Back Set 6 Press [f] to save the photo. • Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. • The resolution is set to 5.9M or less. My Camera > Shooting modes 62 3 When you are finished, release [Shutter]. • The camera will automatically save the shots into one photo. • If you release [Shutter] while shooting, the panoramic shooting stops and photos that have been captured are saved. • The resolution varies depending on the panoramic photo you captured. • In Panorama mode, some shooting options are not available. • The camera may stop shooting due to the shooting composition or the subject's movement. • In Panorama mode, your camera may not capture the entire last scene if you stop moving the camera to improve the photo quality. To capture the entire scene, move your camera slightly beyond the point where you want the scene to end. • For best results when capturing panoramic photos, avoid the following: - moving the camera too quickly or too slowly - moving the camera too little to capture the next image - moving the camera at irregular speeds - shaking the camera - shooting in dark places - capturing moving subjects nearby - shooting conditions where the brightness or color of light is changing • Photos taken are automatically saved, and shooting is stopped under the following conditions: - if you change the shooting direction while shooting - if you move the camera too rapidly - if you do not move the camera R Panorama mode In Panorama mode, you can capture a wide panoramic scene in a single photo. Panorama mode captures and combines a series of photos to create a panoramic image. 1 Rotate the mode dial to R. 2 Press and hold [Shutter], and then slowly move the camera in the direction you selected. • An arrow toward the direction of motion is displayed, and the entire shooting image is displayed in the preview box. • When the scenes are aligned, the camera captures the next photo automatically. My Camera > Shooting modes 63 Recording a video In Shooting mode, you can record Full HD videos (1920X1080) by pressing (Video recording). The camera lets you record a video up to 20 minutes in length at 30 fps, and saves the files in MP4 (H.264) format. The sound is recorded via the camera's microphone. When you use a lens that does not have an AF/MF switch while recording a video, press [F] to deactivate or activate the AF function. When you use the lens that has an AF/MF switch, the AF function works according to the switch’s setting. Select Fader to fade in or out a scene. You can also select Voice or other options to set recording options. (p. 99) 1 Rotate the mode dial to t, P, A, S, M, or s. • This feature may not work in some modes. 2 Set the desired options. 3 Press (Video recording) to start recording. • The camera will retain the shutter speed and aperture value that you have set before starting shooting. 4 Press (Video recording) again to stop. • You can also press [Shutter] to stop recording. My Camera > Shooting modes 64 • H.264 (MPEG-4 part10/AVC) is the latest video coding format established in 2003 collaboratively by ISO-IEC and ITU-T. Since this format uses a high compression rate, more data can be saved in less memory space. • If you have the image stabilizer option on when shooting a movie, the camera may record the image stabilizer sound. • The zoom sound or other lens sounds may be recorded if you adjust the lens while recording a video. • When using an optional video lens, the autofocus noise is not recorded. • If you remove the camera lens while recording a movie, the recording will be interrupted. Do not change the lens while recording. • If you change the shooting angle of the camera suddenly while shooting a movie, the camera may not be able to record images accurately. Use a tripod to minimize camera shake. • The camera supports only the Multi AF function when recording a video. You cannot use any other focus area setting functions. • When the size of a movie file exceeds 4 GB, the camera automatically stops recording even if the maximum recording time (20 minutes) has not been reached. • If you use a slow writing memory card, the recording of your movie can be interrupted because the card cannot process data at the rate the video is being shot. If this occurs, replace the card with a faster memory card or reduce the video size (for example, from 1280X720 to 640X480). • When formatting a memory card, always format using the camera. If you format on another camera or a PC, you can lose files on the card or cause a change in the capacity of the card. • While recording a video in the same ISO sensitivity, the screen may be darker than taking a photo. Adjust the ISO sensitivity. • When you record a video in Program, Aperture Priority, or Shutter Priority mode, ISO is automatically set to Auto . My Camera > Shooting modes 65 Available functions by shooting mode For details about shooting functions, see Chapter 2. Function Available in Photo Size (p. 67) Quality (p. 68) P/A/S/M/s*/t P/A/S/M/s*/R ISO (p. 69) P/A/S/M White Balance (p. 70) P/A/S/M Picture Wizard (p. 72) P/A/S/M Smart Filter (p. 94) P/A/S/M AF Mode (p. 73) P/A/S/M/s*/R AF Area (p. 76) P/A/S/M/s* MF Assist (p. 81) Link AE to AF Point (p. 92) P/A/S/M/s/R/t P/A/S/M Framing Mode (p. 58) P/A/S/M Function Available in OIS (Anti-Shake) (p. 82) Drive (Single/Continuous/Burst/ P/A/S/M/s*/t Timer/Bracket) (p. 83) P/A/S/M/s*/t* Metering (p. 90) P/A/S/M Dynamic Range (p. 93) P/A/S/M Flash (p. 88) P*/A*/S*/M*/s*/t* Exposure compensation (p. 95) P/A/S Exposure lock (p. 96) P/A/S * Some functions are limited in these modes. Chapter 2 Shooting Functions Learn about the functions you can set in Shooting mode. You can enjoy more customized photos and videos by using the shooting functions. 67 Shooting Functions > Size and Resolution ize and Resolution Shooting Functions Photo size As you increase the resolution, your photo or video will include more pixels, so it can be printed on larger paper or displayed on a larger screen. When you use a high resolution, the file size will also increase. Select a low resolution for photos that will be displayed in a digital picture frame or uploaded to the web. To set the size, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Photo Size ĺ an option. * Default Icon Size Recommended for (3:2) 5472x3648* Printing on A1 paper. (3:2) 3888x2592 Printing on A2 paper. (3:2) 2976x1984 Printing on A3 paper. (3:2) 1728x1152 Printing on A5 paper. (16:9) 5472x3080 Printing on A1 paper or viewing on an HDTV. (16:9) 3712x2088 Printing on A3 paper or viewing on an HDTV. (16:9) 2944x1656 Printing on A4 paper or viewing on an HDTV. (16:9) 1920x1080 Printing on A5 paper or viewing on an HDTV. (1:1) 3648x3648 Printing a square photo on A1 paper. (1:1) 2640x2640 Printing a square photo on A3 paper. (1:1) 2000x2000 Printing a square photo on A4 paper. (1:1) 1024x1024 Attaching to an email. Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Size and Resolution 68 Shooting Functions > Size and Resolution Quality The camera saves photos in either the JPEG or RAW format. Photos captured by a camera are often transformed to the JPEG format and stored in the memory according to the settings of the camera at the time of shooting. RAW files are not transformed to the JPEG format and are stored in the memory without any changes. RAW files have the file extension "SRW". To adjust and calibrate exposures, White Balances, tones, contrasts, and colors of the RAW files, or to convert them into JPEG or TIFF format, use the Adobe Photoshop Lightroom program found on the supplied DVD-ROM. Ensure you have enough space on the memory card to save photos in the RAW format. To set the quality, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Quality ĺ an option. * Default Icon Format Description JPEG Super Fine*: • Compressed for the best quality. • Recommended for printing in large size. JPEG Fine: • Compressed for better quality. • Recommended for printing in normal size. * Default Icon Format Description JPEG Normal: • Compressed for normal quality. • Recommended for printing in small size or uploading to the web. RAW RAW: • Save a photo without data loss. • Recommended for editing after shooting. RAW+JPEG RAW + S.Fine: Save a photo in both the JPEG (S.Fine quality) and RAW format. RAW+JPEG RAW + Fine: Save a photo in both the JPEG (Fine quality) and RAW format. RAW+JPEG RAW + Normal: Save a photo in both the JPEG (Normal quality) and RAW format. Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. 69 Shooting Functions > ISO sensitivity SO sensitivity Shooting Functions The ISO sensitivity value represents the sensitivity of camera to light. The larger the ISO value, the more sensitive the camera is to light. Consequently, by selecting a higher ISO sensitivity value, you can capture photos in dim or dark places at faster shutter speeds. However, this may increase electronic noise and result in a grainy photo. To set ISO sensitivity, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ ISO ĺ an option. Examples ISO 100 ISO 400 ISO 800 ISO 3200 • Increase the ISO value in places where flash use is prohibited. You can capture a clear photo by setting a high ISO value without having to secure more light. • Use the Noise Reduction function in order to reduce the visual noise that can appear on photos of a high ISO value. (p. 134) • Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions. ISO sensitivity 70 Shooting Functions > White Balance ite Balance Shooting Functions White Balance represents the light source that influences on the color of a photo. The color of a photo depends on the type and quality of the light source. If you want the color of your photo to be realistic, select an appropriate lighting condition to calibrate the White Balance, such as Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, Tungsten, or adjust color temperature manually. You can also adjust color for the preset light sources so that the colors of the photo match the actual scene under mixed lighting conditions. To set the White Balance, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ White Balance ĺ an option. * Default Icon Description Auto WB*: Use automatic settings depending on the lighting conditions. Daylight: Select when taking outdoor photos on a sunny day. This option results in photos closest to the natural colors of the scene. Cloudy: Select when taking outdoor photos on a cloudy day or in shadows. Photos captured on cloudy days tend to be more bluish than on sunny days. This option offsets that effect. Fluorescent White: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent lamp, especially for white fluorescent light. * Default Icon Description N Fluorescent NW: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent lamp, especially for white fluorescent light of very white hues. D Fluorescent Daylight: Select when shooting under a daylight fluorescent lamp, especially for white fluorescent light of slightly bluish hue. Tungsten: Select when taking indoor photos under incandescent bulbs or halogen lamps. Incandescent tungsten bulbs tend to have a reddish hue. This option offsets that effect. Flash WB: Select when using a flash. Custom Set: Use your pre-defined settings. You can manually set the White Balance by pressing [D], and then shooting a white sheet of paper. Fill the spot metering circle with the paper and set the White Balance. Color Temperature: Manually adjust the color temperature of the light source. Color temperature is a measurement in degrees Kelvin that indicates the specific type of light source. You can get a warmer photo with a higher value, and a cooler photo with a lower value. Press [D], and then adjust the color temperature. Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. White Balance 71 Shooting Functions > White Balance Customizing preset White Balance options You can also customize preset White Balance options. To customize preset options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ White Balance ĺ an option ĺ [D] ĺ Press [D/I/C/F]. White Balance : Daylight Back Reset Examples Auto WB Daylight Fluorescent Daylight Tungsten 72 Shooting Functions > Picture Wizard (photo styles) icture Wizard (photo styles) Shooting Functions Picture Wizard lets you apply different photo styles to your photo to create various looks and emotional moods. You can also create and save your own photo styles by adjusting color, saturation, sharpness, and contrast for each style. There is no rule for which style is suitable in which conditions. Experiment with different styles and find your own settings. To set a photo style, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Picture Wizard ĺ an option. Examples Standard Vivid Portrait Landscape Forest Retro Cool Calm Classic • You can also adjust the value of the preset style settings. Select a Picture Wizard option, press [D], and then adjust color, saturation, sharpness, or contrast. • To customize your own picture wizard, select , , or , and then adjust the color, saturation, sharpness, and contrast. • Picture Wizard options cannot be set with Smart Filter options at the same time. Picture Wizard (photo styles) 73 Shooting Functions > AF mode Shooting Functions AF mode Learn how to adjust the camera’s focus according to the subjects. You can select a focusing mode appropriate to the subject among Single Auto Focus, Continuous Auto Focus, and Manual Focus. The AF function is activated when you press [Shutter] halfway. In the MF mode, you have to rotate the focus ring on the lens to focus manually. In most cases, you can have a focus by selecting Single AF. Fast moving subjects or subjects with small shading differences to the background are difficult to focus. Select an appropriate focusing mode for such instances. If your lens has an AF/MF switch, you must set the switch according to the selected mode. Set the switch to AF when you select Single AF or Continuous AF. Set the switch to MF when you select Manual Focus. When your lens has no AF/MF switch, press [F] to select a desired AF mode. To set the auto focus mode, In Shooting mode, press [F] ĺ an option. • You can also set the option by pressing [m] ĺb ĺ AF Mode ĺ an option in Shooting mode. • The available options may differ depending on the lens in use. 74 Shooting Functions > AF mode Single AF Single AF is appropriate for shooting a still subject. When you press [Shutter] halfway, the focus fixes in the focus area. The area turns green when the focus is achieved. Continuous AF While you are pressing [Shutter] halfway, the camera continues to automatic focusing. This mode is recommended for shooting a person on a bicycle, a running dog, or a car racing scene. 75 Shooting Functions > AF mode Manual focus You can manually focus on a subject by rotating the focus ring on the lens. The MF Assist function lets you easily achieve a focus. While you are rotating the focus ring, the focus area is magnified. This mode is recommended for shooting an object similar in color to the background, a night scene, or fireworks. • If you use this function, you cannot set Face Detection, AF Area, and Link AE to AF Point options. • While you are adjusting the focus, the manual focus scale ( ) appears. 76 Shooting Functions > AF area Shooting Functions The AF area function changes the positions of the focus area. Generally, cameras focus on the nearest subject. When there are a lot of subjects, however, unwanted subjects can be in focus. In order to prevent unwanted subjects from being in focus, change the focus area so that a desired subject is in focus. You can get a clearer and sharper photo by selecting an appropriate focus area. To set the auto focus area, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ AF Area ĺ an option. • Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. • When the AF/MF switch is set to MF, you cannot change the AF area from the shooting menu. Selection AF You can set the focus on an area you want. Apply an out-of-focus effect to make the subject more distinguishable. The focus on the photo below was repositioned and resized so that it fits the subject’s face. AF Size Move To resize or move the focus area, in Shooting mode, press [o]. Press [D/I/C/F] to move the focus area. Rotate the navigation button to resize the focus area. AF area 77 Shooting Functions > AF area Multi AF The camera displays a green rectangle in places where focus is set correctly. The photo is divided into two or more areas, and the camera obtains focus points of each area. It is recommended for scenery photos. When you press [Shutter] halfway, the camera displays the focus areas as shown in the photo below. Tracking AF Compose your shot and press [o] to focus on the subject. Tracking AF allows you to track and automatically focus on your subject, even when the subject is moving or when you change the shooting composition. White frame: Your camera is tracking the subject. Green frame: Your subject is in focus when you half-press [Shutter]. Red frame: Your camera failed to focus. 78 Shooting Functions > AF area • If you do not select a focus area, the focus frame will appear in the center of the screen. • Tracking a subject may fail when: - the subject is too small - the subject moves irregularly - the subject is backlit or you are shooting in a dark place - colors or patterns on the subject and the background are the same - the subject includes horizontal patterns, such as blinds - the camera shakes excessively - you capture photos continuously • When tracking fails, the feature will be reset. • If the camera fails to track the subject, the focus area will be reset. • If the camera fails to focus, the focus frame will change to red and the focus will be reset. 79 Shooting Functions > Face Detection ce Detection Shooting Functions Face Detection Use Face Detection options to capture a self portrait or a smiling face. To use the face detection function, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Face Detection ĺ an option. • When your camera detects a face, it tracks the detected face automatically. • Depending on the Picture Wizard options, Face Detection may not be effective. • When you set manual focus, Face Detection may not be available. • Face Detection may not be effective when: - the subject is far from the camera - it is too bright or too dark - the subject is not facing the camera - the subject is wearing sunglasses or a mask - the subject’s facial expression changes drastically - the subject is backlit or the lighting conditions are unstable • When you set Face Detection options, the AF area is automatically set to Multi AF. • Depending on the Face Detection options you selected, some shooting options may not be available. Normal The camera focuses on human faces preferentially. Faces of up to 10 people can be detected. This setting is recommended for shooting a group of people. When you press [Shutter] halfway, the camera focuses on faces as shown in the photo below. In cases of shooting a group of people, the camera displays the focus on the nearest person’s face in white and the rest of the people’s faces in gray. 80 Shooting Functions > Face Detection Wink Shot The camera automatically releases the shutter 2 seconds after it detects a winking face. • Wink for more than 1 second for better detection. • Wink detection may fail when: - the camera is below eye level - the subject appears dark due to backlighting - the subject is wearing glasses - the subject is far from the camera Smile Shot The camera automatically releases the shutter when it detects a smiling face. When your subject smiles broadly, your camera can detect the smile more easily. 81 Shooting Functions > Shooting Functions > MF Assist F Assist Shooting Functions In the manual focus mode, you have to rotate the focus ring on the lens to focus. When you use the MF Assist function, you can enlarge the scene and easily adjust the focus while rotating the focus ring. This function is only available on a lens that supports manual focus. To set the manual focus assist, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ MF Assist ĺ an option. * Default Icon Description Off: Do not use the MF Assist function. Enlarge x5*: The focus area is magnified by 5 times when you adjust the focus. Enlarge x8: The focus area is magnified by 8 times when you adjust the focus. MF Assist 82 Shooting Functions > Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) ptical Image Stabilization (OIS) Shooting Functions Use the Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) function to minimize camera shake. OIS may not be available with some lenses. Camera shake tends to occur in dark places or when shooting indoors. In such cases, the camera uses slower shutter speeds in order to increase the amount of light taken in, which can result in a blurry photo. You can prevent this situation by using the OIS function. If your lens has an OIS switch, you have set the switch to ON to use the OIS function. To set OIS options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ OIS (Anti-Shake) ĺ an option. * Default Icon Description Mode 1*: The OIS function is applied only when you press [Shutter] in full or half. Mode 2: The OIS function is on. Off: The OIS function is off. Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) Without OIS correction With OIS correction • OIS may not function properly when: - you move your camera to follow a moving subject - there is too much camera shake - the shutter speed is slow (for example, when you select Night in s mode) - the battery is low - you capture a close-up shot • If you use the OIS function with a tripod, your images may be blurred by the vibration of the OIS sensor. Deactivate the OIS function when you use a tripod. • If the camera is hit or dropped, the display will be blurry. If this occurs, turn off the camera, and then turn it on again. • Use the OIS function only when needed because the function consumes more battery power. • To set an OIS option on the menu, set the OIS switch on your lens to ON. • This option may not be available with some lenses. • Off may not be available with some lenses. 83 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) rive (shooting method) Shooting Functions You can set the shooting method, such as Continuous, Burst, Timer, or Bracketing. Select Single to capture one photo at a time. Select Continuous or Burst to shoot fast moving subjects. Select AE Bracket, WB Bracket, P Wiz Bracket, or Depth Bracket to adjust exposure, White Balance, apply picture Wizard effects, or capture photos with different depths of field. You can also select Timer to capture a photo automatically after a specified time. To change the shooting method, In Shooting mode, press [C] ĺ an option. • You can also set the option by pressing [m] ĺb ĺ Drive ĺ a shooting method in Shooting mode. • Available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. Single Capture one photo whenever you press [Shutter]. Recommended for general conditions. Drive (shooting method) 84 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) Continuous Continuously capture photos while you are pressing [Shutter]. You can capture up to 5 photos per second. • If you select Continuous, the noise reduction function is not available. • Maximum shooting speed is 5 frames per second. It will slow down after approx. JPEG 13 shots, RAW 5 shots. (May vary depending on the spec of memory card.) Burst Consecutively capture up to 10 shots per second (3 seconds), 15 shots per second (2 seconds), or 30 shots per second (1 second) when you press [Shutter] once. It is recommended for shooting the rapid motion of fast moving subjects such as racing cars. • To set the number of shots, in Shooting mode, press [C] ĺ Burst, and then press [D]. • The photo size is set to 5M. • It may take longer to save a photo. • You cannot use the flash with this option. • Shutter speed must be faster than 1/30 second. • Photos captured with this option may be slightly enlarged when saving. • You cannot set an ISO option higher than ISO 3200. • This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when the photo quality is set to RAW. 85 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) Timer Capture a photo after a specified time. You can set the Timer for 2 to 30 seconds. • Press [Shutter] to stop capturing. • To set the timer details, in Shooting mode, press [C] ĺ Timer, and then press [D]. Auto Exposure Bracketing (AE Bracket) When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos: the original, one a step darker, and one a step lighter. Use a tripod to prevent blurry photos as the camera captures three photos continuously. You can adjust the settings in Bracket Settings menu. Exposure -2 Original Exposure +2 To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ an option. 86 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) White Balance Bracketing (WB Bracket) When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos: the original and two more with different White Balance settings. The original photo is captured when you press [Shutter]. The other two are automatically adjusted according to the White Balance you have set. You can adjust the settings in Bracket Settings menu. WB-2 Original WB+2 • To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ an option. • This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when the photo quality is set to RAW. Picture Wizard Bracketing (P Wiz Bracket) When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos, each with a different Picture Wizard setting. The camera captures a photo and applies the three Picture Wizard options you have set to the image captured. You can select three different settings in Bracket Settings menu. Vivid Standard Retro • To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ an option. • This option cannot be used with the RAW file format and is not available when the photo quality is set to RAW. 87 Shooting Functions > Drive (shooting method) Depth Bracketing When you press [Shutter], the camera captures 3 consecutive photos, each with a different depth of field by adjusting the aperture value. Use a tripod to prevent blurry photos as the camera captures three photos continuously. You can adjust the settings in Bracket Settings menu. • To set the bracketing details, press [m] ĺ d ĺ Bracket Settings ĺ an option. • This feature is available only in Program or Aperture Priority mode. • If the aperture value is set to its maximum or minimum, two photos will be captured with the maximum or minimum aperture value. 88 Shooting Functions > Flash Shooting Functions In order to capture a realistic photo of a subject, the amount of light should be constant. When the light source varies, you can use a flash and supply a constant amount of light. Select appropriate settings according to a light source and a subject. To set flash options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Flash ĺ an option. Icon Description Off: Do not use the flash. A Smart Flash: The camera automatically adjusts the brightness of the flash according to the amount of light in the surrounding environment. A Auto: The flash automatically fires in dark places. Auto Red-eye: The flash automatically fires and reduces red-eyes. Fill in: The flash fires whenever you capture a photo. (Brightness is automatically adjusted.) Fill-in Red: The flash fires whenever you capture a photo and reduces red-eyes. 1st Curtain: The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens. The camera captures a photo of a subject earlier in an action sequence clearly. Ball moving direction Icon Description 2nd Curtain: The flash fires just before the shutter closes. The camera captures a photo of a subject later in an action sequence clearly. Ball moving direction • The available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. • There is an interval between two bursts of the flash. Do not move until the flash fires a second time. • If you select Off, the flash does not fire even when an external flash is attached. Use only Samsung-approved flashes. Using incompatible external flashes may damage your camera. Flash 89 Shooting Functions > Flash Reducing the red-eye effect If the flash fires when you capture a photo of a person in the dark, a red glow may appear in the eyes. To reduce the red-eye effect, select Auto Red-eye or Fill-in Red. Without red-eye reduction With red-eye reduction If the subject is too far from the camera or moves when the first flash fires, redeyes may not be reduced. Adjusting the flash intensity When the flash is on, adjust the flash intensity ±2 levels. To set the flash intensity, In Shooting mode, select [m] ĺb ĺ Flash ĺ an option ĺ [D] ĺ Rotate the navigation button or press [C/F] to adjust the flash intensity. Back Reset Flash : Fill in • Adjusting the flash intensity may not be effective when: - the subject is too close to the camera - you set a high ISO sensitivity - the exposure value is too big or too small - it is too bright or too dark • In some shooting modes, you cannot use this function. • If you attach an intensity-adjustable external flash to the camera, the intensity settings of the flash will be applied. • If the subject is too close when you use the flash, some light may be blocked, resulting in a dark photo. Ensure that the subject is within the recommended range, which varies by lens. • When a lens hood is attached, the light from the flash can be blocked by the hood. Remove the hood to use the flash. 90 Shooting Functions > Metering etering Shooting Functions The metering mode refers to the way in which a camera measures the quantity of light. The camera measures the amount of light in a scene, and in many of its modes, uses the measurement to adjust various settings. For example, if a subject looks darker than its actual color, the camera captures an overexposed photo of it. If a subject looks lighter than its actual color, the camera captures an underexposed photo of it. The brightness and overall mood of the photo can also be affected by how the camera measures the amount of light. Select an appropriate setting for a shooting condition. To set a metering option, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Metering ĺ an option. Multi The Multi mode calculates the amount of light in multiple areas. When light is sufficient or insufficient, the camera adjusts the exposure by averaging the overall brightness of the scene. This mode is suitable for general photos. Metering 91 Shooting Functions > Metering Center-weighted The Center-weighted mode calculates a broader area than the Spot mode does. It sums up the amount of light in the center portion of the shot (60–80 %) and that of the rest of the shot (20–40 %). It is recommended for situations where there is a slight difference in brightness between a subject and a background or an area of the subject is large compared to the overall composition of the photo. Spot The Spot mode calculates the amount of light in the center. When you capture a photo in conditions where there is a strong backlight behind a subject, the camera adjusts the exposure so as to shoot a subject correctly. For example, when you select the Multi mode in a strong backlight condition, the camera calculates that the overall amount of light is abundant, which results in a darker photo. The Spot mode can prevent this situation as it calculates the amount of light in a designated area. The subject is in bright color while the background is dark. The Spot mode is recommended for a situation like this where a huge difference in the exposure exists between a subject and a background. 92 Shooting Functions > Metering Measuring the exposure value of the focus area When this function is turned on, the camera automatically sets an optimal exposure by calculating the brightness of the focus area. This function is only available when you select Spot metering or Multi metering, and Selection AF. To set this function, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Link AE to AF Point ĺ an option. 93 Shooting Functions > Dynamic Range namic Range Shooting Functions This function automatically corrects the loss of bright detail that can occur due to shading differences in the photo. To set Dynamic Range options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Dynamic Range ĺ an option. Without Dynamic Range effect With Dynamic Range effect * Default Icon Description Off*: Do not use Dynamic Range. Smart Range+: Correct the loss of bright detail. HDR: Capture 3 photos with different exposures, and then combine them to create a single image automatically. • You cannot set an ISO option higher than ISO 3200. • This option cannot be set with drive options other than Single or Timer. Dynamic Range options cannot be set with the Bulb function. Dynamic Range 94 Shooting Functions > Smart Filter mart Filter Shooting Functions Smart Filter lets you apply special effects to your photos or videos. You can select various filter options to create special effects that are difficult to be achieved with normal lenses. To set Smart Filter options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺb ĺ Smart Filter ĺ an option. * Default Option Description Off* No effect Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong vignette effect of Lomo cameras. Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in miniature. Sketch Apply a pen sketch effect. Fish Eye Distort close objects to imitate the visual effect of a fisheye lens. Smart Filter options cannot be set with Picture Wizard options at the same time. Smart Filter 95 Shooting Functions > Exposure compensation xposure compensation Shooting Functions The camera automatically sets the exposure by measuring the levels of light from the photo’s composition and the position of a subject. If the exposure set by the camera is higher or lower than you expected, you can adjust the exposure value manually. The exposure value is adjustable in ±3 increments. The camera displays the exposure warning in red for each step beyond ±3 range. To adjust the exposure value, press [f], and then select EV. You can also press [I] to select the exposure value and rotate the navigation button to adjust it. You can check the exposure value by the position of the exposure level indicator. Exposure level indicator Increased exposure (brighter) Decreased exposure (darker) Exposure warning Standard exposure index -2 Original +2 Exposure compensation 96 Shooting Functions > Exposure lock xposure lock Shooting Functions When you cannot achieve an appropriate exposure because of a strong brightness contrast, lock the exposure and then capture a photo. To lock the exposure, adjust the photo’s composition on which you want to calculate the exposure, and then press the Custom button. (when the function of the Custom button is set to AEL) (p. 139) After locking the exposure, aim the lens where you desire, and then press [Shutter]. Exposure lock 97 Shooting Functions > Video functions ideo functions Shooting Functions The functions available for video are explained below. Movie size Set the movie size. To set movie size options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Movie Size ĺ an option. When Video Out is set to NTSC * Default Icon Size Recommended for * 1920X1080 (30 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV. 1280X720 (30 fps) (16:9) View on an HDTV. 640X480 (30 fps) (4:3) View on a TV. 320X240 (30 fps) (4:3) Post on a website using the wireless network (30 seconds maximum). When Video Out is set to PAL * Default Icon Size Recommended for * 1920X1080 (25 fps) (16:9) View on a Full HDTV. 1280X720 (25 fps) (16:9) View on an HDTV. 640X480 (25 fps) (4:3) View on a TV. 320X240 (25 fps) (4:3) Post on a website using the wireless network (30 seconds maximum). Video functions 98 Shooting Functions > Video functions Movie quality Set the Movie quality. To set movie quality options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Movie Quality ĺ an option. * Default Icon Extension Description MP4 (H.264) Normal: Record videos in normal quality. MP4 (H.264) HQ*: Record videos in high quality. Multi Motion Set the playing speed of a video. To set playing speed options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Multi Motion ĺ an option. * Default Icon Description x0.25: Record a video to view it at 1/4 normal speed during playback. (Available only with 640x480 or 320x240) x1*: Record a video to view it at normal speed during playback. x5: Record a video to view it at 5X normal speed during playback. x10: Record a video to view it at 10X normal speed during playback. x20: Record a video to view it at 20X normal speed during playback. • If you select an option other than x1, the sound recording function will not be supported. • The available options may differ depending on shooting conditions. 99 Shooting Functions > Video functions Voice Sometimes, a muted video is more appealing than the one with sound. Turn the voice off to record a muted video. To set voice options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Voice ĺ an option. Fader You can fade in or fade out a scene using the fader function on the camera without having to do it on a PC. Set the fade in option to gradually fade in at the start of the scene. Set the fade out option to gradually fade out the scene. Use the function appropriately and add dramatic effects on your videos. To set fader options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺgĺ Fader ĺ an option. * Default Icon Description Off*: Fader function not used. In: Scene gradually fades in. Out: Scene gradually fades out. In-Out: The fader function is applied at the start and end of the scene. When you use the fader function, it may take longer to save a file. Chapter 3 Playback/Editing Learn about how to play back and edit photos and videos. Refer to chapter 6 for editing files on a PC. 101 Playback/Editing Learn how to view photo and video thumbnails and how to protect or delete files. If you perform no operations for a while, information and icons on the screen disappear. When you operate the camera again, they will reappear. Viewing photos 1 Press [y]. • The most recent file you captured will be displayed. 2 Rotate the navigation button or press [C/F] to scroll through files. You may not be able to edit or play back files that were captured with other cameras, due to unsupported sizes or codecs. Use a computer or another device to edit or play back these files. Viewing image thumbnails In order to search for photos and videos you want, convert to the thumbnail view by pressing [I] in Playback mode. The thumbnail view displays multiple images at a time so that you can easily look through items you wish to find. You can also classify and display files by category, such as date or file type. 7X4 Thumbnail View In thumbnail view, press [f] to select the thumbnail view mode. You can also press [m] ĺz ĺ View ĺ an item to select the thumbnail view mode. Searching and managing files 102 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Viewing files by category 1 In the thumbnail view, press [m] ĺz ĺ Filter ĺ a category. * Default Option Description All* View files normally. Date View files by the date they were saved. File Type View files by the file type. 2 Select a list to open it. 3 Select a file to view it. Viewing files as a folder Continuous and burst shots appear as a folder. Selecting a folder will play back all photos automatically. Deleting a folder will delete all photos in the folder. 1 In Playback mode, rotate the navigation button or press [C/F] to move to a desired folder. • The camera will automatically play back photos in the folder. Single View 2 Press [o] to open the folder. 3 Rotate the navigation button or press [C/F] to move to another file. 4 Press [f] to return to Playback mode. 103 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Protecting files Protect your files from accidental deletion. 1 In Playback mode, scroll to a file. 2 Press [m] ĺz ĺ Protect ĺ On. • You cannot delete or rotate a protected file. • For photos that are saved as a folder, protecting a folder will protect all photos in the folder. Deleting files Delete files in Playback mode and secure more space on your memory card. Protected files are not deleted. Deleting a single file You can select a single file and delete it. 1 In Playback mode, select a file, and then press [n]. 2 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. 104 Playback/Editing > Searching and managing files Deleting multiple files You can select multiple files and delete them. 1 In Playback mode, press [m] ĺz ĺ Delete ĺ Multiple Delete. • Alternatively, in thumbnails view, press [n], and then select files to delete. 2 Select files you want to delete by rotating the navigation button or pressing [C/F], and then press [o]. • Press [o] again to cancel your selection. 3 Press [n]. 4 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. Deleting all files You can delete all files on the memory card at once. 1 In Playback mode, press [m]. 2 Select z ĺ Delete ĺ Delete All. 3 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. 105 Playback/Editing Enlarging a photo You can enlarge photos when viewing them in Playback mode. Press [o], and then rotate the navigation button to enlarge or reduce a photo. Press [D/I/C/F] to move the magnified area. You can also use the Trim function to extract the portion of the image displayed on the screen and save it as a new file. Magnified area Magnification (The maximum magnification may differ by resolution.) Back Crop To Do this Move magnified area Press [D/I/C/F]. Crop the enlarged image Press [o]. (saved as a new file) Return to the original image Press [m]. Viewing a slide show You can view photos in a slide show and apply various effects to the slide show. 1 In Playback mode, press [m]. 2 Select z ĺ Slide Show Options. 3 Select a slide show effect option. • Skip to step 4 to start a slide show with no effects. * Default Option Description Play Mode Set whether or not to repeat the slide show. (One Play*, Repeat) Interval • Set the interval between photos. (1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, 10 sec) • Intervals can only be set when the scene change effect is Off. Effect • Set a scene change effect between photos. • Select Off to cancel effects. Viewing photos 106 Playback/Editing > Viewing photos 4 Press [m]. 5 Select Start Slide Show. 6 View the slide show. • Press [o] to pause. • Press [o] again to resume. • Press [m] to stop the slide show and return to Playback mode. Auto rotating With Auto Rotate on, the camera automatically rotates photos you have captured vertically so they fit the screen horizontally. To set auto rotate options, In Playback mode, press [m] ĺz ĺ Auto Rotate ĺ an option. 107 Playback/Editing In Playback mode, you can play a video, capture an image from a video, or crop a video to save as another file. Stop Play To Description Rewind • Press [C]. (Each time you press the button while playing the video, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) • Rotate the navigation button counter-clockwise. (Each time you rotate the navigation button while playing the video, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) Pause/Play Press [o]. Fast forward • Press [F]. (Each time you press the button while playing the video, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) • Rotate the navigation button clockwise. (Each time you rotate the navigation button while playing the video, you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X.) Volume control Press [D/I]. Stop Press [m]. Trimming a video during playback 1 In Playback mode, scroll to a video, and then press [m]. 2 Select Trim Movie. 3 Press [o] to start playing the video. 4 Press [o] at the point where you want the trimming to begin. 5 Press [f]. 6 Press [o] to resume playing the video. 7 Press [o] at the point where you want the trimming to end. Playing videos 108 Playback/Editing > Playing videos 8 Press [f]. 9 Press [f] to trim a video. 10 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. • The original video should be at least 10 seconds long. • The camera will save the edited video as a new file and leave the original video intact. • The point where you want the trimming to begin can be selected 2 seconds after playback starts. Capturing an image during playback 1 While viewing a video, press [o] at the point where you want to capture an image. 2 Press [f]. • The resolution of the captured image will be the same as the original video. • The captured image is saved as a new file. 109 Playback/Editing Edited photos are saved as new files under different file names. Photos captured in some modes cannot be edited with the Image Edit function. To edit images, In Playback mode, scroll to a photo, and then press [m] ĺ z ĺ Edit Image ĺ an option. Some images may not be edited with the Edit Image function. In this case, use other image editing software. RAW files cannot be edited with the Edit Image function. In this case, use the supplied image editing software. The camera will save edited photos as new files. When you edit photos, the camera will automatically convert them to a lower resolution. Photos that you rotate or resize manually are not automatically converted to a lower resolution. You cannot edit photos while viewing files as a folder. Open the folder and select a photo to edit each photo. Rotating a photo 1 Select ĺ . 2 Select an option. Rotate : Right 90˚ Cancel Save 3 Press [o] to save. You can also rotate a photo in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting z ĺ Rotate ĺ a desired option. The camera will overwrite the original file. Editing photos 110 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Resizing photos Change the size of a photo and save it as a new file. 1 Select → . 2 Select an option. Resize : 3888 x 2592 Cancel Save 3 Press [o] to save. Available resize options differ depending on the original size of the photo. Adjusting your photos You can correct captured photos by adjusting the brightness, contrast, or color. 1 Select . 2 Select an adjusting option. • If you selected (Auto adjustment), the adjusted photo will be saved automatically. Icon Description Original (Reset to the original image) Auto adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation RGB adjustment Color Temperature Exposure 111 Playback/Editing > Editing photos 3 Rotate the navigation button or press [C/F] to adjust the option. 4 Press [o]. 5 Press [m]. 6 Press [f] to save. Retouching faces 1 Select ĺ . 2 Rotate the navigation button or press [C/F] to adjust the option. As the number increases, the skin tone becomes brighter and smoother. 3 Press [o] to save. 112 Playback/Editing > Editing photos Applying Smart Filter effects Apply special effects to your photos. 1 Select , and then select an option. Smart Filter : Vignetting Cancel Set Option Description Original No effect Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong vignette effect of Lomo cameras. Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in miniature. Soft Focus Hide facial imperfections or apply dreamy effects. Sketch Apply a pen sketch effect. Option Description Fish-eye Distort close objects to imitate the visual effect of a fisheye lens. Classic Apply a black and white effect. Retro Apply a sepia tone effect. Oil Painting Apply an oil painting effect. Cartoon Apply a cartoon effect. Ink Painting Apply ink sketching effect. Cross Filter Add lines that radiate outward from bright objects to imitate the visual effect of a cross filter. Zooming Shot Blur the edges of a photo to emphasize the subjects in the center. 2 Press [o]. 3 Press [f] to save. Chapter 4 Wireless network Learn how to connect to wireless local area networks (WLANs) and use functions. 114 Wireless network Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Learn to connect via an access point (AP) when you are in a range of a WLAN. You can also configure network settings. Connecting to a WLAN 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select , , or . 3 Follow the on-screen instructions until the Wi-Fi Setting screen appears. • The camera automatically searches for available AP devices. 4 Select an AP. Samsung1 Samsung2 Samsung3 Wi-Fi Setting Refresh Back Manual • Select Refresh to refresh the list of connectable APs. • Select Add wireless network to add an AP manually. The AP name must be in English to add the AP manually. Icon Description Ad hoc AP Secured AP WPS AP Signal strength • Press [F] to open network setting options. • When you select a secured AP, a pop-up window appears. Enter the required passwords to connect to the WLAN. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 117) • When you select an unsecured AP, the camera will connect to the WLAN. • If you select a WPS profile supported AP, select WPS PIN connection, and then enter a PIN on the AP device. You can also connect to a WPS profile supported AP by selecting WPS button connection on the camera, and then pushing the WPS button on the AP device. • If a pop-up message about data collection regulations appears, read and agree to it. 115 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Setting network options 1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press [F]. 2 Select each option, and then enter the required information. Option Description Network Password Enter the network password. IP Setting Set the IP address automatically or manually. Manually setting the IP address 1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press [F]. 2 Select IP Setting ĺ Manual. 3 Select each option, and then enter the required information. Option Description IP Enter the static IP address. Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask. Gateway Enter the gateway. DNS Server Enter the DNS address. 116 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Network connection tips • Some Wi-Fi features are not available if you do not insert a memory card. • The quality of the network connection will be determined by the AP. • The further the distance between your camera and the AP, the longer it will take to connect to the network. • If a nearby device is using the same radio frequency signal as your camera, it may interrupt your connection. • If your AP name is not in English, the camera may not be able to locate the device or the name may appear incorrectly. • For network settings or a password, contact your network administrator or network service provider. • Depending on the encryption type, the number of digits in the password may differ. • A WLAN connection may not be possible in all surroundings. • The camera may display a WLAN enabled printer on the AP List. You cannot connect to a network via a printer. • You cannot connect your camera to a network and a TV simultaneously. • If you cannot connect to a WLAN, try another AP from the available AP list. • Available network connections may differ by country. • The WLAN feature of your camera must comply with radio transmission laws in your region. To ensure compliance, use the WLAN feature only in the country where you purchased the camera. • The process for adjusting network settings may differ, depending on network conditions. • Do not access a network that you are not authorized to use. • Before you connect to a network, ensure your battery is fully charged. • Files that you transfer to another device may not be supported by the device. In this case, use a computer to play back the files. • If an AP requires you to enter log-in information, you will not be able to connect to it. 117 Wireless network > Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Entering text Learn how to enter text. Rotate the navigation button or press [D/I/C/F] to scroll to a key and press [o] to enter it. Backspace Done Back Icon Description Delete the last letter. Move the cursor. In ABC mode, change the case. Switch between Symbol mode and ABC mode. Enter a space. Done Save the displayed text. • Press [y] to move to Done directly. • The number of characters you can enter varies depending on the situation. • The screen may differ depending on the input mode. 118 Wireless network Using the NFC Feature (Tag & Go) Using NFC features in Playback mode (Photo Beam) In Playback mode, the camera transfers the current file to the smart phone automatically when you read a tag from an NFC-enabled device. • To transfer multiple files, select files from the thumbnail view, and then read a tag from an NFC-enabled device. Using NFC features in Wi-Fi mode Select MobileLink or Remote Viewfinder from the pop-up window that appears by reading a tag from an NFC-enabled device. (p. 121, 125) Place a smart phone's NFC antenna near the camera’s NFC tag to launch the feature for saving photos to a smart phone automatically or the feature for using a smart phone as a remote shutter. You can also transfer files to an NFC-enabled device in Playback mode. • This feature is supported by NFC-enabled smart phones running Android OS. It is recommended that you use the latest version. This feature is not available for iOS devices. • You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps or the Google Play Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. • For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART CAMERA App from www.samsung.com. • To read an NFC tag, place the NFC-enabled device near the camera’s NFC tag for more than 2 seconds. • You can set the size for transferred photos by pressing [m], and then selecting d ĺ MobileLink/NFC Image Size ĺ an option. • Do not modify the NFC tag in any way. Using NFC features in Shooting mode Launch AutoShare or Remote Viewfinder by reading a tag from an NFCenabled device. (p. 119, 125) Preset to launch the Wi-Fi function by reading a tag on an NFC-enabled device. (p. 139) 119 Wireless network Saving files to a smart phone automatically The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the AutoShare feature via a WLAN. When you capture a photo with your camera, the photo is saved to a smart phone automatically. • The AutoShare feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.) Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly. • You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. • For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART CAMERA App from www.samsung.com. • If you set this function, the setting is maintained even when you change the Shooting mode. • This feature may not be supported in some modes or may not be available with some shooting options. 1 In Shooting mode, select [m] ĺb ĺ AutoShare ĺ On. • If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. • To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the camera, select Security Settings. (p. 144) 2 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. • To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 29) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 5. 3 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. • The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. • If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the camera to the smart phone. 120 Wireless network > Saving files to a smart phone automatically 4 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. • If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. • An icon that shows the connection status ( ) will appear on the camera’s screen. 5 Capture a photo. • The captured photo is saved to the camera, and then transferred to the smart phone. If a memory card is not inserted or the memory is full, the captured photo is transferred to the smart phone without being saved to the camera. • If you recorded a video, it is saved only to the camera. • The image file captured while recording a video is not saved on the smart phone. • If the GPS feature is activated on the smart phone, the GPS information will be saved with the captured photo. 121 Wireless network The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the MobileLink feature via a WLAN. You can easily send photos or videos to your smart phone. • The MobileLink feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.) Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly. • You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. • For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART CAMERA App from www.samsung.com. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • You can view up to 1,000 recent files and send up to 1,000 files at a time. • When you send Full HD videos using MobileLink feature, you may not be able to play back files on some devices. • When using this feature on an iOS device, the device may lose its Wi-Fi connection. • You cannot send RAW files. • You can set the size for transferred photos by pressing [m], and then selecting d ĺ MobileLink/NFC Image Size ĺ an option. • You can also send files in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ MobileLink. • The screen turns off if you perform no operations on the camera for 30 seconds. 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 On the camera, select . • If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. • To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the camera, select Security Settings. (p. 144) 3 On the camera, select a sending option. • If you select Select Files from Smartphone, you can use your smart phone to view and share files stored on the camera. The screen turns off if you perform no operations on the smart phone for 30 seconds. • If you select Select Files from Camera, you can select files to send from the camera. 4 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. • To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 29) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 7. Sending photos or videos to a smart phone 122 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos to a smart phone 5 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. • The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. • If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the camera to the smart phone. 6 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. • If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. 7 On the smart phone or camera, select files to transfer from the camera. 8 On the smart phone, touch the copy button or on the camera, select Send. • The camera will send the files to the smart phone. 123 Wireless network Sending photos or videos to multiple smart phones The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the Group Share feature via a WLAN. You can easily send photos or videos to multiple smart phones. • The Group Share feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.) Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly. • You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. • For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART CAMERA App from www.samsung.com. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • Transferring files to multiple smart phones may take longer than transferring files to one device. • When you send Full HD videos using Group Share feature, you may not be able to play back files on some devices. • When using this feature on an iOS device, the device may lose its Wi-Fi connection. • You cannot send RAW files. • You can set the size for transferred photos by pressing [m], and then selecting d ĺ MobileLink/NFC Image Size ĺ an option. • You can also send files in Playback mode by pressing [m], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) ĺ Group Share. 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 On the camera, select . • If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. • To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the camera, select Security Settings. (p. 144) 3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. 124 Wireless network > Sending photos or videos to multiple smart phones 4 Select the smart phone from the list. • If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. • You can connect to up to 4 smart phones. • If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the camera to the smart phone. 5 Select Next. 6 On camera, select files to transfer from the camera. 7 On the camera, select Send. • The camera will send the files to the smart phone. • When you connect to multiple smart phones, the camera will send the files to all devices at the same time. 125 Wireless network The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the Remote Viewfinder feature via a WLAN. Use the smart phone as a remote shutter release with the Remote Viewfinder feature. The captured photo will display on the smart phone. • The Remote Viewfinder feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.) Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly. • You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. • For devices running Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, download Samsung SMART CAMERA App from www.samsung.com. • Continuously captured photos or videos will not display on the smart phone. 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 On the camera, select . • If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. • To require PIN verification when connecting the smart phone to the camera, select Security Settings. (p. 144) 3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. • To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 29) on the camera. Verify that the smart phone is connected to your camera, and then skip to step 6. 4 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. • The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. • If the Wi-Fi Privacy lock is enabled, enter the PIN displayed on the camera to the smart phone. Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release 126 Wireless network > Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release 5 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. • If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. 6 On the smart phone, select q to open the smart panel. 7 On the smart phone, set the shooting options. • While using this feature, some buttons are not available on your camera. • With the smart phone, you can operate the camera only by touching the screen. • Some shooting options are not supported. • Shooting options that you have set will remain on the camera after the connection with the smart phone has ended. 8 Touch to return to the shooting screen. 9 On the smart phone, touch and hold to focus, and then release it to capture the photo. • Touch to record a video and touch to stop a video. • If the GPS feature is activated on the smart phone, the GPS information will be saved with the captured photo. • When you use this feature, the ideal distance between the camera and the smart phone may vary, depending on your surroundings. • The smart phone must be within 7 m of the camera to use this feature. • It will take some time to capture the photo after you release on the smart phone. • If the file save option is set to Smartphone + Camera, only photos will be transferred to the smart phone. (Videos and RAW files will not be transferred.) • If you capture photos continuously when the file save option is set to Smartphone + Camera, photos will not be transferred to the smart phone. • The smart phone's screen will not mirror the camera's display when recording a video. • The Remote Viewfinder function will deactivate when: - there is an incoming call on the smart phone - either the camera or the smart phone turns off - device loses its connection to the WLAN - the Wi-Fi connection is poor or unstable - you perform no operations for approximately 3 minutes while connected - folder and file number are max values • The screen turns off if you perform no operations on the camera for 30 seconds. 127 Wireless network Using the Home Monitor+ 3 On the camera, select an AP from the list, and then position the camera. • Place the camera in a safe location where children or pets cannot reach it. • Point the camera lens at the subject. • We recommend you use a fully charged battery or connect the camera to a power outlet with the AC adapter. 4 Enter your Samsung account ID and password to log in. • For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 117) • If you have previously logged in to the service, you may be logged in automatically. 5 On the smart phone, turn on the Samsung Home Monitor+ application. Use the Home Monitor+ feature to connect the camera to a smart phone on which the Samsung Home Monitor+ is installed, and monitor a location. • The Home Monitor+ feature is supported by smart phones that run the Android OS or iOS. (Some features may not be supported by some models.) Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version. The Android OS must be 4.1 or higher. • You should install the Samsung Home Monitor+ application on your smart phone before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 On the camera, select . • If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. 128 Wireless network > Using the Home Monitor+ 6 Start monitoring on your smart phone. • During live video monitoring via the smart phone, video is not saved on the camera. • If the monitored location is dark, touch to turn on the AF-assist light. • If the camera is connected to the same wireless network as other devices, videos may not play smoothly. • Depending on network conditions, videos may delay or stop. 7 Touch to exit the Samsung Home Monitor+ application. • The smart phone may not activate the alarm when it detects sound depending on network conditions. • The Home Monitor+ feature is not a professional security device. It is recommended to use professional services for home security. • Do not connect more than two cameras using the Home Monitor+ feature to the same network. The Network may slow down. • You may incur additional charges when using the Samsung Home Monitor+ app on a 3G or LTE network. • The manufacturer is not responsible for any damages associated with the leaking or distribution of personal information, such as streaming videos, to other parties. • The user is responsible for managing the ID and password for the Home Monitor+ feature. • Use this feature indoors only. Using it in public spaces may slow down the network speed. The manufacturer is not responsible for any damages associated with the use of this feature in public spaces. • Do not use this feature for an extended period of more than a week. • Do not use this feature for illegal purposes. • A network delay or breakdown may occur depending on network conditions. • The screen turns off if you perform no operations on the camera for 30 seconds. 129 Wireless network Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos You can send photos or videos that you captured with the camera to a PC wirelessly. Installing the program for Auto Backup on your PC 1 Install i-Launcher on the PC. (p. 150) 2 Connect the camera to the PC with the USB cable. 3 When the Auto Backup program icon appears, click it. • The Auto Backup program is installed on the PC. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation. 4 Remove the USB cable. Before installing the program, ensure that the PC is connected to a network. Sending photos or videos to a PC 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . • If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 114) 3 Select a backup PC. 130 Wireless network > Using Auto Backup to send photos or videos 4 Select OK. • To cancel sending, select Cancel. • You cannot select individual files to backup. This function backs up only new files on the camera. • The backup's progress will be shown on the PC monitor. • When the transfer is completed, the camera will turn off automatically in approximately 30 seconds. Select Cancel to return to the previous screen and prevent the camera from turning off automatically. • To turn off your PC automatically after the transfer is complete, select Shut down PC after backup. • To change the backup PC, select Change PC. • When you connect the camera to the WLAN, select the AP that is connected to the PC. • The camera will search for available access points even if you are connecting to the same access point again. • If you turn off the camera or remove the battery while sending files, the file transfer will be interrupted. • While you are using this feature, the shutter control is disabled on your camera. • You can connect only one camera to the PC at a time for sending files. • The backup may be canceled due to network conditions. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • You must turn off Windows Firewall and any other firewalls before using this feature. • You can send up to 1,000 recent files. • On the PC software, the server name must be entered in the Latin alphabet and can contain no more than 48 characters. 131 Wireless network Using Samsung Link to view files You can view files on a Samsung Link device connected to the same AP. 1 Rotate the mode dial to B. 2 Select . • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 114) • You can set to allow only selected devices or all devices to connect by pressing [f], and then selecting DLNA Access Control on the screen. • A sharing file list is created. Wait until other devices can find your camera. 3 Connect the Samsung Link device to a network, and then turn on the Samsung Link feature. • Refer to your device's user manual for more information. 4 On the camera, allow the Samsung Link device to connect to your camera. 5 On the Samsung Link device, select a camera to connect to. 6 On the Samsung Link device, browse the shared photos or videos. • For information about searching for the camera and browsing the photos or videos on the Samsung Link device, refer to the device's user manual. • Videos may not play smoothly depending on the type of Samsung Link device or the network condition. AP ▲ The camera is connected to a TV that supports Samsung Link via WLAN. 132 Wireless network > Using Samsung Link to view files • You can share up to 1,000 recent files. • On a Samsung Link device, you can view only photos or videos captured with your camera. • The range of the wireless connection between your camera and a Samsung Link device may vary depending on the specifications of the AP. • If the camera is connected to 2 Samsung Link devices, playback may be slower. • Photos or videos will be shared in their original sizes. • You can use this feature only with devices that support Samsung Link. • Shared photos or videos will not be stored on the Samsung Link device, but they can be stored in the camera to meet the device's specifications. • Transferring photos or videos to the Samsung Link device may take some time depending on the network connection, the number of files to be shared, or the sizes of the files. • If you power off the camera abnormally while viewing photos or videos on a Samsung Link device (for example, by removing the battery), the device considers the camera to still be connected. • The order of photos or videos on the camera may be different than on the Samsung Link device. • Depending on the number of photos or videos you want to share, it may take some time to load your photos or videos and complete the initial set-up process. • While viewing photos or videos on the Samsung Link device, continuously using the device's remote or performing additional operations on the device may prevent this feature from working properly. • If you reorder or sort files on the camera while viewing them on a Samsung Link device, you must repeat the initial set-up process to update the list of files on the device. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • We recommend you use a network cable to connect your Samsung Link device to your AP. This will minimize any video ‘Stuttering’ you may experience when streaming content. • To view files on a Samsung Link device, enable multicast mode on your AP. Chapter 5 Camera settings menu Learn about the user settings and general settings menu. You can adjust the settings to better suit your needs and preferences. 134 Camera settings menu You can set the user environment with these settings. To set user options, In Shooting mode, press [m] ĺ d ĺ an option. Available items and the order of them may differ depending on shooting conditions. ISO Customizing ISO Step You can set the size for the ISO sensitivity by either 1/3 or 1 step. Auto ISO Range You can set the maximum ISO value under which each EV step is chosen when you set the ISO to Auto. Noise Reduction Use the Noise Reduction to reduce the visual noise in photos. * Default Option Description High ISO NR This function reduces noise that may occur when you set a high ISO sensitivity. (Off, High, Normal*, Low) Long Term NR This function reduces noise when you set the camera for a long exposure. (Off, On*) User settings 135 Camera settings menu > User settings Bracket Settings You can set up the options for each bracketing. * Default Option Description AE Bracket Settings Set the exposure interval. (-/+0.3 EV*, -/+0.7 EV, -/+1.0 EV, -/+1.3 EV, -/+1.7 EV, -/+2.0 EV, -/+2.3 EV, -/+2.7 EV, -/+3.0 EV) WB Bracket Settings Adjust the White Balance interval range of the 3 bracketed photos. (AB-/+3*, AB-/+2, AB-/+1, MG-/+3, MG-/+2, MG-/+1) For example, AB-/+3 adjusts the Amber value plus or minus three steps. MG-/+3 adjusts the Magenta value the same amount. P Wiz Bracket Settings Select 3 Picture Wizard settings the camera uses to capture the 3 bracketed photos. Depth Bracket Settings Set the depth interval. (-/+0.3, -/+0.7, -/+1.0*, -/+1.3, -/+1.7, -/+2.0, -/+2.3, -/+2.7, -/+3.0) DMF (Direct Manual Focus) You can adjust the focus manually by rotating the focus ring after achieving the focus by half-pressing [Shutter]. This feature may not be available with some lenses. 136 Camera settings menu > User settings Color Space The color space option allows you to select methods for representing colors. Digital imaging devices such as digital cameras, monitors, and printers have their own methods for representing colors, which are called color spaces. * Default Option Description sRGB* sRGB (Standard RGB) is an international specification to define the color space created by IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). It is widely used for creating colors on PC monitors and is also the standard color space for Exif. sRGB is recommended for regular images and images you intend to publish on the Internet. Adobe RGB Adobe RGB is used for commercial printing and has a larger color range than sRGB. Its wider range of colors helps you to easily edit photos on a computer. Note that individual programs are generally compatible with a limited number of color spaces. Adobe RGB sRGB When the color space is set to Adobe RGB, photos will be saved as "_SAMXXXX.JPG". 137 Camera settings menu > User settings Distortion Correct You can correct lens distortion that might occur from lenses. This feature is available with lenses that support it. iFn Customizing You can select options that can be adjusted when you press [i-Function] on an i-Function lens. Option Description Aperture Set to adjust the aperture value. Shutter Speed Set to adjust the shutter speed. EV Set to adjust the exposure value. ISO Set to adjust ISO sensitivity. White Balance Set to adjust the White Balance. 138 Camera settings menu > User settings User Display You can add or remove shooting information from the display. 1 2 3 No. Description 1 Icons Set to display icons on the right in Shooting mode. 2 Date & Time Set to display the date and time. 3 Histogram Set the histogram on the display on or off. About histogram A histogram is a graph that shows the brightness distribution of a photo. A histogram inclined to the left indicates a dark photo. A histogram inclined to the right indicates a bright photo. The height of the graph is related to color information. The graph gets higher if a specific color is more common. Insufficient exposure Balanced exposure Excessive exposure 139 Camera settings menu > User settings Key Mapping You can change the function assigned to the Custom button. * Default Button Function Custom Set the Custom button's function. • Optical Preview*: Execute the Depth of Field Preview function for the current aperture value. (p. 23) • One Touch WB (White Balance): Execute the Custom White Balance function. • One Touch RAW +: Save a file in the RAW+JPEG format. To save a file in JPEG format, press the button again. • Reset: Reset some settings. • AEL: Execute the auto exposure lock function. (Halfpressing [Shutter] executes the auto exposure lock function.) • AEL Hold: Keep executing the auto exposure lock function after shooting. (The exposure remains locked even after you capture a photo.) Live view NFC In Shooting mode, turn on the NFC feature on an NFC-enabled smart phone and place the smart phone's NFC antenna near the camera’s NFC tag to launch AutoShare or Remote Viewfinder. This feature is supported by NFC-enabled smart phones running Android OS. It is recommended that you use the latest version. This feature is not available for iOS devices. MobileLink/NFC Image Size Set the size of photos to transfer to a smart phone using the MobileLink or NFC functions. * Default Option Description Resize to 2M or lower If a photo's size is larger than 3M, it will be transferred after resizing it to 2M or lower. Original* The photo will be transferred in its original size. 140 Camera settings menu > User settings Auto Self-Shot Set to turn on the camera and enter Self shot mode automatically when you flip the display upward. In Self shot mode, the timer (3 seconds), face detection, and beauty face options are automatically activated. Lens Button Speed Settings Set the zoom speed for the Power Zoom lens' buttons at either fast, medium, or slow speed. At fast speed, zoom noise increases and can be recorded in videos. This function is available only when you attach the Power Zoom lens. Grid Line Select a guide to help you compose a scene. (Off*, 4 X 4, 3 X 3, Cross, Diagonal) AF Lamp When shooting in dark places, turn the AF lamp on in order to have a better auto focus. The Auto Focus functions more accurately in dark places when the AF lamp is on. 141 Camera settings menu * Default Item Description Display Adjust Adjust the display brightness, auto brightness setting, display color, or level gauge. Display Brightness: You can adjust the display brightness manually. Auto Brightness: Turn auto brightness on or off. (Off, On*) Display Color: You can adjust the display color manually. Horizontal Calibration: Calibrate the level gauge. If the level gauge is not level, position the camera on the level surface, and then follow the on-screen instructions. You cannot access the Horizontal Calibration option in Playback mode. You cannot calibrate the level gauge in portrait orientation. Auto Display Off Set the display off time. The display turns off if you do not use the camera for the time you set. (Off, 30 sec*, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min) Learn to configure your camera's settings. To set Setting options, In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] ĺ q ĺ an option. * Default Item Description Sound System Volume: Set the sound volume or turn all sound off entirely. (Off, Low, Medium*, High) Even if the system volume is turned off, the camera emits the sound while playing a video or a slide show. AF Sound: Set the sound the camera emits when you half-press the shutter button on or off. (Off, On*) Button Sound: Set the sound the camera emits when you press the buttons.(Off, On*) Quick View Set the Quick View time length-the amount of time the camera displays a photo immediately after you capture it. (Off, 1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, Hold) Setting 142 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description Date & Time Set date, time, date format, time zone and whether to imprint the date on photos. (Time Zone, Date/Time Set, Date Type, Time Type, Imprint) • The date appears on the lower right side of the photo. • When you print a photo, some printers may not print the date appropriately. Video Out Set the video signal output appropriate for your country when connecting the camera to an external video device such as a monitor or HDTV. • NTSC: USA, Canada, Japan, Korea, Taiwan, Mexico, etc. • PAL (Supports only PAL B, D, G, H, or I): Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, England, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Singapore, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, Norway, etc. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) When you connect the camera to an HDTV that supports Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), you can control the play function of the camera with the TV remote control. • Off: You cannot control the play function of camera with the TV remote control. • On*: You can control the play function of camera with the TV remote control. * Default Item Description Auto Power Off Set power shut off time. The camera shuts off if you do not use it for the time you set. (Off, 1 min*, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min) • The camera retains the power-off time setting even if you replace the battery. • Auto Power Off may not work if the camera is connected to a computer or a TV or playing a slide show or a movie. Help Guide Display • Mode Help Guide: Set to display help text about the selected mode when changing shooting modes. (Off, On*) • Function Help Guide: Set to display help text about menus and functions. (Off, On*) Press [n] to hide the help text. Language Set a language the camera shows on the display. 143 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description HDMI Output When you connect the camera to an HDTV with an HDMI cable, you can change the resolution of the image. • NTSC: Auto*, 1080i, 720p, 480p, 576p (activates only when PAL is selected) If the connected HDTV does not support the resolution you select, the camera sets the resolution one level lower. File Name Set the method of creating file names. • Standard*: SAM_XXXX.JPG (sRGB)/ _SAMXXXX.JPG (Adobe RGB) • Date: - sRGB files - MMDDXXXX.JPG. For example, for a photo captured on Jan. 01, the file name would be 0101XXXX. jpg. - Adobe RGB files - _MDDXXXX.JPG for the months Jan through Sept. For the months Oct through Dec, the month number is replaced by the letters A (Oct.), B (Nov.) and C (Dec.). For example, for a photo captured on Feb. 03, the file name would be _203XXXX.jpg. For a photo captured on Oct. 05, the file name would be _A05XXXX.jpg. * Default Item Description File Number Set the method of numbering files and folders. • Reset: After using the reset function, the next file name is started at 0001. • Series*: New file numbers continue the existing number sequence, even if you have installed a new memory card, formatted the card, or deleted all photos. • The first folder name is 100PHOTO, if you have selected the sRGB color space and Standard file naming, the first file name is SAM_0001. • File name numbers are increased by 1 from SAM_0001 to SAM_9999. • Folder numbers are increased by 1 from 100PHOTO to 999PHOTO. • The maximum number of files that can be saved in one folder is 9,999. • File numbers are assigned according to DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) specifications. • If you change a file name (for example, on a computer), the camera will not be able to play the file. Folder Type Set the type of folder. • Standard*: XXXPHOTO • Date: XXX_MMDD 144 Camera settings menu > Setting * Default Item Description Format Format the memory card. Formatting deletes all existing files including protected files. (No*, Yes) Errors can occur if you use a memory card formatted by another brand of camera, a memory card reader, or a computer. Please format memory cards in the camera before using them to capture photos. Device Information View the firmware version of the body and the lens, Mac address, and network certification number, or update the firmware. • Software Update: Update the firmware of the camera body or lens. (Body Firmware, Lens Firmware) • You can update the firmware by connecting the camera to the computer and starting i-Launcher. For more details, refer to page 167. • You cannot run a firmware upgrade without a fully charged battery. Recharge the battery fully before running a firmware upgrade. • If you update the firmware, user settings and values will be reset. (Date, time, language, and video out will not change.) • Do not turn the camera off while the update is in progress. * Default Item Description Wi-Fi Privacy lock Set to require a PIN when connecting the camera and a smart phone. • PIN: Enter a PIN before connecting. • None*: Allow a connection without requiring a PIN. • Connections will automatically be made without requiring a PIN when using the NFC function. • PINs are automatically generated and renewed only when you reset the camera settings or update the firmware. • If you have previously connected your camera to a smart phone via a PIN, they will connect automatically. Reset Reset the setup menu and shooting options to the factory defaults. (Date, time, language, and video output settings do not change.) (No*, Yes) Open Source License View open source licenses. Chapter 6 Connecting to external devices Make full use of the camera by connecting it to external devices such as a computer or HDTV. 146 Connecting to external devices Play back photos or videos by connecting your camera to an HDTV using an optional HDMI cable. 1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [m] ĺ q ĺ HDMI Output ĺ an option. (p. 143) 2 Turn off your camera and HDTV. 3 Connect your camera to your HDTV with the optional HDMI cable. 4 Turn on your HDTV, and then select the HDMI video source. 5 Turn on the camera. • The camera automatically enters into Playback mode when you connect it to an HDTV. 6 View photos or play videos using the camera buttons. • When using the HDMI cable, you can connect the camera to an HDTV using the Anynet+(CEC) method. • The Anynet+(CEC) functions allow you to control connected devices using the TV remote control. • If the HDTV supports Anynet+(CEC), the TV turns on automatically when used in conjunction with the camera. This feature may not be available on some HDTVs. • When connected to an HDTV by an HDMI cable, the camera cannot capture a photo or video. • When connected to an HDTV, some of the camera’s playback functions may not be available. • The length of time after which the camera and an HDTV are connected may vary depending on the memory card that you are using. As the main feature of a memory card is to increase the transfer speed, it is not necessarily true to say that a memory card with a faster transfer speed is also fast in using the HDMI function. Viewing files on an HDTV 147 Connecting to external devices Transfer files on a memory card to your computer by connecting the camera to the PC. Transferring files to your Windows OS computer Connecting the camera as a removable disk You can connect the camera to your computer as a removable disk. Open the removable disk and transfer files to your computer. 1 Turn off the camera. 2 Connect the camera to your computer with the USB cable. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not work properly. 3 Turn on the camera. The computer recognizes the camera automatically. 4 On your computer, select My Computer ĺ Removable Disk ĺ DCIM ĺ 100PHOTO or 101_0101. 5 Select the files you want, and then drag or save them to your computer. If the Folder Type is set to Date, the folder name appears as "XXX_MMDD". For example, if you capture a photo on January 1, the folder name will be "101_0101". Transferring files to your computer 148 Connecting to external devices > Transferring files to your computer Disconnecting the camera (for Windows 7) With Windows 8, the methods for disconnecting the camera are similar. 1 Ensure that no data is being transferred between the camera and the computer. If the status lamp on your camera is blinking, it means the data transfer is in progress. Please wait until the status lamp stops blinking. 2 Click on the tool bar at the bottom right of your computer screen. 3 Click the pop-up message. 4 Click the message box indicating safely removed. 5 Remove the USB cable. Transferring files to your Mac OS Mac OS 10.7 or later is supported. 1 Turn off the camera. 2 Connect your camera to a Macintosh computer with the USB cable. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not work properly. 149 Connecting to external devices > Transferring files to your computer 3 Turn on the camera. • The computer recognizes the camera automatically and displays a removable disk icon. 4 On your computer, open the removable disk. 5 Transfer photos or videos to the Mac OS computer. 150 Connecting to external devices You can view and edit files using the provided programs. You can also send the files to a PC wirelessly. Installing i-Launcher 1 Turn off the camera. 2 Connect the camera to your computer with the USB cable. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. 3 Turn on the camera. 4 Install i-Launcher on the PC. OS How to Install Windows When the pop-up window prompts you to install i-Launcher, select Yes. If the pop-up window does not appear, select My Computer ĺ i-Launcher ĺ iLinker.exe. If a pop-up window prompting you to run iLinker.exe appears, run it first. When you connect the camera to a computer with i-Launcher installed, the program will launch automatically. Mac Click Devices ĺ i-Launcher ĺ Mac ĺ iLinker. 5 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation. Before installing the program, ensure that the PC is connected to a network. Using programs on a PC 151 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC Using Samsung i-Launcher Icon Description You can download the firmware of your camera. Download the User Manual. Download this program to convert Samsung RAW files (SRW) to DNG files. i-Launcher provides a link for downloading the PC Auto Backup program when you connect the camera to a computer. You can send photos or videos that you captured with the camera to a PC wirelessly. If you cannot open Samsung RAW files (SRW) with Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, convert the file format to DNG with the Samsung DNG Converter or update the Adobe Photoshop Lightroom program. Using i-Launcher i-Launcher allows you update the firmware of the camera or the lens or provides a link to download the PC Auto Backup program. Requirements for Windows OS Item Requirements CPU Intel® Core™ 2 Duo 1.66 GHz or higher/ AMD Athlon X2 Dual-Core 2.2 GHz or higher RAM Minimum 512 MB RAM (1 GB or more recommended) OS* Windows 7, Windows 8 Hard disk capacity 250 MB or more (1 GB and above recommended) Others • CD-ROM drive • 1024X768 pixels, 16-bit color display compatible monitor (1280X1024 pixels, 32-bit color display recommended) • USB 2.0 port • nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT or higher/ ATI X1600 series or higher • Microsoft DirectX 9.0c or later * A 32-bit version of i-Launcher will be installed—even on 64-bit editions of Windows 7 and Windows 8. 152 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC • The requirements on the following page are recommendations only. i-Launcher may not work properly even when the computer meets the requirements, depending on the condition of your computer. • If your computer does not meet the requirements, videos may not play correctly. The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage that results from using unqualified computers such as a computer you assembled yourself. Requirements for Mac OS Item Requirements OS Mac OS 10.5 or higher (except PowerPC) RAM Minimum 256 MB RAM (512 MB or more recommended) Hard disk capacity Minimum 110 MB Others • CD-ROM drive • USB 2.0 port Opening Samsung i-Launcher On your computer, select Start ĺ All Programs ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher ĺ Samsung i-Launcher. Or, click Applications ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher on your Mac OS computer. Downloading the firmware From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click . For information about updating the firmware, refer to page 167. Downloading the PC Auto Backup program From the Samsung i-Launcher screen, click . For information about installing the PC Auto Backup program, refer to page 129. 153 Connecting to external devices > Using programs on a PC Installing Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 1 Insert Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM into your PC. 2 Select a language. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions. Using Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Photos captured by a camera are often transformed to JPEG formats and stored in the memory according to the settings of the camera at the time of shooting. RAW files are not transformed to JPEG formats and are stored in the memory without any changes. With Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, you can calibrate exposures, White Balances, tones, contrasts, and colors of photos. You can also edit JPEG or TIFF files as well as RAW files. For more information, refer to the program guide. • If you cannot open Samsung RAW files (SRW) with Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, convert the file format to DNG with the Samsung DNG Converter or update the Adobe Photoshop Lightroom program. • In Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, an image’s brightness, color and other effects may be displayed differently. This occurs because the original camera settings and options applied during image capture are removed, ready for it to be processed in Adobe Photoshop Lightroom. Chapter 7 Appendix Get information about error messages, camera maintenance, trouble shooting tips, specifications, and optional accessories. 155 Appendix When the following error messages appear, try these remedies. Error messages Suggested remedies Lens is locked The lens is locked. Rotate the lens counterclockwise until you hear a click. (p. 46) Card Error • Turn off the camera, and then turn it on again. • Remove the memory card and insert it again. • Format the memory card. Low Battery Insert a charged battery or recharge the battery. No Image File Capture photos or insert a memory card that contains photos. Device disconnected. Network connection disconnected while photos are being transferred to supported devices. Re-select a supported device. File Error Delete the damaged file or contact a service center. Error messages Suggested remedies Memory Full Delete unnecessary files or insert a new memory card. Transfer failed. • The camera has failed to send e-mails or files to other devices. Try sending again. • Check the network connection and try again. Unable to capture a photo because folder and file number on the memory card reached the maximum values. Reset the folder number? File names do not match the DCF standard. Follow the on-screen instructions to reset the folder number. Error 00 Turn off your camera and remount the lens. If the message still appears, contact a service center. Error 01/02 Turn off your camera, remove the battery, and insert again. If the message still appears, contact a service center. Error messages 156 Appendix Cleaning the camera Camera lens and display Use a brush to remove dust and wipe the lens gently with a soft cloth. If any dust remains, apply lens cleaning liquid to a piece of cleaning paper and wipe gently. Image sensor Depending on different shooting conditions, dust may appear in photos because the image sensor is exposed to the external environment. This problem is normal, and the exposure to dust occurs in everyday use of the camera. Do not insert the blower into the mounting opening of the lens. Camera body Wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. Never use benzene, thinners, or alcohol to clean the device. These solutions can damage the camera or cause it to malfunction. Maintaining the camera 157 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Using on beaches or shores • Protect your camera from sand and dirt when you use it on beaches or in other similar areas. • Your camera is not waterproof. Do not handle the battery, adapter, or memory card with wet hands. Operating the camera with wet hands may cause damage to your camera. Storing for extended period of time • When you store the camera for an extended period, place it in a sealed container with an absorbent material, such as silica gel. • Over time, unused batteries will discharge and must be recharged before use. • The present date and time can be initialized when the camera is turned on after the camera and battery have been separated for a prolonged period. Using or storing the camera Inappropriate places to use or store the camera • Avoid exposing the camera to very cold or very hot temperatures. • Avoid using your camera in areas with extremely high humidity, or where the humidity changes drastically. • Avoid exposing the camera to direct sunlight and storing it in hot, poorly ventilated areas, such as in a car during summer time. • Protect your camera and the display from impact, rough handling, and excessive vibration to avoid serious damage. • Avoid using or storing your camera in dusty, dirty, humid, or poorly ventilated areas to prevent damage to moving parts and internal components. • Do not use your camera near fuels, combustibles, or flammable chemicals. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the camera or its accessories. • Do not store the camera where there are mothballs. 158 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Using the camera with caution in humid environments When you transfer the camera from a cold environment to a warm one, condensation can form on the lens or internal components of the camera. In this situation, turn off the camera and wait for at least 1 hour. If condensation forms on the memory card, remove the memory card from the camera and wait until all moisture has evaporated before reinserting it. Other cautions • Do not swing your camera by the strap. This may cause injury to yourself or others or damage to your camera. • Do not paint your camera, as paint can clog moving parts and prevent proper operation. • Turn off the camera when not using it. • Your camera consists of delicate parts. Avoid impacts to the camera. • Protect the display from external force by keeping it in the case when not in use. Protect the camera from scratches by keeping it away from sand, sharp implements, or loose change. • Do not use the camera if the screen is cracked or broken. Broken glass or acrylic could cause injury to your hands and face. Take the camera to a Samsung service center to have it repaired. • Never place cameras, batteries, chargers, or accessories near, on, or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Heat can deform or overheat these devices, which can cause a fire or explosion. • Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight, as this may discolor the image sensor or cause it to malfunction. • Protect your lens from fingerprints and scratches. Clean your lens with a soft, clean, debris-free lens cloth. • The camera may turn off if impacted from the outside. This is to protect the memory card. Turn on the camera to use it again. • While you use the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your camera’s lifespan or performance. • When you use the camera in low temperatures, it may take some time to turn on, the color of the display may be changed temporarily, or afterimages may appear. These conditions are not malfunctions and they will correct themselves when the camera is returned to milder temperatures. • Paint or metal on the outside of the camera may cause allergies, itchy skin, eczema, or swelling for people with sensitive skin. If you experience any of these symptoms, stop using the camera immediately and consult a doctor. • Do not insert foreign objects into any of your camera’s compartments, slots, or access points. Damage due to improper use may not be covered by your warranty. • Do not allow unqualified personnel to service the camera or attempt to service the camera yourself. Any damage that results from unqualified service is not covered by your warranty. 159 Appendix > Maintaining the camera About memory card Supported memory card This product supports microSD, microSDHC, or microSDXC memory cards. Memory card adapter Memory card To read data with a PC or memory card reader, insert the memory card into a memory card adapter. 160 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Memory card capacity The memory capacity may differ depending on shooting scenes or shooting conditions. These capacities are based on a 2 GB SD card. Size Quality Super Fine Fine Normal RAW RAW + S.Fine RAW + Fine RAW + Normal Photo 20.0M (5472X3648) 162 294 403 57 26 32 35 10.1M (3888X2592) 292 492 638 - 32 37 39 5.9M (2976X1984) 440 688 846 - 36 40 41 2.0M (1728X1152) 841 1,095 1,217 - 41 42 43 Burst 495 753 911 - - - - 16.9M (5472X3080) 188 337 456 - 27 34 37 7.8M (3712X2088) 359 585 739 - 34 38 40 4.9M (2944X1656) 503 762 919 - 37 40 41 2.1M (1920X1080) 1,566 2,840 3,897 - 44 45 46 13.3M (3648X3648) 231 403 536 - 30 35 38 7.0M (2640X2640) 390 624 781 - 35 39 40 4.0M (2000X2000) 573 839 993 - 38 41 42 1.1M (1024X1024) 2,814 4,750 6,163 - 45 46 46 161 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Cautions when using memory cards • Avoid memory cards to very cold or very hot temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can cause memory cards to malfunction. • Insert a memory card in the correct direction. Inserting a memory card in the wrong direction may damage your camera and memory card. • Do not use memory cards that have been formatted by other cameras or by a computer. Reformat the memory card with your camera. • Turn off the camera when you insert or remove the memory card. • Do not remove the memory card or turn off your camera while the lamp is blinking, as this may damage your data. • When the lifespan of a memory card has expired, you cannot store any more photos on the card. Use a new memory card. • Do not bend, drop, or subject memory cards to heavy impact or pressure. • Avoid using or storing memory cards near strong magnetic fields. • Avoid using or keeping memory cards in areas with high temperature, high humidity, or corrosive substances. Size Quality HQ Normal Video 1920X1080 (30 fps) Approx. 17' 02" Approx. 19' 50" 1280X720 (30 fps) Approx. 23' 46" Approx. 29' 37" 640X480 (30 fps) Approx. 58' 24" Approx. 77' 06" For Sharing (30 fps) - Approx. 261' 21" • The figures above are measured without using the zoom function. • Available recording time may vary if you use the zoom. • Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time. • The maximum recording time is 20 minutes per file. • The maximum playback time of For Sharing videos is 30 seconds per file. 162 Appendix > Maintaining the camera About the battery Use only Samsung-approved batteries. Battery specifications Item Description Model* B740AE/B740AC/B740AU/B740AK Type Lithium-ion battery Cell capacity 2,330 mAh Voltage 3.8 V Charging time** (When the battery is completely discharged) Approx. 270 min. * The battery specifications or model may differ depending on your region. ** The figures above are based on when you use the provided USB cable and AC adapter. Charging the battery by connecting it to a computer may take longer. • Prevent memory cards from making contact with liquids, dirt, or foreign substances. If dirty, wipe the memory card clean with a soft cloth before you insert the memory card in your camera. • Do not allow liquids, dirt, or foreign substances to come in contact with memory cards or the memory card slot. Doing so may cause memory cards or the camera to malfunction. • When you carry a memory card, use a case to protect the card from electrostatic discharges. • Transfer important data to other media, such as a hard disk, CD, or DVD. • When you use the camera for an extended period, the memory card may become warm. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. • Use a memory card that meets the standard requirements. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. 163 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Personal injury or death can occur if the battery is handled carelessly or improperly. For your safety, follow these instructions for proper battery handling: • The battery can ignite or explode if not handled properly. If you notice any deformities, cracks, or other abnormalities in the battery, immediately discontinue use of the battery and contact your manufacturer. • Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommend battery chargers and charge the battery only by the method described in this user manual. • Do not place the battery near heating devices or expose to excessively warm environments, such as the inside of an enclosed car in the summertime. • Do not place the battery in a microwave oven. • Avoid storing or using the battery in hot, humid places, such as spas or shower enclosures. • Do not rest the device on flammable surfaces, such as bedding, carpets, or electric blankets for a prolonged period. • When the device is switched on, do not leave it in any confined space for a prolonged period. • Do not allow battery terminals to come in contact with metallic objects, such as necklaces, coins, keys, or watches. • Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement batteries. • Do not disassemble the battery or puncture it with any sharp object. • Avoid exposing the battery to high pressure or crushing forces. • Avoid exposing the battery to major impacts, such as dropping it from high places. • Do not expose the battery to temperatures of 60 °C (140 °F) or above. • Do not allow the battery to come in contact with moisture or liquids. • Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, or the like. Disposal guidelines • Dispose of the battery with care. • Do not dispose of the battery in a fire. • Disposal regulations may differ by country or region. Dispose of the battery in accordance with all local and federal regulations. Guidelines for charging the battery Charge the battery only by the method described in this user manual. The battery can ignite or explode if not charged properly. 164 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Battery life Shooting mode Average time / Number of photos Photos Approx. 185 min./Approx. 370 photos Videos Approx. 135 min. (Record videos at 1920X1080 resolution and 30 fps.) • The figures above are based on the CIPA test standards. Your results may differ depending on your actual usage. • Available shooting time differs depending on background, shooting interval, and use conditions. • Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time. Low battery message When the battery has fully discharged, the battery icon will turn red and the "Low Battery" message will appear. Notes about using the battery • Avoid exposing batteries to very cold or very hot temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can reduce the charging capacity of your batteries. • When you use the camera for an extended period, the area around the battery chamber may become warm. This does not affect the normal use of the camera. • Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock. • In temperatures below 0 °C/32 °F, battery capacity and battery life may decrease. • Battery capacity may decrease in low temperatures, but will return to normal in milder temperatures. • Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended period. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious damage to your camera. Storing the camera for extended periods with the battery installed causes the battery to discharge. You may not be able to recharge a fully discharged battery. • When you do not use the camera for an extended period (3 months or more), check the battery and recharge it regularly. If you let the battery discharge continually, its capacity and life may decrease, which can lead to a malfunction, fire, or explosion. 165 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Cautions about using the battery Protect batteries, chargers, and memory cards from damage. Prevent batteries from making contact with metal objects, as this can create a connection between the + and – terminals of your battery and lead to temporary or permanent battery damage and may cause a fire or electric shock. Notes about charging the battery • If the status lamp is off, ensure that the battery is inserted correctly. • If the camera is on while charging, the battery may not fully charge. Turn off the camera before charging the battery. • Do not use your camera when you are charging the battery. This may cause a fire or electric shock. • Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock. • Let the battery charge for at least 10 minutes before turning on the camera. • If you connect the camera to an external power source when the battery is depleted, using high energy-consuming functions will cause the camera to turn off. To use the camera normally, recharge the battery. • If you reconnect the power cable when the battery is fully charged, the status lamp turns on for approximately 30 minutes. • Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Charge the battery fully before using the camera. • If the status lamp blinks in red, reconnect the cable, or remove the battery and insert it again. • If you charge the battery when the cable is overheated or the temperature is too high, the status lamp may blink in red. Charging will start when the battery cools down. • Overcharging batteries may shorten battery life. After charging is finished, disconnect the cable from your camera. • Do not bend or place heavy objects on the AC cable. Doing so may damage the cable. 166 Appendix > Maintaining the camera Notes about charging with a computer connected • Use only the provided USB cable. • The battery may not charge when: - you use a USB hub - other USB devices are connected to your computer - you connect the cable to the port on the front side of your computer - the USB port of your computer does not support the power output standard (5 V, 500 mA) Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care • Never dispose of batteries in a fire. Follow all local regulations when you dispose of used batteries. • Never place batteries or cameras on or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Batteries may explode when they are overheated. 167 Appendix Updating the firmware Connect the camera to the computer and update the firmware of the camera of the lens. You cannot run a firmware upgrade without a fully charged battery. Recharge the battery fully before running a firmware upgrade. If you update the firmware, user settings and values will be reset. (Date, time, language, and video out will not change.) Do not turn the camera off while the update is in progress. 1 Turn off the camera. 2 Connect your camera to the computer with the USB cable. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. If you try to plug the USB cable into the HDMI port, the camera may not work properly. 3 Turn on the camera. 4 On the computer, select i-Launcher ĺ . 5 Follow the on-screen instructions to download the firmware to the camera. You can download the firmware of the camera or the lens. 6 Turn off the camera when the download completes. 7 Remove the USB cable. 8 Turn on the camera. 9 Press [m] ĺ q ĺ Device Information ĺ Software Update ĺ Body Firmware or Lens Firmware. 10 Select Yes from a pop-up window on the camera to update the firmware. 168 Appendix Before contacting a service center If you are having trouble with your device, try these troubleshooting solutions before contacting a service professional. When you leave your camera at a service center, be sure to also leave the other components that may have contributed to the malfunction, such as the memory card and battery. Situation Suggested remedies Cannot turn on the camera • Ensure that the battery is inserted. • Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly. • Charge the battery. The power turns off suddenly • Charge the battery. • Your camera may be in Auto power off mode or the display turns off automatically. (p. 142) • The camera may be turned off automatically to prevent the memory card from being damaged due to excessive heat. Turn on your camera again. The camera is losing battery power quickly • The battery may lose power more quickly in low temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F). Keep the battery warm by putting it into your pocket. • Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Recharge if needed. • Batteries are consumable parts that must be replaced over time. Get a new battery if the battery life is diminishing quickly. Situation Suggested remedies Cannot capture photos • There is no space on the memory card. Delete unnecessary files or insert a new card. • Format the memory card. • The memory card is defective. Get a new memory card. • Ensure that the camera is switched on. • Charge the battery. • Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly. The camera freezes Remove the battery and insert it again. The camera heats up While using the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your camera’s lifespan or performance. The flash fires unexpectedly The flash may fire due to static electricity. The camera is not malfunctioning. The flash does not work • The flash option may be set to Off. (p. 88) • You cannot use the flash in some modes. The date and time are incorrect Set the date and time under the q menu. (p. 142) The display or buttons do not work Remove the battery and insert it again. 169 Appendix > Before contacting a service center Situation Suggested remedies The memory card has an error • Turn off the camera, and then turn it on again. • Remove the memory card, and then insert it again. • Format the memory card. See "Cautions when using memory cards" for more details. (p. 161) Your TV or computer cannot display photos and videos that are stored on a microSDXC memory card microSDXC memory cards use the exFAT file system. Ensure that the external device is compatible with the exFAT file system before connecting the camera to the device. Your computer does not recognize a microSDXC memory card microSDXC memory cards use the exFAT file system. To use microSDXC memory cards on a Windows XP computer, download and update the exFAT file system driver from the Microsoft website. Cannot display files If you change the name of a file, your camera may not play the file (the name of the file should meet the DCF standard). If you encounter this situation, display files on your computer. Situation Suggested remedies The photo is blurry • Ensure that the focus option you set is suitable for the kind of shot you are capturing. • Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. • Ensure that the lens is clean. If not, clean the lens. (p. 156) The colors in the photo do not match the actual scene An incorrect White Balance can create unrealistic color. Select the proper White Balance option to suit the light source. (p. 70) The photo is too bright or too dark Your photo is overexposed or underexposed. • Adjust the aperture value or the shutter speed. • Adjust the ISO sensitivity. (p. 69) • Turn the flash off or on. (p. 88) • Adjust the exposure value. (p. 95) Photos are distorted This camera can have minute distortion when using a wide-angle lens that enables shooting with a wide angle of view. This is normal, and does not cause malfunction. Horizontal lines appear on the photo This may occur when the subject is exposed to a fluorescent or mercury-vapor light source. Select a slow shutter speed. Playback screen does not appear on the connected external device • Ensure that HDMI cable is properly connected to the external monitor. • Ensure that the memory card is properly recorded. 170 Appendix > Before contacting a service center Situation Suggested remedies Your computer does not recognize your camera • Ensure that the USB cable is connected correctly. • Ensure that the camera is switched on. • Ensure that you are using a supported operating system. Your computer disconnects the camera while transferring files The file transfer may be interrupted by static electricity. Disconnect the USB cable and connect it again. i-Launcher is not functioning properly • End i-Launcher and restart the program. • Depending on your computer's specifications and environment, the program may not launch automatically. In this case, click Start ĺ All Programs ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher ĺ Samsung i-Launcher on your Windows computer. (For Windows 8, open Start screen, and then select All apps ĺ Samsung i-Launcher.) Or, click Applications ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher on your Mac OS computer. Situation Suggested remedies Auto Focus does not work • Subject is not in focus. When the subject is outside the AF area, shoot by moving the subject inside the AF area and half-pressing [Shutter]. • Subject is too close. Step back from the subject and shoot. • The focus mode is set to MF. Switch the mode to AF. AEL feature does not work AEL feature does not work in t, M, s, and R modes. Select another mode to use this feature. Lens does not work • Ensure that the lens is properly mounted. • Remove the lens from the camera and remount it. External flash does not work Ensure that the external flash is properly mounted on the external flash port. The date & time settings screen appears when you power on the camera • Set the date and time again. • This screen appears when the camera’s internal power source is completely discharged. Insert a fully charged battery and wait at least 72 hours in power off status for the internal power source to be recharged. 171 Appendix Camera specifications Image Sensor Type CMOS Sensor size 23.5 X 15.7 mm Effective pixels Approx. 20.3 mega-pixels Total pixels Approx. 21.6 mega-pixels Color filter RGB primary color filter Lens Mount Type Samsung NX Mount Available lens Samsung NX Lenses (3D lens not supported) Image Stabilization Type Lens shift (depends on lens) Mode Off/Mode 1/Mode 2 Distortion Correct Off/On (depends on lens) i-Function Supported (Aperture value, Shutter speed, EV, ISO, White Balance) Display Type TFT LCD Size 3.0" (Approx. 75.2 mm) Resolution HVGA (320X480) 460.8 k dots Field of view Approx. 100 % Angle Flip up: 180° User display Grid Line, Icons, Histogram, Level gauge Focusing Type Contrast AF Focusing point • Selection: 1 point (Free selection) • Multi: Normal 21 points, Close up 35 points • Face detection: Max. 10 faces • Object tracking AF Mode Single AF, Continuous AF, Manual Focus AF Assist Lamp Yes 172 Appendix > Camera specifications Shutter Type Electronic front curtain shutter, Focal plane shutter Speed • Auto: 1/4,000–1/4 sec. • Manual: 1/4,000–30 sec. (1/3 EV Step) • Bulb (time limit: 4 min.) Exposure Metering system TTL 221 (17X13) Block segment Metering: Multi, Center-weighted, Spot Metering range: EV 0-18 (ISO 100 · 30 mm, F2) Compensation ±3 EV (1/3 EV Step) AE lock Custom button ISO equivalent Auto, 100-25600 (1 or 1/3 EV Step) Drive Mode Mode Single, Continuous, Burst (5M only), Timer, Bracket (Auto Exposure, White Balance, Picture Wizard, Depth) Continuous shooting 5 fps * Maximum shooting speed is 5 frames per second. It will slow down after approx. JPEG 13 shots, RAW 5 shots. (May vary depending on the spec of memory card.) Bracket shooting Auto exposure bracketing (±3 EV), White Balance bracketing, Picture Wizard bracketing, Depth bracketing (Program and Aperture Priority mode only) Self-timer 2–30 sec. (1 second interval) Shutter release Supported (via smart phone) Flash Type External flash (optional) Mode Smart Flash, Auto, Auto Red-eye, Fill in, Fill-in Red, 1st Curtain, 2nd Curtain, Off Sync speed Less than 1/180 sec. Flash EV -2–+2 EV (0.5 EV Step) External flash Optional Samsung external flashes Sync terminal Hot-shoe White Balance Mode Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent White, Fluorescent NW, Fluorescent Daylight, Tungsten, Flash WB, Custom Set, Color Temperature (Manual) Micro adjustment Amber/Blue/Green/Magenta 7 steps respectively 173 Appendix > Camera specifications Dynamic Range Off/Smart Range+/HDR Picture Wizard Mode Standard, Vivid, Portrait, Landscape, Forest, Retro, Cool, Calm, Classic, Custom1, Custom2, Custom3 Parameter Color, Saturation, Sharpness, Contrast Shooting Mode Smart Auto, Smart, Program, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, Manual, Panorama Smart mode Beauty Face, Best Face, Continuous Shot, Kids Shot, Landscape, Macro, Food, Parties and Indoors, Action Freeze, Rich Tones, Waterfall, Silhouette, Sunset, Night, Fireworks, Light Trace Smart filter Vignetting, Miniature, Sketch, Fish Eye Size • JPEG (3:2): 20.0M (5472X3648), 10.1M (3888X2592), 5.9M (2976X1984), 5.0M (2736X1824) (Burst mode only), 2.0M (1728X1152) • JPEG (16:9): 16.9M (5472X3080), 7.8M (3712X2088), 4.9M (2944X1656), 2.1M (1920X1080) • JPEG (1:1): 13.3M (3648X3648), 7.0M (2640X2640), 4.0M (2000X2000), 1.1M (1024X1024) • RAW: 20.0M (5472X3648) Quality Super Fine, Fine, Normal, RAW, RAW + S.Fine, RAW + Fine, RAW + Normal RAW standard SRW (ver.3.0.0) Color space sRGB, Adobe RGB Video Type MP4 (H.264) Format Movie: H.264, Sound: AAC Movie AE mode Program, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, Manual Movie clip Audio on/off (Shooting time: Max. 20') Smart filter Vignetting, Miniature, Sketch, Fish Eye 174 Appendix > Camera specifications Size 1920X1080, 1280X720, 640X480, 320X240 (For Sharing) Frame rate 30 fps (NTSC), 25 fps (PAL) Multi Motion x0.25 (640X480, 320X240 only), x1, x5, x10, x20 Quality HQ, Normal Sound Stereo Edit Still image capture, Time trimming Playback Type Single image, Thumbnails (15/28), Slide show, Movie Edit Smart Filter, Resize, Rotate, Face Retouch, Brightness, Contrast, Auto adjustment, Saturation, RGB adjustment, Color Temperature, Exposure Smart filter Vignetting, Miniature, Soft Focus, Sketch, Fish-eye, Classic, Retro, Oil Painting, Cartoon, Ink Painting, Cross Filter, Zooming Shot Storage Media External memory (optional): microSD card (2 GB guaranteed), microSDHC card (up to 32 GB guaranteed), microSDXC card (up to 64 GB guaranteed, UHS-1 Supported) - Class 6 and above recommended File format RAW (SRW (ver.3.0.0)), JPEG (EXIF 2.3), DCF Wireless network Type IEEE 802.11b/g/n Function AutoShare, Remote Viewfinder, MobileLink, Photo Beam, Auto Backup, Samsung Link, Home Monitor+, Group Share NFC Yes Interface Digital output USB 2.0 (micro USB jack) Video output NTSC, PAL (selectable) HDMI DC power input DC 5.0 V, 0.55 A via micro USB 175 Appendix > Camera specifications Power Source Type Rechargeable battery: B740AE/B740AC/B740AU/ B740AK (2,330 mAh, 3.8 V) * The battery specifications or model may differ depending on your region. Dimensions (W X H X D) 117.4 X 65.9 X 39.0 mm Weight 230 g (without battery and memory card) Operating Temperature 0–40 °C Operating Humidity 5–85 % Software i-Launcher, Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 5, Samsung DNG Converter * Specifications may change without notice to improve performance. * Other brands and products names are trademarks of respective owners. 176 Appendix Glossary AP (Access Point) An access point is a device that allows wireless devices to connect to a wired network. Ad-Hoc network An ad-hoc network is a temporary connection for sharing files or an internet connection and between computers and devices. AdobeRGB Adobe RGB is used for commercial printing and has a larger color range than sRGB. Its wider range of colors helps you to easily edit photos on a computer. AEB (Auto Exposure Bracket) This feature automatically captures several images at different exposures to help you capture a properly-exposed image. AEL (Auto Exposure Lock) These features help you lock the exposure on which you want to calculate the exposure. AF (Auto Focus) A system that automatically focuses the camera lens on the subject. Your camera uses the contrast to focus automatically. AMOLED (Active-matrix organic light-emitting diode)/ LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) AMOLED is a visual display that is very thin and light, as it does not need backlighting. LCD is a visual display commonly used in consumer electronics. This display needs a separate backlight, such as CCFL or LED, to reproduce colors. Aperture The aperture controls the amount of light that reaches the camera’s sensor. 177 Appendix > Glossary Composition Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually, abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition. DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) A specification to define a file format and file system for digital cameras created by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA). Depth of field The distance between the nearest and farthest points that can be acceptably focused in a photograph. Depth of field varies with lens aperture, focal length, and distance from the camera to the subject. Selecting a smaller aperture, for example, will increase the depth of field and blur the background of a composition. Camera shake (Blur) If the camera is moved while the shutter is open, the entire image may appear blurred. This occurs more often when the shutter speed is slow. Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, or using a faster shutter speed. Alternatively, use a tripod or the OIS function to stabilize the camera. Color space The range of colors that the camera can see. Color temperature Color Temperature is a measurement in degrees Kelvin (K) that indicates the hue of a specific type of light source. As the color temperature increases, the color of the light source has a more bluish quality. As the color temperature decreases, the color of the light source has a more reddish quality. At 5,500 degrees Kelvin, the color of the light source is similar to the sun at midday. 178 Appendix > Glossary Flash A speed light that helps to create adequate exposure in low-light conditions. Focal length The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point (in millimeters). Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject is magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view. Histogram A graphical representation of the brightness of an image. The horizontal axis represents the brightness and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels. High points at the left (too dark) and right (too bright) on the histogram indicate a photo that is improperly exposed. H.264/MPEG-4 A high-compression video format established by international standard organizations ISO-IEC and ITU-T. This codec is capable of providing good video quality at low bit rates developed by the Joint Video Team (JVT). EV (Exposure Value) All the combinations of the camera’s shutter speed and lens aperture that result in the same exposure. EV Compensation This feature allows you to quickly adjust the exposure value measured by the camera, in limited increments, to improve the exposure of your photos. Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format) A specification to define an image file format for digital cameras created by the Japan Electronic Industries Development Association (JEIDA). Exposure The amount of light allowed to reach the camera’s sensor. Exposure is controlled by a combination of the shutter speed, the aperture value, and ISO sensitivity. 179 Appendix > Glossary Metering The metering refers to the way in which the camera measures the quantity of light to set the exposure. MF (Manual Focus) A system that manually focuses the camera lens on the subject. You can use the focus ring to focus on a subject. MJPEG (Motion JPEG) A video format which is compressed as a JPEG image. Image sensor The physical part of a digital camera that contains a photosite for each pixel in the image. Each photosite records the brightness of the light that strikes it during an exposure. Common sensor types are CCD (Chargecoupled Device) and CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor). IP (Internet protocol) address An IP address is a unique number that is assigned to every device that is connected to the internet. ISO sensitivity The sensitivity of the camera to light, based on the equivalent film speed used in a film camera. At higher ISO sensitivity settings, the camera uses a higher shutter speed, which can reduce blur caused by camera shake and low light. However, images with high sensitivity are more susceptible to noise. JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) A lossy method of compression for digital images. JPEG images are compressed to reduce their overall file size with minimal deterioration of the image resolution. 180 Appendix > Glossary PAL (Phase Alternate Line) A video color encoding standard used in numerous countries throughout Africa, Asia, Europe, and the Middle East. Quality An expression of the rate of compression used in a digital image. Higher quality images have a lower rate of compression, which usually results in a larger file size. RAW (CCD raw data) The original, unprocessed data, collected directly from the camera’s image sensor. White Balance, contrast, saturation, sharpness, and other data can be manipulated with editing software before the image is compressed into a standard file format. Resolution The number of pixels present in a digital image. High resolution images contain more pixels and typically show more detail than low resolution images. Noise Misinterpreted pixels in a digital image that may appear as misplaced or random, bright pixels. Noise usually occurs when photos are shot with a high sensitivity or when a sensitivity is automatically set in a dark place. NFC (Near Field Communication) NFC is a set of standards for radio communication at very close proximity. You can use NFC-enabled devices to activate features or exchange data with other devices. NTSC (National Television System Committee) A video color encoding standard used most commonly in Japan, North America, the Philippines, South America, South Korea, and Taiwan. Optical zoom This is a general zoom which can enlarge images with a lens and does not deteriorate quality of images. 181 Appendix > Glossary Shutter speed Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the shutter, and it is an important factor in the brightness of a photo, as it controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture before it reaches the image sensor. A fast shutter speed allows less time to let light in and the photo becomes darker and more easily freezes subjects in motion. sRGB (Standard RGB) International standard of color space established by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). This is defined from color space for PC monitors and is also used as the standard color space for Exif. Vignetting A reduction of an image’s brightness or saturation at the periphery (outer edges) compared to the center of the image. Vignetting can draw interest to subjects positioned in the center of an image. White Balance (Color balance) An adjustment of the intensities of colors (typically the primary colors red, green, and blue), in an image. The goal of adjusting the White Balance, or color balance, is to correctly render the colors in an image. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi is a technology that allows electronic devices to exchange data wirelessly over a network. WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) WPS is a technology that secures wireless home networks. 182 Appendix Optional accessories You can purchase the following optional items: Lens, External flash, Rechargeable battery, Battery charger, Camera bag, Camera case, Memory card, Filter, USB cable, HDMI cable, Strap • To locate the type, image and availability of accessories, visit the Samsung website. • Before purchasing accessories, make sure they are compatible with your camera. GPS10 and EM10 are not compatible with this camera. • Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Samsung is not responsible for damage caused by using another manufacturer’s accessories. 183 Appendix A Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 153 Aperture 15, 19 Auto Backup 129 Auto focus 73 B Battery Caution 162 Charging 34 Insert 33 Best Face mode 61 Bracketing 85 C Camera Connecting as removable disk 147 Connecting to PC 147 Disconnecting (Windows) 148 Layout 29 Camera specifications 171 Charging 34 Color space 136 D Date & Time 142 Depth of Field (DOF) 16, 21 Display brightness 141 Display type 44 Drive 83 E Enlarging 105 Exposure Value (EV) 15, 95 F Fader 99 Files Deleting 103 Photo type 68 Protecting 103 Video type 98 Flash Bounce photography 26 Flash options 88 Guide number 26 Intensity 89 F-number 15 Focal length 20 H Home Monitor+ 127 I Icons Playback mode 43 Shooting mode 41 i-Launcher 151 Image adjustment Adjusting photos 110 Retouching faces 111 ISO sensitivity 69 L Lenses Layout 45 Locking 46 Markings 48 Unlocking 46 M Maintenance 156 Memory card Caution 159 Insert 33 Metering 90 Mobile connection 31 MobileLink 121 Index 184 Appendix > Index N NFC (Tag & Go) 118 O Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) 82 Optional accessories Connect the flash 50 Flash layout 49 P Panorama mode 62 Photos Editing 109 Enlarging 105 Shooting options 67 Viewing on camera 101 Picture Wizard 72 Posture 13 Power save mode 142 R Red-eye effect 89 Remote Viewfinder 125 Resolution Playback mode 110 Shooting mode (Movie) 97 Shooting mode (Photo) 67 Retouching faces 111 Rotating 109 Rule of thirds 23 S Samsung Link 131 Service center 168 Settings 141 Shooting modes Aperture Priority 56 Auto 52 Manual 58 Program 54 Recording 63 Shutter Priority 57 Smart 60 Shutter speed 17, 19 Slide show 105 Smart filter Playback mode 112 Shooting mode 94 Smart panel 38 T Thumbnails 101 Timer 85 Tracking AF 77 Transferring files Mac 148 Windows 147 TV 146 U Unpacking 28 V Video Out 142 Videos Capturing 108 Options 97 Recording 63 Viewing 107 W White balance 70 Wireless network 114 Please refer to the warranty that came with your product or visit our website www.samsung.com for after-sales service or inquiries. Mode d’emploi FRE Ce mode d’emploi propose des instructions détaillées pour l’utilisation de l’appareil photo. Veuille le lire attentivement. 1 Informations sur les droits d’auteur • Les caractéristiques de l’appareil photo ou le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis, suite à l’évolution des fonctions de l’appareil photo. • La distribution ou la réutilisation du contenu de ce mode d’emploi, même partielle, sans autorisation préalable, est interdite. • Nous vous recommandons d’utiliser votre appareil photo dans le pays où vous l’avez acheté. • Utilisez l’appareil photo de manière responsable et veillez à respecter toutes les législations et règlementations en vigueur. PlanetFirst représente l’engagement de Samsung Electronics à l’égard du développement durable et de la responsabilité sociale, qui se traduit par des décisions et des activités commerciales sous une optique écologique. • Microsoft Windows et le logo Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation. • Mac et Apple App Store sont des marques déposées d’Apple Corporation. • Google Play Store est une marque déposée de Google, Inc. • Adobe, le logo Adobe, Photoshop et Lightroom sont des marques déposées ou des marques d’Adobe Systems Incorporated aux Etats-Unis et / ou dans d’autres pays. • microSD™, microSDHC™ et microSDXC™ sont des marques déposées de la SD Association. • HDMI, le logo HDMI et l’expression « High Definition Multimedia Interface » sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées de HDMI Licensing LLC. • Wi-Fi®, le logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. • Les marques commerciales mentionnées dans ce mode d’emploi appartiennent à leurs propriétaires respectifs. 2 Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité Tachez de ne pas éblouir les sujets photographiés. N’utilisez pas le flash à proximité (à moins d’1 mètre) de personnes ou d’animaux. L’utilisation du flash trop près des yeux du sujet peut provoquer des lésions temporaires ou permanentes. Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo à la portée d’enfants en bas âge ou d’animaux domestiques. Tenez l’appareil photo, ses pièces et ses accessoires, hors de portée des enfants en bas âge et des animaux. L’ingestion de petites pièces peut provoquer l’étouffement ou des blessures graves. Les parties détachables et les accessoires représentent également un danger. Evitez toute exposition prolongée de l’appareil photo à la lumière directe du soleil ou à des températures élevées. Une exposition prolongée à la lumière directe du soleil ou à des températures très élevées peut endommager de manière permanente les composants internes de l’appareil photo. Evitez de couvrir l’appareil photo ou le chargeur avec des couvertures ou des vêtements. L’appareil photo risque de surchauffer, de se déformer ou de prendre feu. Ne manipulez pas le cordon d’alimentation ou le chargeur lors d’un orage. Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique. Respectez toujours les consignes et conseils d’utilisation suivants afin de prévenir toute situation dangereuse et de garantir un fonctionnement optimal de l’appareil photo. Attention—situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser d’autres personnes Ne démontez pas ou n’essayez pas de réparer vous-même l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez endommager l’appareil photo et vous exposer à un risque de choc électrique. N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de gaz ou de liquides inflammables ou explosifs. Un départ d’incendie ou une explosion risque de se produire. N’introduisez pas de matériaux inflammables dans l’appareil photo ou ne stockez pas de tels matériaux à proximité de l’appareil photo. Vous risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo avec les mains mouillées. Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique. 3 Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité Si du liquide ou des corps étrangers pénètrent dans l’appareil photo, déconnectez toutes les sources d’alimentation comme la batterie ou le chargeur, puis contactez le centre de service après-vente de Samsung. Respectez toutes les réglementations limitant l’utilisation des appareils photo dans certaines zones. • Evitez toute interférence avec d’autres appareils électroniques. • Eteignez l’appareil photo lorsque vous voyagez en avion. Cet appareil photo peut provoquer des interférences avec les équipements de navigation aérienne. Respectez l’ensemble des réglementations aériennes et éteignez l’appareil photo lorsque vous y êtes invité par le personnel navigant. • Eteignez l’appareil photo à proximité de tout équipement médical. Cet appareil photo peut créer des interférences avec les équipements médicaux des hôpitaux ou des établissements de santé. Respectez l’ensemble des réglementations, avertissements affichés et recommandations du personnel médical. Evitez toute interférence avec les stimulateurs cardiaques. Maintenez l’appareil photo à bonne distance des stimulateurs cardiaques pour éviter toute interférence, comme recommandé par le fabricant et les groupes de recherche. Si vous avez une quelconque raison de suspecter que l’appareil photo provoque des interférences avec un stimulateur cardiaque ou tout autre appareil médical, éteignez-le immédiatement et contactez le fabricant du stimulateur cardiaque ou de l’appareil médical pour en savoir plus. Attention—situations susceptibles d’endommager l’appareil photo ou d’autres équipements Si vous rangez l’appareil photo sans l’utiliser pour une période de temps prolongée, retirez d’abord la batterie. Les batteries peuvent fuir ou se détériorer avec le temps, risquant d’endommager gravement l’appareil photo. Utilisez uniquement des batteries de remplacement lithiumion originales recommandées par le fabricant. N’endommagez pas ou ne chauffez pas la batterie. Les batteries non homologuées, endommagées ou ayant été exposées à la chaleur sont à même de produire une flamme ou une blessure. Utilisez uniquement des batteries, des chargeurs et des accessoires homologués par Samsung. • L’utilisation de batteries, de chargeurs, de câbles ou d’accessoires non homologués peut endommager l’appareil photo, provoquer leur éclatement ou causer des blessures. • Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommage ou blessure résultant d’une utilisation inappropriée de batteries, chargeurs, câbles ou accessoires. Utilisez la batterie prévue uniquement pour l’appareil photo. Une mauvaise utilisation de celle-ci risque de produire une flamme ou une décharge électrique. 4 Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité Ne touchez pas le flash en cours de déclenchement. Le flash est très chaud lorsqu’il se déclenche et peut provoquer des brûlures. Lorsque vous utilisez le chargeur secteur, éteignez l’appareil photo avant de couper l’alimentation du chargeur secteur. Ne pas suivre ces instructions peut produire des flammes ou une électrocution. Débranchez le chargeur de la prise murale lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Ne pas suivre ces instructions peut produire des flammes ou une électrocution. N’utilisez jamais de fiches et de cordons d’alimentation endommagés ou de prises électriques mal fixées lorsque vous rechargez la batterie. Vous risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. Le chargeur secteur ne doit jamais entrer en contact avec les bornes +/- de la batterie. Vous risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo tomber ou subir des chocs. Cela peut endommager l’écran ou des composants, tant externes qu’internes. Effectuez les branchements des cordons, des adaptateurs et l’insertion des batteries et des cartes mémoire avec précaution. Enfoncer les cordons en forçant ou sans précaution et brancher les câbles ou insérer les batteries et les cartes mémoire de manière incorrecte peut endommager les ports, les prises et les accessoires. Evitez tout contact des cartes mémoire avec l’étui de l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager ou d’effacer les données stockées sur la carte. N’utilisez jamais de batterie ou de carte mémoire endommagée. Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique, d’endommager l’appareil photo ou de provoquer une flamme. Ne soumettez ou n’approchez pas l’appareil photo de champs magnétiques. Cela risque d’entraîner un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil photo. N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo si l’écran est endommagé. Si les parties en verre ou en acrylique sont brisées, apportez l’appareil photo dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung afin de la faire réparer. 5 Renseignements relatifs à la santé et à la sécurité Vérifiez que l’appareil photo fonctionne correctement avant de l’utiliser. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de fichiers ou de dégâts résultant d’un fonctionnement incorrect ou d’une mauvaise utilisation de l’appareil photo. Vous devez brancher la fiche micro-USB du câble USB sur votre appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. Ne jamais exposer l’objectif aux rayons directs du soleil. Vous risquez de décolorer le capteur d’images ou d’entraîner des dysfonctionnements. Si l’appareil photo surchauffe, retirez la batterie jusqu’à ce qu’elle refroidisse. • Lors d’un usage prolongé, la batterie peut chauffer et augmenter la température interne de l’appareil photo. Si l’appareil photo ne fonctionne plus, retirez la batterie et laissez-lui le temps de refroidir. • Des températures internes élevées peuvent entraîner l’apparition de parasites sur vos photos. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas les performances globales de l’appareil photo. Evitez toute interférence avec d’autres appareils électroniques. Votre appareil photo émet des signaux de radiofréquences (RF) qui risquent d’interférer avec les équipements électroniques non blindés ou blindés de façon incorrecte, comme les stimulateurs cardiaques, les prothèses auditives et tout autre appareil électronique, que ce soit dans les bâtiments ou les véhicules. Consultez les fabricants de vos appareils électroniques pour résoudre tout problème d’interférence. Pour éviter toute interférence indésirable, utilisez uniquement des appareils ou accessoires approuvés par Samsung. Utilisez l’appareil photo en position normale. Evitez tout contact avec l’antenne interne de l’appareil photo. Transfert des données et responsabilités • Les données transférées via un réseau local sans fil pourraient être divulguées. Evitez donc de transférer des données sensibles dans des endroits publics ou via des réseaux ouverts. • Le fabricant de l’appareil photo ne peut être tenu responsable des transferts de données enfreignant les droits d’auteur, les législations sur les marques commerciales et la propriété intellectuelle ou les règlements concernant les outrages aux bonnes mœurs. 6 Icônes utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi Indications de mode Mode Indication Scènes Automatique t Programme P Priorité d’ouverture A Priorité vitesse S Manuel M Intelligent s Panorama R Réseau sans fil B Icônes utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi Icône Fonction Informations complémentaires Mises en garde et précautions [ ] Touches de l’appareil photo. Par exemple, [Déclencheur] désigne la touche du déclencheur/obturateur. ( ) Numéro de page où se trouve l’information correspondante ĺ Séquence d’options ou de menus à sélectionner pour accomplir une procédure ; par exemple : sélectionnez b ĺ Qualité (signifie que vous devez sélectionner b, puis Qualité). * Annotation 7 Table des matières Chapitre 1 Mon appareil photo Mise en route ............................................................................................... 28 Contenu du coffret ................................................................................................... 28 Présentation de l’appareil photo ............................................................. 29 Utilisation de la touche MOBILE .......................................................................... 31 Utilisation de l’écran ................................................................................................. 32 Utilisation du mode Autoportrait .......................................................................... 32 Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire .................................... 33 Retrait de la batterie et de la carte mémoire................................................... 33 Utilisation de l’adaptateur de carte mémoire ................................................. 33 Mise en charge de la batterie et mise sous tension de l’appareil photo ............................................................................................................. 34 Chargement de la batterie ..................................................................................... 34 Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo ............................................................... 34 Configuration initiale ................................................................................. 35 Sélection de fonctions (options) .............................................................. 37 Utilisation de l’option m .................................................................................. 37 Ex. : définir le format photo en mode P .............................................................. 37 Utilisation du panneau intelligent ...................................................................... 38 Ex. : régler la valeur d’exposition en mode P ..................................................... 38 Utiliser iFn .................................................................................................................... 39 Icônes affichées à l’écran ........................................................................... 41 En mode Prise de vue .............................................................................................. 41 Prise de photos ............................................................................................................. 41 Enregistrement de vidéos ......................................................................................... 42 A propos de l’indicateur de niveau ....................................................................... 42 Conseils Concepts de photographie Postures pour les prises de vue ................................................................ 13 Prise en main de l’appareil photo ........................................................................... 13 Photographie en position debout .......................................................................... 14 Photographie en position accroupie ..................................................................... 14 Ouverture ..................................................................................................... 15 Valeur d’ouverture et profondeur de champ ...................................................... 16 Vitesse d’obturation.................................................................................... 17 Sensibilité ISO .............................................................................................. 18 Contrôle de l’exposition par le réglage de l’ouverture, de la vitesse d’obturation et de la sensibilité ISO ................................. 19 Corrélation entre la longueur de focale, l’angle et la perspective .... 20 Profondeur de champ ................................................................................ 21 Quels sont les éléments qui contrôlent les effets hors-mise au point ? .... 21 Aperçu de la profondeur de champ ....................................................................... 23 Composition ................................................................................................. 23 Règle des tiers ................................................................................................................ 23 Photos avec deux sujets ............................................................................................. 24 Flash ............................................................................................................... 25 Nombre guide du flash ............................................................................................... 26 Prise de vue avec flash indirect ................................................................................ 26 8 Table des matières En mode Lecture ....................................................................................................... 43 Affichage de photos ................................................................................................... 43 Lecture de vidéos ........................................................................................................ 43 Modification des informations affichées .......................................................... 44 Objectifs ........................................................................................................ 45 Présentation de l’objectif ........................................................................................ 45 Verrouillage et déverrouillage de l’objectif ........................................................ 46 Marquages de l’objectif ........................................................................................... 48 Accessoires ................................................................................................... 49 Présentation du flash externe ............................................................................... 49 Fixation du flash externe ........................................................................................... 50 Modes de prise de vue ............................................................................... 51 t Mode Scènes automatiques..................................................................... 52 P Mode Programme ................................................................................................. 54 Changement de programme .................................................................................. 55 Vitesse obturation minimum ................................................................................... 55 A Mode Priorité ouverture .................................................................................... 56 S Mode Priorité Vitesse ........................................................................................... 57 M Mode Manuel........................................................................................................ 58 Utilisation du mode d’exposition ........................................................................... 58 Utilisation de la fonction Bulb ................................................................................. 59 s Mode intelligent ................................................................................................. 60 Utilisation du mode Meilleure photo ................................................................... 61 R Mode Panorama ................................................................................................. 62 Enregistrement d’une vidéo .................................................................................. 63 Fonctions disponibles en mode Prise de vue ................................................. 65 Chapitre 2 Fonctions de prise de vue Format et résolution ................................................................................... 67 Format photo .............................................................................................................. 67 Qualité ........................................................................................................................... 68 Sensibilité ISO .............................................................................................. 69 Balance des blancs ...................................................................................... 70 Personnalisation des options de préréglage de la balance des blancs .... 71 Assistant photo (styles de photo) ............................................................ 72 Mode AF ........................................................................................................ 73 AF unique ..................................................................................................................... 74 AF continu .................................................................................................................... 74 Mise au point manuelle .......................................................................................... 75 Zone AF ......................................................................................................... 76 Mise au point sélection ........................................................................................... 76 Mise au point multiple ............................................................................................ 77 Mise au point avec suivi .......................................................................................... 77 Détection des visages ................................................................................ 79 Normale ........................................................................................................................ 79 Sourire ........................................................................................................................... 80 Clin d’œil ....................................................................................................................... 80 Aide mise au point manuelle .................................................................... 81 Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) .................................................... 82 9 Table des matières Prise de vue (type) ...................................................................................... 83 Unique ........................................................................................................................... 83 Continue ....................................................................................................................... 84 Mode Rafale ................................................................................................................ 84 Retardateur .................................................................................................................. 85 Bracketing Exposition automatique (BKT AE) ................................................. 85 Bracketing Balance des blancs (BKT NB) ........................................................... 86 Bracketing Assistant photo (A. photo Bracketing) ........................................ 86 Bracketing de profondeur de champ ................................................................. 87 Flash ............................................................................................................... 88 Réduction de l’effet yeux rouges ......................................................................... 89 Réglage de l’intensité du flash.............................................................................. 89 Mesure de l’exposition ............................................................................... 90 Multiple ......................................................................................................................... 90 Centrée .......................................................................................................................... 91 Sélective ....................................................................................................................... 91 Mesure de la valeur d’exposition de la zone de mise au point ................. 92 Plage dynamique ........................................................................................ 93 Filtre intelligent ........................................................................................... 94 Compensation de l’exposition .................................................................. 95 Verrouillage de l’exposition ...................................................................... 96 Fonctions vidéo ........................................................................................... 97 Format vidéo ............................................................................................................... 97 Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur NTSC ........................................................................ 97 Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur PAL ........................................................................... 97 Qualité vidéo ............................................................................................................... 98 Multi-mouvements ................................................................................................... 98 Fondu............................................................................................................................. 99 Voix ................................................................................................................................. 99 Chapitre 3 Lecture / Retouche Recherche et gestion de fichiers ............................................................ 101 Affichage de photos .............................................................................................. 101 Affichage des images sous forme de miniatures ........................................ 101 Affichage de fichiers par catégorie .................................................................. 102 Visionnage de fichiers sous forme de dossiers ............................................ 102 Protection de fichiers ............................................................................................ 103 Suppression de fichiers ........................................................................................ 103 Suppression d’un seul fichier ................................................................................ 103 Suppression de plusieurs fichiers ........................................................................ 104 Suppression de tous les fichiers ........................................................................... 104 10 Table des matières Affichage de photos ................................................................................. 105 Agrandissement d’une photo ............................................................................ 105 Visionnage d’un diaporama ............................................................................... 105 Rotation automatique .......................................................................................... 106 Lecture de vidéos ...................................................................................... 107 Recadrage d’une vidéo au cours de la lecture ............................................. 107 Extraction d’une image pendant la lecture .................................................. 108 Retouche de photos ................................................................................. 109 Rotation d’une photo ........................................................................................... 109 Redimensionnement de photos ....................................................................... 110 Réglage des photos ............................................................................................... 110 Retouche de visages ............................................................................................. 111 Effets de filtre intelligent ..................................................................................... 112 Chapitre 4 Réseau sans fil Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau .................................................................................... 114 Connexion à un réseau local sans fil................................................................ 114 Configuration des options de réseau ................................................................. 115 Configuration manuelle de l’adresse IP ............................................................. 115 Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau ........................................................... 116 Saisie de texte .......................................................................................................... 117 Utilisation de la fonction NFC (Partage par contact) ......................... 118 Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Prise de vue ................................ 118 Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Lecture (Partage instantané) .............................................................................................. 118 Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Wi-Fi ............................................... 118 Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone ......... 119 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone ................................ 121 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à plusieurs smartphones .................. 123 Utilisation d’un smartphone pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur à distance ............................................................................. 125 Utilisation de la fonction Home Monitor+ ........................................... 127 Utilisation de Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des photos ou des vidéos ............................................................................... 129 Installation du programme Sauvegarde automatique sur votre ordinateur ................................................................................................................. 129 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un ordinateur ........................................... 129 Utilisation de Samsung Link pour visionner des fichiers .................. 131 11 Table des matières Chapitre 6 Connexion à des appareils externes Affichage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD ........................................... 146 Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur ..................................................... 147 Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Windows ........................................ 147 Connexion de l’appareil photo en tant que disque amovible................... 147 Déconnexion de l’appareil photo (Windows 7) .............................................. 148 Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Mac .................................................. 148 Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur .................................... 150 Installation de i-Launcher ................................................................................... 150 Utilisation de Samsung i-Launcher ..................................................................... 151 Utilisation d’i-Launcher ........................................................................................ 151 Configuration requise pour Windows ................................................................ 151 Configuration requise pour Mac .......................................................................... 152 Ouverture de Samsung i-Launcher ..................................................................... 152 Téléchargement du firmware ................................................................................ 152 Téléchargement du programme PC Auto Backup ......................................... 152 Installation d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ................................................ 153 Utilisation d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom ................................................... 153 Chapitre 5 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo Paramètres utilisateur .............................................................................. 134 Personnalisation ISO ............................................................................................. 134 Palier ISO ....................................................................................................................... 134 Plage ISO auto ............................................................................................................. 134 Réducteur de bruit ................................................................................................. 134 Réglage Bracketing ................................................................................................ 135 DMF (Mise au point manuelle directe) ........................................................... 135 Espace colorimétrique .......................................................................................... 136 Corriger distort. ....................................................................................................... 137 Personnalisation iFn .............................................................................................. 137 Affichage utilisateur .............................................................................................. 138 Attribution touches ............................................................................................... 139 Vue Live NFC ............................................................................................................ 139 Taille de l’image MobileLink/NFC ..................................................................... 139 Grille ............................................................................................................................ 140 Voyant de mise au point ...................................................................................... 140 Autoportrait automatique .................................................................................. 140 Réglagle de la touche Vitesse sur l’objectif ................................................... 140 Paramètres .................................................................................................. 141 12 Table des matières A propos de la batterie ......................................................................................... 162 Caractéristiques de la batterie .............................................................................. 162 Autonomie de la batterie ........................................................................................ 164 Message de batterie faible ..................................................................................... 164 Remarques à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie ........................................ 164 Avertissements à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie ................................ 165 Remarques concernant la recharge de la batterie......................................... 165 Remarques à propos de la recharge avec raccordement à un ordinateur ......................................................................................................................166 Utilisation et recyclage consciencieux des batteries et des chargeurs ...166 Mise à jour du micrologiciel .................................................................... 167 Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente ....................... 168 Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo ..................................................... 171 Glossaire ...................................................................................................... 176 Accessoires en option............................................................................... 182 Index ............................................................................................................ 183 Chapitre 7 Annexe Messages d’erreur ..................................................................................... 155 Entretien de l’appareil photo .................................................................. 156 Nettoyage de l’appareil photo .......................................................................... 156 Objectif et écran de l’appareil photo .................................................................. 156 Capteur d’images ....................................................................................................... 156 Boîtier de l’appareil photo ...................................................................................... 156 Usage et rangement de l’appareil photo....................................................... 157 Usage ou rangement inapproprié de l’appareil photo ................................ 157 Utilisation sur la plage ou en bord de mer ....................................................... 157 Rangement pour une durée prolongée ............................................................ 157 Usage avec précaution de l’appareil photo dans les environnements humides .........................................................................................................................158 Autres avertissements .............................................................................................. 158 A propos des cartes mémoire ............................................................................ 159 Cartes mémoires prises en charge ...................................................................... 159 Capacité de la carte mémoire ............................................................................... 160 Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire ................................................. 161 13 Concepts de photographie Prise en main de l’appareil photo Tenez l’appareil photo de la main droite et placez l’index droit sur la touche du déclencheur. Soutenez l’appareil en plaçant la main gauche sous l’objectif. Postures pour les prises de vue Pour stabiliser l’appareil photo et prendre une bonne photo, une posture correcte est nécessaire. Même si vous tenez l’appareil photo correctement, une mauvaise posture peut le faire bouger. Tenez-vous debout, bien droit et restez immobile afin de stabiliser l’appareil photo. Afin de réduire les mouvements du corps, retenez votre souffle lorsque vous effectuez une prise de vue avec une vitesse d’obturation lente. 14 Concepts de photographie Photographie en position debout Composez votre prise de vue, tenez-vous debout, bien droit, les pieds dans le prolongement de vos épaules, les coudes pointés vers le bas. Photographie en position accroupie Composez votre prise de vue, accroupissez-vous en plaçant un genou au sol tout en vous tenant droit. 15 Concepts de photographie Ouverture L’ouverture fait partie des trois facteurs qui déterminent l’exposition. L’intérieur de l’ouverture contient de fines lamelles de métal qui s’ouvrent et se referment afin de laisser la lumière passer à travers l’ouverture et pénétrer dans l’appareil photo. La taille de l’ouverture est liée à la quantité de lumière : une ouverture plus grande laisse passer plus de lumière, tandis qu’une ouverture plus petite laisse pénétrer moins de lumière. Tailles d’ouverture Ouverture minimum Ouverture moyenne Ouverture maximum Ouverture réduite Ouverture large La taille de l’ouverture est représentée par une valeur désignée par le terme « nombre f ». Le nombre f se détermine par la longueur de focale divisée par le diamètre de l’objectif. Par exemple, si un objectif avec une longueur de focale de 50 mm a pour nombre f F2, le diamètre de l’ouverture est de 25 mm. (50 mm/25 mm = F2) Plus le nombre f est faible, plus la taille de l’ouverture est importante. La taille de l’ouverture se définit par la valeur d’exposition (EV). Augmenter la valeur d’exposition (+1 EV) signifie que la quantité de lumière double. Baisser la valeur d’exposition (-1 EV) signifie que la quantité de lumière est réduite de moitié. Vous pouvez également utiliser la fonction de compensation de l’exposition afin d’effectuer un réglage de quantité de lumière fin, en subdivisant les valeurs d’exposition par 1/2, 1/3 EV, et ainsi de suite. +1 EV F1.4 F2 F2.8 F4 F5.6 F8 -1 EV Niveaux de la valeur d’exposition 16 Concepts de photographie Valeur d’ouverture et profondeur de champ En contrôlant l’ouverture, vous pouvez rendre l’arrière plan d’une photo plus flou ou plus net. Ceci est étroitement lié à la profondeur de champ (DOF) qui peut être définie comme faible ou élevée. Photo avec une profondeur de champ élevée Photo avec une profondeur de champ faible L’intérieur de l’ouverture contient plusieurs lamelles. Ces lamelles se déplacent simultanément et contrôlent la quantité de lumière qui passe à travers le centre de l’ouverture. Lors de prises de vues réalisées de nuit, le nombre de lamelles joue sur l’aspect de la lumière. Pour un nombre donné de lamelles dans l’ouverture, la lumière est divisée par le nombre de sections correspondant. Si le nombre de lamelles est impair, le nombre de sections est double. Par exemple, une ouverture disposant de 8 lamelles divise la lumière en 8 sections alors qu’une ouverture disposant de 7 lamelles la divise en 14 sections. 7 lamelles 8 lamelles 17 Concepts de photographie Vitesse d’obturation La vitesse d’obturation désigne l’intervalle de temps entre l’ouverture et la fermeture de l’obturateur. Elle contrôle la quantité de lumière qui passe à travers l’ouverture avant d’atteindre le capteur d’images. Généralement, la vitesse d’obturation est réglable manuellement. La mesure de la vitesse d’obturation est connue sous le nom de « Valeur d’exposition » (EV), qui se caractérise par des intervalles de 1 s, 1/2 s, 1/4 s, 1/8 s, 1/15 s, 1/1 000 s, 1/2 000 s, et ainsi de suite. Exposition +1 EV -1 EV 1 s 1/2 s 1/4 s 1/8 s 1/15 s 1/30 s Vitesse d’obturation Par conséquent, plus la vitesse d’obturation est élevée, moins la lumière pénètre. De même, plus la vitesse d’obturation est faible, plus la lumière pénètre. Les photos représentées ci-dessous illustrent une vitesse d’obturation lente laissant plus de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer dans l’objectif de l’appareil photo. Cela engendre un effet de flou lié au mouvement des objets. Par ailleurs, une vitesse d’obturation rapide accorde moins de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer, ce qui tend à immobiliser un sujet en mouvement sur la photo. 0,8 s 0,004 s 18 Concepts de photographie Sensibilité ISO L’exposition d’une image est déterminée par la sensibilité de l’appareil photo. Cette sensibilité est basée sur des standards photographiques internationaux, connus sous le nom de standards ISO. Sur les appareils numériques, cette échelle de sensibilité est utilisée pour représenter la sensibilité du mécanisme numérique qui capture l’image. Lorsque le nombre double, la sensibilité ISO double également. Par exemple, une sensibilité définie sur ISO 200 peut capturer des images deux fois plus vite qu’une sensibilité définie sur ISO 100. Néanmoins, des paramètres ISO élevés peuvent causer du « bruit », à savoir des petites tâches, des points et autres phénomènes qui donnent à la photo une apparence sale ou avec des parasites. En règle générale, il vaut mieux utiliser une faible sensibilité ISO afin d’éviter la présence de bruit sur les photos, sauf si vous effectuez une prise de vue dans un environnement sombre ou de nuit. Changements de la qualité et de la luminosité en fonction de la sensibilité ISO Une faible sensibilité ISO signifie que l’appareil photo est moins sensible à la lumière et que vous avez besoin de plus de lumière pour une exposition optimale. Lorsque vous utilisez une faible sensibilité ISO, choisissez une ouverture plus importante ou réduisez la vitesse d’obturation afin de laisser plus de lumière pénétrer dans l’appareil photo. Par exemple, une faible sensibilité ISO au cours d’une journée ensoleillée où la lumière est abondante ne nécessite pas de vitesse d’obturation lente. Néanmoins, dans un endroit sombre ou de nuit, une faible sensibilité ISO rendent les photos floues. Il est donc recommandé d’augmenter la sensibilité ISO de manière modérée. Photo prise avec un trépied et une sensibilité ISO élevée Photo floue avec une faible sensibilité ISO 19 Concepts de photographie Contrôle de l’exposition par le réglage de l’ouverture, de la vitesse d’obturation et de la sensibilité ISO En photographie, les paramètres d’ouverture, de vitesse d’obturation et de sensibilité ISO sont étroitement liés. Les paramètres d’ouverture contrôlent et régulent la quantité de lumière qui pénètre dans l’appareil photo, alors que la vitesse d’obturation détermine la durée au cours de laquelle la lumière peut pénétrer. La sensibilité ISO correspond à la vitesse à laquelle un appareil photo réagit à la lumière. Ces trois aspects sont désignés globalement par le triangle d’exposition. Un changement de la vitesse d’obturation, de la valeur d’ouverture ou de la sensibilité ISO peut être compensé par un réglage des autres valeurs pour maintenir la quantité de lumière. Néanmoins, les résultats varient en fonction des paramètres utilisés. Par exemple, la vitesse d’obturation est utile pour capturer des mouvements, l’ouverture permet de contrôler la profondeur de champ et la sensibilité ISO le grain d’une photo. Paramètres Résultats Valeur d’ouverture Ouverture large = plus de lumière Ouverture étroite = moins de lumière Large = petite profondeur de champ Etroit = grande profondeur de champ Paramètres Résultats Vitesse d’obturation Vitesse rapide = moins de lumière Vitesse lente = plus de lumière Rapide = image nette Lente = image floue Sensibilité ISO Sensibilité élevée = plus sensible à la lumière Sensibilité faible = moins sensible à la lumière Elevée = plus de grain Faible = moins de grain 20 Concepts de photographie Corrélation entre la longueur de focale, l’angle et la perspective La longueur de focale, ou distance focale, exprimée en millimètres, correspond à la distance séparant le milieu de l’objectif du foyer de mise au point. Elle influe sur l’angle et la perspective des images prises. Une longueur de focale courte génère un angle de vue étendu, ce qui permet de photographier un plan large. Une longueur de focale longue génère un angle de vue étroit, ce qui permet de photographier au téléobjectif. Longueur de focale courte plan large angle large objectif angle large Longueur de focale longue photo au téléobjectif angle étroit téléobjectif Observez les photos ci-dessous et comparez les différences. Angle 16 mm Angle 50 mm Angle 200 mm En temps normal, un objectif grand angle convient pour réaliser des photos de paysages, tandis qu’un objectif à angle étroit est recommandé pour les photos d’évènements sportifs ou les portraits. 21 Concepts de photographie Profondeur de champ Les plus belles photos de nature morte ou de portraits sont celles dont l’arrière plan est flou et sur lesquelles le sujet ressort. En fonction des zones mises au point, une photo peut être floue ou nette. Ceci est désigné par « une profondeur de champ faible » ou « une profondeur de champ élevée ». La profondeur de champ est la zone mise au point autour du sujet. C’est pourquoi, une faible profondeur de champ signifie que la zone mise au point est étroite, tandis qu’une profondeur de champ élevée élargit la zone mise au point. Une photo avec une faible profondeur de champ, qui met le sujet en évidence et dont le reste est flou, peut être obtenue en utilisant un téléobjectif ou en sélectionnant une faible valeur d’ouverture. A l’opposé, une photo avec une profondeur de champ élevée et dont chaque élément est nettement mis au point peut être obtenue en utilisant un objectif grand angle ou en sélectionnant une valeur d’ouverture élevée. Profondeur de champ réduite Profondeur de champ élevée Quels sont les éléments qui contrôlent les effets hors-mise au point ? La profondeur de champ dépend de la valeur d’ouverture Plus l’ouverture est large (par définition, plus la valeur d’ouverture est basse), plus la profondeur de champ est faible. Dans une situation où la longueur de focale est égale, une faible valeur d’ouverture résulte en une faible profondeur de champ sur une photo. 50 mm F5.7 50 mm F22 22 Concepts de photographie Profondeur de champ liée à la longueur de focale Plus la longueur de focale est importante, plus la profondeur de champ est faible. Pour réaliser une prise de vue avec une faible profondeur de champ, un téléobjectif disposant d’une longueur de focale importante est mieux adapté qu’un objectif grand angle à courte profondeur de champ. Photo prise avec un objectif grand angle 16 mm Photo prise avec un objectif télescopique 100 mm Profondeur de champ liée à la distance entre le sujet et l’appareil photo Plus la distance entre le sujet et l’appareil photo est courte, plus la profondeur de champ est faible. C’est pourquoi, prendre une photo rapprochée d’un sujet a pour conséquence une faible profondeur de champ. Photo prise avec un objectif télescopique 100 mm Photo prise à proximité du sujet 23 Concepts de photographie Aperçu de la profondeur de champ Afin d’obtenir un aperçu de l’aspect final de votre photo avant d’effectuer la prise de vue, vous pouvez appuyer sur la touche de personnalisation. L’appareil photo règle l’ouverture sur les paramètres prédéfinis et affiche le résultat sur l’écran. Affectez la fonction Aperçu optique à la touche de personnalisation (p. 139). Composition La photographie est un art qui a pour raison d’être de capturer l’essence même des merveilles du monde à l’aide d’un appareil photo. Néanmoins, quand bien même le sujet présage d’une photo réussie, une mauvaise composition ne peut en reproduire fidèlement l’aspect. En matière de composition, il est très important de hiérarchiser les sujets. En photographie, la composition signifie la disposition des éléments d’une scène. En règle générale, une bonne composition doit obéir à la règle des tiers. Règle des tiers La règle des tiers consiste à diviser l’image en un quadrillage de 3x3, formé de rectangles de taille égale. Pour composer des photos qui mettent le mieux en valeur le sujet, veillez à ce que le sujet soit placé dans l’un des quatre coins du rectangle central. 24 Concepts de photographie L’utilisation de la règle des tiers permet de créer des photos avec une composition équilibrée et saisissante. En voici quelques exemples. Photos avec deux sujets Si votre sujet se trouve à l’un des coins de la photo, la composition semble alors déséquilibrée. Vous pouvez équilibrer la photo en prenant un second sujet placé à l’extrémité opposée. Sujet 1 Sujet 2 Sujet 1 Sujet 2 Instable Stable 25 Concepts de photographie Le fait de centrer l’horizon sur une photo de paysage crée une impression de déséquilibre. Equilibrez la photo en déplaçant l’horizon vers le haut ou vers le bas. Sujet 1 Sujet 2 Sujet 1 Sujet 2 Instable Stable Flash La lumière est l’un des éléments les plus importants en photographie. Il n’est, cependant, pas simple d’avoir la quantité de lumière suffisante quel que soit le moment ou l’endroit. L’utilisation d’un flash vous permet d’optimiser les paramètres de lumière et de créer différents effets. Le flash, également appelé éclairage stroboscopique ou laser, permet de créer un niveau d’exposition satisfaisant dans des conditions de faible éclairage. Il est également utile dans des conditions de forte luminosité. Par exemple, le flash peut être utilisé pour compenser l’exposition de l’ombre d’un sujet ou pour saisir à la fois le sujet et l’arrière-plan en contre jour. Avant correction Après correction 26 Concepts de photographie Nombre guide du flash Le numéro de modèle d’un flash indique la puissance du flash ; ainsi, la quantité de lumière maximale créée est représentée par une valeur appelée « nombre guide ». Plus le nombre est élevé, plus le flash est puissant. Le nombre guide s’obtient en multipliant la distance entre le flash et le sujet par la valeur d’ouverture, lorsque la sensibilité ISO est définie sur 100. Nombre guide = Distance flash-sujet X Valeur d’ouverture Valeur d’ouverture = Nombre guide / Distance flash-sujet Distance flash-sujet = Nombre guide / Valeur d’ouverture Par conséquent, si vous connaissez le nombre guide d’un flash, vous pouvez estimer la distance flash-sujet lorsque vous réglez le flash manuellement. Par exemple, si un flash possède le nombre guide NG 20 et est à 4 mètres de distance du sujet, la valeur d’ouverture optimale est de F5.0. Prise de vue avec flash indirect La prise de vue avec flash indirect se réfère à une méthode qui redirige la lumière du sujet vers le plafond ou les murs de sorte que la lumière se répartisse de manière uniforme sur le sujet. En règle générale, les prises de vue réalisées avec le flash peuvent manquer de naturel et projettent des ombres. Au contraire, les sujets sur les photos prises avec la prise de vue avec flash indirect ne projettent pas d’ombres et apparaissent plus douces car la lumière est plus diffuse. Chapitre 1 Mon appareil photo Découvrez les différents composants de l’appareil photo, les icônes affichées à l’écran, les différents objectifs disponibles, les accessoires en option et les fonctions de base. Mon appareil photo 28 Mise en route Contenu du coffret Sortez le téléphone de son coffret et vérifiez que tous les éléments suivants sont présents : Appareil photo Adaptateur secteur / Câble USB Batterie rechargeable Dragonne Guide de demarrage rapide Guide de référence rapide Adobe Photoshop Lightroom DVD-ROM • Les illustrations peuvent différer par rapport au produit fourni. • Vous pouvez acheter des accessoires en option auprès d’un revendeur ou d’un centre de service après-vente Samsung. Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de problème consécutif à l’utilisation d’accessoires non autorisés. Pour en savoir plus sur les accessoires, reportez-vous à la page 182. Mon appareil photo 29 Présentation de l’appareil photo N° Nom 1 Molette de sélection du mode • t : Mode Scènes automatiques (p. 52) • P : Mode Programme (p. 54) • A : Mode Priorité ouverture (p. 56) • S : Mode Priorité Vitesse (p. 57) • M : Mode Manuel (p. 58) • s : Mode Scène (p. 60) • R : Mode Panorama (p. 62) • B : Réseau sans fil (p. 113) 2 Déclencheur 3 Touche Marche / Arrêt 4 Touche MOBILE Sélectionner une fonction Wi-Fi pour vous connecter à votre appareil mobile. (p. 31) 5 Microphone 6 Griffe porte-accessoire N° Nom 7 Haut-parleur 8 Balise NFC 9 Touche de déverrouillage de l’objectif 10 Capteur d'images 11 Monture de l'objectif 12 Repère d'installation de l'objectif 13 Voyant AF / Voyant du retardateur 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 7 9 10 13 12 11 8 Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo 30 N° Nom 1 Touche d’enregistrement vidéo Démarrer un enregistrement vidéo. 2 Anneau d'attache de la dragonne 3 Antenne interne * Eviter tout contact avec l’antenne interne lors de l’utilisation du réseau sans fil. 4 Touche f Accéder au panneau Intelligent et régler certains paramètres. 5 Touche o • Sur l’écran d’accueil : enregistrer les options sélectionnées. • En mode Prise de vue : sélectionner manuellement une zone de mise au point dans certains modes de prise de vue. 6 Touche Supprimer / Personnaliser • En mode Prise de vue : exécuter la fonction assignée (p. 139). • En mode Lecture : supprimer des fichiers. 7 Touche Lecture Activer le mode Lecture pour visualiser les photos ou visionner des vidéos. N° Nom 8 Touche de navigation (molette intelligente) • En mode Prise de vue : - D : modifier les informations à l’écran. - I : sélectionner la vitesse d’obturation, la valeur d’ouverture, la compensation d’exposition ou la sensibilité ISO. - C : sélectionner la méthode de prise de vue ou régler le retardateur. - F : sélectionner un mode AF. • En mode Lecture : - I : afficher les miniatures. • Dans d’autres cas : déplacer respectivement vers le haut, le bas, la gauche, la droite. (Vous pouvez également tourner la touche de navigation.) 9 Touche Accéder aux options ou aux menus. m 10 Voyant d'état Indiquer l’état de l’appareil photo. • Clignotement : lors de l’enregistrement d’une photo ou d’une vidéo, de l’envoi de données vers un ordinateur, de la connexion à un réseau local sans fil ou l’envoi d’une photo. • Fixe : en l’absence de transfert de données ou lorsque la batterie est en charge. 11 Affichage Pour prendre un autoportrait en se regardant dans l’écran, faire pivoter l’écran vers le haut (p. 32). 1 2 4 5 6 8 7 10 9 11 3 Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo 31 N° Nom 1 Port HDMI 2 Port USB Brancher l’appareil photo sur un ordinateur. 3 Trappe batterie / Carte mémoire Insérer une carte mémoire et une batterie. 4 Douille pour trépied Utilisation de la touche MOBILE Sélectionnez une fonction Wi-Fi qui se connecte à un smartphone en appuyant sur [ ]. Appuyez à nouveau sur [ ] pour revenir au mode précédent. 2 1 4 3 Mon appareil photo > Présentation de l’appareil photo 32 Utilisation de l’écran Vous pouvez prendre un autoportrait en vous regardant dans l’écran en le faisant pivoter vers le haut. Utilisation du mode Autoportrait Lorsque l’appareil photo est éteint et que vous avez activé l’option Autoportrait (p. 140), basculer l’écran vers le haut allume l’appareil photo qui passe en mode Autoportrait. En mode Autoportrait, les fonctions de retardateur (3 secondes), détection des visages et beauté sont automatiquement activées. Appuyez sur [o] pour modifier l’option de détection des visages. Appuyez sur [n] pour désactiver ou activer la fonction beauté. 1 Faites pivoter l’écran vers le haut. 180˚ 2 Pour faire la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à micourse, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. • Après 3 secondes, l’appareil photo déverrouille automatiquement le déclencheur. • Lorsque l’appareil est éteint, la basculement de l’écran vers le haut allume automatiquement l’appareil photo. • Laissez l’écran fermé lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil photo. • Faites pivoter l’écran en respectant scrupuleusement les angles autorisés. Le non-respect de cette recommandation risque d’endommager l’appareil photo. • Utilisez un trépied lorsque l’écran est incliné vers le haut et que vous ne le tenez pas à la main. Si vous passez outre ces précautions, vous risquez d’endommager votre appareil photo. • Ne faites pas pivoter l’écran vers le haut lorsqu’un flash externe est monté sur l’appareil photo. Si vous passez outre ces précautions, vous risquez d’endommager votre appareil photo. Mon appareil photo 33 Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire Voici comment installer ou retirer la batterie et une carte mémoire en option dans l’appareil photo. Carte mémoire Insérez une carte mémoire en orientant la puce vers le haut. Batterie rechargeable Insérez la batterie en orientant la puce vers la gauche. Retrait de la batterie et de la carte mémoire Batterie rechargeable Loquet de la batterie Faites glisser le verrou vers le haut pour libérer la batterie. Carte mémoire Appuyez doucement sur la carte pour la faire sortir de l’appareil photo, puis retirez-la entièrement de son emplacement. Utilisation de l’adaptateur de carte mémoire Pour pouvoir lire des données sur un ordinateur ou par le biais d’un lecteur de cartes, insérez la carte dans l’adaptateur approprié. Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire ou la batterie lorsque le voyant d’état de l’appareil photo clignote. Vous risquez d’endommager les données stockées sur la carte mémoire ou dans l’appareil photo. Mon appareil photo 34 Mise en charge de la batterie et mise sous tension de l’appareil photo Chargement de la batterie Vous devez charger complètement la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil photo pour la première fois. Branchez l’extrémité la plus fine du câble USB sur l’appareil photo, puis l’autre extrémité du câble USB sur un adaptateur secteur. Voyant d'état • Voyant rouge allumé : en charge • Voyant vert allumé : charge complète • Voyant rouge clignotant : erreur de charge Utilisez uniquement l’adaptateur secteur et le câble USB fournis avec l’appareil photo. Si vous utilisez un autre adaptateur secteur, la batterie de l’appareil photo risque de ne pas se recharger ou de fonctionner correctement. Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo Pour allumer ou éteindre l’appareil photo, appuyez sur [ ]. • L’écran de configuration initiale apparaît lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo pour la première fois (p. 35). Mon appareil photo 35 Configuration initiale Lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo pour la première fois, l’écran de configuration initiale s’affiche. La langue est réglée selon le pays ou la région où l’appareil photo est vendu. Vous pouvez la changer pour celle de votre choix. 1 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Fuseau horaire, puis appuyez sur [o]. 2 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour sélectionner un fuseau horaire, puis appuyez sur [o]. Retour Définir Fuseau horaire [GMT +00:00] Londres [GMT -01:00] Cap Vert [GMT -02:00] Açores [GMT -03:00] Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo [GMT -03:30] Terre-Neuve 3 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Configuration date/ heure, puis appuyez sur [o]. 4 Appuyez sur [C/F] pour sélectionner un élément (Année/ Mois/Jour/Heure/Minute/Heure d’été). 5 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour définir une option, puis appuyez sur [o]. Retour Définir Année Mois Jour Heure Min Heure d'été Configuration date/heure • L’affichage peut différer en fonction de la langue sélectionnée. 6 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Type date, puis appuyez sur [o]. 7 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour sélectionner un format de date, puis appuyez sur [o]. Retour Définir Type date AAAA/MM/JJ MM/JJ/AAAA JJ/MM/AAAA Mon appareil photo > Configuration initiale 36 8 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner Type d'heure, puis appuyez sur [o]. 9 Appuyez sur [D/I] pour sélectionner un format d’heure, puis appuyez sur [o]. Retour Définir Type d'heure 12 h 24 h 10 Appuyez sur [m] pour terminer la configuration. Mon appareil photo 37 Sélection de fonctions (options) Tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour vous déplacer, puis appuyez sur [o] pour sélectionner une option. Utilisation de l’option m Appuyez sur [m], puis modifiez les options de prise de vue ou les paramètres. Ex. : définir le format photo en mode P 1 Passez au mode P à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Appuyez sur [m]. 3 Appuyez sur [C], tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [D/I] pour accéder à l’option b, puis appuyez sur [o]. 4 Tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [D/I] pour accéder à l’option Format photo, puis appuyez sur [o]. AutoShare Format photo Qualité ISO Vitesse obturation minimum Retour Sélectionner Mon appareil photo > Sélection de fonctions (options) 38 5 Tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [D/I] pour accéder à une option, puis appuyez sur [o]. • Appuyez sur [m] pour revenir au menu précédent. (3:2) (5472x3648) (3:2) (3888x2592) (3:2) (2976x1984) (3:2) (1728x1152) (16:9) (5472x3080) Format photo Retour Définir 6 Appuyez sur [m] pour passer en mode Prise de vue. Utilisation du panneau intelligent Appuyez sur [f] pour accéder à certaines fonctions telles que Exposition, ISO et Balance des blancs. Ex. : régler la valeur d’exposition en mode P 1 Passez au mode P à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Appuyez sur [f]. 3 Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour accéder à l’option EV, puis appuyez sur [o]. • Vous pouvez sélectionner directement une option en tournant la touche de navigation sans appuyer sur [o]. EV : 0 Retour Régler 4 Tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler la valeur d’exposition, puis appuyez sur [o]. Mon appareil photo > Sélection de fonctions (options) 39 Utiliser iFn Appuyez sur [i-Function] sur un objectif compatible i-Function pour sélectionner et régler manuellement la vitesse d’obturation, la valeur d’ouverture, la valeur d’exposition, la sensibilité ISO ainsi que la balance des blancs sur l’objectif. 1 Passez au mode P, A, S ou M à l'aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Appuyez sur [i-Function] sur l’objectif pour sélectionner un paramètre. • Pour sélectionner les éléments à afficher, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ Personnalisation iFn ĺ un élément. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [i-Function], puis sur [D/I] pour sélectionner un paramètre. Option Description Ouverture Régler la valeur d’ouverture. Vitesse d'obturation Régler la vitesse d’obturation. EV Régler la valeur d’exposition. ISO Réglez la sensibilité ISO. Balance des blancs Sélectionner une option de balance des blancs. 3 Tournez la bague de mise au point pour sélectionner une option. • Vous pouvez également tourner la touche de navigation. 4 Enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour faire la mise au point, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. Mon appareil photo > Sélection de fonctions (options) 40 Options disponibles Mode Prise de vue PASM Ouverture -O-O Vitesse d'obturation - - OO EV OOO - ISO OOOO Balance des blancs OOOO Mon appareil photo 41 Icônes affichées à l’écran Prise de photos 1 2 1. Informations de prise de vue Icône Description Mode de prise de vue Date du jour Heure du moment Longueur de focale* Verrouillage automatique de l’exposition (p. 96) Nombre de photos disponibles Carte mémoire insérée Carte mémoire non insérée** Icône Description • : recharge complète • : recharge partielle • (Rouge) : vide (recharger la batterie) • : recharge en cours Cadre de mise au point automatique Zone de mesure de l’exposition sélective Bougé de l’appareil photo Echelle de la mise au point manuelle Indicateur de niveau (p. 42) Histogramme (p. 138) Mise au point Vitesse d’obturation Valeur d’ouverture Valeur de réglage de l’exposition Sensibilité ISO (p. 69) * Cette icône apparaît lorsque l’objectif Power Zoom est fixé. ** Les photos prises sans insérer de carte mémoire ne peuvent pas être imprimées ou transférées sur une carte mémoire ou sur un ordinateur. 2. Options de prise de vue Icône Description Format photo Mode de sélection Flash (p. 88) Réglage de l’intensité du flash Mesure de l’exposition (p. 90) Mode AF (p. 73) Détection des visages Beauté*** Zone de mise au point Balance des blancs (p. 70) Réglage fin de la balance des blancs Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) (p. 82) Fichier RAW Plage dynamique (p. 93) *** Cette icône apparaît lorsque l’écran est incliné vers le haut et que l’appareil photo passe en mode Autoportrait. Les icônes varient en fonction du mode sélectionné ou des options choisies. En mode Prise de vue Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran 42 2. Options de prise de vue Icône Description Taille de la vidéo Mode AF (p. 73) Mesure de l’exposition (p. 90) Balance des blancs (p. 70) Réglage fin de la balance des blancs Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) (p. 82) Fondu (p. 99) Enregistrement vocal désactivé (p. 99) Les icônes varient en fonction du mode sélectionné ou des options choisies. A propos de l’indicateur de niveau L’indicateur de niveau vous permet d’aligner l’appareil photo par rapport aux lignes horizontale et verticale à l’écran. Si l’indicateur de niveau n’est pas droit, réglez-le à l’aide de la fonction Calibrage horizontal (p. 141). Vertical Horizontal Ÿ Aligné sur l’horizon Ÿ Non aligné sur l’horizon Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser l’indicateur de niveau lors d’une prise de vue en orientation portrait. Enregistrement de vidéos 1 2 1. Informations de prise de vue Icône Description Mode de prise de vue Durée d’enregistrement actuelle / Durée d’enregistrement disponible Multi-mouvements (p. 98) Durée de lecture après application de la fonction Multimouvements Carte mémoire insérée • : recharge complète • : recharge partielle • (Rouge) : vide (recharger la batterie) • : recharge en cours Valeur d’exposition Sensibilité ISO (p. 69) Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran 43 En mode Lecture Affichage de photos Informations Mode F No Déclencheur ISO Mesure de l'exposition Flash Distance focale Balance des blancs EV Format photo Date Icône Description Fichier en cours / Nombre total de fichiers Numéro de dossier-Numéro de fichier Fichier RAW Fichier protégé Photos prises en continu (elles apparaissent sous forme de dossier) (p. 102) 1 2 3 N° Description 1 Photo prise 2 Histogramme RGB (p. 138) 3 Mode Prise de vue, Mesure de l’exposition, Flash, Balance des blancs, Valeur d’ouverture, Vitesse d’obturation, ISO, Longueur de focale, Valeur d’exposition, Format photo, Date Lecture de vidéos Arrêter Lecture Icône Description Fichier en cours / Nombre total de fichiers Vitesse de lecture Numéro de dossier-Numéro de fichier Multi-mouvements Temps de lecture en cours Durée de la vidéo Mon appareil photo > Icônes affichées à l’écran 44 Modification des informations affichées Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur [D] pour changer de type d’affichage. Mode Type d’affichage Prise de vue • Informations de base sur la prise de vue (Mode Prise de vue, Vitesse d’obturation, Valeur d’ouverture, Valeur d’exposition, Sensibilité ISO, etc.) • Informations de base sur la prise de vue + Indicateur de niveau • Informations de base sur la prise de vue + Informations sur les options de la prise de vue en cours (Format photo, Mode de sélection, Flash, Mesure de l’exposition, Mode AF, etc.) • Informations de base sur la prise de vue + Informations sur les options de la prise de vue en cours + Histogramme + Date et heure Lecture • Informations de base • Afficher toutes les informations sur le fichier en cours. • Afficher toutes les informations sur la prise de vue, y compris l’histogramme RGB. Mon appareil photo 45 Objectifs Vous pouvez acheter en option des objectifs exclusivement fabriqués pour l’appareil photo de la gamme NX. Découvrez les fonctions de chaque objectif et choisissez-en un selon vos besoins et vos préférences. Présentation de l’objectif Objectif SAMSUNG 16-50 mm F3.5-5.6 Power Zoom ED OIS (exemple) 1 6 2 3 4 5 N° Description 1 Touche i-Function (p. 39) 2 Repère d'installation de l'objectif 3 Bague de mise au point 4 Objectif 5 Touche de zoom • Appuyez sur la touche de zoom pour régler le rapport de zoom. 6 Contacts de l’objectif Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’objectif, installez le cache de l’objectif ainsi que le cache de la monture afin de protéger l’objectif de la poussière et des rayures. Mon appareil photo > Objectifs 46 Objectif SAMSUNG 20-50 mm F3.5-5.6 ED II (exemple) 7 1 2 3 5 6 4 N° Description 1 Repère d'installation de l'objectif 2 Bouton de verrouillage du zoom 3 Objectif 4 Bague de mise au point (p. 81) 5 Touche i-Function (p. 39) 6 Bague de zoom 7 Contacts de l’objectif Verrouillage et déverrouillage de l’objectif Pour verrouiller l’objectif, déplacez le bouton de verrouillage du zoom vers l’extérieur du boîtier de l’appareil photo tout en le maintenant enfoncé, puis tournez la bague de zoom comme indiqué dans l’illustration. Pour déverrouiller l’objectif, tournez la bague de zoom comme indiqué dans l’illustration jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez le déclic. Il est impossible de prendre une photo si l’objectif est verrouillé. Mon appareil photo > Objectifs 47 Objectif SAMSUNG 16 mm F2.4 (exemple) 5 2 1 4 3 N° Description 1 Touche i-Function (p. 39) 2 Repère d'installation de l'objectif 3 Bague de mise au point (p. 81) 4 Objectif 5 Contacts de l’objectif Mon appareil photo > Objectifs 48 Marquages de l’objectif Découvrez ce que les numéros inscrits sur l’objectif signifient. Objectif SAMSUNG 18-200 mm F3.5-6.3 ED OIS (exemple) 1 2 345 N° Description 1 Valeur d’ouverture Gamme de valeurs d’ouverture prises en charge. Par exemple, 1:3.5–6.3 correspond à une gamme de valeurs maximale d’ouverture allant de 3,5 à 6,3. 2 Longueur de focale Distance entre le centre de l’objectif et son point focal (en millimètres). Cette valeur est exprimée sous forme de plage (longueur minimum à maximum). Des longueurs de focale plus importantes réduisent les angles de vue et agrandissent le sujet. Des longueurs de focale moins élevées agrandissent les angles de vue. 3 ED ED signifie dispersion extra faible (Extra-low Dispersion). Un verre à très faible dispersion assure une excellente correction de l’aberration chromatique (déformation qui se produit lorsqu’un objectif ne parvient pas à mettre au point toutes les couleurs vers le même point de convergence). 4 OIS (p. 82) Stabilisation optique de l’image. Les objectifs bénéficiant de cette fonction détectent les mouvements internes de l’appareil photo et les compensent efficacement. 5 Ø Diamètre de l’objectif. Assurez-vous que le diamètre des filtres que vous fixez sur l’objectif est égal au diamètre de ce dernier. Mon appareil photo 49 Accessoires Vous pouvez utiliser des accessoires, par exemple un flash externe, afin de vous aider à prendre de meilleurs clichés, de façon plus pratique. Pour obtenir davantage d’informations sur les accessoires en option, consultez le mode d’emploi de ceux-ci. • Les illustrations peuvent différer par rapport au produit fourni. • Vous pouvez acheter des accessoires agréés Samsung auprès d’un revendeur ou d’un centre de service après-ventes Samsung. Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages causés par l’utilisation d’accessoires fournis par d’autres fabricants. Présentation du flash externe SEF8A (exemple) (en option) 1 2 3 N° Description 1 Lampe 2 Cadran de fixation de la griffe porte-accessoire 3 Raccordement de la griffe porte-accessoire Mon appareil photo > Accessoires 50 Fixation du flash externe 1 Fixez le flash en le faisant coulisser dans la griffe porteaccessoire. 2 Sécurisez le flash en tournant le cadran de fixation de la griffe porte-accessoire dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre. 3 Soulevez le flash pour l’utiliser. • Vous pouvez prendre une photo avec un flash non entièrement rechargé, mais il est préférable d’en utiliser un dont la charge est complète. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction du mode de prise de vue sélectionné. • Un court laps de temps se déroule entre les deux déclenchements du flash. Ne bougez pas tant que le flash ne s’est pas déclenché une seconde fois. • Le flash SEF8A peut ne pas être compatible avec les autres appareils photo de la série NX. • Pour en savoir plus sur les flashs proposés en option, consultez le mode d’emploi des dispositifs en question. Utilisez uniquement des flashs homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de flashs incompatibles peut endommager l’appareil photo. Mon appareil photo 51 Modes de prise de vue Deux modes de prise de vue simples, les modes Scènes automatiques et Intelligent, vous permettent de réaliser des prises de vue à l’aide de nombreux paramètres automatiques. Des modes supplémentaires vous offrent de plus grandes possibilités de personnalisation des paramètres. Icône Description t Mode Scènes automatiques (p. 52) P Mode Programme (p. 54) A Mode Priorité ouverture (p. 56) S Mode Priorité Vitesse (p. 57) M Mode Manuel (p. 58) s Mode Intelligent (p. 60) R Mode Panorama (p. 62) B Réseau sans fil (p. 113) Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 52 t Mode Scènes automatiques En mode Scènes automatiques, l’appareil photo reconnaît l’environnement dans lequel les prises de vue sont effectuées et règle automatiquement les facteurs liés à l’exposition, notamment la vitesse d’obturation, la valeur d’ouverture, la mesure de l’exposition, la balance des blancs et la compensation de l’exposition. L’appareil photo contrôlant la plupart de ces fonctions, certaines fonctions de prise de vue sont limitées. Ce mode est utile pour prendre rapidement des photos en effectuant le moins de réglages possible. 1 Passez au mode t à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Cadrez le sujet. 3 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course. • L’appareil photo sélectionne une scène. L’icône correspondante apparaît à l’écran. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 53 Scènes reconnaissables Icône Description Paysages Scènes sur fonds blancs éclatants Paysages de nuit Portraits de nuit Paysages à contre-jour Portraits à contre-jour Portraits Plans rapprochés d’objets Plans rapprochés de texte Couchers de soleil Intérieurs, endroits obscurs Eclairage partiel Plans rapprochés avec éclairage au spot Portraits avec éclairage au spot Ciel bleu Icône Description Zones boisées (couleur dominante verte) Plans rapprochés de sujets colorés Appareil photo stabilisé sur un trépied et sujet relativement immobile pendant une durée donnée (lors d’une prise de vue dans des conditions de faible éclairage). Sujets en mouvement 4 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. • Il est possible que l’appareil photo détecte des scènes différentes ou des sujets identiques, en fonction des conditions de prise de vue, telles que le bougé de l’appareil photo, l’éclairage et la distance à laquelle se trouve le sujet. • Si l’appareil photo ne reconnaît pas de mode scénique, il utilise les paramètres par défaut du mode t. • Même lorsqu’un visage est détecté, il est possible que l’appareil photo ne sélectionne pas un mode Portrait, selon la position du sujet ou de l’éclairage. • Même si vous utilisez un trépied, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne détecte pas le mode Trépied ( ) si le sujet est en mouvement. • La batterie de l’appareil photo se décharge plus rapidement, car l’appareil change souvent les paramètres afin de capturer les scènes adéquates. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 54 P Mode Programme L’appareil photo règle automatiquement la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture afin d’atteindre une valeur d’exposition optimale. Ce mode est pratique lorsque vous souhaitez réaliser des prises de vue avec une exposition constante tout en ayant la possibilité de régler d’autres paramètres. 1 Passez au mode P à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Définissez les options de votre choix. 3 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 55 Changement de programme La fonction Changement de programme vous permet de régler la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture tout en conservant la même valeur d’exposition sur l’appareil photo. Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture, puis appuyez sur la touche de navigation pour régler la valeur d’ouverture. La vitesse d’obturation change en fonction de la valeur d’ouverture. Vitesse obturation minimum Réglez la vitesse d’obturation afin qu’elle ne soit pas plus lente que la vitesse sélectionnée. Toutefois, si la valeur d’exposition optimale ne peut être atteinte, car la sensibilité ISO est égale à la valeur ISO maximale définie par l’option Plage ISO auto, la vitesse d’obturation doit être plus lente que la vitesse d’obturation minimum sélectionnée. Pour définir une vitesse d’obturation minimum En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Vitesse obturation minimum ĺ une option. • Cette fonction est disponible uniquement si la sensibilité ISO est réglée sur Automatique. • Cette fonction est disponible uniquement en mode Programme ou Priorité ouverture. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 56 A Mode Priorité ouverture En mode Priorité ouverture, l’appareil photo calcule automatiquement la vitesse d’obturation en fonction de la valeur d’ouverture choisie. Vous pouvez ajuster la profondeur de champ (DOF) en modifiant la valeur d’ouverture. Ce mode est utile pour prendre des portraits ou des photos de fleurs ou de paysages. Profondeur de champ élevée Profondeur de champ réduite 1 Passez au mode A à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la valeur d’ouverture. 3 Tournez la touche de navigation pour régler la valeur d’ouverture. 4 Définissez les options de votre choix. 5 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. • En cas de faible luminosité, il peut s’avérer nécessaire d’augmenter la sensibilité ISO afin d’éviter de prendre des photos floues. • Pour régler la vitesse d’obturation minimum, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Vitesse obturation minimum ĺ une option. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 57 S Mode Priorité Vitesse En mode Priorité Vitesse, l’appareil photo règle automatiquement la valeur d’ouverture en fonction de la vitesse d’obturation choisie. Ce mode est utile pour prendre des photos de sujets en mouvement ou pour créer des effets de vitesse sur une photo. Par exemple, définissez la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur supérieure à 1/500 s afin d’immobiliser le sujet sur l’image. Pour rendre le sujet flou, réglez la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur inférieure à 1/30 s. Vitesse d’obturation lente Vitesse d’obturation rapide 1 Passez au mode S à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la priorité vitesse. 3 Faites pivoter la touche de navigation pour régler la valeur d’obturation. 4 Définissez les options de votre choix. 5 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. Afin de compenser le manque de lumière causé par des vitesses d’obturation rapides, augmentez l’ouverture pour permettre à plus de lumière d’entrer. Si vos photos sont toujours trop sombres, augmentez la valeur ISO. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 58 M Mode Manuel Le mode Manuel vous permet d’ajuster la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture manuellement. Dans ce mode, vous pouvez entièrement contrôler l’exposition de vos photos. Ce mode est utile dans des environnements de prise de vue professionnels, tel qu’un studio, ou lorsqu’il est nécessaire d’affiner les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Le mode Manuel est également recommandé pour les prises de vue de nuit ou les feux d’artifice. 1 Passez au mode M à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la valeur d’ouverture ou la priorité vitesse. 3 Faites pivoter la touche de navigation pour régler la valeur d'ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation. 4 Définissez les options de votre choix. 5 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. Utilisation du mode d’exposition Lorsque vous réglez la valeur d’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation, l’exposition change en fonction des paramètres et l’affichage peut s’assombrir. Lorsque cette fonction est activée, la luminosité de l’écran est constante quels que soient les paramètres choisis, pour vous permettre de mieux cadrer la prise de vue. Pour utiliser le mode d’exposition En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Mode d'exposition ĺ une option. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 59 Utilisation de la fonction Bulb Utilisez la fonction Bulb pour réaliser des prises de vue nocturnes ou pour photographier des ciels étoilés. Pendant l’intervalle de temps entre la première pression sur le [Déclencheur], et la seconde pression sur le [Déclencheur], l’obturateur reste ouvert de façon à pouvoir créer des effets de lumière en mouvement. Pour utiliser un flash de type bulb En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [I] pour sélectionner la vitesse d’obturation ĺ tournez complètement la touche de navigation dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre afin de régler la vitesse d’obturation sur Bulb ĺ appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour démarrer la prise de vue ĺ appuyez à nouveau sur le [Déclencheur] pour arrêter la prise de vue. • Si vous réglez une valeur ISO élevée ou si vous laissez l’obturateur ouvert pendant longtemps, du bruit plus important risque d’apparaître sur l’image. • Les options de prise de vue et de flash ne peuvent pas être utilisées avec la fonction Bulb. • La fonction Bulb est disponible uniquement en mode Manuel. • Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil photo. • Plus l’obturateur reste ouvert, plus l’enregistrement d’une photo est long. N’éteignez pas l’appareil photo lorsque l’enregistrement d’une photo est en cours. • Si vous utilisez cette fonction pendant une durée prolongée, veillez à ce que la batterie soit complètement rechargée. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 60 s Mode intelligent En mode Intelligent, vous pouvez prendre une photo avec des options prédéfinies pour une scène donnée. 1 Passez au mode s à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sélectionnez une scène. Option Description Beauté Faire un portrait avec des options qui gomment les imperfections du visage. Meilleure photo Prendre plusieurs clichés et remplacer les visages pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible. Mode Continu Prendre une série de photos de sujets qui se déplacent. Prise Enfants Prendre une photo avec un son amusant pour attirer l’attention des enfants. Paysage Réaliser des clichés de nature morte ou de paysage. Macro Prendre en photo des petits sujets ou réaliser des gros plans. Option Description Nature morte Prendre en photo des aliments dans des tons plus colorés. Fêtes et intérieurs Prendre des photos d’intérieur nettes. Action Prendre en photo des sujets se déplaçant à grande vitesse. Ton riche Prendre une photo avec des couleurs dynamiques. Cascade Prendre en photo des scènes avec des cascades. Silhouette Prendre en photo des sujets sous forme d’ombres foncées se détachant sur un fond clair. Coucher de soleil Prendre des photos de couchers du soleil avec des tons rouges et jaunes naturels. Nuit Prendre une photo d’une plus grande netteté et avec un bruit réduit, dans des conditions d’éclairage faible. Feux d'artifice Prendre en photo des scènes avec des feux d’artifice. Lumière Prendre en photo des scènes avec des traînées lumineuses dans des conditions de faible luminosité. 3 Pour effectuer la mise au point, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour effectuer la prise de vue. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 61 Utilisation du mode Meilleure photo En mode Meilleure photo, vous pouvez prendre plusieurs clichés et remplacer les visages pour obtenir la meilleure photo possible. Vous avez alors la possibilité de choisir, pour chacun des individus d’une photo de groupe, le meilleur cliché. 1 Passez au mode s à l'aide de la molette de sélection, puis sélectionnez Meilleure photo. 2 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point. 3 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. • L’appareil photo prend 5 photos consécutives. • La première est définie comme arrière-plan. • Les visages sont automatiquement détectés après la mise au point par l’appareil photo. 4 Sélectionnez un visage à remplacer à l’aide de la touche de navigation. Annuler Enregistrer 5 Sélectionnez la meilleure pose pour les 5 visages photographiés. • Répétez les étapes 4 et 5 pour remplacer le reste des visages de la photo. • L’icône apparaît sur l’image recommandée par l’appareil photo. Retour Définir 6 Appuyez sur [f] pour enregistrer la photo. • Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil photo. • La résolution photo est définie sur 5.9M ou à une valeur inférieure. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 62 3 Une fois terminé, relâchez le [Déclencheur]. • L’appareil photo enregistre automatiquement les photos en une seule. • Si vous relâchez le [Déclencheur] au cours de la prise de vue, la vue panoramique s’interrompt et les photos prises sont enregistrées. • La résolution varie en fonction de la photo panoramique que vous avez prise. • En mode Panorama, certaines options de prise de vue ne sont pas disponibles. • L’appareil photo peut cesser de photographier du fait de la composition de la prise de vue ou du déplacement du sujet. • En mode Panorama, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne prenne pas l’intégralité de la dernière scène si vous arrêtez le déplacement de l’objectif pour améliorer la qualité de la photo. Pour prendre une scène entière, déplacez l’appareil photo légèrement au-delà du point final. • Pour optimiser les résultats lors de la prise de photos panoramiques, évitez : - de déplacer l’appareil photo trop rapidement ou trop lentement ; - d’interrompre le déplacement de l’appareil photo avant le cliché suivant ; - de déplacer l’appareil photo à une vitesse irrégulière ; - de secouer l’appareil photo ; - d’effectuer la prise de vue dans un endroit sombre ; - de prendre en photo des sujets en mouvement placés trop près de l’objectif ; - les conditions de prise de vue, où la luminosité et la couleur de la lumière, ne cessent de changer. • Les photos réalisées sont automatiquement sauvegardées et la prise de vue est interrompue dans les circonstances suivantes : - si vous changez de direction en pleine prise de vue ; - si vous bougez l’appareil photo trop rapidement ; - si vous ne bougez pas l’appareil photo. R Mode Panorama En mode Panorama, vous pouvez prendre une large scène panoramique sur une seule photo. Le mode Panorama permet de prendre une série de photos puis de les combiner pour créer une image panoramique. 1 Passez au mode R à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Maintenez le [Déclencheur] enfoncé, puis déplacez lentement l’appareil photo dans la direction souhaitée. • Une flèche indiquant la direction du mouvement apparaît et l’intégralité de l’image prise est affichée dans le champ d’aperçu. • Une fois les scènes alignées, l’appareil photo prend alors le cliché suivant automatiquement. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 63 Enregistrement d’une vidéo En mode Prise de vue, vous pouvez enregistrer des vidéos Full HD (1920X1080) en appuyant sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo). L’appareil photo vous permet de réaliser des vidéos d’une durée de 20 minutes à 30 ips, et enregistre les fichiers au format MP4 (H.264). Le son est enregistré via le microphone de l’appareil photo. Si vous utilisez un objectif dépourvu de commutateur AF / MF pendant l’enregistrement d’une vidéo, appuyez sur [F] pour désactiver ou activer la fonction de mise au point automatique. Lorsque vous utilisez un objectif équipé d’un commutateur AF / MF, la fonction de mise au point automatique s’appuie sur le réglage du commutateur. Sélectionnez Fondu pour appliquer un fondu entrant ou sortant à la scène. Vous pouvez également sélectionner l’option Voix ou toute autre option permettant de paramétrer l’enregistrement (p. 99). 1 Passez au mode t, P, A, S, M ou s à l'aide de la molette de sélection. • Il est possible que cette fonction soit inopérante dans certains modes. 2 Définissez les options de votre choix. 3 Appuyez sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo) pour lancer l’enregistrement. • L’appareil photo maintient la vitesse d’obturation et la valeur d’ouverture définies avant la prise de vue. 4 Appuyez à nouveau sur (mode d’enregistrement vidéo) pour l’arrêter. • Vous pouvez également appuyer sur le [Déclencheur] pour arrêter l’enregistrement. Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 64 • Le format H.264 (MPEG-4 part10 / AVC) est l’un des derniers formats vidéo mis au point par les organismes internationaux de normalisation ISO-IEC et ITU-T et disponible depuis 2003. Sachant que ce format utilise un taux de compression élevé, davantage de données peuvent être enregistrées dans un espace mémoire plus restreint. • Il est possible que l’appareil photo enregistre le son du stabilisateur d’image si vous avez activé cette option ou bien lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo. • Si vous réglez l’objectif alors que l’enregistrement d’une vidéo est en cours, vous risquez d’enregistrer le son émis par le zoom ou l’objectif. • Lorsque vous utilisez un objectif vidéo en option, le son de la mise au point automatique n’est pas enregistré. • Si vous retirez l’objectif de l’appareil photo lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo, l’enregistrement est alors interrompu. Ne changez pas d’objectif lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo. • Si vous modifiez brusquement l’angle de prise de vue lorsque vous réalisez une vidéo, il est possible que l’appareil photo ne puisse pas enregistrer les images de façon précise. Utilisez un trépied pour réduire les mouvements de l’appareil photo. • L’appareil photo prend uniquement en charge la fonction Mise au point multiple lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser d’autres fonctions de réglage de la zone de mise au point. • Lorsque la taille d’un fichier vidéo est supérieure à 4 Go, l’appareil photo interrompt automatiquement l’enregistrement même si la durée maximale d’enregistrement (20 minutes) n’est pas atteinte. • Si vous utilisez une carte mémoire à vitesse d’écriture lente, il est possible que l’enregistrement de la vidéo en cours s’interrompe, car la carte ne parvient pas à traiter un débit de données trop élevé. Si cela se produit, remplacez la carte utilisée par une autre carte à vitesse d’écriture plus rapide, ou bien réduisez la résolution de l’image (par exemple, de 1280X720 à 640X480). • Utilisez toujours l’appareil photo pour formater une carte mémoire. Si vous formatez les fichiers sur un autre appareil photo ou sur un ordinateur, cela peut affecter la capacité d’enregistrement de la carte ou bien causer la perte de fichiers. • Lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo avec la même sensibilité ISO, l’écran peut être plus sombre que lors de la prise d’une photo. Réglez la sensibilité ISO. • Lorsque vous enregistrez une vidéo en mode Programme, Priorité ouverture, ou Priorité vitesse, le paramètre ISO est automatiquement défini sur Automatique . Mon appareil photo > Modes de prise de vue 65 Fonctions disponibles en mode Prise de vue Pour obtenir plus d’informations à propos des fonctions de prise de vue, reportez-vous à la section 2. Fonction Disponible en Format photo (p. 67) Qualité (p. 68) P/A/S/M/s*/t P/A/S/M/s*/R ISO (p. 69) P/A/S/M Balance des blancs (p. 70) P/A/S/M Assistant photo (p. 72) P/A/S/M Filtre intelligent (p. 94) P/A/S/M Mode AF (p. 73) P/A/S/M/s*/R Zone AF (p. 76) P/A/S/M/s* Aide mise au point manuelle (p. 81) P/A/S/M/s/R/t Lien AE à AF (p. 92) P/A/S/M Mode d'exposition (p. 58) P/A/S/M Fonction Disponible en OIS (anti flou de bougé) (p. 82) Prise de vue (Unique/Continue/ P/A/S/M/s*/t Mode Rafale/Retardateur/ Bracketing) (p. 83) P/A/S/M/s*/t* Mesure de l'exposition (p. 90) P/A/S/M Plage dynamique (p. 93) P/A/S/M Flash (p. 88) P*/A*/S*/M*/s*/t* Compensation de l'exposition (p. 95) P/A/S Verrouillage de l’exposition (p. 96) P/A/S * Dans ces modes, certaines fonctions sont limitées. Chapitre 2 Fonctions de prise de vue Découvrez les fonctions que vous pouvez définir en mode Prise de vue. En utilisant les fonctions de prise de vue, vous pouvez personnaliser encore plus vos photos et vos vidéos. Fonctions de prise de vue 67 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Format photo Sélectionner une résolution plus élevée permet d’augmenter le nombre de pixels des photos ou des vidéos afin de pouvoir les imprimer sur du papier grand format ou de les visionner sur un grand écran. Si vous utilisez une résolution élevée, la taille du fichier augmente également. Pour afficher des photos dans un cadre numérique ou en télécharger vers le web, sélectionnez une basse résolution. Pour régler la taille En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Format photo ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Taille Recommandé pour (3:2) 5472x3648* Impression sur papier A1. (3:2) 3888x2592 Impression sur papier A2. (3:2) 2976x1984 Impression sur papier A3. (3:2) 1728x1152 Impression sur papier A5. (16:9) 5472x3080 Impression sur papier A1 ou affichage sur un téléviseur HD. (16:9) 3712x2088 Impression sur papier A3 ou affichage sur un téléviseur HD. (16:9) 2944x1656 Impression sur papier A4 ou affichage sur un téléviseur HD. (16:9) 1920x1080 Impression sur papier A5 ou affichage sur un téléviseur HD. (1:1) 3648x3648 Impression d’une photo carrée sur du papier au format A1. (1:1) 2640x2640 Impression d’une photo carrée sur du papier au format A3. (1:1) 2000x2000 Impression d’une photo carrée sur du papier au format A4. (1:1) 1024x1024 Pièce jointe à un courriel. Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Format et résolution 68 Fonctions de prise de vue > Format et résolution Qualité L’appareil photo enregistre les photos au format JPEG ou RAW. Les photos prises par un appareil numérique sont souvent converties en format JPEG et stockées en mémoire selon les paramètres de l’appareil photo au moment de la prise de vue. Les fichiers RAW ne sont pas convertis au format JPEG et sont stockés en mémoire sans aucune modification. Les fichiers RAW ont pour extension « SRW ». Pour régler et étalonner l’exposition, la balance des blancs, les tonalités, le contraste et les couleurs des fichiers RAW, ou pour les convertir au format JPEG ou TIFF, utilisez le programme Adobe Photoshop Lightroom fourni sur le DVD-ROM. Pour enregistrer des photos en format RAW, assurez-vous que la carte mémoire dispose d’un espace suffisant. Pour définir la qualité En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Qualité ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Format Description JPEG Maximale* : • Compressée afin d’obtenir la meilleure qualité possible. • Recommandé pour imprimer en grand format. JPEG Elevée : • Compressé pour obtenir une meilleure qualité. • Recommandé pour imprimer en format normal. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Format Description JPEG Normale : • Compressé pour obtenir une qualité normale. • Recommandé pour imprimer en petit format ou pour envoyer sur le web. RAW RAW : • Enregistrer une photo sans perte de données. • Recommandé pour effectuer des modifications après la prise de vue. RAW+JPEG RAW + Très élevée : enregistrer une photo au format JPEG (qualité maximale) et RAW. RAW+JPEG RAW + Elevée : enregistrer une photo au format JPEG (qualité Elevée) et RAW. RAW+JPEG RAW + Normale : enregistrer une photo au format JPEG (qualité normale) et RAW. Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Fonctions de prise de vue 69 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue La sensibilité ISO désigne la sensibilité de l’appareil photo à la lumière. Plus la valeur de la sensibilité ISO est importante, plus l’appareil photo est sensible à la lumière. Par conséquent, en sélectionnant une valeur de sensibilité ISO plus élevée, vous pouvez réaliser des prises de vue dans des endroits sombres, en utilisant une vitesse d’obturation supérieure. Néanmoins, il est possible que cela augmente les effets de bruit électronique et donne un aspect granuleux à la photo. Pour définir la sensibilité ISO En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ ISO ĺ une option. Exemples ISO 100 ISO 400 ISO 800 ISO 3200 • Augmentez la valeur ISO dans les endroits où l’utilisation du flash est interdite. En définissant une valeur ISO élevée, vous pouvez obtenir des photos d’une plus grande clarté sans avoir besoin de davantage de lumière. • Afin de réduire le bruit visuel (parasites) qui peut apparaître sur des photos prises avec une valeur ISO élevée, utilisez la fonction Réducteur de bruit (p. 134). • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Sensibilité ISO Fonctions de prise de vue 70 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue En photographie, la balance des blancs permet de corriger la dominante de couleur en fonction de l’éclairage ambiant. La couleur des photos dépend du type et de la qualité de la source d’éclairage. Pour que les couleurs de vos photos soient le reflet de la réalité, choisissez des conditions d’éclairage appropriées pour calibrer la balance des blancs, par exemple Balance des blancs automatique, Lumière du jour, Nuageux, Tungstène, ou bien réglez la température des couleurs manuellement. Vous pouvez également ajuster la couleur des sources de lumière prédéfinies de façon à ce que les couleurs de la photo correspondent aux couleurs véritables de la scène sous différentes conditions d’éclairage. Pour définir une balance des blancs En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Balance des blancs ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description Balance des blancs automatique* : automatiser les paramètres en fonction des conditions d’éclairage. Lumière du jour : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en extérieur par beau temps. Cette option permet d’obtenir des photos reproduisant au mieux les couleurs naturelles d’une scène. Nuageux : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en extérieur par temps nuageux ou dans un endroit ombragé. Les photos prises par temps nuageux ont tendance à présenter une teinte plus bleutée que celles prises par beau temps. Cette option permet de compenser cet effet. Blanc fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue sous un éclairage de type lumière naturelle fluorescente, en particulier celle de couleur blanche. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description N Blanc/Noir fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue sous un éclairage de type lumière naturelle fluorescente, en particulier celle aux tonalités de blanc très prononcé. D Lumière du jour fluorescent : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue sous un éclairage de type lumière naturelle fluorescente, en particulier celle de couleur blanche avec une teinte légèrement bleue. Tungstène : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue en intérieur avec des ampoules à incandescence ou des lampes halogène. Les ampoules tungstène incandescentes ont tendance à ajouter une tonalité rougeâtre. Cette option permet de compenser cet effet. Balance des blancs flash : sélectionner cette option lors de prises de vue à l’aide d’un flash. Réglage personnalisé : utiliser vos paramètres prédéfinis. Vous pouvez définir manuellement la balance des blancs en appuyant sur [D], et en prenant une feuille de papier blanc en photo. Remplir le cercle de mesure de l’exposition sélective avec la feuille de papier et définir la balance des blancs. Température couleur : régler manuellement la température des couleurs de la source lumineuse. La température des couleurs est une mesure exprimée en degrés kelvins et qui indique spécifiquement le type de source lumineuse. Il est possible d’obtenir une photo plus chaleureuse à l’aide d’une valeur élevée, et une photo moins chaleureuse à l’aide d’une valeur plus basse. Appuyez sur [D], puis réglez la température de couleur. Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Balance des blancs 71 Fonctions de prise de vue > Balance des blancs Personnalisation des options de préréglage de la balance des blancs Vous pouvez également personnaliser les options prédéfinies de balance des blancs. Pour personnaliser les options prédéfinies En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Balance des blancs ĺ une option ĺ [D] ĺ appuyez sur [D/I/C/F]. Balance des blancs : Lumière du jour Retour Réinitialiser Exemples Balance des blancs automatique Lumière du jour Lumière du jour fluorescent Tungstène Fonctions de prise de vue 72 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue L’assistant photo vous permet d’appliquer des styles à vos photos afin de leur faire adopter différents aspects et créer des impressions particulières. Vous pouvez également créer et enregistrer vos propres styles de photos en réglant la couleur, la saturation, la netteté et le contraste pour chacun de ces styles. L’application de différents styles ne suit aucune règle particulière, quelles que soient les conditions. Essayez plusieurs styles différents et trouvez les paramètres qui vous conviennent. Pour définir un style de photo En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Assistant photo ĺ une option. Exemples Standard Accentué Portrait Paysage Naturel Rétro Cool Calme Classique • Vous pouvez également régler les valeurs des paramètres de styles prédéfinis. Sélectionnez une option de l’Assistant photo, appuyez sur [D], puis réglez la couleur, la saturation, la netteté ou le contraste. • Pour personnaliser l’Assistant photo, sélectionnez , ou , puis réglez la couleur, la saturation, la netteté et le contraste. • Il est impossible de régler en même temps les options de l’Assistant photo et les options de Filtre intelligent. Assistant photo (styles de photo) Fonctions de prise de vue 73 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Mode AF Voici comment régler la mise au point de l’appareil photo en fonction des sujets. Vous pouvez sélectionner un mode de mise au point adapté au sujet, parmi les modes de Mise au point automatique unique, Mise au point automatique continue et Mise au point manuelle. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, la fonction de mise au point automatique s’active. En mode Mise au point manuelle, vous devez tourner la bague de mise au point sur l’objectif. Dans la plupart des cas, vous pouvez effectuer une mise au point en sélectionnant AF unique. Il est difficile d’effectuer une mise au point sur des sujets se déplaçant rapidement ou ayant des effets d’ombre subtils différents de ceux de l’arrière-plan. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez un mode de mise au point approprié. Si votre objectif est équipé d’un commutateur AF / MF, vous devez le régler en fonction du mode sélectionné. Réglez le commutateur sur AF lorsque vous sélectionnez les options AF unique ou AF continu. Réglez le commutateur sur MF lorsque vous sélectionnez l’option Mise au point manuelle. Si votre objectif est dépourvu de commutateur AF / MF, appuyez sur [F] pour sélectionner le mode AF souhaité. Pour définir le mode de mise au point automatique En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [F] ĺ une option. • Vous pouvez également effectuer ce réglage en appuyant sur [m] ĺ b ĺ Mode AF ĺ option choisie en mode Prise de vue. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction l’objectif utilisé. 74 Fonctions de prise de vue > Mode AF AF unique La fonction AF unique est appropriée pour les photos de sujets immobiles. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, la mise au point s’établit dans la zone correspondante. Une fois la mise au point effectuée, la zone devient verte. AF continu Tant que vous enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo continue d’effectuer la mise au point automatique. Ce mode est recommandé pour photographier une personne sur une bicyclette, un chien qui court ou une course automobile. 75 Fonctions de prise de vue > Mode AF Mise au point manuelle Vous pouvez effectuer manuellement la mise au point sur un sujet en tournant la bague de mise au point sur l’objectif. La fonction Aide mise au point manuelle vous permet d’effectuer facilement la mise au point. Lorsque vous tournez la bague de mise au point, la zone de mise au point est agrandie. Ce mode est recommandé pour photographier un objet dont la couleur est similaire à celle de l’arrière-plan, une scène de nuit ou un feu d’artifice. • Si vous utilisez cette fonction, vous ne pouvez pas régler les options Détection des visages, Zone AF et Lien AE à AF. • Tandis que vous réglez la mise au point, l’échelle de la mise au point manuelle ( ) apparaît. Fonctions de prise de vue 76 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue La fonction Zone AF permet de modifier l’emplacement de la zone de mise au point. D’une manière générale, les appareils photo effectuent une mise au point sur le sujet le plus proche. En présence de plusieurs sujets, il arrive que certains sujets soient involontairement mis au point. Vous pouvez modifier l’emplacement de la zone de mise au point afin d’éviter qu’une mise au point porte sur des sujets non choisis. En sélectionnant une zone de mise au point appropriée, vous pouvez obtenir une photo plus claire et plus nette. Pour définir la zone de mise au point automatique En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Zone AF ĺ une option. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. • Lorsque le commutateur AF / MF est réglé sur MF, vous ne pouvez pas modifier l’option Zone AF à partir du menu Prise de vue. Mise au point sélection Vous pouvez définir la mise au point sur une zone en particulier. Appliquez un effet hors-mise au point afin de faire ressortir le sujet. La zone de mise au point de la photo ci-dessous a été repositionnée et sa taille a été modifiée afin de l’adapter au visage du sujet. Taille AF Déplacer En mode Prise de vue, afin de redimensionner ou de déplacer la zone de mise au point, appuyez sur [o]. Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour déplacer la zone de mise au point. Tournez la touche de navigation pour redimensionner la zone de mise au point. Zone AF 77 Fonctions de prise de vue > Zone AF Mise au point multiple L’appareil photo affiche un rectangle vert sur les zones de la photo où la mise au point est correctement effectuée. La photo est divisée en au moins deux zones et l’appareil photo effectue une mise au point sur chaque zone. Ceci est recommandé pour les photos de paysages. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo affiche les zones de mise au point, comme illustré sur la photo ci-dessous. Mise au point avec suivi Composez votre prise de vue et appuyez sur [o] pour effectuer la mise au point sur le sujet. La mise au point avec suivi permet de suivre un sujet et d’effectuer automatiquement la mise au point, même si le sujet se déplace ou en cas de changement de cadrage de la prise de vue. Cadre blanc : l’appareil photo effectue un suivi. Cadre vert : la mise au point est effectuée lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course. Cadre rouge : l’appareil photo ne parvient pas à effectuer la mise au point. 78 Fonctions de prise de vue > Zone AF • Si aucune zone de mise au point n’a été sélectionnée, le cadre apparaît au centre de l’écran. • Le suivi peut s’avérer impossible si : - le sujet est trop petit ; - le sujet bouge de manière irrégulière ; - le sujet est à contre-jour ou si la luminosité est insuffisante ; - les couleurs ou les motifs sur le sujet et l’arrière-plan sont identiques ; - des motifs horizontaux, tels que des stores, sont présents ; - l’appareil photo n’est pas stable ; - vous prenez des photos en continu. • Lorsque le suivi ne parvient pas à s’effectuer, la fonctionnalité est réinitialisée. • Si l’appareil photo ne parvient pas à suivre le sujet, la zone de mise au point est réinitialisée. • Si l’appareil photo ne réussit pas à effectuer la mise au point, le cadre de mise au point devient rouge et la fonctionnalité est réinitialisée. Fonctions de prise de vue 79 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Détection des visages Utilisez les options de Détection des visages pour faire un autoportrait ou un visage souriant. Pour utiliser la fonction de détection des visages En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Détection des visages ĺ une option. • Lorsque l’appareil photo détecte un visage, il suit automatiquement le visage détecté. • Selon les options sélectionnées dans l’Assistant photo, la détection des visages peut ne pas être efficace. • Lors d’une mise au point manuelle, la détection des visages peut ne pas être possible. • La détection des visages risque de ne pas fonctionner lorsque : - le sujet est éloigné de l’appareil photo ; - la luminosité est trop forte ou trop faible ; - le sujet n’est pas face à l’appareil photo ; - le sujet porte des lunettes de soleil ou un masque ; - les expressions faciales du sujet changent radicalement ; - le sujet est à contre-jour ou les conditions d’éclairage sont instables. • Lorsque vous définissez les options Détection des visages, la zone AF est automatiquement réglée sur Mise au point multiple. • Selon les options de Détection des visages que vous avez sélectionnées, il est possible que certaines options de prise de vue ne soient pas disponibles. Normale L’appareil photo effectue une mise au point en priorité sur les visages. Il peut détecter jusqu’à 10 visages. Ce paramètre est recommandé pour les photos de groupe. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, l’appareil photo effectue une mise au point sur les visages, comme cela est présenté sur la photo ci-dessous. Lors d’une prise de vue d’un groupe de personnes, la mise au point effectuée avec l’appareil photo sur le visage de la personne la plus proche s’affiche en blanc tandis que celle effectuée sur les autres personnes s’affiche en gris. 80 Fonctions de prise de vue > Détection des visages Clin d’œil L’appareil photo déverrouille automatiquement le déclencheur 2 secondes après avoir détecté un clin d’œil. • Clignez des yeux pendant plus de 1 seconde pour une meilleure détection. • La détection des clignements des yeux peut échouer si : - l’appareil photo n’est pas aligné par rapport au niveau des yeux ; - le sujet est dans l’ombre ; - le sujet porte des lunettes ; - le sujet est éloigné de l’appareil photo. Sourire L’appareil photo déverrouille automatiquement le déclencheur lorsqu’il détecte un visage souriant. Lorsque votre sujet a un grand sourire, il est plus facile pour l’appareil photo de le détecter. Fonctions de prise de vue 81 Fonctions de Fonctions de prise de vue prise de vue En mode Mise au point manuelle, vous devez tourner la bague de mise au point sur l’objectif afin d’effectuer la mise au point. Avec la fonction Aide mise au point manuelle, vous pouvez agrandir la scène et facilement effectuer la mise au point tout en tournant la bague de mise au point. Cette fonction est disponible uniquement sur les objectifs avec lesquels la mise au point manuelle est possible. Pour définir l’aide à la mise au point manuelle En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Aide mise au point manuelle ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description Désactivé : ne pas utiliser la fonction Aide mise au point manuelle. Agrandir x5* : lorsque vous effectuez la mise au point, la zone de mise au point est grossie jusqu’à 5 fois. Agrandir x8 : lorsque vous effectuez la mise au point, la zone de mise au point est grossie jusqu’à 8 fois. Aide mise au point manuelle Fonctions de prise de vue 82 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Utilisez la fonction OIS (stabilisation optique de l’image) pour réduire le bougé de l’appareil photo. La fonction OIS peut ne pas être disponible avec certains objectifs. Le bougé de l’appareil photo tend à se produire dans les endroits sombres ou lors de la prise de vue en intérieur. Dans ces cas-là, l’appareil photo utilise une vitesse d’obturation plus lente afin d’augmenter la quantité de lumière qui pénètre dans l’objectif, ce qui peut donner des photos floues. Vous pouvez éviter ce type de situations en utilisant la fonction OIS. Si l’objectif est équipé d’un interrupteur OIS, positionnez-le sur ON pour utiliser la fonction OIS. Pour définir les options OIS En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ OIS (anti flou de bougé) ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description Mode 1* : la fonction OIS s’applique uniquement lorsque vous enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à fond ou à mi-course. Mode 2 : la fonction OIS est activée. Désactivé : la fonction OIS est désactivée. Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) Sans correction OIS Avec correction OIS • L’option OIS risque de ne pas fonctionner si : - vous bougez l’appareil photo pour suivre un sujet en mouvement ; - l’appareil photo est instable ; - la vitesse d’obturation est lente (par exemple, si vous sélectionnez Nuit en mode s) ; - le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible ; - vous prenez une photo en gros plan. • Si la fonction OIS est utilisée avec un trépied, les photos peuvent être floues en raison des vibrations du capteur OIS. Désactivez la fonction OIS lorsque vous utilisez un trépied. • Si l’appareil photo est soumis à un choc, l’affichage devient flou. Si cela se produit, éteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le. • Utilisez la fonction OIS uniquement si cela est nécessaire, car la batterie se décharge plus rapidement. • Pour définir une option OIS dans le menu, réglez l’interrupteur OIS de l’objectif sur ON. • Cette option peut ne pas être disponible avec certains objectifs. • La position Désactivé peut ne pas être disponible avec certains objectifs. Fonctions de prise de vue 83 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Il vous est possible de définir le type de prise de vue, par exemple Continue, Mode Rafale, Retardateur ou Bracketing. Sélectionnez Unique pour prendre une photo à la fois. Sélectionnez Continue ou Mode Rafale pour prendre des photos de sujets se déplaçant rapidement. Sélectionnez BKT AE, BKT NB, A. photo Bracketing ou Bracketing de profondeur de champ pour régler l’exposition, la balance des blancs, appliquer des effets de l’assistant photo ou prendre des photos avec différentes profondeurs de champ. Vous pouvez également sélectionner Retardateur pour prendre automatiquement une photo à l’issue d’une durée particulière. Pour modifier la méthode de prise de vue En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C] ĺ une option. • Vous pouvez également effectuer ce réglage en appuyant sur [m] ĺb ĺ Prise de vue ĺ une option en mode Prise de vue. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Unique Prenez une photo à chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. Recommandé pour des conditions de prise de vue courantes. Prise de vue (type) 84 Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type) Continue Prenez des photos en continu en appuyant sur le [Déclencheur]. Vous pouvez prendre jusqu’à 5 photos par seconde. • Si vous sélectionnez Continue, la fonction de réduction du bruit n’est pas disponible. • La vitesse maximale de prise de vue est de 5 images par seconde. Elle ralentira au bout environ de 13 clichés au format JPEG et de 5 clichés au format RAW. (Cela peut varier en fonction des caractéristiques techniques de la carte mémoire.) Mode Rafale Prenez successivement 10 photos par seconde (3 secondes), 15 photos par seconde (2 secondes) ou 30 photos par seconde (1 seconde) lorsque vous appuyez une fois sur le [Déclencheur]. Cette fonctionnalité est recommandée pour prendre des photos de mouvements rapides ou de sujets se déplaçant rapidement, par exemple lors de courses automobiles. • Pour définir le nombre de clichés, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C] → Mode Rafale, puis appuyez sur [D]. • Le format photo est réglé sur 5M. • L’enregistrement d’une photo peut prendre plus de temps. • Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le flash avec cette option. • La vitesse d’obturation doit être supérieure à 1/30 seconde. • Les photos capturées avec cette option peuvent être légèrement agrandies lors de l’enregistrement. • Vous ne pouvez pas régler l’option ISO à une valeur supérieure à ISO 3200. • Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW. 85 Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type) Retardateur Prenez une photo à l’issue d’une durée particulière. Vous pouvez régler le retardateur sur un délai compris entre 2 et 30 secondes. • Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour interrompre la prise de vue. • Pour définir les détails du retardateur, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [C] ĺ Retardateur, puis appuyez sur [D]. Bracketing Exposition automatique (BKT AE) Après avoir appuyé sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo prend 3 photos consécutives : l’originale, une un peu plus sombre et une autre un peu plus claire. Utilisez un trépied afin d’éviter d’obtenir un résultat flou lors de la prise continue des trois clichés par l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez régler les paramètres dans le menu Réglage Bracketing. Exposition -2 Original Exposition +2 Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option. 86 Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type) Bracketing Balance des blancs (BKT NB) Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo prend 3 photos consécutives : l’originale et deux autres avec des paramètres de balance des blancs différents. La photo originale est réalisée lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. Les deux autres sont réglées automatiquement en fonction de la balance des blancs que vous avez définie. Vous pouvez régler les paramètres dans le menu Réglage Bracketing. WB-2 Original WB+2 • Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option. • Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW. Bracketing Assistant photo (A. photo Bracketing) Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo réalise trois clichés consécutifs, chacun avec différents paramètres de l’assistant photo. L’appareil photo effectue une prise de vue et applique les trois options de l’assistant photo que vous avez définies pour la photo prise. Vous pouvez sélectionner trois paramètres différents dans le menu Réglage Bracketing. Accentué Standard Rétro • Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option. • Cette option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le format de fichier RAW et n’est pas disponible lorsque la qualité d’image est réglée sur RAW. 87 Fonctions de prise de vue > Prise de vue (type) Bracketing de profondeur de champ Lorsque vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo réalise trois clichés consécutifs, chacun avec une profondeur différente en ajustant la valeur d’ouverture. Utilisez un trépied afin d’éviter d’obtenir un résultat flou lors de la prise continue des trois clichés par l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez régler les paramètres dans le menu Réglage Bracketing. • Pour définir les détails de la fonction bracketing, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ Réglage Bracketing ĺ une option. • Cette fonction est disponible uniquement en mode Programme ou Priorité ouverture. • Si la valeur d’ouverture est réglée au maximum ou au minimum, deux photos seront prises avec la valeur d’ouverture maximum ou minimum. Fonctions de prise de vue 88 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Pour obtenir une photo réaliste du sujet, la quantité de lumière doit être constante. Lorsque la source de luminosité varie, vous pouvez utiliser un flash pour obtenir une quantité de lumière stable. Sélectionnez des paramètres appropriés en fonction d’une source de lumière et d’un sujet. Pour définir les options du flash En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Flash ĺ une option. Icône Description Désactivé : ne pas utiliser le flash. A Flash intelligent : l’appareil photo règle automatiquement l’intensité du flash en fonction de la quantité de lumière ambiante. A Automatique : le flash se déclenche automatiquement dans les endroits sombres. Yeux rouges auto : le flash se déclenche automatiquement et réduit l’effet yeux rouges. Contre jour : le flash se déclenche chaque fois que vous prenez une photo. (La luminosité est automatiquement ajustée.) Ctre jour + Yeux rouges : le flash se déclenche et réduit l’effet yeux rouges chaque fois que vous prenez une photo. 1er Rideau : le flash se déclenche immédiatement après l’ouverture de l’obturateur. L’appareil photo capture plus rapidement et plus nettement la photo d’un sujet au cours d’un mouvement. Direction du déplacement de la boule Icône Description 2e Rideau : le flash se déclenche juste avant que l’obturateur ne se referme. L’appareil photo prend plus lentement et plus clairement la photo d’un sujet au cours d’un mouvement. Direction du déplacement de la boule • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. • Un court laps de temps se déroule entre les deux déclenchements du flash. Ne bougez pas tant que le flash ne s’est pas déclenché une seconde fois. • Si vous sélectionnez Désactivé, le flash ne se déclenche pas même si un flash externe est installé. Utilisez uniquement des flashs homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de flashs externes incompatibles peut endommager l’appareil photo. Flash 89 Fonctions de prise de vue > Flash Réduction de l’effet yeux rouges Si le flash se déclenche lorsque vous photographiez une personne dans un endroit sombre, il est possible qu’une lueur rouge apparaisse dans ses yeux. Pour réduire l’effet yeux rouges, sélectionnez Yeux rouges auto ou Ctre jour + Yeux rouges. Sans réduction des yeux rouges Avec réduction des yeux rouges Si le sujet est trop éloigné de l’appareil photo ou se déplace lorsque le flash se déclenche, il se peut que l’effet yeux rouges ne soit pas corrigé. Réglage de l’intensité du flash Lorsque le flash est activé, réglez son intensité de ±2 niveaux. Pour définir l’intensité du flash En mode Prise de vue, sélectionnez [m] ĺb ĺ Flash ĺ une option ĺ [D] ĺ tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler l’intensité du flash. Retour Réinitialiser Flash : Contre jour • Le réglage de l’intensité du flash risque d’être sans effet si : - le sujet est trop près de l’appareil photo ; - vous avez sélectionné une sensibilité ISO élevée ; - la valeur d’exposition est trop élevée ou trop faible; - la luminosité est trop forte ou trop faible. • Dans certains modes de prise de vue, cette fonction n’est pas accessible. • Si vous fixez sur l’appareil photo un flash externe à intensité variable, les paramètres d’intensité de ce dernier s’appliquent. • Si le sujet est trop rapproché lorsque vous utilisez le flash, cela peut refléter la lumière et assombrir la photo. Vérifiez que le sujet est situé à la distance recommandée, qui peut varier selon l’objectif utilisé. • L’utilisation d’un parasoleil peut bloquer la lumière du flash. Retirez le parasoleil pour utiliser le flash. Fonctions de prise de vue 90 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Le mode de mesure de l’exposition correspond à la manière dont l’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière. L’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière, puis utilise cette mesure dans de nombreux modes afin de régler divers paramètres. Par exemple, si un sujet semble plus foncé qu’il ne l’est en réalité, l’appareil photo effectue une prise de vue surexposée de ce sujet. Si un sujet semble plus clair qu’il ne l’est en réalité, l’appareil photo effectue une prise de vue sous-exposée de ce sujet. La luminosité et l’ambiance générale de la photo peuvent également être affectées par la façon dont l’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière. Sélectionnez des paramètres appropriés pour chaque type de conditions de prise de vue. Pour définir une option de mesure de l’exposition En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Mesure de l'exposition ĺ une option. Multiple Le mode Multiple calcule la quantité de lumière dans différentes zones. Lorsque la lumière est suffisante, ou lorsqu’elle ne l’est pas, l’appareil photo règle l’exposition en équilibrant la luminosité générale de la scène. Ce mode est adapté aux photos courantes. Mesure de l’exposition 91 Fonctions de prise de vue > Mesure de l’exposition Centrée Le mode Centrée effectue des calculs sur une zone plus large qu’en mode Sélective. Il détermine la quantité de lumière dans la partie centrale de la photo (60 – 80%) ainsi que sur le reste de la photo (20 – 40%). Ce mode est recommandé dans les cas où la différence de luminosité entre un sujet et un arrière-plan est faible, ou qu’une partie du sujet est grande au regard de la composition générale de la photo. Sélective La mesure Sélective calcule la quantité de lumière au centre. Lorsque vous réalisez une prise de vue dans des conditions de fort contre-jour derrière un sujet, l’appareil photo règle l’exposition afin de capturer correctement ce dernier. Par exemple, lorsque vous sélectionnez le mode Multiple dans des conditions de fort contre-jour, l’appareil photo considère que la quantité globale de lumière est élevée, ce qui assombrit la photo. Le mode Sélective permet d’éviter cette situation, car la quantité de lumière est calculée dans une zone définie. Le sujet est clair alors que l’arrière plan est sombre. Le mode Sélective est recommandé dans un cas comme celui-ci, qui présente une différence d’exposition importante entre un sujet et un arrière-plan. 92 Fonctions de prise de vue > Mesure de l’exposition Mesure de la valeur d’exposition de la zone de mise au point Lorsque cette fonction est activée, l’appareil photo applique automatiquement une exposition optimale en calculant la luminosité de la zone de mise au point. Cette option est disponible uniquement si vous sélectionnez la mesure de l’exposition Sélective ou Multiple, et l’option Mise au point sélection. Pour appliquer cette fonction En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Lien AE à AF ĺ une option. Fonctions de prise de vue 93 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Cette fonction corrige automatiquement la perte de luminosité due à des différences de niveaux d’exposition sur la photo. Pour définir les options de Plage dynamique En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Plage dynamique ĺ une option. Sans effet de plage dynamique Avec effet de plage dynamique * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description Désactivé* : ne pas utiliser la Plage dynamique. Plage intelligente+ : corriger la perte de luminosité. HDR : prendre 3 photos avec différentes expositions, puis les associer afin de créer automatiquement une image unique. • Vous ne pouvez pas régler l’option ISO à une valeur supérieure à ISO 3200. • Cette option ne peut pas être définie avec des options de prise de vue autres que Unique ou Retardateur. Les options Plage dynamique ne peuvent pas être réglées avec la fonction Bulb. Plage dynamique Fonctions de prise de vue 94 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Le filtre intelligent vous permet d’appliquer des effets spéciaux à vos photos ou vidéos. Vous pouvez sélectionner diverses options de filtre pour créer des effets spéciaux difficiles à obtenir avec des objectifs normaux. Pour appliquer les options de filtre intelligent En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺb ĺ Filtre intelligent ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Désactivé* Aucun effet Vignettage Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un fort contraste et un effet de dégradé intense, caractéristiques des appareils Lomo. Miniature Appliquer un effet de plongée pour que le sujet apparaisse plus petit. Esquisse Appliquer un effet d’esquisse au crayon. Œil de poisson Déformer les objets en gros plan pour imiter l’effet visuel d’un objectif ultra grand angle. Il est impossible de régler en même temps les options du Filtre intelligent et les options de l’Assistant photo. Filtre intelligent Fonctions de prise de vue 95 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue L’appareil photo définit automatiquement l’exposition en mesurant les niveaux de lumière à partir de la composition d’une photo et de la position d’un sujet. Si la valeur d’exposition définie par l’appareil photo est plus élevée ou plus basse que celle que vous attendiez, vous pouvez alors la régler manuellement. La valeur d’exposition peut être réglée en faisant varier les valeurs de ±3. L’appareil photo affiche un message d’avertissement en rouge pour chaque niveau d’exposition au-delà d’une plage de ±3. Pour régler la valeur d’exposition, appuyez sur [f], puis sélectionnez EV. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [I] pour sélectionner la valeur d’exposition et tournez la touche de navigation pour effectuer le réglage. Vous pouvez vérifier la valeur d’exposition par rapport à l’indicateur de niveau d’exposition. Indicateur de niveau d’exposition Exposition augmentée (plus clair) Exposition réduite (plus sombre) Mise en garde à propos de l’exposition Indice d’exposition standard -2 Original +2 Compensation de l’exposition Fonctions de prise de vue 96 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Si vous ne parvenez pas à obtenir une exposition adéquate à cause d’un fort contraste de luminosité, verrouillez l’exposition, puis prenez la photo. Pour verrouiller l’exposition, définissez les éléments de la photo sur lesquels vous souhaitez calculer le niveau d’exposition et appuyez sur la touche de personnalisation. (lorsque la fonction de la touche de personnalisation est réglée sur AEL) (p. 139) Une fois l’exposition verrouillée, pointez l’objectif sur le sujet et appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. Verrouillage de l’exposition Fonctions de prise de vue 97 Fonctions Fonctions de prise de vue de prise de vue Les fonctions vidéo disponibles sont présentées ci-dessous. Format vidéo Définissez le format vidéo. Pour définir les options du format vidéo En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ Format vidéo ĺ une option. Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur NTSC * Paramètre par défaut Icône Taille Recommandé pour * 1920X1080 (30 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur Full HD. 1280X720 (30 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD. 640X480 (30 ips) (4:3) Visionner sur un téléviseur. 320X240 (30 ips) (4:3) Publier sur un site Web via un réseau sans fil (30 secondes maximum). Lorsque Vidéo est réglée sur PAL * Paramètre par défaut Icône Taille Recommandé pour * 1920X1080 (25 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur Full HD. 1280X720 (25 ips) (16:9) Visionner sur un téléviseur HD. 640X480 (25 ips) (4:3) Visionner sur un téléviseur. 320X240 (25 ips) (4:3) Publier sur un site Web via un réseau sans fil (30 secondes maximum). Fonctions vidéo 98 Fonctions de prise de vue > Fonctions vidéo Qualité vidéo Définissez la qualité vidéo à utiliser. Pour définir les options de la qualité vidéo En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ Qualité vidéo ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Extension Description MP4 (H.264) Normale : enregistrer des vidéos en qualité normale. MP4 (H.264) HQ* : enregistrer des vidéos en haute qualité. Multi-mouvements Régler la vitesse de lecture d’une vidéo. Pour définir les options de vitesse de lecture En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ Multi-mouvements ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description x0.25 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner au 1/4 de la vitesse normale. (Disponible uniquement à la résolution 640x480 ou 320x240) x1* : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale. x5 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale X 5. x10 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale X 10. x20 : enregistrer une vidéo et la visionner à la vitesse normale X 20. • Si vous sélectionnez une option différente de x1, la fonction d’enregistrement audio n’est pas prise en charge. • Les options disponibles peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. 99 Fonctions de prise de vue > Fonctions vidéo Voix Il arrive parfois que certaines vidéos muettes soient plus attractives que celles filmées avec le son. Désactivez l’enregistrement vocal afin de réaliser une vidéo muette. Pour définir les options de voix En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ Voix ĺ une option. Fondu Vous pouvez appliquer un fondu au début ou à la fin d’une scène en utilisant la fonction de fondu sur l’appareil photo, sans avoir recours à un ordinateur. Appliquez l’effet de fondu entrant pour qu’une scène commence progressivement par cet effet. Appliquez l’effet de fondu sortant pour qu’une scène se termine progressivement par cet effet. Utilisez cette fonction de manière appropriée pour vous permettre d’ajouter des effets spectaculaires à vos vidéos. Pour définir les options de fondu En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺgĺ Fondu ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Icône Description Désactivé* : fonction de fondu non utilisée. Entrant : la scène est fondue progressivement en début de séquence. Sortant : la scène est fondue progressivement en fin de séquence. Entrant-Sortant : le fondu est appliqué au début et à la fin de la scène. Lorsque la fonction de fondu est utilisée, l’enregistrement d’un fichier peut prendre plus de temps. Chapitre 3 Lecture / Retouche Voici comment lire et retoucher des photos et des vidéos. Pour retoucher des fichiers sur un ordinateur, reportez-vous à la section 6. 101 Lecture / Retouche Voici comment afficher les miniatures de vos photos et vidéos, et comment protéger ou supprimer des fichiers. Si vous n’effectuez aucune opération pendant un certain temps, les informations et icônes à l’écran disparaissent. Ces éléments réapparaissent lorsque vous réutilisez l’appareil photo. Affichage de photos 1 Appuyez sur [y]. • Le fichier capturé le plus récent s’affiche. 2 Tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [C/F] pour parcourir les fichiers. Il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas modifier ou reproduire des fichiers capturés avec d’autres appareils photo en raison de tailles ou de codecs non pris en charge. Utilisez un ordinateur ou un autre dispositif pour modifier ou reproduire ces fichiers. Affichage des images sous forme de miniatures Pour rechercher des photos et des vidéos de votre choix, convertissez-les en vues Miniatures en appuyant sur [I] en mode Lecture. L’affichage sous forme de miniatures permet de visionner plusieurs images à la fois afin de parcourir et de trouver facilement les éléments que vous recherchez. Vous pouvez également classer et afficher les fichiers par catégorie, telles que la date ou le type de fichier. 7X4 Miniature En vue Miniatures, appuyez sur [f] pour sélectionner le mode vue Miniatures. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [m] ĺz ĺ Afficher ĺ un élément, pour sélectionner le mode vue Miniatures. Recherche et gestion de fichiers 102 Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers Affichage de fichiers par catégorie 1 En vue Miniatures, appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Filtrer ĺ une catégorie. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Tout* Afficher les fichiers normalement. Date Afficher les fichiers en fonction de leur date d’enregistrement. Type de fichier Afficher les fichiers par type. 2 Sélectionnez une liste afin de l’ouvrir. 3 Sélectionnez un fichier afin de l’afficher. Visionnage de fichiers sous forme de dossiers Les prises de vues en continue et en rafale apparaissent sous forme de dossiers. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un dossier, toutes les photos sont automatiquement lues. La suppression d’un dossier entraîne celle de toutes les photos qu’il contient. 1 En mode Lecture, tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [C/F] pour accéder au dossier voulu. • L’appareil photo lit automatiquement les photos contenues dans le dossier. Vue unique 2 Appuyez sur [o] pour ouvrir le dossier. 3 Tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [C/F] pour passer à un autre fichier. 4 Appuyez sur [f] pour revenir au mode Lecture. 103 Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers Protection de fichiers Protégez vos fichiers contre toute suppression accidentelle. 1 En mode Lecture, faites défiler l’affichage pour atteindre un fichier. 2 Appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Protéger ĺ Activé. • Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer ou faire pivoter un fichier protégé. • Pour les photos enregistrées sous forme de dossier, protéger un dossier permet également de protéger les photos qu’il contient. Suppression de fichiers En mode Lecture, supprimez des fichiers pour gagner de l’espace sur la carte mémoire. Les fichiers protégés ne sont pas supprimés. Suppression d’un seul fichier Vous pouvez sélectionner un seul fichier et le supprimer. 1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez un fichier et appuyez sur [n]. 2 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui. 104 Lecture / Retouche > Recherche et gestion de fichiers Suppression de plusieurs fichiers Vous pouvez effectuer une sélection multiple de fichiers pour les supprimer. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Supprimer ĺ Suppression multiple. • Vous pouvez également, en mode Miniatures, appuyer sur [n], puis sélectionner les fichiers à supprimer. 2 Sélectionnez les fichiers à supprimer en faisant tourner la touche de navigation ou en appuyant sur [C/F], puis en appuyant sur [o]. • Appuyez sur [o] à nouveau pour annuler votre sélection. 3 Appuyez sur [n]. 4 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui. Suppression de tous les fichiers Vous pouvez supprimer tous les fichiers de la carte mémoire en même temps. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m]. 2 Sélectionnez z ĺ Supprimer ĺ Supprimer tout. 3 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui. 105 Lecture / Retouche Agrandissement d’une photo En mode Lecture, vous pouvez agrandir les photos lorsque vous les visualisez. Appuyez sur [o], puis tournez la touche de navigation pour agrandir ou réduire une photo. Appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour déplacer la zone d’agrandissement. Vous pouvez également utiliser la fonction Recadrer afin d’extraire une partie de l’image affichée sur l’écran et d’enregistrer la photo découpée en tant que nouveau fichier. Zone agrandie Agrandissement (L’agrandissement maximum possible peut varier en fonction de la résolution.) Retour Rogner Pour Procédez comme suit Déplacer la zone agrandie Appuyer sur [D/I/C/F]. Rogner la photo agrandie Appuyez sur [o]. (enregistrée en tant que nouveau fichier) Revenir à l’image originale Appuyez sur [m]. Visionnage d’un diaporama Vous pouvez visionner les photos sous forme de diaporama et ajouter des effets de transition entre chaque photo. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m]. 2 Sélectionnez z ĺ Options diaporama. 3 Choisissez une option d’effet de diaporama. • Passez à l’étape 4 pour démarrer le diaporama sans aucun effet. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Mode de lecture Activer une option de répétition du diaporama. (Une lecture*, Répétition) Intervalle • Définir l’intervalle entre l’affichage des photos. (1 s*, 3 s, 5 s, 10 s) • Les intervalles peuvent uniquement être définis si l’effet de changement de scène est réglé sur Désactivé. Effet • Définir un changement de scène entre les photos. • Sélectionnez Désactivé pour annuler les effets. Affichage de photos 106 Lecture / Retouche > Affichage de photos 4 Appuyez sur [m]. 5 Sélectionnez Démarrer diaporama. 6 Visionnez le diaporama. • Appuyez sur [o] pour mettre en pause. • Appuyez à nouveau sur [o] pour reprendre la lecture. • Appuyez sur [m] pour interrompre le diaporama et revenir au mode Lecture. Rotation automatique En activant la fonction Rotation auto, l’appareil photo fait pivoter automatiquement les photos prises verticalement afin qu’elles s’affichent horizontalement à l’écran. Pour définir les options de rotation automatique En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Rotation auto ĺ une option. 107 Lecture / Retouche En mode Lecture, vous pouvez lire une vidéo, en extraire une image ou encore la rogner et l’enregistrer en tant que nouveau fichier. Arrêter Lecture Pour Description Revenir en arrière • Appuyez sur [C]. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur la touche lors de la lecture d’une vidéo, la vitesse de lecture change selon la séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.) • Tournez la touche de navigation dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur la touche de navigation lors de la lecture d’une vidéo, la vitesse de lecture change selon la séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.) Pause/Lecture Appuyez sur [o]. Avance rapide • Appuyez sur [F]. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur la touche lors de la lecture d’une vidéo, la vitesse de lecture change selon la séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.) • Tournez la touche de navigation dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre. (Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur la touche de navigation lors de la lecture d’une vidéo, la vitesse de lecture change selon la séquence suivante : 2X, 4X, 8X.) Contrôle du volume Appuyez sur [D/I]. Arrêter Appuyez sur [m]. Recadrage d’une vidéo au cours de la lecture 1 En mode Lecture, faites défiler l’affichage pour atteindre une vidéo, puis appuyez sur [m]. 2 Sélectionnez Recadrer la vidéo. 3 Appuyez sur [o] pour lancer la lecture de la vidéo. 4 Appuyez sur [o] à l’endroit où vous souhaitez que le recadrage débute. 5 Appuyez sur [f]. 6 Appuyez sur [o] pour arrêter la lecture de la vidéo. 7 Appuyez sur [o] à l’endroit où vous souhaitez que le recadrage s’arrête. Lecture de vidéos 108 Lecture / Retouche > Lecture de vidéos 8 Appuyez sur [f]. 9 Appuyez sur [f] pour recadrer une vidéo. 10 Lorsque la fenêtre s’affiche, appuyez sur Oui. • La durée de la vidéo d’origine doit être d’au moins 10 secondes. • L’appareil photo enregistre la vidéo modifiée en tant que nouveau fichier et conserve la vidéo d’origine intacte. • L’endroit où vous souhaitez que le recadrage commence peut être sélectionné 2 secondes après le début de la lecture. Extraction d’une image pendant la lecture 1 Lors du visionnage d’une vidéo, appuyez sur [o] à l’endroit où vous souhaitez capturer une image. 2 Appuyez sur [f]. • La résolution de l’image extraite est la même que celle de la vidéo d’origine. • L’image extraite est enregistrée en tant que nouveau fichier. 109 Lecture / Retouche Les photos retouchées sont enregistrées en tant que nouveaux fichiers, sous des noms de fichiers différents. Il est impossible de retoucher les photos prises dans certains modes par le biais de la fonction Édition photo. Pour retoucher des images En mode Lecture, faites défiler l’affichage pour atteindre une photo, puis appuyez sur [m] ĺz ĺ Retoucher l'image ĺ une option. • Il est possible que certaines images ne puissent pas être modifiées à l’aide de la fonction Retoucher l’image. Dans ce cas, utilisez un autre logiciel de retouche. • Les fichiers RAW ne peuvent pas être retouchés à l’aide la fonction Retoucher l’image. Dans ce cas, utilisez le logiciel de retouche fourni. • L’appareil photo enregistre les photos retouchées en tant que nouveau fichier. • Lorsque vous retouchez des photos, l’appareil photo les enregistre automatiquement à une résolution inférieure. Les photos pivotées ou redimensionnées manuellement ne sont pas automatiquement converties à une résolution inférieure. • Les photos visionnées en tant que dossier ne peuvent pas être retouchées. Ouvrez le dossier et sélectionnez une photo pour retoucher chacune des photos. Rotation d’une photo 1 Sélectionnez ĺ . 2 Sélectionnez une option. Rotation : Droite (90°) Annuler Enregistrer 3 Appuyez sur [o] pour enregistrer. • Vous pouvez également faire pivoter une photo en mode Lecture en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant zĺ Rotation ĺ une option voulue. • L’appareil photo écrase le fichier d’origine. Retouche de photos 110 Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos Redimensionnement de photos Modifiez la taille d’une photo pour l’enregistrer sous forme de nouveau fichier. 1 Sélectionnez → . 2 Sélectionnez une option. Redimensionner : 3888 x 2592 Annuler Enregistrer 3 Appuyez sur [o] pour enregistrer. Les options de redimensionnement disponibles dépendent de la taille d’origine de la photo. Réglage des photos Vous pouvez modifier les photos prises en réglant la luminosité, le contraste ou la couleur. 1 Sélectionnez . 2 Sélectionnez une option de réglage. • Si vous avez sélectionné (Réglage automatique), la photo ainsi paramétrée est automatiquement enregistrée. Icône Description Original (revenir à l’image originale) Réglage automatique Luminosité Contraste Saturation Réglage RVB Température couleur Exposition 111 Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos 3 Tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler l’option. 4 Appuyez sur [o]. 5 Appuyez sur [m]. 6 Appuyez sur [f] pour enregistrer. Retouche de visages 1 Sélectionnez ĺ . 2 Tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [C/F] pour régler l’option. • Au fur et à mesure que la valeur augmente, la couleur de la peau devient plus lumineuse et plus douce. 3 Appuyez sur [o] pour enregistrer. 112 Lecture / Retouche > Retouche de photos Effets de filtre intelligent Appliquez des effets spéciaux à vos photos. 1 Appuyez sur , puis sélectionnez une option. Filtre intelligent : Vignettage Annuler Définir Option Description Original Aucun effet Vignettage Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un fort contraste et un effet de dégradé intense, caractéristiques des appareils Lomo. Miniature Appliquer un effet de plongée pour que le sujet apparaisse plus petit. Onirique Masquer les imperfections du visage ou appliquer des effets doux. Esquisse Appliquer un effet d’esquisse au crayon. Option Description Effet ultra grand angle Déformer les objets en gros plan pour imiter l’effet visuel d’un objectif ultra grand angle. Classique Appliquer un effet noir et blanc. Rétro Appliquer un effet sépia. Peinture à l'huile Appliquer un effet de peinture à l’huile. Dessin Appliquer un effet de bande dessinée. Peinture à l'encre Appliquer un effet d’esquisse à l’encre. Filtre croisé Ajouter des lignes qui irradient vers l’extérieur depuis les objets brillants pour imiter l’effet visuel d’un filtre croisé. Prise de vue zoom Brouiller les bords d’une photo pour souligner les sujets placés au milieu. 2 Appuyez sur [o]. 3 Appuyez sur [f] pour enregistrer. Chapitre 4 Réseau sans fil Voici comment vous connecter à des réseaux locaux sans fil et à utiliser des fonctions de connectivité. 114 Réseau sans fil Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Cette section décrit comment se connecter via un point d’accès lorsqu’un réseau local sans fil se trouve dans le champ de détection. Vous pouvez également configurer les paramètres réseau. Connexion à un réseau local sans fil 1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sélectionnez , , ou . 3 Suivre les instructions qui s’affichent jusqu’à l’apparition de l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi. • L’appareil photo recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles. 4 Sélectionnez un point d’accès. Samsung1 Samsung2 Samsung3 Paramètres Wi-Fi Actualiser Retour Manuel • Sélectionnez Actualiser pour actualiser la liste des points d’accès disponibles. • Sélectionnez Ajouter mode sans fil pour ajouter un point d’accès manuellement. Le nom du point d’accès doit être en anglais pour ajouter le point d’accès manuellement. Icône Description Point d’accès Ad hoc Point d’accès sécurisé Point d’accès WPS Force du signal • Appuyez sur [F] pour définir les options de réglage réseau. • Lorsque vous choisissez un point d’accès sécurisé, une fenêtre contextuelle apparaît. Saisissez le mot de passe requis pour vous connecter au réseau local sans fil. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte » (p. 117). • Si vous choisissez un point d’accès non sécurisé, l’appareil photo se connecte au réseau local sans fil. • Si vous choisissez un point d’accès pris en charge par un profil WPS, sélectionnez Connexion PIN WPS, puis saisissez le code PIN sur le périphérique du point d’accès. Vous avez également la possibilité de vous connecter à un point d’accès pris en charge par un profil WPS en sélectionnant Connexion via la touche WPS sur l’appareil photo et en appuyant sur la touche WPS sur le périphérique du point d’accès. • Si un message vous informe de la réglementation en vigueur sur la collecte de données, lisez son contenu et acceptez ses conditions. 115 Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Configuration des options de réseau 1 Dans l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi, accédez à un point d’accès, puis appuyez sur [F]. 2 Pour chaque option, précisez les informations requises. Option Description Mot de passe réseau Saisir le mot de passe réseau. Configuration IP Définir l’adresse IP automatiquement ou manuellement. Configuration manuelle de l’adresse IP 1 Dans l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi, accédez à un point d’accès, puis appuyez sur [F]. 2 Sélectionnez Configuration IP ĺ Manuel. 3 Pour chaque option, précisez les informations requises. Option Description IP Saisir l’adresse IP statique. Masque sous-réseau Indiquer le masque sous-réseau. Passerelle Indiquer la passerelle. Serveur DNS Saisir l’adresse DNS. 116 Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau • Certaines fonctions Wi-Fi ne sont pas disponibles si vous n’insérez pas de carte mémoire. • La qualité de la connexion réseau est déterminée par les points d’accès. • Plus la distance entre l’appareil photo et le point d’accès est grande, plus ce premier met du temps à se connecter au réseau. • Si un périphérique à proximité utilise une fréquence radio identique à celle de l’appareil photo, il se peut que votre connexion s’interrompe. • Si le nom de votre point d’accès n’est pas en anglais, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne puisse pas localiser le périphérique ou que son nom apparaisse de façon incorrecte. • Pour connaître les paramètres réseau et le mot de passe requis, contactez votre administrateur réseau ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau. • En fonction du type de chiffrement, la longueur du mot de passe peut varier. • En fonction des conditions environnantes, il peut s’avérer impossible d’établir une connexion à un réseau local sans fil. • Il est possible que l’appareil photo affiche une imprimante compatible avec les réseaux locaux sans fil figurant dans la liste des points d’accès. Vous ne pouvez cependant pas vous connecter au réseau par le biais d’une imprimante. • Il est impossible de connecter l’appareil photo simultanément à un réseau et à un téléviseur. • Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à un réseau local sans fil, essayez un autre point d’accès dans la liste des points d'accès disponibles. • Les connexions réseau disponibles peuvent varier selon le pays. • La fonction de réseau local sans fil de l’appareil photo doit être conforme à la législation en matière de transmission par radiofréquences dans votre pays ou région. Pour assurer une compatibilité totale, n’utilisez la fonction de réseau local sans fil que dans le pays dans lequel vous avez acheté l’appareil photo. • Les opérations à suivre pour régler les paramètres réseau peuvent différer en fonction des conditions du réseau. • Ne tentez pas d’accéder à un réseau dont l’accès ne vous est pas autorisé. • Avant de vous connecter à des réseaux, assurez-vous que la batterie est entièrement rechargée. • Les fichiers transférés vers un autre appareil peuvent ne pas être pris en charge par cet appareil. Dans ce cas, utilisez un ordinateur pour lire les fichiers. • Si un point d’accès requiert la saisie de vos informations de session, vous ne pourrez pas vous y connecter. 117 Réseau sans fil > Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Saisie de texte Cette section décrit comment saisir du texte. Tournez la touche de navigation ou appuyez sur [D/I/C/F] pour accéder à une touche et appuyez sur [o] pour saisir le caractère correspondant. Retour arrière Effectué Retour Icône Description Supprimer la dernière lettre. Déplacer le curseur. En mode ABC, changer la casse. Passer du mode Symbole au mode ABC. Ajouter un espace. Effectué Enregistrer le texte à l’écran. • Appuyez sur [y] pour aller jusqu’à Effectué directement. • Le nombre de caractères à saisir varie en fonction de la situation. • L’affichage peut différer en fonction du mode de saisie. 118 Réseau sans fil Utilisation de la fonction NFC (Partage par contact) Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Lecture (Partage instantané) En mode Lecture, l’appareil photo transfère automatiquement le fichier actif sur le smartphone lorsque vous procédez à la lecture d’une balise depuis un dispositif compatible NFC. • Pour transférer plusieurs fichiers, sélectionnez des fichiers depuis l’écran Miniatures, puis procédez à la lecture d’une balise depuis un dispositif compatible NFC. Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Wi-Fi Sélectionnez MobileLink ou Remote Viewfinder depuis la fenêtre qui s’affiche en procédant à la lecture d’une balise depuis un dispositif compatible NFC (p. 121, 125). Placez l’antenne NFC du smartphone à proximité du symbole NFC de l’appareil photo pour lancer la fonctionnalité d’enregistrement automatique des photos sur le smartphone ou pour utiliser le smartphone comme déclencheur à distance. Vous pouvez également transférer des fichiers vers un dispositif compatible NFC en mode Lecture. • Cette fonctionnalité est prise en charge par les smartphones compatibles NFC fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android. Il est recommandé d’utiliser la dernière version. Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible pour les appareils iOS. • Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps ou Google Play Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement. • Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca. • Pour se connecter à une balise NFC, placez le dispositif compatible NFC à proximité de la balise NFC de l’appareil photo pendant plus de 2 secondes. • Vous pouvez définir la taille des photos transférées en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant d ĺ MobileLink / Taille de l'image NFC ĺ une option. • Il ne faut en aucun cas modifier l’étiquette NFC. Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Prise de vue Lancez AutoShare ou Remote Viewfinder en procédant à la lecture d’une balise depuis un dispositif compatible NFC (p. 119, 125). Configurez la fonction Wi-Fi pour qu’elle se lance à la lecture d’une balise sur un dispositif compatible NFC (p. 139). 119 Réseau sans fil Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction AutoShare via un réseau local sans fil. Lorsque vous prenez une photo à l’aide de l’appareil photo, la photo s’enregistre automatiquement sur le smartphone. • La fonctionnalité AutoShare est prise en charge par les smartphones ou les tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement. • Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement. • Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca. • Si vous activez cette fonction, les paramètres sont conservés même si vous changez de mode Prise de vue. • Il est possible que certains modes ne prennent pas en charge cette fonction ou que cette dernière ne soit pas disponible avec certaines options de prise de vue. 1 En mode Prise de vue, sélectionnez [m] ĺb ĺ AutoShare ĺ Activé. • Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. • Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Paramètres sécurité. (p. 144) 2 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer l’application. • Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de la balise NFC (p. 29) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le smartphone est connecté à l’appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 5. 3 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et établissez la connexion entre le smartphone et l’appareil photo. • Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à la fois. • Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone. 120 Réseau sans fil > Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone 4 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez la connexion du smartphone. • Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la connexion est automatique. • Une icône indiquant l’état de la connexion ( ) apparaît sur l’écran de l’appareil photo. 5 Prenez une photo. • La photo est enregistrée sur l’appareil photo, puis transférée au smartphone. Si aucune carte mémoire n’est insérée ou si la mémoire est insuffisante, la photo prise est alors transférée sur le smartphone sans qu’elle soit enregistrée sur l’appareil photo. • Tout enregistrement vidéo n’est conservé que sur l’appareil photo. • Le fichier image généré au cours de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo n’est pas sauvegardé sur le smartphone. • Si la fonction GPS est activée sur le smartphone, les informations GPS sont alors enregistrées avec la photo prise. 121 Réseau sans fil L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction MobileLink via un réseau local sans fil. Vous pouvez facilement envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à votre smartphone. • La fonctionnalité MobileLink est prise en charge par les smartphones ou les tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement. • Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement. • Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Vous pouvez visualiser jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents et envoyer jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers à la fois. • Lorsque vous envoyez des vidéos Full HD à l’aide de la fonction MobileLink, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas lire ces fichiers sur certains appareils. • Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction sur un appareil iOS, la connexion Wi-Fi risque d’être désactivée. • Il est impossible d’envoyer des fichiers RAW. • Vous pouvez définir la taille des photos transférées en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant d ĺ MobileLink / Taille de l'image NFC ĺ une option. • Vous pouvez également envoyer des fichiers en mode Lecture en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ MobileLink. • L’écran s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur l’appareil photo dans les 30 secondes. 1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez . • Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. • Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Paramètres sécurité. (p. 144) 3 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez une option d’envoi. • Si l’option Sélectionner des fichiers du smartphone est activée, vous pouvez utiliser votre smartphone pour afficher et partager les fichiers stockés sur l’appareil photo. L’écran s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur le smartphone dans les 30 secondes. • Si l’option Sélectionner des fichiers de l’appareil photo est activée, vous pouvez sélectionner les fichiers à envoyer depuis l’appareil photo. 4 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer l’application. • Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de la balise NFC (p. 29) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le smartphone est connecté à l’appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 7. Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone 122 Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone 5 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et établissez la connexion entre le smartphone et l’appareil photo. • Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à la fois. • Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone. 6 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez la connexion du smartphone. • Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la connexion est automatique. 7 Sur le smartphone ou l’appareil photo, sélectionnez les fichiers à transférer depuis l’appareil photo. 8 Sur le smartphone, appuyez sur la touche de copie ou, sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Envoyer. • L’appareil photo envoie les fichiers au smartphone. 123 Réseau sans fil Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à plusieurs smartphones L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction Group Share via un réseau local sans fil. Vous pouvez facilement envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à plusieurs smartphones. • La fonctionnalité Group Share est prise en charge par les smartphones ou les tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement. • Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement. • Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Le transfert de fichiers vers plusieurs smartphones peut prendre plus de temps que le transfert vers un seul appareil. • Lorsque vous envoyez des vidéos Full HD à l’aide de la fonction Group Share, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas lire ces fichiers sur certains appareils. • Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction sur un appareil iOS, la connexion Wi-Fi risque d’être désactivée. • Il est impossible d’envoyer des fichiers RAW. • Vous pouvez définir la taille des photos transférées en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant d ĺ MobileLink / Taille de l'image NFC ĺ une option. • Vous pouvez également envoyer des fichiers en mode Lecture en appuyant sur [m], puis en sélectionnant Partager (Wi-Fi) ĺ Group Share. 1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez . • Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. • Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Paramètres sécurité. (p. 144) 3 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer l’application. 124 Réseau sans fil > Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à plusieurs smartphones 4 Sélectionnez le smartphone dans la liste. • Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la connexion est automatique. • Vous pouvez connecter jusqu’à 4 smartphones. • Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone. 5 Sélectionnez Suivant. 6 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez les fichiers à transférer depuis l’appareil photo. 7 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Envoyer. • L’appareil photo envoie les fichiers au smartphone. • Lorsque vous établissez la connexion avec plusieurs smartphones, l’appareil photo envoie les fichiers à tous les dispositifs en même temps. 125 Réseau sans fil L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction Remote Viewfinder via un réseau local sans fil. Utilisez le smartphone pour déclencher à distance l’obturateur à l’aide de la fonction Remote Viewfinder. La photo ainsi prise s’affiche directement sur le smartphone. • La fonctionnalité Remote Viewfinder est prise en charge par les smartphones ou les tablettes fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente. Si la version du firmware n’est pas la plus récente, il est possible que cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement. • Vous devez installer Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur votre téléphone ou appareil pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareils photo Samsung fabriqués en 2013 ou ultérieurement. • Pour les appareils fonctionnant sous Android OS 2.3.3 – 2.3.7, téléchargez Samsung SMART CAMERA App depuis www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca. • Les photos ou les vidéos prises en continu ne s’affichent pas sur le smartphone. 1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez . • Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. • Pour qu’il vous soit demandé de saisir un code PIN lorsque vous connectez le smartphone à l’appareil photo, sélectionnez Paramètres sécurité. (p. 144) 3 Sur le smartphone, démarrez Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • Pour les appareils iOS, activez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de lancer l’application. • Pour démarrer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de la balise NFC (p. 29) de l’appareil photo. Vérifiez que le smartphone est connecté à l’appareil photo, puis passez à l’étape 6. 4 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et établissez la connexion entre le smartphone et l’appareil photo. • Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à la fois. • Si le Verrouillage Wi-Fi est activé, saisissez le code PIN affiché sur l’appareil photo depuis le smartphone. Utilisation d’un smartphone pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur à distance 126 Réseau sans fil > Utilisation d’un smartphone pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur à distance 5 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez la connexion du smartphone. • Si le smartphone s’est connecté à l’appareil photo auparavant, la connexion est automatique. 6 Sur le smartphone, sélectionnez q pour ouvrir le panneau intelligent. 7 Sur le smartphone, définissez les options de prise de vue. • Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction, certaines touches ne sont plus disponibles sur l’appareil photo. • Avec le smartphone, vous pouvez faire fonctionner l’appareil photo uniquement en appuyant sur l’écran. • Certaines options de prise de vue ne sont pas prises en charge. • Les options de prise de vue réglées sont conservées sur l’appareil photo même après la déconnexion avec le smartphone. 8 Appuyez sur pour revenir à l’écran de prise de vue. 9 Sur le smartphone, maintenez enfoncé pour effectuer la mise au point, puis relâchez pour prendre la photo. • Appuyer sur pour enregistrer une vidéo et sur pour arrêter une vidéo. • Si la fonction GPS est activée sur le smartphone, les informations GPS sont alors enregistrées avec la photo prise. • Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonctionnalité, la distance idéale entre l’appareil photo et le smartphone peut varier, selon les conditions environnantes. • Pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction, le smartphone doit se trouver dans un périmètre de 7 m par rapport à l’appareil photo. • Une fois relâché sur le smartphone, le déclenchement de la prise de vue peut ne pas se faire immédiatement. • Si l’option d’enregistrement du fichier est définie sur Smartphone + Appareil photo, seules les photos seront transférées vers le Smartphone. (Les vidéos et les fichiers RAW ne seront pas transférés.) • Si vous prenez des photos en continu lorsque l’option d’enregistrement du fichier est définie sur Smartphone + Appareil photo, les photos ne seront pas transférées vers le Smartphone. • Lors de l’enregistrement d’une vidéo, l’écran du smartphone ne reflète pas l’écran de l’appareil photo. • La fonction Remote Viewfinder se désactive si : - le smartphone reçoit un appel ; - l’appareil photo ou le smartphone est éteint ; - l’appareil perd sa connexion au réseau local sans fil ; - le signal de la connexion Wi-Fi est mauvais ou instable ; - vous ne réalisez aucune opération dans les 3 minutes une fois la connexion établie ; - le nombre de dossiers et de fichiers a atteint le maximum. • L’écran s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur l’appareil photo dans les 30 secondes. 127 Réseau sans fil Utilisation de la fonction Home Monitor+ 3 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez un point d’accès dans la liste, puis positionnez l’appareil photo. • Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo à la portée d’enfants en bas âge ou d’animaux domestiques. • Pointez l’objectif de l’appareil photo sur le sujet. • Il est recommandé d’utiliser une batterie entièrement rechargée ou de brancher l’appareil photo sur une prise de courant par le biais d’un adaptateur secteur. 4 Saisissez l’identifiant et le mot de passe de votre compte Samsung pour vous connecter. • Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section « Saisie de texte » (p. 117). • Si vous avez déjà ouvert une session sur le service, il se peut que la connexion s’établisse automatiquement. 5 Sur le smartphone, démarrez l’application Samsung Home Monitor+. Utilisez la fonction Home Monitor+ pour établir la connexion entre l’appareil photo et un smartphone où Samsung Home Monitor+ est installé pour surveiller un lieu. • La fonction Home Monitor+ est prise en charge par les smartphones fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. (Certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge toutes ces fonctionnalités.) Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez à jour le firmware à la version la plus récente. Vous devez disposer de la version 4.1 ou ultérieure du système d’exploitation Android. • Vous devez installer l’application Samsung Home Monitor+ sur votre smartphone avant d’utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. 1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez . • Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. 128 Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de la fonction Home Monitor+ 6 Procédez à la surveillance sur votre smartphone. • Au cours de la vidéo surveillance par le biais du smartphone, la vidéo n’est pas enregistrée sur l’appareil photo. • Si le lieu surveillé est sombre, appuyez sur pour activer le voyant AF. • Si l’appareil photo est connecté au même réseau sans fil que les autres appareils, des problèmes de lecture des vidéos peuvent survenir. • Selon les conditions du réseau, les vidéos peuvent être ralenties ou s’arrêter. 7 Appuyez sur pour fermer l’application Samsung Home Monitor+. • Selon les conditions du réseau, le smartphone peut ne pas activer l’alarme lors de la détection d’un son. • La fonction Home Monitor+ ne peut remplacer un dispositif de sécurité professionnel. Pour garantir la sécurité de votre domicile, nous vous recommandons de recourir à des services professionnels. • Ne connectez pas plus de deux appareils photo utilisant la fonction Home Monitor+ au même réseau. Le réseau peut être ralenti. • L’utilisation de l’application Samsung Home Monitor+ sur un réseau 3G ou LTE peut entraîner des frais supplémentaires. • Le fabricant ne peut être tenu responsable de tout dommage en relation avec la divulgation ou la distribution d’informations personnelles, telles que des vidéos en streaming, à d’autres parties. • L’utilisateur est responsable de la gestion des identifiants et mots de passe de la fonction Home Monitor+. • N’utilisez cette fonction qu’en intérieur. L’utilisation de cette fonction dans les espaces publics peut ralentir la vitesse du réseau. Le fabricant ne peut être tenu responsable de tout dommage en relation avec l’utilisation de cette fonction dans les espaces publics. • N’utilisez pas cette fonction pendant une période prolongée, c’est-à-dire pendant plus d’une semaine. • N’utilisez pas cette fonction à des fins illégales. • Selon les conditions du réseau, un ralentissement ou une interruption de la connexion peut se produire. • L’écran s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur l’appareil photo dans les 30 secondes. 129 Réseau sans fil Utilisation de Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des photos ou des vidéos A l’aide de la fonction sans fil, vous pouvez envoyer sur un ordinateur les photos ou vidéos enregistrées avec l’appareil photo. Installation du programme Sauvegarde automatique sur votre ordinateur 1 Installez i-Launcher sur l’ordinateur (p. 150). 2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 3 Lorsque l’icône du programme Sauvegarde automatique apparaît, cliquez dessus. • Le programme Sauvegarde automatique est alors installé sur l’ordinateur. Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour terminer l’installation. 4 Débranchez le câble USB. Avant d’installer le programme, assurez-vous que l’ordinateur est connecté à un réseau. Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un ordinateur 1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sélectionnez . • Si la fenêtre qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, sélectionnez Suivant. • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles (p. 114). 3 Sélectionnez un ordinateur de sauvegarde. 130 Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de Sauvegarde automatique pour envoyer des photos ou des vidéos 4 Sélectionnez OK. • Pour annuler l’envoi, sélectionnez Annuler. • Il est impossible de sélectionner des fichiers précis à sauvegarder. Cette fonction ne sauvegarde que les nouveaux fichiers de l’appareil photo. • La progression de la sauvegarde s’affiche sur l’écran de l’ordinateur. • Lorsque le transfert est terminé, l’appareil photo s’éteint automatiquement au bout d’environ 30 secondes. Sélectionnez Annuler pour revenir à l’écran précédent et empêcher l’appareil photo de s’éteindre automatiquement. • Pour éteindre automatiquement votre ordinateur une fois le transfert terminé, sélectionnez Eteindre PC après sauvegarde. • Pour changer d’ordinateur de sauvegarde, sélectionnez Changer de PC. • Si vous connectez l’appareil photo au réseau local sans fil, sélectionnez le point d’accès connecté à l’ordinateur. • L’appareil photo recherche les points d’accès disponibles même si vous vous reconnectez au même point d’accès. • Si vous éteignez l’appareil photo ou retirez sa batterie lors de l’envoi de fichiers, le transfert de fichiers est alors interrompu. • Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction, la commande de l’obturateur se désactive sur l’appareil photo. • Vous ne pouvez connecter qu’un seul appareil photo à l’ordinateur à la fois pour envoyer des fichiers. • La sauvegarde peut être annulée en raison de l’état du réseau. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Avant d’utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez désactiver le pare-feu Windows ou tout autre pare-feu. • Vous pouvez envoyer jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents. • Sur le logiciel PC, le nom du serveur doit être saisi en alphabet latin et ne peut pas comporter plus de 48 caractères. 131 Réseau sans fil Utilisation de Samsung Link pour visionner des fichiers Vous pouvez visionner des fichiers sur un appareil Samsung Link connecté au même point d’accès. 1 Passez au mode B à l’aide de la molette de sélection. 2 Sélectionnez . • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles (p. 114). • Vous pouvez autoriser à se connecter uniquement les dispositifs sélectionnés ou tous les dispositifs en appuyant sur [f], puis en sélectionnant Contrôle d'accès DLNA à l’écran. • Une liste de partage de fichiers est alors créée. Attendez que les autres dispositifs aient détecté l’appareil photo. 3 Connectez le dispositif Samsung Link à un réseau, puis activez la fonction Samsung Link. • Reportez-vous au mode d’emploi de votre dispositif pour davantage d’informations. 4 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez le dispositif Samsung Link à se connecter à l’appareil photo. 5 Sur le dispositif Samsung Link, sélectionnez l’appareil photo auquel se connecter. 6 Sur le dispositif Samsung Link, parcourez la liste des photos ou vidéos partagées. • Pour en savoir plus sur la manière de rechercher l’appareil photo et de parcourir les photos ou les vidéos sur le dispositif Samsung Link, consultez le mode d’emploi de l’appareil. • Selon le type de dispositif Samsung Link ou l’état du réseau, il est possible que les vidéos ne soient pas lues correctement. Point d’accès ▲ L’appareil photo est raccordé à un téléviseur compatible Samsung Link via un réseau local sans fil. 132 Réseau sans fil > Utilisation de Samsung Link pour visionner des fichiers • Vous pouvez partager jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents. • Vous ne pouvez afficher sur un dispositif Samsung Link que des photos ou des vidéos prises avec l’appareil photo. • La portée de la connexion sans fil entre l’appareil photo et un dispositif Samsung Link peut varier en fonction des spécifications du point d’accès. • Si l’appareil photo est connecté à 2 dispositifs Samsung Link, la lecture risque d’être ralentie. • Les photos ou les vidéos sont partagées dans leurs dimensions d’origine. • Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonctionnalité avec des dispositifs prenant en charge Samsung Link. • Les photos ou vidéos partagées ne sont pas enregistrées sur le dispositif Samsung Link, mais peuvent être stockées dans l’appareil photo afin de respecter les caractéristiques de l’appareil photo. • Le transfert de photos ou de vidéos sur le dispositif Samsung Link peut prendre un certain temps selon la connexion réseau, le nombre de fichiers à partager ou la taille des fichiers. • Si vous éteignez l’appareil photo de façon inhabituelle pendant le visionnage de photos ou de vidéos sur un dispositif Samsung Link (par exemple, en retirant la batterie), le dispositif considère que l’appareil photo est toujours connecté. • Il se peut que l’ordre des photos ou des vidéos sur l’appareil photo diffère de celui du dispositif Samsung Link. • En fonction du nombre de photos ou de vidéos à partager, le chargement de celles-ci et l’exécution du processus de configuration initial peuvent prendre un certain temps. • Lorsque vous visionnez des photos ou des vidéos sur le dispositif Samsung Link, l’utilisation continue de la télécommande ou l’exécution d’opérations supplémentaires sur le dispositif peut empêcher le bon fonctionnement de cette fonction. • Si vous réorganisez ou triez des fichiers sur l’appareil photo tout en les visionnant sur un dispositif Samsung Link, vous devez procéder à nouveau au processus initial de configuration pour actualiser la liste des fichiers sur le dispositif. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Il est recommandé d’utiliser un câble réseau pour raccorder le dispositif Samsung Link au point d’accès. Cela permet de réduire les interruptions du son et de l’image lors de la diffusion de vidéo. • Pour visionner des fichiers sur un appareil Samsung Link, vous devez activer le mode Multidiffusion sur votre point d’accès. Chapitre 5 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo Cette section présente les paramètres utilisateur et le menu général des réglages de l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez régler les paramètres en fonction de vos besoins et de vos préférences. 134 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo Vous pouvez définir la manière d’utiliser l’appareil grâce à ces paramètres. Afin de paramétrer les options utilisateur En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [m] ĺ d ĺ une option. Les options disponibles et leur ordre d’affichage peuvent différer selon les conditions de prise de vue. Personnalisation ISO Palier ISO Vous pouvez régler la sensibilité ISO par paliers de 1/3 ou 1. Plage ISO auto Si vous réglez la plage ISO sur Automatique, vous pouvez définir la valeur ISO maximale pour chaque palier EV sélectionné. Réducteur de bruit Afin de réduire les parasites sur les photos, utilisez l’option Réducteur de bruit. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Réduct. bruit ISO élevé Cette fonction réduit les parasites qui peuvent apparaître lorsque vous utilisez une sensibilité ISO élevée. (Désactivé, Elevé, Normale*, Bas) Réduction bruit long terme Cette fonction réduit le bruit lorsque vous réglez l’appareil photo sur une exposition prolongée. (Désactivé, Activé*) Paramètres utilisateur 135 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur Réglage Bracketing Vous pouvez configurer les options de chaque bracketing. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Réglage AE Bracketing Régler l’intervalle d’exposition. (-/+0.3 EV*, -/+0.7 EV, -/+1.0 EV, -/+1.3 EV, -/+1.7 EV, -/+2.0 EV, -/+2.3 EV, -/+2.7 EV, -/+3.0 EV) Régler balance des blancs Brack Régler la gamme de balance des blancs des 3 photos bracketing. (AB-/+3*, AB-/+2, AB-/+1, MG-/+3, MG-/+2, MG-/+1) Par exemple, AB-/+3 règle la valeur Orange sur plus ou moins trois paliers. MG-/+3 règle la valeur Magenta aux mêmes niveaux. Réglage balance des blancs mode Braketing Sélectionner 3 paramètres de l’assistant photo que l’appareil photo utilise pour prendre 3 photos bracketing. Réglage de la profondeur de champ mode Bracketing Régler l’intervalle de profondeur. (-/+0.3, -/+0.7, -/+1.0*, -/+1.3, -/+1.7, -/+2.0, -/+2.3, -/+2.7, -/+3.0) DMF (Mise au point manuelle directe) Vous pouvez régler la mise au point manuellement en faisant tourner la bague, une fois la mise au point effectuée en enfonçant le [Déclencheur] à mi-course. Il se peut que la fonction ne soit pas disponible avec certains objectifs. 136 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur Espace colorimétrique L’espace colorimétrique vous permet de sélectionner les méthodes de représentation des couleurs. Les appareils numériques d’imagerie, comme les appareils photos numériques, les moniteurs et les imprimantes disposent de leurs propres spécificités techniques pour représenter les couleurs, que l’on nomme espaces colorimétriques. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description sRGB* La norme sRGB (standard RGB) est une norme internationale qui permet de définir l’espace colorimétrique créé par l’IEC (commission électrotechnique internationale). Cette norme est couramment utilisée afin de recréer les couleurs sur des moniteurs d’ordinateurs et constitue également l’espace colorimétrique standard pour les données Exif. sRGB est recommandé pour les images habituelles et celles que vous souhaitez publier sur Internet. Adobe RGB Adobe RGB est utilisé pour des impressions professionnelles et dispose d’une gamme de couleurs plus importante que la norme sRGB. Il vous permet ainsi de retoucher facilement des photos sur un ordinateur. Notez que les divers programmes disponibles sur le marché ne sont généralement compatibles qu’avec un nombre limité d’espaces colorimétriques. Adobe RGB sRGB Lorsque l’espace colorimétrique est réglé sur Adobe RGB, les photos sont enregistrées sous le nom « _SAMXXXX.JPG ». 137 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur Corriger distort. Vous pouvez corriger la déformation qui peut se produire avec les objectifs. Cette fonction est disponible avec les objectifs qui la prennent en charge. Personnalisation iFn Vous pouvez sélectionner les options réglables prévues lorsque vous appuyez sur [i-Function] sur un objectif compatible i-Function. Option Description Ouverture Permet de régler la valeur d’ouverture. Vitesse d'obturation Permet de régler la vitesse d’obturation. EV Permet d’ajuster la valeur d’exposition. ISO Définissez la sensibilité ISO. Balance des blancs Régler la balance des blancs. 138 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur Affichage utilisateur Vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des informations de prise de vue sur l’écran. 1 2 3 N° Description 1 Icônes Activer l’affichage des icônes sur la partie de droite en mode Prise de vue. 2 Date et heure Activer l’affichage de la date et l’heure. 3 Histogramme Activer ou désactiver l’histogramme sur l’écran. Description des histogrammes Un histogramme est la représentation graphique de la répartition de la luminosité sur une photo. Un histogramme incliné vers la gauche signifie que la photo est sombre. Un histogramme incliné vers la droite signifie que la photo est claire. La hauteur des crêtes est liée aux informations colorimétriques. Les crêtes du graphique sont plus élevées si une couleur spécifique est prédominante. Exposition insuffisante Exposition équilibrée Exposition excessive 139 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur Attribution touches Vous pouvez modifier la fonction affectée à la touche de personnalisation. * Paramètre par défaut Bouton Fonction Personnalisé Définir la fonction de la touche Personnalisé. • Aperçu optique* : exécuter la fonction de prévisualisation de la profondeur de champ pour la valeur d’ouverture (p. 23). • Balance des blancs 1 touche (Balance des blancs) : exécuter la fonction de balance des blancs personnalisée. • 1 touche RAW + : enregistrer un fichier au format RAW+JPEG. Pour enregistrer un fichier au format JPEG, appuyer à nouveau sur cette touche. • Réinitialiser : réinitialiser certains paramètres. • AEL : exécuter la fonction de verrouillage automatique de l’exposition. (Appuyer sur le [Déclencheur] à mi-course exécute la fonction de verrouillage automatique de l’exposition.) • Maintien AEL : continuer d’exécuter la fonction de verrouillage automatique de l’exposition. (L’exposition reste verrouillée même après la prise de vue.) Vue Live NFC En mode Prise de vue, activez la fonction NFC sur un smartphone compatible, puis placez l’antenne NFC de ce dernier près de la balise NFC de l’appareil photo pour lancer la fonction AutoShare ou Remote Viewfinder. Cette fonctionnalité est prise en charge par les smartphones compatibles NFC fonctionnant avec le système d’exploitation Android. Il est recommandé d’utiliser la dernière version. Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible pour les appareils iOS. Taille de l’image MobileLink/NFC Définir la taille des photos à transférer à un smartphone à l’aide des fonctions MobileLink ou NFC. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Redimensionnez à 2M ou moins. Si la taille de la photo est supérieure à 3M, elle sera transférée après avoir été redimensionnée à une taille inférieure ou égale à 2M. Original* La photo sera transférée dans sa taille originale. 140 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres utilisateur Autoportrait automatique Réglez l’appareil pour qu’il s’allume et passe automatiquement en mode Autoportrait lorsque vous inclinez l’écran vers le haut. En mode Autoportrait, les fonctions de retardateur (3 secondes), détection des visages et beauté sont automatiquement activées. Réglagle de la touche Vitesse sur l’objectif Réglez la vitesse du zoom des touches de l’objectif Power Zoom sur la valeur rapide, moyenne ou lente. A vitesse rapide, le son du zoom augmente et risque d’être capturé dans les enregistrements vidéo. Cette fonction n’est disponible que lorsque l’objectif Power Zoom est fixé. Grille Sélectionnez un guide pour vous aider à composer une scène. (Désactivé*, 4 X 4, 3 X 3, Croix, Diagonale) Voyant de mise au point Afin d’optimiser la mise au point automatique dans les endroits sombres, activez le voyant de mise au point. Cette fonction donne de meilleurs résultats lorsque le voyant de mise au point est activé pour la prise de photo dans les endroits sombres. 141 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Réglage affichage Régler la luminosité de l’écran, la luminosité automatique, la couleur ou l’indicateur de niveau. • Luminosité écran : régler la luminosité de l’écran manuellement. • Luminosité auto : activer ou désactiver la luminosité automatique. (Désactivé, Activé*) • Colorimétrie écran : régler manuellement la colorimétrie de l’écran. • Calibrage horizontal : étalonner l’indicateur de niveau. Si l’indicateur de niveau n’est pas droit, positionnez l’appareil photo sur une surface plane, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran. • Il est impossible d’accéder à l’option Calibrage horizontal en mode Lecture. • Il est impossible d’utiliser l’indicateur de niveau lors d’une prise de vue en orientation portrait. Désactivation écran auto Définir le délai de désactivation de l’écran. Après une durée prédéfinie sans utiliser l’appareil photo, l’écran s’éteint. (Désactivé, 30 s*, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min) Voici comment configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Pour définir les paramètres En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺ q ĺ une option. * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Son • Volume système : définir le volume sonore ou désactiver complètement le son. (Désactivé, Bas, Moyen*, Elevé) Même si le volume système est désactivé, l’appareil photo émet un son lors de la lecture vidéo ou d’un diaporama. • Son de la mise au point : définir le son que l’appareil photo émet en enfonçant le déclencheur à mi-course. (Désactivé, Activé*) • Son des touches : définissez le son que l’appareil photo doit émettre lorsque vous appuyez sur des touches. (Désactivé, Activé*) Vue rapide Définir la durée de la vue rapide – délai au cours duquel l’appareil photo affiche la photo immédiatement après la prise de vue. (Désactivé, 1 s*, 3 s, 5 s, Maintenir) Paramètres 142 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Date et heure Définir la date, l’heure, le format de date, le fuseau horaire et indiquer si la date doit être mentionnée sur les photos. (Fuseau horaire, Configuration date/heure, Type date, Type d'heure, Impression) • La date apparaît en bas à droite de la photo. • Lorsque vous imprimez une photo, il est possible que certaines imprimantes n’impriment pas la date correctement. Vidéo Sélectionner la sortie des signaux vidéo appropriée à votre pays lorsque l’appareil photo est raccordé à un appareil vidéo externe, comme un moniteur ou un téléviseur HD. • NTSC : États-Unis, Canada, Japon, Corée, Taïwan, Mexique, etc. • PAL (compatible uniquement avec PAL B, D, G, H ou I) : Allemagne, Australie, Autriche, Belgique, Chine, Danemark, Espagne, Finlande, France, Italie, Koweït, Malaisie, Norvège, Nouvelle-Zélande, Royaume-Uni, Singapour, Suède, Suisse, Thaïlande, etc. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un téléviseur HD compatible avec la fonction Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), vous pouvez contrôler la fonction de lecture de l’appareil photo à l’aide d’une télécommande. • Désactivé : il est impossible de contrôler la fonction de lecture de l’appareil photo à l’aide de la télécommande du téléviseur. • Activé* : il est possible de contrôler la fonction de lecture de l’appareil photo à l’aide de la télécommande du téléviseur. * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Mise hors tension auto Définir le délai de mise hors tension. L’appareil photo s’éteint lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas pendant une période prédéfinie. (Désactivé, 1 min*, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min) • L’appareil photo mémorise le délai d’extinction même si vous remplacez la batterie. • Si l’appareil photo est connecté à un ordinateur ou à un téléviseur et qu’une vidéo ou un diaporama est en cours de lecture, il est possible que la fonction Mise hors tension auto ne fonctionne pas. Affichage de l'aide • Aide à la sélection de mode : activer l’affichage de texte d’aide relatif au mode sélectionné lors du changement de mode de prise de vue. (Désactivé, Activé*) • Aide à la sélection de fonction : activer l’affichage de texte d’aide sur les menus et les fonctions. (Désactivé, Activé*) Appuyez sur [n] pour masquer le texte d’aide. Language Sélectionnez une langue d’affichage sur l’écran de l’appareil photo. 143 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Sortie HDMI Lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un téléviseur HD par le biais d’un câble HDMI, vous pouvez changer la résolution de l’image. • NTSC : Automatique*, 1080i, 720p, 480p, 576p (actif uniquement lorsque le réglage PAL est sélectionné) Si le téléviseur HD n’est pas compatible avec la résolution sélectionnée, l’appareil photo définit la résolution au niveau inférieur. Nom de fichier Définir le type de création des noms de fichier. • Standard* : SAM_XXXX.JPG (sRGB)/ _SAMXXXX.JPG (Adobe RGB) • Date : - Fichiers sRGB - MMJJXXXX.JPG. Par exemple, pour une photo prise le 1er janvier, le nom du fichier est 0101XXXX.jpg. - Fichiers Adobe RGB - _MJJXXXX.JPG pour les mois de janvier à septembre. Pour les mois d’octobre à décembre, le numéro du mois est remplacé par les lettres A (oct.), B (nov.) et C (déc.). Par exemple, pour une photo prise le 3 février, le nom du fichier est _203XXXX.jpg. Pour une photo prise le oct. 05, le fichier s’intitule _A05XXXX.jpg. * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Numéro fichier Définissez la méthode de création des noms de fichier et de dossier. • Réinitialiser : après utilisation de la fonction de réinitialisation, la dénomination des nouveaux fichiers débute à 0001. • Série* : les nouveaux numéros de fichiers s’ajoutent à la suite de ceux déjà existants, même si vous avez inséré ou formaté une nouvelle carte mémoire ou que vous avez supprimé toutes les photos existantes. • Le nom du premier dossier est 100PHOTO. Si vous avez sélectionné l’espace colorimétrique sRGB et la dénomination standard des fichiers, le nom du premier fichier correspond à SAM_0001. • Les noms des fichiers vont progressivement de SAM_0001 à SAM_9999 d’un incrément de 1. • Les noms des dossiers vont progressivement de 100PHOTO à 999PHOTO d’un incrément de 1. • Un même dossier peut contenir 9 999 fichiers maximum. • Les numéros de fichiers sont attribués conformément aux caractéristiques DCF (Design rule for Camera File system). • Si vous modifiez le nom d’un fichier (par exemple sur un ordinateur), l’appareil photo n’est alors pas en mesure de le lire. Type dossier Définir le type d’un dossier. • Standard* : XXXPHOTO • Date : XXX_MMJJ 144 Menu des paramètres de l’appareil photo > Paramètres * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Formater Formater la carte mémoire. Le formatage supprime l’ensemble des fichiers, y compris les fichiers protégés. (Non*, Oui) Il est possible que des erreurs se produisent si vous utilisez une carte mémoire formatée à l’aide d’un appareil photo d’une autre marque, d’un lecteur de cartes mémoire ou d’un ordinateur. Veuillez formater la carte mémoire avec l’appareil photo avant de l’utiliser pour la prise de photos. Informations périphérique Afficher la version du micrologiciel du boîtier et de l’objectif, l’adresse Mac et le numéro de certification réseau, ou mettre à jour le micrologiciel. • Mise à jour du logiciel : mettre à jour le firmware du boîtier de l’appareil photo ou de l’objectif. (Micrologiciel boîtier, Micrologiciel objectif) • Vous pouvez effectuer la mise à jour du firmware en connectant l’appareil photo à l’ordinateur et en démarrant le i-Launcher. Pour plus de détails, reportezvous à la page 167. • Vous ne pouvez pas lancer la mise à niveau du firmware sans avoir complètement rechargé la batterie au préalable. Rechargez entièrement la batterie avant d’effectuer la mise à niveau du firmware. • Si vous mettez le firmware à jour, les paramètres utilisateur et les valeurs sont réinitialisés. (La date, l’heure, la langue et la sortie vidéo ne sont pas modifiées.) • N’éteignez pas l’appareil photo lorsque la mise à jour est en cours. * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Verrouillage Wi-Fi Demander la saisie d’un code PIN lors de la connexion de l’appareil photo à un smartphone. • PIN: saisir un code PIN avant la connexion. • Aucun*: autoriser la connexion sans saisie d’un code PIN. • La connexion est automatique et aucun code PIN n’est demandé lors de l’utilisation de la fonction NFC. • Dès que vous réinitialisez les paramètres de l’appareil photo ou mettez à jour le micrologiciel, les codes PIN sont automatiquement générés et renouvelés. • Si vous avez déjà connecté votre appareil photo à un smartphone à l’aide d’un code PIN, la connexion est automatiquement établie. Réinitialiser Réinitialiser le menu de configuration et les options de prises de vue aux paramètres par défaut. (Les paramètres de la date, de l’heure, de la langue et de la sortie vidéo ne sont pas modifiés.) (Non*, Oui) Licence Open Source Afficher les licences open source. Chapitre 6 Connexion à des appareils externes Tirez pleinement partie des fonctionnalités de l’appareil photo en le connectant à des appareils externes, par exemple un ordinateur ou un téléviseur HD. 146 Connexion à des appareils externes Visionnez des photos ou vidéos en raccordant l’appareil photo à un téléviseur HD à l’aide d’un câble HDMI vendu en option. 1 En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [m] ĺ q ĺ Sortie HDMI ĺ une option (p. 143). 2 Eteignez l’appareil photo et le téléviseur. 3 Branchez l’appareil photo sur le téléviseur HD à l’aide du câble HDMI proposé en option. 4 Allumez le téléviseur HD et sélectionnez la source vidéo HDMI. 5 Allumez l’appareil photo. • L’appareil photo passe automatiquement en mode Lecture lorsque vous le raccordez à un téléviseur HD. 6 Utilisez les touches de l’appareil photo pour visualiser des photos ou lire des vidéos. • Grâce au câble HDMI, vous pouvez brancher l’appareil photo sur le téléviseur HD en utilisant la méthode Anynet+(CEC). • Les fonctions Anynet+(CEC) vous permettent de contrôler les appareils connectés en utilisant la télécommande du téléviseur. • Si le téléviseur HD est compatible Anynet+(CEC), il s’allume automatiquement lorsqu’il est connecté à l’appareil photo. Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible sur certains téléviseurs HD. • Vous ne pouvez pas prendre de photos ou de vidéos lorsque l’appareil photo est branché sur le téléviseur HD à l’aide d’un câble HDMI. • Il est possible que certaines fonctions de lecture de l’appareil photo ne soient pas disponibles lorsque celui-ci est branché sur un téléviseur HD. • Le délai de connexion de l’appareil photo à un téléviseur HD peut varier en fonction de la carte mémoire utilisée. La fonction principale d’une carte mémoire étant d’augmenter la vitesse de transfert, celle-ci n’est pas nécessairement plus rapide lors de l’utilisation de fonctions HDMI, même si elle dispose d’un taux de transfert plus élevé. Affichage de fichiers sur un téléviseur HD 147 Connexion à des appareils externes Transférez les fichiers d’une carte mémoire sur votre ordinateur en connectant l’appareil photo à ce dernier. Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Windows Connexion de l’appareil photo en tant que disque amovible Vous pouvez connecter l’appareil photo à votre ordinateur en tant que disque amovible. Ouvrez le disque amovible qui apparaît et transférez des fichiers sur l’ordinateur. 1 Eteignez l’appareil photo. 2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. • Vous devez brancher la fiche micro-USB (extrémité la plus petite) du câble USB sur l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. • Si vous tentez de brancher le câble USB sur le port HDMI, l’appareil photo risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 3 Allumez l’appareil photo. • L’ordinateur détecte automatiquement l’appareil photo. 4 Sur l’ordinateur, sélectionnez Poste de travail ĺ Disque amovible ĺ DCIM ĺ 100PHOTO ou 101_0101. 5 Sélectionnez les fichiers de votre choix, puis faites-les glisser ou enregistrez-les sur l’ordinateur. Si Type dossier est réglé sur Date, le nom du dossier apparaît comme suit : « XXX_MMJJ ». Par exemple, si vous capturez un fichier le 1er janvier, le nom du fichier sera « 101_0101 ». Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur 148 Connexion à des appareils externes > Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur Déconnexion de l’appareil photo (Windows 7) La méthode pour déconnecter l’appareil photo est identique pour Windows 8. 1 Assurez-vous qu’aucune donnée n’est en cours de transfert entre l’appareil photo et l’ordinateur. • Si le voyant d’état de l’appareil photo clignote, cela signifie que des données sont en cours de transfert. Attendez que le voyant d’état cesse de clignoter. 2 Cliquez sur dans la barre d’outils en bas à droite de l’écran de l’ordinateur. 3 Cliquez sur le message qui apparaît. 4 Cliquez sur la zone du message indiquant que l’appareil photo a été retiré en toute sécurité. 5 Débranchez le câble USB. Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Mac Mac OS 10.7 ou version ultérieure est pris en charge. 1 Eteignez l’appareil photo. 2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur Macintosh à l’aide du câble USB. • Vous devez brancher la fiche micro-USB (extrémité la plus petite) du câble USB sur l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. • Si vous tentez de brancher le câble USB sur le port HDMI, l’appareil photo risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 149 Connexion à des appareils externes > Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur 3 Allumez l’appareil photo. • L’ordinateur détecte automatiquement l’appareil photo et affiche une icône de disque amovible. 4 Ouvrez le disque amovible. 5 Transférez vos photos ou vidéos sur l’ordinateur Mac. 150 Connexion à des appareils externes Vous pouvez afficher et modifier les fichiers à l’aide des programmes fournis. Vous pouvez envoyer des fichiers à l’ordinateur via le réseau sans fil. Installation de i-Launcher 1 Eteignez l’appareil photo. 2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. Vous devez brancher l'extrémité la plus petite du câble USB sur l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. 3 Allumez l’appareil photo. 4 Installez i-Launcher sur l’ordinateur. Système d’exploitation Comment procéder à l’installation Windows Lorsque la fenêtre contextuelle vous demande d’installer i-Launcher, sélectionnez Oui. • Si aucune fenêtre contextuelle n’apparaît, sélectionnez Poste de travail ĺ i-Launcher ĺ iLinker.exe. • Si une fenêtre contextuelle vous demandant d’exécuter iLinker.exe apparaît, lancez d’abord l’exécutable. • Lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un ordinateur où i-Launcher est installé, le programme démarre automatiquement. Mac Cliquez sur Appareils ĺ i-Launcher ĺ Mac ĺ iLinker. 5 Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour terminer l’installation. Avant d’installer le programme, assurez-vous que l’ordinateur est connecté à un réseau. Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur 151 Connexion à des appareils externes > Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur Utilisation de Samsung i-Launcher Icône Description Vous pouvez télécharger le firmware de l’appareil photo. Télécharger le mode d’emploi. Télécharger ce programme pour convertir les fichiers Samsung RAW (SRW) en fichiers DNG. i-Launcher propose un lien pour télécharger le programme PC Auto Backup lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un ordinateur. A l’aide de la fonction sans fil, vous pouvez envoyer sur un ordinateur les photos ou vidéos enregistrées avec l’appareil photo. Si vous ne pouvez pas ouvrir les fichiers Samsung RAW (SRW) avec Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, convertissez le format de fichier au format DNG avec le Samsung DNG Converter ou mettez à jour le programme Adobe Photoshop Lightroom. Utilisation d’i-Launcher i-Launcher vous permet de mettre à jour le micrologiciel de l’appareil photo ou de l’objectif ou vous fournit un lien pour télécharger le programme PC Auto Backup. Configuration requise pour Windows Elément Configuration requise Processeur Intel® Core™ 2 Duo 1,66 GHz ou plus / AMD Athlon X2 Dual-Core 2,2 GHz ou plus Mémoire vive Minimum 512 Mo de RAM (1 Go ou plus recommandé) Système d’exploitation* Windows 7, Windows 8 Capacité du disque dur 250 Mo minimum (1 Go et plus recommandé) Divers • Lecteur de CD-ROM • Pour une résolution de 1024X768 pixels, un moniteur couleur 16 bits compatible est recommandé (pour une résolution de 1280X1024 pixels, un écran couleur 32 bits est recommandé) • Port USB 2.0 • nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT ou plus puissante / ATI X1600 ou plus puissante • Microsoft DirectX 9.0c ou version ultérieure * Une version 32 bits de i-Launcher sera installée même sur les éditions 64 bits de Windows 7 et Windows 8. 152 Connexion à des appareils externes > Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur • Les exigences de la page suivante sont uniquement des recommandations. i-Launcher peut ne pas fonctionner correctement sur certains ordinateurs, même si ceux-ci satisfont à la configuration requise. • Si l’ordinateur ne répond pas à la configuration requise, un problème de lecture vidéo risque de se produire. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages résultant de l’utilisation d’ordinateurs non conformes, notamment les ordinateurs assemblés. Configuration requise pour Mac Elément Configuration requise Système d’exploitation Mac OS 10.5 ou version ultérieure (sauf PowerPC) Mémoire vive Minimum 256 Mo de RAM (512 Mo ou plus recommandé) Capacité du disque dur 110 Mo minimum Divers • Lecteur de CD-ROM • Port USB 2.0 Ouverture de Samsung i-Launcher Sur l’ordinateur, sélectionnez Démarrer Démarrer → Tous les programmes → Samsung → i-Launcher → Samsung i-Launcher. Sinon, cliquez sur Applications → Samsung → i-Launcher sur l'ordinateur Mac OS. Téléchargement du firmware Depuis l’écran de Samsung i-Launcher, cliquez sur . Pour plus de détails sur la mise à jour du micrologiciel, veuillez-vous reporter à la page 167. Téléchargement du programme PC Auto Backup Depuis l’écran de Samsung i-Launcher, cliquez sur . Pour en savoir plus sur l’installation du programme PC Auto Backup, reportez-vous à la page 129. 153 Connexion à des appareils externes > Utilisation de programmes sur un ordinateur Installation d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 1 Insérez le DVD-ROM Adobe Photoshop Lightroom dans l’ordinateur. 2 Sélectionnez la langue. 3 Suivez les instructions à l’écran. Utilisation d’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom Les photos prises par un appareil numérique sont souvent converties aux formats JPEG et stockées en mémoire selon les réglages de l’appareil photo au moment de la prise de vue. Les fichiers RAW ne sont pas convertis au format JPEG et sont stockés dans la mémoire sans qu’aucune modification ne soit effectuée. Adobe Photoshop Lightroom vous permet d’étalonner le niveau d’exposition, la balance des blancs, les tonalités des couleurs, les contrastes et les couleurs des photos. Vous pouvez également retoucher les fichiers JPEG ou TIFF ainsi que les fichiers RAW. Pour davantage d’informations, consultez le guide du programme en question. • Si vous ne pouvez pas ouvrir les fichiers Samsung RAW (SRW) avec Adobe Photoshop Lightroom, convertissez le format de fichier au format DNG avec le Samsung DNG Converter ou mettez à jour le programme Adobe Photoshop Lightroom. • Il se peut qu’Adobe Photoshop Lightroom affiche différemment les effets de luminosité, de couleurs et autres d’une image. Cela est dû à la suppression des paramètres et des options d’origine de l’appareil photo, appliqués au moment de l’enregistrement de l’image, en vue du traitement dans Adobe Photoshop Lightroom. Chapitre 7 Annexe Obtenez des informations concernant les messages d’erreur, l’entretien de l’appareil photo, des conseils de dépannage, les caractéristiques et les accessoires en option. 155 Annexe Lorsque l'un des messages d'erreur suivants apparaît, reportez-vous aux solutions proposées pour tenter de résoudre le problème. Messages d'erreur Solutions possibles Objectif verrouillé L’objectif est verrouillé. Tourner l’objectif dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d’une montre jusqu’au déclic (p. 46). Erreur de carte • Eteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le. • Retirez la carte mémoire, puis insérez-la de nouveau. • Formatez la carte mémoire. Batterie faible Insérez une batterie chargée ou rechargez celle qui est déjà en place. Aucun fichier image Prenez des photos ou insérez une carte mémoire qui en contient. Périphérique déconnecté. La connexion réseau s’est interrompue pendant le transfert de photos vers des appareils pris en charge. Sélectionnez de nouveau un appareil pris en charge. Erreur de fichier Supprimez le fichier endommagé ou contactez le centre de service après-vente. Messages d'erreur Solutions possibles Mémoire pleine Supprimez les fichiers inutiles ou insérez une nouvelle carte mémoire. Échec transfert. • L’appareil photo n’a pas pu envoyer d’e-mails ou de fichiers à d’autres appareils. Ré-essayez de l’envoyer. • Vérifiez la connexion réseau et ré-essayez. Impossible de prendre une photo car le numéro de dossier/fichier sur la carte mémoire a atteint les valeurs maximales. Réinitialiser le numéro de dossier ? Les noms de fichier ne correspondent pas à la norme DCF. Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour réinitialiser le nombre de dossiers. Error 00 Eteignez l’appareil photo avant de retirer l’objectif. Si le message s’affiche toujours, contactez le centre de service après-vente. Error 01 / 02 Eteignez l’appareil photo, retirez la batterie, puis insérez-la de nouveau. Si le message s’affiche toujours, contactez le centre de service aprèsvente. Messages d’erreur 156 Annexe Nettoyage de l’appareil photo Objectif et écran de l’appareil photo Utilisez un pinceau pour éliminer la poussière et essuyez délicatement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux. S’il reste de la poussière, humidifiez une lingette avec du nettoyant liquide pour objectif et essuyez délicatement. Capteur d’images En fonction des conditions de prise de vue, de la poussière peut apparaître sur les photos suite à l’exposition du capteur d’images à l’environnement extérieur. Ce phénomène est normal et l’exposition à la poussière fait partie de l’utilisation quotidienne de l’appareil photo. N’introduisez pas la soufflette dans la monture de l’objectif. Boîtier de l’appareil photo Essuyez-le délicatement avec un chiffon doux et sec. N’utilisez jamais de benzène, de diluants ou d’alcool pour nettoyer l’appareil. Ces produits peuvent l’endommager ou entraîner un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil photo. Entretien de l’appareil photo 157 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo Utilisation sur la plage ou en bord de mer • Protégez l’appareil photo du sable et de la poussière lorsque vous l’utilisez à la plage ou dans d’autres endroits similaires. • L’appareil photo n’est pas étanche. Ne manipulez pas la batterie, l’adaptateur ou la carte mémoire avec les mains humides. Cela peut entraîner la détérioration de l’appareil photo. Rangement pour une durée prolongée • Lorsque vous rangez l’appareil photo pour une durée prolongée, placezle dans un contenant clos avec un matériau absorbant comme du gel de silice. • Lorsqu’elle n’est pas utilisée pendant une période prolongée, une batterie pleine se décharge progressivement et doit alors être rechargée avant l’utilisation suivante. • Il est possible de régler la date et l’heure lorsque l’appareil photo est éteint et que la batterie ne se trouve pas dans l’appareil photo pendant une durée prolongée. Usage et rangement de l’appareil photo Usage ou rangement inapproprié de l’appareil photo • Evitez d’exposer l’appareil photo à des températures extrêmes. • Evitez d’utiliser l’appareil photo dans des endroits très humides ou dans lesquels le taux d’humidité varie beaucoup. • Evitez d’exposer l’appareil photo à la lumière directe du soleil et de le ranger dans des endroits chauds, mal ventilés, comme à l’intérieur d’une voiture en été. • Protégez l’appareil photo et son écran contre les chocs et les vibrations excessives susceptibles de les endommager. • Evitez d’utiliser et de ranger l’appareil photo dans un endroit poussiéreux, mal entretenu, humide ou mal ventilé, afin de ne pas endommager ses composants internes. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de combustibles ou de produits chimiques inflammables. Ne transportez et ne stockez jamais de liquides inflammables, de gaz ou de matériaux explosifs dans le même compartiment que l’appareil photo ou ses accessoires. • Ne rangez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de boules de naphtaline. 158 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo Usage avec précaution de l’appareil photo dans les environnements humides Lorsque vous transférez l’appareil photo d’un environnement froid à un environnement chaud, de la condensation peut se former sur l’objectif et les composants internes de l’appareil photo. Si tel est le cas, éteignez l’appareil photo et attendez au moins 1 heure. Si de la condensation s’est formée sur la carte mémoire, retirez-la de l’appareil photo et attendez que l’humidité se soit évaporée avant de la réinsérer. Autres avertissements • Ne faites pas tournoyer l’appareil photo par la dragonne. Vous risquez de vous blesser, de blesser d’autres personnes ou d’endommager l’appareil photo. • Ne peignez pas l’appareil photo, la peinture risquant de bloquer ses pièces mobiles et de perturber son fonctionnement. • Eteignez l’appareil photo si vous ne l’utilisez pas. • L’appareil photo contient des pièces fragiles. Evitez de faire subir des chocs à l’appareil photo. • Protégez l’écran de toute pression extérieure en le conservant dans l’étui lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Protégez l’appareil photo des rayures en le tenant à l’écart du sable, des objets pointus ou des pièces de monnaie. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo si l’écran est fissuré ou endommagé. Des morceaux de plastique ou d’acrylique risquent de vous blesser les mains ou le visage. Apportez l’appareil photo dans un centre de service aprèsvente Samsung afin de la faire réparer. • Ne posez jamais l’appareil photo, sa batterie, son chargeur ou ses accessoires à proximité, à l’intérieur ou au-dessus d’un dispositif chauffant, tel qu’un four à micro-ondes, une cuisinière ou un radiateur. La chaleur peut déformer ou faire surchauffer ces appareils et provoquer une incendie ou une explosion. • Evitez toute exposition de l’objectif à la lumière directe du soleil — ceci risque d’entraîner une décoloration ou un mauvais fonctionnement du capteur d’images. • Protégez l’objectif des traces de doigt et des éraflures. Nettoyez l’objectif à l’aide d’un chiffon doux et propre, exempt de poussière. • L’appareil photo peut s’éteindre en cas de pression extérieure. Cela a pour but de protéger la carte mémoire. Allumez l’appareil photo pour l’utiliser à nouveau. • Il est possible que l’appareil photo chauffe en cours d’utilisation. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ou les performances de l’appareil photo. • Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo à des températures faibles, il peut mettre du temps à s’allumer, une décoloration peut se produire temporairement ou des images persistantes peuvent apparaître. Il ne s’agit en aucun cas d’un dysfonctionnement, et ces perturbations momentanées se corrigent d’elles-mêmes une fois que l’appareil photo retrouve à nouveau une température plus modérée. • La peinture ou le métal sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut provoquer des allergies, des démangeaisons, de l’eczéma ou des boursouflures pour les personnes à peau sensible. Si vous présentez de tels symptômes, arrêtez immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil photo et consultez un médecin. • N’introduisez pas de corps étrangers dans les compartiments, les logements ou les ouvertures de l’appareil photo. Il est possible que votre garantie ne couvre pas les dommages provoqués par une mauvaise utilisation. • Ne confiez pas la réparation de l’appareil photo à un technicien non agréé et ne tentez pas de le réparer vous-même. Votre garantie ne couvre pas les dégâts résultant d’une réparation par un technicien non agréé. 159 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo A propos des cartes mémoire Cartes mémoires prises en charge Ce produit prend en charge les cartes mémoire microSD, microSDHC ou microSDXC. Adaptateur de carte mémoire Carte mémoire Pour pouvoir lire des données sur un ordinateur ou par le biais d’un lecteur de cartes, insérez la carte dans l’adaptateur approprié. 160 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo Capacité de la carte mémoire La capacité de la mémoire peut varier en fonction de la scène ou des conditions de prise de vue. Ces capacités sont données pour une carte SD de 2 Go. Taille Qualité Maximale Elevée Normale RAW RAW + Très élevée RAW + Elevée RAW + Normale Photo 20.0M (5472X3648) 162 294 403 57 26 32 35 10.1M (3888X2592) 292 492 638 - 32 37 39 5.9M (2976X1984) 440 688 846 - 36 40 41 2.0M (1728X1152) 841 1 095 1 217 - 41 42 43 Mode Rafale 495 753 911 - - - - 16.9M (5472X3080) 188 337 456 - 27 34 37 7.8M (3712X2088) 359 585 739 - 34 38 40 4.9M (2944X1656) 503 762 919 - 37 40 41 2.1M (1920X1080) 1 566 2 840 3 897 - 44 45 46 13.3M (3648X3648) 231 403 536 - 30 35 38 7.0M (2640X2640) 390 624 781 - 35 39 40 4.0M (2000X2000) 573 839 993 - 38 41 42 1.1M (1024X1024) 2 814 4 750 6 163 - 45 46 46 161 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire • Evitez d’exposer la carte mémoire à des températures extrêmes (inférieures à 0 °C ou supérieures à 40 °C). Cela risque de provoquer des dysfonctionnements de la carte mémoire. • Introduisez la carte mémoire dans le bon sens. Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil photo ainsi que la carte mémoire. • N’utilisez pas de carte mémoire formatée avec un autre appareil photo ou avec un ordinateur. Reformatez la carte mémoire sur l’appareil photo. • Eteignez l’appareil photo avant d’introduire ou de retirer la carte mémoire. • Vous ne devez pas retirer la carte mémoire ou éteindre l’appareil photo lorsque le voyant clignote. Vous risquez d’endommager vos données. • Au terme de la durée de vie de la carte mémoire, vous ne pouvez plus stocker de photos sur la carte. Utilisez une autre carte mémoire. • Evitez de plier la carte mémoire, de la laisser tomber ou de la soumettre à des chocs ou des pressions importantes. • Evitez d’utiliser ou de ranger toute carte mémoire à proximité de champs magnétiques. • Evitez d’utiliser ou de ranger toute carte mémoire dans des environnements chauds, très humides ou en contact avec des substances corrosives. Taille Qualité HQ Normale Vidéo 1920X1080 (30 ips) Environ 17' 02" Environ 19' 50" 1280X720 (30 ips) Environ 23' 46" Environ 29' 37" 640X480 (30 ips) Environ 58' 24" Environ 77' 06" Pour partager (30 ips) - Environ 261' 21" • Les valeurs précédentes sont mesurées sans utiliser la fonction de zoom. • Le temps d’enregistrement disponible peut varier si le zoom est utilisé. • Plusieurs vidéos ont été enregistrées successivement afin de déterminer la durée totale d’enregistrement. • La durée maximale d’enregistrement est de 20 minutes par fichier. • La durée maximale de lecture de vidéos Pour partager est de 30 secondes par fichier. 162 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo A propos de la batterie Utilisez uniquement des batteries homologuées par Samsung. Caractéristiques de la batterie Elément Description Modèle* B740AE/B740AC/B740AU/B740AK Type Batterie au lithium-ion Capacité des cellules 2 330 mAh Tension 3,8 V Temps de charge** (Lorsque la batterie est complètement déchargée) Environ 270 min. * Les caractéristiques de la batterie ou du modèle peuvent différer selon votre région. ** Les valeurs indiquées ci-dessus sont basées sur l’utilisation du câble de connexion USB et de l’adaptateur secteur fournis. La recharge de la batterie en la raccordant à un ordinateur peut s’avérer plus lente. • Evitez tout contact de la carte mémoire avec des liquides, de la poussière ou des corps étrangers. Si la carte mémoire est sale, nettoyez-la avec un chiffon doux avant de l’introduire dans l’appareil photo. • Evitez que la carte mémoire ou l’emplacement pour carte mémoire n’entre en contact avec des liquides, de la poussière ou tout corps étranger. Cela risque d’endommager l’appareil photo ou la carte mémoire. • Lorsque vous transportez une carte mémoire, rangez-la dans un étui afin de la protéger de l’électricité statique. • Transférez vos données importantes sur d’autres supports, tel qu’un disque dur ou un CD ou DVD. • Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo de manière prolongée, la carte mémoire peut chauffer. Ceci est normal et n’entraîne aucun dysfonctionnement. • Utilisez une carte mémoire conforme aux normes en vigueur. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. 163 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo Des blessures pouvant s’avérer mortelles peuvent résulter d’une utilisation imprudente ou inappropriée de la batterie. Pour votre sécurité, veuillez suivre ces instructions destinées à utiliser la batterie correctement : • La batterie peut s’enflammer ou bien éclater si celle-ci n’est pas manipulée correctement. Si vous remarquez un quelconque défaut de fabrication, une fêlure ou d’autres anomalies sur la batterie, cessez de l’utiliser immédiatement et contactez votre fabricant. • Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs de batterie originaux recommandés par le fabricant, et rechargez la batterie en respectant scrupuleusement les consignes décrites dans ce mode d’emploi. • Ne placez pas la batterie à proximité d’appareils chauffants ou dans un environnement soumis à des températures élevées, par exemple à l’intérieur d’une voiture en été. • Ne placez jamais la batterie dans un four à micro-ondes. • Evitez de stocker ou d’utiliser la batterie dans des endroits chauds et humides comme des spas ou des cabines de douche. • Ne posez pas l’appareil sur des surfaces inflammables comme de la literie, des couvertures, des tapis ou des couvertures électriques pendant des périodes prolongées. • Lorsque l’appareil est allumé, ne le laissez pas dans un espace confiné pendant une période prolongée. • Ne laissez pas les bornes de la batterie entrer en contact avec des objets métalliques comme des colliers, des pièces de monnaie, des clés ou des montres. • Utilisez uniquement des batteries de remplacement lithium-ion originales recommandées par le fabricant. • Ne démontez ou ne perforez pas la batterie avec un objet tranchant. • Evitez de soumettre la batterie à une pression élevée ou à des éléments susceptibles de l’écraser. • Evitez de soumettre la batterie à des chocs importants, par exemple la laisser tomber de très haut. • N’exposez pas la batterie à des températures d’au moins 60 °C. • Evitez de mettre la batterie en contact avec des liquides ou de l’humidité. • Evitez tout contact de la batterie avec des flammes et de l’exposer à une chaleur intense ou au soleil de façon prolongée. Informations sur le traitement des batteries usagées • Portez une attention particulière à la façon dont vous jetez les batteries usagées. • Ne jetez pas la batterie au feu. • Les consignes de traitement des batteries usagées peuvent varier d’un pays à l’autre. Procédez à la mise au rebut de la batterie usagée en accord avec toutes les réglementations locales et fédérales en vigueur. Consignes relatives à la recharge de la batterie Respectez les consignes de recharge indiquées dans ce mode d’emploi pour recharger la batterie. La batterie peut s’enflammer ou éclater si celle-ci n’est pas rechargée correctement. 164 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo Autonomie de la batterie Mode Prise de vue Durée moyenne / Nombre de photos Photos Environ 185 min./Environ 370 photos Vidéo Environ 135 min. (Enregistrement de vidéos à une résolution de 1920X1080 et à une fréquence de 30 ips.) • Ces chiffres proviennent des normes de test CIPA. Ils peuvent varier en fonction de votre utilisation réelle. • Les temps de prise de vue disponibles varient en fonction de l’arrièreplan, de l’intervalle de prise de vue et des conditions d’utilisation. • Plusieurs vidéos ont été enregistrées successivement afin de déterminer la durée totale d’enregistrement. Message de batterie faible Lorsque la batterie est complètement déchargée, l’icône de batterie devient rouge et le message « Batterie faible » apparaît. Remarques à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie • Evitez d’exposer les cartes mémoire à des températures extrêmes (inférieures à 0 °C ou supérieures à 40 °C). Les températures extrêmes peuvent avoir pour effet de réduire la capacité de recharge des batteries. • Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo de manière prolongée, la zone située autour de la trappe batterie peut chauffer. Ceci n’affecte pas l’utilisation normale de l’appareil photo. • Ne tirez pas sur le cordon d’alimentation pour le débrancher de la prise secteur, car vous risquez de provoquer des flammes ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. • A des températures inférieures à 0 °C, la capacité et la durée de vie de la batterie peuvent diminuer. • La capacité de la batterie peut diminuer à de faibles températures, mais redevient normale à des températures plus modérées. • Si vous rangez l’appareil photo sans l’utiliser pour une période de temps prolongée, retirez d’abord la batterie. Les batteries peuvent fuir ou se détériorer avec le temps, risquant d’endommager gravement l’appareil photo. Si vous rangez l’appareil photo pendant une durée prolongée, sans avoir retiré la batterie, celle-ci risque de se décharger. Lorsque la batterie est complètement déchargée, il peut s’avérer impossible de la recharger. • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil photo pendant une durée prolongée (3 mois ou plus), vérifiez la batterie et rechargez-la régulièrement. Si vous laissez continuellement la batterie se décharger, sa capacité et sa durée de vie peuvent diminuer, ce qui peut entraîner son dysfonctionnement, des flammes ou son éclatement. 165 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo Avertissements à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie Protégez la batterie, le chargeur et la carte mémoire de toute détérioration. Evitez tout contact de la batterie avec des objets métalliques, car cela risque de provoquer un court-circuit entre les bornes + et - de la batterie, de l’endommager de manière temporaire ou permanente, ou de provoquer des flammes ou une électrocution . Remarques concernant la recharge de la batterie • Si le voyant d’état est éteint, assurez-vous que la batterie est correctement mise en place. • Si lors de la recharge l’appareil photo est allumé, la batterie peut ne pas se recharger complètement. Eteignez l’appareil photo avant de recharger la batterie. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo lors de la recharge de la batterie. Vous risquez de provoquer une flamme ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. • Ne tirez pas sur le cordon d’alimentation pour le débrancher de la prise secteur, car vous risquez de provoquer des flammes ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. • Laissez la batterie se recharger pendant au moins 10 minutes avant d’allumer l’appareil photo. • Si vous raccordez l’appareil photo à une source d’alimentation externe alors que la batterie est déchargée, l’utilisation de fonctions à forte consommation énergétique provoque l’extinction de l’appareil photo. Rechargez la batterie pour pouvoir utiliser l’appareil photo normalement. • Si vous rebranchez le cordon d’alimentation alors que la batterie est complètement rechargée, le voyant d’état s’allume pendant environ 30 minutes. • L’utilisation du flash et l’enregistrement de vidéos déchargent rapidement la batterie. Rechargez complètement la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil photo. • Si le voyant d’état rouge clignote, rebranchez le cordon ou retirez la batterie et réintroduisez-la. • Si vous rechargez la batterie lorsque le cordon surchauffe ou lorsque la température est trop élevée, le voyant d’état rouge peut clignoter. La recharge démarre lorsque la batterie a refroidi. • La recharge excessive des batteries peut raccourcir leur durée de vie. A la fin de chaque recharge, débranchez le cordon de l’appareil photo. • Ne tordez pas le cordon d’alimentation et ne placez pas d’objets lourds dessus. Vous risquez d’endommager le cordon. 166 Annexe > Entretien de l’appareil photo Remarques à propos de la recharge avec raccordement à un ordinateur • Utilisez uniquement le câble USB fourni. • La recharge de la batterie peut s’avérer impossible quand : - vous utilisez un concentrateur USB ; - d’autres appareils USB sont raccordés à votre ordinateur ; - vous connectez le câble sur le port situé sur la face avant de votre ordinateur ; - le port USB de votre ordinateur ne prend pas en charge un niveau standard de puissance en sortie (5 V, 500 mA). Utilisation et recyclage consciencieux des batteries et des chargeurs • Ne jetez jamais la batterie au feu. Respectez la réglementation en vigueur concernant l’élimination des batteries usagées. • Ne posez jamais les batteries ou l’appareil photo à l’intérieur ou audessus d’un dispositif chauffant, tel qu’un four à micro-ondes, une cuisinière ou un radiateur. En cas de surchauffe, les batteries risquent d’éclater. 167 Annexe Mise à jour du micrologiciel Connectez l’appareil photo à l’ordinateur et procédez à la mise à jour du micrologiciel de l’appareil photo ou de l’objectif. • Vous ne pouvez pas lancer la mise à niveau du firmware sans avoir complètement rechargé la batterie au préalable. Rechargez entièrement la batterie avant d’effectuer la mise à niveau du firmware. • Si vous mettez le firmware à jour, les paramètres utilisateur et les valeurs sont réinitialisés. (La date, l’heure, la langue et la sortie vidéo ne sont pas modifiées.) • N’éteignez pas l’appareil photo lorsque la mise à jour est en cours. 1 Eteignez l’appareil photo. 2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. • Vous devez brancher l'extrémité la plus petite du câble USB sur l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous installez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. • Si vous tentez de brancher le câble USB sur le port HDMI, l’appareil photo risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 3 Allumez l’appareil photo. 4 Sur l’ordinateur, sélectionnez i-Launcher → . 5 Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour télécharger le micrologiciel dans l’appareil photo. • Vous pouvez télécharger le micrologiciel de l’appareil photo ou de l’objectif. 6 Éteignez l’appareil photo une fois le téléchargement terminé. 7 Débranchez le câble USB. 8 Allumez l’appareil photo. 9 Appuyez sur [m] → q → Informations périphérique → Mise à jour du logiciel → Micrologiciel boîtier ou Micrologiciel objectif. 10 Sélectionnez Oui sur une fenêtre contextuelle de l’appareil photo pour la mise à jour du micrologiciel. 168 Annexe Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente Si l’appareil photo ne fonctionne pas correctement, vérifiez les éléments suivants avant de contacter un représentant. Lorsque vous apportez l’appareil photo dans un centre de service après-vente, veillez à également fournir les autres composants qui ont pu contribuer au dysfonctionnement, notamment la carte mémoire et la batterie. Problème Solutions possibles Impossible d’allumer l’appareil photo • Assurez-vous que la batterie est installée. • Assurez-vous que la batterie est correctement installée. • Rechargez la batterie. L’appareil photo s’éteint de façon inattendue • Rechargez la batterie. • L’appareil photo peut être réglé en mode extinction automatique ou configuré afin que l’écran s’éteigne automatiquement (p. 142). • Il est possible que l’appareil photo s’éteigne afin d’éviter que la carte mémoire ne soit endommagée en raison d’une chaleur excessive. Rallumez l’appareil photo. La batterie de l’appareil photo se décharge rapidement • La batterie peut se décharger plus rapidement dans un environnement où les températures sont basses (en dessous de 0 °C). Gardez la batterie au chaud en la plaçant dans votre poche. • L’utilisation du flash et l’enregistrement de vidéos déchargent rapidement la batterie. Rechargez-la si nécessaire. • La batterie est un consommable qui a une durée de vie limitée et doit périodiquement être remplacé. Remplacez-la si son autonomie diminue rapidement. Problème Solutions possibles Impossible de prendre des photos • La carte mémoire est pleine. Supprimez les fichiers inutiles ou insérez une nouvelle carte. • Formatez la carte mémoire. • La carte mémoire est défectueuse. Remplacez la carte mémoire. • Assurez-vous que l’appareil photo est allumé. • Rechargez la batterie. • Assurez-vous que la batterie est correctement installée. L’appareil photo ne répond pas Retirez la batterie, puis replacez-la. L’appareil photo chauffe Il est possible que l’appareil photo chauffe en cours d’utilisation. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ou les performances de l’appareil photo. Le flash se déclenche de façon inattendue L’électricité statique peut provoquer le déclenchement du flash. Il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil photo. Le flash ne fonctionne pas • Le flash est peut-être réglé sur Désactivé (p. 88). • Certains modes ne vous permettent pas d’utiliser le flash. La date et l’heure sont incorrectes Réglez la date et l’heure dans le menu q (p. 142). L’écran ou des touches ne fonctionnent pas Retirez la batterie, puis replacez-la. 169 Annexe > Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente Problème Solutions possibles La carte mémoire présente une erreur • Eteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le. • Retirez la carte mémoire, puis insérez-la de nouveau. • Formatez la carte mémoire. Pour davantage d’informations, voir « Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire » (p. 161). Le téléviseur ou l’ordinateur ne peuvent pas afficher les photos et les vidéos stockées sur une carte mémoire microSDXC Les cartes mémoire microSDXC utilisent le système de fichiers exFAT. Assurez-vous que le dispositif externe est compatible avec le système de fichiers exFAT avant d’y connecter l’appareil photo. Votre ordinateur ne reconnaît pas les cartes mémoires microSDXC Les cartes mémoire microSDXC utilisent le système de fichiers exFAT. Pour utiliser une carte mémoire microSDXC sur un ordinateur Windows XP, téléchargez et effectuez la mise à jour du pilote du système de fichiers exFAT, à partir du site Web de Microsoft. Impossible d’afficher des fichiers Si vous modifiez le nom d’un fichier, l’appareil photo risque de ne plus pouvoir le lire (le nom de fichier doit être conforme à la norme DCF). Si vous rencontrez ce problème, affichez le fichier sur un ordinateur. Problème Solutions possibles La photo est floue • Assurez-vous d’avoir réglé l’option de mise au point appropriée pour le type de prise de vue. • Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil photo. • Assurez-vous que l’objectif est propre. Dans le cas contraire, nettoyez-le (p. 156). Les couleurs de la photo ne correspondent pas à celles de la scène Un réglage incorrect de la balance des blancs peut provoquer un mauvais rendu des couleurs. Sélectionnez l’option Balance des blancs appropriée à la source de lumière (p. 70). La photo est trop claire ou trop sombre Votre photo est surexposée ou sous-exposée. • Réglez la valeur d’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation. • Réglez la sensibilité ISO (p. 69). • Activez ou désactivez le flash (p. 88). • Réglez la valeur d’exposition (p. 95). Les photos sont déformées L’objectif grand-angle, qui permet de photographier avec un angle de vue large, peut générer de très légères déformations de la photo prise par l’appareil photo. Ceci est normal et n’engendre pas de dysfonctionnement. Des lignes horizontales apparaissent sur la photo Cela peut se produire lorsque le sujet est exposé à une source lumineuse fluorescente ou une lampe au mercure. Sélectionnez une vitesse d’obturation lente. L’écran de lecture ne s’affiche pas sur le périphérique externe connecté • Vérifiez qu’un câble HDMI est correctement branché sur l’écran externe. • Assurez-vous que la carte mémoire est reconnue. 170 Annexe > Avant de contacter un centre de service après-vente Problème Solutions possibles L’ordinateur ne reconnaît pas l’appareil photo • Vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement branché. • Assurez-vous que l’appareil photo est allumé. • Assurez-vous d’utiliser un système d’exploitation pris en charge. L’appareil photo se déconnecte de l’ordinateur pendant le transfert des fichiers L’électricité statique peut interrompre la transmission des fichiers. Débranchez le câble USB, puis rebranchez-le. i-Launcher ne s’exécute pas correctement • Quittez i-Launcher et redémarrez l’application. • Selon la configuration et l’environnement de votre ordinateur, il est possible que l’application ne démarre pas automatiquement. Si tel est le cas, cliquez sur Démarrer ĺ Tous les programmes ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher ĺ Samsung i-Launcher sur votre ordinateur Windows. (Dans le cas de Windows 8, ouvrez l’écran d’accueil, puis sélectionnez Toutes les applications ĺ Samsung i-Launcher.) Sinon, cliquez sur Applications ĺ Samsung ĺ i-Launcher sur votre ordinateur Mac OS. Problème Solutions possibles La fonction de mise au point automatique ne fonctionne pas • La mise au point ne s’effectue pas sur le sujet. Lorsque le sujet se trouve en dehors de la zone AF, recadrez-le dans la zone AF, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course. • Le sujet est trop proche. Eloignez-vous du sujet et prenez la photo. • Le mode de mise au point est réglé sur MF. Passez en mode AF. La fonction de verrouillage AEL ne fonctionne pas La fonction AEL ne fonctionne pas avec les modes t, M, s et R. Pour utiliser cette fonction, sélectionnez un autre mode. L’objectif est inopérant • Vérifiez que l’objectif est correctement installé. • Retirez l’objectif de l’appareil photo et remettez-le en place. Le flash externe ne fonctionne pas Assurez-vous que le flash externe est correctement monté sur le port du flash externe. Lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo, l’écran de réglage de la date et de l’heure s’affiche • Réglez de nouveau la date et l’heure. • Cet écran apparaît lorsque la source d’alimentation interne de l’appareil photo est complètement déchargée. Insérez une batterie pleine puis éteignez l’appareil photo pendant au moins 72 heures afin d’assurer une recharge complète. 171 Annexe Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Capteur d’images Type CMOS Dimensions du capteur 23,5 X 15,7 mm Pixels effectifs Environ 20,3 mégapixels Nombre total de pixels Environ 21,6 mégapixels Filtre couleur Filtre RGB couleurs primaires Monture de l’objectif Type Monture Samsung NX Objectif disponible Objectifs Samsung NX (les objectifs 3D ne sont pas pris en charge) Stabilisation de l’image Type Décentrement (dépend de l’objectif) Mode Désactivée/Mode 1/Mode 2 Correction des déformations Activé / Désactivé (dépend de l’objectif) i-Function Prise en charge (Valeur d’ouverture, Vitesse d’obturation, EV, ISO, Balance des blancs) Écran Type TFT LCD Taille 3,0" (Environ 75,2 mm) Résolution HVGA (320X480) 460,8 k points Champ de vision Environ 100% Angle Pivotement vers le haut : 180° Affichage utilisateur Grille, Icônes, Histogramme, Indicateur de niveau Mise au point Type Contraste Mise au point automatique Foyer de mise au point automatique • Sélection : 1 point (sélection libre) • Multiple : Normal 21 points, Macro 35 points • Détection des visages : max. 10 visages • Mise au point avec suivi des objets Mode AF unique, AF continu, Mise au point manuelle Voyant de mise au point assistée Oui 172 Annexe > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Obturateur Type Obturateur avec premier rideau électronique, Obturateur à plan focal Vitesse • Automatique : 1/4 000 – 1/4 s • Manuel : 1/4 000 – 30 s (Palier 1/3 EV) • Bulb (limite de temps : 4 min.) Exposition Système de mesure de l’exposition TTL 221 (17X13) Segment bloc Mesure de l’exposition : Multiple, Centrée, Sélective Plage de la mesure d’exposition : EV 0–18 (ISO 100 · 30 mm, F2) Compensation ±3 EV (Palier 1/3 EV) Verrouillage AE Touche de personnalisation Equivalent ISO Automatique, 100–25600 (1 ou Palier 1/3 EV) Mode de sélection Mode Unique, Continue, Mode Rafale (5M uniquement), Retardateur, Bracketing (Exposition automatique, Balance des blancs, Assistant photo, Profondeur) Prise de vue en continu 5 ips * La vitesse maximale de prise de vue est de 5 images par seconde. Elle ralentira au bout environ de 13 clichés au format JPEG et de 5 clichés au format RAW. (Cela peut varier en fonction des caractéristiques techniques de la carte mémoire.) Prise de vue Bracketing Bracketing Exposition automatique (±3 EV), Bracketing Balance des blancs, Bracketing Assistant photo, Bracketing de profondeur de champ (uniquement en mode Programme et Priorité ouverture) Retardateur à distance 2 – 30 s (intervalle d’1 seconde) Déclenchement de l’obturateur Prise en charge (via smartphone) Flash Type Flash externe (en option) Mode Flash intelligent, Automatique, Yeux rouges auto, Contre jour, Ctre jour + Yeux rouges, 1er Rideau, 2e Rideau, Désactivée Vitesse de synchronisation Inférieure à 1/180 s Valeur d’exposition Flash -2 – +2 EV (Palier 0,5 EV) Flash externe Flash externes Samsung en option Terminal de synchronisation Griffe porte-accessoire 173 Annexe > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Balance des blancs Mode Balance des blancs automatique, Lumière du jour, Nuageux, Blanc fluorescent, Blanc/Noir fluorescent, Lumière du jour fluorescent, Tungstène, Balance des blancs flash, Réglage personnalisé, Température couleur (Manuel) Ajustement micro Orange / Bleu / Vert / Magenta 7 paliers respectivement Plage dynamique Désactivée/Plage intelligente+/HDR Assistant photo Mode Standard, Accentué, Portrait, Paysage, Naturel, Rétro, Cool, Calme, Classique, Personnalisé 1, Personnalisé 2, Personnalisé 3 Paramètres Couleur, Saturation, Netteté, Contraste Prise de vue Mode Scènes Automatique, Intelligent, Programme, Priorité ouverture, Priorité vitesse, Manuel, Panorama Mode intelligent Beauté, Meilleure photo, Mode Continu, Prise Enfants, Paysage, Macro, Nature morte, Fêtes et intérieurs, Action, Ton riche, Cascade, Silhouette, Coucher de soleil, Nuit, Feux d'artifice, Lumière Filtre intelligent Vignettage, Miniature, Esquisse, Œil de poisson Taille • JPEG (3:2) : 20.0M (5472X3648), 10.1M (3888X2592), 5.9M (2976X1984), 5.0M (2736X1824) (mode Rafale uniquement), 2.0M (1728X1152) • JPEG (16:9) : 16.9M (5472X3080), 7.8M (3712X2088), 4.9M (2944X1656), 2.1M (1920X1080) • JPEG (1:1) : 13.3M (3648X3648), 7.0M (2640X2640), 4.0M (2000X2000), 1.1M (1024X1024) • RAW: 20.0M (5472X3648) Qualité Maximale, Elevée, Normale, RAW, RAW + Très élevée, RAW + Elevée, RAW + Normale Norme RAW SRW (ver.3.0.0) Espace colorimétrique sRGB, Adobe RGB Vidéo Type MP4 (H.264) Format Vidéo : H.264, son : AAC Mode vidéo AE Programme, Priorité ouverture, Priorité vitesse, Manuel Clip vidéo Son activé / désactivé (durée de prise de vue : maxi. 20') Filtre intelligent Vignettage, Miniature, Esquisse, Œil de poisson 174 Annexe > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Taille 1920X1080, 1280X720, 640X480, 320X240 (Pour partager) Fréquence d’images 30 ips (NTSC), 25 ips (PAL) Multi-mouvements x0.25 (640X480, 320X240 uniquement), x1, x5, x10, x20 Qualité HQ, Normale Son Stéréo Retouche Découpage de la durée, Capture d’images fixes Lecture Type Image unique, Miniatures (15/28), Diaporama, Vidéo Retouche Filtre intelligent, Redimensionner, Rotation, Retouche des visages, Luminosité, Contraste, Réglage automatique, Saturation, Réglage RVB, Température des couleurs, Exposition Filtre intelligent Vignettage, Miniature, Onirique, Esquisse, Effet ultra grand angle, Classique, Rétro, Peinture à l'huile, Dessin, Peinture à l'encre, Filtre croisé, Prise de vue zoom Stockage Support Mémoire externe (en option) : carte microSD (jusqu’à 2 Go garantis), microSDHC (jusqu’à 32 Go garantis), microSDXC (jusqu’à 64 Go garantis, UHS-1 pris en charge) - Classe 6 et supérieure recommandée Format de fichier RAW (SRW (ver.3.0.0)), JPEG (EXIF 2.3), DCF Réseau sans fil Type IEEE 802.11b/g/n Fonction AutoShare, Remote Viewfinder, MobileLink, Partage instantané, Sauvegarde automatique, Samsung Link,Home Monitor+, Group Share NFC Oui Interface Sortie numérique USB 2.0 (prise micro-USB) Sortie vidéo • NTSC, PAL (au choix) • HDMI Connecteur d’alimentation CC 5,0 V, 0,55 A via micro USB 175 Annexe > Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Source d'alimentation Type Batterie rechargeable : B740AE/B740AC/ B740AU/B740AK (2 330 mAh, 3,8 V) * Les caractéristiques de la batterie ou du modèle peuvent différer selon votre région. Dimensions (L x H x P) 117,4 x 65,9 x 39,0 mm Poids 230 g (sans batterie, ni carte mémoire) Température de fonctionnement 0 – 40 °C Humidité ambiante tolérée 5 – 85% Logiciels i-Launcher, Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 5, Samsung DNG Converter * Ces caractéristiques peuvent changer sans préavis à des fins d’amélioration du rendement. * Toutes les marques de commerce et noms de produits appartiennent à leurs détenteurs respectifs. 176 Annexe Glossaire AP (Point d’accès) Un point d’accès est un appareil qui permet aux appareils sans fil de se connecter à un réseau câblé. Réseau Ad-Hoc Un réseau ad-hoc est une connexion temporaire permettant de partager des fichiers ou une connexion Internet entre des ordinateurs et des appareils. Adobe RGB Adobe RGB est utilisé pour des impressions professionnelles et dispose d’une gamme de couleurs plus importante que la norme sRGB. Il vous permet ainsi de retoucher facilement des photos sur un ordinateur. AEB (Bracketing d’exposition automatique) Cette fonctionnalité permet de prendre automatiquement plusieurs photos à différentes expositions afin de vous aider à obtenir une exposition correcte. AEL (Verrouillage automatique de l’exposition) Ces fonctions vous permettent de verrouiller l’exposition sur laquelle vous souhaitez calculer celle-ci. AF (Mise au point automatique) Système qui permet à l’objectif de l’appareil photo d’effectuer une mise au point automatique sur le sujet. L’appareil photo se base sur le contraste pour opérer la mise au point automatique. AMOLED (matrice active à diodes organiques électroluminescentes) / LCD (Ecran à cristaux liquides) L’écran AMOLED est très fin et très léger, car il ne nécessite aucun rétro-éclairage. L’écran LCD est couramment utilisé dans le secteur de l’électronique grand public. Ce type d’écran nécessite un rétro-éclairage séparé, de type CCFL ou LED, pour reproduire les couleurs. Ouverture L’ouverture contrôle la quantité de lumière atteignant le capteur de l’appareil photo. 177 Annexe > Glossaire Composition En photographie, la composition signifie la disposition des éléments d’une scène. En règle générale, une bonne composition doit obéir à la règle des tiers. DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) Spécification créée par la Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA) qui définit le format et le système de fichiers pour les appareils photo. Profondeur de champ Zone de netteté acceptable entre le point de mise au point le plus proche et celui le plus éloigné. La profondeur de champ varie selon la focale et l’ouverture utilisées, ainsi que la distance entre l’appareil photo et le sujet. Avec, par exemple, une ouverture inférieure, la profondeur de champ augmente et l’arrière-plan de la composition devient flou. Bougé de l’appareil photo (flou) Si vous bougez l’appareil photo alors que l’obturateur est ouvert, l’image risque d’être floue. Cela est d’autant plus vrai si la vitesse d’obturation est lente. Vous pouvez éviter ce phénomène de bougé de l’appareil photo en augmentant la sensibilité, en utilisant le flash ou en augmentant la vitesse d’obturation. Pour stabiliser l’appareil photo, vous pouvez également utiliser un trépied ou la fonction OIS. Espace colorimétrique Gamme des couleurs « visibles » par l’appareil photo. Température des couleurs La température des couleurs est une mesure exprimée en Kelvin (K) qui indique la tonalité chromatique d’un type spécifique de source de lumière. Lorsque la température de couleur augmente, la couleur de la source lumineuse devient bleutée. Lorsque la température de couleur diminue, la couleur de la source lumineuse devient rougeâtre. A 5 500 degrés Kelvin, la couleur de la source lumineuse est similaire celle de la lumière du soleil à midi. 178 Annexe > Glossaire Flash Lumière brève et intense qui permet de créer une exposition adéquate lorsque la luminosité est faible. Longueur de focale Distance entre le centre de l’objectif et son point focal (en millimètres). Des longueurs de focale plus importantes réduisent les angles de vue et agrandissent le sujet. Des longueurs de focale moins élevées agrandissent les angles de vue. Histogramme Représentation graphique de la luminosité d’une image. L’axe des abscisses représente la luminosité et l’axe des ordonnées le nombre de pixels. Des points à l’extrême gauche (trop sombre) ou à l’extrême droite (trop clair) signifient que la photo n’est pas correctement exposée. H.264 / MPEG-4 Format vidéo à compression élevée mis au point par les organismes internationaux de normalisation ISO-IEC et ITU-T. Ce codec permet d’obtenir une bonne qualité vidéo avec des débits binaires faibles développés par la Joint Video Team (JVT). EV (Valeur d’exposition) Ensemble des combinaisons de vitesses d’obturation et d’ouverture de l’objectif de l’appareil photo pour une même exposition. Compensation EV Cette fonctionnalité permet de régler rapidement la valeur d’exposition mesurée par l’appareil photo, selon des incréments restreints, afin d’améliorer l’exposition des photos. Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format) Spécification créée par la Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA) qui définit le format de fichiers pour les appareils photo. Exposition Quantité de lumière atteignant le capteur de l’appareil photo. L’exposition est contrôlée par la vitesse d’obturation, la valeur d’ouverture et la sensibilité ISO. 179 Annexe > Glossaire Mesure de l’exposition La mesure de l’exposition correspond à la manière dont l’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière nécessaire à la définition de l’exposition. MF (Mise au point manuelle) Système qui permet d’effectuer une mise au point manuelle sur le sujet à travers l’objectif de l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez utiliser la bague de mise au point en vue de la prise de vue d’un sujet. MJPEG (Motion JPEG) Format vidéo avec une compression d’images JPEG. Capteur d’images Partie physique de l’appareil photo qui comporte une cellule photosensible pour chaque pixel de l’image. Chaque cellule photosensible enregistre la valeur de la luminosité d’une exposition. Il existe deux types de capteurs : CCD (Charge-Coupled Device) et CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor). Adresse IP (protocole Internet) Une adresse IP est un nombre unique affecté à chacun des appareils raccordés à Internet. Sensibilité ISO Sensibilité de l’appareil photo à la lumière, mesurée d’après la sensibilité du film utilisé dans un appareil photo à pellicule. A une sensibilité ISO élevée, la vitesse d’obturation de l’appareil photo est plus grande, ce qui réduit le flou causé par le bougé de l’appareil ou par une faible luminosité. Toutefois, avec une sensibilité plus élevée, le risque de parasites est également plus grand. JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) Méthode de compression des images numériques avec pertes. Les images JPEG sont compressées afin de réduire la taille de leur fichier avec une dégradation minimale de la résolution. 180 Annexe > Glossaire PAL (Phase Alternate Line) Norme d’encodage couleur vidéo utilisée dans de nombreux pays d’Afrique, d’Asie, d’Europe et du Moyen-Orient. Qualité Expression du taux de compression d’une image numérique. Lorsque la qualité de l’image est élevée, le taux de compression est bas et la taille du fichier plus importante. RAW (données brutes CCD) Données originales non traitées, capturées directement par le capteur d’images de l’appareil photo. La balance des blancs, le contraste, la saturation, la netteté et d’autres données peuvent être modifiées avec le logiciel de retouche avant que l’image ne soit compressée dans un format de fichier standard. Résolution Nombre de pixels d’une image numérique. Les images à résolution élevée comportent plus de pixels et présentent généralement davantage de détails que les images avec une faible résolution. Parasite (ou bruit) Problème d’affichage des pixels, au niveau de leur emplacement ou de leur clarté, sur une image numérique. Des parasites peuvent apparaître si les photos sont prises avec une sensibilité trop élevée ou avec un réglage de sensibilité automatique dans un environnement sombre. NFC (Near Field Communication) La communication NFC est une technologie de communication sans-fil à courte portée. Vous pouvez utiliser des appareils compatibles NFC pour activer des fonctions ou échanger des données avec d’autres appareils. NTSC (National Television System Committee) Norme d’encodage couleur vidéo habituellement utilisée au Japon, en Amérique du Nord, aux Philippines, en Amérique du Sud, en Corée du Sud et à Taïwan. Zoom optique Zoom qui permet d’agrandir les images à l’aide de l’objectif sans dégrader la qualité des images. 181 Annexe > Glossaire Vitesse d’obturation La vitesse d’obturation est définie par la durée nécessaire à l’ouverture et à la fermeture de l’obturateur. Du point de vue de la luminosité d’une photo, la vitesse d’obturation constitue un facteur important, car elle contrôle la quantité de lumière qui passe à travers l’ouverture avant d’atteindre le capteur d’images. Par ailleurs, une vitesse d’obturation rapide accorde moins de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer. La photo devient plus sombre et immobilise un sujet en mouvement plus facilement. sRGB (RGB standard) Norme internationale de l’espace colorimétrique établie par la CEI (Commission électrotechnique internationale). Elle est définie d’après l’espace colorimétrique des écrans informatiques et est également utilisée comme espace colorimétrique standard pour Exif. Vignettage Réduction de la luminosité ou de la saturation d’une image à sa périphérie (bords externes). Le vignettage permet de mettre en évidence les sujets positionnés au centre de l’image. Balance des blancs (équilibre des couleurs) Réglage de l’intensité des couleurs (généralement les couleurs primaires comme le rouge, le vert et le bleu) d’une image. La balance des blancs a pour but d’obtenir un rendu fidèle des couleurs. Wi-Fi La technologie Wi-Fi permet aux appareils électroniques d’échanger des données sans fil via un réseau. WPS (configuration Wi-Fi protégée) WPS est une technologie permettant de sécuriser les réseaux domestiques sans fil. 182 Annexe Accessoires en option Les articles suivants vous sont proposés en option : Objectif, Flash externe, Batterie rechargeable, Chargeur de batterie, Sac de transport de l’appareil photo, Étui de l’appareil photo, Carte mémoire, Filtre, Câble USB, Câble HDMI, Dragonne • Pour connaître le type et la disponibilité, et obtenir une image, des accessoires, rendez-vous sur le site Web de Samsung. • Avant tout achat d’accessoire, vérifiez qu’il est bien compatible avec l’appareil photo. GPS10 et EM10 sont incompatibles avec l’appareil photo. • Utilisez uniquement des accessoires homologués par Samsung. Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages causés par l’utilisation d’accessoires fournis par d’autres fabricants. 183 Annexe A Accessoires en option Mise en place du flash 50 Présentation du flash 49 Adobe Photoshop Lightroom 153 Agrandissement 105 Appareil photo Connexion à l’ordinateur 147 Connexion en tant que disque amovible 147 Déconnexion (Windows) 148 Disposition 29 Assistant photo 72 B Balance des blancs 70 Batterie Attention 162 En charge 34 Insérer 33 Bracketing 85 C Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo 171 Carte mémoire Attention 159 Insérer 33 Centre de service après-vente 168 Connexion mobile 31 Contenu du coffret 28 D Date et heure 142 Diaporama 105 E Effet yeux rouges 89 En charge 34 Entretien 156 Espace colorimétrique 136 F Fichiers Protection 103 Suppression 103 Type de photo 68 Type de vidéo 98 Filtre intelligent Mode de prise de vue 94 Mode Lecture 112 Flash Intensité 89 Nombre guide 26 Options du Flash 88 Prise de vue avec flash indirect 26 Fondu 99 H Home Monitor+ 127 I Icônes Mode de prise de vue 41 Mode Lecture 43 i-Launcher 151 L Longueur de focale 20 Luminosité écran 141 M Mesure de l’exposition 90 Miniatures 101 Mise au point automatique 73 Mise au point avec suivi 77 MobileLink 121 Mode Economie d’énergie 142 Mode Meilleure photo 61 Mode Panorama 62 Modes de prise de vue Automatique 52 Enregistrement 63 Intelligent 60 Manuel 58 Priorité d’ouverture 56 Priorité vitesse 57 Programme 54 Index 184 Annexe > Index N NFC (Partage par contact) 118 Nombre f 15 O Objectifs Déverrouillage 46 Disposition 45 Marquages 48 Verrouillage 46 Ouverture 15, 19 P Panneau intelligent 38 Paramètres 141 Photos Affichage sur l’appareil photo 101 Agrandissement 105 Options de prise de vue 67 Retouche 109 Posture 13 Prise de vue 83 Profondeur de champ (DOF) 16, 21 R Réglage de l’image Réglage des photos 110 Retouche de visages 111 Règle des tiers 23 Remote Viewfinder 125 Réseau sans fil 114 Résolution Mode Lecture 110 Mode Prise de vue (photo) 67 Mode Prise de vue (vidéo) 97 Retardateur 85 Retouche de visages 111 Rotation 109 S Samsung Link 131 Sauvegarde automatique 129 Sensibilité ISO 69 Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) 82 T Téléviseur 146 Transfert de fichiers Mac 148 Windows 147 Type d’affichage 44 V Valeur d’exposition (EV) 15, 95 Vidéo 142 Enregistrement 63 Options 97 Prise de vue en cours 108 Visionnage 107 Vitesse d’obturation 17, 19 185 Pour les utilisateurs résidant en France Service Consommateur Contact téléphonique : Du lundi au samedi de 9 h à 20 h 01 48 63 00 00 Adresse postale : Samsung Service Consommateurs BP 200 93404 SAINT OUEN CEDEX 186 Pour les utilisateurs résidant au Canada SERVICE À LA CLIENTÈLE Téléphone : Du lundi au vendredi de 8 h 30 à 20 h (heure normale de l'Est) 1 800 726-7864 Adresse postale : Samsung Electronics Canada Inc. 55 Standish Court, 10th Floor Mississauga ON L5R 4B2 Pour toute question ou demande de service après-vente, veuillez consulter les conditions de garantie accompagnant votre produit ou rendez-vous sur le www.samsung.com/fr ou www.samsung.ca. Click a topic This user manual includes detailed usage instructions for your camera. Please read this manual thoroughly. USER MANUAL Basic troubleshooting Basic functions Playback/Editing Appendixes Quick reference Extended functions Wireless network Index Contents Shooting options Settings WB35F/WB36F/WB37F 1 Warning—situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Do not disassemble or attempt to repair your camera. You can damage the camera and expose yourself to the risk of an electric shock. Do not use your camera near flammable or explosive gases and liquids. This may cause a fire or explosion. Do not insert flammable materials into the camera or store these materials near the camera. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not handle your camera with wet hands. This may result in an electric shock. Prevent damage to subjects’ eyesight. Do not use the flash in close proximity (closer than 1 m/3 ft) to people or animals. If you use the flash too close to your subject’s eyes, you can cause temporary or permanent eyesight damage. Keep your camera away from small children and pets. Keep your camera and all accessories out of the reach of small children and animals. Small parts may cause choking or serious injury if swallowed. Moving parts and accessories may present physical dangers as well. Do not expose the camera to direct sunlight or high temperatures for an extended period of time. Prolonged exposure to sunlight or extreme temperatures can cause permanent damage to your camera’s internal components. Health and safety information Always comply with the following precautions and usage tips to avoid dangerous situations and ensure peak performance of your camera. 2 Health and safety information Avoid covering the camera or charger with blankets or clothes. The camera may overheat, which may distort the camera or cause a fire. Do not handle the power supply cord or the charger during a thunderstorm. This may result in electric shock. If liquid or foreign objects enter your camera, immediately disconnect all power sources, such as the battery or charger, and then contact a Samsung service center. Comply with any regulations that restrict the use of a camera in a certain area. • Avoid interference with other electronic devices. • Turn off the camera when in an aircraft. Your camera can cause interference with aircraft equipment. Follow all airline regulations and turn off your camera when directed by airline personnel. • Turn off the camera near medical equipment. Your camera can interfere with medical equipment in hospitals or health care facilities. Follow all regulations, posted warnings, and directions from medical personnel. Avoid interference with pacemakers. Maintain a safe distance between this camera and all pacemakers to avoid potential interference, as recommended by the manufacturer and research groups. If you have any reason to suspect that your camera is interfering with a pacemaker or other medical device, turn off the camera immediately and contact the manufacturer of the pacemaker or medical device for guidance. 3 Health and safety information Caution—situations that could cause damage to your camera or other equipment Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended period of time. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious damage to your camera. Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement batteries. Do not damage or heat the battery. Inauthentic, damaged, or heated batteries may cause a fire or personal injury. Use only Samsung-approved batteries, chargers, cables, and accessories. • Using unauthorized batteries, chargers, cables, or accessories can cause batteries to explode, damage your camera, or cause injury. • Samsung is not responsible for damage or injuries caused by unapproved batteries, chargers, cables, or accessories. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Misusing the battery may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not touch the flash while it fires. The flash is very hot when fired and may burn your skin. When you use the AC charger, turn off the camera before you disconnect the power to the AC charger. Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock. Disconnect the charger from the wall socket when not in use. Failing to do so may result in fire or electric shock. Do not use a damaged power supply cord, plug, or loose outlet when you charge batteries. This may cause a fire or electric shock. Do not allow the AC charger to come in contact with the +/- terminals on the battery. This may cause a fire or electric shock. 4 Health and safety information Do not drop or subject the camera to strong impacts. Doing so may damage the screen or external or internal components. Exercise caution when you connect cables or adapters and install batteries and memory cards. If you force the connectors, improperly connect cables, or improperly install batteries and memory cards, you can damage ports, connectors, and accessories. Keep cards with magnetic strips away from the camera case. Information stored on the card may be damaged or erased. Never use a damaged charger, battery, or memory card. This may result in electric shock or camera malfunction or cause a fire. Do not place the camera in or near magnetic fields. Doing so may cause the camera to malfunction. Do not use the camera if the screen is damaged. If the glass or acrylic parts are broken, visit a Samsung Electronics Service Center to have the camera repaired. Check that the camera is operating properly before use. The manufacturer takes no responsibility for any loss of files or damage that may result from camera malfunction or improper use. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. Avoid interference with other electronic devices. Your camera emits radio frequency (RF) signals that may interfere with unshielded or improperly shielded electronic equipment, such as pacemakers, hearing aids, medical devices, and other electronic devices in homes or vehicles. Consult the manufacturers of your electronic devices to solve any interference problems you experience. To prevent unwanted interference, use only Samsung-approved devices or accessories. Use your camera in the normal position. Avoid contact with your camera’s internal antenna. Data transference and your responsibilities • Data transferred via WLAN can be hacked, so avoid transferring sensitive data in public areas or on open networks. • The camera manufacturer is not liable for any data transfers that infringe on copyrights, trademarks, intellectual property laws, or public decency ordinances. 5 Copyright information • Microsoft Windows and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. • Mac and Apple App Store are registered trademarks of the Apple Corporation. • Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google, Inc. • microSD™, microSDHC™, and microSDXC™ are registered trademarks of the SD Association. • Wi-Fi® , the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. • Trademarks and trade names used in this manual are the property of their respective owners. • Camera specifications or contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice due to an upgrade of the camera's functions. • We recommend using your camera within the country where you purchased it. • Use this camera responsibly and adhere to all laws and regulations concerning its use. • You are not allowed to reuse or distribute any part of this manual without prior permission. Outline of the User Manual Basic functions 13 Learn about what is in the product box, the camera’s layout, what the icons mean, and basic shooting functions. Extended functions 37 Learn how to capture a photo and record a video by selecting a mode. Shooting options 48 Learn how to set the options in Shooting mode. Playback/Editing 69 Learn how to play back photos or videos, and edit photos. Also, learn how to connect your camera to your computer or TV. Wireless network 88 Learn how to connect to wireless local area networks (WLANs) and use functions. Settings 105 Refer to options to configure your camera’s settings. Appendixes 111 Get information about error messages, specifications, and maintenance. 6 Icons used in this manual Icon Function Additional information Safety warnings and precautions [ ] Camera buttons. For example, [Shutter] represents the shutter button. ( ) Page number of related information → The order of options or menus you must select to perform a step; for example: Select Face Detection → Normal (represents Select Face Detection, and then select Normal). * Annotation Expressions used in this manual Pressing the shutter • Half-press [Shutter]: Press the shutter halfway down • Press [Shutter]: Press the shutter all the way down Half-press [Shutter] Press [Shutter] Subject, background, and composition • Subject: The main object in a scene, such as a person, animal, or still life • Background: The objects around the subject • Composition: The combination of a subject and background Composition Background Subject Exposure (Brightness) The amount of light that enters your camera determines the exposure. You can alter the exposure by changing the shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO sensitivity. By altering the exposure, your photos will be darker or lighter. Normal exposure Overexposure (too bright) 7 Basic troubleshooting Learn to solve common problems by setting shooting options. The subject’s eyes appear red. Red eye occurs when the subject's eyes reflect light from the camera flash. • Set the flash option to Red-eye or Red-eye Fix. (p. 52) • If the photo has already been captured, select Red-eye Fix in Photo Editor mode. (p. 81) Photos have dust spots. If dust particles are present in the air, you may capture them in photos when you use the flash. • Turn off the flash or avoid capturing photos in a dusty place. • Set ISO sensitivity options. (p. 54) Photos are blurred. Blurring can occur if you capture photos in low light conditions or hold the camera incorrectly. Use the OIS function or half-press [Shutter] to ensure the subject is in focus. (p. 35) Photos are blurred when shooting at night. As the camera tries to let in more light, the shutter speed slows. This can make it difficult to hold the camera steady long enough to capture a clear photo and may result in camera shake. • Select Night in Smart mode. (p. 42) • Turn on the flash. (p. 52) • Set ISO sensitivity options. (p. 54) • Use a tripod to prevent your camera from shaking. Subjects come out too dark because of backlighting. When the light source is behind the subject or when there is a high contrast between light and dark areas, the subject may appear too dark. • Avoid shooting toward the sun. • Set the flash option to Fill in. (p. 52) • Adjust the exposure. (p. 61) • Set the Auto Contrast Balance (ACB) option. (p. 62) • Set the metering option to Spot if a subject is in the center of the frame. (p. 62) 8 Quick reference Capturing photos of people • Smart mode > Beauty Face 42 • Red-eye/Red-eye Fix (to prevent or correct red-eye) 52 • Face Detection/Self-Portrait 58 • Smile Shot/Blink Detection 59 Capturing photos at night or in the dark • Smart mode > Silhouette, Sunset, Night, Fireworks, Light Trace 42 • Flash options 52 • ISO sensitivity (to adjust the sensitivity to light) 54 Capturing action photos • Smart mode > Action Freeze 42 • Continuous, Motion Capture 65 Capturing photos of text, insects, or flowers • Smart mode > Macro 42 • Macro 55 Adjusting the exposure (brightness) • ISO sensitivity (to adjust the sensitivity to light) 54 • EV (to adjust exposure) 61 • ACB (to compensate for subjects against bright backgrounds) 62 • Metering 62 • AEB (to capture 3 photos of the same scene with different exposures) 65 Capturing photos of scenery • Smart mode > Landscape 42 • Magic mode > Live Panorama 44 Applying effects to photos • Magic mode > Photo Filter 45 • Image Adjust (to adjust Sharpness, Contrast, or Saturation) 66 Applying effects to videos • Magic mode > Movie Filter 46 Reducing camera shake • Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) 34 Transferring and sharing files • Sending photos or videos to a smart phone 95 • Sending photos or videos via email 98 • Using photo or video sharing services 101 • Uploading photos to an online storage or registered devices 103 • Using the NFC Feature (Tag & Go) 93 • Viewing files as thumbnails 71 • Viewing files by category 72 • Deleting all files on the memory 74 • Viewing files as a slide show 76 • Viewing files on a TV 83 • Connecting your camera to a computer 84 • Adjusting sound and volume 107 • Adjusting the brightness of the display 108 • Changing the display language 109 • Setting the date and time 109 • Before contacting a service center 123 9 Contents Basic functions ............................................................................................................... 13 Unpacking ................................................................................................................... 14 Camera layout............................................................................................................ 15 Using the DIRECT LINK button ............................................................................. 17 Inserting the battery and memory card ......................................................... 18 Charging the battery and turning on your camera ..................................... 19 Charging the battery ............................................................................................. 19 Turning on your camera ........................................................................................ 19 Performing the initial setup ................................................................................ 20 Learning icons ........................................................................................................... 22 Using the Home screen .......................................................................................... 23 Accessing the Home screen .................................................................................. 23 Icons on the Home screen .................................................................................... 24 Selecting options or menus .................................................................................. 27 Setting the display and sound ............................................................................. 29 Setting the display type ........................................................................................ 29 Setting the sound ................................................................................................... 30 Capturing photos ..................................................................................................... 31 Zooming .................................................................................................................. 32 Reducing camera shake (OIS) ............................................................................... 34 Tips for getting a clearer photo ........................................................................... 35 Extended functions ..................................................................................................... 37 Using Basic modes ................................................................................................... 38 Using the Smart Auto mode ................................................................................. 38 Using the Program mode ...................................................................................... 39 Using the Smart Movie mode .............................................................................. 40 Using the Movie mode ........................................................................................ 41 Using the Smart mode .......................................................................................... 42 Using the Album ..................................................................................................... 43 Using the Settings menu ....................................................................................... 43 Using Magic modes ................................................................................................. 44 Using the Live Panorama mode ........................................................................... 44 Using the Photo Filter mode ................................................................................ 45 Using the Movie Filter mode ............................................................................... 46 Editing a photo ....................................................................................................... 47 10 Contents Shooting options .......................................................................................................... 48 Selecting a resolution and quality ..................................................................... 49 Selecting a resolution ............................................................................................ 49 Selecting a photo quality ...................................................................................... 50 Using the timer .......................................................................................................... 51 Shooting in the dark ................................................................................................ 52 Preventing red-eye ................................................................................................. 52 Setting a flash option ............................................................................................. 52 Adjusting the ISO sensitivity ................................................................................. 54 Changing the camera’s focus ............................................................................... 55 Using macro ............................................................................................................ 55 Using auto focus ..................................................................................................... 55 Adjusting the focus area ....................................................................................... 56 Using Face Detection .............................................................................................. 58 Detecting faces ....................................................................................................... 58 Capturing a self portrait shot .............................................................................. 58 Capturing a smile shot .......................................................................................... 59 Detecting eye blinking ......................................................................................... 59 Tips for detecting faces ......................................................................................... 60 Adjusting brightness and color ........................................................................... 61 Adjusting the exposure manually (EV) ............................................................... 61 Compensating for backlighting (ACB) ................................................................ 62 Changing the metering option ............................................................................ 62 Selecting a White Balance setting ....................................................................... 63 Using burst modes ................................................................................................... 65 Adjusting images ..................................................................................................... 66 Reducing the sound of the zoom ....................................................................... 67 Available shooting options by shooting mode ............................................. 68 11 Contents Playback/Editing ........................................................................................................... 69 Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode ................................................. 70 Starting Playback mode ........................................................................................ 70 Viewing photos ....................................................................................................... 74 Playing a video ........................................................................................................ 77 Editing a photo .......................................................................................................... 78 Resizing photos ...................................................................................................... 78 Rotating a photo .................................................................................................... 78 Applying Smart Filter effects ................................................................................ 79 Adjusting brightness, contrast, saturation or dark subjects ........................... 80 Adjusting portrait photos ..................................................................................... 80 Editing a video ........................................................................................................... 82 Trimming a video ................................................................................................... 82 Capturing an image from video .......................................................................... 82 Viewing files on a TV ............................................................................................... 83 Transferring files to a computer .......................................................................... 84 Transferring files to your Windows OS computer ............................................. 84 Transferring files to your Mac OS computer ..................................................... 85 System Requirements ............................................................................................. 87 Wireless network .......................................................................................................... 88 Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings ....................... 89 Connecting to a WLAN .......................................................................................... 89 Using the login browser ........................................................................................ 90 Network connection tips ...................................................................................... 91 Entering text ............................................................................................................ 92 Using the NFC Feature (Tag & Go) ...................................................................... 93 Using NFC features in Shooting mode ............................................................... 93 Using NFC features in Playback mode(Photo Beam) ........................................ 93 Using NFC features in Wi-Fi mode ....................................................................... 93 Saving files to a smart phone automatically .................................................. 94 Sending photos or videos to a smart phone .................................................. 95 Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release ........................................ 96 Sending photos or videos via email .................................................................. 98 Changing email settings ....................................................................................... 98 Sending photos or videos via email .................................................................. 100 Using photo or video sharing services ........................................................... 101 Accessing a sharing service ................................................................................ 101 Uploading photos or videos ............................................................................... 101 Using Samsung Link to send files ..................................................................... 103 Viewing photos or videos on devices that support Samsung Link .............. 103 12 Contents Settings ........................................................................................................................... 105 Settings menu ......................................................................................................... 106 Accessing the settings menu ............................................................................. 106 Sound ..................................................................................................................... 107 Display .................................................................................................................... 107 Connectivity .......................................................................................................... 108 General ................................................................................................................... 109 Appendixes ................................................................................................................... 111 Error messages ........................................................................................................ 112 Camera maintenance ............................................................................................ 113 Cleaning your camera .......................................................................................... 113 Using or storing the camera ............................................................................... 114 About memory cards ........................................................................................... 115 About the battery ................................................................................................. 118 Upgrading the firmware ...................................................................................... 122 Before contacting a service center................................................................... 123 Camera specifications ........................................................................................... 126 Glossary ..................................................................................................................... 130 Index ........................................................................................................................... 135 Basic functions Learn about what is in the product box, the camera’s layout, what the icons mean, and basic shooting functions. Unpacking ……………………………………… 14 Camera layout …………………………………… 15 Using the DIRECT LINK button ………………… 17 Inserting the battery and memory card ……… 18 Charging the battery and turning on your camera ……………………………………… 19 Charging the battery …………………………… 19 Turning on your camera ……………………… 19 Performing the initial setup …………………… 20 Learning icons …………………………………… 22 Using the Home screen ………………………… 23 Accessing the Home screen …………………… 23 Icons on the Home screen ……………………… 24 Selecting options or menus …………………… 27 Setting the display and sound ………………… 29 Setting the display type ………………………… 29 Setting the sound ……………………………… 30 Capturing photos ……………………………… 31 Zooming ……………………………………… 32 Reducing camera shake (OIS) ………………… 34 Tips for getting a clearer photo ………………… 35 Basic functions 14 Unpacking The following items are included in your product box. Camera AC adapter/USB cable Rechargeable battery Strap Quick Start Guide Optional accessories Camera case A/V cable Battery charger Memory card/Memory card adapter • The illustrations may differ slightly from the items shipped with your product. • The items included in the box may differ depending on the model. • You can purchase optional accessories at a retailer or a Samsung service center. Samsung is not responsible for any problems caused by using unauthorized accessories. Basic functions 15 Camera layout Before you start, familiarize yourself with your camera’s parts and their functions. Flash AF-assist light/Timer lamp Lens Speaker Shutter button Microphone Power button Internal antenna* * Avoid contact with the internal antenna while using a wireless network. Tripod mount USB and A/V port Accepts USB cable and A/V cable Battery chamber cover Insert a memory card and battery Attaching the strap Camera layout Basic functions 16 Button Description Access the Home screen. (p. 23) Access options or menus. Enter Playback mode. Delete files in Playback mode. Button Description Basic functions Other functions Change the display option. Move up Change the macro option. Move down Change the flash option. Move left Change the timer option. Move right Confirm the highlighted option or menu. Buttons (See the table below) Status lamp • Blinking: When the camera is saving a photo or video, being read by a computer, when the image is out of focus, or when the camera is connecting to WLAN or sending a photo • Steady: When the camera is connected to a computer, charging the battery, or when the image is in focus Display Zoom button • In Shooting mode: Zoom in or out • In Playback mode: Zoom in on part of a photo or view files as thumbnails, or adjust the volume DIRECT LINK button Start a preset Wi-Fi function. (p. 17) NFC tag Launch an NFC feature by reading a tag from an NFC-enabled device. (p. 93) Camera layout Basic functions 17 Using the DIRECT LINK button You can turn on the Wi-Fi feature conveniently with [ ]. Press [ ] to activate the Wi-Fi function that you have designated. Press [ ] again to return to the previous mode. Setting a DIRECT LINK button option You can select a Wi-Fi function to launch when you press [ ]. 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Select General → DIRECT LINK (Wi-Fi Button). 4 Select a Wi-Fi feature. (p. 110) Basic functions 18 Inserting the battery and memory card Learn how to insert the battery and an optional memory card into the camera. Removing the battery and memory card Rechargeable battery Battery lock Slide the lock to the right to release the battery. Memory card Push the card gently until it disengages from the camera, and then pull it out of the slot. Insert a memory card with the goldcolored contacts facing up. Insert the battery with the Samsung logo facing up. Basic functions 19 Charging the battery and turning on your camera Turning on your camera Press [ ] to turn your camera on or off. • The initial setup screen appears when you turn on the camera for the first time. (p. 20) Turning on your camera in Playback mode Press [ ]. The camera turns on and immediately accesses Playback mode. If you turn on your camera by pressing and holding [ ], the camera does not emit any sounds. Charging the battery Before you use the camera for the first time, you must charge the battery. Plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera, and then plug the other end of the USB cable into the AC adapter. Status lamp • Red light on: Charging • Red light off: Fully charged Use only the AC adapter and USB cable supplied with your camera. If you use another AC adapter (such as SAC-48), the camera battery may not charge or work properly. Basic functions 20 Performing the initial setup When you turn on your camera for the first time, the initial setup screen appears. Follow the steps below to configure the camera’s basic settings. The language is preset for the country or region where the camera is sold. You can change the language as desired. 3 Press [ ] to select Date/Time Set, and then press [ ] or [ ]. Cancel Set Date/Time Set Year Month Day Hour Min DST • The screen may differ depending on the language you selected. 4 Press [ / ] to select an item. 5 Press [ / ] to set the date, time, and daylight-saving time, and then press [ ]. 1 Press [ ] to select Time Zone, and then press [ ] or [ ]. 2 Press [ / ] to select a time zone, and then press [ ]. Home Cancel Set London Performing the initial setup Basic functions 21 6 Press [ ] to select Date Type, and then press [ ] or [ ]. 7 Press [ / ] to select a date type, and then press [ ]. 8 Press [ ] to select Time Type, and then press [ ] or [ ]. 9 Press [ / ] to select a time type, and then press [ ]. 10 Press [ ] to finish the initial setup. Basic functions 22 Learning icons The icons the camera displays on the screen change according to the mode you select or the options you set. If you change a shooting option, the corresponding icon will blink briefly in yellow. 3 Shooting information Icon Description Current date Current time Available number of photos Memory card inserted • : Fully charged • : Partially charged • : Empty (Recharge) • : Charging (Connected with the charger) Aperture value Shutter speed Available recording time Auto focus frame Camera shake Zoom indicator Photo resolution when the Intelli zoom is on Zoom ratio 2 Shooting option (right) Icon Description Intelli zoom on Continuous auto focus activated Photo resolution Video resolution Metering Frame rate (per second) Flash Zoom Mute on Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) Focus Option Image adjustment (sharpness, contrast, and saturation) Timer 1 Shooting options (left) Icon Description Shooting mode Exposure value adjusted ISO sensitivity White balance Face detection Burst option AutoShare On 1 2 3 Basic functions 23 Using the Home screen You can select a shooting mode or access the settings menu by selecting the icons on the Home screen. No. Description 1 Current Home screen • Rotate [Zoom] to the left or right to switch to another Home screen. • Press [ ] to scroll to the Home screen name, and then press [ / ] to switch to another Home screen. • Press [ / ] repeatedly to switch to another Home screen. 2 Mode icons • Press [ / / / ] to scroll to a desired mode, and then press [ ] to access the mode. Accessing the Home screen In Shooting or Playback mode, press [ ]. Press [ ] again to return to the previous mode. Smart Auto Program Movie Magic Basic Wi-Fi Smart Album Settings Smart Movie 2 1 Back Page Move Using the Home screen Basic functions 24 Icon Description MobileLink: Send photos or videos to a smart phone. (p. 95) Remote Viewfinder: Use a smart phone as a remote shutter release and see a preview of an image from your camera on your smart phone. (p. 96) Email: Send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. (p. 98) SNS & Cloud: Upload photos or videos to file sharing services. (p. 101) Samsung Link: View files on a Samsung Link device connected to the same AP. (p. 103) Icons on the Home screen Icon Description Smart Auto: Capture a photo with a scene mode selected automatically by the camera. (p. 38) Program: Capture a photo with settings you have adjusted manually. (p. 39) Smart Movie: Record a video with a scene mode selected automatically by the camera. (p. 40) Movie: Record a video. (p. 41) Smart: Capture a photo with options that are preset for a specific scene. (p. 42) Album: View files as thumbnails. (p. 71) Settings: Adjust settings to match your preferences. (p. 105) Using the Home screen Basic functions 25 Icon Description Live Panorama: Capture and combine a series of photos to create a panoramic image. (p. 44) Photo Filter: Capture a photo with various filter effects. (p. 45) Movie Filter: Record a video with various filter effects. (p. 46) Photo Editor: Edit photos with various effects. (p. 78) Using the Home screen Basic functions 26 5 Scroll to the desired wallpaper, and then press [ ]. • If you select a photo you have captured, you can set a specified area as wallpaper. Rotate [Zoom] to the left or right to reduce or enlarge the area. Press [ / / / ] to move the area. 6 Press [ ] to save. • If you select a photo you have captured, press [ ], and then select Yes. You can also set the photo you are viewing as wallpaper by pressing [ ], and then selecting Set Wallpaper in Playback mode. Setting Wallpaper Set wallpaper for the Home screen with the desired image. 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Select Display → Wallpapers. 4 Select an option. Option Description Wallpaper Gallery Select the desired wallpaper from the default gallery. Album Set a photo you have captured as a wallpaper. Basic functions 27 Selecting options or menus To select an option or a menu, press [ ], and then press [ / / / ] or [ ]. Going back to the previous menu Press [ ] to go back to the previous menu. Half-press [Shutter] to return to Shooting mode. 1 In Shooting or Playback mode, press [ ]. 2 Scroll to an option or a menu. • To move up or down, press [ ] or [ ]. • To move left or right, press [ ] or [ ]. 3 Press [ ] to confirm the highlighted option or menu. Selecting options or menus Basic functions 28 For example, to select a White Balance option in Program mode: 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Press [ ]. Exit Select AutoShare EV White Balance ISO Flash Focus 4 Press [ / ] to select White Balance, and then press [ ] or [ ]. Exit Select AutoShare EV White Balance ISO Flash Focus 5 Press [ / ] to select a White Balance option. Back Set White Balance : Daylight 6 Press [ ] to save your settings. Basic functions 29 Setting the display type You can select a display type for the Shooting or Playback mode. Each type displays different shooting or playback information. See the table below. Press [ ] repeatedly to change the display type. Mode Display type Shooting • Hide all information about shooting options. • Show all information about shooting options. Playback • Hide all information about the current file. • Hide all information about the current file except basic information. • Show all information about the current file. Setting the option display view You can hide or show the option display appearing in some modes. Press [ ] repeatedly. • Hide the option display. • Show the option display. Option display Panel off Beauty Face ▲ An example in Smart mode Setting the display and sound Learn how to change the basic display information and sound settings. Setting the display and sound Basic functions 30 Setting the sound Turn the sound your camera emits when you perform functions on or off. 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Select Sounds → Beep Sound. 4 Select an option. Option Description Off The camera does not emit any sounds. On The camera emits sounds. Basic functions 31 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Align your subject in the frame. 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus. • A green frame means the subject is in focus. • A red frame means the subject is out of focus. 5 Press [Shutter] to capture a photo. 6 Press [ ] to view the captured photo. • To delete the photo, press [ ], and then select Yes. 7 Press [ ] to return to Shooting mode. See page 35 for tips to get clearer photos. Capturing photos Learn how to capture photos easily and quickly in Smart Auto mode. Capturing photos Basic functions 32 Zooming You can capture close-up photos by adjusting the zoom. Zoom out Zoom in Zoom ratio When you rotate the zoom button, the zoom ratio shown on the screen may change inconsistently. Digital zoom Digital zoom is supported by default in Shooting mode. If you zoom in on a subject in Shooting mode and the zoom indicator is in the digital range, your camera is using Digital zoom. By using both the 12X Optical zoom and 2X Digital zoom, you can zoom in up to 24 times. Zoom indicator Optical range Digital range • Depending on the shooting options you selected, Digital zoom may not be available. • If you capture a photo with Digital zoom, the photo quality may be lower than normal. Capturing photos Basic functions 33 Intelli zoom If the zoom indicator is in the Intelli range, your camera is using Intelli zoom. Photo resolution varies according to the zoom ratio if you use Intelli zoom. By using both Optical zoom and Intelli zoom, you can zoom in up to 24 times. Zoom indicator Optical range Intelli range Photo resolution when the Intelli zoom is on • Depending on the shooting options you selected, Intelli zoom may not be available. • Intelli zoom helps you capture a photo with less quality deterioration than Digital zoom. However, the photo quality may be lower than when you use Optical zoom. • Intelli zoom is available only when you set a 4:3 resolution ratio. If you set another resolution ratio with Intelli zoom on, Intelli zoom will be turned off automatically. • Intelli zoom is always on in Smart Auto mode. Setting Intelli zoom 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Intelli Zoom. 3 Select an option. Icon Description Off: The Intelli zoom is deactivated. On: The Intelli zoom is activated. Capturing photos Basic functions 34 Reducing camera shake (OIS) Reduce camera shake optically in Shooting mode. Before correction After correction 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select OIS. 3 Select an option. Icon Description Off: OIS is deactivated. On: OIS is activated. • OIS may not function properly when: - you move your camera to follow a moving subject - you use Digital zoom - there is too much camera shake - the shutter speed is slow (for example, when you capture night scenes) - the battery is low - you capture a close-up shot • If you use the OIS function with a tripod, your images may be blurred by the vibration of the OIS sensor. Deactivate the OIS function when you use a tripod. • If the camera is hit or dropped, the display will be blurry. If this occurs, turn off the camera, and then turn it on again. Basic functions 35 Holding your camera correctly Ensure nothing is blocking the lens, flash, or microphone. Half-pressing the shutter button Half-press [Shutter] and adjust the focus. The camera adjusts the focus and exposure automatically. The camera sets the aperture value and shutter speed automatically. Focus frame • Press [Shutter] to capture the photo if the focus frame appears in green. • Change the composition and half-press [Shutter] again if the focus frame appears in red. Reducing camera shake Set the Optical Image Stabilization option to reduce camera shake optically. (p. 34) When is displayed Camera shake When you shoot in the dark, avoid setting the flash option to Slow Sync or Off. The aperture remains open longer and it may be harder to hold the camera steady long enough to capture a clear photo. • Use a tripod or set the flash option to Fill in. (p. 52) • Set ISO sensitivity options. (p. 54) Tips for getting a clearer photo Basic functions 36 Preventing your subject from being out of focus It may be difficult to get your subject in focus when: - there is little contrast between the subject and background (for example, when your subject is wearing clothing that is similar in color to the background) - the light source behind the subject is too bright - the subject is shiny or reflective - the subject includes horizontal patterns, such as blinds - the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame • When you capture photos in low light Turn on the flash. (p. 52) • When subjects are moving rapidly Use the Continuous or Motion Capture function. (p. 65) Using the focus lock Half-press [Shutter] to focus. When the subject is in focus, you can reposition the frame to change the composition. When you are ready, press [Shutter] to capture your photo. Extended functions Learn how to capture a photo and record a video by selecting a mode. Using Basic modes ……………………………… 38 Using the Smart Auto mode …………………… 38 Using the Program mode ……………………… 39 Using the Smart Movie mode ………………… 40 Using the Movie mode ………………………… 41 Using the Smart mode ………………………… 42 Using the Album ……………………………… 43 Using the Settings menu ……………………… 43 Using Magic modes ……………………………… 44 Using the Live Panorama mode ……………… 44 Using the Photo Filter mode …………………… 45 Using the Movie Filter mode ………………… 46 Editing a photo ………………………………… 47 Extended functions 38 Using the Smart Auto mode In Smart Auto mode, your camera automatically chooses the appropriate camera settings based on the type of scene it detects. The Smart Auto mode is helpful if you are not familiar with the camera settings for various scenes. 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Align your subject in the frame. • The camera automatically selects a scene. An appropriate scene icon appears at the top left of the screen. The icons are listed below. Icon Description Landscapes Scenes with bright white backgrounds Landscapes at night Portraits at night Landscapes with backlighting Portraits with backlighting Portraits Close-up photos of objects Close-up photos of text Sunsets Indoors, dark Partially lit Close-up with spot lighting Portraits with spot lighting Blue skies Forested areas Close-up photos of colorful subjects Using Basic modes Capture photos or record videos using basic modes. You can also use the Smart mode. Using Basic modes Extended functions 39 Icon Description Camera is stabilized or on a tripod (when shooting in the dark)* Actively moving subjects* * This icon appears next to the scene icon. 4 Half-press [Shutter] to focus. 5 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo. • If the camera does not recognize an appropriate scene mode, it uses the default settings for the Smart Auto mode. • Even if it detects a face, the camera may not select a portrait mode depending on the subject's position or lighting. • The camera may not select the correct scene depending on the shooting conditions, such as camera shake, lighting, or distance to the subject. • Even if you use a tripod, the camera may not detect the mode if the subject is moving. • The camera consumes more battery power, because it changes settings often to select appropriate scenes. Using the Program mode In Program mode, you can set most options, except the shutter speed and aperture value, which the camera sets automatically. 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Set the desired options. • For a list of options, refer to "Shooting options". (p. 48) 4 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. 5 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo. Using Basic modes Extended functions 40 Using the Smart Movie mode In Smart Movie mode, your camera automatically chooses the appropriate camera settings based on the scene it has detected. 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Align your subject in the frame. • The camera automatically selects a scene. An appropriate scene icon will appear at the top left of the screen. Icon Description Landscapes Sunsets Blue skies Forested areas 4 Press [Shutter] to start recording. 5 Press [Shutter] again to stop recording. • If the camera does not recognize an appropriate scene mode, it uses the default settings for Smart Movie mode. • The camera may not select the correct scene depending on the shooting conditions, such as camera shake, lighting, and distance to the subject. Using Basic modes Extended functions 41 Using the Movie mode In Movie mode, you can customize settings to record HD videos (1280x720) of up to 20 minutes in length. The camera saves recorded videos as MP4 (H.264) files. • H.264 (MPEG-4 part10/AVC) is a high-compression video format established by the international standards organizations ISO-IEC and ITU-T. • If you use memory cards with slow write speeds, the camera may not save videos properly. Video recordings may be corrupted or fail to play back correctly. • Memory cards with slow writing speeds will not support high-resolution videos. To record high-resolution videos, use memory cards with faster write speeds. • If you activate the Image Stabilization function while recording a video, the camera may record the operating sound of the Image Stabilization function. • If you use the zoom function when recording a video, the camera may record the noise of the zoom operating. In this case, use the Zoom Mute function. (p. 67) • (Continuous AF): Use this function to shoot by changing composition while automatically focusing on the center area. 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Set desired options. • For a list of options, refer to "Shooting options". (p. 48) 4 Press [Shutter] to start recording. • While recording a video, press [ ] once to cancel the continuous auto focus function and once again to activate the function. 5 Press [Shutter] again to stop recording. Using Basic modes Extended functions 42 Pause recording The camera allows you to temporarily pause a video while recording. With this function, you can record separate scenes as a single video. OK : Pause : Continuous AF Off • Press [ ] to pause while recording. • Press [ ] to resume. Using the Smart mode In Smart mode, you can capture a photo with options that are preset for a specific scene. 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Select a scene. Panel off Beauty Face Using Basic modes Extended functions 43 Option Description Beauty Face Capture a portrait with options to hide facial imperfections. Landscape Capture still-life scenes and landscapes. Macro Capture small or close-up subjects. Action Freeze Capture subjects moving at high speed. Silhouette Capture subjects as dark shapes against a light background. Sunset Capture scenes at sunset, with natural-looking reds and yellows. Night Capture scenes at night or in low lighting (using a tripod is recommended). Fireworks Capture scenes with fireworks. Light Trace Capture scenes with the light trailing in low-light conditions. 4 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. 5 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo. Using the Album You can view files as thumbnails. Refer to "Viewing files as thumbnails". (p. 71) Using the Settings menu You can set or change the camera settings. Refer to "Settings". (p. 105) Extended functions 44 Using Magic modes Capture a photo or record a video by selecting appropriate modes for various scenes or effects. Using the Live Panorama mode In Live Panorama mode, you can capture a wide panoramic scene in a single photo. Capture and combine a series of photos to create a panoramic image. Shooting example 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. • Align the camera with the far left or the far right, or very top or bottom, of the scene you want to capture. 4 Press and hold [Shutter] to start shooting. 5 With [Shutter] pressed, slowly move the camera in the direction that will let it capture the rest of the panorama. • Arrows pointing in the direction of motion are displayed, and the entire shooting image is displayed in the preview box. • When the viewfinder is aligned with the next scene, the camera captures the next photo automatically. Stability: A flatter line represents less camera shake. 6 When you are finished, release [Shutter]. • When you have captured all the necessary shots, the camera combines them into one panoramic photo. Using Magic modes Extended functions 45 • For best results when capturing panoramic photos, avoid the following: - moving the camera too quickly or too slowly - moving the camera too little to capture the next image - moving the camera at irregular speeds - shaking the camera - shooting in dark places - capturing moving subjects nearby - shooting conditions where the brightness or color of light is changing • Photos taken are automatically saved, and shooting is stopped under the following conditions: - if you change the shooting direction while shooting - if you move the camera too rapidly - if you don't move the camera • Selecting Live Panorama mode will disable the digital and optical zoom functions. If you select Live Panorama mode while the lens is zoomed in, the camera automatically zooms out to the default position. • Some shooting options are not available. • The camera may stop shooting due to the shooting composition or movement within the scene. • Your camera may not capture the last scene in its entirety if you stop moving the camera exactly where you want the scene to end. To capture the entire scene, move your camera slightly beyond the point where you want the scene to end. Using the Photo Filter mode Apply various filter effects to your photos to create unique images. Miniature Vignetting Fish-eye 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . Using Magic modes Extended functions 46 3 Select an effect. Option Description Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in miniature. Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong vignette effect of Lomo cameras. Cross Filter Add lines that radiate outward from bright objects to imitate the visual effect of a cross filter. Fish-eye Distort close objects to imitate the visual effect of a fisheye lens. Classic Apply a black and white effect. Retro Apply a sepia tone effect. 4 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. 5 Press [Shutter] to capture a photo. • Depending on the option you select, the resolution may change to or less automatically. • To apply filter effects to saved photos, press [ ] and then select Open Image → an image. Using the Movie Filter mode Apply various filter effects to your videos to create unique images. 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Select an effect. Option Description Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in miniature. Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong vignette effect of Lomo cameras. Fish-eye Distort close objects to imitate the visual effect of a fisheye lens. Classic Apply a black and white effect. Retro Apply a sepia tone effect. Palette Effect 1 Create a vivid look with sharp contrast and strong color. Palette Effect 2 Make scenes clean and clear. Palette Effect 3 Apply a soft brown tone. Palette Effect 4 Create a cold and monotone effect. Using Magic modes Extended functions 47 4 Press [Shutter] to start recording. 5 Press [Shutter] again to stop recording. • If you select Miniature, playback speed will increase. • If you select Miniature, you cannot record sound in the video. • Depending on the option you select, the recording resolution may change to or less automatically. Editing a photo You can edit a photo in multiple ways. Scroll to on the Home screen, and then select . Refer to "Editing a photo". (p. 78) Selecting a resolution and quality …………… 49 Selecting a resolution ………………………… 49 Selecting a photo quality ……………………… 50 Using the timer ………………………………… 51 Shooting in the dark …………………………… 52 Preventing red-eye …………………………… 52 Setting a flash option …………………………… 52 Adjusting the ISO sensitivity …………………… 54 Changing the camera’s focus …………………… 55 Using macro …………………………………… 55 Using auto focus ……………………………… 55 Adjusting the focus area ……………………… 56 Using Face Detection …………………………… 58 Detecting faces ………………………………… 58 Capturing a self portrait shot ………………… 58 Capturing a smile shot ………………………… 59 Detecting eye blinking ………………………… 59 Tips for detecting faces ………………………… 60 Adjusting brightness and color ………………… 61 Adjusting the exposure manually (EV) ………… 61 Compensating for backlighting (ACB) ………… 62 Changing the metering option ………………… 62 Selecting a White Balance setting ……………… 63 Using burst modes ……………………………… 65 Adjusting images………………………………… 66 Reducing the sound of the zoom ……………… 67 Available shooting options by shooting mode … 68 Shooting options Learn how to set the options in Shooting mode. Shooting options 49 Selecting a resolution and quality Learn how to change the image resolution and quality settings. Setting the video resolution 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Movie Size. 3 Select an option. Icon Description 1280 X 720: HD files to play back on an HDTV. 640 X 480: SD files to play back on an analog TV. For Sharing: Post to a sharing service via a wireless network (30 seconds maximum). Selecting a resolution As you increase the resolution, your photo or video will include more pixels, so it can be printed on larger paper or displayed on a larger screen. When you use a high resolution, the file size will also increase. Setting the photo resolution 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Photo Size. 3 Select an option. Icon Description 4608 X 3456: Print on A1 paper. 4608 X 3072: Print on A1 paper in wide ratio (3:2). 4608 X 2592 : Print on A1 paper in panorama ratio (16:9) or play back on an HDTV. 3648 X 2736: Print on A2 paper. 2592 X 1944: Print on A4 paper. 1984 X 1488: Print on A5 paper. 1920 X 1080: Print on A5 paper in panorama ratio (16:9) or play back on an HDTV. 1024 X 768: Attach to an email. Selecting a resolution and quality Shooting options 50 Selecting a photo quality Set a photo quality setting. Higher image quality settings will result in larger file sizes. The camera compresses and saves the photos you capture in the JPEG format. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Quality. 3 Select an option. Icon Description Super Fine: Capture photos in super high quality. Fine: Capture photos in high quality. Normal: Capture photos in normal quality. Shooting options 51 Using the timer Learn how to set the timer to delay shooting. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. Exit Set Off 10 sec 2 sec Double Timer 2 Select an option. Icon Description Off: The timer is not active. 10 sec: Capture a photo after a 10-second delay. 2 sec: Capture a photo after a 2-second delay. Double: Capture one photo after a 10-second delay and another photo after a 2-second delay. Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions. 3 Press [Shutter] to start the timer. • The AF-assist light/timer lamp blinks. The camera will automatically capture a photo after the specified time has elapsed. • Press [Shutter] or [ ] to cancel the timer. • Depending on the Face Detection options you selected, the timer function may not be available. • Timer options are not available if you set burst options. • In some modes, you can also set the timer option by pressing [ ], and then selecting Timer. Shooting options 52 Shooting in the dark Learn how to capture photos at night or in low light conditions. Setting a flash option Use the flash when you capture photos in the dark or when you need more light in your photos. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. Exit Set Off Auto Red-eye Fill in Slow Sync Red-eye Fix Flash 2 Select an option. Icon Description Off: • The flash will not fire. • The camera will display the shake warning when you are shooting in low light. Auto: The flash will fire automatically when the subject or background is dark. Preventing red-eye When the flash fires when you capture a photo of a person in the dark, a red glow may appear in the person’s eyes. To prevent this, select Red-eye or Red-eye Fix. Refer to flash options in “Setting a flash option.” Before correction After correction Shooting in the dark Shooting options 53 Icon Description Red-eye: • The flash will fire twice when the subject or background is dark to reduce the red-eye effect. • There is an interval between the 2 bursts of the flash. Do not move until the flash fires a second time. Fill in: • The flash always fires. • The camera automatically adjusts the intensity of the flash. Slow Sync: • The flash fires and the shutter stays open longer. • This option is recommended when you want to capture more ambient light to reveal more details in the background. • Use a tripod to prevent your photos from blurring. • The camera will display the shake warning when you are shooting in low light. Red-eye Fix: • The flash fires twice when the subject or background is dark. The camera corrects red-eye through its advanced software analysis. • There is an interval between the 2 bursts of the flash. Do not move until the flash fires a second time. Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions. • Flash options are not available if you set burst options or select Self-Portrait, Blink Detection. • Make sure that your subjects are within the recommended distance from the flash. (p. 127) • If light from the flash is reflected or there is a substantial amount of dust in the air, tiny spots may appear in your photo. • In some modes, you can also set the flash option by pressing [ ], and then selecting Flash. Shooting in the dark Shooting options 54 Adjusting the ISO sensitivity The ISO sensitivity is the measure of a film’s sensitivity to light as defined by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). The higher ISO sensitivity you select, the more sensitive to light your camera becomes. Use a higher ISO sensitivity to capture better photos and reduce camera shake when not using the flash. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select ISO. 3 Select an option. • Select to use an appropriate ISO sensitivity based on the brightness of the subject and lighting. Higher ISO sensitivities may result in more image noise. Shooting options 55 Using macro Use macro to capture close-up photos of subjects, such as flowers or insects. (Refer to "Using auto focus".) • Try to hold the camera firmly to prevent blurry photos. • Turn off the flash if the distance to the subject is less than 15.7 in. (40 cm). Using auto focus To capture sharp photos, select the appropriate focus option according to your distance from the subject. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. Exit Set Normal (AF) Macro Focus Changing the camera’s focus Learn how to adjust the camera’s focus to suit the subject and the shooting conditions. Changing the camera’s focus Shooting options 56 Adjusting the focus area You can get clearer photos by selecting an appropriate focus area according to your subject's location in the scene. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Focus Area. 3 Select an option. Icon Description Center AF: Focus on the center of the frame (suitable when subjects are located at or near the center). Multi AF: Focus on one or more of 9 possible areas. Tracking AF: Focus on and track the subject. (p. 57) Available shooting options may differ depending on the shooting mode. 2 Select an option. Icon Description Normal (AF): Focus on a subject farther than 31 in. (80 cm) away. Farther than 98 in. (250 cm) away when you use the zoom. Macro: Focus on a subject that is 2-31 in. (5-80 cm) from the camera. 51-98 in. (130-250 cm) when you use the zoom. Auto Macro: • Focus on a subject farther than 2 in. (5 cm) away. Farther than 51 in. (130 cm) away when you use the zoom. • Auto Macro is set automatically in some modes. You cannot set it manually. Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions. In some modes, you can also set the focus option by pressing [ ], and then selecting Focus. Changing the camera’s focus Shooting options 57 Using tracking auto focus Tracking AF allows you to track and automatically focus on your subject, even when you are moving. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Focus Area → Tracking AF. 3 Focus on the subject you want to track, and then press [ ]. • A focus frame appears on the subject and follows the subject as you move the camera. Tracking AF • The white frame means that your camera is tracking the subject. • When you half-press [Shutter], the green frame means that your subject is in focus. • The red frame means that your camera failed to focus. 4 Press [Shutter] to capture the photo. • If you do not select a focus area, the focus frame will appear in the center of the screen. • Tracking a subject may fail when: - the subject is too small - the subject moves excessively - the subject is backlit or you are shooting in a dark place - colors or patterns on the subject and the background are the same - the subject includes horizontal patterns, such as blinds - the camera shakes excessively • When tracking fails, the feature will be reset. • If the camera fails to track the subject, you must reselect the subject to track. • If the camera fails to focus, the focus frame will change to red and the focus will be reset. • If you use this function, you cannot set Face Detection options, Timer options, Burst options, and Intelli zoom. Shooting options 58 Detecting faces Your camera automatically detects up to 10 human faces in one scene. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Face Detection → Normal. The face nearest the camera or nearest the center of the scene appears in a white focus frame and the rest of the faces appear in gray focus frames. The closer you are to the subjects, the quicker your camera will detect faces. Capturing a self portrait shot Capture photos of yourself. The camera sets the focus distance to close-up, and then emits a beep when ready. 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select → Beauty Face. 3 Press [ ]. 4 Select Face Detection → Self-Portrait. 5 Compose your shot with the lens facing you. 6 When you hear a quick beep, press [Shutter]. When faces are located in the center, the camera beeps rapidly. If you turn Volume off in the sound settings, the camera will not emit a beep. (p. 107) Using Face Detection If you use Face Detection options, your camera can automatically detect a human face. When you focus on a human face, the camera adjusts the exposure automatically. Use Blink Detection to detect closed eyes or Smile Shot to capture a smiling face. Using Face Detection Shooting options 59 Capturing a smile shot The camera automatically releases the shutter when it detects a smiling face. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Face Detection → Smile Shot. 3 Compose your shot. • The camera automatically releases the shutter when it detects a smiling face. When your subject smiles broadly, your camera can detect the smile more easily. Detecting eye blinking If your camera detects closed eyes, it will automatically capture 2 photos in succession. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Face Detection → Blink Detection. Using Face Detection Shooting options 60 Tips for detecting faces • When your camera detects a face, it tracks the detected face automatically. • Face Detection may not be effective when: - the subject is far from the camera - it is too bright or too dark - the subject is not facing the camera - the subject is wearing sunglasses or a mask - the subject’s facial expression changes drastically - the subject is backlit or the lighting conditions are unstable • When you set Face Detection options, the AF area is automatically set to Multi AF. • Depending on the Face Detection options you selected, some Shooting options may not be available. • Depending on the shooting options you selected, Face Detection options may not be available. Shooting options 61 Adjusting brightness and color Learn how to adjust the brightness and color for better image quality. 3 Press [ / ] to adjust the exposure. • The photo will be brighter as the exposure value increases. Cancel Set EV : 0 4 Press [ ] to save your settings. • Once you adjust the exposure, the setting will be stored automatically. You may need to change the exposure value later to avoid overexposure or underexposure. • If you cannot decide on an appropriate exposure, select the AEB (Auto Exposure Bracket) option. The camera will capture 3 consecutive photos, each with a different exposure: normal, underexposed, and overexposed. (p. 65) Adjusting the exposure manually (EV) Depending on the intensity of the ambient light, your photos may be too bright or dark. In these cases, you can adjust the exposure to get a better photo. Darker (-) Neutral (0) Brighter (+) 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select EV. Adjusting brightness and color Shooting options 62 Compensating for backlighting (ACB) When the light source is behind your subject or there is high contrast between your subject and the background, your subject is likely to appear dark in the photo. In this case, set the Auto Contrast Balance (ACB) option. ▲ Without ACB ▲ With ACB 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select ACB. 3 Select an option. Icon Description Off: ACB (Auto Contrast Balance) is deactivated. On: ACB (Auto Contrast Balance) is activated. • The ACB feature is always on in Smart Auto mode. • The ACB feature is not available when you set Burst options. Changing the metering option The metering mode refers to the way in which a camera measures the quantity of light. The brightness and lighting of your photos will vary depending on the metering mode you select. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Metering. 3 Select an option. Icon Description Multi: • Your camera divides the frame into several areas, and then measures the light intensity of each area. • Suitable for general photos. Spot: • Your camera measures only the light intensity at the very center of the frame. • If a subject is not in the center of the frame, your photo may be improperly exposed. • Suitable for a subject with backlighting. Center-weighted: • Your camera averages the meter reading of the entire frame with emphasis placed on the center. • Suitable for photos with subjects in the center of the frame. Adjusting brightness and color Shooting options 63 Selecting a White Balance setting The color of your photo depends on the type and quality of the light source. If you want the color of your photo to be realistic, select a White Balance setting that is appropriate for the lighting conditions, such as Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, or Tungsten. Auto WB Daylight Cloudy Tungsten 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select White Balance. 3 Select an option. Icon Description Auto WB: Automatically set the White Balance based on the lighting conditions. Daylight: For outdoor photos on a sunny day. Cloudy: For outdoor photos on a cloudy day or in shadows. Fluorescent_H: For shooting under a daylight fluorescent or 3-way fluorescent light. Fluorescent_L: For shooting under white fluorescent light. Tungsten: For shooting indoor photos under incandescent bulbs or halogen lamps. Custom Set: To use White Balance settings that you define. (p. 64) Color Temp.: To adjust the color temperature of the light source. (p. 64) Adjusting brightness and color Shooting options 64 Defining your own White Balance You can customize the White Balance by capturing a photo of a white surface, such as a piece of paper, under the lighting conditions in which you intend to capture a photo. The White Balance feature will help you to match the colors in your photo with the actual scene. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select White Balance → Custom Set. 3 Aim the lens at a piece of white paper, and then press [Shutter]. A piece of white paper Adjusting color temperature 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select White Balance → Color Temp.. 3 Press [ / ] to adjust the color temperature to match your light source. • You can get a warmer photo with a higher value, and a cooler photo with a lower value. Color Temp. : 3000K Back Set 4 Press [ ] to save your settings. Shooting options 65 Using burst modes It can be difficult to capture photos of fast-moving subjects or capture natural facial expressions and gestures of your subjects in photos. Also, it can be difficult to adjust the exposure correctly and select a proper light source. In these cases, select one of the burst modes. Icon Description AEB: • Capture 3 consecutive photos, each with a different exposure: normal, underexposed, and overexposed. • It may take longer to capture the photo. Use a tripod for best results. 4 Align your subject in the frame, and then half-press [Shutter] to focus. 5 Press and hold [Shutter]. • While you are pressing [Shutter], the camera captures photos continuously. • Available options may differ depending on the shooting conditions. • When you select Motion Capture, your camera will set the resolution to and set the ISO sensitivity to Auto. • Depending on the Face Detection options you selected, some Shooting options may not be available. • It may take longer to save the photos depending on the memory card capacity and performance. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Drive. 3 Select an option. Icon Description Single: Capture a single photo. (Single is not a burst option.) Continuous: • While you are pressing [Shutter], the camera continuously captures photos. • The maximum number of photos depends on the capacity of your memory card. Motion Capture: While you are pressing [Shutter], the camera captures photos (5 photos per second; maximum of 30 photos). Shooting options 66 Adjusting images Adjust the sharpness, contrast, or saturation of your photos. 4 Press [ / ] to adjust each value. Sharpness Description – Soften the edges on your photos (suitable for editing the photos on your computer). + Sharpen the edges to improve the clarity of your photos. (This may also increase the noise in your photos.) Contrast Description – Decrease the color and brightness. + Increase the color and brightness. Saturation Description – Decrease the saturation. + Increase the saturation. 5 Press [ ] to save your settings. Select 0 if you do not want to apply any effects (suitable for printing). 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Image Adjust. 3 Select an option. • Sharpness • Contrast • Saturation Image Adjust Back Set Sharpness Contrast Saturation Shooting options 67 Reducing the sound of the zoom When you use the zoom while recording videos, the camera can record the sound of the zoom. In this case, use the Zoom Mute function. 1 In Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Voice. 3 Select an option. Icon Description Zoom Mute: The camera stops recording sound temporarily when you use the zoom. Off: Record a video without sound. On: Record a video with sound. • Do not block the microphone when you use the Zoom Mute function. • Recordings made with Zoom Mute may differ from actual sounds. Shooting options 68 Available shooting options by shooting mode For details about shooting options, refer to "Shooting options". (p. 48) Smart Auto Program Smart Movie Movie Smart Live Panorama Photo Filter Movie Filter Resolution O O O O O - O O Quality - O - - - - O - Timer O O O O O - O O Flash O O - - O - O - ISO sensitivity - O - - - - - - Macro - O - O O - - - Focus area - O - - O - - - Face detection - O - - O - - - EV - O - O - - - - ACB - O - - - - - - Metering - O - O - - - - White balance - O - O - - - - Drive - O - - - - - - Image adjust - O - - - - - - Voice - - O O - - - O Digital zoom - O - - O - - - Intelli zoom O O - - - - - - OIS - O - O - - - - O: The option is available. Some options may be limited or may not be changeable. -: The option is not available. Playback/Editing Learn how to play back photos or videos, and edit photos. Also, learn how to connect your camera to your computer or TV. Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode … 70 Starting Playback mode ……………………… 70 Viewing photos ………………………………… 74 Playing a video ………………………………… 77 Editing a photo ………………………………… 78 Resizing photos ………………………………… 78 Rotating a photo ……………………………… 78 Applying Smart Filter effects …………………… 79 Adjusting brightness, contrast, saturation or dark subjects …………………………………… 80 Adjusting portrait photos ……………………… 80 Editing a video …………………………………… 82 Trimming a video ……………………………… 82 Capturing an image from video ……………… 82 Viewing files on a TV …………………………… 83 Transferring files to a computer ……………… 84 Transferring files to your Windows OS computer … 84 Transferring files to your Mac OS computer …… 85 System Requirements …………………………… 87 Playback/Editing 70 Starting Playback mode View photos or play videos stored in your camera. 1 Press [ ]. • The most recent file will be displayed. • If the camera is off, it will turn on and display the most recent file. 2 Press [ / ] to scroll through files. • Press and hold [ / ] to scroll through files quickly. • You may not be able to edit or play back files that were captured with other cameras, due to unsupported sizes (image size, etc) or codecs. Use a computer or another device to edit or play back these files. • Photos or videos captured in portrait orientation do not rotate automatically and are displayed in landscape orientation by the camera and other devices. Photo file information File Information Memory in use Album/Zoom In Icon Description Current file/Total files Folder name-File name Protected file To display file information on the screen, press [ ]. Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode Learn how to play back photos or videos and how to manage files. Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode Playback/Editing 71 Video file information File Information Play Album Capture Icon Description Current file/Total files Folder name-File name Current playback time Video length Protected file To display file information on the screen, press [ ]. Viewing files as thumbnails Scan thumbnails of files. In Playback mode, rotate [Zoom] to the left to view thumbnails (12 at a time). Rotate [Zoom] to the left once more to display more thumbnails (24 at a time). Rotate [Zoom] to the right to return to the previous view. Menu • You can also view files as thumbnails by scrolling to on the Home screen, and then selecting . Press [ / / / ] to scroll through files. Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode Playback/Editing 72 Viewing files by category View files by category, such as date or file type. 1 In Playback mode, rotate [Zoom] to the left. • You can also view files as thumbnails by scrolling to on the Home screen, and then selecting . 2 Press [ ], and then select Filter → a category. All Date File Type Filter Back Set Icon Description All: View files normally. Date: View files by the date they were saved. File Type: View files by the file type. 3 Scroll to a desired list, and then press [ ] to open the list. 4 Scroll to a desired file, and then press [ ] to view the file. 5 Rotate [Zoom] to the left, and then press [ ] to return to the previous view. • If you change the category, it may take some time for the camera to reorganize files depending on the number of files. • If you delete a category classified by Date or File Type, all files in the category will be deleted. Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode Playback/Editing 73 Protecting a file Protect a file from accidental deletion. 1 In Playback mode, select a file to protect. 2 Press [ ], and then select Protect → On. 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to protect additional files. You cannot resize, delete, or rotate a protected file. Deleting files Select files to delete in Playback mode. Deleting a single file You can select one file, and then delete it. 1 In Playback mode, select a file, and then press [ ]. 2 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. You can also delete files in Playback mode by pressing [ ], and then selecting Delete → Delete → Yes. Deleting multiple files You can select multiple files, and then delete them at once. 1 In Playback mode, press [ ]. • When in thumbnails view, press [ ], select Delete → Select, and then skip to step 3, or press [ ], select Select, and then skip to step 3. 2 When the pop-up message appears, select Multiple Delete. 3 Scroll to each file you want to delete, and then press [ ]. • Press [ ] again to cancel your selection. 4 Press [ ]. 5 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode Playback/Editing 74 Deleting all files You can select all files, and then delete them at once. 1 In Playback mode, press [ ]. • When in thumbnails view, press [ ], select Delete → Delete All, and then skip to step 3, or press [ ], select Delete All, and then skip to step 3. 2 Select Delete → Delete All. 3 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. • All unprotected files are deleted. Viewing photos Enlarge part of a photo or view photos as a slide show. Enlarging a photo In Playback mode, rotate [Zoom] to the right to enlarge a portion of the photo. Rotate [Zoom] to the left to zoom out. Enlarged area Back Crop Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode Playback/Editing 75 To Description Move the enlarged area Press [ / / / ]. Trim the enlarged photo Press [ ], and then select Yes. (The trimmed photo will be saved as a new file. The original photo is retained in its original form.) When you view photos that were captured by another camera, the zoom ratio may differ. Viewing panoramic photos View photos captured in Live Panorama mode. 1 In Playback mode, press [ / ] to scroll to a desired panoramic photo. • The entire panoramic photo appears on the screen. 2 Press [ ]. • The camera automatically scrolls through the photo from left to right for a horizontal panoramic photo and from top to bottom for a vertical panoramic photo. The camera then switches to Playback mode. • While playing back a panoramic photo, press [ ] to pause or resume. • After you have paused the playback of a panoramic photo, press [ / / / ] to move the photo horizontally or vertically, depending on the direction you moved when capturing the photo. 3 Press [ ] to return to Playback mode. The camera automatically scrolls through the panoramic photo only if the longest side of the photo is two or more times longer than the shortest side. Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode Playback/Editing 76 Playing a slide show Apply effects and audio to a slide show of your photos. The slide show function does not work for videos. 1 In Playback mode, press [ ]. 2 Select Slide Show Options. 3 Select a slide show effect option. • Skip to step 4 to start a slide show with no effects. * Default Option Description Play Mode Set whether or not to repeat the slide show. (One Play*, Repeat) Interval • Set the interval between photos. (1 sec*, 3 sec, 5 sec, 10 sec) • You must set the Effect option to Off to set the interval. Music Set background audio. Effect • Set a scene change effect between photos. (Off, Calm*, Relax, Lively, Sweet, Shine) • Select Off to cancel effects. • When you use the Effect option, the interval between photos will be set to 1 second. 4 Press [ ]. 5 Select Start Slide Show. 6 View the slide show. • Press [ ] to pause the slide show. • Press [ ] again to resume the slide show. • Press [ ] to stop the slide show and return to Playback mode. • Rotate [Zoom] to the left or right to adjust the volume level. Viewing photos or videos in Playback mode Playback/Editing 77 Playing a video In Playback mode, you can view a video. 1 In Playback mode, select a video, and then press [ ]. 2 View the video. Current playback time/ Video length Pause Stop To Description Scan backward Press [ ]. Each time you press [ ], you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X. Pause or resume playback Press [ ]. Scan forward Press [ ]. Each time you press [ ], you change the scan speed in this order: 2X, 4X, 8X. Adjust the volume level Rotate [Zoom] to the left or right. When playing a movie, you can begin using features such a scanning backward, scanning forward, or pausing after the video has run for 2 seconds. Playback/Editing 78 Resizing photos Change the size of a photo and save it as a new file. 1 In Playback mode, select a photo, and then press [ ]. 2 Select Resize. 3 Select an option. Back Set Resize 2592 X 1944 1984 X 1488 1024 X 768 4 Press [ ] to save. Available resize options differ depending on the original size of the photo. Rotating a photo 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Rotate [Zoom] to the left, and then select a photo. 4 Select Rotate → an option. 5 Press [ ] to save. Rotate : Right 90˚ Cancel Save • The camera will overwrite the original file. • In Playback mode, press [ ], and then select Rotate to rotate a photo. Editing a photo Learn how to edit photos. • The camera will save edited photos as new files. • When you edit photos, the camera will automatically convert them to a lower resolution. Photos that you rotate manually are not automatically converted to a lower resolution. • Photos captured in some modes cannot be edited. Editing a photo Playback/Editing 79 Applying Smart Filter effects Apply special effects to your photos. 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Rotate [Zoom] to the left, and then select a photo. 4 Select Smart Filter → an option. Smart Filter : Normal Back Set Option Description Normal No effect Miniature Apply a tilt-shift effect to make the subject appear in miniature. (The top and bottom of the image will be unclear.) Vignetting Apply the retro-looking colors, high contrast, and strong vignette effect of Lomo cameras. Cross Filter Add lines that radiate outward from bright objects to imitate the visual effect of a cross filter. Fish-eye Distort close objects to imitate the visual effect of a fisheye lens. Classic Apply a black and white effect. Retro Apply a sepia tone effect. 5 Press [ ] to save. Editing a photo Playback/Editing 80 Adjusting portrait photos Learn how to correct red-eye and retouch faces. The camera will save an edited photo as a new file, but may convert it to a lower resolution. Retouching faces 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Rotate [Zoom] to the left, and then select a photo. 4 Select Face Retouch. 5 Press [ / ] to adjust the option. • As the number increases, the skin tone becomes brighter and smoother. 6 Press [ ] to save. Adjusting brightness, contrast, saturation or dark subjects Learn how to adjust the brightness, contrast, or saturation. If the center of a photo is dark, you can adjust it to be brighter. The camera will save an edited photo as a new file, but may convert it to a lower resolution. 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Rotate [Zoom] to the left, and then select a photo. 4 Select an adjusting option. Icon Description Brightness Contrast Saturation ACB (Adjust dark subjects) • If you selected , skip to step 7. 5 Press [ / ] to adjust the option. 6 Press [ ]. 7 Press [ ] to save. Editing a photo Playback/Editing 81 Removing red-eye 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Rotate [Zoom] to the left, and then select a photo. 4 Select Red-eye Fix. 5 Press [ ] to save. Playback/Editing 82 Editing a video While playing back a video, you can trim the video or capture an image from the video. Trimming a video 1 In Playback mode, select a video, and then press [ ]. 2 Select Trim Movie. 3 Press [ ] to start playing the video. 4 Press [ ] → [ ] at the point where you want the trimming to begin. 5 Press [ ] to resume playing the video. 6 Press [ ] → [ ] at the point where you want the trimming to end. 7 Press [ ] to trim. 8 When the pop-up message appears, select Yes. • The original video should be at least 10 seconds long. • You can trim videos anywhere between 2 seconds from the beginning and 2 seconds from the end of the video. • The camera will save the edited video as a new file and leave the original video intact. Capturing an image from video 1 While viewing a video, press [ ] at the point where you want to capture an image. 2 Press [ ]. • The resolution of the captured image will be the same as the original video. • The captured image is saved as a new file. Playback/Editing 83 Viewing files on a TV Play back photos or videos by connecting your camera to a TV with the A/V cable. 7 Turn on your TV, and then select the A/V video source with the TV remote control. 8 Turn on your camera. • The camera automatically enters Playback mode when you connect it to a TV. 9 View photos or play videos using the camera buttons. • Depending on the TV model, you may see some digital noise or part of an image may not appear. • Images may not be centered on the TV screen depending on your TV settings. 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Select Connectivity → Video Out. 4 Select the video signal output for your country or region. (p. 108) 5 Turn off your camera and TV. 6 Connect your camera to your TV with the A/V cable. Audio Video Playback/Editing 84 Transferring files to your Windows OS computer Connect the camera to your computer as a removable disk. Your computer must be running Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Windows 8 for you to connect the camera as a removable disk. 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Select Connectivity → i-Launcher → Off. 4 Turn off the camera. 5 Connect the camera to your computer with the USB cable. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. 6 Turn on the camera. • The computer recognizes the camera automatically. 7 On your computer, select My Computer → Removable Disk → DCIM → 100PHOTO. 8 Drag or save files to your computer. Transferring files to a computer Connect the camera to a computer to transfer files from the camera's memory card to the computer. Transferring files to a computer Playback/Editing 85 Disconnecting the camera (for Windows XP) With Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 8, the methods for disconnecting the camera are similar. 1 If the status lamp on your camera is blinking, wait until it stops. 2 Click on the tool bar at the bottom right of your computer screen. 3 Click the pop-up message. 4 Click the message box that indicates the camera can be removed safely. 5 Remove the USB cable. Transferring files to your Mac OS computer When you connect the camera to your Mac OS computer, the computer will automatically recognize the device. You can transfer files directly from the camera to the computer without installing any programs. Mac OS 10.5 or later is supported. 1 Turn off the camera. 2 Connect your camera to your Mac OS computer with the USB cable. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. Transferring files to a computer Playback/Editing 86 3 Turn on the camera. • The computer recognizes the camera automatically and displays a removable disk icon. 4 On your computer, open the removable disk. 5 Drag or save files to your computer. Playback/Editing 87 System Requirements Recommended system requirements to play videos on a PC or run the i-Launcher application. Mac OS requirements Item Requirements OS Mac OS 10.5 or higher (except PowerPC) RAM Minimum 256 MB RAM (512 MB or more recommended) Hard disk capacity Minimum 110 MB Others USB 2.0 port • The requirements are recommendations only. It may not work properly even when the computer meets the requirements, depending on the condition of your computer. • The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage that results from using unqualified computers such as a computer you assembled yourself. Windows OS Requirements Item Requirements CPU Intel Pentium®4, 3.2 GHz or higher/ AMD Athlon™ FX D2.6 GHz or higher RAM Minimum 512 MB RAM (1 GB or more recommended) OS* Windows 7, or Windows 8 Hard disk capacity 250 MB or more (1 GB and above recommended) Others • 1024 X 768 pixels, 16-bit color display compatible monitor (1280 X 1024 pixels, 32-bit color display recommended) • USB 2.0 port • nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT or higher/ ATI X1600 series or higher * A 32-bit version of i-Launcher will be installed—even on 64-bit editions of Windows 7, and Windows 8. Wireless network Learn how to connect to wireless local area networks (WLANs) and use functions. Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings …………………………………………… 89 Connecting to a WLAN ………………………… 89 Using the login browser ……………………… 90 Network connection tips ……………………… 91 Entering text …………………………………… 92 Using the NFC Feature (Tag & Go) ……………… 93 Using NFC features in Shooting mode ………… 93 Using NFC features in Playback mode (Photo Beam) …………………………………… 93 Using NFC features in Wi-Fi mode ……………… 93 Saving files to a smart phone automatically … 94 Sending photos or videos to a smart phone … 95 Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release …………………………………………… 96 Sending photos or videos via email …………… 98 Changing email settings ……………………… 98 Sending photos or videos via email …………… 100 Using photo or video sharing services ………… 101 Accessing a sharing service …………………… 101 Uploading photos or videos …………………… 101 Using Samsung Link to send files ……………… 103 Viewing photos or videos on devices that support Samsung Link …………………………………… 103 Wireless network 89 Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Learn to connect via an access point (AP) when you are in a range of a WLAN. You can also configure network settings. Icon Description Ad hoc AP Secured AP WPS AP Signal strength Press [ ] to open network setting options. • When you select a secured AP, a pop-up window appears. Enter the required passwords to connect to the WLAN. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 92) • When a login page appears, refer to "Using the login browser". (p. 90) • When you select an unsecured AP, the camera will automatically connect to the WLAN. • If you select a WPS profile supported AP, select → WPS PIN connection, and then enter a PIN on the AP device. You can also connect to a WPS profile supported AP by selecting → WPS button connection on the camera, and then pushing the WPS button on the AP device. • If a pop-up message about data collection regulations appears, read and agree to it. Connecting to a WLAN 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select , , or . 3 Follow the on-screen instructions until the Wi-Fi Setting screen appears. • The camera automatically searches for available AP devices. • In some modes, press [ ], and then select Wi-Fi Setting. 4 Select an AP. Wi-Fi Setting Back Manual Refresh Samsung 1 Samsung 2 Samsung 3 Samsung 4 • Select Refresh to refresh the list of connectable APs. • Select Add wireless network to add an AP manually. The AP name must be in English to add the AP manually. Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Wireless network 90 Setting network options 1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press [ ]. 2 Select each option, and then enter the required information. Option Description Network Password Enter the network password. IP Setting Set the IP address automatically or manually. Manually setting the IP address 1 In the Wi-Fi Setting screen, move to an AP, and then press [ ]. 2 Select IP Setting → Manual. 3 Select each option, and then enter the required information. Option Description IP Enter the static IP address. Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask. Gateway Enter the gateway. DNS Server Enter the DNS address. Using the login browser You can enter your login information via the login browser when connecting to some APs, sharing sites, or cloud servers. Button/Icon Description [ / / / ] Move to an item or scroll the page. [ ] Select an item. [ ] Access the following options: • Previous Page: Move to the previous page. • Next Page: Move to the next page. • Reload: Reload the page. • Stop: Stop loading the page. • Exit: Close the login browser. [ ] Close the login browser. • You may not be able to select some items depending on the page you connected to. This does not indicate a malfunction. • The login browser may not close automatically after you log into some pages. In this case, close the login browser by pressing [ ], and then proceed with the desired operation. • It may take longer to load the login page due to the page size or network speed. If this occurs, wait until the login information input window appears. Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Wireless network 91 Network connection tips • Some Wi-Fi features are not available if you do not insert a memory card. • The quality of the network connection will be determined by the AP. • The further the distance between your camera and the AP, the longer it will take to connect to the network. • If a nearby device is using the same radio frequency signal as your camera, it may interrupt your connection. • If your AP name is not in English, the camera may not be able to locate the device or the name may appear incorrectly. • For network settings or a password, contact your network administrator or network service provider. • If a WLAN requires authentication from the service provider, you may not be able to connect to it. To connect to the WLAN, contact your network service provider. • Depending on the encryption type, the number of digits in the password may differ. • A WLAN connection may not be possible in all surroundings. • The camera may display a WLAN enabled printer on the AP List. You cannot connect to a network via a printer. • You cannot connect your camera to a network and a TV simultaneously. • Connecting to a network may incur additional charges. Costs will vary based on the conditions of your contract. • If you cannot connect to a WLAN, try another AP from the available AP list. • A login page may appear when you select free WLANs provided by some network service providers. Enter your ID and password to connect to the WLAN. For information about registering or the service, contact the network service providers. • Be cautious when you enter personal information for an AP connection. Do not enter any payment or credit card information on your camera. The manufacturer is not liable for any problem caused by entering such information. • Available network connections may differ by country. • The WLAN feature of your camera must comply with radio transmission laws in your region. To ensure compliance, use the WLAN feature only in the country where you purchased the camera. • The process for adjusting network settings may differ, depending on network conditions. • Do not access a network that you are not authorized to use. • Before you connect to a network, ensure your battery is fully charged. • You cannot upload or send files captured in some modes. • Files that you transfer to another device may not be supported by the device. In this case, use a computer to playback the files. Connecting to a WLAN and configuring network settings Wireless network 92 Entering text Learn how to enter text. The icons in the table below let you move the cursor, change the case, etc. Press [ / / / ] to move to a desired key, and then press [ ] to enter the key. Done Cancel Backspace Icon Description Delete the last letter. Move the cursor. In ABC mode, change the case. Enter ".com". Icon Description Switch between Symbol mode and ABC mode. Enter a space. Done Save the displayed text. View the entering text guide. • You can use only the English alphabets in some modes, regardless of the display language. • To move to Done directly, press [ ]. • You can enter up to 64 characters. • The screen may differ depending on the input mode. Wireless network 93 Using the NFC Feature (Tag & Go) Place a smart phone's NFC antenna near the camera’s NFC tag to launch the feature for saving photos to a smart phone automatically or the feature for using a smart phone as a remote shutter. You can also transfer files to an NFC-enabled device in Playback mode. • This feature is supported by NFC-enabled smart phones running Android OS. It is recommended that you use the latest version. This feature is not available for iOS devices. • You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps or the Google Play Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. • To read an NFC tag, place the NFC-enabled device near the camera’s NFC tag for more than 2 seconds. • Do not modify the tag information in any way. Using NFC features in Wi-Fi mode Select MobileLink or Remote Viewfinder from the pop-up window that appears by reading a tag from an NFC-enabled device. (p. 95, 96) Using NFC features in Shooting mode Launch AutoShare or Remote Viewfinder by reading a tag from an NFC-enabled device. (p. 94, 96) Preset to launch the Wi-Fi function by reading a tag on an NFC-enabled device. (p. 110) Using NFC features in Playback mode(Photo Beam) In Playback mode, the camera transfers the current file to the smart phone automatically when you read a tag from an NFC-enabled device. • To transfer multiple files, read a tag from an NFC-enabled device from the thumbnail view, and then select files. Wireless network 94 Saving files to a smart phone automatically The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the AutoShare feature via a WLAN. When you capture a photo with your camera, the photo is saved to the smart phone automatically. • The AutoShare feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running Android OS or iOS. Some features may not be supported by some models. Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly. • You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. • If you set this function, the setting is maintained even when you change the Shooting mode. • This feature may not be supported in some modes. 5 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. • If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. • An icon that shows the connection status ( ) will appear on the camera’s screen. 6 On the camera, capture a photo. • The captured photo is saved to the camera, and then transferred to the smart phone. • If the GPS feature is activated on the smart phone, the GPS information will be saved with the captured photo. 1 On the camera, in Shooting mode, press [ ]. 2 On the camera, select AutoShare → On. • If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. 3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. • To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 16) on the camera. 4 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. • The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. Wireless network 95 Sending photos or videos to a smart phone The camera connects to a smart phone that supports the MobileLink feature via a WLAN. You can easily send photos or videos to your smart phone. • The MobileLink feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running Android OS or iOS. Some features may not be supported by some models. Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly. • You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • If you select files from the smart phone, you can view up to 1,000 recent files and send up to 1,000 files at a time. If you select files from the camera, you can view files that were selected from the camera and the maximum number of files you can send varies depending on the storage space of the smart phone. • When using this feature on an iOS device, the device may lose its Wi-Fi connection. 5 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. • The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. 6 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. • If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. • The application on the smart phone can be closed if no operations are performed on the camera for 30 seconds. 7 On the smart phone or camera, select files to transfer from the camera. 8 On the smart phone, touch the copy button or on the camera, select Send. • The camera will send the files. The camera screen turns off if you perform no operations on the camera for 30 seconds. 1 On the camera’s Home screen, scroll to . 2 On the camera, select . • If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. 3 On the camera, select a sending option. • If you select Select Files from Smartphone, you can use your smart phone to view and share files stored on the camera. • If you select Select Files from Camera, you can select files to send from the camera. 4 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. • To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 16) on the camera. Wireless network 96 1 On the camera’s Home screen, scroll to . 2 On the camera, select . • If the pop-up message that prompts you to download the application appears, select Next. 3 On the smart phone, turn on Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • For iOS devices, turn on the Wi-Fi feature before turning on the application. • To start the application automatically on an NFC-enabled smart phone, turn on the function and place the smart phone near the NFC tag (p. 16) on the camera. 4 Select the camera from the list and connect the smart phone to the camera. • The smart phone can connect to only one camera at a time. 5 On the camera, allow the smart phone to connect to your camera. • If the smart phone has been connected to your camera before, it is connected automatically. 6 On the smart phone, set the following shooting options. • While using this feature, some buttons are not available on your camera. • With the smart phone, you can operate the camera only by touching the screen. • Remote Viewfinder mode supports the 10M and 3M photo sizes only. Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release The camera connects to a smart phone via a WLAN. Use the smart phone as a remote shutter release with the Remote Viewfinder feature. The captured photo will display on the smart phone. • The Remote Viewfinder feature is supported by smart phones or tablets running Android OS or iOS. Some features may not be supported by some models. Before using this feature, update the device’s firmware to the latest version. If the firmware version is not the most recent, this function may not perform properly. • You should install Samsung SMART CAMERA App on your phone or device before using this feature. You can download the application from Samsung Apps, the Google Play Store, or the Apple App Store. Samsung SMART CAMERA App is compatible with Samsung camera models manufactured in 2013 or later. Using a smart phone as a remote shutter release Wireless network 97 7 On the smart phone, touch and hold to focus. • The focus is automatically set to Multi AF. 8 Release to capture the photo. • If the GPS feature is activated on the smart phone, the GPS information will be saved with the captured photo. • When you use this feature, the ideal distance between the camera and the smart phone may vary, depending on your surroundings. • We recommend you keep the distance between the smart phone and the camera within 23 feet (7 m) when you use this feature. • It will take some time to capture the photo after you release on the smart phone. • The Remote Viewfinder function will deactivate when: - either the camera or the smart phone turn off - either device loses its connection to the WLAN - the Wi-Fi connection is poor or unstable - you perform no operations for approximately 3 minutes while connected • The camera screen turns off if you perform no operations on the camera for 30 seconds. Wireless network 98 Changing email settings In the email menu, you can change settings for storing your information. You can also set or change the email password. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 92) Storing your information 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Press [ ]. 4 Select Sender Setting. 5 Select the Name box, enter your name, and then select Done. Sender Setting Name Email Save Reset Back 6 Select the Email box, enter your email address, and then select Done. 7 Select Save to save your changes. • To delete your information, select Reset. Sending photos or videos via email You can change settings in the email menu and send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. Sending photos or videos via email Wireless network 99 Setting an email password 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Press [ ]. 4 Select Setting Password → On. • To deactivate the password, select Off. 5 When the pop-up appears, select OK. 6 Enter a 4-digit password. 7 Enter the password again. 8 When the pop-up appears, select OK. If you forget your password, you can reset it by selecting Reset on the password setting screen. When you reset the information, the previously saved user’s setting information, email address, and recently sent email list will be deleted. Changing the email password 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Press [ ]. 4 Select Change Password. 5 Enter your current 4-digit password. 6 Enter a new 4-digit password. 7 Enter the new password again. 8 When the pop-up appears, select OK. Sending photos or videos via email Wireless network 100 Sending photos or videos via email You can send photos or videos stored on the camera via email. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 92) 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Connect to a WLAN. (p. 89) 4 Select the Sender box, enter your email address, and then select Done. • If you have previously saved your information, it will be inserted automatically. (p. 98) • To use an address from the list of previous senders, select → an address. 5 Select the Receiver box, enter an email address, and then select Done. • To use an address from the list of previous recipients, select → an address. • Select to add additional recipients. You can input up to 30 recipients. • Select to delete an address from the list. 6 Select Next. 7 Scroll to files to send, and then press [ ]. • You can select up to 20 files. The total size must be 7 MB or less. 8 Select Next. 9 Select the comment box, enter your comments, and then select Done. 10 Select Send. • The camera will send the email. • If an email fails to send, a message prompting you to send it again appears. • Even if a photo appears to have transferred successfully, errors with the recipient’s email account may cause the photo to be rejected or recognized as spam. • You may not be able to send an email if no network connection is available or if your email account settings are incorrect. • You cannot send an email if the combined file sizes exceed the 7MB. The maximum resolution of photos you can send is 2M. The maximum resolution of videos you can send is . If the selected photo has a resolution higher than 2M, it will be automatically resized to a lower resolution. • If you cannot send an email because of firewall or user authentication settings, contact your network administrator or network service provider. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • You can also send an email in Playback mode by pressing [ ], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) → Email. Wireless network 101 Accessing a sharing service 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Select a sharing service. • If the pop-up message that prompts you to create an account appears, select OK. 4 Connect to a WLAN. (p. 89) 5 Enter your ID and password to log in. • For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 92) • To select an ID from the list, select → an ID. • If you have previously logged in to the sharing service, you may be logged in automatically. You must have an existing account with the file sharing service to use this feature. Uploading photos or videos 1 Access the sharing service with your camera. 2 Scroll to files to upload, and then press [ ]. • You can select up to 20 files. The total size must be 10 MB or less. (On some sharing services, the total size or number of files may vary.) 3 Select Upload. • The camera will upload photos or videos. • On some sharing services, you can enter your comments by selecting the comment box. For information about entering text, refer to "Entering text". (p. 92) Using photo or video sharing services Upload your photos or videos to file sharing services. Available sharing services will be displayed on your camera. To upload files to some websites, you must visit the website and register before connecting your camera. Using photo or video sharing services Wireless network 102 • You can set an upload folder for Facebook by pressing [ ], and then selecting Upload Folder (Facebook) on the sharing service's list screen. • You cannot upload files if the file size exceeds the limit. The maximum resolution of photos you can upload is 2M. The maximum resolution of videos you can upload is . If the selected photo has a resolution higher than 2M, it will be automatically resized to a lower resolution. (On some sharing services, the maximum photo resolution may vary.) • The method of uploading photos or videos may differ depending on the selected sharing service. • If you cannot access a sharing service because of firewall or user authentication settings, contact your network administrator or network service provider. • Uploaded photos or videos may be automatically titled with the date they were captured. • The speed of your internet connection may affect how quickly photos upload or web pages open. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • You can also upload photos or videos to file sharing services in Playback mode by pressing [ ], and then selecting Share(Wi-Fi) → a sharing service. • You cannot upload videos to some sharing services. Wireless network 103 Using Samsung Link to send files You can view files on a Samsung Link device connected to the same AP. 6 On the Samsung Link device, browse the shared photos or videos. • For information about searching for the camera and browsing the photos or videos on the Samsung Link device, refer to the device's user manual. • Videos may not play smoothly depending on the type of Samsung Link device or the network condition. If this happens, re-record the video in or smaller quality and play it again. If videos do not play smoothly on your device over the wireless connection, try connecting the camera to the device with an A/V cable. AP ▲ The camera is connected to a TV that supports Samsung Link via WLAN. Viewing photos or videos on devices that support Samsung Link 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select → Nearby devices. • If the guide message appears, press [ ]. • The camera will automatically attempt to connect to a WLAN via the most recently connected AP device. • If the camera has not previously been connected to a WLAN, it will search for available AP devices. (p. 89) • You can set to allow only selected devices or all devices to connect by pressing [ ], and then selecting DLNA Access Control on the screen. • A sharing file list is created. Wait until other devices can find your camera. 3 Connect the Samsung Link device to a network, and then turn on the Samsung Link feature. • Refer to your device's user manual for more information. 4 On the camera, allow the Samsung Link device to connect to your camera. 5 On the Samsung Link device, select a camera to connect to. Using Samsung Link to send files Wireless network 104 • You can share up to 1,000 recent files. • On an Samsung Link device, you can view only photos or videos captured with your camera. • The range of the wireless connection between your camera and an Samsung Link device may vary depending on the specifications of the AP. • If the camera is connected to 2 Samsung Link devices, playback may be slower. • Photos or videos will be shared in their original sizes. • You can use this feature only with devices that support Samsung Link. • Shared photos or videos will not be stored on the Samsung Link device, but they can be stored in the camera to meet the device's specifications. • Transferring photos or videos to the Samsung Link device may take some time depending on the network connection, the number of files to be shared, or the sizes of the files. • If you power off the camera abnormally while viewing photos or videos on an Samsung Link device (for example, by removing the battery), the device considers the camera to still be connected. • The order of photos or videos on the camera may be different than on the Samsung Link device. • Depending on the number of photos or videos you want to share, it may take some time to load your photos or videos and complete the initial set-up process. • While viewing photos or videos on the Samsung Link device, continuously using the device's remote or performing additional operations on the device may prevent this feature from working properly. • If you reorder or sort files on the camera while viewing them on an Samsung Link device, you must repeat the initial set-up process to update the list of files on the device. • When there are no files in the camera memory, you cannot use this feature. • We recommend you use a network cable to connect your Samsung Link device to your AP. This will minimize any video ‘Stuttering’ you may experience when streaming content. • To view files on an Samsung Link device using the Nearby devices feature, enable multicast mode on your AP. Settings Refer to options to configure your camera’s settings. Settings menu …………………………………………………… 106 Accessing the settings menu ……………………………… 106 Sound ………………………………………………………… 107 Display ……………………………………………………… 107 Connectivity ………………………………………………… 108 General ……………………………………………………… 109 Settings 106 Settings menu Learn to configure your camera's settings. 4 Select an item. Back Select Medium On Sound 1 Off On Sounds Volume Beep Sound Shutter Sound Start Sound AF Sound 5 Select an option. Back Set Volume Off Low Medium High 6 Press [ ] to return to the previous screen. Accessing the settings menu 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Select a menu. Sounds Display Connectivity General Settings Icon Description Sounds: Set various camera sounds and the volume. (p. 107) Display: Customize the display settings. (p. 107) Connectivity: Set the connection options. (p. 108) General: Change the settings for the camera system such as memory format and default file name. (p. 109) Settings menu Settings 107 Sound * Default Item Description Volume Set the volume of all sounds. (Off, Low, Medium*, High) Beep Sound Set the sound the camera emits when you press the buttons or switch modes on or off. (Off, On*) Shutter Sound Set the sound the camera emits when you press the shutter button. (Off, Sound 1*, Sound 2, Sound 3) Start Sound Set the sound the camera emits when you turn on your camera. (Off*, Star Flight, Laser Show, Cloud) AF Sound Set the sound the camera emits when you half-press the shutter button on or off. (Off, On*) Display * Default Item Description Start Image Set a start image to display when the camera turns on. • Off*: Display no start image. • Logo: Display a default image stored in the internal memory. • User Image: Select User Image from the photos you captured in the memory. If you select a new photo as a User Image or reset your camera, the camera will delete the current image. Wallpapers Set wallpaper for the Home screen with the desired image. (Wallpaper Gallery, Album) Guide Line Select a guide to help you compose a scene. (Off*, 3 X 3, 2 X 2, Cross, Diagonal) Date/Time Display Set whether or not to display the date and time on the camera's display. (Off*, On) Help Display Display a brief description of an option or menu. (Off, On*) Settings menu Settings 108 * Default Item Description Display Brightness Adjust the brightness of the screen. (Auto*, Dark, Normal, Bright) Normal is fixed in Playback mode even if you have selected Auto. Quick View Set whether or not to review a captured image before returning to the Shooting mode. (Off, On*) This feature does not work in some modes. Auto Display Off If you perform no operations for 30 seconds, the camera automatically switches to Power save mode. (Off*, On) In Power save mode, press any button other than [ ] to resume using the camera. Connectivity * Default Item Description Video Out Set the video signal output for your region. • NTSC: USA, Canada, Japan, Korea, Taiwan, Mexico, etc • PAL (supports only BDGHI): Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Denmark, England, Finland, France, Germany, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, Singapore, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, etc i-Launcher Set i-Launcher to launch automatically when you connect your camera to your computer. (Off, On*) Settings menu Settings 109 General * Default Item Description Network Information View the Mac address and network certification number of your camera. Language Set a language for the display text. Time Zone Set the time zone for your location. When you travel to another country, select Visit, and then select the appropriate time zone. (Home*, Visit) Date/Time Set Set the date and time. Date Type Set a date format. (YYYY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY) The default date type may differ depending on the language selected. Time Type Set the time format. (12 Hr, 24 Hr) The default time type may differ depending on the language selected. * Default Item Description File No. Specify how to name files. • Reset: Set the file number to start from 0001 when you insert a new memory card, format a memory card, or delete all files. • Series*: Set the file number to resume from the previous file number when you insert a new memory card, format a memory card, or delete all files. • The default name of the first folder is 100PHOTO and the default name of the first file is SAM_0001. • The file number increases by one, from SAM_0001 to SAM_9999, each time you capture a photo or record a video. • The folder number increases by one, from 100PHOTO to 999PHOTO, each time a folder is full. • The maximum number of files that can be stored in one folder is 9,999. • The camera defines file names according to the Design rule for Camera File system (DCF) standard. If you intentionally change file names, the camera may not play back the files. Settings menu Settings 110 * Default Item Description Imprint Set whether or not to display the date and time on captured photos. (Off*, Date, Date & Time) • The date and time will be displayed on the bottom right corner of the photo. • Some printer models may not print the date and time properly. • The photo will not display the date and time if: - you select Live Panorama in Magic mode Auto Power Off Set the camera to turn off automatically when you perform no operations for a specified period. (Off, 1 min, 3 min*, 5 min, 10 min) • Your settings will not change when you replace the battery. • The camera will not turn off automatically when the camera is connected to a computer or WLAN or when you are playing a slide show or videos. DIRECT LINK (Wi-Fi Button) Start a preset Wi-Fi function by pressing [ ]. (AutoShare, MobileLink*, Remote Viewfinder, Email, SNS & Cloud, Samsung Link) Live view NFC Set a Wi-Fi function to launch by reading a tag from an NFC-enabled device in Shooting mode. (AutoShare, Remote Viewfinder*) * Default Item Description AF Lamp Set a light to turn on automatically in dark places to help you focus. (Off, On*) Format Format the memory. Formatting will delete all files, including protected files. (Yes, No) Errors can occur if you use a memory card formatted by another brand of camera, a memory card reader, or a computer. Please format memory cards in the camera before using them to capture photos. Reset Reset menus and shooting options. Date and time, language, and video output settings will not be reset. (Yes, No) Open Source License View open source licenses. Appendixes Get information about error messages, specifications, and maintenance. Error messages …………………………………………………… 112 Camera maintenance …………………………………………… 113 Cleaning your camera ……………………………………… 113 Using or storing the camera ………………………………… 114 About memory cards ………………………………………… 115 About the battery …………………………………………… 118 Upgrading the firmware …………………………………… 122 Before contacting a service center …………………………… 123 Camera specifications …………………………………………… 126 Glossary ………………………………………………………… 130 Index ……………………………………………………………… 135 Appendixes 112 Error messages When the following error messages appear, try these remedies. Error message Suggested remedies File system not supported. Your camera does not support the FAT file structure of the inserted memory card. Format the memory card on the camera. Initialization failed. The camera has failed to locate a device that supports Samsung Link. Turn on devices on the network that support Samsung Link. Low Battery Insert a charged battery or recharge the battery. Memory Full Delete unnecessary files or insert a new memory card. No Image File Capture photos or insert a memory card that contains some photos. Password Incorrect The password for transferring files to another camera is wrong. Enter the correct password. Transfer failed. • The camera has failed to send e-mails or files to other devices.Try sending again. • Check the network connection and try again. Error message Suggested remedies Cannot read file content Delete the damaged file or contact a service center. Card Error • Turn off your camera, and then turn it on again. • Remove your memory card, and then insert it again. • Format your memory card. Card not supported. The inserted memory card is not supported by your camera. Insert a microSD, microSDHC, or microSDXC memory card. Connection failed. • The camera cannot connect to the network using the selected access point. Select another AP and try again. • The camera has failed to connect to the other devices. Try connecting again. DCF Full Error File names do not match the DCF standard. Transfer the files from the memory card to your computer and format the card. Then, open the Settings menu and select File No. → Reset. (p. 109) Device disconnected. Network connection disconnected while photos are being transferred to supported devices. Re-select a supported device. Appendixes 113 Camera maintenance Camera body Wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. • Never use benzene, thinners, or alcohol to clean the device. These solutions can damage the camera or cause it to malfunction. • Do not press on or use a blower brush on the lens cover. This can damage the camera. Cleaning your camera Camera lens and display Use a blower brush to remove dust and wipe the lens gently with a soft cloth. If any dust remains, apply lens cleaning liquid to a piece of lens cleaning paper and wipe gently. Camera maintenance Appendixes 114 Using or storing the camera Inappropriate places to use or store the camera • Avoid exposing the camera to very cold or very hot temperatures. • Avoid using your camera in areas with extremely high humidity, or where the humidity changes drastically. • Avoid exposing the camera to direct sunlight and storing it in hot, poorlyventilated areas, such as in a car during summer time. • Protect your camera and the display from impact, rough handling, and excessive vibration to avoid serious damage. • Avoid using or storing your camera in dusty, dirty, humid, or poorly-ventilated areas to prevent damage to moving parts and internal components. • Do not use your camera near fuels, combustibles, or flammable chemicals. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the camera or its accessories. • Do not store the camera where there are mothballs. Using on beaches or shores • Protect your camera from sand and dirt when you use it on beaches or in similar areas. • Your camera is not waterproof. Do not handle the battery, adapter, or memory card with wet hands. Operating the camera with wet hands may cause damage to your camera. Storing for extended period of time • When you store the camera for an extended period, place it in a sealed container with an absorbent material, such as silica gel. • Over time, unused batteries will discharge and must be recharged before use. • You must reset the date and time when you turn the camera on after the camera and battery have been separated for a prolonged period. Using the camera with caution in humid environments When you transfer the camera from a cold environment to a warm one, condensation can form on the lens or internal components of the camera. In this situation, turn off the camera and wait for at least 1 hour. If condensation forms on the memory card, remove the memory card from the camera and wait until all moisture has evaporated before reinserting it. Other cautions • Do not swing your camera by the strap. This may cause injury to yourself or others or damage to your camera. • Do not paint your camera, as paint can clog moving parts and prevent proper operation. • Turn off the camera when not using it. Camera maintenance Appendixes 115 • Your camera contains delicate parts. Avoid impacts to the camera. • Protect the display from external force by keeping it in the case when not in use. Protect the camera from scratches by keeping it away from sand, sharp implements, or loose change. • Do not use the camera if the screen is cracked or broken. Broken glass or acrylic could cause injury to your hands and face. Take the camera to a Samsung service center to have it repaired. • Never place cameras, batteries, chargers, or accessories near, on, or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Heat can deform or overheat these devices, which can cause a fire or explosion. • Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight, as this may discolor the image sensor or cause it to malfunction. • Protect the lens from fingerprints and scratches. Clean the lens with a soft, clean, debris-free lens cloth. • The camera may turn off if struck or dropped. This is to protect the memory card. Turn on the camera to use it again. • While you use the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your camera’s lifespan or performance. • When you use the camera in low temperatures, it may take some time to turn on, the color of the display may be changed temporarily, or after-images may appear. These conditions are not malfunctions and they will correct themselves when the camera is returned to milder temperatures. • Paint or metal on the outside of the camera may cause allergies, itchy skin, eczema, or swelling for people with sensitive skin. If you experience any of these symptoms, stop using the camera immediately and consult a doctor. • Do not insert foreign objects into any of your camera’s compartments, slots, or access points. Damage due to improper use may not be covered by your warranty. • Do not allow unqualified personnel to service the camera or attempt to service the camera yourself. Any damage that results from unqualified service is not covered by your warranty. About memory cards Supported memory cards Your camera supports microSD (Secure Digital), microSDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity), or microSDXC (Secure Digital eXtended Capacity) memory cards. Memory card Memory card adapter To read data with a PC or memory card reader, insert the memory card into a memory card adapter. Camera maintenance Appendixes 116 Memory card capacity The memory capacity may differ depending on the scenes you shoot or shooting conditions. These capacities are based on a 2 GB microSD card: Photo Size Super Fine Fine Normal 231 485 669 262 525 719 303 606 808 359 719 969 669 1139 1486 969 1609 1927 1381 2262 2738 2628 3185 3806 Video Size 30fps 1280 X 720 Approx. 15' 35" 640 X 480 Approx. 30' 44" For Sharing Approx. 90' 03" • The figures above are measured without using the zoom function. • Available recording time may vary if you use the zoom. • Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time. Camera maintenance Appendixes 117 Cautions when using memory cards • Avoid exposing memory cards to very cold or very hot temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can cause memory cards to malfunction. • Insert a memory card in the correct direction. Inserting a memory card in the wrong direction may damage your camera and memory card. • Do not use memory cards that have been formatted by other cameras or by a computer. Reformat the memory card with your camera. • Turn off the camera before you insert or remove the memory card. • Do not remove the memory card or turn off your camera while the lamp is blinking, as this may damage your data. • When the lifespan of a memory card has expired, you cannot store any more photos on the card. Use a new memory card. • Do not bend, drop, or subject memory cards to heavy impact or pressure. • Avoid using or storing memory cards near strong magnetic fields. • Avoid using or keeping memory cards in areas with high temperatures, high humidity, or corrosive substances. • Prevent memory cards from making contact with liquids, dirt, or foreign substances. If dirty, wipe the memory card clean with a soft cloth before you insert the memory card into your camera. • Do not allow liquids, dirt, or foreign substances to come in contact with memory cards or the memory card slot. Doing so may cause memory cards or the camera to malfunction. • When you carry a memory card, use a case to protect the card from electrostatic discharges. • Transfer important data to other media, such as a hard disk, CD, or DVD. • When you use the camera for an extended period, the memory card may become warm. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. Camera maintenance Appendixes 118 About the battery Use only Samsung-approved batteries. Battery specifications Specification Description Model BP70A Type Lithium-ion battery Cell capacity 700 mAh Voltage 3.7 V Charging time* (when the camera is switched off) Approximately 150 min * Charging the battery by connecting it to a computer may take longer. Battery life Average shooting time/ Number of photos Test conditions (when the battery is fully charged) Photos Approximately 100 min/ Approximately 200 photos The battery life was measured under the following conditions: in Program mode, in darkness, resolution, Fine quality, OIS on. 1. Set the flash option to Fill in, take a single shot, and zoom in or out. 2. Set the flash option to Off, take a single shot, and zoom in or out. 3. Perform steps 1 and 2, waiting 30 seconds between each step. Repeat the process for 5 minutes, and then turn off the camera for 1 minute. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3. Videos Approximately 70 min Record videos at resolution and 30 FPS. • The figures above are based on the CIPA test standards. Your results may differ depending on your actual usage. • Several videos were recorded in succession to determine the total recording time. • When using network functions, the battery will be depleted more quickly. Camera maintenance Appendixes 119 Low battery message When the battery has fully discharged, the battery icon will turn red and the "Low Battery" message will appear. Notes about using the battery • Avoid exposing batteries to very cold or very hot temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F). Extreme temperatures can reduce the charging capacity of your batteries. • When you use the camera for an extended period, the area around the battery chamber may become warm. This does not affect the normal use of the camera. • Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock. • In temperatures below 0 °C/32 °F, battery capacity and battery life may decrease. • Battery capacity may decrease in low temperatures, but will return to normal in milder temperatures. • Remove the batteries from your camera when storing it for an extended period. Installed batteries may leak or corrode over time and cause serious damage to your camera. Storing the camera for extended periods with the battery installed causes the battery to discharge. You may not be able to recharge a fully discharged battery. • When you do not use the camera for an extended period (3 months or more), check the battery and recharge it regularly. If you let the battery discharge continually, its capacity and life may decrease, which can lead to a malfunction, fire, or explosion. Cautions about using the battery Protect batteries, chargers, and memory cards from damage Prevent batteries from making contact with metal objects, as this can create a connection between the + and – terminals of your battery and lead to temporary or permanent battery damage and may cause a fire or electric shock. Notes about charging the battery • If the status lamp is off, make sure that the battery is inserted correctly. • If the camera is on while charging, the battery may not fully charge. Turn off the camera before charging the battery. • Do not use your camera when you are charging the battery. This may cause a fire or electric shock. • Do not pull the power supply cord to disconnect the plug from the power outlet, as this may cause a fire or electric shock. • When the battery is fully discharged, allow it to charge for a while before turning the camera on. Let the battery charge for at least 10 minutes before turning on the camera. • If you connect the camera to an external power source when the battery is depleted, using high energy-consuming functions will cause the camera to turn off. To use the camera normally, recharge the battery. Camera maintenance Appendixes 120 • If you reconnect the power cable when the battery is fully charged, the status lamp turns on for approximately 30 minutes. • Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Charge the battery until the red status lamp turns off. • If the indicator light does not illuminate, reconnect the cable, or remove the battery and insert it again. • Overcharging batteries may shorten battery life. After charging is finished, disconnect the cable from your camera. • Do not bend or place heavy objects on the AC cable. Doing so may damage the cable. Notes about charging with a computer connected • Use only the provided USB cable. • The battery may not charge when: - you use a USB hub - other USB devices are connected to your computer - you connect the cable to the port on the front side of your computer - the USB port of your computer does not support the power output standard (5 V, 500 mA) Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care • Never dispose of batteries in a fire. Follow all local regulations when you dispose of used batteries. • Never place batteries or cameras on or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Batteries may explode when they are overheated. Camera maintenance Appendixes 121 Personal injury or death can occur if the battery is handled carelessly or improperly. For your safety, follow these instructions for proper battery handling: • The battery can ignite or explode if not handled properly. If you notice any deformities, cracks, or other abnormalities in the battery, immediately discontinue use of the battery and contact a service center. • Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommend battery chargers and adapters and charge the battery only by the methods described in this user manual. • Do not place the battery near heating devices or expose it to excessively warm environments, such as the inside of an enclosed car in the summertime. • Do not place the battery in a microwave oven. • Avoid storing or using the battery in hot, humid places, such as spas or shower enclosures. • Do not rest the camera on flammable surfaces, such as bedding, carpets, or electric blankets for a prolonged period. • When the camera is switched on, do not leave it in any confined space for a prolonged period. • Do not allow battery terminals to come in contact with metallic objects, such as necklaces, coins, keys, or watches. • Use only authentic, manufacturer-recommended, Lithium-ion replacement batteries. • Do not disassemble the battery or puncture it with any sharp object. • Avoid exposing the battery to high pressure or crushing forces. • Avoid exposing the battery to major impacts, such as dropping it from high places. • Do not expose the battery to temperatures of 60 °C (140 °F) or above. • Do not allow the battery to come in contact with moisture or liquids. • Do not expose the battery to sources of excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, or the like. Disposal guidelines • Dispose of the battery with care. • Do not dispose of the battery in a fire. • Disposal regulations may differ by country or region.Dispose of the battery in accordance with all local and federal regulations. Guidelines for charging the battery Charge the battery only by the methods described in this user manual. The battery can ignite or explode if not charged properly. Camera maintenance Appendixes 122 Upgrading the firmware i-Launcher allows you to upgrade the firmware of your camera. 1 On the Home screen, scroll to . 2 Select . 3 Select Connectivity → i-Launcher → On. 4 Turn off the camera. 5 Connect the camera to your computer with the USB cable. You must plug the small end of the USB cable into your camera. If the cable is reversed, it may damage your files. The manufacturer is not responsible for any loss of data. 6 Turn on the camera. 7 Install i-Launcher on the PC. OS How to Install Windows When the pop-up window prompts you to install i-Launcher, select Yes. • If a pop-up window prompting you to run iLinker.exe appears, run it first. • If the pop-up window does not appear, select My Computer → i-Launcher → iLinker.exe. • When you connect the camera to a computer with i-Launcher installed, the program will launch automatically. Mac Click Devices → i-Launcher → Mac → iLinker. 8 Upgrade the firmware to the latest version following the on-screen instructions. • Select Firmware Upgrader on the screen of i-Launcher. • Before upgrading the firmware, ensure that the PC is connected to a network. • Do not power off during the firmware upgrade. Appendixes 123 Before contacting a service center If you are having trouble with your camera, try these troubleshooting procedures before you contact a service center. If you have attempted the suggested remedy and are still having problems with your device, contact your local dealer or service center. When you leave your camera at a service center, be sure to also leave the other components that may have contributed to the malfunction, such as the memory card and battery. Situation Suggested remedies Cannot capture photos • There is no space on the memory card. Delete unnecessary files or insert a new card. • Format the memory card. • The memory card is defective. Get a new memory card. • Make sure that the camera is switched on. • Charge the battery. • Make sure that the battery is inserted correctly. The camera freezes Remove the battery and insert it again. The camera heats up While you use the camera, it may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your camera’s lifespan or performance. The flash does not work • The flash option may be set to Off. (p. 52) • You cannot use the flash in some modes. Situation Suggested remedies Cannot turn on the camera • Ensure that the battery is inserted. • Ensure that the battery is inserted correctly. (p. 18) • Charge the battery. The power turns off suddenly • Charge the battery. • Your camera may be in Auto Power Off mode. (p. 110) • The camera may turn off to prevent the memory card from being damaged due to an impact. Turn on your camera again. The camera is losing battery power quickly • The battery may lose power more quickly in low temperatures (below 0 °C/32 °F). Keep the battery warm by putting it into your pocket. • Using the flash or recording videos depletes the battery quickly. Recharge if needed. • Batteries are consumable parts that must be replaced over time. Get a new battery if the battery life is diminishing quickly. Before contacting a service center Appendixes 124 Situation Suggested remedies The flash fires unexpectedly The flash may fire due to static electricity. The camera is not malfunctioning. The date and time are incorrect Set the date and time in the display settings. (p. 109) The display or buttons do not work Remove the battery, and then insert it again. The camera display responds poorly If you use your camera at very low temperatures, it may cause the camera screen to malfunction or discolor. For better performance of your camera screen, use your camera in moderate temperatures. The memory card has an error • Turn off your camera, and then turn it on again. • Remove your memory card, and then insert it again. • Format your memory card. See “Cautions when using memory cards” for more detail. (p. 117) Situation Suggested remedies Cannot play back files If you change the name of a file, your camera may not play the file (the name of the file should meet the DCF standard). If you encounter this situation, play back the files on your computer. The photo is blurry • Make sure that the focus option you set is suitable for close-up shots. (p. 55) • Make sure that the lens is clean. If not, clean the lens. (p. 113) • Make sure that the subject is within range of the flash. (p. 127) The colors in the photo do not match the actual scene An incorrect White Balance can create unrealistic color. Select the proper White Balance option to suit the light source. (p. 63) The photo is too bright or too dark Your photo is overexposed or underexposed. • Turn the flash off or on. (p. 52) • Adjust the ISO sensitivity. (p. 54) • Adjust the exposure value. (p. 61) Before contacting a service center Appendixes 125 Situation Suggested remedies The TV does not display your photos • Make sure that the camera is correctly connected to the TV with the A/V cable. • Make sure that your memory card contains photos. Your computer does not recognize your camera • Make sure that the USB cable is connected correctly. • Make sure that your camera is switched on. • Make sure that you are using a supported operating system. Your computer disconnects the camera while transferring files The file transmission may be interrupted by static electricity. Disconnect the USB cable and connect it again. Situation Suggested remedies i-Launcher is not functioning properly • End i-Launcher and restart the program. • Make sure that i-Launcher is set to On in the settings menu. (p. 108) • Depending on your computer's specifications and environment, the program may not launch automatically. In this case, click Start → All Programs → Samsung → i-Launcher → Samsung i-Launcher on your Windows computer. (For Windows 8, open Start screen, and then select All apps → Samsung i-Launcher.) Or, click Applications → Samsung → i-Launcher on your Mac OS computer. Your TV or computer cannot display photos and videos that are stored on a microSDXC memory card. microSDXC memory cards use the exFAT file system. Ensure that the external device is compatible with the exFAT file system before connecting the camera to the device. Your computer does not recognize a microSDXC memory card. microSDXC memory cards use the exFAT file system. To use microSDXC memory cards on a Windows XP computer, download and update the exFAT file system driver from the Microsoft website. Appendixes 126 Image sensor Type 1/2.3" (Approximately 7.76 mm) CCD Effective pixels Approximately 16.2 mega-pixels Total pixels Approximately 16.6 mega-pixels Lens Focal length Samsung Lens 12x Zoom Lens f = 4.3–51.6 mm (35 mm film equivalent: 24–288 mm) F-stop range F3.1(W)–F6.3(T) Digital zoom • Still image mode: 1.0–2.0X • Playback mode: 1.0–14.4X (depending on image size) • Intelli zoom: 2.0X Display Type TFT LCD Feature 2.7" (67.5 mm) QVGA(230K) Focusing Type TTL auto focus (Center AF, Multi AF, Tracking AF, Face Detection AF, Video continuous auto focus (CAF)) Range Wide (W) Tele (T) Normal (AF) 31 in. (80 cm)- infinity 98 in. (250 cm)- infinity Macro 2-31 in. (5-80 cm) 51-98 in. (130-250 cm) Auto Macro 2 in. (5 cm) -infinity 51 in. (130 cm)- infinity Shutter speed • Smart Auto: 1/8–1/2,000 sec. • Program: 1–1/2,000 sec. • Night: 8–1/2,000 sec. • Fireworks: 2 sec. Exposure Control Program AE Metering Multi, Spot, Center-weighted, Face Detection Metering range EV 2–17 (Wide, ISO Auto), EV 4–19 (Tele, ISO Auto) Compensation ±2EV (1/3 EV Step) ISO equivalent Auto, ISO 80, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200 Camera specifications Camera specifications Appendixes 127 Flash Mode Auto, Red-eye, Fill in, Slow Sync, Off, Red-eye Fix Range • Wide: 7.87-157.48 in. (0.2-4.0 m) (ISO Auto) • Tele: 19.69-62.99 in. (0.5-1.6 m) (ISO Auto) Recharging time Approximately 5 sec. Shake reduction Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) Effect Photo Shooting mode • Photo Filter (Smart Filter): Miniature, Vignetting, Cross Filter, Fish-eye, Classic, Retro • Image Adjust: Sharpness, Contrast, Saturation Video Shooting mode Movie Filter: Miniature, Vignetting, Fish-eye, Classic, Retro, Palette Effect 1, Palette Effect 2, Palette Effect 3, Palette Effect 4 White Balance Auto WB, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent_H, Fluorescent_L, Tungsten, Custom Set, Color Temp. Date Imprinting Date & Time, Date, Off Shooting Photos • Modes: Smart Auto (Portrait, Night Portrait, Backlight Portrait, Night, Backlight, Landscape, White, Natural Green, Blue Sky, Sunset, Macro, Macro text, Macro Color, Tripod, Action, Low Light, Spotlight, Spotlight (Macro), Spotlight (Portrait)), Program, Smart (Beauty Face, Landscape, Macro, Action Freeze, Silhouette, Sunset, Night, Fireworks, Light Trace), Live Panorama, Photo Filter • Burst: Single, Continuous, Motion Capture, AEB • Timer: Off, 10 Sec, 2 Sec, Double (10 Sec, 2 Sec) Videos • Modes: Smart Scene Detection (Landscape, Blue Sky, Natural Green, Sunset), Movie Filter • Format: MP4 (H.264) (Max recording time: 20 min) • Size: 1280 X 720, 640 X 480, 240 Web • Voice: On, Off, Zoom Mute • Continuous AF: Continuous AF On, Continuous AF Off Camera specifications Appendixes 128 Playback Photos • Type: Single image, Thumbnails, Multi Slide Show with Music and Effect, Smart Album* * Smart Album category: All, Date, File Type • Edit: Rotate, Smart Filter, Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, ACB, Face Retouch, Red-eye Fix, Resize, Crop • Effect: Smart Filter (Normal, Miniature, Vignetting, Cross Filter, Fish-eye, Classic, Retro) Videos Video editing: Still image capture, Time trimming Storage Media External memory (Optional): microSD card (2 GB guaranteed), microSDHC card (up to 32 GB guaranteed), microSDXC card (up to 64 GB guaranteed) - Class 6 and above recommended File format • Still Image: JPEG (DCF), EXIF 2.3 • Movie Clip: MP4 (Video: MPEG-4.AVC/H.264, Audio: AAC) Image size Icon Size 4608 X 3456 4608 X 3072 4608 X 2592 3648 X 2736 2592 X 1944 1984 X 1488 1920 X 1080 1024 X 768 Wireless network MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Email, SNS & Cloud, Samsung Link, AutoShare, S/W Upgrade Notifier Camera specifications Appendixes 129 NFC Yes Interface Digital output connector USB 2.0 Audio input/ output Internal speaker (Mono), Microphone (Mono) Video output A/V: NTSC, PAL (selectable) DC power input connector 5.0 V Power source Rechargeable battery Lithium-ion battery (BP70A, 700 mAh) Connector type Micro USB (5 pin) The power source may differ depending on your region. Dimensions (W X H X D) 3.97 X 2.40 X 0.81 in. (100.9 X 61.2 X 20.7 mm) (without protrusions) Weight 5.11 oz (145 g) (without battery and memory card) Operating Temperature 0–40 °C (32-104 °F) Operating Humidity 5–85 % Software i-Launcher Specifications may change without notice to improve performance. Appendixes 130 ACB (Auto Contrast Balance) This feature automatically improves the contrast of your images when the subject is backlit or when there is a high contrast between your subject and the background. AEB (Auto Exposure Bracket) This feature automatically captures several images at different exposures to help you capture a properly-exposed image. AF (Auto Focus) A system that automatically focuses the camera lens on the subject. Your camera uses the contrast to focus automatically. Aperture The aperture controls the amount of light that reaches the camera’s sensor. Camera shake (Blur) If the camera is moved while the shutter is open, the entire image may appear blurred. This occurs more often when the shutter speed is slow. Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, or using a faster shutter speed. Alternately, use a tripod or the OIS function to stabilize the camera. Composition Composition in photography means arranging objects in a photo. Usually, abiding by the rule of thirds leads to a good composition. DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) A specification to define a file format and file system for digital cameras created by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA). Depth of field The distance between the nearest and farthest points that can be acceptably focused in a photograph. Depth of field varies with lens aperture, focal length, and distance from the camera to the subject. For example, using a smaller f-number will create a large depth of field and blur the background in the composition. Digital zoom A feature that artificially increases the amount of zoom available with a zoom lens (Optical zoom). When using the Digital zoom, the image quality will deteriorate as the magnification increases. Glossary Glossary Appendixes 131 EV Compensation This feature allows you to quickly adjust the exposure value measured by the camera, in limited increments, to improve the exposure of your photos. Set the EV compensation to -1.0 EV to adjust the value one step darker and 1.0 EV to one step brighter. EV (Exposure Value) All the combinations of the camera’s shutter speed and lens aperture that result in the same exposure. Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format) A specification to define an image file format for digital cameras created by the Japan Electronic Industries Development Association (JEIDA). Exposure The amount of light allowed to reach the camera’s sensor. Exposure is controlled by a combination of the shutter speed, the aperture value, and ISO sensitivity. Flash A speed light that helps to create adequate exposure in low-light conditions. Focal length The distance from the middle of the lens to its focal point (in millimeters). Longer focal lengths result in narrower angles of view and the subject is magnified. Shorter focal lengths result in wider angles of view. H.264/MPEG-4 A high-compression video format established by international standard organizations ISO-IEC and ITU-T and developed by the Joint Video Team (JVT). This codec is capable of providing good video quality at low bit rates. Image sensor The physical part of a digital camera that contains a photosite for each pixel in the image. Each photosite records the brightness of the light that strikes it during an exposure. Common sensor types are CCD (Charge-coupled Device) and CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor). Glossary Appendixes 132 ISO sensitivity The sensitivity of the camera to light, based on the equivalent film speed used in a film camera. At higher ISO sensitivity settings, the camera uses a higher shutter speed, which can reduce blur caused by camera shake and low light. However, images with high sensitivity are more susceptible to noise. JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) A lossy method of compression for digital images. JPEG images are compressed to reduce their overall file size with minimal deterioration of the image resolution. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) A visual display commonly used in consumer electronics. This display needs a separate backlight, such as CCFL or LED, to reproduce colors. Macro This feature allows you to capture close-up photos of very small objects. When using the macro feature, the camera can maintain a sharp focus on small objects at a near life-size ratio (1:1). Metering The metering refers to the way in which the camera measures the quantity of light to set the exposure. MJPEG (Motion JPEG) A video format which is compressed as a JPEG image. NFC (Near Field Communication) NFC is a set of standards for radio communication at very close proximity. You can use NFC-enabled devices to activate features or exchange data with other devices. Noise Misinterpreted pixels in a digital image that may appear as misplaced or random, bright pixels. Noise usually occurs when photos are shot with a high sensitivity or when a sensitivity is automatically set in a dark place. OIS (Optical Image Stabilization) This feature compensates in real-time for shaking and vibrating while shooting. There is no image degradation compared to Digital Image Stabilization feature. Glossary Appendixes 133 Optical zoom This is a general zoom which can enlarge images with a lens and does not degrade the quality of images. Quality An expression of the rate of compression used in a digital image. Higher quality images have a lower rate of compression, which usually results in a larger file size. Resolution The number of pixels present in a digital image. High resolution images contain more pixels and typically show more detail than low resolution images. Shutter speed Shutter speed refers to the amount of time it takes to open and close the shutter, and it is an important factor in the brightness of a photo, as it controls the amount of light which passes through the aperture before it reaches the image sensor. A fast shutter speed allows less time to let light in and the photo becomes darker and more easily freezes subjects in motion. Vignetting A reduction of an image’s brightness or saturation at the periphery (outer edges) compared to the center of the image. Vignetting can draw interest to subjects positioned in the center of an image. White balance (color balance) An adjustment of the intensities of colors (typically the primary colors red, green, and blue) in an image. The goal of adjusting the white balance, or color balance, is to correctly render the colors in an image. Appendixes 134 Correct Disposal of This Product Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories, or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product or their local government office for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. PlanetFirst represents Samsung Electronics' commitment to sustainable development and social responsibility through ecodriven business and management activities. Correct disposal of batteries in this product (Applicable in countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the battery, manual, or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd, or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium, or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system. Appendixes 135 A AF-assist light Location 15 Settings 110 AF Sound 107 Auto Contrast Balance (ACB) Playback mode 80 Shooting mode 62 Auto Exposure Bracket (AEB) 65 AutoShare 94 A/V port 15 B Battery Caution 119 Charging 19 Inserting 18 Blink Detection 59 Brightness Playback mode 80 Shooting mode 61 Burst modes Auto Exposure Bracket (AEB) 65 Continuous 65 Motion Capture 65 C CAF (Continuous AF) 41 Camera maintenance 113 Camera specifications 126 Capturing an image from video 82 Charging 19 Cleaning Camera body 113 Display 113 Lens 113 Connecting to your Mac computer 85 Contrast Playback mode 80 Shooting mode 66 D Date/Time Set 109 Deleting files 73 Digital zoom 32 DIRECT LINK button 17 Disconnecting the camera 85 Display brightness 108 Display type 29 E Editing photos 78 Editing videos Capturing 82 Trimming 82 Enlarging 74 Error messages 112 Exposure 61 Index Appendixes 136 F Face Detection 58 Flash Auto 52 Fill in 53 Off 52 Red-eye 53 Red-eye Fix 53 Slow Sync 53 Focus area Center AF 56 Multi AF 56 Tracking AF 56 Formatting 110 Function button 16 G Guide Line 107 H Half-press shutter 35 Home screen 23 I Icons Playback mode 70 Shooting mode 22 Image Adjustment ACB 80 Brightness Playback mode 80 Shooting mode 61 Contrast Playback mode 80 Shooting mode 66 Red-eye 81 Saturation Playback mode 80 Shooting mode 66 Sharpness 66 Imprint 110 Intelli zoom 33 ISO sensitivity 54 L Language settings 109 Live Panorama mode 44 M Macro Auto Macro 56 Macro 56 Memory card Caution 117 Insert 18 Menu button 16 Metering Center-weighted 62 Multi 62 Spot 62 MobileLink 95 Motion Capture 65 Movie Filter mode 46 Movie mode 41 N NFC (Tag & Go) 93 O Optical Image Stabilization (OIS) 34 Optional accessories 14 Index Appendixes 137 P Photo Filter mode 45 Playback button 16 Playback mode 70 Power button 15 Power save mode 108 Program mode 39 Protecting files 73 Q Quick view 108 R Red-eye Playback mode 81 Shooting mode 52 Remote Viewfinder 96 Reset 110 Resolution Playback mode 78 Shooting mode 49 Retouching faces Playback mode 80 Rotating 78 S Samsung Link 103 Saturation Playback mode 80 Shooting mode 66 Self-Portrait 58 Service center 123 Settings 109 Sharing service Accessing 101 Uploading photos or videos 101 Sharpness 66 Shooting portraits Blink Detection 59 Face Detection 58 Self-Portrait 58 Smile Shot 59 Shutter button 15 Slide show 76 Smart Auto mode 38 Smart Filter Photo shooting mode 45 Playback mode 79 Video recording mode 46 Smart mode 42 Smart Movie mode 40 Smile Shot 59 Sound settings 30 Start Image 107 Status lamp 16 T Thumbnails 71 Timer Shooting mode 51 Timer lamp 15 Time settings 20 Time zone settings 20, 109 Tracking AF 57 Index Appendixes 138 Transferring files Email 98 Mac 85 Windows 84 Tripod mount 15 U Unpacking 14 USB port 15 V Video Playback mode 77 Shooting mode 41 Video out 108 Viewing files Category 72 Panoramic photos 75 Slide show 76 Thumbnails 71 TV 83 W White Balance 63 Wireless network 89 Z Zoom Using the zoom 32 Zoom button 16 Zoom sound settings 67 Index Please refer to the warranty that came with your product or visit our website, www.samsung.com, for after-sales service or inquiries. Cliquez sur une rubrique Ce manuel d’utilisation propose des instructions détaillées pour l’utilisation de votre appareil photo. Veuillez le lire attentivement. Manuel d’utilisation Questions fréquentes Fonctions de base Lecture/Retouche Annexes Référence rapide Fonctions avancées Réseau sans fil Index Table des matières Options de prise de vue Paramètres WB35F/WB36F/WB37F 1 Evitez d’endommager la vue des sujets photographiés. N’utilisez pas le flash à proximité (à moins d’un mètre) de personnes ou d’animaux. L’utilisation du flash trop près des yeux du sujet peut provoquer des lésions temporaires ou permanentes. Ne laissez pas l’appareil photo à la portée d’enfants en bas âge ou d’animaux domestiques. Tenez l’appareil, ses pièces et ses accessoires, hors de portée des enfants en bas âge et des animaux. L’ingestion de petites pièces peut provoquer un étouffement ou des blessures graves. Les composants et les accessoires peuvent également présenter des risques de blessure. Evitez toute exposition prolongée de l’appareil photo à la lumière directe du soleil ou à des températures élevées. Une exposition prolongée à la lumière directe du soleil ou à des températures très élevées peut endommager de manière permanente les composants internes de l’appareil photo. Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité Respectez toujours les consignes et conseils d’utilisation suivants afin de prévenir toute situation dangereuse et de garantir un fonctionnement optimal de votre appareil photo. Avertissement—situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser d’autres personnes Ne démontez pas ou n’essayez pas de réparer vous-même votre appareil photo. Vous pouvez endommager l’appareil photo et vous exposer à un risque de choc électrique. N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de gaz ou de liquides inflammables ou explosifs. Vous risquez de provoquer une explosion ou un incendie. Ne laissez pas pénétrer de matériaux inflammables dans l’appareil photo ou ne stockez pas ces matériaux à proximité de l’appareil photo. Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique ou de provoquer un incendie. N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo avec les mains mouillées. Vous pouvez recevoir une décharge électrique. 2 Evitez de couvrir l’appareil photo ou le chargeur avec des couvertures ou des vêtements. L’appareil photo peut surchauffer, se déformer ou prendre feu. Ne manipulez pas le cordon d’alimentation ou le chargeur lors d’un orage. Vous pourriez recevoir une décharge électrique. Si du liquide ou des corps étrangers pénètrent dans l’appareil photo, déconnectez toutes les sources d’alimentation comme la batterie ou le chargeur, puis contactez un service après-vente de Samsung. Respectez la réglementation interdisant l'utilisation des appareils photo dans certaines zones spécifiques. • Evitez les interférences avec d'autres appareils électroniques. • Eteignez votre appareil photo à bord d'un avion. Il pourrait photo peut provoquer des interférences avec l'équipement de bord. Respectez les consignes de la compagnie aérienne et éteignez votre appareil photo lorsque vous y êtes invité. • Eteignez votre appareil photo à proximité de tout appareil médical. Il pourrait causer des interférences avec le matériel médical utilisé dans les hôpitaux et les centres de soins. Observez la réglementation en vigeur, ainsi que les mises en garde affichées et les consignes du personnel médical. Évitez les interférences avec les stimulateurs cardiaques. Maintenez l’appareil photo à bonne distance des stimulateurs cardiaques pour éviter toute interférence, comme recommandé par le fabricant et les groupes de recherche. Si vous pensez que votre appareil photo interfère avec un stimulateur cardiaque ou un appareil médical, éteignez-le immédiatement et contactez le fabricant du stimulateur cardiaque ou de l'appareil médical pour connaître la marche à suivre. Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité 3 Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité Attention—situations susceptibles d’endommager votre appareil photo ou d’autres appareils Si vous rangez votre appareil photo sans l’utiliser pour une période de temps prolongée, retirez d’abord la batterie. Les batteries peuvent fuir ou se détériorer avec le temps, risquant d’endommager gravement l’appareil photo. Utilisez uniquement des batteries de remplacement lithium-ion authentiques recommandées par le fabricant. N’endommagez pas ou ne chauffez pas la batterie. Cela risque de provoquer un incendie ou des dommages corporels. Utilisez uniquement des batteries, des chargeurs et des accessoires homologués par Samsung. • L’utilisation de batteries, chargeurs, câbles ou accessoires non homologués peut endommager l’appareil photo, provoquer une explosion ou causer des blessures. • Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages ou blessures résultant d’une utilisation inappropriée de batteries, chargeurs, câbles ou accessoires. N’utilisez la batterie que pour l’usage pour lequel elle a été conçue. Un usage non conforme risque de provoquer une décharge électrique ou un incendie. Ne touchez pas le flash en cours de déclenchement. Le flash est très chaud lorsqu’il se déclenche et peut provoquer des brûlures. Lorsque vous utilisez un chargeur, éteignez toujours l’appareil photo avant de débrancher le chargeur de la prise murale. Si vous ne prenez pas cette précaution, vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique ou de provoquer un incendie. Débranchez le chargeur de la prise murale lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Si vous ne prenez pas cette précaution, vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique ou de provoquer un incendie. N’utilisez jamais de fiches et de cordons d’alimentation endommagés ou de prises électriques mal fixées lorsque vous rechargez la batterie. Vous risquez de recevoir une décharge électrique ou de provoquer un incendie. Evitez tout contact du chargeur avec les bornes + et – de la batterie. Vous pouvez recevoir une décharge électrique ou provoquer un incendie. 4 Ne laissez pas tomber l’appareil photo et ne le soumettez pas à des chocs violents. Cela risquerait d’endommager l’écran ou les composants internes ou externes. Effectuez les manipulations de branchement des cordons, du chargeur et d’insertion des batteries et des cartes mémoire avec précaution. Enfoncer les cordons en forçant ou sans précaution et brancher les câbles ou insérer les batteries et les cartes mémoire de manière incorrecte peut endommager les ports, les prises et les accessoires. Evitez tout contact des cartes mémoire avec le boîtier de l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager ou d’effacer les données qui y sont stockées. N’utilisez jamais une batterie, un chargeur ou une carte mémoire endommagé. Vous risqueriez de recevoir une décharge électrique, d’endommager l’appareil photo ou de provoquer un incendie. Ne pas positionner l’appareil photo à l’intérieur ou à proximité d’un champ magnétique. Cela risquerait de l’endommager. N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo si l’écran est endommagé. Si des parties en verre ou en acrylique sont brisées, rapportez votre appareil photo à un centre de service Samsung pour le faire réparer. Vérifiez que l’appareil photo fonctionne correctement avant de l’utiliser. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de fichiers ou de dégâts résultant d’un fonctionnement incorrect ou d’une mauvaise utilisation de l’appareil photo. Vous devez brancher la fiche micro-USB du câble USB sur votre appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous inversez le sens de connexion du câble. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de pertes de données. Evitez les interférences avec d'autres appareils électroniques. Les signaux de fréquence radio émis par votre appareil photo peuvent perturber le fonctionnement des systèmes électroniques mal installés ou insuffisamment protégés, notamment les stimulateurs cardiaques, les prothèses auditives, les appareils médicaux et les équipements électroniques domestiques et automobiles. Contactez les fabricants de ces appareils électroniques pour résoudre les problèmes d'interférences éventuels. Pour éviter toute interférence involontaire, utilisez exclusivement des appareils ou des accessoires homologués par Samsung. Utilisez votre appareil photo dans la position normale. Evitez tout contact avec l'antenne interne de votre appareil photo. Transfert de données et responsabilités • Afin d'empêcher tout risque de fuite des données transférées via le réseau WLAN, évitez de transférer des données sensibles dans des zones publiques ou sur des réseaux ouverts. • Le fabricant de l'appareil photo décline toute responsabilité en cas de transferts de données qui porteraient atteinte aux droits d'auteur, marques, lois sur la propriété intellectuelle ou qui seraient contraires aux bonnes moeurs. Informations relatives à la santé et à la sécurité 5 Informations sur les droits d’auteur • Microsoft Windows et le logo Windows sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation. • Mac et Apple App Store sont des marques déposées d’Apple Corporation. • Google Play Store est une marque déposée de Google, Inc. • microSD™, microSDHC™ et microSDXC™ sont des marques deposees de SD Association. • Wi-Fi®, le logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. • Les marques commerciales mentionnées dans ce manuel d’utilisation appartiennent à leurs propriétaires respectifs. • Les caractéristiques de l’appareil ou le contenu de ce manuel d’utilisation peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis, suite à l’évolution des fonctions de l’appareil. • Nous vous recommandons d’utiliser votre appareil photo dans le pays dans lequel vous l’avez acheté. • Utilisez cet appareil photo de manière responsable et veillez à respecter toutes les législations et règlementations en vigueur. • La distribution ou la réutilisation du contenu de ce manuel d’utilisation, même partielle, sans autorisation préalable, est interdite. Organisation du manuel d’utilisation Fonctions de base 13 Cette section décrit le contenu du coffret du produit, la présentation de l’appareil photo, la signification des icônes et les fonctions de base de la prise de vue. Fonctions avancées 37 Découvrez comment prendre une photo et enregistrer de la vidéo en sélectionnant un mode. Options de prise de vue 48 Cette section explique comment définir les options en mode Prise de vue. Lecture/Retouche 69 Cette section décrit comment visionner des prises d’images ou de vidéos et retoucher des photos. Vous apprendrez également comment connecter votre appareil photo à un ordinateur ou à un téléviseur. Réseau sans fil 88 Apprenez à vous connecter à des réseaux locaux sans fil et à utiliser les fonctions. Paramètres 105 Cette section décrit les différentes options qui permettent de configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Annexes 111 Cette section reprend les messages d’erreur, les caractéristiques de l’appareil et des conseils pour l’entretien. 6 Icônes reprises dans ce manuel d’utilisation Icône Fonction Informations complémentaires Mises en garde et précautions [ ] Touches de l’appareil photo. Par exemple, [Déclencheur] représente la touche de l’obturateur. ( ) Numéro de page où se trouve l’information correspondante → Séquence d’options ou de menus à sélectionner pour effectuer une manipulation. Exemple : Appuyez sur Détection des visages → Normale (signifie que vous devez Appuyer sur Détection des visages, puis sur Normale). * Annotation Expressions reprises dans ce manuel d’utilisation Pression sur le déclencheur • Enfoncer le [Déclencheur] à mi-course : enfoncez à moitié le déclencheur. • Appuyer sur le [Déclencheur] : enfoncez entièrement le déclencheur. Enfoncer le [Déclencheur] à mi-course Appuyer sur le [Déclencheur] Sujet, arrière-plan et composition • Sujet : le principal objet d’une scène, qu’il s’agisse d’une personne, d’un animal ou d’un objet inanimé. • Arrière-plan : l’environnement qui entoure le sujet. • Cadrage : la combinaison d’un sujet et d’un arrière-plan. Cadrage Arrière-plan Sujet Exposition (luminosité) L’exposition correspond à la quantité de lumière perçue par l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez modifier l’exposition en réglant la vitesse d’obturation, la valeur d’ouverture et la sensibilité ISO. Modifier l’exposition permet d’obtenir des photos plus sombres ou plus claires. Exposition normale Surexposition (trop lumineux) 7 Questions fréquentes Cette section propose des réponses à des questions fréquentes. Les yeux du sujet sont rouges. Un reflet de l’appareil provoque ce désagrément. • Définissez l’option du flash sur Anti yeux rouges ou Correction des yeux rouges. (p. 52) • Si la photo a déjà été prise, sélectionnez Correction des yeux rouges depuis le mode Éditeur photos. (p. 81) Les photos présentent des traces de poussière. En utilisant le flash, il est possible que l’appareil capture des particules de poussière en suspension dans l’air. • Désactivez le flash ou évitez de prendre des photos dans un lieu poussiéreux. • Réglez les options de sensibilité ISO. (p. 54) Les photos sont floues. Si vous prenez des photos dans des conditions de faible luminosité ou si vous tenez l’appareil photo de façon incorrecte, il se peut que vos photos soient flous. Utilisez la fonction OIS ou enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point du sujet. (p. 35) Les photos sont floues lorsqu’elles sont prises dans l’obscurité. L’appareil tente de faire pénétrer plus de lumière, par conséquent la vitesse d’obturation ralentit. Il devient alors difficile de tenir l’appareil immobile et cela provoque un effet de bougé de l’appareil photo. • Sélectionnez Nuit depuis le Mode intelligent. (p. 42) • Activez le flash. (p. 52) • Réglez les options de sensibilité ISO. (p. 54) • Utilisez un trépied pour stabiliser l’appareil. Les sujets sont trop sombres à cause du contre-jour. Lorsque la source de lumière se trouve derrière le sujet ou lorsqu’il existe un fort contraste entre les zones lumineuses et les zones sombres, le sujet peut apparaître trop sombre. • Evitez de prendre des photos face au soleil. • Réglez l'option du flash sur Contre jour. (p. 52) • Réglez l’exposition. (p. 61) • Réglez l’option de réglage automatique du contraste (ACB). (p. 62) • Réglez l’option de mesure de l’exposition sur Sélective lorsqu’un sujet se trouve au centre du cadre. (p. 62) 8 Référence rapide Photographie de personnes • Mode Intelligent > Beauté 42 • Anti yeux rouges / Correction des yeux rouges (prévention ou correction des yeux rouges) 52 • Détection des visages / Auto portrait 58 • Détection des sourires / Détection des regards 59 Photographie de nuit ou dans un endroit sombre • Mode Intelligent > Silhouette, Coucher de soleil, Nuit, Feux d'artifice, Lumière 42 • Options du flash 52 • Sensibilité ISO (pour régler la sensibilité à la lumière) 54 Photographie en pleine action • Mode Intelligent > Action 42 • Continue, Rafale 65 Photographie de texte, d’insectes ou de fleurs • Mode Intelligent > Macro 42 • Macro 55 Réglage de l’exposition (luminosité) • Sensibilité ISO (pour régler la sensibilité à la lumière) 54 • EV (pour régler l’exposition) 61 • ACB (pour corriger le contraste entre un sujet et un arrière-plan lumineux) 62 • Mesure de l’exposition 62 • AEB (pour prendre 3 photos de la même scène avec différentes expositions) 65 Prise de photos de paysages • Mode Intelligent > Paysage 42 • Mode Magic > Panorama Live 44 Application d’effets aux photos • Mode Magic > Filtre photos 45 • Réglage des images (pour ajuster les options Netteté, Contraste ou Saturation) 66 Appliquer des effets aux vidéos • Mode Magic > Filtre vidéos 46 Réduction des tremblements de l’appareil photo • Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) 34 Transfert et partage de fichiers • Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone 95 • Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel 98 • Utilisation des services de partage de photos ou de vidéos 101 • Publication de photos vers un stockage en ligne ou des appareils inscrits 103 • Utilisation de la fonction NFC (Partage par contact) 93 • Affichage de fichiers sous forme de vignettes 71 • Affichage des fichiers par catégorie 72 • Suppression de tous les fichiers de la mémoire 74 • Visionnage de fichiers sous forme de diaporama 76 • Visionnage de fichiers sur un téléviseur 83 • Branchement de l’appareil photo sur un ordinateur 84 • Réglage du son et du volume 107 • Réglage de la luminosité de l’écran 108 • Changement de la langue d’affichage 109 • Réglage de la date et de l’heure 109 • Avant de contacter le service après-vente 123 9 Table des matières Prise de photos .......................................................................................................... 31 Zoom ........................................................................................................................ 32 Réduction des mouvements de l’appareil photo (fonction OIS) .................... 34 Conseils pour obtenir des photos plus nettes ............................................... 35 Fonctions avancées ..................................................................................................... 37 Modes de base ........................................................................................................... 38 Mode Scènes automatiques ................................................................................. 38 Mode Programme .................................................................................................. 39 Mode Vidéo intelligente ........................................................................................ 40 Mode Vidéo ............................................................................................................. 41 Mode Intelligent ..................................................................................................... 42 Utiliser l'album ........................................................................................................ 43 Utiliser le menu Paramètres .................................................................................. 43 Modes Magic .............................................................................................................. 44 Mode Panorama Live ............................................................................................. 44 Mode Filtre Photo .................................................................................................. 45 Mode Filtre vidéos ................................................................................................. 46 Retouche de photo ................................................................................................ 47 Fonctions de base ........................................................................................................ 13 Contenu du coffret ................................................................................................... 14 Présentation de l’appareil photo ........................................................................ 15 Utilisation du bouton DIRECT LINK ..................................................................... 17 Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire ............................................. 18 Chargement de la batterie et mise en route de l’appareil ......................... 19 Chargement de la batterie .................................................................................... 19 Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo ................................................................ 19 Configuration initiale .............................................................................................. 20 Description des icônes ........................................................................................... 22 Écran d’accueil ........................................................................................................... 23 Accès à l’écran d’accueil ........................................................................................ 23 Icônes du menu ...................................................................................................... 24 Sélection d’options ou de menus ....................................................................... 27 Réglage de l’affichage et du son ......................................................................... 29 Réglages du type d’affichage ............................................................................... 29 Réglage du son ....................................................................................................... 30 10 Table des matières Options de prise de vue ............................................................................................. 48 Sélection de la résolution et de la qualité ....................................................... 49 Sélection d’une résolution .................................................................................... 49 Sélection d’une qualité photo .............................................................................. 50 Utilisation du retardateur...................................................................................... 51 Prise de photo dans un endroit sombre .......................................................... 52 Correction des yeux rouges .................................................................................. 52 Configuration d'une option du flash ................................................................... 52 Réglage de la sensibilité ISO ................................................................................. 54 Mise au point de l’appareil photo ...................................................................... 55 Fonction Macro ....................................................................................................... 55 Mise au point automatique .................................................................................. 55 Réglage de la zone de mise au point .................................................................. 56 Fonction de Détection des visages .................................................................... 58 Détection des visages ............................................................................................ 58 Réalisation d’un auto portrait .............................................................................. 58 Détection des sourires ........................................................................................... 59 Détection des regards ........................................................................................... 59 Conseils pour la détection des visages ............................................................... 60 Réglage de la luminosité et des couleurs ........................................................ 61 Réglage manuel de l’exposition (EV) ................................................................... 61 Compensation du contre-jour (ACB) ................................................................... 62 Modification de la mesure de l’exposition ......................................................... 62 Sélection d’un réglage de la balance des blancs .............................................. 63 Utilisation des modes Rafale ................................................................................ 65 Réglage des images ................................................................................................. 66 Réduction du bruit du zoom ................................................................................ 67 Options de prise de vue disponibles en fonction du mode de prise de vue ................................................................................................................................. 68 11 Table des matières Lecture/Retouche ......................................................................................................... 69 Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture .................................. 70 Activation du mode Lecture ................................................................................. 70 Affichage des photos ............................................................................................. 74 Lecture d’une vidéo ............................................................................................... 77 Retouche de photo .................................................................................................. 78 Redimensionnement des photos ........................................................................ 78 Rotation d’une photo ............................................................................................ 78 Effets de filtre intelligent ....................................................................................... 79 Réglages de la luminosité, du contraste, de la saturation ou des sujets en contre-jour .............................................................................................................. 80 Réglage des portraits ............................................................................................. 80 Montage vidéo .......................................................................................................... 82 Recadrage d’une vidéo .......................................................................................... 82 Extraction d’une image d’une vidéo ................................................................... 82 Affichage des fichiers sur un téléviseur ........................................................... 83 Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur ................................................................. 84 Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Windows .............................................. 84 Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur Mac ........................................................... 85 Configuration système ........................................................................................... 87 Réseau sans fil ................................................................................................................ 88 Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau ........................................................................................................................... 89 Connexion automatique à un réseau local sans fil ........................................... 89 Utilisation du navigateur de connexion ............................................................. 90 Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau ............................................................... 91 Saisie du texte ......................................................................................................... 92 Utilisation de la fonction NFC (Partage par contact) ................................... 93 Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Prise de vue ........................................ 93 Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Lecture (Partage instantané) ........... 93 Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Wi-Fi ..................................................... 93 Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone ................. 94 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone .......................................... 95 Utilisation d’un smartphone comme télécommande pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur .......................................................................... 96 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel ..................................................... 98 Modification des paramètres de courriel ........................................................... 98 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel ...................................................... 100 Utilisation des services de partage de photos ou de vidéos .................. 101 Accès à un service de partage ............................................................................ 101 Publication de photos ou de vidéos ................................................................. 101 Utilisation de Samsung Link pour l’envoi de fichiers ................................ 103 Affichage de photos ou de vidéos sur des appareils compatibles Samsung Link ........................................................................................................ 103 12 Table des matières Paramètres ..................................................................................................................... 105 Menu Paramètres ................................................................................................... 106 Accès au menu des paramètres ......................................................................... 106 Son .......................................................................................................................... 107 Affichage ................................................................................................................ 107 Connectivité .......................................................................................................... 108 Général ................................................................................................................... 109 Annexes .......................................................................................................................... 111 Messages d’erreur .................................................................................................. 112 Entretien de l’appareil photo ............................................................................. 113 Nettoyage de l’appareil photo ........................................................................... 113 Usage et rangement de l’appareil photo ......................................................... 114 Concernant les cartes mémoire ......................................................................... 115 Concernant la batterie ......................................................................................... 118 Mise à niveau du micrologiciel ........................................................................... 122 Avant de contacter le service après-vente .................................................... 123 Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo ............................................................... 126 Glossaire .................................................................................................................... 130 Index ........................................................................................................................... 135 Contenu du coffret ……………………………… 14 Présentation de l’appareil photo ……………… 15 Utilisation du bouton DIRECT LINK …………… 17 Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire … 18 Chargement de la batterie et mise en route de l’appareil ………………………………………… 19 Chargement de la batterie …………………… 19 Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo ………… 19 Configuration initiale …………………………… 20 Description des icônes ………………………… 22 Écran d’accueil …………………………………… 23 Accès à l’écran d’accueil ………………………… 23 Icônes du menu ………………………………… 24 Sélection d’options ou de menus ……………… 27 Réglage de l’affichage et du son ……………… 29 Réglages du type d’affichage ………………… 29 Réglage du son ………………………………… 30 Prise de photos ………………………………… 31 Zoom …………………………………………… 32 Réduction des mouvements de l’appareil photo (fonction OIS) …………………………………… 34 Conseils pour obtenir des photos plus nettes … 35 Fonctions de base Cette section décrit le contenu du coffret du produit, la présentation de l’appareil photo, la signification des icônes et les fonctions de base de la prise de vue. Fonctions de base 14 Contenu du coffret Votre coffret comprend les éléments suivants : Appareil photo Adaptateur secteur/Câble USB Batterie rechargeable Dragonne Guide de prise en main rapide Accessoires en option Etui de l’appareil photo Câble audio / vidéo Chargeur de batterie Carte mémoire/ Adaptateur de carte mémoire • Il se peut que les illustrations diffèrent du produit fourni. • Selon modèle, les éléments inclus dans la boîte peuvent être différents. • Vous pouvez acheter des accessoires en option auprès d’un revendeur ou d’un centre de service Samsung. Samsung décline toute responsabilité en cas de problème consécutif à l’utilisation d’accessoires non autorisés. Fonctions de base 15 Présentation de l’appareil photo Avant de commencer, prenez connaissance des éléments de l’appareil photo et de leurs fonctions. Flash Voyant AF / Voyant du retardateur Objectif Haut-parleur Déclencheur Microphone Touche Marche / Arrêt Antenne interne* * Évitez tout contact avec l’antenne interne si vous utilisez le réseau sans fil. Douille pour trépied Port USB et port audio / vidéo Compatible avec un câble USB ou un câble audio / vidéo Trappe batterie Emplacement pour carte mémoire et batterie Fixation de la dragonne Présentation de l’appareil photo Fonctions de base 16 Bouton Description Accéder à l’écran d’accueil. (p. 23) Accéder aux options ou aux menus. Activer le mode Lecture. Supprimer des fichiers en mode Lecture. Bouton Description Fonctions de base Autres fonctions Changer l’option d’affichage. Déplacement vers le haut Changer l’option macro. Déplacement vers le bas Changer l’option du flash. Déplacement vers la gauche Changer l’option du retardateur. Déplacement vers la droite Confirmer l’option ou le menu en surbrillance. Touches (Voir tableau ci-dessous) Voyant d’état • Clignotant : lorsque l'appareil photo sauvegarde une photo ou une vidéo, lorsqu'un ordinateur accède aux fichiers de l'appareil photo, quand l'image est floue ou lorsque l'appareil photo se connecte à un réseau sans fil ou envoie une photo • Fixe : lorsque l’appareil photo est relié à un ordinateur, lors du rechargement de la batterie ou quand l’image est au point Affichage Touche Zoom • En mode Prise de vue : zoom avant ou arrière • En mode Lecture : agrandissez une partie d’une photo, visualisez des photos sous forme de miniatures ou réglez le volume Touche DIRECT LINK Lancer une fonction Wi-Fi prédéfinie. (p. 17) Balise NFC Exécuter une fonction NFC en lisant une balise sur l’appareil compatible NFC. (p. 93) Présentation de l’appareil photo Fonctions de base 17 Utilisation du bouton DIRECT LINK Vous pouvez facilement activer la fonction Wi-Fi avec l’option [ ]. Appuyez sur [ ] pour activer la fonction Wi-Fi indiquée. Appuyez de nouveau sur [ ] pour revenir au mode précédent. Configuration d’une option de bouton DIRECT LINK Vous pouvez sélectionner une fonction Wi-Fi à lancer lorsque vous appuyez sur [ ]. 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Appuyez sur Général → DIRECT LINK (bouton Wi-Fi). 4 Sélectionnez une fonction Wi-Fi. (p. 110) Fonctions de base 18 Insertion de la batterie et de la carte mémoire Cette section décrit comment insérer la batterie et une carte mémoire en option dans l’appareil photo. Retrait de la batterie et de la carte mémoire Batterie rechargeable Loquet de la batterie Faites glisser le loquet vers la droite pour libérer la batterie. Carte mémoire Appuyez légèrement sur la carte pour qu’elle se libère de son logement, puis retirez-la. Insérez la carte mémoire, contacts dorés orientés vers le haut. Insérez la batterie en orientant le logo Samsung vers le haut. Fonctions de base 19 Chargement de la batterie et mise en route de l’appareil Mise sous tension de l’appareil photo Appuyez sur [ ] pour allumer ou éteindre l’appareil photo. • Lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo pour la première fois, l’écran de configuration initiale s’affiche. (p. 20) Activation du mode Lecture de l’appareil photo Appuyez sur [ ]. L’appareil photo s’allume et accède immédiatement au mode Lecture. Si vous appuyez sur la touche [ ] et la maintenez enfoncée pour mettre l'appareil photo sous tension, celui-ci n'émettra aucun son. Chargement de la batterie Vous devez charger la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil photo pour la première fois. Branchez l’extrémité la plus fine du câble USB sur l’appareil photo, puis l’autre extrémité du câble sur un adaptateur secteur. Voyant d’état • Voyant rouge allumé : chargement en cours • Voyant rouge éteint : chargement terminé Utilisez l’adaptateur secteur et le câble USB fournis avec l’appareil photo. Si vous faites appel à un autre adaptateur secteur (tel qu’un SAC-48), la batterie de l’appareil photo risque de ne pas se charger ou fonctionner correctement. Fonctions de base 20 Configuration initiale Lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo pour la première fois, l’écran de configuration initiale s’affiche. Suivez les étapes répertoriées ci-après pour configurer les paramètres de base de l’appareil photo. La langue est réglée selon le pays où l’appareil photo est vendu. Vous pouvez modifier la langue à votre convenance. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] pour sélectionner Configuration date/heure, puis sur [ ] ou sur [ ]. Annuler Définir Configuration date/heure Année Mois Jour Heure Min Heure d’été • L’affichage peut différer en fonction de la langue sélectionnée. 4 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour sélectionner un élément. 5 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour régler la date, l’heure et l’heure d’été, puis appuyez sur [ ]. 1 Appuyez sur [ ] pour sélectionner Fuseau horaire, puis sur [ ] ou sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour sélectionner un fuseau horaire, puis appuyez sur [ ]. Domicile Annuler Définir Londres Configuration initiale Fonctions de base 21 6 Appuyez sur [ ] pour sélectionner Type date, puis sur [ ] ou sur [ ]. 7 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour sélectionner un format de date, puis appuyez sur [ ]. 8 Appuyez sur [ ] pour sélectionner Type d'heure, puis sur [ ] ou sur [ ]. 9 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour sélectionner un type d’heure, puis appuyez sur [ ]. 10 Appuyez sur [ ] pour terminer la configuration initiale. Fonctions de base 22 Description des icônes Les icônes affichées sur l’écran varient en fonction du mode sélectionné ou des options choisies. Si vous changez une option de prise de vue, l’icône correspondante clignotera brièvement en jaune. 3 Informations de prise de vue Icône Description Date Heure Nombre de photos disponibles Carte mémoire insérée • : chargement terminé • : chargement partiel • : vide (recharger) • : chargement en cours (connecté au chargeur) Valeur d’ouverture Vitesse d’obturation Durée d’enregistrement restante Cadre de mise au point automatique Tremblements de l’appareil photo Indicateur de zoom Résolution des photos lorsque la fonction lntelli Zoom est activée Niveau de zoom 2 Options de prise de vues (droite) Icône Description Intelli Zoom activé Mise au point automatique continue activée Résolution photo Résolution vidéo Mesure de l'exposition Fréquence d’images (par seconde) Flash Zoom silencieux activé Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS, Optical Image Stabilization) Option de mise au point Réglage de l’image (netteté, contraste et saturation) Retardateur 1 Options de prise de vues (gauche) Icône Description Mode Prise de vue Valeur d’exposition Sensibilité ISO Balance des blancs Détection des visages Option de prise de vue en rafale AutoShare activé 1 2 3 Fonctions de base 23 Écran d’accueil Vous pouvez sélectionner un mode de prise de vue ou accéder au menu des paramètres en appuyant sur les icônes de l’écran d’accueil. N° Description 1 Ecran d’accueil actif • Faites tourner le [Zoom] vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour passer à un autre écran d’accueil. • Appuyez sur [ ] jusqu’à atteindre le nom de l’écran d’accueil voulu, puis appuyez sur [ / ] pour passer à un autre écran d’accueil. • Appuyez plusieurs fois sur [ / ] pour passer à un autre écran d’accueil. 2 Icônes du menu • Appuyez sur [ / / / ] jusqu’à atteindre le mode voulu, puis appuyez sur [ ] pour accéder au mode. Accès à l’écran d’accueil En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [ ]. Appuyez à nouveau sur [ ] pour revenir au mode précédent. Scènes Automatique Programme Film Magique Basique Wi-Fi Intelligent Album Paramètres Vidéo intelligente 2 1 Retour Déplacement de la page Écran d’accueil Fonctions de base 24 Icône Description MobileLink : envoyer des photos ou des vidéos vers un smartphone. (p. 95) Remote Viewfinder : utiliser un smartphone comme déclencheur à distance et y visionner l’image prise sur l’appareil photo. (p. 96) Courriel : envoyer par courriel des photos ou des vidéos stockées sur l’appareil photo. (p. 98) Réseaux sociaux et Cloud : envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à des services de partage de fichiers. (p. 101) Samsung Link : affichez les fichiers sur un appareil Samsung Link connecté au même point d’accès. (p. 103) Icônes du menu Icône Description Scènes Automatique : prendre une photo dans un mode Scène sélectionné automatiquement par l’appareil photo. (p. 38) Programme : prendre une photo avec les réglages adaptés manuellement. (p. 39) Vidéo intelligente : enregistrez une vidéo dans un mode de scène sélectionné automatiquement par l’appareil photo. (p. 40) Film : enregistrer une vidéo. (p. 41) Intelligent : prendre une photo avec des options prédéfinies pour une scène spécifique. (p. 42) Album : afficher des fichiers sous forme de miniatures. (p. 71) Paramètres : régler les paramètres selon vos préférences. (p. 105) Écran d’accueil Fonctions de base 25 Icône Description Panorama Live : prenez une série de photos puis combinez-les pour créer une image panoramique. (p. 44) Filtre photos : prendre une photo avec différents effets de filtre. (p. 45) Filtre vidéos : enregistrer une vidéo avec différents effets de filtre. (p. 46) Éditeur photos : retoucher des photos en leur appliquant différents effets. (p. 78) Écran d’accueil Fonctions de base 26 Configurer le fond d’écran Choisissez l’image souhaitée pour le fond d’écran de l’écran d’accueil. 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Sélectionnez Affichage → Fonds d'écran. 4 Sélectionnez une option. Option Description Galerie de fonds d'écran Sélectionnez le fond d’écran souhaité dans la galerie par défaut. Album Indiquez une photo prise pour servir de fonds d’écran. 5 Faites défiler les options jusqu’au fond d’écran voulu, puis appuyez sur [ ]. • Si vous sélectionnez une photo que vous avez prise, il vous est possible d’indiquer une zone donnée pour servir de fonds d’écran. Faites tourner le [Zoom] vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour réduire ou agrandir cette zone. Appuyez sur [ / / / ] pour déplacer la zone. 6 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer. • Si vous sélectionnez une photo que vous avez prise, appuyez sur [ ], puis sélectionnez Oui. Vous pouvez également définir la photo active à l’écran en tant que fond d’écran en appuyant sur [ ], puis en sélectionnant Configurer le fond d'écran en mode Lecture. Fonctions de base 27 Sélection d’options ou de menus Pour sélectionner une option ou un menu, appuyez sur [ ], puis sur [ / / / ] ou [ ]. Retour au menu précédent Appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir au menu précédent. Pour revenir en mode Prise de vue, enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course. 1 En mode Prise de vue ou Lecture, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Faites défiler les options ou les menus pour effectuer votre choix. • Pour vous déplacer vers le haut ou vers le bas, appuyez sur [ ] ou sur [ ]. • Pour vous déplacer à gauche ou à droite, appuyez sur [ ] ou sur [ ]. 3 Pour confirmer le menu ou l’option en surbrillance, appuyez sur [ ] . Sélection d’options ou de menus Fonctions de base 28 Ex : sélection d’une option de balance des blancs en mode Programme : 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Appuyez sur [ ]. Quitter Sélectionner AutoShare EV Balance des blancs ISO Flash Mise au point 4 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour sélectionner Balance des blancs, puis sur [ ] ou sur [ ]. Quitter Sélectionner AutoShare EV Balance des blancs ISO Flash Mise au point 5 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour sélectionner une option de Balance des blancs. Retour Définir Balance des blancs : Lumière du jour 6 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer vos paramètres. Fonctions de base 29 Réglages du type d’affichage Il vous est possible de sélectionner un type d’affichage pour le mode Prise de vue ou Lecture. Chaque type reprend des informations de prise de vue ou de lecture différentes. Voir tableau ci-dessous. Appuyez à plusieurs reprises sur [ ] pour changer de type d’affichage. Mode Type d’affichage Prise de vue • Masquez toutes les informations sur les options de prise de vue. • Affichez toutes les informations sur les options de prise de vue. Lecture • Masquer les informations sur le fichier actif. • Masquez les informations sur le fichier actif hormis les informations de base. • Affichez les informations sur le fichier actif. Réglage de l’affichage des options Vous pouvez masquer ou afficher l’affichage des options apparaissant dans certains modes. Appuyez sur [ ] à plusieurs reprises. • Masquez les options. • Affichez les options. Affichage des options Panneau fermé Beauté ▲ Exemple en Mode intelligent Réglage de l’affichage et du son Cette section décrit comment modifier les informations d’affichage de base et les réglages du son. Réglage de l’affichage et du son Fonctions de base 30 Réglage du son Activez ou désactivez le son que l’appareil photo émet lors de l’exécution de fonctions. 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Appuyez sur Sons → Bip sonore. 4 Sélectionnez une option. Option Description Désactivé L’appareil photo n’émet aucun son. Activé L’appareil photo émet les sons. Fonctions de base 31 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Cadrez le sujet. 4 Enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point. • Un cadre vert indique que le sujet est mis au point. • Un cadre rouge équivaut à un sujet flou. 5 Pour prendre la photo, appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. 6 Appuyez sur [ ] pour visionner la photo prise. • Pour supprimer la photo, appuyez sur [ ], puis sélectionnez Oui. 7 Appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir au mode Prise de vue en cours. Pour obtenir des conseils pour réaliser des photos plus nettes, reportez-vous à la page 35. Prise de photos Cette section présente les actions de base pour prendre des photos en mode Scènes automatiques en toute simplicité. Prise de photos Fonctions de base 32 Zoom La fonction de zoom vous permet de prendre des photos en gros plan. Zoom arrière Zoom avant Niveau de zoom Lorsque vous faites tourner la touche Zoom, il est possible que le taux affiché à l'écran change de façon incohérente. Zoom numérique Le mode Prise de vue accepte par défaut le zoom numérique. Si vous zoomez sur un sujet en mode Prise de vue et que le voyant se trouve dans la plage numérique, l’appareil photo utilise alors le zoom numérique. L’utilisation conjointe du zoom optique de 12X et du zoom numérique de 2X permet un agrandissement jusqu’à 24 fois. Indicateur de zoom Plage optique Plage numérique • Selon les options de prise de vue sélectionnées, il est possible que le zoom numérique ne soit pas disponible. • Si vous prenez une photo à l’aide du zoom numérique, la qualité de la photo risque de s’avérer inférieure à une qualité normale. Prise de photos Fonctions de base 33 Intelli Zoom Si l’indicateur de zoom se trouve dans la plage Intelli, l’appareil photo utilise le zoom Intelli. Dans ce cas, la résolution des photos varie selon le niveau de zoom. L’utilisation conjointe du zoom optique et de l’Intelli Zoom permet un agrandissement jusqu’à 24 fois. Indicateur de zoom Plage optique Plage Intelli Résolution des photos lorsque la fonction lntelli Zoom est activée • Selon les options de prise de vue sélectionnées, il est possible qu'Intelli Zoom ne soit pas disponible. • Cette fonction permet de prendre une photo avec une dégradation moindre de la qualité qu’avec le zoom numérique. Cependant, la qualité des photos peut être inférieure à celle des photos prises avec le zoom optique. • Il est disponible uniquement lorsque vous utilisez une résolution de proportions 4:3. Si vous optez pour d’autres proportions alors que la fonction Intelli Zoom est activée, cette dernière se désactive automatiquement. • La fonction Intelli Zoom est toujours activée en mode Scènes automatiques. Réglage de l’Intelli Zoom 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur Intelli Zoom. 3 Sélectionnez une option. Icône Description Désactivé : l’Intelli Zoom est désactivé. Activé : l’Intelli Zoom est activé. Prise de photos Fonctions de base 34 Réduction des mouvements de l’appareil photo (fonction OIS) Réduisez à l’aide d’une fonction optique les effets du tremblement en mode Prise de vue. Avant correction Après correction 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur OIS. 3 Sélectionnez une option. Icône Description Désactivé : la fonction OIS est désactivée. Activé : la fonction OIS est activée. • L’option OIS risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si : - vous suivez un sujet en mouvement avec l’appareil photo ; - vous utilisez le zoom numérique ; - les mouvements de l’appareil photo sont trop importants ; - la vitesse d’obturation est faible (par exemple, lorsque vous photographiez de nuit) ; - le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible ; - vous prenez une photo en gros plan. • Si la fonction OIS est utilisée avec un trépied, les photos peuvent être floues en raison des vibrations du capteur OIS. Désactivez la fonction OIS lorsque vous utilisez un trépied. • Si l’appareil photo est soumis à un choc, l’affichage s’en trouve flou. Dans ce cas, éteignez l’appareil photo et rallumez-le. Fonctions de base 35 Tenue en main correcte de l’appareil photo Vérifiez qu’aucun objet n’obstrue l’objectif, le flash ou le microphone. Enfoncez le déclencheur à mi-course Enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour régler la mise au point. L’appareil photo règle automatiquement la mise au point et l’exposition. L’appareil photo définit automatiquement l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation. Cadre de mise au point • Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo lorsque le cadre de mise au point devient vert. • Si le cadre apparaît en rouge, recadrez, puis enfoncez à nouveau le [Déclencheur] à mi-course. Réduction des tremblements de l’appareil photo Configurez les options OIS de stabilisation optique de l’image pour réduire les effets dus aux mouvements de l’appareil photo. (p. 34) Si s’affiche Tremblements de l’appareil photo Si vous effectuez des prises de vues dans un endroit sombre, évitez de régler l’option du flash sur Synchronisation lente ou sur Désactivé. L’ouverture est conservée pendant une durée plus longue, et il peut s’avérer plus difficile de stabiliser l’appareil photo suffisamment longtemps pour prendre une photo nette. • Utilisez un trépied ou réglez le flash sur Contre jour. (p. 52) • Réglez les options de sensibilité ISO. (p. 54) Conseils pour obtenir des photos plus nettes Fonctions de base 36 Vérification que la mise au point sur le sujet est correcte Il est difficile d’obtenir une bonne mise au point si : - il existe peu de contraste entre le sujet et l’arrière-plan (par exemple, si votre sujet porte des vêtements de la même couleur que l’arrière-plan) ; - la source de lumière derrière le sujet est trop intense ; - le sujet est clair ou présente des reflets ; - le sujet inclut des motifs horizontaux, tels que des stores ; - le sujet n’est pas centré sur l’image. • Lorsque vous prenez des photos dans des conditions d’éclairage insuffisant Activez le flash. (p. 52) • Lorsque les sujets se déplacent rapidement Utilisez la fonction Continue ou Rafale. Usage du verrouillage de mise au point (p. 65) Enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point. Une fois le sujet mis au point, vous pouvez le recadrer pour modifier la composition. Lorsque vous êtes prêt, appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. Modes de base …………………………………… 38 Mode Scènes automatiques …………………… 38 Mode Programme ……………………………… 39 Mode Vidéo intelligente ……………………… 40 Mode Vidéo …………………………………… 41 Mode Intelligent ……………………………… 42 Utiliser l'album ………………………………… 43 Utiliser le menu Paramètres …………………… 43 Modes Magic …………………………………… 44 Mode Panorama Live …………………………… 44 Mode Filtre Photo ……………………………… 45 Mode Filtre vidéos ……………………………… 46 Retouche de photo …………………………… 47 Fonctions avancées Découvrez comment prendre une photo et enregistrer de la vidéo en sélectionnant un mode. Fonctions avancées 38 Mode Scènes automatiques En mode Scènes automatiques, votre appareil photo choisit automatiquement les réglages appropriés au type de scène détecté. Ce mode est particulièrement utile si vous ignorez comment régler l’appareil photo pour les différentes scènes. 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Cadrez le sujet. • L’appareil photo sélectionne automatiquement une scène. L’icône de la scène appropriée s’affiche en haut à gauche de l’écran. Les icônes sont décrites ci-dessous. Icône Description Paysages Vues comportant des arrière-plans lumineux Paysages de nuit Portraits de nuit Paysages en contre jour Portraits en contre jour Portraits Gros plans d’objets Gros plans de texte Couchers de soleil Intérieur sombre Éclairage partiel Gros plans avec un éclairage de spots Portraits avec un éclairage de spots Ciel dégagé Zones boisées Gros plans de sujets colorés Modes de base Prenez des photos ou enregistrez des séquences vidéo sous les modes de base. Vous pouvez également utiliser le mode Intelligent. Modes de base Fonctions avancées 39 Icône Description L’appareil photo est stabilisé ou installé sur un trépied (pour une prise de vue dans un endroit sombre)* Sujets très mobiles* * Cette icône s’affiche en regard de celle de la scène. 4 Enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point. 5 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. • Si l’appareil photo ne reconnaît pas de mode scénique, il utilise les paramètres par défaut du mode Scènes automatiques. • Même s’il détecte un visage, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne sélectionne pas le mode Portrait en fonction de la position du sujet ou de l’éclairage. • Il est possible que l’appareil photo ne sélectionne pas le bon mode de plan en fonction, par exemple, des conditions de prise de vue, des tremblements de l’appareil photo, de l’éclairage et de la distance du sujet. • Même si vous utilisez un trépied, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne détecte pas le mode si le sujet est en mouvement. • La batterie de l’appareil photo se décharge plus rapidement, car l’appareil modifie souvent les paramètres afin de capturer les scènes adéquates. Mode Programme Le mode Programme permet de régler diverses options, à l’exception de la vitesse d’obturation et de l’ouverture que l’appareil photo règle automatiquement. 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Réglez les options voulues. • Reportez-vous à la liste des options de la section « Options de prise de vue ». (p. 48) 4 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point. 5 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. Modes de base Fonctions avancées 40 Mode Vidéo intelligente En mode Vidéo auto, votre appareil photo choisit automatiquement les réglages appropriés au type de scène détecté. 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Cadrez le sujet. • L’appareil photo sélectionne automatiquement une scène. L’icône de la scène appropriée s’affiche en haut à gauche de l’écran. Icône Description Paysages Couchers de soleil Ciel dégagé Zones boisées 4 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour lancer l’enregistrement. 5 Appuyez à nouveau sur le [Déclencheur] pour arrêter l’enregistrement. • Si l’appareil photo ne reconnaît pas un mode scène, il utilise les paramètres par défaut du mode Vidéo Auto. • Il est possible que l’appareil photo ne sélectionne pas le bon mode de plan en fonction, par exemple, des conditions de prise de vue, des tremblements de l’appareil photo, de l’éclairage et de la distance du sujet. Modes de base Fonctions avancées 41 Mode Vidéo Le mode Vidéo vous permet de personnaliser les réglages afin d’enregistrer des vidéos haute définition (1280x720) d’une durée maximale de 20 minutes. Les vidéos sont enregistrées sous forme de fichiers MP4 (H.264). • Le H.264 (MPEG-4 part10/AVC) constitue un format vidéo à compression élevée mis au point par les organismes internationaux de normalisation ISO-IEC et ITU-T. • Si vous utilisez des cartes mémoire dont la vitesse d’écriture est faible, l’appareil photo risque de ne pas enregistrer les vidéos correctement. Les enregistrements vidéo risquent d’être endommagés ou la lecture de ne pas être correcte. • Les cartes mémoire dont la vitesse d’écriture est faible ne sont pas compatibles avec les vidéos à résolution élevée. Pour enregistrer des vidéos en haute résolution, utilisez des cartes mémoire dont le débit d’écriture est supérieur. • Si vous avez activé la fonction Stabilisation d’image et procédé à l’enregistrement d’une vidéo, il se peut que l’appareil photo enregistre le son de fonctionnement de la fonction. • En utilisant la fonction de zoom lors de l’enregistrement vidéo, il se peut que l’appareil photo enregistre les sons du mécanisme du zoom. Dans ce cas, utilisez la fonction Zoom silencieux. (p. 67) • (AF continu): Utilisez cette fonction pour réaliser des photos en changeant le cadrage tout en faisant automatiquement la mise au point sur la zone centrale. 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Définissez les options de votre choix. • Reportez-vous à la liste des options de la section « Options de prise de vue ». (p. 48) 4 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour lancer l’enregistrement. • Pendant l'enregistrement d'une vidéo, appuyez une fois sur [ ] pour annuler la fonction de mise au point automatique continue, puis encore une fois pour activer la fonction. 5 Appuyez à nouveau sur le [Déclencheur] pour arrêter l’enregistrement. Modes de base Fonctions avancées 42 Suspension de l’enregistrement L’appareil photo vous permet d’interrompre temporairement l’enregistrement vidéo. Grâce à cette fonction, vous pouvez enregistrer plusieurs scènes en une même vidéo. OK : Pause : AF continu Désactivé • Appuyez sur [ ] pour mettre l’enregistrement en pause. • Appuyez sur [ ] pour reprendre l’enregistrement. Mode Intelligent Le mode Intelligent permet de prendre une photo avec des options prédéfinies pour une scène spécifique. 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Sélectionnez un plan. Panneau fermé Beauté Modes de base Fonctions avancées 43 Option Description Beauté Réaliser un portrait en appliquant des options permettant de masquer les imperfections du visage. Paysage Prendre des scènes ou des paysages en nature morte. Macro L’appareil prend des sujets petits ou en gros plan. Action Photographier des sujets se déplaçant rapidement. Silhouette Photographier des formes sombres sur fond clair. Coucher de soleil Prendre des scènes au coucher du soleil avec des tons rouges et jaunes naturels. Nuit Réalisez des prises de vue de nuit ou en situation de faible luminosité (l’usage d’un trépied est alors recommandé). Feux d'artifice Photographier des feux d’artifice. Lumière Photographier des traces lumineuses dans des conditions de faible luminosité. 4 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point. 5 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. Utiliser l'album Vous pouvez afficher les fichiers sous forme de vignettes. Reportez-vous à la section « Affichage de fichiers sous forme de vignettes » (p. 71). Utiliser le menu Paramètres Vous pouvez régler ou modifier les paramètres de l'appareil photo. Reportez-vous à la section « Paramètres » (p. 105). Fonctions avancées 44 Modes Magic Prenez une photo ou enregistrez une vidéo en sélectionnant les modes appropriés en fonction de la scène et des effets souhaités. 5 Avec le [Déclencheur] enfoncé, déplacez doucement l’appareil photo dans la direction où il doit capturer le reste du panorama. • Les flèches indiquant la direction des déplacements sont affichées et l’intégralité de la prise de vue apparaît dans la fenêtre d’aperçu. • Une fois le guide aligné sur l’image suivante, l’appareil photo prend alors le cliché automatiquement. Stabilité : un ligne plus plate représente moins de bougé de l’appareil photo. 6 Une fois terminé, relâchez le [Déclencheur]. • Lorsque tous les clichés nécessaires sont pris, l’appareil photo les combine en une photo panoramique. Mode Panorama Live En mode Panorama Live, vous pouvez prendre une scène panoramique large en une seule photo. Prenez une série de photos puis combinez-les pour créer une image panoramique. Exemple de prise de vue 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point. • Pointez l’appareil photo en calant la prise sur la limite gauche, droite, supérieure ou inférieure de la scène à prendre. 4 Maintenez le [Déclencheur] enfoncé pour commencer la prise de vue. Modes Magic Fonctions avancées 45 • Pour obtenir les meilleurs résultats possibles lors de la prise de photos panoramiques, évitez de : - déplacer l’appareil photo trop rapidement ou trop lentement ; - déplacer insuffisamment le point de vue pour prendre l’image suivante ; - déplacer l’appareil photo à vitesse irrégulière entre les prises ; - faire trembler l’appareil photo ; - prendre des clichés dans des endroits sombres ; - capturer des sujets hors-cadre en mouvement proches de la prise de vue ; - prendre ou filmer dans des conditions de luminosité ou de couleurs de lumières changeantes. • Les photos réalisées sont automatiquement sauvegardées et la prise de vue est interrompue dans les circonstances suivantes : - si vous changez de direction en pleine prise de vue ; - si vous bougez l’appareil photo trop rapidement ; - si vous ne bougez pas l’appareil photo. • La sélection du mode Panorama Live entraîne la désactivation des fonctions de zoom numérique et optique. Si vous sélectionnez le mode Panorama et que l’objectif est en position de zoom avant, l’appareil photo effectue automatiquement un zoom arrière pour reprendre la position par défaut. • Certaines options de prise de vue peuvent ne pas être disponibles. • Il se peut que l’appareil photo interrompe la prise de vue à cause de la composition de la prise ou en cas de mouvement du sujet. • L’appareil photo peut ne pas prendre l’intégralité de la dernière scène si vous arrêtez le déplacement de l’appareil photo exactement à l’endroit où vous souhaitez que la scène se termine. Pour prendre une scène dans son intégralité, déplacez l’appareil photo légèrement au-delà du point final. Mode Filtre Photo Appliquez divers effets de filtre à vos photos pour créer des images uniques. Miniature Vignettage Effet ultra grand angle 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . Modes Magic Fonctions avancées 46 3 Sélectionnez un effet. Option Description Miniature Appliquez un effet d’objectif à décentrement pour faire apparaître le sujet en miniature. Vignettage Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un contraste marqué et un effet de dégradé intense, caractéristiques des appareils Lomo. Filtre croisé Ajoutez des lignes irradiant d’objets brillants pour imiter l’effet visuel d’un filtre croisé. Effet ultra grand angle Déformer les objets photographiés de façon rapprochée afin de créer un effet de grand angle. Classique Appliquer un effet noir et blanc. Rétro Appliquer un effet de ton sépia. 4 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point. 5 Pour prendre la photo, appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. • Selon l’option sélectionnée, la résolution peut passer automatiquement à ou à une valeur inférieure. • Pour appliquer des effets de filtre aux photos enregistrées, appuyez sur [ ], puis sur Sélect. image → une image. Mode Filtre vidéos Appliquez divers effets de filtre à vos vidéos pour créer des images uniques. 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Sélectionnez un effet. Option Description Miniature Appliquez un effet d’objectif à décentrement pour faire apparaître le sujet en miniature. Vignettage Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un contraste marqué et un effet de dégradé intense, caractéristiques des appareils Lomo. Effet ultra grand angle Déformer les objets photographiés de façon rapprochée afin de créer un effet de grand angle. Classique Appliquer un effet noir et blanc. Rétro Appliquer un effet de ton sépia. Effet palette 1 Crée un cliché lumineux présentant un fort contraste et des couleurs vives. Effet palette 2 Eclaircit la scène et la rend plus nette. Effet palette 3 Appliquer une légère tonalité brune. Effet palette 4 Créer un effet froid et monotone. Modes Magic Fonctions avancées 47 4 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour lancer l’enregistrement. 5 Appuyez à nouveau sur le [Déclencheur] pour arrêter l’enregistrement. • Si vous sélectionnez Miniature, la vitesse de lecture augmente. • Si vous appuyez sur Miniature, vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer le son vidéo. • Selon l’option sélectionnée, la résolution peut passer automatiquement à ou à une valeur inférieure. Retouche de photo Vous pouvez retoucher une photo de plusieurs façons. Depuis l'écran d'accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu'à , puis sélectionnez . Reportez-vous à la section « Retouche de photo » (p. 78). Sélection de la résolution et de la qualité …… 49 Sélection d’une résolution …………………… 49 Sélection d’une qualité photo ………………… 50 Utilisation du retardateur ……………………… 51 Prise de photo dans un endroit sombre ……… 52 Correction des yeux rouges …………………… 52 Configuration d'une option du flash …………… 52 Réglage de la sensibilité ISO …………………… 54 Mise au point de l’appareil photo ……………… 55 Fonction Macro ………………………………… 55 Mise au point automatique …………………… 55 Réglage de la zone de mise au point ………… 56 Fonction de Détection des visages …………… 58 Détection des visages ………………………… 58 Réalisation d’un auto portrait ………………… 58 Détection des sourires ………………………… 59 Détection des regards ………………………… 59 Conseils pour la détection des visages ………… 60 Réglage de la luminosité et des couleurs …… 61 Réglage manuel de l’exposition (EV) …………… 61 Compensation du contre-jour (ACB) …………… 62 Modification de la mesure de l’exposition …… 62 Sélection d’un réglage de la balance des blancs … 63 Utilisation des modes Rafale …………………… 65 Réglage des images …………………………… 66 Réduction du bruit du zoom …………………… 67 Options de prise de vue disponibles en fonction du mode de prise de vue ……………………… 68 Options de prise de vue Cette section explique comment définir les options en mode Prise de vue. Options de prise de vue 49 Sélection de la résolution et de la qualité Découvrez comment modifier la résolution de l’image et les réglages de la qualité. Sélection de la résolution vidéo 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur Format vidéo. 3 Sélectionnez une option. Icône Description 1280 X 720 : fichiers haute définition reproductibles sur un téléviseur HD. 640 X 480 : fichiers définition standard reproductibles sur un téléviseur analogique. Pour partager : publier sur un service de partage par le biais du réseau sans fil (30 secondes maximum). Sélection d’une résolution Augmenter la résolution permet d’augmenter le nombre de pixels des photos ou des vidéos afin de pouvoir les imprimer sur du papier grand format ou les visionner sur un grand écran. Si vous utilisez une résolution élevée, la taille du fichier augmente également. Sélection de la résolution photo 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur Format photo. 3 Sélectionnez une option. Icône Description 4608 X 3456 : imprimer sur une feuille A1. 4608 X 3072 : imprimer sur une feuille A1 dans le sens paysage (3:2). 4608 X 2592 : imprimer sur une feuille A1 en panorama (16:9) ou lire sur un téléviseur HD. 3648 X 2736 : imprimer sur une feuille A2. 2592 X 1944 : imprimer sur une feuille A4. 1984 X 1488 : imprimer sur une feuille A5. 1920 X 1080 : imprimer sur une feuille A5 en panorama (16:9) ou lire sur un téléviseur HD. 1024 X 768 : envoyer en tant que pièce jointe à un courriel. Sélection de la résolution et de la qualité Options de prise de vue 50 Sélection d’une qualité photo Définissez les paramètres de qualité photo. Augmenter la qualité des images accroît également la taille des fichiers. Les photos prises avec l’appareil sont compressées et enregistrées au format JPEG. 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur Qualité. 3 Sélectionnez une option. Icône Description Maximale : prendre des photos en très haute qualité. Elevée : prendre des photos en haute qualité. Normale : prendre des photos en qualité normale. Options de prise de vue 51 Utilisation du retardateur Cette section décrit comment régler le retardateur afin de retarder la prise de vue. 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. Quitter Définir Désactivé 10 s 2 s Double Retardateur 2 Sélectionnez une option. Icône Description Désactivé : le retardateur est désactivé. 10 s : prendre une photo après un délai de 10 secondes. 2 s : prendre une photo après un délai de 2 secondes. Double : permet de prendre une photo après un délai de 10 secondes, puis une autre après 2 secondes. Les options proposées peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. 3 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour lancer le retardateur. • Le voyant AF/voyant du retardateur clignote. L’appareil prend automatiquement une photo après le délai indiqué. • Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] ou sur [ ] pour annuler le retardateur. • Selon les options de détection des visages choisies, la fonction du retardateur peut ne pas être disponible. • Les options du retardateur ne sont pas disponibles si vous avez activé une option Prise de vue en rafale. • Dans certains modes, vous pouvez également régler l’option retardateur en appuyant sur [ ], puis sur Retardateur. Options de prise de vue 52 Prise de photo dans un endroit sombre Découvrez comment prendre des photos de nuit ou dans des conditions d’éclairage très faible. Configuration d'une option du flash Utilisez le flash pour prendre des photos dans un endroit sombre ou si vous avez besoin de photos plus claires. 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. Quitter Définir Désactivée Automatique Anti yeux rouges Contre jour Synchronisation lente Correction des yeux rouges Flash 2 Sélectionnez une option. Icône Description Désactivée : • Le flash ne se déclenche pas. • Un message d’avertissement de bougé de l’appareil photo s’affiche si vous prenez une photo dans un endroit sombre. Automatique : le flash se déclenche automatiquement lorsque le sujet ou l’arrière-plan est sombre. Correction des yeux rouges Si le flash se déclenche lorsque vous photographiez une personne dans un endroit sombre, il est possible qu’une lueur rouge apparaisse dans ses yeux. Pour éviter ce problème, sélectionnez Anti yeux rouges ou Correction des yeux rouges. Reportez-vous aux options du flash mentionnées au paragraphe suivant, « Configuration d'une option du flash ». Avant correction Après correction Prise de photo dans un endroit sombre Options de prise de vue 53 Icône Description Anti yeux rouges : • Le flash se déclenche deux fois lorsque le sujet ou l’arrière-plan est sombre dans le but de limiter l’effet yeux rouges. • Un intervalle est prévu entre chaque déclenchement du flash. Ne bougez pas tant que le flash ne s’est pas déclenché une seconde fois. Contre jour : • Le flash se déclenche systématiquement. • L’intensité lumineuse se règle automatiquement. Synchronisation lente : • Le flash se déclenche et l’obturateur reste ouvert plus longtemps. • Sélectionnez cette option pour capturer la lumière ambiante afin de révéler plus de détails en arrière-plan. • Il est recommandé d’utiliser un trépied pour éviter que les photos soient floues. • Un message d’avertissement de bougé de l’appareil photo s’affiche si vous prenez une photo dans un endroit sombre. Correction des yeux rouges : • Le flash se déclenche lorsque le sujet ou l’arrière-plan est sombre et que l’appareil photo corrige les yeux rouges par le biais d’un logiciel d’analyse avancée. • Un intervalle est prévu entre chaque déclenchement du flash. Ne bougez pas tant que le flash ne s’est pas déclenché une seconde fois. Les options proposées peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. • Les options du flash ne sont pas disponibles si vous avez activé une option de prise de vue en rafale ou les options Auto portrait, Détection des regards. • Assurez-vous que le sujet se trouve à la distance recommandée du flash. (p. 127) • Des petites traces peuvent apparaître sur la photo si la lumière se reflète ou si de la poussière se trouve en suspension. • Dans certains modes, vous pouvez également régler l’option flash en appuyant sur [ ], puis sur Flash. Prise de photo dans un endroit sombre Options de prise de vue 54 Réglage de la sensibilité ISO La sensibilité ISO est la mesure de la sensibilité d’un film à la lumière, telle que définie par l’Organisation internationale de normalisation (ISO). Plus cette sensibilité ISO est élevée, plus l’appareil photo est sensible à la lumière. Utilisez une sensibilité ISO plus élevée pour prendre de meilleures photos et réduire l’effet de tremblement de l’appareil photo si vous n’utilisez pas le flash. 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur ISO. 3 Sélectionnez une option. • Sélectionnez pour utiliser une sensibilité ISO appropriée, en fonction de la luminosité du sujet et de l’éclairage. Plus la sensibilité ISO est élevée, plus le risque de parasites présents sur les photos augmente. Options de prise de vue 55 Fonction Macro Utilisez la fonction Macro pour photographier en gros plan des sujets tels que des fleurs ou des insectes. (Reportez-vous à la section « Mise au point automatique ».) • Tâchez de ne pas faire bouger l’appareil afin d’éviter que les photos soient floues. • Désactivez le flash si la distance qui vous sépare du sujet est inférieure à 40 cm. Mise au point automatique Pour prendre des photos nettes, sélectionnez l’option de mise au point qui convient en fonction de la distance qui vous sépare du sujet. 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. Quitter Définir Normale (AF) Macro Mise au point Mise au point de l’appareil photo Cette section explique comment régler la mise au point de l’appareil photo en fonction des sujets et des conditions de prise de vue. Mise au point de l’appareil photo Options de prise de vue 56 Réglage de la zone de mise au point Vous pouvez obtenir des photos plus nettes en sélectionnant une zone de mise au point appropriée en fonction de l’emplacement du sujet dans le décor. 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur Zone de mise au point. 3 Sélectionnez une option. Icône Description Mise au point au centre : mettre au point sur le centre (lorsque les sujets sont placés au centre de la scène). Mise au point multiple : mettre au point sur une ou plusieurs zones parmi les 9 zones possibles. Mise au point avec suivi : faire une mise au point avec repérage du sujet. (p. 57) Les options de prise de vue proposées peuvent varier en fonction du mode de prise de vue choisi. 2 Sélectionnez une option. Icône Description Normale (AF) : mise au point sur un sujet se trouvant à plus de 80 cm, et à plus de 250 cm lorsque vous utilisez le zoom. Macro : mise au point manuelle sur un sujet se trouvant entre 5 et 80 cm de l’appareil photo, et entre 130 et 250 cm lorsque vous utilisez le zoom. Macro automatique : • Mise au point sur un sujet se trouvant à plus de 5 cm et à plus de 130 cm lorsque vous utilisez le zoom. • Dans certains modes, cette option est automatiquement définie. Vous ne pouvez pas la régler manuellement. Les options proposées peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. Dans certains modes, vous pouvez également régler l’option de mise au point en appuyant sur [ ], puis sur Mise au point. Mise au point de l’appareil photo Options de prise de vue 57 Utilisation de la mise au point automatique avec repérage La mise au point avec suivi vous permet d’effectuer le repérage et la mise au point automatiquement sur le sujet, même si vous êtes en mouvement. 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Sélectionnez Zone de mise au point → Mise au point avec suivi. 3 Effectuez la mise au point sur le sujet à suivre, puis appuyez sur [ ]. • Un cadre de mise au point apparaît autour du sujet et le suit lorsque vous déplacez l’appareil photo. Mise au point avec suivi • Un cadre blanc signifie que l’appareil photo suit le sujet. • Lorsque vous enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course, le cadre vert signifie que le sujet est mis au point. • Le cadre rouge indique un échec de mise au point de l’appareil photo. 4 Appuyez sur le [Déclencheur] pour prendre la photo. • Si vous ne sélectionnez pas de zone à mettre au point, le cadre apparaît alors au centre de l’écran. • Le suivi d’un sujet peut ne pas fonctionner si : - le sujet est trop petit ; - il se déplace de manière excessive ; - il se trouve à contre-jour ou vous photographiez dans un endroit sombre ; - des couleurs ou des motifs présents sur le sujet et à l’arrière-plan se confondent ; - le sujet inclut des motifs horizontaux, tels que des stores ; - l’appareil photo tremble de manière excessive. • En cas d’échec du suivi, la fonction est réinitialisée. • Si l’appareil photo ne parvient pas à suivre le sujet, vous devez sélectionner de nouveau ce dernier. • En cas d’échec de la mise au point, le cadre de mise au point passe au rouge et la fonction est réinitialisée. • Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction, vous ne pouvez pas régler les options de détection des visages, les options de retardateur, de prise de vue en rafale et d’Intelli Zoom. Options de prise de vue 58 Détection des visages L’appareil photo détecte automatiquement jusqu’à 10 visages dans une scène. 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur Détection des visages → Normale. Le visage le plus proche de l’appareil photo ou du centre de la prise apparaît dans un cadre de mise au point tandis que les autres sont encadrés en gris. L’appareil détecte plus rapidement les visages si vous vous rapprochez des sujets. Réalisation d’un auto portrait Cette option vous permet de vous photographier. L’appareil photo règle la distance de mise au point pour les plans rapprochés, puis émet un court signal sonore une fois l’appareil prêt pour la prise de vue. 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Appuyez sur → Beauté. 3 Appuyez sur [ ]. 4 Appuyez sur Détection des visages → Auto portrait. 5 Réalisez la photo une fois l’objectif face à vous. 6 Lorsque vous entendez un signal sonore court, appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. Lorsque les visages se trouvent au centre, l’appareil photo émet un bref signal sonore. Si vous désactivez le Volume dans les paramètres de son, l’appareil photo n’émet alors aucun signal sonore. (p. 107) Fonction de Détection des visages Les options de Détection des visages permettent à l’appareil photo de détecter automatiquement les visages. Lorsque vous effectuez la mise au point sur un visage, l’appareil photo ajuste automatiquement l’exposition. Utilisez les options Détection des regards ou Détection des sourires pour prendre des photos en laissant l’appareil détecter les yeux fermés ou les visages souriants. Fonction de Détection des visages Options de prise de vue 59 Détection des sourires L'appareil photo déclenche automatiquement l'obturateur lorsqu'il détecte un visage souriant. 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur Détection des visages → Détection des sourires. 3 Préparez la prise de vue. • L’appareil photo déclenche automatiquement l’obturateur lorsqu’il détecte un sourire. L’appareil photo peut détecter plus facilement les sourires lorsque le sujet sourit franchement. Détection des regards Si l’appareil détecte des yeux fermés, il prend automatiquement 2 photos successives. 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur Détection des visages → Détection des regards. Fonction de Détection des visages Options de prise de vue 60 Conseils pour la détection des visages • Si votre appareil photo détecte un visage, il en effectue le repérage automatiquement. • La détection des visages peut se révéler inefficace lorsque : - le sujet est éloigné de l’appareil photo ; - il est trop éclairé ou trop sombre ; - le sujet ne se trouve pas face à l’appareil photo ; - le sujet porte des lunettes de soleil ou un masque ; - l’expression faciale du sujet change d’un extrême à l’autre ; - le sujet se trouve en contre-jour ou la luminosité change. • Une fois les options de détection des visages réglées, la zone de mise au point automatique se définit automatiquement sur Mise au point multiple. • En fonction de l’option Détection des visages sélectionnée, certaines options de prise de vue peuvent ne pas être disponibles. • Selon les options de prise de vue sélectionnées, la détection des visages peut être impossible. Options de prise de vue 61 Réglage de la luminosité et des couleurs Découvrez comment régler la luminosité et les couleurs afin d’obtenir une meilleure qualité d’image. 3 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour régler l’exposition. • La photo s’éclaircit à mesure que la valeur d’exposition augmente. Annuler Définir EV : 0 4 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer vos paramètres. • Une fois la valeur d’exposition modifiée, le réglage s’enregistre automatiquement. Il peut s’avérer nécessaire de la modifier afin d’éviter toute sur ou sous-exposition. • Si vous ne parvenez pas à choisir une valeur d’exposition, sélectionnez l’option AEB (Auto Exposure Bracket). L’appareil photo prend alors 3 photos consécutives, avec différentes valeurs d’exposition : normale, sous-exposée et surexposée. (p. 65) Réglage manuel de l’exposition (EV) En fonction de l’intensité de l’éclairage ambiant, les photos peuvent parfois être trop claires ou trop sombres. Dans ce cas, vous pouvez régler la valeur d’exposition pour obtenir de meilleurs clichés. Plus sombre (-) Neutre (0) Plus clair (+) 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur EV. Réglage de la luminosité et des couleurs Options de prise de vue 62 Compensation du contre-jour (ACB) Si la source de lumière se trouve derrière le sujet ou en cas de contraste important entre le sujet et l’arrière-plan, le sujet risque d’être sombre sur la photo. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez l’option de réglage automatique des contrastes (ACB). ▲ Sans ACB ▲ Avec ACB 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur ACB. 3 Sélectionnez une option. Icône Description Désactivé : le réglage automatique du contraste (ACB) est désactivé. Activé : le réglage automatique du contraste (ACB) est activé. • La fonction ACB est toujours activée en mode Scènes Automatique. • La fonction ACB n’est pas disponible lorsque vous activez les options de prise de vue en rafale. Modification de la mesure de l’exposition Le mode de mesure correspond à la manière dont l’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière. La luminosité et la clarté des photos varient selon le mode de mesure sélectionné. 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur Mesure de l’exposition. 3 Sélectionnez une option. Icône Description Multiple : • L’appareil photo divise le plan en plusieurs zones, puis mesure l’intensité de lumière de chacune d’elles. • Ce mode s’adapte aux photos habituelles. Sélective : • L’appareil photo mesure uniquement l’intensité de la lumière au centre du cadre. • Si le sujet ne se trouve pas au centre de la scène, la photo peut s’avérer trop claire ou trop sombre. • Ce mode s’adapte plus volontiers aux sujets à contre-jour. Centrée : • L’appareil photo mesure la luminosité moyenne sur l’ensemble du cadre en mettant l’accent sur le centre. • Ce mode s’adapte aux photos dont les sujets se trouvent au centre de l’image. Réglage de la luminosité et des couleurs Options de prise de vue 63 Sélection d’un réglage de la balance des blancs Les couleurs des photos dépendent du type et de la qualité de la source d’éclairage. Pour que vos photos soient le reflet de la réalité, choisissez des conditions d’éclairage appropriées pour calibrer la balance des blancs, par exemple Balance des blancs automatique, Lumière du jour, Nuageux ou Tungstène. Balance des blancs automatique Lumière du jour Nuageux Tungstène 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur Balance des blancs. 3 Sélectionnez une option. Icône Description Balance des blancs automatique : régler automatiquement la balance des blancs en fonction des conditions d’éclairage. Lumière du jour : prendre des photos en extérieur et par beau temps. Nuageux : prendre des photos en extérieur par temps nuageux ou dans un endroit ombragé. Fluorescent haut : prendre des photos avec un éclairage fluorescent de type lumière du jour ou un éclairage fluorescent à trois degrés d’intensité. Fluorescent bas : prendre des clichés avec un éclairage fluorescent blanc. Tungstène : prendre des photos en intérieur avec des ampoules à incandescence ou des lampes halogène. Réglage personnalisé : pour utiliser les paramètres de balance des blancs que vous définissez. (p. 64) Temp. couleur : régler la température des couleurs de la source de lumière. (p. 64) Réglage de la luminosité et des couleurs Options de prise de vue 64 Personnalisation de la balance des blancs Vous pouvez personnaliser la balance des blancs en prenant des photos d’une surface blanche, telle qu’une feuille de papier, dans les conditions d’éclairage auxquelles l’objet doit être exposé pour la prise de vue. Ceci permet d’adapter les couleurs de votre photo aux conditions d’éclairage réelles. 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur Balance des blancs → Réglage personnalisé. 3 Orientez l’objectif vers une feuille de papier blanc, puis appuyez sur le [Déclencheur]. Feuille de papier blanc Réglage de la température des couleurs 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Sélectionnez Balance des blancs → Temp. couleur. 3 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour régler la température des couleurs en fonction de la source d’éclairage. • Il est possible d’obtenir une photo plus chaleureuse à l’aide d’une valeur élevée, et une photo moins chaleureuse à l’aide d’une valeur plus basse. Temp. couleur : 3000K Retour Définir 4 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer les paramètres. Options de prise de vue 65 Utilisation des modes Rafale Il peut être difficile de photographier un sujet qui se déplace rapidement ou de capturer des expressions faciales et des gestes naturels. Il peut également s’avérer compliqué de régler correctement l’exposition et de choisir une source adaptée de lumière. Dans de tels cas de figure, sélectionnez l’un des modes de prise de vue en rafale. Icône Description AEB: • Prend 3 photos consécutives sous différentes expositions : normale, sous-exposée et surexposée. • La prise de la photo peut prendre plus de temps. Utilisez un trépied pour obtenir de meilleurs résultats. 4 Cadrez le sujet à photographier, puis enfoncez le [Déclencheur] à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point. 5 Maintenez le [Déclencheur] enfoncé. • Pendant toute la durée de la pression sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil prend des photos en continu. • Les options proposées peuvent varier en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. • Lorsque vous sélectionnez l’option Rafale, la résolution est réglée sur et la sensibilité ISO sur Automatique. • En fonction de l’option Détection des visages sélectionnée, certaines options de prise de vue en rafale peuvent ne pas être disponibles. • Selon la capacité de la carte mémoire et de ses performances, l’enregistrement des photos peut prendre plus de temps. 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur Prise de vue. 3 Sélectionnez une option. Icône Description Unique : prendre une seule photo. (L’option Unique ne correspond pas à une option de prise de vue en rafale.) Continue: • Pendant que vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil prend des photos en continu. • Le nombre maximal de photos dépend de la capacité de votre carte mémoire. Rafale: pendant que vous appuyez sur le [Déclencheur], l’appareil photo prend des photos (5 photos par seconde avec un maximum de 30 photos). Options de prise de vue 66 Réglage des images Vous pouvez modifier la netteté, le contraste ou la saturation de vos photos. 4 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour régler chaque valeur. Netteté Description – Adoucir les contours des photos (adapté pour la retouche de photos sur ordinateur). + Rendre les contours des photos plus nets. (Cette option augmente aussi le risque d’affichage de parasites sur les photos.) Contraste Description – Diminuer l’intensité des couleurs et la luminosité. + Augmenter l’intensité des couleurs et la luminosité. Saturation Description – Réduire la saturation. + Augmenter la saturation. 5 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer les paramètres. Sélectionnez 0 si vous ne souhaitez appliquer aucun effet (adapté à l’impression). 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur Réglage des images. 3 Sélectionnez une option. • Netteté • Contraste • Saturation Réglage des images Retour Définir Netteté Contraste Saturation Options de prise de vue 67 Réduction du bruit du zoom Lorsque vous utilisez le zoom pour enregistrer des vidéos, l’appareil photo peut enregistrer le bruit du zoom. Dans ce cas, utilisez la fonction Zoom silencieux. 1 En mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur Voix. 3 Sélectionnez une option. Icône Description Zoom silencieux : Lorsque vous utilisez le zoom, tout enregistrement sonore est temporairement interrompu. Désactivé : Enregistrer une vidéo sans son. Activé : Enregistrer une vidéo avec son. • Ne bloquez pas le micro lorsque vous utilisez la fonction Zoom silencieux. • Quand le Zoom silencieux est activé, les enregistrements sonores peuvent être altérés. Options de prise de vue 68 Options de prise de vue disponibles en fonction du mode de prise de vue Pour plus de détails sur les options de prise de vue, reportez-vous au chapitre « Options de prise de vue ». (p. 48) Scènes Automatique Programme Vidéo intelligente Film Intelligent Panorama Live Filtre photos Filtre vidéos Résolution O O O O O - O O Qualité - O - - - - O - Retardateur O O O O O - O O Flash O O - - O - O - Sensibilité ISO - O - - - - - - Macro - O - O O - - - Zone de mise au point - O - - O - - - Détection des visages - O - - O - - - EV - O - O - - - - ACB - O - - - - - - Mesure de l’exposition - O - O - - - - Balance des blancs - O - O - - - - Prise de vue - O - - - - - - Réglage de l’image - O - - - - - - Voix - - O O - - - O Zoom numérique - O - - O - - - Intelli Zoom O O - - - - - - OIS - O - O - - - - O : l’option est disponible. Certaines options peuvent être limitées ou ne peuvent pas être modifiées. - : l’option n’est pas disponible. Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture …………………………………………… 70 Activation du mode Lecture …………………… 70 Affichage des photos …………………………… 74 Lecture d’une vidéo …………………………… 77 Retouche de photo ……………………………… 78 Redimensionnement des photos ……………… 78 Rotation d’une photo ………………………… 78 Effets de filtre intelligent ……………………… 79 Réglages de la luminosité, du contraste, de la saturation ou des sujets en contre-jour ……… 80 Réglage des portraits …………………………… 80 Montage vidéo …………………………………… 82 Recadrage d’une vidéo ………………………… 82 Extraction d’une image d’une vidéo …………… 82 Affichage des fichiers sur un téléviseur ……… 83 Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur …………… 84 Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Windows … 84 Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur Mac ……… 85 Configuration système ………………………… 87 Lecture/Retouche Cette section décrit comment visionner des prises d’images ou de vidéos et retoucher des photos. Vous apprendrez également comment connecter votre appareil photo à un ordinateur ou à un téléviseur. Lecture/Retouche 70 Activation du mode Lecture Visionnez des photos ou des vidéos enregistrées dans l’appareil photo. 1 Appuyez sur [ ]. • Le fichier le plus récent que vous avez capturé s’affiche. • Si l’appareil photo est éteint, ce dernier s’allume et affiche le fichier le plus récent. 2 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour parcourir les fichiers. • Maintenez appuyé [ / ] pour un défilement rapide des fichiers. • Il se peut que vous ne soyez pas en mesure de retoucher ou de visionner des photos ou des vidéos prises par un autre appareil photo, si certaines résolutions ou codecs ne sont pas pris en charge. Utilisez un ordinateur ou un autre appareil pour les retoucher ou les visionner. • Les photos ou les vidéos prises en orientation portrait ne pivotent pas automatiquement et s'affichent en orientation paysage sur l'appareil photo et les autres appareils. Informations sur les fichiers photos Informations sur le fichier Mémoire en cours d’utilisation Album/Zoom avant Icône Description Fichier en cours/Total des fichiers Nom du dossier – Nom du fichier Fichier protégé Pour afficher les informations relatives au fichier à l’écran, appuyez sur [ ]. Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture Cette section décrit comment visionner des photos et des vidéos et comment manipuler les fichiers. Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture Lecture/Retouche 71 Informations sur les fichiers vidéo Informations sur le fichier Lecture Album Capture Icône Description Fichier en cours/Total des fichiers Nom du dossier – Nom du fichier Durée de la lecture en cours Durée de la vidéo Fichier protégé Pour afficher les informations relatives au fichier à l’écran, appuyez sur [ ]. Affichage de fichiers sous forme de miniatures Parcourez les fichiers sous forme de miniatures. En mode Lecture, tournez [Zoom] vers la gauche pour afficher les vignettes (12). Tournez à nouveau le [Zoom] vers la gauche pour afficher d’autres miniatures (24 à la fois). Tournez le [Zoom] vers la droite pour revenir au mode d’affichage précédent. Menu • Vous pouvez également consulter les fichiers sous forme de vignettes en parcourant les options jusqu’à dans l’écran d’accueil, puis en sélectionnant . Appuyez sur [ / / / ] pour parcourir les fichiers. Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture Lecture/Retouche 72 Affichage des fichiers par catégorie Affichez les fichiers par catégorie, par exemple, par date ou type de fichier. 1 En mode Lecture, faites tourner le [Zoom] vers la gauche. • Vous pouvez également consulter les fichiers sous forme de vignettes en parcourant les options jusqu’à dans l’écran d’accueil, puis en sélectionnant . 2 Appuyez sur [ ], puis sélectionnez Filtrer → une catégorie. Tout Date Type de fichier Filtrer Retour Définir Icône Description Tout : visionnez les fichiers normalement. Date : afficher les fichiers par date d’enregistrement. Type de fichier : affichage des fichiers par type. 3 Recherchez la liste de votre choix, puis appuyez sur [ ] pour ouvrir la liste. 4 Recherchez le fichier de votre choix, puis appuyez sur [ ] pour visionner le fichier. 5 Tournez le [Zoom] vers la gauche, puis appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir au mode d’affichage précédent. • Si vous changez de catégorie, le temps de réorganisation des fichiers par l’appareil photo peut être plus ou moins long selon le nombre de fichiers concernés. • Si vous supprimez une catégorie classée par Date ou Type de fichier, tous les fichiers de la catégorie sont également supprimés. Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture Lecture/Retouche 73 Protection de fichiers Vous pouvez protéger des fichiers pour éviter toute suppression involontaire. 1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez un fichier à protéger. 2 Appuyez sur [ ], puis sélectionnez Protéger → Activé. 3 Répétez les étapes 1 et 2 afin de protéger d’autres fichiers. Il est impossible de redimensionner, de supprimer ou de faire pivoter un fichier protégé. Suppression de fichiers Sélectionnez les fichiers à supprimer en mode Lecture. Suppression d’un seul fichier Vous pouvez sélectionner un seul fichier pour le supprimer. 1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez un fichier, puis appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Lorsque la fenêtre en incrustation s’affiche, sélectionnez Oui. Il vous est également possible de supprimer des fichiers en mode Lecture en appuyant sur [ ], puis sur Supprimer → Supprimer → Oui. Suppression de plusieurs fichiers Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs fichiers et les supprimer simultanément. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [ ]. • En affichage vignettes, appuyez sur [ ], sélectionnez Supprimer → Sélectionner, puis passez à l'étape 3 ou appuyez sur [ ], sélectionnez Sélectionner, puis passez à l'étape 3. 2 Lorsque la fenêtre en incrustation s’affiche, sélectionnez Suppr. multiple. 3 Faites défiler la liste pour accéder à chacun des fichiers que vous souhaitez supprimer, puis appuyez sur [ ]. • Appuyez à nouveau sur [ ] pour annuler votre sélection. 4 Appuyez sur [ ]. 5 Lorsque la fenêtre en incrustation s’affiche, sélectionnez Oui. Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture Lecture/Retouche 74 Suppression de tous les fichiers Vous pouvez sélectionner tous les fichiers pour les supprimer en une seule fois. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [ ]. • En affichage vignettes, appuyez sur [ ], sélectionnez Supprimer → Supprimer tout, puis passez à l'étape 3 ou appuyez sur [ ], sélectionnez Supprimer tout, puis passez à l'étape 3. 2 Appuyez sur Supprimer → Supprimer tout. 3 Lorsque la fenêtre en incrustation s’affiche, sélectionnez Oui. • Tous les fichiers non protégés sont alors supprimés. Affichage des photos Effectuez un zoom avant sur une partie d’une photo ou affichez les photos sous forme de diaporama. Agrandissement d’une photo En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [Zoom] vers la droite pour agrandir une partie de la photo Tournez la touche [Zoom] vers la gauche pour effectuer un zoom arrière. Zone agrandie Retour Rogner Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture Lecture/Retouche 75 Pour Description Déplacer la zone agrandie Appuyez sur [ / / / ]. Recadrer la photo agrandie Appuyez sur [ ], puis choisissez Oui. (La photo recadrée est alors enregistrée sous forme de nouveau fichier. La photo originale est conservée dans son format d’origine.) Lors du visionnage de photos prises avec un autre appareil photo, le niveau de zoom peut différer. Affichage de photos en panorama Regardez des photos réalisées en mode Panorama Live. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [ / ] pour accéder au panoramique voulu. • L’intégralité du panoramique s’affiche à l’écran. 2 Appuyez sur [ ]. • L’appareil photo fait automatiquement défiler la photo de gauche à droite pour une vue panoramique horizontale ou de haut en bas pour une vue panoramique verticale. L’appareil photo passe ensuite au mode Lecture. • Lors de la lecture d’un panoramique, appuyez sur [ ] pour mettre en pause ou pour reprendre la lecture. • En cas de pause d’un panoramique, appuyez sur [ / / / ] pour déplacer horizontalement ou verticalement l’affichage, en fonction du sens dans lequel vous avez déplacé l’appareil photo lors de la prise de la photo. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir au mode Lecture. L’appareil photo ne fait automatiquement défiler le panoramique que lorsque le bord le plus long de la photo représente au moins le double du bord le plus court. Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture Lecture/Retouche 76 Lecture d’un diaporama Appliquez des effets et du son à un diaporama. La fonction de diaporama ne fonctionne pas avec les vidéos. 1 En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur Options diaporama. 3 Choisissez une option d’effet de diaporama. • Passez à l’étape 4 pour démarrer le diaporama sans appliquer d’effet. * Paramètre par défaut Option Description Mode de lecture Activer une option de répétition du diaporama. (Une lecture*, Répétition) Intervalle • Définissez l’intervalle entre l’affichage de chaque photo. (1 s*, 3 s, 5 s, 10 s) • Pour marquer l’intervalle, vous devez définir l’option Effet sur Désactivé. Musique Choisir une musique d’arrière-plan. Effet • Définir un effet de transition entre les photos. (Désactivé, Calme*, Décontracté, Vif, Doux, Brillant) • Sélectionnez Désactivé pour annuler les effets. • Lorsque vous utilisez l’option Effet, l’intervalle entre l’affichage des photos est alors défini sur 1 seconde. 4 Appuyez sur [ ]. 5 Appuyez sur Démarrer diaporama. 6 Visionnez le diaporama. • Appuyez sur [ ] pour mettre en pause le diaporama. • Rappuyez sur [ ] pour reprendre la lecture du diaporama. • Appuyez sur [ ] pour interrompre le diaporama et repasser en mode Lecture. • Faites tourner [Zoom] de gauche à droite pour régler le niveau de volume. Affichage de photos ou de vidéos en mode Lecture Lecture/Retouche 77 Lecture d’une vidéo Le mode Lecture vous permet de visionner une vidéo. 1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez une vidéo et appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Visionnez la vidéo. Temps de lecture en cours/ Durée de la vidéo Pause Arreter Pour Description Revenir en arrière Appuyer sur [ ]. En appuyant sur [ ], l’appareil photo effectue un rembobinage de la lecture par incréments de 2X, 4X, et 8X. Mettre en pause ou reprendre la lecture après une pause Appuyer sur [ ]. Avancer rapidement Appuyer sur [ ]. En appuyant sur [ ], l’appareil photo effectue une lecture rapide en avant par incréments de 2X, 4X, et 8X. Régler le volume Faites tourner le [Zoom] vers la gauche ou vers la droite. Lors de la lecture d’une vidéo, les fonctionnalités comme le rembobinage, l’avance rapide ou la pause peuvent être utilisées au bout de 2 secondes. Lecture/Retouche 78 Redimensionnement des photos Modifiez la taille d’une photo pour l’enregistrer sous forme de nouveau fichier. 1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez une photo et appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur Redimensionner. 3 Sélectionnez une option. Retour Définir Redimensionner 2592 X 1944 1984 X 1488 1024 X 768 4 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer. Les options disponibles varient en fonction des dimensions originales de la photo sélectionnée. Rotation d’une photo 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Faites tourner le [Zoom] vers la gauche, puis sélectionnez une photo. 4 Appuyez sur Rotation → une option. 5 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer. Rotation : Droite (90°) Annuler Enregistrer • L’appareil photo remplace la photo originale. • En mode Lecture, appuyez sur [ ], puis sur Rotation pour faire pivoter une photo. Retouche de photo Cette section décrit comment retoucher des photos. • Les photos retouchées s’enregistrent sous forme de nouveaux fichiers. • Lorsque vous retouchez des photos, l’appareil photo les convertit automatiquement en résolution inférieure. Les photos que vous faites pivoter ne sont pas automatiquement converties dans une résolution inférieure. • Les photos prises dans certains modes ne peuvent pas être modifiées. Retouche de photo Lecture/Retouche 79 Effets de filtre intelligent Appliquez des effets à vos photos. 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Faites tourner le [Zoom] vers la gauche, puis sélectionnez une photo. 4 Appuyez sur Filtre intelligent → une option. Filtre intelligent : Normal Retour Définir Option Description Normal Aucun effet Miniature Appliquez un effet d’objectif à décentrement pour faire apparaître le sujet en miniature. (Le haut et le bas de la photo sont flous.) Vignettage Appliquer des couleurs rétro, un contraste marqué et un effet de dégradé intense, caractéristiques des appareils Lomo. Filtre croisé Ajoutez des lignes irradiant d’objets brillants pour imiter l’effet visuel d’un filtre croisé. Effet ultra grand angle Déformer les objets photographiés de façon rapprochée afin de créer un effet de grand angle. Classique Appliquer un effet noir et blanc. Rétro Appliquer un effet de ton sépia. 5 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer. Retouche de photo Lecture/Retouche 80 Réglages de la luminosité, du contraste, de la saturation ou des sujets en contre-jour Cette section présente le réglage de la luminosité, du contraste ou de la saturation. Si le centre d’une photo s’avère sombre, vous pouvez l’éclaircir. La photo retouchée s’enregistre sous forme de nouveau fichier, mais peut se voir convertie à une résolution inférieure. 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Faites tourner le [Zoom] vers la gauche, puis sélectionnez une photo. 4 Sélectionnez une option de réglage. Icône Description Luminosité Contraste Saturation ACB (Réglage des sujets en contre-jour) • Si vous avez sélectionné , passez à l’étape 7. 5 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour régler l’option. 6 Appuyez sur [ ]. 7 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer. Réglage des portraits Cette section présente la correction de l’effet yeux rouges et de la retouche de visages. La photo retouchée s’enregistre sous forme de nouveau fichier, mais peut se voir convertie à une résolution inférieure. Retouche des visages 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Faites tourner le [Zoom] vers la gauche, puis sélectionnez une photo. 4 Appuyez sur Retouche des visages. 5 Appuyez sur [ / ] pour régler l’option. • Augmentez la valeur pour obtenir un ton de peau plus clair et plus lisse. 6 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer. Retouche de photo Lecture/Retouche 81 Élimination de l’effet yeux rouges 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Faites tourner le [Zoom] vers la gauche, puis sélectionnez une photo. 4 Appuyez sur Correction des yeux rouges. 5 Appuyez sur [ ] pour enregistrer. Lecture/Retouche 82 Montage vidéo Lorsque vous visionnez une vidéo, vous pouvez recadrer la vidéo ou enregistrer une image fixe tirée de la vidéo. Recadrage d’une vidéo 1 En mode Lecture, sélectionnez une vidéo et appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur Recadrer la vidéo. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] pour lire la vidéo. 4 Appuyez sur [ ] → [ ] à l’endroit où vous souhaitez que le recadrage commence. 5 Appuyez sur [ ] pour reprendre la lecture de la vidéo. 6 Appuyez sur [ ] → [ ] à l’endroit où vous souhaitez que le recadrage se termine. 7 Appuyez sur [ ] pour recadrer. 8 Lorsque la fenêtre en incrustation s’affiche, sélectionnez Oui. • La vidéo d’origine doit durer au moins 10 secondes. • Il vous est possible de recadrer la vidéo à n’importe quel point depuis 2 secondes à partir du début jusqu’à 2 secondes avant la fin de la vidéo. • La vidéo modifiée s’enregistre sous forme de nouveau fichier. Extraction d’une image d’une vidéo 1 Lors du visionnage d’une vidéo, appuyez sur [ ] au point où vous souhaitez enregistrer l’image. 2 Appuyez sur [ ]. • La résolution de l’image capturée reprend celle de la vidéo originale. • L’image s’enregistre sous forme de nouveau fichier. Lecture/Retouche 83 Affichage des fichiers sur un téléviseur Pour afficher des photos ou des vidéos sur un téléviseur, branchez l’appareil photo en utilisant le câble audio / vidéo fourni. 7 Allumez le téléviseur et sélectionnez le mode d’entrée vidéo A/V à l’aide de la télécommande. 8 Allumez l’appareil photo. • L’appareil photo passe automatiquement en mode Lecture lorsque vous le raccordez à un téléviseur. 9 Utilisez les boutons de l’appareil photo pour visualiser des photos ou lire des vidéos. • Sur certains téléviseurs, du bruit numérique (parasites) peut apparaître sur l’image ou une partie de celle-ci peut ne pas s’afficher. • En fonction des réglages du téléviseur, il est possible que l’image apparaisse décentrée sur l’écran. 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Appuyez sur Connectivité → Vidéo. 4 Sélectionnez le signal vidéo en sortie correspondant à votre pays ou votre région. (p. 108) 5 Eteignez l’appareil photo et le téléviseur. 6 Branchez l’appareil photo sur le téléviseur à l’aide du câble audio / vidéo. Audio Vidéo Lecture/Retouche 84 Transfert de fichiers sur un ordinateur Windows Vous pouvez connecter l’appareil photo à votre ordinateur en tant que disque amovible. L’ordinateur doit fonctionner sous Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 ou Windows 8 afin que vous puissiez connecter l’appareil photo en tant que disque amovible. 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Sélectionnez Connectivité → i-Launcher → Désactivée. 4 Eteignez l’appareil photo. 5 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. Vous devez brancher l’extrémité la plus fine du câble USB sur l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous branchez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. 6 Allumez l’appareil photo. • L’ordinateur détecte automatiquement l’appareil photo. 7 Sur l’ordinateur, sélectionnez Poste de travail → Disque amovible → DCIM → 100PHOTO. 8 Faites glisser les fichiers ou enregistrez-les sur l’ordinateur. Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur Raccordez l’appareil photo à l’ordinateur pour transférer les fichiers de la carte mémoire vers l’ordinateur. Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur Lecture/Retouche 85 Déconnexion de l’appareil photo (Windows XP) La méthode pour débrancher l’appareil photo est identique pour Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows 8. 1 Si le voyant lumineux de l’appareil photo clignote, attendez qu’il s’éteigne. 2 Cliquez sur dans la barre d’outils en bas à droite de l’écran de l’ordinateur. 3 Cliquez sur le message qui apparaît. 4 Cliquez sur la boîte de dialogue indiquant que l’appareil photo peut être retiré en toute sécurité. 5 Débranchez le câble USB. Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur Mac Lorsqu’il est connecté à un ordinateur Mac, l’appareil photo est automatiquement reconnu. Vous pouvez directement transférer des fichiers de l’appareil photo vers l’ordinateur sans installer de logiciel. Mac OS 10.5 ou version ultérieure est pris en charge. 1 Éteignez l’appareil photo. 2 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur Mac par le biais du câble USB. Vous devez brancher l’extrémité la plus fine du câble USB sur l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous branchez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. Transfert de fichiers sur l’ordinateur Lecture/Retouche 86 3 Allumez l’appareil photo. • L’ordinateur détecte automatiquement l’appareil photo et affiche l’icône d’un disque amovible. 4 Sur votre ordinateur, ouvrez le disque amovible. 5 Faites glisser les fichiers ou enregistrez-les sur l’ordinateur. Lecture/Retouche 87 Configuration système Configuration recommandée pour visionner des vidéos sur un PC ou démarrer l'application i-Launcher. Spécifications du système d’exploitation Mac Elément Configuration requise Système d’exploitation Mac OS 10.5 ou une version ultérieure (à l’exception du PowerPC) Mémoire vive Minimum 256 Mo de RAM (512 Mo ou plus recommandé) Capacité du disque dur 110 Mo minimum Divers Port USB 2.0 • Ces informations ne sont qu'à but informatif. Il est possible que les performances ne soient pas optimales, même si les caractéristiques de votre ordinateur sont égales ou supérieures à celles de la configuration recommandée. • Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de dommages résultant de l’utilisation d’ordinateurs non conformes, notamment les ordinateurs assemblés. Spécifications du système d’exploitation Windows Elément Configuration requise Processeur Intel Pentium®4, 3.2 GHz ou plus puissant/ AMD Athlon™ FX 2.6 GHz ou plus puissant Mémoire vive 512 Mo de RAM minimum (1 Go et plus recommandé) Système d’exploitation* Windows 7 ou Windows 8 Capacité du disque dur 250 Mo minimum (1 Go et plus recommandé) Divers • Résolution minimale de 1024 X 768 pixels, affichage couleur 16 bits recommandé (résolution de 1280 X 1024 pixels, affichage couleur 32 bits recommandés) • Port USB 2.0 • Carte vidéo nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT ou plus récente, ou ATI X1600 ou plus récente * Une version 32 bits de i-Launcher s’installera, y compris sur les éditions 64 bits de Windows 7 et Windows 8. Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau ………… 89 Connexion automatique à un réseau local sans fil … 89 Utilisation du navigateur de connexion ……… 90 Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau ………… 91 Saisie du texte ………………………………… 92 Utilisation de la fonction NFC (Partage par contact) …………………………… 93 Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Prise de vue ……………………………………………… 93 Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Lecture (Partage instantané) …………………………… 93 Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Wi-Fi … 93 Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone ……………………………………… 94 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone … 95 Utilisation d’un smartphone comme télécommande pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur ………… 96 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel …… 98 Modification des paramètres de courriel ……… 98 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel …… 100 Utilisation des services de partage de photos ou de vidéos ………………………………………… 101 Accès à un service de partage ………………… 101 Publication de photos ou de vidéos …………… 101 Utilisation de Samsung Link pour l’envoi de fichiers …………………………………………… 103 Affichage de photos ou de vidéos sur des appareils compatibles Samsung Link ………… 103 Réseau sans fil Apprenez à vous connecter à des réseaux locaux sans fil et à utiliser les fonctions. Réseau sans fil 89 Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Cette section décrit comment se connecter via un point d’accès (PA) lorsqu’un réseau local sans fil se trouve dans le champ de détection. Vous pouvez également configurer les paramètres réseau. Icône Description Point d’accès Ad hoc Point d’accès sécurisé Point d’accès WPS Force du signal Appuyez sur [ ] pour ouvrir les options de paramétrage réseau. • Lorsque vous choisissez un point d’accès sécurisé, une fenêtre contextuelle apparaît. Saisissez les mots de passe requis pour vous connecter au réseau local sans fil. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, consultez « Saisie du texte ». (p. 92) • Lorsqu’une page de connexion apparaît, reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation du navigateur de connexion ». (p. 90) • Si vous choisissez un point d’accès non sécurisé, l’appareil photo se connecte automatiquement au réseau local sans fil. • Si vous sélectionnez le point d’accès pris en charge par un profil WPS, sélectionnez → Connexion PIN WPS, puis tapez le code PIN sur l’appareil du point d’accès. Vous avez également la possibilité de vous connecter à un point d’accès pris en charge, à profil WPS, en sélectionnant → Connexion via la touche WPS sur l’appareil photo et en appuyant sur le bouton WPS sur le dispositif du point d’accès. • Si un message mentionne la réglementation sur la collecte de données, veuillez le lire et l’accepter. Connexion automatique à un réseau local sans fil 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez , ou . 3 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent jusqu’à l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi. • L’appareil photo recherche automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles. • Dans certains modes, appuyez sur [ ], puis sélectionnez Paramètres Wi-Fi. 4 Sélectionnez un point d’accès. Paramètres Wi-Fi Retour Manuel Actualiser Samsung 1 Samsung 2 Samsung 3 Samsung 4 • Sélectionnez Actualiser actualiser la liste des PA connectables. • Appuyez sur Ajouter mode sans fil pour ajouter un point d’accès manuellement. Le nom du point d’accès (PA) doit être en anglais pour ajouter le PA manuellement. Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Réseau sans fil 90 Configuration des options de réseau 1 Dans l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi, accédez à un point d’accès, puis appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Pour chaque option, précisez les informations requises. Option Description Mot de passe réseau Saisissez le mot de passe réseau. Configuration IP Définissez l’adresse IP automatiquement ou manuellement. Configuration manuelle de l’adresse IP 1 Dans l’écran Paramètres Wi-Fi, accédez à un point d’accès, puis appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Appuyez sur Configuration IP → Manuel. 3 Pour chaque option, précisez les informations requises. Option Description IP Saisissez l’adresse IP statique. Masque sous-réseau Indiquez le masque de sous-réseau. Passerelle Indiquez la passerelle. Serveur DNS Saisissez l’adresse DNS. Utilisation du navigateur de connexion Vous pouvez saisir vos informations de session via le navigateur lors de la connexion à certains points d’accès, sites de partage ou serveurs cloud. Bouton/Icône Description [ / / / ] Accéder à un élément ou faire défiler la page. [ ] Sélectionner un élément. [ ] Accéder aux options suivantes : • Page précédente : Accéder à la page précédente. • Page suivante : Accéder à la page suivante. • Recharger : Actualiser la page. • Arrêter : Arrêter le chargement de la page. • Quitter : Fermer navigateur de connexion. [ ] Fermer navigateur de connexion. • Selon la page activée, il est possible que vous ne puissiez pas sélectionner certaines options. Il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement. • Le navigateur de connexion peut ne pas se fermer automatiquement après la connexion sur certaines pages. Dans ce cas, fermez le navigateur en appuyant sur [ ], puis poursuivez vos manipulations. • La page de connexion peut s’avérer plus longue à charger en fonction de sa taille ou du débit du réseau. Dans ce cas, patientez jusqu’à ce que la fenêtre de connexion s’affiche. Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Réseau sans fil 91 Conseils relatifs à la connexion réseau • Certaines fonctions Wi-Fi ne sont pas disponibles si vous n’insérez pas de carte mémoire. • La qualité de la connexion réseau se détermine d’après les points d’accès. • Plus la distance entre votre appareil photo et le point d’accès est grande, plus ce premier mettra de temps à se connecter au réseau. • Si un dispositif à proximité utilise une fréquence radio identique à celle de votre appareil photo, il se peut que votre connexion s’interrompe. • Si le nom de votre point d’accès n’est pas en anglais, il se peut que l’appareil photo ne puisse pas localiser le périphérique ou que son nom apparaisse de façon incorrecte. • Pour connaître les paramètres réseau et le mot de passe requis, contactez votre administrateur réseau ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau. • Si le fournisseur de service d’un réseau local sans fil requiert l’identification de l’utilisateur, il se peut que vous ne soyez pas en mesure de vous connecter audit réseau. Pour vous connecter au réseau local sans fil, contactez votre fournisseur de service réseau. • En fonction du type de cryptage, le nombre de chiffres qui composent le mot de passe peut varier. • En fonction des conditions environnantes, il peut s’avérer impossible d’établir une connexion à un réseau local sans fil. • Il est possible que l’appareil photo affiche une imprimante compatible avec les réseaux locaux sans fil figurant dans les listes des points d’accès. Vous ne pouvez cependant pas vous connecter au réseau par le biais d’une imprimante. • Il est impossible de connecter votre appareil photo simultanément à un réseau et à un téléviseur. • La connexion à un réseau peut supposer des frais supplémentaires. Les coûts varient en fonction des conditions de votre contrat. • Si vous ne pouvez pas vous connecter à un réseau Wi-Fi, essayez un autre point d’accès parmi la liste de ceux proposés. • Il se peut qu’une page de connexion apparaisse lorsque vous sélectionnez des réseaux Wi-Fi gratuits assurés par certains fournisseurs de service réseau. Saisissez votre identifiant et votre mot de passe pour vous connecter au réseau local sans fil. Pour en savoir plus sur l’inscription ou sur un service particulier, contactez les fournisseurs de service réseau en question. • Soyez prudent lors de la saisie d’informations personnelles pour vous connecter à un point d’accès. Ne saisissez aucune information de paiement sur votre appareil photo. Le fabricant ne peut être tenu responsable de tout problème survenant suite à la saisie de telles informations. • Les connexions réseau disponibles peuvent varier selon le pays. • La fonction de réseau local sans fil de votre appareil photo doit être conforme à la législation en matière de transmission par hyperfréquences dans votre pays ou région. Pour assurer une compatibilité totale, n’utilisez la fonction de réseau local sans fil que dans le pays dans lequel vous avez acheté l’appareil photo. • Les opérations à suivre pour régler les paramètres réseau peuvent différer en fonction des conditions du réseau. • Ne tentez pas d’accéder à un réseau dont l’accès ne vous est pas autorisé. • Avant de vous connecter à des réseaux, assurez-vous que la batterie est entièrement rechargée. • Certains modes de capture empêchent la publication ou l’envoi de fichiers. • Les fichiers transférés vers un autre appareil peuvent ne pas être pris en charge par cet appareil. Si tel est le cas, utilisez un ordinateur pour les lire. Connexion à un réseau local sans fil et configuration des paramètres réseau Réseau sans fil 92 Saisie du texte Cette section décrit comment saisir du texte. Les icônes dans le tableau ci-dessous vous permettent de déplacer le curseur, de modifier la casse, etc. Appuyez sur [ / / / ] pour vous déplacer jusqu’à la touche souhaitée, puis appuyez sur [ ] pour saisir la touche. Effectué Annuler Retour arrière Icône Description Supprimer la dernière lettre. Déplacer le curseur. En mode ABC, changer la casse. Saisir « .com ». Icône Description Passez du mode Symbole au mode ABC. Ajouter un espace. Effectué Enregistrer le texte à l’écran. Afficher le guide de saisie de texte. • Dans certains modes, vous pouvez uniquement utiliser l’alphabet anglais, quelle que soit la langue d’affichage choisie. • Pour passer directement à Effectué, appuyez sur [ ]. • Vous pouvez saisir jusqu’à 64 caractères. • L’écran peut différer selon la langue sélectionnée. Réseau sans fil 93 Utilisation de la fonction NFC (Partage par contact) Placez l’antenne NFC du smartphone à proximité du symbole NFC de l’appareil photo pour lancer la fonctionnalité d’enregistrement automatique des photos sur le smartphone ou pour utiliser le smartphone comme déclencheur à distance. Vous pouvez aussi transférer des fichiers vers un dispositif compatible NFC en mode Lecture. • La fonction est prise en charge par les smartphones compatibles NFC- avec le système d’exploitation Android. Il est conseillé d’utiliser la dernière version disponible. Cette fonction n’est pas disponible pour les dispositifs iOS. • Vous devez installer l’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur le téléphone ou l’appareil afin de pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps ou Google Play Store. L’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareil photo Samsung fabriqués à partir de 2013. • Pour lire le symbole NFC, placez l’appareil compatible NFCà proximité du symbole NFC de l’appareil photo pendant plus de 2 secondes. • Il ne faut pas modifier l’information de l’étiquette de quelque manière que ce soit. Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Wi-Fi Sélectionnez MobileLink ou Remote Viewfinder dans la fenêtre qui s’affiche après avoir lu la balise NFC d’un dispositif compatible. (p. 95, 96) Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Prise de vue Lancez le programme AutoShare ou Remote Viewfinder en lisant une balise sur un appareil compatible NFC. (p. 94, 96) Activez la fonction Wi-Fi de façon prédéfinie en lisant une balise sur un appareil compatible NFC. (p. 110) Utilisation des fonctions NFC en mode Lecture (Partage instantané) En mode Lecture, l’appareil photo transfère automatiquement le fichier en cours vers le smartphone lorsque vous lisez le symbole d’un appareil compatible NFC. • Pour transférer plusieurs fichiers, lisez une étiquette avec un appareil compatible NFC sous forme de vignette, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Réseau sans fil 94 Enregistrement automatique de fichiers sur un smartphone L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction AutoShare via un réseau local sans fil. Lorsque vous prenez une photo avec l'appareil photo, celle-ci est automatiquement enregistrée sur le smartphone. • La fonction AutoShare est prise en charge par les smartphones et tablettes avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. Il est possible que certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge des fonctions particulières. Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez le micrologiciel de l’appareil à jour. Si la version du micrologiciel n’est pas la plus récente, il se peut que cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement. • Vous devez installer l’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur le téléphone ou l’appareil afin de pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. L’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareil photo Samsung fabriqués à partir de 2013. • Si vous paramétrez cette fonction, le réglage est conservé même lorsque vous modifiez le mode Prise de vue. • Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas prise en charge dans certains modes. 5 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez le smartphone à se connecter à votre appareil photo. • Si le smartphone a déjà été connecté à votre appareil photo, la procédure est automatique. • Une icône indiquant l'état de la connexion ( ) apparaît sur l'écran de l'appareil photo. 6 Prenez une photo à l’aide de l’appareil photo. • La photo est sauvegardée sur l'appareil photo, puis transférée sur le smartphone. • Si la fonction GPS est activée sur le smartphone, les informations GPS sont alors enregistrées avec la photo prise. 1 Sur l’appareil photo, en mode Prise de vue, appuyez sur [ ]. 2 Sur l’appareil photo, appuyez sur AutoShare → Activé. • Si le message contextuel qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, appuyez sur Suivant. 3 Sur le smartphone, démarrez l’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • Pour les appareils iOS, démarrez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de démarrer l'application. • Pour lancer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de la balise NFC désignée (p. 16) sur l’appareil photo. 4 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et raccordez le smartphone à l’appareil photo. • Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à la fois. Réseau sans fil 95 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos à un smartphone L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone prenant en charge la fonction MobileLink via un réseau local sans fil. Vous pouvez facilement envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à votre smartphone. • La fonction MobileLink est prise en charge par les smartphones et tablettes avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. Il est possible que certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge des fonctions particulières. Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez le micrologiciel de l’appareil à jour. Si la version du micrologiciel n’est pas la plus récente, il se peut que cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement. • Vous devez installer l’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur le téléphone ou l’appareil afin de pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. L’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareil photo Samsung fabriqués à partir de 2013. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Si vous sélectionnez des fichiers dans le smartphone, vous pouvez afficher jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents et envoyer jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers à la fois. Si vous sélectionnez des fichiers dans l'appareil photo, vous pouvez afficher des fichiers sélectionnés dans l'appareil photo et le nombre de fichiers maximum pouvant être envoyés dépend de l'espace de stockage du smartphone. • Au cours de l’utilisation de cette fonction sur un appareil iOS, il se peut que ce dernier perde sa connexion Wi-Fi. 5 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et raccordez le smartphone à l’appareil photo. • Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à la fois. 6 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez le smartphone à se connecter à votre appareil photo. • Si le smartphone a déjà été connecté à votre appareil photo, la procédure est automatique. • Il est possible que l'application du smartphone se ferme si l'appareil photo reste inactif pendant 30 secondes. 7 Sur le smartphone ou l’appareil photo, sélectionnez les fichiers à transférer depuis l’appareil photo. 8 Sur le smartphone, appuyez sur le bouton copier ou, sur l'appareil photo, sélectionnez Send. • L’appareil photo transmet alors les fichiers. L’écran de l’appareil photo s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur l’appareil photo dans les 30 secondes. 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil de l’appareil photo, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez . • Si le message contextuel qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, appuyez sur Suivant. 3 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez une option d’envoi. • Si vous choisissez l’option Sélectionner des fichiers du smartphone, vous pouvez utiliser votre smartphone pour visualiser et partager les fichiers stockés sur l’appareil photo. • Si vous sélectionnez Sélectionner des fichiers de l’appareil photo, vous pouvez sélectionner des fichiers à envoyer depuis l'appareil photo. 4 Sur le smartphone, démarrez l’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • Pour les appareils iOS, démarrez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de démarrer l'application. • Pour lancer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de la balise NFC désignée (p. 16) sur l’appareil photo. Réseau sans fil 96 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil de l’appareil photo, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sur l’appareil photo, sélectionnez . • Si le message contextuel qui vous invite à télécharger l’application apparaît, appuyez sur Suivant. 3 Sur le smartphone, démarrez l’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App. • Pour les appareils iOS, démarrez la fonction Wi-Fi avant de démarrer l'application. • Pour lancer automatiquement l’application sur un smartphone compatible NFC, activez la fonction et placez le smartphone à proximité de la balise NFC désignée (p. 16) sur l’appareil photo. 4 Sélectionnez l’appareil photo dans la liste et raccordez le smartphone à l’appareil photo. • Le smartphone ne peut se connecter qu’à un seul appareil photo à la fois. 5 Sur votre appareil photo, autorisez le smartphone à se raccorder à votre appareil photo. • Si le smartphone a déjà été raccordé à votre appareil photo, il se connecte automatiquement. 6 Sur le smartphone, définissez les options de prise de vue suivantes. • Lors de l’utilisation de cette fonction, certaines touches ne sont plus disponibles sur votre appareil photo. • Vous pouvez utiliser l'appareil photo depuis l'écran tactile de votre smartphone. • Le mode Remote Viewfinder n’est compatible qu’avec les formats photo 10M et 3M. Utilisation d’un smartphone comme télécommande pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur L’appareil photo se connecte à un smartphone via le réseau local sans fil. Utilisez le smartphone comme télécommande du déclencheur par le biais de la fonction Remote Viewfinder. La photo ainsi prise s’affiche directement sur le smartphone. • La fonction Remote Viewfinder est prise en charge par les smartphones et tablettes avec le système d’exploitation Android ou iOS. Il est possible que certains modèles ne prennent pas en charge des fonctions particulières. Avant d’utiliser cette fonction, mettez le micrologiciel de l’appareil à jour. Si la version du micrologiciel n’est pas la plus récente, il se peut que cette fonction ne s’exécute pas correctement. • Vous devez installer l’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App sur le téléphone ou l’appareil afin de pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Vous pouvez télécharger l’application depuis Samsung Apps, Google Play Store ou Apple App Store. L’application Samsung SMART CAMERA App est compatible avec les modèles d’appareil photo Samsung fabriqués à partir de 2013. Utilisation d’un smartphone comme télécommande pour le déclenchement de l’obturateur Réseau sans fil 97 7 Sur l’écran d’accueil du smartphone, maintenez le doigt sur pour effectuer la mise au point. • Le mode Mise au point multiple s’active automatiquement. 8 Relâchez le pour prendre la photo. • Si la fonction GPS est activée sur le smartphone, les informations GPS sont alors enregistrées avec la photo prise. • Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonctionnalité, la distance idéale entre l’appareil photo et le smartphone peut varier, selon l’environnement. • Il est recommandé de conserver une distance de 7 m entre l’appareil photo et le smartphone lorsque vous utilisez la fonctionnalité. • La prise de photo prend un certain temps après avoir relâché la touche sur le smartphone. • La fonction Remote Viewfinder se désactive si : - l’appareil photo ou le smartphone est éteint ; - l’un des appareils connectés perd sa connexion au réseau local sans fil ; - le signal de la connexion Wi-Fi est mauvais ou instable ; - vous n’effectuez aucune opération pendant environ 3 minutes lorsque l’appareil est branché. • L’écran de l’appareil photo s’éteint si vous n’effectuez aucune opération sur l’appareil photo dans les 30 secondes. Réseau sans fil 98 Modification des paramètres de courriel Depuis le menu Courriel, il vous est possible de modifier les paramètres pour le stockage de vos coordonnées. Vous avez également la possibilité de définir ou de changer le mot de passe de courriel. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, consultez « Saisie du texte ». (p. 92) Enregistrement de vos coordonnées 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Appuyez sur [ ]. 4 Appuyez sur Paramètres expéditeur. 5 Sélectionnez le champ Nom, indiquez votre nom, puis sélectionnez Effectué. Paramètres expéditeur Nom Courriel Enregistrer Réinitialiser Retour 6 Sélectionnez le champ Courriel, indiquez votre adresse de courriel, puis appuyez sur Effectué. 7 Appuyez sur Enregistrer pour enregistrer les modifications. • Pour supprimer vos coordonnées, appuyez sur Réinitialiser. Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres du menu Courriel et envoyer par courriel des photos ou des vidéos stockées sur l’appareil photo. Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel Réseau sans fil 99 Création d’un mot de passe de courriel 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Appuyez sur [ ]. 4 Sélectionnez Configurer mot de passe → Activé. • Pour désactiver le mot de passe, appuyez sur Arrêt. 5 Lorsque le message contextuel s’affiche, sélectionnez OK. 6 Saisissez un mot de passe de 4 chiffres. 7 Confirmez-le en le saisissant à nouveau. 8 Lorsque le message contextuel s’affiche, sélectionnez OK. Si vous avez perdu votre mot de passe, vous pouvez le réinitialiser en sélectionnant Reset depuis le menu de configuration du mot de passe. Lorsque vous réinitialisez ces informations, toutes données préalablement sauvegardées, ainsi que l'adresse de courrier électronique et la liste de courriels récemment envoyés seront supprimées. Modification du mot de passe de courriel 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Appuyez sur [ ]. 4 Appuyez sur Changer mot de passe. 5 Saisissez le mot de passe de 4 chiffres actuel. 6 Saisissez un nouveau mot de passe de 4 chiffres. 7 Confirmez-le en le saisissant à nouveau. 8 Lorsque le message contextuel s’affiche, sélectionnez OK. Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel Réseau sans fil 100 Envoi de photos ou de vidéos par courriel Il vous est possible d’envoyer par courriel des photos ou des vidéos stockées sur l’appareil photo. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, consultez « Saisie du texte ». (p. 92) 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Connectez-vous à un réseau local sans fil. (p. 89) 4 Sélectionnez le champ Expéditeur, indiquez votre adresse de courriel, puis sélectionnez Effectué. • Si vous avez préalablement enregistré vos coordonnées, celles-ci sont insérées automatiquement. (p. 98) • Pour utiliser une adresse figurant dans la liste des précédents destinataires, sélectionnez → une adresse. 5 Sélectionnez le champ Destinataire, saisissez une adresse de courriel, puis sélectionnez Effectué. • Pour utiliser une adresse figurant dans la listes des précédents destinataires, sélectionnez → une adresse. • Sélectionnez pour ajouter des destinataires. Vous pouvez en saisir jusqu’à 30. • Sélectionnez pour supprimer une adresse de la liste. 6 Appuyez sur Suivant. 7 Trouvez les fichiers à envoyer, puis appuyez sur [ ]. • Vous pouvez sélectionner jusqu’à 20 fichiers. La taille totale ne doit pas dépasser 7 Mo. 8 Appuyez sur Next. 9 Sélectionnez le champ Commentaire, saisissez vos commentaires, puis appuyez sur Effectué. 10 Appuyez sur Envoyer. • L’appareil photo envoie le courriel. • Si un courriel n’est pas envoyé, un message vous demande alors de le renvoyer. • Même si le transfert de la photo semble s’être déroulé correctement, celle-ci peut-être rejetée ou identifiée comme courrier indésirable en cas d’erreur sur le compte e-mail du destinataire. • Il se peut que vous ne soyez pas en mesure d’envoyer de courriel si aucune connexion réseau n’est disponible ou si les paramètres de votre compte de courriel sont incorrects. • Vous ne pouvez pas envoyer de courriel si la taille combinée du fichier dépasse 7 Mo. La résolution maximale des photos que vous pouvez envoyer est de 2M. La résolution maximale des vidéos que vous pouvez envoyer est de . Si la photo sélectionnée a une résolution supérieure à 2M, la photo est alors automatiquement redimensionnée à une résolution inférieure. • Si vous ne pouvez pas envoyer de courriel en raison d’un pare-feu ou de paramètres d’authentification utilisateur, contactez votre administrateur réseau ou votre fournisseur d’accès réseau. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Vous pouvez également envoyer un courriel en mode Lecture. Il vous suffit d'appuyer sur [ ], puis de sélectionner Partager (Wi-Fi) → Courriel. Réseau sans fil 101 Accès à un service de partage 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Sélectionnez un service de partage. • Si la fenêtre en incrustation qui vous invite à créer un compte apparaît, appuyez sur OK. 4 Connectez-vous à un réseau local sans fil. (p. 89) 5 Saisissez votre identifiant et mot de passe pour vous connecter. • Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, consultez « Saisie du texte ». (p. 92) • Pour sélectionner un identifiant dans la liste, sélectionnez → un identifiant. • Si vous avez déjà visité le services de partage, il se peut que vous soyez en mesure de vous connecter automatiquement. Vous devez disposer d’un compte sur le service de partage de fichiers pour pouvoir exploiter cette fonction. Publication de photos ou de vidéos 1 Accédez au services de partage par le biais de l’appareil photo. 2 Faites défiler les fichiers jusqu'à ceux que vous souhaitez envoyer, puis appuyez sur [ ]. • Vous pouvez sélectionner jusqu’à 20 fichiers. (Selon le service de partage, la taille ou le nombre total de fichiers peut différer.) 3 Sélectionnez Upload. • L’appareil photo envoie des photos ou des vidéos. • Sur certains services de partage, vous pouvez saisir vos commentaires en sélectionnant le champ Commentaire. Pour en savoir plus sur la saisie de texte, consultez « Saisie de texte ». (p. 92) Utilisation des services de partage de photos ou de vidéos Publiez vos photos ou vos vidéos à travers des services de partage de fichiers. Les services de partage disponibles s’affichent sur l’appareil photo. Pour publier des fichiers sur certains services de partage, vous devez vous y inscrire avant de connecter l’appareil photo. Utilisation des services de partage de photos ou de vidéos Réseau sans fil 102 • Vous pouvez configurer un dossier de publication pour Facebook en appuyant sur [ ], puis en sélectionnant Charger dossier (Facebook) sur la page du service de partage. • Vous ne pouvez pas télécharger de fichiers si la taille du fichier dépasse la limite autorisée. La résolution maximale des photos que vous pouvez télécharger est de 2M. La résolution maximale des vidéos que vous pouvez télécharger est de . Si la photo sélectionnée a une résolution supérieure à 2M, la photo est alors automatiquement redimensionnée à une résolution inférieure. (Selon le service de partage, la résolution maximale des photos peut varier.) • Le mode de publication des photos ou des vidéos peut varier en fonction du service de partage sélectionné. • Si vous ne parvenez pas à accéder à un service de partage en raison d’un pare-feu ou de paramètres d’authentification utilisateur, contactez votre administrateur réseau ou votre fournisseur de service réseau. • Il se peut que la date de prise de vue apparaisse dans le titre des photos ou des vidéos publiées. • Le débit de votre connexion Internet peut avoir une incidence sur le temps de publication des photos ou d’ouverture des pages Web. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Vous pouvez également envoyer des photos ou des vidéos à des services de partage de fichiers. Il vous suffit d'appuyer sur [ ], puis de sélectionner Partager (Wi-Fi) → le service de partage souhaité. • Sur certains services de partage, il est impossible de publier des vidéos. Réseau sans fil 103 Utilisation de Samsung Link pour l’envoi de fichiers Vous pouvez également accéder à un périphérique Samsung Link connecté au même appareil photo. 6 Sur l’appareil Samsung Link, parcourez la liste des photos ou vidéos partagées. • Pour en savoir plus sur la manière de rechercher l’appareil photo et de parcourir les photos ou les vidéos sur l’appareil Samsung Link, consultez le mode d’emploi de l’appareil. • Selon le type d’appareil Samsung Link ou l’état du réseau, il est possible que les vidéos ne soient pas lues correctement. Si tel est le cas, ré-enregistrez la vidéo au format ou à une qualité inférieure, et relancez la lecture. Si la lecture des vidéos ne fonctionne pas correctement sur votre appareil via la connexion sans fil, connectez l’appareil photo à l’appareil à l’aide d’un câble audio / vidéo. PA ▲ Un appareil photo est raccordé à un téléviseur compatible Samsung Link via un réseau sans fil. Affichage de photos ou de vidéos sur des appareils compatibles Samsung Link 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez → Appareils à proximité. • Si le message du guide apparaît, appuyez sur [ ]. • L’appareil photo tente de se connecter automatiquement à un réseau local sans fil via les derniers points d’accès auxquels il s’est connecté. • Si l’appareil photo ne s’est jamais connecté à un réseau local sans fil, il recherche alors automatiquement les points d’accès disponibles. (p. 89) • Vous pouvez autoriser la connexion des seuls appareils sélectionnés ou tous les appareils en appuyant sur [ ], puis en sélectionnant Contrôle d'accès DLNA à l’écran. • Une liste des fichiers partagés est créée. Patientez jusqu’à ce que les autres appareils localisent votre appareil photo. 3 Connectez l’appareil Samsung Link à un réseau, puis activez la fonction Samsung Link. • Reportez-vous au mode d’emploi de votre appareil pour en savoir plus. 4 Sur l’appareil photo, autorisez l’appareil Samsung Link à se connecter à votre appareil photo. 5 Sur l'appareil Samsung Link, sélectionnez un appareil photo à raccorder. Utilisation de Samsung Link pour l’envoi de fichiers Réseau sans fil 104 • Vous pouvez partager jusqu’à 1 000 fichiers récents. • Sur un appareil Samsung Link, vous pouvez uniquement afficher les photos ou vidéos prises avec votre appareil photo. • Le champ de détection de la connexion sans fil entre votre appareil photo et un appareil Samsung Link peut varier en fonction des spécifications du point d’accès. • Si l’appareil photo est connecté à 2 appareils Samsung Link, la lecture risque d’être ralentie. • Les photos ou les vidéos sont partagées dans leurs dimensions d’origine. • Cette fonction est uniquement disponible sur les appareils compatibles Samsung Link. • Les photos ou vidéos partagées ne sont pas enregistrées sur l’appareil Samsung Link, mais peuvent être stockées dans l’appareil photo en respectant les caractéristiques de l’appareil. • Le transfert de photos ou de vidéos sur l’appareil Samsung Link peut prendre un certain temps selon la connexion réseau, le nombre de fichiers à partager ou la taille des fichiers. • Si vous éteignez l’appareil photo de façon inhabituelle pendant le visionnage de photos ou de vidéos sur un appareil Samsung Link (par exemple, en retirant la batterie), l’appareil considère que l’appareil photo est toujours connecté. • Il se peut que l’ordre des photos ou des vidéos sur l’appareil photo diffère de celui sur l’appareil Samsung Link. • En fonction du nombre de photos ou de vidéos à partager, le chargement de cellesci et l’exécution du processus de configuration initial peuvent prendre un certain temps. • Lorsque vous visionnez des photos ou des vidéos sur l’appareil Samsung Link, l’utilisation continue de la télécommande ou l’exécution d’opérations supplémentaires sur l’appareil peut empêcher le bon fonctionnement de cette fonction. • Si vous réorganisez ou triez des fichiers sur l’appareil photo tout en les visionnant sur un appareil Samsung Link, vous devez procéder à nouveau au processus initial de configuration pour actualiser la liste des fichiers sur l’appareil. • Si aucun fichier ne se trouve dans la mémoire de l’appareil photo, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction. • Il est recommandé d’utiliser un câble réseau pour connecter votre appareil Samsung Link au point d’accès. Cela permet de réduire les désagréments que vous pourriez rencontrer lors de la diffusion en continu de contenus. • Pour afficher des fichiers sur un appareil Samsung Link utilisant la fonction Appareils à proximité, activez le mode Multidiffusion sur votre point d’accès. Menu Paramètres ……………………………………………… 106 Accès au menu des paramètres …………………………… 106 Son …………………………………………………………… 107 Affichage …………………………………………………… 107 Connectivité ………………………………………………… 108 Général ……………………………………………………… 109 Paramètres Cette section décrit les différentes options qui permettent de configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo. Paramètres 106 Menu Paramètres Découvrez comment configurer les paramètres de l’appareil photo. 4 Sélectionnez un élément. Retour Sélectionner Moyen Activé Son 1 Désactivé Activé Sons Volume Bip sonore Son de l’obturateur Son de démarrage Son de la mise au point 5 Sélectionnez une option. Retour Définir Volume Désactivé Bas Moyen Elevé 6 Appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir à l’écran précédent. Accès au menu des paramètres 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Sélectionnez un menu. Sons Affichage Connectivité Général Paramètres Icône Description Sons : régler le volume et les sons émis par l’appareil photo. (p. 107) Affichage : personnaliser les paramètres d’affichage. (p. 107) Connectivité : configurer les options de connexion. (p. 108) Général : modifier les réglages du système de l’appareil photo, tels que le format de la mémoire et le nom des fichiers par défaut. (p. 109) Menu Paramètres Paramètres 107 Son * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Volume Réglez le volume de tous les sons. (Désactivé, Bas, Moyen*, Elevé) Bip sonore Définir le son émis par l’appareil photo lorsque vous appuyez sur l’une des touches ou que vous passez d’un mode à l’autre. (Désactivé, Activé*) Son de l’obturateur Définir le son émis par l’appareil photo lorsque vous appuyez sur le déclencheur. (Désactivé, Son 1*, Son 2, Son 3) Son de démarrage Définir le son émis par l’appareil photo lorsque vous allumez l’appareil photo. (Désactivé*, Volant, Show laser, Cloud) Son de la mise au point Définir le son émis par l’appareil photo lorsque vous appuyez à mi-course sur le déclencheur. (Désactivé, Activé*) Affichage * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Image de démarrage Sélectionner l’image qui s’affiche après la mise en marche de l’appareil photo. • Désactivée* : aucune image n’est affichée. • Logo : afficher une image enregistrée par défaut dans la mémoire interne. • Image personnalisée : Sélectionnez Image personnalisée parmi les photos prises et stockées en mémoire. Si vous sélectionnez une nouvelle photo comme image de démarrage ou que vous réinitialisez l’appareil photo, l’image actuelle sera supprimée. Fonds d'écran Choisissez l’image souhaitée pour le fond d’écran de l’écran d’accueil. (Galerie de fonds d'écran, Album) Aide à la prise de vue Sélectionnez un guide pour vous aider à composer une scène (Désactivée*, 3 X 3, 2 X 2, Croix, Diagonale) Affichage date/heure Indiquez si vous voulez afficher la date et l’heure sur l’écran de l’appareil photo. (Désactivé*, Activé) Affichage aide Affichez une brève description d’une option ou d’un menu. (Désactivé, Activé*) Menu Paramètres Paramètres 108 * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Luminosité écran Régler la luminosité de l’écran. (Automatique*, Faible, Normale, Forte) En mode Lecture, l’option Normale est automatiquement sélectionnée, même si vous choisissez l’option Automatique. Vue rapide Définissez si la photo prise doit être vérifiée avant de revenir en mode Prise de vue. (Désactivé, Activé*) Cette fonctionnalité est inopérante dans certains modes. Désactivation écran auto L’appareil photo passe automatiquement en mode Economie d’énergie si vous n’effectuez aucune manipulation dans un délai de 30 secondes. (Désactivée*, Activée) En mode Economie d’énergie, appuyez sur n’importe quelle touche autre que [ ] pour utiliser à nouveau l’appareil photo. Connectivité * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Vidéo Sélectionner la sortie du signal vidéo correspondant à votre lieu géographique. • NTSC : États-Unis, Canada, Japon, Corée, Taïwan, Mexique, etc. • PAL (prend en charge uniquement BDGHI) : Australie, Autriche, Belgique, Chine, Danemark, Royaume-Uni, Finlande, France, Allemagne, Italie, Koweït, Malaisie, Pays-Bas, Nouvelle-Zélande, Norvège, Singapour, Espagne, Suède, Suisse, Thaïlande, etc. i-Launcher Configurer i-Launcher pour que le logiciel se lance automatiquement lors de la connexion de l’appareil photo à l’ordinateur. (Désactivé, Activé*) Menu Paramètres Paramètres 109 Général * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Informations réseau Afficher l’adresse MAC et le numéro de certification réseau de l’appareil photo. Language Choisir la langue d’affichage. Fuseau horaire Indiquer le fuseau horaire correspondant à votre lieu géographique. Lorsque vous voyagez, appuyez sur Extérieur, puis choisissez le fuseau horaire. (Domicile*, Extérieur) Configuration date/heure Régler la date et l’heure. Type date Sélectionnez un format de date. (AAAA/MM/JJ, MM/JJ/AAAA, JJ/MM/AAAA) Le type de date par défaut peut différer en fonction de la langue sélectionnée. Type d'heure Sélectionnez le format de l’heure. (12 h, 24 h) Le type d’heure par défaut peut différer en fonction de la langue sélectionnée. * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Numérotation des fichiers Définir les règles de création des noms de fichier. • Réinitialiser : les fichiers sont numérotés à partir de 0001 lorsque vous insérez une nouvelle carte mémoire, formatez une carte mémoire ou supprimez tous les fichiers. • Série* : lorsque vous insérez une nouvelle carte mémoire, que vous formatez la carte mémoire ou supprimez tous les fichiers, les fichiers sont numérotés en continuant à partir du dernier numéro de fichier. • Par défaut, le nom du premier dossier est 100PHOTO et le nom du premier fichier correspond à SAM_0001. • Le numéro de fichier incrémente d'une unité, de SAM_0001 à SAM_9999, chaque fois que vous prenez une photo ou que vous enregistrez une vidéo. • Le numéro de dossier s’incrémente chaque fois d’une unité, de 100PHOTO à 999PHOTO. • Un même dossier peut contenir jusqu’à 9 999 fichiers. • L’appareil photo nomme les fichiers conformément à la norme DCF (Design rule for Camera File). Si vous modifiez le nom d’un fichier, il risque de ne plus pouvoir être lu par l’appareil photo. Menu Paramètres Paramètres 110 * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Impression Définir si l’appareil photo ajoute la date et l’heure sur les photos. (Désactivée*, Date, Date et heure) • La date et l’heure s’affichent en jaune dans l’angle inférieur droit de la photo. • Il est possible que certains modèles d’imprimante n’impriment pas correctement la date et l’heure. • La photo n’affiche pas la date et l’heure si: - vous sélectionnez Panorama Live en mode Magique. Mise hors tension auto Paramétrez l’appareil photo pour qu’il s’éteigne automatiquement lorsque vous n’effectuez aucune opération après une période d’inactivité définie. (Désactivée, 1 min, 3 min*, 5 min, 10 min) • Ces paramètres ne sont pas modifiés si vous changez de batterie. • L’appareil photo ne s’éteint pas automatiquement lorsqu’il est connecté à un ordinateur ou à un réseau sans fil et si vous visionnez un diaporama ou des vidéos. DIRECT LINK (bouton Wi-Fi) Lancer une fonction Wi-Fi prédéfinie en appuyant sur [ ]. (AutoShare, MobileLink*, Remote Viewfinder, Courriel, Réseaux sociaux et Cloud, Samsung Link) Vue Live NFC Régler une fonction Wi-Fi de sorte qu’elle se lance à la lecture d’une balise reçue d’un dispositif compatible NFC en mode Prise de vue. (AutoShare, Remote Viewfinder*) * Paramètre par défaut Elément Description Voyant de mise au point Paramétrer l’appareil photo pour qu’il s’allume automatiquement dans les endroits sombres pour faciliter la mise au point. (Désactivé, Activé*) Formater Formater la mémoire. Le formatage supprime tous les fichiers, y compris les fichiers protégés. (Oui, Non) Il est possible que des erreurs se produisent si vous utilisez une carte mémoire qui a été formatée à l’aide d’un appareil photo d’une autre marque, d’un lecteur de cartes mémoire ou d’un ordinateur. Veuillez formater les cartes mémoire dans l’appareil photo avant de les utiliser pour effectuer des prises de vue. Réinitialiser Réinitialisez les menus et les options de prise de vue. Les réglages de la date et de l’heure, de la langue et de la sortie vidéo ne sont pas remis à zéro. (Oui, Non) Licence Open Source Afficher les informations sur la licence Open Source. Messages d’erreur ……………………………………………… 112 Entretien de l’appareil photo …………………………………… 113 Nettoyage de l’appareil photo ……………………………… 113 Usage et rangement de l’appareil photo …………………… 114 Concernant les cartes mémoire …………………………… 115 Concernant la batterie ……………………………………… 118 Mise à niveau du micrologiciel ……………………………… 122 Avant de contacter le service après-vente …………………… 123 Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo ………………………… 126 Glossaire ………………………………………………………… 130 Index ……………………………………………………………… 135 Annexes Cette section reprend les messages d’erreur, les caractéristiques de l’appareil et des conseils pour l’entretien. Annexes 112 Messages d’erreur Lorsque l’un des messages d’erreur suivants apparaît, reportez-vous aux solutions proposées pour tenter de résoudre le problème. Message d’erreur Solutions possibles Fichier système incompatible. L’appareil photo ne prend pas en charge la structure de fichiers FAT de la carte mémoire insérée. Formatez cette carte mémoire dans l’appareil photo. Échec initialisation. L’appareil photo n’est pas parvenu à localiser un appareil compatible Samsung Link. Allumer les appareils compatibles Samsung Link présents sur le réseau. Batterie faible Insérez une batterie chargée ou rechargez celle déjà en place. Mémoire pleine Supprimez les fichiers inutiles ou insérez une nouvelle carte mémoire. Aucun fichier image Prenez des photos ou insérez une carte mémoire qui en contient. Mot de passe incorrect Le mot de passe qui permet de transférer des fichiers vers un autre appareil photo est incorrect. Saisissez le bon mot de passe. Échec transfert. • L'appareil photo n'est pas parvenu à envoyer des e-mails ou des fichiers aux autres périphériques. Essayez à nouveau de l’envoyer. • Vérifiez la connexion au réseau et réessayez. Message d’erreur Solutions possibles Lecture du contenu du fichier impossible Supprimez le fichier endommagé ou contactez le service après-vente. Erreur de carte • Eteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le. • Retirez la carte mémoire, puis insérez-la de nouveau. • Formatez la carte mémoire. Carte incompatible La carte mémoire insérée ne fonctionne pas avec l’appareil photo. Insérez une carte mémoire microSD, microSDHC ou microSDXC. Echec connexion • L’appareil photo ne peut pas se connecter au réseau à l’aide du point d’accès sélectionné. Sélectionnez un autre point d’accès et réessayez. • L’appareil photo n’est pas parvenu à se connecter aux autres appareils. Essayez à nouveau de vous connecter. DCF Full Error Les noms de fichier ne répondent pas à la norme DCF. Transférez les fichiers de la carte mémoire vers un ordinateur et formatez la carte. Accédez ensuite au menu Paramètres et sélectionnez Numérotation des fichiers → Réinitialiser. (p. 109) Périphérique déconnecté. La connexion au réseau a été interrompue pendant le transfert des photos vers des périphériques compatibles. Sélectionnez de nouveau un périphérique compatible. Annexes 113 Entretien de l’appareil photo Boîtier de l’appareil photo Essuyez-le délicatement avec un chiffon doux et sec. • N’utilisez jamais de benzène, de diluants ou d’alcool pour nettoyer l’appareil. Ces produits peuvent l’endommager ou entraîner un dysfonctionnement. • N’appuyez pas et n’utilisez pas de soufflette sur le cache de l’objectif. Cela peut détériorer l’appareil photo. Nettoyage de l’appareil photo Objectif et écran de l’appareil photo Utilisez une soufflette pour éliminer la poussière et passez délicatement un chiffon doux sur l’objectif. S’il reste de la poussière, humidifiez une lingette avec du nettoyant liquide pour objectif et essuyez délicatement. Entretien de l’appareil photo Annexes 114 Usage et rangement de l’appareil photo Usage ou rangement inapproprié de l’appareil photo • Evitez d’exposer l’appareil à des températures extrêmes. • Evitez d’utiliser l’appareil photo dans des endroits très humides ou dans lesquels le taux d’humidité varie beaucoup. • Evitez d’exposer l’appareil photo à la lumière directe du soleil et de le ranger dans des endroits chauds, mal ventilés, comme à l’intérieur d’une voiture en été. • Protégez l’appareil photo et son écran contre les chocs et les vibrations excessives, qui risqueraient de les endommager. • Evitez d’utiliser et de ranger votre appareil dans un endroit poussiéreux, mal entretenu, humide ou peu ventilé, afin de ne pas endommager ses composants internes. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de combustibles ou de produits chimiques inflammables. Ne transportez et ne stockez jamais de liquides inflammables, de gaz ou de matériaux explosifs dans le même compartiment que l’appareil ou ses accessoires. • Ne rangez pas l’appareil photo à proximité de boules de naphtaline. Utilisation sur la plage ou en bord de mer • Protégez l’appareil photo du sable et de la terre lorsque vous l’utilisez à la plage ou dans d’autres endroits similaires. • L’appareil photo n’est pas étanche. Ne manipulez pas la batterie, l’adaptateur ou la carte mémoire avec les mains humides. Cela pourrait endommager l’appareil photo. Rangement pour une durée prolongée • Lorsque vous rangez l’appareil photo pour une durée prolongée, placez-le dans un récipient clos avec un matériau absorbant comme du gel de silice. • Lorsqu’elle n’est pas utilisée pendant une période prolongée, une batterie pleine se décharge progressivement et doit alors être rechargée avant l’utilisation suivante. • La date et l’heure peuvent être initialisées lorsque l’appareil photo est allumé après avoir été séparé de la batterie pendant une longue période. Utilisation de l’appareil photo avec précaution dans les environnements humides Lorsque vous faites passer l’appareil photo d’un environnement froid à un environnement chaud, de la condensation peut se former sur l’objectif et les composants internes de l’appareil photo. Si tel est le cas, éteignez l’appareil photo et attendez au moins 1 heure. Si de la condensation s’est formée sur la carte mémoire, retirez-la et attendez que l’humidité se soit évaporée avant de la réinsérer. Autres avertissements • Ne faites pas tournoyer l’appareil photo par la dragonne. Vous risqueriez de vous blesser ou d’entrainer des blessures à d’autres personnes, ou même d’endommager l’appareil photo. • Evitez de peindre l’appareil photo, la peinture risquant de bloquer ses pièces mobiles et de perturber son fonctionnement. • Eteignez l’appareil photo lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Entretien de l’appareil photo Annexes 115 • L’appareil photo contient des pièces fragiles. Evitez de faire subir des chocs à l’appareil photo. • Protégez l’écran de toute pression extérieure en le conservant dans l’étui lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Protégez l’appareil photo des rayures en le tenant à l’écart du sable, des objets pointus ou des pièces de monnaie. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo si l’écran est fissuré ou brisé. Vous risquez de vous blesser les mains ou le visage avec les morceaux de verre ou de plastique. Rapportez votre appareil photo à un centre de service après-vente Samsung pour le faire réparer. • Ne posez jamais l’appareil photo, les batteries, le chargeur ou des accessoires à l’intérieur ou au-dessus d’un dispositif chauffant, tel qu’un four à micro-ondes, une cuisinière ou un radiateur. La chaleur peut déformer ou faire surchauffer ces appareils et provoquer une incendie ou une explosion. • Evitez toute exposition de l’objectif à la lumière directe du soleil - ceci risquerait d’entraîner une décoloration ou un mauvais fonctionnement du capteur d’image. • Protégez l’objectif des traces de doigt et des éraflures. Nettoyez l’objectif en utilisant un chiffon doux et propre, exempt de poussière. • L’appareil photo peut s’éteindre en cas de pression extérieure. Cela a pour but de protéger la carte mémoire. Allumez l’appareil photo pour l’utiliser à nouveau. • Il est possible que l’appareil photo chauffe en cours d’utilisation. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ou les performances de l’appareil. • Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo à de faibles températures, il peut mettre du temps à s’éteindre, une décoloration peut se produire temporairement ou des images persistantes peuvent apparaître. Il ne s’agit en aucun cas de dysfonctionnements. Ces perturbations sont momentanées et se corrigent d’ellesmêmes une fois que l’appareil retrouve à nouveau une température normale. • La peinture ou le métal sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut provoquer des allergies, des démangeaisons, de l’eczéma ou des boursouflures pour les personnes à peau sensible. Si vous présentez de tels symptômes, arrêtez immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil photo et consultez un médecin. • N’introduisez pas de corps étrangers dans les compartiments, les logements ou les ouvertures de l’appareil photo. Il est possible que les dommages provoqués par une mauvaise utilisation ne soient pas couverts par la garantie. • Ne confiez pas la réparation de l’appareil photo à un technicien non agréé et ne tentez pas de le réparer vous-même. Votre garantie ne couvre pas les dégâts résultant d’une réparation par un technicien non agréé. Concernant les cartes mémoire Cartes mémoires compatibles Votre appareil photo est compatible avec les cartes mémoire suivantes : microSD (Secure Digital), microSDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity) ou microSDXC (Secure Digital eXtended Capacity). Carte mémoire Adaptateur de carte mémoire Pour pouvoir lire des données sur un ordinateur ou par le biais d’un lecteur de cartes, insérez la carte dans l’adaptateur approprié. Entretien de l’appareil photo Annexes 116 Capacité de la carte mémoire La capacité de la mémoire peut varier en fonction de la scène et des conditions de prise de vue. Ces capacités sont données pour une carte microSD de 2 Go : Photo Taille Maximale Elevée Normale 231 485 669 262 525 719 303 606 808 359 719 969 669 1 139 1 486 969 1 609 1 927 1 381 2 262 2 738 2 628 3 185 3 806 Vidéo Taille 30 ips 1280 X 720 Environ 15' 35" 640 X 480 Environ 30' 44" Pour partager Environ 90' 03" • Les chiffres mentionnés ci-dessus sont mesurés sans la fonction de zoom. • Le temps d’enregistrement disponible peut varier si le zoom est utilisé. • Plusieurs vidéos ont été enregistrées successivement afin de déterminer la durée totale d’enregistrement. Entretien de l’appareil photo Annexes 117 Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire • Evitez d’exposer les cartes mémoire à des températures extrêmes (inférieures à 0 °C ou supérieures à 40 °C). Cela risque de provoquer des dysfonctionnements des cartes mémoire. • Introduisez une carte mémoire dans le bon sens. Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil photo ainsi que la carte mémoire. • N’utilisez pas de carte mémoire qui a été formatée avec un autre appareil photo ou avec un ordinateur. Reformatez la carte mémoire sur l’appareil photo. • Eteignez l’appareil photo avant d’introduire ou de retirer la carte mémoire. • Vous ne devez pas retirer la carte mémoire ou éteindre l’appareil photo lorsque le voyant clignote. Vous risquez d’endommager vos données. • Au terme de la durée de vie de la batterie, vous ne pouvez plus stocker de photos sur la carte. Remplacez-la. • Evitez de plier la carte mémoire, de la laisser tomber ou de la soumettre à des chocs ou des pressions importantes. • Evitez d’utiliser ou de ranger les cartes mémoire à proximité de champs magnétiques. • Evitez d’utiliser ou de ranger des cartes mémoire dans des environnements chauds, très humides ou en contact avec des substances corrosives. • Evitez tout contact des cartes mémoire avec des liquides, de la poussière ou des corps étrangers. Si la carte mémoire est sale, nettoyez-la avec un chiffon doux avant de l’introduire dans l’appareil photo. • Evitez que les cartes mémoire ou l’emplacement pour carte mémoire n’entrent en contact avec des liquides, des poussières ou tout corps étranger. Cela risque d’endommager l’appareil photo ou les cartes mémoire. • Lorsque vous transportez une carte mémoire, rangez-la dans un étui afin de la protéger de l’électricité statique. • Transférez vos données importantes sur d’autres supports, tel qu’un disque dur ou un CD/DVD. • Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo de manière prolongée, la carte mémoire peut chauffer. Ceci est normal et n’engendre pas de dysfonctionnement. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. Entretien de l’appareil photo Annexes 118 Concernant la batterie Utilisez uniquement des batteries homologuées par Samsung. Caractéristiques de la batterie Caractéristiques Description Modèle BP70A Type Batterie au lithium-ion Capacité des cellules 700 mAh Tension 3,7 V Temps de charge* (lorsque l’appareil photo est éteint) Environ 150 min. * Le temps de chargement de la batterie lors de la connexion à un ordinateur peut être plus long. Autonomie de la batterie Durée moyenne / Nombre de photos Conditions de test (lorsque la batterie est entièrement chargée) Photos Environ 100 min. / Environ 200 photos La durée de vie de la batterie a été mesurée dans les conditions suivantes : mode Programme, dans l’obscurité, avec une résolution de , en Elevée qualité, avec la fonctionOIS activée. 1. Option du flash sur Contre jour, une seule photo, puis zoom avant ou arrière. 2. Option du flash sur Désactivée, une seule photo, puis zoom avant ou arrière. 3. Exécutez les tâches 1 et 2, en attendant 30 secondes entre chaque étape. Répétez le processus pendant 5 minutes, puis éteignez l’appareil photo pendant 1 minute. 4. Répétition des étapes 1 à 3. Vidéos Environ 70 min. Enregistrement de vidéos à une résolution de et à une fréquence de 30 ips. • Les chiffres ci-dessus s’appuient sur les normes de test de la CIPA. Votre propre usage peut influer sur ces valeurs de façon significative. • Plusieurs vidéos ont été enregistrées successivement afin de déterminer la durée totale d’enregistrement. • Lorsque vous utilisez les fonctions réseau, la batterie se décharge plus rapidement. Entretien de l’appareil photo Annexes 119 Message de batterie faible Lorsque la batterie s’est complètement déchargée, l’icône de batterie devient rouge et le message « Batterie faible » s’affiche. Remarques à propos de l’utilisation de la batterie • Evitez d’exposer la batterie à des températures extrêmes (inférieures à 0 °C ou supérieures à 40 °C). Ceci est à même de réduire la capacité de charge de celle-ci. • Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil photo de manière prolongée, la zone située autour de la trappe batterie peut chauffer. 4Ceci n’affecte pas l’utilisation normale de l’appareil photo. • Ne tirez pas sur le cordon d’alimentation pour débrancher le chargeur de la prise murale, au risque de provoquer un incendie ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. • A des températures inférieures à 0 °C, la capacité et la durée de vie de la batterie peuvent diminuer. • La capacité de la batterie peut diminuer à de faibles températures, mais redevient normale à des températures plus modérées. • Si vous rangez l’appareil photo sans l’utiliser pour une durée prolongée, retirez d’abord la batterie. Les batteries peuvent fuir ou se détériorer avec le temps, risquant d’endommager gravement l’appareil photo. Le stockage de l’appareil photo pendant une période prolongée, alors que la batterie est installée, peut entraîner le déchargement de la batterie. Il est possible que vous ne puissiez pas recharger une batterie complètement déchargée. • Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil photo pendant une période prolongée (3 mois ou plus), vérifiez la batterie et rechargez-la régulièrement. Si vous laissez continuellement la batterie se décharger, sa capacité et sa durée de vie risquent de décroître, ce qui peut entraîner un dysfonctionnement, un incendie ou une explosion. Précautions d’utilisation de la batterie Protégez les batteries, les chargeurs et les cartes mémoire des chocs Évitez tout contact de la batterie avec des objets métalliques, car cela risque de provoquer un court-circuit entre les bornes + et - de la batterie et de l’endommager de manière temporaire ou permanente. Vous risquez également de provoquer un incendie ou une décharge électrique. Remarques concernant le chargement de la batterie • Si le voyant d’état est éteint, assurez-vous que la batterie est installée correctement. • Si l’appareil photo est toujours en chargement, la batterie peut ne pas être complètement chargée. Eteignez l’appareil photo avant de charger la batterie. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil photo lorsqu’il est en charge. Vous risquez de provoquer un incendie ou un choc électrique. • Ne tirez pas sur le cordon d’alimentation pour débrancher le chargeur de la prise murale, au risque de provoquer un incendie ou de recevoir une décharge électrique. • Attendez que la batterie ait rechargé au moins 10 minutes avant d’allumer l’appareil photo. • Si vous branchez l’appareil photo sur une source d’alimentation externe lorsque la batterie est déchargée, l’utilisation de certaines fonctions gourmandes en énergie peut entraîner la mise hors tension de l’appareil photo. Pour utiliser l’appareil photo normalement, rechargez la batterie. Entretien de l’appareil photo Annexes 120 • Si vous rebranchez le cordon d’alimentation alors que la batterie est complètement chargée, le voyant d’état s’allume pendant environ 30 minutes. • L’utilisation du flash et l’enregistrement de vidéos déchargent rapidement la batterie. Chargez la batterie jusqu’à ce que le voyant d’état rouge s’éteigne. • Si le voyant ne s'allume pas, rebranchez le câble ou retirez les piles, puis remettezles. • Le chargement excessif des batteries peut raccourcir leur durée de vie. A la fin de chaque chargement, débranchez le câble de l’appareil photo. • Ne tordez pas le cordon d’alimentation et ne placez pas d’objets lourds dessus. Vous risquez d’endommager le cordon. Remarques concernant le chargement avec un ordinateur connecté • Utilisez uniquement le câble USB fourni. • La batterie peut ne pas se recharger dans les cas suivants : - vous utilisez un concentrateur USB ; - d’autres périphériques USB sont connectés à l’ordinateur ; - le câble est branché sur le port situé sur la façade avant de l’ordinateur ; - le port USB de l’ordinateur n’est pas compatible avec la norme d’alimentation électrique (5 V, 500 mA). Précautions relatives à l’utilisation et à la mise au rebut de batteries et de chargeurs • Ne jetez jamais les batteries au feu. Respectez la réglementation en vigueur dans votre pays concernant l’élimination des batteries usagées. • Ne posez jamais les batteries ou l’appareil à l’intérieur ou au-dessus d’un dispositif chauffant, tel qu’un four à micro-ondes, une cuisinière ou un radiateur. En cas de surchauffe, les batteries risquent d’exploser. Entretien de l’appareil photo Annexes 121 Des blessures pouvant s’avérer mortelles peuvent résulter d’une utilisation imprudente ou inappropriée de la batterie. Pour votre sécurité, veuillez suivre ces instructions relatives à l’utilisation correcte de la batterie : • La batterie peut s’enflammer ou bien exploser si celle-ci n’est pas manipulée correctement. Si vous remarquez un quelconque défaut de fabrication, une fêlure ou d’autres anomalies sur la batterie, cessez de l’utiliser immédiatement et contactez le service après-vente. • Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs de batterie et des adaptateurs authentiques recommandés par le fabricant et rechargez la batterie en respectant scrupuleusement les consignes décrites dans ce manuel d’utilisation. • Ne placez pas la batterie à proximité d’appareils chauffants ou dans un environnement soumis à des températures élevées comme par exemple à l’intérieur d’une voiture en été. • Ne placez jamais la batterie dans un four à micro-ondes. • Evitez de stocker ou d’utiliser la batterie dans des endroits chauds et humides comme des spas ou des cabines de douche. • Ne posez pas l’appareil sur des surfaces inflammables comme de la literie, des couvertures, des tapis ou des couvertures électriques pendant des périodes prolongées. • Lorsque l’appareil est allumé, ne le laissez pas dans un espace confiné pendant une période prolongée. • Ne laissez pas les bornes de la batterie entrer en contact avec des objets métalliques comme des colliers, des pièces de monnaie, des clés ou bien des montres. • Utilisez uniquement des batteries de remplacement lithium-ion authentiques recommandées par le fabricant. • Ne démontez ou ne perforez pas la batterie avec un objet coupant, quel qu’il soit. • Evitez de soumettre la batterie à une pression élevée ou bien à des éléments susceptible de l’écraser. • Evitez de soumettre la batterie à des chocs importants comme par exemple la laisser tomber de très haut. • N’exposez pas la batterie à des températures supérieures ou égales à 60 °C. • Evitez de mettre la batterie en contact avec des liquides ou de l’humidité. • Evitez de mettre la batterie en contact avec le feu et de l’exposer à une chaleur extrême ou au soleil de façon prolongée. Informations sur le traitement des batteries usagées • Portez une attention particulière à la façon dont vous traitez les batteries usagées. • Ne jetez pas la batterie au feu. • Les réglementations de mise au rebut peuvent différer selon le pays ou la région. Observez les réglementations locales et fédérales en matière de traitement des batteries usagées. Consignes relatives au chargement de la batterie Respectez les consignes de chargement indiquées dans ce manuel d’utilisation pour charger la batterie. La batterie peut s’enflammer ou bien exploser si celle-ci n’est pas chargée correctement. Entretien de l’appareil photo Annexes 122 Mise à niveau du micrologiciel i-Launcher vous permet de mettre à niveau le micrologiciel de votre appareil photo. 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil, faites défiler les options jusqu’à . 2 Sélectionnez . 3 Sélectionnez Connectivité → i-Launcher → Activé. 4 Éteignez l’appareil photo. 5 Branchez l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. Vous devez brancher l’extrémité la plus fine du câble USB sur l’appareil photo. Vous risquez d’endommager vos fichiers si vous branchez le câble à l’envers. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. 6 Allumez l’appareil photo. 7 Installez i-Launcher sur l’ordinateur. Système d’exploitation Méthode d’installation Windows Lorsque la fenêtre contextuelle vous invite à installer i-Launcher, sélectionnez Oui. • Si une fenêtre vous invite à exécuter iLinker.exe, exécutez le programme. • Si la fenêtre ne s’affiche pas, sélectionnez Poste de travail → i-Launcher → iLinker.exe. • Lorsque vous connectez l’appareil photo à un ordinateur sur lequel i-Launcher est installé, le programme se lance automatiquement. Mac Cliquez sur Appareils → i-Launcher → Mac → iLinker. 8 Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour mettre à niveau le micrologiciel et installer ainsi la version la plus récente. • Sélectionnez Firmware Upgrader depuis l'écran de i-Launcher. • Avant de démarrer la mise à niveau du micrologiciel, vérifiez que le PC est connecté à un réseau. • Pendant toute la durée de la mise à niveau, ne mettez pas hors tension les appareils connectés. Annexes 123 Avant de contacter le service après-vente Si l’appareil photo ne fonctionne pas correctement, vérifiez les éléments suivants avant de contacter le service après-vente. Si la solution de dépannage proposée ne permet pas de résoudre le problème, veuillez contacter votre revendeur local ou le service après-vente. Lorsque vous apportez l’appareil photo dans un service après-vente, veillez à également fournir les autres composants qui ont pu contribuer au dysfonctionnement, notamment la carte mémoire et la batterie. Problème Solutions possibles Impossible de prendre des photos • La carte mémoire est pleine. Supprimez les fichiers inutiles ou insérez une nouvelle carte mémoire. • Formatez la carte mémoire. • La carte mémoire est défectueuse. Remplacez-la. • Assurez-vous que l’appareil photo est allumé. • Mettez la batterie en charge. • Assurez-vous que la batterie est installée correctement. L’appareil photo ne répond pas. Retirez la batterie, puis replacez-la. L’appareil photo chauffe Il est possible que l’appareil photo chauffe en cours d’utilisation. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ou les performances de l’appareil. Le flash ne fonctionne pas. • Il se peut que le flash soit désactivé par l’option Désactivée. (p. 52) • Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le flash dans certains modes. Problème Solutions possibles Impossible d’allumer l’appareil photo • Assurez-vous que la batterie est installée. • Assurez-vous que la batterie est bien en place. (p. 18) • Mettez la batterie en charge. L’appareil photo s’éteint de façon inattendue. • Mettez la batterie en charge. • L’appareil photo est peut-être en mode Mise hors tension auto. (p. 110) • Il est possible que l’appareil photo s’éteigne afin d’éviter que la carte mémoire ne soit endommagée après un choc. Rallumez l’appareil photo. La batterie de l’appareil photo se décharge rapidement • La batterie peut se décharger plus rapidement dans un environnement de basse température (en dessous de 0 °C). Gardez la batterie au chaud en la plaçant dans votre poche. • L’utilisation du flash et l’enregistrement de vidéos déchargent rapidement la batterie. Rechargez-la si nécessaire. • La batterie est un consommable qui possède une durée de vie limitée et qui doit périodiquement être remplacée. Remplacez-la si son autonomie diminue rapidement. Avant de contacter le service après-vente Annexes 124 Problème Solutions possibles Le flash se déclenche de façon inattendue. L’électricité statique peut provoquer le déclenchement du flash. Il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil photo. La date et l’heure ne sont pas correctes Réglez la date et l’heure dans les paramètres d’affichage. (p. 109) L’écran ou des touches ne fonctionnent pas Retirez la batterie, puis replacez-la. L’écran de l’appareil photo fonctionne mal Si vous utilisez l’appareil photo à des températures extrêmement basses, un dysfonctionnement ou une décoloration de l’écran de l’appareil photo peut se produire. Pour bénéficier de performances optimales, utilisez l’appareil photo à des températures de fonctionnement modérées. La carte mémoire présente une erreur. • Eteignez l’appareil photo, puis rallumez-le. • Retirez la carte mémoire, puis insérez-la de nouveau. • Formatez la carte mémoire. Pour plus de détails, voir « Précautions d’utilisation des cartes mémoire ». (p. 117) Problème Solutions possibles Impossible de lire des fichiers Si vous modifiez le nom d’un fichier, l’appareil photo risque de ne plus pouvoir le lire (le nom des fichiers doit être conforme à la norme DCF). Si vous rencontrez ce problème, lisez les fichiers sur un ordinateur. La photo est floue • Vérifiez que l’option choisie pour la mise au point convient aux photos prises en gros plan. (p. 55) • Assurez-vous que l’objectif est propre. Dans le cas contraire, nettoyez-le. (p. 113) • Vérifiez que le sujet est placé à la bonne distance du flash. (p. 127) Les couleurs de la photo ne correspondent pas à celles de la scène Un réglage incorrect de la balance des blancs peut provoquer un mauvais rendu des couleurs. Sélectionnez l’option de balance des blancs qui s’adapte à la source de lumière. (p. 63) La photo est trop claire ou trop sombre. La photo s’avère surexposée ou sous-exposée. • Désactivez ou activez le flash. (p. 52) • Réglez la sensibilité ISO. (p. 54) • Réglez la valeur d’exposition. (p. 61) Avant de contacter le service après-vente Annexes 125 Problème Solutions possibles Les photos ne s’affichent pas sur le téléviseur. • Vérifiez que l’appareil photo est correctement branché sur le téléviseur avec le câble audio / vidéo. • Vérifiez que la carte mémoire contient des photos. Votre ordinateur ne reconnaît pas l’appareil photo • Vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement branché. • Assurez-vous que l’appareil photo est allumé. • Assurez-vous d’utiliser un système d’exploitation pris en charge. L’appareil photo se déconnecte de l’ordinateur pendant le transfert des fichiers. L’électricité statique peut interrompre la transmission des fichiers. Débranchez le câble USB, puis rebranchezle. Problème Solutions possibles i-Launcher ne fonctionne pas correctement • Fermez i-Launcher et redémarrez-le. • Vérifiez que i-Launcher est activé Activé dans le menu des paramètres. (p. 108) • En fonction des spécifications de votre ordinateur et de l’environnement dans lequel il se trouve, le lancement du programme peut ne pas se faire automatiquement. Dans ce cas, cliquez sur démarrer → Tous les programmes → Samsung → i-Launcher → Samsung i-Launcher sur votre ordinateur. (Pour Windows 8, ouvrez l'écran d'accueil, puis sélectionnez Toutes les All apps (applications) → Samsung i-Launcher.) Vous pouvez aussi cliquer sur Applications → Samsung → i-Launcher sur un ordinateur Mac. Le téléviseur ou l’ordinateur ne peuvent pas afficher les photos et les vidéos stockées sur une carte mémoire microSDXC. Les cartes mémoire microSDXC utilisent le système de fichier exFAT. Assurez-vous que le dispositif externe est compatible avec le système de fichier exFAT avant d’y connecter l’appareil photo. Votre ordinateur ne reconnaît pas la carte mémoire microSDXC Les cartes mémoire microSDXC utilisent le système de fichier exFAT. Pour utiliser une carte mémoire microSDXC sur un ordinateur Windows XP, téléchargez et effectuez la mise à jour du pilote du système de fichier exFAT, à partir du site Web de Microsoft. Annexes 126 Capteur d’image Type 1/2,3'' (environ 7,76 mm) CCD Pixels effectifs Environ 16,2 mégapixels Nombre total de pixels Environ 16,6 mégapixels Objectif Distance focale Objectif Samsung 12x Zoom optique f = 4,3 à 51,6 mm (équivalent film de 35 mm : 24 à 288 mm) Plage d’ouverture de l’objectif F3.1(GA) à F6.3(T) Zoom numérique • Mode d’images fixes : 1,0 à 2,0X • Mode Lecture : 1,0 à 14,4X (en fonction de la taille de l’image) • Intelli Zoom : 2,0X Affichage Type LCD TFT Caractéristiques 2,7 pouces (67,5 mm) QVGA(230K) Mise au point Type Mise au point automatique TTL (Mise au point au centre, Mise au point multiple, Mise au point avec suivi, MPA Détection des visages, Mise au point vidéo automatique continue (CAF)) Plage Grand angle (GA) Téléobjectif (T) Normale (AF) 80 cm à infini 250 cm à infini Macro 5 à 80 cm 130 à 250 cm Macro automatique 5 cm à infini 130 cm à infini Vitesse d’obturation • Scènes Automatique : 1/8 à 1/2 000 s. • Programme : 1 à 1/2 000 s. • Nuit : 8 à 1/2 000 s. • Feux d’artifice : 2 s. Exposition Contrôle AES Programme Mesure de l’exposition Multiple, Sélective, Centrée, Détection des visages Plage de mesures EV 2 – 17 (Large, ISO Auto), EV 4 – 19 (Télé, ISO Auto) Compensation ±2EV (Palier 1/3 EV) Equivalent ISO Automatique, ISO 80, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200 Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Annexes 127 Flash Mode Automatique, Anti yeux rouges, Contre jour, Synchronisation lente, Désactivé, Correction des yeux rouges Plage • Large : 0,2 à 4,0 m (ISO Auto) • Télé : 0,5 à 1,6 m (ISO Auto) Durée de rechargement Environ 5 s. Réduction des tremblements de l’appareil photo Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) Effet Mode Photo • Filtre photos (Filtre intelligent) : Miniature, Vignettage, Filtre croisé, Effet ultra grand angle, Classique, Rétro • Réglage des images : Netteté, Contraste, Saturation Mode Enregistrement vidéo Filtre vidéos : Miniature, Vignettage, Effet ultra grand angle, Classique, Rétro, Effet palette 1, Effet palette 2, Effet palette 3, Effet palette 4 Balance des blancs Balance des blancs automatique, Lumière du jour, Nuageux, Fluorescent haut, Fluorescent bas, Tungstène, Réglage personnalisé, Temp. couleur Impression de la date Date & heure, Date, Désactivée Prise de vue Photos • Modes : Scènes Automatique (Portrait, Portrait de nuit, Portrait en contre jour, Nuit, Contre jour, Paysage, Blanc, Vert naturel, Ciel Bleu, Coucher de Soleil, Macro, Texte Macro, Macro couleur, Trépied, Sport, Faible luminosité, Projecteur, Projecteur (Macro), Projecteur (Portrait)), Programme, Intelligent (Beauté, Paysage, Macro, Action, Silhouette, Coucher de soleil, Nuit, Feux d'artifice, Lumière), Panorama Live, Filtre photos • Rafale : Unique, Continue, Rafale, AEB • Retardateur : Désactivé, 10 s, 2 s, Double (10 s, 2 s) Vidéos • Modes : Détection intelligente de scène (Paysage, Ciel Bleu, Vert naturel, Coucher de Soleil), Filtre vidéos • Format : MP4 (H.264) (durée d’enregistrement max. : 20 min) • Taille : 1280 X 720, 640 X 480, 240 Web • Voix : Activée, Désactivée, Zoom silencieux • AF continu : AF continu Activé, AF continu Désactivé Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Annexes 128 Lecture Photos • Type : Image unique, Vignettes, Diaporama avec musique et effets, Album Photo intelligent* * Catégorie Album intelligent : Tout, Date, Type de fichier • Modifier : Rotation, Filtre intelligent, Luminosité, Contraste, Saturation, ACB, Retouche des visages, Correction des yeux rouges, Redimensionner, Rogner • Effet : Filtre intelligent (Normal, Miniature, Vignettage, Filtre croisé, Effet ultra grand angle, Classique, Rétro) Vidéos Retouche vidéo : Extraction d’images fixes, Réglage de la durée Stockage Support Mémoire externe (option) : carte microSD (2 Go garantis), carte microSDHC (jusqu’à 32 Go garanti), carte microSDXC (jusqu’à 64 Go garanti) - Classe 6 et plus recommandé Format de fichiers • Image fixe : JPEG (DCF), EXIF 2.3 • Clip vidéo : MP4 (vidéo : MPEG-4.AVC/H.264, audio : AAC) Format de l’image Icône Taille 4608 X 3456 4608 X 3072 4608 X 2592 3648 X 2736 2592 X 1944 1984 X 1488 1920 X 1080 1024 X 768 Réseau sans fil MobileLink, Remote Viewfinder, Courriel, Réseaux sociaux et Cloud, Samsung Link, AutoShare, Notification mise à niveau logicielle Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo Annexes 129 NFC Oui Interface Câble de sortie numérique USB 2.0 Entrée / sortie audio Haut-parleur intégré (Mono), Microphone (Mono) Sortie vidéo A/V : NTSC, PAL (sélectionnable) Connecteur d’alimentation CC 5,0 V Source d’alimentation Batterie rechargeable Batterie lithium-ion (BP70A, 700 mAh) Type de connecteur Micro USB (5 broches) La source d’alimentation peut varier en fonction de votre région. Dimensions (L x H x P) 100,9 X 61,2 X 20,7 mm (hors éléments en saillie) Poids 145 g (sans batterie, ni carte mémoire) Température de fonctionnement 0 à 40 °C Humidité en fonctionnement 5 à 85 % Logiciel i-Launcher En vue d’améliorer le produit, ces caractéristiques peuvent changer sans avis préalable. Annexes 130 ACB (Réglage automatique du contraste) Cette fonctionnalité améliore automatiquement le contraste de vos images lorsque le sujet est rétroéclairé ou en cas de contraste lumineux entre le sujet et l'arrièreplan. AEB (Auto Exposure Bracket) Cette fonctionnalité permet de prendre automatiquement plusieurs photos à différentes expositions afin de vous aider à obtenir une exposition correcte. AF (Mise au point automatique) Système qui permet d’effectuer une mise au point automatique sur le sujet. L’appareil photo se base sur le contraste pour opérer la mise au point automatique. Ouverture L’ouverture contrôle la quantité de lumière atteignant le capteur de l’appareil photo. Bougé de l’appareil photo (flou) Si vous bougez l’appareil photo alors que l’obturateur est ouvert, l’image risque d’être floue. Cela est d’autant plus vrai si la vitesse de l’obturateur est lente. Vous pouvez éviter ce problème en augmentant la sensibilité, en utilisant le flash ou en augmentant la vitesse de l’obturateur. Vous pouvez également utiliser un trépied ou la fonction OIS pour stabiliser l'appareil photo. Composition En photographie, ce terme signifie la disposition des éléments d’une scène. En règle générale, une bonne composition doit obéir à la règle des tiers. DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) Spécification créée par la Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA) qui définit le format et le système de fichiers des appareils photo. Profondeur de champ Zone de netteté acceptable entre le point de mise au point le plus proche et celui le plus éloigné. Elle est variable et dépend de la distance focale et de l’ouverture utilisées, mais aussi de la distance entre l’appareil photo et le sujet. Par exemple, l’utilisation d’une valeur d’ouverture plus petite créé une grande profondeur de champ et brouille l’arrière-plan de la composition. Zoom numérique Fonctionnalité qui augmente artificiellement le zoom disponible de l’objectif du zoom (zoom optique). Le zoom numérique dégrade la qualité de l’image au fur et à mesure que ce type de grossissement augmente. Glossaire Glossaire Annexes 131 EV (Valeur d’exposition) Cette fonctionnalité vous permet de régler rapidement la valeur d’exposition mesurée par l’appareil photo, selon des incréments restreints, afin d’améliorer l’exposition de vos photos. Réglez la compensation EV sur -1,0 EV pour obtenir une valeur plus sombre d’un pas et sur 1,0 EV pour une valeur plus claire d’un pas. Compensation EV Ensemble des combinaisons de vitesses de l’obturateur et d’ouverture de l’objectif pour une même exposition. Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format) Spécification créée par la Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEIDA) qui définit le format de fichiers pour les appareils photo. Exposition Quantité de lumière atteignant le capteur de l’appareil photo. L’exposition est contrôlée par la vitesse de l’obturateur, la valeur d’ouverture et la sensibilité ISO. Flash Lumière brève et intense qui permet de créer une exposition adéquate lorsque la luminosité est faible. Longueur de focale Distance entre le centre de l’objectif et son point focal (exprimée en millimètres). Des distances focales plus importantes réduisent les angles de vue et agrandissent le sujet. Celles moins élevées agrandissent à l’inverse les angles de vue. H.264/MPEG-4 Format vidéo de compression élevée établi par les organisations normatives internationales ISO-IEC et ITU-T. Ce codec, développé par la Joint Video Team (JVT), améliore la qualité vidéo même lorsque le débit binaire est faible. Capteur d’image Partie physique de l’appareil photo qui comporte une cellule photosensible pour chaque pixel de l’image. Chaque cellule photosensible enregistre la valeur de la luminosité d’une exposition. Il existe deux types de capteurs : CCD (Charge-coupled Device) et CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor). Glossaire Annexes 132 Sensibilité ISO Sensibilité de l’appareil photo à la lumière basée sur la sensibilité du film utilisé dans l’appareil photo. A une sensibilité ISO élevée, la vitesse de l’obturateur de l’appareil photo est plus grande, ce qui réduit le flou causé par les tremblements de l’appareil ou une luminosité insuffisante. Toutefois, avec une sensibilité plus élevée, le risque de parasites s’avère également plus grand. JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) Méthode de compression des images numériques avec pertes. Les images JPEG sont compressées afin de réduire la taille de leur fichier avec une dégradation minimale de la résolution. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) Ecran d’affichage couramment utilisé dans le secteur de l’électronique grand public. Ce type d’écran nécessite un rétroéclairage séparé, de type CCFL ou LED, pour reproduire les couleurs. Macro Cette fonctionnalité permet de prendre des photos en gros plan ou de photographier de petits objets. Cela permet à l’appareil photo d’effectuer une mise au point nette à une échelle proche de la réalité (1/1). Mesure de l’exposition Correspond à la manière dont l’appareil photo mesure la quantité de lumière nécessaire à la définition de l’exposition. MJPEG (Motion JPEG) Format vidéo avec une compression d’images JPEG. NFC (Near Field Communication, Communication en champ proche) NFC représente un ensemble de normes de transmission radio de proximité très réduite. Vous pouvez utiliser des dispositifs compatibles NFC pour activer des fonctionnalités ou échanger des données entre appareils. Parasite Problème d’affichage des pixels sur une image numérique. Des parasites peuvent apparaître si les photos sont prises avec une sensibilité trop élevée ou avec un réglage de sensibilité automatique dans un environnement sombre. OIS (Stabilisation optique de l’image) Cette fonction permet de compenser en temps réel tout mouvement ou toute vibration lors de la prise de vue. Aucune dégradation de l’image par comparaison avec la fonction Stabilisation optique de l’image. Glossaire Annexes 133 Zoom optique Zoom qui permet d’agrandir les images à travers l’objectif, sans dégrader la qualité des images. Quality Expression du taux de compression d’une image numérique. Lorsque la qualité de l’image est élevée, le taux de compression est faible et la taille du fichier plus importante. Résolution Nombre de pixels d’une image numérique. Les images à résolution élevée comportent plus de pixels et présentent généralement davantage de détails que les images avec une faible résolution. Vitesse d’obturation La vitesse d’obturation est définie par la durée nécessaire à l’ouverture et à la fermeture de l’obturateur. Dans le cadre de la luminosité d’une photo, la vitesse d’obturation constitue un facteur important, car elle contrôle la quantité de lumière qui passe à travers l’ouverture avant d’atteindre le capteur d’images. Par ailleurs, une vitesse d’obturation rapide accorde moins de temps à la lumière pour pénétrer. La photo devient plus sombre et immobilise un sujet en mouvement plus facilement. Vignettage Réduction de la luminosité ou de la saturation d’une image à sa périphérie (bords externes). Cela permet de mettre en évidence les sujets positionnés au centre de l’image. Balance des blancs (équilibre des couleurs) Réglage de l’intensité des couleurs (généralement les couleurs primaires comme le rouge, le vert et le bleu) d’une image. L’objectif est un rendu exact des couleurs. Annexes 134 Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit (Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques) (Applicable aux pays disposant de systèmes de collecte séparés) Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque audio, câble USB, etc.) ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée des déchets présentant des risques environnementaux et de santé publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres déchets. Vous favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un développement durable. Les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les procédures et les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage. Les entreprises et particuliers sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets. PlanetFirst représente l’engagement de Samsung Electronics à l’égard du développement durable et de la responsabilité sociale, illustré à travers des activités commerciales écologiques et contrôlées. Elimination des batteries de ce produit (Applicable aux pays disposant de systèmes de collecte séparés) Le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l'emballage indique que les batteries de ce produit ne doivent pas être éliminées en fin de vie avec les autres déchets ménagers. L'indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de mercure, de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive CE 2006/66. Si les batteries ne sont pas correctement éliminées, ces substances peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou à l'environnement. Afin de protéger les ressources naturelles et d'encourager la réutilisation du matériel, veillez à séparer les batteries des autres types de déchets et à les recycler via votre système local de collecte gratuite des batteries. Annexes 135 A Accessoires en option 14 Affichage rapide 108 Agrandissement 74 Aide à la prise de vue 107 Anti yeux rouges Mode Lecture 81 Mode Prise de vue 52 Auto Exposure Bracket (AEB) 65 Auto portrait 58 AutoShare 94 B Balance des blancs 63 Batterie Attention 119 Chargement en cours 19 Insertion 18 Bouton DIRECT LINK 17 C CAF (AF continu) 41 Capteur de mise au point Emplacement 15 Paramètres 110 Caractéristiques de l’appareil photo 126 Carte mémoire Insérer 18 Précautions 117 Chargement en cours 19 Configuration date/heure 109 Connexion à votre ordinateur Mac 85 Contenu du coffret 14 Contraste Mode Lecture 80 Mode Prise de vue 66 D Déclencheur 15 Déconnexion de l'appareil photo 85 Détection des regards 59 Détection des sourires 59 Détection des visages 58 Diaporama 76 Douille pour trépied 15 E Ecran d’accueil 23 Enfoncer le déclencheur à mi-course 35 Entretien de l’appareil photo 113 Exposition 61 Extraction d’une image d’une vidéo 82 F Filtre intelligent Mode d’enregistrement vidéo 46 Mode Lecture 79 Mode Photo 45 Flash Anti yeux rouges 53 Automatique 52 Contre jour 53 Correction des yeux rouges 53 Désactivé 52 Synchronisation lente 53 Formatage 110 Index Annexes 136 I Icônes Mode Lecture 70 Mode Prise de vue 22 Image de démarrage 107 Impression 110 Intelli Zoom 33 L Luminosité 108 Mode Lecture 80 Mode Prise de vue 61 M Macro Macro 56 Macro automatique 56 Messages d'erreur 112 Mesure de l'exposition Centrée 62 Multiple 62 Sélective 62 Miniatures 71 Mise au point avec suivi 57 MobileLink 95 Mode Détection intelligente de scène 40 Mode Economie d'énergie 108 Mode Filtre photos 45 Mode Filtre vidéos 46 Mode intelligent 42 Mode Lecture 70 Mode Panorama Live 44 Mode Programme 39 Mode Scènes automatiques 38 Modes Rafale Auto Exposure Bracket (AEB) 65 Continue 65 Rafale 65 Mode Vidéo 41 N Netteté 66 Nettoyage Boîtier de l’appareil photo 113 Ecran 113 Objectif 113 NFC (Tag & Go) 93 P Paramètres 109 Paramètres de fuseau horaire 20, 109 Paramètres linguistiques 109 Pivotement 78 Port audio / vidéo 15 Portraits Auto portrait 58 Détection des regards 59 Détection des sourires 59 Détection des visages 58 Port USB 15 Protection de fichiers 73 R Rafale 65 Réglage automatique du contraste (ACB) Mode Lecture 80 Mode Prise de vue 62 Réglage de l’heure 20 Index Annexes 137 Réglage des images ACB 80 Anti yeux rouges 81 Contraste Mode Lecture 80 Mode Prise de vue 66 Luminosité Mode Lecture 80 Mode Prise de vue 61 Netteté 66 Saturation Mode Lecture 80 Mode Prise de vue 66 Réglages du son 30 Remise à zéro 110 Réseau sans fil 89 Résolution Mode Lecture 78 Mode Prise de vue 49 Retardateur Mode Prise de vue 51 Voyant du retardateur 15 Retouche de photos 78 Retouche des visages Mode Lecture 80 Retouche de vidéos Extraction 82 Recadrage 82 S Samsung Link 103 Saturation Mode Lecture 80 Mode Prise de vue 66 Sensibilité ISO 54 Service après-vente 123 Service de partage Accès 101 Publication de photos ou de vidéos 101 Son de la mise au point 107 Sortie vidéo 108 Stabilisation optique de l’image (OIS) 34 Suppression de fichiers 73 T Touche de fonction 16 Touche Lecture 16 Touche Marche / Arrêt 15 Touche Menu 16 Transfert de fichiers Email 98 Mac 85 Windows 84 Type d'affichage 29 V Vidéo Mode Lecture 77 Mode Prise de vue 41 Viseur à distance 96 Index Annexes 138 Visionnage de fichiers Catégorie 72 Diaporama 76 Miniatures 71 Photos panoramiques 75 Téléviseur 83 Voyant d'état 16 Z Zone de mise au point Mise au point au centre 56 Mise au point avec suivi 56 Mise au point multiple 56 Zoom Réglages sonores du zoom 67 Touche Zoom 16 Utilisation du zoom 32 Zoom numérique 32 Index Annexes 139 Pour les utilisateurs résidant en France Service Consommateur Contact téléphonique : Du lundi au samedi de 9 h à 20 h 01 48 63 00 00 Adresse postale : SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS FRANCE ZI Paris Nord II, BP 50116 95950 Roissy CDG FRANCE Annexes 140 Pour les utilisateurs résidant au Canada SERVICE À LA CLIENTÈLE Téléphone : Du lundi au vendredi de 8 h 30 à 20 h (heure normale de l'Est) 1 800 726-7864 Adresse postale : Samsung Electronics Canada Inc. 55 Standish Court, 10th Floor Mississauga ON L5R 4B2 Pour toute question ou demande de service après-vente, veuillez consulter les conditions de garantie accompagnant votre produit ou rendez-vous sur le www.samsung.fr ou www.samsung.ca HMX-F90/HMX-F91 HMX-F900/HMX-F910 HMX-F920 Digital Camcorder www.samsung.com/register USER MANUAL For video recording, use a memory card that supports faster write speeds. - Recommended Memory Card: 6MB/s (Class 6) or above. 2 SAFETY WARNINGS What the icons and signs in this user manual mean: Safety Icon Meaning WARNING There is a potential risk of death or serious injury. CAUTION There is a potential risk of personal injury or damage to the product. To reduce the risk of fire, explosion, electric shock, or personal injury when using your camcorder, follow these basic safety precautions. Here are hints or page number references you will find helpful when you operate the camcorder. Settings required before using a function. These warning signs are here to prevent injury to you and others. Please follow them explicitly. After reading this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference. PRECAUTIONS Warning! • When using the AC power adaptor with your camcorder, connect the adaptor to an outlet with protective grounding. • Do not expose the camcorder battery to direct sunlight, heaters, radiators, fire, or any source of excessive heat. Caution If you replace the battery with the wrong battery, you can cause an explosion. Replace only with the same battery or an equivalent type. To disconnect the apparatus from the mains, the plug must be pulled out from the mains socket, therefore the mains plug shall be readily operable. IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON USE Thank you for purchasing this Samsung Camcorder. Please read this user manual carefully before you use the camcorder and keep it handy for future reference. Should your camcorder fail to operate correctly, refer to Troubleshooting. pages 93~102 This User Manual covers models HMX-F90, HMX-F91, HMX-F900, HMX-F910, and HMX-F920. • Illustrations of model HMX-F90 are used in this user manual. • The displays in this user manual may not be exactly the same as those you see on the LCD screen. • Designs and specifications of the camcorder and other accessories are subject to change without notice. • Before using the camcorder, read the Safety information carefully and then use the product properly. • Samsung is not responsible for any injury or damage caused by not following the instructions in the user manual. • In this manual, a ‘memory card’ or ‘card’ means an SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory card. • In this user manual’s function description tables, the icon shown in the on-screen display column will appear on the screen when you set the corresponding function. Example: 720X576/50p (16:9) - Video Resolution Submenu item page 53 Item Use On-screen display 720X576/50p (16:9) Records in 720x576 (50p) resolution with 16:9 aspect ratio. If you set the video resolution to 720X576/50p (16:9), the corresponding icon ( ) will appear on the screen. Before reading this user manual About this user manual 3 Before reading this user manual The following terms are used in this manual: • ‘Scene’ refers to the point where you press the [Recording start/stop] button to start recording until you press it again to stop recording. • The terms ‘photo’ and ‘still image’ are used interchangeably with the same meaning. • This camcorder records video in H.264 (MPEG4/AVC) format. • You can play back and edit the video recorded by the camcorder on a personal computer using the internal software of this camcorder. • Please note that this camcorder is not compatible with other digital video formats. • Before recording important video, make a trial recording. Play back your trial recording to make sure the video and audio have been recorded properly. • Recorded contents may be lost due to a mistake when handling this camcorder or memory card, etc. Samsung will not provide compensation for damages due to the loss of recorded contents. • Make a backup of important recorded data. Protect your important recorded data by copying the files to a PC. We also recommend you copy it from your PC to other recording media for storage. Refer to the software installation and USB connection guide. • Copyrights: Please note that this camcorder is intended for individual use only. Data recorded on the storage media in this camcorder using other digital/analogue media or devices is protected by the Copyright Act and cannot be used without permission of the owner of the copyright, except for personal enjoyment. Even if you record an event such as a show, performance, or exhibition for personal enjoyment, we strongly recommend that you obtain permission beforehand. Notes regarding trademarks • All the trade names and registered trademarks mentioned in this manual or other documentation provided with your Samsung product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Furthermore, ‘ TM’ and ‘ ®’ are not mentioned in each case in this manual. • SD, SDHC and SDXC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. • Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, and DirectX® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. • Intel®, Core™, Core 2 Duo®, and Pentium® are the registered trademarks or trademarks of the Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries. • AMD and Athlon™ are either registered trademarks or trademarks of AMD in the United States and other countries. • Macintosh, Mac OS are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. • YouTube is a trademark of Google Inc. • Flickr is a trademark of Yahoo. • Facebook is a trademark of Facebook Inc. • Twitter is a trademark of Twitter Inc. • Picasa is a trademark of Google Inc. • Adobe, the Adobe logo, and Adobe Acrobat are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. • HDMI, the HDMI logo and the term “High Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. Proper recording etiquette • Do not record videos or photos of people without their authorisation or consent. • Do not record videos or photos in forbidden recording places. • Do not record videos or photos in private places. Before using this camcorder 4 The safety precautions illustrated below are to prevent personal injury or material damages. Heed all instructions carefully. WARNING Means that there is a potential risk of serious personal injury. Prohibited action. Do not touch the product. CAUTION Means that there is a potential risk of personal injury or damage to the product. Do not disassemble the product. Unplug from the power supply. This precaution must be followed. WARNING Do not overload outlets or extension cords as this may result in abnormal heat or fire. Using the camcorder at temperatures over 60˚C (140˚F) may result in fire. Keeping the battery at a high temperature may cause an explosion. Do not allow water, metal, or inflammable material to enter the camcorder or power adaptor. Doing so may pose a fire hazard. No sand or dust! Fine sand or dust entering the camcorder or power adaptor could cause malfunctions or defects. L I O No oil! Oil entering the camcorder or power adaptor could cause electric shock, malfunctions or defects. Do not aim the camcorder directly into the sun. Doing so could cause eye injuries, as well as lead to malfunctioning of internal parts of the product. Do not bend the USB cable or damage the power adaptor by pressing on it with a heavy object. There is a risk of fire or an electric shock. Do not disconnect the adaptor by pulling on its USB cable, as this could damage the cable. Safety information 5 Safety information diulf gninaelc Do not use the power adaptor if it has damaged, split or broken cords or wires. Doing so may cause fire or electric shock. Do not connect the power adaptor unless the plug can be fully inserted with no part of the blades exposed. Do not dispose of the battery in a fire as it may explode. Never use cleaning fluid or similar chemicals to clean the camcorder. Do not spray cleaners directly on the camcorder. Keep the camcorder away from water when using it near the beach or pool or when it rains. There is a risk of a malfunction or an electric shock. Keep the used lithium battery or memory card out of the reach of children. If the lithium battery or memory card is swallowed by a child, consult a physician immediately. Do not plug or unplug the power adaptor with wet hands. There is a risk of electric shock. Keep the power adaptor unplugged when not in use or during lightning storms. There is a risk of fire. Unplug the power adaptor before you clean it. If you leave it plugged in, there is a risk of a malfunction or an electric shock. If the camcorder emits an abnormal sound or smell, or smokes, unplug the power adaptor immediately and request service from a Samsung service centre. There is a risk of fire or personal injury. If the camcorder malfunctions, immediately detach the power adaptor or battery from the camcorder. There is a risk of fire or injury. Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify the camcorder or the power adaptor. There is a risk of fire or an electric shock. 6 Safety information CAUTION Do not press the surface of the LCD with force, or hit it with a sharp object. If you push the LCD surface, display unevenness may occur. Do not drop or expose the camcorder, battery, power adaptor or other accessories to severe vibrations or impact. This may cause a malfunction or injury. Do not use the camcorder on a tripod (not supplied) in a place where it is subject to severe vibrations or impact. Do not use the camcorder near direct sunlight or heating equipment. This may cause a malfunction or injury. EDICITCESNI Do not leave the camcorder in a closed vehicle for a long time where the temperature is very high. Do not expose the camcorder to soot or steam. Thick soot or steam could damage the camcorder case or cause a malfunction. Do not use the camcorder near dense exhaust gas generated by gasoline or diesel engines, or corrosive gas such as hydrogen sulphide. Doing so may corrode the external or internal terminals, disabling normal operation. Do not expose the camcorder to insecticide. Insecticide entering the camcorder could cause the product to fail to operate normally. Turn the camcorder off and cover it with vinyl sheet, etc. before using insecticide. Do not expose the camcorder to sudden changes in temperature or high humidity. There is also a risk of defect or electric shock when using outdoors during lightning storms. Do not place the camcorder down on the open LCD screen. Do not wipe the camcorder body with benzene or thinner. The exterior coating could peel off or the case surface could deteriorate. Do not leave the LCD screen open when not using the camcorder. 7 Safety information Do not hold the camcorder by the LCD screen when lifting it. The LCD screen could detach and the camcorder may fall. Do not use the camcorder near a TV or radio. Interference from the camcorder could cause noise on the TV or in the radio broadcast. Do not use the camcorder near sources of strong radio waves or magnetic fields such as speakers and large motors. Noise from these sources could distort the video or audio you are recording. Use Samsung-approved accessories only. Using products from other manufacturers may cause overheating, fire, explosion, electric shock or personal injuries caused by abnormal operation. Place the camcorder on a stable surface that is well ventilated. Keep important data separately. Samsung is not responsible for data loss. Only plug the power adaptor plug into a socket that is easily accessible. If any problem occurs with the product, you must pull the plug out of the socket to disconnect the power completely. Turning off the power button on the product does not turn off the camcorder completely. Other manufacturers of optional accessories compatible with this camcorder are responsible for their own products. Use the optional accessories according to the safety instructions. Samsung is not responsible for any malfunction, risk of fire, electric shock, or damages caused by using unauthorised accessories. 8 Before reading this user manual ....................... 2 SAFETY WARNINGS..................................................................... 2 PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................. 2 IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON USE ........................................... 2 Safety information............................................ 4 Quick start guide ........................................... 10 Getting to know the camcorder...................... 13 UNPACKING ............................................................................... 13 LOCATION OF CONTROLS......................................................... 14 IDENTIFIYING THE SCREEN DISPLAYS...................................... 16 Getting started .............................................. 19 INSERTING/EJECTING THE BATTERY........................................ 19 CHARGING THE BATTERY ......................................................... 20 CHECKING THE BATTERY STATE............................................... 21 Basic operation of the camcorder................... 24 TURNING YOUR CAMCORDER ON/OFF .................................... 24 SWITCHING TO THE POWER SAVING MODE ............................ 24 SETTING THE DATE/TIME FOR THE FIRST TIME........................ 25 SETTING THE OPERATION MODES ........................................... 26 SWITCHING THE INFORMATION DISPLAY MODE...................... 26 USING THE SHORTCUT MENU (OK GUIDE)............................... 27 SELECTING THE LANGUAGES................................................... 29 Getting ready to start recording ...................... 30 INSERTING AND EJECTING A MEMORY CARD (NOT SUPPLIED)... 30 SELECTING A SUITABLE MEMORY CARD (NOT SUPPLIED)......................................................................... 31 RECORDABLE TIME AND CAPACITY ......................................... 33 ATTACHING THE STRAP............................................................. 34 ADJUSTING THE LCD SCREEN.................................................. 34 Basic recording ............................................. 35 RECORDING VIDEOS.................................................................. 35 RecordING pause/RESUME .................................................. 36 TAGGING AND CAPTURING GREAT MOMENTS WHILE RECORDING (MY CLIP FUNCTION)............................................ 37 RECORDING PHOTOS................................................................ 38 RECORDING WITH EASE FOR BEGINNERS (SMART AUTO)...... 39 Zooming in/out....................................................................... 40 USING THE BACK LIGHT BUTTON............................................. 41 Basic playback.............................................. 42 CHANGING THE PLAYBACK MODE ........................................... 42 PLAYING BACK VIDEOS ............................................................. 43 PLAYING BACK My Clip............................................................ 45 USING THE SMART BGM FUNCTION......................................... 45 TAGGING and capturing great moments while playing back video ............................................................... 46 VIEWING PHOTOS...................................................................... 47 ZOOMING DURING PHOTO PLAYBACK..................................... 48 Using the menu items.................................... 49 HANDLING MENUS .................................................................... 49 MENU ITEMS .............................................................................. 50 Contents 9 Contents Advanced recording ...................................... 52 iSCENE ....................................................................................... 52 Video Resolution.......................................................................... 53 Photo Resolution......................................................................... 54 White Balance ............................................................................. 54 Face Detection ............................................................................ 56 EV (Exposure Value)..................................................................... 57 C.Nite.......................................................................................... 58 Focus .......................................................................................... 58 Anti-Shake(HDIS)......................................................................... 60 Digital Special Effect .................................................................... 61 Zoom Type .................................................................................. 62 Cont. Shot................................................................................... 63 Time Lapse REC ......................................................................... 64 Guideline ..................................................................................... 66 Advanced playback ....................................... 67 Thumbnail View Option................................................................ 67 PlayOption .................................................................................. 68 Smart BGM Option...................................................................... 68 Delete.......................................................................................... 70 Delete My Clip ............................................................................. 71 Protect ........................................................................................ 72 Share Mark ................................................................................. 73 Slide Show .................................................................................. 74 File Info........................................................................................ 74 Other settings................................................ 75 Storage Info................................................................................. 75 File No......................................................................................... 75 Date/Time Set ............................................................................. 76 Date/Time Display ....................................................................... 76 LCD Brightness ........................................................................... 77 Auto LCD Off............................................................................... 77 Beep Sound ................................................................................ 78 Shutter Sound ............................................................................. 78 Auto Power Off............................................................................ 79 PC Software ................................................................................ 79 Format......................................................................................... 80 Default Set................................................................................... 80 Language .................................................................................... 80 Open source licences .................................................................. 80 Connecting to a TV........................................ 81 Connecting to a high definition TV with HDMI.............. 81 CONNECTING TO A REGULAR TV ............................................. 82 VIEWING ON A TV SCREEN........................................................ 83 Dubbing videos ............................................. 84 DUBBING TO VCR OR DVD/HDD RECORDERS......................... 84 Using with a windows computer..................... 85 WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH A WINDOWS COMPUTER ............... 85 USING THE Intelli-studio programme...................................... 86 Upload your videos directly to YouTube! .................... 90 USING AS A REMOVABLE STORAGE DEVICE............................ 91 Troubleshooting............................................. 93 WARNING INDICATORS AND MESSAGES ................................. 93 Symptoms and solutions................................................... 96 Maintenance & additional information............ 103 MAINTENANCE......................................................................... 103 USING YOUR CAMCORDER ABROAD ..................................... 104 GLOSSARY............................................................................... 105 Specifications.............................................. 106 10 Quick start guide STEP 1: Get ready 1 Insert the battery into the battery slot. page 19 2 Charge the battery fully. page 20 3 Insert a memory card. page 30 CARD CARD STEP 2: Record videos and photos 1 Open the LCD screen and press the [Power ( )] button to turn on the camcorder. • Set the [Lens cover open/close] switch to open ( ). page 15 2 To record videos, press the [Recording start/stop] button or, to record photos, press the [PHOTO] button. pages 35, 38 This quick start guide introduces the basic operation and features of your camcorder. See the reference pages for more information. [Recording start/stop] button [Recording start/stop] button 11 Quick start guide STEP 3: Play back videos or photos Viewing videos or photos on the LCD screen You can find recordings quickly by using the thumbnail view. 1 Press the [MODE] button to select the playback ( ) mode. 2 Select the video or photo thumbnail view by using the [Zoom] lever. 3 Use the [Control (Up/Down/Left/Right)] button to select a desired video or photo, and then press the [Control (OK)] button. Normal 1/10 Photo Move Play 0:00:55 Viewing on a TV You can enjoy detailed, brilliant quality videos on a connected TV. pages 81~83 CARD CARD STEP 4: Save recorded videos / photos Using the Intelli-studio programme built in to your camcorder, you can import videos and photos into your computer and edit or share the videos and photos with your friends and family. For details, see pages 86~89. CARD 12 Quick start guide Importing and viewing videos/photos to your PC from the camcorder 1 Start the Intelli-studio programme by connecting the camcorder to your PC with a USB cable. • A new file saving screen appears with the Intelli-studio main window. Click Yes, and the uploading procedure starts. 2 Any new files are saved to your PC and registered to Contents Manager in the Intelli-studio programme. • You can arrange the files by different criteria such as Face, Date, Location, etc. Contents Manager Saved files in your PC Folders directory on your PC 3 Double-click the file you would like to play back. Sharing videos/photos on Web sites Share your contents with the world by uploading photos and videos directly to a web site with a single click. Click the Share ( ) Upload tab on the Intelli-studio browser. page 89 Intelli-studio runs automatically when you connect the camcorder to a Windows computer (if you have set PC Software: On). page 79 STEP 5: Delete videos or photos If the camcorder’s storage media is full, you cannot record new videos or photos. Delete videos or photos you have saved to your computer from the camcorder’s storage media. Then you can record new videos or photos on newly freed up space. [MODE] button Playback ( ) mode [MENU] button Delete page 70 13 UNPACKING Your new camcorder comes with the accessories shown on this page. If any of these items is missing from your box, call Samsung’s Customer Care Centre. Model name Internal memory Lens HMX-F90 HMX-F91 HMX-F900 HMX-F910 HMX-F920 - 52x (Optical), 70x (Intelli), 130x (Digital) • Although the models have some features that are different, they operate in the same way. • The exact appearance of each item may vary by model. • The contents may vary depending on the sales region. • You can purchase parts and accessories after consulting with your local Samsung dealer. SAMSUNG is not responsible for reduced battery life time or malfunctions caused by any unauthorised use of accessories such as the power adaptor or the batteries. • A memory card is not included. See page 31 for memory cards compatible with your camcorder. Check your accessories Battery Power adaptor USB cable Audio/Video cable Quick start guide Micro HDMI cable Carrying case External battery charger Memory card/ Memory card adaptor Optional accessories Getting to know the camcorder 14 Getting to know the camcorder LOCATION OF CONTROLS Front & Left 1 Lens 2 MENU button 3 Control (Up/Down/Left/Right/OK) button / Zoom (T/W) button 4 Recording start/stop button 5 LCD screen 6 Memory card/Jack cover ⓐ USB jack ( ) ⓑ Memory card slot ( ) ⓒ AV jack ( ) ⓓ CHG (charging) indicator ⓔ HDMI jack ( ) 7 Internal speaker 8 Display ( ) button 9 Recording pause/resume ( ) button 10 Back light ( ) button / SMART BGM button 11 SMART AUTO ( ) button / Share ( ) button 12 Power ( ) button 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 1 7 ⓑ CARD ⓐ ⓒ ⓓ ⓔ 15 Getting to know the camcorder Right/Top & Bottom 1 MODE button 2 Zoom lever (T/W) 3 PHOTO / My Clip button 4 Strap 5 Strap hook 6 Lens cover open ( )/close ( ) switch 7 Internal microphone 8 Battery release switch (BATT.) 9 Tripod receptacle Rear 1 Mode indicator : Recording mode (Video/Photo) : Playback mode 2 Recording start/stop button 3 Battery slot Be careful not to cover the internal microphone and lens during recording. 8 9 2 3 1 7 6 4 5 1 3 2 16 Getting to know the camcorder 1/50 STBY 0:00:00 [220Min] +0.3 01/JAN/2013 00:00 1 Sec/ 24 Hr 9999 • This camcorder provides one combined video and photo recording mode. You can easily record videos or photos in the same mode without having to change it. • The on-screen indicators are based on a 16GB SDHC memory card. • The settings of functions marked with a are lost when the camcorder turns off. • For enhanced performance, the display indications and their order are subject to change without prior notice. • The total number of recordable photos is based on the available space on the storage media. • The maximum number the photo counter can display is 9,999. Left of the LCD screen Indicator Meaning / Recording mode (Video/Photo) STBY// / Operating status (standby/ recording/pause/photo capturing) 0:00:00 [220Min] Time counter (video recording time, remaining recordable time) / iSCENE / Smart Auto Time Lapse REC My Clip 9999 Photo image counter (total number of recordable photos) White Balance Manual focus 1/50 C.Nite +0.3 EV (Exposure Value) Zoom (optical zoom / intelli zoom / digital zoom) Digital Special Effect 01/JAN/2013 00:00 Date/Time Display Right of the LCD screen Indicator Meaning Storage media (memory card) Battery info. (remaining battery level) , Photo Resolution, Video Resolution Anti-Shake (HDIS) Back light Continuous shot Face Detection IDENTIFIYING THE SCREEN DISPLAYS The available functions vary depending on the selected operation mode. Different indicators appear depending on the setting values. • The On Screen Display (OSD) below appears when the camcorder is in the recording ( ) mode only. • Press the [MODE] button to select the recording ( ) mode. page 26 Video and Photo recording mode 17 Getting to know the camcorder • The On Screen Display (OSD) below appears in the video playback ( ) mode only. • Press the [MODE] button to select the playback ( ) mode. page 26 Video playback mode: Thumbnail view Video playback mode: Single view 0:00:00/0:00:55 Thumbnail View 100-0001 Top of the LCD screen Indicator Meaning Video playback mode / / / Playback status (playback/pause/ search) 0:00:00/0:00:55 Time code (elapsed time / recorded time) Storage media (memory card) Battery info (remaining battery level) PlayOption Video Resolution Indicator Meaning My Clip Share Mark Protect Shortcut menu Bottom of the LCD screen Indicator Meaning Button guide 100-0001 File name (file number) Normal 1/10 Photo Move Play 0:00:55 Top of the LCD screen Indicator Meaning Video playback mode Storage media (memory card) Battery info (remaining battery level) Bottom of the LCD screen Indicator Meaning Button guide Centre of the LCD screen Indicator Meaning 0:00:55 Recorded time 1/10 Current video / total number of recorded videos Protect Share Mark My Clip Error file Scroll bar 18 Getting to know the camcorder • This On Screen Display (OSD) below appears in the photo playback ( ) mode only. • Press the [MODE] button to select the playback ( ) mode. page 26 Photo playback mode: Thumbnail view Photo playback mode: Single view 1/10 Thumbnail View 100-0001 Top of the LCD screen Indicator Meaning Photo playback mode Slide Show 1/10 Current photo / total number of recorded photos Storage media (memory card) Battery info (remaining battery level) Photo Resolution Indicator Meaning Protect Shortcut menu Bottom of the LCD screen Indicator Meaning Button guide 100-0001 File name (file number) Normal 1/10 Movie Move Play Top of the LCD screen Indicator Meaning Photo playback mode Storage media (memory card) Battery info (remaining battery level) Bottom of the LCD screen Indicator Meaning Button guide Centre of the LCD screen Indicator Meaning 1/10 Current photo / total number of recorded photos Protect Error file Scroll bar 19 To insert the battery Insert the battery into the battery slot until it softly clicks. • Make sure that the SAMSUNG logo on the battery is facing you when the camcorder is placed as shown in the figure. Getting started To eject the battery 1 Gently push the [Battery release (BATT.)] switch in the direction shown in the figure to eject the battery. 2 Push down, and then lift the battery out in the direction shown in the figure. [Battery release (BATT.)] switch • Use only Samsung-approved batteries. Do not use batteries from other manufacturers. Otherwise, there is a danger of overheating, fire, or explosion. • Samsung is not responsible for the problems caused by unapproved batteries. • Remove the battery from the camcorder when the camcorder is not in use. • We recommend you purchase one or more additional batteries to allow continuous use of your camcorder. INSERTING/EJECTING THE BATTERY 20 Getting started CHARGING THE BATTERY You can charge the battery with the USB cable and power adaptor. Make sure that you use the supplied USB cable or power adapter to charge the battery. If you use any other power adapter for the camcorder, it will not work properly or the battery may not be charged. It may also cause an electric shock or result in a fire. 1 Insert the battery into the camcorder. page 19 2 Open the jack cover of the camcorder. 3 Charge the battery using the USB cable and power adaptor. • The CHG (charge) indicator lights up and charging starts. When the battery is fully charged, the charging (CHG) indicator turns green. page 21 • Charging the battery at low temperature may take longer or the battery may not charge fully (The green indicator will not turn on). • Make sure that there are no foreign substances on the plug or in the socket when you connect the power adaptor to the camcorder. • When using the power adaptor, place it close to the wall outlet. If you experience a malfunction while using the camcorder, separate the power adaptor immediately from the wall outlet. • Do not use the power adaptor in a tight space, such as between furnishings. • Make sure to turn off the camcorder before disconnecting the power adaptor. Otherwise, you can damage the storage media or data. • When recording indoors with a wall outlet available, it is convenient to use the power adaptor instead of the battery. • We recommend you charge the battery in a place with an ambient temperature between 50˚F and 86˚F (10°C~30°C). • If the camcorder is turned on, the battery will still charge, but more charging time will be needed. We recommend you keep the camcorder turned off while it charges. • You cannot operate the camcorder using USB power only. Use the power adaptor or battery to power the camcorder. • If you use the camcorder while you are charging the battery, charging may take longer. • An AC plug adaptor is required in some foreign countries. If you need one, purchase it from your distributor. To charge the battery with the power adaptor CARD To charge the battery by connecting to a PC CARD 21 Getting started CHECKING THE BATTERY STATE You can check the charging state and remaining battery capacity. To check the charging state The colour of the CHG lamp indicates the charging state. Charging (CHG) lamp Charging state Charging Fully charged Error LED colour (Orange) (Green) (Orange blink) Battery level display The battery level display shows the amount of battery power remaining in the battery. Battery Level Indicator State Message Fully charged - 75%~50% - 50%~25% - 25%~5% - less than 5% - Exhausted (flickers): The device will soon turn off. Charge the battery as soon as possible. - - The device will be forced to turn off after 3 seconds. Low battery The figures above are based on a fully charged battery at normal temperature. Low ambient temperature may affect the use time. CARD STBY [220Min] 9999 22 Getting started Available charging and running time for the battery Battery Type IA-BP105R IA-BP210R Charging time To charge the battery with the power adaptor approx. 160 min. approx. 300 min. To charge the battery by connecting to a PC approx. 160 min. approx. 300 min. Resolution HD SD HD SD Continuous recording time approx. 100 min. approx. 80 min. approx. 200 min. approx. 160 min. Playback time approx. 200 min. approx. 400 min. • Charging time: Approximate time in minutes required to fully charge a completely exhausted battery. • Recording/Playback time: Approximate time available when you have fully charged the battery. • The time is only for reference. Times shown above are measured under Samsung’s test conditions. Your times may differ, depending on your usage and conditions. • The recording and playback times will be shorter when you use your camcorder in low temperatures. • We recommend using the power adaptor when using the Time Lapse REC function. Continuous Recording (without zoom) The continuous recording time shows the available recording time when you record without using any other function after recording starts. The battery may discharge 1.5 times faster than this reference if you use the record start/stop, the zoom, and the playback functions. Prepare additional batteries with the expectation that the actual recording time is about 60% of the times listed above. Using an AC power source We recommend that you use the power adaptor to power the camcorder from a household AC outlet when recording and playing back the camcorder indoors. The connection is the same as that for battery charging. page 20 • The charging time will vary depending on the amount of charge left in the battery. • Depending on your PC specifications, the charging time can be prolonged. 23 Getting started About the battery • Battery properties A lithium-ion battery is small-sized and has a high capacity. Low ambient temperature (below 50ºF (10ºC)) may shorten its usage time and affect its function. Before recording in low temperatures, put the battery into your pocket to warm it, then install it in the camcorder. • Make sure to store the battery separately after use. - A small amount of battery power is consumed when the battery is stored in the camcorder even if the camcorder power is off. - The battery may be completely discharged, if it has been installed and left in the camcorder for a long period of time. If this occurs, the battery may not fully operate even if you charge it. - If the battery is not used for a long time, fully charge the battery and then, using your camcorder, drain the charge completely. Do this once every 3 months to keep the battery functioning properly. To store the battery, remove it from your camcorder and put it in a cool, dry place. • Charge an extra battery before using the camcorder outdoors in cold temperatures. - The cold temperature may shorten the length of time you can use the battery before needing to recharge it. - Carry the supplied USB cable and power adaptor to charge the battery while travelling. • Check whether the battery terminal is damaged if the battery falls or is dropped. - If you install a battery with the damaged terminal into the camcorder, you can damage the camcorder. • Remove the battery and the memory card from the camcorder and disconnect the power adaptor after use. - Store the battery in a stable, cool, and dry place. (Recommended temperature : 59ºF~77ºF (15ºC~25ºC), recommended humidity: 40%~60%) - Temperatures that are too high or too low shorten the battery lifetime. - The battery terminals can become rusty or malfunction if the battery is stored in a smoky or dusty location. • Recycle or dispose of your dead batteries properly. • The battery lifetime is limited. - Battery capacity decreases over time and through repeated use. If decreased usage time between charges becomes significant, it is probably time to replace the battery with a new one. - Each battery’s life is affected by storage, and operating and environmental conditions. 24 Basic operation of the camcorder TURNING YOUR CAMCORDER ON/OFF 1 Open the LCD screen and press the [Power ( )] button to turn on the camcorder. • Set the [Lens cover open/close] switch to open ( ). 2 To turn off the camcorder, press the [Power ( )] button. LCD screen Power( ) button The camcorder operates the self-diagnosis function when powered on. If a warning message appears, refer to ‘warning indicators and messages’ (pages 93~95) and take corrective action. When using this camcorder for the first time When you use your camcorder for the first time or reset it, the Date/ Time Set screen appears at start-up. Set the date and time. page 25 SWITCHING TO THE POWER SAVING MODE If you need to use camcorder for the extended time, the following functions enable you to prevent unnecessary energy consumption. Sleep mode The camcorder switches to the sleep mode when the LCD screen is closed, and then, if idle for more than 20 minutes, the camcorder turns off. However, if Auto Power Off: 5 Min is set, the camcorder turns off in 5 minutes. If you open the LCD screen during sleep mode, the sleep mode ends and the camcorder returns to the last operation mode used. After 20 minutes LCD screen is closed • The power saving mode does not work in the following situations: - While recording, playing back, or displaying a slide show. - When the LCD screen is opened. • The camcorder consumes less battery power in the power saving mode. However, if you plan to use the camcorder for an extended time, we recommend you turn off the camcorder by pressing the [Power ( )] button when not using it. 25 Basic operation of the camcorder SETTING THE DATE/TIME FOR THE FIRST TIME You can set the date and time of your local area when you turn on this camcorder for the first time. 1 Open the LCD screen and press the [Power ( )] button to turn on the camcorder. • The Date/Time Set screen appears. 2 Select the date and time information, and change the setting values by using the [Control (Up/Down/ Left/Right)] button. 3 Make sure the clock is correctly set, and then press the [Control (OK)] button. • The year can be set up to 2037. • Set Date/Time Display to On. page 76 • After setting, the date and time are automatically recorded on a special data area of the storage media. Internal rechargeable battery • Your camcorder includes a internal rechargeable battery that retains the date and time settings even after the power is turned off. • Once this battery is depleted, the current date/time values are all reset to defaults, and you need to recharge the internal rechargeable battery. The date/time must be set again. Charging the internal rechargeable battery • The internal battery is always recharged while your camcorder is connected to the power adaptor or while the battery is attached. • If you do not connect the camcorder to power adaptor or do not attach the battery for about 48 hours, the internal battery fully discharges. If this occurs, charge the internal battery by connecting to the supplied USB cable and power adaptor for 12 hours. Date/Time Set Move OK 2013 00 00 Year 01 Day Month Hr Min JAN 26 Basic operation of the camcorder SETTING THE OPERATION MODES You can switch the operation mode in the following order each time you press the [MODE] button. Recording mode ( ) Playback mode ( ) • Each time the operation mode changes, the respective mode indicator light turns on. Mode Indicator Functions Recording mode To record videos or photos. Playback mode To play back videos or photos. This camcorder provides one recording mode for both video and photo recordings. You can easily record videos or photos in the same mode without having to switch modes. SWITCHING THE INFORMATION DISPLAY MODE You can switch the on-screen information display mode. Press the [Display ( )] button. • The full and minimum display modes will alternate. • Warning indicators and messages may appear depending on the recording conditions. • In the menu screen, the [Display ( )] button will be deactivated. STBY [220Min] STBY 9999 27 Basic operation of the camcorder USING THE SHORTCUT MENU (OK GUIDE) The shortcut menu (OK guide) contains the most frequently accessed functions for the selected mode. Pressing the [Control (OK)] button will display the shortcut menu of frequently used functions on the LCD screen. An example: Setting EV (Exposure Value) in the recording mode using the shortcut menu (OK guide). 1 Press the [Control (OK)] button in STBY mode. • The shortcut menu (OK guide) appears. 2 Press the [Control (Left)] button to select EV function. • Press the [Control (Left/Right)] button to adjust the exposure while viewing the image on the LCD screen. 3 Press the [Control (OK)] button to confirm your selection. • Press the [Control (OK)] button to exit the shortcut menu. • The exposure value setting is applied and the indicator ( ) and setting value appear. • The shortcut menu (OK guide) cannot be used in the SMART AUTO mode. • The example above shows how to set EV in the recording mode using the shortcut menu. The setting procedure could be different for other menu items. • The shortcut menu appears briefly. The shortcut menu reappears when you press the [Control (OK)] button. STBY [220Min] 9999 STBY [220Min] 9999 0.0 EV STBY [220Min] +1.0 9999 28 Basic operation of the camcorder Controlling the shortcut functions using the control buttons Button Recording ( ) mode Playback ( ) mode Menu selection Video playback ( ) mode Photo playback ( ) mode OK - Access the shortcut menu - Confirm selection - Exit the shortcut menu - Access the shortcut menu - Playback / Pause - Access the shortcut menu - Playback zoom Confirms selection UP - iSCENE - Zoom (tele) Increases the volume - Moves the cursor up DOWN - Focus - Zoom (wide) Decreases the volume - Moves the cursor down LEFT EV - Search playback RPS (Reverse Playback Search) rate: x2→x4→x8→x16 - Previous skip playback Previous image Moves to the previous menu RIGHT Face Detection - Search playback FPS (Forward Playback Search) rate: x2→x4→x8→x16 - Next skip playback Next image Moves to the next menu 29 Basic operation of the camcorder SELECTING THE LANGUAGES You can select the language that appears on the LCD screen. 1 Press the [MENU] button [Control (Left/Right)] button Settings. 2 Press the [Control (Up/Down)] button to select Language, and then press the [Control (OK)] button. 3 Press the [Control (Up/Down)] button to select the desired OSD language, and then press the [Control (OK)] button. 4 Press the [MENU] button to exit the menu. • The OSD language appears in the selected language. • Language options may be changed without prior notice. • The selected language remains even if you remove the battery. • The date and time format may change depending on the language you selected. STBY [220Min] Exit Settings Default Set Language Format STBY [220Min] Exit Settings Default Set Language Format English Français 한국어 30 Getting ready to start recording INSERTING AND EJECTING A MEMORY CARD (NOT SUPPLIED) • To avoid data loss, turn off the camcorder by pressing the [Power ( )] button before inserting or ejecting the memory card. • Be careful not to push the memory card too hard. The memory card may suddenly pop out. • If you eject the memory card from the camcorder while it is on, the camcorder turns off. Your camcorder supports only SD, SDHC, and SDXC cards. Card compatibility with this camcorder may vary depending on the card manufacturer and type. To insert a memory card 1 Turn the camcorder off. 2 Open the memory card cover as shown in the figure. 3 Insert the memory card into the card slot until it softly clicks. • Make sure that the camcorder is placed as shown above and the terminal portion of the card is facing up. 4 Close the cover. To eject a memory card 1 Turn the camcorder off. 2 Open the memory card cover as shown in the figure. 3 Gently push the memory card to eject it. 4 Pull the memory card out of the memory card slot and close the cover. CARD CARD 31 Getting ready to start recording SELECTING A SUITABLE MEMORY CARD (NOT SUPPLIED) Compatible memory cards • You can use SD, SDHC, and SDXC cards with this camcorder. We recommend you use an SDHC card. This camcorder supports SD cards up to 2GB. We cannot guarantee normal operation with SD cards bigger than 2GB. • MMC (Multi Media Card) and MMC Plus are not supported. • Compatible memory card capacity: - SD: 1GB~2GB - SDHC: 4GB~32GB - SDXC: ~up to 64GB • When you use unauthorised memory cards, the camcorder can not record videos correctly and your recordings may be lost. • The memory cards released after this camcorder was released may not be compatible with the camcorder. • To ensure stable recording and playback, use 6MB/s (Class 6) or higher memory cards. • SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards have a mechanical writeprotection switch. Setting the switch prevents accidental erasure of files recorded on the card. To enable writing, move the switch up in the direction of the terminals. To set write protection, move the switch down. • SDHC/SDXC cards are a higher version of SD memory cards and support higher capacities than SD memory cards. • SD cards can be used with current SD enabled host devices. Using the memory card adaptor To use a micro memory card with a computer or a card reader you must attach it to or insert it into an adaptor. SDHC (4GB~32GB) Usable memory card SDXC (Up to 64GB) SD (1GB~2GB) Protection tab Terminals 32 Getting ready to start recording Handling a memory card • Damaged data may not be recoverable. We recommend you make a back-up of important data separately on the hard disk of your PC. • Turning the power off or removing a memory card during an operation such as formatting, deleting, recording, and playback may cause data loss. • If you modify the name of a file or folder stored in the memory card with your PC, your camcorder may not recognise the modified file. • The memory card does not support any data recovery mode. Therefore, care should be taken to prevent the memory card from being damaged while recording. • Make sure to format the memory card on this camcorder. If the memory card had been formatted by a PC or other device, using it on this camcorder without re-formatting may cause trouble with recording and/or playback. Samsung is not responsible for damage to recorded contents caused by improper formatting. • You have to format newly-purchased memory cards, memory cards with data that your camcorder cannot recognise, or cards with data saved by other devices. Note that formatting erases all data on the memory card. Erased data cannot be recovered. • A memory card has a certain life span. If you cannot record new data, you have to purchase a new memory card. • Do not bend, drop, or subject the card to strong impacts. • Do not place foreign substances on the memory card terminals. Use a soft dry cloth to clean the terminals if required. • Do not paste anything other than the label provided with the card on the label pasting area of the card. • Do not use a damaged memory card. • Be careful to keep the memory card out of the reach of children, who might swallow it. • Samsung is not responsible for data loss due to misuse, including loss caused by any PC virus. • We recommend using a memory card case to avoid data loss that can be caused by moving the card or by static electricity. • After a period of use, the memory card may get warm. This is normal and is not a malfunction. The camcorder supports SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards, giving you a wider choice of cards! The data storage speed of cards may differ, depending on the manufacturer and production system. • SLC (single level cell) system: faster write speed enabled. • MLC (multi level cell) system: only lower write speed is supported. For best results, we recommend using a memory card that supports a faster write speed. Using a lower write speed memory card for recording video may cause difficulties when storing. You may even lose your video data during the recording. In an attempt to preserve every bit of the recorded video on a low speed card, the camcorder forcibly stores the video on the memory card and displays a warning: Low speed card. Please record at a lower resolution. If you are unavoidably using a low speed memory card, the resolution and quality of the recording may be lower than the value you set. page 53 The higher the video resolution and quality, the more memory the camcorder uses. 33 Getting ready to start recording RECORDABLE TIME AND CAPACITY Recordable time available for video Resolution Storage media capacity 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 64GB 1280X720/25p 13 27 55 110 220 440 890 720X576/50p (16:9) 13 27 55 110 220 440 890 720X576/50p (4:3) 13 27 55 110 220 440 890 (Unit: Approximate minutes of recording) Recordable number of photos Resolution Storage media capacity 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 64GB 1696x954 (16:9) 1,650 3,290 6,630 9,999 9,999 9,999 9,999 1280x720 (16:9) 2,270 4,550 9,160 9,999 9,999 9,999 9,999 1600x1200 (4:3) 1,520 3,030 6,110 9,999 9,999 9,999 9,999 800x600 (4:3) 2,990 5,970 9,999 9,999 9,999 9,999 9,999 (Unit: Approximate number of images) 1GB ≒ 1,000,000,000 bytes : Actual formatted capacity may be less as the internal firmware uses a portion of the memory. • Your recordable time and capacity and recordable number of photos may differ from the figures in the tables depending on your subject and actual recording conditions. • The higher the resolution, the more memory is used. • Lower resolution increases the recording time, but the image quality may suffer. • The bit rate automatically adjusts to the recording image. Accordingly, the recording time may vary. • Memory cards bigger than 64GB may not operate normally. • The recording length of a Time Lapse REC may vary depending on settings. • A memory card that is used to store a video can have un-writable areas, which may result in reduced recording time and free memory space. • The maximum continuous recording time is under 20 minutes. The maximum video file size is 1.8GB. When a video recording time is more than 20 minutes or a video file exceeds 1.8GB, a new video file is created automatically. • The maximum number of recordable photo and video files is 9,999, respectively. • Resolutions marked with are the resolutions of photos you record when you set video resolution to 720X576/50p (4:3). 34 Getting ready to start recording ATTACHING THE STRAP Adjust the length of strap so that the camcorder is stable when you press the [Recording start/stop] button with your thumb. If you adjust the strap too tightly and use excessive force to insert your hand, the strap hook of the camcorder may be damaged. ADJUSTING THE LCD SCREEN The wide LCD screen on your camcorder offers high quality image viewing. 1 Open the LCD screen with your finger. • The screen opens up to 90°. 2 Rotate the LCD screen towards the lens. • You can rotate it up to 180° towards the lens and up to 90° backwards. To view recordings more conveniently, rotate the screen by 180° towards the lens, and then fold it back to the body. Excessive rotation may damage the connective hinge between the screen and the camcorder. • When the LCD screen is rotated by 150°~180°, the left and right sides of the subject are shown in reverse, which produces a horizontally flipped image. • Remove fingerprints or dust on the screen with a soft cloth. • To adjust the LCD brightness, see page 77. 1 2 35 Basic recording RECORDING VIDEOS Set the desired resolution before recording. page 53 • Insert a memory card. page 30 • Open the Lens cover by using the [Lens cover open/close] switch. page 15 • Press the [Power ( )] button to turn on the camcorder. • Select the recording ( ) mode by pressing the [MODE] button. page 26 This camcorder features two [Recording start/stop] buttons. One is on the rear side of the camcorder and the other is on the LCD screen. Select the one that works best for you. 1 Select a subject to record. • Adjust the LCD screen to the best angle for recording. • Use the [Zoom] lever or [Zoom] button to adjust the size of the subject. page 40 2 Press the [Recording start/stop] button. • The recording () indicator appears and recording starts. 3 To stop recording, press the [Recording start/stop] button again. • If power is interrupted or an error occurs during recording, the video may not be recorded. • Samsung is not responsible for any damage caused by a failure of normal recording or playback operations caused by memory card error. • Note that damaged data cannot be recovered. • Do not turn off the camcorder or remove the memory card while accessing the storage media. Doing so may damage the storage media or the data in the storage media. 0:00:00 [220Min] 0005 36 Basic recording • For on-screen information display, see pages 16~18. • For approximate recording times, see page 33. • Eject the battery when you have finished recording to prevent unnecessary battery power consumption. • For various functions available when you record videos, see pages 52~66. • During recording, some button operations are unavailable. ([MODE] button, [MENU] button, etc.) • Sound is recorded from the internal stereo microphone on the top-front of the camcorder. Take care that this microphone is not blocked. • Before recording an important video, make sure to test the recording function to check if there is any problem with the audio or video recording. • You can adjust the brightness of the LCD screen in the menu options. Adjusting the LCD screen does not affect the image being recorded. page 77 • You cannot use a locked memory card for recording. You will see a message saying recording is disabled due to the lock. • Recording videos in a quiet environment increases microphone sensitivity. This increased sensitivity may cause the microphone to record surrounding ambient noise. The increased microphone sensitivity may also cause the camcorder to record the noise the zoom mechanism makes if you use the zoom while recording. • When you record indoors or in the dark places, ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted. In very dark places, the ISO adjustment can cause interference effects on images and prevent you from recording these images correctly. We recommend you use a professional, infrared camcorder when recording in dark places or at night. • An image can be blurred when the Anti-Shake(HDIS) function is enabled and the camcorder is mounted on a tripod or fixed in place. Release the Anti-Shake(HDIS) function when the camcorder is mounted on a tripod. RecordING pause/RESUME The camcorder allows you to pause temporarily while recording a video. With this function, you can record separate scenes as a single video. 1 Press the [Recording start/stop] button. • The recording () indicator appears and recording starts. 2 Press the [Recording pause/ resume ( )] button. • The recording pauses and the indicator ( ) appears. • To continue the recording, press the [Recording pause/ resume ( )] button. • If you connect your camcorder to a PC using a USB cable when recording is paused, the camcorder will connect to the PC after it saves the video it has recorded up to the pause. • If you remove the memory card when the camcorder is in Pause mode, the camcorder turns off the power and will not save any of the video it has recorded. 0:01:24 [220Min] 0005 Resume Stop 37 Basic recording TAGGING AND CAPTURING GREAT MOMENTS WHILE RECORDING (MY CLIP FUNCTION) My Clip lets you tag good scenes with the My Clip icon ( ) by pressing the [PHOTO] button while you are recording a video, and then lets you extract those clips from the video and watch them separately. The camcorder also captures photos at the same time. 1 Press the [Recording start/stop] button. • The recording () indicator appears and recording starts. 2 Press the [PHOTO] button at each great moment while recording. • The camcorder tags the scenes as My Clip ( ) and captures photos at the same time. 3 To stop recording, press the [Recording start/stop] button again. Understanding My Clip function During a video recording Captured photos are saved in the photo thumbnail view. You can extract and play back the scenes tagged as ‘My Clip’( ) from a video. page 45 • The camcorder can tag up to 5 moments as ‘My Clip’ and capture up to 5 photos while recording a video. • When you use the My Clip function, the camcorder tags the scene so that it starts 3 seconds before you pressed the [PHOTO] button and ends five seconds after you pressed the [PHOTO] button. • Photos are captured in the video recording resolution. • When you use time lapse recording, the My Clip function does not operate. • You can also tag any scenes in a video by pressing the [PHOTO] button during video playback. page 46 • The captured photos are not recorded if an error occurs during video recording or the camcorder does not complete recording successfully. [220Min] 0005 38 Basic recording RECORDING PHOTOS Set the desired resolution before recording. page 54 • Insert a memory card. page 30 • Open the Lens cover by using the [Lens cover open/close] switch. page 15 • Press the [Power ( )] button to turn on the camcorder. • Select the recording ( ) mode by pressing the [MODE] button. page 26 1 Select a subject to record. • Adjust the LCD screen to the best angle for capturing. • Use the [Zoom] lever or [Zoom] button to adjust the size of the subject. page 40 2 Centre the subject in the LCD screen. 3 Fully press the [PHOTO] button. • The shutter sound is heard (when Shutter Sound: On is set). • To continue capturing, wait until the current photo is completely saved on the storage media. Do not turn off the camcorder or remove the memory card when taking photos as it may damage the storage media or data. • This camcorder provides one combined video and photo recording mode. You can easily record videos or photos in the same mode without having to change it. • The recordable number of photos varies depending on the photo resolution. page 33 • Audio is not recorded when you take photos. • For the on-screen display information, see pages 16~18. • You can adjust the brightness of the LCD screen in the menu options. Adjusting the LCD screen does not affect the image being recorded. page 77 • For various functions available during recording, see pages 52~66. • Photo files conform to the DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) standard, established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association). 39 Basic recording RECORDING WITH EASE FOR BEGINNERS (SMART AUTO) User-friendly SMART AUTO optimises your camcorder for the recording conditions automatically, providing you with the best performance. 1 Press the [SMART AUTO] button. • The SMART AUTO ( ) and Anti-Shake(HDIS) ( ) icons appear on the screen at the same time. 2 Centre the subject in the LCD screen. • The camcorder automatically detects the scene (Landscape, etc.) and adjusts the camcorder settings accordingly. • The appropriate scene icon appears on the LCD screen. Scene icons Meaning Appears when recording a night scene. Appears when recording with a very bright background. Appears when recording indoors. Appears when recording a close-up. Appears when recording a landscape. Appears when recording a portrait. Appears when recording a portrait outdoors at night. 3 Press the [Recording start/stop] button or [PHOTO] button. pages 35, 38 4 To cancel the SMART AUTO mode, press the [SMART AUTO] button again. • The SMART AUTO ( ) and Anti-Shake(HDIS) ( ) icons disappear from the screen. • When there is no detected scene, the ( ) icon appears. • The camcorder may not detect the Portrait mode when recording a face, depending on the position of the face or brightness. • Depending on conditions such as lighting, shaking of the camcorder, or distance to the subject, the camcorder may detect the image you see on the LCD screen as a different scene type each time you apply SMART AUTO. • The Portrait and Night portrait modes work only when Face Detection is set to On. page 56 • Buttons unavailable during SMART AUTO operation: [MENU] button, [Control (OK)] button, etc. Most settings are automatically adjusted in SMART AUTO mode. To set or adjust functions on your own, release the SMART AUTO mode first. • SMART AUTO must be set before recording. STBY [220Min] 9999 40 Basic recording Zooming in/out Use the zoom function for close-up or wide-angle recording. This camcorder allows you to record using 52x optical power zoom, 70x Intelli-zoom and 130x digital zoom. To zoom in (T) Slide the [Zoom] lever towards [T] (telephoto). (Or press the [Control (Up)] button on the LCD screen.) • The distant subject is gradually magnified. To zoom out (W) Slide the [Zoom] lever towards [W] (wide-angle). (Or press the [Control (Down)] button on the LCD screen.) • The subject gets smaller and further away. • The smallest zoom ratio is the subject’s original size in the zoomout. W: Wide-angle T: Telephoto • Zoom magnification over 70x is done through digital image processing, and is therefore called digital zoom. Digital zooming is possible up to 130x. page 62 • To maintain sharp focus, the minimum possible distance between the camcorder and subject is about 1cm for wide-angle and 1m for telephoto. • Optical zoom preserves image quality, but the image quality may suffer when you use digital zoom. • Fast zooming or zooming in a subject that is a good distance away may cause the camcorder to focus slowly. If this occurs, use Focus: Manual. page 58 • We recommend you use Anti-Shake(HDIS) for handheld recording when the subject is zoomed in and enlarged. • Frequent use of the zoom function consumes more power. • If you zoom when recording, the camcorder may record the sound of the [Zoom] lever or [Zoom] button operating. • When you use the zoom function, you can decrease its speed by slowly moving the [Zoom (T/W)] lever. Moving the lever quickly increases the zoom speed. However, you cannot use the [Zoom (T/W)] button on the display to adjust the zoom speed. • When Video Resolution is set to 1280x720/25p, the Intelli Zoom function does not operate. 41 Basic recording USING THE BACK LIGHT BUTTON When a subject is lit from behind, this function compensates for lighting so that the subject is not too dark. Press the [Back light ( )] button to toggle the back light mode between On and Off. Back lighting influences recording when the subject is darker than the background: • The subject is in front of a window. • The subject is against a snowy background. • The subject is outdoors and the background is overcast. • The light sources are too bright. • The person to be recorded is wearing white or shiny clothes and is placed against a bright background. • The person’s face is too dark to distinguish his/her features. 42 Basic playback CHANGING THE PLAYBACK MODE • You can switch to the playback mode by pressing the [MODE] button. • The recorded videos or photos appear in thumbnail view and the most recently created file is highlighted. • The camcorder selects the thumbnail display options based on the standby mode you used the last time. However, you can choose the video or photo thumbnail view display options by using the [Zoom] lever. Understanding how to change the operation modes You can easily change the playback mode by using the buttons as shown in the following figures: Normal 1/10 Movie Move Play Normal 1/10 Photo Move Play 0:00:55
